2010-2012 Acura MDX Service Manual

Citation preview

INTRODUCTION

General Informati on

r~ How to Use This M anual---------------------------------This manual is divided into multiple sections. The first page of each section is marked with a black tab that lines up with its corresponding thumb index tab on this page and the back cover. You can quickly find the first page of each secti on without looking through a full table of contents. The symbols printed at the top corner of each page can also be used as a quick reference system. Each section includes; 1. A table of contents, or an exploded view index showing: • Parts disassembly sequence. • Bolt torques and thread sizes. • Page references to descri ptions in text. 2. Disassembly/assembly procedures and tools. 3. Inspection. 4. Testing/troubleshooting. 5. Repair. 6. Adjustments. '

Specifications

specs

Maintenance

o ^ C

*Engine Electri cal Engi ne Mechanical Engine Cooling

Safety Messages Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help you make informed decisions, we have provided safety messages, and other safety information throughout this manual. Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. You must use your own good judgment You will find important safety information in a variety of forms including; • Safety Labels — on the vehicle. • Safety Messages — preceded by a safety alert symbol ^ and one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean: You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if ^WARNING you don't follow instructions. You CAN be HURT if you don't follow A CAUTION instructions. Instructions — how to service th i s vehicle correctly and safely.

*

Fuel and Emissions *Transaxle *Steering i— :----------- ------------------------1 (Including TPMS)

A DANGER

AH information contained i n this manual is based on the latest product information avai lable at the time of printing. We reserve the right to make changes at anytime without notice. No part of this publication may be reproduced, or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text, images, and tables. As you read this manual, you will f i nd information that is preceded by a [NOTICE~] symbol. The purpose of this message is to help prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the. environment. First Edition 08/2010 All Rights Reserved Specifications apply to USA and Canada

Honda Motor Co., Ltd. Service Publication Office

Dns with # include SRS components; irecautions are required when servicing. marked sections are not included in this manual, see Volum e 2.

*Brakes (Including VSA) *

Body

#Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning *

Body Electrical

* Audi o, Entertainment, .. Navigation, and Telematics

Restraints ‘Driving Support

2010-12 Acura MDX Volume 1 of 2

r— — \

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM fSRS) The Acura MDX SRS includes a dr i ver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a front passenger's a i rbag in the dashboard above the glove box, seat belt tensioners i n the front seat belt retractors, side curtain airbags in the sides of the roof, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this Service Manual. Items marked with an asterisk (*) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items requires special precautions and tools, and should be done by an authorized Acura dealer. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal or side collision, all SRS service work should be done by an authorized Acura dealer. • Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags, side airbags, side curtain airbags, and/or seat belt tensioners. • Do not bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, or rear safing sensor, especially when the ignition switch is in ON (11), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0); otherwise, the system may fail in a colli sion, or the airbags may deploy. • SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the steering column, center console, dashboard, dashboard lower cover, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats, in the roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equ i pment on these circuits.

General Information Chassis and Paint Codes '10 M od el........................................................................1-2 '11 M od el.........................................................................1-4 '12 M o d el.........................................................................1-6 Identification Number Locations. 1-8 Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations................... 1-9 Under-Hood Emission Control Label.............................1-11 Lift and Support Points....................................................1-12 Tow ing................................................................................. 1-13 Parts M arking.....................................................................1-15 Precautions for Super Handling All-Wheel Drive™ (SH-AWD®) System .......................................................1-15

J

General Information Chassis and Paint Codes - '10 Model Vehicle Identification Number 2HN YD2 H 2 *

A H 500001

, br ';c dr er rf r9 hr a

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle 2HN: Honda of Canada Mfg., Honda Canada Inc. Acura multipurpose passenger vehicle b. Line, Body and Engine Type YD2: Acura MDX/J37A1 c. Body Type and Transmission Type H: 5-door/6-speed Automatic d. Vehicle Grade (Series) USA models 0: ADV-E (with Navigation, Rear Entertainment, CMBS, BSD 2: MDX 4: TECH-E (with Rear Entertainment Navigation) 5: ADV (w i th Navigati on, Active Damper System, CMOS, BS!) 6; TECH (with Navigation) 7: ADV-E (with Navigation, Active Damper System, Rear Entertainment, CMBS, BSl) 9: ADV (with Navigation, CMBS, BSD

e.

f. g. h.

Canada models 2: M D X 6: TECH-E (with Rear Entertainment, Navigation) 7: ELITE (with Navigation, Active Damper System, Rear Entertainment, CMBS, BSD 8; ELITE (with Navigation, Rear Entertainment, CMBS, BSD Check Digit Model Year A; '10 Factory Code H: ANiston, Ontario Factory in Canada Serial Number 000001 —: Canada models 500001 —: USA models

Vehicle Identification Number and Canadian M otor Vehicle Safety Standard Certification Label

J37A1 - 6000001

a

b

a. Engine Type J37A1: 3.7 L SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport Fuel-injected engine b. Serial Number T ra n s m is s io n N u m b e r m im

a

- 1000001 b

a. Transmission Type MT4A: 8-speed Automatic b. Serial Number

Code

Color

NH-677P NH-731P NH-738M NH-737M

Aspen White Pearl Crystal Black Pearl Grigio Metallic Polished Metal Metallic Palladium Metallic Bali Blue Pearl Dark Cherry Pearl Ionized Bronze Metallic

NH-743M B-552P R-529P YR-580M

USA models O O

o o o

o

Canada models O' O O

O

r—0 —

General Information Chassis and Paint Codes - '11 Model Vehicle Identification Number 2HN YD2 H 2 *

B H 500001

r br crdr er frri 9 h

a

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle 2HN: Honda of Canada Mfg., Honda Canada Inc. Acura multipurpose passenger vehicle b. Line, Body and Engine Type YD2: Acura MDX/J37A1 c. Body Type and Transmission Type H: 5-door/6-speed Automatic d. Vehicle Grade (Series) USA models 2: M D X 4: TECH (with Rear Entertainment, Navigation) 5: ADV (with Navigation, Active Damper System, QVJBS, BSD 8: TECH (with Navigation) 7: ADV-E (with Navigation, Active Damper System, Rear Entertainment, CMBS, BSl)

Vehicle Identification Number, Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Certification, and Paint Code Label Vehicle Identification Number, Canadian M otor Vehicle Safety Standard Certification, and Paint Code Label

J lllB llll

lilliiliiillllllllilllli

|jlllS!llllSSS!!llllllllllllllllliiiiiiii:

e. f. g. h.

Canada models 2: MDX 8: TECH-E (with Rear Entertainment, Navigation) 7: ELITE (with Navigation, Active Damper System, Rear Entertainment, CMBS, BSl) Check Digit Model Year B: '11 Factory Code H; Alliston, Ontario Factory in Canada Serial Number 000001 Canada models 500001 —; USA models

Sllllllllll

J37A1 - 7000001

a

b

a. Engine Type J37A1: 3.7 L SOHC VIEC Sequential Multiport Fuel-injected engine b. Serial Number

Transmission Number M im

a

- 2000001

b

a. Transmission Type MT4A: 6-speed Automatic b. Serial Number

Code

Color

Aspen White Pearl Crystal Black Pearl Grigio Metallic Polished Metal Metal .N.H743M. Palladium Metallic Bali Blue Pearl .B S S 2 P Dark Cherry Pearl R-529P YR-573M Mocha Metallic YR-5S0M Ionized Bronze Metallic NH-677P NH-731P NH-736M NH-737M

USA models O O O O

Canada models O

O O O

O

O

O

O O

Chassis and Paint Codes - '12 Model Vehicle Identification Number 2HN YD2 H 2 *

C H 500001

r bn cr dr er frri 9 h

a

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle 2HN: Honda of Canada Mfg., Honda Canada Inc. Acura multipurpose passenger vehicle b. Line, Body and Engine Type YD2: Acura MDX/J37A1 c. Body Type and Transmission Type H: 5-door/6-speed Automatic d. Vehicle Grade (Series) USA models 2: MDX 3: TECH (with Navigation) 4: TECH (with Navigati on, Rear Entertainment) 5: ADV (with Navigation, CMBS, BSl) 8: SPORT (with Navigation, Active Damper System, CMBS, BSi) 7; ADV-E (with Navigation, Rear Entertainment, CMBS, BSi) 8: SPORT-E (with Navigation, Rear Entertainment, Active Damper, CMBS, BSl)

e. f. g. h.

Canada models 2: M D X 8: TECH-E (with Rear Entertainment Navigation, BSi) 7; ADV-E (with Navigation, Rear Entertainment, CMBS, BSl) 8: SPORT-E (with Navi gation, Rear Entertainment Acti ve Damper System, CMBS, BSl) Check Digit Model Year C: 12 Factory Code n : Alliston, Ontario Factory in Canada Serial Number 000001 —: Canada models 500001 —: USA models

Vehicle identification Number, Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Certification, and Paint Code Label Vehicle Identification Number, Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Certification, and Paint Code Label

B Engine Number J37A1 - 8000001

a

b

a. Engine Type J37A1: 3.7 L SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport Fuel-injected engine b. Serial Number

Transmission Number MT4A - 3000001

a

b

a. Transmission Type MT4A: 6-speed Automatic b. Serial Number

Paint Code Code

Color

NH-814P NH-731P NH-736M NH-737M

Aspen White Pearl II Crystal Black Pearl Grigio Metallic Polished Metal Metallic Palladium Metallic Bali Blue Pearl Dark Cherry Pearl II

NH-743M B-552P R-549P

USA models O o o )

Canada models O o o

o 0 o

o 0 o

Identification Number Locations Vehicle Identification Num ber (VIN)

Vehicle identification Num ber |¥1N}

Engine N um ber

Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations Front Passenger's Compartment: HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK W A RN IN G

Steering Wheel:

Rear Passenger's C o m p a rtm e n t ROOF-SiDE AIRBAG M ODULE DANGER

CABLE REEL C AUTION

M ODULE DANGER

(cont'd)

Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations (cont'd) Engine Compartment;

1m TESTING IN FO RM A TION (Canada models)

Doorjamb Area; EMISSION CONTROL INFO RM ATION, ENGINE COOLANT INFO RM ATION, and 1/M TESTING INFO RM ATION {USA models)

TIRE IN FO RM A TION Located on driver's doorjam b

Located on driver's and passenger's doorjambs

AIR CON D ITIO NING IN FO RM A TION

RADIATOR CAP DANGER Located on the radiator cap

BATTERY DANGER

Under-Hood Emission Control Label Emission Group Identification

Test Group and Evaporative Family

Example:

Test Group: VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

®ACURA (u ■ F)

RYE-A05

IN FORM ATIO N

~

C HNX T §3.7

R19

CONFORMS TO REGULATIONS : 2012MY U.S. EPA: T2B5 LDT 2 ' 0BD: CA 0BD II FUEL: GASOLINE CALIFORNIA: LEV II ULEV LDT2 OBO: CA 0BD II FUEL: GASOLINE 2WU-TWC, TWC, 2A/F SENSOR, 2H02S, EGR, SFi CHNXT03.7R19

CHNXR01671EA 3.7L

HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD,

*ccordinctomaintensnce suBcoDE50Rat

=

'10 Model CONFORMS TO REGULATIONS: 2010 MY '11 Model CONFORMS TO REGULATIONS: 2011 MY '12 Model CONFORMS TO REGULATIONS: 2012 MY

a b

c d

e

a. Model Year A: '10 B: '11 C: *12 b. Manufacturer Subcode HNX: Honda c. Family Type T; LDT d. Displacement Group e. Sequence Characters W19: '10 model M19: '11 model R19: '12 model Evaporative Family: C HNX R §167

a b

c d

1EA

e

a. Model Year A: ’10 B: f11 C: '12 b. Manufacturer Subcode HNX: Honda c. Family Type R: Refueling d. Canister Working Capacity Group 0187: '10 -12 e. Sequence Characters 1EA: *10 -12 model

Lift and Support Points NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components such as suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall safety stands, When substantial weight is removed from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can change, causing the vehicle to tip forward on the lift.

Floor Jack

Vehicle Lift

3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking bracket (A) or the rear jack i ng bracket (B), Center the jacking bracket on the jack lift platform (C) and jack up the veh i cle high enough to fit the safety stands under i t.

1. Position the lift pads (A) under the vehicle's front support points (B) and rear support points (€).

INOTICE I Be sure the lift pads are properly placed to avoid damaging the vehicle.

1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the sh i ft lever in P. 2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted.

INOTICE I Be sure the floor jack is properly placed to avo i d damaging the vehicle.

2. Raise the lift a few inches, and rock the vehicle gently to be sure it is firm ly supported. 3. Raise the lift to its full height and inspect the vehicle support points for solid contact with the lift pads.

4. Position the safety stands under the support points, and adjust them so the vehicle is level side to side. 5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.

Safetf Stands To support the veh i cle on safety stands, use the same support points as for a vehicle li ft. Always use safety stands when working, on or under any vehicle that is supported only by a jack.

Towing If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professi onal towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another vehicle w i th just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous.

Rear;

Emergency Towing There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle. Flat-bed Tow Truck Equipment —The operator loads the vehicle on the back of a flat-bed tow truck. This Is the only way of transporting the vehicle. To accommodate the flat-bed tow truck equipment, the vehicle is equipped with a detachable front/rear towing hook (A), front tie down hook slots (B), and rear tie down hook slots (C). The towing hooks can be used with a winch to pull the vehicle onto the flat-bed tow truck, and the tie down hook slots can be used secure the vehicle to the flat-bed tow truck. NOTE; The tie down hook slots use rubber plugs (D) to cover the openings. Front:

A

(cont'd)

General Information Towing (cont'd) Towing Hook Installation The detachable tow i ng hook is for tow i ng very short distances, such as freeing the vehicle. The hook attaches to the anchor in the front or rear bumper.

INOTICE I • To avoid damage to the vehicle, use the towing hook for straight flat ground towing only. Do not tow on an angle. • Do not use the detachable tow i ng hook as a t i e down to secure the vehicle to a flat-bed tow truck. Use the tie down hook slots provided. 1. Remove the cover (A) from the bumper. Front bumper;

Wheel Lift Equipment —The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and lifts them off the ground. The other two wheels remain on the ground. Newer to w the vehicle w ith wheel lift equipment. Sling-type Equipment —The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame or suspension, and the cables lift that end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this method of towing is attempted. This method of tow ing the vehicle is unacceptable. The only recommended way of towing the vehicle is on a flat-bed tow truck.

inotrsi • Towing the vehicle with only two wheels on the ground will damage p a rts of the SH-AWD s y s te m . If the vehicle is damaged, it must be transported on a flat-bed tow truck or trailer. • Improper towing preparati on will damage the transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. • Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's weight.

2. Remove the detachable towing hook from the tool kit under the cargo area floor. 3. Screw in the detachable towing hook (B), and tighten it securely by hand.

_ u Parts Marking

Precautions for Super Handling All-Wheel Drive™ (SH-AWD®) System

To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are marked with the vehicle i dentification number (VIN). Original parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement body parts have generic self-adhesive labels. These labels should not be removed. The original engine or transmission VIN plates are not transferable to the replacement engine or transmission.

This vehicle i s equipped with the Super Handling All-Wheel Dri ve™ (SH-AWD®) system. The SH-AWD system distributes driving torque between the front and rear wheels when accelerating and when wheel spin occurs.

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking labels during body repair. Mask the labels before repairing the part.

The SH-AWD system does not have a manual switch to disable the AWD system. Whenever service work requires spinning the front or rear wheels with the engine, always lift and support the vehicle so all four wheels are off the ground.

Specifications Standards and Service Limits

,2-2

Torque Summary Torque Specifications.................

2-14

Design Specifications.............

2-19 2-22

Body Specifications.....................

Standards and Service Limits Engine Electrical Item Ignition coil

Measurement Rated voltage Firing order

Spark plug

Type

Qualificati on

Standard or New 1: 1 _ 4 _ 2 —5 —3 —e

NGK

IL

DENSO

SXU22HCR1 IS

In N or P

1.0 -1 .1 mm (0,039-0,043 i 1 0 ± 2 °BTDC

Drive belt

At idle Check the red mark Tension

Alternator

Output

At 13.5 V and normal engine temperature

130 A

Coil (rotor) resistance

At 88 °F (20 °C)

2,3—2.7 O

G Ignition timing

Auto-tensioi

Slip ring O.D, Starter

Service Limit

Brush length

14,2 — 14.4 mm (0.559-0.587 in) 10.5 mm (0.413 in

Output Commutator mica depth

1.8 kW 0.50 —0.30 mm (0.0197-0.0354 in)

Commutator runout Commutator O.D.

0.02 mm (0.0008 in) max.

0.05 mm (0.0020 in)

28.9—23.0 mm (1.138-1.142 in)

28.0 mm (1.102 in)

Brush length

15.0—16.0 mm (0.531 -0 .8 3 0 in)

9.0 mm (0.354 in)

Brush spring tension (new)

2 2 .3 -2 7 .3 N (2 .2 7 -2 .7 8 kgf, 5 .0 0 6.13 Ibf)

13.8 mm (0.543 in) 1.5 mm (0.059 in) 0.20 mm (0.0073 in)

Engine Assembly Item Compression

Measurement Pressure (checked with engine starter cranking at wide-open throttle)

Qualification

Standard or New

Service Limit

Minimum

—

930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi)

Maximum variation

—

200 kPa (2.0 kgf/c.,. , 28 psi]

Cylinder Head Item Head

Camshaft

Measurement

Qualification

120.8 mm (4.756

End play

0 .0 5 -0 .2 0 mm (0.0020-0.0079 in)

Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance

0.0 50-0.08 9 mm (0.00197-0.00350 in) 0.03 mm (0.0012 in) max.

0.20 mm (0.0079 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) 0.04 mm (0.0016 in)

Intake PRI Intake SEC

34.299 mm (1.35035 in) 35.932 mm (1.41464 in)

-

Exhaust

36.760 mm (1.44724 in)

—

Intake Exhaust

0 .2 0 -0 .2 4 mm (0.008-0.009 in)

—

0 .2 8 -0 .3 2 mm (0.011-0.012 in)

-

Intake

5.4 85-5.49 5 mm (0.21594-0.21634 in)

5.455 mm (0.21476 in)

Exhaust

5.4 50-5.46 0 mm (0.21457-0.21496 i n) 0 .0 20-0.04 5 mm (0.00079-0.00177 in)

5.420 mm (0.21339 in)

Cam lobe height

Clearance (cold) Stem O.D.

Stem-to-guide clearance

Intake Exhaust

Valve seat

Width

Intake Exhaust

Valve guide

Service Limit 0.05 mm (0.002 ii

120.95-121.05 mm (4.7618-4.7657 ir

Total runout

Valve

Standard or New -

Warpage Height

-

0.08 mm (0.0031 in)

0 .0 55-0.08 0 mm (0.00217-0.00315 in) 1 .2 5 -1 .5 5 mm (0.0492-0.0610 in)

0.11 mm (0.0043 in)

2.00 mm (0.0787 in) 47.80 mm (1.8819 in)

2.00 mm (0.0787 in)

Stem installed height

Intake Exhaust

1.25 — 1.55 mm (0.0492-0.0610 in) 46 .75-47.5 5 mm (1.8405-1.8720 in) 46 .68-47.4 8 mm (1.8378-1.8693 in)

Installed height

Intake

21.20 —22.20 mm (0.8346-0.8740 in)

-

Exhaust

20 .60-21.6 0 mm (0.8110-0.8504 in)

__

47.73 mm (1.8791 in)

specs Item Rocker arm

Measurement Arm-to-shaft clearance

Qualification

Standard or New

Service Limit

Intake

0.015—0.048 mm (0.00059-0.00181 in)

0.046 mm (0.00181 in)

Exhaust

0.018—0.047 mm (0,00071 -0 .0 0 1 8 5 in)

0.047 mm (0.00185 in)

Engine Block Item Block

Piston

Measurement

Qualification

Warpage of deck Bore diameter Skirt O.D. at 16 mm (0,83 in) from bottom of skirt Clearance in cylinder

Pi ston ring

Piston pin

Connecting rod

30.000-30.015 mm (3.54330-3.54389 in) 89.983—89.996 mm (3.54263-3.54314 in) 0.004—0.032 mm (0.00016-0.00126 in)

30.065 mm (3.54586 in) 89.975 mm (3.54232 in) 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)

Top Second

0.055—0.085 mm (0.003-0.003 in) 0.030 —0.060 mm (0.002-0.002 in)

0.15 mm (0.005 in) 0.13 mm (0.005 in)

Ri ng end gap

Top Second

0.30—0.40 mm (0.012-0.015 in) 0.40—0.55 mm (0.016-0.021 in)

0.60 mm (0.023 in) 0.70 mm (0.027 in)

Oil

0.20—0.35 mm (0 .008-0.013 in)

0.80 mm (0.031 in)

O.D.

21.961 —21.985 mm (0.86480-0.86478 in)

21.954 mm (0.86433 in)

Pin-to-piston clearance

-0.0050—0.0030 mm (-0.0001970.000118 in) 0.005—0.015 mm (0.00020-0.00059 in) 21.970-21.978 mm (0.80496-0.86520 i n) 60.0 mm (2.362 i n)

0.004 mm (0.00016 i n) 0.019 mm (0.00075 in)

0.15 —0.35 mm (0.006-0.013 in)

0.45 mm (0.017 in)

Main journal diameter

71.976—72.000 mm (2.83370-2.83464 in)

—

Rod journal diameter

56.978—57.000 mm (2.24315-2.24409 in)

—

Rod/main journal taper

0.005 mm (0.00020 in) max.

0.010 mm (0.00039 in)

Rod/main journal out-of-round

0.005 mm (0.00020 i n) max.

0.010 mm (0.00039 in) 0.45 mm (0.0177 in) 0.030 mm (0.00118 in)

Pin-to-rod clearance

Bi g end bore diameter End play

Crankshaft bearing

Service Limit 0.10 mm (0.003 in)

Ring-to-groove clearance

Small end bore diameter

Crankshaft

Standard or N ew 0.07 mm (0.002 in) max.

End play

0.10—0.35 mm (0.0039-0.0138 in)

Total runout

0.025 mm (0.00098 in) max.

Main bearing-to-journal oi l clearance

0.019—0.045 mm (0.00075-0.00177 in)

Connecting rod bearing-to-journal oil clearance

0.020—0.044 mm (0.00073-0.00173 in)

— ~

0.050 mm (0.00197 in) 0.050 mm (0.00197 in)

2-3

Standards and Service Limits Engine Lubrication Item Engine oil

Oil pump

Measurement Capacity

Qualification

Service Limit -

5.0 L (5.3 US qt) 4.3 L (4,5 US qt)

—

Oil change without filter

4.0 L (4.2 US qt)

—

0.04—0.18 mm (0 .002 -0.0 08 in)

0.20 mm (0.007 in)

0 .1 0 -0 ,1 9 mm (0.004-0.007 in)

0.20 mm (0.007 in)

0.02 —0.07 mm (0.001 -0 .0 0 2 in)

Inner rotor-to-outer rotor radial clearance Pump housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance Pump housing-to-rotor axial clearance Oil pressure with oil. temperature at 176 °F (80 °C)

Standard or New

Engine overhaul Oi l change including filter

At idle

70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) min.

0.12 mm (0.004 in) -

At 3,000 rpr

490 kPa (5,0 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) min.

_

Qualification Engine overhaul

9.2 L(2,43 US gal)

Cooling System Item Radiator

Measurement Coolant capacities (including engine, heater, hoses, and reservoir)

ird or New

Service Limit -

Coolant type

_ 7.3 L (1.33 US gal) Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

Coolant change

Coolant reservi Radiator cap

Coolant capacity

0.71 L (0.188 US gal)

—

Opening pressure

9 3 -1 2 3 kPa (0 .9 5 -1 .2 5 kgf/cm2, 13.5 - 1 7 .8 psi)

—

Thermostat

Opening temperature

Begins to open Fully open

1 6 9 -1 7 6 °F ( 7 6 - 8 0 °C 134 °F (90 °C) 10.0 mm (0.394 in) min

Valve lift at fully open

-

Fuel and Emissions Measurement

Item Fuel pressure regulator

Pressure with fuel pressure gauge connec

Fuel tank

Capacity

Engine idle

Idle speed without load Idle speed with high electrical load

Qualification

Standard or New 380—430 kPa ( 3 . 9 - 4 4 kgf/cm2, 5 5 - 6 3 psi) 79,5 L (21.00 US c

In N or P It

710 ± 50 rpm 710 ± 50 rpm

Service Limit — -

specs Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential Item Automatic transmission fluid ATF pressure

Measurement Capacity: use Honda ATF DW-1

Line pressure (Low)

Line pressure (Normal) 1st clutch pressure

Service Limit

. .

3.1 L (3.3 US qt)

Overhaul

8.0 L (8.5 US qt)

APP Sensor opening less than 18 % in D (ATF temperature between 122 °F and 212 °F (50 °C and 100 °Q) At 2,000 rpm in N c APP Sensor opening more than 20 % in 1st gear

667—716 kPa (6 .8 0 -7 .3 0 kgf/cm2, 38.7 — 103,8 psi)

Lower limit: 618 kPa (6.30 kgf/cm2, 89.6 psi) Upper limit; 765 kPa (7.80 kgf/cm2, 110.9 psi)

1,123—1#172 kPa (11.45-11.95 kgf/cm2, 182.8 — 169.3 psi) 1 123 1,172 kPa (1 1.45-11.95 kgf/em2f 16 2.8-169.9 psi)

1,079 kPa (11.00 kgf/cm2, 156.4 ps 1,079 kPa (11.00 kgf/cm2, 156.4 psi)

2nd clutch pressure

APP Sensor opening more than 20 % in 2nd gear

1,123-1,172 kPa (11.45-11,95 kgf/cm2, 162.3—163.9 psi )

1,079 kPa (11.00 kgf/cm2, 156.4 psi)

3rd clutch pressure

APP Sensor opening more than 20 % in 3rd gear

1,123 - 1,172 kPa (11.45 —11.95 kgf/cm2, 182.8 — 169.9 psi)

1,079 kPa (11.00 kgf/cm2, 156.4 psi)

4th clutch pressure

APP Sensor opening more than 20 % in 4th gear

1,123 — 1,172 kPa (11.45~11.95 kgf/cm2, 162.8—169.9 psi)

1,079 kPa (11.00 kgf/cm2, 156.4 psi)

5th clutch pressure

APP Sensor opening more than 20 % in 5th gear

1,123-1,172 kPa (11.45-11.95 kgf/cm2, 16 2.8-169.9 psi)

1,079 kPa (11.00 kgf/cm2, 156.4 psi)

6th clutch pressure

APP Sensor opening more than 20 % in 8th gear

1,123 — 1,172 kPa (11.45-11.95 kgf/cm2, 162.8—169.9 psi)

1,079 kPa (11.00 kgf/cm2, 156.4 psi)

Torque converter clutch pressure

At 4,000 rpm in 2nd gear (Lock-up condition)

294 kPa (3.00 kgf/cm2, 42.7 psi)

245 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm2, 35.6 psi)

Torque converter

Stall speed Check with vehicle on level ground

Clutch

Clearance between clutch end-plate and top disc

2,000 r

-

Service limit 1st

1,800 —2,100 rpm 1.50 — 1.70 mm (0.0591 -0 .0 6 6 9 in)

-

2 3rd

1.25—1.45 mm (0.0492-0.0571 in) 1.25 — 1.45 mm (0.0492-0.0571 in)

-

4th

1,50 —1.70 mm (0.0591 -0 .0 6 6 9 in) 1.25 —1,45 mm (0.0492-0.0571 in)

-

5

-

1.25 —1.45 mm (0.0492-0.0571 in)

-

Diameter of stator shaft needle bearing contact area

31.984—32.000 mm (1.25921 -1 .2 5 9 8 4

When worn or damaged

3rd gear I.D.

49.000—49.016 mm (1.92913-1.92976 in'

3rd gear axial clearance

0.10—0.21 mm (0.0039-0.0083 in) 41.962—41,978 mm (1.65204-1.65267 in)

0 Mainshaft

ird or New

Qualification Fluid change

3rd gear collar diameter of needle bearing contact a\ 3rd gear collar wi Sealing ring thickness (41 mm) Sealing ring groove width

in

When worn or damaged When worn or damaged

29.00 —29.05 mm (1.1417-1.1437 in) 1.91 —1.96 mm (0.0752-0.0772 in)

-

2.0 25-2.06 0 mm (0.07972-0.08110 in

—

-

2-5

Standards and Service Limits Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd) Item Countershaft

Measurement

Qualification

Standard or New

Diameter of needle bearing contact area at torque converter housing

40.505—40.515 mm (1.59488-1.59508 ini

Diameter of 1st gear at needle beari ng contact area Diameter of park gear at needle beari ng contact area

57.000—57.019 mm (2.24409-2.24484 in) 52.971 —52.390 mm (2.08547-2.08622 ini

Axial clearance of gears

Thrust shim thickness (42.5 mm)

5th gear collar width

Service Limit When worn or damaged

1st gear

0.07—0.30 mm (0,0028-0.0118 in)

When worn or damaged When worn or damaged -

2nd and 5th gear (total!

0.04—0.10 mm (0.002 -0.0 03 in)

—

A

1.82 mm (0.0717 in)

When worn or damaged

B

1.88 mm (0.0732 in)

When worn or damaged

C

1.90 mm (0.0748 i n)

When worn or damaged

D

1.94 mm (0.0784 in)

When worn or damaged

E

1.98 mm (0.0780 in)

When worn or damaged

F

2,02 mm (0.0795 in)

When worn or damaged

C

2.08 mm (0.0811 i n)

H

2.10 mm (0.0827 in)

1

2.14 mm (0,0843 i

J

2.18 mm (0.0858 in)

K

2.22 mm (0.0874 in)

When worn damaged When worn damaged When worn damaged When worn damaged When worn damaged

L

2.28 mm (0.0830 i .

When worn or damaged

65.55—88.50 mm (2.5807—2.6181 in)

When worn or damaged

or or or or or

specs Item Secondary shaft

Qualification

I.D. of gears

Axial clearance of gears Diameter of gear collars at needle bearing contact area

31.988—31.993 mm {1.25923-1.25980 i n)

Service Limit When worn or damaged

At torque converter housing bearing

32.002—32.015 mm (1 2 5 9 9 2 -1 2 6 0 4 3 in)

When worn or damaged

At torque converter housing fshaft end sidel

28.5935—28,6065 mm (1.1257261.126238 in)

When worn or damaged

1st gear

38.000—38.016 mm (1.49606-1.49669 in)

2nd gear

44 .000 -44.016 mm (1.73228-1.73291 in)

5th gear

50.000—50,016 mm (1.36850-1.96313 in) 0.16—0,40 mm (0.0063-0.0157 in)

When worn or damaged When worn or damaged When worn or damaged -

1st gear 2nd and 5th gear 2nd gear collar

-

A

0.05—0,12 mm (0 .002 -0,0 04 in) 37.975—37.991 mm (1.49508-1.49571 in) 44,962—44.978 mm (1.77015-1.77078 in) 0.85 mm (0.0335 in)

B

0.92 mm (0.0362 i

C

0.99 mm (0.0390 in)

When worn or damaged

D

1.06 mm (0.0417 in)

E

1.13 mm (0.0445 in)

When worn or damaged When worn or damaged

F

1.20 mm (0.0472 in)

When worn or damaged

G

1.27 mm (0.0500 in)

When worn or damaged

H

1.34 mm (0.0528 in)

When worn or damaged

i

1.41 mm (0.0555 in)

When worn or damaged

J

1.48 mm (0.0583 in)

When worn or damaged

K

1.55 mm (0.0610 i n)

L

1.62 mm (0.0638 in)

M

1.69 mm (0.0665 in)

When worn or . damaged When worn or damaged When worn or damaged

N

1.76 mm (0.0693 in)

When worn or damaged

0

1.83 mm (0.0720 in)

When worn or damaged

P

1.90 mm (0.0748 in)

When worn or damaged

Q

1.97 mm (0.0776 in)

When worn or damaged

R

2.04 mm (0.0803 in)

When worn or damaged

S

2.11 mm (0.0831 in)

When worn or damaged

T

2.18 mm (0.0858 in)

When worn or damaged

5th gear collar Thrust shim thickness (89 mm)

Standard or New

At 1st gear

Measurement Diameter of beari ng contact area

When worn damaged When worn damaged When worn damaged When worn damaged

or or or or

Standards and Service Limits Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd) Item Secondary shaft (cont'd)

Third shaft

Measurement 2nd gear collar thickness

Qualification

Standard or M e w

Service Limit

A

32.89 mm (1.2949 in)

When worn or damaged

B

32.94 mm (1,2988 in)

When worn or damaged

C

32.99 mm (1.2988 in)

When worn or damaged

D

33.04 mm (1.3008 in)

E

33.09 mm (1,3028 in)

F

33.14 mm (1.3047 in)

When worn or damaged When worn or damaged When worn or damaged

C

33.19 mm (1.3087 in)

When worn or damaged

H

33.24 mm (1.3087 in)

When worn or damaged

5th gear collar width Sealing ring thickness (30 mm)

28.00—28.05 mm (1.1024-1.1043 in) 1,74—1,80 mm (0.0685-0.0709 in)

-

Sealing ring groove width

1,875 — 1.910 mm (0.07382-0.07520 in4

ATF feed pipe O.D,

5.97—5.98 mm (0,2350-0.2354 in)

5.95 mm (0,2343 in)

ATF feed pipe bushing I.D.

8.018—8.030 mm (0.23093-0.23740 in) 44.986—44.999 mm (1.77110-1.77181 in)

8.045 mm (0.23799 in) When worn or damaged When worn or damaged

Diameter of needle bearing contact area

I.D. of gears

At 4th gear collar

—

At 6th gear collar

36.986-38.999 mm (1.45814-1,45865 in)

4th gear

50.000—50,018 mm (1.98850-1.98913 in

6th gear

42.000—42.018 mm (1.85354-1.85417 in)

When worn or damaged When worn or damaged

Reverse gear

41.000—41.016 mm (1.81417-1.61480 in)

When worn or damaged

34.975—34.991 mm (1.37697-1.37780 in)

When worn or damaged

Diameter of reverse gear collar at needle bearing contact area Axial clearance

-

4th gear

0.115 —0.350 mm (0,00453-0.01378 in)

6th gear

0.045—0.420 mm (0.00177-0.01854 in)

Reverse gear

0.1 —0.2 mm (0 .004 -0.0 08 in) 51.50—51.55 mm (2.0276-2.0295 i n)

-

Reverse gear collar width Cotter thickness

2.99—3.02 mm (0.1177-0,1189 in)

-

1.90—1.97 mm (0.0748-0.0776 in)

-

Sealing ring thickness (35 mm) Sealing ring groove width

2.025 —2.060 mm (0.07972-0.08110 in) 51.80—51.75 mm (2.0315-2.0374 in)

Reverse selector hub O.D. 4th gear washer thickness

A

8.515 mm (0.33524 in)

B

8.540 mm (0.33822 in)

C

8.585 mm (0.33720 in)

D

8.590 mm (0.33819 i n)

E

8.815 mm (0.33917 in)

F

8.640 mm (0.34016 in)

—

—

-

—

When worn damaged When worn damaged When worn damaged When worn damaged

or or or or

When worn or damaged When worn or damaged When worn or damaged

specs Item Idler gear shaft

Measurement Diameter of needle bearing contact area

Qualification At transmission housi ng bearing (shaft end side)

Cotter thickness Washer thickness (41.5 mm)

Reverse idler gear shaft

ATF pump

Service Limit When worn or damaged

2.49—2.62 mm (0.0980-0.0992 in)

-

A

1.28 mm (0.0498 in)

When worn or damaged

B

1.30 mm (0.0612 in)

When worn or damaged

C

1.34 mm (0.0528 in)

D

1,38 mm (0.0543 in)

E

1.42 mm (0.0559 in)

When worn or damaged When worn or damaged When worn or damaged

F

1.46 mm (0.0575 in)

When worn or damaged

G

1,50 mm (0.0591 i n)

When worn or damaged

H

1.54 mm (0.0806 in)

When worn or damaged

I

1.58 mm (0.0622 in)

When worn or damaged

J

1.62 mm (0.0838 in)

When worn or damaged

K

1.86 mm (0.0654 in)

When worn or damaged

L

1.70 mm (0.0669 in)

M

1.74 mm (0.0685 in)

When worn or damaged When worn or damaged

N

1.78 mm (0.0701 in)

0

1.82 mm (0.0717 in)

P

18 6 mm (0.0732 in)

When worn or damaged

Q

1.90 mm (0.0748 in)

When worn or damaged

R

1.94 mm (0.0784 in)

When worn or damaged

S

1.98 mm (0.0780 in)

When worn or damaged

I

2.02 mm (0.0795 i n)

When worn or damaged

U

2.06 mm (0.0811 in)

When worn or damaged

17.991 — 17.999 mm (0.70831 -0 .7 0 8 6 2 i n)

When worn or damaged When worn or damaged -

Diameter of needle beari ng contact area I.D. of gear

Standard or N ew 22.995—23.005 mm (0.30531 -0.90571 in)

Reverse idler gear

24.000—24.013 mm (0.94488-0.94539 in)

When worn or damaged When worn or damaged

Axial clearance

0.07—0.27 mm (0.0028-0.0106 i n)

I.D. of transmission housing at reverse idler gear shaft contact area

32.002—32.020 mm (1.25992-1.26063 in)

Reverse i dler gear shaft thrust washer thickness

1.50—1.55 mm (0.0591 -0 .0 6 1 0 in)

—

0.04—0.07 mm (0.002-0.002 in)

0.07 mm (0.002 in) -

ATF pump thrust clearance Clearance between ATF pump gear and main valve body

Drive gear

0.210—0.285 mm (0 .009-0.010 in)

Driven gear

__

0.070—0.125 mm (0.003 -0.0 04 in)

-

ATF pump driven gear I.D.

14.016—14.034 mm (0.55181 -0 .5 5 2 5 2 in)

ATF pump driven gear shaft O.D.

13.980 —13.990 mm (0.55039-0.55079 in)

When worn or damaged When worn or damaged

Standards and Service Limits Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd) Item Stator shaft

Measurement I.D. at needle bearing contact area

Qualification At torque converter side At ATF pump side

Reverse shift fork Park gear and pawl Regulator valve body

Standard or New 28.000—28.021 mm (1.10238-1.10319 in)

Service Limit When worn or damaged

I.D. at mainshaft sealing ring contact area Fork finger thickness

40.000—40.025 mm (1.57480-1.57578 in) 41.000—41.025 mm (1.61417-1.81515 in) 5.30—6.00 mm (0.2323-0.2362 i n )

—

—

When worn or damaged

At shaft part

14.000—14.010 mm (0.55118-0.55157 in)

—

At valve part

37.000—37.039 mm (1.45883-1.45823 in)

37.045 mm (1.45848 ii 35.05 mm (1.3799 in)

I.D. of shift fork shaft contact area

— 41.05 mm (1.6161 in) 5.4 mm (0.213 in)

Main valve body

Third shaft sealing ring contact I.D.

35.000—35.025 mm (1.37735-1.37833 in)

ATF guide collar

Secondary shaft sealing ring contact I. D.

30.000-30.021 mm (1.18110-1.18193 in)

30.05 mm (1.1831 in)

A/T differenti al carrier

Driveshaft/intermediate shaft contact area I.D.

32.025-32.055 mm (1.28082-1.28201 in)

—

Clearance between carrier and driveshaft Clearance between carrier and intermediate shaft

0 .0 45-0.03 6 mm (0.00177-0.00378 in) 0 .0 80-0.12 6 mm (0.00315-0.00436 in'

0.13 mm (0.0051 in)

For new bearing

3 .9 - 5 .6 N-m ( 4 0 - 5 7 kgf-cm, 3 5 - 4 3 Ibf-in)

Adjust

For reused bearing

3.6—5.3 N-m ( 3 7 - 5 4 kgf-cm, 3 2 - 4 7 Ibf-in)

Adjust

0.05—0.15 mm (0.0020-0.0059 in) 18.042 — 18.088 mm (0.71031-0.71126 in) 0 .0 55-0.09 5 mm (0.00217-0.00374 in)

-

Carrier bearing starting torque (preload)

A/T differential pinion gear

Backlash I.D. Clearance between pinion gear and pinion shaft

—

— 0.12 mm (0.0047 in)

specs Item Transfer output shaft

Measurement Diameter of bearing contact area

Qualification

Service Limi

21,977—21.990 mm (0,86523-0.86575 in)

21.92 mm (0.8630 in)

At torque converter housing side

40.002—40.018 mm (1.57488-1.57551 in)

39.95 mm (1.5728 in)

0 —0.44 mm (0 .00-0.0173 in)

Axial clearance Thrust shim thickness (28.5 mm)

Standi

At transmission housing side

.

A

1,82 mm (0.0717 in)

When worn or dama«

B

1.84 mm (0.0724'

C

1,86 mm (0.0732 in)

D

1.88 mm (0.0740 in)

When worn or damaged When worn or damaged When worn or damaged

E

1,90 mm (0.0748 i

F

1.92 mm (0.0756 in)

G

1.94 mm (0.0764 in)

H

1.98 mm (0.0772 in)

I

1.98 mm (0.0780 in)

When worn or damaged

J

2.00 mm (0.0787 i n)

K

2.02 mm (0.0795 in)

L

2.04 mm (0.0803 i

When worn or damaged When worn or damaged When worn or damaged

M

2.00 mm (0.0811 i 2.08 mm (0.0819 in) 2.10 mm (0.0827 in)

When worn damaged When worn damaged When worn damaged When worn damaged

or or or or

When worn or damaged When worn or damaged When worn or damaged When worn or damaged

P

2.12 mm (0.0835 in)

Q

2.14 mm (0.0843 i

When worn or damaged

R

2.18 mm (0.0850 in)

When worn or damaged

S

2.18 mm (0.0858 in)

When worn or damac

T

2.20 mm (0.0866 in)

When worn or damaged

U

2.22 mm (0.0874 in)

When worn or damaged

¥

2.24 mm (0.0882 in)

When worn or damaged

W

2.26 mm (0.0890 in)

X

2,28 mm (0.0898 i n)

When worn or damaged When worn or damac

Y

2.30 mm (0.0906 in)

When worn or damaged

Z

2.32 mm (0.0913 in)

When worn or damaged

AA

2.34 mm (0.0921 in)

When worn or damaged

AB

1.78 mm (0.0701 in)

When worn or damaged

AC

1.80 mm (0.0709 in)

When worn or damaged

Standards and Service Limits Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd) Measurement

Item

Qualification

Standard or New

Service Limit

Transfer assembly fluid

Capacity: Hypoid gear oil SAE90 viscosity, API classified GL4 or GL5 only

Fluid change Overhaul

0.43 L (0.45 US qt)

-

0.45 L (0.48 US qt)

—

Transfer assembly

Diameter of transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft assembly at tapered roller bearing contact area

At transfer cover side At transfer gear side

60.002 —50.018 mm (1,38858-1.96321 in1 24.387 —25.000 mm (0.38374-0.98425 in'

49,96 mm (1.9665 in)

Diameter of transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) at tapered roller bearing contact area

At transfer gear side At companion flange side

39.95 mm (1.5728 in)

Transfer gear backlash

40,002—40.018 mm (1.57488-1.57551 in) 3 1.975-31,988 mm (1.25888-1.25937 in 0.06—0.18 mm (0.0024-0.0063 in)

Tapered roller bearing total starting torque (preload)

2.64—4.23 N-m (28.9-43.1 kgf-cm, 2 3 .3 -3 7 .4 Ibf-in)

24.33 mm (0.3815 i n)

31.32 mm (1.2587 i n) Adjust Adjust

Rear Differential Item Rear differential fluid

Measurement Capacity; use Acura All-Wheel Drive Flui d (DPSF)

Qualification Fluid change

Standard or New 2.53 L (2.87 US qt)

-

Service Limit

Overhaul

2.77 L (2.93 US qt)

_

Standard or New 0 — 10 mm (0 —0,39 in)

—

23 N (3.0 kgf, 6,8 Ibf)

—

Steering Measurement

Item Steering wheel

Qualification

Rotational play measured at outside edge Initial turning load measured at outside edge with engine running

irvice Limit

Gearbox

Angle of rack guide screw loosened from locked posit

15+5°

Pump

Output pressure with shut-off valve closed

8,320 —9,420 kPa (90.98-90.06 kgf/cm2, 1,293.7-1,366.3 ps

—

Power steering fluid

Capacity; use Acura power steering fluid

System capacity Reservoir capacity

1.0 L (1.1 US qt) 0.34 L (0.38 US qt)

-

Qualification Front

Standard or New —0 ° 30 # ± 1 0

—

Suspension Item Wheel alignment

Measurement Camber Caster

Rear

—0 0 30 ' + 4 5 '

Front

4 ° 12 ' ± 3 5 ' 0 ± 2 mm (0±0.08 in)

Total toe-in

Front

Front wheel turning angle

Rear Inward Outward (reference)

Wheel Wheel bearing

Service Limit

2 ± 2 mm (0.08±0.08 in) 38 ° 12 ' ± 2 ° 31 ° 4 4 '

Runout

Axial

0 —0.3 mm (0 —0.012 in)

2.0 mm (0.079 in)

End play

Radial Front

0 —0.3 mm (0—0.012 in) 0 —0.05 mm (0 —0.0020 in)

1.5 mm (0.059 in) -

Rear

0 —0.05 mm (0—0.0020 in)

Brakes Measurement

item Parking brake

Brake pedal

Number of clicks when pedal pressed with 294 N (30.0 kgf, 66.1 Ibf) of force (reference)

Qualification

Standard or New

Service Limit

9 to 11 clicks

Drum I.D.

210.0—210.1 mm (8.208-8.272 ir

211.0 mm (8.307 in)

Shoe lining thickness

3.9 mm (0.154 in)

Height from floor

155 mm (6.10 in) 1 —5 mm (0.04—0.20 in)

1.0 mm (0.039 in) -

Free play

specs Item Brake disc

Measurement Thickness

Qualification Front

Standard or New 27.9—28,1 mm (1.098 — 1.106 in)

Service Limit 26.0 mm (1.024 in)

Rear

10.9—11.1 mm (0.429—0.437 in)

9.0 mm (0.354 in)

Runout Parallelism Brake pad

Thickness

0.04 mm

(0.0016 in) 0.015 mm (0.00059 i n)

— Front

10.8 —11.2 mm (0.417—0.441 in)

1.6 mm (0.063 in)

Rear

9.6—10.2 mm (0.378-0.402 in)

1.6 mm (0.063 in]

Air Conditioning Item Refrigerant

Measurement Type Capacity of system

Refri gerant oil

Type Capacity of components

Compressor

Field coil resistance Pulley-to-pressure plate clearance

Qualification

Standard or New

Service Limit

HFC-134a (R-134a) 600—650 g (2 1.16-22.93 oz) DENSO ND-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH) Condenser (i ncluding dryer desiccant)

50 m l (1 2/3 fl’Oz)

Evaporator (front) Evaporator (rear)

40 m l (1 1/3 fl-oz) 30 m l (1 fl-oz)

Each li ne and hose

10 m l (1/3 fl-oz)

Dryer desiccant

10 m l (1/3 fl-oz)

Compressor

125—137 mL (4 2 / 9 - 4 5/8 fl-oz)

At 68 °F (20 °C)

3.9—4.3 0 0.35—0.60 mm (0 .0138-0.0236 in)

|

Torque Summary Torque Specifications NOTE • Refer to the S/M section for the precautions and complete procedures. • Refer to the S/M section for the bolts/nuts not indicated here. *1: Parts to be tightened in particular orders. *2: Follow closely the S/M procedures closely for torque, sequence, and special steps.

Engine Electrical Location

Item

Remark

Torque

Starting system

Starter bolts

Ignition system

Starter harness clamp nut Spark plugs

Charging system

Alternator bolt (8 mm)

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)

Alternator bolt (10 mm)

44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft)

44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 ibfft) 3.0 N-m (0.9 kgf-m, 7,0 Ibf-ft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

Alternator cable nut

12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)

Drive belt auto-tensioner bolt

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

Drive belt auto-tensioner pulley bolt Idler pulley bolt

80 N-m (8,2 kgf-m, 53 Ibfft)

Engine Mechanical Location Engine assembly

Item Front engine mount bracket bolts Front engine mount bolt (10 mm) 0

Remark Use new bolts Use new bolt

Front engine mount bolts (10 mm) Qty4

Use new bolts

38 N-m (3.9 kgf m, 28 Ibfft)

Front engine mount stop nuts

Use new nuts

Lower transmission mount bolt (10 mm) Qty 1

Use new bolt

74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 Ibf-ft) 54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibfft)

Lower transmission mount bolts (10 mm) Qty 3 Power steeri ng pump bracket bolts

38 N-m (3.9 kgf-m, 28 Ibfft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 18 Ibfft)

Rear engine mount bracket bolts

Use new bolts

88 N-m (9.0 kgf-m, 85 Ibf-ft)

Rear engine mount bolt (10 mm) Qty 1 Rear engine mount bolts (10 mm) Qty 4

Use new bolt Use new bolts

54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibfft) 54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibfft)

Rear engine mount base bolts (10 mm) Qty2 (front side)

Use new bolts

42 N-m (4.3 kgf-m, 31 Ibfft)

Rear engine mount base bolts (10 mm) Qty2 (rear side) Rear engine mount stop nuts

42 N-m (4.3 kgf-m, 31 Ibfft) Use new nuts

74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 Ibfft)

Side engine mount bracket bolts (10 mm) Qty2

Use new bolts

44 N-m (4,5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft) 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibfft)

Side engine mount bolt (12 mm)

Use new bolt

Side engine mount bracket bolts (10 mm) Qty3

Engine block Engine lubrication

Intake manifold and exhaust system

38 N-m (3.9 kgf m#28 Ibfft) 54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibfft)

54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibfft)

Side engine mount bolts (10 mm)

38 N-m (3.9 kgf-m, 28 Ibfft)

Rocker arm oil control solenoid assembly bolts Oil filter

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)

Oil filter feed pi pe

Use oil on threads

12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 9 Ibf-ft) 35 N-m (3.6 kgf-m, 26 Ibf-ft)

Oil pan drain bolt

Use new washer

39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf-ft)

Oil pressure switch

■Use new O-ring •Use liquid gasket on threads

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)

Intake manifold bolts*'

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)

Intake manifold nuts*1 Injector base bolts Injector base nuts

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

Exhaust pipe A self-locking nuts (Warm up TWC side)

Use new nuts

54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibf-ft)

Exhaust pipe A self-locking nuts (Under-floor TWC side)*1

Use new nuts

54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibfft)

Muffler self-locking nut

Use new nuts

33 N-m (3.4 kgf-m, 25 Ibfft)

specs Torque Specifications NOTE • Refer to the S/M section for the precautions and complete procedures. • Refer to the S/M section for the bolts/nuts not indicated here. *1: Parts to be tightened in particular orders. *2: Follow closely the S/M procedures closely for torque, sequence, and special steps.

Engine Cooling Location Cooling system

Item

Remark

Torque

Water passage bolts

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 ibfft)

Water passage nuts

22 IM-m (2.2 kgf-m, 18 Ibfft)

Fuel and Emissions Location Fuel and emissions

Item

RemarK

Torque

A /F sensor ECT sensor 1

44 N*m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibfft) 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibfft)

ECT sensor 2

12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibfft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

EGR pipe bolts EGR pipe nuts

22 N-m (2.2 kgf m# 16 Ibfft)

EGR valve nuts EVAP canister cover bolts

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

Fuel joint hose bolt

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf mr 16 Ibfft)

Fuel tank locknut

70 N-m (7.1 kgf-m, 51 Ibfft) 64 N-m (6.6 kgf-m, 47 Ibfft)

Fuel tank support straps bolts Knock sensor

31 N-m (3.2 kgf-m, 23 Ibfft) ■ 22 N-m (2.2 kgf m, 16 Ibfft) 44 N-m (4.5 kgfm ,33 Ibfft)

Rocker arm oil pressure switch Secondary H 02S Throttle body bolts

22 N-m (2.2 kgf m, 16 Ibfft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft) 33 N-m (3.4 kgf-m,25 Ibfft)

Throttle body nuts Under floor TWC self-locking nuts (front side)

Use new nuts

Under floor TWC self-locking nuts (rear side)

Use new nuts

54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m,40 Ibfft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

Use new nuts

31 N-m (3.2 kgfm ,23 Ibfft)

Use new nuts

31 N-m (3.2 kgf-m, 23 Ibfft)

Warm up TWC bracket bolts Warm up TWC (front bank) upper self-locking nuts Warm up TWC (rear bank) upper self-locking nuts

Torque Summary Automatic Transmission Location Automatic transmission

Item

Remark

ATF drain plug

Use new sealing washer

ATF filler bolt

Use new sealing washer

Clutch pressure inspection port sealing bolts (line/1 st/5th/torque converter) Clutch pressure inspection port sealing bolts (3rd/6th) Transmission fluid pressure'switches Line pressure switch

44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft) 20 N-m (2,0 kgf-m, 14 Ibfft) 27 N-m (2.8 kgf-m, 20 Ibfft)

Use new sealing washers Use new sealing washer

20 N-m (2.0 kgf-m, 14 Ibfft) 20 N-m (2.0 kgf-m, 14 Ibf-ft)

Drive plate bolts *2

74 N*m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 Ibf ft)

Lower transmission housing mounting bolts

74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 Ibfft)

Upper transmission housing mounting bolts

64 N-m (6.5 kgf-m, 47 Ibf-ft)

Transfer assembly mounting bolts

51 N-m (5.2 kgf m, 38 Ibf-ft)

Transmission ground terminal biacket bolt Shift lever assembly bolts

26 N-m (2,7 kgf-m, 20 Ibf-ft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

Shift cable end nut

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)

Shift lever bracket base bolts Transfer assembly

Torque 49 N-m (5.0 kgf-m, 38 Ibfft)

Transfer assembly fluid drai n plug Transfer assembly fluid filler plug

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) Use new sealing washer Use new sealing washer

44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibfft) 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibfft)

Rear Differential Location

Item

Rear differential

Rear differential drain plug

Use new sealing washer

47 N-m (4.8 kgf-m, 35 Ibf-ft)

Rear differential filler plug

Use new sealing washer

47 N-m (4.8 kgf m, 35 Ibfft)

Rear differential mounting biacket front bolts (14

Use new bolts

74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 Ibfft)

Remark

Torque

IT

Rear differentia! mounting biacket front bolts (10 mm) Rear differential rear bolts *2

38 N-m (3.3 kgf-m, 28 Ibfft) Use new bolts

Rear differential side case bolts *2

74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 Ibfft) 27 N-m (2.8 kgf-m, 20 Ibf-ft)

Driveline/Axle Location Driveline/axle

Item

Remark

Torque

Front dr i ve shaft spindle nut (26 mm)

•Use oil on the seating surface ■Use new nut

328 N-m (33.5 kgf-m, 242 Ibfft)

Rear drive shaft spindle nut (24 mm)

■Use oil on the seating surface ■Use new nut

245 N-m (25.0 kgf-m, 181 Ibfft)

Intermediate shaft dowel bolts

39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 23 Ibfft) 39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibfft)

Intermediate shaft flange bolt Heat shield bolts No.1 propeller shaft bolts No.2 propeller shaft bolts Propeller shaft protector bolts Center support bearing bolts

Use new bolts

^ 2 ^ n 7 ( 2 Y k g f i^ 72 N-m (7.3 kgf-m, 53 Ibfft)

Use new bolts

72 N-m (7 3 kgf m, 53 Ibf-ft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) 39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf-ft)

Torque Specifications NOTE • Refer to the S/M section for the precautions and complete procedures. • Refer to the S/M section for the bolts/nuts not indicated here. *1: Parts to be tightened in particular orders. *2: Follow closely the S/M procedures closely for torque, sequence, and special steps.

Steering Location Steering

Item

Remark

Torque

Steering wheel bolt

39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf-ft)

Steering Joint bolts Steering column bolts*1

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 ibf-ft)

Steering column nuts*1

16 N-m (1.6 kgf-m, 12 Ibf-ft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)

16 N-m (1.6 kgf-m, 12 Ibfft)

Steering pump bolts Steering gearbox bolts* 1

Use new bolts

Steering gearbox cushion bracket bolts*!

50 N-m (5.1 kgf-m, 37 Ibf-ft) 39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf-ft)

Tie-rod end ball Joint nut

60 N-m (6.1 kgf-m, 44 Ibf-ft)

Tie-rod end locki ng nut

44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft)

Suspension Location Front suspension

Item

Remark

Wheel nuts Knuckle damper pinch bolts/nuts Hub bearing unit bolts

Use new bolts/nuts

Lower arm ball joint castle nut

Use new nut

Lower arm bolt (16 mm) Lower arm bolt (14 mm)

Use new bolt

Lower arm bushing self-locking nut

Use new nut

162 N-m (16.5 kgf-m, 119 Ibf-ft) 39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibfft)

Stabilizer link nuts

Use new nuts

Damper nuts

Use new nuts

78 N-m (8.0 kgf-m, 58 Ibfft) 59 N-m (6.0 kgf-m, 43 Ibfft)

Use new bolt

98.1 N-m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.3 Ibf-ft) 93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibfft)

Use new bolt

Stabilizer bar bolts

Rear suspension

Torque 127 N-m (13.0- kgf-m, 94.0 Ibf-ft) 211 N-m (21.5 kgf-m, 156 Ibf-ft)

177 N-m (18.0 kgf-m, 130 Ibfft) 93 N-m (3.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft)

127,N-m (13.0 kgf-m, 94.0 Ibfft)

Wheel nuts Hub bearing unit bolts Upper arm bolt

98.1 N-m 110.0 kgf m, 72.3 Ibf-ft) 103—113 N-m (10.5—11.5 kgf-m, 75.3—83,2 Ibfft)

Upper arm ball Joint castle nut

5 9 - 6 9 N-m (6 .0 -7 .0 kgf-m, 4 3 - 5 1 Ibf-ft)

Lower arm A se lf locking nut/adjusting bolt Lower arm A bolt Lower arm B nut

Use new nut Use new bolt

113 N-m (11.5 kgf-m, 83.2 Ibl 93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft)

Use new nut

108 N-m (11.0 kgf-m, 79.6 Ibfft)

Lower arm B bolt Trailing arm nuts

Use new bolt Use new nuts

113 N-m (11.5 kgf-m, 83.2 Ibfft) 64 N-m (6.5 kgf-m, 47 Ibf-ft)

Trailing arm bolts Stabilizer bar bolts

Use new bolts

103 N-m (10.5 kgf-m, 75.9 Ibfft) 39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf-ft) 49 N-m (5.0 kgf-m, 36 Ibfft)

Stabilizer Link nut Stabilizer Link self-locking nut

Use new nut

37 N-m (3.8 kgf-m, 27 Ibf-ft)

Dumper lower bolt

Use new bolt

64 N-m (6.5 kgf-m, 47 Ibfft)

Damper upper bolts

Use new bolts

64 N-m (6.5 kgf-m, 47 Ibfft) 59 N-m (6.0 kgfm , 43 Ibfft)

Bump stop bolt

Torque Summary Brakes Location

Item

Conventional brake

Remark

Front brake caliper bolts Front brake caliper bracket bolts Front brake hose banjo bolt Rear brake caliper bolts

Use new washers

Rear brake caliper bracket bolts Rear brake hose banjo bolt Backing plate nuts

34 N-m (3.5 kgf-m, 25 Ibfft) 37 N-m (3.8 kgf-m, 27 Ibf-ft) 88 N-m (9.0 kgf-m, 85 Ibfft)

Use new washers

Master cylinder nuts

34 N-m (3.5 kgf-m, 25 Ibf-ft) 98.1 N-m (10.0 kgf-m, 72,3 Ibfft) 13 N-m (1.3 kgf-m, 9.4 Ibfft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

Master cyli nder brake line Brake booster/Brake pedal n

13 N-m (1,3 kgf-m, 3.4 Ibfft)

Brake pedal bracket bo

22 N-m (2,2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)

Parki ng brake pedal bolt Parking brake pedal nuts

22 N-m (2,2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

Parking brake release lever bolt Parking brake cable bolts

22 N-m (2,2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

Parking brake cable nuts V

Toraue 72 N-m (7,3 kgf-m, 53 Ibfft) 137 N-m (14.0 kgf-m, 101 Ibf-ft)

Parking brake cable bracket bolts VS A modulator control unit brake line (10 mm)

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)

VSA modulator control unit brake line (12 mm)

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)

15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft)

Body Location Frame

Item Front subframe bolts* 1

Remark Use new bolts

Torque 103 N-m (10.5 kgf-m, 76 Ibfft) 74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 Ibfft)

Front subframe front bracket bolts Front subframe rear bracket bolt

Use new bolt

117 N-m (11.9 kgf-m, 86 Ib f ft)

Front subframe stiffener bolts Steering gearbox stiffener bolt/nut

Use new bolts

53 N-m (6.0 kgf-m, 44 Ibf-ft) 38 N-m (3.9 kgf-m, 28 Ibf-ft)

Steering gearbox stiffener bolt

38 N-m (3.3 kgf-m, 28 Ibf-ft)

Front subframe damper bolts Rear subframe bolts

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) Use new bolts

33 N-m (8.5 kgf-m, 61 Ibf-ft)

Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning Location A/C compressor

Item A/C compressor bracket bolts

Remark

A/C compressor bolts A/C compressor center bolt Receiver line

rque 45 N-m (4.6 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)

A/C compressor relief valve

18 N-m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft) 13 N-m (1.3 kgf-m, 10 Ibfft)

A/C pressure sensor

11 N-m (1.1 kgf-m, 8 Ib1

Body Electrical Remark

Location

Item

Wipers/washers

Windshield wiper arm nut

29 N-m (3.0 kgf-m, 21 Ibfft)

Windshield wiper linkage nut

31 N-m (3.2 kgf-m, 23 Ibf-ft)

rque

Driving Support Location Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Item

Remark

Brake line 4-way joint brake line (10 mm) Left front brake fluid pressure sensor

Use new O-ring

15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibfft) 20 N-m (2.0 kgf-m, 15 Ibfft)

Right front brake fluid pressure sensor

Use new O-ring

20 N-m (2.0 kgf-m, 15 Ibfft)

specs

Design Specifications Item DIMENSIONS

Measurement

Qualification

Overall length Overall width Overall heigu*

1,733 mm (68.2 ir

Wheelbase Track

Specification 4,867 mm (191.6 i 1,394 mm (78.5 in) 2,750 mm (108.3 I

Front Rear

Seating capacity

1,720 mm (87.7 ir 1,715 mm (87,5 in) Seven (7)

WEIGHT

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

2,700 kg (5,952 lbs)

ENGINE

Type Cylinder arrangement

Water-cooled, 4-stroke SOHC VTEC V6 gasoline engine 60 ° V6-cylinder, transverse

Bore and stroke Displacement

3f884 cm3 (mL) (223.6 cu in)

Compression ratio Valve train

11.2 Belt driven, SOHC VTEC 4 valves per cylinder

Lubrication system Fuel required

Forced, wet sump, with trochoid pump Premium UNLEADED gasoline with 91 Pump Octane Number or higher

Type

Gear reducti on

Nominal output

1.8 kW 12 V

STARTER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

30.0 x 96.0 mm (3,54 x 3.78 in)

Nomina! voltage Hour rating

30 seconds

Di rection of rotati on

Counterclockwise as viewed from drive end

Type

Electronically-controlled automatic, six-speed forward, one reverse

Primary reduction Gear ratio

Fi nal reduction

Direct 1:1 1st 2nd

3.359 2.094

4th

1.484 1.065

5th

0.754

6th

0.555

Reverse

2.269

Type

Single helical gear

Gear ratio

4.250

2-19

Design Specifications Item STEERING

SUSPENSION

Measurement

Specification

Qualification

Hydraulic power-assisted rack and pin!

Type Overall ratio

17.0

Turns, !ock-to-lock Steering wheel diameter

3.29 380 mm (14.36 in) Front

Independent strut with stabilizer, coil spring

Rear

Independent multi-link with trailing arm, stabilizer, coil

Shock absorber (without active damper system)

Front and rear

Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled

Shock absorber (with active damper system)

Front and rear

Magnet rheological variable active damper

Size

Front and rear (MDX, TECH, TECH-E: '10 -11 models)

P255/55R18 104H

Front and rear (MDX, TECH, TECH-E: '12 models)

255/55R18 105H

Front and rear (ADV, ADV-E, SPORT, SPORT-E, ELITE) Spare

P255/50R19 103H

Type

spring

TIRES

WHEEI ALIGNMENT

Front and rear

—0 0 30 '

Caster

Front

Total toe-in

Front Rear

4 ° 12 ' 0 mm (0 in) 2 mm (0.08 i

Type of parking brake Pad friction surface area (swept area)

31 ° 4 4 ' 12° 4 8 '

Front Rear

Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc (drum in)

Front Rear

Compressor

Foot type mechanical actuating, rear wheels 63.5 cm2 (3.84 sq 25.3 cm2 (3.92 sq i n) x 2 80.2 cm2 (9.33 sq in) x 2

Parking brake shoe friction surface area AIR CONDITIONING

CM

Type of service brake

o

Outward (reference) SA1 at camber (kingpin axis)

00

Inward

CO

Front wheel turning angle

BRAKES

T165/80D17 104M

Camber

Type Capacity

Swash plate 177 mL (10.8 cu in)/rev

Maximum speed

7,800 rpm

Lubricant capacity

125—137 mL (4 2 / 9 - 4 5/8 fl-oz)

Lubricant type

DENSO ND-

Condenser

Type

Corrugated fin

Evaporator

Type

Corrugated •

Blower

Type

Stabilized swirling flow

Motor input

Front 260 W/12 V Rear: 2 2 0 W /1 2 V

Speed control Maximum capacity

riable Front: 525 m3 (18,510 cu ft)/b Rear; 275 m3 (3,635 cu ft)/h Air-mix type

Temperature control Compressor clutch

Type Electrical power consumption at 88 °F (20 °C)

Dry, single plate, Poly-V belt drive 35 W maximum at 12 V

Refrigerant

Type

HFC-134a (R-134a)

Quantity

600—850 g (21,2—22.3 oz)

specs Item ELECTRICAL RATINGS

Measurement Battery Fuses

Qualification Main under-hood fuse box Under-hood fuse/relay box

Light bulbs

Specification 12 V —76 Ah/20 HR (12 V - 6 5 Ah/5 HR) 120 A, 60 A, 50 A, 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 7.5 A 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 1 0 A 7 .5 A

Auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box

10 A

Under-dash fuse/relay box Auxiliary under-dash fuse holder 1 Auxiliary under-dash fuse holder 2

30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 10 A r 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A

Rear fuse/relay box

40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 10 A, 7.5 A

Headlight high beam

12 ¥ —60 W

Headlight low beam (HID)

12 ¥ —35 W

Daytime running light:

12 V —60 W

Front turn signal lights Side turn signal lights

12 V —21 W LED

Front parking lights Front side marker lights

12 V —3 CP 12 ¥ —3 CP

Fog lights

12 V —55 W 12 V —21 W

Rear turn signal lights Brake lights/tail lights Rear side marker lights

LED

Hi gh mount brake light

LED

12 V —3 CP

Back-up lights

12 V —18 W

License plate lights Tailgate lights

12 V —3 CP 12 ¥ —5 W

Front individual map lights Rear indivi dual map lights

LED

Ambient lights

LED

Vanity mirror lights

12 V —2 W

Glove box light

12 ¥ —1.4 W 12 V —3.4 W

Door courtesy lights

LED

Footweil lights

12 V —3.4 W

Gauge lights Indicator lights

LED LED

Design Specifications

1,733 mm (68.2 in)

Body Specifications

Maintenance Maintenance Lubricants and Fluids . .................................................... 3-2

Maintenance Minder™ General Information......................................................... 3-4 Maintenance Main Items................................................ 3-7 Maintenance Sub Item s................................................... 3-8

Maintenance Lubricants and Fluids Application Engine

Automat i c transmission Transfer assembly

Rear differential Brake system (including VSA lines) Power steering system

Cooling system

API CERTI FICATION SEAL

Lubricant or Fluid Acura Motor Oil: 5W-2C Look for the API certi fication seal on the oil container. Make sure it says "Tor Gasoline Engines." SAE viscosity: See chart Acura Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF DW-1); Always use Acura ATF DW-1. Using a non-Acura ATF can affect shift qualify Hypoid gear oil GL4 or Use an SAE 90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API classified GL4 or GL5 only, Viscosity SAE 90: above 0 °F ( -1 8 °C) Always use Acura All-Wheel Drive Fluid (DPS Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid: Always use Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid, Using a non-Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the syste Acura Power Steering Fluid: Always use Acura Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering flu i d or automatic transmiss i on fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather Always use Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolai

Recomm ended Engine Oil Engine oil viscosity for am bient tem perature ranges

For the details of the lubrication points and the type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and the various work procedures (such as Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each secti on.

A B C D E F G H i J

Application Brake booster clevis pin Battery terminals Fuel fill door (lock rod sliding area) Hood hinges and hood latch Tailgate hinges Caliper p i ston boots, caliper piston seals (front), caliper pins, and caliper pin boots Caliper piston seals (rear) Parki ng brake shoe linkage Parking brake connnecting rod Air conditioning compressor

Lubricant or Fluid Multipurpose grease

Honda silicone grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid Plastilube #2 grease Rubber grease Compressor oil: DENSO ND-OIL 8 (P/N 38S37-PR7-A01AH ) for refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a)

NOTE: • Lubri cate the following areas using the recommended lubricants and fluids. • In corrosive areas, more frequent lubrication is necessary.

D

3-3

Maintenance Minder™ General Information Maintenance Minder The Maintenance Minder is an important feature of the multi-information display. Based on engine and automatic transmiss i on operating conditions, and accumulated engine revolutions, the MDX's onboard computer (PCM) calculates the remaining engine oil and automatic transmission fluid l i fe, The system also displays the remaining engine oil life along with the code(s) for other scheduled ma i ntenance items needi ng servi ce,

3-4

Service Information 1. The remain i ng eng i ne oil life (A) i s shown as a percentage on the multi-information display. To see the current engine oil life, turn the ignition switch to ON (ll), then push and release the SEt/RESET button repeatedly until the engine oil life displays.

2, When the ignition switch i s in ON (II), and the remain i ng engine o i l life is 15 % to 8 %, the remaining engine oil life and other scheduled maintenance item (s) needing service are displayed. The Maintenance Minder message "SERVICE DUE SOON" (A) also comes on. To cancel the message, press the INFO button. The display continues to show the remaining engine oil life (B) and the message i ndicator (C) until it is reset. • Complete list of maintenance main items (D) (see page 3-7). • Complete list of maintenance sub items (E) (see page 3-8).

3. When the ignition switch is in ON (ll), and the remaining engine oil life is 5 % to 1 %, the Maintenance Minder message "SERVICE DUE NOW" is displayed along with the same maintenance item code(s). If the Maintenance Minder message display is canceled, a "SERVICE" message appears.

4. When the ignition switch i s in ON (II), and the remaining engine oil life is 0 %, the Maintenance Minder message "SERVICE PAST DUE" is displayed along with the same maintenance item code(s).

5. If the indicated maintenance is not done, the "SERVICE PAST DUE" message shows a negative distance traveled, for example "10 miles," on the display, If the negative distance traveled is between 0 and 9, the message is displayed for on l y a few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II). The negative distance traveled (A) remains displayed after the veh i cle is driven more than 10 miles (for USA models) or 10 km (for Canada mode l s) after 0% oil l ife is reached, and the disp l ay cannot be cancel ed. This means the indicated maintenance item(s) should have been done more than 10 miles (or 10 km) ago.

(cont'd)

3-5

Maintenance Minder™ General Information (cont'd) Resetting the Maintenance Minder NOTE: • The veh i cle must be stopped to reset the Maintenance Minder. • If a required service is done and the Maintenance Minder is not reset, or if the Maintenance Minder is reset without doing the service, the system w i l l not show the proper maintenance timing. This can l ead to serious mechanical prob l ems because there w i ll be no accurate record of when the required maintenance is needed, • The engine oil l ife and maintenance item(s) can be independentl y reset with the HDS. 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. If system message(s) are displayed, press the I NFO button to cancel the display.

5. Press the I NFO button repeatedly until the "RESET" indicator is displayed, then press the SEL/RESET button. The maintenance item code(s) w il l disappear, and the engine oil l ife w il l reset to "100%."

OIL LIFE

1 00%

002300

Resetting Individual Maintenance Items 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).

3. Push and release the SEL/RESET button repeatedly until the engine o il life indicator is displayed.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

4. Press and hold the SEL/RESET button for about 10 seconds, the "OIL LI FE RESET" mode disp l ay appears.

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehic l e and the powertrain control module (PCM), If it doesn't communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209),

NOTE: • If you are resetti ng the Maintenance Minder when the engine oil life is more than 15 % , make sure any maintenance item(s) requiring service are done before resetting the display. • To cancel the "OIL LI FE RESET" mode, press the INFO button repeatedly until the "CANCEL" indicator is disp l ayed, then press the SEL/RESET button.

OIL LIFE RE

7

RESET CANCEL

OIL LIFE 5% SERVICE A123456

3-6

4. Select BODY ELECTRICAL w i th the HDS. 5. Select ADJUSTMENT i n the GAUGES with the HDS. 0. Select MAINTENANCE MINDER in the ADJUSTMENT with the HDS. 7. Select RESET in the MA I NTENANCE MINDER with the HDS, 8. Select the individua l maintenance item you wish to reset with the HDS.

Maintenance Main Items If the message "SERVICE DUE NOW" does not appear more than 12 months after the disp l ay is reset change the engine oil every year. NOTE: • Independent of the maintenance messages in the mu lti-information display, replace the brake f l uid every 3 years . • I nspect i dle speed every 180,000 m il es (256,000 km). • Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1,2, or 3 if they are noisy.___________ _;_____________________ _ Symbol laintenance Main Item A Repl ace engine oil (see page 8-3) - Engine oi l capacity without oil f i lter; 4.0 L (4.2 US qt) B Repl ace engine oil and oil fi lter (see page 8-10) - Engine oil capacity with oil filter: 4.3 L (4.5 US qt) Check front and rear brakes (see page 19-3) • Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks. • Check cal ipers for damage, l eaks, and tightness of mounting bolts. • Check parking brake l inings for cracking, glazing, wear, and for oil or grease contamination. Check parking brake adjustment (see page 19-8) - Check the number of c l icks (3 to 11) when parki ng brake pedal is pressed with 294 N (30.0 kgf, 86.1 I bf) of force. Inspect tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and gearbox boots (see page 17-5) • Check steering linkage, • Check boots for damage and leaking grease. • Check fluid lines for damage or leaks. Inspect suspension components (see page 18-3) • Check bo l ts for tightness. • Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage. Inspect driveshaft boots (see page 16-4) - Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness. Inspect brake hoses and l ines including VSA lines (see page 13-40) - Check master cylinder and VSA modul ator-control unit for damage and l eakage, Inspect all f l uid level s and condition of fluids • Engine coolant (see page 10-6) • Automatic transmission fluid (see page 14-183) • Transfer assembly fluid (see page 14-333) • Rear differential f l uid (see page 15-64) • Power steering fluid (see page 17-25) • Brake fluid (see page 19-9) • Windshield washer fluid Inspect exhaust system * (see page 9-8) - Check catalytic converter heat shields, exhaust pipes, and mufflers for damage, leaks, and tightness. Inspect fuel lines* (see page 11-302), and connections* (see page 11-304) - Check for l oose connections, cracks, and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace damaged parts. NOTE: According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk (*) will not void the client's emissions warranties, However, Acura recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended interval, to ensure long-term reliability.

Maintenance Minder™ Maintenance Sub Items Number 1 2

3

4

5

8

3-8

Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires, and check tire inflation and condition - Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual, Replace air cleaner element (see page 11-332) - If the veh i cle is regu l arly driven in dusty conditions, rep l ace every 15,000 m i l es (24,000 km). Replace dust and po l len filter (see page 21-128) • If the vehicle is driven mostly in areas that have high concentrations of dust, pollen, or soot in the air, replace every 15,000 m i l es (24,000 km). • Replace filter whenever airf l ow from the heating and air conditioning system is less than normal. I nspect dr i ve bel t (see page 4-28) - Look for cracks and damage, and inspect auto tensioner; no adjustment is needed. Replace automatic transmission fluid (see page 14-184), and transfer assembly f l uid (see page 14-333) • Use Acura ATF DW-1. • Automatic transmission f l uid capacity: 3.1 L (3.3 US qt) • Use hypoid gear o i l GL4 or GL5, • Transfer assembly fluid capacity: 0.43 L (0.45 US qt) Replace spark p l ugs (see page 4-19) ILZKR7B-11S (NGK) or SXU22HCR11S (DENSO). Replace timing belt (see page 6-21), and inspect water pump (see page 10-5) - If the vehic l e is regularly dr i ven in very high temperatures over 110 °F (43 °C), or in very low temperatures under —20 °F(—29 °C), rep l ace every 60,000 miles (USA models)/100,000 km (Canada m odels). I nspect va l ve clearance (cold) (see page 6-9) • Intake: 0.20—0.24 mm (0.008—0.003 in) • Exhaust: 0.28—0.32 mm (0.011—0.012 i 1 Repl ace engine coolant (see page 10-6) • Use Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. acity (incl uding the reserve tank); 7.3 L (1.33 US gal) Replace rear differential fluid (see page 15-64) • Use Acura All-Whee l Drive Fl uid (DPSF). • Capacity: 2.53 L (2.67 US qt) • Driving in mountainous areas at very l ow vehicle speeds or towing trailer results i n higher l evel of mechanical (shear) stress to f l uid. This requires differentia l fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder, If the vehicle is regularly dr i ven in these conditi ons, have the differential f l uid changed at 7,600 m il es (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km)

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If engine electrical maintenance is required) The Acura MDX SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering whee l hub, a front passenger's airbag in the dashboard above the g l ove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat bel t retractors, side curtain airbags in the sides of the roof, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. I nformation necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this Service Manual. Items marked with an asterisk (*) on the contents page inc l ude or are located near SRS components. Servicing, disassembl ing, or rep l acing these items requires special precautions and tools, and shou l d be done by an authorized Acura dealer. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could l ead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal or side coll ision, al l SRS service work shou l d be done by an authorized Acura dealer. • I mproper service procedures, including incorrect remova l and insta l lation of the SRS, cou l d l ead to personal injury caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags, side airbags, side curtain airbags, and/or seat belt tensioners. • Do not bump or impact the SRS u n it front impact sensors, side impact sensors, or rear safing sensor, especial ly when the ignition switch is in ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0); otherwise, the system may fail in a col l ision, or the airbags may deploy. • SRS electrica l connectors are identified by yell ow co l or coding. Related components are located in the steering column, center console, dashboard, dashboard l ower cover, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats, in the roof side, and around the floor. Do not use e l ectrical test equipment on these circuits.

Engine Electrical Engine Electrical Special Tools......................................................................4-2

Starting System Component Location Index............................................. 4-3 Symptom Troubleshooting Index.................................4-4 Circuit Diagram................................................................. 4-5 Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting...................... 4-6 Starter Solenoid Test........................................................ 4-8 Starter Performance Test................................................ 4-9 Starter Removal and Installation.................................... 4-10 Starter Overhaul................................................................4-11

Ignition System Component Location Index............................................. 4-17 Ignition Timing Inspection...............................................4-18 Ignition Coil and Spark Plug Removal/Installation. ...4-19 Spark Plug Inspection...................................................... 4-19

Charging System Component Location Index............................................. 4-21 Symptom Troubleshooting Index................................. 4-22 Circuit Diagram................................................................. 4-23 Charging System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting. 4-24 Alternator and Regulator Circuit Troubleshooting. ...4-26 Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting..................4-27 Drive Belt Inspection.................................... ................... 4-28 Drive Belt Replacement................................................... 4-29 Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Inspection...........................4-29 Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Replacement...................... 4-30 Tensioner Pulley Replacement....................................... 4-31 Alternator Removal and Installation..............................4-31 Alternator Overhaul......................................................... 4-34

Cruise Control Component Location Index............................................. 4-39 Symptom Troubleshooting Index.................................4-40 Circuit Diagram................ ................................................ 4-41 Cruise Control Input Test................................................ 4-42 * Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement......................................................... 4-44

Engine Mount Control System Component Location Index............................................. 4-45 Circuit Diagram................................................................. 4-46 Troubleshooting................................................ .............. 4-47

Engine Electrical Special Tools Ref. No. © CD

4-2

Tool Number 07746-0010300 07749-0010000

Description Bearing Driver Attachment, 42 x 47 mm Driver Handl e, 15 x 13!

Qty 1 1

Component Location Index AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH RELAY BLOCK A STARTER C UT RELAY 2 Test, page 22-103 —

STARTER C U T RELAY 1 T e s t page 22-109

BATTERY Test, page 22-94

IR A N S fH iS S IO N RANGE S W ITCH T e s t page 14-234 R ep lacem en t page 14-235

PCM

STARTER Circuit Diagram, page 4-5 Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 4-6 Solenoid Test, page 4-8 Performance Test, page 4-9 Removal and Instal l ation, page 4-10 O verhaul , page 4-11

Symptom Troubleshooting Index Symptom Engine does not crank

Engine cranks, but does not start

Engine is hard to start

Engine cranks slowly

Diagnostic procedure 1. Check for loose battery termina l s or connections. 2. Test the battery for a l ow state of charge (see page 22-94). 3. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11 -3). 4. Check for PGM-FI main relays (see page 22-109). 5. Check the starter (see page 4-6). 6. Check starter cut relay 1 and starter cut relay 2 (see page 22-109). 7. Check the transmission range switch (see page 14-234). 8. Check the i gnition switch and its related c i rcu i ts (see page 22-117). 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11 -3). 2. Check for IMMOB I status and function (see page 22-519). 3. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-301). 4. Check for a plugged or damaged fue l line (see page 11-302). 5. Check for a p l ugged fue l filter (see page 11-314). 6. Check the throttle body (s e e page 11-331). 7. Check for low engine compression (see page 6-7). 8. Check for a damaged or broken timing belt (see page 8-14). 9. Do the PCM reset in the PGM-FI I NSPECTION menu to cancel ALL I NJECTORS STOP with the HDS. 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11 -301). 3. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel l ine (see page 11-302). 4. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-314). 1. Check for l oose battery term i nals or connections. 2. Test the battery for a l ow state of charge (see page 22-34). 3. Check the starter for binding (see page 4-11). 4. Check for excessive drag in the engine.

Also check for • Poor ground at G101 • Seized engine

• Fuel l evel in tank • Weak or fou l ed sparkplugs

Weak or fouled spark plugs

Circuit Diagram

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

4-5

Starting System Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting Special Tools Required Alternator, Regulator, Battery, and Starter Tester OTC3131* *Availabl e through the Acura Tool and Equipment Program 888-424-6857 NOTE: • Air temperature must be within 53—100 °F (15—38 °C) during this procedure. • After the inspection, you must reset the PCM. Otherwise, the PCM will continue to stop the fue l injectors from operating. • The battery must be in good condition and fully charged. 1. Connect the alternator, regu l ator, battery, and starter tester (OTC3131) to the battery as shown. NOTE; The probe is not used for battery testing.

3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11 -3). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 5. Make sure the HDS communicates w ith the vehicle and the PCM. If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209), 6. Sel ect ALL INJECTORS STOP in the INSPECTION menu with the HDS.

P G M -F I

7. Set the parking brake, then with the shift lever in P or N, turn the ignition switch to START (III) to crank the engine. D o e s th e s ta r te r c r a n k th e e n g in e n o rm a lly ?

YES-The starting system is OK. Go to step 15. NO-Go to step 8. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 9. Check the e l ectrical connections at the battery, the negative battery cable to the body, the engine ground cables, and the starter for looseness and corrosion. Then try cranking the engine again. D o e s th e s ta r te r c r a n k th e e n g in e n o rm a lly ?

YES-Repairing the loose connection corrected the problem. The starti ng system is OK, Go to step 15.

2. Do the BATTERY TEST. D o e s th e d is p la y in d ic a te G O O D o r G O O D , L O W CHARGE?

YES-The battery is OK. Charge the battery if necessary, then go to step 3. NO- lf the display indicates BAD BATTERY, rep l ace the battery, then retest. If the display indicates CHARGE & RETEST, charge the battery, then retest.

NO-Based on the following symptoms, take the appropr i ate action: • If the starter does not crank the engine at all , go to step 10. • If the starter cranks the engine erratically or too slowly, go to step 12. • If the starter does not disengage from the torque converter ring gear when you release the key, replace the starter (see page 4-10), or remove and disassemble it (see page 4-11), and check for the following: - Starter solenoid and switch malfunction. - Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning clutch. - Damaged torque converter ring gear.

10. Make sure the shift l ever is in P or N, then disconnect th e c o n n e c to r (A) fro m th e s ta rte r S te rm in a l. C onnect

a jumper wire from the battery positive terminal to the S termina l .

D o e s th e s ta r te r c r a n k th e e n g in e ?

YES~Go to step 11. NO-Replace the starter (see page 4-10), or remove and disassemble it (see page 4-11) as necessary.ll

11. Check the following items in the order listed until you find the probl em in the circuit: NOTE; After the problem in the circuit is found and repaired, go to step 15. • A blown STS (7.5 A) fuse in the auxi l iary under-dash fuse hol der 2 located below the under-dash fuse/rel ay box. • A blown STRLD (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-dash fuse holder 1 l ocated bel ow the under-dash fuse/relay box. • Check for an open or short in the WHT wire and connectors between the starter cut relay 1 and the main under-hood fuse box. • Check for an open or short in the PNK wire and connectors between the auxiliary under-dash fuse holder 1 and the PCM. • Check for an open or short in the BRN wire and connectors between auxiliary under-dash fuse holder 1, the starter cut relay 1, and the starter cut relay 2. • Check for an open or short in the WHT wire, BLK/WHT wire, and connectors between the starter cut relay 2 and the starter. • Check for an open or short in the YEL wire, LT BLU wire, and connectors between the ignition switch and the PCM, • Check for an open or short in the LT GRN wire and connectors between the PCM, the starter cut relay 1, and the starter cut relay 2, • Check for an open or short in the PNK wire and connectors between the starter cut rel ay 1 and the starter cut rel ay 2. • Check for an open or short in the PNK wire, BLU/WHT wire, and connectors between the starter cut relay 1, the starter cut relay 2, and the transmission range switch. • Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the transmission range switch and body ground (G101). • Check for a faulty ignition switch (see page 22-117). • Check for a faulty transmission range switch (see page 14-234). • Check for a faulty starter cut relay 1 and the starter cut relay 2 (see page 22-109).

(cont'd)

Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

Starter Solenoid Test

12. Connect the a lternator, regu l ator, battery, and starter tester (OTC3131) to the battery.

1. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-98).

NOTE: The probe i s used for starter testing.

2. Remove the battery base (see step 11 on page 5-3). 3. Disconnect the positive starter cable (A), the motor wire (B), and the S terminal connector (C). 8 m 1.25 mm 9.0 N-m (0.9 kgf-m, 7.0 ibf-ft)

( 1.0

13. Do the STARTING TEST. D o e s th e d is p la y in d ic a te c r a n k in g v o lta g e g r e a te r th a n o r e q u a l to 8 .0 V a n d is th e c u r r e n t d r a w le s s th a n o r e q u a l to 3 7 5

4?

YES-Go to step 14. NO-Replace the starter (see page 4-10), or remove and disassemb l e i t (see page 4-11), and check for these problems:® • Drag in the starter armature • Short in the armature winding • Excessive drag in the engine • Open circuit in starter armature commutator segments • Excessivel y worn starter brushes • Open circuit in the starter brushes • Dirty or damaged helical sp l ines or drive gear • Faulty overrunning clutch 14. Remove the starter (see page 4-10), and inspect its drive gear and the torque converter ring gear for damage. Replace any damaged parts, 15. Select PCM reset (see page 11-4) in the PGM-FI INSPECTION menu to cancel the ALL I NJECTORS STOP with the HDS.

kgf-m, 7 lbf*ft)

4. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S terminal and the armature housing (ground). There should be continuity: • If there is continuity, go to step 5. • If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid. 5. Check the pull-in coi l for continuity between the S termina l and the M terminal. There should be continuity: • If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK. • If there i s no continuity, replace the solenoid. 6. Connect the wire and the connector in the reverse order of remova l . 7. Install the battery base (see step 52 on page 5-18). 8. Do the battery install ation procedure (see page 22-38).

Starter Performance Test 1. Remove the starter (see page 4-10). 2. Di sconnect the motor w i re from the M termina l .

7. Disconnect the battery from the starter body as shown. If the pinion retracts immediate ly, it is working properly.

3. Clamp the starter firm ly in a vise. 4. Make the connections for this test using the thickest (gauge) wire possible (preferably the same gauge as used on the vehicle). NOTE: To avoid damaging the starter, never leave the battery connected for more than 5 seconds.

8. Reconnect the motor wire to the M terminal. 3. Connect the starter to the battery as shown, and confirm that the motor runs.

5. Connect the battery as shown. Make sure you disconnect the starter motor wire from the M terminal. If the starter pinion moves out, it is working properly. 8. Disconnect the battery from the M terminal. If the pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil of the solenoid is working properly.

10. If the electric current meets the specification when the battery voltage i s at 11.5 V, the starter is working proper l y. Specification Electric Current: 90 A or less

Starting System Starter Removal and Installation Remowai

Installation

1. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-36).

1. I nstall the starter (A), then tighten the mounting bolts (B).

2. Remove the air cl eaner (see page 11-332). 3. Remove the battery base (see step 11 on page 5-3). 4. Remove the harness c l amp (A),

NOTE: A lways use a new gasket (C). 8 x 1.25 mm 9.0 N-m (0.3 kgf-m, 7.0 I bf-ft)

1® x 1.25 mm 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 ib fft) D

5. Disconnect the positive starter cable (B) and the S terminal connector (C). 6. Remove the two bo l ts holding the starter, then remove the starter (D) and the gasket (E).

2. Connect the positive starter cable (D) and the S terminal connector (E). Make sure the crimped side of the ring terminal faces away from the starter when you connect it. 3. I nstall the harness c l amp (F). 4. Install the battery base (see step 52 on page 5-18). 5. Install the air cleaner (see page 11-332), 6. Do the battery installation procedure (see page 22-98). 7. Start the engine to make sure the starter works proper ly.

Starter Overhaul Exploded View

(cont'd)

4-11

Starting System Starter Overhaul (cont'd) NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View if needed during this procedure. Brush Holder Removal 1. Remove the starter (see page 4-10).

Armature Inspection and Test 5. I nspect the armatu re for wear or damage from contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear or damage, rep l ace the armature.

2. Disconnect the motor wire from the M terminal (see page 4-8), and remove the end cover. 3. Pry back each brush spring with a screwdr i ver, then position the brush on the brush ho l der about halfway out of i ts holder. Release the spring to ho l d i t in place.

8. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is dirty or burnt, resurface it with an emery cloth or a lathe to the specifications in step 7, or recondition with #500 or #600 sandpaper (B).

4. Remove the brush holder assembly (A).

4-12

7. Check the commutator diameter with a digital caliper or dial type caliper. If the diameter i s belowthe service limit, replace the armature. Commutator Diameter Standard (New): 28.9-29.0 mm (1.138-1.142 in) Service Limit; 28.0 mm (1.102 in)

9. Use a digital caliper or dial type caliper to check the mica depth (A). If the mica depth is belowthe service limit, repl ace the armature. Commutator Mica Depth Standard (New); 0.50—0.90 mm (0.0197-0.0354 in) Service Limit: 0.20 mm (0.0079 in)

\W// 10. Use an ohmmeter to check for continuity between the segments of the commutator. If there is an open circuit between any segments, replace the armature.

8. Measure the commutator (A) runout; • If the commutator runout is w ith i n the service l imit, check the commutator for carbon dust or brass chips between the segments. • If the commutator runout is not within the service limit, replace the armature. Commutator Runout Standard (New); 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) max. Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)

(cont'd)

4-13

Starter Overhaul (cont'd) 11, Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B). Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If the blade is attracted to the core w hi l e the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace the armature.

12. Use an ohmmeter to check for continuity between the commutator (A) and the armature coil core (B), and between the commutator and the armature shaft (C). If there i s continuity, rep l ace the armature.

Overrunning Clutch Inspection 13. Slide the overrunning clutch (A) along the shaft. Replace it if it does not s l ide smooth l y.

14. Hold the overrunning clutch (A), and turn the drive gear (B) in the direction shown to make sure it turns free l y. Also make sure the drive gear locks i n the opposite d i rection, If it does not lock, replace the overrunning clutch assembly.

15. If the starter drive gear is worn or damaged, replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear is not available separate l y. Check the condition of the id l er gear and the torque converter ring gear. Repl ace it if the starter drive gear teeth are damaged.

Starter Brush Inspection 18. Measure the brush length. If i t i s shorter than the service l imit, replace the brush holder assembly. Brush Length Standard (New): 15.0-16.0 mm (0.591-0.630 Ini Service Limit: 9.0 mm (0.354 in)

Brush Spring Inspection 18. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring the brush into contact with the commutator, then attach a spring scale (B) to the spring (C). Measure the spring tension at the moment the spring lifts off the brush. If it is not within the standard, rep l ace the brush ho l der assemb l y. Spring Tension Standard (New); 22.3-27.3 N (2.27-2.78 kgf, 5.00 -6 .1 3 ibf)

Starter Brush Holder Test 17. Check for continuity between the ( + ) brush holders (A) and the ( —) brush holders (B). If there i s continuity, rep l ace the brush ho l der assembly.

Planetary Gear Inspection 19. Check the planetary gears (A), the armature shaft gear (B), and the interna l ring gear (C). Replace them if they are worn or damaged.

(cont'd)

4-15

Starter Overhaul (cont'd) Starter Reassembly 20. Install the armature housing (A) and the armature (B) by aligning the slotted point (C) to the projection (D).

22. Insta ll the brush ho l der assemb l y. Next pry back each brush spring again, and push each brush down until it seats against the commutator, then release the spring against the end of the brush.

23. Install the end cover to retain the brush holder.

21, Pry back each brush spring with a screwdriver, then position the brush on the brush ho l der about halfway out of its holder. Release the spring to hold i t in place. NOTE: To seat the new brushes. Sl ip a strip of #500 or #800 sandpaper, with the grit side up, between the commutator and each brush, and smoothly turn the armature, The contact surface of the brushes w ill be sanded to the same contour as the commutator.

10 N-m

(1.0 kgf-m, 7 Ibf-ft) 24. Instal l the starter (see page 4-10).

Component Location Index IGNITION COIL RELAY

Inspection, page 4-19

Ignition Timing Inspection 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11 -3). 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehic l e and the PCM. If it does not communicate, troub l eshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209). 4. Check for DTCs (see page 11 -3). If a DTC is present, diagnose and repair the cause before continuing with this test.

9. Aim the light toward the pointer (A) on the timing belt lower cover. Check the ignition timing under a no l oad condition (headlights, b l ower fan, rear window defogger, and air conditioner are turned off). NOTE: The other pointer (B) is not used. Ignition Timing: 10±2 ®BTDC (RED mark (C)) at idle in P or N

5. Start the engine. Hold the eng i ne speed at 3,000 rpm with no load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 6. Check the idle speed (see page 11 -281). 7. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS. 8. Connect the timing light to the No. 1 ignition coil harness.

10. If the ignition timing differs from the specification, check the camshaft timing (see page 8-14). If the camshaft timing is OK, update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substi tute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the system works proper l y, and the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-223). 11. Disconnect the HDS and the timing light.

Ignition Coil and Spark Plug Removal/Installation

Spark Plug Inspection

1. Remove the engine cover (see step 8 on page 5-2).

1. Remove the ignition coils and the spark plugs (see page 4-19).

2. Disconnect the ign i tion co il connectors (A), then remove the ignition coils (B). FRONT A

12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 ib fft)

REAR

2. I nspect the electrodes and the ceramic insulator. • Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by these conditions: - Advanced ignit i on tim i ng - Loose spark plug - Pl ug heat range too hot - Insufficient cooling • Foul ed p l ugs may be caused by these conditions: - Retarded i gnition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too cold - Excessive idling/l ow speed runn i ng - Clogged air cleaner e l ement - Deteriorated ignition'coi l s

• Improper gap ■ Oil-fouling ■ Carbon deposits ■ Cracked center electrode insulator

3. Remove the spark plugs and inspect them (see page 4-19). 4. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cy l inder head, finger tight, then tighten the plugs to the specified torque, Specified Torque: 22 N-m {2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) 5. Insta l l the ignition coil s in the reverse order of removal.

(cont'd)

Spark Plug Inspection (cont'd) 3. Replace the p l ug at the specified interval, or if the center e l ectrode (A) is rounded, or if the spark plug gap (B) is out of specification, or if the spark plug electrode is dirty or contaminated. Use only the spark plugs l isted. NOTE: • Do not adjust the gap of iridium tip plugs. • Do not use a p l ug cleaner. Spark Plugs MGK: ILZKR7B-11S DENSO; SXU22HCR11S Electrode Gap Standard (New); 1.0—1.1 mm (0.039—0.043 in) B

4. Install the spark p l ugs and the igniti on coils (see page 4-19).

Component Location Index

CHARGI NG SYSTEM INDICATOR (In the gauge control module)

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX fHas built-in ELD)

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

BATTERY Test, page 22-94

IENS10NER PULLEY Repl acement page 4-31

DRIVE BELT AUTO-TENSiONER Inspection, page 4-29 Replacement, page 4-30

DRIVE BELT I nspection, page 4-28 Repl acement page 4-29

ALTERNATOR Circuit Diagram, page 4-23 Charging System I ndicator Circuit Troubl eshooting, page 4-24 Alternator and Regulator Circuit Troubl eshooting, page 4-26 Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting, page 4-27 Removal and Installation, page 4-31 Overhaul, page 4-34

Symptom Troubleshooting Index Symptom Charging system indicator does not come on with the igniti on switch in ON (II) Charging system indicator stays on

Battery discharged

Battery overcharged

Low or dead battery

Diagnostic procedure Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit (see page 4-24).

1. Check for a broken drive be lt (see page 4-28). 2. Check the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-29). 3. Troub l eshoot the charging system indicator circuit (see page 4-24). 4. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). 1. Check for a poor connection at the battery terminal. 2. Test the battery (see page 22-94). 3. Troubleshoot the alternator and regu l ator circuit (see page 4-28). 4. Check for a broken drive be lt (see page 4-28). 5. Check the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-29). 8. Check for excessive parasitic e l ectrical current draw (see page 22-97). 1. Test the battery (see page 22-34). 2. Troubleshoot the alternator and regu l ator circuit (see page 4-26). Battery symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-100).

Also check for

Circuit Diagram

- - - : F-CAN line

Charging System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: Check for stored DTCs in the PGM-FI before troub l eshooting the charging system indicator,

13. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal C42 and body ground.

1. Turn the ignit i on switch to ON (II). D o e s th e c h a r g in g s y s te m in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?

P C M CONNECTOR C (49P!

YES-Go to step 2, NO-Go to step 14. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 1 minute. D o e s th e c h a r g in g s y s te m in d ic a to r g o o ff?

YES-Charging system indicator circuit is OK. Go to the alternator and regu l ator circuit troubleshooting (see page 4 -2 8 ).■ NO-Go to step 3. 3. Do the gauge contro l module self-diagnostic function procedure (see page 22-335). D o e s th e c h a r g in g s y s te m in d ic a to r fla s h ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-Replace the gauge contro l modu l e (see page 22-419). I 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector, 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),

£ 3 3 | 4 | 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 IT p lo T a 11 12 / 14|1S 10 17 18 19 2 0 21

J 1 I 2

1 /

23 24

25

26 27 28

31 3 2 133 34 35|3S 37 38 / / / 140141 4 2 |4 3 |4 4 l 4 5 | 4 6 f 4 7 4 8 |4 9 j

Trr"h. .. r— b— X ALTL (WHT/BLU)

Term inal side of fem ale terminals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the alternator 4P connector terminal No. 3 and PCM connector termina l C42.ll NO-LIpdate the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229).■ 14. Do the gauge control module sel f-diagnostic function procedure (see page 22-395),

D o e s th e c h a r g in g s y s te m in d ic a to r g o o ff?

D o e s th e c h a r g in g s y s te m in d ic a to r fla s h ?

YES-Fteplace the al ternator (see page 4-31), or repair the alternator (see page 4 -3 4 ).■

YES-Go to step 15.

NO-Go to step 7.

NO-Rep l ace the gauge contro l module (see page 22-419).■

7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

8. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11 -3).

18. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.

9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 10. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the PCM, If it does not communicate, troub l eshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -209). 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM from damage. 12. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

1

17. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground w i th a jumper w i re. ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR

25. Check for continuity between PCM connector termina l C42 and alternator 4P connector terminal No. 3. ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

J1I2 3 I4 I5 I

L W H T/B LU

8 I 7 I 8 TRoT 1 14[15 16 17(18 19 20 21 24 25 28 27 28 23 > < 1 / 1 / / 31 32133 34 35j38 37 38 / |4 0 |41 4 2 |4 3 |4 4|4 5 |4 6 |47 4 8 14 9 1 11 12 /

2i 4 , y

JU M PER WIRE (W H T/B LU )

W ire si de of fem ale te rm i nals

18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). D o e s th e c h a r g in g s y s te m in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?

YES-Replace the al ternator (see page 4-31), or repai r the alternator (see page 4 -3 4 ).■ NO-Disconnect the juniper wire, then go to step 20. 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 20. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11-3). 21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 22. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the PCM. If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC ci rcuit (see page 11-209). 23. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM from damage. 24. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

W ire si de of fe m a l e term inals

ALTL

(WHT/BLU)

Term inal side of fe m a l e terminals

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the l atest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good PCM, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11-223).H NO-Repair an open in the wire between the alternator 4P connector termina l No. 3 and PCM connector terminal C42.H

Alternator and Regulator Circuit Troub l eshooting Special Tools Required Alternator, Regulator, Battery, and Starter Tester OTC3131* ^Available through the Acura Tool and Equipment Program 888-424-8857 1. Make sure the battery connections are good and the battery i s sufficiently charged. 2, Connect the a lternator, regu l ator, battery, and starter tester (OTC3131) to the battery as shown. NOTE; The probe is used for alternator testing.

3. Start the engine. Hol d the engine speed at 3,000 rpm with no load (in P or N), until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 4. Do the CHARGING SYSTEM TEST, D o e s th e d is p la y in d ic a te th e v o lta g e is w ith in 1 3 .3 -1 5 .3 V a n d th e a m p e r a g e is 8 7 .5 A o r m o re ?

YES-Go to step 5, NO- lf the voltage is less than 13.3 V, go to al ternator control circuit troubleshooting (see page 4-27). If the voltage is over 15,3 V and amperage is less than 87.5 A, replace the a l ternator (see page 4-31) or repair the alternator (see page 4-34). ■

5. Check the diode condition on the display. D o e s th e d is p la y in d ic a te G O O D ?

YES-The diode is OK, Troubleshooting is com plete.!! NO- l f the display indicates BAD, repl ace the alternator (see page 4-31) or repair the alternator (see page 4-34), then retest.■ NOTE: If the display i nd i cates N/A, the diode pattern could not be diagnosed. Repeat the test agai n. If N/A appears repeatedly, replace the alternator (see page 4-31).

Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: Do this troubleshooting i t in step 4 of the alternator and regulator circuit troubleshooting (see page 4-26), the battery vo ltage is less than 13.5 V.

10. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal C43 and body ground.

1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11-3). PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the PCM. If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209), 4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present, diagnose and repair the cause before continuing with this test.

J 1 I 2 V fT fiT e T ^ 11 12 / 14|15 16 17|18 19 2 0 21 1 /

23 24

7. Measure the vo ltage between alternator 4P connector terminal No, 2 and the positive terminal of the battery.

BATTERY

20 27 28

1

31 32 33 34 35(36 37 38 / / / | 4 0 | 41 4 2 | 4 3 | ^ ^ 4 8 |4 9 | 1 ALTC fWVHT/GRN)

(g>

5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector. 6. Start the engine, and turn on the headlights to high beam.

25

i

Term inal side of fem ale term inals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire between a l ternator 4P connector terminal No. 2 and PCM connector terminal C 43.ll NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the l atest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good PCM, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229).■

C fWHI/GRN) ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR

1

z)

13 4 J

W ire side of fem ale term inals

11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition sw i tch to LOCK (0). NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM from damage. 12. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

is th e re le s s th a n 1 V?

YES-Go to step 11. NO-Go to step 8. 8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition sw i tch to LOCK (0). NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM from damage. 3. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

(cont'd)

Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) 13. Check for loose termina l s and connecti ons, then check for continu i ty between PCM connector terminal C43 and alternator 4P connector term i nal No. 2. PCM

CONNECTOR C (49P)

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 ho] i 11 12 / 14|15 18 17 18 19 20 21 25 28 27 28 1 / 23 24 X i / / 31 3233 34 35|38 37 38 / 140141 4 2 14 3 14414 5 14 6 147 4 8 |4 9 | J 1 I2

ALIC

Terminal side of femal e terminal s

C (WHT/GRN)

(WHT/GRN)

1 2]

u

4J

ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR

Wire side of female term i nals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-31), or repair the alternator (see page 4-34).H NO-Repair an open in the w i re between the alternator 4P connector terminal No. 2 and PCM connector terminal C 43.il

Drive Belt Inspection 1. Inspect the belt for cracks and damage, If the belt is cracked or damaged, repl ace it (see page 4-29). 2. Check that the auto-tensioner indicator (A) is within the standard range (B) as shown. If it is out of the standard range, replace the dr i ve belt (see page 4-29).

Drive Belt Replacement

Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Inspection

Special Tools Required Belt Tension Release Too l Snap-on YA9317, commercially availab l e

Special Tools Required Bel t Tension Release Tool Snap-on YA9317, commercially availab l e

1, Move the auto-tensioner (A) using the belt tension release tool (YA9317) in the direction of the arrow to relieve tension from the drive bel t (B), then remove the drive belt.

1. Turn the ign i tion switch to ON (II ), and make sure to turn the A/C switch off. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Check the position of the auto-tensioner ind i cator (A). Start the engine, then check the position again with the engine id l ing. If the position of the indicator moves or fluctuates a lot, replace the auto-tensioner (see page 4-30).

2. Install the new belt in the reverse order of remova l .

3. Check for abnormal noise from the tensioner pu l ley. If you hear any abnorma l noise, rep l ace the auto-tensioner pull ey (see page 4-31). 4. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-29). 5. Move the auto-tensioner within its limit using the belt tension release tool (YA9317) in the'direction of the arrow. Check that the auto-tensioner moves smoothly and without any abnorma l noise. If the tensioner does not move smoothly, or you hear abnormal noise, replace the auto-tensioner (see page 4-30).

(cont'd)

Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Inspection (cont'd)

Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Replacement

6. Remove the auto-tensioner (see page 4-30).

1. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-29).

7, Clamp the auto-tensioner (A) by using a 10 mm bolt (B), an 8 mm bolt (C), and a vise (D) as shown. Do not clamp the auto-tensioner itself.

2. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-233).

8. Attach a. torque wrench (A) to the pu l ley bolt. Measure the torque when the tensioner is turned counterclockwise. If the torque is l ess than the specified value, rep l ace the auto-tensioner (see page 4-30). Auto-tensioner Spring Torque: 50.5 N-m (5.15 kgf-m, 37.2 ib fft)

9. Install the a u to -te n s io n e r in the reverse o rd e r o f re m o v a l .

3. Remove the auto-tensioner.

4, Install the auto-tensioner in the reverse order of remova l .

Tensioner Pulley Replacement

Alternator Removal and Installation

1, Remove the auto-tensioner (see page 4-30).

Removal

2. Remove the pulley bolt (A) (left-hand threads), and remove the tensioner pull ey (B).

1. Do the battery termina l disconnection procedure (see page 22-95). 2. Remove the engine cover (see step 6 on page 5-2). 3. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-29). 4. Remove the A/C suction l ine from brackets (A).

5. Remove the coolant reservoir (A), then remove power steering fluid reservoir (B) from the bracket. 3. Insta ll the tensioner pu l ley in the reverse order of remova l .

(cont'd)

4-31

Alternator Removal and Installation (cont'd) 8. Remove the harness ho l der (A), then disconnect the A/C compressor clutch connector (B).

Installation 1. Install the a lternator (A), and tighten the mounti ng bolt (B) and the alternator bracket mounting bolt (C).

7. Disconnect the alternator connector (C) and the positive alternator cabl e (D) from the alternator. 8. Rem ove the m o u n ti ng b o lt (A) and alte rn a to r bracket

mounting bolt (B), then remove the alternator (C).

10 x 1.25 mm 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft)

8 x 1.25 min 22 M - m ( 2,2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

2. Connect the a l ternator connector (A) and the positive a l ternator cable (B) to the alternator. Make sure the crimped side of the ring terminal faces away from the alternator when you connect it. 6 x 1.0 mm

12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8 J Ibf-ft)

3. Install the harness holder (C), then connect the A/C compressor c l utch connector (D).

4. Install the power steering fluid reservoir (A) to the bracket, then i nstall the coolant reservo i r (B).

A

6. Install the drive belt (see page 4-29). 7. Insta l l the engine cover (see step 57 on page 5-19). 8. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-38).

Alternator Overhaul Exploded View

Special Tools Required . Driver Handl e, 15 x135L 07749^0010000 • Bearing Driver Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300

5. Remove the end cover (A) and the terminal insulator (B).

'NOTE: Refer to the Expl oded View if needed during this procedure. 1. Test the alternator and regu l ator before you remove them (see page 4-24). 2. Remove the al ternator (see page 4-31). Alternator Disassembly 3. If the front bearing needs replacing, remove the pulley l ockout w i th a 10 mm wrench (A) and a 22 mm wrench (B). If necessary, use an impact wrench.

6. Remove the brush holder assembl y (A).

4. Remove the three flange nuts.

(cont'd)

Alternator Overhaul (cont'd) 7. Remove the four through bolts, then remove the rear housing assembly (A) and the washer (B).

10. Remove the front beari ng retainer.

11. Drive out the front bearing with a brass drift and a hammer. 8. If you are not replacing the front bearing, go to step 13. Remove the rotor from the drive-end housing.

9. Inspect the rotor shaft for scoring, and inspect the bearing journa l surface in the drive-end housing for seizure marks. • If the rotor is damaged, replace the rotor assembly. • If the rotor is OK, go to step 10.

12, Install a new front bearing in the drive-end housing with a hammer, the driver handle, 15 x 135L, and bearing driver attachment 42 x 47 mm.

Alternator Brush Inspection 13. Measure the length of both brushes (A) with a vernier cal iper (B). • If either brush is shorter than the service limit, replace the brush holder assembl y. • If the brush l ength is OK, go to step 14, Alternator Brush Length Standard (New); 10.5 mm (0.413 in) Service Limit; 1.5 mm (©,059 in)

Rotor Slip Ring Test 14, Check for continuity between the s l ip rings (A). • If there is continuity, go to step 15. • If there is no continuity, rep l ace the rotor assembly.

15. Check for continuity between each slip ring and the rotor (B) and the rotor shaft (C). • If there is no continuity, go to step 18. • If there is continuity, replace the rotor assemb l y. Alternator Reassembly 18. If you removed the pulley, put the rotor in the drive-end housing, then torque its lockout to 110 N-m {11,2 kgf-m, 81.0 Ibf-ft). 17. Remove any grease or any oil from the slip rings. 18. Put the rear housing assembly and the drive-end housing/rotor assembly together, tighten the four through bolts, 13. Push the brushes (A) in, then insert a pin or dri ll bit (B) (about 1,8 mm (1/16 in) diameter) to ho l d them there.

(cont'd)

Alternator Overhaul (cont'd) 20. Install the brush ho l der assembly, and pul l out the pin or dri l l b i t.

♦

21. Install the end cover. 22. After assembling the alternator, turn the pulley by hand to make sure the rotor turns smooth l y and without noise, 23. Install the a lternator (see page 4-32).

Component Location Index CRUISE M M M INDICATOR

Symptom Troubleshooting Index irmptom Cruise control cannot be set

Cruise control can be set, but the cruise main indicator does not come on Cruise control can be set, but the cruise contro l indicator does not come on Vehicle does not accelerate accordingly when the resume/accel button is pressed Set speed does not cancel when the brake pedal is pressed

Set speed does not cancel when the cruise control main button is pressed

Set speed does not cancel when the cancel button is pressed

Set speed does not resume when the resume/accel button is pressed (with the cruise control main switch turned on, and set speed temporarily canceled by pressing the brake pedal) Light switch turned on, the cruise control combination switch illumination does not come on

Diagnostic procedure 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). 2. Check the No. 11 (15 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box, and the No. 18 (10 A) fuse i n the under-dash fuse/relay box. 3. Do the cruise contro l combination switch test (see page 4-44). 4. Do the cruise contro l input test (see page 4-42). 1. Do the gauge contro l module self-diagnostic function procedure (see page 22-395). 2. Do the cruise contro l input test (see page 4-42). Test the cruise contro l main switch signa l input. 3. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). 1. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function procedure (see page 22-395). 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-42). Test the cruise control indicator signal input. 3. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11 -3). 1. Do the cruise contro l combination switch test (see page 4-44). 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-42). Test the resume/accel switch signal inp ut 3. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). 1. Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page 22-282). 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-42). Test the brake pedal positi on switch signa l input. 3. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). 1. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page 4-44), 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-42). Test the cruise contro l main switch signa l input. 3. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). 1. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page 4-44). 2. Do the cruise control i nput test (see page 4-42). Test the cancel switch signa l input 3. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11 >3). 1, Check the brake pedal position switch adjustment (see page 19-6). 2. Do the cru i se contro l combination switch test (see page 4-44). 3, Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-42). Test the resume/accel switch signal input. Test the brake pedal position switch signal input. 4. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). Do the cru i se contro l combination switch test (see page 4-44),

Also check for Poor ground G101

Faulty gauge contro l module

Faulty gauge control module

Open circuit, l oose or disconnected terminals: LT GRN/BLK, YELwire

• Short to power on the BRN wire • Faulty brake pedal position switch Short to power on the PNK, LT GRN wire

Open circuit loose or disconnected terminals: YEL/RED, GRY or LT GRN/BLK, YE L wire • Open c i rcuit, loose or disconnected terminals: LT GRN/BLK, YELwire • Faulty brake pedal position switch

Circuit Diagram ------- : F-CAN line

BATTERY

BLU

BLU /Y ct,

O UTPUT SHAFT TRA NSM ISSIO N {COUNTER SHAFT) RANGE SWITCH SPEED SENSOR

Cruise Control Input Test NOTE: Always make sure that you have the latest HDS software. 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11 -3). 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehic l e and the PCM. If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209). 4. Check for and troubleshoot any DTCs (see page 11 -3). 5. Do the fo l lowing tests while monitoring parameters in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS. 6. If the input tests prove OK, replace the

PCM

(see page 11 -229).

NOTE; Intermittent fa i l ures are often caused by loose circuit connections. While monitoring cruise control inputs, flex the circuit wires, and note if any of the test results change. Signal to be tested Brake peda l position switch signal

Test condition Brake pedal pressed, then released

Parameter: Desired result CRUI SE BRAKE SW/I DLE STOP SW should indicate OPEN when the brake pedal is pressed and CLOSE when the brake pedal is released. CRUISE MASTER (MA I N) SW should indicate ON when the cruise contro l main button is pressed and OFF when the cruise contro l main button is re l eased.

Cruise control main switch signa l

Cruise control main button pressed and released

Set switch signa l

Decel/set button pressed and released

CRUISE SET SW should indicate ON when the Decel/set button i s pressed and OFF when the Decel/set button is released.

Resume switch signa l

Resume/accel button pressed and released

Cancel switch signa l

Cancel button pressed and released

CRUI SE RESUME SW should indicate ON when the resume/accel button is pressed and OFF when the resume/accel button is re l eased. CRUISE CANCEL SW should indicate ON when the cancel button is pressed and OFF when the cancel button is released.

Possible cause if result is not obtained • Faulty brake pedal position switch • Blown No. 18 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/re l ay box • An open in the wire between the PCM and the brake pedal position switch • A wire shorted to ground between the PCM and the brake pedal position switch • Faulty cruise control combination switch • An open in the wire between the gauge control modu l e and the cruise control combination switch • A wire shorted to ground between the gauge contro l modu l e and the cruise contro l combination switch • An open in the wire between the cruise control combination switch and the ground G506 • Faulty cruise contro l combination switch • An open in the wire between the gauge control module and the cruise contro l combinati on switch • A wire shorted to ground between the gauge contro l modu l e and the cruise itro l combination switch ilty cruise control combination swit • An open in the wire between the gauge control module and the cruise contro l combination switch • A wire shorted to ground between the gauge contro l modu l e and the cruise itrol combination switch ilty cruise contro l combination switch • An open in the wire between the gauge contro l module and the cruise contro l combination switch • A wire shorted to ground between the gauge control module and the cruise itrol combination swit


Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection

Valve Guide Replacement

1, Remove the valves (see page 6-44).

Special Tools Required • Va l ve Guide Dri ver, 5.35 x 3.7 mm 07742-0010100 • Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7A100

2. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured with a micrometer, from the I.D. of the valve guide, measured with an inside micrometer or a ball gauge. Take the measurements in three places a l ong the valve stem and three p l aces inside the valve guide. The difference between the l argest guide measurement and the small est stem measurement should not exceed the service l imit. Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Standard (New): 0.020—0.045 mm (0.00079-0.00177 In) Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)

1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide cl earance (see page 6-48). 2. As illustrated, use a commercially avail ab l e air-impact va l ve guide driver (A) modified to fit the diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the same procedure can be done using the valve guide driver, 5.35 x 9.7 mm and a conventional hammer.

5.3 mm

Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Standard (New): 0.055—0.080 mm (0.00217-0.00315 in) Service Limit; 0.11 mm (0.0043 in)

6.21 in)J^ (o.:

L

iU - 87 mm I

{3.43 in)

-----57 mm — |2.24 in!

If f 1 1 10.8 m m (0.42 in)

3. Select the proper repl acement guides, and chill them in the freezer section of a refrigerator for at least an hour. 4. Use a hot p l ate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder head to 300 °F (150 °C). Monitor the temperature with a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head hotter than 300 °P (150 °C); excessive heat may l oosen the valve seats.

5. Working from the camshaft side, use the driver and an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm (0.1 in) towards the combustion chamber. This w i l l knock off some of the carbon and make removal easier. Hold the air hammer directly in l ine with the va l ve guide to prevent damaging the driver. Wear safety goggles or a face shield. 6. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out toward the camshaft side of the head.

9. Apply a thin coat of new engine oil to the outside of the new valve guide. I nstall the guide from the camshaft side o f the head; use the valve guide d riv e r to drive the guide to the specified instal led height (A) of the guide (B). If you have all 12 guides to do, you may have to reheat the head. Valve Guide Installed Height

intake: Exhaust:

21.20-22.20 mm (0.8346-0.8740 in) 20.60-21.60 mm (§.8110-0.8504 in)

10. Coat both the valve guide reamer, 5.5 mm and the va l ve guide with cutting oil.

7. If a valve guide still will not move, drill it out with a 8 mm (5/18 in) dril l bit, then try again. NOTE: Drill guides only in extreme cases; you cou l d damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks, 8. Remove the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a time, as you need them.

(cont'd)

Valve Guide Replacement (cont'd)

Valve Seat Reconditioning

11. Rotate the reamer cl ockwise the ful l length of the valve guide bore.

1. Inspect the valve stem-to-guide c l earance (see page 6-46), If the valve guides are worn, repl ace them (see page 8-48) before cutting the va l ve seats. 2, Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a valve seat cutter.

12. Continue to rotate the reamer cl ockwise w hi l e removing it from the bore. 13. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water to remove any cutting residue, 14. Check the clearance with a valve (see page 6-48), Verify that a valve sl ides in the intake and exhaust valve guides w i thout sticking.

3. Careful ly cut a 45 ° seat, removing only enough material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat.

15. Inspect the valve seating (see page 8-48). If necessary renew the valve seat using a valve seat cutter.

4. Bevel the upper and lower edge at the angles shown in the illustration. Check the width of the seat and adjust according l y.

5. Make one more very l ight passes with the 45 ° cutter to remove any possible burrs caused by the other cutters. Intake Valve Seat Width Standard {M e m ); 1.25-1.55 mm (0.0492-0.0610 In) Service Limit; 2 J© min (0.0787 in) Exhaust Valve Seat Width Standard (New): 1.25—1.55 mm (0.0492—0.0610 in) Service Limit: 2.00 mm (0.0787 in)

6. After resurfacing the seat inspect it for even valve seating. App ly Prussi an Blue compound (A) to the valve face. Insert the valve in its origina l l ocation in the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the seat several times. B

7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by the blue compound, should be centered on the seat • If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you must make a second cut w i th the 87.5 ° cutter (intake seat) or the 60 ° cutter (exhaust seat) to move it down, then one more cut with the 45 ° cutter to restore seat width. • If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must make a second cut with the 30 ° cutter to move it up, then one more cut with the 45 ° cutter to restore seat width. NOTE: The final cut should always be made with the 45 ° cutter.

8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head, and measure the va l ve stem install ed hei ght (A). Intake Valve Stem Installed Height Standard (New); 48.75—47.55 mm " (1.8405-1.8720 in) Service Limit: 47.80 mm (1.8819 in) Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height Standard (New): 46.68—47.48 mm (1.8378—1.8893 in) Service Limit: 47.73 mm (1.8791 In)

3. If the valve stem insta l l ed hei ght is over the service limit, repl ace the valve and recheck. If it is still over the service l imit, replace the cy l inder head; the va l ve seat in the head is too deep.

Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation Special Tools Required • Stem Seal Driver 07PAD-0010000 • Valve Spring Compressor Attachment 07757-PJ1010A 1, Coat the valve stems with new engine oil. Install the valves in the valve guides.

8. Install the va l ve spring compressor attachment and the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring and install the valve cotters. 07757-PJ1010A

2, Check that the valves move up and down smooth l y. 3, Install the spring seats on the cylinder head. 4, I nstall the new valve seals (A) using the 5.5 mm side of the stem seal driver (B). NOTE; Exhaust va l ve seal s (C) have a b l ack spring (D) and intake valve seals (E) have a white or silver spring (F). They are not interchangeabl e.

*

7. Remove the valve spring compressor and the va l ve spring compressor attachment. 8. Lightl y tap the end of each valve stem two or three times with a plastic mall et (A) to ensure proper seating of the valve and valve cotters. Tap the valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend the stem. NOTE: Be sure to raise the head off the work bench so the va l ve is not possib l y damaged.

5. Install the valve spring and the spring retainer. Place the end of the valve spring with close l y wound coils toward the cylinder head.

te a Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation Front 1. Loosen the lockouts and adjusting screws. 2. Cl ean and dry the camshaft oi l seal hous i ng. 3. App l y a light coat of new engine to the lip of the camshaft oil seal . 4. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the cy l inder head. -1. Tap the camshaft o i l seal in squarely. -2. I nstall the oi l seal about 0.5—1.5 mm (0.02^0.08 in) below the surface of the cy l inder head.

install the camshaft thrust cover (C). Always use a new O-ring (D). App l y new engine oi l to the journals and the cam lobes. 8. Clean the excess oil off the camshaft, and check that the oil seal l ip is not distorted. 7. Install the dowe l pins (E). 8. If the rocker arm assembly is disassembl ed, reassembl e the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-38). 9. Remove al l of the old l iquid gasket from the rocker shaft holder and the cylinder head.

10. App l y liquid gasket (P/N 087174)004,08718-0003, 08718-0004, or 08718-0009) to the rocker shaft holder mating surface of the cylinder head. Install the component within 5 m i nutes of applying the liquid gasket. NOTE: • Apply a 2.5 mm (0.098 in) diameter bead of l iquid gasket along the broken line (A). • If you app l y liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the component must be insta l led within 4 minutes. • If too much time has passed after app l ying the liquid gasket remove the old liquid gasket and residue, then reappl y the new liquid gasket.

11. Set the rocker arm assembly in p l ace, and loosely instal l the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve steins. NOTE: • Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. • Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after insta l l ing the rocker arm assembly.

(cont'd)

Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation (cont'd) 12. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the sequence shown to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves.

14. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft pul l ey mounting bolt (A), I nstall the back cover (B), then install the camshaft pulley (C).

When the rocker shaft bridge is reused: Specified Torque i x 1,25 mm; 24.5 N-m {2.5 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft) When a new rocker shaft bridge is installed: Specified Torque Sx 1.25 min: 1st: 28 N-m (2.9 kgf-m, 21 Ibfft), then loosen the bolts. 2nd; 24.5 N-m (2.5 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft)

©

©

(D

®

©

(D

©

X

1 .^ 0 m m

92 N-m (9,2 kgf-m, 68 Ibf-ft)

o a

m in

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 17 I bf-ft)

15. Set the camshaft pulley to top dead center (TDC) before bolting them onto the engine block (see page 6-17).

13. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new gasket (B). NOTE: The front injector base gasket is different from the rear one. Do the mix injector base gasket types.

te l

Rear 1. Loosen the lockouts and adjusting screws. 2. Clean and dry the camshaft oil seal housing. 3. Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the lip the camshaft oil seal. 4. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the cy l inder head. -1. Tap the camshaft o il seal i n squarely. -2. Insta ll the oi l seal about 0.5—1.5 mm {0.02—0.06 in) below the surface of the cy l i nder head.

5. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head, then install the camshaft thrust cover (C). A l ways use a new O-ring (D). Apply new engine o il to the journa l s and the cam l obes. 8. Clean the excess oil off the camshaft, and check that the oil seal l ip is not distorted. 7. Install the dowel pins (E). 8. If the rocker arm assembly i s disassembled, reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-39). 9. Remove all of the o l d l iquid gasket from the rocker shaft holder and the cylinder head.

10. App l y liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004,08718^0003, 08718-0004, or 08718-0009) to the rocker shaft holder mating surface of the cylinder head. Install the component within 5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket NOTE: • Apply a 2.5 mm (0.038 in) diameter bead of liquid gasket along the broken l ine (A). • If you app l y liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the component must be i nsta l led w i thin 4 minutes. • If too much time has passed after applying the l iquid gasket remove the o l d l iquid gasket and residue, then reapply the new liquid gasket.

----->j— -H4------ 2.5 mm (0.098 in)

i

t

S

11. Set the rocker arm assembly in p l ace, and loosely install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. NOTE: • Wait at l east 30 minutes before filling the engine with oi l . • Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the rocker arm assembly.

(cont'd)

Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation (cont'd) 12. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the sequence shown to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves.

14. App l y new engine oi l to the threads of the camshaft pu l ley mount i ng bolt (A). Install the back cover (B), then install the camshaft pulley (C).

When the rocker shaft bridge Is reused: Specified Torque 8 x 1.25 mm: 24.5 N-m (2.5 kgf-m, 18 ib fft) When a m e m rocker shaft bridge is installed: Specified Torque 8 x 1.25 mm: 1st: 28 N-m (2.9 kgf-m, 21 Ibf-ft), then loosen the bolts. 2nd; 24.5 N-m (2.5 kgf*m, 18 Ibfft)

A

12 x 1,25 mm 92 N-m (9.2 kgf-m, 68 Ib fft)

15. Set the camshaft pu ll ey to top dead center (TDC) before bolting them onto the engine b l ock (see page 6-17).

(B). NOTE: The rear injector base gasket i s different from the front one. Do the mix injector base gasket types.

8 x 1.25 m m 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m , 17 Ibf-ft)

1. Clean the cylinder head and engine b l ock surface. 2. Clean and install the oil contro l orifices (A). A l ways use new O-rings (B),

6. Set the camshaft pull eys to TDC by al igning the TDC marks (A) on the camshaft pu l l eys with the pointers (B) on the back covers. FRONT

3. Install the dowel pins (C) and new cylinder head gaskets (D). 4. Clean the timing be lt pulleys, timing belt guide plate, and the upper and lower covers, 5. Set the timing belt drive pulley to top dead center (TDC) by ali gning the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the timing belt drive pulley with the pointer (B) on the oil pump.

(cont'd)

Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd) 8. Measure the diameter of each cylinder head bo lt at point A and point B. 50 mm (2,0 In)

11. Torque the cylinder head bolts in sequence to 30 N-m (3.0 kgf-m, 22 Ibf-ft) with use a beam-type torque wrench. When using a preset c l ick-type torque wrench, be sure to tighten sl owly and do not overti ghten. If a bolt makes any noise while you are torquing i t, loosen the bolt and retighten it from the first step.

9. If either diameter is l ess than 11.3 mm (0,44 in), replace the c y lin d e r head bolt.

10. App l y new engine oil to the threads and under the bolt heads of a l l cylinder head bolts.

mm

h

12. After torquing, tighten a ll cyli nder head bolts i n two steps (90 ° per step) using the sequence shown in step 11. If you are using a new cylinder head bolt, tighten the bolt an extra 90 °.

9

19. I nsta ll the engine mount control soleno i d valve bracket (A) to the rear cylinder head.

NOTE: Remove the cylinder head bolt if you tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go back to step 8 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to the specified angle.

8 x 1.28 mm 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)

13. I nstall the timing belt (see page 8-17). 14. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 8-9). 15. Insta ll the cylinder head covers (see page 6-28). 16. Install the water passage (see page 10-10). 17. Install the injector bases (see page 9-8). 18. Install the connector bracket to the front cy l inder head.

(cont'd)

i

Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd) 20. Connect the fuel feed hose (A), then install the quick-connect fitting cover (B) (see page 11-308).

21. Insta l l the front warm up TWC (see page 11-339) and the rear warm up TWC (see page 11-340). 22. Connect the following engine wire harness connectors, and insta l l the wire harness clamps to the cylinder head; • Six injector connectors • Knock sensor connector • ECT sensor 1 connector • Engine mount control so l eno i d va lve connector • EGR valve connector • CMP sensor connector • Rocker arm oil control solenoid connector • Rocker arm oil pressure switch connector • Two A/F sensor connectors • Two secondary H02S connectors 23. Insta ll the six ignition coils (see page 4-19). 24. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-4). 25. Install the alternator (see page 4-32). 26. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-98). 27. After insta l l ation, check that a l l tubes, hoses, and connectors are install ed correctly. 28. I nspect for fue l l eaks. Turn the ignit i on switch to ON (II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line. Repeat this operation three times, then check for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line. 23. Refill the radiator with engine coo l ant, and bleed the air from the coo l ing system (see step 3 on page 10-7). 30. Check for fluid leaks, 31. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11 -282). 32. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern l earn procedure (see page 11-4). 33. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11 -281), 34. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-18),

ta s i Camshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car

Sealing Bolt Installation

Special Tools Required

NOTE: When installing the seal ing bolts (A), always use

Ball Jo i nt Remover/Install er 07GAF-SD40330

a new w a sh e r (B).

1. Remove the timing bel t (see page 6-14).

FRONT

2. Remove the camshaft pull ey and the back cover (see step 15 on page 6-33). 3. Remove the camshaft oi l seal. 4. Clean and dry the camshaft oi l seal housing. 5. Apply a l i ght coat of new engine oi l to the l ip of the camshaft oi l seal . 6. Using the ball joint remover/insta l l er (A), a washer (B), and a 12 x 75 x 1.25 mm bolt (C), press in the new camshaft oil seal (D) about 0.5—1.5 mm (0.02—0.08 in) belowthe surface of the cylinder head.

28 x 1.5 mm 80 N-m |8,0 kgf-m, 58 ibf-ft)

REAR

7. Clean the excess grease off the camshaft, and check that the oi l seal lip is not distorted. 8. App l y new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft pulley mounting bo l t I nstall the back cover, then instal l the camshaft pulley: • Front (see step 14 on page 6-52) • Rear (see step 14 on page 6-54) 9. Install the t i ming belt (see page 6-17).

8© N-m (8,0 kgf-m, 58 ibf-ft)

Engine Block Special Tools...................................................................... 7-2 Component Location Index............................................. 7-3 Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection. 7-6 Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement........................7-7 Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement......................... 7-9 Oil Pan Removal................................................................7-10 Crankshaft and Piston Removal......................................7-11 Crankshaft Inspection.......... ............................................7-14 Block and Piston Inspection............................................7-15 Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement............7-17 Piston Ring Replacement................................................ 7-20 Crankshaft and Piston Installation................................. 7-22 CKP Pulse Plate Replacement.........................................7-27 Oil Pan Installation........................................................... 7-28 Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation In C ar. . . 7-29 Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation In C ar....................................................................................7-30 Sealing Bolt Installation....................................................7-30 -

-

Special Tools Ref.No. ® © @

J

Tool Number 070AD-RCA0200 07743-0010000 070AD-RCAA100

O

O

Description Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 106 mm Driver Handle, 15 x 135L Oil Seal Dri ver, 64 mm

Qty 1 1 1

Component Location index

Overhaul, page 8-13

Component Location Index (cont'd)

I nstal lation, page 7-30

PISTON RINGS Replacement page 7-20

Inspection, step 16 on page 7-23

Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play inspection 1. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-14). 2. Remove the baffle plate (see step 9 on page 7-12). 3. Measure the connecting rod end p l ay with a fee l er gauge (A) between the connecting rod (B) and the crankshaft (C). Connecting Rod End Play Standard (New): 0.15—0.35 mm (0.006—0.013 in) Service Limit: 0.45 mm (0.017 in)

4. If the connecting rod end p l ay is beyond the service l imit, install a new connecting rod and recheck. If it is still beyond the service limit, replace the crankshaft (see page 7-11).

5. Push the crankshaft firm l y away from the dia l indicator by prying, and zero the dial against the end of the crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firm l y back toward the indicator by prying; the dial reading should not exceed the service limit. Crankshaft End Play Standard (New); 0.10—0.35 mm (0.0039—0.0138 in) Service Limit; 0.45 mm (0.0177 in)

6. If the crankshaft end play is beyond the service limit, replace the thrust washers and recheck, If it is still beyond the service l imit, replace the crankshaft (see page 7-11).

Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement Main Bearing Clearance Inspection 1. Remove the main bearing caps and the bearing halves (see page 7-11). 2. Cl ean each main journa l and bearing half with a clean shop towel.

5. Remove the bearing cap and the bearing half, and measure the widest part of the plastigage. Main Bearing-to-journal Oil Clearance Standard (New): 0.019—0.045 mm (0.00075-0.00177 in) Service Limit: 0.050 mm (0.00197 in)

3. Pl ace one strip of plastigage across each main journal. NOTE: If the engine is still in the vehicle when you bolt the main cap down to check the clearance, the weight of the crankshaft and drive plate w il l flatten the plastigage further than just the torque on the cap bolt and give you an incorrect reading. For an accurate reading, support the crank with a jack under the counterweights, and check only one bearing at a time. 4. Reinstall the bearings and the caps, then torque the bearing cap bolts to 74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 Ibf-ft), and the bearing cap side bolts to 49 N-m (5.0 kgf-m, 36 Ibf-ft) in the proper sequence (see step 22 on page 7-24). NOTE: • Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flanges. • Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.

8. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of the bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance. 7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is sti ll incorrect, try the next larger or sma l ler bearing (the color l isted above or below the current one), and check again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the appropriate larger or sma l ler bearings, rep l ace the crankshaft and start over (see page 7-11).

Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement (cont'd) Main Journal Code Locations (Numbers or Bars)

Main Bearing Selection Block Bore Code Location

Letters or bars have been stamped on the end of the engine b l ock as a code for the size of each of the four main journa l bores. Use them, and the numbers stamped on the crankshaft (codes for main journa l size), to choose the correct bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them on l y w i th solvent or detergent.

Larger block bore Bearing Identification Color code is on the edge of the bearing

A o r! ---- -—►

B o rii

C or lii

Smaller bearing (Thicker) Pink

Pink/ Yellow

Yellow

Pink/

Yellow

Yellow/ Green

1 or I

Red/ Pink

2 or il

Pink

3 or Hi

Pink/ Yellow

Y e llo w

4 or ill!

Yellow

Yellow/ Green Green

5 or iiiil

Yellow/ Green Green

6 or llllll

Green

f

Smaller main journal

f

Smaller bearing (Thicker)

D or llll

Y e llo w

Green/ Brown

Yellow / Green Green Green/ Brown

Green/ Brown

Brown

Brown

Brown/ Black

NOTE: W hen using bearing halves of different colors, it does not matter which color is used in the top or bottom.

rc 9 i Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection

Connecting Rod Bearing Selection

1. Remove the connecting rod cap and the bearing half (see page 7-11).

Each connecting rod fa l ls into one of four to l erance ranges (from 0 to 0.024 mm (0.0003 in), in 0.008 mm (0.0002 in) increments) depending on the size of its big end bore.

2. Cl ean the crankshaft rod journa l and the bearing half with a clean shop towe l . 3. Place a strip of plastigage across the rod journa l . 4. Reinstall the bearing half and the connecting rod cap, then torque the connecting rod bo lt to 20N-m (2,0 kgf-m, 14 Ibf-ft)+ 90°. NOTE: • Apply new engine oil to the bo l t threads and flanges, • Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection. 5. Remove the connecting rod cap and the bearing half and measure the widest part of the plastigage. Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance Standard (New): 0.020—0.044 mm (0.00079-0.00173 in) Service Limit; 0.050 mm (0.00197 in)

6. If the p l astigage measures too wide or too narrow, remove the upper half of the bearing. I nstall a new, complete bearing with the same color code, and recheck the c l earance. Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance. 7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is sti l l incorrect, try the next larger or sma l ler bearing (the color l isted above or be l ow the current one), and check clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the appropriate l arger or smaller bearings, rep l ace the crankshaft and start over (see page 7-11).

It's then stamped with a number or bar (1,2,3, or 4/I, II, 111, or l l ll) indicating the range. You may find any combination of 1,2, 3, or 4/I, II, III, or l l ll in any engine.

Big End Bore Size: 60 J mm (2.382 in) Inspect the connecti ng rod for cracks and heat damage. Big End Bore Code Locations Numbers or bars have been stamped on the side of each connecting rod as a code for the size of the big end. Use them, and the l etters or bars stamped on the crank (codes for rod journal size) to choose the correct bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent.

Oil Pan Removal

Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement (cont'd) Larger big end bore Bearing Identification Color code is on the edge of the .bearing

1 or 1

2 or 11

3 or lil

4 or llll

Smaller bearing (Thicker) Yellow / Green

A or 1

Pink

Pink/ Yellow

Yellow

B o r li

Pink/ Yellow

Yellow

Yellow / Green Green

C or 111

Yellow

Yellow / Green Green

D or ilii

Yellow / Green Green

E or (111

Green

F o r 111

Green/ Brown

f

f

Smaller bearing (Thicker)

2. Raise the vehic l e on the l ift. 3. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-3).

---------►

Smaller rod journal

1. If the engine is already out of the vehicle, go to step 8.

4. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-233) and the front undercover (see page 20-234). 5. Remove exhaust pipe A (see step 31 on page 5-5). 6. Remove the rear warm up TWC bracket.

Green/ Brown

Green/ Brown

Brown

Green/ Brown

Brown

Brow n/ Black

Brown

Brow n/ Black Black

NOTE: W hen using bearing halves of different col ors, it does not m atter which col or is used in the top or bottom.

Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations (Letters or Bars)

7. Remove the CKP sensor cover (A) and the bolt (B), then disconnect the CKP sensor connector (C).

Crankshaft and Piston Removal 8. Remove the torque converter cover (A) and the four bolts (B) securing the transmission.

1. Remove the engine/transmission (see page 5-2). 2. R em ove th e tra n s m i ssi on (see page 14-188).

3. Remove the drive plate (see page 14-200). 4. Remove the cylinder heads (see page 8-32). 5. Remove the timing bel t drive pulley from the crankshaft. 8. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-10). 7. Remove the engine b l ock end cover.

9. Remove the bolts securing the oil pan. 10. Using a flat blade screwdriver, separate the oil pan from the b l ock in the places shown.

8. Remove the rocker arm oil control solenoid/oil filter assembly.

11. Remove the oil pan.

Crankshaft and Piston Removal (cont'd) 9, Remove the oil strainer (A), the baffl e plate (B), and the oil pump (C).

10. Remove the connecting rod caps after setti ng the connecting rod journal at bottom dead center (BDC) for each cylinder. Remove the piston/connecting rod assembly by pushing on the connecting rod. Take care not to damage the oil jets, connecting rod journa l , or the cylinder with the connecting rod. CORRECT

11. Remove the bearing from the rod cap. Keep all caps/bearings in order. 12. Remove the upper bearing halves from the connecting rods, and set them aside with their respective caps. 13. After removing a piston/connecting rod assembly, reinstall the connecting rod cap on the rod. 14. To avoid confusion during reassembly, mark each piston/connecting rod assembl y with its cylinder number.

15. Loosen the bearing cap bolts and the bearing cap side bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the sequence u n til all bo lts are loosened.

18, Remove the bearing cap bolts (A) and the bearing cap side bo lts (B), then remove the main bearing cap (C).

17. Lift the crankshaft (A) out of the engine b l ock, being careful not to damage the journa l s and the CKP pulse plate (B).

18. Remove the CKP pu l se plate from the crankshaft (see page 7-27). 19. Rei nstall the main bearing caps and the bearings on the engine b l ock in the proper order.

Crankshaft Inspection Out-of-Round and Taper

Straightness

1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block (see page 7-11).

7. Pl ace the V-blocks on a flat surface.

2. Remove the CKP pulse plate from the crankshaft (see page 7-27). 3. Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe cleaners or a suitable brush, 4. Check the keyway s l ot and the threaded holes for damage, 5. Measure the out-of-round at the middle of each rod and the main journal in two p l aces. The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. Journal Out-of-Round Standard (New): §.§§5 mm (0.00020 in) max. Service Limit; 0.010 mm (0.00039 in)

J l____ L

i — r 8, Measure the taper at the edges of each rod and main journa l . The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. Journal Taper Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.00020 in) max. Service Limit; 0.010 mm (0.00039 in)

8. Check the tota l runout w ith the crankshaft supported on V-blocks. 9. Measure the runout on all of the main journals. Rotate the crankshaft two complete revo l utions. The difference between measurements on each journa l must not be more than the service l imit. Crankshaft Total Runout Standard ( M e m ) : 0 . 0 2 5 mm (0.00098 in) max. Service Limit: 0.030 mm (0.00118 in)

Block and Piston Inspection 1. Remove the pistons from the engine b l ock (see page 7-11).

4. Measure the wear and taper in direction X and Y at three level s in each cylinder as shown,

2. Check the pistons for distortion or cracks.

5. If the measurements in any cy l inder are beyond the service limit or the cylinders are damaged, replace the engine block.

3. Measure the piston ski rt diameter at a point 16 mm (0.83 in) from the bottom of the skirt. Piston Diameter Standard (New): 89.983—89.996 mm (3.54263-3.54314 in) Service Limit; 89.975 mm (3.54232 in)

Cylinder Bore Size Standard (New): 90.000—90.015 mm (3.54330—3.54389 in) Service Limit: 90.065 mm (3.54588 in) Bore Taper Limit:

(Difference between first and third measurement) 0.05 min (0.0020 in)

10 m m

16 m m

(0.63 in)

(0.39 In)

First M easurem ent

50 m m (1.37 in)

Second M easurem ent

130 m m (5.12 in)

Third M easurem ent

(cont'd)

Block and Piston Inspection (cont'd) 8. Check the top of the engine block for warpage. Measure along the edges and across the center as shown. Engine Block Warpage Standard (New): 0.07 mm (0.002 in) max. Service Limit: 0.10 mm (0.003 in)

7. Cal cu l ate the difference between cy l inder bore diameter and the piston diameter. If the clearance is near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the piston and the cylinder bore for excessive wear. Piston-tO’Cylinder Bore Clearance Standard (M e w ): 0.004—0.032 mm (0.00016-0.00126 in) Service Limit; 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)

rfs j Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement Disassembly 1. R e m o v e th e p is to n s fr o m th e e n g in e b l o c k (s e e p a g e

4. Separately heat each piston and connecting rod assemb l y to about 158 °F (70 °C), then remove the piston pin.

7-11). 2. Apply new engine oil to the piston pin snap rings (A) and turn them in the ring grooves until the end gaps are lined up with the cutouts in the piston pin bores (B). NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves. .A

3. Remove snap rings (A) from both sides of each piston. Start at the cutout i n the piston pin bore. Remove the snap rings carefu l ly so they do not go f l ying or get l ost. Wear eye protection.

(cont'd)

Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont'd) Inspection NOTE; Inspect the piston, the piston pin, and the connecting rod when they are at room temperature. 1. Measure the diameter of the piston p i n. Piston Pin Diameter Standard (New): 21.961 —21.965 mm (§.8848§—©,86476 in) Service Limit; 21.954 mm (0.86433 in)

3. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter and piston pin hole diameter on the piston. Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance Standard (New): -0.0050—0.0030 mm (-0.000197-0.000118 in) Service L im it 0.004 mm (0.00016 in)

4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance. Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance Standard (New): 0.005—0.015 mm (0.00020-0.00059 in) Service Limit: 0.019 mm (0.00075 in)

Reassembly 1. Install a piston pin snap ring (A) on ly on one side.

4. Assemble the piston (A) and the connecting rod (B) with the embossed marks (C) on the same side. Install the piston pin (D). NOTE; App l y new engine oil to the piston pin.

2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in the connecting rod, and the piston pin with new engine oi l. 3. Heat the piston to about 158 °F (70 °C).

5. I nstall the remaining snap ring, 6. Reassembl e the other pistons the same way.

Piston Ring Replacement 1. Remove the pistons from the engine b l ock (see page 7-11).

4. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the cylinder bore 15—20 mm (0.8—0.8 in) from the bottom.

2. Using a r i ng expander (A), remove the old piston rings (B).

15^20 mm in!

( 0 .6 - 0.8

3. Cl ean all the ring grooves thoroughly with a squared-off broken ring, or a ring groove c l eaner with a blade to fit the piston grooves. Fil e down the blade, if necessary. The top ring and second ring grooves are 1.2 mm (0.05 in) wide, and the oi l ring groove is 2.8 mm (0.11 in) wide. Do not use a wire brush to clean the ring grooves, or cut the ring grooves deeper with the cleaning too l . NOTE: If the piston is to be separated from the connecting rod, do not insta l l new rings yet.

5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) with a feeler gauge: • If the gap is too sma l l , check to see if you have the proper rings for your engine. • If the gap is too large, recheck the cy l inder bore diameter against the wear limits (see step 5 on page 7-15). Piston Ring End-Gap Top lin g : Standard (New); 0.30—0.40 mm (0.012-0.015 in) Service Limit: 0.60 mm (0.023 in) Second Ring; Standard (New): 0.40—0.55 mm (0.016-0.021 in) Service Limit: 0.70 mm (0.027 in) Oil Ring: Standard (New): 0.20—0.35 mm (0.008-0.013 in) Service Limit: 0.80 mm (0.031 in)

te a

6, I nstall the rings as shown, The top ring (A) has a 1E mark and the second ring (B) has a 2E mark. The manufacturing marks (C) must face upward.

7. After i nstall ing a new set of rings, measure the ring-to-groove clearance. Top'Ring Clearance Standard (New): 0.055—0.085 mm (0.003-0.003 in) Service Limit; 0.15 min (0.005 in) Second Ring Clearance Standard (New): 0.030—0.060 mm (0 .002 - 0.002 in) Service Limit: 0.13 mm (0.005 in)

8. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they do not bind. 9. Position the ring end gaps as shown: A bo ut 90 •

Piston Ring Dimensions: Top Ring {Standard) A: 3.1 m m (©.12 in} B: 1.2 m in (0.05 in) Second Ring (Standard) A: 3.4 m m (0.13 in) B: 1.2 m m (0.05 in)

Crankshaft and Piston Installation Special Tools Required . Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000 • Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 106 mm 070AD-RCA0200

8. Insta ll the main bearings (A) and the main bearing caps (B) with the arrow (C) facing the timing belt side of the engine block.

1. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage (see page 7-7), 2. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with plastigage (see page 7-9). 3. Install the bearing halves in the engine block and the connecting rods. 4. Apply new engine oi l to the inside of the main bearings and the connecting rod bearings. 5. I nstall the CKP pulse p l ate to crankshaft (see page 7-27). 8. Lower the crankshaft (A) into the engine b l ock, being careful not to damage the journals and the CKP pulse plate (B). A

7, Apply new engine oil to the side with the thrust washer groove. I nsta ll the thrust washers (A) in the No. 3 journa l . A

1§x80 mm

E 10x60 mm

9. App l y new engine oi l to the bolt threads and f l anges, then loosely insta ll the bearing cap bolts (D) and the bearing cap side bo lts (E), 10. Set the crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for the cy l inder you are insta l ling the piston in. 11. Apply new engine oil to the piston, the inside of the ring compressor, and the cylinder bore. 12. Attach the ring compressor to the piston/connecting rod assembl y, and check that the bearing is securely in place.

13. Position the piston/connecting rod assemb ly with the arrow (A) facing the timing belt side of the engine b l ock.

16. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt at point A and point B. 35 m m

A

14. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly in the cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a hammer (A). Mai ntain downward force on the ring compressor (B) to prevent the rings from expanding before entering the cylinder bore.

17. Calcul ate the d ifference in diameter between point A and point B. Point A —Point B = Difference in Diameter Difference in Diameter Specification: 0—0.1 mm (0—0.004 in) 18. If the difference in diameter is out of to l erance, replace the connecting rod bo lt.

A

19. Install the connecting rod beari ng (A), then l ine up the mark (B) on the connecting rod (C) and the rod cap (D).

15. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and check the connecting rod-to-rod journal al ignment before pushing the piston into place.

20, Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flanges. Torque the bo l ts (E) to 20 N-m (2.0 kgf-m, 14 Ibf-ft).

Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd) 21. Tighten the connecting rod bo lt an additional 90 NOTE; Remove the connecting rod bolt if you tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go back to step 16 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to the specified angle. Repeat steps 10 to 21 for the remaining cylinders.

22. Tighten the main bearing cap bolts, then tighten the main bearing cap side bolts to the specified torque in the sequence as shown. Repeat the torque sequence again to ensure the bolts are proper ly torqued. 1 1 x 1 .5 m m 74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 ibf-ft)

1 0 x 1 .2 5 m m 49 N-m (5.0 kgf-m, 36 Ibf-ft)

23. Remove a l l of the old liquid gasket from the engine b l ock end cover mating surfaces, the bo l ts, and the bolt holes. 24. Clean and dry the engine b l ock end cover mating surfaces and the crankshaft o i l seal housing. 25. Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the l ip of the crankshaft oil seal .

26. Using the driver hand l e, 15x135 L and the oil seal driver attachment 106 mm, drive in the new crankshaft oil seal (A) until the oil seal driver attachment bottoms on the engine b l ock end cover.

27. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0003, 08718-0004, or 08718-0009) to the engine block mating surface of the engine block end cover and to the inside edge of the threaded bo lt holes. Instal l the component within 5 minutes of app l ying the liquid gasket. NOTE: • Apply a 2.3 mm (0.091 in) diameter bead of l iquid gasket along the broken line (A). • If you apply liqu i d gasket P/N 08718-0012, the component must be installed within 4 minutes, • if too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket remove the old liquid gasket and residue, then reapply new liquid gasket.

28. Instal l the dowel pins (A), a new O-ring (B), and the engine b l ock end cover (C) on the eng i ne block. NOTE: • Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine w i th oil. • Do not run the engine for at l east 3 hours after i nstalling the engine block end cover.

Repl ace.

29. Cl ean the excess oil off the crankshaft, and check that the oil seal lip is not distorted. 30. Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil pump (see step 3 on page 8-17), 31. Remove all of the o l d liquid gasket from the oil pump mating surfaces, the bo l ts, and the bolt holes. 32. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces.

(cont'd)

Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd) 33. App l y liqu i d gasket (P/N 08717^0004, 08718-0003, 08718-0004, or 08718-0003) to the engine b l ock mating surface of the oil pump and to the i nside edge of the threaded bolt ho l es. I nstall the component within 5 minutes of apply i ng the liquid gasket.

34. Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the lip of the crankshaft oi l seal, and to the new O-ring (A).

NOTE: • Apply a 2.3 mm (0.091 in) diameter bead of l iquid gasket along the broken l ine (A). • If you apply l iquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the component must be i nstalled within 4 minutes. • If too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket, remove the old l iquid gasket and residue, then reapp ly the new l i quid gasket.

35, I nsta l l the dowe l pins (B), then align the inner rotor with the crankshaft, and install the oil pump (C).

----- ►

b -

2.3 mm (0.091 in)

NOTE: • Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. • Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the oil pump. 38. Clean the excess oi l off the crankshaft, and check that the oil seal l ip is not distorted. 37. I nsta l l the baffle p l ate (D), then install the oil strainer (E) with a new O-ring (F).

CKP Pulse Plate Replacement 38. I nstall the rocker arm oi l control so l enoid/oil filter assembly (A ), with a new rocker arm oil control s o l enoid f i lte r (B).

1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine b l ock (see page 7-11). 2. Remove the CKP pulse plate (A) from the crankshaft. NOTE: Be carefu l not to damage the journals and the CKP pulse plate.

39. Instal l the oil pan (see page 7-28). 40. I nstall the timing belt drive pulley to the crankshaft (see page 8-26). 41. Install the cylinder heads (see page 8-55). 42. Install the drive plate (see page 14-200). 43. Install the transmission (see page 14-200). 44. Install the engine/transmission (see page 5-11). NOTE: When any crankshaft or connecting rod bearing i s replaced, run the engine at id l e until it reaches normal operating temperature, then continue to run it for about 15 minutes,

3. I nstall the CKP pulse plate in the reverse order of removal. NOTE; When insta l l ing the crankshaft, refer to the crankshaft and piston install ation procedure (see page 7-22).

Oil Pan Installation 1. Remove a l l of the old liquid gasket from the oil pan mating surfaces, the bo lts, and the bo l t ho l es. 2. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces. 3. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 087174)004,08718^0003, 08718-0004, or 08718-0009) to the oi l pan mating surface of the engine b l ock and to the inside edge of the threaded bolt holes. I nsta ll the component within 5 minutes of app l ying the l iquid gasket.

5. Tighten the bo lts in three steps. I n the final step, torque the bolts, in sequence, to 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft). NOTE: • Wait at least 30 minutes before fi l ling the engine with oil. • Do not run the engine for at l east 3 hours after install ing the oil pan.

NOTE: • Apply a 2,3 mm (0.091 in) diameter bead of liquid gasket along the broken line (A). • If you app l y liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the component must be insta l led within 4 minutes. • If too much time has passed after applying the liquid gasket, remove the o l d liquid gasket and residue, then reapply new liquid gasket

8. Tighten the four bolts (A) securing the transmission, then install the torque converter cover (B), A 12 x 1,25 m m

4. I nstall the oi l pan on the engine block.

Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car 7. Connect the CKP sensor connector (A), then install the CKP sensor cover (B) and the bolt (C).

Special Tools Required Oil Seal Driver, 64 mm 070AD-RCAA100 1. Remove the timing belt dr i ve pulley (see page 6-26). 2. Remove the pu l ley end crankshaft oil seal. 3. Clean and dry the crankshaft o i l seal housing. 4. App l y a l ight coat of new engine oil to the l ip of the crankshaft oil seal. 5. Using the oil seal driver, 84 mm, dr i ve i n the new crankshaft oil seal (A) until the oil seal driver bottoms on the oi l pump.

6 x 1 .0 m m 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7

Ibf-ft)

8. Install the rear warm up TWC bracket. 8 x 1.25 m m 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 ibf-ft)

6. Clean the excess oil off the crankshaft, and check that the oi l seal lip is not distorted. 7. Install the tim i ng belt drive pulley (see page 8-26).

9. If the engine is stil l in the vehicle, do the following steps. 10. Install exhaust pipe A using new gaskets and new self-locking nuts (see step 29 on page 5-15). 11. Install the splash shield (see page 20-233) and the front undercover (see page 20-234). 12. Refil l the engine with engine oil (see step 4 on page 8-9).

Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car

Sealing Bolt Installation

Special Tools Required . Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07743-0010000 • Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 108 mm 070AD-RCA0200

NOTE: When installing the sealing'bo lts (A), always use a new washer (B).

1. Remove the transmission (see page 14-186) and the drive p l ate (see page 14-200). 2. Remove the transmission end crankshaft o i l seal. 3. Clean and dry the crankshaft oi l seal housing. 4. App l y a light coat of new engine oil to the lip of the crankshaft oil seal. 5. Using the driver hand l e, 15x135 L, and the oil seal driver attachment, 108 mm, drive in the new crankshaft oi l seal (A) until the oil seal driver attachment bottoms on the engine b l ock end cover. Align the hole in the oil seal driver attachment with the pin on the crankshaft.

8. Clean the excess oil off the crankshaft, and check that the oi l seal lip is not distorted, 7. Install the drive plate (see page 14-200), and the transmission (see page 14-200).

28 x 1.0 m m 80 N-m (8 J kgf-m, 58 Ibf-ft)

Engine Lubrication Special Tools...................................................................... 8-2 Component Location Index....................................... .8-3 Symptom Troubleshooting Index................................. 8-4 Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram................ 8-5 Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open)..............................................................................8-6 Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Short)..............................................................................8-7 Oil Pressure Switch Test.................................................. 8-8 Oil Pressure Switch Replacement................................. 8-8 Oil Pressure Test................................................................8-9 Engine Oil Replacement.................................................. 8-9 Engine Oil Filter Replacement.........................................8-10 Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement...................................8-11 Oil Jet Replacement..........................................................8-12 Oil Jet Bolt Inspection.......................................................8-12 Oil Pump Overhaul........................................................... 8-13

Special Tools Ref.No. ®

(D © © ®

J

Tool Number 07408-0070301 07AAA-PLCA100 07AAJ-PY4A100 07MAJ-PY40120 07NAJ-P07010A G70AD-RCAA100 07ZAJ-S5AA200

Description A/T Low Pressure Gauge w/Panel Oil Filter Wrench AT Pressure Test Hose A/T Pressure Adapter Pressure Gauge Adapter Oil Seal Driver, 84 mm Oil Pressure Hose

Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Component Location Index OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

O-RINGS

Low Oil Pressure I ndicator Circuit Diagram, page 8-5 Low Oil Pressure I ndicator Circuit Troub l eshooting (Open), page 8-8 Low Oil Pressure I ndicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Short), page 8-7 Test page 8-8 Replacement, page 8-8 Oil Pressure Test, page 8-9

OIL CONTROL ORIFICES

O-RING

CONNECTING TUBE

ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID/ OIL FILTER ASSEMBLY

ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID FILTER BAFFLE PLATE

OIL FILTER FEED PIPE

Replacement page 8-11

OIL FILTER

Replacement page 8-10

OIL PUMP Overhaul, page 8-13

OIL PAN

Symptom Troubleshooting Index Symptom Excessi ve engine oil consumption

Low oil pressure indicator stays on

Low oil pressure indicator does not come on with the ignition switch in ON (II)

Diagnostic procedure 1. Check for oi l leaks. 2. Check for worn valve guide(s) (see page 6-48) or worn valve stem seal(s) (see page 6-44). 3. Check for damaged or worn piston ring(s) (see page 7-20). 4. Check for damaged or worn engine interna l parts (cyl inder wa l l, pistons, etc.) (see page 7-15). 1. Check the engine oil level . 2. Do the low o i l pressure indicator circuit troub l eshooting (Open) procedure (see page 8-6). 1. Do the low oil pressure indicator circuit troubleshooting (Short) procedure (see page 8-7). 2. Test the oi l pressure switch (see page 8-8).

Also check for Check the maintenance records as engine oi l that is worn out burns off at a higher rate

An open in the wire between the PCM and the oi l pressure switch A wire shorted to ground between the PCM and the oil pressure switch

te a Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram

UNDER-DASH

. - : F-CAN line

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX BATTERY

No. 1 (BAT) (120 A)

-iTVX.—

No. 3 (IG) (50 A) -< X X X ^ —

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

YEL

OIL PRESSURE SWITCH (Open : Low or lost pressure) (C losed: Norma! pressure)

Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open) 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11 -3). 2. Turn the igniti on switch to ON (ll). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the veh i cle and the PCM. If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209). 4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present, diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing with this test.

10. Check for continu i ty between PCM connector term i nal C45 and the oil pressure switch connector. PCM CONNECTOR €

(49P)

Terminal side of female terminals JJ_JL

8 j 1I2 11 12 / 14|15 16 1?| 18 19 20 21 25 Sfsl 26 27 28 / 23 24 / / 31 32|33 34 35136 37 38 1 / [4 0 |41 4 2 |4 3 |4 4 |4 5 |4 6 |47 4 8 |4 9 |

I OPSWV fS L U /Y E l)

5. Start the engine, and check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS. Is O N

©

JTOPSW (BLU/YEL)

in d ic a te d ?

YES-Repl ace the gauge control module (see page 22-413).11

OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR W ire side of female terminal

NO-Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 8.

YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the l atest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good PCM, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229).■

NO-Do the oil pressure test (see page 8-9). If the oil pressure is OK, replace the oi l pressure switch (see page 8 -8 ),■

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the oil pressure switch and the PCM connector terminal C 45.il

7. Check the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8). is th e o il p r e s s u r e s w i t c h O K ?

8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I), and jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM from damage. 3. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P) and the oil pressure switch connector.

Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Short) 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11 -3), 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

10, Check for continuity between the oi l pressure switch connector and body ground.

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the PCM. if i t does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -209).

O il PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR

4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present, diagnose and repair the cause before continuing with this test. 5. Turn the ign i tion switch to ON (II), and check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the PGM-fi DATA LIST with the HDS. Is O F F

in d ic a te d ?

YES-Repl ace the gauge control module (see page 22-413).11 NO-Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Check the oi l pressure switch (see page 8-8). Is th e

o il p r e s s u r e s w i t c h O K ?

YES-Go to step 8. NO-Replace the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8).B 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), and jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM from damage. 9. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P),

W ire side of fem ale terminal

Is th e r e

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short i n the wire between the oil pressure switch and PCM connector terminal C45.HI NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227) or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good PCM, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229).■

Oil Pressure Switch Test

Oil Pressure Switch Replacement

1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector (A) from the oil pressure switch (B).

1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector (A), then remove the oil pressure sw i tch (B).

2. Check for continuity between the oil pressure switch termina l (C) and the engine (ground). There should be no continuity with the engine stopped, There should be continuity w i th the engine running.

2. Remove all of the o l d liquid gasket from the oi l pressure switch mounting hole, 3. Cl ean and dry the oi l pressure switch mounting ho l e. 4. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0003, 08718-0004, or 08718-0009) to the new oil pressure switch threads. I nstall the component within 5 minutes of app l ying the liquid gasket. NOTE: • Using too much l iquid gasket may cause liquid gasket to enter the oil passage or the end of the oil pressure switch. • If too much time has passed after applying the l iquid gasket, remove the o l d liquid gasket and residue, then reapp l y the new liquid gasket. 5. Install the oi l pressure switch with a new O-ring (C). 8. Connect the oi l pressure switch connector.

Oil Pressure Test

Engine Oil Replacement

Special Tools Required • Oil Pressure Hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200 -A/T Low Pressure Gauge w/Panel 07406-0070301 • AT Pressure Test Hose 07AAJ-PY4A100 • A/T Pressure Adapter 07MAJ-PY40120 • Pressure Gauge Adapter 07NAJ-P07010A

1. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature (fan comes on at least twice). 2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil.

If the l ow oil pressure ind i cator stays on with the engine running, check the engine oi l level. If the oil level is correct: 1. Remove the oi l pressure switch (see page 8-8). 2. I nsta l l the oil pressure hose, the A/T l ow pressure gauge w/panel, the A/T pressure test hose, and the A/T pressure adapter as shown, then insta l l the oil pressure switch to the pressure gauge adapter.

3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B) and torque to specification. 4. Refill the engine with the recommended oil (see page 3-2). Capacity A t Oil Change: 4.0 L (4.2 US qt)

At Oil Change including Filter: 4.3 L (4.5 US qt) After Engine Overhaul: 5 J L (5 J US qt)

3. Start the eng i ne. Shut it off immediate l y if the gauge registers no oi l pressure. Repair the problem before continuing. 4. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature (fan conies on at l east twice). The pressure should be: Engine Oil Temperature: 176 °F (80 °C) Engine Oil Pressure: At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2,10 psi) min. At 3,000 rpm: 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) min. 5. If oil pressure is not within specifications, inspect these items: • Blocking of oil filter. • Blocking of oil strainer. • Inspect the oil pressure relief valve (see page 8-13). • Inspect the oil pump (see page 8-16). 6. Install the oil pressure switch (see page 8 - 8 ).

Engine Oil Replacement (cont'd)

Engine Oil Filter Replacement

5. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check the oil leve l and oil leakage.

Special Tools Required Oil Filter Wrench 07AAA-PLCA100

6. If the Maintenance Minder required replacing the engine oil, reset the Maintenance Minder (see page 3-4), and this procedure is complete. If the Maintenance Minder did not require engine oil replacement, go to step 7.

1. Remove the oil filter with the oil filter wrench.

7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11-3). 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

2. Inspect the filter to make sure the rubber seal is not stuck to the oil filter seating surface of the engine. 3. I nspect the threads (A) and the rubber seal (B) on the new filter. Clean the seat on the oi l filter base, then apply a light coat of new engine oil to the oi l filter rubber seal . Use on l y filters with a built-in bypass system.

10. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the PCM. If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209). 11. Select GAUGES in the BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. 12. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES with the HDS. 13. Sel ect MAINTENANCE MINDER in the ADJUSTMENT with the HDS, 14. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS, 15. Select RESETTI NG THE ENGI NE OI L LIFE with the HDS. NOTE: If you changed the ATF at the same time with the engine oi l , sel ect RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE AND ATF with the HDS instead.

4. Insta l l the oil fi lter by hand. 5. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the oil filter wrench, Tighten: 3/4 Turn Clockwise Tightening Torque:12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8,8 Ibfft)

Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement 6. If four numbers or marks (1 to 4 or ▼ to ▼ ▼ ▼ ▼ ) are printed around the outside of the filter, you can use the fo l lowing procedure to tighten the filter. • Spin the fi lter on until its seal light l y seats against the oil filter base, and note which number or mark is at the bottom. • Tighten the filter by turning it c l ockwise three numbers or marks from the one you noted. For example, if mark ▼ is at the bottom when the seal is light l y seated, tighten the fi lter until the mark ’ comes around to the bottom.

1. Remove the oil fi lter (see page 8-10). 2. Remove the oi l fi lter feed pipe.

3. Install two 20 x 1.5 mm nuts (A) onto the new oil filter feed pipe, and hold one nut with a wrench, then tighten the other nut. A Mark w hen rubber seal is seated.

4 Number or 1 2 3 Mark when or or or or w ww www ▼ ▼ ▼ ▼ rubber seal is seated 4 Number or 1 2 3 Mark after or or or or www ww w ▼ ▼ ▼ ▼ tightening 7. After insta l l ation, fill the engine with engine oi l to the specified level, run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. 4. Apply new engine oil to the oil filter feed pipe threads, then torque the oil f i lter feed pipe to 35 N-m (3.5 kgf-m, 28 Ibf-ft), then remove the nuts from the oil filter feed pipe. 5. Install the oil fi lter (see page 8-10).

Oil Jet Replacement

Oil Jet Bolt Inspection

1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine b l ock (see page 7-11).

1. Remove the oil jet bo lt (see page 8-12).

2. Remove the oil jet bo l t (A), then remove the oil jet (B). A 16 N-m kgf-m, 12 ibf-ft) Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads. ( 1.6

3. Carefully install the new oil jet and tighten the oi l jet bolt. 4. Install the crankshaft (see page 7-22).

2. I nspect the oi l jet bolt as follows. • Make sure that a 0,8 mm (1/84 in) diameter dri l l bit will go through the o i l intake (0.7 mm (0.03 in) diameter). Make sure the check ball (A) moves smooth l y and has a stroke of about 4.0 mm (0.16 in). • Check the oil jet bolt operation with an air nozzl e. It should take at l east 120 kPa (1.2 kgf/cm, 17 psi) to unseat the check ball.

Oil Pump Overhaul Exploded View

39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf-ft)

Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd) Special Tools Required • Oil Seal Driver, 84 mm 070AD-RCAA100 • Engine Support Hanger, A and Reds AAR-11250* • Engine Hanger Adapter Set VSB02C000031 * *: Availab l e through the Acura Tool and Equipment program, 888-424-6857,

Removal 1. Disconnect the support struts from both si des of the pivot ball (bolted to the hood). Secure the hood in a vertical position. Install the left side pivot ball into the lower threaded ho l e, NOTE; Do not attempt to c l ose the hood with the support strut in the vertica l position, as it w il l damage the support strut and hood.

2. Remove the bulkhead cover (see page 20-217). 3. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-23). 4. Remove the power steering pump and the power steering l ine bracket (see page 17-28).

5. Remove the service caps (A) for the front damper f l ange nuts from the cowl cover (B). Position the engine hanger adapter set (VSB02C000031) with the FRONT mark facing forward over the damper flange nuts.

6. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256) onto the vehic l e as shown, and attach the hook (A) to the engine hanger (B). T i ghten the w i ng nut (C) by hand, and l ift and support the engine/transmission.

11. Remove the oil strainer (A).

NOTE: • Be carefu l when working around the windshield. • AAR-T1256 two sets required for stacking two cross section bars.

12. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the oil pump assembly (B).

7. Remove the timing belt (see page 8-14). 8. Remove the timing belt drive pul l ey from the crankshaft (see page 6-26). 9. Remove the rocker arm oi l contro l solenoid/oil filter assemb l y (see step 8 on page 7-11). 10. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-10).

(cont'd)

Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd) Inspection NOTE: Refer to the Exploded V i ew if needed during this procedure. 1. Remove the screws from the pump housing, then separate the pump housing and the cover. 2. Check the inner rotor-to-outer rotor radial clearance between the inner rotor (A) and the outer rotor (B). If the inner rotor-to-outer rotor radia l clearance exceeds the service l imit, replace the o i l pump assembl y.

4. Check the pump housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance between the outer rotor (A) and the pump housing (B). If the pump housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the oil pump assembly. Pump Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance Standard (New): 0.100—0.190 mm (0.004—0.007 in) Service Limit: 0.20 mm (0.007 in) A

B

Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance Standard (New): 0.040—0.160 mm (0.002—0.006 in} Service Limit: 0.20 mm (0.007 in)

5. Inspect both rotors and the pump housing for scoring or other damage. Replace the oil pump assembly, if necessary. 6 . Apply liquid thread lock to the pump housing screws,

then install the oil pump cover. 3. Check the pump housing-to-rotor axial clearance between the rotors (A) and the pump housing (B). If the pump housing-to-rotor axial clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the oil pump assembly. Pump Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance Standard (New): 0.020-0.070 min (0.001 -0.0 02 in) Service Limit: 0.12 mm (0.004 in)

7. Check that the oil pump turns freely.

Installation 1. Remove the old oil seal from the oil pump. 2. Clean and dry the crankshaft oi l seal housing. 3. Using the oil seal driver, 64 mm, driver in the new crankshaft oil seal (A) until the oil seal driver bottoms on the pump.

4. Remove all of the old l iquid gasket from the oil pump mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt ho l es. 5. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces.

6. App l y liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004,08718^0003, 08718-0004, or 08718-0009) to the engine block mati ng surface of the oi l pump and to the inside edge of the threaded bo lt ho l es. I nstall the component within 5 minutes of app l ying the l iquid gasket NOTE: • Apply a 2.3 mm (0.091 in) diameter bead of l iquid gasket a l ong the broken l ine (A). • If you app l y liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the component must'be installed w ith i n 4 minutes. • If too much time has passed after app ly i ng the liquid gasket, remove the o l d l iquid gasket and residue, then reapply new liquid gasket.

Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd) 7, Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the l i p of the crankshaft o i l seal, and to the new O-ring (A). 6 x 1.0 m m

11. Install the oi l pan (see page 7-28). 12. Insta l l the rocker arm oil control so l eno i d/oil filter assembl y w i th a new rocker arm o i l control solenoid filter (see step 38 on page 7-27). 13. Install the timing belt drive pulley to the crankshaft (see page 6-26). 14. Install the timing belt (see page 6-17). 15. Support the engine with a jack and a wood block under the oil pan. 18. Remove the engine support hanger, and the engine hanger adapter set. 17. Instal l the service caps on the cow l cover. 18. insta l l the power steering pump and the power steering line bracket (see page 17-28). 19. Insta l l the drive belt (see page 4-29). 20. Instal l the bulkhead cover (see page 20-217).

8. Install the dowel p i ns (B), then align the inner rotor with the crankshaft, and install the oi l pump (C). NOTE: • Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. • Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the oil pump. 9, Clean the excess oil off the crankshaft, and check that the oi l seal lip is not distorted. 10, Insta l l the oi l strainer (D) with a new O-ri ng (E).

21. Refill the engine with engine oil (see page 8-9).

Intake Manifold and Exhaust System Intake Manifold Removal and Installation. ................. 9-2 Injector Base Removal and Installation........................9-6 Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement........................9-8

Intake Manifold Removal and Installation Exploded View 6 x 1.0 m m 12 N-m |1,2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ib fft) UPPER COVER Replace if it is cracked or if the mating surface is damaged.

J

GASKET Replace.

INTAKE M ANIFOLD Replace intake manifold as an assembly only if it is cracked or if the mating surface is damaged

8 x 1.25 m m 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 I bf-ft!

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ib fft)

EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE

i x 1.0 m m 10 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 8.7 ib fft)

GASKET Replace. REAR INJECTOR BASE

THROTTLE BODY

8 x 1.25 m m 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 18 ibf-ft!

8 x 1.25 m m 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 18 Ib fft)

FUEL RAIL

NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View if needed during this procedure.

Ftemowai

5. Disconnect the EVAP canister hose (A), the EVAP canister purge va lve connector (B), the throttle actuator connector (C), and the MAP sensor connector (D).

1. Remove the engine cover (see step 8 on page 5-2). 2. Disconnect the breather pipe (A).

6. Disconnect and plug the water bypass hoses (E). 7. Remove the upper cover mounting bolts and nuts sequential ly i n three steps, then remove the upper cover (A). 3. Remove the i ntake ai r duct (B). 4. Disconnect the PCV hose (A), the brake booster vacuum hose (B), the vacuum hose (C), and the IMT actuator connector (D).

Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd) 8. Remove the int ake manifold mount ing bolts and nuts sequentially in three steps. ©

O

l O

®

®

1. Insta l l the intake manifold, Tighten the bolts and nuts sequentia ll y in three steps. A l ways use a new intake manifold gasket. Specified Torque 8 x 1.25 mm: 22 M m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) CD

oO o0

J

©

Installation

@

©

oQ

©

9, Remove the i ntake manifol d.

2. Install the upper cover (A), Tighten the bo l ts and nuts sequentia l ly in three steps. A lways use a new gasket. Specified Torque 8 x 1.0 mm; 12 N-m (1.2-kgf-m, 8.8 ibfft)

3. Connect the water bypass hoses (A).

6. Insta l l the intake air duct (A).

4. Connect the MAP sensor connector (B), the throttle actuator connector (C), the EVAP canister purge valve connector (D), and the EVAP canister purge hose (E). 5. Connect the I MT actuator connector (A), the vacuum hose (B), the brake booster vacuum hose (C), and the PCV hose (D).

8. Insta ll the engine cover (see step 57 on page 5-19). 9. Cl ean up any spil l ed engine coo l ant. 10. After insta l lation, check that all tubes, hoses, and connectors are installed correctly. 11. Refill the radiator with engine coo l ant, and bleed the air from the cooling system (see step 9 on page 10-7).

Injector Base Removal and Installation Removal _

installation

1. Rel ieve the fue l pressure (see page 11-298).

1. Insta ll the front injector base (A) and rear injector base (B) with new gaskets (C), and tighten the injector base mounting bolts/nuts (D) in a crisscross pattern in three steps, beginning with the inner nuts.

2. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-29). 3. Remove the power steering pump and the power steering hose bracket (see page 17-28). 4. Remove the intake manifo l d (see page 9-3). 5. Remove the injectors (see page 11-220). 6. Remove the harness ho l der mounting bolt (A) and disconnect the knock sensor connector (B).

7. Remove the injector base mounting bolts/nuts (A), then remove the front injector base (B) and rear injector base (C).

NOTE: The front injector base gasket is different from the rear one. Do not mix injector base gasket types.

2. Connect the knock sensor connector (A) and install the harness holder mounting bo lt (B).

12 N-m

(1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)

3. I nsta l l the injectors (see page 11-220). 4. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-4). 5. Install power steering pump and the power steering hose bracket (see page 17-28). 6. Install the drive bel t (see page 4-29). 7. Inspect for fuel l eaks. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel l ine. Repeat this operation three times, then check for fue l leakage at any point in the fuel line.

Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement NOTE: Use new gaskets and sel f- l ocking nuts when reassemb l ing.

10 x 1.25 mm 54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m, 4© Ibf-ft) Replace,

1© x 1.25 m m 33 N-m (3.4 kgf-m, 25 Ibf-ft) Replace.

Cooling System Component Location Index...................... .......................10-2 Radiator Cap T est.............................................................. 10-3 Radiator Test........................ .................................... .........10-3 Fan Motor T est................................................................... 10-4 Thermostat Test................................................................ 10-4 Water Pump Inspection....................................................10-5 Water Pump Replacement............................................... 10-5 Coolant Check.................................... ................................10-6 Coolant Replacement.......................................................10-6 Thermostat Replacement................................................ 10-9 Water Passage Replacement.......................................... 10-10 Radiator and Fan Replacement......................................10-11

Fan Controls Component Location Index............................................. 10-13 Symptom Troubleshooting Index................................. 10-14 Circuit Diagram ................................................................. 10-15 Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting. ...10-16

Component Location Index

I

WATER PUMP I nspection, page 10-5 Replacement page 10-5

RADIATOR CAP

Test, page 10-3

WATER PASSAGE Replacement page 10-10

RADIATOR Test page 10-3 Coolant Check, page 10-6 Coolant Replacement page 10-6 Replacement page 10-11

THERMOSTAT Test page 10-4 Replacement page 10-9 FAN, FAN MOTOR and SHROUD Fan Motor Test page 10-4 Replacement page 10-11

• k

Radiator Cap Test

Radiator Test

1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefu l ly remove the radiator cap (A). Wet the radiator cap seal with engine coo l ant, then install it on a commerciall y available pressure tester (B).

1. Wait until the engine is coo l , then carefu l ly remove the radi ator cap, and fil l the radiator with engine coolant to the base of the fil l er neck.

B

2. Attach a commercia ll y availab l e pressure tester (A) to the radiator, and app ly a pressure of 93—123 kPa (0.95 -1 .2 5 kgf/cm2, 13.5-17.8 psi).

2. Apply a pressure of 93—123 kPa (0.95—1.25 kgf/cm2, 13.5-17.8 psi). 3. Check for a drop in pressure. 4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap.

3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in pressure. 4. Remove the tester, then reinsta l l the radiator cap.

Fan Motor Test

Thermostat Test

1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the radiator fan motor (A) and the A/C condenser fan motor (B).

Repl ace the thermostat if it is stuck in the open position at room temperature. To test a closed thermostat: 1, Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water. Do not let the thermostat and the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of the hot container.

2, Test each motor by connecting battery power to terminal No. 2 and ground to terminal No. 1. 3. If either motor fails to run or does not run smoothly, replace i t (see page 10-11). 2. Heat the water, and check the temperature with a thermometer. Check the temperature at which the thermostat f i rst opens, and at which it is fu l ly open. 3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is fu l l y open. Standard Thermostat Lift Height: Above 10.0 mm (0.394 in) Starts Opening: 169-176 °F (7 6 -8 0 °C) Fully Open: 194*F(90°C)

* Water Pump Inspection

Water Pump Replacement

1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-14).

1. Drain the engine coo l ant (see page 10-8).

2. Turn the water pump pu l ley counterc l ockwise, and make sure that it turns free l y. If i t does not turn freely, replace the water pump (see page 10-5).

2. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-14).

NOTE: When you check the water pump, you may see a sma l l amount of "weeping" from the b l eed holes (A), This i s normal.

3. Remove the timing belt adjuster (see page 6-28). 4. Remove the five bolts securing the water pump (A), then remove the water pump.

12 N-m kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft!

( 1.2

3, Install the timing belt (see page 6-17).

5. Inspect and cl ean the mating surface of the engine b l ock. 6. Install the water pump with a new O-ring (B). 7. Cl ean up any spil l ed engine coolant. 8. Insta ll the timing belt adjuster (see page 8-28). 9. Insta l l the timing belt (see page 6-17).

10, Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then b l eed the air from the cooling system (see step 9 on page 10-7).

Coolant Check

Coolant Replacement

1. Check the coo l ant l evel i n the coo l ant reservoir. Make sure it is between the MAX mark (A) and MIN mark (B).

1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove the radiator cap. 2. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-233). 3. Loosen the drain p l ug (A) and drain the coolant.

2. If the coo l ant l evel in the coolant reservoir is at or belowthe MIN mark, add coo l ant to bring it between the M I N and MAX marks, then inspect the coo l ing system for l eaks.

4. Insta ll a rubber hose (A) on the drain bolt (B) located at the rear of the eng i ne block, then loosen the drain bolt.

3. Check the coolant level in the radiator, and add Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into the radiator up to the base of the fi l ler neck, if needed. NOTE: • Always use Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Using a non-Acura coo l ant can resu lt in corrosion, causing the coo l ing system to malfunction or fail. • Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add water. 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)

5. When the coolant stops draining, tighten the drain bolt. Remove the rubber hose. 8. Tighten the radiator drain p l ug securely. 7. Instal l the sp l ash shie l d (see page 20-233). 8. Remove, drain, and reinstall the coolant reservoir.

* 9. Fill the coolant reservoir to the MAX mark (A) with Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Cool ant Type 2.

11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 1,500 rpm unti l i t warms up (the radiator fan comes on at l east twice). Make sure the thermostat is open. 12. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator, and add the recommended coolant, if needed. 13. Set the c l imate contro l or heater control panel to maximum coo l . Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 1,500 rpm for 5 minutes, then turn off the engine. 14. Check the level in the radiator, and add the recommended coo l ant, if needed. 15. Set the climate control or heater control panel to maximum heat. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 1,500 rpm for 5 minutes, then turn off the engine.

10. Pour Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coo l ant Type 2 into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. NOTE: • Always use Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Using a non-Acura coolant can resu l t in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fai l . • Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coo l ant Type 21s a mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do not add water. Engine Coolant Capacities (Including the coolant reservoir capacity of §.71 L (0.188 US gal)): A t Coolant Change: 7.3 L (1 .93 US gal) After Engine Overhaul: 9.2 L (2.43 US gal)

18. Check the l eve l in the radiator, and add the recommended coolant, if needed. 17. Set the climate control or heater control panel to maximum cool. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 1,500 rpm for 3 minutes, then turn off the engine. 18. Check the level in the radiator, and add the recommended coolant, if needed. 19. Set the climate control or heater control panel to maximum heat. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 1,500 rpm for 3 minutes, then turn off the engine. 20. Check the l evel in the radiator, and add the recommended coo l ant, if needed.

'

21. Repeat steps 17 through 20 until the coolant level does not change in the radiator, then insta ll the radiator cap loosely. 22. Set the cl imate control or heater contro l panel to maximum cool. Start the engine. Hol d the engine speed at 2#500 rpm for 1 minute.

(cont'd)

Coolant Replacement (cont'd) 23. Set the climate contro l or heater contro l panel to maximum heat, and select high speed heat mode on the rear control panel. Measure the temperature of the air from the rear floor vent for 3 minutes. Make sure the temperature is above the standard line of the graph as shown. If the temperature is belowthe standard li ne, repeat steps 17 through 20 several more times. Then loosely install the radiator cap and recheck. AIR FLOW TEMPERATURE °F f°G)

28. If the Maintenance Minder required replacing the engine coolant reset the Maintenance Minder (see page 3-4L and this procedure is complete. If the Maintenance Minder did not require engine coo l ant replacement 90 to step 30. 29. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 30. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11 -3). 31. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 32. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the PCM. If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209).

176 (80) 158 CTO)

33. Sel ect GAUGES in the BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS.

140 (80) 122 ( 50)

34. Select ADJUSTMENT i n the GAUGES with the HDS.

104 (40)

35. Select MAINTENANCE MINDER in the ADJUSTMENT with the HDS.

88 (30) 88 C20)

38. Sel ect RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the HDS.

50 (10)

0 59 (153

83 (17)

88 113)

70 121)

73 (23)

77 (25)

81 127)

84 (29)

INTERIOR TEMPERATURE °F f € )

24. With the engine id l ing, make sure you do not hear the sound of water flowing near the rear heater unit. If you hear water flowing, repeat steps 17 through 20 several more times. 25. Install the radiator cap securely. 26. Fill the coolant reservoir with the recommended coo l ant up to the MAX mark on the coo l ant reservoir, then add an extra 0.4 L (0.11 US gal) coolant 27. Clean up any spil led engine coo l ant.

37. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 5 RESET with the HDS.

* Thermostat Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct (see step 7 on page 5-2), 2. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6). 3. Remove the thermostat cover, then remove the thermostat.

4. Instal l the new thermostat with a new rubber seal, then insta l l the thermostat cover. 5. Insta ll the intake air duct (see step 6 on page 9-5). 8. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then b l eed air from the cooling system (see step 9 on page 10-7). 7. Cl ean up any spilled engine coolant,

Water Passage Replacement 1. Do the battery remova l procedure (see page 22-96). 2. Remove the intake ai r duct (see step 7 on page 5-2). 3. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6). 4. Disconnet the upper radiator hose, the l ower radiator hose, the heater hoses, and the water bypass hoses from the water passage. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 connector and the EGR va l ve connector. 5. Remove the EGR pipe (see page 11-354). 8. Remove the water passage.

7. Install the water passage with new gaskets i n the reverse order of remova l . 8. Do the battery installation procedure (see page 22-96). 9. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed ai r from the cooling system (see step 9 on page 10-7). 10. Clean up any spil led engine coolant.

Radiator and Fan Replacement NOTE: • Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted surfaces. • To avoid damaging the wire and terminals, unplug the wiring connectors carefu ll y w hi l e ho l ding the connector portion. • Mark a ll wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection. Also, be sure that they do not contact any other wiring or hoses, or interfere with any other parts.

8. Unclamp the hose c l amps (A) and disconnect the ATF coo l er hoses (B), then plug the cooler hoses and the lines.

B-

C 8x1.® mm 7.1 N-m (0.72 kgf-m, 5.2 ib fft)

1. Do the battery remova l procedure (see page 22-96). 2. Remove the battery base (see step 11 on page 5-3). 3. Remove the air c l eaner (see page 11-332). 4. Remove the front gri l le cover, then remove the front grille (see page 20-217). 5. Disconnect the fan motor connectors (A), the harness c l amp (B), the ECT sensor 2 subharness connector (C) and the coolant reservoir hose (D). 9. Remove the ATF coo l er pipe mount bolts (C), then remove the ATF coo l er p i pe (D). 10. Disconnect the l ower radiator hose (A) and the ECT sensor 2 connector (B), then loosen the two bolts (C).

6. Drain the engine coo l ant (see page 10-6). 7. Disconnect the upper radiator hose. 7.1 N-m fi.72 kgf-m, 5.2 ib fft)

11. With ACC system: Remove the millimeter wave radar (see page 25-80).

(cont'd)

Radiator and Fan Replacement (cont'd) 12. Disconnect the hood latch switch connector (A), and hood opener cable c l amps (B), then remove the hood latch (C).

14. Move the fan shroud assemblies toward the engine, then pull up the radiator assembly (A).

W ithout ACC 6 x 1.0 mm 7.1 N-m (0.72 kgf-m, 5.2 Ibf-ft)

6 x 1.0 mm 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)

6 x 1.0 mm 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft) (1,0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)

(0.72 kgf-m, 5,2 Ibf-ft)

With ACC

15. Remove the fan shroud assemblies.

6 x 1,0 mm 7.1 M - m (i0.72 kgf-m, 5.2 Ibf-ft)

8 x 1.0 mm 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)

16. Install the radiator and fan shroud assemblies in the reverse order of removal. 17. Install the bulkhead bracket in the reverse order of removal. Apply body paint to the bracket mounting bolts. 18. Set the upper and lower cushions securely. 19. Fill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-184). 20. Do the battery installation procedure (see page 22-96). 21. Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the air from the system (see step 9 on page 10-7). 22. Adjust the engine hood latch (see page 20-201). 23. With ACC system: Aim the millimeter wave radar (see page 25-85).

6 x 1.0 mm

9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)

6 x 1.0 mm 7.1 N-m (0.72 kgf-m, 5.2 ibf-ft)

i x 1.0 mm 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)

13. Remove the bracket (D), and radiator and A/C condenser mount upper bracket/cushion (E), then remove the fan shroud mount bolts (F).

Fan Controls Component Location Index

$

c

Symptom Troubleshooting Index Symptom Engine overheats

The radiator fan does not run at high speed

Diagnostic Proced 1. Check the coolant level. 2. Check for any engine coolant leakage (from gaskets, hoses, O-rings, etc.), 3. Check for dirt, leaves, or insects on the radiator and A/C condenser. 4. Check for deteriorated coo l ant. 5. Check for a damaged or deformed fan shrouds. 8. Check the fan motors are operating properly {air shou l d be blowing toward the engine). 7. Inspect the fan motors (see page 10-4) or fan relays: • A/C condenser fan re l ay (see page 22-103) 8. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-3). 3. Check the thermostat (see page 10-4), 10. I nspect the water pump (see page 10-5). 11. Check for plugged or deteriorated radiator hoses. 12. Check for a plugged heater core or hoses, 13. Check for a damaged cylinder head gasket. Radiator fan high speed circuit troubleshooting (see page 10-18).

Both the radiator fan and the A/C condenser fan do not run at l ow speed

Radiator and A/C condenser fans low speed circuit troub l eshooting (see page 21-91).

The A/C condenser fan does not run at high speed

A/C condenser fans high speed circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-94).

Also check for Check the radiator and A/C condenser fan are operating properly

Check the connectors are properly connected and the termina l s are making good contact Check the connectors are properly connected and the terminals are making good contact Check the connectors are properly connected and the termina l s are making good contact

$

Circuit Diagram

-J- i C205

I2 GRN

Lq

J

ECT SENSOR 1

€205

i

I1 BLU

w ECTSENSOR 2

c

Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No. 16 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/re l ay box and the No. 7 (7,5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. A r e th e fu s e (s ) O K ?

4. Connect fan contro l relay 5P socket terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.

FAN CONTROL RELAY SP SOCKET

YES-Reinstall the fuse(s), then go to step 2. NO-Rep lace the fuse(s) and recheck. If the fuse(s) b l ow again, repair the short to ground on the No. 18 (30A) fuse and the No. 7 (7.5A) fuse circuit.!

1

JUMPER WIRE

2

2. Remove the radiator fan rel ay and the fan control relay from the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-109). A r e th e r e la y s O K ?

5 4

3

Termina l side of female term ina l s

YES-Go to step 3. NO-Replace the rad i ator fan relay and/or fan contro l re l ay.B 3. Measure the vo ltage between radiator fan relay 4P socket termina l No. 1 and body ground.

5. Connect rad i ator fan relay 4P socket terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire. RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET

RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET

1 2

JUMPER WIRE

4 3

Termina l side of female terminals

Terminal side of female terminals

D o e s th e r a d i a t o r fa n ru n a t h ig h s p e e d ?

Is th e re b a t t e r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Remove the jumper wire, the go to step 10.

YES-Go to step 4.

NO-Remove the jumper wire, the go to step 6.

NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/re l ay box.l

6. Test the radiator fan motor (see page 10-4). Is th e fa n m o t o r O K ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Replace the radiator fan motor (see page 10-11).

* 7. Check for continuity between fan control relay 5P socket terminal No. 2 and body ground.

9. Check for cont i nuity between fan control re l ay 5P socket terminal No. 1 and radiator fan motor 2P connector term i nal No. 1.

FAN CONTROL RELAY SP SOCKET FAN CONTROL RELAY SP SOCKET Terminal side of female term ina l s

Terminal side of fema l e terminals

is there continuity? YES-Go to step 8.

RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR

NO-Repair an open in the wire between fan control relay 5P socket terminal No. 2 and body ground.■ 8. Check for continuity between radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No, 2 and radiator fan motor 2P connector terminal No. 2. RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET Terminal side of fema l e terminals

1 2

Wire side of female terminals

is there continuity? YES-Go to step 10. NO-Repair an open in the wire between fan control relay 5P socket terminal No. 1 and radiator fan motor 2P connector terminal No. 1.B 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

4 3 1 I- T _ zo

1

BRN

RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals

is there continuity? YES-Go to step 9. NO-Repair an open in the wire between radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and radiator fan motor 2P connector terminal No. 2.H

(cont'd)

Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) 11. Measure the vo l tage between fan control rel ay 5P socket termina l No, 5 and body ground.

18. Check for conti nuity between radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and PCM connector termina l A5. RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET T e rm in a l side o f fe m a l e t e rm in a ls

FAN C ONTROL RELAY SP SOCKET

1 2 CO

4

FANH fZ Z Z IZ Z i

_T___^ _

n _

J 1 f 2 ^ n T j ^ >I 6 I 7 | 8 ir jT o T i 11 12 13 / I / 18 /| 1 8 19 20 21 i 22 23 24 25 20 27 28

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le t e r m in a l s

i

is th e re b a t t e r y v o lta g e ?

29 30 31 3 2 1 / / 140141

YES-Go to step 12. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the under dash fuse/relay box and the under hood fuse/relay box.B

(PUR)

/ N

PCM CONNECTOR A

37 38 39

i

4 8 14 9 1

(49P)

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le t e r m in a l s

Is th e re

c o n tin u ity ?

12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

YES-Go to step 19,

13. Connect the HDS to the DLC.

NO-Repair an open the wire between radiator fan relay 4P socket termina l No, 3 and PCM connector termina l A 5 .ll

14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 15. Make sure the HDS commun i cates with the vehicle and the PCM. If it does not communicate, troub l eshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209). 16. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM from damage. 17. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

19. Check for continuity between fan control relay 5P socket termina l No. 3 and PCM connector terminal A S . FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P SOCKET Terminal side of female terminals

1 2 5 4 3r~ {f|} FANH (PUR)

_______________ N .1.1 I 2 fY J T T t T Y W V n T 9(10| a 11 12 13 / ] / 16 / h e 19 20 21 i 22 23 24 25 > < 28 27 28 1 i 29 30 31 321 / / /136 37 38 39 140 J41 4 2 \ 4 3 \ 4 ^ X m \ X 48]49| P C M CONNECTOR A (49P) Terminal side of female terminals

Is th e re

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Update the PCM i f it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substi tute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good PCM, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229).H NO-Repair an open in the wire between fan contro l re l ay 5P socket terminal No. 3 and PCM connector terminal ASM

Fuel and Emissions Systems Specia l T o o ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Genera l T roub l eshooting Inform ation . D TCTroubleshooting I n d e x . . . . . . . . . . . Sym ptom Troubleshooting In d e x .. . . . System D escriptio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Set Readiness Codes . . . . . . . . . .

11-2 11-3 11-10 11-17 11-13 11-71

PGM-Fi System C om ponent Location In d e x. . . . . . . . . . . DTC Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-CAN Circuit Troub l eshooting . . . . . . . . MIL Circuit T ro u blesh oo ting . . . . . . . . . . DLC Circuit T roub l eshooting . . . . . . . . . . Injector Rep l a cem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAP Sensor Replacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . MAF Sensor/ IAT Sensor Replacem ent. ECT Sensor 1 R eplacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . ECT Sensor 2 R eplacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . A/F Sensor R eplacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . Secondary H02S Replacem ent. . . . . . . . CMP Sensor Rep l acem en t. . . . . . . . . . . . CKP Sensor Replacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . Knock Sensor R eplacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . PCM Upd at e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Repl acement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-74 11-78 11-201 11-208 11-203 11-220 11-222 11-222 11-223 11-223 11-224 11-225 11-226 11-228 11-227 11-227 11-223

Electronic Throttle Control System Com ponent Location I n de x . . . . . . . . . . . DTC Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APP Sensor Signal I nspecti on. . . . . . . . . Accelerator Pedal M odule Removal/ I nsta l l at i o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-232 11-233 11-282 11-283

VTEC Com ponent Location I ndex. . . . . . . . . . . DTC Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Repl a c emen t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rocker Arm O i l Pressure Switch Removal/Instal l ati o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-284 11-285 11-272 11-272

Idle Control System Com ponent Location I ndex. . . . . . . . . . . DTC Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/C Signal Circuit T roub l eshooting . . . . A lternator FR Signal Circuit Troubl eshoot i ng. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubl eshoot i ng. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . I dle Speed Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Idle Learn Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . .

11-273 11-274 11-276 11-277 11-278 11-280 11-281 11-282

Fuel Supply System Com ponent Location In de x . . . . . . . . . . . 11-283 DTC Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-285 Fuel Pressure Relieving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-238

Fuel Pressure Test................... 11-301 Fuel Tank Draining ................... 11-301 Fuel Line Inspection .................. 11-302 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions........................ 11-304 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Remova l .......................... 11-306 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation........................ 11-308 Fuel Tank Unit Remova l and I nstal lation ........................ 11-311 Fuel Pressure Regul ator Replacement. 11-313 Fuel Filter Replacement............... 11-314 Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Repl acement..... ............ 11-314 Fuel Tank Replacement............... 11-315 Fuel Fil lPipe Removal/Instal l ation..... 11-317 Fuel Pump Control Module Replacement...................... 11-318 Fue l Gauge Sending Unit T e s t . . . . . . . . 11-318 Low Fuel Indicator Test............... 11-320

Intake Air System Component Location Index........... DTC Troubleshooting................ Throttle Body Test................... Throttle Body Cleaning ............... Air Cleaner Removal/I nstallation ...... Air Cleaner Element I nspection/Replacement............ Intake Air Resonator Remova l /Instal lation............... I M T Actuator Repl acement........... Throttle Body Removal/I nstallati on ....

11-321 11-322 11-331 11-331 11-332 11-332 11-333 11-334 11-335

Catalytic Converter System Component Location I ndex........... 11-338 DTC Troubleshooting ................ 11-337 W a r m Up T W C Removal/Instal lation ... 11-339 Under-Floor T W C Remova l /I nstal l ation............... 11-341

EGR System Component Location Index........... DTC Troubleshooting ................ EGR Valve Replacement.............. EGR Pipe Repl acement...............

11-342 11-343 11-354 11-354

PCV System Component Location I ndex........... 11-355 DTC Troubleshooting................ 11-356 PCV Valve I nspection ................. 11-357 PCV Valve Replacement.............. 11-357

EVAP System Component Location Index........... 11-358 DTC Troubleshooting................ 11-359 Fuel Cap Warning Message System Troubl eshooting................... 11-386

FTP Sensor Replacement....................... 11-387 EVAP Canister Purge Valve Replacement........................................ 11-388 EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Replacement........................................ 11-389 EVAP Canister Replacement................. 11-390

Special Tools Ref.No. CD (2) CD (4)

(D Cl)

(?) ® (1)

Tool Number 07408-0040001 07408-0070301 07AAA-S0XA100 07AAJ-PY4A100 07AAJ-S8MA150 07JAZ-001000B 07MAJ-PY40120 07NAJ-P07010A 072AJ-S5A0200

ion Fuel Pressure Gauge A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel Fuel Sender Wrench jre Test Hose Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment Set Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0 —4 inHg A/T Pressure Adapter Pressure Gauge Adapter Oil Pressure Hose

Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

General Troubleshooting Information Interm ittent Failures The term i ntermittent fa i lure means a system may have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the malfunction indicator lamp (M I L) on the dash does not come on, check for poor connections or l oose terminals at all connectors related to the circuit that you are troubleshooting. If the MIL was on but then went out, the original prob l em may have been intermittent.

2, If the MIL stays on, connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.

Service Information Periodical ly, new PCM software or new service procedures may become availab l e. Always check online for the latest software or service i nformation related to the DTCs or symptoms you are troubleshooting.

Opens and Shorts Open and short are common electrical terms. An open is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is an accidenta l connection of a wire to ground or to another wire. In simp l e terms, this usual ly means something won't work at all. With complex el ectronics (such as PCMs) this can sometimes mean something works, but not the way it's supposed to.

How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System) lith e MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) has come on 1. Start the engine, and check the MIL (A). NOTE; If the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), and the engine is not started, the M I L stays on for 15—20 seconds (see page 11-71).

\

\

\

\

3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM and other vehic l e systems. If it doesn't go to the DLC circuit troub l eshooting (see page 11-209). 5. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it. Also check the freeze data and/or on-board snapshot data, and down l oad any data found. Then refer to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, and begin the appropriate troubleshooting procedure. NOTE; • Freeze data indicates the engine conditions when the first system malfunction, misfire, or fuel trim malfunction that activated the M I L was detected. • The HDS can read the DTC, freeze data, on-board snapshot, current data, and other powertrain control module (PCM) data. • For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came with the HDS. 6. If no DTCs are found, go to MIL troubleshooting (see page 11-208). If the MIL did not stay on If the MIL did not stay on but there is a driveability problem, do the symptom troubleshooting. If you can't duplicate the DTC Some of the troubleshooting requires you to reset the PCM and try to duplicate the DTC. If the problem is intermittent and you can't duplicate the code, do not continue through the procedure. To do so will only result in confusion and possibly, a needlessly replaced PCM.

(cont'd)

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd) HDS Clear Command

PCM Reset

The PCM stores various specific data to backup the system even if there is no electrica l power such as when the battery negative terminal or No. 7 BACK UP FI ECU (7.5 A)*1 is disconnected, Stored data based on failed parts should be cleared by using the CLEAR COMMAND of the HDS, if parts are replaced.

1. Reset the PCM with the HDS while the engine is stopped,

The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet this purpose. They are DTC clear, PCM reset, and CKP pattern c l ear. DTC clear command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and readiness codes. This must be done with the HDS after reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting. The PCM reset command erases all stored DTCs, freeze data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes, and all specific data to correct the system except CKP pattern. If the CKP pattern data in the PCM was cleared, you must do the CKP pattern learn procedure, The CKP pattern clear command erases only CKP pattern data. This command is for repair of a misfire or the CKP sensor.

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), and wait 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS from the DLC. 5. Do the PCM id l e learn procedure (see page 11-282).

CKP Pattern Clear/CKP Pattern Learn Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS) 1, Connect the HDS to the data l ink connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver’s side of the dashboard.

*1: Continental PCM

Scan Tool Clear Command If you are using a generic scan too l to clear commands, be aware that there is only one setting for clearing the PCM, and it clears all commands at the same time (CKP pattern learn, idle learn, readiness codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and DTCs), After you c l ear all commands, you then need to do these procedures, in this order: PCM idle l earn procedure (see page 11-282); CKP pattern learn procedure; test-drive to set readiness codes to complete (see page 11-71),

DTC Clear 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), and wait 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS from the DLC.

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM and other vehic l e systems. If it doesn't go to the DLC circu i t troubleshooting (see page 11-209). 4. Sel ect CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS. 5. Select CRANK PATTERN CLEAR, and clear the CKP pattern, 6. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNI NG with the HDS, and fo l l ow the screen prompts.

Learn Procedure (without the HDS)

PCM Manufacturer Indication

1. Start the engine. Hol d the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on.

1. Remove the auxil i ary under-hood fuse/relay box (A) from the stay (B), then remove the bo l t (C),

2. Test-drive the vehic l e on a l evel road: Decelerate (with the throttle fu ll y closed) from an engine speed of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the transmission in D. 3. Repeat step 2 several times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 30 seconds.

How to End a Troubleshooting Session (required after any troubleshooting) 1. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 2. Do the PCM id l e learn procedure (see page 11-282). 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.

2. Remove the bracket (A), then free the A/C discharge l i ne (B) from the c l ip (C) and remove the A/C suction l i ne mounting bracket bo lt (D). Keihln PCM

NOTE: The PCM is part of the immobilizer system. If you rep l ace the PCM, you must use the HDS to instruct the new P C M and the immobilizer-keyless contro l unit to recognize each other's unique serial code,

(cont'd)

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd) Continental PCM

How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM Connectors NOTE: The PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP system for up to an hour after the i gnition switch is turned to LOCK (0). Jumping the SCS line after turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) cancels this function. Disconnecting the PCM during this function, without jumping the SCS line first, can damage the PCM. 1. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 2. Remove the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box (A) from the stay (B), then remove the bolt (C).

3. Remove the cover (E). 4. Check the l abel (F) on the PCM (G) to determine if the PCM was manufactured by Keihin or Continental. 5. After checking the label , install the cover.

3. Remove the bracket (D), then free the A/C discharge l ine (E) from the clip (F) and remove the A/C suction line mounting bracket bolt (G).

6. Connect one side of the patch cord terminals (A) to a commercially available digital multimeter (B), and connect the other side of the terminals (C) to a commercially available banana jack (Pomona Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent) (D).

7. Gently insert the pin probe (male) at the terminal test port from the terminal side. Do not force the tips into the terminals.

INOTICE i 4. Remove the cover (H), then disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C. NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols fA = a B=A, C=C)) embossed on them for identification. 5. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the PCM connector, use the terminal test port (A) above the terminal you need to check.

• For accurate results, always use the pin probe (male). • To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do not insert test equipment probes, paper clips, or other substitutes. Damaged terminals cause a poor connection and an incorrect measurement. • Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections.

(cont'd)

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd) Substituting the PCM

8, Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Special Tools Required • Honda Diagnosti c System (HDS) tablet tester • Honda I nterface Module (HIM) and an iN workstation with the latest HDS software version • HDS pocket tester • GNA600 and an iN workstation with the latest HDS software version • MVCI unit with the latest control modu l e (CM) update software installed

7. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS, 8, Remove the auxiliary under-hood fuse/re l ay box (A) from the stay (B), then remove the bolt (C).

Any one of the above updating tools can be used. NOTE: • Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM during troub l eshooting procedures. • Make sure the HDS/iN workstation or the MVCI has the latest HDS software version. 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) l ocated under the driver's side of the dashboard.

9. Remove the bracket (D), then free the A/C discharge line (E) from the clip (F) and remove the A/C suction l ine mounting bracket bo l t (G). Keihin

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM and other vehic l e systems. If it doesn’t, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-209). If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, then clean the throttle body (see page 11-331) after substituting the PCM. 4. Select the INSPECTI ON MENU with the HDS. 5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and fo l low the screen prompts. NOTE; If the TP POSITION CHECK ind i cates FAILED, continue this procedure.

PCM

20. If the TP POSITI ON CHECK fa i l ed i n step 5, clean the throttle body (see page 11-331).

Continental PCM

21. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227). 22. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 23. Do the CKP pattern cl ear/CKP pattern learn procedure.

OBD Status

10. Remove the cover (H), then disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C. NOTE; PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A=[IL B = A , C =0) embossed on them for identification. 11. Keihin PCM: Remove the bolts (I), then remove the PCM ( J ) , 12. Continenta l P C M : Remove the nuts (K), then remove the P C M (J). 13. Continenta l PCM: Remove the spacers (L). 14. Install a known-good PCM in the reverse order of removal. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NOTE; DTC P0630 (VI N Not Programmed or Mismatch) may be stored because the VIN has not been programmed into the PCM; ignore i t, and continue this procedure. 16. Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. 17. Sel ect the

MMOBl

SYSTEM with the HDS.

18. Enter the immobilizer PCM code that you got from the iN, and use the PCM replacement procedure in the IMMOBI MENU of the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 19. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

The OBD status shows the current system status of each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is used to see if the repair was successful ly completed. The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are disp l ayed as: • PASSED; The on board diagnosis is successfu l ly f i nished. • FAI LED: The on board diagnosis has finished but failed, • EXECUTING: The vehic l e is in enab l e criteria conditions for the DTC and the on board diagnosis is running. ■ • NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosi s was running but i s out of the enable conditions of the DTC. • OUT OF CONDITION: The vehic l e has stayed out of the enable conditions of the DTC.

DTC Troubleshooting Index DTC (MIL indication!

Two Drive Cycle Detecti on

D e te c tio n Ite m

M IL

N ote

P0101 (50)

Mass A ir F lo w (MAF) S e n s o r C ircu it R a n g e/P erform a nce Probh

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see p a u ii 11 76)

P0102 (50)

M ass A ir F lo w (M AF) S e n so r C ircuit L o w V oltag e

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 1 1-77)

P0103 (50)

M ass A ir F lo w (MAF) S e n s o r C ircuit H igh V oltag e

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-79)

P0107 (3)

M a n ifo ld A b s o lu te Pressure (MAP) S e n s o r C ircuit L o w V oltag e

ON

bleshooting se page 11-81)

P0108 (3)

M a n ifo ld A b s o lu te Pressure (MAP) S e n s o r C ircu it H igh V oltag e

ON

bleshooting (see page 11-82)

P0111 (10)

Intake A ir T e m p e ra tu re (IAT) S e n so r C ircu it R a n g e/P erform a nce Prob’

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11 -84)

Intake A ir T e m p e ra tu re (lAT) S enso r C irc u it L o w V o lta g e

ON

DTC Troubleshooting 3e pa

Intake A ir T e m p e ra tu re (IAT) S enso r C irc u it H igh V o lta g e

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11 87)

E ngine C o o la n t T e m p e ra tu re (ECT) S e n so r 1 C ircuit R a n g e/P erform a nce P rob le m

ON

DTC Troubleshooting 3e pa

P0117 (6)

E ngine C o o la n t T e m p e ra tu re (ECT) S e n s o r 1 C irc u it L o w V o lta g e

ON

DTC Troubleshooting 5e pa

P0118 (6)

E ngine C o o la n t T e m p e ra tu re (ECT) S e n so r 1 C ircuit H igh Voltac '

ON

DTC Troubleshooting ?e page 11-91)

T h ro ttle P osition (TP) S e n so r A C irc u it L o w V oltag e

ON

DTC Troubleshooting e page 11-233)

T h ro ttle P osition (TP) S e n so r A C irc u it High V oltag e

ON

DTC Troubleshooting e page 11-234)

E ngine C o o la n t T e m p e ra tu re (ECT) S e n s o r 1 M a lfu n c tio n /S lo w Respor

ON

DTC Troubleshooting 3e pa

P0128 (87)

Cooling System Malfunction

ON

DTC T rojblesho otin g ?e page 11-94)

P0133 (157)

Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Malfunction/Slo w Respor

ON

DTC Troubleshooting ?e page 11-95)

P0134 (151)

Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensot 1} H eater System Malfunction

ON

bleshooting ?e page 11-96)

P0135 (151)

Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) H eater Circuit Malfunction

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-98)

P0112 (10)

o

P0113 (10) P0116 (86)

P0122 (7)

>

~ ^ ——

P0123 (7) P0125 (88)

r r ^

P0137 (161)

'j

Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H 0 2 S (Bank 1, Sensor 2)) Circuit Low Voltage

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-102)

P0138 (161)

O

Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H 0 2 S (Bank 1, Sensor 2)) Circuit High Voltage

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (boe page 11-104)

P0139 (161)

Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H 0 2 S (Bank 1, Sensor 2)) Slow Response

ON

OFC Troubleshooting (r;re page 11-106)

P0141 (163)

Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H 0 2 S (Bank 1, Sensor 2)) Heater Circuit Malfunction

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11 -107)

P0153 (158)

'

Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Malfunction/Slo w Response

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-95)

P0154 (152)

o

Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-96)

Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Heater Circuit M a lfu n c f

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11 -98)

P0155 (152)

NOTE: The ab o v e DTCs are indic a te d w h e n th e PGM-FI sy ste m is selected w ith the HDS. S o m e a u to m a tic tra n s m is s io n DTCs cause th e M IL to c o m e on. If th e MIL is on and no DTCs are indic a ted in the PGM-FI s ys te m , select th e A /T syste m , and check fo r a u to m a tic t ra n s m is s io n DTCs. *: These DTCs are indica ted by a b lin k in g MIL when the SCS line is ju m p e d w ith th e HDS. S o m e DTCs do no t cause the M IL to blin k w h e n th e SCS line is ju m p e d . The last fo u r ch a racte rs o f these DTCs are s h o w n in th e g a u g e display.

DTC (MIL indication*) P0157 (182)

Two Drive Cycle Detection

O O

Detection Item

M IL

lote

Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H 0 2 S (Bank 2, Sensor 2)) Circuit Low Voltage

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-102)

Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H 0 2 S (Bank 2 , Sensor 2)) Circuit High Voltage

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-104)

P0159 (162)

Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H 0 2 S (Bank 2, Sensor 2)) S low Response

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-106)

P0161 (164)

Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H 0 2 S (Bank 2 , Sensor 2)) Heater Circuit Malfunction

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-107)

P0171 (153)

Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System Too Lean

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-110)

Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System Too Rich

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-110)

Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System Too Lean

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-110)

Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System Too Rich

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-110)

P0222 (7)

Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-238)

P0223 (7)

Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit High V o l tage

ON

DTC Tro u b l eshooting (see page 11-237)

P0300 (211) and any combination of the following: P0301 (71) P0302 (72) P0303 (73) P0304 (74) P0305 (75) P0306 (70)

Random Misfire Detected

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-112)

No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-114)

No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-114)

P0303 (73)

No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-114)

P 0 3 0 4 (74)

No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-114)

No. 5 C yl inder Misfire Detected

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-114)

No. 6 Cylinder Misfire Detected

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-114)

Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-120)

P0335 (4)

Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor No Signal

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-123)

P0339 (4)

Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption

ON

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 11-125)

P0351 (71)

No. 1 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction

ON

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 11-126)

P01S8 (162)

P0172 (153) P0174 (154) P0175 (154)

P0301 (71) P0302 (72)

P0305 (75) P0306 (76) P0325 (23)

O o o

o o

o o o

NOTE; The above DTCs are indicated w hen the PG M -F I system is selected with the HDS. Som e autom atic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to com e on. If the M IL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PG M -F I system, select the A /T system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs. *: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking M IL w hen the SCS line is ju m p ed with the HDS. S om e DTCs do not cause the M IL to blink w hen the SCS line is jum ped. The last four characters of these DTCs are shown in the gauge display.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd) DTC (MIL indication')

Two Drive Cycle Det ect ion

Detection Item

M IL

N ote

P0352 (72)

No. 2 Cyl inder I gnition Coil Circuit Malfunction

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-126)

P0353 (73)

No. 3 Cylinder I gnition Coil Circuit Malfunction

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-126)

P0354 (74)

No, 4 Cylinder I gnition Coil Circuit Malfunction

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-128)

P0355 (75)

No. 5 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-128)

P0356 (76)

No. 8 Cyl inder I gnition Coil Circuit Malfunction

ON

DTC T roubleshoot i ng (see page 11 126)

P0365 (8)

Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Circuit No S ign al

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-130)

P0369 (8)

Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Circuit Intermittent I nterruption

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-132)

Exhaust Gas Recircul ation (EGR) System Leak Detected

ON

DTC Troubleshooting e page 11-343)

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Insufficient Flow

ON

DTC Troubleshooting e pat

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Circuit Range/Performance Probl em

ON

DTC Troubleshooting e page 11-345)

Exhaust Gas Recircul ation (EGR) Valve Position Sensor Circuit High Voltage

ON

DTC Troubleshooting e page 11-348)

Rear Bank Catalyst System Efficiency Bel o w Threshold (Bank 1)

ON

DTC Troubleshooting e page 11-337)

Front Bank Catalyst System Efficiency Bel o w Threshol d (Bank 2)

ON

DTC Troubleshooting e page 11-337)

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge V a l ve Circuit M a l functio

ON

DTC T ro u bl eshooting e page 11-353)

Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance ProbU

ON

DTC Troubleshooting e page 11-383)

Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

ON

DTC Troubleshooting e page 11-364)

Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-367)

P0455 (90)

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Large Leak Detected

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-370)

P0456 (90)

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Very Small Leak Detected

ON

DTC T ro u bl eshooting (see page 11-370)

P0457

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detected/Fuel Fill Cap Loose or Missing

OFF

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-374)

P0461

Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Range/Performance Problem

OFF

DTC Troubleshooting e page 11-285)

Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Low Voltage

OFF

DTC Troubleshooting ( s e e page 11-285)

P0463

Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit High Voltage

OFF

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-238)

P0496 (92)

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System High Purge Flow Detected

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-375)

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Low Purge Flow Detected

ON

DTC Troubleshooting e page 11-378)

J

P0400 (80) P 0 4 0 1 (80)

O

P0404 (12) P0406 (12)

o

P0420 (165) P0430 (166)

o

P0443 (92) P0451 (91)

>

P0452 (91)

'

P04S3 (91)

o

P0462

P 0 4 9 7 (90)

.

o

Q

NOTE; The above DTCs are indicated w hen the PG M -FI system is sel ected with the HDS. S om e automatic transmission DTCs cause the M I L to com e on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, sel ect the A /T system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs. *: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL w hen the SCS line is jum ped with the HDS. S om e DTCs do not cause the M I L to blink when the SCS line is jum ped. The last four characters of these DTCs are shown in the gauge display.

Detection Item

M IL

Note

Evaporative E m i ssion (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut V a l ve Circuit Low Voltage

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-379)

Evaporative Emissi on (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Circui t High Voltage

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-382)

Idl e Control System RPM Lower than Expected

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-274)

I d l e C ontrol System RPM Higher than Expected

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-275)

Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance Problem

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-133)

Col d Start Ignition Tim ing Control System Performance Problem

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-135)

P0560*3

Powertrain Control M o du le (PCM) Power Source Circuit Unexpected Voltage

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-138)

P0582

Charging System Low Voltage

OFF

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-139)

Powertrain Control M o du le (PCM) Power Source Circuit Unexpected Voltage

OFF

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-140)

P0602 (196)

Powertrain Control M odule (PCM) P rogram m ing Error

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-142)

P080A (131)

Powertrain Control M odule (PCM) Internal Control M odule Malfunction

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-143)

P0615

Starter Cut Relay STRLD Circuit Malfunction

OFF

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-143)

P0827 (169)

Fuel Pump Control M odule System Malfunction

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-290)

P082F (131)

Powertrain Control M o du le (PCM) I nternal Control M odule Keep Alive M e m o ry (KAM) Error

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-147)

PO830 (139)

V I N Not Program m ed or Mismatch

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-148)

P0641 (133)

Sensor Reference V o ltage A Malfunction

ON

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 11-149)

P0651 (134)

Sensor Reference V o ltage B Malfunction

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-150)

P0885 (135)

Powertrain Control M o d u l e (PCM) Power Control Circuit/Internal Circuit Malfunction

ON

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 11-152)

Intake M a n ifo l d Tuning (IM T) V a l ve Stuck in High RPM Position

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-322)

P1078 (108)

Intake M a n ifo l d Tuning (IM T) Valve Stuck in Low RPM Position

ON

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 11-327)

P1109 (13)*

Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Out of Range High

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-153)

Engine C oo l ant Tem perature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Range/Performance Problem

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-153)

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Lower Than Expected

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-155)

Manifold Absolute Pressure (M AP) Sensor Signal Higher Than Expected

ON

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 11-156)

DTC (MI L indication*)

Two Drive Cycle Detection

P0499 (117)

■) O

P0506 (14)

(

P0438 (117)

P0507 (14) P050A (167) P050B (167)

P0563

P1077 (108)

'»

o o


A32 SCS

To NAVIGATION UNIT (with navigation), CENTER INFORMATION DISPLAY (without navigation), HEADLIGHT LEVELING CONTROL U NIT (with headlight leveling system)

VSSO UT A30 < To IMMOBILIZER UNIT

S-NET5V A46 < LG3A41


B47 F-CAN B H

PSPSW A38
B48 F-CAN B L

-o..c J

□

) C45 OPSW OIL PRESSURE SWITCH TP SENSOR

j— THROTTLE ACTUATOR THROTTLE BODY

*2; '10-11 models

* B18VCC5

VCC3 A24
B17TPSA

A P S A A 18
B26TPSB

S G 3A 2 6
B33 SG5

V CC 4A 25
C2 ETCSM +

A P S BA19
< 26 27 28 ■ 22 23 24 i 29 30 31 32 1 / / / | 3 6 37 38 39 | 40 | 41 42 | 4 3 144 |y/} 46

PCM B (A ) (49P)

J 1I 2 T i

T T j T j T f f 8 | 9 110 |_ 11 12 13 14115 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 > < 25 26 / / a 29 30 31 32 33 34 35(36 37 38 39 | 40 | 41 l4 7 |4 8 |/1

'X

42l43T44|«T«

TERMINAL LOCATIONS

PCM C

(O)

(49P)

J 1 I 2 11 12 / 14115 16 17|18 23 24 25 i / 31 32|33 34 35(36 / / 140 | 41 4 2 143 144 | 45 | 46

8 | 9 110 | ■ 19 20 21 26 27 28 1 37 38 / 47 4 8 149 |

1

PCM Circuit Diagram PCM 5V

T L

- YEL/RED -

■ YEL/RED •

X

- GRN/RED - GRN/RED MAP B34

' G R N /W H T -

_ r

MAP SENSOR Cl 08

■ GRN/WHT

r f

J

YEL/RED

-

C32

- RED/WHT -

■ RED/WHT -

- GRN/YEL ECTSENSOR 1

TL

VCC2

EGRP

• YEL/BLU •

■ WHT/BLK EGR VALVE POSITION SENSOR

12 V

CIO

- YEL/BLU - WHT/BLK ■ - GRN/YEL • BLU/RED -

- BLU/RED y e l/ BLU

A C45 OPSW

r~

0

-B L K -—

-

0

BLU/YEL •

BLU/YEL ■ OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

C105

*8

QMS *7: Keihin PCM *8: Continental PCM

3

H S U

1

System Description (cont'd)

m m IGPLS1

- BLK/WHT *

21 20 18 19 22

B23 -Y E L/G R N ■

-Y E L/G R N -B L K — No. 1 IGNITION COIL - BLK/WHT ■

B30

►T o SPARK PLUG

■ BLU/RED -

IGPLS2

ICM .B L K —

No. 2 IGNITION COIL - BLK/WHT - WHT/BLU

it

IGPLS3 - BLK —

^SPARK PLUG

icm

No. 3 IGNITION COIL - BLK/WHT ■B R N ■

-B R N —

*S P A R K PLUG

IGPLS4 -B L K —

?/h

No. 4 IGNITION COIL - BLK/WHT •

B11

- BLK/RED - BLK — No. 5 IGNITION COIL ■ BLK/WHT ■ BRN/W HT ■

■ BRN/W HT ■

.To SPARK SPA PLUG

I

■ BLK —

No. 6 IGNITION COIL

PG2

- BLK

BLK ■ BLK - BLK -B LK

20

■ BLK

- BLK/WHT ■ - BLK/WHT • - BLK/WHT ■ - BLK/WHT « . BLK/WHT . - BLK/WHT ■

- BLK/WHT •

■ WHT C101

” 0" Cl 52

KNOCK SENSOR

1 ”

BRN /YEL

0

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd)

EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE

If ENGINE M O U N T CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

X

FRONT SECONDARY H02S (BANK 2, SENSOR 2)

*7: Keihin PCM *8: Continental PCM

NOTE: Check the label on the PCM- to see if it was made by Keihin or Continental. Refer to the General Troubleshooting Information for more details.

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd)

k

5

C21 LSA

LSB

h

L .

hC

B21

B43 LSD

G101

h

L .

C20 SHA

G101

• BLU/YEL SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

€28

ifE S SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

h £1

C9

itEjS

- GRN/W HT

SHC

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C

*3 1

PLA

• YEL LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE A C105

Cl 04

BLK

€201

_

L

A36 31 -------------- G R N ----------- — SUPP A37 SDNP

■B L U -

CABLE REEL

G101

■ BLU •

-B LK

x G501

PADDLE SHIFTER + (UPSHIFT SWITCH)

-G RN /B LK ■

-G R N -

30

BLK

9 —

10

YEL/W HT —

— G RN/W H T—

4

- W HT-

5 PADDLE SHIFTER — (DOW NSHIFT SWITCH)

1

System Description (cont'd)

C106 C101 ! A18 ATPP

■G R N -

—BLU/W HT •

13l

■B LU /B LK

_

■

C25

■ RED/BLK ■

- WHT -

ATPR C28 ATPN C17 ATPD

-Y E L /G R N

—

s a

N ^

——

K n

,

D -O ’

«

— YEL —

• RED/BLK

p R

— WHT —

S «€»/

• RED/WHT ■ YEL/GRN

• BLU/YEL

-

— BLK — C46 ■ YEL-

TRANSM ISSIO N RANGE SWITCH

ATPS C19

-R E D /W H T «

ATPRVS C18

J;— PNK—^ ror\~7— I

'■i n i C101

PNK

BLU/YEL

ATPFWD

. X

BLU/BLK

■ BLU/BLK

1

TRA NSM ISSIO N FLUID _ PRESSURE SWITCH A — (2ND CLUTCH) • B L U /W H T -

X

TRANSM ISSIO N FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH B (3RD CLUTCH) ■ BLU/YEL 0P4SW TRA NSM ISSIO N FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH C (4TH CLUTCH)

J

L

X X

1

■ W HT/GRN *

-

- W HT/GRN TRA NSM ISSIO N F PRESSURE SWITCH D (5TH CLUTCH)

C31 ■ WHT/BLK ■ 0P6SW TRA NSM ISSIO N FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH E (6TH CLUTCH) €35 WHT/BLU

■ WHT/BLU ■ LINE PRESSURE SWITCH

■ BLU/YEL - GRN/YEL ATF TEMPERATURE SEN SOR.

*8: C o ntinental PCM NOTE: Check the label on the PCM to see if it w as m a d e by Keihin or Continental. Refer to the G eneral Troub leshootin g Info rm ation for m o re details.

(cont'd)

System Descriptio n (co nt'd)

0 0 0

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX RELAY CONTROL MODULE ---------- ORN f 13

YEL /BLK

1 4 j1 5

— GRY

ORN

_____

H6

- WHT -

[Si RELAY BLOCK

|-----H|-rJ HC4

-Y E L /G R N —

I--------

J |G1 IG1ETCS

C206 A4

—iFTo—I —'TRP—|

■W H T — - LT BLU -

WHT ■

A/C CONDENSER FAN RELAY

FANL

% C212

rm

ORN - LT BLU ■

- sts3

- PNK —

2 4 1 23 PNK

-5 T 5 -I €207

f

t PNK

■R E D • ■P N K ' A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY

[i] ACC

-sysJ . PUR -

'iT

FANH A6

-5 T 5 -) - 'W - | ETCS CONTROL RELAY

A13

A5

PGM-FI MA IN RELAY 1

—

■ ORN■P U R -

RADIATOR FAN RELAY

—!

PGM-FI SUBRELAY

-G R N -

MRLY A29

-ST HsT

ETCSRLY A40

-6 T s J

•BLU ■ RED ■

■P U R —

SUBRLY

IGNITION COIL RELAY

- LT BLU ■ FAN CONTROL RELAY

U N D E R -H O O D F U S E /R EL A Y BOX:

■O R N ■

( D N o . 7 - f B FAN T IM E R {7.5 A) - PUR .

(2) No. 8 IGP (1 5 A) (3) N o . 10 D B W (ETCS) (15 A) ® N o . 11 A /F S E N S O R ( A F H T + ) (1 5 A)

- PUR ■

© N o . 9 IG N C O I L + (15 A)

E5 ■G R N ■ ■ BLU ■ E13 ■R E D ■ C206

.51 GRN

C2 ■G R N ■

c

(cont’d)

System Descriptio n (co nt'd) BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Brake pedal pressed: closed Brake pedal released: open Brake pedal pressed: open Brake pedal released: closed

IG2 CUT RELAY M A IN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX: © No, 3 R/Bl (30 A) © No. 7 BACK UP FI ECU (7.5 A)*8 Cf) No. 11 + B STOP & HORN (15 A) © N o . 3IG 1 M A IN (50 A) © No. 4 + B BACK UP/ACC M AIN (40 A) (6) No. 1 BATTERY (120 A) UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX: © N o . 30 A/C (10 A) © N o . 18AC G (10 A) © N o . 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) © N o . 10 IGN SOL (15 A) © No. 21 METER (7.5 A) (12) No. 7 BACK UP (10 A) AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH FUSE HOLDER 2 i) No. 1 STS (7.5 A) AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH FUSE HOLDER 1 © No. 1 STRLD (7.5 A) *: AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH RELAY BLOCK A *7: Keihin PCM *8: Continental PCM

IGNITION SWITCH IG1 HOT in ON (II) and START (III)

NOTE: Check the label on the PCM to see if it was made by Keihin or Continental. Refer to the General T roublesho o ting Inform ation fo r m ore details.

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd)

7 9 8 10 4

[a

p

][

ar]

[a s ] [

a t

|[

ag

]

1W H T ' WHT* WHT-

“ WHT WHT

I

WHT

I

I

U

- RED

- RED-

■W H T

RED-

2

■ RED RED-

B5 F-CAN A L

0608

E-PRETENSIONER UNIT

■W H T W HT-

JL

F-CAN A H

! RED-

11 7

2 F-CAN A L

Y A W RATE-LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION SENSOR

WHT-

1 3

F-CAN A H

• RED

W HT-

F-CAN A H A8 F-CAN A L GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

W HT-

JL W H T F-CAN A H

10 W HT12

2

W HTSTEERING ANGLE SENSOR

JL R E D 1 2

WHT

RED-

F-CAN A H

RED-

RED

JL RED -

-O R N

JL R E D 6

V SA MODULATORCONTROL UNIT

- RED _

15 K-LINE

RED-W H T ■

_

38 F-CAN A L

C304

wht -

- ORN ■

A17 F-CAN A H A16 F-CAN A L A18 SRS UNIT

■ WHT "

4

..._.._ _ ..........t ..................... ..... ....._A7_ * F-CAN A H 1

3

....._.._._ ......_L...... „ r n ._ .._ .. A6_ F-CAN A L

C616 - RED -

*1: *2: *4: *5: *6;

W ith n a v ig a ti o n W ith o u t navigation W ith ACC W ith active d a m p e r U S A m o d e l w ith AcuraLink

_

_

C520

£

*1: With navigation *2: Without navigation *4: With ACC

(cont'd)

System Description (co nt'd) PGM-FI System

Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor

The programmed fuel injection (PGM-FI) system is a sequentia l m ultiport fuel injection system.

The CMP sensor detects the position of the No.1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fue l injection to each cylinder.

Alternator Control The alternator signa l s the PCM during charging. The PCM then cotrols the voltage generated at the alternator according to the electrical load determined by the electrical l oad detector (ELD) and the driving mode. This reduces engine l oad to improve fue l economy.

TERMINAL

Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay When the PCM receives a demand for cooling from the A/C system, it de l ays the compressor from being energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth transition to the A/C mode. WAG NET

Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor The A/F sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The A/F sensor is insta l led upstream of the warm up three way catalytic converter (WU-TWC), and it sends signals to the PCM which varies the duration of fue l injection accordingly.

Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the PCM to determine ignition timing, tim ing for the fue l injection of each cylinder, and engine misfire detection.

WAG NET

ZiRCONIA ELEMENT

/ TERMINAL

Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor is inside the PCM. It converts atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that is used by the PCM to modify the basic duration of the fuel injection discharge.

TO-RiNG

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 and 2 ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent resistors (thermistors). The resistance decreases as the engine coo l ant temperature increases.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes) The vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If the vehic l e's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has been reset, these codes are reset. I n some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the test, or the test cannot be finished. To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), but do not start the engine. The M I L w i l l come on for 15—20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are comp l ete. If it flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are not set to complete. To set each code, drive the vehic l e or run the engine as described in the procedures (see page 11-71).

Ignition Timing Control The PCM contains the memory for basic ignition timing at various engine speeds and manifold abso l ute pressures. It a l so adjusts the timing according to engine coolant temperature.

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor converts manifo l d absolute pressures into electrical signa l s that are" sent to the PCM.

Injector Timing and Duration The PCM contains the memory for basic discharge duration at various engine speeds and manifo l d pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being read out from the memory, is further modified by signals sent from various sensors to obtain the fina l discharge duration. By monitoring long term fuel trim, the PCM detects long term malfunctions in the fue l system and sets diagnostic troub l e codes (DTCs) if needed. Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock.

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor

Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor This sensor detects output shaft (countershaft) speed.

The mass air flow (MAF) sensor/irrtake air temperature (IAT) sensor contains a hot wire, a cold film, and a thermistor, The sensor is in the intake air passage. The resistance of the hot wire, the cold fi l m, and the thermistor changes due to intake air temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set temperature. The current is converted to vo l tage in the control circuit, then output to the PCM,

T E R M IN A L

Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) The secondary H02S detects the oxygen content i n the exhaust gas downstream of the warm up three way catalytic converter (WU-TWC), and sends signals to the P C M . To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The PCM compares the H02S output with the A/F sensor output to determine cata l yst efficiency. A secondary H02S is insta l led in each bank, downstream of the WU-TWC.

ELEM EN T

SENSOR TE R M IN A LS

Starter Control System Diagram The starter control system controls the starter motor. • When the ignition switch is turned to START (111), the PCM app l ies current to starter cut re l ay 1 (STR) and starter cut relay 2, then battery voltage is applied to the starter motor to run it. • Once the ignition switch is released, the PCM keeps the starter motor running until the engine starts. If the PCM detects that the engine starts, the PCM stops applying current to the relays, and the starter motor stops. • If you turn the ignition sw i tch to START (111) while the engine is running, the starter motor does not operate. • In these cases, the PCM stops the starter motor: - After the starter motor operates for 10 seconds (to prevent the starter motor from overheating). - If the engine rpm i s too high during starter motor operation. • If there is a prob l em with the starter control system, a message appears on the gauge disp l ay. When the warning message is terned on, the vehicle can on l y be started by turning and holding the ignition switch in the start position until the engine.

IG1 MAIM

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Electronic Throttle Control System

Throttle Body

The throttle is e l ectronica l ly controll ed. Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of the system.

The throttle body is a single-barre l side draft type. The lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine coo l ant from the cylinder head to prevent icing of the thrott l e plate.

Id l e contro l : When the engine is idling, the PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed according to engine l oads.

Acceleration control; When the accelerator pedal is pressed, the PCM opens the thrott l e va lve based on the accel erator pedal position (APP) sensor signa l . Cruise contro l : The PCM controls the thrott l e actuator to maintain the set speed when cruise control is operating. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator.

Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal vo l tage to the PCM which then contro l s the thrott l e position.

Electronic Throttle Control System Diagram The electron i c throttle contro l system consi sts of the throttle actuator, throttle position (TP) sensor A/B, accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor A/B, the el ectronic thrott l e contro l system (ETCS) contro l relay, and the PCM.

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) VTEC System • The VTEC system changes the cam profi l e to correspond to eng i ne speed. It maximizes torque at low engine speed and output at high engine speed. The l ow l ift cam i s used at l ow engine speeds, and the high lift cam is used at h i gh engine speeds. • The intake valve side has primary and secondary rocker arms. These rocker arms are l ocked and separated to change the cam profil e by switching the oil passages. Rol l er rockers are used to minimize mechanical friction.

ROCKER A R M

• The VTEC system oi l pressure is switched by the rocker arm o i l control valve changing the hydrau l ic circuit The rocker arm oil contro l valve is contro l led by the rocker arm oil control solenoid. The rocker arm oil pressure switch detects VTEC system oi l pressure and sends this information to the PCM. ENGINE SPEED LOW HIGH

ROCKER A B M OIL CONTROL SOLENOID OFF ON

INTAKE WAIVE LIFT LOW iIGH

VTEC System Operation A t low engine speed The rocker arm oil control solenoid is turned off by the PCM. Oil pressure from the rocker arm oi l control va l ve does not enter the rocker shaft. The intake primary and secondary rocker arms are separated by a return spri ng and lifted by the l ow lift cam l obe.

System Descriptio n (cont'd) A t high engine speed The rocker arm oil control solenoid is turned on by the PCM. Oil pressure from the rocker arm contro l so l enoid enters into the intake secondary rocker arm via the rocker shaft, and it moves the VTEC switching piston in the intake secondary rocker arm. This causes the VTEC switching piston to s l ide into the primary rocker arm, l ocking the pr i mary and secondary rocker arms together. Both intake rocker arms are lifted by the high lift cam lobe.

Idle Control System

Fuel Supply System

When the engine is cold, i f the A/C compressor i s on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging, the PCM controls current to the thrott l e actuator to maintain the correct idle speed.

Fuel Cutoff Control

Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position sw i tch signals the PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Power Steering Pressure fPSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the PCM when the power steering load is h i gh.

During deceleration w i th the throttle valve c l osed, current to the injectors i s cut off to improve fue l economy at engine speeds over 850 rpm. Fuel cutoff control also occurs when the engine speed exceeds 6,800 rpm, regard l ess of the position of the throttle valve, to protect the engine from over-revving. When the vehicle is stopped, the PCM cuts the fuel at engine speeds over 5,000 rpm. On a cold engine, fuel cut occurs at a l ower engine speed. Fuel Pump Control When the ignition switch is turned to ON (II ), the PCM grounds PGM-FI main relay 2 which feeds current to the fuel pump contro l module. The PCM sends a signal to the fuel pump contro l module to operate the fuel pump for 2 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. When the engine starts, the fuel pump speed is control l ed in four l evels by the fuel pump control modu l e. The PCM selects the fuel pump speed based on calculating the injector activation time and engine speed and sends a operation command signa l to the fuel pump control module. This operation decrease fue l pump noise at low engine speed. PGM-FI Main Relays 1 and 2 PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition switch i s turned to ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main rel ay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supp l y power to the fue l pump control module for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II ), and when the engine is cranking or running.

System Description (cont'd) Intake Air Sfstem Intake Manifold Tuning (IMT) Valve Engine power i s adjusted by opening and closing the intake manifo l d tuning (IMT) valve. When the valve is closed, there is high torque at low engine speed. When the valve i s open, there is high torque at high engine speed. The intake manifo l d tuning (I MT) actuator contains a sensor that detects the IMT valve position and sends it to the PCM.

Catalytic Converter System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System

Warm Up/Three Way Catalytic Converter (WU-TWC) and Under-Floor Three Way Catalytic Converter (Under-Floor TWC)

Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of the system.

The WU-TWC/Under-Floor TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (C02), nitrogen (N2), and water vapor.

EGR Vaiw© The EGR valve lowers peak combustion temperatures and reduces oxides of nitrogen emissions (NOx) by recircu l ating exhaust gas through the intake manifold and into the combustion chambers.

WU-TWC

UNDER-FLOOR TWC

VEHICLE

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram The EGR system reduces ox i des of n i trogen (NOx) emissions by recircu l ating exhaust gas through the EGR pipe and the intake manifold, and i nto the combustion chambers. Routing the exhaust gas through the EGR pipe helps to prevent carbon deposits from forming in the intake manifo l d and the throttle body. The PCM maintains the ideal EGR valve positions for various operating conditions, The EGR va l ve position sensor detects the amount of EGR valve lift and sends it to the PCM. The PCM then compares it with the idea l lift in its memory (based on signa l s sent from other sensors). If there is any difference between the two, the PCM cuts current to the EGR va lve.

r5 3 Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System

The PCV va l ve prevents b l ow-by gases from escaping into the atmosphere by venting them into the intake manifo l d.

Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of the system. EVAP Canister The EVAP canister temporari l y stores fuel vapor from the fuel tank unti l it can be purged from the EVAP canister into the engine and burned. EVAP Canister Purge Valve When the engine coolant temperature is below 140 °F (60 °C), the PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge valve which cuts vacuum to the EVAP canister. OUT

t

^ ■ i : BLOW-BY VAPOR < J z i : FRESH AiK

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor

EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve

The FTP sensor converts fue l tank absolute pressure into an electrical input to the PCM.

The EVAP canister vent shut valve is on the EVAP canister.

SENSOR UNIT TERMINAL

The EVAP canister vent shut va l ve contro l s the venti ng of the EVAP canister.

O-RiNG

O-RING

V A LVE

O-RiNG

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram The EVAP controls minimize the amount of fuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor from the fue l tank is temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged from the canister into the engine and burned. • The EVAP cani ster is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold. The purging vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge va l ve, which operates whenever the engine coo l ant temperature is above 140 °F (60 °C). • During refueling, the fue l tank vapor contro l valve opens from pressure in the fuel tank and feeds the fue l vapor to the EVAP canister. EVAP CANISTER V E N T S H U T VA LVE

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Fuel Cap Warning Message

How to clear the message with the HDS

The PCM w i l l detects a loose or missing fue l fi l l cap as an evaporative system l eak and alerts the driver by showing a warning message in the gauge display.

Procedure

The first time a leak is detected a TI GHTEN FUEL CAP message appears in the gauge display (A). To scroll to another message, press the select/reset button. The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message appears each time you restart the engine until the system turns the message off. Turn the engine off, then replace or tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks at least once.

1. Tighten the fuel fill cap unti l it clicks, 2. Clear the Pending DTC with the HDS. 3. Verify there is no leak by doing the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.

How to clear the message without the HDS Procedure 1. Tighten the fuel fil l cap unti l it c l icks. 2. Start the engine, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK ( 0 ). 3. Repeat step 2 two more times.

How to Set Readiness Codes Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes)

Catalytic Converter Monitor and Readiness Code

The vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has been reset, these readiness codes are reset to incomplete. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete, If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fai l the emission test, or the test cannot be finished.

NOTE: • During the procedure, do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I ) or LOCK (0). • All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected, if DTCs have been cl eared, or i f the PCM is reset with the HDS. • Low ambient temperatures or excessive stop-and-go traffic may increase the drive time needed to switch the readiness code from incomp l ete to complete. • The readiness code w il l not switch to comp l ete until all the enabl e criteria are met. • If a fault in the secondary H02S system caused the MIL to come on, the readiness code cannot be set to complete until you correct the fault.

To check if the readiness codes are set to comp l ete, turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), but do not start the engine. The MIL comes on for 15—20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set to complete. If it flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are not set to complete. To set readiness codes from i ncomp l ete to complete, do the procedure for the appropriate code. To check the status of a specific DTC system, check the OBD status in the DTC MENU with the HDS (see page 11-9). This screen displays the DTC, the current data l ist of the enable criteria, and the status of the readiness testing.

Enable Criteria • ECT SENSOR 1 at 158 °F (70 °C) or more. • IAT SENSOR at 20 °F ( - 7 °C) or more. • Vehicle speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). Procedure 1. Connect the HDS to the vehic l e's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the READINESS CODEs screen for Catalyst in the DTCs MENU. 2. Start the engine. 3. Test-drive the vehic l e under stop-and-go conditions with short periods of steady cruise. After about 5 m i l es (8 km), the readiness code shou l d switch to comp l ete. 4. If the readiness code is sti ll not set to comp l ete, check for a Pending DTC with the HDS. If there is no DTC, one or more of the enab l e criteria were probably not met; repeat the procedure.

(cont'd)

How to Set Readiness Codes (cont'd) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System Monitor and Readiness Code

Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Monitor and Readiness Code

NOTE; All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM is reset with the HDS.

NOTE; • During the procedure, do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or LOCK (0), • A l l readiness codes are c l eared when the battery is ' disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM is reset with the HDS.

Enable Criteria • Battery vo l tage is more than 10.5 ¥. • Engine at idle. • ECT SENSOR 1 and 2 between 176 °F (80 °C) and 212 °F (100 °C). • MAP sensor l ess than 46.6 kPa (14 inHg, 350 mmHg). • Vehicle speed 0 mph (0 km/h). • IAT SENSOR between 32 °F (0 °C) and 212 °F (100 °C). Procedure 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. 2. Start the engine. 3. Sel ect EVAP TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS, then select the FUNCTION TEST in the EVAP TEST MENU. • If the result is normal, readiness is comp l ete. • If the result is not normal, go to the next step. 4. Check for a Pending DTC. If there is no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were probably not met; repeat the procedure.

Enable Criteria ECT SENSOR 1 at 140 °F (80 °C) or more. Procedure 1. Start the engine. 2. Test-drive the vehic l e under stop-and-go conditions with short periods of steady cruise. During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle fu ll y closed)'for 5 seconds. After about 3.5 m i l es (5.8 km), the readiness code shou l d switch from incomplete to comp l ete. 3. Check the readiness codes screen for the AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. • If the screen shows complete, readiness is complete. • If the screen shows not complete, go to the next step. 4. Check for a Pending DTC. If there is no DTC, the enable criteria was probably not met. Select the DATA LIST MENU. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the ALL DATA LIST with the HDS. If ECT SENSOR 1 i s less than 140 ° F (60 °C), run the engine unti l it is more than 140 °F (80 °C), then repeat the procedure.

Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Heater Monitor Readiness Code NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM is reset with the HDS. Procedure 1. Start the engine, and l et it idle for 1 minute. The readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 2. If the readiness code is still not set to comp l ete, check for a Pending DTC. If there is no DTC, repeat the procedure.

Misfire Monitor and Readiness Code • This readiness code is always set to availab l e because misfiring is continuously monitored. • Monitoring pauses, and the m i sfire counter resets, if the vehic l e is driven over a rough road. • Monitoring also pauses, and the misfire counter holds at its current value, if the thrott l e position changes more than a predeterm i ned value, or if driving conditions fal l outside the range of any related enable criteria.

Fuel System Monitor and Readiness Code • This readiness code is always set to avail ab l e because the fue l system is continuous l y monitored during closed loop operation. • Monitoring pauses when the catalytic converter, EVAP control system, and A/F sensor monitors are active. • Monitoring al so pauses when any related enable criteria are not being met. Monitoring resumes when the enable criteria is again being met.

Comprehensive Component Monitor and Readiness Code This readiness code is always set to availab l e because the comprehensive component monitor is continuously running whenever the engine is cranking or running.

EGR Monitor and Readiness Code NOTE: • During the procedure, do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or LOCK (0). • A l l readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM is reset with the HDS, Enable Criteria ECT SENSOR 1 at 178 °F (80 °C) or more. Procedure 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. 2. Start the engine. 3. Drive at a steady speed with the transmiss i on i n D, at 50—82 mph (80—100 km/h) or above for more than 10 seconds. 4. With the transm i ssion in D, decelerate from 62 mph (100 km/h) or above by completely re l easing the throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the engine is stopped during this step, repeat steps 3 and 4. 5. Check the OBD status screen for DTC P0401 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. • If it is passed, readiness is complete. • If it is not passed, go to step 3 and retest.

Component Location Index

INJECTORS Replacement, page 1 1-220 CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR R ep lacem en t page 11-226 M A N IFO LD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (M A P I SENSOR R ep lacem en t page 1 1-2 2 2

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

Includes:

M A S S AIR FLOW (M AF) S EN S O R / INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR R ep lacem en t page 11-222

■ PGM-FI M A IN RELAY 1 • PGM-FI SUBRELAY • IG N ITIO N COIL RELAY

\

POW ERTRAIN CONTROL M OD U LE (PCM) G eneral Troubleshooting Information, page 11-3 Update, page 11-227 Substitution, page 11-8 R ep lace m en t page 11-229

C A M S H A FT POSITION {CMP) SENSOR R ep lacem en t page 11-226

ELECTRICAL LOAD DETECTOR (ELD)

ENGINE C OOLAN T TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR 2 R ep lacem en t page 11-223

ENGINE COOLAWT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR 1 R ep lacem en t page 11-223

DTC Troubleshooting DTC P0101: MAF Sensor Circuit

6. Start the engine.

Range/Performance Problem

7. Vary the engine speed between 2,000 and 3,000 rpm.

NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3). • If DTC P1128, P1129, P2228, and/or P2229 are stored at the same time as DTC P0101, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P0101.

8. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

1. Check for poor connections or damage to these parts: • PCV hose • Intake air resonator • Air cleaner • Purge (PCS) l ine • Brake booster • Brake booster hose Are the parts OK?

YES~Go to step 2. NO-Repair or replace the damaged part(s), then go to step 14. 2. Check for a damaged or incorrectl y install ed air duct to the intake air cleaner. is it OK?

YES-Go to step 3. NO-Reconnect or replace the air duct, then go to step 14. 3. Check for a dirty air cleaner element is it dirty?

YES-Replace the air cleaner e l ement (see page 11 -332), then go to step 14. NO-Go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 5. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. is there about 0.2 gm/s or 0.5 ¥?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-Go to step 12.

D o e s th e r e a d in g c h a n g e ?

YES-Go to step 9, NO-Go to step 12. 9. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then l et it id l e. 10. Test-drive the vehic l e for severa l minutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters; • ENGINE SPEED • VEHICLE SPEED • MAP SENSOR • MAF SENSOR 11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0101 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 12. NO- lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose termina l s at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM, If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 10 and recheck. 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 13. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page 11 - 222 ).

14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 15. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 16. Do the PCM id l e learn procedure (see page 11-282). 17. Test-drive the vehicle for severa l minutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters: • ENGI NE SPEED • VEHICLE SPEED • MAP SENSOR • MAF SENSOR 18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T O P 0 1 0 1 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Go to step 19,

19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0101 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated i n step 18, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 17.

DTC P0102: MAF Sensor Circuit Low Voltage NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record a l l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting i nformation (see page 11-3). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 2 seconds. 2. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is a b o u t 0

g m /s , o r 0.1 ¥ o r le s s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 3. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM.B 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Measure the vo l tage between MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground. M M

S E N S O R /iA T S ENSOR 5P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 415 ! IGP (YEL/BLK)

W ire side of fem ale term inals

Is th e re

b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step-7. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and PGM-FI main re l ay 1, then go to step 19. 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 8. Measure the resistance between MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.

12. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector terminal No. 3 and PCM connector terminal A20.

MAF SENSOR/iAT SENSOR SP CONNECTOR

MAF SENSOR/iAT SENSOR SP CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 VG+ (RED/GRN) I

1 2 3 4 5

Wire side of female term inal s

V G + (RED/GRN)

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) ¥ G + (RED)

©

3e= i I J 1 I 2 ' 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 3 1101 11 12 13 / I / 16 /I™ 19 20 21 i ■ 22 23 24 X 25 X 26 27'2 8 1 i 37 38 39 29 30 31 3 2 1 / / CO CO

Wire side of female terminals

[40141

42 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6

4 8 |4 9 |

Is th e re 1 9 0 - 2 1 0 k Q ?

Terminal side of fem al e terminals

YES-Go to step 13.

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

NO-Go to step 3.

YES-Go to step 25.

9. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A20) and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to step

10. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A20 and body ground, PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

20 .

13. Substitute a known-good MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page 11 - 2 2 2 ). 14. Reconnect all connectors.

¥ G + (RED) i

J 1I 2

r

3 | 4|5|
< 26 1 / 23 24 31 32(33 34 35|36 37 / / 140141 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 |4 5 | 4 6 | 47

f i ( 'WHT/BLK)

9 11 0 1 20 21 27 28

1

1

38 / 4 8 |4 9 |

Term inal side of fem ale term inals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

i

/

5

8

W ire side of fe m al e te rm in al s UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX C ONNECTOR H (3P) + B (PUR)

3 4

1 /

5 0

7

9

/

W ire side of fe m a l e term inals

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 17. NO-Repair an open in the w i re between the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 22.

YES-Go to step 15.

17. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (€6 (C8)*) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step 22.

18. Disconnect under-hood fuse/re l ay box connector E (14P). 19. Check for continuity between under-hood fuse/relay box connector E (14P) terminal No. 13 and PCM connector terminal A40. UN DER-HOO D FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E

(14P)

n

1 J...

/

3 r —1 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 i SUBRLY (RED)

Term inal side of fem ale term inals PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

CO

■jx

CO

m

\

1101 1 21 1 28 1 39 JO*

3 |4 |5 |6 |7 |8 9 11 12 13 7 1 7 16 / | 1 8 19 20 > < 25 X 26 27 ■ 22 23 24 37 38 29 30 31 321/ / 14 0 | 41

j i 12

00

15. Disconnect under-hood fuse/re l ay box connector H (9P).

SUBRLY (RED) W ire side of fem ale te rm in a l s is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 20. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A40) and the under-hood fuse/re l ay box, then go to step 22.

20. Test the PGM-FI subre l ay (built into the relay control module) (see page 22-111). Is th e P G M - F I s u b r e la y O K ?

YES-Go to step 28. NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page 22-88), then go to step 22,

28. Reconnect all connectors. 23. Update the PCM if it does not have the l atest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 30. Start the engine, and let it i dle. 31. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

21. Repl ace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -224).

is D T C P 0 1 3 5 a n d /o r P 0 1 5 5 * in d ic a te d ?

22. Reconnect all connectors.

25. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282).

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose termina l s at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 30. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

28. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

NO-Go to step 32,

23. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 24. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

Is D T C P 0 1 3 5 a n d /o r P 015 S * in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the under-hood fuse/re l ay box (PGM-FI subrelay) and the PCM, then go to step 1, NO-Go to step 27. 27. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0135 and/or P015S* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Troubleshooting is comp l ete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 28, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.® NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose termina l s at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subre l ay) and the PCM, then go to step 1, If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.

32. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0135 and/or P0155* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 31, go to the ind i cated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the under-hood fuse/re l ay box (PGM-FI subrelay) and the PCM, If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 30. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a resu lt comes on.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC P0137: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1, Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage DTC P0157: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2, Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3). • I nformation marked with an asterisk O applies to the front bank (Bank 2). 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),

8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 3. Check H02S 81 S2 OUTPUT VOLTAGE and/or H02S B2 S2 OUTPUT VOLTAGE* in the DATA LIST with the HDS. D o e s th e v o lta g e s ta y a t 0 ,1 2 ¥ o r le s s ?

YES-Go to step 10. NO-Go to step 22. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Remove the jumper wire from the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector. 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then l et it idle.

13. Check H02SB1 S2 OUTPUT VOLTAGE and/or H02SB2 S2 OUTPUT VOLTAGE* in the DATA LIST with the HDS, is th e re a b o u t 5 V?

4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0137 and/or P0157* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 14, NO-Go to step 18.

YES-Go to step 5.

14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a resu lt comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3 and recheck,

15. Jump the SCS l ine w i th the HDS. 18. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). 17, Check for continuity between PCM connector termina l C23 (C36)* and body ground.

PCM CONNECTOR C

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8, Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector, 7. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector term i nals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.

(49P)

czzzzn

Jl I2 i

/

/

14014

/

| 7 | 8 ir fT o f 1 17|18 19 20 21

3 I 4 I 5 I6

11 12 / 14 15 10 25 i / 23 24

28 27 28

31 32|33 34 35]38 37 38

1

4 2 ]4 3 |4 4 |4 5 ] 4 I 5j 47 4 8 |4 9 l

SECONDARY H 0 2 S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR

S 02S G B 2 (BLU)* fW H T/R ED )

JUMPER WIRE Term inal side of fem ale terminals

SH 02S B 1 (GRN) S H 02S B 2 (W H T)*

1 2 3 4

is th e re c o n tin u ity ? S 02S G B 1 (W H T/R ED ) S 0 2S G B 2 (BLU)*

W ire side of fem ale term inals

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (C23 (C36)*) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to step 24. NO-Go to step 31. 18, Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 13, Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

20. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). 21. Check for continuity between PCM connector termina l B25 (B16)* and body ground. PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) S H 02S B 1 (GRN)

.r— J 1 2 11 12 22 23 29 30 140 j 41

3 13 24 31 42

S H 02S B 2 {W H T)*

\ n 5 | 6 7 8 9 ho 1 14|15 16 1?|18 19 20 21 20 / / 25 1 32|33 34 35be 37 38 39 14 3 144 J45[46] 47 48 4

I/I

Term inal side of fem ale te rm in al s Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (B25 (B16)*) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then goto step 24. NO-Go to step 31. 22. Turn the ign i tion switch to LOCK (0). 23. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page 11-225). 24. Reconnect a ll connectors. 25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 26. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 27. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 28. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 29. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 1 3 7 a n d /o r P 0 1 5 7 *in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Go to step 30.

30. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0137 and/or P0157* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. Does th e

H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 29, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 28. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 28. 31. Reconnect all connectors. 32. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 33. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 34. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 1 3 7 a n d /o r P 0 1 S 7 * in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a know-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 33. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-Go to step 35. 35. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0137 and/or P0157* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 34, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 33. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 33. (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC P0138: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1, Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage DTC P0158: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2, Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troubleshooting information {see page 11-3). • Information marked with an asterisk O applies to the front bank (Bank 2). 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),

3. Check H02S 81 S2 OUTPUT VOLTAGE and/or H02S B2 S2 OUTPUT VOLTAGE* in the DATA LIST with the HDS. D o e s th e v o lta g e s ta y a t 1 ,2 7 ¥ o r m o re ?

YES-Go to step 10, NO-Go to step 19. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 11. Remove the jumper w i re from the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector, 12. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire.

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, 3. Start the engine, and l et it idle w i thout load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 4. Check. H02S B1 S2 OUTPUT VOLTAGE and/or H02S B2 82' OUTPUT VOLTAGE* in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

SECONDARY H 0 2 5 (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR SH 02S B 1 (GRN) S H 02S B 2 (WHT)*

D o e s th e v o lta g e s ta y a t 1 ,2 7 ¥ o r m o re ?

1 2 3 4

JU M PER WIRE

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PC M .il

W ire side of fem ale term inals

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

6. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector,

14. Check H02S 61 S2 OUTPUT VOLTAGE and/or H02S B2 S2 OUTPUT VOLTAGE* in the DATA LI ST with the HDS.

7. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.

D o e s th e v o lta g e s ta y a t 1 ,2 7 ¥ o r m o re ?

YES-Go to step 15. SECONDARY H 0 2 S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR

JUM PER WIRE

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (C23 (C36)*) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then g oto step 21. 15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

S H 02S B 1 (GRN) S H 0 2 S B 2 (W H T)*

1 2 3 4

18. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. S 02S G B 1 (W H T/R ED ) S 02S G B 2 (BLU)*

W ire side of fem ale term inals

8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

17. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

18. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B25 (B16)* and body ground.

D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) S H 02S B 1

(GRN)

S H 02S B 2 fWHTJ*

,

J 111| 122 133 144 22 23 24

X

. .._n.___ 6

7

8

9

10

16 1?! 18 19 20 21 25

26

/ /

28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0138 and/or P0158* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.

29 30 31 3 2 133 34 35 36 37 38 39

M 1

14 0 141 42 4 3 j 44 j 4 S | 46T 47 48

YES-Troubleshooti ng is comp l ete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 27, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAI LED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 25. 29. Reconnect all connectors.

Term inal side of fem ale term inals is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 29, NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (B25 (B16)*) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then g o to step 21,

30. Update the PCM if it does not have the l atest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 31. Start the engine, and let it id l e without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on.

21. Reconnect all connectors.

32. Test-drive under these conditions: • Engine coo l ant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 158 °F (70 °C) • Transmission in D • Engine speed between 1,500—3,000 rpm • Drive 5 seconds or more

22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

33. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS,

19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 20. Repl ace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page 11-225).

23. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 24. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11 -282). 25. Start the engine, and l et it idle without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on. 26. Test-drive under these conditions; • Engine coo l ant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 158 °F (70 °C) • Transmission in D • Engine speed between 1,500—3,000 rpm • Drive 5 seconds or more

is D T C P 0 1 3 8 a n d /o r P 0 1 5 8 * in d i c a t e d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 31. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-Go to step 34.

27. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 1 3 8 a n d /o r P 0 1 5 8 * i n d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose termina l s at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Go to step 28.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 34. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0138 and/or P0158* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 33, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO- l f the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 31. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates EXECUTI NG, keep driving until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 31.

DTC P0139: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1, Sensor 2) Slow Response DTC P0159: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2, Sensor 2) Slow Response NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Information marked with an asterisk O app l ies to the front bank (Bank 2). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the eng i ne, and l et it id l e without load (i n P or N) until the radiator fan comes on. 4. T est-drive u n d e r these c o n d itio n s : • Engine coo l ant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 158 °F (70 °C) • Transmission in D • Drive at a steady speed between 56—75 mph (88—120 km/h) for 1 minute, then decel erate (with the throttle fully closed) for 10 seconds 5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0133 and/or P0159* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep driving unti l a resu l t comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDIT I ON, go to step 3 and recheck.

6, Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page 11-225). 8, Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11 -282). 11. Start the engine, and l et it i d l e without l oad (in P or N) unti l the radiator fan comes on. 12. Test-drive under these conditions: • Engine coo l ant temperature above 158 °F (70 °C) • Transmission in D • Drive at a steady speed between 55—75 mph (88—120 km/h) for 1 minute, then decelerate (with the throttle fu ll y closed) for 10 seconds 13. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0 1 3 9 a n d /o r P 0 1 5 9 *in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Go to step 14. 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0139 and/or P0159* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Troub l eshooting is comp l ete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 13, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAI LED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates EXECUTI NG, keep driving until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 11.

DTC P0141: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1, Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction DTC P0161: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2, Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction NOTE: • Before you troub l eshoot record a l l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troubleshooting information (seepage 11-3). • Information marked with an asterisk (*) app l ies to the front bank (Bank 2). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, 3. Start the engine. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 1 4 1 a n d /o r P 0 1 61* in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO- I intermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2 ), the under-hood fuse/re l ay box (PGM-FI subre l ay) and the PCM .il 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Check No. 11 A/F sensor (AFHT + ) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. is th e fu s e O K ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Repair a short in the wire between the A/F sensors, the under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subre l ay), then replace the blown fuse, then go to step 21.

7. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 8. At the sensor side, measure the resistance between secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4,

12. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal C5 (C7)* and body ground. P C M CONNECTOR C (49P)

SECONDARY H 0 2 S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR

S02SHTCB1 (BLK/W HT)

S 0 2 S H IC B 2 (G R N /R E D !*

IP" “ ll

S 02SHTCB1 S 02 S H T C B 2 *

C l..Z......... n_ ............

— r- r“"

1 2 - 3 4-

T T ] 2 3 4 | 5T 6T 7 J 8 9 T i o T 1 11 12 / 14| 15 10 17(18 19 20 21

+B

1

/ /

23 24

X

25

X

28 27 28

31 32(33 34 35|36 37 38 / 140141 42 4 3 p 4 ] 4 5 T 4 6 |4 7 48|49]

Term inal side of male term inals

is t h e r e 5 . 4 — 6 .8 Q a t ro o m te m p e r a tu r e ( 8 5 — 7 0

Term inal side of fem ale term inals

°F, 18—

2 1 °C )?

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (C5 (C7)l and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to step 21.

YES-Go to step 9. NO-Go to step 20.

NO-Go to step 13.

3. At the sensor side, check for continuity between body ground and secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector termina l s No. 3 and No. 4 individua l ly. SECONDARY H 0 2 S (SENSOR

S 0 2 S H IC B 1 S 0 2 S H IC B 2 *

1

/

2) 4P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4-

13, Check for continuity between secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 3 and PCM connector termina l C5 (C7)#. SECONDARY H 0 2 S (SENSOR

1 2 3 4

S 0 2 S H IC B 1 (BLK/W HT)

2) 4P CONNECTOR

S 02S H TC B 2 (G R N /R E D )*

W ire side of fem ale term inals PGM CONNECTOR C (43P) S02SH TC B 1 (BLK/W HT)

Term inal side of male term inals

c o n tin u ity ?

2

3

11 12

4

5

6

7

9jTo

14|15 18 17|18 19 20 21

X

25 28 27 28 / 23 24 34 35(36 37 38 / 31 / 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

/

CO CO CM CO

Is th e r e

1

S 02S H TC B 2 (G R N /R E D )*

^ — ■*— -T1— — Vr— —

YES-Go to step 20. NO-Go to step 10.

Term inal side of fem ale term inals is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

YES-Go to step 14.

11. Disconnect PCM connector C (43P).

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (C5 (C7)*) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to step 21. 14, Disconnect under-hood fuse/re l ay box connector H (9P).

16. Check for continuity between secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and under-hood fuse/re l ay box connector H (9P) terminal No. 9.

18. Check for continuity between under-hood fuse/relay box connector E (14P) terminal No. 13 and PCM connector terminal A40. UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (14P)

SECONDARY H 0 2 S (SENSOR 214P CONNECTOR

1/ 7 /

1 2 3 4

n

5

6

J 1 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 j 8 9 |10| i 11 12 13 7 I 7 16 / | 1 8 19 20 21 i x 27 28 25 26 22 23 24 > < i i 29 30 31 3 2 1 / / / | 3 6 37 38 39 42143 1 441 / | 46| / 48|49|

+ B (PUR)

O _

4s.

Jl 7

10 11 12 13 14

P C M CONNECTOR A (43P)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

1

_T“ L_

9

SUBRLY (REDJ Terminal side of female term inal s

| + 8 (W H T /B LK )

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR H (9P)

4

3

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

SUBRLY (RED)

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 16.

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 21.

YES-Go to step 19.

16. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). 17. Disconnect under-hood fuse/re l ay box connector E (14P).

NO-Repair an open in the wire between' the PCM (A40) and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 21. 19. Test the PGM-FI subre l ay (built into the relay contro l module) (see page 22-111). is th e P G M - F i s u h r e ia y O K ?

YES-Go to step 27. NO-Repl ace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page 22-88), then go to step 21. 20. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page 11-226). 21. Reconnect all connectors. 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 23. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 24. Do the

PCM

idle learn procedure (see page 11-282).

25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 1 4 1 a n d /o r P 0 1 61* in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay), and the PCM, then go to step 1.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0141 and/or P0161* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Troubleshooting is comp l ete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 25, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2 ), the under-hood fuse/re l ay box (PGM-FI subrelay), and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on. 27. Reconnect all connectors. 28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 29. Start the engine, and let it idle. 30. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i th the HDS. Is D T C

P 0 1 4 1 a n d /o r P 0 1 61* in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay), and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 29. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-Go to step 31. 31. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0141 and/or P0161* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS, D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11 -229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 30, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

DTC P0171: Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System Too Lean DTC P0172: Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System Too Rich DTC P0174: Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System Too Lean DTC P0175: Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System Too Rich NOTE: • Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3). • Poor fuel qua l ity can cause DTC P0171, P0174. • If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at the same time as DTC P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then recheck for P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or PQ175. P0101, PO102, P0103: MAF sensor P0107, P0108, P1128, P1123: MAP sensor P0133, P0153, P1172, P1174, P2135, P2197, P2237, P2238, P2240, P2241, P2243,P2245, P2247, P2243, P2251, P2252, P2254, P2255, P2A00, P2A03: A/F sensor (Sensor 1) P0134, P0135, P0154, P0155: A/F sensor (Sensor 1) heater P0137, P0138, P0139, P0157, P0158, P0159, P2270, P2272: Secondary H02S(Sensor 2) P0141, P0161: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater P2648, P2647, P2648, P2843; VTEC system P0401, P0404, P0408, P2413: EGR system P2279: Intake air leakage 1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11 -301). Is th e f u e l p r e s s u r e O K ?

YES-Go to step 2, NO- l f the HDS indicates FAI LED, check for poor connections or loose term i nals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the under-hood fuse/re l ay box (PGM-FI subre l ay), and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 23. If the PCM was substituted, g oto step 1, If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a resu lt comes on.

NO-Check these items: • If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel pressure regulator (see page 11 -313), then go to step 6 . • If the pressure is too low, check for restrictions in the fuel pump, the fuel pressure regulator, the fuel filter, and the fuel lines for restrictions, then go to step 6.

2. Check for vacuum l eaks at these parts: • PCV valve • PCV hose • EVAP canister purge valve • Thrott l e body • intake manifold • Brake booster • Brake booster hose • Air intake duct Are th e p a r ts O K ?

YES-Go to step 3. NO-Repair or rep l ace parts with leaks, go to step 6. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 4. Check for these conditions: • Engine coo l ant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 158 °F (70 °C» • Transmission in P or N • A l l electrica l loads off 5. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Raise and hold the engine speed steady at 2,500 rpm. W hi l e holding the rpm steady, check the MAF SENSOR i n the DATA LIST.

6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

7. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 8. Do the PCM id l e learn procedure (see page 11-282). 9. Start the engine. Ho l d the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) unti l the radiator fan comes on, then let it i dle. 10. Test-dri ve under these cond i tions: • Engine cool ant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 158 °F (70 °C) • Transmission i n D • Drive at a steady speed between 15—75 mph (24— 120. km/h) for 15 minutes. ■ NOTE: DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 and/or P0175 may take up to 80 minutes of test driving to set. Using the HDS, mon i tor the short term fuel trim (ST FUEL TRIM). If the ST FUEL TRIM stays with i n 0.8—1.21, there is no problem at this time. 11. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

Is D T C

P 0 1 7 1 , P 0 1 7 2 , P 0 1 7 4 a n d / o r P 0 1 7 5 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 1.

NO-Troubleshooting is complete, If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

is th e re a b o u t 9 , 8 — 1 1 .9 g m /s ?

YES-Replace the injectors (see page 11-220), then go to step 8. NO-Rep l ace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page 11 -222), then go to step 8,

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC P0300: Random Misfire and Any

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Combination of the Following:

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected

3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Por N).

DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected DTC P0303: No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected

4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s t h e H D S in d ic a t e F A IL E D ?

DTC P0304: No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected DTC P0305: No. 5 Cylinder Misfire Detected DTC P0306: No. 6 Cylinder Misfire Detected Special Tools Required • Pressure Gauge Adapter 07NAJ-P07010A • A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 07406-0070301 • AT Pressure Test Hose 07AAJ-PY4A100 • A/T Pressure Adapter 07MAJ-PY40120 • Oil Pressure Hose 07ZAJ-S5A0200 NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot record a l l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troub l eshooting i nformation (see page 11-3), • If the misfire is frequent enough to trigger detection of increased emissions during two consecutive driving cycl es, the M I L w i ll come on, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0308) are

stored. • If the misfire is frequent enough to damage the catalyst, the M I L w i ll blink whenever the misfire occurs, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0306) are stored. When the misfire stops, the MIL stays on. • Troubleshoot the fo l l owing DTCs first, if any of them were stored along with the random misfire DTC(s) (Because parts can sometimes fail without setting DTCs, you should also do a physical inspection of the

system listed below.): P0101, P0102, P0103: MAF sensor P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: MAP sensor P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175: Fuel system PG335r P0339: CKP sensor

P0506, P0507: Idle control system P0365, P0369: CMP sensor P2646, P2847, P2648, P2849: VTEC system P0401, P0404, P0408, P2413: EGR system

YES-Go to step 9, NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep idle until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, wait for several minutes, then recheck. 5. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 M ISFIRE, CYL3 MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYLS MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes with the HDS. D o e s C Y L1 M IS F IR E , C Y L 2 M IS F IR E , C Y L 3 M IS F IR E , C Y L 4 M IS F IR E , C Y L 5 M IS F IR E , a n d /o r C Y L 8 M IS F IR E s h o w m is fir e c o u n t s ?

YES-Go to step 9. NO-Go to step 6. 6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters: • ENGINE SPEED • VEHICLE SPEED • REL TP SENSOR • CLV (calculated load value) • ECT SENSOR 1 • APP SENSOR 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P03O4, P0305, or PG308 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S i n d ic a t e F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 9. NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, go to step 8. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 6 and recheck.

8. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 M ISFIRE, CYLS M I SFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6 M I SFI RE in the DATA LIST for 10 m i nutes with the HDS. D o e s C Y L 1 M IS F IR E , C Y L 2 M IS F IR E f C Y L 3 M IS F IR E f C Y L 4 M IS F IR E , C Y L S M IS F IR E , a n d /o r C Y L 6 M IS F IR E s h o w m is fire c o u n ts ?

YES-Go to step 9. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this tim e .il 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Check the fue l quality. is th e fu e l q u a lity g o o d ?

YES-Go to step 11. NO-Drain the fue l tank, and fill it with a known-good fuel, then go to step 19. 11. Remove and inspect the spark p l ugs (see page 4-19). If the spark plugs are fou l ed or worn, replace them. 12. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters: • ENGI NE SPEED • VEHICLE SPEED • REL TP SENSOR • CLV (calculated load value) • ECTSENSOR 1 • APP SENSOR 13. Check the CYL1 M I SFIRE, CYL2 M ISFI RE, CYL3 MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 M ISFIRE, and/or CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes w i th the HDS. D o e s C Y L 1 M IS F IR E , C Y L 2 M IS F IR E , C Y L 3 M IS F IR E f

14. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-301), Is th e fu e l p r e s s u r e O K ?

YES-Go to step 15. NO• If the pressure is too high, rep l ace the fuel pressure regulator (see page 11-313), then g oto step 19. • If the pressure is too l ow, check for restrictions in the fuel pump, the fuel feed lines, and the fuel filter. If they are OK, rep l ace the fue l pressure regulator (see page 11-313), then go to step 19, 15. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without l oad (in P or N) unti l the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 16. Check for these conditions: , • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 176 °F (80 °C) • Transmission in P or N • All electrical l oads off 17. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LI ST with the HDS. Raise and ho l d the engine speed steady at 2,500 ±100 rpm. W hi l e holding the rpm steady, check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST. Is th e re a b o u t 9 f 8 — 1 1 .9 g m /s ?

YES-Go to step 18. NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page 11 - 2 2 2 ), then go to step 19. 18. Do the VTEC rocker arm test (see page 6-8), D id th e e n g in e p a s s th e te s t?

YES-Go to step 20. NO-Repair the VTEC rocker arm, then go to step 20.

C Y L 4 M IS F IR E , C Y LS M IS F IR E , a n d / o r C Y L 6 M IS F IR E s h o w m is fire c o u n ts ?

YES-Go to step 14. NO-Go to step 19.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 20. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected

21. Do the PCM id l e learn procedure (see page 11-282). 22. Do the CKP pattern c l ear/CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4). 23. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters; • ENGINE SPEED • VEHICLE SPEED • REL TP SENSOR • CLV (calculated load value) • ECT SENSOR 1 • APPSENSOR 24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

DTC P0303: No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected DTC P0304: No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected DTC P0305: No. 5 Cylinder Misfire Detected DTC P0306: No. 6 Cylinder Misfire Detected NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3), 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

Is D T C P 0300 a n d a n y c o m b in a t io n o f D T C P0301, P 0 3 0 2 , P 0 3 0 3 , P 0 3 0 4 , P 0 3 0 5 , o r P 0 3 0 8 in d ic a te d ?

3. Start the engine, and let it idle without l oad (in P or N) for 2 minutes,

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the ignition coils, the injectors, and the PCM, then go to DTC P0301f P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 troub l eshooting (see page 11-114).

4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P03G4, P0305, or P0308 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.

NO-Go to step 25. 25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0308 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Troub l eshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 24, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAI LED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ignitions coils, the injectors, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 23,

D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 9. NO- l f the HDS indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep id l ing unti l a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, wait for several minutes, then recheck. 5. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 M ISFIRE, CYLS MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 M ISFIRE, and/or CYL8 M I SFI RE i n the DATA LIST for 10 minutes with the HDS. D o e s C Y L1 M IS F IR E , C Y L 2 M IS F IR E , C Y L 3 M IS F IR E r C Y L 4 M IS F IR E , C Y L 5 M IS F IR E , a n d /o r C Y L 6 M IS F IR E s h o w m is fire c o u n ts ?

YES-Go to step 9. NO-Go to step 8.

6. Test-drive the vehic l e for several minutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters: • ENGI NE SPEED • VEHICLE SPEED • REL TP SENSOR • CLV (cal culated l oad value) • GEAR POSITION • ECTSENSOR 1 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P030S, or P0308 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 3. NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, go to step 8. If the HDS indicates EXECUTI NG, keep driving until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 8. 8. Check the CYL1 M ISFIRE, CYL2 MISFI RE, CYL3 MISFIRE, CYL4 M ISFIRE, CYL5 MISFI RE, and/or CYL6 MISFI RE i n the DATA LIST for 10 minutes with the HDS. D o e s C Y L 1 M IS F IR E t C Y L 2 M IS F IR E , C Y L 3 M IS F IR E , C Y L S M IS F IR E , C Y L S M IS F IR E , a n d /o r C Y L 8 M IS F IR E s h o w m is f ir e c o u n t s ?

YES-Go to step 9. NO- l ntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose termina l s in the fue l system and the ignition system.■

9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Exchange the ignit i on coi l from the prob l em cylinder with one from another cylinder. 11. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters: • ENGINE SPEED • VEHICLE SPEED • RELTP SENSOR • CLV (calculated load value) • GEAR POSIT I ON • ECT SENSOR 1 12. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYLS MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6 M I SFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes with the HDS. D o e s C Y L1 M IS F IR E f C Y L 2 M IS F IR E , C Y L 3 M IS F IR E , C Y L 4 M IS F IR E , C Y LS M IS F IR E , a n d /o r C Y L 6 M IS F IR E s h o w m is fire c o u n ts ?

YES-Go to step 13. NO-lntermittent failure due to poor contact at an ignition coil contactor (no misfire at this time). Make sure that the ignition coil connectors are secure.!! 13. Determine which cy l inder had the misfire. D o e s th e m is fire o c c u r in th e c y lin d e r w h e r e th e ig n itio n c o il w a s m o w e d ?

YES-Replace the fau lty ignition coil (see page 4-19), then go to step 44. NO-Go to step 14.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Exchange the spark plugs from the problem cylinder with one from another cylinder. 18. Test-drive the vehic l e for several minutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters: . ENGI NE SPEED • VEHI CLE SPEED • REL TP SENSOR • CLV (calculated l oad value) • GEAR POSITION • ECTSENSOR 1 17. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFI RE, CYLS MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFI RE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes with the HDS.

24. Measure the vo ltage between body ground and the appropriate PCM connector termina l (see table). PROBLEM PCM DTC CYLINDER TERMINAL No. 1 P0301 B4 No. 2 P0302 B8 B7 No. 3 P0303 B6 ^No7 4 ~ > .P0304. .P0305..... 85 No. 5 LB9 No. 6 P0306

HfiRE COLOR BRN RED BLU YEL BLK/RED WHT/BLU

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

INJ2 (RED) INWS (WHT/BLU)

INJ1 (BRN)

J 1I 2

3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7? 8 9 h o| 1 14|15 18 17|18 19 20 21

11 12 13 22 23 2 4

D o e s C Y L 1 M IS F IR E , C Y L 2 M IS F IR E ; C Y L 3 M IS F IR E ,

«

C Y L 4 M IS F IR E , C Y L 5 M IS F IR E , a n d /o r C Y L 6 M IS F IR E

|40|41

X

25

X

28

29 30 31 32(33 34 3 5 136 37 4 2 143 j 4 4 14 5 14 6 147

/

/

38 39

1

48 M

s h o w m is fire c o u n ts ?

®

YES-Go to step 18. NO- l ntermittent failure due to spark plug fouling (no misfire at this time).®

M M

1PJJ5 (BLK/RED)

fYEL)

INJ3 (BLU)

p lu g s w e re m o w e d ?

YES-Replaee the faulty spark plugs (see page 4-19), then go to step 45.

3 | 4 | *i | < 25 X : 26 / ' / i i 29 30 31:32)33 34 35(36:57 38139 | 4 0|41 42 |4 3 | 4 4 |4 5 |46|47 4 8 1/ |

J 1 12

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

IN JECTOR 2P CONNECTOR

U

1 2 I I

IN J

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) 1NJ4 (YEL) iN JS fB LK /R E D I H llJ 3 ( B l5 F

CD

0

J 1 I 2 'f 3 l 4 | e hs m T 1 11 12 13 14(15 16 17| 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 / I / ( 1 29 30 31 32|33 34 35136 37 38 39 |4 0 |4 1 4 2 |4 3 | 44|45|46|47 481/1

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the injector and the under-hood fuse/re l ay box (PGM-FI main relay 1), then go to step 32. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM and the injector, then go to step 44.

Is th e re 1 0 . 8 - 1 3 . 2 Q ?

YES-Go to step 33. NO-Replace the i njector (see page 11-220), then go to step 44.

33. Exchange the injector from the problem cylinder with the one from another cy l inder. Also check the injector fuel in l et screen for debris, and clean it if needed. 34. Reconnect all connectors, and reinsta l l the intake manifo l d (see page 9-2).

43. Do the VTEC rocker arm test (see page 8-8). D id th e e n g in e p a s s th e te s t?

YES-Go to step 52. NO-Repair the VTEC rocker arm, then go to step 44.

35. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

44. Reconnect all connectors,

36. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

45. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ).

37. Start the engine, and let it idle without l oad (in P or N) 'for 2 minutes.

46. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

38. Test-drive the vehicle for several m i nutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters: • ENGI NE SPEED • VEHICLE SPEED • REL TP SENSOR • CLV (calcul ated l oad value) • GEAR POSIT ION • ECT SENSOR 1 33. Check the CYL1 MISFI RE, CYL2 M I SFIRE, CYLS MISFIRE, CYL4 M I SFIRE, CYL5 M ISFIRE, and/or CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes with the HDS. D o e s C Y L 1 M IS F IR E , C Y L 2 M IS F IR E , C Y L 3 M IS F IR E , C Y L 4 M IS F IR E , C Y LS M IS F IR E , a n d /o r C Y L 6 M IS F IR E

47. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 48. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4). 49. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters: • ENGINE SPEED • VEHICLE SPEED • REL TP SENSOR • CLV (cal culated load value) • GEAR POSITION • ECT SENSOR 1 50. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0 3 0 1 , P 0 3 0 2 , P 0 3 0 3 f P 0 3 0 4 , P 0 3 0 5 f o r P 0 3 0 6 in d ic a te d ?

s h o w m is fire c o u n ts ?

YES-Go to step 40. NO-lntermittent fail ure due to poor contact in the injector connector (no misfire at this time). Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the inje ctor.il 40. Determine which cylinder had the misfire. D o e s th e m is fire o c c u r in th e c y lin d e r w h e r e th e in je c to r w as m oved?

YES-Repl ace the faulty injector (see page 11-220), then go to step 44. NO-Go to step 41. 41 .Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 42. Do an engine compression and a cylinder leakdown test (see page 8-7). D id th e e n g in e p a s s b o th te s ts ?

YES-Go to step 43.

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the ign i t i on coi l s, the i njectors, and the PCM, then go to the troub l eshooting for DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, PO305, or P0308 (see page 11-112). NO-Go to step 51. 51. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304f P0305, or P0306'in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. ' D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 50, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS ind i cates FAI LED, check for poor connections or l oose termina l s at the ignition coils, the injectors, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result conies on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 43.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 52. Reconnect all connectors.

DTC PU325: Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction

53. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8).

NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot, record a l l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooti ng information (see page 11-3).

54. Test-drive the vehic l e for several minutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters; • ENGINE SPEED • VEHI CLE SPEED • RELTP SENSOR • CLV (calculated load value) • GEAR POSITION • ECT SENSOR 1

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

4. Hold the eng i ne speed at 3,000—4,000 rpm for at l east 10 seconds.

55. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

is D T C P 0 3 0 1 P 0 3 0 2 , P 0 3 0 3 f P 0 3 0 4 , P 0 3 0 5 f o r P 0 3 0 6 in d ic a te d ?

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) unti l the radiator fan comes on, then l et it idle.

Is D T C

P 0 3 2 5 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 8.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ignition coi l s, the injectors, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good P C M (see page 11 -8), then go to step 54. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1,

8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

NO-Go to step 68.

7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

56. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, PG303, P03G4, P0305, or P0308 i n the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 55, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the ign i tion coils, the injectors, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 54. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates EXECUTI NG, keep driving unti l a result comes on. If the HDS i ndicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 54.

NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system i s OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the knock sensor and the P C b A M

8. Disconnect the knock sensor subharness (engine wire harness side) 1P connector. 3. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

10. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal C47 and body ground.

12. Check for continu i ty between PCM connector terminal C47 and body ground.

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

____________

CO! JZU CM C O

tJ- !

IC MI

2 3 | 4 | £ 6( 8 9 10 ■ 11 12 / 14|15 16 17 18 19 20 21 25 28 27 28 / 23 24 X i 34 3538 37 38 / / / 31 j40 41 42 4 3 144 145 146 147 48

J1|

CO CO CM CO

_JTo[ 3 |4 j 5 j 6 |7 (8 ■ 11 12 / 14|15 18 17|18 19 20 21 25 28 27 28 X ■ / 23 1 34 35(36 37 38 / 31 [40141 42 j 43144145146147 48149]

J 1I2

I

cz

KS (RED/BLU)

ICS (RED/BLU)

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal side of female terminals

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (C47) and the knock sensor subharness, then go to step 20.

YES-Go to step 13.

NO-Go to step 11. 11. Connect the engine wire harness C152 1P connector terminal to body ground with a jumper wire. ENGINE WIRE HARNESS C152 1P CONNECTOR

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (C47) and the engine wire harness (C152 connector), then go to step 20. 13. Remove the jumper wire from the engine wire harness. 14. Remove the i ntake manifold (see page 3-3), and the injector base (see page 9-6). 15. Disconnect the knock sensor 1P connector.

m KS fRED/BLU)

18. Check for continuity between the knock sensor 1P connector termina l and body ground,

JUMPER WIRE KNOCK SENSOR IP CONNECTOR

Wire side of female terminals KS {RED/BLUI

Wire side of female terminals is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the knock sensor subharness, then g oto step 19. NO-Go to step 17. (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 17. Check for an open in the knock sensor subharness. is th e h a r n e s s O K ?

YES-Go to step 18. NO-Repair an open in the knock sensor subharness, then go to step 19. 18. Replace the knock sensor (see page 11-227). 13. Install the injector base (see page 3-8), and the intake manifo l d (see page 3-4).

27. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 28. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then l et it idle. 29. Hold the engine speed at 3,000—4,000 rpm for at least 10 seconds. 30. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

20. Reconnect a l l connectors.

Is D T C P 0 3 2 5 in d ic a te d ?

21 .Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 28. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

22. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 23. Do the

PCM

idle learn procedure (see page 11-282).

24. Hol d the engine speed at 3,000—4,000 rpm for at least 10 seconds. 25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

NO-Go to step 31. 31. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0325 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.

Is D T C P 0 3 2 5 in d ic a te d ? D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor and the PCM, then go to step 27, NO-Go to step 28. 28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0325 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 25, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■ N O- l f the HDS indicates FAI LED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 24.

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete, If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229), If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 30, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.® NO-lf the HDS indicates FAI LED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 28. If the PCM was substi tuted, go to step 1, If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 28.

DTC P0335: CKP Sensor No Signal NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

3. Measure the voltage between CKP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.

CKP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS,

3

CKP (BLU)

3. Start the engine. 4. Check for Pendi ng or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 3 3 5 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5.

W ire side of fem ale term inals

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the CKP sensor and,the PCM.H is th e re a b o u t 5 V?

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), YES-Go to step 10. 6. Disconnect the CKP sensor 3P connector, 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Measure the vo ltage between CKP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.

NO-Go to step 11. 10. Measure the voltage between CKP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.

CKP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR CKP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

1

/V LG IGP

(BRN/YEL)

J

| IGP

(YEL/BLK)

(YEL/BLK)

(v )

W ire side of fem ale term inals W ire side of fem ale term inals

is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ? is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 17. YES-Go to step 9. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the CKP sensor and the under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI main re l ay 1), then go to step 19.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the CKP sensor and G101, then go to step 19. 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 13. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 14. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B45 and body ground. PCM CONNECTOR B {49PJ

PCM CONNECTOR B (43P)

J 1 I 2 3 4 I 5 16 J 7 ‘ 8 9 ho t 1 11 12 13 14|1S 16 1 7 118 19 20 21 1

22 23 24 X 25 26 / / 29 30 31 3 2 ) 3 3 34 3 5 136 37 38 39

18. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B45 and body ground.

1

14 0 141 4 2 |4 3 | 4 4 | 4 5 | 4 6 | 47 48 I / I

J 1 I 2

11 12 22 23 1 29 30 |4 0 |41

3 I 4 I 5 6 I 7 | 8 9 110 1 1 13 14) 15 16 17|18[19 20 21 24 X 25 > < J 2 6 / / 1 31 3233 34 35|36|37 38 39 42 4 3 |4 4 |4 5 |4 6 |47 4 8 1 / |

CKP (BLU)

CKP (BLU)

Term inal side of fem ale term inals

Term inal side of fem ale te rm in a l s

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (B45) and the CKP sensor, then go to step 19,

YES-Go to step 25,

NO-Go to step 15. 15. Connect CKP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (B45) and the CKP sensor, then go to step 19. 17. Turn the ignition sw i tch to LOCK (0), 18. Repl ace the CKP sensor (see page 11-226). 19. Reconnect a l l connectors,

CKP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 21. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

1 CKP fBLUt JUM PER WIRE

22. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 23. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4). 24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

W ire side of fem ale term inals

is D T C P 0 3 3 5 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1, NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicat___ . _ s troubleshooting.®

EF\ 25. Reconnect al l connectors. 26. Update the PCM i f it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 27. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w ith the HDS.

DTC P0339: CKP Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3).

is D T C P 0 3 3 5 in d ic a te d ?

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the CKP sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substi tute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

2. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS.

NO-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooti ng is complete. If the PCM was substituted, repl ace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

3. Start the engine, and l et it id l e for 10 seconds. 4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0339 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until the result comes on. 5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters; • ENGI NE SPEED • VEHICLE SPEED 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0339 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO- l f the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 5 and recheck. 7, Check for poor connections or loose termina l s at these locations: • CKP sensor • PCM • Engine ground • Body ground A r e th e c o n n e c tio n s a n d te r m in a ls O K

?

YES-Go to step 8. NO-Repair the connections or the terminals, then go to step 11.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 8. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-10), and check for damage to the CKP pulse plate. Is th e C K P p u ls e p la te d a m a g e d ?

YES-Replace the CKP pu l se p l ate (see page 7-27), then go to step 11. NO-Go to step 3. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11 -228). 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 12. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 13. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282).

DTC P0351: No. 1 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction DTC P0352; No. 2 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction DTC P0353: No. 3 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction DTC P0354; No. 4 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction DTC P§3§5: No. 5 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction

14. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).

DTC P03S6: No, 6 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction

15. Start the eng i ne, and let it id l e for 10 seconds.

NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot, record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 3 3 9 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor and the P C M , then go to step 1. NO-Iroubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the engine. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 3 5 1 , P 0 3 5 2 , P 0 3 5 3 , P 0 3 5 4 , P 0 3 5 5 f a n d /o r P 0 3 5 6 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent fa i lure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ignit i on coil fs) and the P C M .I 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Exchange the ignition coi l from the prob l em cylinder with one from another cylinder. 7. Start the engine. 8. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is an ig n itio n

c o il D T C in d ic a te d a t th e e x c h a n g e d

c y lin d e r ?

YES-Repl ace the faulty ignition coil (see page 4-19), then go to step 25.

9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Check the No. 9 IGN COIL + (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/re l ay box.

15. Reconnect all connectors. 16. Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector from the problem cylinder.

Is th e fu s e O K ?

17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).

YES-Go to step 11.

18. Measure the vo ltage between ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3 of the prob l em cy l inder and body ground (see table).

NO-Go to step 12. 11. Test the ignition coil relay (built into the rel ay control module) (see page 22-111). Is th e r e la y O K ?

YES-Go to step 15. NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page 22-88), then go to step 25. 12. Disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector H (3P). 13. Disconnect all ignition coil 3P connectors.

PROBLEM CYLINDER No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5 No. 6

DTC P0351 P0352 P0353 P0354 P0355 P0356

IG N ITIO N COIL 3P CONNECTOR

14. Check for continuity between No. 1 ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.

/X + B (BLK/W HT)

No. 1 IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR

W ire side of fem ale term inals + B (B LK/W H T)

Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ? W ire side of fe m a l e te rm in al s

YES-Go to step 19. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ignition coil and the under-hood fuse/relay box (ignition coil relay), then go to step 25.

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ignition coil and the under-hood fuse/relay box (i gnition coil relay). Also rep l ace the No. 9 IGN COIL + (15 A) fuse, then go to step 25. NO-Check the under-hood fuse/relay box, and replace it if needed (see page 22-88), then go to step 25.

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

21. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS.

20. Check for continuity between ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 2 of the problem cylinder and body ground (see tab l e).

22. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

PROBLEM CYLINDER No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5 No. 8

DTC

23. Check for continuity between body ground and the appropriate PCM connector terminal (see table). PROBLEM DTC CYLINDER P0351....~.1 No. 1 .P0352 No. 2 P0353 No. 3 P0354 No. 4 ' P0355 No. 5 P0358 No. 8

.poI I T P0352 P0353 P0354 P0355 P0368

PCM

w ir e

TERMINAL 823 B30 B22 B23 B11 B12

COLOR YEL/GRN BLU/RED WHT/BLU BRN BLK/RED BRN/WHT

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

IGN ITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR

1GPLS5 (BLK/RED) I | 2 ' 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10| 1 11 12 13 14(15 16 17|18 19 20 21 25 X 26 / / 22 23 24 1 29 30 31 3 2 I3 3 34 35136 37 38 39 |4 { 141 4 2 |4 3 |4 4 |4 5 ]4 6 |47 48 I / I

G N P (BLK)

X

W ire side of fem ale term inals

IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN)

1GPLS3 (W H T/B L U )

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 21, IG P L S i fB R N /W H T!

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ignition coil and G101, then go to step 25.

9 10 3 4 5 8 7 12 13 14[l5 18 TtTTs 19 20 21 28 25 ■23 24 29 30 31 32p3 34 35|36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 1GPLS4

IGPLS2 (BLU/RED)

(BRN)

Term inal side of fem ale te rm in al s

Is th e r e

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM and the ignition coil, then go to step 28,

24. Check for continuity between appropriate ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 1 and the PCM connector termina l of the problem cy l inder (see table). PROBLEM DTC CYLINDER No. 1 P0351 No. 2 P0352 No. 3 .P0353 No. 4 P0354 No. 5 P0355 No. 8 P0358

PCM TERMINAL B29 B30 ..B22 B23 B11 B12

WIRE COLOR YEL/GRN .¥ [ u / fied WHT/BLU BRN BLK/RED BRN/WHT

IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR

25. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 26. Reconnect all connectors. 27. Turn the ign i tion switch to ON (ll). 28. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 29. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 30. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0 3 5 1 , P 0 3 5 2 , P 0 3 5 3 f P 0 3 5 4 , P 0 3 5 5 , a n d / o r P 0 3 5 6 i n d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose termina l s at the ignition coil(s) and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC s troubleshooting.■ 31. Reconnect all connectors. 32. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 33. Check for Pendi ng or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0 3 5 1 , P 0 3 5 2 , P 0 3 5 3 , P 0 3 5 4 , P 0 3 5 5 , a n d /o r P 0 3 5 6 in d ic a te d ?

IG N ITIO N COIL 3P CONNECTOR

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ignition coil(s) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooti ng is complete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

IG P lS i {BR N /W H T)

_00

I 1 l 2| | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 I 7 j 9 10 11 12 13 14|15 18 19 20 21 25 & 23 24 26 / / 29 30 31 32133 34 35136 37 38 39 40 4 ~42|^3T44l~45j46X47|48|^^l

1GPLS4 (BRN)

X

X

IGPLS2 (BLU/RED)

Term inal side of fem ale term inals

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 31. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM and the ignition coi l , then go to step 28. (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC P03S5: CMP Sensor Circuit No Signal NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot, record a ll freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

3. Measure the vo ltage between CMP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.

C M P SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. CMP (GRN)

3. Start the engine, 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0 3 6 5 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5.

W ire side of fem ale term inals

NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM.H Is th e re a b o u t 5 ¥ ?

5. Turn the i gnition switch to LOCK (0).

YES-Go to step 10.

6. Disconnect the CMP sensor 3P connector. NO-Go to step 11. 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Measure the vo ltage between CMP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.

10. Measure the vo ltage between CMP sensor 3P connector termina l s No. 2 and No. 3.

C M P SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR C M P SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

1 LG (BRN/YEL) IGP (YEL/BLK)

J

[ IGP (YEL/BLK)

W ire side of fem ale term inals

W ire side of fem ale term inals

is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ? is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 16. YES-Go to step 9, NO-Repair an open in the wire between the CMP sensor and the under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI main re l ay 1), then go to step 18.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the CMP sensor and G101, then go to step 18.

11 .Turn' the i gnition switch to LOCK (0). 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

16. Check for continuity between CMP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 and PCM connector terminal B46.

13. Di sconnect PCM connector B (49P). C M P SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

14. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B46 and body ground.

/V

1 2 3

P C M CONNECTOR B (49P)

CMP (GRN) W ire side of fem ale te rm in al s

X

PCM CONNECTOR B

(49P)

i= f

m

. | 1 | 2 13 | 4 I 5 | 6 | 7 ' 8 9 1101■ 11 12 13 14|15 16 17(18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 / / 1 ■ 29 30 31 3 2 133 34 35|36 37 38 39 | 4 0 |41 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 |4 5 | 4 6 | 47 4 8 | / |

J 1 I2 11 12 22 23 1 29 30 |4 0 |41

3 | 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 | 8 9 110| i 13 14|15 16 17 18 19 20 21 24 25 26 / / i 31 32 j33 34 3536 37 38 39 4 2 14 3 14 4 145 j 46)47 4 8 1 / |

X

CMP

Term inal side of fem ale term inals

(GRN)

Term inal side of fem ale term inals is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (B46) and the CMP sensor, then go to step 18. NO-Go to step 15.

YES-Go to step 23. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (B46) and the CMP sensor, then go to step 18.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 17. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11-228).

DTC P0363: CMP Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption

19. Turn the i gnition switch to ON (II).

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3).

20. Reset the PCM with the HDS,

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

21. Do the PCM idle l earn procedure (see page 11-282).

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

22. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

3. Start the engine, and l et it idle for 10 seconds.

18. Reconnect all connectors.

Is D T C P 0 3 6 5 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is comp l ete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ 23. Reconnect all connectors. 24. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 3 6 5 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM, If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8) then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, Troub l eshooting is comp l ete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0369 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO- l f the HDS indicates PASSED, go to step 5, If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep id l ing until the resu l t comes on. 5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters; . ENGINE SPEED • VEHICLE SPEED 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0369 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals, at the CMP sensor and the PCM. If the HDS i ndicates NOT COMPLETED, goto step 5 and recheck. 7. Check for poor connections or loose termina l s at

these locations: • CMP sensor • PCM • Engine ground • Body ground A r e th e c o n n e c tio n s a n d te r m in a ls O K ?

YES-Go to step 8. NO-Repair the connections or the terminals, then go to step 11.

8. Check for damage to the front camshaft pu l l ey (CMP pulse plate) (see page 11-228). is th e C M P p u ls e p la t e d a m a g e d ?

YES-Replace the front camshaft pul l ey (CMP pu l se plate) (see page 11-228). A l so, if needed, check the camshaft end p l ay (see page 8-41), then go to step 11, NO-Go to step 3. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

DTC PCISOA: Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance Problem NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record a l l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. A r e a n y P e n d in g o r C o n fir m e d D T C s o th e r th a n P 0 5 0 A

10. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11-226).

in d ic a te d ?

11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

YES-Go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■

12. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

NO-Go to step 3.

13. Do the PCM idle l earn procedure (see page 11-282),

3. Check for poor connections or a blockage in the intake air duct.

14. Start the engine, and let it id l e for 10 seconds. Is i t O K ?

15. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. YES-Go to step 4, Is D T C P 0 3 6 9 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.

NO-Reconnect or repair the intake air duct, then go to step 19. 4. Check for damage to the air cleaner housing.

NO-Troub leshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

Is i t O K ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-Rep l ace the air cleaner housing (see page 11 -332), then go to step 13. 5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner e l ement Is i t d irty ?

YES-Repl ace the air cleaner element or remove the debris (see page 11 -332), then go to step 13. NO-Go to step 6.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 6. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR 1 is 131 °F (55 °C) or less. 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 8. Start the engine, and l et it idle for 10 seconds or more. 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 10. NO- l f the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connecti ons or loose term i nals at the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, and PCM. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep idling unti l a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OP CONDITION, go to step 8, 10. Do the ETCS TEST in the I NSPECTION MENU w i th the HDS. is th e T H R O T T L E A C T U A T O R C O N T R O L V A L V E n o rm a l?

YES-Go to step 11, NO-Rep l ace the thrott l e body (see page 11 -335), then go to step 19. 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 12. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for 30 seconds, check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is th e re a b o u t 9 , 8 — 1 1 .9 g m /s ?

YES-Go to step 13, NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page 11-222), then go to step 19.

13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Allow the engine to coo l to the ambient temperature, 15. Note the ambient temperature, 18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I), 17. Quickly note the value of the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 18. Compare the value of the IAT SENSOR and the ambient temperature. D o e s th e v a lu e o f th e IA T S E N S O R d iffe r 5 .4 ° F (3 ° C ) o r m o re fro m th e a m b ie n t te m p e r a tu r e ?

YES-Repl ace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page 11 -222), then go to step 13. NO-Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle bore. If there is dirt or carbon, c l ean the thrott l e body (see page 11 -331), then go to step 19. If there is damage to the throttle bore, rep l ace the throttle body (see page 11-335), then go to step 13.

13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

20. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 21. Do the PCM id l e learn procedure (see page 11-282). 22. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR 1 is 131 °F (55 °C) or l ess.

DTC P050B: Cold Start Ignition Timing Control System Performance Problem NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

23. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or more. 2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. A r e a n y P e n d i n g o r C o n f i r m e d D T C s o t h e r th a n P 0 5 0 B Is D T C P 0 5 0 A in d ic a t e d ?

in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, and the PCM, then go to step 1.

YES-Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

NO-Go to step 25. 25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a t e P A S S E D ?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 24, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, and the PCM, then go to step 1 If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 22,

NO-Go to step 3. 3. Check for poor connections or a blockage in the intake air duct. is it O K ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-Reconnect or repair the intake air duct, then go to step 21. 4. Check for damage to the air cleaner housing. is it O K ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-Replace the air cleaner housing (see page 11-332), then go to step 21. 5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner element. Is it d irty ?

YES-Replace the air cleaner element or remove the debris (see page 11 -332), then go to step 21. NO-Go to step 6.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 8. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR 1 is 131 °F (55 °C) or less. 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 8. Start the engine, and l et it idle for 10 seconds or more. 9. Monitor the OBD MENU with the HDS.

US for DTC P050B in the DTCs

13. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then l et it i dle, 14. W h i le holding the eng i ne speed at 2,500 rpm for 30 seconds, check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is th e re a b o u t 9 . 8 — 1 1 .9 g m /s ?

D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 15,

YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Rep l ace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page 11-222), then g oto step 21.

NO- l f the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent fa i l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the CKP sensor, the thrott l e body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the HDS indicates EXECUTI NG, keep idling until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 8. 10. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-18), Is th e ig n itio n tim in g O K ?

YES-Go to step 12. NO-Go to step 11. 11. Check for damage to the CKP sensor (see page 11-226) and the CKP pulse p l ate (see page 7-27). Is th e C K P s e n s o r a n d /o r th e C K P p u ls e p ia ie d a m a g e d ?

YES-Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11 -228) and/or the CKP pulse plate (see page 7-27), then go to step 21.

NO-Go to step 28. 12. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. Is th e T H R O T T L E A C T U A T O R C O N T R O L V A L V E n o rm a l?

YES-Go to step 13, NO-Rep l ace the throttle body (see page 11-335), then go to step 21.

15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 16. A l l ow the sensors to cool to the ambient temperature. 17. Note the ambient temperature. 18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 19. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 20. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the ambient temperature, and the va l ue of ECT SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature individually. D o e s e ith e r s e n s o r d iffe r m o re th a n 5 ,4 ° F (3 ° C ) fro m th e a m b ie n t te m p e r a tu r e ?

YES-Replace the sensor that differed more than 5.4 °F (3 °C) from the ambient temperature, then go to step 21. NO-Check and repair any problems with the following items. Repair or replace them if needed, then go to step 21. If a l l of the items are OK, go to step 28. • Engine compression and cy l inder leakdown • VTEC system • Engine oil • A/C system • Power steering

21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ). 22. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 24. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR 1 is 131 °F (55 °C) or less. 25. Start the engine, and let it i dle for 10 seconds or more. 28. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0 5 0 B in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the CKP sensor, the thrott l e body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Go to step 27. 27, Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 26, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooti ng.■ NO- l f the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or l oose termina l s at the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep idling, until a result comes on. If the HDS i ndicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 24.

28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8).

29. Do the PCM idle l earn procedure (see page 11-282). 30. Let the engine coo l until the value of ECT SENSOR 1 is 131 °F (55 °C) or less. 31. Start the engine, and let it id l e for 10 seconds or more. 32. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0 S 0 B in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 30. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-Go to step 33. 33. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S i n d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 32, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAI LED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 30. If the PCM was substituted, goto step 1. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a resul t comes on, If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDIT I ON, go to step 30.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC P0560: PCM Power Source Circuit Unexpected Voltage NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. C l ear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the engine, and let it idl e, 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 5 6 0 i n d ic a te d ?

9. Measure the vo ltage between PCM connector termina l A23 and body ground.

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

_ 1 I2 11 12 22 23 29 3 0 140 I4

__

fj

r

4 | £* < 26 27 28 31 3 2 [ / / / 136 37 38 39 48 149 | 42 4: 3

/V

WBUM (GRN)

YES-Go to step 5, NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time, Check for poor connections or loose termina l s at the No. 7 BACK UP FI ECU (7.5 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box and the PCM.11 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Check the No. 7 BACK UP FI ECU (7.5 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box. is th e fu s e O K ?

YES-Go to step 7, NO-Go to step 10.

Term inal side of fem ale terminals is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ? Y E S - G o to s te p 19.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A23) and the No. 7 BACK UP FI ECU (7,5 A) fuse, then go to step 13. 10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 11. Disconnect PCM connector A (43P), 12. Check for continuity between PCM connector termina l A23 and body ground.

7. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS. 8. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

PCM CONNECTOR A (43P)

]__ ____________o__ J 1 I2 3 4 I6 | 6 ? i8 11 12 13 7 7 16 / | 1 8 19 28 22 23 24 > 7 25 i 37 29 30 31 321 7 / 14014 I 42]43|441/] 4 0 1 /

j

X

CD

CO

i 20 21 ■ 27 28 ■ 38 39 4 8 14 9 1

¥ B U M (GRN)

Term inal side of fem ale terminals is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (A23) and the No. 7 BACK UP FI ECU (7.5 A) fuse. Also rep l ace the No. 7 BACK UP FI ECU (7.5 A) fuse, then go to step 13.

NO-Check the main under-hood fuse box, and repl ace it if needed (see page 22-88). Also replace the No. 7 BACK UP FI ECU (7,5 A) fuse, then go to step 13.

13. Reconnect all connectors.

DTC P0582: Charging System Low Voltage

14. Turn the ignition sw i tch to ON (II).

NOTE: • Before you troub l eshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooti ng information (see page 11-3). • If any high current load accessories are insta l l ed, this DTC can be set, • If DTC P16BB and/or P16BC is stored at the same time as DTC P0562, troubleshoot DTC P16BB and/or P16BC first, then recheck for DTC P0562.

15. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 18. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11 -282). 17. Start the engine, and l et it idle. 18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0 5 6 0 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the No. 7 BACK UP FI ECU (7.5 A) fuse and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO~Iroubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ 19. Reconnect a l l connectors. 20. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), 21. Start the engine, and let it idle. 22. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS, Is D T C P 0 5 6 0 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the No. 7 BACK UP FI ECU (7.5 A) fuse and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 21. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

1. Turn the i gnition switch to ON (II ). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the engine. 4. Check under these conditions; • A/Con • Temperature control at maximum coo l • Bl ower fan at maximum speed • Rear window defogger on • Headl ights on high beam 5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in P or N) for 1 minute. 6. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0 5 6 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-31), then go to step 7. NO- l ntermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the alternator and the main under-hood fuse box, and check the battery performance (see page 22-94).■

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 9. Do the PCM i dle l earn procedure (see page 11-282), 10. Start the engine. 11. Check under these conditions: • A/C on • Temperature control at maximum cool • Blower fan at maximum speed • Rear window defogger on • Headlights on high beam 12. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in P or N) for 1 minute. 13. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C

P 0 5 8 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the alternator, the battery, and the main under-hood fuse box, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is comp l ete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

DTC P0583; PCM Power Source Circuit Unexpected Voltage NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3), 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Wait 10 seconds, 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 5 6 3 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO~lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the under-hood fuse/re l ay box, the No. 8 IGP (15 A) fuse, and the PCM.B 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, 9. Disconnect

PCM

connector A (49P).

10. Measure the voltage between PCM connector termina l A8 and body ground. PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) M RLY(GRN)

p— — — —

f ~ ~ ~ ~ — -p—

2 3 | 4 | £i | 13 | 7 | 8 9 hoi J 111| 12 ■ 13 18 / |1 8 19 20 21 ■ 22 23 24 25 X 26 27 28 ■ / v

29 30 31

32j / / / 1 36 37 38 39

140141 4 2 |4 3 ]4 4 ^

48 49

Terminal side of female terminals is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 13. NO-Go to step 11. 11. Disconnect under-hood fuse/re l ay box connector E (14P).

12. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A6 and body ground.

17. Measure the vo ltage between PCM connector terminal B3 and body ground. P C M CONNECTOR B (49P)

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

11 12 13 / I / 22 23 24 >
c 26 27 28

29 30 31 32 L / . / / 1 36 37 38 39 140141 4 2 j 4 3 | 4 4 X / | 4 6 X / 4 8 j 49j

1 ig p (YEL/BLK)

—

E S I i_ 3 T l T T T f 7 t T 9|10| ■ 11 12 13 14|15 16 17]18 19 20 21 26 / / 22 23 24 > < 25 1 i 29 30 31 32 33 34 35136 37 38 39 4 8 |/| [40141 4 2 )4 3 (4 4 ^

J 112

O

3 1 4 1 5 ] 6 | 7 18

j 1 I2

i

—

(GRN) CD

M R IY

M

1 1

T e rm in al side of fem ale term in al s Terminal side of female terminals Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

Is th e re

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (A6) and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 19.

YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the PCM (B3) and the under-hood fuse/rel ay box, then go to step 19.

NO-Go to step 18.

NO-Go to step 18.

13. Reconnect PCM connector A (49P). 14. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

18. Test PGM-FI main rel ay 1 (built into the relay control module) (see page 22-111). Is P G M - F I m a in r e la y 1 O K ?

15. Measure the vo l tage between PCM connector terminal B3 and body ground. PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) IGP (YEL/BLK) i

n

J T 1T 1 3 ( 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 i r p o r ■ 11 12 13 14(15 16 17 18 19 20 21 ■

26 / / 25 ■ 29 30 31 32133 34 35J36 37 38 39 14 0 141 '4 2 j4 3 |4 4 [4 5 14 6 147 4 8 1 / |

YES-Go to step 28. NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page 22 - 88 ), then go to step 19.

19. Reconnect all connectors. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 21. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

22 23 24

22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 23. Wait 10 seconds. 24. Do the PCM id l e learn procedure (see page 11-282).

Term inal side of fe m a l e term inals is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 16. NO-Go to step 18. 16. Disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector H (9P).

25. Check for Pendi ng or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is

DTC P 0 5 8 3

in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the under-hood fuse/relay box and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 26. Reconnect all connectors.

DTC P0B02: PCM Programming Error

27. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8).

NOTE: • Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3). • This DTC is stored when a PCM update is not comp l eted. • Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or LOCK (0) w hi l e updating the PCM. If you do, the PCM can be damaged.

28. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C

P 0 5 6 3 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the under-hood fuse/relay box and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substi tuted, go to step 1, NO-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.®

1. Do the PCM update procedure (see page 11 -227). 2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C

P 0 6 0 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-223).H NO-The troubleshooting is complete,■

DTC P060A: PCM Internal Control Module Malfunction

DTC P0615: Starter Cut Relay STRLD Circuit Malfunction

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3).

NOTE: • Before you troub l eshoot, record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the genera l troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3). • If DTC P0705 and/or P0706 in the A/T system are stored at the same time as DTC P0815, troubleshoot DTC P0705 and/or P0708 first, then recheck for DTC P0615. • If DTC P16BD and/or P18BE are stored at the same time as DTC P0615, troubleshoot DTC P18BD and/or P16BE first, then recheck for DTC P0615.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0 6 0 A in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this tim e.B 4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8).

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch to START (III), and hold it for 1 second or more. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 8 1 5 in d ic a te d ? is D T C P 0 8 0 A in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5.

YES-lf the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at starter cut re l ay 1, transmission range switch and the P C M .I 5. Try to start the engine. .

D o e s th e e n g in e s ta rt?

YES-Go to step 8. NO-Go to step 13. 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Check the No. 1 STRLD (7.5 A) fuse in auxiliary under-dash fuse holder 1. is th e fu s e O K ?

YES-Go to step 8. NO-Replace the fuse, then go to step 28.

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)

10. Remove starter cut re l ay 1 (A) from the aux i liary under-dash relay block A.

STARTER CU T RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR

3 1 2

X 4

S T R L D (BRN)

!

JUM PER WIRE

Term inal side of fem ale term inals

12. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A28 and body ground.

PCM CONNECTOR A (43P) fZZZZZZc

I 1I2 i

3 | 4 15 18 [ 7 I 8

11 12 13 / I / 22 23 24

16 / ] 1 8 19 2 0 ;21 25

29 30 31 3 2 1 / / 4 2 (4 3 ^

[40141

o

3. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

11. Connect starter cut relay 1 4P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.

CO

8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

X

28 27 ;28

^ 3 6 37 38 :2 9

i i i

48 | 4 9 1

STRLD (PNK)

Term inal side of fem ale terminals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 32. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A28) and starter cut re l ay 1, then go to step 27.

13. Turn the ignit i on switch to LOCK (0). 14. Remove starter cut rel ay 1 (A) from the auxiliary under-dash rel ay block A.

18. Connect starter cut relay 1 4P connector termina l No. 4 to body ground with a jumper wire. STARTER CU T RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR

STRLY

(LT GRN)

JU M PER WIRE

Term inal side of fem ale terminals

17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 15. Remove starter cut relay 2 (A) from the auxili ary, under-dash re l ay block A,

18. Check the STARTER RELAY CONTROL RETURN in the DATA LIST with the HDS while the ignition switch i s in START (ill). Is O F F

in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 19. A

NO-Go to step 23. 19. Remove the jumper wire from starter cut rel ay 1 4P connector. 20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 21. Disconnect the transmission range switch 10P connector.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 22. At the switch side, check for continuity between transmission range switch 10P connector termina l s No. 2 and No. 8 with the shift lever in N, and then in P. TR A N S M IS S IO N RANGE SWITCH

10P CONNECTOR

26. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A3 and body ground with the jumper wire still connected. PCM CONNECTOR A

(49P)

00 t—

6 ND

J 1I 2

o

3 ■ 11 12 13 / I / 18 /|1 8 19 20 21 ■ 25 28 27 28 1 22 23 24 ■ 29 30 31 32L / / l / } 3 6 37 38 39 48|49| |40|41 CO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ID Tj-

ST

CO

STRLY (LT GRN) i

X 42l^\44\y\46\X

Term inal side of m al e terminals Term inal side of fem ale terminals Is th e re c o n tin u ity in e a c h s h ift le v e r p o s itio n ?

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair an open in the wire between the transmission rang sw i tch and starter cut rel ay 1, starter cut rel ay 2, or G101, then go to step 27.

YES-Go to step 32.

NO-Rep l ace the transmission range switch (see page 14-235), then go to step 27. 23. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 24. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 25. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A3) and starter cut re l ay 1, then go to step 27. 27. Reconnect all connectors. 28. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). 23. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 30. Do the PCM id l e learn procedure (see page 11-282). 31. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0& 1S in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at starter cut relay 1 and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is comp l ete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

1 32. Reconnect all connectors. 33. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 34. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 6 1 5 i n d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at starter cut re l ay 1 and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

DTC P§62F: PCM Internal Control Module Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Error NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. A r e a n y P e n d in g o r C o n fir m e d D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this tim e.B 4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 6 2 F in d ic a te d ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, substi tute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC P0630: VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch NOTE: • Before you troub l eshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troubleshooting informat i on (see page 11-3). • This DTC is stored only when the PCM does not have the VIN information of the vehic l e. Use the HDS to input the missing V I N information. 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Check the VIN with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S s h o w th e v e h ic le 's V IN ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-Go to step 3. 3. Input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te C O M P L E T E ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-Go to step 4. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0 6 2 F in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to the DTC P082F troubleshooting (see page

11-147).I NO-Go to step 9, 5. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS. 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 5 seconds. 8. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0 6 0 3 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 3. NO- l ntermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this time. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooti ng.■

9. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), 10, Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0 & 3 0 in d ic a te d ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substi tuted, go to step 1, NO-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is comp l ete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

DTC P0641: Sensor Reference Voltage A Malfunction NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troubleshooting information (see page 11 -3).

11. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS. 12. Disconnect PCM connectors A (49P), B (49P), and C (49P). 13. Check for continu i ty between body ground and PCM connector terminals A24, B18, and C12 individually.

1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS.

PCM C ONNECTOR A (49P)

3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 6 4 1 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4. N O- l ntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the P C M and these parts:® • Throttle body • Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor • APP sensor

j .......

.I 1 I 2 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 l / ' 8 11 12 13 / \ 7 16 / | 1 8 19 2 0 21 25 26 27 28 1 22 23 24

1 1

■

29 30 •1 321 / / / 1 36 37 38 39 ^2 14 3 14 4 1 / | 4 6 | / 4 8 |4 9 |

1 40 1 41

XVCC3 (RED)

Term inal side of fem ale term inals PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) ¥C C 5 (BLU)

4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Disconnect the connectors from these parts; • Throttle body • I nput shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor • APP sensor 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ).

8 “91101 , M I 2 3 1 11 12 13 14)15 16 17|1* 19 20 21 25 26 / / 22 23 24 1 1 29 30 31 32133 34 35)36 37 38 39 |4 0 |41 4 2 |4 3 |4 4 |4 5 |4 6 |47 4 8 M

Term inal side of fem ale terminals

7. Clear the DTC with the HDS. P C M CONNECTOR C (49P)

8. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

¥C C 2 (YEL/BLU)

NO-Go to step 3. 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS w h i l e connecting these parts, one at a time; • Throttle body • Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor ' • APP sensor

1

A

CD

12 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 11 1 2 14115 16 17|18 19 23 24 25 26 ■ / / / 31 32|33 34 3 5 ( 3 6 37 |4 0 |41 4 2 |4 3 |4 4 |4 5 |46 47 J

YES-Go to step 10.

O

1

is D T C P 0 6 4 1 in d ic a te d ?

1

20 21 27 28 1 38 / 481491

Term inal side of fem ale term inals

is D T C P 0 6 4 1 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Replace the part that caused the DTC when it was reconnected, then go to step 14. NO-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the PCM and the following parts, then go to step 1. • Throttle body • Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor • APP sensor

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (A24, B18, or C12) and each part that was disconnected in step 5, then go to step 14. NO-Go to step 20.

10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Reconnect a ll connectors.

DTC P0651: Sensor Reference Voltage B Malfunction

17. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot, record a ll freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

18. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282).

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

19. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

16. Turn the i gnition switch to ON (II).

is D T C P 0 6 4 1 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the PCM and the fo l l owing parts, then go to step 1. • Throttle body • I nput shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor • APP sensor NO-Troub l eshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting,■ 20. Reconnect a ll connectors. 21. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 22. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 8 4 1 in d ic a te d ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the PCM and the following parts, then go to step 1, • Throttle body • I nput shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor • APP sensor NO- l f the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■

3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 8 5 1 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the PCM and these parts:!! • MAP sensor • O u tp u t sh a ft (cou ntersh aft) speed sen sor

• • • •

I MT actuator EGR valve APP sensor FTP sensor

4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Disconnect the connectors from these parts: • MAP sensor • Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor • IMT actuator • EGR valve • APP sensor • FTP sensor 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 8. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 6 5 1 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 10. NO-Go to step 9.

is D T C P 0 6 5 1 in d ic a te d ?

13. Check for conti nuity between body ground and PCM connector terminals A25, B36, and C11 individually.

'3

■

YES-Replace the part that caused the DTC when it was reconnected, then go to step 14.

22 23 24

18

J> < / / 1 1 29 30 31 32 33 34 3536 37 38 39 42 4314414514|5147 48 I / I 0

_

NO-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the PCM and the following parts, then go to step 1. • MAP sensor • Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor • IMT actuator • EGR valve • APP sensor • FTP sensor

|4 |5 |6 |7

11 12 13 / I /

0

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

CO

9. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS w hi l e connecting these parts, one at a time; • MAP sensor • Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor • I MT actuator • EGR va l ve • APP sensor • FTP sensor

10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

V

VCC1 (YEL/RED)

11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Term inal side of fem ale term inals

12. Disconnect PCM connectors A (49P), B (49P), and C (49P).

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) VCG 6 {YEL/BLU!

1I 2 ^¥]TITr¥T7tT

9 ho| 1 11 12 / 14115 16 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 24 > < 25 'X . 26 27 28 1 31 32 33 34 3 5(36 37 38 / 7 / |40 |41 42 |43 |44 |45 |46 |47 48 |49 |

J

Term inal side of fem ale term inals

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (A25, B36, or C11) and each part that was disconnected in stepB, then go to step 14.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Reconnect all connectors. 18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 17. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 18. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 19. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C

P 0 6 5 1 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the PCM and the following parts, then go to step 1. • MAP sensor • Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor • IMT actuator • EGR valve • APP sensor • FTP sensor NO-Troub l eshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ 20. Reconnect al l connectors. 21. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 22. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C

P 0 6 5 1 in d ic a te d ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the PCM and the following parts, then go to step 1. • MAP sensor • Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor • I MT actuator • EGR valve • APP sensor • FTP sensor N O- l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

DTC P0685: PCM Power Control Circuit/Internal Circuit Malfunction NOTE: • Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting informati on (see page 11-3). • If the problem does not return after you clear the DTC, or it this DTC is stored intermittentl y, check for l oose terminals at the IGP line connectors before rep l acing the PCM. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, 3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 5. Start the engine, and l et it idle for 30 seconds. 8. Turn the i gnition switch to LOCK (0), 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P0885

in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 3. NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this t im e .! 9. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), 10. Start the engine, and let it idle for 30 seconds. 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 12. Start the engine, and l et it idle for 30 seconds, 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I). 15. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS, Is D T C P0885

in d ic a te d ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 10. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is comp l ete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11 -229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

DTC P1109; BARO Sensor Circuit Out of Range High

DTC P1116: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Range/Performance Problem

NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3).

NOTE; • Before you troubleshoot record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • If DTC P0111 is stored at the same time as DTC P1116, troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC P1116.

1. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 2. Start the engine. 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 1 1 0 9 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at th i s time. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■ 4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substi tute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8).

1. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2. A r e th e c o n n e c tio n s a n d te r m in a ls O K ?

YES-Go to step 2. NO-Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to step 21. 2. Turn the i gnition switch to ON (II). 3. Check for Pendi ng or Confirmed DTCs w i th the HDS.

6. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. A r e D T C P 1 1 1 6 a n d P 2 1 8 3 in d ic a t e d a t th e s a m e tim e ?

Is D T C P 1 1 0 9 in d ic a te d ?

YES- l f the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1, N O-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

YES-Go to step 12. NO-Go to step 4. 4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes, 5. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LI ST with the HDS. Is a b o u t 1 0 9 ° F (4 3 °C ) o r le s s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Repl ace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-223), then go to step 21. NO-Go to step 6.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 6. Turn the ignition sw i tch to LOCK (0).

15. Turn the i gnition switch to LOCK (0).

7. A l l ow ECT sensor 1 to cool to the ambient temperature.

16. Allow the sensors to cool to the ambient temperature.

8. Note the ambient temperature. 3. Turn the i gniti on switch to ON (II), 10. Quickl y note the va l ue of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 11. Compare the va l ue of ECT SENSOR 1 and the ambient temperature.

17. Note the ambient temperature, 18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 19. Quickly note the va l ue of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 20. Compare the va l ue of ECT SENSOR 1 and the ambient temperature, and the va l ue of ECT SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature individually.

D o e s th e v a lu e o f E C T S E N S O R 1 d iffe r 5 .4 ° F (3 °C ) o r

Does one o f th e

m o re fro m th e a m b ie n t te m p e r a tu r e ?

fro m th e a m b ie n t te m p e r a tu r e ?

YES-Rep l ace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-223), then go to step 21.

YES-Replace the sensor that differed more than 5.4 °F (3 °C) from the ambient temperature, then go to step

NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM.B 12. Start the engine, and l et it id l e for 10 minutes. 13. Check ECT SENSOR 1 i n the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is a b o u t 1 0 9 ° F (4 3 °C ) o r le s s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-223), then go to step 21. NO-Go to step 14. 14. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is a b o u t 1 0 9 ° P (4 3 °C ) o r le s s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11 -223), then go to step 21. NO-Go to step 15.

s e n s o rs d iffe r m o re th a n 5 .4 ° F (3 ° C )

21.

N O- l ntermittent failure, the system i s OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM.B 21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 22. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11 -282). 24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 1 1 1 6 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

DTC P1128: MAP Sensor Signal Lower Than Expected

7. Turn the ign i tion switch to LOCK (0).

NOTE: • Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and revi ew the genera l troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Before starting this troubleshooting, check for poor connections or a blockage at the intake a i r duct.

9. Turn the ignition sw i tch to ON (II).

1. Turn the ignit i on switch to ON (II ). 2. Check the MAP SENSOR i n the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is le s s th a n 5 4 .1 k P a ( 1 6 .0 in H g , 4 0 6 m m H g ) o r 1.61 ¥ h e ld f o r m o r e th a n 5 s e c o n d s ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Go to step 3. 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 4. Start the engine. Hol d the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 5. Test-drive under these conditions: • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 158 °F (70 °C) • Engine speed about 1,200 rpm or more • Transmission in D • Vehicle speed about 15 mph (24 km/h) or more under half thrott l e • Drive 2 seconds or more 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1128 in the DTCs MENU w i th the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 7.

8. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-222).

10. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 11. Do the PCM idle l earn procedure (see page 11 -282). 12. Start the engine. Hol d the eng i ne speed at 3,000 rpm without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then l et it id l e. 13. Test-drive under these conditions: • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 158 °P (70 °C) • Engine speed about 1,200 rpm or more • Transmissi on in D • Vehicle speed about 15 mph (24 km/h) or more under half throttle • Drive 2 seconds or more 14. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 1 1 2 8 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Go to step 15. 15. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1128 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. Does th e

H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 14, go to the ind i cated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO- lf the HDS indicates FAI LED, check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 12.

N O-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, interm i ttent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 4 and recheck.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC P1129: MAP Sensor Signal Higher Than Expected NOTE; Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the genera l troub l eshooting i nformation (see page 11-3). 1. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts: • PCV valve • PCV hose • EVAP canister purge valve • Throttle body • Intake manifold • Brake booster • Brake booster hose A r e th e re a n y v a c u u m le a k s ?

YES~Repair or replace the part(s) with vacuum leaks, then go to step 9. NO-Go to step 2, 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 3. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. is th e re m o re th a n 3 8 .9 k P a (1 1 .0 in H g , 2 7 7 m m H g ) o r 1 .1 4 V h e ld fo r m o re th a n 5 s e c o n d s ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Go to step 4.

4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 5. Test-drive under these conditions; • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 168 °F (70 °C) • Engine speed between 1,200—5,900 rpm • Transmission in D • Drive at a steady speed between 55—75 mph (88—120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate (with the throttle fu l ly closed) for 2 seconds. 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1129 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, interm i ttent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose termina l s at the MAP sensor and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 6 and recheck. 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11 -222). 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 10. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 11. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11 -282). 12. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle, 13. Test-drive under these conditions: • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 158 °F (70 °C) • Engine speed between 1,200—5,900 rpm • Transmission in D • Drive at a steady speed between 55—75 mph (88—120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate (with the throttle fu l ly c l osed) for 2 seconds. 14. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 1 1 2 9 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.

15. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1129 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 14, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 12.

DTC P1172: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range High DTC P1174: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range High NOTE: • Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general' troubleshoot i ng information (see page 11-3). • Information marked with an asterisk (1 app l ies to the front bank (Bank 2). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the engine. Hol d the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) unti l the radiator fan conies on, then let it idle. 4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1172 and/or P1174* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO- lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this t i me. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/P sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the HDS indicates EXECUTI NG, keep idling unti l a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDIT I ON, go to step 3 and recheck. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 6. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -224), 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 9. Do the PCM id l e learn procedure (see page 11-282). 10. Start the engine. Hol d the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) unti l the radiator fan comes on, then let i t idle. 11. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 1 1 7 2 a n d /o r P 1 174* in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC PI 172 and/or PI 174* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. ■ D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Troub l eshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 11, go to the ind i cated DTCs troubleshooting.■ N O- lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose termina l s at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates EXECUTI NG, keep id l ing until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, g o to step 10.

DTC P1297: ELD Circuit Low Voltage NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS, is 7 2 A o r m o re in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 3. NO-lntermittent fa i lure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ELD and the P C M .I 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 1$ 7 2 A o r m o re in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Go to step 11. 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). 10. Check for cont i nuity between PCM connector terminal A10 and body ground. PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) ELD (ORN) (

— — —

\ ri 1 2 3 I 4 |£ \ | < 29 30 31 3 2 1 / / / | 3 6 37 38 39 140141 4 2 |4 3 |4 4 l/|46 |X 48|49|I

Term inal side of female terminals

15. Reset the PCM with the HDS, 16. Do the PCM id l e learn procedure (see page 11-282), 17. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS, Is D T C

P 1 2 9 8 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 18. NO~Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■ 18. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8).

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 11. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A10) and the ELD, then go to step 13. 11. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. ELD 3P CONNECTOR

! G N D (BLK)

W ire side of fem ale term inals

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 12. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ELD and G302, then go to step 13.

19. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 1 2 9 8 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ELD unit and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck, If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO -lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the origina l PCM (see page 11 -229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting,®

DTC P1549: Charging System High Voltage NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • If a high voltage battery (24 V, etc.) i s connected to the vehicle, th i s DTC can be stored. 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

DTC P16BB: Alternator B Terminal Circuit Low Voltage NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and revi ew the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3), 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the engine.

4. Check under these conditions: • A/C off • Headl ights off • Rear window defogger off

4. Check under these conditi ons: • A/Con • Temperature control at maximum cool • Blower fan at maximum speed • ■Rear window defogger on • Headlights on high beam

5. Hol d the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in P or N) for 1 minute.

5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in P or N) for 1 minute.

6. Check for Pending or Confi rmed DTCs w ith the HDS.

6. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

3. Start the engine.

Is D T C P 1 5 4 9 in d ic a te d ?

Is D T C

YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-31), then go to step 7.

YES-Go to step 7.

NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the alternator and the ■main under-hood fuse box.®

NO- l ntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the alternator and the main under-hood fuse box, and check the battery performance (see page 22-94).■

7. Turn the ignition sw i tch to ON (II). 8. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

P 1 8 B B in d ic a te d ?

7. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the alternator and the main under-hood fuse box ( + B line).

9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). A r e th e c o n n e c tio n s a n d te r m in a ls O K ?

10. Start the engine. 11. Check under these conditi ons: • A/C off • Headlights off • Rear window defogger off 12. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in P or N) for 1 minute.

YES-Go to step 8. NO-Repair the connections or terminals, then go to step 9. 8. Check for an open in the wire between the alternator and the main under-hood fuse box at the starter subharness. Is th e h a rn e s s O K ?

13. Check for Pending or Confi rmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 1 5 4 9 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the alternator and the main under-hood fuse box, then go to step 1.

YES-Replace the a lternator (see page 4-31), then go to step 9. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the alternator and the main under-hood fuse box, then go to step 3.

NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 10. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 11. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 12. Start the engine. 13. Check under these conditions: • A/C on • Temperature control at maximum cool • Bl ower fan at maximum speed • Rear window defogger on • Headlights on high beam

DTC P16BC: Alternator FR Terminal Circuit/IGP Circuit Low Voltage NOTE; Before you troub l eshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3). 1. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the alternator 4P connector. A r e th e c o n n e c tio n s a n d te r m in a ls O K ?

YES-Go to step 2. NO-Repair the connections or terminals, then go to step 18,

14. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in P or N) for 1 minute.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ).

15. Check for Pending or Confi rmed DTCs with the HDS.

3. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

Is D T C P 1 6 B B in d ic a te d ?

4. Start the engine.

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the al ternator and the main under-hood fuse box, then go to step 1.

5. Check under these conditions: • A/C on • Temperature contro l at maximum cool • Blower fan at maximum speed • Rear window defogger on • Headlights on high beam

NO-Troubleshooting is comp l ete. If any other Pending or Confi rmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

8. Hold the engine speed 2,000 rpm (in P or N) for 1 minute. 7. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 1 6 B C in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 8. NO- I intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose termina l s at the alternator.® 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 9. Disconnect the a lternator 4P connector. 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ).

11. Measure the voltage between a l ternator 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.

16. Check for continuity between a lternator 4P connector terminal No. 4 and PCM connector terminal C44. ■

■ ■

.

ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR

ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR

IG1 (BLK/YEL)

1 2 3 4

r- i I 2 3 4

ALTF (W H T/R ED )

W ire side of fem ale term inals PCM CONNECTOR C

J 1 I 2 11 12 ■

W ire side of fe m a l e te rm in a l s

3 |4 |5

(49P)

7 | 8 9 | 10| ■ 17|18 19 20 21

| 6 |

14(15 18

25 26 27 28 / 23 24 X 1 31 3 2 133 34 35|36 37 38 / / |40|41 42|43|44|45|46|47 48|49|

ALTF (W H T/R ED ) Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

Term inal side of fem ale term inals

YES-Go to step 12.

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the alternator (IG1 line) and the No. 18 ACG (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 17. 12. Measure the voltage between alternator 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.

YES-Go to step 26. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (C44) and the a lternator, then go to step 18. 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 18. Reconnect a ll connectors.

ALTERNATOR 4P C ONNECTOR

19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 20. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). ALTF f¥ ¥H I/R E D )

22. Start the engine.

Is th e re a b o u t 5 ¥ ?

23. Check under these conditions: • A/Con • Temperature control at maximum coo l • Blower fan at maximum speed • Rear window defogger on • Headl ights on high beam

YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-31 )f then go to step 17.

24. Hold the engine speed 2,000 rpm (in P or N) for 1 minute.

NO-Go to step 13.

25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

W ire side of fem ale term inals

13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Is D T C P 1 8 B C in d ic a te d ?

14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the alternator and the PCM, then go to step 1.

15. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).

NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 26. Reconnect a ll connectors.

DTC P16BD: Starter Cut Relay 2 Malfunction

27. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8).

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3),

28. Start the engine.

1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

23. Check under these conditions: • A/C on • Temperature contro l at maximum cool • Blower fan at maximum speed • Rear window defogger on • Headl ights on high beam

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.

30. Hold the engine speed 2,000 rpm (in P or N) for 1 minute. 31. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i th the HDS. Is D T C P 1 6 B C in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the alternator and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 28. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11 -229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

3. Check the STARTER CUT RELAY in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is 2 .2 ¥ o r le s s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4, NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at starter cut relay 1, starter cut relay 2, and the PCM.H 4. Try to start the engine. D o e s th e e n g in e s ta r t?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-Go to step 11. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Check the No. 1 STRLD (7.5 A) fuse in auxiliary under-dash fuse holder 1. Is th e fu s e O K ?

YES-Replace starter cut relay 2, then go to step 20, NO-Go to step 7. 7. Remove the b l own fuse from auxiliary under-dash fuse ho l der 1. 8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

10. Check for conti nuity between PCM connector terminal A28 and body ground.

11. Remove starter cut relay 1 (A) from the auxiliary under-dash re l ay block A.

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

IzznE . h 12

13

| 4 | 5 | 6 | 7T8

11 12 13 / I / 16 / ] 1 8 19 22 23 24 x , 25 > c 28 ■ 29 30 31 321 / / / 1 36 37 | 40 | 41 42 43 ; 4 4 !,-'!46:.,-'

__

9 101 i 20 21 i 27 28 i 38 39 48 14 9 1

STRLD (PNK)

Terminal side of female term inals

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (A28) and auxiliary under-dash fuse holder 1, A l so replace the No. 1 STRLD (7.5 A) fuse, then go to step 19, NO-Replace the No. 1 STRLD (7.5 A) fuse, then go to step 19.

12. Check the STARTER CUT RELAY in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is 2 .2 ¥ o r le s s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 13. NO-Replace starter cut relay 1, then go to step 20.

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 13. Remove starter cut rel ay 2 (A) from the auxiliary under-dash relay block A.

16. Turn the i gnition switch to LOCK (0). 16. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). 18. Check for continuity between starter cut rel ay 1 4P connector term i nal No. 2 and body ground. STARTER C U T RELAY 1 4P C ONNECTOR

3

S TR LD (BR N )

14. Check the STARTER CUT RELAY i n th e DATA LIST

with the HDS.

Terminal side of femal e terminal s

Is 2 ,2 V o r le s s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 15. NO-Rep l ace starter cut re l ay 2, then go to step 20.

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between starter cut relay 1 and auxiliary under-dash fuse ho l der 1, then g oto step 13. NO-Go to step 24.

13. Reconnect all connectors.

DTC P16BE: Starter Cut Relay 1 Malfunction

20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

21. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 22. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 23. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 1 6 B D i n d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at starter cut re l ay 1, starter cut relay 2, and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting i s complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ 24. Reconnect all connectors. 25. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11 -227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8).

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds. 3. Check the STARTER CUT RELAY in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is 3 .2

¥

or m o re

in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at starter cut re l ay 1, starter cut relay 2, and the PCM.B 4. Remove starter cut relay 1 (A) from the auxi l iary under-dash re l ay block A,

26. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C

P 1 8 B D in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at starter cut relay 1, starter cut relay 2, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the origina l PCM (see page 11 -229). If any other Pendi ng or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■ 5. Check the STARTER CUT RELAY in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is 3 .2 ¥ o r m o re in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-Replace starter cut relay 1, then go to step 7.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 8. Measure the vo l tage between starter cut rel ay 1 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground, STARTER CUT RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR

11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 12. Reconnect all connectors, 13. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 14. Check for Pendi ng or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

S T R L D (BRN)

(v;

Term inal side of female term inals

is th e re 3 ,2 V o r m o re ?

YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between starter cut rel ay 1, starter cut rel ay 2, and the P C M , then go to step 7. NO-Go to step 11. 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11 -282). 10. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 1 6 B E in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at starter cut relay 1, starter cut rel ay 2, and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troub l eshooting is comp l ete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■

Is D T C P 1 8 B E in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at starter cut re l ay 1, starter cut relay 2, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, g oto step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is comp l ete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

DTC P16BF: Starter Cut Relay STRLY Circuit Malfunction

9. Remove starter cut re l ay 1 (A) and starter cut relay 2 (B) from the auxiliary under-dash relay block A.

NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 1.Turn the i gniti on switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 6 seconds. 3. Check the STARTER RELAY CONTROL RETURN in the DATA LIST with the HDS. is O F F in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-Go to step 14.

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at starter cut relay 1, starter cut re l ay 2, and the PCM.B 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Remove the I G2 cut relay, and the ACC cut relay from their soket (see page 22-8). 8. Test the IG2 cut relay, and the ACC cut relay (see page 22-109). A r e th e re la y s O K ?

YES-Go to step 9. NO-Rep l ace the IG2 cut relay, and/or ACC cut relay, then go to step 24.

YES-Go to step 11. NO-Rep l ace starter cut relay 1 and/or starter cut relay 2, then go to step 24. 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 12. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). 13. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal A3 and body ground. P C M CONNECTOR A (49P) —

—

(LT GRN)

“ " - “ “ - I STRLY

C

Ti----- il

1

I 2 ' 11 12 13 / I / 22 23 24

.^

J l

O

YES-Go to step 8,

A r e th e re la y s O K ?

i

18 / | 1 8 19 20 21 26 27 28

25

29 30 31 32 L / / |4 0 |4 1

X

i

i

^ 3 6 37 38 39 CO

is O F F in d ic a te d ?

10. Test starter cut re l ay 1 and starter cut relay 2 (see page 22-109),

CD

5. Check the STARTER RELAY CONTROL RETURN in the DATA LIST with the HDS while the ignition switch is in START (III ).

_00

4. Turn the ignition switch to START (III ), and hold it for 5 seconds or more.

Term inal side of fem ale terminals

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (A3) and starter cut relay 1, starter cut relay 2, or the IG2 cut relay, then go to step 24.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Remove the 1G2 cut relay, and the ACC cut relay from their soket (see page 22-8). 16. Test the I G2 cut relay, and the ACC cut relay (see page 22-109). A re th e re la y s O K ?

22. Measure the vo ltage between PCM connector termina l A3 and body ground. PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) —

— — l STRLY (LT GRN) fZ ZZ ZZE 1 | 2 11 12 13 /

YES-Go to step 17. NO-Rep l ace the IG2 cut relay, and/or ACC cut relay, then go to step 30. 17. Remove starter cut relay 1 (A) and starter cut relay 2 (B) from the under-dash relay block A.

Ez3[

J

i

I /

IHToT■

18 l / | i 8 19 20 21

1

X , 26 27 28 1 29 30 31 3 2 1 / / i/lse 37 38 39 |4 0 |4 1 42 [43 ]4 4 1 / | 4 8 1 / 4 8 |4 9 | 22 23 24

25

Term inal side of fem ale terminals

Is th e re 1.0 ¥ o r m o re ?

YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the PCM (A3) and starter cut re l ay 1 or starter cut re l ay 2, then go to step 23. NO-Go to step 29. 23. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 24. Reconnect all connectors. 25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 26. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 18. Test starter cut rel ay 1 and starter cut re l ay 2 (see page 22-109).

27. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 28. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

A re th e re la y s O K ?

Is D T C P 1 8 B F In d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 19.

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at starter cut relay 1, starter cut relay 2, and the PCM, then goto step 1.

NO-Replace starter cut rel ay 1 and/or starter cut relay then go to step 24.

2,

19. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 20. Disconnect PCM connector A (43P). 21 .Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).

NO-Troubleshooting is comp l ete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

29. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 30. Reconnect all connectors. 31. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 32. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C

P16BF indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at starter cut relay 1, starter cut relay 2, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO- l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■

DTC P2183: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Range/Performance Problem NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot, record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troub l eshooti ng i nformation (see page 11-3). • If DTC P0111 is stored at the same time as DTC P2183, troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC P2183. 1. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2. Are th e c o n n e c tio n s a n d te rm in a ls O K ?

YES-Go to step 2. NO-Repair the connections or terminals, then go to step 21. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Are D T C P1116 a n d P 2 1 8 3 in d ic a t e d a t th e s a m e tim e ?

YES-Go to step 12. NO-Go to step 4. 4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes. 5. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is a b o u t

116 °F (4 7 °C ) o r le s s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11 -223), then go to step 21. NO-Go to step 6.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 8, Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

7. Allow ECT sensor 2 to cool to the ambient temperature.

18. Allow the sensors to cool to the ambient temperature.

8. Note the ambient temperature. 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 10. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 11. Compare the va l ue of ECT SENSOR 2 and the amb i ent temperature.

17. Note the ambient temperature. 18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 19. Quickl y note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR 2 quickl y in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 20. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR la n d the ambient temperature, and the value of ECT SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature individually.

a m b ie n t te m p e r a tu r e ?

D o e s o n e o f th e s e n s o r s d iffe r m o r e th a n 5 .4 fr o m th e a m b ie n t te m p e r a tu r e ?

YES-Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11 -223), then go to step 21.

YES-Replace the sensor that differed more than 5.4 °F (3 °C) from the ambient temperature, then go to step

D o e s E C T S E N S O R 2 d iffe r 5 .4 ° F (3 ° C ) o r m o re fro m th e

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM.B 12. Start the engine, and l et it idle for 10 minutes. 13. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LI ST with the HDS. is a b o u t 1 0 9 ° F (4 3 ° C ) o r le s s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-223), then go to step 21. NO-Go to step 14. 14. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. is a b o u t 1 0 9 ° F (4 3 °C ) o r le s s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Repl ace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-223), then go to step 21. NO-Go to step 15.

°F

(3

°C )

21 . N O -l n te rm itte n t fa ilu re , the system is OK at th is tim e . Check fo r p o o r co n ne ctions o r loose te rm in a ls at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the P C M .B

21 .Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 22. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 2 1 8 3 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2 , and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC’s troubleshooting.■

DTC P2184: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage

11 .Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

12. Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-223). 13. Reconnect all connectors. 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

15. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282).

Is a b o u t 8 5 6 ° P (1 8 0 °C ) o r m o re , o r 0 .0 8 ¥ o r le s s

17. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 3.

Is D T C P2184 in d ic a te d ?

NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system i s OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at ECT sensor 2 and the PCM.B

YES-Check for poor connecti ons or l oose termina l s at ECT sensor 2 and the PCM, then go to step 1.

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

NO-Troubleshooti ng is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■

4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector. 18. Reconnect all connectors.

5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is a b o u t 8 5 6 ° F (1 8 0 °C ) o r

more, or 0 .0 8

¥ o r le s s

i n d ic a te d ?

19. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 20. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

YES-Go to step 7.

Is D T C P2184 in d ic a te d ?

NO-Go to step 11.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 2 and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

7. Turn the ignition sw i tch to LOCK (0). 8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). 10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P connector termina l No. 1 and body ground.

NO- l f the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are i ndi cated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooti ng,■

ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR

ECT2 (BLU)

Wire side of female terminals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between ECT sensor 2 and the PCM (A21), then go to step 13. NO-Go to step 18. (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC P2185: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and feview-the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

11. Measure the vo ltage between ECT sensor 2 2P connector termina l No. 1 and body ground. ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is a b o u t

1 ECT2(BLU)

— 4 0 ° F ( — 4 0 °C ) o r le s s , o r 4 .9 2 ¥ o r m o re

in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 3. NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at.th i s time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 2 and the PCM,■

Wire side of female terminals

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),

Is th e re a b o u t 5 ¥ ?

4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector.

YES-Go to step 12.

5. Connect ECT sensor 2 2P connector term i nal s No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.

NO-Go to step 18.

ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR

12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, 14. Disconnect PCM connector A (43P).

1 ECT2 (BLU)

2 SG4 (GRN)

15. Check for continuity between PCM connector term i nal A27 and ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminal No. 2. ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR

1

JUMPER WIRE

SG4 (GRN) I Wire side of female terminals

Wire side of female term i nal s PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) SG4

8. Turn the i gnition switch to ON (II), 7. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is a b o u t

— 4 0 ° F ( — 4 0 °C ) o r le s s , o r 4 ,9 2 ¥ o r m o re

in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 8. NO-Go to step 20.

(GRN)

J 1 I 2 3 I 4 I 5 | 6 I 7 I 8 ®1101■ I 11 12 13 7 1 7 18/|18 19 JO21 25 X 28 27 28 i* ■ 22 23 24 29 30 31 3 2 1 / 7 / 136 37 38 39 140141 ,421431441/1461/ 48|49|

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there c o n tin u ity ?

8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

YES-Go to step 27.

9. Remove the jumper wire from the ECT sensor 2 2P connector.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A27) and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 22.

10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

16. Turn the ignit i on switch to LOCK (0). 17. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 18. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

19. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A21 and ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminal No. 1. ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR

27. Reconnect all connectors. 28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substi tute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 29. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

ECT2(BLU) I______________

Is D T C

P 2 1 8 5 in d ic a te d ?

■

W ire side of female terminals PCM CONNECTOR A |43P) ECT2 (PUR)

_

8 9 h o| h | j ..... ....... ........ ... i 11 12 13 / I / 18 / 1 18 19 20 21 ■ 22 23 24 25 28 27 28

„h

i

X

29 30 31 3 2 1 / / / | 3 6 37 38 39 | 4 0 | 41 4 2 1 4 3 1 4 4 1 / | 4 6 | / 481491

Terminal side of female terminals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 27. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A21) and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 22. 20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 21. Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-223). 22. Reconnect al l connectors. 23. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 24. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 25. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 26. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 2 1 8 5 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 2 and the PCM, then go to step 1, NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at ECT sensor 2 and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. N O-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete, If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC P2195: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,

7. Turn the ign i tion switch to LOCK (0).

Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean

8. Reinstall the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -224).

DTC P2197: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,

9. Turn the ign i tion sw itch to ON (II).

Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean

10. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot, record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review.the general troub l eshooting information (see page 1-1-3). • I nformation marked with an asterisk O applies to the front bank (Bank 2). • If the vehic l e was out of fue l and the engine stalled before this DTC was stored, refuel, and clear the DTC with the HDS, • If DTC P2101, P2118#P2135, P2138, P2178r or a combination of P2122 and P2127, P2122 and P2138 or P2127 and P2138 are stored at the same time as DTC P2135 (P2197)*, troub l eshoot those DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P2195 (P2197)\

11. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11 -282).

1. Check for dirt or debris in the MAF sensor/IAT sensor.

12. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 2 1 9 5 a n d /o r P 2 1 9 7 * in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1, NO-Go to step 13. 13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2195 and/or P2137* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Troubleshooti ng is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were i ndicated in step 12, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

is it d irty ?

YES-Remove the debris. If needed, replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page 11-222). NO-Go to step 2. 2. Check the install ation of the A/F sensor (Sensor 1). is th e A / F s e n s o r lo o s e o r d is c o n n e c te d fro m th e e x h a u s t p ip e ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Go to step 3, 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 5. Start the engine, and l et it idle for 2 minutes. 6. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 2 1 9 5 a n d /o r P 2 1 9 7 *in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 14. NO- l ntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose termina l s at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

NO- l f the HDS i ndicates FAI LED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.

14. Update the PCM if i t does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 15. Start the eng i ne, and let it idle for 2 minutes. 16. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 2 1 9 5 a n d /o r P 2 1 9 7 *in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good P C M (see page 11-8), then go to step 15. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-Go to step 17. 17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2195 and/or P2137* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 18, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS i ndicates FAILED, check for poor connections or l oose termina l s at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), go to step 15, If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep id l ing until a result comes on.

DTC P2227; BARO Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troub l eshooting i nformation (see page 11-3). • If DTC P0107, P0108, P1128, and/or P1129 are stored at the same time as DTC P2227, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P2227. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), and wait 2 seconds. 2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is a b o u t 101 k P a (2 9 .9 in H g , 7 8 0 m m H g ), o r a b o u t 2 .9 ¥ a t s e a le v e l in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 3. NO-Go to step 7. 3. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS. 4. Start the engine. Hol d the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let i t idle. 5. Test-drive under these conditions: • Engine coo l ant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 158 °F (70 °C) • Transmission in D • Throttle position between 13 deg and 26 deg for at l east 3 seconds 6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2227 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO- lf the HDS indicates PASSED, interm i ttent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 4 and recheck. 7. Check the intake air system for clogging or restriction (foreign material, dirty air cleaner e l ement, etc). Is th e in ta k e a ir s y s te m c l o g g e d o r r e s tr ic te d ?

YES-Remove the clog or restriction, then go to step 9.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 8, Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 9. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then l et it id l e. 10. Test-drive under these conditions; • Engine coo l ant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 158 °F (70 °C) • Transmission in D • Throttl e position between 13 deg and 28 deg for at least 3 seconds

DTC P2228: BARO Sensor Circuit Low Voltage NOTE: • Before you troub l eshoot, record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Check the label on the PCM to see if it was made by Keihin or Continenta l . Refer to the General Troubleshooting I nformation for more details (see page 11-5). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

11. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i th the HDS. Is a b o u t 4 3 k P a (1 2 ,7 in H g , 3 2 3 m m H g ) , o r 1.31 Is D T C P 2 2 2 7 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose termina l s at the PCM . If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM, then go to step 9. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-Go to step 12. 12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2227 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is comp l ete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11 -229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 11, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAI LED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 9. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 3.

¥ o r le s s

in d ic a te d ? (K e ih in P C M ), is a b o u t 3 5 k P a (1 0 .3 in H g , 2 6 0 m m H g ), o r 1 .0 8 V o r le s s in d ic a te d ? (C o n tin e n ta l P C M ),

YES-Go to step 3, NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this tim e .ll 3. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 2 2 2 8 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO- l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

DTC P2229: BARO Sensor Circuit High Voltage NOTE: • Before you troub l eshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Check the l abel on the PCM to see if it was made by Keihin or Continental . Refer to the General Troubleshooting I nformation for more details (see page 11-5). 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ). 2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LI ST with the HDS. Is a b o u t

1 6 0 k P a (4 7 .2 in H g , 1 ,2 0 0 m m H g ), o r 4 .4 9 V o r

m o re in d ic a te d ? (K e ih in P C M ), is a b o u t 1 2 0 k P a (3 5 .4 in H g , 9 0 0 m m H g ), o r 4 .9 5 V o r m o re in d ic a te d ? ( C o n tin e n ta l P C M ).

YES-Go to step 3. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time M 3. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i th the HDS.

DTC P2237: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) IP Circuit High Voltage DTC P2240: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) IP Circuit High Voltage NOTE: • Before you troub l eshoot, record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • I nformation marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the front bank (Bank 2). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the eng i ne. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it i dle 2 minutes. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 2 2 3 7 a n d /o r P 2 2 4 0 * in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM .ll 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

is D T C P 2 2 2 9 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

6. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS. 7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector. 8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

NO- l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 9. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector terminal No. 5 to and PCM connector terminal B31 (B32)\ A /F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -224). 16. Reconnect all connectors. 16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 17. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

IPBl (GRN)

!PB2

(GRN/RED)*

19. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS,

W ire side of female terminals P C M CONNECTOR B (43P! | 1 | 2

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7

8

is D T C P 2 2 3 7 a n d /o r P 2 2 4 0 * i n d ic a t e d ?

9 11 0 1 i

11 12 13 14(15 16 17(18 19 20 21 i

22 23 24

X

25 26 / / 29 30 31 32(33 34 35(36 37 38 39

■

| 4 0 | 41 42 Jz .3)44 [ 4 5 1 4 8 147 4 8 1 / !

IPBl (GRN)

18. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282).

1PB2 (G R N /R E D )*

T e r m i n a l s id e o f fe m a le t e r m i n a l s

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1.

NO-Go to step 20. 20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2237 and/or P2240* in th e DTCs MENU w ith the HDS.

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

D o e s th e H D S i n d ic a t e P A S S E D ?

YES-Go to step 10.

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 13, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (831 (B32)*) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step 15. 10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P). 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it id l e 2 minutes. 12. Measure the vo ltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector termina l No. 5 and body ground. A /F SENSOR (SENSOR

1) 6P CONNECTOR

NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on. 21. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 22. Reconnect all connectors. 23. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 24. Start the engine, and let it idle.

1 2 / 4 5 6 IPBl

(GRN) . 1PB2 (G R N /R E D )*

W ire side of female term inals

25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 2 2 3 7 a n d /o r P 2 2 4 0 *in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

20. Mon i tor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2237 and/or P224CT in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 25, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting,■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substi tute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1 If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.

DTC P2238: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low Voltage DTC P2241: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low Voltage NOTE: • Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • I nformation marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the front bank (Bank 2). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

is D T C

P 2 2 3 8 a n d /o r P 2 2 4 1

Indicated?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lnterm i ttent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose termina l s at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.B 5. Turn the igniti on switch to LOCK (0). 6. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS. 7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector. 8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 3. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B31 (B32)* and body ground.

13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -224). 15. Reconnect all connectors.

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

16. Turn the i gnition switch to ON (II). 17. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

i

n

2 '3 | 4 I 5 I 6 | 7 ' 8 J 1 11 12 13 14 15 10 17(18 19 20 21

X

i

X

25 26 22 23 24 i / / 29 30 31 32! 33 34 35 38 37 38 39

■

40 41 4 2 1^ 3p4l45l46|47

IPBl (GRN)

48 H

IPB2 (GRN/RED)*

18. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 19. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 2 2 3 8 a n d /o r P 2 2 4 T in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose termina l s at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Go to step 20.

Terminal side of female term inal s

20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2238 and/or P2241* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS,

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (B31 (B32)*) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step 15.

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 13, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

NO-Go to step 10.

NO-lf the HDS ind i cates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose termina l s at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling unti l a result comes on.

10. Reconnect

PCM

connector B (49P).

11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. 12. Measure the vo ltage between A/P sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground. A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) SP CONNECTOR

21. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 22. Reconnect all connectors. 23. Update the PCM if it does not have the l atest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 24. Start the engine, and let it idle.

1 2 / 4

5

6 IPB1 (GRN)

JPB2 (GRN/RED)*

Wire side of female terminals

25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 2 2 3 8 a n d /o r P 2 2 4 T

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2238 and/or P2241* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is comp l ete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the .original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 25, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO- l f the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1 If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling unti l a result comes on.

DTC P2243: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit High Voltage DTC P2247: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit High Voltage NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot,., record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Information marked w ith an asterisk (*) applies to the front bank (Bank 2). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 2 2 4 8 a n d /o r P 2 2 4 7 * in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system i s OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.H 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector. 8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 3. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 8P connector terminal No. 6 and PCM connector terminal 815(824)*. A /F SENSOR (SENSOR 1! 6P CONNECTOR

13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -224). 15. Reconnect all connectors. 16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ). 17. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

¥€ E N T B 2 (R E D /W H T )* V C E N IB 1 (RED) W ire side of female terminals P C M CONNECTOR B (49P) W CENIB2 (R E D /W H T )*

.M 12

.

11 12 1 ]

1

V C E N IB 1 (RED)

22 23 24

18. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 19. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 2 2 4 3 a n d /o r P 2 2 4 7 '' in d ic a te d ?

9 11C 4 | 14(15 16 17)18 19 20 21

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose termina l s at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step

X

1.

I 6I

25

8

26

/

/

29 30 31 3 2 133 34 35|3 6 37 38 39

|4 0 |41 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 | 4 5 | 4 6 | 4 7 4 8 1 / u—

1

Term inal side of female terminals

Is th e re

NO-Go to step 20. 20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2243 and/or P2247* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 10, NO-Repair an open i n the wire between the PCM (B15 (B24)*) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step 15. 10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P). 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then l et it idle 2 minutes. 12. Measure the vo l tage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector terminal No. 8 and body ground. A /F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 8P CONNECTOR

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 19, go to the ind i cated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on. 21. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 22. Reconnect all connectors. 23. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 24. Start the engine, and let it idle. 25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

WCENTB1 (RED)

vVCENTB2 fR E D /W H T )*

W ire side of female terminals

Is D T C P 2 2 4 3 a n d / o r P 2 2 4 7 * i n d ic a t e d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2243 and/or P2247* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES- l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 25, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooti ng.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was substi tuted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling unti l a result comes on.

DTC P2245: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit Low Voltage DTC P2249: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit Low Voltage NOTE: • Before you troub l eshoot, record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3). • Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the front bank (Bank 2), 1. Turn the ignition sw itch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it i dle 2 minutes. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 2 2 4 5 a n d /o r P 2 2 4 9 * in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.B 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS. 7, Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector. 8. Disconnect PCM connector B (43P).

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 3, Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B15 (B24)* and body ground. P C M CONNECTOR

13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Repl ace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-224). 15. Reconnect all connectors.

B (49P)

18, Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

V C E N IB t (RED)

n 3 14 15 j 6 I 7 | 8 11 12 13 14|15 10 17|18 19 20 21 25 20 22 23 24 ■ 29 30 31 32 33 34 35138 37 38 39 2 | 4 3 14 4 J4 5 14 8 J47 140141

fZ Z IZ Z j

J 1I 2

4

17. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

ITfioT■

18. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282).

/ /

19. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

■

481X1

Is D T C P 2 2 4 5 a n d /o r P 2 2 4 9 * in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step

V C E N IB 2

(RED/WHT)*

1.

NO-Go to step 20, Term inal side of female term inals

20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2245 and/or P2243* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (B15 (B24)*) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step 15,

YES-Troubleshooting is comp l ete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 19, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting,■

NO-Go to step 10.

NO-lf the HDS indicates FAI LED, check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1, If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling unti l a result comes on,

10. Reconnect PCM connector B (43P). 11. Start the engine, Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. 12. Measure the vo l tage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector terminal No. 8 and body ground. A /F SENSOR (SENSOR

1) 6P CONNECTOR

21. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 22. Reconnect all connectors. 23. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 24. Start the engine, and l et it id l e.

1 2 / 4 5 6

25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. ¥C E N T 81 (RED) VCENTB2 (R ED /W HT)

W ire side of female terminals

Is D T C P 2 2 4 5 a n d /o r P 2 2 4 9 * in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2245 and/or P2243* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 25, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.

DTC P2251; Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1f Sensor 1) VS Circuit High Voltage DTC P2254; Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VS Circuit High Voltage NOTE: • Before you troub l eshoot, record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • If DTC P2251 and/or P2254* is stored at the same time as DTC P0134 and/or P0154*, troub l eshoot DTC P2251 and/or P2254* first, then recheck for P0134 and/or P0154*. • Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the front bank (Bank 2), 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 2 2 5 1 a n d /o r P 2 2 5 4 ‘ i n d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose termina l s at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM .ll 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector. 8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 9, Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector terminal No. 4 and PCM connector terminal B13 (B14)*. A /F SENSOR (SENSOR 1)

6P CONNECTOR

13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 14. Repl ace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -224). 15. Reconnect all connectors. 18, Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

1 2 4

/

17. Reset the PCM with the HDS,

5 6 ¥ S B 2 (W H T/R E D !*

¥SB1 (BLU)

W ire side of female terminals P C M CONNECTOR B (43P) WSB1

(BLU)

19. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

WSB2 (W H I/R E D )* 8 13 14|15 16 17|18 19 26 24 25 34 35|36 37 31 42 4 3 | 4 4 | 4 5 | 4 6 f 47 r—

..

X

CO CO CM CO

J 1I2 11 12 23 i 22 29 30 14 0 141

X

9

M■

20 21

/ / 38 39 4 8 1 /1

18. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282).

■

Term inal side of female term inals

Is D T C P 2 2 5 1 a n d / o r P 2 2 5 4 *in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1, NO-Go to step 20, 20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2251 and/or P2254* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Go to step 10.

YES-Troubleshooti ng is comp l ete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 19, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

NO-Repai r an open in the wire between the PCM (B13 (B14D and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step 15. 10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P). 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. 12. Measure the voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector termina l No. 4 and body ground. A /F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) SP CONNECTOR

NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on. 21. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 22. Reconnect all connectors. 23. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 24. Start the engine, and let it idle, 25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

¥SB1 (BLU) VSB2 (WHT/RED)*

W ire side of female terminals

Is th e re a b o u t 0 ,2 V o r le s s ?

YES-Go to step 21,

I f D T C P 2 2 5 1 a n d /o r P 2 2 5 4 *in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2251 and/or P2254* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS, D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-223). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 25, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO- l f the HDS indicates FAI LED, check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1 If the HDS i ndicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a resu lt comes on.

DTC P2252; Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low Voltage DTC P2255: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low Voltage NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troubleshooting i nformation (see page 11-3). • Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the front bank (Bank 2). 1. Turn the ignit i on switch to ON (II ). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the engine. Hol d the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C

P 2 2 5 2 a n d /o r P 2 2 5 5 *in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose termina l s at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.B .5. Turn the ignition sw i tch to LOCK (0). 6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector. 8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 9. Check for conti nuity between PCM connector terminal B13 (B14)* and body ground.

18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

¥SB2 (WHT/RED)*

CO

14. Repl ace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-224), 15. Reconnect all connectors,

PCM CONNECTOR i (49P) VSB1 fBtU )

13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

17. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 0

7 1 2 :iT ^ l T T T T T t T 11 12 13 14|i5 16 17)18 19 20 21 25 X 28 / / 22 23 24 X 1 29 30 31 32)33 34 35)36 37 38 39 p o jiT 48 \ / \

18. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 13. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 2 2 5 2 a n d /o r P 2 2 5 5 ‘ in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose term i nals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. Terminal side of femal e term inals

Is th e re

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (B13 (814)1 and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step 15. NO-Go to step 10. 10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P). 11. Start the engine. Hol d the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then l et it idle 2 minutes. 12. Measure the vo ltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground. A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 11 SP CONNECTOR

NO-Go to step 20. 20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2252 and/or P225S* i n the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Troubleshooting is comp l ete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 19, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or l oose termina l s at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1, If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a resu lt comes on. 21. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 22. Reconnect all connectors. 23. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good P C M (see page 11-8). 24. Start the engine, and let it idle.

VSB1 (BLU) VSB2 (WHT/RED)*

25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 2 2 5 2 a n d /o r P 2 2 5 5 *in d ic a te d ?

Wire side of female terminals

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1,

26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2252 and/or P2255* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting, is complete. If the PCM was substi tuted, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 25, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a resu lt comes on.

DTC P2270: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1, Sensor 2) Circuit Signal Stuck Lean DTC P2272: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2, Sensor 2) Circuit Signal Stuck Lean NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3). • I nformation marked with an asteri sk (*) applies to the front bank (Bank 2). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) unti l the radiator fan comes on, then l et it idle. 4. Test-drive under these conditions; • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 158 °F (70 °C) • Transmission in D • Engi ne speed between 1,500—3,000 rpm • Drive 35 seconds or more 5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2270 and/or P2272* in the DTCs MENU w i th the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, i ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the HDS indicates EXECUTI NG, keep driv i ng until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3 and recheck.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Repl ace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page 11-225). 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 10. Do the PCM id l e learn procedure (see page 11 -282). 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 12. Test-drive under these conditions: • Engine coo l ant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 158 °F (70 °C) • Transmission in D • Engine speed between 1,500—3,000 rpm • Drive 35 seconds or more 13. Check for Pending or Confirmed-DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 2 2 7 0 a n d /o r P 2 2 7 2 ‘ in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1, NO-Go to step 14. 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2270 and/or P2272* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 13, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, g o to step 12.

DTC P2610: PCM Ignition Off Internal Timer Malfunction NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 2 8 1 0 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.® 4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 2 6 1 0 in d ic a te d ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck, If the P C M was substituted, go to step 1. NO- lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If the PCM was substi tuted, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229), If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.®

DTC P2A00: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Circuit Range/Performance Problem DTC P2A03: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Circuit Range/Performance Problem NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • I nformation marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the front bank (Bank 2). 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 4. Test-drive under these conditions: • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 158 °F (70 °C) • Transmission in D • Vehicle speed between 25—55 mph (40—88 km/h) for 5 minutes. • Drive at a steady speed between 55—75 mph (88—120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for 8 seconds. 5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2A00 and/or ' P2A03* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S i n d ic a te F A IL E D ?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, i ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, If it is EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3 and recheck.

6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -224). 8. Turn the ign i tion switch to ON (II). 9. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 11. Test-drive under these conditions: • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 158 °F (70 °C) • Transmission in D • Vehicl e speed between 25—55 mph (40—88 km/h) for 5 minutes. • Drive at a steady speed between 55—75 mph (88—120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate (with the thrott l e fu l ly closed) for i seconds. 12. Check for Pending or Confi rmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 2 A 0 0 a n d /o r P 2 A 0 3 * in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1.

NO-Go to step 13. 13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2A00 and/or P2A0X in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-Troub l eshooting is complete, If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 12, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■ NO- lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates EXECUTI NG, keep driving until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 11.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC U0029: F-CAN A Malfunction (BUS-OFF (PCM)) NOTE; Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3).

DTC U0047: F-CAN B Malfunction (BUS-OFF (PCM)) NOTE;

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

• For vehic l es without the adaptive cruise control (ACC) - if this DTC is stored, do not try to repair the vehicle. • Before you troubleshoot, record a l l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),

1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Is D T C

U 0 0 2 9 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.11 4. Update the P C M if it does not have the latest software (see page 11 -227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), 5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i th the HDS.

2. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C U 0 0 4 7 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4, NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time, if any o th e r Pending or C o n firm e d DTCs are in dica ted,

go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ 4. Watch the adaptive cruise control (ACC) indicator.

is D T C U 0 0 2 9 in d ic a te d ? D o e s th e A C C in d ic a to r ( a m b e r ) s ta y o n ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the P C M was substituted, go to step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■

YES-Check for ACC system DTC, and do the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-Go to step 5. 5. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 8, Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C U 0 0 4 7 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the ACC unit and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good P C M (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11-223). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■

DTC U0104: F-CAN A Malfunction (PCM^ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unit) NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the genera l troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3).

10. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A48 and ACC unit 20P connector terminal No. 10. ACC U N IT 2©P C ONNECTOR

1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

! .n n 11 2 3 / 7 5 6 7 8 9 113 11 •12 '13 ‘14 ■15 ■10 ‘17 '18,/ 20 F-CAN A H (W HT)

2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

T e rm in a l side of fem ale te rm in a l s

A r e D T C U 0 0 2 9 a n d U 0 1 0 4 in d ic a t e d a t th e s a m e tim e ?

YES-Go to the troubleshooting for DTC U0029 (see page 11-194).■ NO-Go to step 3. 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

P C M CONNECTOR A

J 1 |2 11 12 23 ■ 22 29 30 4 0 |41

|

(49P)

3 |4 |5 |6 |7 |8 9 1101 i 13 16 19 20 21 /P 8 ■ 25 24 26 27 28 i / b e 37 38 39 31 321 / 4 8j49|

7I7

>< / ^43j44[/|46|7

F-CAN A H (W HT) W ire side of fe m a l e terminals

is D T C U 0 1 0 4 in d ic a te d ?

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 5.

YES-Go to step 11.

NO- l ntermittent fa i l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose termina l s at the ACC unit and the PCM.B

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A48) and the ACC unit, then go to step 12.

5. Check for communication to the DRIV I NG SUPPORT SYSTEM with the HDS

11. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A49 and ACC unit 20P connector term i na l No. 20. ACC U N IT 20P C ONNECTOR

D o e s th e H D S c o m m u n ic a te w ith th e A C C u n it?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-Go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-203).11

1 n Tn 1 2 3 / ' 5 8 1 8 9 10l ir 11 '12 '13 ■14 15 '18 * \Q / ;20 F-CAN A L (RED) I Term inal side of fem ale term inals

6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 8. Disconnect the ACC unit 20P connector. 9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

P C M CONNECTOR A (49P)

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 TjioT ■ 19 20 21 11 12 13 / \ 7 16 i 27 22 23 24 25 26 28 X ■ ■ 29 30 31 321/ / / | 3 6 37 38 39 |4 0 |41 4 2 14 3 14 4 1/ | 46 1 / 4 8 |4 9 | J 1 I 2

F-CAN A L (RED) W ire side of fem ale term inals is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Substitute a known-good ACC unit (see page 25-84), then go to step 12 and recheck. If PTCU0104is not indicated after substi tution, replace the original ACC unit (see page 25-84), then go to step 12. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A49) and the ACC unit, then go to step 12.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 12. Reconnect all connectors. 13. Turn the ignition sw i tch to ON (II ).

DTC U0114: F-CAN A Malfunction (PCMSH-AWD Control Unit)

15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282).

NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot, record a l l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

14. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

Is D T C U 0 1 0 4 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ACC un i t and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troub l eshooting is comp l ete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS, A r e D T C U 0 0 2 9 a n d U 0 1 14 in d ic a t e d a t th e s a m e tim e ?

YES-Go to troub l eshooting for DTC U0029 (see page 11-194). NO-Go to step 3. 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C U 0 1 1 4 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose termina l s at the SH-AWD contro l unit and the PCM .ll 5. Check for communicati on to the SH-AWD system with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S c o m m u n ic a te w ith th e S H -A W D c o n tr o l u n it?

YES-Go to step 8. NO-Go to the SH-AWD symptom troub l eshooting for SH-AWD indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are stored (see page 15-81). 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 8. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P). 9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

10. Check for continuity between PCM connector termina l A48 and SH-AWD contro l unit connector A (20P) terminal No. 10. SH -A W D CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A

n 1 7

(20P)

I--------------- f ._______ n 8 |9 10 3 Z l 7 j

1112ZZZZ17181 E F-CAN A H (WHT)

20

Term inal side of female terminals

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

11. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A43 and SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) terminal No. 20. S H -A W D CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A

3 / 5 1 11 12 / /

(20P)

8 9 10 17 18 19 20 / F-CAN A L (RED) L

Term inal side of fem ale terminals

PCM CONNECTOR A

(49P)

I===I < [ 25 X ■ 29 30 31 321 / / / ] 3 6 37 38 39 |40|41 4 2 14 3 14 4 1 / | 4 6 1 / 4 8 |4 9 |

7I7

F-CAN A L fRED) L W ire side of fem ale terminals

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 11.

YES-Update the SH-AWD control unit if i t does not have the latest software (see page 15-7), or substitute a known-good SH-AWD contro l unit (see page 15-66), then g oto step 12 and recheck. If DTC U0114 is not indicated after substitution, replace the origina l SH-AWD control unit (see page 15-66), then go to step 12 .

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A48) and the SH-AWD control unit, then goto step 12.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A43) and the SH-AWD control unit, then go to step 12. 12. Reconnect a ll connectors. 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 15. Do the PCM idle l earn procedure (see page 11 -282), 16. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C U 0 1 1 4 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the SH-AWD control unit and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is comp l ete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC U0122: F-CAN A Malfunction (PCM-VSA Modulator-Control Unit) NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3).

10. Check for continuity between PCM connector termina l A48 and VSA modulator-control unit 48P connector terminal No, 39, V S A M ODULATOR-CONTROL U N IT 46P CONNECTOR 6

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS, A re D T C

~L F-CAN A

H fWHI) L _ _

Term inal side of fem ale terminals

U0029 a n d U0122 in d ic a t e d a t th e s a m e tim e ? PCM CONNECTOR A

YES-Go to troubleshooting for DTC U0029 (see page 11-104).■ NO-Go to step 3, 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C U 0 1 2 2 in d ic a te d ?

(49P)

1=1

J 1I 2

8 11 12 13 16 / | 1 8 19 25 > < 26 ■ 22 23 24 29 30 31 3 2 | / / / b e 37 140141 42(43 J44 | X | 4 6 f X

X

9 |10| i 20 21 i 27 28 i 38 39 4 8 J49]

X

F-CAN A

H (WHT) «—

W ire side of fem ale terminals

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit and the PCM.H 5. Check for communication to the VSA with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S c o m m u n ic a te w ith th e V S A m o d u la to r - c o n tr o l u n it?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-Go to the VSA symptom troubleshooting for the ABS indicator, the brake system indicator, and the VSA indicator that will not go off (see page 19-103).■ 6. Turn the i gnition switch to LOCK (0), 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 8. Disconnect the VSA modu l ator-control unit 46P connector. 9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P),

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 11. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A48) and the VSA modulator-control unit, then go to step 12.

11. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A43 and VSA modu l ator-control unit 46P connector termina l No. 38. V SA MODULATOR-CONTROL U N IT 46P CONNECTOR

DTC U0155: F-CAN A Malfunction (PCM-Gauge Control Module) NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3). 1. Turn the ignition sw i tch to ON (II).

F-CAN A L fRED) Terminal side of female terminals

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

PCM CONNECTOR A (49PJ Is D T C

F-CAN A

L fRED)

O

3 4 [5 |6 [7' 8 ■ 13 / ! / 16 / | 1 8 19 20 21 ■ 24 > < 25 X 26 27 28 1 31 3 2 I / 1/ / ) 3 6 37 38 39 42 j 1? s44 [ 14f) [, / 48 j 49 j CD

J 1I2 11 12 22 23 ■ 29 30 40 41

I

W ire side of female terminals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 13-115), or substitute a known-good VSA modu l ator-control unit (see page 19-117), then go to step 12 and recheck. If DTC U0122 is not indicated after substitution, replace the original VSA modulator-contro l unit (see page 13-117), then go to step 12. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A49) and the VSA modulator-contro l unit, then go to step 12.

U0155 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO- l ntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the gauge contro l modu l e and the PCM.B 4. Check for body el ectrica l DTCs in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. Is DTC B1168, B1169, a n d /o r B1178 indicated?

YES-Go to step 5. IMO-Do the gauge control module input test (see page 22-418).11 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 7. Remove the gauge control module (see page 22-419). 8. Disconnect gauge control module connector A (12P). 9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

12. Reconnect all connectors, 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 16. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS, is D T C U 0 1 2 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the VSA modu l ator-control unit and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting,■

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A48 and gauge contro l module connector A (12P) terminal No. 12.

11. Check for continuity between PCM connector termina l A49 and gauge control module connector A (12P) termina l No. 8.

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (12P)

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (12P)

ri™ 1 2 3

n, 5 8 1 2 3 / 7 8 9 10 11 12

5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

P C M CONNECTOR A (49P)

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 1101 i 11 12 13 / I / 16 / 1 15 19 20 21 i 20 27 28 i 22 23 24 X . 25 i 29 30 31 3 2 l / / / ] 3 6 37 38 39 140141 42 4 3 | 4 4 1 / 1 4 6 1 / 48|49| J 1 | 2

I----

J 1 I 2 '3 | 4 11 12 13 ■

|

6

|7I 8

16 / 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 > < 26 27 28 29 30 31 3 2 1 / / / | 3 6 37 38 39

,

■ ■ ■

4 8 j4 9 |

|— 40141 42 LA

F-CAN AH (WHT) I Wire side of female terminals

| 5

o

F-CAN A L (RED) ........_... Terminal side of female terminals

CO

F-CAN A H (WHT) L _ Terminal side of female terminals

F-CAN A URED) L Wire side of female terminals

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 11.

YES-Substitute a known-good gauge contro l module (see page 22-419), then go to step 12 and recheck. If DTC U0155 is not indicated, replace the origina l gauge contro l module (see page 22-419), then go to step 12,

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A48) and the gauge contro l module, then go to step 12.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A49) and the gauge contro l modu l e, then go to step 12. 12. Reconnect a ll connectors. 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ). 14. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 15. Do the PCM idle l earn procedure (see page 11-282). 16. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C U 0 1 5 5 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the gauge control module and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■

I F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Do the PCM update procedure for the PGM-FI and A/T systems (see page 11-227). 2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C U 0 3 0 0 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Repl ace the original PCM (see page 11-229),■ NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

2. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS, 3. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). 4. Measure the resistance between PCM connector terminals A48 and A43, then compare your reading to the model/trim l evel listed the table below. Vehicles w ith active damper: Other Systems Adaptive cruise contro l

Resistance About 44—55 0

(A C C )

(USA model) Adaptive cruise contro l (ACC) (Canada model)

About 45—58 0

Vehicles w itho ut active damper: Other S f stems Adaptive cruise contro l fACCi (USA model) Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (Canada model) Without adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Resistance About 48—57 0 About 46—57 0 About 48—53 0

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

TTTY1 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 11 12 13 / I / " 16 / N 19 22 23 24 > < 25 X 28 ■ 29 30 31 32 L / / / 1 36 37 (40141 4 2 | 4 3 i 4 4 | / ^ 4 6 [ / F-CAN A

(WHT)

o

NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3). • Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or LOCK (0) w hi l e updating the PCM. If you do, the PCM w il l be damaged,

1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

CO

DTC U0300: PGM-FI System and A/T System Program Version Mismatch

20 21 27 28 38 39

i i i

48149]

H

F-CAN A L (RED)

Terminal side of female term inal s is th e re s is ta n c e OK.?

YES-Go to step 20.

(cont'd)

F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

__o__________ ____ o__ ____ 3 | 4 1 £;1(3 | 7 | 8 9 10 ■ 11 12 13 7 1 7 16 / | 1 8 19 20 21 ■ 28 27 28 22 23 24 > < 25 1 29 30 31 321/ / 7 3 6 37 38 39

J 1 I2

CO

Tf Tt

X

F-CAN A (WHT)

r 3

1

6

7

8

9

F-CAN A

10

11

H (W HT)

I

Term inal side of female terminals

f

P C M CONNECTOR A (49P) ~ Y = = j— n

n /! 8

9 11° | ■ 12 13 / I / 16 /] 1 8 19 20 21 i 22 23 24 5 > < ^ 25 28 27 28 23 30 31 3 2 | / / / | 3 6 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 48 49 1 | 2

3

4 | f > 11 H

11

X

F-CAN A H (WHT) ' W i re side of female terminals

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 8, NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A48) and the gauge control module.■

V SA M ODULATOR-CONTROL U N IT 48P CONNECTOR

F-CAN A H (WHT)

48 14 3 1

H

T„J

8. Check for continuity between PCM connector termina l A48 and VSA modulator-contro l unit 46P connector terminal No. 39.

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

40 41 42 143

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (12P)

CXI

8. Check for continuity between PCM connector termina l s A48 and A49.

7. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A48 and gauge control module connector A (12P) terminal No. 12.

i

5. Disconnect these connectors: • Gauge contro l module connector A (12P) (see page 22-413), • VSA modulator-contro l unit 48P connector (see page 19-117). • Yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector (see page 19-113). • Steeri ng angle sensor 5P connector (see page 19-112). • SRS unit connector A (39P) (see page 24-214), • TPMS contro l unit 20P connector (see page 18-158). • Active damper contro l unit connector B (14P) (with active damper) (see page 18-118). • SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) (see page 15-66). • ACC unit 20P connector (with ACC) (see page 25-84), • E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P) (with ACC) (see page 24-221). • Acuralink control unit connector A (32P) (USA mode l with Acuralink) (see page 23-133).

F-CAN A L fRED)

Terminal side of female terminals PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

Terminal side of female terminals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wires between PCM connector terminals A48 and A 4 9 .ll

r n r " 3 1”] ; I r « / , I 9 110 j 1 11 12 13 / I / 16 /1 1 8 19 20 21 1 25 26 27 28 22 23 24 ■ ■ 37 38 39 29 30 31 3 2 [ / / [40[41 42,4 48|49|

X

F-CAN A

NO-Go to step 7.

H (WHT)

W ire side of female terminals

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 9. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A48) and the VSA modulator-control uni

3. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A48 and SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) termina l No. 10.

11. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A49 and gauge control module connector A (12P) terminal No. 8.

S H -A W D CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (20P)

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (12P)

i--------- r_______ __n .l Z 3 / 5 7 7 8 9 0

rt_______

1112ZZZZ1718

i------------------

P 1

20

2 7

F-CAN A H (WHT)

8

r __ n

3 Z

5

9

10 11

6. 12

F-CAN A L (RED)

Terminal side of fe m al e te rm inal s

Terminal side of fe m al e terminals PCM CONNECTOR A {49P1

P C M CONNECTOR A (49P)

J 1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 hol 11 12 13 7LZ 16 / | 1 8 19 20 21 i i 28 27 28 22 23 24 25 X ■ ■ 29 30 31 32 1 / / / | 3 6 37 38 39

o

CO

J 1I 2 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 11 12 13 / I / 18 / 1 18 19 2021 i ■ 22 23 24 25 X 26 27 28 ■ i 29 30 31 3 2 1 / / / 1 36 37 38 39 |4 0 |41 42 14 3 14 4 1 / | 46 [ / 4 8 |4 9 |

| 4 0 | 41

42

481491

F-CAN A L (RED) L— — W ire side of fe m a l e terminals

W ire side of female terminals is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-

YES-Go to step 12.

• With ACC: Go to step 10. • Without ACC: Go to step 11.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A49) and the gauge contro l module.!

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A48) and the SH-AWD control unit.B 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A48 and ACC unit 20P connector terminal No. 10.

12. Check for conti nu i ty between PCM connector terminal A49 and VSA modulator-control unit 48P connector term i nal No. 38. V S A MODULATOR-CONTROL U N IT 4SP CONNECTOR

i

0 3 / |

5

7

8

| col

ACC U N IT 20P CONNECTOR 1.. 1 2

r 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 / 20 F-CAN A H {WHT} ___ Terminal side of fem ale terminals

PCM CONNECTOR A f43P)

J 1 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 TTToT■ 11 12 13 / | / 18 / ] 1 8 19 2021 ■ 22 23 24 25 . X 28 27 28 ■ ■

F-CAN A L (RED) Te rm inal side of fe m a l e terminals PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 i 11 12 13 / | / 10 / 1 18 19 20 21 i 28 27 28 22 23 24 25 X ■ i 29 30 31 3 2 1 / / / | 3 0 37 38 39 4 8 14 9 1 140141 42 . h h

F-CAN A L (RED) I

29 30 31 3 2 1 / / / 1 36 37 38 39 140141 4 2 14 3 14 4 | / | 4 6 | / 4 8 | 4 9[

F-CAN A H (WHT) W ire side of female terminals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 11. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A48) and the ACC unit.B

W ire side of female terminals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 13. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A49) and the VSA modulator-control unit.B

(cont'd)

F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) 13, Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A49 and SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) terminal No. 20. SH -A W D CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (20P)

15. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector, 18. Measure the resistance between PCM connector term i nals A48 and A43.

ijrj

nu 1 / 3 / 11 12 / /

8

/

9

10

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

1? 18 19 20 / F-CAN A L fRED) [ (

Terminal side of fe m a l e terminals

O1

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

n r J 1 1 2 3 | 4 | £ 1 3 | 7 | 8 9 11 0 1i 11 12 13 7 1 / 16 / N 19 20 21 ■ 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 321 7 7 7 3 8 37 38 39 41 42 | 4 3 | 4 4 ] 7 | 4 € | 7 ^ 48 14 9 1

I 1 I2 ■

3 |4 |5 |6 |7 |8

11 12 13

18 / | 1

22 23 24

25

9 |10| i 8 19 20 21 28 27 28

F-CAN A H (WHT)

i ■

F-CAN A L fRED)

> < / 1 36 37 38 39 4 2 )4 3 1 4 4 1 ^ 1 4 6 1 / 4 8 |4 9 |

29 30 31 3 2 1 / / (40141

Terminal side of female terminals W ire side of female terminals

Is th e r e

is th e re a b o u t 1 0 8 — 1 3 2 D ?

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 17.

YES-

NO-Substitute a known-good VSA modu l ator-control unit (see page 19-117), then reconnect PCM connector A. If the HDS identi fies the vehicle, replace the orig i nal VSA modulator-control unit (see page 13-117).■

• With ACC: Go to step 14. • Without ACC; Go to step 15. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A49) and the SH-AWD control unit.B 14, Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A49 and ACC unit 20P connector terminal No. 20. ACC U N IT 20P CONNECTOR

i _, _, _ 1 2 3 / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12113 14 15 16 •17 18 2 20 F-CAN A L fRED) [ Terminal side of fem ale terminals PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

7 |8

J 1I2 I

11 12 13 / I / 22 23 24

16 / N 25 >
( 17 18 J 1 12 3 I 4 11 12 13 / I / 18 A 18 19 22 23 24 25 28 29 30 31 3 2 1 / / / | 3 6 37 41 42 (43 ^ I o I

|

X M /H a l/

\ 9 11 0 1 i 20 21 i 27 28 i 38 39 48 14 9 1

F-CAN A H (WHT)

F-CAN A L (REDJ

Terminal side of female term inal s Is th e re a b o u t 1 0 8 — 13 2 D ?

YES-Go to step 20. NO-Substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit (see page 15-66), then reconnect PCM connector A. If the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace the origina l SH-AWD control un i t (see page 15-66).!

20. Disconnect these connectors: • Gauge contro l module connector A (12P) (see page 22-419). • VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector (see page 19-117). • Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector (see page 19-113). • Steering angle sensor 5P connector (see page 19-112). • SRS unit connector A (39P) (see page 24-214). • TPMS control unit 20P connector (see page 18-158). • Acti ve damper contro l unit connector B (14P) (with active damper) (see page 18-116). • SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) (see page 15-66). • ACC unit 20P connector (with ACC) (see page 25-84). • E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P) (with ACC) (see page 24-221). • AcuraLink control unit connector A (32P) (USA model with Acuralink) (see page 23-133). 21. Check for continuity between PCM connector termina l A48 and body ground.

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P!

J 1 I2

3

11 12 13

4

.

I £H

22 23 24 > .
40 ■41 42 143 144

27 28 > < 20 / | 3 6 37 38 39

[ / 1 46 [/

i

i

48 14 9 1

F-CAN A H (WHT)

I U

T erm inal side of fe m al e terminals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repaira short in the wire between the PCM (A48) and the gauge contro l modu l e, the VSA modulator-control unit, the SRS unit, the TPMS control unit, the yaw rate-lateral/ l ongitudinal accel eration sensor, the steering ang l e sensor, the SH-AWD control unit, the active damper contro l unit (with active damper), the AcuraLink control unit (with Acuralink), the ACC unit (with ACC), the E-pretensioner unit (with ACC), or the D L C .I

(cont'd)

F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) 22. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A49 and body ground.

PCM CONNECTOR A

(49P)

31 .Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 32. Reconnect the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit 46P connector, 33. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P). 34. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), and read the HDS. D o e s th e H D S id e n tify th e v e h ic le ?

YES-Replace the SRS unit (see page 24-214).! NO-Go to step 35. [40 [41 [42 [43 [4 4 1 x ^ 4 1 ^ 48 49 F-CAN A I f R E D ) ,

35. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 36. Reconnect SRS unit connector A (39P). 37. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.

Terminal side of female term inal s

38. Turn the i gnition switch to ON (II), and read the HDS.

Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? D o e s th e H D S id e n tify th e v e h ic le ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the P C M (A49) and the gauge control module, the VSA modulator-contro l unit, the SRS unit, the TPMS contro l unit, the yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudinal accel eration sensor, the steering ang l e sensor, the SH-AWD contro l unit, the active damper control unit (with active damper), the Acuralink control un i t (with Acuratink), the ACC unit (with ACC), the E-pretensioner unit (ACC), or the DLC.11 NO-Go to step 23.

YES-Replace TPMS control unit (see page 18-158).! NO-Go to step 39, 39. Turn the ignition sw itch to LOCK (0). 40. Reconnect the TPMS contro l unit 20P connector. 41. Di sconnect the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector. 42. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and read the HDS.

23. Reconnect all connectors.

D o e s th e H D S id e n tify th e v e h ic le ?

24. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3).

YES-Repl ace the yaw rate-l ateral/l ongitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-113).!

25. Disconnect gauge control modu l e connector A (12P). 26. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), and read the HDS.

NO-Go to step 43. 43. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

D o e s th e H D S id e n tify th e v e h ic le ?

YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page 22-419).! NO-Go to step 27, 27. Turn the i gnition switch to LOCK (0). 28. Reconnect gauge contro l module connector A (12P). 29. Disconnect the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit 48P connector. 30. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), and read the HDS. D o e s th e H D S id e n tify th e v e h ic le ?

YES-Replace the VSA modu l ator-control unit (see page 19-117).!

44. Reconnect the yaw rate-1ate ra I/I ongit udinaI acceleration sensor 4P connector. 45. Disconnect the steering ang l e sensor 5P connector. 46. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and read the HDS. D o e s th e H D S id e n tify th e v e h ic le ?

YES-Replace the steering angle sensor (see page 19-112). NO• With active damper: Go to step 47. • Without active damper: Go to step 51.

47. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0),

53. Turn the i gnition switch to LOCK (0).

48. Reconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector.

60. Reconnect the ACC unit 20P connector.

49. Disconnect active d a m p e r control unit connector B (14P).

61. Disconnect E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P).

50. Turn the ignition switch to O N Does

(II), and read the HDS.

th e HDS id e n t if y th e v e h ic le ?

Y E S - R e p l ace the active d a m p e r control unit (see page 18-116).■ N O - G o to step 51. 51. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 52. Reconnect the steering a n g l e sensor SP connector or active d a m p e r control unit connector B (14P). 53. Disconnect S H - A W D control unit connector A (20P) 54. Turn the ignition switch to O N D oes

(II), and read the HDS.

62. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and read the HDS. D o e s th e H D S id e n tify th e v e h ic le ?

YES-Replace the E-pretensioner unit (see page 24-221). NO• With Acuralink: Go to step 63. • Without Acuralink: Update the PCM i f it does not have the latest software (see page 11 -2 2 7 ), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then recheck. If the HDS identifies the vehicle with a known-good PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229).I 63. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

th e HDS id e n t if y th e v e h ic le ?

Y E S - R e p l ace the S H - A W D control unit (see page 15-66).H

64. Reconnect E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P), 65. Disconnect Acuralink contro l unit connector A (32P). 66. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and read the HDS.

NO• With ACC: G o to step 55.

D o e s th e H D S id e n tify th e v e h ic le ?

• Without ACC: Update the P C M if it does not have the latest software (see page 11 -227), or substitute a

YES-Repl ace the Acuralink contro l unit (see page 23-133).■

k nown-good P C M (see page 11-8), then recheck. I f the H D S identifies the vehicl e with a known-good P C M , replace the original PCM (see page 11-229).■ 55. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 56. Reconnect S H - A W D control unit connector A (20P). 57. Disconnect the A C C unit 20P connector, 58. Turn the ignition switch to O N D oes

(II), and read the HDS.

th e HDS id e n t if y th e v e h ic le ?

Y E S - R e p l ace the A C C unit (see page

NO-Go to step 53.

25-84).■

NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the HDS identifies the vehic l e with a known-good PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229).■

MIL Circuit Troubleshooting 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Do the gauge control modu l e sel f-diagnostic function (see page 22-395). D o e s th e M IL in d ic a to r fla s h ?

7. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A32 and body ground.

K M

CONNECTOR A (49P)

YES-Go to step 3. NO-Substitute a known-good gauge contro l modu l e (see page 22-419), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good gauge control module, replace the original gauge control module (see page 22-419).■

Ll 1 I 2

3

I 4 I 5 ( 8 | 7 I 8 ITfTof

1

11 12 13 7 X 7 18 / i s 19 20 21 1 22 23 24 25 > < 28 27 28 1 1 29 30 31 32 | / / / 1 38 37 38 39 [40 T4 T L4_2L1- # 4 4 ^ 4¥|49|

3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3).

SCS (BRN)

4. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is

a s h o r t in d ic a te d ?

Term inal side of fem ale terminals

YES-Go to step 5.

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck, If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was updated, troubleshooti ng is comp l ete. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was substituted, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229).I

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (A32), the Headlight leveling control unit (with headlight l eveling control), and the DLC.ll

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P), then disconnect the HDS.

NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was substituted, replace the or i ginal PCM (see page 11-229).■

K

M

DLC Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: If you suspect the HDS or the HDS DLC cable may be the source of the commun i cation problem, verify that they are working properly by connecting them to a known-good, like vehicle and system, and checking for communication problems.

7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the VSA indicator. D o e s th e V S A in d ic a to r c o m e o n a n d g o o ff?

1. Turn the igniti on switch to LOCK (0).

YES-Go to step 21.

2. Connect the HDS to the DLC {see page 11 -3).

NO-Go to the VSA symptom troubleshooting for an ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA indicator that do not go off (see page 19-109).■

3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I), and read the HDS. D o e s th e H D S id e n tify th e v e h ic le ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-Go to step 27. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the PGM-FI system with the HDS.

9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), and watch the immobilizer indicator. D o e s th e im m o b iliz e r in d ic a to r s ta y o n o r fla s h ?

A r e a n y P e n d in g o r C o n fir m e d D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to the immobilizer system's troubleshooting (see page 22-519).■

YES-Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

NO-Go to step 21.

NO-

11 .Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0).

• If the HDS does not communicate with the SRS, go to step 5. • If the HDS does not communicate with the VSA system, go to step 7. • If the HDS does not communicate with the I MMOBI (immobilizer) system, go to step 9. • If the HDS does not communicate with the SH-AWD system, go to step 11. • If the HDS does not communicate with the TPMS, go to step 13. • If the HDS does not communicate with the active damper system, go to step 15. • If the HDS does not communicate with the ACC system, go to step 17. • If the HDS does not communicate with the BODY ELECTRICAL system, go to step 19.

12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the SH-AWD indicator.

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), and watch the SRS indicator. D o e s th e S R S i n d ic a to r c o m e o n a n d g o o ff?

YES-Go to step 21. NO-Go to the SRS symptom troubleshooting for an SRS indicator that stays on with no stored DTCs (see page 24-193).B

D o e s th e S H -A W D i n d ic a to r c o m e o n a n d g o o ff?

YES-Go to step 21. NO-Go to the SH-AWD symptom troubleshooting for an SH-AWD indicator that does not go off with no stored DTCs (see page 15-61).11 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I), and watch the TPMS indicator. D o e s th e T P M S i n d ic a to r c o m e o n a n d g o o ff?

YES-Go to step 21. NO-Go to the TPMS symptom troubleshooting for a TPMS indicator that does not go off with no stored DTCs (see page 18-156).■ 15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 16. Turn the igniti on switch to ON (II ), and watch the active damper system indicator. D o e s th e a c tiv e d a m p e r s y s te m in d ic a to r c o m e o n a n d g o o ff?

YES-Go to step 21. NO-Go to the active damper system symptom troubleshooting for an active damper system indicator that does not go off with no stored DTCs (see page 18-113),■ (cont'd)

DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), and watch the ACC indicator. D o e s th e A C C in d ic a to r c o m e o n a n d g o o ff?

YES-Go to step 19. NO-Go to the ACC symptom troubleshooting for an ACC indicator that does not go off (see page 25-78).H 19. Do the gauge contro l module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-395). 20. Check the gauge display. is

B-CAN— ERROR in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for B-CAN system DTCs (see page 22-158).11 NO-Go to step 21, 21 .Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95), and wait at l east 3 minutes before continuing. 22. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. 23. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No. 7 and body ground. DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)

24. Continue to check for continuity between DLC termina l No. 7 and body ground, w hi l e disconnecting these connectors, one at a time; • SRS unit connector A (39P) • VSA modulator-contro l unit 46P connector • I mmobilizer-keyless contro l unit 7P connector • Audio unit connector A (17P) (without navigation) • SH-AWD contro l unit connector A (20P) • Active damper control unit connector B (14P) (with active damper) • TPMS control unit 20P connector • Audio-navigation unit connector A (24P) (with navigation) • ACC unit 20P connector (with ACC) • MICU connector P (30P) D o e s c o n tin u ity g o a w a y w h e n o n e o f th e a b o v e p a r ts is d is c o n n e c te d ?

YES-Repl ace the part that caused an open when it was disconnected.■ NO-Repair a short in the wire between the DLC (K-line) and the SRS unit, the VSA modu l ator-control unit, the immobil izer-keyless control unit, the audio unit, the SH-AWD control unit, the active damper contro l unit, the TPMS control unit, the ACC unit, the audio-navigation unit, or the M IC U.il 25. Connect DLC terminal No. 7 to body ground with a juniper wire. DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)

Terminal side of female term inal s

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 24. NO-Go to step 25.

Term inal side of fem ale terminals

26. Check for continuity between body ground and these connector termina l s; Connector SRS unit connector A (33P) VSA modu l ator-control unit 46P connector I mmobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector Audio unit connector A (17P) SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) Active damper control unit connector B (14P) TPMS control unit 20P connector M ICU connector P (SOP) ACC unit 20P connector Audio-navigation unit connector A (24P)

Terminal No. 18 (ORN) No. 15 (ORN)

30. Measure the vo ltage between DLC terminal No. 16 and body ground. DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)

No. 5 (ORN)

1 2 7 14 +B (WHT)

No. 6 (ORN) No. 5 (ORN) No. 3 (ORN) No. 7 (ORN) No. 6 (ORN) No. 8 (OR! No. 3 (ORN)

Is th e re c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n th e D L C te r m in a l a n d e a c h o f th e te r m in a ls in th e c h a rt?

YES-Replace the part that does not communicate with the HDS.H1 NO-Repair an open in the wire between the DLC (K-l ine) and the appropriate connector.il

Terminal side of female terminals Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 31. NO-Repair an open in the wire between DLC terminal No. 16 and the No. 7 BACK UP (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/re l ay box.B 31. Measure the vo ltage between DLC term i nals No. 4 and No. 18. DATA LINK CONNECTOR {DLC)

27. Check for B-CAN system DTCs without the HDS (see page 22-121).

YES-Go to step 38.

GND (BLK) I

/

NO-Go to step 28.

CD

Is D T C B 1 1 6 8 , B 1 1 6 9 , a n d /o r B 1 1 7 8 i n d ic a te d ?

4 5 7 12 14

/

+ B (WHT)

28. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 29. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.

Terminal side of female terminals Is t h e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 32. NO-Repair an open in the wire between DLC terminal No. 4 and G503.B 32. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3). 33. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 34. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). 35. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.

(cont'd)

DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) 36. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A48 and DLC termina l No. 8. D ATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) / /

4

5 6 7 12 / 14 /

/

/ W A H (WHT) i— _ _ _

F-CAN Term inal side of fem ale terminals PCM CONNECTOR A (43P) 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 11 12 13 / \ 7 16 / 1 8 19 20 21 2 2 23 24 25 26 27 28

X

CO CO

■

H (W HT)

i ■

i

W ire side of fem ale terminals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 37. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A48) and DLC terminal No. 8.11 37. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A49 and DLC terminal No. 14. DATA LINK C ONNECTOR (DLC!

/ / \9 / /

4 12 ..L_

5 6 14 /

YES-Go to F-CAN circuit troub l eshooting (see page 11-201 ) . ■ NO-Go to step 39. 39. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

a

37 38 39 29 30 31 3 2 | / / [40141 4 2 14 3 14 4 | X l 4 6 | / 4 8 | 4 9 |

F-CAN A

D o e s th e e n g in e s ta r t a n d id le s m o o th ly ?

40. Check the No. 3 IG1 MA I N (50 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box.

o

o>

J 1I 2

38. Try to start the engine.

Is th e fu s e O K ?

YES-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 3 IG1 MAIN (50 A) fuse and the ignit i on switch. If the wire is OK, go to step 41. NO-Repair a short in the wire between the No. 3 IG1 MAIN (50 A) fuse and the main under-hood fuse box. Also rep l ace the No, 3 IG1 MAIN (50 A) fuse.B 41. Inspect the No. 8 I GP (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is th e fu s e O K ?

YES-Go to step 48. NO-Go to step 42. 42. Remove the blown No, 8 IGP (15 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box.

7 18/

43. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Term inal side of fem ale terminals PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 11 0 1 ■ 11 12 13 18 / | 1 8 13 20 21 ■ 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 i i 29 30 31 32 1 / / / 1 36 37 38 39 140141 4 2 14 3 14 4 L X l 46 J l

45h

00

CO

X

F-CAN A L (RED! I W ire side of female terminals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Reconnect all connectors, then update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is comp l ete. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229).B NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A49) and DLC terminal No. 14.11

44. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P),

i

PCM CONNECTOR B (43P) IGP fYEL/BLKl

CO

c—

CO

3

h*

1

LO

1T T 2

ITjloT

11 12 13

14|15 18

17| 18 19 20 21

22 23 24

X

X

26 / / 25 29 30 31 3 2(3 3 34 35 36 37 38 39

140141

4 2 |4 3 ^

1

1

4 8 1 /1

Terminal side of female terminals D o e s c o n tin u ity g o a w a y w h e n o n e o f th e a b o v e p a r ts is d is c o n n e c te d ?

YES-Replace the part that made the short to body ground go away when disconnected. Reconnect all connectors, then update the PCM if it does not have the l atest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). A l so replace the No. 8 IGP (15 A) fu s e .ll

47. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B3 and body ground.

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) IGP (YEL/BLK)

1 ~~HZri J 1 | 2 3 TTTTreTyl 8 11 12 13 14115 16 17|18 1920 21 1 1 22 23 24 X 25 X 20 / ■ 29 30 31 32|33 34 35 36 37 38 39 [40141 42J43T44|45|46|47 4 8 1 / | O

r

CD

45. W hi l e disconnecting each of the parts or connectors below, one at a time, check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B3 and body ground. • PGM-FI main relay 2 • Each injector 2P connector • Camshaft position (CMP) sensor 3P connector • Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 3P connector • MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector • Under-hood fuse/re l ay box connector H (9P)

y

Term inal side of female terminals is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (B3) and each part. Also replace the No. 8 I GP (15 A) fu s e .ll NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/re l ay box. A l so replace the No. 8 I GP (15A) fu s e .ll 48. Inspect the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. is th e fu s e O K ?

YES-Go to step 80. NO-Go to step 49. 49. Remove the blown No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/re l ay box. 50. Remove the left kick panel (see page 20-76), then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (G) from the under-dash fuse/relay box.

NO-Go to step 48. 46. Disconnect these parts or connectors: • PGM-FI main rel ay 2 • Each injector 2P connector • Camshaft position (CMP) sensor 3P connector • Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 3P connector • MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector • Under-hood fuse/re l ay box connector H (9P)

(cont’d)

DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) 51. Test PGM-FI main re l ay 2 (see page 22-109). Is th e re la y O K ?

55. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B42 and body ground,

YES-Go to step 52. PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 2. Also rep l ace the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse.B

3 _ _ _ ____________0___ 3 I 4 | 5 j 6 I 7 I 8 T jlo T 1 11 12 13 14|15 18 17|18 19 20 21

52. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector termina l No, 1 and body ground.

J 1 I 2

i PGM-FI M A I N RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR

22 23 24

25 20 / « / 29 30 31 32|33 34 35(36 37 38 39

1

140141 4 2 (4 3)4 4 ^ 4 5 1 4 6 1 4 7 48 1 / |

I IG1 fBLK/YEL)

@ Terminal side of female terminals

Is th e re Terminal side of female terminals

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 53. NO-Go to step 58. 53. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 54. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and the PCM (B42), between the No. 13 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 2, or between the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and the immobilizer control unit, A l so repl ace the No. 13 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse.B NO-Replace the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/re l ay box, reconnect all connectors, and update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see p< w 17), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete, If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was substituted, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11-223).■ 58, Remove the cargo floor lid (see page 20-87). 57. On models with active damper, remove the active damper contro l unit (see page 18-116), 58. Disconnect the fue l pump control module 10P connector.

59. Check for continuity between fuel pump control module 10P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.

63. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminal B42 and body ground.

P C M CONNECTOR B f43P)

/

7 8

/

IG1 (YEL)

O

3 4

IM M

/

CD

FUEL PUfVIP CONTROL MODULE 10P CONNECTOR

T T |2 3| 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 | 8 11 12 13 14(15 16 1 7 jl8 19 20 21 22 23 24

■

25

X

26 /

1

/

1

29 30 31 32 33 34 35|30 37 38 39

48lXl

|40j41 4 2 | 4 3 ^

IlG I

(B LK/YEt)

Terminal side of female terminals

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 64. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and the PCM (B42).B 84. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminal A6 and body ground.

PCM CONNECTOR A |49PJ JViRLY {GRN)

80. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 81. Disconnect PCM connectors A (49P) and B (49P). 62. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

n

1

r y y y y "

J 1 i 2 3 ^ 4 j5 |i 11 12 13 / V 7 16 / N 25 22 23 24

X

1

0

NO-Replace the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse, then substitute a known-good fue l pump control modu l e (see page 11-318), and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good fue l pump contro l modu l e, replace the origina l fuel pump contro l module (see page 11-318).■

Terminal side of female terminals is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

CO

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the fue l pump contro l module and PGM-FI main rel ay 2. A l so replace the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/re l ay box.B

19 20 21 26 27 28

1 1 1

29 30 31 3 2 1 / / , /| 3 6 37 38 39 4 8 |4 9 | |40j41 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 | ^

Terminal side of fem ale terminals Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 88. NO-Go to step 65. 65. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 66. Disconnect under-hood fuse/re l ay box connector E (14P).

(cont'd)

DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) 67. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A8 and under-hood fuse/rel ay box connector E (14P) termina l No. 5,

70. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal B3 and under-hood fuse/relay box connector H (9P) terminal No, 1. PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (14P) 3

1 7

4 5 8 rm . 9 10 11 12 1 3 14

—

/

MRLY (GRN) Te rm in al side of female te rm inal s PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) M R tY (GRN) f — — — — —

_

IGP (YEL/BLK)

J 1I 2

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 1101 i 11 12 13 14 15 16 17(18 19 20 21 24 25 26 / / 22 23 ■ i 29 30 31 32)33 34 3 5)36 37 38 39 | 4 0 |41 4 2 |4 3 |44|4 5 |4 6 |47 4 8 ) / !

X

Terminal side of fe m al e term inal s

J 1I 2 a D l U 11 12 13 / V 2223 24 X 1

T 16

/N

W o f■

19 20 21

25 > < : 26 27 28 ■ 37 38 39 29 30 31 3 21 /" / |4 0 |41 4 2 14 3 144 l / l 4 6 1 / 4 8 | 4 9 |

/136

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR H (3P» IGP (ORN) 1

/

3

4

5

6

7 /

3

W ire side of fe m al e term inal s

Is t h e r e

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Iest PGM-FI main relay 1 (built i nto the relay contro l modu l e) (see page 22-111). If PGM-FI main relay 1 is OK, reconnect all connectors, then update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was substituted, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229). NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A6) and the under-hood fuse/rel ay box.B 88. Turn the ignition sw i tch to LOCK (0). 89. Disconnect under-hood fuse/re l ay box connector H (9P).

W ire side of fem ale terminals Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 71. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (B3) and the under-hood fuse/re l ay box.H 7.1. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (built into the relay contro l module) (see page 22-111). is P G M - F i m a in r e la y 1 O K ?

YES-Go to step 72. NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page 22-88).11 72. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P),

!

73. Check for continuity between body ground and PCM , connector terminals B1, B40, B41, C1, and C41 individually.

74. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B36 and body ground.

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

PCM CONNECTORS

B (49P)

PG2 fBLIC) 2

3

4

5

6

J 1I 2

7

11 12 13

11 12|13 14|l5 18 17|18 19 20 21 25 28 / / 22 23|24 X 29 30 31 32133 34 35136 37 38 39

X

1

14|15 18

17(18 19 20 21

22 23 24

25 28 / / 29 30 31 32(33 34 3 5 138 37 38 39

140141

4^43|44|45|4I i 147

(BUC)L JLG2(BRN/YEL)

i i

481 /|

VCC1 fYEL/RED)

U

C

PGM ETCS {BLK)

(49P)

Te rm in a l side of fem ale terminals

Is th e r e 11 12 / 14(15 16 17|18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 > < / 31 32(33 34 35(36 37 38 /

/ /

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 76. NO-Go to step 76.

LG1 (BRN/YEL)

Term inal side of fem ale terminals

Is t h e r e

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 74. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (B1, B40, B41, C1, C41) and body ground (G101).H

75. Continue to check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B38 and body ground, while disconnecting these parts, one at a time: • MAP sensor 3P connector • Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector D o e s c o n tin u ity g o a w a y w h e n o n e o f th e a b o v e p a r ts is d is c o n n e c te d ?

YES-Repl ace the part that caused an open when it was disconnected.® NO-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (B38) and the MAP sensor or the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor.H

(cont’d)

DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) 76. Check for continuity between PCM connector termina l C12 and body ground,

79, Continue to check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A24 and body ground, w hi l e disconnecting the APP sensor 6P connector,

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) is th e re c o n tin u ity ? VCC2 (YEL/BLU) J

4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 irp fo T ■ 14(15 16 17| 18 19 20 21 25 > < 28 27 28 23 24 i / i / / 31 32133 34 3S|38 37 38 / |40[41 4 2 j4 3 j4 4 | 4 5 | 46|47 48 |4 9 | 1 2

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (A24) and the APP sensor.B

3

NO-Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page 11-263).■ 80. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A25 and body ground.

mm

Term inal side of fe m a l e terminals is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?

CONNECTOR A (49P)

E=3

fZ Z Z Z Z I i

J 1I 2 11 12 13 / 22 23 24 i 3

YES-Go to step 77. NO-Go to step 78.

4 | 5 | 6 | 7 18 I /

/1 25 X 16

18 19

o

X

CO

11 12 /

20 21

26 27 28

i i

CO

CO

i

37 38 39 29 30 31 3 2 1 / / 140141 __ll4 2 | 4 3 ^ 11 / 1 4 6 1 / 481491

77. Continue to check for continuity between PCM connector terminal Cl 2 and body ground, while disconnecting the input shaft (maiiishaft) speed sensor 3P connector.

VCC4 (ORN)

is th e re c o n tin u ity ? Terminal side of fem ale terminals

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (C12) and the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor.B NO-Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (see page 14-177).■ 78. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A24 and body ground.

P C M CONNECTOR A (49P)

Is th e re

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 81. NO-Go to step 82, 81. Continue to check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A25 and body ground, while disconnecting these connectors one at a time. • APP sensor 6P connector • FTP sensor 3P connector D o e s c o n tin u ity g o a w a y w h e n o n e o f th e a b o v e p a r ts is

3 I 4 I 5 I 6 | 7 | 8 I T fio T ■ 11 12 13. / J / 18 / | 1 8 19 20 21 i 28 27 28 22 23 24■ ] > < ^ 25 I i 37 38 39 29 30 3 1 / 140141 41r | 4 3 ] 4 4 | / | 4 6 X 7 48(491

[p T T z

i

VCC3 (RED!

Te rm inal side of female terminals is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 79. NO-Go to step 80.

YES-Repl ace the part that caused an open when it was disconnected.■

8

X

d is c o n n e c te d ?

NO-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (A25) and the APP sensor or the FTP sensor.B

82. Check for conti nuity between PCM connector terminal B18 and body ground.

84. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal €11 and body ground. PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

P C M CONNECTOR B (4SP) VCCS (BLU) ~ —

V€C§ (YEL/BLU)

T r= r 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24. 25 26

29 30 38 39 40 41 42 4 3 |4 4 |45 46 47

"0—

9 11 0 1 J 1 i2 i 11 12 / 14|15 16 17(18 19 20 21 26 27 28 "23 24 25 X 1 / 1 31 32)33 34 35 36 37 38 / 14 0 141 4 2 T 4 3 |4 4 ] 4 5 l4 6 ] ^ 4 8 | 49]

M2 Terminal si de of female terminals

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there c o n tin u ity ?

Is there c o n tin u ity ? YES-Go to step 85.

YES-Go to step 83.

NO-Reconnect al l connectors, then update the PCM if

NO-Go to step 84.

it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is comp l ete. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-223).HI

83. Continue to check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B18 and body ground, while disconnecting the thrott l e body 6P connector. Is

there c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (B18) and the thrott l e b o d y .il NO-Replace the thrott l e body (see page 11-335).B

85. Continue to check for continuity between PCM connector terminal C11 and body ground, w hi l e disconnecting these parts, one at a time: • IMT actuator 5P connector • EGR valve 5P connector D o e s c o n tin u ity g o a w a y w h e n o n e o f th e

above parts is

d is c o n n e c te d ?

YES-Replace the part that caused an open when it was disconnected.! NO-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (Cl 1) and the IMT actuator or the EGR valve.H

I njector Replacement 1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11 -298). 2. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-2). 3. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A) (see page 11-306).

4. Remove the fuel joint hose mounting bolt (B), 5. Disconnect the connectors (C) from the injectors. 6. Remove the fuel rail mounting bolts (D) from the fuel rails (E). 7. Remove the fuel rail and the injectors from the injector base. 8. Remove the injector c l ips (F) from the fue l rail . 9. Remove the injectors from the fuel rails.

10. Coat the new 0-rings (black) (A) with c l ean engine oil, and insert the injectors (B) into the fuel rails (C).

11. Install the injector clips (D). 12. Coat the new injector O-rings (brown) (E) with clean engine oil . 13. Insta ll the fue l rails and injectors in the injector base (F). 14. Install the fue l rail mounting bolts, and connect the connectors on the injectors. 15. Install the fuel joint hose mounting bolt. 16. Connect the quick-connect fitting (see page 11 -308). 17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fue l pump runs for about 2 seconds, the fuel rail will be pressurized. Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel l eaks. 18. I nstall the intake manifold with a new gasket (see page 9-2).

MAP Sensor Replacement

MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement

1. Remove the engine cover .(see step 8 on page 5-2).

1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector (A).

2. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector (A).

3. Remove the screw (B). 4. Remove the MAP sensor (C). 5. Insta ll the parts in the reverse order of remova l with a new O-ring (D).

2. Remove the screws (B). 3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C). 4. Insta l l the parts in the reverse order of remova l with a new O-ring (D).

ECT Sensor 1 Replacement

ECT Sensor 2 Replacement

1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).

1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).

2. Remove the engine cover (see step 6 on page 5-2).

2. Remove the splash shie l d (see page 20-233).

3. Remove the main under-hood fuse box.

3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector (A).

4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector (A).

C

4. Remove ECT sensor 2 (B), 6. Insta l l the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coo l ant (see page 10-6). 5. Remove ECT sensor 1 (B). 8. Install the parts in the reverse order of remova l w ith a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine coo l ant (see page 10-6).

A/F Sensor Replacement Special Tools Required 02 Sensor Socket Wrench Snap-on SWR2 or 02 Sensor Wrench Snap-on YA8875, commercia l ly avail ab l e

Front Bank (Bank 2)

Rear Bank(Bank 1) 1. Disconnect the rear A/F sensor SP connector (A), then remove the rear A/F sensor (B).

1. Disconnect the front A/F sensor 6P connector (A), t hen remove the A/F sensor (B).

44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft)

2. Install the parts in the reverse order of remova l . 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 ib fft)

2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Secondary H02S Replacement Special Tools Required 02 Sensor Socket Wrench Snap-on SWR2 or 02 Sensor

Rear Bank(Bank 1)

W rench Snap-on YA8875, c o m m e rc ia lly a v a ila b l e

1. Raise th e ve h icle on a l ift.

Front Bank (Bank2)

2. Disconnect the rear secondary H02S 4P connector (A), and remove the harness c l amps (B).

1. Disconnect the front secondary H02S 4P connector (A), and remove the harness c l amps (B).

2. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 3. Remove the harness clamp (A), then remove the front secondary H02S (B).

3. Remove the rear secondary H02S (C). 4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

CMP Sensor Replacement

CKP Sensor Replacement

1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-14).

1. Raise the vehic l e on a lift.

2. Remove the front camshaft pulley (CMP pulse plate) (A), B

NOTE: Make sure the vehicle is level, because engine oil will drip out when you remove the sensor. 2. Remove the CKP sensor cover (A).

3. Disconnect the CKP sensor 3P connector (B). Apply engine oil to the bolt threads.

3. Disconnect the CMP sensor 3P connector (B), then remove the back cover (C). 4. Remove the CMP sensor (A) from the back cover.

4. Remove the CKP sensor (C). 5. Insta l l the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D). 8. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4). 7. Check the engine o i l level, and add more oil if needed.

5. I nstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. Install the timing belt (see page 6-17). 8. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern l earn procedure (see page 11-4).

B S

j

Knock Sensor Replacement

PCM Update

1. Remove the intake manifo l d (see page 9-2).

Special Tools Required - Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) tab l et tester • Honda Interface Modu l e (HI M) and an IN workstation with the latest HDS software version • HDS pocket tester • GNA600 and an iN workstation with the latest HDS software version - MVCI unit with the latest control module (CM) update software installed Any one of the above updating tools can be used.

2. Remove the injector base (see page 9-6). 3. Disconnect the knock sensor 1P connector (A).

4. Remove the knock sensor (B). 5, Install the parts In the reverse order of remova l .

NOTE: • Make sure the HDS/iN workstation or the MVCI has the l atest HDS software version. • Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery in the vehic l e is fu l ly charged, and connect a jumper battery (not a battery charger) to maintain system voltage. • Never turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0) during the update. If there is a prob l em with the update, l eave the ignition switch is ON (II). • To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrica l (headlights, audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, door locks, etc.) during the update. • To ensure the latest program is installed, do a PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. • You cannot update a PCM with a program it already has. It will only accept a new program. • High temperature in the engine compartment might cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update, If the engine has been running before this procedure, open the hood and coo l the engine compartment. • If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the HI M's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in ON (II) when you disconnect the HI M from the data link connector (DLC). This w i l l prevents PCM damage.

(cont'd)

i

PCM Update (cont'd) 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HDS to the data l ink connector (DLC) (A) l ocated under the driver's side of the dashboard.

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM and other vehicle systems. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troub l eshooting (see page 11-209). If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, and clean the thrott l e body (see page 11-331) after updating the PCM. 4. Sel ect the INSPECTION MENU with HDS. 5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the HDS screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure, 8. Exit the HDS, then select the update mode, and follow the screen prompts to update the PCM.

7. If the software in the PCM is the l atest, disconnect the updating tool from the DLC, and go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the PCM is not the latest, fo l l ow the instructions on the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI system or the A/T system, make sure you update both. NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to cool the PCM, follow the instructions on screen. If you run in to a problem during the update procedure (programming takes over 15 minutes, status bar goes over 100 %, D or immobilizer indicator flashes, HDS tab l et freezes, etc.), fo l l ow these steps to minimize the chance of damaging the PCM: • Leave the ignition switch is in ON (II), • Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery charger). • Shut down the HDS. • Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. • Reboot the HDS. • Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the update procedure again. 8. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean the throttle body (see page 11-331). 9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 10. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4),

HI PCM Replacement Special Tools Required • Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) tab l et tester • Honda Interface Modu l e (HIM) and an iN workstation with the latest HDS software version • HDS pocket tester • GNA600 and an iN workstation with the latest HDS software version • MVCI unit with the l atest control module (CM) update software installed Any one of the above updating tools can be used. NOTE; • Make sure the HDS/iN workstation or the MVCI has the latest HDS software version. • If you are replacing the PCM after substituting a known-good PCM, reinstall the original P C M , then do this procedure. • During the procedure, if any READ DATA, WRITE DATA, or other data checks fail, note the failure, then continue. 1. Connect the HDS to the data l ink connector (DLC) (A) l ocated under the driver’s side of the dashboard.

4. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS. 5. Select the I NSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 8. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and fo l low the screen prompts. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 7. Select the REPLACE PCM MENU, then sel ect READ DATA and fo l low the screen prompts. NOTE: • Doing this step copies (READS) the engine oil life data from the origina l PCM so you can later download (WRITES) it into the new PCM. • If the READ DATA indicates FAI LED, continue with this procedure. 8. Select the A/T system with the HDS. 9. Select the REPLACE TCM/PCM MENU, then select READ DATA and fo l l ow the screen prompts. NOTE: • Doing this step copies (READS) the ATF life data from the original PCM so you can later download (WRITES) it into the new PCM. • If the READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 12. Remove the auxiliary under-hood fuse/re l ay box (A) from the stay (B), then remove the bo l t (C).

A

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM and other vehicle systems. If it doesn't go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-203). If you are returning from DLC circuit troub l eshooting, skip steps 4 through 9,20 through 26, and 29 through 31, and do this after rep l acing the PCM; • Replace the engine oil (see page 8-9) and the engine oil filter (see page 8-10). • Replace the ATF (see page 14-184). • Clean the thrott l e body (see page 11 -331).

B

C

(cont'd)

PCM Replacement (cont'd) 13, Remove the bracket (D), then free the A/C discharge line (E) from the cl ip (F) and remove the A/C suction line mounting bracket bolt (G). Keihin PCM

14. Remove the cover (H), then disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C. NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A = U B=A, C=0) embossed on them for identification, 15. Keihin PCM: Remove the bolts (I ), then remove the PCM (J). 16. Continenta l PCM: Remove the nuts (K), then remove the PCM (J). 17. Continenta l PCM: Remove the spacers (L). 18. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

i 19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

9

(1 7

20. Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. NOTE: DTC P0630 VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch may be stored because the VIN has not been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and continue this procedure. 21. If the READ DATA (engine oil life) failed in step 7, goto step 24. Otherwise, go to step 22. 22. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS.

Continental PCM

23. Sel ect the REPLACE PCM MENU, then select WRITE DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 24. If the READ DATA (ATF life) failed in step 9, go to step 27. Otherwise go to step 25. 25. Select the A/T SYSTEM with the HDS. 20. Sel ect the REPLACE TCM/PCM MENU, then select WRITE DATA and follow the screen prompts. NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure. 27. Sel ect I MMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS. 28. Enter the immobilizer PCM code that you got from the iN, and use the PCM replacement procedure in the IMMOBI MENU of the HDS; it allows you to start the engine. 29. If the TP POSITION CHECK fai l ed in step 6, clean the throttle body (see page 11-331), then go to step 30. 30. If the READ DATA failed in step 7 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 23, replace the engine oil (see page 8-9) and engine oil filter (see page 8-10), then go to step 31.

31. If the READ DATA failed in step 9 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 28, replace the ATF (see page 14-184), then go to step 32. 32. Sel ect PGM-FI system and reset the PCM with the HDS. 33. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227). 34. Do the PCM id l e learn procedure (see page 11-282). 35. Do the CKP pattern c l ear/CKP pattern l earn procedure (see page 11-4).

Component Location Index UNDER-HOOD FUSE RELAY BOX Includes: ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL S YS T EM fETCS) CONTROL RELAY

POW ERTRAIN CONTROL M O D U LE (PCM) General Troubleshooting I nformation, page 11-3 Update, page 11-227 Substitution, page 11-8 Replacement, page 11-223

THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL M O D U LE (Contains THROTTLE A C TU A TOR and THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR)

DTC Troubleshooting DTC P0122: TP Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage

12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

NOTE; Before you troubleshoot record a l l freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troubleshooting Information (see page 11-3),

13. Measure the voltage between throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.

1-Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

THROTTLE BODY 8P CONNECTOR

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

/ \

3 4 5 6

3. Check TP SENSOR A i n the DATA LIST with the HDS. Is

th e re

WCCS (BLU)

a b o u t 0 ,3 ¥ o r le s s ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO- l ntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the thrott l e body and the PCM .ll

Wiresideof femaleterminal s

4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. A re

DTC

P0122

and

P0222

in d ic a te d a t th e s a m e tim e ?

Is th e r e a b o u t 5 V ?

YES-Go to step 18.

YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Go to step 14.

NO-Go to step 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.

14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 16. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). 9. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

17. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B18 and throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 2. THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR 1 2 VCCS (BLUjI

3 4

5 0

1 2 3 4

cn

Wiresideof femaleterminals

8

IPSA {RED/BLK)

PCM CONNECTOR i (49P) VCCS fBLU) j—

J 1 12 ' 3 | 4 11 12 22 23 29 30 |4 0 |41

Wire side of female terminals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the throttle body and the PCM (B17), then go to step 20. NO-Go to step 25.

j 5 | 6 { 7 |8 9 13 14jl5 16 17|18i 19 20 21 25 26 / / 24 31 32133 34 35136i 37 38 39 4 2 |4 3 |4 4 |4 5 ) 4 6 |47 4 8 | / l

.X "

X

Terminal sideof femaleterminals Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 25. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the throttle body and the PCM (B18), then go to step 20.

10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 18. Turn the ign i tion switch to LOCK (0).

DTC P0123; TP Sensor A Circuit High Voltage

13. Repl ace the throttle body (see page 11-335).

NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot record a l l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troub l eshooting information (see page 1 1 - 3 ) .

20. Reconnect al l connectors. 21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (il). 22. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

1 . Turn

the ignition switch to ON (II).

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 3.

Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is th e re a b o u t 4 .8 V o r m o re ? is D T C P 0 1 2 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.®

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the throttle body and the PCM.B 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

25. Reconnect all connectors,

A re D T C P 0 1 2 3 a n d

26. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8).

YES-Go to step

27. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

P0223

in d ic a te d a t th e s a m e tim e ?

13.

NO-Go to step 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Disconnect the thrott l e body 6P connector.

Is D T C P 0 1 2 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the throttle body and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Measure the voltage between throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. THROTTLE BODY SP CONNECTOR

NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the-indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

7\

2 3 IPSA (RED/BLK)

(v)

Wire side of fema l e terminals Is th e re a b o u t 5 V?

YES-Go to step 18. NO-Go to step 3. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, 11, Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

12. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B17 and throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 1. THROTTLE BODY 8P CONNECTOR

18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 19. Replace the thrott l e body (see page 11-335). 20. Reconnect all connectors. 21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

1 2

3

4

5

6

IP S A (RED /BLK) I W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) TPSA {RED /BLK) JTTY1 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 7 | 8 9 11 12 13 14|15 16 17|18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 / / 29 30 31 32(33 34 35)36 37 38 39 |4 0 |41 4 2 [4 3 (4 4 |4 5 |46 47 4 8 1 / i

X

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

22. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 1 2 3 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

25. Reconnect all connectors. YES-Go to step 25. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the thrott l e body and the PCM (B17), then go to step 20. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. 15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, 16. Disconnect PCM connector B (43P). 17. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal B33 and thrott l e body 6P connector terminal No. 4. THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

1 2

3

4

5

6

SG5 (GRN) L

26. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 27. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 1 2 3 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the thrott l e body and the PCM, If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls PCM CONNECTOR B {49PJ 9 |1 0 | K IT 13 11 12 13 14|15 16 17)18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 / / 29 30 31 32133 34 35(36 37 38 39 |4 0 |41 4 2 | 4 3 | 44 |4 5 |4 6 |47 48 M

SG5

(GRN) L— — — _ _ _

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 25. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the throttle body and the PCM (B33), then go to step 20.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC P0222: TP Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage

12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

13. Measure the voltage between throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.

1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

THROTTLE BODY

6P CONNECTOR

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

1 2 3 4 5 6 ¥CCS (BLU)

is th e r e a b o u t 0 .3 V o r le s s ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose termina l s at the throttle body and the PCM.B

Wi resideof femaleterminal s

4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. A r e D T C P 0 1 2 2 a n d P 0 2 2 2 in d ic a te d a t th e s a m e tim e ?

is t h e r e a b o u t 5 V ?

YES-Go to step 18.

YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Go to step 14.

NO-Go to step 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

8. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.

15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

16. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

17. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal B18 and throttle body 6P connectorterminal No. 2.

9. Check for continuity between thrott l e body 6P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. THROTTLE SODY'6P CONNECTOR

THROTTLE BODY SP CONNECTOR

./\ 1

2

3

4

5

0

VCC5(BLU)L

Wiresideof femaleterminals

1 2 3 4 5 6

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) ¥C C 5 |B L U )i— — —

IP S B (R E D /B LU f J 1 (2 11 12 22 23 29 30 [40 J41

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is t h e r e

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the throttle body and the PCM (B26), then go to step 20. NO-Go to step 25. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.

3 7 T F 5 T 6 [ 7 |8 9 13 14|15 16 17|18; 19 20 21 26 / / 24 : > < 25 31 32|33 34 35136>37 38 39 4 2 ]43|44 j 45J46 j 47 4 8 1 / |

Terminal sideof femal eterminal s is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

YES~Go to step 25. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the throttle body and the PCM (B18), then go to step 20.

18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

DTC P0223: TP Sensor B Circuit High Voltage

13. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-335).

NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot record a l l freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3).

20. Reconnect all connectors. 21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 22. Reset the PCM with the HDS, 23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282).

. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is th e re a b o u t 4 .8 ¥ o r m o re ?

Is D T C

P 0 2 2 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is complete, If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the throttle body and the P C M .I 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

25. Reconnect all connectors.

A r e D T C P 0 1 2 3 a n d P 0 2 2 3 in d ic a te d a t th e s a m e tim e ?

26. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8).

YES-Go to step 13.

27. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C

NO-Go to step 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Disconnect the thrott l e body 6P connector.

P 0 2 2 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the throttle body and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, g oto step 1. NO- lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Measure the voltage between thrott l e body 6P connector termina l No. 3 and body ground. THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 TPSB (R E D /B LU )

(V )

W ire side o f fe m a le te r m i n a l s

is th e re a b o u t 5 ¥ ?

YES-Go to step 18. NO-Go to step 3. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. J u m p th e SCS l in e w ith th e HDS.

11. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 12. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal B26 and throttle body 6P connectorterminal No. 3. THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 19. Replace the thrott l e body (see page 11-335). 20. Reconnect all connectors. 21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).

2

1

3

4

5

8

22. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

TPSB (R E D /B LU I I W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls m m

CONNECTOR B (49P)

J 1 12

3 4 | 5 |6 |7 8 11 12 13 14(15 16 17)l8 19 20 21 26 25 22 23 24 . 29 30 31 32)33 34 35)36 3 7 38 39 |4 0 |41 4 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 r 4 8 1 / |

X

X

/ /

TPSB fR E D /B lU i T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C

P 0 2 2 3 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the thrott l e body and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

25. Reconnect all connectors. YES-Go to step 25. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the throttle body and the PCM (B26), then go to step 20. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. 15. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS. 18. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). 17. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal B33 and thrott l e body 6P connector termina l No. 4. THROTTLE BODY 8P CONNECTOR

1

2

3

4

5

6

SG5 (GRN) I W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls P C M CONNECTOR B

F IT " 11 12 22 23 29 30 [40141

(49P)

WoT 17(18 X / /

3 T T 5 i~6 I 7 ! 8n 19 20 21 13 14|15 16 25 26 24 X 31 32(33 34 35)36 37 38 39 42 4 3 114 )4 5 (4 6 147 4 8 ! , / !

SG5 m

m )

T e rm in a l s ide o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

Is th e re

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 25, NO-Repair an open in the wire between the thrott l e body and the PCM (B33), then go to step 20.

26. Update the- PCM if it does not have the l atest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11 >8). 27. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 0 2 2 3 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the throttle body and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

DTC P I658: ETCS Control Relay ON Malfunction

8. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal A23 and body ground.

NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

^ 3

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). J1 I 2 11 12 22: 23 1 29■ 30 40 41

2. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. Is th e R E L A Y c ir c u it O K ?

YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the under-hood fuse/relay box (ETCS contro l relay) and the PCM.B NO-Go to step 3. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Test the ETCS contro l rel ay (built into the relay contro l module) (see page 22-111). Is th e E T C S c o n tr o l re la y O K ?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page 22-88), then go to step 14.

T y ro 13 / I / 16 / |1 8 19 20 21 24 25 X 26 27 28 31 3 2 ],/ / / 1 36 37 38 39 42 43\44\X 46 1 / 48 49

l

i i i

^ E T C S R L Y (BLU)

Terminal side of fema l e term ina l s

Is there c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (A29) and the under-hood fuse/relay box (ETCS contro l relay), then go to step 14. NO-Go to step 3. 9. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). 10. Disconnect under-hood fuse/re l ay box connector H (9P).

5. Jump the SCS line with the HDS,

11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

6. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

12. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminal C4 and body ground,

7. Disconnect under-hood fuse/re l ay box connector E (14P),

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) f —

-

—

— 11G1ETCS (YEL/GRN)

£=3 J 1 1 2 3 ] 4 I 5 1 6 j 7 J 8 i r [ T o r■ 11 12 / 14 15 16 17|18 19 20 21

■ / /

23 24 /

140141

25

26 27 28

31 32|33 34 35(36 37 38 / 4 2 |4 3 |4 4 T 4 5 ]4 6 l4 7 4 8 |4 9 j

1

Terminal side of female term ina l s

Is there b a tte r y

v o lta g e ?

YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the PCM (C4) and the under-hood fuse/relay box (ETCS contro l re l ay), then go to step 13. NO~Go to step 19.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Reconnect all connectors.

DTC P1659: ETCS Control Relay OFF Malfunction

18. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

NOTE; Before you troub l eshoot, record a ll freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

17. Do the

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (l l).

15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

PCM

idle learn procedure (see page 11-282).

18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 1 8 5 8 in d ic a te d ?

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the under-hood fuse/relay box (ETCS control relay) and the PCM, then go to step 1,

Is D T C

NO~Troubleshooting is complete, If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the under-hood fuse/re l ay box (ETCS control relay) and the PCM.B

19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 20. Reconnect all connectors. 21. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 22. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 1 6 5 8 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the under-hood fuse/relay box (ETCS contro l relay) and the P C M . If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

P 1 6 5 9 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 4.

4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Check the No. 10 DBW (ETCS) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/re l ay box. Is th e fu s e O K ?

YES-Go to step 8. NO-Go to step 14. 8. Test the ETCS contro l re l ay (built into the relay control module) (see page 22-111). Is th e E T C S c o n tr o l r e la y O K ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page 22-88), then go to step 22. 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 8. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). 9. Disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector H (9P).

&

10. Check for continuity between under-hood fuse/relay box connector H (9P) terminal No. 7 and PCM connectorterminal €4. PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) 1G1ETCS (YEL/GRN)

13. Check for continuity between under-hood fuse/re l ay box connector E (14P) terminal No. 14 and PCM connectortermina l A29. UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (14P)

1 2

7

3j4fT|TTTl8

Lr^ /

17|18 19 20 21 26 27 28 X 31 32(33 34 35|36 37 38 /

11 12 / 14)15 16 23 24 25

/ /

/

[40141 4 2 \A ^ M 4 5 \4 6 W

r.-j] 8 L_ 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 Vd

n_ 1/

B E

EICSRIY fBLU) I Termina l side of female terminals

481491 PCM CONNECTOR A (43P)

Terminal side of fema l e term ina l s

\

1

/

3 4 5 0 IG1ETCS (GRY)

3 2 l/ / 37 38 39 4 2 14 3 14 4 | / | 4 6 | / 4 8 | 4 9 |

2 9 30 31

/

9

| 4 0 | 41

ETCSRLY(BLU) I

Wire side of female terminals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

CO CO

IJ 1I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 j 8 9 |10| i 11 12 13 7I7 18 / | 1 8 19 20 21 i 28 27 28 2 2 23 24 25 X i i

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/ RELAY BOX CONNECTOR H |9P)

Wire side of female terminals is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 11.

YES-Go to step 27.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (C4) and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to step. 22.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A29) and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 22.

11. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). 12. Disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector E (14P).

14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 15. Disconnect

PCM

connector C (49P).

16. Disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector H (3P). 17. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal C4 and body ground. P C M CONNECTOR C (49P)

— — —— — - IG1 ETCS (YEL/GRN) J T \ 2 3 I4 |5 |6 |7 I8 11 12 / 14)15 16 17 18 19 25 26 23 24 1 / 7 / 31 32133 34 35138 37 140141 42|4 3 14 4 ]4 5 [46 |4 7

20 21 27 28 38 / 48 (49]

i i

Termina l side of female terminals

Is th e re

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (C4) and the under-hood fuse/re l ay box, then go to step 22.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 18. Reconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector H (9P), and replace the No. 10 DBW (ETCS) fuse in the under-hood fuse/re l ay box. 19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 20. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminal C4 and body ground. PCM CONNECTOR C

(4SP)

1G1ETCS (Y E L/G R N )

m u j T il 2 11 12 / / 23 24

14|15 18 17|18 19 20

21

1

25 28 27 28 1 31 32|33 34 35|38 37 38 / 140141 42 j4 3 T 5 4 n ^5 |4 6 l4 7 4 8 |4 9 |

1

/

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 27. NO-Rep l ace the under-hood fuse/re l ay box. Also replace the No. 10 DBW (ETCS) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 21. 21. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 22. Reconnect al l connectors, 23. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ). 24. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 25. Do the PCM idle l earn procedure (see page 11-282). 26. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 1 6 5 9 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the under-hood fuse/re l ay box and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

27. Reconnect a l l connectors. 28. Update the PCM if it does not have the l atest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 29. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 1 6 5 9 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the under-hood fuse/relay box and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. N O -lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is comp l ete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11 -229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

DTC P1683: Throttle Valve Default Position Spring Performance Problem

9. Push the throttle valve c l osed as shown.

Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn the ign ition sw i tch to ON (II) or w hi l e the ignition switch is in ON (II). If you do, you will seriousl y injure your fingers if the throttle va lve is activated. NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot, record a l l freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.

10. Release the throttle valve. Does th e

th ro ttle waive re tu rn ?

4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 10 seconds.

YES-Clean the throttl e body (see page 11>331), then go to step 12, and recheck. If DTC P1883 is indicated, g oto step 11.

5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

NO-Go to step 11.

6. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 1 6 8 3 in d ic a te d ?

11. Replace the thrott l e body (see page 11 -335). 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ).

YES-Go to step 7.

13. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the throttle body and the PCM.B

14. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282).

7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Disconnect the intake air duct from the thrott l e body (see page 11-335).

15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 10 seconds. 16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 17. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C

P 1 6 8 3 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC P1684: Throttle Valve Return Spring Performance Problem

3. Push the throttle va l ve open as shown.

ikCAUTIO Do not insert your fingers into the installed thrott l e body when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or while the ignition switch is in ON (I I). If you do, you will seriously injure your fingers if the thrott l e valve is activated. NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record a ll freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troub l eshooti ng information (see page 11-3). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.

10. Release the thrott l e valve. D o e s th e th ro ttle v a lv e re tu rn ?

4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 10 seconds.

YES-Clean the throttle body (see page 11 -331), then go to step 12, and recheck. If DTC P1884 is indicated, g oto step 11.

5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

NO-Go to step 11.

6. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C

P I 6 8 4 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the throttle body and the PCM.B

11. Replace the throttl e body (see page 11 -335). 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 13. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 14. Do the

PCM

idle learn procedure (see page 11-282).

15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 10 seconds.

7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

8. Disconnect the intake ai r duct from the thrott l e body (see page 11-335).

17. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 1 6 8 4 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the throttl e body and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO~Troubleshooting is comp l ete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■

DTC P2101: ETCS Malfunction

9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 10. C lear the DTC w ith the HDS.

Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or w hi l e the ignition switch is in ON (II). If you do, you w i l l seriously injure your fingers if the thrott l e valve is activated.

11. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 12. Visually check the throttle va l ve operation. D o e s th e th ro ttle v a lv e o p e ra te s m o o th ly ?

NOTE; Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

YES-Clean the thrott l e body (see page 11-331), then go to step 25 and recheck. If DTC P2101 is indicated, go to step 22.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ).

NO-Go to step 13.

2. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS.

13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

3. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.

14. Disconnect the thrott l e body 6P connector.

4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

18. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P),

is D T C P 2 1 0 1 In d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Go to step 5. 5. Test-drive the vehic l e for several minutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters: • ENGI NE SPEED • VEHICLE SPEED • APP SENSOR A 8. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS, is D T C P 2 1 01 in d ic a te d ?

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then c l ean the throttle body (see page 11 -331 ) . ■

17. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal B33 and throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 4. THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 8 Wire side of female termina l s PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) J 1 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |1 0 | 11 12 13 14|15 18 19 I 7 '1! 25 X 22 23 24 X 26 / / 29 30 31 32133 34 35|36 37 38 39 (4 0 |41^42 4 |4 5 |4 6 |47 48 I / I —

2021

t l

YES-Go to step 7.

15. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS.

SG5 (GRN) t _ _ ^ Terminal side of female term ina l s Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

7. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0).

YES-Go to step 18.

8. Disconnect the intake air duct from the throttle body (see page 11-335).

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the thrott l e body and the PCM (B33), then go to step 24, 18. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 19. Connect thrott l e body 6P connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6 with a jumper wire.

21. At the throttle body side, measure the resistance between th rott l e body 6P connector term ina l s No. 5 and No. 6 with the throttle fu l ly closed.

THROTTLE BO D Y SP CONNECTOR THROTTLE BODY

6P CONNECTOR

&

1 2 3 4 5 6

2 3 4 5 8 E TG S M — (GRN)

E T C S M + (BLU) E TC S M —

JU M P E R

ETCSM +

p o p

WIRE

W ire side o f fe m a l e te r m in a l s T e rm in a l side o f m a le te rm in a ls

20. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminals €2 and C3.

Is th e re

a b o u t 1 .0 k O o r m o re ?

YES~Go to step 23. PCM CONNECTOR C f4S P )

NO-Go to step 30. 22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

ETCSM (GRN)

ETCSM +

(BLU)

23. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-335). 24. Reconnect all connectors.

11 12 / 14|15 18 17(18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 / 31 32133 34 35|36 37 38 /

/

[ioRT

42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 26. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 27. Do the PCM idle l earn procedure (see page 11-282).

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te r m in a l s

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 21. NO-Repair an open in the wires between the throttle body and the PCM (C2, C3), then go to step 24.

28. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the' range of these recorded freeze data parameters: • ENGINE SPEED • VEHI CLE SPEED • APPSENSOR A 29. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 2 1 0 1 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the thrott l e body and the PCM, then clean the throttle body (see page 11 -331), and go to step 1, NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting,■ 30. Reconnect a ll connectors. 31. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a' known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 32. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters: • ENGINE SPEED • VEHICLE SPEED • APPSENSOR A 33. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 2 1 0 1 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the throttle body and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1, N O-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■

DTC P2118: Throttle Actuator Current ■ ■ Range/Performance Problem NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Slowly press the accel erator pedal to the floor. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 2 1 18 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the throttle body and the PCM.B 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8, Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 7. Disconnect the thrott l e body 6P connector. 8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). 3, Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal B33 and throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 4. THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

■

X\ 1

2

3

4

5 .6

SG5 (GRN) L— .— '----W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s PCM CONNECTOR B

(49P)

3 4 I 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10 || 11 12 13 14|15 18 17|18 19 20 21 26 / / 22 23 24 > < 25 29 30 31 32 33 34 35(36 37 38 39 |4 0 |41 4 2 14 3 1i4 14 5 14 6 147 48 M

SG5

(GRN) L—

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 10. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the throttle body and the PCM (B33), then go to step 18. 10. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 11. Check for continuity between thrott l e body 6P connector termina l s No. 5 and No. 8.

13. At the thrott l e body side, measure the resistance between throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6 with the throttle fu l l y closed.

THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR THROTTLE BODY 8P CONNECTOR

y\ 1

2

3

E IC S M — fG R N iJ

| E T C S M + (BLUJ

1

3

2

4

5

8

E TC S M —

E TC S M +

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

T e rm in a l side o f m a le te rm in a ls

Is th e r e

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wires between throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5 (ETCS”- line) and No. 6 (ETCS+ line), then go to step 18. NO-Go to step 12, 12. Check for continuity between body ground and throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5 and No. 8 individua l ly.

is th e r e a b o u t 1 .0 D o r le s s ?

YES-Go to step 14. NO-Go to step 17. 14. Connect th rott l e body 6P connector terminals No. 5 and No. 8 with a jumper wire. THROTTLE BODY SP CONNECTOR

THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR 1 1

2

3

4

5

ETCSM- (GRN) I

3

4

E TC S M — (GRN)

8

IETCSM +

2

5

8

ETCSM +

(BLU)

(K X&

JU M P E R W IRE

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls W ire side o f fe m a le te r m in a l s

Is th e re

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the throttle body 6P connector and body ground, then go to step 18.

(BLU)

15, Check for continuity between PCM connector termina l s €2 and €3. PCM CONNECTOR

C (49P)

17. Repl ace the thrott l e body (see page 11-335). 18. Reconnect al l connectors. 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 20. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

E TC S M + fBLUJ

21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11 -282).

ETCSM ■ (GRN)

22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

r1 1 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 T 8 9 j 10] 1 11 12 / 14|15 16 17|18 19 20 21 23 24 25 27 28 1 / 1 / / 31 32 I33 34 35 36 37 38 / (40[41 42 4 3 |4 4 |4 5 |4 6 |47 4 8 |4 9 | J 1 12

28

X

23. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 24. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to the floor, 25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 2 1 18 in d ic a te d ?

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 16. NO-Repair an open in the wires between the thrott l e body and the PCM (C2, C3), then go to step 18. 16. At the thrott l e body side, check for continuity between body ground and thrott l e body 6P connector termina l s No. 6 and No. 6 individuall y.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ 26. Reconnect a ll connectors. 27. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 28. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

___________ CM

1

3 4 5

ETCSM- {GRNjI

0

IETCSM+ (BLU)

(HXH)

T e rm in a l side o f m a l e te rm in a ls

Is th e r e

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 17. NO-Go to step 26.

29. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 30. Slowly press the accel erator pedal to the floor, 31. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. is D T C P 2 1 18 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose termina l s at the throttle body and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 28, If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-223). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC P2122: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D) Circuit Low Voltage NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3), 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

10, Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P connectorterminal No. 1 and body ground. APP SENSOR 8P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6

2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

A PS A (PUR)

Is th e re a b o u t 0 ,2 ¥ o r le s s ?

YES-Go to step 3. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the APP sensor and the PCM.B

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (A18) and the APP sensor, then go to step 24.

5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 8, Measure the voltage between APP sensor 6P connector termina l s No. 2 and No. 3.

NO-Go to step 11. 11. Connect APP sensor 6P connector termina l No, 1 to body ground with a jumper wire.

APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 SG3 ( ¥ 1 1 ^

R vH

/\. 1 2 3 4 5 6 APSA (PURJ JU M PER WIRE

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls Is th e re a b o u t 5 V?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Go to step 17. 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS. 3. Disconnect PCM connector A (43P).

12. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal A18 and body ground.

20. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No, 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.

(49P)

P C M CONNECTOR A

APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR

11 12 13

XIX 16 / | 1 8

22 23 24

25

29 30 31 3 2 1/7

/

I8

19 20 21 26 27 2 8

X

CO CO

X

i

n 3 |4 |^ |6 (7

37 38 3 9

14 0 j 41 4 2 14 3 14 4 1 / | 4 8 1 /

1 2 3 4 5 6

o

J 1I 2

(PUR) CO

APSA

■

V C O (RED)

■ ■

JU M P E R W IRE

f 1

48 4 9

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

21. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal A24 and body ground.

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 13. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A18) and the APP sensor, then go to step 24, 13. Reconnect PCM connector A (43P). 14. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with a jumper wire.

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

IE 3 C

f~ ~ ~

J1 | 2

11 12 13

o

J*.

/IX

SI 3 16

7

/b e

8

9

110 ■

19 20 21

J>1 3 | 7 | 8 16 / |1 8 19 25 X 28 32 / /|3 6 37 143 J44 [ / 1 46

[/

2. Monitor the ALTERNATOR in the DATA LI ST with the HDS. 3. Check if the indicated percentage varies when the headlight switch is turned on.

ACC (REDJ

J J 1 | 2 11 12 13

1. Start the engine, and l et it idle,

9 j 101 20 21 27 28

ij

D o e s th e p e r c e n t a g e w ary?

YES-The alternator signa l circuit is OK.B

i

38 39 48 14 9 1

NO-Go to step 4. 4. Turn the headlight switch OFF and ignition switch to LOCK (0).

JU M P E R WIRE

5. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS. T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s is th e r e a c lic k in g n o is e fro m th e A /C c o m p r e s s o r c lu tc h ?

YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the l atest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is comp l ete. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229).HI NO-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/C compressor clutch rel ay and the PCM. If the connections are OK, check the A/C compressor clutch relay (see page 22-109). If needed, repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A13) and the A/C compressor clutch relay and the other A/C system parts.

8. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector. 7. Disconnect PCM connector C (43P). 8, Check for continuity between body ground and PCM connectorterminal C44.

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

flZ Z IZ Z i J 1[2 3 |4 I5 I6 I7 |8 TJW 11 12 / 14 15 18 17|18 19 20 21 25 28 27 28 / 23 24

i

31 32133 34 35 36 37 38 / (40141 42I43T4-4T45T 46I47 4 8 149]

1 1

/ /

j—

ALTF

(WHT/RED)

T erm inal side o f fem ale term inals

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (C44) and the alternator.il NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the l atest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was substituted, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229).I

PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Start the engine, and l et it idle. 2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead, 3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

13. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connectorterminal No. 1 and body ground. PSP SW ITCH 2P CONNECTOR

D o e s it in d ic a te O N ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-Go to step 14. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the fu l l l ock position. 5. Check the PSP SW ITCH in the DATA LI ST with the HDS. D o e s it c h a n g e to O F F ?

YES-The PSP switch signal circuit is O K .ll NO-Go to step 8,

8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 8. Start the engine. 9. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. D o e s it c h a n g e to O F F ?

YES-Repl ace the PSP switch (see page 17-26).! NO-Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 12. Disconnect PCM connector A (43P).

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (A38) and the PSP switch,■ NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck, If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/indication goes away arid the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229).I 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector.

16. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a juniper wire, then start the engine. PSP SW ITCH 2P CONNECTOR .

23. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connectorterminal No. 2 and body ground. PSP SW ITCH 2P CONNECTOR

PSPS W {PNK) JU M PER W IRE G M D (BLK)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

17. Check the PSP SW ITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. D o e s it c h a n g e to O N ?

YES-Replace the PSP switch (see page 17-26).ll NO-Go to step 18. 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 19. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P connector. 20. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 21. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P), 22. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal A38 and PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1. PSP SW ITCH 2P CONNECTOR vPSPSV¥

(PNK)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls PGM CONNECTOR A (49P)

J1|2 i

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 11 12 13 16 22 23 24 25 > < 29 30 31 3 2 1 / / / b e

| 8 9 |1 0 | 1 19 20 21 26 27 28 ( 1 37 38 39

| 4 0 | 41 4 2 14 3 14 4 1/ | 4 6 1 / n

S|49|

PSPSW (PNK) T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is th e re

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 23. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PSP switch and the PCM (A38).H

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/indication goes away and the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229).■ NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PSP switch and G202.il

Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

9. Connect brake pedal position switch 4P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire. BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR

D o e s it in d ic a te O F F ?

B KSW (LT GRN)

YES-Go to step 3. 2 1 3>< 26 27 28 12 13

■ i i

29 30 31 3 2 1 / / / 1 36 37 38 39 41 42 4 3 | 4 4 l 7 T 4 6 l X 48 14 9 1

O

8. Check for continuity between PCM connectortermina l A8 and body ground.

B KSW

(43P)

PCM CONNECTOR A

(49P)

B K S W (LTG R N )

ZIZZIII

>

r— - r — T—

J 1 I 2

-M-

3 |4 n 5 i6 |7 | 8

ITfToI

11 12 13 7 1 7 18 7 b 8 19 20 21 ■

22 23 24 > < C 25

>028 27 28

29 30 31 3 2 1 7 / The:37 38 39 f4 0 ]4 1 42|43l44L/|46X/ 4 8 i4 9 |

i

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

■

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM (A8) and the brake pedal position switch. Also replace the No. 11 + B STOP & HORN (15 A) fuse

9

T e rm in a l si de o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

i

YES-Repair an open or short in the wire between the brake pedal position switch and the No. 11 + B STOP & HORN (15 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box. If the circuit is OK, inspect the brake pedal position switch (see page 19-6).B NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A8) and the brake pedal position switch.■

s e

n

Idle Speed Inspection NOTE: • Before checking the Id l e speed, check these items: - The malfunction indicator lamp ( M I L ) has not been reported on, and there are no DTCs. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system • App l y the parking brake and make sure the headlights are off. 1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve connector (see step 1 on page 11-388). 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) l ocated under the driver's side of the dashboard.

5. Start the engine. Hol d the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without l oad (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 8. Check the idle speed without l oad conditions: headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and A/C off. Idle speed should be: 710 ± 50 rpm tin P or N) 7. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with high electric load (the A/C switch on, the temperature set to max cool, the blower fan on high, and the headl ights on high beam). Idle speed should be: 710 ± 50 rpm (in P or N) NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). If the idle speed is stil l not within specification, go to symptom troub l eshooting. 8. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve connector.

4, Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-209).

PCM I d l e Learn Procedure The id l e l earn procedure must be done so the l earn the engine idle characteristics.

PCM

can

Do the id l e learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions; • Replace the PCM. • Reset the PCM. • Update the PCM. • Replace or c l ean the throttle body. • Disassembl e the engine or transmission. NOTE: Clearing DTCs with the HDS does not require you to do the idle learn procedure.

Procedure 1. Make sure all electrical items (the A /C , the audio, the l ights, etc.) are off. 2. Reset the PCM with the HDS, 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll), and wait 2 seconds. 4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant temperature reaches 194 °F (30 °C). 5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the throttle fu ll y c l osed. NOTE: If the radiator fan conies on, do not inc l ude its running time in the 5 minutes.

Component Location Index FUEL L IN E / QUIC K-C O N N EC T FITTING P reca utions, page 11-304 R e m o va l , page 11-306 In sta l la tio n , page 11-308 FUEL FILL CAP FUEL FEED LINE

FUEL RAIL

FUEL FILL PIPE Removal/Instal lation, page 11-317

FUEL LIN E /Q U IC K -

x

CONNECT FITTING

FU ELTAN K D ra in in g , page 11-301 R e p la c e m e n t page 11-315

x ...

Precautions, page 11 -304 £UEL TA^ K UNIT Removal. Daae 11-308 11-306 Removal/Installation, page 11-311 R em o val, page I n s ta l la tio n , page 11-308 FUEL LINE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTING P recautions, page 11-304 R e m o v a l , page 11-306 I n s ta lla tio n , page 11-308

FUEL V APO R LINE

Includes:

FUEL PUWP R e p la c e m e n t page 11-314 FUEL G AU G E SEN D IN G U N IT T e s t page 11-318 R e p la c e m e n t page 11-314 FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR R epl a c e m e n t page 11-313 FUEL FILTER R e p la c e m e n t page 11-314

Component Location Index (cont'd)

U p d a tin g , page 11-227 S u b s titu tio n , page 11-8 R epl ace m ent, page 11-229

DTC Troubleshooting DTC P0461: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Range/Performance Problem NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Because it requires 182 m i l es (260 km) of driving without refueling to complete this diagnosis, this DTC P0461 cannot be duplicated during this troubleshooting. 1. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-318). is th e fu e l g a u g e s e n d in g u n it O K ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the fuel gauge sending unit and the gauge control m o d u le .! NO-Rep l ace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-314), then go to step 2. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 3. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 4. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

DTC P0462: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Low Voltage NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troub l eshooting information (see page 11-3). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds. 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C

P 0 4 6 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the gauge contro l module and the fuel gauge sending unit.B 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). , 5. Remove the second row seat (see page 20-160). 6. Remove the access panel from the f l oor (see page 11-311). 7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.

A r e a n y P e n d in g o r C o n fir m e d D T C s in d ic a te d ?

10. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. YES-Go to the indicated DTCs Troubleshooting. Is D T C P 0 4 6 3 in d ic a te d ?

NO-Troubleshooting is complete.HI

YES-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-314), then go to step 23. NO-Go to step 11.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 11. Measure the vo ltage between fue l tank unit 4P connectortermina l No. 1 and body ground.

15. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 4P connectorterminal No. 1 and body ground. FUEL T A N K U N IT 4P CONNECTOR

FUEL T A N K U N IT 4P CONNECTOR

S IG N A L |ORN»

S IG N A L (ORN)

1

2

3

4

1 2 3 4

W ire sid e o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

Is th e r e

b a tte r y v o lt a g e ?

YES-Go to step 16. NO-Go to step 12. 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 13. Remove the gauge contro l module (see page 22-419). 14. Disconnect gauge contro l module connector A (12P).

Is there

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the gauge contro l module (signal line) and the fuel gauge sending unit, then go to step 24. NO-Rep l ace the gauge contro l module (see page 22-413), then go to step 24.

16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

23. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

17. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-311).

24. Reinstall all removed parts in the reverse order of remova l .

18. Connect the fue l tank unit 4P connector. 19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). 20. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 21. Set the float (A) to the E position.

25. Reconnect all connectors. 28. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). 27. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 28. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 23. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0 4 6 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the fuel gauge sending unit and the gauge control module, then go to step 1. NO-Troub l eshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ 30. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 31. Reinstall all removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 32. Reconnect all connectors. 22. Check the fuel gauge. D o e s th e fu e l g a u g e m o v e to th e e m p ty p o s itio n ?

33. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8).

YES-Go to step 30. 34. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. NO-Rep l ace the'gauge contro l module (see page 22-419), then go to step 23.

Is D T C P 0 4 6 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the fuel gauge sending unit and the gauge control module. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC P0463: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit High Voltage

11. Connect fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.

NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

FUEL T A N K U N IT 4P CONNECTOR

1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.

1

2

3

4 G ND

3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.

(LT GRN)

JU M P E R W IRE

Is D T C P 0 4 6 3 in d ic a te d ? W ire sid e o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the gauge contro l modu l e and the fue l gauge sending unit.B 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Remove the second row seat (see page 20-160). 8. Remove the access panel from the floor (see page

12. Remove the gauge contro l module (see page 22-419). 13. Disconnect the gauge control modu l e connector B (24P). 14. Check for continuity between gauge control module connector B (24P) terminal No. 15 and body ground.

11-311).

7. Disconnect the fue l tank unit 4P connector,

G AU G E C O NTROL M O D U LE CONNECTOR B (24P)

8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

7

I S IG N A L 1

2

3

4

3

4

5

/

8

13 14 15 18 1? 18 19

FUEL T A N K U N IT 4P CONNECTOR

““

2

9

10 11 21 22

12 24

CO CM

9. Measure the vo ltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.

G N D (L T G R N )

(ORN)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

GN D (LT GRN) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is th e re

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 15. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the gauge control module (GND l ine) and the fuel gauge sending u n it then go to step 28. is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 18. NO-Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

15. Connect fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jum per wire.

18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 19. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-311), 20. Test the fue l gauge sending unit (see page 11-318).

FU'EL T A N K U N IT 4P CONNECTOR

is th e fu e l g a u g e s e n d in g u n it O K ?

S IG N A L {ORN)

1 2 3 4

YES-Go to step 21. NO-Replace the fue l gauge sending unit (see page 11 -314), then go to step 28.

JU M P E R WIRE

21. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector. 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). W ire s ide o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

23. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 24. Set the float (A) to the F position.

16, Disconnect the gauge control modu l e connector A (12P). 17. Check for continuity between gauge contro l module connector A (12P) terminal No. 11 and body ground.

G A U G E CON TR O L M O D U LE CONNECTOR A

1 1 2

1

7

3 ,/ 8

S IG N A L

9

(12P)

- r — *-Jl 5 6 1CI 11 12

(ORN)

25. Check the fue l gauge. W ire sid e o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

D o e s th e g a u g e m o v e to th e fu ll p o s itio n ?

YES-Go to step 33. Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page 22-419), then go to step 28. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the gauge control module (signal line) and the fuel gauge sending unit, then go to step 28,

NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page 22-419), then go to step 26.

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 26. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 27. Reinstall all removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 28. Reconnect all connectors.

DTC P0827: Fuel Pump Control Module System Malfunction NOTE; Before you troubleshoot record a l l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

29. Turn the ignition switch to ON (11). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 30. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 31. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-282). 3. Turn the ignition switch to START (III). 32. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0 4 8 3 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose termina l s at the gauge contro l module and the fuel gauge sending unit, then go to step 1. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ 33. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 34. Reinstall all removed parts in the reverse order of remova l .

NOTE: This vehic l e has an auto control mode starting system. It keeps the starter motor running after the ignition switch is rel eased for 15 seconds, or until the engine starts. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C P 0 8 2 7 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the fuel pump control modu l e, PGM-FI main relay 2, the fuel tank unit, and the PC M .ll

35. Reconnect a l l connectors.

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),

36. Update the P C M if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8).

6. Check the No. 13 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse in under-dash fuse/relay box. Is th e fu s e O K ?

37. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. YES-Go to step 7. Is D T C P 0 4 6 3 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the fuel gauge sending unit and the gauge contro l module. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. N O-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229), If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

NO-Repair a short in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 2 and the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse. Also replace the No. 13 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse, then go to step 74, 7. Disconnect the fue l pump contro l modu l e 10P connector (see page 11-318),

8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (11), and measure the voltage between fue l pump control module 10P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 8 within 2 seconds. FUEL PU M P C O NTROL M O D U LE

11. Remove the left kick panel (see page 20-76), then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (G) from the under-dash fuse/re l ay box.

10P CONNECTOR

3 4 5 6 7 8 / / / / IG1 (YEL) GND (BLK)

--- ^ ---

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

Is th e re b a tte r y

voltage?

YES-Go to step 28.

12. Test PGM-FI main relay 2 (see page 22-103).

NO-Go to step 10. Is P G M - F I m a in r e la y 2 O K ?

9. Check for continuity between fuel pump contro l modu l e 10P connector terminal No. 8 and body ground. FUEL PU M P C ONTROL M O D U LE

10P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 13. NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 2, then go to step 74. 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Measure the vo ltage between PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.

y l / l 3 I4 |5 l6 | 7 I8

\A7

PG M -Fi M A IN RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR

G N P (BLK)

3 x

4

W ire sid e o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s

Is there c o n tin u ity ? YES-Go to step 10. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the fue l pump control module (GND l ine) and G604, then go to step 74.

-■ '

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is there b a tte r y

v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 19. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO-Go to step 15. 15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 16. Disconnect under-hood fuse/re l ay box connector H (9P).

(cont'd)

DTC Troublesho oting (cont'd) 17. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connectorterminal No. 4 to body ground with a jumper wire.

19. Measure the voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.' PG M -Fi M M M RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR

PG M -Fi M M M RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR

3 1 2

3

X 4

1G1 IGP JU M P E R W IRE

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

18. Check for continuity between under-hood fuse/relay box connector H (9P) terminal No. 1 and body ground, U N D ER-HOO D FU SE/R ELAY BO X CONNECTOR

H (9P)

Is th e re battery voltage?

YES-Go to step 20. NO-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-90), then go to step 73. 20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

1

3 4

/ IGP

5 6

/

9

21, Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector terminals No, 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.

(ORN) PG M -Fi M A IN RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR

u

3

El

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is there continuity? YES-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page 22-88), then go to step 74.

NO• Repair an open in the wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box and the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 74. • If the wire is OK, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-90), then go to step 74.

IG1 FUEL P U M P

JU M P E R W IRE T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

22. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II), and measure the v o lt a g e b e tw e e n f u e l p u m p c o n t r o l m o d u le ' 10P

27. Check for continuity between P C M connectorterminal

A11 and body ground.

connector terminal No. 3 and body ground within 2 seconds,

FUEL PU M P CONTROL M O D U LE

PCM CONNECTOR A |43P) IMOFPR (BRN)

10P CONNECTOR f

I 1 I 2

3 I 4 | £r j e l T T 8

11 12 13 / v 22 23 24

3 4 5 G 7

25

/

/ I 18

X

9 11

19 20 21 20 27 28

CO CO

29 30 31 3 2 1 /

1G1 {YEL)

18

0

1 i i ■

37 38 39

|4 0 T 4 t 42

48 ( 4 9 1

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls Is

th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ?

YES-Go to step 79, Y E S - G o to step 23. NONO• Repair an open in the wire between the under-dash fuse/rel ay box and the fuel p u m p control m o d u l e, then go to step 73. • Ifthe wire is OK, replace the under-dash fuse/rel ay box (see page 22-90), then go to step 73. 23. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

• Repair an open in the wire between the PCM (A11) and under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 74. • If the wire, is OK, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-90), then go to step 74. 28. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 29. Reconnect the fuel pump control module 10P connector (see page 11-318).

24, J u m p the S C S line with the HDS,

30. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 25, Disconnect P C M connector A

(49P).

26. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector terminal No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.

PGM-FI M A IN

RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR

3

IMOFPR

31. Clear the DTC with the HDS, 32. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 33. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I), and check for sound from the fue l pump within 2 seconds. Does

th e fu e l p u m p o p e ra te ?

YES-Go to step 34.

1

NO-Go to step 54. JU M P E R WIRE

34. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 35. Disconnect the fuel pump control module 10P connector (see page 11-318).

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 36. Check for continuity between fuel pump control module 10P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.

42. Connect fue l pump control module 10P connector terminal No. 4 to body ground with a jumper wire. FUEL P U M P CONTROL M O D U LE

FUEL P U M P CONTROL M O D U LE

10P CONNECTOR

10P CONNECTOR

5 16 17 18 1 /1 7 3 I4 I 5 |6 |7 |8 l / V

FPCD (LT B LU f

FPCD {LT B LU f

JU M P E R WIRE

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

43. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal A42 and body ground.

Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 37, NO-Go to step 40.

PCM CONNECTOR A

(49P)

37. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS. 38, Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

J1

o

CO

112

11 12 13 / I / 7 16 / | 1 8 19 20 21 ■

22 23 24 29 30 31

25 > < 26 27 3 21 / / / 1 36 37 38

| 4 | S > 1i3 I 7 I 8

22 23 24 >


O X

X

O

X

O

X

_ p R N

X

D

X

S

X

X

X

X

O

ATP

ATP

F ID X

RVS X

X

12. Disconnect P C M connector A (49P) or C (43P), 13. Check for continuity between the transmission range switch connectorterminal and the P C M connector terminal of the input which indicated OFF. Refer to the fol l owing table,

O: Of\Tx Toff

ATP

ATP

ATP

ATP

ATP

ATP

ATP

P

R

N

D

S

FW D

RVS

PCM

A16

C25

C 28

C 17

C 48

C 18

C 19

time.B

Transm ission range switch

7

8

4

9

10

5

1

N O - G o to step 4.

Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?

D o th e tra n s m is s io n r a n g e s w itc h s ig n a ls m a tc h ? Y E S - 1 ntermittent failure, the system is O K at this

4. C o m p a r e the ATPP, ATPR, A T P N , AT PD, ATPS, A T P F W D , and A T P R V S inputs with the H D S to the table in step 3, in each shift lever position.

D o a ll s ig n a ls r e m a in O F F ?

Y E S - R e p l ace the P C M (see page 11-229).■ NO-Repair an open in the wire between the corresponding transmission range switch connector termina l and the P C M . B

Y E S - G o to step 14,

14. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

NO - R e c o r d the input that incorrectly indicated ON, then go to step 5,

15. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector.



9. Check the 6th Pressure Switch signal with the H D S in the A/T Data List.

is th e 8 th P r e s s u r e S w it c h O N ?

DTC P16C0: PCM A/T Control System Incomplete Update NOTE:

YES-Replace transmission fluid pressure switch E (6th clutch) (see page 14-181).■ N O - G o to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

• Before you troubleshoot, record a l lfreeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). • This code is indicated w h e n P C M updating is in c o m p l ete. • D o not turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) or A C C E S S O R Y (I) while updating the P C M . Ifyou turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) or A C C E S S O R Y (I) before c o m p l etion, the P C M can be damaged.

11. R e m o v e the jumper wire. 12. J u m p the S C S l ine with the HDS. 13. Disconnect P C M connector C (49P). 14. Check for continuity between P C M connectorterminal C31 and the transmission fl uid pressure switch E (6th clutch) connectorterminal.

1. Update the P C M (see page 11 -227). 2. Check for Pending or Confirmed D T C s with the HDS. Is D T C P 1 8 C 0 i n d i c a t e d ?

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

T R A N S M IS S IO N FLUID PRESSURE SW ITCH E (6TH CLUTCH) CONNECTOR

j|

fi| l | 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |lo| l) 111|l 2 / jt 4-|l 5|l 6 11T|l8 19120|211 P .

OPiSvv

1 140j 41|4

f W H T /B L K ) OPSSW (W H T /B LK )

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

,

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

Is t h e r e c o n t i n u i t y ? Y E S - R e p l ace the P C M (see page 11-229).■ NO-Repair an open in the wire between P C M connector terminal C31 and transmission fluid pressure switch E (6th clutch).®

YES-Replace the P C M (see page 11-229).H N O - P C M updating is c o m p l ete.!

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)

NO TE : • Before you troubl eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the Genera l Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).

12. Check for continuity between P C M connectortermina l Cl 9 and transmission range switch connector terminal No. 1, T R A N S M IS S IO N RANGE SW ITCH CONNECTOR

ATPR VS (R E D /W H T !

• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanica l prob l e m in the transmission, 1. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II).

i 2 6

PCM CONNECTOR C (43P)

ATPR VS (R ED /W HT) | l | 2

3 4 5

7 8

CD

DTC P1717: Open in Transmission Range Switch ATPRVS Switch Circuit

11 12 / /

10

/ |4

2. Shift to R, and check the Reverse Switch (ATPRVS) signal with the HDS.

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

3 I M sF j 1 9 |101 14jl5 18 1 T |l8 1'9 20 21

28 24 X / 4-1

01

25 X

31 32|33 34 3S|36

2

827

37 3 8

28 /

42(43 14 4 ^ ^

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is th e R e v e r s e S w it c h ( A T P R V S ) O N ? YES-lntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time.ll N O - G o to step 3. 3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 5. Connect a jumper wire between transmission range switch connectorterminal No. 1 and body ground. T R A N S M IS S IO N RANGE SW ITCH CONNECTOR A TPR VS (R E D /W HT)

1 6

2 i / 7 8

4

5

9 10

JU M P E R WIRE

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

6. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 7. Check the Reverse Switch (ATPRVS) signal with the HDS.

is th e R e v e r s e S w itc h ( A T P R V S ) O N ? YES-Replace the transmission range switch (see page 14-235).■ N O - G o to step 8. 8. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 3. R e m o v e the jumper wire. 10. J u m p the S C S l ine with the HDS. 11. Disconnect P C M connector C (49P).

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Replace the P C M

(see page 11-229).B

NO-Repair an open in the wire between P C M connector terminal Cl 9 and the transmission range switch.!!

DTC P177A: Line Pressure Solenoid Valve A Stuck OFF#or Line Pressure Switch Stuck OFF NO TE : Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the G enera l T roub l eshooting Information (see page 14-4). 1. W a r m up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan c o m e s on). 2. M a k e sure that the transmission is fill ed to the proper l evel, and check for fluid leaks. 3. Drain the A T F (see step 5 on page 14-185) through a strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or excessive clutch material.

D o e s th e s tra in e r h a v e m e ta i d e b ris o r e x c e s s iv e c lu tc h m a te r ia l? YES-Replace the transmission.■

10. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 11. Check for a blown No. 18 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.

Is th e N o . 1 8 ( 1 0 A ) fu s e O K ? Y E S - G o to step 12. NO-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between P C M connectorterminal B2 and the under-dash fuse/relay bo x . B 12. J u m p the S C S line with the HDS. 13. Disconnect P C M connector B (49P). 14. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 15. Measure the v o l tage between P C M connector termina l B2 and b ody ground. PCM CONNECTOR B (43P) VBSOl

NO-Replace the A T F (see step 8 on page 14-185), then go to step 4. h i*

4. Raise the vehicle on a lift, m a k e sure it is securely supported, and a l low all four wheels to rotate freely. 5. Turn the ignition switch to O N (ll).

3

1 11 :213

(BLK/YEL)

8 9ho| 14|15 16 IT te 19 20 21

26 / 22 2.324 X 25 X / 2930 31 32|33 34 35(36 37 38 39

|40|41I 42 4 3 |4 4 |^ l4 6 4? 4 8 t /t

6. Clear the D T C with the HDS. 7. Start the engine. With the brake p e d a l pressed, shift to D, then release the brake pedal. 8. Monitoring the A P P Sensor (%) with the H D S in the A/T Data List, press (2 % opened) and release (0 % opened) the acce l erator ped a l every 2 seconds. Then check the Line Pressure Sol VLV. A signal and the Line Pressure Pressure Switch signal with the H D S in the A/T Data List.

Is th e L in e P r e s s u r e P r e s s u r e S w it c h O N w h e n L in e P r e s s u r e S o i V L V . A is O N , a n d O F F w h e n L in e P r e s s u r e S o i V L V . A is O F F ?

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is th e r e b a tt e r y v o lta g e ? YES-Faulty l ine pressure solenoid v a l ve A, Replace the secondary valve bo dy (line pressure solenoid valve A) (see page 14-167),■ NO-Repair an open in the wire between P C M connectortermina l B2 and the under-dash fuse/rel ay bo x . B 16. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

YES-lntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time. Check for poor connections and l oose terminals between the l ine pressure switch and the P C M . B

17. Disconnect the line pressure switch connector.

N O - G o to step 3. 9. Select Line Pressure Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test Me nu, and check that line pressure solenoid v a l ve A operates with the HDS.

is a c lic k in g s o u n d h e a r d ? Y E S - G o to step 16.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 18. Connect a juniper wire between the l ine pressure switch connectorterminal and bo dy ground.

25. Check-for continuity between P C M connectorterminal C35 and the line pressure switch connectortermina l . PCM CONNECTOR C (4SP)

LINE PRESSURE SW ITCH CONNECTOR

U N E PRESSURE S W ITCH CONNECTOR

1 jO P PLSM f (W H T /B L U ! JU M P E R W IRE (W H T /B LU ) T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

W ire side o f fe m a le te r m in a l s

13. Turn the ignition switch to O N (ll).

is

20. Check the Line Pressure Pressure Switch signal with the H D S in the A/T Data List

YES-Replace the P C M (see page

is

th e

L in e P r e s s u r e P r e s s u r e S w itc h O N ?

YES-Replace the line pressure switch (see page

14-182). ■ N O - G o to step 21. 21. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), 22. R e m o v e the jumper wire. 23. J u m p the S C S line with the HDS. 24. Disconnect P C M connector C (49P).

th e re

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

c o n tin u ity ?

11-229).■

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the l ine pressure switch connectorterminal and P C M connectorterminal C3S.11

< •# > DTC P2714: A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve D Stuck OFF NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the Genera l Troub l eshooting Information (see page 14-4). 1. W a r m up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan c o m e s on). 2. M a k e sure that the transmission is fil l ed to the proper l evel, and check for fl uid leaks. 3. Drain the A T F (see step 5 on page 14-185) through a strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or excessive clutch material.

D o e s th e s tra in e r h a v e m e ta l d e b ris o r e x c e s s iv e d u tc h m a te r ia l? Y E S - R e p l ace the transmission.■

8. Clear the D T C with the HDS. 9. Select Clutch Pressure Contro l (Linear) S o l enoid Valve D in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T c l utch pressure control so l enoid v a l ve D with the HDS.

D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te N O R M A L ? YES-Faulty lock-up shift valve. Replace the main v a l ve body (lock-up shift valve) or the transmission. I f you are replacing the main va l ve body, clean off any metal debris or excessive c l utch material inside the transmission, the A T F cooler, the A T F hoses, the A T F pipes, and the hydraulic circuit. Then, replace the main valve body and the torque converter.® N O - F a u l ty A/T clutch pressure control so l enoid valve D. Replace the secondary valve b ody (A/T clutch pressure control so l enoid valve D) (see page

14-167).!

NO-Replace the A T F (see step 8 on page 14-185), then go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 5. Clear the D T C with the HDS. 6. Start the engine. With the brake pedal pressed, shift to D. 7. Check the A/T Shift S o l VLV. B signal ,the Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed, and the Shift Control w h e n moving the shift l ever to D with the H D S in the A/T Data List.

D w S S

o e s th e in p u t S h a ft (M a in s h a ft) S p e e d re m a in s te a d y h e n t h e A / T S h ift S o i V L V . B is O F F , a n d d o e s t h e in p u t h a ft (M a in s h a ft) S p e e d r e a c h 0 r p m w h e n th e A /T S h ift o i V L V . B is O N ?

YES-Go to step 8. N O - l ntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time.B

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC P2720: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve D Circuit

9. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure control so l enoid v a l ve D connectortermina l No. 1 and body ground.

NOTE; • Before you troubleshoot, record a l lfreeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).

A /T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID V A l¥ E D CONNECTOR

• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanica l prob l e m in the transmission.

LSD (B LK /W H T !

• If D T C P2720 is stored in the P C M , the transmission does not shift to 2nd or 5th gear because of the fail-safe function. 1 .Turn the ignition switch to O N (II), W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

2. C l ear the D T C with the HDS, 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed D T C s with the HDS.

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?

is D T C P 2 7 2 0 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire

YES-Go to step 4.

between P C M connectortermina l B43 and A/T clutch pressure control so l enoid valve D M

NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is O K at this time. Check for poor connections and l oose termina l s between A/T c l utch pressure control solenoid valve D and the PCM.ll 4. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 5. J u m p the S C S line with the HDS. 8. Disconnect P C M connector B (49P). 7, Check for continuity between P C M connector terminal B43 and body ground. PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

h

3

7TYI¥]T

9h°I

8

11 12 13 14|15 18 17|18 19 20 21 22 23 24

X 25 X 2837 /

29 30 31 32(33 34 35|36

/

38 39

|40|41 42 43|44]45|46 47 481 / |

LSD (B LK /W H T)

NO-Faulty A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve D. R e p l ace the secondary v a l ve body (A/T clutch pressure control so l enoid valve D) (see page 14-167).■ 10. Disconnect the A/T cl utch pressure control solenoid valve D connector. 11. Check for continuity between P C M connectorterminal B43 and A/T clutch pressure control so l enoid valve D connectorterminal No. 1. PCM CONNECTOR i (49P)

A /T CLUTCH PRESSURE C ONTROL SOLENOID W A IV E D CONNECTOR

I M 2 3 7 ] 5 f e 1 7 f¥ J 9 | ig | 11 12 13 .14(15 18 17J1S 19 20 21

X

28 / 22 23 24 / K . 25 / 29 30 31 32|33 84 35|36 3? 38 39

| |

|40|41 42 43 44 45|46 * m 7 \

LSD (B LK /W H T)

1

2 LSD (B LK /W H T)

© T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls is

t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 8. N O - G o to step 10. 8. Disconnect the A/T c l utch pressure control solenoid valve D connector.

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 12. NO-Repair an open in the wire between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid va l ve D connectorterminal No. 1 and P C M connectorterminal B43.ll

12. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve D connectorterminal No. 2 and bo dy ground.

DTC P2721* Ptoblem in A/T C lu tc h Pressure

Control Solenoid Valve D NOTE:

A /T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID V A L V E D CONNECTOR

G ND fBLIC)

• Before you troub l eshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4), • This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the transmission.

• If DTC P2721 is stored in the PCM, the transmission does not shift to 2nd or 5th gear because of the fail-safe function. n W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Go to step 13. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve D connector and body ground (G101) (see page 2 2 - 2 0 ) , or repair poor body ground (G101).H 13. Measure the resistance between A/T clutch pressure control so l enoid valve D connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.

the ignition switch to ON (II).

2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.

3. Check for Pending or Confirmed D

with the HDS.

is DTC P2721 indicated? YES-Go to step 4. NO -lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this tim e .ll 4. Check the A/T C.P.C. Sol VLV. D Actual w ith the HDS in the A/T Data List. Is t h e r e 3 5 m A o r m o r e ?

Y E S - G o to step 5. A /T CLUTCH PRESSURE C O NTROL SOLENOID V A L V E D CONNECTOR

NO-Faulty A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve D. Replace the secondary valve body (A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve D) (see page 1 4-16 7).■ 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 6. Jum p the SCS line with the HDS. 7. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

T e rm in a l side o f m ale te rm in a ls

is th e r e 4 . 7 - 5 , 9 0 ? YES-Replace the P C M (see page 11-229),■

NO-Faulty A/T clutch pressure control so l enoid valve D. Replace the secondary v a l ve bo dy (A/T c l utch pressure control solenoid v a l ve D) (see page 14-167).■

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 8. Check for continuity between: • PCM connectortermina l B1 and body ground, • PCM connectorterminal B40 and body ground. P G M CONNECTOR B f43P)

PG2 (BLK)

Il|2 3 30 0 1 8 9|)0| 11 12 13 14|15 1 81?|t8 19 a 22 23. 24 X 25 X 28 // 29 30 31 32(33 34 35(36 3? 38 39 243 |44|4S|46 47 |40|41 4 PG1 (BLK)

Terminal side of female terminals is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Replace the PCM (see page 11-223).■ NO-Repair open in the wires between; • PCM connectorterminal B1 and body ground (G101) (see page 22-20), or repair poor body ground (G10D.B • PCM connectorterminal B40 and body ground (G101) {see page 22-20), or repair poor body ground (G101).H

DTC P2821: Line Pressure Solenoid Vaive A Stuck ON NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the General Troubleshooting I nformation (see page 14-4). • If DTC P2821 is stored in the PCM, engine torque is restricted because of the fai l -safe function. 1. Warm up the engine to norma l operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on), 2. Make sure that the transmission is fi l led to the proper level, and check for fluid leaks. 3. Drain the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-185) through a strainer. Inspect the strainer for meta l debris or excessive cl utch material. D o e s th e s tr a in e r h a v e m e t a l d e b r is o r e x c e s s iv e c lu tc h m a te ria l?

YES-Replace the transmission.■ NO-Replace the ATF (see step 8 on page 14-185), then go to step 4. 4. Raise the vehicle on a l ift, make sure it is securel y supported, and all ow all four wheels to rotate freely. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 7. Start the engine. With the brake pedal pressed, shift to D, then release the brake pedal. 8. Monitoring the APP Sensor (%) with the HDS in the A/T Data List, press (2 % opened) and release (0 % opened) the accelerator pedal every 2 seconds. Then check the Line Pressure So l VLV. A signal and the Line Pressure Pressure Switch signal with the HDS in the A/T Data List. is th e L in e P re s s u re P re s s u re S w it c h O N w h e n L in e P

js u re

S o i VLV, A is O N , a n d is th e L in e P re s s u re

P re s s u re S w it c h O F F w h e n L in e P re s s u re S o i V L V . A is Of f ?

YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this tinne.il NO-Fau l ty l ine pressure so l enoid va lve A. Replace the secondary va l ve body (line pressure so l enoid va l ve A) (see page 14-187).■

DTC P2826: Short in Line Pressure Solenoid Valve A Circuit

12. Measure the voltage between PCM -connector terminal B2 and body ground. PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot, record a l l freeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the General Troub l eshooting Information (see page 14-4). • This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the transmission.

VBSOL (BLK/YEL)

h i*

3

TTTTTIT

8 9 |10 |

11 11213

18

19 20 21

222:324 X

25

28

/ /

29 30 31 32(33 34 3§|36 37 38 39 |40|41 42 4 3 M 4 5 T « 47 4 8 1 /)

1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Raise the vehicle on a l ift, make sure it is securel y supported, and al low all four wheels to rotate free ly.

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le term inals is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

4. Start the engine. With the brake pedal pressed, shift to D, then release the brake pedal.

YES-Go to step 13.

5. Monitoring the APP Sensor (%) with HDS in the A/T Data List, press (2 % opened) and re l ease (0 % opened) the accelerator pedal every 2 seconds.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between PCM connectorterminal B2 and the under-dash fuse/relay box.B

8. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

is D T C P 2 8 2 6 i n d ic a te d ?

14. Connect PCM connector B (49P).

YES-Go to step 7.

15. Disconnect the line pressure solenoid valve A connector.

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections and l oose terminals between l ine pressure so l enoid va l ve A and the PCM.B 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Check for a blown No. 18 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/re l ay box.

16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 17. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 18. Start the engine. With the brake pedal pressed, shift to D, then release the brake pedal.

is th e N o . 18 (1 0 A ) fu s e O K ?

19. Monitoring the APP Sensor (%) with HDS in the A/T Data List, press (2 % opened) and release (0 % opened) the accelerator pedal every 2 seconds.

YES-Go to step 9.

20. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

NO-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between PCM connectorterminal B2 and the under-dash fuse/relay box.H 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 10. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ).

'

is D T C P 2 8 2 8 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 21. NO-Fau lty l ine pressure solenoid valve A. Repl ace the secondary va l ve body (line pressure solenoid valve A) (see page 14-167).■ 21. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 22. Jump the SCS l ine with the HDS. 23. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 24. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal B44 and body ground. P C M CONNECTOR B (49P)

l11P£ 23

|40|4l|42l43|44|45|46|47|48|/1

DTC P2827: Open in Line Pressure Solenoid Valve A Circuit NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). • This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical prob l em in the transmission.

I PLA (YEL)

(S )

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS.

T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te r m in a l s

3. Start the engine in P, and wait for at least 1 second. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between PCM connectortermina l B44and line pressure so l enoid valve A connector terminal No. 2.1 NO-Replace the PCM (see page 11-223).■

Is D T C

P 2 8 2 7 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections and loose terminals between line pressure so l enoid valve A and the PCM.B 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Disconnect the line pressure solenoid valve A connector. 7. Connect a jumper wire between l ine pressure so l enoid valve A connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. U N E PRESSURE SOLENOID V A l¥ E A CONNECTOR

PLA (YEL) JU M P E R WIRE

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls




21. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal B44 and line pressure solenoid va l ve A connector termina l No. 2.

10. Raise the vehicle on a l ift, make sure it is securely supported, and al l ow the all four whee l s to rotate free l y.

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

11. Start the engine. With the brake pedal pressed, shift to D, then release the brake pedal.

ll 1 i 2 I 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9110||| 1 |11|12|1314|15|16[17|1819 20|21| p

12. Monitoring the APP Sensor (%) with HDS in the A/T Data List, press (2 % opened) and re l ease (0 % opened) the accel erator pedal every 2 seconds each time.

■g g S S S S O E S S S B V jM

1

LINE PRESSURE S O LEN O ID V A L V E A C ONNECTOR

.r — 1. 1

I PLA (YEL)

2 PLA

____ ^

__________

13. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. T e rm in a l side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is D T C P 2 8 2 6 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 14.

is

NO-Go to step 17.

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

there c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Replace the PCM {see page 11-229).H

14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Remove the jumper wire. 16. Check for continuity between l ine pressure solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between PCM connectorterminal B44 and line pressure solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2 M

L I M E PRESSURE SOLENOID V A L V E A CONNECTOR

G N D (BLK)

W ire side o f fe m a le te r m in a l s

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Faulty line pressure so l enoid valve A. Replace the secondary valve body (line pressure so l enoid valve A) (see page 14-167).■ NO-Repair an open in the wire between line pressure solenoid valve A and body ground (G101) (see page 22-20), or repair poor body ground (G10t).H 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 18. Remove the jumper wire. 13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 20. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC U0029: F-CAN Communication Circuit Error (F-CAN Bus OFF) NOTE: • Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). • This code is caused by an e l ectrica l circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical prob l em in the transmission. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the PGM-FI SYSTEM with the HDS. is D T C U 0 0 2 9 in d ic a t e d in th e P G M - F i S Y S T E M ?

Y E S - G o to the D T C U 0029 troubl eshooting in the PGM-FI S Y S T E M (see page 11-194).B

NO-Go to step 4. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the A/T SYSTEM with the HDS. is D T C U 0 0 2 9 in d ic a t e d in th e A / T S Y S T E M ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■ 5. Update the PCM if it does not have the l atest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), 8, Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), and wait for at l east 2 minutes. 7. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the A/T SYSTEM with the HDS. is D T C U 0 0 2 9 i n d ic a t e d in th e A / T S Y S T E M ?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 2. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 8.

8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0029 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S i n d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, rep l ace the original PCM (see page 11-229), If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 7, go to the indicated DTC's troub l eshooting,■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAI LED, check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 8, If the PCM was substituted, go to step 2, If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 6.

DTC U0104: Lost Communication with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unit-PCM NOTE: • Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). • This code is caused by an el ectrical circuit prob l em and cannot be caused by a mechanica l prob l em in the transmission. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the PGM-FI SYSTEM with the HDS. is D T C U 0 1 0 4 i n d ic a t e d in th e P G M - F i S Y S T E M ?

YES-Go to the DTC U0104 troub l eshooting in the PGM-FI SYSTEM (see page 11-195).B NO-Go to step 4. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the A/T SYSTEM with the HDS, is D T C (J 0 10 4 i n d ic a t e d in th e A I T S Y S T E M ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.® 5. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). 6. Start the engine, and wait for at least 2 minutes. 7. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the A/T SYSTEM with the HDS. is D T C U 0 1 0 4 i n d ic a t e d in th e A / T S Y S T E M ?

YES-Check for poor connections or l oose terminals between the adaptive cruise control (ACC) unit and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 8. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 2.

8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0104 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the origina l PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 1 , go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■ NO- l f the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or l oose terminals between the adaptive cruise control (ACC) unit and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 6. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 2. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, goto step 6.

DTC Tioubleshooting (cont'd) DTCU01?/, , '7 ‘ f'J !V!-'l!'j((Ction ( P C M Lost Communication with VSA Modulator-Control Unit) NOTE: • Before you troubl eshoot record a l lfreeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4), • This code is caused by an electrical circuit prob l e m

and cannot be caused transmission.

chanical problem in the

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the D T C w ith the HDS. 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the PGM-FI SYSTEM w ith the HDS.

Is DTC U0122 indicated in the PGM-FI SYSTEM? YES Go to the DTC U0122 tro u b leshooting in the PGM-FI S Y S T E M (see pago l'i 190),B

NO-Go to step 4.

4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the A/T S Y S T E M with the HDS.

Is DTC U0122 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM? YES Ho to step 5. N O -lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this time. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting,■ 5. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see page 11-227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 1 1 8).

6. Start the engine, and w ait for at lei

utes.

7 Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the A/T S Y S T E M with the HDS,

is

DTC U 01 2 2

indicated in the A /T

SYSTEM ?

YES Check fo r poor connections or loose terminals between the VSA modulator-control unit and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute d known-good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 6. If the P C M w a s substituted, go to step 2.

8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0122 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS, D o e s t h e H D S in d i c a t e P A S S E D ?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete, If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229). If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 7, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■ NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals between the VSA modulator-control unit and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then goto step 6 . If the PCM was substituted, go to step 2. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, goto step 6.

< 26/ / i 29 30 31 32(33 34 35|36 37 38 39 (40141 « | 4 3 p i T 4 5 l« l 4 7|4 8 L / |

B A (49P) Terminal side of female terminals

rziziz 1

'3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 ' 11 12 / u | l 6 16 17)18 24 23 25 X / / / 31 32 33 34 35|36

S | 9 110 | a 19 20 21 28 27 28 i 37 38 /

48 | 49 | 140 14-1 4 5 ^ 4 3 1 ^ 4 5 ^ 47 1


< 25 > < i 22 / 29 30 31 3 2 1 / / / 3 6 [40141 4 2 p 3 | 4 4 lX ! 4 6

V lT lT o I 19 20 21 28 27 28 37 38 39 Z M

Terminal side of female terminals

M L

i i

i 3| 4 [ S

DTC Troubleshooting DTC 11,13,15,17: Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 13-56). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D TC 88 in d ic a te d w ith DTC 1 1, 13, 15, o r 17 a t the sa m e tim e?

YES-Go to step 3.

10. Disconnect the VSA modu l ator-control unit 46P connector (see step 3 on page 19-117). 11. Start the engine. 12. Measure the vo ltage between body ground and the appropriate wheel speed sensor + B and GND termina l s of the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit 46P connector individually (see table). DTC 11 (Right-front) 13 (Left-front)

NO-Go to step 3. 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again. 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

15 (Right-rear) 17 (Left-rear)

Appropriate Terminal GND +B FR-GND: FR +B: No. 28 No. 29 FL-GNP: F L+B : No. 34 No. 12 RR-GND; RR +B: No. 8 No. 30 RL-GND: R L+B : No. 11 No. 10

VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR

Is D TC 11, 13, 15, o r 17 in d ic a te d ? YES-Go to step 6.

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent fai l ures troub l eshooting (see page 13-55),11 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7, Check for l oose terminals between the wheel speed sensor 2P connector and the VSA modu l ator-control unit 48P connector. W ire side of fem al e term inals

A re the c o n n e c tio n s O K?

Is there 0.1 ¥ o r m ore?

YES-Go to step 8. NO-Repair the connector or terminals if possible, or rep l ace the harness, and retest.■ 8, Check that the appropriate wheel speed sensor is properly mounted (see page 19-119). DTC 11 13

Appropriate Wheel Speed Sensor

YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the VSA modulator-control unit and the appropriate wheel speed sensor.B NO-Go to step 13. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

ight-front

light-rear rear Is the w h e e l s p e e d s e n s o r in sta lla tio n O K ?

YES-Go to step 10. NO-Reinstali the whee l speed sensor (see page

19-113), then go to step 1. ■

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 14, Check for continuity between body ground and the appropriate wheel speed sensor + B and GND termina l s of the VSA modu l ator-control unit 46P connector individual ly (see table). DTC 11 (Right-front) 13 (Left-front) 15 (Right-rear) 17 (Left-rear)

Appropriate Terminal +B GND FR-GND: FR +B: No. 29 o. 28 “GND: FL +B: No. 34 No. 12 RR +B: RR-GND; No. 8 No. 30 R L+B: RL-GND: No. 10 No. 11

VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR

15. Disconnect the appropriate wheel speed sensor 2P connector (see page 19-119). 16. Check for continuity between body ground and the appropriate whee l speed sensor + B and GND terminals of the VSA modulator-contro l unit 48P connector individually (see table), DTC

Appropriate Terminal +e 3NP FR +B; FR-GND: No. 29 0.28 FL +B; No. 12 No. 34 RR +B; RR-GND: No. 30 No. 8 R L+B: RL-GND: No. 11 No. 10

11 (Right-front) 13 (Left-front) 15 (Right-rear) 17 (Left-rear)

VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 48P CONNECTOR RL-GND (RED)

RL + B (YEL)

FL-GND (GRY)

FR-GND (PNK)

RR + B (LT BLU) FR + B (GRN)

W ire side of fem ale te rm in a l s Is there co n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 15. NO-Go to step 17,

W ire side of fem ale term inals Is there co n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the VSA modulator-control unit and the appropriate wheel speed sensor.B NO-Replace the appropriate wheel speed sensor (see page 19-119).■

@

V-^VSA

17. Measure the resistance between the appropriate VSA modulator-contro l unit 48P connector whee l speed sensor + B and GND terminals (see tab l e), then measure the resistance between the same terminals after reversing the positive and negative tester probes. DTC 11 (Right-front) 13 (Left-front) 15 (Right-rear) 17 (Left-rear)

Appropriate Terminal +B MB FR +B: FR-GNt No. 29 No. 28 FL +B: FL-GND: No. 34 No. 12 RR +B; RR-GND; No. 30 No. 8 RL +B: RL-GND; No. 11 No. 10

18. Disconnect the appropriate wheel speed sensor 2P connector (see page 13-119). 19. On the sensor side, measure the resistance between appropriate wheel speed sensor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2, then measure resistance between the same terminals after reversing the positive and negative tester probes. WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

¥ S A MODULATOR-CONTROL U N IT 46P CONNECTOR RL-GND fREDl [ - ( § ) - 1 RL + B (YELJ '- - - - J FL + B (ORN)

Term inal side of male term inals

is the re s is ta n ce in fin ity (o h m m e te r m a y re a d OL) in b o th d ire ctio n s ?

YES-Replace the appropriate whee l speed sensor (see page 13-119).■ RR + B (LT BLU)

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA modu l ator-control unit.B

W ire side of female term inals is the res is ta n c e in fin ity (ohmmeter m a y re a d O L) in b o th d ire ctio n s?

YES-Go to step 18. NO-Go to step 20.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 20. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA modu l ator-control unit 48P connector wheel speed sensor + B and GND terminals (see tab l e), then check for continuity between the same terminals after reversing the positive and negative tester probes.

11 (Right-front) 13 (Left-front) 15 (Right-rear) 17 (Left-rear)

Appropriate Terminal +S 3ND FR 9 6: FR-GND: No. 29 0. 28 FL i B* -GND: No. 12 o. 34 -GND: RR +B: Jo. 8 No. 30 RL +B: -GND: o. 10 No. 11

VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR

21. Disconnect the appropriate wheel speed sensor 2P connector (see page 19-113). 22. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector wheel speed sensor + B and GND terminals (see table), then check for continuity between the same termina ls after reversing the positive and negative tester probes. DTC

^

11 (Right-front) 13 (Left-front) 15 (Right-rear) 17 (Left-rear)

RL-GND fRED) r ^ - ] R L + B (YEL) '

FL + B (ORN)

Appropriate Terminal +B iND FR +B: FR-GND: No. 29 No. 28 FL +B: -GNC No. 34 No. 12 RR + 8; -GNl No. 30 No. 8 R L+ B : RL-GND: No. 11 No. 10

VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR RL-GND fRED) r ( § ) - i R L + B (YEL)

1

Pl+efORN)

RR + B (LT BLU) W ire side of female term inals Is there co n tin u ity in b o th d ire c tio n s ?

R R + B fL T BLU) W ire side o f female term inals

YES-Go to step 21. NO-Reconnect the VSA modulator- control unit 46P

connector, then go to step 23,

Is there c o n tin u ity in b o th d ire c tio n s ?

YES-Repair a short in the wires between the VSA modulator-contro l unit and the appropriate, wheel speed sensor.B NO-Go to step 23.

23. Substitute a known-good wheel speed sensor (see page 13-113). 24. Reconnect all connectors, 25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 26. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 27. Test-drive the vehicle at 13 mph (30 km/h) or more. NOTE; Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 28. Check for DTCs with the HDS. fs D 1 C 11,

13, 15. o r 17 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 23.

NO-Repl ace the original speed sensor (see page 19-113).■ 29. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115). 30. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. NOTE: Drive the vehic l e on a straight section of road, not on a lift.

31. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is DTC 11, 13, 15, o r 17 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for l oose termina l s in the VSA modu l ator-control unit 46P connector. If the VSA modulator-control unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA modulator-contro l unit (see page 19-117).B

DTC 1 2 ,14f 16,18: Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Malfunction NOTE: • If the ABS and other indicators come on because of electrical noise, the indicators will go off when you test-drive the vehic l e speed at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more and the noise is gone. • An incorrectly installed wheel bearing can cause one of these DTCs. • Before you troub l eshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 19-56).' 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Check the appropriate wheel speed sensor is properly mounted (see page 19-119). DTC 12 14 18 18

light-rear rear

Is the w h e e l s p e e d s e n s o r in sta lla tio n O K?

YES-Go to step 3. NO-Reinstall the wheel speed sensor, and check the mounting position (see page 19 -11 9).■

3. Inspect the appropriate magnetic encoder for damage, debris, and correct installation.

DTC

12 14

Appropriate Magnetic Encoder Right-frc Left-front

16 18

Right-rear Left-rear

NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated,

troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

Appropriate Wheel Speed Sensor ight-fron Left-front

Note

Remove the bearing unit page 18-14). Remove the bearing unit page 18-37).

h (see h (see

Is the magnetic encoder surface OK? YES-Go to step 4. NO-Remove the debris from the magnetic encoder, or replace the hub bearing unit: • Front: Replace the front hub bearing unit (see page

18-14),■* • Rear: Replace the rear hub bearing unit (see page 18-37). ■

4. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector (see step 3 on page 19-117).

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 5. Check for continuity between the appropriate wheel speed sensor GND terminal and the other whee l speed sensor GND terminals of the VSA modulatorcontrol un it 48P connector (see tab l e). DTC 12 14 16

Appropriate Terminal FR-GND: No. 28 FL-6ND: No. 34 RFt-GND: No. 8

18 No. 10

VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR DTC 12 RL-GND (RED)

RR-GMP (GRY)

Other Terminals No. 8

No. 10

No. 34

No. 8

No. 10

No. 28

No. 10

No. 28

No. 34

No. 8

No. 28

No. 34

FR-GND (PNK)

L

^

J

Pl-GND igry )

DTC 14 RL-GND (RED!

RR-GNP (GRYl

FR-GND (PNK)

Pt-GND (GRY)

DTC 16 1 RL-GND (RED)

RR-GND (GRY)

I [22[/L/l25l/1/l28l29|30t/|/|/|3 _ ----------(PNK)

____

FR-GND

1 ri T b FL-GND (GRY)

/R \ |

V^5/

RR-GND (GRY) G F tt V im

RL-GND (RED)

_r

1/1 8|29|30|91/I^34M>137|38|39|40|/1/1

.. ~T_

FR-GND (PNK)

FL-lSND _ _ _. _ .9 -9 (GR»Y) ^

_... _...._ ....

T erm inal side of female term inals Is there co n tin u ity?

YES-Repair a short in the wires between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the other wheel speed sensor.B NO-Go to step 6.

8. Substitute an appropriate known-good whee l speed sensor (see page 19-119). 7. Reconnect al l connectors. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Clear the DTC with the HDS, 10. Turn the ignition switch LOCK (0). 11. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more, NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 12. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D T C 12, 14, 16, o r 18 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 13. NO-Replace the origina l whee l speed sensor (see page 19-119),■ 13. Update the VSA modu l ator-control unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115). 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

DTC 2 1 ,22#23#24: Magnetic Encoder Malfunction NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the -general troub l eshooting information (see page 19-58), 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Test-drive the vehicle at 31 mph (50 km/h) or more. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D TC 21, 22, 23, o r 24 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page 19-55).H 5. I nspect the appropriate magnetic encoder for debris or cracks.

21 22

Appropriate Magnetic Encoder Right-front Left-front

23 24

Right-rear Left-rear

DTC

15. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more, NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a l ift. 16. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D TC 12, 14, 16, o r 18 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulator-contro l unit 46P connector, If the VSA modulator-contro l unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 1 9 -1 1 7 ).■ NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, troub l eshooting is comp l ete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■

Note

Remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the appropriate wheel hub bearing unit (see ge 18-14), Remove the hub bearing unit (see ge 18-37!

is the m a g n e tic e n c o d e r su rfa c e O K?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-Remove the debris from the magnetic encoder, or replace the front hub bearing unit or the rear hub bearing unit (magnetic encoder): • Front: Replace the front hub bearing unit (see page 18-14).B

• Rear: Repl ace the rear hub bearing unit (see page 18-37). 11

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 8. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have the l atest software (see page 13-115).

DTC 25: Yaw Rate Sensor Malfunction

7. Test-drive the vehic le at 31 mph (50 km/h) or more.

DTC 26; Lateral Acceleration Sensor Malfunction

NOTE: Drive the vehic l e on the road, not on a lift. 8. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

DTC 28; Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Malfunction

is D T C 21, 22, 23, o r 24 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulator-contro l unit 46P connector, If the VSA modulator-control unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA modulator-contro l unit (see page 19 -1 1 7 ).■ NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, troub l eshooting is comp l ete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■

NOTE: • These code(s) w il l set after a test drive if the sensor is installed incorrectly. • Before you troub l eshoot record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 19-58). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I). 2. Check for DTCs with the HDS, Is DTC 8 6 in d ic a te d w ith DTC 25, 26, o r 2 8 a t the sa m e tim e? YES-Do the DTC 88 troubleshooting (see page 19-37).

NO-Go to step 3. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudinal accel eration sensor {see page 19-113). 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 7. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 13 mph (30 km/h) or more, and go a distance of 985 ft (300 m) or more. 8. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D T C 25 , 26, o r 2 8 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 3.

NO-Replace the original yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudinal accel eration sensor (see page 19-113).■

3. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-116). 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (OL then turn it to ON (I I) again. 11. Test-drive the vehic le. Drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more, and go a distance of 985 ft (300 m) or more, 12. Check for DTCs with the HDS, Is D T C 25, 2 6 , o r 2 8 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulator-contro l unit 48P connector. If the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit was updated and the symptom/indication is stil l present, rep l ace the VSA modulator-contro l unit (see page 1 9 -1 1 7 ).■ N O -lf the VSA modu l ator-control unit was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.®

DTC 27; Steering Angle Sensor Malfunction NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 19-58). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D TC 8 6 in d ic a te d w ith D T C 2 7 a t the s a m e tim e? YES-Do the DTC 86 troubleshooting (see page 19-97).B NO-Go to step 3. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Substitute a known-good steering angle sensor (see page 19-112). 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization with the HDS (see page 19-114). 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again. 8. Check the DTC with the HDS. Is D TC 2 7 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 9. NO-Replace the original steering ang l e sensor (see page 19-112).■ 9. Update the VSA modulator-contro l unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115). 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (Oh then turn it to ON (II) again. 11. Check the DTC with the HDS. is DTC 2 7 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modu l ator-control unit 46P connector. If the VSA modulator-control unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-117).■ NO-lf the VSA modu l ator-control unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC 31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38: ABS Solenoid Valve Malfunction NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 13-56). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

DTC 51: M otor Lock DTC 52: M otor Stuck DTC 53: M otor Stuck NOTE; Before you troub l eshoot, record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troubleshooting information (see page 19-56). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ).

3. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again.

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS,

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

is D T C 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, o r 38 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5.

NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent fai l ures troub l eshooting (see page 19-55).B

4. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more. NOTE: Drive the vehic l e on the road, not on a lift. 5. C h e ck f o r DTCs w ith th e HDS, is D TC 51, 52, o r 53 in d ic a te d ?

5. Update the VSA modu l ator-control unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 13-115),

YES-Go to step 20.

6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again.

NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent fai l ures troubleshooting (see page 13-55).H

7. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D TC 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, o r 38 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modu l ator-control unit 46P connector. If the VSA

modu l ator-contro l unit was updated and the symptom/indication is sti ll present replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-117).■ NO-lf the VSA modu l ator-control unit was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.®

8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7, Check the No. 2 (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box. is the fu se b io w n ?

YES-Go to step 8, NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 18. 8. Disconnect the VSA modu l ator-control unit 46P connector (see step 3 on page 19-117).

9. Check for continuity between VSA modu l ator-contro l unit 46P connector terminal No. 45 and body ground. VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR

W ire side of fem ale term inals

17. Measure the vo ltage between VSA modulator-control unit 48P connector terminal No. 45 and body ground. VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR

W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s

Is there co n tin u ity ?

Is there b a tte ry voltage?

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the No. 2 (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box and the VSA modulator-contro l u n lt.il

YES-Go to step 18.

NO-lnstall a new No, 2 (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box, then go to step 10.

10. Reconnect the VSA modu l ator-control unit 46P connector. 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 2 (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box and the VSA modulator-control unit.B 18. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-contro l unit 46P connector terminal No. 46 and body ground.

VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR

12. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more, GND 1 (BLK)

NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 15. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D T C 51, 52, o r 53 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 20. W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s

NO-Troubleshooting is complete,■

18. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 48P connector (see step 3 on page 13-117).

Is there c o n tin u ity ? YES-Go to step 19.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the VSA modulator-control unit and body ground (G303).H

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 19. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector.

DTC 54: faii-safe Relay Malfunction

20. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115).

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 19-58).

21. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),

22. Test-drive the vehicle, Drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more.

2. Check the No. 12 (20 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box.

NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 23. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D T C 51, 52, o r 53 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulator-control unit 48P connector. If the VSA modulator-control unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-117)JI NO-lf the VSA modu l ator-control unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.®

is the fuse b io w n ?

YES-Go to step 3. NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 5.

3. Disconnect the VSA modu l ator-control unit 48P connector (see step 3 on page 19-117). 4. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control unit 48P connector termina l No. 44 and body ground, VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR

+ B-S O I (LT GRNJ

W ire side o f fem al e term inals

is there co n tin u ity?

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the No. 12 (20 A) fuse in the main, under-hood fuse box and the VSA modulator-contro l unit.B NO-lnstall a new No, 12 (20 A) fuse, then go to step 7.

5. Disconnect the VSA modu l ator-control unit 48P connector (see step 3 on page 19-117),

8. Measure the vo ltage between VSA modulator-contro l unit 46P connector termina l No. 44 and body ground. VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR

12. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115). 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again. 14. Check for DTCs with the HDS,' is D T C 54 in d ic a te d ?

+B-SO L {LTGRN)

W ire side o f fem al e term inals

Is there b a tte ry vo lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 12 (20 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box and the VSA modu l ator-control unit.B 7. Reconnect the VSA modu l ator-control unit 46P connector. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). 9. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again. 11. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C 54 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 12. NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent fail ures troubleshooting (see page 13-55).11

YES-Check for l oose terminals in the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector. If the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see page,19-117).■ NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.!

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC 59: BRK DlAG Signal High Voltage NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data

and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 19-56). 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Check the brake l ights without pressing the brake pedal. A re the b ra k e lig h ts o n?

YES-Replace the brake light relay.® NO-Go to step 3. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 4. Check the brake l ights without pressing the brake pedal .

9. Turn the igunition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Disconnect the adaptive cruise contro l (ACC) unit connector (see page 25-84). 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 12. Check the brake l ights without pressing the brake pedal. A re the b ra k e lig h ts o n ?

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the VSA modulator-contro l unit 46P.B NO-Replace the adaptive cruise contro l (ACC) unit (see page 25-84 ).■ 13. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Are the b ra k e lig h ts o n ?

15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

YES-Go to step 5.

18. Press the brake pedal for 3 seconds or more.

NO-Go to step 13.

17. Check for DTCs with the HDS and the TSA warning come on.

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Is D T C 59 in d ic a te d a n d TSA w a rn in g c o m e o n ?

6. Disconnect the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit 46P connector (see step 3 on page 19-117).

YES-Go to step 18.

7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

NO-Go to step 22.

8. Check the brake l ights without pressing the brake pedal . Are the b ra k e lig h ts o n?

YES• With ACC: Go to step 3. • Without ACC: Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit 46P.B

NO-Go to step 22.

18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 19. Short the SCS line with the HDS. 20. Disconnect the PCM connector A (49P) (see page 11-229).

21. Check for continuity between brake pedal position switch 4Pconnectorterminal No. 2 and PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 8. PCM COWNECIOR A |4SPf Term inal side o f fem ale te rm in a l s BKSW (LTGRN)

i 1I2I3" 4 I5 I6 I7 8 11 12 ©9 / m/I* m 20 21 22 / 24 25 X 26 27 28 1

23. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (ll) 24. Press the brake pedal for 3 seconds or more. 25. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C 59 in d ic a te d ?

■

29 30 31 3 2 |/ / / ] 3 6 37 38 39 42 43 144 [ 7 j 46 / j 4 8 |4 i ]

22. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115).

a

j 4 0(41

BKSW (LTGRN)

n

EM U BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fem ale term inals

Is there c o n tin u ity ? YES-Replace the PCM (see page 11-229).B NO-Repair an open in the wire between the PCM and the brake pedal position switch.®

YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulator-contro l unit 46P connector. If the VSA modulator-control unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 13-117).H NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC 61: Battery Voltage Low

DTC 62: Battery Voltage High

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 19-56).

NOTE: • An overcharging alternator can cause this DTC. • Before you troub l eshoot, record a ll freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 19-56).

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 3. Test-drive the vehicle at 2 mph {3 km/h) or more. 2. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 3. Test-drive the vehic l e at 2 mph (3 km/h) or more. Is DTC 81 in d ic a te d ?

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS, YES-Go to step 5. is D T C 82 in d ic a te d ?

NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent fai l ures troubleshooting (see page 19-55),11 5. Test the battery (see page 22-34), and connections (see page 22-35), Are the b a tte ry a n d b a tte ry co n n e c tio n s O K ?

YES-Check for a poor connection at all I G1 circuit connections between the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector terminal No. 40 and the under-dash fuse/relay box No. 29 (10A) fuse. If the connections are good, go to the Alternator and Regulator Circuit Troub l eshooting (see page 4 -2 6 ). ■ NO-Rep l ace or charge the battery (see page 22-94), or repair the connections.■

YES-Check for a poor connection at the battery terminals. Check for a l oose connection at G303. If the connections are good, go to the A lternator and Regulator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 4 -2 6 ).■ NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent fail ures troubleshooting (see page 19-55).■

DTC 65: Brake Fluid Level Low NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 19-56). 1. Check the brake fluid level in the master cylinder reservoir.

9. Disconnect gauge control modu l e connector B (24P) (see page 22-419). 10. Check for continuity between brake fluid level switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.

BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR

Is the b ra k e flu id le v e l O K ?

1 2

YES-Go to step 2. NO-Do the brake pad inspection; Front (see page

ORN

19-13), Rear (see page 19-25), check for brake fluid leaks or replace worn brake pads, then go to step 2, and recheck. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again. 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C 8 5 in d ic a te d ?

W ire side of fem ale term inals

Is there co n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the gauge control module and f l uid l evel s w itc h .!

YES-Go to step 6.

NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page 19-55).B

NO-Do the gauge control module self test (see page 22-335).I I

6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Disconnect the brake fluid l evel switch 2P connector (see step 3 on page 19-21). 8. On the switch side check for continuity between brake fluid l evel switch 2P connectorterminal No. 1 and No. 2 with the float in the up position (see page 19-12). BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR

Term inal side o f m al e term inals Is there c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Replace the reservoir (brake fluid l evel switch is included) on the master cylinder (see page 19-21 ) . ■ NO-Go to step 9. (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC 66: Pressure Sensor Malfunction NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troub l eshooting information {see page 13-58),

DTC 88; Brake Pedal Position Switch Malfunction

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).

NOTE; Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troubleshooting information (see page 13-56).

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again.

2. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is DTC 66 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent fai l ures troub l eshooting (see page 19-55).■ 5. Update the VSA modulator-contro l unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115).

Is D TC 86 in d ic a te d w ith D T C 68 a t the s a m e tim e?

YES-Do the DTC 88 (see page 19-97).B NO-Go to step 3. 3. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS w hi l e moving the brake pedal. D oes it in d ic a te O N w h e n the p e d a l is p re s s e d , a n d O F F w h e n the p e d a l is re le a s e d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-Go to step 7.

8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (I I) again.

4. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

7. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

5. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) for 80 seconds or more,

Is DTC 66 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulator-control unit 48P connector. If the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA modu l ator-control unit (see page 19-117).■ NO- lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicate troubleshooting.■

NOTE: Drive the vehic l e on the road, not on a lift. 6. Check for DTC- with the HDS. Is D TC 88 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 10, NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page 19-55).H 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P connector (see step 2 on page 19-8), 9. Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page 22-282). Is the s w itc h O K ?

YES-Check for fue l and emissions systems DTCs (see page 11-3), and troubleshoot those DTCs first, if no fuel and emissions systems DTCs are found troub l eshoot the brake pedal position switch signa l circuit (see page 11-280).■ NO-Replace the brake pedal position switch (see page 1 9-8).■ 10. Update the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115).

11. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) for 60 seconds or more. NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a l ift. 12. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D TC 88 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for loose termina l s in the VSA modulator-contro l unit 46P connector. If the VSA modulator-control unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA modulator-contro l unit (see page 19-117),■ NO-lf the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit was updated, troub l eshooting is comp l ete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■

DTC 69: BRK DlAG Signal Low Voltage NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 19-56). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again. 4. After the TSA warning goes off, press the brake pedal for 3 seconds or more. 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS and the TSA warning. Is D TC 69 in d ic a te d a n d the TSA w a rn in g ?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-Go to step 19. 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Remove the brake l ight relay. 8. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P connector. 9. Check for continuity between the brake pedal position switch 4P connector terminal No. 2 and the brake l ight relay 5P connector termina l No. 4. BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem al e term inals BKSW (LT GRN}

m

u

j 2 B K S W (LT GRN) BRAKE LIGHT RELAY 5P CONNECTOR Term inal side of fem ale term inals Is there co n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 10. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the brake pedal position switch and the brake l ight relay.B 10. Disconnect the VSA modulator-contro l unit 46P connector (see step 3 on page 19-117), (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 11. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator-contro l unit46P connectorterminal No. 6 and the brake light relay 5P connector terminal No. 1. VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem al e term inals

22. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 48P connector (see step 3 on page 13-117). 23. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 24. Connect the VSA modulator-control unit 48P connector termina l No. 37 to body ground with a jumper wire. VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 4SP CONNECTOR

0

BRIC LAMP (YEL) JUMPER WIRE Term inal side of fem al e term inals Is t h e r e c o n t i n u i t y ?

YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the VSA modulator-contro l unit and the brake l ight relay.® 12. Substitute a known-good brake light re l ay. 13. Reconnect all connectors. 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 15. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS. 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (OL then turn it to ON (II) again. 17. After the TSA warning goes off, press the brake pedal for 3 seconds or more. 18. Check for DTCs with the HDS and the TSA warning. Is D TC 69 in d ic a te d a n d the TSA w a rn in g c o m e on?

YES-Go to step 33,

NO-Replace the original brake l ight re la y .! 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 20. Check the No.21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. is the fuse O K?

YES-Go to step 21. NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse is blown, check for a short to body ground in the brake l ight relay c irc u it.! 21. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

W ire side of female term inals

25. Check the brake l ights without pressing the brake pedal. A re the b ra k e lig h ts on?

YES-Go to step 31.

NO-Go to step 28. 26. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 27. Remove the brake light relay.

28. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator-control un!t48Pconnectorterminal No. 37 and the brake light relay 5P connector terminal No. 3. VSA WODy LATOR-CONTIOL UNIT 4 19 CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals

32. Check for continuity between VSA modu l ator-contro l unit4BPconnectorterminal No, 8 and brake light rel ay 5P connector terminal No. 1. VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR Wire-side o f fem al e term inals

BMC LAMP {YEL}

1 2 3 4 5 I YEL BRAKE LIGHT RELAY SPCONNECTOR Terminal side of female terminals

BRAKE LIGHT RELAY 5P CONNECTOR T erm inal side o f fem ale term inals

Is there c o n tin u ity ?

Is th e m c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 33.

YES-Go to step 29.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the VSA modulator-contro l unit and the brake light r e la y .!

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the VSA

modulator-control unit and the brake light relay.!! 29. Turn the ignition switch to ON (11).

33. Update the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115).

30. Measure the voltage between brake light relay 5P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.

34. After the TSA warning goes off, press the brake pedal for 3 seconds or more. 35. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

BRAKE LIGHT RELAY §§»CONNECTOR

Is D T C 69 in d ic a te d ? YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit 46P connector. If the VSA

1 2 |3 4 5 YEL

modulator-control unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-117).B NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

Terminal side of female terminals Is th e m b a tte ry w oitoge? ' YES-Replace the brake light re la y.ll NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 21

(7J A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the brake light relay.B

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC 81: Modulator-Control Unit Internal Circuit Malfunction NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 19-58). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D TC 81 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5.

NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent fai l ures troubleshooting (see page 19-55).B

DTC 83: PGM-Fi Malfunction ■ NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the genera l troubleshooting information'(see page 19-56). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C 86 in d ic a te d w ith D TC 83 a t the sa m e tim e?

YES-Do the DTC 86 troubleshooting (see page 19-97). NO-Go to step 3. 3. Check for fuel and emissions systems DTCs with the HDS (see page 11-3). A re a n y DTCs in d ic a te d ?

YES-Do the applicable troubleshooting for the

PCM.B NO-Go to step 4,

5. Update the VSA modulator-contro l unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115).

4. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again.

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then start the engine.

7, Check for DTCs with the HDS.

6. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

Is D TC 81 in d ic a te d ?

Is D T C 88 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit 46P connector. If the VSA modulator-control unit was updated and the symptom/indication is stil l present replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-117).■

YES-Go to step 7,

NO- lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, troub l eshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

NO- l ntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent failures troub l eshooting (see page 19-55).■ 7. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115). 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then start the engine. 9. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D TC 88 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for l oose terminals in the VSA modulator-contro l unit 48P connector. If the VSA modulator-contro l unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-117).■ NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

DTC 84; VSA Sensor Neutral Position Not Written NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot, record a l l freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 19-56).

DTC 88; F-CAN Communication Malfunction NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot record a l l freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the genera l troub l eshooting information (see page 19-58). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

2. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Are a n y D TC s in d ic a te d w ith D TC 84 a t the sa m e tim e?

4. Start and run the engine for at l east 5 seconds.

YES-Troubleshoot any other DTCs fir s t■

5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

NO-Go to step 3. 3. Do the VSA sensor neutra l position memorization with the HDS (see page 19-114). 4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again. 6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C 84 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Repl ace the steering angle sensor (see page 19-112), then do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization (see page 19-114).B NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page 13-55).H

Is D TC 8 6 in d ic a te d ? YES-Go to step 6. NO-Check the COMMU PC M , COMMU GAUGE, COMMU STEERING ANGLES, and COMMU YAW RATE/G, in the VSA FREEZE DATA with the HDS. Then check for F-CAN communication lines continuity to the appropriate system or sensor and loose terminals in the appropriate system or sensor connectors.il 0. Check the COMMU PCM, COMMU GAUGE, COMMU STEERING ANGLES, and COMMU YAW RATE/G, in the VSA FREEZE DATA with the HDS. Is there c o m m u n ic a tio n e rro r in the syste m o r se n so r? YES-Go to step 7.

NO-Go to step 23. 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Short the SCS l ine with the HDS. 9. Disconnect the PCM connector A (44P) (see page 11-229). 10. Disconnect the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit 48P connector (see step 3 on page 19-117). 11. Disconnect the gauge contro l module connector A (12P) (see page 22-419). 12. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector (see page 19-112). 13. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector (see page 19-113).

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 14. Check the F-CAN communication lines for continuity between the VSA modu l ator-control unit and the appropriate system or sensor (see table). Component VSA modulator-contro l unit PCM

Gauge Control Module Steering ang l e sensor Yaw

F-CAN A L Terminal

F-CAN A H Terminal

38

39

A49 A8

A48 A12

VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR W ire side of fe m al e term inals

F-CAN A H (WHT)

r© J F-CAN A L (RED) F-CAN A H (WHT)

Rate-lateral/longitudinal

1

Acceleration Sensor VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 4SP CONNECTOR W ire side of fem al e term inals

2

4

5

STEERING ANGLE SENSOR CONNECTOR (5P) W ire side of fe m a l e term inals VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale term inals

YAW RATE>LAT£RAL/L0NG1TUDINAL ACCELERATION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) Term inal side of female te rm in a l s VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR

W ire side of fem ale term inals Is there F -C A N c o m m u n ic a tio n lin e s co n tin u ity ?

YES-

W ire side of female te rm in a l s

• If the appropriate system or sensor is the yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudinal acceleration sensor: goto step 15. • If the appropriate system or sensor is not the yaw rate-l ateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor: go to step 19. NO-Repair an open in the appropriate line.H 15. Check for l oose terminals in the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector.

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (12P) W ire side of fem al e term inals

Is the y a w rate-lateral/longitudinal a c c e le ra tio n s e n s o r 4P c o n n e c to r O K?

YES-Go to step 18. NO-Repair or reconnect the connector securely.®

18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ).

17. Measure the vo ltage between yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 4. Y A W RATE-LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR

20. Reconnect all the connectors. 21. Start and run the engine for at least 5 seconds, 22. Check for other system DTCs with the HDS. Is a n o th e r D T C in d ic a te d ? YES-Do the appropriate DTC troubleshooting.■ NO-Go to step 23. 23. Update the VSA modulator-contro l unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115). 24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

W ire side of female te rm in a l s

25. Start and run the engine for at l east 5 seconds. 26. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

Is there b a tte ry v o lta g e ? YES-Replace the yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudina l acceleration sensor (see page 13-113 ) M NO-Go to step 18. 18. Measure the voltage between yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connectorterminal No. 1 and body ground. YAW RATE-LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR

W ire side of fem ale term inals

Is there b a tte ry voltage? YES-Repair an open in the wire between the yaw rate-latera l/longitudina l acceleration sensor and body ground (G506).H NO-Repair an open in the wire between the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor and the under-dash fuse/rel ay box.B 19. Check for loose terminals in the appropriate system connectors. A re the a p p ro p ria te syste m c o n n e c to rs O K?

YES-Go to step 20. NO-Repair or reconnect the connector securely.®

Is D T C 8 6 'in d ic a te d ? YES-Check for loose termina l s in the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector. If the VSA modulator-control unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present, rep l ace the VSA modulator-contro l unit (see page 19-117).■ NO- lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub leshooting.■

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC 88: Difference in Wheel Speed

7. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

NOTE:

Is D T C 88 in d ic a te d ?

• A wheel bearing that is insta ll ed backwards can cause this DTC, • Before you troub l eshoot, record a l l freeze data and any on-board snapshot and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 19-56).

YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector. If the VSA modulator-control unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-117).B

1. Check all four tires for size, inflation, and wear.

N O -lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs

Are a ll fo u r tires the c o rre c t s ize , p ro p e rly in fla te d , a n d w o rn e v e n ly?

YES-Go to step 2. NO-lnstall the correct tires, a known-good set of tires, or set the tires to the correct pressure, and retest by test-driving. ■

2. Test-drive the vehicle. 3. Check the RIGHT-FRONT, LEFT-FRONT, RIGHT-REAR, LEFT-REAR WHEEL SPEED in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS. Are a ll fo u r the sa m e in d ic a te d value? YES-Go to step 4. NO-Reinstall or replace the wheel speed sensor(s) (see page 13-113), and retest by test-dri ving.B

4. Check all magnetic encoders on the hub bearing units for debris or cracks: Front (see page 18-14), rear (see page 18-37), A re th e y in s ta lle d c o rre c tly a n d in g o o d c o n d itio n ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-Clean and reinstall or replace the hub bearing unit(s), and retest by test-driving: • Front: Reinstall or replace the front hub bearing unit (see page 1 8 -1 4 ).■ • Rear: Reinstall or replace the rear hub bearing unit (see page 18-37),11 5. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115). 6. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more. NOTE: Drive the vehicle on a straight section of road, not on a lift.

troubleshooting.!!

DTC 91: VSA Activation Time Too Long NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 19-56). 1. Check the brake system for l eaks or mechanical problems.

DTC 113: Yaw Rate-Acceleration Sensor Power Source Malfunction NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record a ll freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 19-58). 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Is the b ra k e syste m O K ? (No b ra k e flu id le a ka ge , n o a ir tra p p e d in the b ra k e system , n o b ra k e p a d s w o rn o u t )

2. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal accel eration sensor 4P connector (see page 19-113).

YES-Go to step 2.

3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

NO-Repair the brake system, then recheck.B

4. Measure the voltage between body ground and yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector terminal No. 1.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 3. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS. 4. Test-drive the vehicle in a straight l ine. Accelerate the vehicle up to 6 mph (10 km/h), and stop, then accelerate up to 6 mph (10 km/h).

Y A H RATE-LATEiAL/LO NG iTUDiNAL ACCELERATION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR

5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C 91 in d ic a te d ? YES-Go to step 6. NO- lf any DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting. If DTCs are not indicated, intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page 19-55).B 8. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115). 7. Test-drive the vehicle in a straight line. Accelerate the vehicle up to 6 mph (10 km/h), and stop, then accelerate up to 6 mph (10 km/h). NOTE: Drive the vehic l e on the road, not on a lift. 8. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C 91 in d ic a te d ? YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modu l ator-control unit 48P connector. If the VSA modulator-control unit was updated and the symptom/indication is stil l present, rep l ace the VSA modu l ator-control unit (see page 19-117).■ NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

W ire side o f fem ale term inals

Is there b a tte ry vo lta g e ? YES-Repl ace the yaw rate-latera l/longitudinal accel eration sensor (see page 19-113).■ NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 29 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the yaw rate-latera l/ l ongitudinal acceleration sensor.B

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC 121,122,123,124: VSA Solenoid Valve Malfunction NOTE: Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 19-56), 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again, 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is DTC 121 , 122f 123f o r 124 in d ic a te d ? YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent failures troub l eshooting (see page 19-55).B 5. Update the VSA modu l ator-control unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115). 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again. 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D T C 121t 122f 123, o r 124 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for l oose terminals in the VSA modulator-control unit 48P connector. If the VSA modulator-contro l unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA modulator-contro l unit (see page 1 9 -1 1 7 ).■ NO-lf the VSA modulator-contro l unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go'to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting,■

DTC 131: Yaw Rate Sensor Malfunction NOTE: • Driving on an extreme l y angled road can cause this DTC, • Before you troub l eshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the genera l troubleshooting information (see page 19-58). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is DTC 91 in d ic a te d w ith D T C 131 a t the sa m e tim e? YES-Do the DTC 91 troubleshooting (see page

19-101).■ NO-Go to step 3. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Check that the yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudinal acceleration sensor is properly mounted (see page 19-113). Is the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal a c c e le ra tio n se n s o r in s ta lla tio n O K ? YES-Go to step 5. NO-Reinstall the yaw rate-latera l/ l ongitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-113), and retest by test-driving.■

5. Put the vehicle on a l eve l surface. 8. Turn, the ignition switch to ON (II ). 7. Check the YAW RATE SENSOR in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS. Is the YA W R A T E 0 ° ± 5 °/s? YES-Go to step 8. NO-Replace the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-113).■ 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 9. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of comers. NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 10. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D T C 131 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 11. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent failures troub l eshooting (see page 19-55).HI

11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 12. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudinal accel eration sensor (see page 19-113). 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). 14. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 16. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners. NOTE: Drive the vehic l e on the road, not on a lift. 16. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 1$ D T C 131 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 17. NO-Replace the original yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudinal accel eration sensor (see page 19-113).■

DTC 132; Lateral Acceleration Sensor Malfunction DTC 133; Lateral Acceleration Sensor Malfunction (Installation Error) DTC 135; Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Malfunction . DTC 136: Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Malfunction'(Installation Error) NOTE: • Driving on an extremely angled road can cause this DTC. • Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 19-58).

17. Update the VSA modulator-contro l unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 13-115).

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

18. Test-drive the vehic l e around a number of corners.

2. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a l ift. 19. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

Is D TC 91 in d ic a te d w ith DTC 1 3 2 , 1 3 3 , 1 3 5 , o r 13 6 a t the sa m e tim e? YES-Do the DTC 91 troub l eshooting (see page

is D T C 131 in d ic a te d ?

19-101 ) . ■

YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modu l ator-control unit 46P connector. If the VSA modulator-contro l unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present, rep l ace the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-117).■

NO-Go to step 3.

NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Check that the yaw rate-l ate ra I/I o ng it ud i na I acceleration sensor is proper ly mounted (see page 19-113). Is the y a w rate-lateral/longitudinal a c c e le ra tio n s e n s o r in sta lla tio n O K? YES-Go to step 5. NO-Reinstall the yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-113), and retest by test-driving.■

5. Put the vehicle on a level surface. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Check the LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR and LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION SENSOR in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS. IsO ± 1 m/s indicated ? YES-Go to step 8. NO-Replace the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-113).■ (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

DTC 134: Steering Angle Sensor Malfunction

9. Test-drive the vehic l e around a number of corners.

NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 19-58),

10. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D T C 132, 133, 135, o r 138 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 11. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent fai l ures troubleshooting (see page 19-55),B 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 12. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudina l acceleration sensor (see page 13-113), 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Cl ear the DTC with the HDS, 15. Test-drive the vehic l e around a number of corners. NOTE; Drive the vehic l e on the road, not on a lift, 18. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D T C 132, 133, 135, o r 138 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 17, NO-Replace the origina l yaw rate-latera l/longitudina l accel eration sensor (see page 19-113).■

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Check for DTCs with the HDS, is D TC 91 in d ic a te d w ith DTC 134 a t the sa m e tim e?

YES-Do the DTC 31 troub l eshooting (see page 19-101).■ NO-Go to step 3, 3. Put the vehicle on a l evel surface, and center the steering wheel spokes. 4. Check STEERING ANGLE in the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS. With the fro n t w h e e ls in the s tra ig h t a h e a d po sitio n, is STEER ING A N G L E 0 " + 5 ' ' ?

YES-Go to step 5, NO-Check the installation of the steering angle sensor (see page 19-112). If installation is good, do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization (see page 13-114).11 5. Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-5).

17. Update the VSA modulator-contro l unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115),

is the w h e e l a lig n m e n t w ithin the s p e c ific a tio n ?

18. Test-drive the vehic l e around a number of corners.

NO-Make sure the suspension is not modified, adjust the whee l alignment correctly, then go to step 6.

NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 19. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D T C 132, 133, 135, o r 138 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit 46P connector. If the VSA modulator-contro l unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA modulator-contro l unit (see page 19-117).■ NO-lf the VSA modulator-contro l unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting,■

YES-Go to step 8.

8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Clear the DTCs with the HDS, 8. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners, NOTE: Drive the vehic l e on the road, not on a l ift. 9. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D TC 134 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 10. NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Refer to intermittent fai l ures troubleshooting (see page 19-55).H 10. Update the VSA modulator-contro l unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115). 11. Test-drive the vehic l e around a number of corners, NOTE: Drive the vehic l e on the road, not on a lift.

12. Check for DTCs with the HDS, is D T C 134 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector. If the VSA

modu l ator-control unit was updated and the symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 13-117).H N O-lf the VSA modulator-contro l unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troub l eshooting.■

DTC 137: Pressure Sensor Offset Malfunction NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 13-56). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P connector (see step 2 on page 19-6), 3. Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page 22-282). Is the s w itc h O K?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-Replace the brake pedal position switch (see page 19-6).H 4. Short the SCS line with the HDS. 5. Disconnect the PCM connector A (49P). 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Measure the voltage between PCM connector A (49P) termina l No, 8 and body ground. PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) BKSW (LTGRN)

lr= il

T erm inal side of female term inals is th e m 0.1 V o r m ore w h e n the b ra k e p e d a l is re le a s e d ?

YES-Repair a' short to power in the wire between the brake pedal position switch and the PCM.B NO-Go to step 8.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 9. Reconnect all connectors.

DTC 138: Brake Pedal Position Switch Malfunction

10. Update the PCM if it does not have the l atest software (see page 11 -227), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8),

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record al l freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troub l eshooting information (see page 19-56).

11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

12. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

2. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

13. Test-drive the vehic l e at 8 mph (12 km/h) for 80 seconds or more. NOTE: Drive the vehic l e on the road, not on a l ift. 14. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

is D TC 88 in d ic a te d w ith D TC 138 a t the sa m e tim e?

YES-Do the DTC 88 troubleshooting (see page 19-97).I

NO-Go'to step 3,

is D TC 137 in d ic a te d ?

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

YES-Check for loose terminals in the PCM connector A (49P). If the PCM was updated, substitute a knowngood PCM (see page 11-8), then retest. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 15.

4. Check the No. 11 (15 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box.

NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-229).■ 15. Update the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit if it does not have the latest software (see page 19-115), 18, Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 8 mph (12 km/h) for 60 seconds or more, around a number of corners.

is the fuse b lo w n ?

YES-Repl ace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse is blown, check for a short to body ground in this fuse circuit. NO—Reinstal l the checked fuse, then go to step 5. 5. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P connector (see step 2 on page 19-8). 8. Measure the voltage between brake pedal position switch 4P connector termina l No. 1 and body ground,

NOTE; Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift, 17. Check for DTCs with the HDS,

BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR WHT r“ i 1 2

is D TC 137 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for loose termina l s in the VSA modulator-control unit 48P connector. If the VSA modulator-control unit was updated and the symptom/indication is stil l present, rep l ace the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 1 9-11 7).■ NO- lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

3 >
: Clip, 3 F £> ; Hook,

12

7. Install the cover in the reverse order of remova l , and note these items: • If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones. • Push the clips and the hooks into place securely. 3. Release the windshield washer tube (C) from the hooks (D). 4. If necessary, remove the hood rear sea l (E) from a ll of the hooks (F).

him* A-Pillar Comer Trim Replacement Special Tools Required KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014# • Available through the Acura Tool and Equipment Program, 888-424-6867 NOTE: • Take care not to scratch the trim or the body. • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when removing components. 1. Open the front door. 2. Using a trim too l , detach the bottom clip of the A-pillar corner trim (A). Fastener Location

3. Gently slide the A-pillar corner trim (A) up along the A-pillar to re l ease it from the clips. Fastener Locations

A-Pillar Corner Trim Replacement (cont'd)

Roof Rail Replacement

5. If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.

Special Tools Required KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014#

6. I nstall the cl ips (A) on the A-pillar corner trim (B).

• Available through the Acura Tool and Equipment Program, 888-424-6857

For Some Models NOTE: • Take care not to scratch the covers, the roof rail or the body. • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when removing components. • When using a f l at-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. 1, Pry up on the front cover (A) with a trim tool to detach the clips and the rib (B) from the front bracket (CL then remove the cover by pulling the cover forward. 7. Hold the A-pillar corner trim (A) up, and fit the clips into the holes in the body, then push on the trim until the clips snap into p l ace securel y. Fastener Locations

Fastener Locations

3

2. Pry up on the rear cover (A) with a trim tool to detach the clips from the rear bracket (B), then remove the cover by pulling the cover rearward. fastener Locations ; Clip, 2 (Black)

3. Remove the roof rail (A) and the center bracket (B). -1. Using a trim tool, pry the notch (C), then remove the roof rail bar cap (D). -2. Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the nuts (E) from the front bracket (F) and the rear bracket (G). -3. Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the bolts (H), then remove the roof rail. -4. Remove the center cover (I), and using a TORX T30 bit, remove the nuts (J), then remove the center bracket. Fastener Locations E , J § : TORX Nut, 6

H►

: TORX Bolt, 2

4, Instal l the roof rail in the reverse order of remova l , and note these items: • If the cl ips are damaged or stress-whitened, repl ace them with new ones. • Push the clips into pl ace securely.

Roof Molding Replacement Special Tools Required KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* • Available through the Acura Too l and Equipment Program, 888-424-8857

M olding Remowa! MOTE: • Put on g l oves to protect your hands. • Take care not to damage the windshield. • Do not use any metall ic tools to remove the windshield area of the roof molding, or you may chip the edge of the windshield and some cracks in the windshield w il l occur, • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim too l set to avoid damage when removing components. • Take care not to bend the roof molding. 1. For some models: Remove the roof rail (see page 20 - 220 ),

2. Detach the bottom clip (A) at the lower corner of the windshield. Fastener Location

A t> ; Clip, 1

(Left: Yellow, Right: Pink)

3. Remove the windshield area of the roof molding (A). -1. Carefully insert the large trim too l (B) and plastic spatu l a (C) in under the molding next to the lower clip (D). -2. W hi l e pu l ling the clip area of the molding up by hand, push each of the eight small hook (E) in numbered sequence shown to release the cl ip from the clip (F) on the A-pillar. Do not try to pry up the clip if it is hard to release from the clip on the A-pil lar. -3. Gradua l ly work your way up to release each of the upper clips (G, H, I). Fastener Locations D0 G [> H [> I O

: Clip (Blue) : Clip (Green) : Clip (Yellow) : Clip (Orange) J 7 mm _ _ L l (0,28 in) —..— * \ 1 mm

I (0.039 in)

4. Start from the front to the rear, careful ly insert a trim tool in under the roof molding(s) (A) next to each of the c l ips (B), and pry the molding(s) up to release it with the clip from the stud bolt on the body, then remove the roof area of the molding(s). Without roof rail Fastener Locations

fastener Locations

5. If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.

M o ld in g In s ta lla tio n 1. Instal l the cl ips (A, B, C, D, E, f ) on the roof molding(s) (G).

Without roof rail

Roof Molding Replacement (cont'd) 2. Install the roof molding(s) (A).

■

-1, Hold the roof molding(s) up on the roof, and align each clip to the stud bolts. -2. From the rear to the front, fit the cl ips (B) to the stud bolts (C), then push on the molding until they snap into place. -3. From the top to the bottom, push the c l ips (D) in the windshield area of the roof molding until they snap into place to the clip (E) on the A-pillar. -4. Push the bottom clip (F) to the front fender into place. -5. Set the hook (G) of the hood hinge cover (H).

B o d f Side Clip Replacem ent 1. Gradually scrape off the adhesive tape (A) under the cl ips (B) whi l e heating it with a heat gun to 2 1 2 -2 4 8 °F {1 0 0 -1 2 0 °C). NOTE; • To prevent damage, do not heat the painted surface around the clips too much, • To keep the exterior resin parts near the A-pillar from being overheated by the heat gun, wrap them with aluminum foil.

Without roof rail

2. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface. 3. Install the clips (A), -1. Peel the adhesive backing away from the clips. -2. Line up the clips with the a l ignment marks (B) on the body, and attach the clips with adhesive tape

With roof rail

(C). -3. Apply two-part epoxy adhesive (D) around the edge of the clips as shown. Adhesive tape:

G 3. Push the clip areas into place securely and reinstall the roof rail (see page 20-220), if equipped.

Thickness 1 mm {§.©4 in) Width i mm (0.32 in)

Side Sill Panel Replacement Special Tools Required KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* *Available through the Acura Tool and Equipment Program, 888-424-6857 NOTE: • Take care not to scratch the body. • When prying with a flat-trip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. 1. Open the front door and rear door. 2. Remove the side sill panel (A). Remove the screws (B), then remove the splash guard (C). Remove the screw (D) fastening the rear inner fender (E) and the rear strake (F). Remove the clips (G) Use the trim tool to pry out the front clip (H), then rel ease the front of the side sill panel from the body. Whil e pull ing the front area of the side sill panel away from the body, slide the panel forward and remove it. The side clips (ll will stay in the body. -6. Remove the side clips by turning them 45 °. -1.

-2. -3, -4. -5.

Fastener Locations B ► : Screw D► Left, 5 Right, 4

: Screw,

1

G|> : Clip, 3

H | > ; Clip, 1

I [>•' Clip, 11

Left

D

F 3. If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones. 4. Instal l the side cl ips on the side sill panel. 5. Hold the panel up, and fit the front cl ip and al l the side cl ips into the holes in the body, then push on the panel until the side clips snap into place. 6. Reinstall the front inner fender and front spl ash guard.

Rear Door Protection Tape Replacement

Tailgate Spoiler Trim Replacement

1. Slow l y peel up the old rear door protection tape.

NOTE: Take care not to scratch the tailgate or the body,

2. Clean the door bonding surface with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface.

1. Open the tailgate. Disconnect the rear window washer tube (A). Remove the radio antenna connector grommet (B) from the tailgate, and disconnect the radio antenna connector (C).

3. Peel the adhesive backing from the rear door protection tape.

B

4. Align the rear door protection tape (A) with the edge of the door (B), then press the tape into place.

2. Remove the access cap (A) from the tailgate, and remove the nuts and the bo l ts securing the tai l gate spoil er trim, Fastener Locations •

; Nut, 3

► : Bolt 2

5. Remove the application backing (C).

mm

x 1.0 3.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)

8

1 1 -1 2 model: 5 x 0.8 mm 3.3 N-m (0.39 kgf-m, 2 .8 ibf-ft)

3. Gently close the tailgate, and l ift up on the tailgate spoiler trim (A) to detach the clips. Fastener Locations

4. Remove the high mount brake l ight connector grommet (B) from the tailgate, and disconnect the high mount brake l ight connector (C), then remove the tailgate spoiler trim,

5. If necessary, remove damaged spacer (A) and damaged pad rubbers (B, C) from the tail gate spoiler trim (D). Clean the trim surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol, then attach new parts to the trim.

6. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: • Make sure the radio antenna connector and the high mount brake l ight connector are plugged in properly and the rear window washer tube is connected properly. • Make sure the radio antenna connector grommet and the high mount brake l ight connector grommet are installed securely. • If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones. • Push the clips into place securely.

Rear License Trim Replacement NOTE: • Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Take care not to scratch the tailgate. 1. Remove the tail gate lower trim panel (see page 20-93),

4. Remove the screws, and release both ends of the rear license trim (A) from the inner taillights (B), then remove the trim. Pul l the rearview camera harness (C) out. Fastener Locations

2. From inside the tail gate, disconnect the rearview camera connector (A).

5. Remove the screw grommets (A) from the tail gate. 3. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rearview camera cover (B).

NOTE: • If the screw grommets cracked excessivel y, replace them with new ones. • If the screw grommets are damaged or stress-whitened, repl ace them with new ones. • If a new rear license trim w i l l be install ed, remove a l l of remaining screw grommets on the tailgate and discard them. The screw grommets have been installed to the new rear license trim with screws.

Rear Gutter Cover Replacement 8. Instal l the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: • Make sure the rearview camera connector is plugged in properly. • If a new rear license trim assembly (A) is to be installed, hold the trim up, and fit a l l the screw grommets (B) into the ho l es in the tailgate, then push on the trim until the grommets snap into place. New rear license trim installation

Special Tools Required KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2Q14* ^Available through the Acura Too l and Equipment Program, 888-424-6857 NOTE: • Use the appropriate too l from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when removing components. • Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Open the tailgate. 2. Separate the double-sided adhesive tape (A), and use a trim tool to detach the clip (B) and the pins (C) of the rear gutter cover (D).

3. If the cl ip and the grommets (E, F) are damaged or stress-whitened, repl ace them with new ones.

Rear Gutter Cover Replacement (cont'd) 4. I nstal l the rear gutter cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: • Scrape off the remaining double-sided adhesive tape from the cover and body, then clean the cover and body surface with a sponge dampened In isopropyl alcohol. • Apply new adhesive tape (A) to the rear gutter cover (B). • Push the adhesive areas, the cl ips and the pins into place securel y. Adhesive tape:

Rear Bumper Molding Replacement NOTE: • Put on gloves to prevent damage, • Take care not to scratch the rear bumper. 1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-196). 2. Remove the rear bumper skid trim (see page 20-198). 3. Remove the screws and detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear bumper molding (B).

Thickness 1.5 mm (0.06 in) Width 12 min (§.47 in) Length 50 mm (2 J in)

4. Install the molding in the reverse order of remova l , and push the hooks into pl ace securely.

[jlJJ : Emblem/Sticker Replacement NOTE: When removing the emblems, take care not to scratch the body. 1. To remove the front "A" emb l em, remove the front grille (see page 20-217). 2. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in isopropyl a l cohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface. 3. App l y the emb l ems where shown. • ACURA/MDX emblems: Remove the adhesive backing. Put the ACURA/MDX emblems with the application guide foam on the tailgate as shown, then press the emblem into place. Remove the film and application guide foam. • When instal ling the ULEV sticker on the inside surface of the l eft quarter glass, a l ign the sticker with the edge of the black ceramic as shown, then press the sticker into p l ace, and remove the application tape. FRONT "A" EMBLEM

Unit: mm (in) Adhesive tape: Thickness 0 .8 mm (0.03 in)

t r im

PANEL

ADHESIVE TAPE

ACURA EMBLEM

Front Inner Fender Replacement NOTE: • Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Take care not to scratch the body. • When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. 1. Remove the front Inner fender (A). -1. On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B), then remove the splash guard (C). -2. From under the front bumper (D), remove the bolt (E) and the clips (F) securing the front bumper and the front inner fender, -3. From the wheel arch, remove the screw (G) securing the front bumper. -4. From the wheel arch, remove the cl ip (H) securing the front splash shield (I ) and the front inner fender, and remove the clips (J) securing the front inner fender on the body. -5. Pull out the front inner fender.

B ,G ^ : Screw Left, 6

E ^ : Bolt, 1

P#H S>: Clip, 3

Jt>

:

Clip, 7

Right 5

Cij)n3B>

s5S| |

2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: • I f the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones. • Push the cl ips into p l ace securely.

Splash Shield Replacement NOTE: • Put on g l oves to protect your hands. • Take care not to scratch the body. • When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. 1, Remove the splash shiel d (A). -1. Remove the cl ips (B) that secure the front inner fender (C) and the splash shield. -2, From under the front bumper (D), remove the clips (E). -3. From under the body, remove the clips (F) that secure the front undercover (G) and the splash shiel d, and remove the clips (H) that secure the splash shiel d on the front suspension subframe (i). -4. Pull the splash shield out. Fastener Locations B ,E > :C lip ,7 F t > : Clip#2

H t> : Clip, 4

•t

2. Install the splash shield in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: • If the c l ips are damaged or stress-whitened, rep l ace them with new ones. • Push the clips into place securel y.

Front Undercover Replacement

Front Strake Replacement

NOTE:

NOTE; Take care not to scratch the body.

• Put on g l oves to protect your hands. '.... ce care not to scratch the body. • When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. 1. Remove the bolts (A), and the cl ips (B), then remove the front undercover (C) from the splash shiel d (D), the front suspension subframe (E), and the front subframe stiffener (F).

1. Remove the bo l ts, then remove the front strake (A) from the front inner fender (B). Fastener Locations ►

; Bolt, 3

Fastener Locations

6 x 1.0 mm 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)

2. Install the strake in the reverse order of removal.

6 x 1.0 mm 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)

2. Instal l the undercover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: • If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones. • Push the clips into place securely.

Front Fender Fairing Replacement

Left Front Splash Guard Reinforcement Replacement

NOTE:

NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body.

• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the front inner fender as needed (see page 20-232). 2. Pul l out and remove the front fender fairing (A).

1. Remove these items: • Left front inner fender, as needed (see page 20-232) • Left side sill pane l (see page 20-225) 2. Remove the bolts, then remove the left front splash guard reinforcement (A). Fastener Locations

3. Instal l the fender fairing in the reverse order of removal.

10 x 1.25 mm 38 N-m (3.9 kgf-m, 28 Ibf-ft)

3, Install the reinforcement In the reverse order of removal.

Rear Inner Fender Replacement NOTE:

Right

• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Take care not to scratch the body or the related parts. • When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage.

Fastener Locations B, D ►

: Screw, 3

E►

: Screw, 2

F f> : Clip, 1

1, Remove the rear inner fender cover (A), -1, Remove the screw (B) that secure the fender cover and the rear strake (C) from the front of the rear whee l arch. -2. Remove the screws (D, E) and the clip (F) that secure the rear bumper (G) and the fender cover from the rear of the rear whee l arch, -3. Remove the bolts (H) and the clip(s) (I) from the rear whee l arch. -4. Pull out the rear inner fender cover. Left

H ► : Bolt, 7

| [>: Cl ip, 1

Fastener Locations B, D ►

H►

: Screw, 3

: Bolt

6

E►

: Screw, 2

F [> : Clip, 1

I |> * Clip, 2

= *= #

2. Install the fender cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: • If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones. • Push the clips into pl ace securel y.

Rear Strake Replacement

Rear Air Outlet Replacement

NOTE; When prying with a f l at-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage.

NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body.

1. Remove the screw (A) and the clips (B), then remove the rear strake (C) from the rear inner fender cover (D) and the side sil l panel (E).

1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-198). 2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air outlet (B).

Fastener Locations A ► : Screw, 1

B [>: Clip, 2

4

3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook areas until the hooks snap into place.

2. Install the strake in the reverse order of removal, and note these items; • If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, repl ace them with new ones. • Push the clips into place securely.

Spare Tire Hoist Replacement

Spare Tire Support Bracket Replacement

NOTE: Take care not to bend the cabl e.

Spare Tire Support Bracket Torque

1. Remove the spare tire.

Fastener Locations

2. Remove the bolts, then remove the spare tire hoist

(A). Fastener Locations

x 1 .® mm SJ N'm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft) 8

8 x 1.25 mm 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 ibf-ft)

3. Instal l the hoist in the reverse order of removal.

Rear Wheelwell Gusset Replacement

Cargo Lid Support Replacement

NOTE:

NOTE:

• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Take care not to scratch the body or the related parts.

• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Take care not to scratch the body or the related parts.

1. Remove these items; • Rear side trim panel (see page 20-88)

1. Remove these items: • Rear side trim panel , both sides (see page 20-88)

• Third row seat (see page 20-184) 2. Pull the carpet back as needed. 3. Remove the rear wheelwell gusset (A). -1. Remove the ground bolt (B) and release the harness cl ip (C), -2, Remove the bolts (D). -3. From outside the vehicl e, remove the nuts.

: Bolt,

1

D►

2. Remove the cl ips fastening the rear differentia l breather box (see page 15-69). 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the cargo l id support (A).

Fastener Locations B►

• Rear side trim panel support bracket (see step 11 on page 20-91) • Cargo rear trim pane l (see page 20-87) • XM receiver (see page 23-133) • Active damper control unit (see page 18-116)

; Bolt 2

# : Nut, 4

iifjH (Q

9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)

4. Install the gusset in the reverse order of remova l .

Fastener Locations

Subframe Replacement Special Tools Required Subframe Alignment Pin 070AG-SJAA1 OS

Front Subframe Torque After removing the subframe mounting bo lts and the front subframe stiffener mounting bolts, be sure to rep l ace them with new ones.

kgf-m, 44 Ibf-ft) Replace. {B M

Front Subframe Alignment NOTE: • Loosely instal l new front subframe mounting bolts, then tighten’the bol ts to the specified torque in the sequence shown. • After mounting the subframe and brackets loosely, a l ign all of the positioning holes in the subframe, in the subframe front bracket, and in the body using a alignment pin as a guide, then tighten the bolts. • After reinstall ing all removed parts, check and adjust the front wheel alignment (see page 18-6). SUBFRAME "POSITIONING HOLE (Body side)

‘ POSITIONING HOLE (Subframe side)

FRONT SUSPENSION SUBFRAME REAR BRACKET SUBFRAME ALIGNMENT

POSITIONING HOLE (Bracket side)

FRONT SUSPENSION

SUBFRAME FRONT BRACKET

(cont'd)

Subframe Replacement (cont'd) Rear Subframe Torque NOTE: • When installing, align both installation reference ho l es In the subframe with the reference ho l es in the body using a screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide. • After removing the subframe mounting bo l ts, be sure to replace them with new ones.

Reference hole alignment

Frame Repair Chart Top View

Unit: mm fin)

a

For bumper beam mount 011 (0.43)

0 : Inner

b1

For front subframe mount 015 (0.59) forward

b2

For front subframe mount 015 (0.59) rearward

diameter

c

For engine side mount 013 (0.51)

d

Front damper center hole 0 8 ® (3.15)

e

Side frame gusset locating hole 028 ( 1. 1)

CENTER UNE

E tn

f

For propeller shaft mount 012 (©.47)

j

Rear frame locating hole 023 (0.91) forward

g1

For fuel tank mount 015 (0.53) left side forward

k1

For rear subframe mount 0 I 6 (0.63) forward

g2

For fuel tank mount 015 (0.53) right side forward

k2

For rear subframe mount 0 I 6 (0.63) rearward

g3

For fuel tank mount 015 (0.59)right side rearward

I

For rear damper mount center

g4

For fuel tank mount 01 5 (0.59) left side rearward

m

Lower arm stopper bracket locating hole 01 1 (0.43)

hi

For trailing arm mount 017 (0.67) outside

n

Rear frame locating hole 025 (0.98) rearward

h2

For trailing arm mount 017 (0.67) center side

o

For spare tire hoist mount 09 (0.35) forward

i

Floor frame extension locating hole 025 (0.98)

p

For spare tire hoist mount 09 (0.35) rearward

(cont'd)

Frame Repair Chart (cont'd) Side View

Unit: mm fin) 0 : Inner

diameter

a

For bumper beam mount 011 (0.43)

bl

For front subframe mount 015 (0.59) forward

b2

For front subframe mount 015 (0.59) rearward

c

For engine side mount 013 (©,51)

d

Front damper center hole 0 8 © (3.15)

e

Side frame gusset locating hole 028 (1.1) 132 (5.20)

l

f

For propeller shaft m ou n t 012 (0.47)

j

Rear frame ocating hole 023 (0.91) forward

g1

For fuel ta n k m ou n t 015 (0.59) le ft side fo rw a rd

k1

For rear subframe mount 0 I 6 (0.63) forward For rear subframe mount 0 I 6 (0.63) rearward

g2

For fuel ta n k m ou n t 015 (0.59) rig h t side fo rw a rd

k2

g3

For fuel tank m ou n t 015 (0.59)right side rearward

I

For rear damper mount center

g4

For fuel tank mount 015 (0.59) eft side rearward

m

Lower arm stopper bracket locating hole 0 1 1 (0.43)

hi

For trailing arm mount 017 (0.67) outside

n

Rear frame locating hole 025 (0.98) rearward

h2

For trailing arm mount 017 (0.67) center side

i

Floor frame extension locating hole 025 (0.98)

l

637 (25.1)

14(0.55) hole

BASE LINE CENTER LINE

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If HVAC maintenance is required) The Acura MDX SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a front passenger's airbag in the dashboard above the glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, side curtain airbags in the sides of the roof, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safe ly service the SRS is included in this Service Manual. Items marked with an asterisk (*) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items requires special precautions and tools, and should be done by an authorized Acura dealer. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could l ead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal or side collision, a l l SRS service work should be done by an authorized Acura dealer. • Improper service procedures, incl uding incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury caused by unintentiona l dep l oyment of the airbags, side airbags, side curtain airbags, and/or seat belt tensioners. • Do not bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, or rear safing sensor, especiall y when the ignition switch is in ON (I I), or for at l east 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0); otherwise, the system may fail in a co ll ision, or the airbags may deploy. • SRS e l ectrical connectors are identified by yell ow color coding. Rel ated components are l ocated in the steering column, center console, dashboard, dashboard lower cover, in the dashboard above the g l ove box, in the front seats, in the roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.

Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning) Special T o o ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2

C lim ate Control Com ponent Location I n d e x . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3 A/C Service Tips and Precautions. . . . . . 21-6 A/C System Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-6 Genera l Troubleshooting I nform ation . 21-8 DTC T roub l eshooting In de x. . . . . . . . . . . 21-15 Sym ptom T roub l eshooting In d e x. . . . . 21-17 System D escription. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13 Circuit D iagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-30 DTC Tro u blesh oo ting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-34 Rear Mode Control M otor Circuit T ro u blesh oo ting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-88 Climate Control Unit Power and Ground Circuit Troub l eshooting . . . . . 21-90 Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting . . . . . . 21-91 A 1C Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit T ro u blesh oo ting .................................. 21-94 A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit T ro u blesh oo ting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-36 Navigation Com munication Line Circuit T ro u blesh oo ting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-98 Humidity/ln-Car Temperature Sensor T e s t. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-100 Outside A ir Temperature Sensor T e s t.. 21-101 Sunlight Sensor T e s t. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-102 Front Power Transistor T e st. . . . . . . . . . . 21-102 Driver's A ir M ix Control M otor T e s t. . . . 21-103 Passenger's A ir M ix Control M otor T e s t. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-104 Front Mode Control M otor T e s t. . . . . . . 21-105 Recirculation Control M otor T e s t. . . . . . 21-106 Front Evaporator Temperature Sensor T e s t. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-108 A/C Compressor Clutch Check. . . . . . . . 21-107 Refrigerant Leak C heck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-108 A/C System Noise C heck. . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-112 A/C System T e st. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-114 A/C Condenser Rep l acem ent. . . . . . . . . . 21-120 Receiver/Dryer Desiccant Rep l acem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-122 A/C Compressor Rep l acem ent. . . . . . . . 21-122 A/C Compressor Clutch O verhaul. . . . . 21-124 A/C Compressor Relief Valve Replacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-125 A/C Refrigerant Oi l R eplacem ent. . . . . . 21-128 Front A/C Line R e p la c e m e n t.......... 21-127

Dust and Poll en Filter Replacem ent. . . . B l ower Unit "Removal/I nsta l l ation . . . . . . B l ow er Unit Com ponent Repl acem ent. Front Expansion Valve Replacem ent. . . Front Evaporator Core Rep l acem ent. . . * Heater Unit/Core Replacem ent. . . . . . . . Driver's A ir M ix Control M otor Replacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passenger's A ir M ix C ontro l M otor R eplacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Mode Control M otor R eplacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recirculation Control M otor R eplacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hum idity/ln-Car Temperature Sensor R eplacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside A ir Temperature Sensor R eplacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun l ight Sensor Replacem ent. . . . . . . . . Front Evaporator Temperature Sensor R eplacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climate C ontro l Unit Removal/I nsta l l a tio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refrigerant R ecovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Evacuation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System C harging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21-128 21-128 21-130 21-130 21-131 21-132 21-135 21-135 21-138 21-136 21-137 21-138 21-138 21-139 21-133 21-140 21-140 21-141

Rear Climate Control

*

* * * * * * * *

Component Location In d e x . . . . . . . . . . . System D escription. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Power Transistor T e s t. . . . . . . . . . . Rear A ir M ix C ontro l M otor T e s t.... . . . . Rear Mode Contro l M otor T e s t. . . . . . . . Rear Evaporator Temperature Sensor T e s t. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear A/C Line R eplacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . Rear Heater Line Replacem ent. . . . . . . . Rear HVAC Unit R em oval/Installation.. Rear HVAC Unit Component Rep l acem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Heater Core Replacem ent. . . . . . . . Rear Blower M otor Rep l a cem ent. . . . . . Rear A ir M ix Control M otor Replacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Mode Contro l M otor R eplacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Evaporator Tem perature Sensor Replacem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Climate Control Panel Removal/Instal l a tio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21-143 21-144 21-145 21-146 21-147 21-147 21-148 21-149 21-160 21-152 21-154 21-155 21-155 21-158 21-158 21-157

B

_

|

H V A C

( H e a t in g , V e n t ila t io n ,

a n d

A ir

C o n d itio n in g )

Special Tools Ref.NO. © ©

Tool Number 07AAF-OO0A150 07SAZ-001000A

©

Description A/C Compressor Kit Backprobe Set

©

Qty 1 2

•

Component Location Index

SERVICE VALVE

Clutch Check, page 21-107 Clutch Overhaul, page 21-124 Relief Valve R ep lacem en t page 21-125

Component Location Index (cont'd) FAN CONTROL RELAY f T e s t page 22-109 A /C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 'T e st, page 22-103 A /C CONDENSER FAN RELAY 'T e s t page 22-109 RADIATOR FAN RELAY "T e s t page 22-103 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 'T e s t, page 22-109

RELAY BLOCK

A /C PiODE A

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

mm

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Test, page 21-101 Replacem ent page 21 -138 RADIATOR FAN Fan M otor Test, page 10-4 Removal and Installation, page 10-11 A/C CONDENSER FAN Fan M otor T e s t page 10-4 Removal and Installation, page 10-11

SUNLIGHT SENSOR T e s t page 21-102

R eplacem ent page 21-138 FRONT EVAPORATOR CORE {Located in th e heater unit) R eplacem ent page 21-131 RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR T e s t page 21-106 Replacem ent page 21-136 BLOWER UNIT Rem oval/Installation, page 21-128 Com ponent Replacem ent page 21-130

DUST AND POLLEN FILTER Replacem ent page 21-128

FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR Test, page 21-105 Replacem ent page 21-136

DRIVER’S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR T e s t page 21-103 Replacem ent page 21-135

PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR T e st page 21-104 Replacem ent page 21-135 FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR T e s t page 21-106 Replacem ent page 21-139

FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR T e s t page 21-102 HUMIDITY/IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Test, page 21-100 Replacem ent page 21-137

CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT Rem oval/I nstallation, page 21-139

A/C Service Tips and Precautions

Compressed air mixed with the R-134a forms a combustible vapor. The vapor can burn or expl ode causing serious injury. Never use compressed air to pressure test R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning systems.

• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. • Be carefu l when connecting service equipment. • Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. The air conditioning system uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant and polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2788 to remove R~134a from the air conditioning system.

A/C System Inspection NOTE: For A/C system noise, go to the A/C System Noise Check (see page 21-112). Before troub l eshooting any problem with the air conditioning system, other than noise, do the following; 1. Check that the HVAC air intake p l enum at the base of the windshie l d is not b l ocked by leaves or debris. Remove any blockage. 2. Check for kinks or sharp bends in the A/C l ines and hoses (which can greatly reduce system performance). If any of the A/C lines and hoses are kinked or bent, replace them (see page 21-127). 3. Inspect the A/C components, the pressure l ines, and the hoses for stains that may indicate a refrigerant or an A/C compressor oi l leak. If there is any indication of leaks, do the Refrigerant Leak Check (see page 21-108) to confirm the leak(s). Check for stains.

If accidenta l system discharge occurs, ventil ate the work area before resuming service,

R~134a service equipment or vehic l e air conditioning systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested with compressed air.

Additiona l health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. • Always disconnect the negative cabl e from the battery whenever rep l acing air conditioning parts. • Keep moisture and dirt out of the system. When disconnecting any l ines, plug or cap the fittings immediately; do not remove the caps or plugs until just before you reconnect each l ine, • Before connecting any hose or line, app ly a few drops of refrigerant oil to the O-ring. • When tightening or loosening a fitting, use a second wrench to support the matching fitting, • When discharging the system, use an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station; do not release refrigerant into the atmosphere.

4. Inspect the drive belt for physical damage or signs of slippage (see page 4-28). If the drive belt is damaged or shows signs of s l ippage, rep l ace it and recheck.

5. Check the A/C condenser (A) for materia l clogging the fins (dirt, insects, etc.). If the A/C condenser is clogged or restricted, carefu l ly clean any materia l from the A/C condenser fins with water and detergent. If deeper cleaning is required, clean the fins with HondaBrite cleaner (P/N 08732-0020B). Do not perform pressure test until the A/C condenser is completely dry.

6. Check the A/C condenser for fin damage (bent fins). If any of the A/C condenser fins are bent try to comb them straight. Do the Refrigerant Leak Check (see page 21-108) to check for leaks if there is visible damage to the A/C condenser. If the A/C condenser is l eaking or the fins cannot be straightened, replace the A/C condenser (see page 21-120). 7. Check the dust and pollen filter. If the dust and poll en filter is clogged or restricted, replace it (see page 21-128).

8. Check for climate control DTCs using the Self-Diagnostic Function (see page 21-10). If there are any DTCs, go to the appropriate troubleshooting (see page 21-11). 9. Start the engine, turn the air conditioning system on, and al low it to run for a few minutes and reach stable operation. 10. Check that the A1C operates at each position of the fan control switch (except OFF). If the A/C does not operate at all fan contro l switch positions, refer to the symptom troubleshooting.

11. Check that the A/C compressor clutch pressure plate (A) is rotating at the same speed as the pull ey and is engaging. If the A/C compressor clutch does not engage properly, go to the A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 21-96).

12. Check that the A/C condenser fan (B) and the radiator fan (C) operate when the A/C compressor cl utch is engaged and blow air toward the engine compartment If one or both of the fans is networking properly, refer to the symptom troubleshooting. 13. Check that the engine idle speed is correctly maintained when the A/C is switched on and off, (A/C compressor clutch is engaged and disengaged). If the idle speed increases more than 100 rpm when the A/C compressor engages, confirm that the A/C compressor is the cause of the idle speed increase. Replace the A/C compressor (see page 21-122), if necessary.

General Troubleshooting Information How to Check for DTCs with the HDS NOTE:

•

re a re three methods used to check for DTCs. The recommended method is to use the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) with the appropriate software, plugged into the data l ink connector (DLC). • The second method is to run the self-diagnostic function built into the climate contro l unit. • The third method is to use B-CAN system diagnosis test mode A (see page 22-164). 1. Make sure the ignition switch is LOCK (0). 2, Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.

3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the climate control u n it If it doesn’t, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209). 5. Select HVAC/CLI MATE CONTROL in the BODY ELECTRICAL menu. 6. Select DTCs in the HVAC/CLffVIATE CONTROL menu. 7. Check for DTCs, If any DTCs are indicated, write down the DTCs, then go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting. If no DTCs are indicated, refer to symptom troubleshooting. NOTE: • After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs with the HDS. • For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came with the HDS.

h

d

How to Use the Self-Diagnostic Function w ith the HDS 1. Make sure the ignition switch is LOCK (0). 2. Connect the HDS to the data l ink connector (DLC). 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehic l e and the climate control u n it If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209). 5. Select HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL in the BODY ELECTRICAL menu. 6. Sel ect I NSPECTION in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL menu. 7. Select CLIMATE CONTROL SELF TEST in the INSPECTION menu. 8. Check for DTCs. If any DTCs are indicated, write down the DTCs, then go to the indicated DTC troub l eshooting. NOTE:' • After troub l eshooting, clear the DTCs with the HDS. • For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came with the HDS.

(cont'd)

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd) How to Use the Self-Diagnostic Function without the HDS The climate contro l unit has a self-diagnostic function. To run the self-diagnostic function, do the following: 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the ON/OFF button, then press the RECIRCULATION CONTROL button five times within 10 seconds. Release the ON/OFF and RECIRCULATION CONTROL buttons; then the self-diagnostic begins. NOTE: • The b l ower motor will run at various speeds regard l ess of what the panel is displaying. • If there is a problem with the system, it w il l flash AUTO, 88 and AUTO, 88 and MODE, or 88 and WINDSHI ELD DEFROST and one or more of the 14 indicator segments (A through P). Refer to checking for DTCs. • If there are no prob l ems detected, the segments w il l not illuminate, and the system w i l l appear to be turned off.

Canceling the Self-Diagnostic Function 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), to cancel the self-diagnostic function, After comp l eting the repair work, run the self-diagnostic function again to make sure that there are no other DTCs.

B

B

Checking for DTCs The temperature disp l ay indicates single or mu ltiple DTCs. If no DTCs are present, the indicator remains blank, NOTE: If the driver's temperature indicator segments A, C, E, G, J, M, with the AUTO indicator, the MODE indicator, and the WINDSHIELD DEFROST indicator are on at the same time, there may be an open in the sensor common ground wire. DRIVER'S TEMPERATURE INDICATOR C E

A U TO INDICATOR

MODE INDICATOR

W INDSHIELD DEFROST INDICATOR

B D

A U TO A l J

U

T

O

HP

DTC (Driver's Detection Item Temperature Indicator Segments, AUTO, MODE, and WINDSHIELD DEFROST Indicator) ...........A.and.AUTO...........1 An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-42) W m d M W o .......... A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-44) CfancJ.AUTO An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-45) D and AUTO A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-46) ~ T a n 6 .AUTO.......... An open in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-47) F and AUTO A short in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-48) G and AUTO An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (front) (see page 21-49) H and AUTO A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (front) (see page 21-51) J and AUTO An open in the air mix control motor circuit (driver's) (see page 21-52) K and AUTO A short in the air mix contro l motor circuit (driver's) (see page 21-53) * L and AUTO blem in the air mix control motor circuit, l inkage, door, or motor (driver's) (t page 21-5* M and AUTO An open in the passenger's air mix contro l motor circuit (see page 21-57) N and AUTO A short in the passenger's air mix contro l motor circuit (see page 21-58) P and AUTO A problem in the passenger's air mix contro l motor circuit, linkage, door, or motor (see page

(cont'd)

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd) DTC (Driver’s Temperature Indicator Segment, AUTO, MODE, and WINDSHIELD DEFiO SI Indicator) AUTO A and MODE B and MODE Cand MODE Fand MODE G and MODE H and MODE J and MODE K and MODE M and MODE N and MODE Pand MODE A and W I NDSHI ELD DEFROST Band WINDSHIELD DEFROST

Detection Item

Climate control unit l ost communication with gauge contro l module (ECT message) (see page An open or short in the mode control motor circuit (front) (see page 21-6 A problem in the front mode control motor circuit, linkage, doors, or motor (front) (see page 21-6! A prob l em in the b lower motor circuit (front) (see page 21-68) An open in the rear air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-89) >rt in the rear air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-70) A prob l em in the rear air mix contro l motor circuit, linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-73) An open or short in the recirculation contro l motor circuit (; A problem in the recircul ation contro l motor circuit, linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-85) A problem in the rear blower motor circuit (see page 21-39) An open in the rear evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-35) A short in the rear evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-36) An open in the humidity sensor circuit (see page 21-78), a short in the humidity sensor circuit (see page 21-77) An open in the A/C pressure sensor circuit (see page 21-81), a short in the A/C pressure sensor circuit (see page

Displaying Sensor Inputs at the Climate Control Unit The climate contro l unit has a mode that displays sensor inputs it receives. This mode shows you what the climate contro l unit is receiving from each of the sensors, one at a time, and it can help you determine if a sensor is fau lty.

Checks Before Using the Sensor Input Display Mode 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the recirculation door function; press the recircu l ation button to switch from FRESH to RECIRC. The air volume and sound shou l d change slightly. 2. Set the temperature contro l knob to the desired test temperature. When selecting the test temperature, note these items: • iJLo" temperature setting w il l default to MAX COOL, VENT, and RECIRC (A/C ON) or FRESH (A/C OFF). • " H I " temperature setting w i l l default to MAX HOT, HEAT, and FRESH. • 58 through 88 °F settings w i ll use the automatic c l imate contro l logic, 3, Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

B

B

Run the Sensor Input Display Mode 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Press and hold both the AUTO and RECI RCULATION CONTROL buttons, then start the engine. 3. After the engine starts, rel ease both buttons. The display panel control unit w il l f l ash the sensor number and then the value for that sensor. Record the value displayed. . 4. To advance to the next sensor, press the REAR W I NDOW DEFOGGER/POWER MIRROR DEFOGGER button. NOTE: • The sensor values w i l l be displayed in degrees Cel sius (°C) or an alphanumeric code. Use the chart to convert the value to degrees Fahrenheit (°F). • If the sensor value displays "Er", this indicates there is an open or short in the circuit or sensor. Check for DTCs using the HDS, or refer to checking DTCs by DTC indication. • If necessary, compare the sensor input display to a known-good vehicle under the same test conditions. • If the sensor displayed value is out of the normal range, refer to the sensor test or substitute a known-good sensor, and recheck. Sensor 0 1 2 3 5

“

8 7 T 9 A b C d E F

Item In-car temperature Outside air temperature Engine coo l ant temperature Solar radiation sensor va l ue: dark = 00,'flashlight = 04, c l oudy = 10, sunny = 65 Front evaporator outlet air temperature Driver's and Passenger's air mix opening (low value indicates coo l er air distribution, higher va l ue indicates warmer air distribution) Vent temperature air out (TAO) Vehicle speed (vehicl e must be driven to display speed) 1 A/C pressure Rear air mix opening Rear vent temperature air out (TAO) Rear evaporator out l et air temperature Humidity sensor va l ue Fog margin Solar radiation azimuth (with navigation) Solar radiation ang l e of elevation (with navigation)

Displayed Value °C °C °c kcal/m2-h °C % of opening °C km/h kPa % of opening °C % rh 10° i— “ .~ ...11°...... .....“

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd) Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion Table

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3

°F 32 34 30 37 33 41 43 45 48 48

°C 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 17 18 19

°F 50 52 54 65 57 53 81 83 64 66

°C 20 21 22 23 24 25 28 27 28 29

®F 68 70 72 73 75 77 79 81 82 84

°C 30 31 32 33 34 35 38 37 38 39

°F 86 88 30 31 93 95 97 39 100 102

°C 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

®F 104 108 108 109 111 113 115 117 118 120

°C 50 51 52 53 54 55 58 57 58 59

°F 122 124 128 127 128 131 133 135 136 139

°C 80 81 82 83 84 85 88 87 88 69

•F 140 142 144 145 147 143 151 152 154 158

°C 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79

op 158 180 182 163 185 187 189 170 172 174

°C 80 81 82 83 84 85 88 87 88 89

®F 178 178 180 181 183 185 187 188 190 192

90 91 92 93 94 95 98 97 98 99

°F 194 198 198 199 201 203 205 207 208 210

Alphanumeric Conversion Table

.

Display Reading (Alphanumeric) A1 thru A9 B0 thru B9 CO thru C9 DO thru D9 ..E0.th7u .E9' ”1 FCHhru.F9.... .......

®F —1 t l — 10 thru —19

—20 thru —29 —30 thru —39 —40 thru —49

^

30 thru 18 14 thru —2 —4 thru —20 —22 thru —38 —40 thru —56

%

iru iru —20 thru —30 thru —40 thru + 100 thru

—9 —19 —29 —39 —49 +109

5. To cancel the sensor input display mode, press the AUTO button or turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

DTC Troubleshooting Index Checking the DTCs with the HDS

DTC B1200

ection Item or Sympt< Communication circuit error (BUS-OFF)

B1202

Cl imate control unit internal error

B1205

Climate contro l unit l ost communication with gauge control modu l e (VSP/NE message) Cl imate contro l unit lost communication with gauge contro l modu l e (coolant temp message) Climate contro l unit l ost communication with gauge control module (illumination message) An open in the rear evaporator temperature sensor circuit A short i n the rear evaporator temperature sensor circuit An open or short in the recirculation control motor circi A pioblem in the rear blower motor circui" An open in the in-car temperature sensor circui" A short in the in-car temperature sensor

81208

B1207

B1213

61214 61215 B1223 B1225 B1226

circui'

B1227

B1229

An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit An open in the sunlight sensor circuit

B1230

A short in the sunlight sensor circuit

B1231

An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (fron A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (fron An open in the air mix contro l motor circuit (driver's A short in the air mix control motor circuit (driver's A problem in the air mix control motor circuit l inkage, door, or motor (driver’s) An open in the passenger's air mix control motor circu A short in the passenger's air mix contro l motor circuit A problem in the passenger’s air mix control motor circuit l inkage, door, or motor

B1228

B1232 B1233 B1234 812: B12:

612:

DTC type Loss of communication Internal error

Climate control unit Climate control unit Climate control unit

Loss of communication

Page DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-171) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-34) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-34)

Climate control unit

Loss of communication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-34)

Cl imate control unit

Loss of communication

DTC Troubleshoot (see page 21-34)

Climate control unit Climate control unit Climate control unit Climate control unit Climate control unit Climate contro l unit Cl imate control unit Climate control unit Climate control unit Climate control unit Climate control unit Climate control unit Climate control unit Climate control unit Cl imate control unit Climate control unit Climate control unit Climate contro l unit

Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-35) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-36) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-37) DTC Troubleshooting

Signal error Signal error Signal error

(see page 21-39) Signal error Signal error Signal error Signal error Signal error Signal error Signal error Signal error Signal error Signal error Signal error Signal error Signal error Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-42) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-44) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-45) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-46) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-47) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-48) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-49) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-51) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-52) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-53) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-56) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-57) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-58) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-61)

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd) Checking the DTCs w ith the HDS

B2365

Detection Item or Symptom An open or short in the mode control m oto r ci rcu it (fro nt) A problem in the mode control motor circuit linkage, doors, or motor (front) A problem in the front b l ower motor circuit An open in the rear air mix contro l motor circuit A short in the rear air mix control motor circuit A prob l em in the rear air mix control motor circuit, linkage, door, or motor Rear communication failure

B2967

An open in the humidity sensor circuit

IB2388

A short in the humidity sensor circuit

B2363

Climate control unit l ost communication with MICU (WIPSW message) Climate contro l unit lost communication with gauge contro l unit (RM message) An open in the A/C pressure sensor circuit A short in the A/C pressure sensor circuit

DTC 81239 B1240 B1241 B1244 B1245 B1246

B2970 B2979 B2980 B2983 B2991

A problem in the recircu l ation control motor circuit l inkage, door, or motor Climate contro l unit l ost communication with audio system

ECU Cl imate contro l unit Climate control unit Cl imate control unit Cl imate control unit Cl imate control unit Climate contro l unit Climate control unit Climate contro l unit Climate contro l unit Climate control unit Climate control unit Climate control unit Climate control unit Climate contro l unit Climate contro l unit

DTC type Signal error Signa l error Signa l error Signal error Signal error Signal error Loss of communication Signa l error Signal error Loss of communication Loss of communication Signal error Signa l error Signal error Loss of communication

Page DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 21-1 DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-66) DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 21-< ibleshoot

(see page 21-63) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-70) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-73) DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 21-75) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-76) DTC Troubleshootinr (see page 21-77) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-80) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-81) DTC Troubleshooting (see page DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-82) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-1 DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-87)

Symptom Troubleshooting Index S ym pto m

Diagnostic procedure

Also check

for

The rear m ode control doors do not change between ceiling vents (cool! and floor vents (hot)

Rear m ode control m otor circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-88)

• HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8) • Blown fuse No. 3 0 (10 A) in the under-dash fuse/rel ay box • Cleanliness and tightness of all te rm in al s

The blower and, heater controls, and A/C do not work

Climate control pow er and ground circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-30)

• HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8) • Blown fuse No. 30 (10 A) in the u n d e r-d as h fuse/relay box • Poor ground at G508 (see page 22-38) • Cleanliness and tightness of all te rm in al s

Both fans do not run at low speed with the A/C on (but the A/C compressor runs with the A/C on)

Radiator and A/C condenser fan low speed circuit troubleshooti ng (see page 21-91)

• HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8) • Blown fuse No. 15 (30 A) in the relay block, and No. 30 (10 A) in the under-dash fuse/rel ay box • Poor ground at G301 (see page 22-24) • Cleanliness and tightness of a l l te rm in a l s

The A/C condenser fan does not run at high speed (but both fans run at low speed and the A/C compressor operates with the A/C on)

A/C condenser fan high speed circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-94)

• HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8) • Cl eanliness and tightness of all term inals

Both fans do not run at high speed with the A/C on (but both fans run at low speed and the A/C compressor operates with the A/C o 1

ECT troubleshooting; ECT sensor 2 circuit low voltage (see page 11-173), ECT sensor 2 ci rcuit high voltage (see page 11-174)

• Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3) • Cl eanliness and tightness of a ll terminals

The A/C compressor clutch does not engage (but both fans run with the A/C on)

A/C compressor clutch circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-96)

• HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)

The blower fan(s) runs slower than expected in cold weather

ECT troubleshooti ng: ECT sensor 2 circuit low voltage (see page 11-173), ECT sensor 2 circuit high voltage (see page 11-174) NOTE: It is no rm al for the blo w e r(s ) to run slowly until the engine coolant tem perature begins to rise. If the blower continues to run slowly for an abnorm al length of tim e, continue to trou bl eshoot the problem.

• P o w e rtra in DTC s (see p a g e 11-3) • B lo w e r m o t o r o p e ra tio n

Voice com m ands do not work

Com munication problem between the climate control unit and the navigation system Do the navigation comm unication line circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-98)

• C lim a te c ontrol D TC s (see p a g e 2 1 - 1 1 ) • A u d io -n a v ig a tio n un it D TC (see p a g e 2 3-1 8 6 ) • P oor or l o o s e co n n ec tio n s at th e te rm in a ls

HDS does not comm unicate with the climate control unit or the vehicle

Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209)

wn fuse N o. 17 (7.5 A) in th e relay block, a nd N o. 3 0 (10 A ) in th e u n d e r-d as h fu s e /re la y bo x • B lo w e r m o t o r o p e ra tio n • C le an lin e ss a nd tig h tn e s s o f all t e r m i n a l s -5

(cont'd)

Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd) Sym ptor Insufficient heating

Diagnostic procedure 1. Check the cool ant level fsee page 10-8) 2. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-3) 3. Check the operation of the air m ix control m otor and door (see page 21-103) 4. Check the coolant tem perature 5. Check the bl ow er m otor unit for obstructions 8, Check for air leaks around the ducts and vents 7, Check the inlet hose tem perature • If it is COLD, check for restrictions in the hose, a dam aged or leaking therm ostat, and a dam aged or l eaking w ater pump. • If it is HOT, check for restrictions in the heater core. Back fl ush the heater core using standard com m ercial ly availabl e quipment, or replace the heater core.

Also check for Dam aged cylinder head gasket

System Description The air conditioning system removes heat from the passenger compartment by transferring heat from the ambient air to the evaporator. The evaporator coo l s the air with the refrigerant that is circu l ating through the evaporator. The refrigerant expands in the evaporator, and the evaporator becomes very cold and absorbs the heat from the ambient air. The blower fan pushes air across the evaporator where the heat is absorbed, and then it blows the cool air into the passenger compartment. EXPANSION VALVE (Meters the required am ou nt of refrigerant into th e evaporator)

FRONT BLOWER FAN FRONT EVAPORATOR (Absorption of heat) FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR RELIEF VALVE (Relieves pressure at th e A /C compressor w h en th e pressure is to o high) A /C PRESSURE SENSOR W hen the refrigerant is below 198 kPa (2.00 kgf/cm2, 28.4 psi) or above 3,138 kPa (32.00 kgf/cm2, 455.1 psi), the PCM turns the A/C compressor cl utch relay off to protect the A/C compressor. W hen the refrigerant is above 1,470 kPa|14,33 kgf/cm2, 213.2 psi), the A/C pressure sensor switches the radiator and the A/C condenser fans to high speed.

A /C COMPRESSOR (Suction and compression) HIGH PRESSURE VAPOR HIGH PRESSURE LIQUID A /C CONDENSER fRadiation of heat)

LOW PRESSURE LIQUID LOW PRESSURE VAPOR RECEiVER/DRYER (Traps debris, and rem oves m oisture)

This vehicle uses HFC~134a (R-134a) refrigerant which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention to the following service items; • Use only the recommended polya l kyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oi l (DENSO ND-O I L 8) designed for the R-134a A/C compressor. I ntermixing the recommended (PAG) refrigerant oil with any other refrigerant oi l w i l l result in A/C compressor failure. • A l l A/C system parts (A/C compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, A/C condenser, receiver/dryer, expansion valve, O-rings for joints) are designed for refrigerant R-134a. • Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R~134a. • Use only a recovery/recycling/charging station that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2788 to service the R-134a air conditioning systems. • Always recover refrigerant R-134a with an approved reco ve ry/recy cIing/c ha rg ing station before disconnecting any A/C fitting.

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Humidity/ln-Car Temperature Sensor The humidity sensor consists of two sensors. One sensor is for humidity detection, and the other is for in-car temperature detection. When the cl imate contro l unit receives signals about the in-car condition from the humidity sensor, and judges that the humidity in the vehic l e is very l ow, the climate control unit reduces the A/C compressor run time. Engine power l oss is kept to a minimum, and fue l economy is increased.

Humidity/ln-Car Temperature Sensor Quality The capacitance of the humidity sensor changes by the adsorption and the evaporation of moisture. The resistance change of the humidity sensor changes the output voltage.

VOLTAGE

(V)

HUMIDITY LEVEL (% rh)

B

B

A/C Pressure Sensor The A/C pressure sensor converts A/C pressure into electrical signals to the PCM. NOTE: The high side pressure can be m onitored using the HDS PGM-FI Data List

The response of the A/C pressure sensor is shown in the graph. NOTE: W hen the refrigerant is below 196 kPa {2.00 kgf/cm2, 28.4 psi) or above 3,138 kPa (32.00 kgf/cm2, 455.1 psi), the PCM turns the A/C compressor clutch relay off to protect the A/C compressor. W hen the refrigerant pressure is above 1,470 kPa (14.99 kgf/cm2, 213.2 psi), the PCM switches the radiator and A/C condenser fans to high speed.

OU TPU T VOLTAGE

(Vout)

(-1.01) [ —14.4]

(2.00) [28.4]

132.00)

(kgf/cm 2)

[458.1]

A /C PRESSURE

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Climate Control Door Positions HOT

I COOL

DEFROSTER DOOR

AIR M IX DOORS

(VENT)

DOOR

♦# *

v

(HEAT)

11 - t*

V

HOT

COOL

*> • fH E A I/D E F )

^47 t

Tt

fPEP)

Dual Air Mix Control System Driver's side: HOT Passenger's side: COOL

Driver’s side: COOL Passenger's side: HOT

DRIVER'S AIR M I X DOOR

PASSENGER'S AIR M IX DOOR

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) i-Dual and i-Tri Climate Control 8 f stern (With navigation) The "i-Dual" climate control system automatically controls the temperature and the vent mode of the air direction to the driver's and passenger's side, depending on the angle of the sun, and the direction of the vehicle. It calculates information such as date, time, longitude, and l atitude from the navigation system, as well as the radiant strength of the sun from the sun l ight sensor, to determine the appropriate mode position and temperature to be directed to each side. The "l-T ri" climate control system is an addition of the automatic controls with the temperature and the vent mode of the air direction to the rear section to the 'i-D ua l" c l imate contro l system.

DATE LONGITUDE LATITUDE DIRECTION OF THE VEHICLE

IRRADIATE STRENGTH

REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL

W it h i-T ri

FRONT DUAL AIR M IX CONTROL

. REAR AIR M IX CONTROL

REAR AIR M I X POOR DRIVER'S AIR M IX DOOR

PASSENGER’S AIR M IX DOOR

I n the event that the navigation system malfunctions, or when driving in areas where the navigation system cannot determine the vehicle position (non-coverage areas, tunnels, etc.), the climate contro l system w i l l operate the same as a vehicle without a navigation system.

B

B

Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)

r _

_

_

_

n __ ______

1

2

3

4

5

6

/

8

9

10 11 12 13 14 16 16 17 18 19

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

35 36 37 38

/

/

W ire side of fem ale term inals

CONNECTOR A Cavity 1 2*1

Wire color WHT YEL

Terminal name + BBACK UP AC-SI

3

PNK

I G2

4 5

LTGRN LT BLU

B-CAN Tr

0

BLU

S5V

8 9

l i l M ....... BLU

~S ^C O M

BLW-V (F)

10

RED

BLW-G (F)

11

PUR

AIVID-P (D)

12

PNK

M-HOT (D)

13

LT BLU

M-COOL (D)

14

LTGRN

M-HOT (P)

15

YEL

M-COOL (P)

10

GRN

M-DEF (F)

17

ORN

M-VENT (F)

18

YEL

FRS

13

ORN

REC

21#1

BLU

AC-CLK

Description Battery back up power supply Outputs audio-navigation communication data IG2 Power supply B-CAN communication l ine in-car temperature sensor signal ■ Power source for humidity sensor, A/C pressure sensor, and air mix control motor (driver's, passenger's, and rear) Ground exclusive for sensor Feedback signal of front power transistor drain voltage I nputs

Outputs front power transistor gate voltage Outputs driver's air mix control motor potentiometer signal Drives driver's air mix control motor on the HOT side Drives driver's air mix contro l motor on the COOL side Drives passenger's air mix control motor on the HOT side Drives passenger's air mix control motor on the COOL side Front mode contro l motor on the DEF side Front mode contro l motor on the VENT side Recircul ation control motor on the FRESH side Recirculation control motor on the RECIRCULATE side Audio-navigation communication data clock

Signal Battery voltage

__

With ignition switch ON (ll ): battery voltage

_ With ignition switch ON (I I): about 5 V Less than 0.2 ¥ at all times With ignition switch ON (II) battery voltage (depending on b l ower motor speed) Fan switch to MAX: about 12 ¥ Fan switch to MIN: about 4 V Drive on COOL side; about 1.5 V Drive on HOT side: about 4.5 ¥ Drive on HOT side: battery voltage Drive on COOL side: battery voltage Drive on HOT side: battery voltage Drive on COOL side: battery voltage Drive on DEF side: battery voltage Drive on VENT side: battery voltage Drive on FRESH side: battery vo ltage Drive on RECI RCULATE side: battery voltage

_

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) CONNECTOR A (cont'd)

Cavity 22#1

Wire color ED

Terminal name AC SO

23

LT BLU

ILL+

24

BRN

leva (F)

25

PUR

ACC

2€

LT GRN

Pd

28

PNK

Hum Tam

30

PUR BLU

Tsun AMD-P (P)

31

WHT

MODE 1

LTGRN

10DE2

r^ Y E L ^

n

Inputs audio-navigation communication da' Power source for illuminatk Inputs front evaporator temperature sensor signa l ACC power supp ly A/C Pressure sensor signal Inputs humidity sensor sign Inputs outside air temperature sensor signa l Inputs sunlight sensor sign* Outputs passenger's air mix contro l motor potentiometer signa l I nputs front mode contro l motor signa' Inputs front mode control motoi

Signal "— With lighting switch ON: battery volta

_

With ignition switch ACC (I' battery vo ltag With A/C switch ON: about 4.8 V (depending on A/C press — ■— — Drive on COOL side: about 1.5 V Drive on HOT side: abc

— —

signa

33

35

37 38

PUR

MODE 3

BLU

MODE 4

WHT

MODE 1

BLK

MODE 2

BLK GRN

GND MODE 3

*1: With navigation

I nputs front mode control motor signa’ I nputs front mode control motor signa” Recirculation control motor position feedback Recircul ation contro l motor position feedback Climate contro l unit ground (G506) Recircul ation control motor position feedback

—

— __ ~ Less than 0.2 V at all tit

—

B

B

Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs CLIMATE CONTROL

1

/

3

2 8

/

UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)

_ 9

X

11

4 5 8 12 1 3 14

W ire side of fem ale terminals

CONNECTOR B Cavity 1

Wire color GRN

Terminal name M-COOL (R)

2

PNK

M-HOT (R)

3

YEL

M-HEAT (R)

4

BLK

M-VENT (R)

5

PUR

AMD-P (R)

LTBLU

le va (R)

8

BLU

AUD IO DATA

11 13

ORN GRN RED

AC BUS RX m Fb u s t x BLW-V (R)

14

BLU

BLW-G (R)

Description Rear air mix control motor on the COOL side Rear air mix control motor on the HOT side Rear mode control motor on the HEAT side Rear mode contro l motor on the VENT side Outputs rear air mix contro l motor potentiometer signa l Inputs rear evaporator temperature sensor signal Communication to audio unit (audio display data) Communication to rear panel Communication to rear panel Feedback signa l of rear power transistor drain voltage Outputs rear power transistor gate voltac

Drive on voltage Drive on volta Drive on vo ltage Drive on voltage Drive on Drive on

Signal COOL side: battery HOT side: battery HEAT side: battery VENT side; battery COOL side: about 0.5 V HOT side: about 4.5 V _

_ _

__ _

With ignition switch ON (II): battery vo ltage (depending on blower motor speed) Fan switch to MAX: about 10 V Fan switch to M I N: about 2 V

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Rear Climate Control Panel Inputs and Outputs REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL 10P CONNECTOR

W ire side of fem ale terminals

Cavity 1

Wire color PNK

Terminal name IG2

3

BLK

GND

7

LT BLU

ILL+

3 10

GRN ORN

AC BUS TX AC BUS RX

Description IG2 power supply Rear climate contro l panel ground (G508) Power source for il l umination Communication to rear panel Communication to rear panel

Signal With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage Less than 0.2 ¥ at a l l times With lighting switch ON: battery voltage _ _ —

21-29

Circuit Diagram

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

RADIATOR FAN MOTOR

-Q _

G301

-Kg)

KD

_1--------- GRN - ..- - - I

-0

* u

;Othercommunicationline

S5V AMD-P M-COOL M-HOT

I7 GRN

REAR l EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE 1SENSOR

DTC Troubleshooting DTC B1202; Climate Control Unit Internal Error NOTE; Check the battery condition (see page 22-94) and the charging system (see page 4-24). 1. Cl ear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II ). 3. Wait for 8 seconds or more. 4. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-9). 5. Check for DTCs. is DTC B 1 2 0 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES-The climate control unit is faulty, replace the climate contro l unit (see page 21-139).®

NO-lntermittent failure, the climate control unit is OK at this tim e.B

DTC B120S; Climate Control Unit Lost Communication with Gauge Control Module (VSP/NE message) DTC B1206 or DTC indicator AUTO; Climate Control Unit Lost Communication with Gauge Control Module (coolant temp message) DTC B1207: Climate Control Unit Lost Communication with Gauge Control Module (illumination message) NOTE: If you are troub l eshooting mu ltip l e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in the B-CAN system diagnosis test mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 3. Wait for 8 seconds or more, 4. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-9) or the climate contro l unit (see page 21-10). 6, Check for DTCs. Are D TC s B1205, a n d /o r B 1 2 0 6 o r AU TO , and/or B1207 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 8.

NO-lntermittent fai l ure, check for loose wires or poor connections in the c l imate control unit connector A (40P).B

8, Check for DTCs using the HDS. A re a n y o f the M o w in g DTCs in d ic a te d ; B W 1 1, B 1 0 6 0 f B 2 1 8 0 , B 1 3 5 7 , B 1 3 0 5 f B 1 4 0 8 f o rB 2 1 5 7 ?

YES-Do the gauge control module input test (see page 22-416).B

NO-Do the climate contro l power and ground circuit troub l eshooting (see page 21-90).■

DTC B1213 o r DTC indicator N and Mode: An Open in the Rear Evaporator Temperature Sensor Circuit

8. Check for continuity between c l imate contro l unit connector B (14P) terminal No. 8 and rear evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector termina l No. 2. CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR B (14P)

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

W ire side of fem ale terminals IEW A (R), (LT BLU)

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-9) orthe cl imate contro l unit (see page 21-10).

1

/

2 8

4

3

/ /X "

5

6

12 13

14

4. Check for DTCs. is D T C B1213 o r N a n d M o d e in d ic a te d ?

_[— ___

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, check for loose wires or poor connections in the rear evaporator temperature sensor c irc u it.!

1 Ji

6. Remove the rear evaporator temperature sensor (see page 21-166), and test it (see page 21-147).

YES-Go to step 9.

NO-Replace the rear evaporator temperature sensor (see page 21-158).■ 7. Disconnect c l imate contro l unit connector B (14P).

2 ““ T

W ire side of fem ale terminals

is there co n tin u ity?

YES-With the rear evaporator temperature sensor disconnected, go to step 7.

TEVA (R) 1! T Rl i I!

REAR EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

is the re a r evaporator te m p e ra tu re s e n s o r O K?

L

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the climate control unit and the rear evaporator temperature sensor.®

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 9. Check for continuity between cl imate contro l unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 8 and rear evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector termina l No. 1. CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A |4§PJ W ire side of fem ale terminals

DTC B1214 or DTC indicator P and MODE: A Short in the Rear Evaporator Temperature Sensor Circuit 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-9) or the climate control unit (see page 21-10). 4. Check for DTCs. Is DTC B 1 2 14 o r P a n d M O D E in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. REAR EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

Wire side of female terminals is there co n tin u ity?

YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at climate contro l unit connector A (40P), B (14P), and at the rear evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good c l imate control unit, and recheck, If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original climate contro l unit (see page 21-139).■ NO-Repair an open in the wire between the climate control unit and the rear evaporator temperature sensor.B

NO-lntermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor connections in the rear evaporator temperature sensor circuit.®

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Remove the rear evaporator temperature sensor (see page 21-158), and test it (see page 21-147). is the re a r evaporator te m p e ra tu re s e n s o r O K ?

YES-With the rear evaporator temperature sensor disconnected, go to step 7. NO-Replace the rear evaporator temperature sensor (see page 2 1 -1 5 6 ).■ 7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P) and

B (14P).

8. Check for continuity between climate control unit connector B (14P) terminal No. 8 and body ground.

DTC B1215 or DTC indicator J and MODE: An Open or Short in the Recirculation Control Motor Circuit

CL1WATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR B (14P)

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. TEVA (R)

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

(LT BLU) |" 1

2

8

3

/

m

12

13

3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-9) or the climate contro l unit (see page 21-10).

14

4. Check for DTCs. Is D TC B 1 2 1 5 o r J a n d M O D E in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. W ire side of fe m al e terminals

NO- l ntermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor connections in the recirculation contro l motor circuil.B

Is there co n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

between the climate control unit and the rear evaporator temperature sensor.B

6. Test the recirculation control motor (see page 21-108). is the re c irc u la tio n c o n tro l m o to r O K?

NO-Go to step 9. 9. Check for continuity between climate control unit connector A (40P) termina l No. 8 and c l imate control unit connector B (14P) terminal No. 8. CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) W ire side of fem ale terminals

NO-Replace the recircul ation contro l motor (see page 21-136).11 7. Disconnect the recircul ation control motor 7P connector. 8. Disconnect cl imate control unit connector A (40P).

S-COM (GRN) n

YES-Go to step 7.

234 88

1

/

2 8

4

3

/ X"

5

8

TEVA (R) (LT BLU)

12 13 14

CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR B (14P) W ire side of fem ale te rm in al s

Is there c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short in the wires between the climate contro l unit and the rear evaporator temperature sensor.B NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,

and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original cl imate contro l unit (see page 21-139).■

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 3. Check for continuity between the fo ll owing terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P) and the recircu lation contro l motor 7P connector. 40 P No. 8 No. 35 No, 36 No. 38

7P: No. No. No. No.

10, Check for continuity between body ground and climate contro l unit connector A (40P) termina ls No. 35, No, 38, and No, 38 individually. CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

7 5 4 3

CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) W ire side of fe m al e terminals S-C OM (GRN) !_

n

_

_

9 110| 11112113114115116117118119] / \ | 21| 22| 23| 34| 2S| 26| 271 28| 29| 30| 31| 32| 33134| 35| 36| 37| 38| / L / M OD E 1 (W HT)

JT m o d e 2

©

M ODE 3

(GRN)

iBLK,( n ) ( n

\ S-COM(GRN) M O D E 1 (WHT) i

2

3

4

W ire side of fe m al e terminals

Is there co n tin u ity? 5 /

M O D E 3 (GRN) M OD E 2 (BLK) RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale terminals

is there c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 10, NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the c l imate control unit and the recircul ation control motor.®

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s) between the climate contro l unit and the recircul ation control m otor.® NO-Go to step 11 11. Check for continuity between' climate contro l unit connector A (40P) terminals as fo l l ows. From terminal 35 36

To terminals 38,38 38

CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

TfTITTTrrp^ H E120

W ire side of fem ale term inal s

is there co n tin u ity b e tw e e n a n y o f the te rm in a ls?

YES-Repair a short in the w ire s .! NO-Go to step 12 12. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).

B sJ

13. Turn the ignition switch to ON ( II), and measure the voltage between the same termina l s and body ground.

DTC B1223 or DTC indicator M and MODE: A Problem in the Rear Blower Motor Circuit 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS,'

CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (ii).

V I2U U ! I 9 1101111121131 116 11« 1»71161lalxi / | a | 22123| 24125| 2e| 27| 28| 28| 30| M| 32133134| 36| 38f a?| 38

3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-9) or the climate control unit (see page 21-10).

MOD E 1

mm0

M O PE 3

(GR N) MO DE2 (BLI1C)

^)(x)

QZ

4. Check for DTCs. Is D TC B 1 2 2 3 o r M a n d M O D E in d ic a te d ? YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, check for loose wires or poor connections in the rear blower motor circuit.®

W ire side of fe m a l e terminals

is th ere a n y vo lta g e?

YES-Repair a short to power In the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the recirculation contro l motor. This short may al so damage the climate contro l unit. Repair a short to power before replacing the c l imate control unit.B NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at cl imate contro l unit connector A (40P) and at the recirculation control motor 7P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original climate contro l unit (see page 21-139).B

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Check the No. 2 (RR BLOWER) (30 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box, and the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/re l ay box. A re the fu se s O K ?

YES~Go to step 7. NO-Rep l ace the fuse(s), and recheck. If fuse(s) blow again, check for a short in the No. 2 (RR BLOWER) (30 A) and No. 30 (10 A) fuse(s) circuit.! 7. Connect rear b l ower motor 2P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire. REAR BLOWER M O TO R 2P CONNECTOR

BLW (ORN) JUM PER WIRE

W ire side of fem ale term inals

8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). D o e s the re a r b lo w e r m o to r ru n a t h ig h s p e e d ?

YES-Go to step 9. NO-Go to step 24, 3. Turn the ignition-switch to LOCK (0). 10. Disconnect the jumper wire. (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 11. Disconnect the rear power transistor 4P connector. 12. Check for continuity between rear power transistor 4P connector termina l No. 2 and body ground. REAR POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR

J = L

18, Check for continuity between body ground and climate control unit connector B (14P) terminals No. 13 and No. 14 individually. CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR i (14P)

GND (BLK)

1

/

2

3

8

BLW-V (R)| (RED) X

W ire side of female terminals

j PLW;G (F)

9|BLU>

W ire side of fem ale terminals

Is there c o n tin u ity ? is there co n tin u ity?

YES-Go to step 13.

NO-Check for an open in the wire between the rear power transistor and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G503 (see page 22~36).H 13. Connect rear power transistor 4P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 4 with a jumper wire, REAR POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR

JE=EL GND (BLK! JUMPER WIRE

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s) between the c l imate control unit and the rear power transistor,■ NO-Go to step 19.

19, Check for continuity between the fo l l owing terminals of cl imate contro l unit connector B (14P) and the rear power transistor 4P connector.

14P: No. 13

4P: No. 3

No. 14

No. 1

CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR B (14P) W ire side of female terminals

BLW (ORN)

W ire side of fem ale terminals

14, Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). D oes the re a r b lo w e r m o to r run a t h ig h s p e e d ?

YES-Go to step 15. NO-Repair an open in the ORN wire between the rear power transistor and the rear b l ower m o to r.ll

REAR POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR W ire side of female terminals

15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Is there continuity?

18. Disconnect the jumper wire,

YES-Go to step 20.

17. Disconnect climate contro l unit connector B (14P).

NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the rear power transistor.!!

21. Measure the vo ltage between body ground and climate control unit connector B (14P) terminals No. 13 and No. 14 individua ll y.

26. Measure the voltage between rear b l ower motor 2P connectorterminal No. 1 and body ground, REAR BLOWER M OTOR 2P CONNECTOR

CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR B (14P)

1

2

/

8

3

c r?

9lXh

4

5

6

12 13 14

B IV¥-V (R) (RED) 1

B LW -G (F) i {BLU!

(2)(2) W ire side of fe m a l e term inals W ire side of fem ale term inals

Is there b a tte ry v o lta g e?

Is there a n y vo lta g e?

YES-Replace the rear blower motor (see page 21-155).Hi

YES-Repair a short to power in the wire(s).B

NO-Go to step 27.

NO-Go to step 22. 22. Reconnect cl imate control unit connector B (14P). 23. Test the rear power transistor (see page 21-145). Is the re a r p o w e r tra n sisto r O K? YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at climate control unit connector B (14P) and at the rear power transistor 4P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the sym pto m/in dication goes away, replace the original climate contro l unit (see page 21-139).■

27. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 28. Remove the rear blower motor relay from the dashboard wire harness, and test it (see page 22-109). Is the re la y O K ?

YES-Go to step 29, NO-Replace the rear blower motor relay.H 29. Measure the vo ltage between rear b l ower motor relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and body ground. REAR BLOWER M O TO R RELAY 4P SOCKET

NO-Replace the rear power transistor.B 24. Disconnect the jumper wire. 25. Disconnect the rear blower motor 2P connector.

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there b a tte ry v o lta g e?

YES-Go to step 30. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 2 (RR BLOWER) (30 A) in the main under-hood fuse box and the rear blower motor relay.H 30. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 31. Measure the voltage between rear b l ower motor relay 4P socket terminal No. 4 and body ground. REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET

DTC B1225 or DTC indicator A and AUTO: An Open in the In-Car Temperature Sensor Circuit 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS, 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

±M I JL COIL+

(V) (PNK)

3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-3) or the c l imate control unit (see page 21-10). 4. Check for DTCs. Is D TC B 1 2 2 5 o r A a n d A U T O in d ic a te d ?

Terminal side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 5.

Is there b a tte ry vo lta g e?

NO-lntermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor connections in the in-car temperature sensor

YES-Go to step 32.

circuit.!

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No, 30 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the rear blower motor rel ay,■

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see page 21-137), and test it (see page 21-101).

32. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Is the in -c a r te m p e ra tu re s e n s o r O K?

33. Check for continuity between rear b l ower motor relay 4P socket termina l No. 3 and body ground.

YES-With the humidity/in-car temperature sensor

REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET

disconnected, go to step 7, NO-Replace the humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see page 21-137),■ 7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P),

sM i GND A * (BLK) ( 1 2 )

Term inal side of fem ale terminals

Is there c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair an open in the GRY wire between the rear blower motor relay and the blower motor.® NO-Check for an open in the wire between the rear blower motor relay and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G304 (see page 22-30).■

D

8, Check for continuity between climate contro l unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 5 and humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector terminal No. 4. CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) W ire side of fe m al e terminals

M

9. Check for continuity between climate contro l unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 8 and humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector terminal No. 3. CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) W ire side of fem ale terminals S -C O H {GRN)

TR (LT BLU) 1} 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 8 I / ) 8 9 110| 11112 13114| IS1161171181191/1 | 2n| 22123| 2i4{26128| Z7128| 28130| 31132[ 33134| 36| 36| 37| 38I ,/] ,/

1311411B116| 1711« | | 22123| 241 2B126| STT| 28| | 30| | 32133134| 36| 36137|

T tr

1

ftr e iu i

____ L _ n 2 3 4

H U M iD iT Y/iN -C A R TEMPERATURE SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale terminals

1

2

S-COM (GRN) J__CL 3 4

HUMIDITY/'IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale terminals

Is there co n tin u ity?

Is there co n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 9.

YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at climate control unit connector A (40P) and at the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original climate contro l unit (see page 21-139).■

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the climate control unit and the in-car temperature sensor.B

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the climate control unit and the in-car temperature sensor.B

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B1226 or DTC indicator B and AUTO: A Short in the In-Car Temperature Sensor Circuit

9. Check for continuity between climate control unit connector A (40P) terminals No. 5 and No. 8. CLIMATE CONTROL

UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)

1. Cl ear the DTCs with the HDS. 2, Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

r@ i

3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-9) orthe cl imate contro l unit (see page 21-10).

TR (LT BLU)

S-COM (GRN)

M.-TTRtTT

4. Check for DTCs, Is DTC B 1 2 2 8 o r B a n d A U T O in d ic a te d ? W ire side of fe m a l e terminals

YES-Go to step 5, NO-lntermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor connections in the in-car temperature sensor circuit,■ 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 6. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see page 21 -137), and test it (see page 21 -101). Is the in -c a r te m p e ra tu re s e n s o r O K? YES-With the humidity/in-car temperature sensor

disconnected, go to step 7. NO-Rep l ace the humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see page 21-137).■ 7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P). 8. Check for continuity between c l imate control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 5 and body ground. CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) TR (LT BLU)

'i L h U i 5| 6M 818I10I 11[12 1311411511811711{ | 21| 22j 23| 2412515®| 27128|5J9|30| 31| 3Z|33134135|36|37138\ / \ /

W ire side of fe m al e term inal s

Is there co n tin u ity? YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the climate control unit and the in-car temperature sensor.B

Is there co n tin u ity? YES-Repair a short in the wires between the c l imate contro l unit and the in-car temperature sensor.B NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,

and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the origina l climate contro l unit (see page 21-139).B

B sJ

DTC B1227 or DTC indicator C and AUTO:

An Open in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor Circuit

8. Check for continuity between climate control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 28 and outside air temperature sensor 2P connector termina l No. 2. CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A |4©Pi

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

W i re side of fe m a l e term inal s

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-9) or the cl imate control unit (see page 21-10). 4. Check for DTCs. Is D TC B 1 2 2 7 o r C a n d A U T O in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO- l ntermittent fai l ure, check for loose wires or poor connections in the outside air temperature sensor c irc u it!!

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale terminals

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Is there co n tin u ity ?

6. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see page 21-138), and test it (see page 21-101).

YES-Go to step 9.

Is the o u tsid e a ir te m p e ra tu re s e n s o r O K ?

YES-With the outside air temperature sensor disconnected, go to step 7. NO-Rep l ace the outside air temperature sensor (see page 21-138).■ 7. Disconnect cl imate control unit connector A (40P).

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the climate control unit and the outside air temperature sensor.B

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 9. Check for continuity between cl imate contro l unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 8 and outside air temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No. 1. CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) W ire side of fe m a l e terminals

DTC B1228 or DTC indicator D and AUTO: A Short in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor Circuit 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-9) or the climate control unit (see page 21-10). 4. Check for DTCs. is DTC B 1 2 2 8 o r D a n d A U T O in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5, NO-lntermittent fa ilu re .! OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),

W ire side of fem ale terminals 6. R e m o v e th e o u ts id e a ir t e m p e r a tu r e s e n s o r (s ee p a g e

Is there co n tin u ity ? YES-Check for l oose wires or poor connections at climate control* unit connector A (40P) and at the outside air temperature sensor 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate contro l unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original c l imate control unit (see page 21-133).■ NO-Repair an open in the wire between the climate control unit and the outside air temperature sensor.B

21-138), and test it (see page 21-101). is the o u tsid e a ir te m p e ra tu re s e n s o r O K?

YES-With the outside air temperature sensor disconnected, go to step 7, NO-Replace the outside air temperature sensor (see page 21-138).■ 7. Disconnect climate contro l unit connector A (40P). 8. Check for continuity between climate control unit connector A (40P) terminal No, 28 and body ground. CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

§J10j Mh? 13j t4j tS116117|IS119L/] I 21I22)23)?4|* |2B| I28S 30j il, Via [%I w[ 37] » \ / \ / TAW (PNK)

W ire side of female terminals

is there co n tin u ity?

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the c l imate contro l unit and the outside air temperature sensor.B

9, Check for continuity between c l imate contro l unit connector A (40P) termina l s No. 8 and No. 28. CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40PJ

DTC B1229 or DTC indicator E and AUTO: An Open in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

S-COfVJ (GRN) 13114115118j 17118| 211552123| 55*|25|2l8| ST7128|29|30f 31| 32[33|34|35|36|37[38\ / \ / ]TAN(PNiq

3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21 -9) or the climate control unit (see page 21-10). 4. Check for DTCs. Is D TC B 1 2 2 9 o r E a n d A U T O in d ic a te d ? YES-Go to step 5.

W ire side of female terminals

Is there co n tin uity? YES-Repair a short in the wires between the climate control unit and the outside air temperature sensor,■ NO-Substitute a known-good cl imate contro l unit,

and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original c l imate contro l unit (see page 21-139).H

NO-lntermittent fai l ure, check for loose wires or poor connections in the sun l ight sensor c irc u it.ll 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Disconnect the sun l ight sensor 5P connector, 7. Disconnect cl imate control unit connector A (40P). 8. Check for continuity between cl imate control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 29 and sun l ight sensor 5P connector terminal No. 4. CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) W ire side of fem ale terminals

| 10( 7lfl2 13114116116|17118119j/] 27 28 29 30 31 V

it r r 3 4 5 6

TS U N (PUR)

TS U N (PUR)

_______ 5 ~ ? 1

2

3

4

SU NLIG H T SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR W ire side of female terminals

Is there continuity? YES-Go to step 9. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the climate control unit and the sunlight sensor.B

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 9. Check for continuity between climate control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 8 and sunlight sensor 5P connector terminal No. 2, CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) W ire side of fe m al e term inal s

S^COM (GRN) 'llY f s [ 417161/1 8 9110j 11Jl2 131141151161^7j 18)19|/| 121122|23|24|2SI» |Z7| 2B|28I30I 3l|32| 33134|36I 36137I 38I/ I/

DTC B1230 or DTC indicator F and AUTO: A Short in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (ll). 3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-9) or the cl imate control unit (see page 21-10). 4. Check for DTCs, Is DTO B 1 2 3 0 o r P a n d A U T O in d ic a te d ?

S-GOM (GRN) _______ 1

2

3

4

5

SU NLIG H T SENSOR SP CONNECTOR W ire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, check for l oose wires or poor connections in the sunlight sensor circuit.B 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),

Is there co n tin uity?

6. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector.

YES-Go to step 10,

7. Disconnect cl imate contro l unit connector A (40P).

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the climate control unit and the sun l ight sensor.B

8. Check for continuity between climate contro l unit connector A (40P) terminal No, 23 and body ground.

10. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector, CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT C O N N E C T O i A (40P)

11. Reconnect cl imate contro l unit connector A (40P). 12. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-102). Is the s u n lig h t s e n s o r O K?

YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at climate control unit connector A (40P) and at the sunlight sensor 5P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate contro l unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original cl imate contro l unit (see page 21-139).B ■NO-Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-138).l

IzIaU U le j/je 9110| 11[12

|2 1(22)23)24(26126I27|aB|»| ao| SI(32)331d4|«I36(37)38t/L /

iTSUN (PUR)

(Q) W ire side of fe m al e term inal s

Is there co n tin uity?

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the c l imate contro l unit and the sunlight sensor.B NO-Go to step 9.

I

9, Check for continuity between climate control unit connector A (40P) terminals No. 8 and No. 29.

u

DTC B1231 or DTC indicator G and AUTO: An Open in the Evaporator Temperature Sensor Circuit (Front)

CLIM ATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. S-COM ftjRN) 3 i r i ] 7 r n i i z i i 9I10I 11112 13Il4115lie 117|l8jl91/1 | 21(22.| | 24| 235| 26|Z7| 2S| 29| 30| 31| 32133|34|36|36| 37|38I / } / T S U N (PUR)

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (I I). 3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-9) or the climate contro l unit (see page 21-10), 4. Check for DTCs. Is D T C B 12 3 1 o r G a n d A U T O in d ic a te d ?

W ire side of fem ale te rm in al s

Is th ere c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wires between the climate control unit and the sunlight sensor.B NO-Go to step 10. 10. Reconnect the sun l ight sensor 5P connector.

YES-Go to step 5, NO- l ntermittent fai l ure, check for l oose wires or poor connections in the front evaporator temperature sensor c ircu it.! 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Remove the front evaporator temperature sensor (see page 21-139), and test it (see page 21-108).

11. Reconnect c l imate control unit connector A (40P).

Is the fro n t e v a p o ra to r te m p e ra tu re s e n s o r O K ?

12. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-102).

YES-With the front evaporator temperature sensor disconnected, go to step 7.

Is the s u n lig h t s e n s o r O K?

YES-Substitute a known-good climate contro l unit,

and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, rep l ace the origina l c l imate control unit (see page 21-139).H

NO-Replace the front evaporator temperature sensor (see page 21-139).■ 7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).

NO-Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-138).■

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 8. Check for continuity between c l imate contro l unit connector A (40P) termina l No. 24 and front evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector termina l No. 2.

9. Check for continuity between c l imate contro l unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 8 and front evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No. 1.

CLIM ATE CONTROL U N IT C ONNECTOR A (40P)

W ire side of fem ale te rm in al s

CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

W ire side of fe m a l e term inals S -C O M (GRN)

'i T213141s [et / i 8 9| 10| 11j12 13114115116117118119[/T* | 21|22123|24| 2S]28| 27| 28|29|30| SIj 32133134|36| 36| 37| 38l/J^/ I

®

T E ¥ A |F)

,BRN> TEVA

(BRN)

(F)

FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale term inals

is there c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 9. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the climate control unit and the front evaporator temperature sensor.B

S -C O M

(GRN)

FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale term inals

Is there c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Check for l oose wires or poor connections at climate control unit connector A (40P) and at the front evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good c l imate contro l unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original c l imate control unit (see page 21-139).■ NO-Repair an open in the wire between the climate control unit and the front evaporator temperature sensor.B

DTC B1232 or DTC indicator H and AUTO: A Short in the Evaporator Temperature Sensor Circuit (Front)

9. Check for continuity between c l imate control unit connector A (40P) terminals No. 8 and No. 24. CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

1. Cl ear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

S -C O M (GRN)

3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-9) orthe climate contro l unit (see page 21-10). 4. Check for DTCs. Is D T C B 1 2 3 2 o r H a n d A U T O in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5.

W ire side of fem ale term inals

NO-lntermittent fa ilu re .! Is there co n tin u ity?

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Remove the front evaporator temperature sensor (see page 21-139), and test it (see page 21-106). Is the fro n t evaporator te m p e ra tu re s e n s o r O K ?

YES-With the front evaporator temperature sensor

disconnected, go to step 7. NO-Replace the front evaporator temperature sensor (see page 21-139).■ 7. Disconnect c l imate control unit connector A (40P). 8. Check for continuity between c l imate control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 24 and body ground. CLIM ATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

9 | 10 j 11 1 12 13 114 j 15 116 j 17 118 1191 / ] ' ’’ I f b U M e L / l a 22|23 24|2S|26|27|2 | 1 1

21

3129130| 31| | 33134|35|36 37138 9 9

W ire side of fem ale term inals

Is th e re co n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the c l imate contro l unit and the front evaporator temperature sensor.B

YES-Repair a short in the wires between the climate contro l unit and the front evaporator temperature sensor.B NO-Substitute a known-good climate control u n it and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original climate control unit (see page 21-133).HI

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B1233 or DTC indicator J and AUTO: An Open in the Air Mix Control Motor Circuit (Driver's) 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-9) or the climate contro l unit (see page 21-10).

9. Check for continuity between the fo l l owing terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P) and the driver's air mix contro l motor 7P connector. 40P: No. 6 No. 8

7P: No. 7 No. 5

N o. .1

Nr.?

CLIMATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) W i re side of fem ale term inals

4. Check for DTCs. Is D TC B 1 2 3 3 o r J a n d A U T O in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5.

NO- l ntermittent failure, check for l oose wires or poor connections in the driver’s air mix contro l motor circuit.® 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Test the driver’s air mix control motor (see page 21-103). Is the d riv e r's a ir m ix c o n tro l m o to r O K ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Rep l ace the driver’s air mix control motor (see page 21-135).■ 7. Disconnect the driver's air mix contro l motor 7P connector. 8. Disconnect climate contro l unit connector A (40P),

DRIVER'S AIR M IX CONTROL M O TO R 7P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale term inals

Is there c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Check for l oose wires or poor connections at climate contro l unit connector A (40P) and at the driver's air mix contro l motor 7P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate contro l unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original climate control unit (see page 21-133).■ NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the c l imate control unit and the driver’s air mix control motor,■

D

DTC B1234 or DTC indicator K and AUTO: A Short in the Air Mix Control Motor Circuit (Driver's)

U

10. Check for continuity between climate control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 11 and body ground. CLIM ATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

1. Cl ear the DTCs with the HDS. A M D -P (D) (PUR}

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-3) or the climate control unit (see page 21-10). 4. Check for DTCs. Is D T C B 1 2 3 4 o r K a n d A U T O in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO- l ntermittent failure, check for looses wires or poor connections in the driver's air mix control motor c irc u it.! 5. Check for DTCs. Are th e se D T C s a lso p re s e n t; B 1 2 3 7 o r N a n d AU T O , and/or B1245 o r G, a n d /o r B 2 9 6 8 o r A a n d W IN D S H IE LD D E F R O S T a n d /o r B 2 9 8 0 o r B a n d W IN D S H IE LD DEFROST?

W ire side of fem ale term inals

Is there c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the c l imate contro l unit and the driver's air mix control fn o to r.il NO-Go to step 11. 11. Check for continuity between climate control unit connector A (40P) terminals No. 6 and No, 11,

YES-Go to step 13. NO-Go to step 8.

CLIM ATE CONTROL U N IT C ONNECTOR A (40P)

8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 7. Test the driver's air mix contro l motor (see page 21-103). Is the d riv e r's a ir m ix c o n tro l m o to r O K ?

ssv — © — I AMD-P (D) (BLU)

(PUR)

9I10I11j 12 13114115116| 17118119[/| 121| 22|23|24| 2S|5S8| 2T| 28|29| 30| 31| 32133|34-1^ |36|37|38[/[/''

YES-Go to step 8. NO-Rep l ace the driver's air mix contro l motor (see page 21-135).■

W ire side of fem ale term inals

8. Disconnect the driver's air mix contro l motor 7P connector.

Is th ere c o n tin u ity ?

9. Disconnect c l imate control unit connector A (40P).

YES-Repair a short in the wires J NO-Go to step 12.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the voltage between c l imate control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 11 and body ground.

15. Check for continuity between climate control unit connector A (40P) termina l No. 8 and body ground. CLIM ATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

CLIM ATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A |4©PJ S 5 ¥ (BLU)

9| 10| 11112 13114116116| 17118119[ / l " | | 27| 218|29| 30| 31132133|34|36|36| 37| SSL/]/

A M D -P |D) (PUR!

| 21 | 22 | 23 | 2-4 | 2S 26

’ifz U U M e H s 9| 10| 11[12 13114115[16117118119I/I | 2t | 22j 23| 2| ^5| 38| 37| 38l/ j / W ire side of fe m al e term inals

is th e re a b o u t 5 V?

Y,

YES-Go to step 20. NO-Check for a loose wire or poor connection at climate control unit connector A (40P), If the connection is good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, rep l ace the origina l c l imate control unit (see page 21-139).■

W ire side of fem ale term inals

D o e s the v o lta g e re m a in a t a b o u t 6 V?

YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original c l imate control unit (see page 21-139).■ NO-Rep l ace the component that caused the voltage drop.B

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B1235 or DTC indicator L and AUTO: A Problem in the Air Mix Control Motor Circuit, Linkage, Door, or Motor (Driver's) 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-9) orthe climate contro l unit (see page 21-10).

3. Check for continuity between the following terminals of climate contro l unit connector A (40P) and the driver's air mix contro l motor 7P connector. 40P: No. 12 No, 13

7P: N c.2 No. 1

CLIM ATE CONTROL U N IT C ONNECTOR A (40P) W ire side of fem ale term inals

4. Check for DTCs. Is D TC B 1 2 3 6 o r L a n d A U T O in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor connections in the driver's air mix contro l motor circuit.® 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Test the driver's air mix contro l motor (see page 21-103). is the d riv e r's a ir m ix co n tro l m o to r O K ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Replace the driver's air mix control motor (see page 21-135), or repair the driver's air mix contro l l inkage or door.B 7. Disconnect the driver's air mix contro l motor 7P connector. 8. Disconnect climate contro l unit connector A (40P).

DRl¥ER'S AIR M IX CONTROL M O TO R 7P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale term inals

Is there c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 10, NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the driver's air mix control m o to r.ll

B

10. Check for continuity between body ground and climate control unit connector A (40P) termina l s No. 12 and No. 13 individua ll y. CLIM ATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A {4©P) M -C O O l (D) (LT BLU) IVl-HOT (D) (PNK)

B

DTC B1236 or DTC indicator M and AUTO: An Open in the Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor Circuit 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-9) or the climate control unit (see page 21-10). 4. Check for DTCs. Is D T C B 1 2 3 6 o r M a n d A U T O in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. W ire side of fe m a l e term inals

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the driver's air mix control motor.® NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the origina l climate control unit (see page

21-139).B

NO-lntermittent fai l ure, check for loose wires or poor connections in the passenger's air mix control motor c irc u it.!

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Test the passenger's air mix contro l motor (see page 21-104). Is the p a s s e n g e r's a ir m ix c o n tro l m o to r O K ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Replace the passenger's air mix contro l motor (see page 21-135! I 7. Disconnect the passenger's air mix contro l motor 7P connector, 8. Disconnect climate contro l unit connector A (40P).

(cont'd)

DTC 1 roubleshooting (cont'd) 9, Check for continuity between the fo l lowing terminals of cl imate control unit connector A (40P) and the passenger's air mix control motor 7P connector. 40 P: No. 6 No. 8 No. 30

7P; No. 7 No. 5 No. 3

C LIM ATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A

DTC 81237 or DTC indicator N and AUTO: A Short in the Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor Circuit 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

(40P)

W ire side of fem ale term inals

3. Do the self-diagnostic function with the HDS (see page 21-9) or the climate contro l unit (see page 21-10). 4. Check for DTCs. is D T C B 1 2 3 7 o r N a n d A U T O in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor connections in the passenger's air mix control motor circuit!! 5. Check for DTCs. Are these DTCs also p re s e n t; B1234 or K and AUTO, a n d /o r B 1 2 4 5 o r G, a n d /o r B 2 9 8 8 o r A a n d W IN D S H IE L D DEFROST, a n d /o r B 2 9 8 0 o r B a n d W IN D S H IE LD PASSENGER'S AIR M I X CONTROL M O TO R 7P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale term inals

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at climate control unit connector A (40P) and at the passenger's air mix control motor 7P connector. If the

connections are good, substitute a known-good climate contro l unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, rep l ace the original climate contro l unit (see page 21-139).■ NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the c l imate control unit and the passenger's air mix control motor. ■

DEFROST?

YES-Go to step 13. NO-Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Test the passenger's air mix control motor (see page

21-104). Is the passenger's air mix control motor OK? YES-Go to step 8. NO-Replace the passenger's air mix control motor (see page 2 1 -1 3 5 ).■ 8. Disconnect the passenger's air mix control motor 7P connector.

9. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).

a

10. Check for continuity between c l imate contro l unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 30 and body ground.

m

12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the voltage between c l imate contro l unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 30 and body ground,

CLIM ATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) CLIM ATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

I—

9I10j 11T12 13114115118117| l8Il9[/] |2t j 22j23] 24(25| 26j 27)28|29)30] 31| 32133[34[35| 36| 37|38l / l / AMD-P CP) (BLU)

1284 66 E H 28I27I2BI29I90I 31132I33I34I36|36I37I38k E l AMD-P (P)

\fB L U )

W ire side of fem ale te rm in a l s W ire side of fe m a l e term inals

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the c l imate control unit and the passenger's air mix contro l m otor.■ NO-Go to step 11. 11. Check for continuity between c l imate control unit connector A (40P) terminals No. 6 and No, 30. CLIM ATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

S 5 ¥ fBLU)

1j 2| 3| 4| 6| 8| / | 8 9J10j 11112 13 14116118 17Il8 119I / I | 21| iZf23f/4 j S\ A>p? | A ] A | Ojil | i/\&\ J4[ 5%}38| 37| 38| / | / I AMD-P (P) (BLU)

W ire side of fem ale term inals

Is there a n y voltage?

YES-Repair a short to power in the wire(s) between the c l imate control unit and the passenger's air mix control motor. This short may al so damage the climate control unit. Repair a short to power before replacing the cl imate control u n it .l NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original climate control unit (see page 21-133).■

13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the c l imate contro l unit connector A (40P). 14. Disconnect these items; • Driver's air mix control motor • Passenger's air mix control motor • Rear air mix contro l motor • Humidity/in-car temperature sensor • A/C pressure sensor

Is there c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short in the wires J NO-Go to step 12.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 15. Check for continuity between climate control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 6 and body ground.

19. Turn the ignition' switch to ON (II), and measure the voltage between c l imate contro l unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 8 and body ground.

CLIM ATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40PJ CLIM ATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) S 5 ¥ (BLU) S5W |[BLU)

9| 10| 11112 13114115116[17118119|7l

717

T T r r r T .T s T .L /ie 9 110| 11112 13114| IB116J17118119^7]' | 2l|22|2S|2*|2B| a |z 7 |a | 28|30|3l| a2|33| 3*|36|36|s7|38|717

Options> In f o Version. The version number will appear near the top of the screen. Write down the version number, then call Midtronics at 800-778-1995 to verify you have the latest software version. To check the software version on the GR8, do this: • Press the POWER button, • Read the version number on the screen. It should appear for about 5 seconds. • Or from the Main Menu, select: Options> In f o I Version. The version number will appear on the screen. Write down the version number, then call Midtronics at 800-778-1995 to verify you have the latest software version.

NOTE: For set up, customization, and other available features, refer to the ED-18 user's manual, 1. Connect the leads to the positive and negative terminal of the battery. 2. Use the arrow keys to select the Battery test, then press ENTER, then follow the prompts, NOTE: • Make sure to enter the correct cold cranking ampere (CCA) rating of the battery. You can find the CCA printed on the label on the top of the battery. If the CCA rating is not entered correctly, the test result w ill not be accurate. • Make sure you select FLOODED for the battery type. 3. Here are the four possible battery conditions: • GOOD BATTERY: The battery has at least 60 percent of its charge and good state of health. No action is required. • GR8 DIAGNOSTIC TEST NEEDED: The battery voltage is low. Connect the GR8 and use the diagnostic test to determine if the battery is GOOD or needs to be REPLACED. • REPLACE BATTERY: The battery condition is poor. Replace it. • BAD CELL: There is a problem with the battery. Replace it.

Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection Using the GR8 Battery Diagnostic Station

Disconnection

NOTE; • For set up, customization, and other available features, refer to the GR8 user's manual. • On the GR-8, you ca n select two modes: DEALER INVENTORY or CUSTOMER VEHICLE.

NOTE: Some systems store data in memory that is lost when the battery is disconnected. Do the following procedures before disconnecting the battery,

- DEALER INVENTORY: Use this mode for vehicles in dealer inventory. The GR8 charges the battery to 80% of its state-of-charge. If the battery condition is OK, the GR8 states the battery is GOOD. If you leave the GR8 attached to the battery, it changes to Top Off mode, and continues to charge the battery until it is at 100% of its state-of-charge. - CUSTOMER VEHICLE; In order to give a waiting customer quicker service, the GR8 charges the battery to 80% of its state-of-charge. If the battery condition is OK, the GR8 states the battery is GOOD. If you leave the GR8 attached to the battery, it changes to Top Off mode, and continues to charge the battery until it is at 100% of its state-of-charge.

1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio or the audio-navigation unit 2. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect and isolate the negative cable from the battery. NOTE: Always disconnect the negative cable from the battery first. 4. Disconnect the positive cable from the battery.

1. Connect the leads to the positive and negative terminal of the battery. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Diagnostic, and follow the prompts. NOTE: • Make sure to enter the correct cold cranking ampere (CCA) rating of the battery. You can find the CCA printed on the label on top of the battery. If the CCA rating is not entered correctly, the test result will not be accurate, • Make sure you select FLOODED for the battery type. 3. Here are the three possible battery conditions: • GOOD BATTERY: The battery state of health is good and state of charge is at least 80%. • REPLACE BATTERY: The battery condition is poor. Replace it • BAD CELL: There is a problem with the battery. Replace it.

(cont'd)

Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (cont'd)

Battery Removal and Installation

Reconnection

NOTE; The battery terminal disconnection/reconnection procedure (see page 22-95) must be done before and after doing this procedure. Some systems store data in memory that is lost when the battery is disconnected.

NOTE: • Some systems store data in memory that is lost when the battery is disconnected. Do the following procedures before disconnecting the battery, • The battery sensor is initialized and recalibrated automatically after reconnecting. Review Battery Management System Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-108). 1. Clean the battery terminals. 2. Test the battery (see page 22-94). 3. Reconnect the positive cable (A) to the battery (B) first, then reconnect the negative cable (£) to the battery. NOTE: Always connect the positive cable to the battery first.

4. Apply multipurpose grease to the terminals to prevent corrosion. 5. Do the steering column position memorization procedure (see page 17-13). 6. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the audio navigation unit 7. Set the clock (for vehicles without navigation). 8. If equipped, initialize the navigation system (see page 23-182). 9. If the power tailgate was opened while the battery was disconnected, the power tailgate control unit must be reset (see page 22-601).

Removal 1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95). 2. Remove the two nuts (A) securing the battery hold down plate, then remove the battery setting plate (B) and the battery (C). A

Parasitic Draw Check Installation

Special Tools Required

1. Install the battery (A), then install the battery hold down plate (B).

LH41 AC/DC low current clamp meter, FLULH41A* *: Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program, 888-424-6857

C

1. Make sure the battery is fully charged, and that all the vehicle's electrical accessories are turned off. 2. Open the hood. 3. Disconnect the security hood switch 2P connector to allow the security system to arm itself with the hood open. 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the ignition key from the ignition switch. 6. Get out of the vehicle, and close all the doors. 7. Lock the doors with the keyless transmitter. 8. Make sure the map lights are turned off and the security alarm system is armed by confirming that the security indicator is flashing. 9. Wait at least 20 minutes. 10. Attach the LH41 AC/DC low current clamp meter (A) to the battery ground cable (B). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions, then measure the parasitic draw. NOTE: If you are using a digital multimeter, go to step

2. Tighten the two nuts (C) equally until the battery is stable.

12.

NOTE; Do not deform the battery hold down plate by over-tightening the nuts. 3. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-96), NOTE: Make sure the battery is installed correctly, and the positive and negative terminals are not reverse connected.

Is the parasitic draw 52 mA or less?

YES-Go to step 18. NO-Go to step 11.

(cont'd)

Parasitic Draw Check (cont'd) 11. Check for poor connections and loose terminals at the battery and the alternator terminals.

14. Connect the red ( + ) test lead (A) to the negative terminal (B) of the battery ground cable.

Are the connections OK?

YES-Do the alternator and regulator circuit troubleshooting (see page 4-28), and alternator control circuit troubleshooting (see page 4-27), then recheck. If the system is OK, the battery is flat from self-discharge, Check the battery (see page 22-34), then recharge or replace the battery (see page 22-96).11 NO-Reconnect the terminals, then recheck.B 12. Check the following items before measuring; • The multimeter dial is set to the DCA (direct current amps) range. • The red test probe is plugged into the red A (Amps) jack, and the black test probe is plugged into the COM jack.

• Tc cvoid blowing an input fuse, start by setting the range above 10 A. 13. Loosen the nut (A) of the battery negative terminal. NOTE: Follow the instructions exactly to avoid disconnecting the battery ground cable terminal from the battery negative terminal,

15. Slide the negative terminal of the battery ground cable upwards from the battery negative terminal so that it still makes contact and avoids disconnection. Then connect the black (—) test lead (C) to the battery negative terminal post. 16. Disconnect the negative terminal (A) of the battery ground cable from the battery negative terminal post

17. Measure the parasitic draw. is the parasitic draw 52 mA or less?

YES-The system is normal at this tim e.B NO-Go to step 18.

18. Check if there are any aftermarket electrical accessories installed on the vehicle. Are there any aftermarket electrical accessories

installed?

YES-Go to step 13. NO-Go to step 21. 19. Make sure that the aftermarket electrical accessories have been properly installed. Are the aftermarket electrical accessories installed

correctly? YES-Go to step 20. NO-Repair, reinstall, or remove the aftermarket accessories, then recheck.B 20. Disconnect the aftermarket electrical accessories one at a time, then measure the parasitic draw. -1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and then back to LOCK (0). -2. Get out of the vehicle and close all doors. -3. Wait at least 40 seconds. -4. Measure the parasitic draw. Is the parasitic draw 52 mA or less? YES-Replace or repair the aftermarket electrical accessory that reduced the parasitic draw to 52 mA or less when disconnected.■ NO-Go to step 21.

-1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and then back to LOCK (0). -2. Get out of the vehicle and close all doors. -3. Wait at least 40 seconds. -4. Measure the parasitic draw. Is the parasitic draw 52 m A or less?

YES-Disconnect the control units from the B-CAN circuit one at a time, perform steps 1 —4 above, then measure the parasitic draw. Do the input test for the control unit that reduced the parasitic draw to 52 mA or less when disconnected.■ NO-Disconnect the control units from the No. 4 (40 A) fuse circuit one at a time, perform steps 1 —4 above, then measure the parasitic draw. Replace the control unit that reduced the parasitic draw to 52 mA or less when disconnected,■ 24. Remove the No. 3 (IG) (60 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box, then measure the parasitic draw. -1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and then back to LOCK (0). -2. Get out of the vehicle and close all doors. -3. Wait at least 40 seconds, -4. Measure the parasitic draw. is the parasitic draw 52 m A or less? YES-Go to step 25.

21. Remove the No. 4 (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box, then measure the parasitic draw. Is

23. Install the No. 4 (40 A) fuse to the main under-hood fuse box, then measure the parasitic draw.

the parasitic draw 34.5 mA or less?

YES-Go to step 22. NO-Go to step 24. 22. Connect immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground with a jumper wire. IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT 7P CONNECTOR

NO-Remove the fuses from the fuse box one at a time, perforin steps 1 —4 above then, measure the parasitic draw in order to isolate the circuit which contains the fault. If all circuits are OK, check the starter circuits and do the starter performance test (see page 4 - 9 ) , ■ 25. Install the No. 3 (IG) (50 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box. 26. Disconnect the ignition switch 7P connector, then measure the parasitic draw. Is the parasitic draw 52 m A or less? YES-Replace the ignition switch (see page 2 2 -1 1 8 ).■

s z ?

3 4 5

CD

CM

1

7

B-CAN (LT G RN) JU M PER WIRE

Wire side of female term inals

NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the No. 3 (IG) (50 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box and ignition switch.■

Symptom Troubleshooting Low or Dead Battery NOTE: A battery might be discharged under these conditions: • Driving a vehicle 6 miles (10 km) or less per day, • Leaving a vehicle parked without removing the ignition key from the ignition switch. • Leaving the vehicle idling high electrical loads such as headlight, seat heaters, wipers, rear window defogger, etc, • Parking the vehicle with the hood unlatched prevents the security system from arming, which causes excessive parasitic draw. 1. Check the battery (see page 22-94). Recharge or replace the battery (see page 22-96) if necessary. 2. Start the engine, and check the charging system indicator. Does the charging system indicator go off with the engine running?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-Go to step 3.

5. Lock the doors with the transmitter LOCK button. Make sure the security alarm system arms by confirming that the security indicator is flashing slowly, about once every 3 seconds. is the security alarm system armed? YES-Go to step 8. NO-Go to the symptom troubleshooting for the security alarm system {see page 2 2 -2 0 4 ).■ 8. Check the following items with the ignition key removed from the ignition switch; • The brake lights are off when the brake pedal is not pressed. • The courtesy lights are off with all doors closed. • The cargo area light is off with the tailgate closed. • The radiator and condenser fans are not running, • The audio unit (including navigation) is off. • There is no operating sound from the VSA modulator-control unit. • The rear window defogger and the power mirror defoggers are off. Are aii of the check items OK?

3. Check for PGM-FI DTCs. YES-Check the parasitic draw (see page 2 2 -9 7 ),■ Are DTCs P0582, P1549, P18BBf and/or P18BC indicated?

YES-Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■ NO-Do the drive belt inspection (see page 4-28), drive belt auto-tensioner inspection (see page 4-29), and alternator and regulator circuit troubleshooting (see page 4 -2 8 ).■ 4. Check the following items: • The hazard warning switch is off. • The front individual map light and interior light switches are off. • All of the doors, hood, and tailgate a re closed. • The brake pedal is not pressed. Are all of the check items OK?

YES-Go to step 5.

NO-Turn off the applicable switch, and check the parasitic draw (see page 2 2 -9 7 ),■

NO-Troubleshoot and repair the affected circuits,■

Component Location Index

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

(cont'd)

Component Location Index (cont'd)

ROOF CONSOLE (Has b u ilt in fro n t individual m ap light) Input Test/Replacement page 22-311

FRONT PASSENGER’S FOOTWELL LIGHT Test/Replacement, page 22-317

FRONT PASSENGER'S MPCS UNIT Input Test, page 22-357 REAR INDIVIDUAL M A P LIGHT (2ND) Input Test/Replacement, page 22-31

REAR INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHT (3RD) Input Test/Rep l acement, page 22-313

MICU (Built in to the under-dash fuse/relay box) Input Test, page 22-324 R eplacem ent page 22-90

RIGHT TAILGATE LIGHT R eplacem ent page 22-315

LEFT TAILGATE LIGHT Replacem ent page 22-315

DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT Input Test, page 22-324

LEFT REAR DOOR COURTESY LIGHT Rep l a ce m e n t page 22-315 DRIVERS DOOR COURTESY LIGHT Replacem ent page 22-315

RIGHT REAR DOOR COURTESY LIGHT Rep l acement, page 22-316

REAR MICU (Built in to th e rear fuse/relay box) Input T e s t page 22-324 R eplacem ent page 22-93

System Description This system consists of the battery sensor, the gauge control module, the M ICU, the rear MICU, the driver's MPCS unit, the front passenger's MPCS unit the alternator, and the PCM, The battery sensor measures current voltage, and temperature values of the battery in all ignition switch positions. This data is used to control the alternator output, the idle speed, and the interior lights. These are the advantages of this system: • • • • •

Helps to Helps to Helps to Helps to Helps to

prevent over-discharge of the battery protect engine cranking amps extend battery life improve fuel economy alert the client of battery condition

Battery Management W hile The Ignition Sw itch Is In LOCK (0) W ith Electrical Devices ON When the battery sensor detects the battery voltage decreasing, that information is sent to the gauge control module via the UART line. The gauge control module then operates a beeper, and displays the message "SW ITCH OFF ALL LIGHTS AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES" on the multi-information display (MID) to inform the client that electrical devices should be turned off. If electrical devices are not turned off and the battery voltage decreases more, the gauge control module sends an interior lights off signal to the MICU, the rear M ICU, and/or the driver's MPCS unit via the B-CAN line {the front passenger's MPCS unit receives that signal from the driver's MPCS unit via the UART line). Based on that signal, the units cut off the ground circuits of the interior lights and turns them off.

FRONT PASSENGER’S MPCS UNIT

-< ]

FRONT PASSENGER’S DOOR COURTESY LIGHT

■ FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS (b u ilt into the roof console) • REAR INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS ■ FOOTWELL LIGHTS ■ IGNITION KEY LIGHT

DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT

-< ]

NOTE: The message on the multi-information display (MID) is not applied to '12 model. (cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Battery Management W hile The Engine Is Idling While the engine is idling, the battery sensor measures current, voltage, and temperature values of the battery, and this data is sent to the gauge control module via the UART line. The gauge control module sends the idle speed control signal and alternator control signal to the PCM via the F-CAN A line. Then, based on those signals and the signal from the ELD, the PCM determines the idle speed that is appropriate for the current state of charge of the battery, and also controls the alternator output. Because of these functions, battery condition is maintained, and fuel economy is improved. If the battery sensor detects any problems, a warning message is shown on the multi-information display (MID) to inform the client that the system needs attention.

'10-11 m odels ■ CHECK BATTERY SENSOR

’12 model |

H ■ ■

-H

BATTERY

E3

I

\

/

1

CHARGE LOW SEE OWNER'S

I" "1

CHECK BATTERY SENSOR

■

M ANUAL

NOTE: • Even though the engine is not idling, the warning messages w ill be shown as long as the ignition switch is ON (II). • If there are any problems with the charging system or the battery, the charging system indicator comes on at the same time. • The most common causes for "BATTERY CHARGE LOW" message are: 1: Short-trip driving 2: Using vehicle electrical devices or aftermarket electrical accessories for long periods with the engine OFF and the ignition ON, • If the "BATTERY CHARGE LOW" message is displayed after fully charging the battery, disconnect the gray 2-pin connector next to the Battery Sensor for 10 seconds, then reconnect the connector and the warning w ill be removed from the display, • If battery replacement is required, always replace with a new battery of the same group size.

Circuit Diagram CANline ................................... ; Other comm unication line BATTERY

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

Symptom Troubleshooting '10-12 models MID Indication

Possible cause • Faulty connector • Faulty wire harness • Faulty battery sensor

- - CHECK |- -I BATTERY

SENSOR

Diagnostic procedure 1. Inspect the connector to be sure it is making good contact. 2. Check for an open or high resistance in the wire. 3. Disconnect the battery sensor from the battery negative terminal and reconnect it. 4. Check for DTCs. 5. Replace the battery sensor.

Notes The battery sensor is initialized and recalibrated automatically after reconnecting. To do this quickly, turn off all electrical loads, lock all doors with the transmitter, and remove the No. 9 (7.5 A) fuse from the main under-hood fuse box. Then disconnect the battery sensor 2P I connector, wait 5 seconds, j reconnect it, and reinstall the fuse. The battery sensor will be initialized and recalibrated within 10 minutes.

'10-11 models MID Indication

Possible cause F a u l t y b a tte ry

Diagnostic procedure

Notes

T e s t th e b a tte r y (see p a g e

22-34).

HATTERY CHARGE LOW SEEOWNER'S MANUAL DATTERY CHARGE LOW SWITCH OFF ALL LIGHTS AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES

• Faulty alternator • Low battery voltage • Low battery charge

1.Troubleshoot the charging system. 2. Check for excessive parasitic draw with the ignition switch in LOCK (OL and the key removed.

Long-term parking, frequent short trips, aftermarket accessories, or using vehicle electrical devices without the engine running for long periods may cause this condition.

Battery Sensor Input Test NOTE: Before testing, make sure the battery ground cable is installed correctly, and make sure there is continuity between the battery negative terminal and ground terminal G1. 1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the battery sensor (B). 10-11 models

*12 model

2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be s u re they are all making good contact. • If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. • If the terminals look OK, go to step 3. 3. With the 2P connector still disconnected, do the following input tests: • If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If all the input tests prove OK, replace the battery sensor.

(cont'd)

Battery Sensor Input Test (cont'd) Cavity

Wire

Test Condition

2

GRN

Under all conditions

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be battery voltage.

1

PNK

Under all conditions

Check for continuity between terminal No. 1 and gauge control module connector B (24P) terminal No. 7: There should be continuity.

Test: Desired result

Possible cause if desired result is not obtained • Blown No. 9 (7.5 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box • Faulty main under-hood fuse box • An open or high listance in the wire An open or high resistance in the wire

Power Relay Test Special Tools Required . Relay Puller 07AAC-000A1A0 or 07AAC-000A2A1 • Relay Socket Extension (4 Pin) 07AGK-000A1A0 • Relay Socket Extension (5 Pin) 07AGK-000A2A0

Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. Relay

Test

A/C compressor clutch relay

Normally-open

A/C condenser fan relay Accessory power socket relay Cargo area accessory power socket relay Front blower motor relay Front seat heater relay Fog light relay Headlight low beam relay Headlight washer relay Interior light relay PGM-FI main relay 2 (Fuel pump) Power window relay Radiator fan relay Rear blower motor relay Rear window defogger relay Second row seat heater relay SH-AWD relay Starter cut relay 1, 2 TECH relay ACC cut relay Brake light relay Fan control relay IG2 cut relay

four-terminal type

Five-terminal type

NOTE: • The following relays are part of the relay control module: PGM-FI main relay 1, ignition coil relay, PGM-FI subrelay and ETCS control relay. To test these relays, do the relay control module test. • Using the relay puller, carefully remove the relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box using the relay puller. Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the relay.

Power Relay Test (cont'd) Normally-open Four-terminal Type

Five-terminal Ty p©

Check for continuity between the terminals. • There should be continuity between terminals No. 1 and No. 2 when battery power is connected to terminal No. 4f and body ground is connected to terminal No. 3. • There should be no continuity between terminals No. 1 and No. 2 when power is disconnected.

Check for continuity' between the terminals. • There should be continuity between terminals No. 1 and No. 2 when battery power is connected to terminal No. 5, and body ground is connected to terminal No. 3.

1

• There should be continuity between terminals No. 1 and No. 4 when power is disconnected.

1

9

9

o 5

2. Connect battery power to terminal €2.

Relay Control Module Test The relay control module is part of the under-hood fuse/relay box, and it contains these relays: • PGM-FI main relay. 1 • Ignition coil relay • PGM-FI subrelay • ETCS control relay • Horn relay If any of these relays fail the test, replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. 1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-35), then disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connectors C (2P), E (14P), and H (9P). NOTE; A ll connector views are wire side of female terminals. UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR C (2P)

pJ— L i 1 2 UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (14P) n 1

/ 7 Lr— 1/

3

J — l

9

11

10

4

5

12

13

„™jti 6 14 — tJ

PGM-FI main relay 1: • Connect terminal E6 to body ground. There should be battery voltage between terminal H1 and body ground. • Disconnect terminal E5 from the body ground. There should be no voltage between terminal H1 and the body ground. Ignition coil relay; • Connect terminal E5 to body ground. There should be battery voltage between terminal H6 and body ground. • Disconnect terminal E5 from the body ground. There should be no voltage between terminal H6 and the body ground. PGM-FI subrelay • Connect terminals E5 and E13 to body ground. There should be battery voltage between terminal H9 and body ground. • Disconnect terminal E5 from the body ground. There should be no voltage between terminal H9 and the body ground. ETCS control relay: • Connect terminals E5 and E14 to body ground. There should be battery voltage between terminal H7 and body ground. • Disconnect terminal E5 from the body ground. There should be no voltage between terminal H7 and body ground.

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR H (9P)

3. Connect battery power to terminal H3.

n

n________ 1 3 J—

/

4

5

0

7

/

9 ---- L

Horn relay: • Connect terminal E4 to body ground. There should be battery voltage between terminal H4 and body ground, and between terminal H5 and body ground. • Disconnect terminal E4 from the body ground. There should be no voltage between terminal H4 and body ground, and between terminal H5 and body ground.

C o m p o n e n t L o c a tio n

In d e x

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

iSTEERiNG LOCK ASSEMBLY /K ey I nterlock System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 22-114 I Key Interlock Solenoid T e s t page 22-116

BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Test, page 22-282

PARK PIN SWITCH Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 22-114 Test, page 22-117 Replacement, page 14-254

Circuit Diagram IGNITION SWITCH

BLK

BLK

GRN

L _ 0 _ J 7

i Lx

G101

TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (Closed: in P position)

PARK PIN SWITCH {Open: in P position)

1

A

G503

G801

Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or servicing.

10. Check for continuity between steering lock 6P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.

STEERING LOCK 6P CONNECTOR

1. Check the A/T system DTCs with the HDS. Are DTCs P0705 and/or P0706 indicated?

YES-Go to DTC troubleshooting P0705 (see page 14-87), P0708 (see page 14-88).

3 4 5

2

1

6

KEY LOCK SOL (BLU)

NO-Go to step 2. 2. Move the shift lever to P and set the parking brake. 3. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-128). 4. Disconnect the steering lock 6P connector.

Wire side of female term inals

is there continuity?

5. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I).

Y E S -R e p a ir a s h o r t to b o d y g r o u n d in th e w ir e b e tw e e n th e ke y in t e r l o c k s o l e n o id a n d th e M IC U .11

6. C h e c k if th e ig n itio n s w itc h can be tu r n e d to LO C K (0).

N O - G o to s te p 11.

Can the ignition switch be turned to LOCK (0)? YES-Go to step 7.

11. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay box connector P (30P) terminal No. 15 and steering lock 6P connector terminal No. 3

NO-Replace the steering lock (see page 17-14).■ UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR P (30P)

7. Check the No. 32 (10A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box,

W ire side of fem ale te rm in a l s

is the fuse OK? 1

YES-Go to step 8. NO-Replace the fuse. If the fuse blows again, repair a short to ground in the No. 32 (10A) fuse circuit.

2

15 18 9

3

5

9 /

/

8

7 X

20 9

22 | X 9

9

9 10 11 12 13 14

9

25 26 27 28 9

30

KEY LOCK SOL fBLU)

8. Make sure the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0). 9. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector P (30P).

KEY LOCK SOL (BLU)

2

3

4

5

6

STEERING LOCK 6P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale te rm in a l s

Is there continuity? YES-Go to step 12. NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire between the key interlock solenoid and the M IC U .il 12. Move the shift lever to P. 13. Remove the driver's center console trim (see step 4 on page 20-104). 14. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light 6P connector.

15, Do the park pin switch test (see page 22-117). Is the switch OK?

17, Check for continuity between shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light BP connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.

YES-Go to step 16. SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID/PARK PIN SWITCH/ A /T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL LIGHT 6P CONNECTOR

NO-Check the park pin switch installation. If the switch installation is OK, the park pin switch is faulty; replace the park pin switch (see page 14-254) and retest. ■

GND (BLK)

16. Check for continuity between shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light 6P connectorterminal No, 1 and body ground. SHIFT LOCK SOLENOiP/PARK. PIN SWITCH/ A /T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL LIGHT 6P CONNECTOR

m— in _ 1 2 3

■I 4

5

6

W ire side of fe m a l e te rm in a l s

Is there continuity? YES-Go to step 18. NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire between shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light 6P connectorterminal No. 2 and body ground (G503).B

Wire side of female term inals

18. Check the A/T system Data List with the HDS. is there continuity? YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light 6P connector terminal No. 1 and the M ICU.■ NO-Go to step 17.

is the transmission range switch indicated ON when the shift lever is in P, and is the transmission range switch indicated OFF when the shift lower is shifted to any position other than P? YES-Go to step 20. NO-Go to step J 3. 19. Do the transmission range switch test (see page 14-234). is the switch OK? YES-Go to step 20. NO-Check the transmission range switch installation. If the switch installation is OK, replace the transmission range switch (see page 14-236) and retest. ■ 20. Disconnect the transmission range switch 10P connector. 21. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector P

OOP).

(cont'd)

Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) 22. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay box connector P (30P) terminal No. 18 and transmission range switch 10P connectorterminal No. 7. UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR P (30P) Wire side of female term inals

Key Interlock Solenoid Test NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or servicing. 1. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-128). 2. Disconnect the steering lock assembly 6P connector (A), and then turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY ( I ).

1 4 /

5 10 ATP-P (BLU/BLK)

9

8

2

1

7

6

TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR Terminal side of female term inals

Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 23. NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire between transmission range switch 10P connector terminal No. 7 and MICU.B 23, Check for continuity between transmission range switch 10P connectorterminal No. 8 and body ground. TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR

10

4 / 9

8

2

1

7

CO

5

T I GND (BLK)

U Terminal side of female term inals

is there continuity? YES-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 2 2 -3 0 ).■ NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the ground wire or poor ground (G101).H

3. Connect power to steering lock assembly 6P connectorterminal No. 4, and ground steering lock assembly 6P connector terminal No. 3, then try turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0); the ignition switch should not turn. 4. Disconnect power and ground from terminals, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and remove the key; the ignition switch should turn and the key can be removed, 5. If the key interlock solenoid does not work as specified, replace the steering lock assembly (see page 17-14).

Park Pin Switch Test

ignition Switch Test

1, Remove the driver's center console trim (see step 4 on page 20-104).

NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or servicing.

2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the shift lock solenoid/park pin switch/AT gear position indicator panel light connector (B),

1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-35). 2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-128). 3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the ignition switch (B),

3. Check for continuity between terminals No. 1 and No. 2. • There should be continuity when the shift lever is moved out of P. • There should be no continuity when the shift lever is moved to P. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the park pin switch (see page 14-254).

4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Term inal Position

RED WHT PNK (ACC) (BAT) (IG1)

ORN (IG2)

YEL (ST)

0 (LOCK) I (ACCESSORY) ii (ON) 111 (START)

o——o O—

—o Sa — —o o-

—o —o

5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition switch (see page 22-118). 6. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-96).

Ignition Switch Replacement NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or servicing. 1, Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95). 2, Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-128). 3, Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the ignition switch (B).

4. Remove the two screws and the ignition switch. 5, Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. 8. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-96).

Component Location Index

REAR MICU (Built in to th e rear fuse/relay box) I nput Test, page 22-183 R eplacem ent page 22-93'

(cont'd)

Component Location Index (cont'd)

Replacement, page 22-583

General Troubleshooting Information Troubleshooting CAN Circuit Related Problems NOTE: Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM (see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of communication errors first.

Using the HDS (Preferred method) Connect the HDS to the Data Link Connector (DLC). NOTE: There are two ways to read B-CAN code with the HDS. First method; On the HDS, first select BODY ELECTRICAL, then select the subsystem that relates to the problem (for example; door locks, keyless, security, etc.), and then last, select the DTCs. Second method: Ground the SCS circuit with the HDS, then read the DTCs displayed in the multi-information display (MID) in the gauge control module, then go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154).

Using the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 (Use only if the HDS is ynawaiabie) 1. Check for communication circuit problems using B-CAN System Diagnostic Test Mode 1 (see page 22-158). 2. Check for DTCs. 3. If there are DTCs stored, sort them, and then troubleshoot the DTCs in this order. -1. Battery voltage DTCs -2. Internal error DTCs -3. Loss of communication DTCs NOTE: If DTC B1000 is stored, troubleshoot DTC B1000 first (see page 22-164). -4. Signal error DTCs 4. If no DTCs are retrieved, use B-CAN System Diagnostic Test Mode 2 to check all inputs related to the failure (see page 22-158).

(cont'd)

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd) How to display DTCs on the gauge control module Enter B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 (see page 22-158). W hile in Test Mode 1, the DTCs which have been detected and stored individually by various B-CAN (Body-controller Area Network) units w ill be shown one by one on the multi-information display (MID) when communication between the M ICU and the gauge control module is normal. To scroll through the DTCs, press the SEL/RESET button.

DTC detected (the fo u r dig its after the letter " B " represent th e DTC) Control U n it I.D. Num ber (the tw o d igits after th e letters "P A " represent the control u n it number)

No DTCs detected

ALL DTCs have been displayed

The unit that has stored the code can be identified by the number shown on the multi-information display (MID). Unit MICU Relay control module Rear MICU Power tailgate control unit Driver's MPCS unit Gauge control module Climate control unit Audio-navigation unit Combination switch control unit HandsFreeLink control unit Power seat control unil Immobilizer-keyless control unit Acura Link control unit (XM receiver) BSI control unit

Code (Control Unit I.D. Number) 10 11 12 31 35 50 5' 64 70 34 35 98 37 3P

How to clear DTCs 1. Enter B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 (see page 22-158). 2. W hile in Test Mode 1, press and hold down the SEL/RESET button for at least 10 seconds to clear the DTCs.

Loss of Communication DTC cross-reference chart When an electronic control unit (ECU) on the CAN circuit is unable to communicate with the other ECUs on the CAN circuit, the other control units will set loss of communication DTCs. Use this chart to find the control unit that is not communicating with the other control units on the CAN circuit. 1. Find the Transmitting Control Unit that is in the same row as all of the loss of communication DTCs retrieved. 2. Do the input test for the transmitting control unit. BUS OFF and internal Error Codes

DTCtype

Related Unit MICU RearMICU Relay Driver's Combination Gauge Climate Immobilizer- Power PowerSeat Hands Acuralink BSlControl Control MPCSUnit Switch Control Control Unit Keyless Tailgate Control Unit FreeLink Control Unit Unit Module Controlunit Control Unit Control Unit (XM Control Unit Module Receiver) BUSOFF B1000 B1350 B1050 62150 B1250 81150 B1200 B1900 B1350 B1800 U1280 U1280 U1280 B18A1 ECU(CPU) B1001 B1051 B1901 Error ECU B1002 B1052 B2152 B1252 81152 B1202 B1902 B1352 B1802 B1792 (EEPROM) Error Transmitting Control Unit

Message

MICU

ALARM MICU DOORSW MIRRORSW AUTOLT

MICU

RearMICU _ _ _ _ _ RelayControl Module Driver'sMPCS DRLOCKSW Unit ASLOCKSW MEMSW Combination HLSW SwitchControl WfPSW Unit GaugeControl VSP/NE Module ILLUMI CDS PowerTailgate Control Unit PCM VSAModulatorcontrol Unit TPMSControl Unit SRSUnit ActiveDamper Control Unit AudioUnit

ReceivingUnit/LossofCommunicationDTC Rear Relay Driver's Combina­ Gauge Climate Immobilizer- Power MICU Control mm tion Control Control Keyless Tailgate Module Unit Switch Module Unit Control Uni Control Unit Control Unit B1056 B1355 B1955 B1055 B2155 B1255 B1157 B1067 B2181 B1159 B2156 B11S0

B1012 B1005 B1959 B1015 B1013

.I1TIF.

bTw Fj

B1957 B1062 B1958 B1063

B1011

B1060 lITIo. B1956 B1061

B1032

B1905 B1356 B1358

81155 B1156 B2989 B1205 B1206 B1207

B2157

PIG

B1162

ENG AT VSA

‘81168

TPMS

81173

SRS ADS

B1187 B1189

ACC BSIControl Unitl—n is r —

B1808 B1811 B1810

B1158 B2970 B1182

B1065

Power Hands AcuraLinkBSIControl Seat FreeLink Control Unit Control Control Unit (XI Unit Receiver) Unit

B1357 B1805 ^81906^"B1359n B1808

U0156 U0155 u?28D~

B1170

B1171 U128F

“B18121

0299?”

DTC Troubleshooting Index NOTE: Record all DTCs, and sort them by DTC type using the following DTC troubleshooting indexes, then troubleshoot the DTC(s) in this order: • Battery voltage DTCs • Internal error DTCs • Loss of communication DTCs (begin with the lowest number first; for example, if B1005 and B1016 are retrieved, troubleshoot B1005 first). • Signal error DTCs MiCU DTC B1000

Description

DTC Type

Page

Com munication bus line error

Loss of com m unication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-164)

B1001 81002

MICU interna l error (CPU error)

Internal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-166)

MIC U internal error (EEPROM error)

Internal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-166)

81005

M I CU l ost comm unication w ith relay contro l m odule (RM message) MICU l ost comm unication w ith com bination switch contro l unit (HLSW message)

Loss of com m unication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-166)

Loss of comm unication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-167)

MICU lost com m unication w ith gauge control m odule (VSP/NE message) M I CU lost com m unication w ith rear MICU (RJU

Loss of comm unication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-167)

Loss of comm unication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-168)

message) B1013

M IC U lost com m unication with driver's MPCS unit (ASLOCKSW message)

Loss of comm unication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-168)

B1015

MIC U lost comm unication with driver's MPCS unit (DRLOCKSW message)

Loss of comm unication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-168)

B1032

MIC U lost com m unication with SRS unit (CDS message)

Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-169)

B1575

A utom atic lighting sensor circuit malfunction

Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-261)

B1007 81011 B1012

Relay Control M odule DTC 81050

Description C om m unication circuit error (BUS-OFF)

B1051

Relay control m odule interna l error (CPU error)

B1052

Rel ay error) Relay M I CU Relay MICU

B1055 B1058 B1057 B1060 B1061

B1062 B1083

61065 B B1076

DTC Type Loss of com m unication I nternal error

Page DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-171) DTC Tro u b l eshooting (see page 22-86) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-86)

control m od u l e interna l error (EEPROM

Internal error

con tro l m o d u l e l ost com m unication w ith (MICU message) co ntro l module l ost com m unication w ith (ALARM message)

Loss o f com m unication Loss of com m unication

DTC Tro u b l eshooting (see page 22-86)

Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss o f com m unication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-86)

Relay con tro l m o d u l e lost com m unication with MICU (DOGRSW message) Relay control m odule l ost com m unication w ith gauge control m odule (VSP/NE message) Relay control m odule lost com m unication with gauge control m odule (A/T message) Rel ay control m odule l ost com m unication w ith com bination switch con tro l unit (HLSW message) Rel ay control m o d u l e lost com m unication w ith com bination switch control unit (W IP S W message) Rel ay control m od u l e l ost com m unication w ith driver's MPCS unit (DRLOCKSW message) Headlight switch back-up circuit m alfunction

B B1078

W indshield w iper switch back-up circuit m alfunction W indshield w iper m otor (Park) signal error Daytime running lights system error (Canada)

B

Daytime running l ights system error (USA)

B1080

Power supply circuit (IG1 line) input error fo r relay c o ntr o l m odule and MICU

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-86)

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-87) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-87) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-87) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 2 2 4

Loss of com m unication Signal error Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-88)

Signal error Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Signa l error

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-376) DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-257)

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-257) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-376)

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-257) DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-169)

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd) Gauge Control M odule DTC B1150 B1152 B1155 B1156

B1157 B1158 B1159 B1162

B1168 B1169 B1170 B1171 B1173 B1175 B1176 B1178 B1180 B1182 B1187 B1189 B1192

U128F

Description C om m unication circuit error (BUS-OFF)

DTC Type Loss of com m unication

Gauge control m od u l e interna l error (EEPROM error) Gauge control m odule lost com m unication w ith com bination switch con tro l unit (HLSW message) Gauge co ntro l m odule l ost com m unication with com bination switch con tro l unit (W IP S W message) Gauge co ntro l m odule l ost com m unication w ith MICU (MICU message) Gauge con tro l m odule l ost com m unication with relay control module (RM message) Gauge control m odule lost com m unication w ith MICU (DOORSW message) Gauge co ntro l m odule lost com m unication with Power tailgate control unit (PTG message)

Internal error

Page DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-171) roubleshooting (see page 22-403)

Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-403)

Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication

DTC Troubleshooting fsee page 22-404)

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-403)

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-404) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-404) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-405) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-405)

Gauge control m od u l e lost com m unication w ith PCM (ENG messages) Gauge con tro l m odule lost c o m m u n ica ti o n with PCM (A/T messages) Gauge control m odule l ost com m unication with VSA m odulator-control unit (VSA message) Gauge co ntro l m od u l e l ost com m unication with adaptive cruise con tro l unit (ACC message) Gauge con tro l m od u l e l ost com m unication w ith TPMS control unit (TPMS message) Fue l leve l sensor (fue l gauge sending unit) circuit open Fuel level sensor (fuel gauge sending unit) circuit short F-CAN com m unication l ine error

Loss of com m unication Loss o f com m unication Loss of comm unication Loss o f com m unication Loss of com m unication Signal error

Loss of com m unication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-405)

Gauge co ntro l m o d u l e l ost com m unication w ith MICU (AUTOLT message) Gauge con tro l m od u l e lost com m unication w ith driver's MPCS unit (DRLOCKSW message)

Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-404)

Gauge control m od u l e lost com m unication w ith SRS unit (SRS message) Gauge con tro l m odule l ost com m unication w ith active dam per system control unit (ADS message) Gauge control m odule l ost com m unication w ith the battery sensor (UART LINE) Gauge con tro l m o d u l e l ost com m unication w ith BSI control unit {BSI message)

Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-405) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-408) DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-407) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-408) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-409) leshooting (see page 22-410)

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-411) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-411) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-412) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-413) DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-416)

F ■

l

BODY ■

Climate Control Unit DTC B1200

Description Com m unication circuit e rror (BUS-OFF)

B1202 B1205

Cl imate control unit internal error Climate co n tro l unit lost com m unication with gauge control module (VSP/NE massage) Climate co n tro l unit l ost com m unication w ith gauge contro l (ECT message) C l imate control unit lost com m unication w ith gauge control m odule ( I LLUMI message) An open in the rear evaporator temperature sensor circuit A short in the rear evaporator tem perature sensor circuit An open or short in the recirculation co n tro l m otor circuit A problem in the rear b l ower m otor circuit An open in the in-car tem perature sensor circuit A short in the in-car tem perature sensor circuit An open in the outside air tem perature sensor circuit

B1208 B1207 B1213 B1214 B1215

B1223 B1225 B1226 B1227 B1228 B1229 B1230 B1231 B1232 B1233 B1234 B1235 B1236 B1237 B1238 B1239 B1240 B1241

‘

A short in the outside air tem perature sensor circuit An open in the sunlight sensor circuit A short in the sun l ight sensor circuit An open in the front evaporator tem perature sensor circuit A short in the fro n t evaporator temperature sensor circuit An open in the d river’s air m ix control m otor circuit A short in the driver's air m ix control m otor circuit A p ro b l em in the driver's air m ix con tro l linkage, door, or m otor circuit An open in the passenger's air m ix co n tro l m otor circuit A short in the passenger's air m ix co n tro l m otor circuit A problem in the passenger's air m ix control linkage, door, or m otor circuit An open or short in the fro n t mode control m otor circuit A problem in the fron t mode control linkage, doors, or m otor circuit A problem in the fron t blow er m otor circuit

Page DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-171)

DTC Type Loss of comm unication Internal error Loss o f comm unication Loss o f comm unication Loss of comm unication Signal error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 21-35)

Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-36)

Signal error

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 21-37)

Signal error Signal error

roubleshooting (see page 21-39) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 21-42)

Signal error Signa l error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 21-44) DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 21-45)

Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-46)

Signa l error Signal error Signal error

DTC Tro u b l eshooting (see page 21-47) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 21-48) DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 21-43)

Signa l error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 21-51)

Signal error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 21-52)

Signal error Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-53) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 21-56)

Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-57)

Signa l error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 21-58)

Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-61)

Signal error

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 21-63)

Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-65)

Signal error

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 21-86)

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 21-34) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-34) DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 21-34) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 21-34)

(c o n t'd )

DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd) Clim ate C ontrol U n it DTC B1244 B1245 B1246

Description An open in the rear air m ix co n tro l m otor circuit A short in the rear air m ix control m otor circuit A problem in the rear air m ix control linkage, door, or m otor circuit

DTC Type Signal error Signal error S igna l error

Page DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 21-63) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-70)

B2965

Climate control unit l ost com m unication w ith'rear c l imate control pane l An open in the hum idity sensor circuit A short in the h u m idity sensor circuit Climate contro l unit l ost com m unication with com bination switch contro l unit (W IP S W message) Climate control unit l ost com m unication with relay contro l m odule (RM message) An open in the A/C pressure sensor circuit A short in the A/C pressure sensor circuit A problem in the recirculation control l inkage, door, or m otor circuit

Loss of comm unication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-75)

Signal error Signal error Loss of com m unication

DTC T roubleshooting fsee page 21-76) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-77) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 21-80)

Loss of com m unication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-81)

Signal errc Signa l error

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 21-81) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 21-82)

Signa l error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 21-85)

Loss of com m unication

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 21-87)

B2967 B2968 B2963

B2970 B2373 B2380 B2383 B2991

Climate control unit lost com m unication with audio unit

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 21-73)

Com bination S w itch Control U nit DTC B1250

Description Com m unication circuit error (BUS-OFF)

B1252

Com bination switch control unit internal error (EEPROIVI error) Com bination switch control unit lost com m unication w ith MICU (MICU Message) Com bination light switch OFF position circuit malfunction C om bination light switch parking l ight position circuit malfuncti Headlight switch AUTO position circuit malfunction Headlight switch ON position circuit m alfunction Headlight switch DIMMER position circuit m alfunction Turn signa l switch circuit m alfunction W in d sh ie l d w iper switch MIST position circuit m a l functioi W indshield w iper switch I NT position circuit m alfunction

B1255 B1275 B1278 B1277 B1278 B1279 81280 B1281 B1282

DTC Type Loss of com m unication

Page DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-171)

Internal error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-259)

Loss of com m unication Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-259) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-260)

Signa l error

roub l eshooting (see page 22-280)

Signa l error

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-260)

Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-280)

Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-260)

Signa l error Signal error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-288) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-378)

Signal error

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-378)

B1283

W indshield w iper switch LOW position circuit m alfunction

Signal error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-378)

B1284

W indshield w iper switch HI GH position circuit malfunctioi"

Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-378)

Power Tailgate Control Unit DTC B135G

Description Com m unication circuit err o r (BUS-OFF)

DTC Type Loss of com m unication

Page DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-171)

B1352

Power ta i l gate control unit internal error (EEPROfVi error) Power tailgate con tro l unit lost com m unication w ith MICU (M ICU message) Power tailgate contro l unit lost com m unication w ith d river’s MPCS unit (DRLOCKSW message) Power ta i l gate control unit lost com m unication w ith gauge con tro l m od u l e (VSP/NE message) Power ta i l gate con tro l unit l ost com m unication w ith driver's MPCS unit (ASLOCKSW message) Power tailgate control unit lost com m unication w ith gauge control m odule (A/T message) Driver's door power ta i l gate switch circuit m alfunction

Internal error

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-604)

Loss o f com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Signal error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-604)

B1355 B1356 B1357 B1358 B1359 B1375

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-605) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-605) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-605) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-805) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-606)

Tailgate outer handle switch circuit m alfunction I nside ta i l gate switch circuit m alfunction Power tailgate right pinch sensor circuit m a l function Power tailgate l eft pinch sensor circuit m alfunction

Signa l error Signa l error Signal error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-607) DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-608) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-609)

Signal error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-610)

B1380

Power tailgate c l oser unit neutral switch circuit m alfunction

Signal error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-611)

B1381

closer unit release switch circuit

Signal error

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-613)

closer unit full latch switch circuit

Signa l error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-615)

closer unit ratchet switch circuit

Signa l error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-617)

closer unit half latch switch circuit

Signal error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-818)

B1386 B1387 B1388

Power tailgate m alfunction Power tailgate m alfunction Power ta i l gate m alfunction Power ta i l gate m alfunction Power tailgate Power tailgate Power tailgate

sensor pulse A circuit m alfunction sensor pulse B circuit m alfunction m otor circuit m alfunction

B1389 B1330

Power ta i l gate m otor clutch circuit m alfunction Power ta i l gate closer function error

Signal Signa l Signal Signa l Signa l

DTC T ro u b l eshooting DTC T ro u b l eshooting DTC T roubleshooting DTC Troubleshooting DTC Tro u b l eshooting

B1378 B1377 B1378 B1379

B1382 B1383 B1384

error error error error error

(see (see (see (see (see

page page page page page

22-620) 22-621) 22-622) 22-624) 22-625)

( c o n t’d)

DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd) HandsFreeLink Control U nit

DTC B1775

B1778

B1779

B1780

B1792 U1280

Description M icrophone input/output shorted to power (with navigation) M icrophone input/output shorted to power (w ithout navigation) M icrophone input/output shorted to ground or open (with navigation) M icrophone input/output shorted to ground or open (w ithout navigation) HandsFreeLink steering wheel s w i tch fa i l ure (with navigation) HandsFreeLink steering wheel switch failure (w ithout navigat i on) HandsFreeLink steering wheel switch l ine short (with navigation) HandsFreeLink steering w hee l switch l ine short (w ithout navigation) HandsFreeLink con tro l m od u l e error C om m unication bus l ine error (BUS-OFF)

DTC Type Signal error

Page DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-335)

Signal error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 23-336)

Signal error

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 23-337)

Signa l error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 23-398)

Signal error

leshooting (see page 23-339)

Signa l error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-^

Signa l error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-402)

Signa l error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-403)

Interna l error Loss of com m unication

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 23-404) DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-174)

Im m obilizer-Keyless C ontrol U nit

DTC

Description

B130G

C om m unication circuit error (BUS-OFF)

B1301 B1902

I m m o b i l izer unit internal error (CPU error)

B1905

Im m o b il i zer-keyless contro l unit l ost com m unication w ith driver's MPCS unit (DRLOCKSW message) Immobilizer-keyless con tro l unit l ost com m unication w ith gauge control m odule (A/T message)

B1308

Im m obilizer unit internal error (EEPROM error)

DTC Type

Page

Loss of com m unication I nternal error I nternal error Loss o f com m unication

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-171)

Loss of comm unication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-518)

DTC Type Loss of com m unication Loss o f comm unication Loss of comm unication

Page DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-171)

Loss of comm unication Loss of com m unication Loss of

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-32)

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-517) leshooting (see page 22-517) DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-517)

Rear MiCU DTC B1950

Description Com m unication circuit error (BUS-OFF)

B1355

Rear MICU lost com m unication w ith M I CU (MICU message) Rear MICU lost com m unication w ith gauge control m o d u l e (A/T message) Rear MICU lost com m unication w ith com bination switch control unit (HLSW message) Rear M I CU lost com m unication w ith com bination switch co n tro l unit (W IP S W message) Rear MICU lost com m unication w ith re l ay control m odule (RM message)

B1356 B1957 B1958 B1353

comm unication

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-31) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-31)

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-92) DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-32)

Power Seat C o ntro l U nit DTC B1800

Description Com m unication circuit error (BUS-OFF)

B1802

Power seat contro l unit internal error (EEPROM error) Power seat control unit lost com m unication w ith gauge contro l m odule (VSP/NE message) Power seat control unit l ost com m unication w ith MICU (M I CU message) Power seat co ntro l unit lost co m m unicat i on w ith gauge control m odule (A/T message) Power seat control unit lost com m unication w ith MiCU (MiRRORSW message) Power seat co ntro l unit l ost com m unication w ith MICU (DOORSW message) Power seat control unit lost com m unication w ith driver's MPCS unit (M E M S W message) Power seat s l ide m otor pu l se error Power seat fron t up-down m oto r pu l se error Power seat rear up-down m oto r pu l se error Power seat recline m otor p u l se error A/T P signal and VSS signa l mismatch Power tilt/telescopic switch signal input error Power seat position sensor circuit short Driving position m em ory reca l l tim eo u t Tilt m otor pulse error Telescopic m otor p u l se error Power tilt/te l escopic position sensor power supply circuit (SVCC l ine) short Power seat control unit lost com m unication w ith power tilt/telescopic steering co n tro l unit (UART line) Power seat slide switch circuit m alfunction Power seat rec l ine switch circuit m alfunction Power seat fron t up-down switch circuit m a l function Power seat rear up-down switch circuit m alfunction

B1805 B1806 B1808 B1810 B1811 B1812

B1825 B1826 B1827 B1828 B1829 B1835 B1836 B1837 81840 B1841 B1842 B1843

B1844 B1845 B1846 B1847

DTC Type Loss of comm unication I nterna l error

Page DTC Tro u b l eshooting (see page 22-171) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-542)

Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-542)

Loss of com m unication

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-542)

Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-543)

Loss of com m unication Signal error Signal error Signa l error Signa l error Signa l error Signal error Signa l Signa l Signal Signal Signal

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-543)

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-543) DTC Tro u b l eshooting fsee page 22-543) DTC T roubleshooting DTC Troubleshooting DTC Tro u b l eshooting DTC Troubleshooting DTC Tro u b l eshooting DTC T roubleshooting DTC T roubleshooting DTC T roub l eshooting

(see (see (see (see (see (see (see (see

page page page page page page page page

22-544) 22-546) 22-549) 22-551) 22-556) 22-556) 22-557) 22-553)

errc error error error error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-560) DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-563) DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-567)

Signal error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-588)

Signa l error Signal error Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-563) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-570) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-571)

Signa l error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-572)

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd) Driver's MPCS U n it DTC B2150

Description Com m unication circuit error (BUS-OFF)

B2152 B2155

Driver's MPCS unit internal error (EEPROM error) Driver's MPCS unit lost com m unication w ith M I CU (M I CU message) Driver's MPCS unit l ost com m unication with M I CU (MiRRORSW message) Driver's MPCS unit l ost com m unication with gauge contro l m odule (ILLUMI message) Driver's MPCS unit lost com m unication with gauge contro l m odule (VSP/NE message) Driver's MPCS unit lost com m unication w ith MICU (DOORSW message) Driver's MPCS unit lost com m unication w ith relay co n tro l m odule (RM message) Driver's power w in d o w m otor pu l se A error Driver's power w in d o w m otor pu l se B error

B2156 B2157 B2160 B2181 B2182 B2175 B2176 B2177 B2178 B2173 B2180 B2181 B2182 B2183 B2184 B2185 B2186 B2187 B2188 B2189 B2190 B2191

Front passenger's power w in d o w m otor pulse A err o r Front passenger's power w in d o w m otor pulse B error Driver's door key cylinder switch LOCK/UNLOCK signa l error Driver's door l ock switch LOCK/UNLOCK signa l error Driver's door l ock knob switch LOCK/UNLOCK signal error Left power m irror horizonta l sensor signal error Left power m irro r vertical sensor signa l error Right power m irro r horizonta l sensor signal error Right power m irro r vertica l sensor signal error Front passenger's door l ock switch LOCK/UNLOCK signal error UART comm unication error 1 (Driver's MPCS unit from DR door ECU) UART com m unication error 2 (Driver's MPCS Unit from other node) Driver's w in d o w position data error Assistant's w in d o w position data error Front passenger's MPCS unit internal error (EEPROM error)

DTC Type Loss of com m unication Internal error Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Signal error Signa l error Signal error

Page DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-171)

Signal error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-348)

Signa l error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-196)

Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-197)

Signal error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-138)

Signal error Signa l error Signal error Signal error Signa l error

DTC Troubleshooting DTC Troubleshooting DTC T roubleshooting DTC T ro u b l eshooting DTC T roubleshooting

Signal error

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-348)

Signal error

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-349)

Signal error Signa l error Internal error

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-350) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-350)

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-172) DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-172) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-172) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-173) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-173) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-172) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-173) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-341) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-342) DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 22-344)

(see (see (see (see (see

page page page page page

22-573) 22-575) 22-578) 22-578) 22-139)

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 22-351)

AcuraLink Control U nit

Description

DTC Type

Page DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-357) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-357)

DTC B2240 U0023

XM antenna l ine failure F-CAN Com m unication bus l ine error (BUS-OFF)

Internal error Loss of com m unication

U0100

F-CAN lost comm unication w ith PCM

DTC T roubleshooting (see page 23-358)

U0155

F-CAN l ost com m unication w ith Gauge Control M odule

U1280

Com m unication bus line error (BUS-OFF)

Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication Loss of com m unication

U128D

Lost com m unication w ith gauge co n tro l m odule

Loss of comm unication

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 23-353)

2 2 -1 3 2

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 23-359) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 22-174)

BSl Control Unit DTC B18A1

Description BSl control unit interna l circuit error

B18A5 B18A8 B18A7

Left BSI radar unit temperature high Right BSI radar unit temperature high

B18A8 B18A9 B18AA B18AF B18B1 B18B4 B18B5 B18B8 B18B7 B18B8 B18B3 B18BA B18BB B18BC B18BD B18BE B18C2 B18CF U0155 U0423 U12S0

Left BS I radar unit voltage input l ow Right BSi radar unit voltage input l ow Left BS I radar unit voltage input high Right BSI radar unit v o l tage input high Left BSI radar unit internal circuit error Right BSI radar unit internal circuit error Left BSI radar unit dirty Right BSI radar unit dirty Lost comm unication w ith left BS I radar unit Lost comm unication with right BS I radar unit Left BS I radar unit azimuth o ff alignm ent Right BSI radar unit azimuth o ff alignm ent Left BS I radar unit version incorrect Right BS I radar unit version incorrect BS I radar units com m unication error BSI control unit voltage input high BSI contro l unit voltage input l o w Left BSI alert indicator output error Right BSI alert indicator o u tput error Lost comm unication w ith the gauge co n tro l m od u l e Inva l id data received from PCM (vehicle speed data) Com munication bus line error (BUS-OFF)

DTC Type internal error Signal error Signa l error Signal error Signal error

Page DTC Tro u b l eshooting (see page 25-138) DTC T roubleshooting (see page 25-136) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-137)

Signa l error Signal error

DTC Tro u b l eshooting DTC T roubleshooting DTC Troubleshooting DTC Troubleshooting

Interna l error Internal error Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-140) DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 25-141) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-141)

Signal error Signa l error Signa l error Signal error Signal error Signa l error Signal error Signal error Signal error Signa l error Signa l error Signal error Loss of com m unication Signal error

DTC Troubleshooting (see ioting (see DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see DTC Troubleshooting (see •oting (see DTC Troubleshooting (see

page page page page page page

25-142) 25-146) 25-146) 25-147)

DTC Troubleshooting DTC Troubleshooting DTC Troubleshooting leshooting DTC Tro u b l eshooting

page page page page page page page

25-147) 25-147) 25-143) 25-149) 25-150) 25-152) 25-154)

Loss of com m unication

fsee (see (see (see

(see (see (see (see (see oting (see DTC Troubleshooting (see

page page page page

25-137) 25-138) 25-139) 25-140)

25-142) 25-142)

DTC T ro u b l eshooting (see page 25-155) DTC Tro u b l eshooting (see page 25-155)

System Description Body Controller Area Network (B-CAN) and Fast Controller Area Network (F-CAN) The body controller area network (B-CAN) and the fast controller area network (F-CAN) share information between multiple electronic control units (ECUs). B-CAN communication moves at a slower speed (33.33 kbps) for convenience related items and for other functions. F-CAN information moves at a faster speed (500 kbps) for "real time" functions such as fuel and emissions data. To allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module translates and relays the information from B-CAN to F-CAN A and from F-CAN A to B-CAN. This is called the Gateway function.

GAUGECONTROLMODULE

Gateway Function The gauge control module acts as a gateway to allow both systems to share information. The gauge control module translates and relays the information from B-CAN to F-CAN A, and from F-CAN A to B-CAN,

N etw ork "Loss of Com m unication" Error Checking Function The ECUs on the CAN circuit send messages to each other. If there are any communication malfunctions on the network, the multi-information display (M ID) on the gauge control module can indicate the error messages by entering the gauge control module self-diagnostic function {see page 22-395).

COMMUNICATIONCHECK F-CAN... ERROR

System Description (cont'd) Self-diagnostic Function By connecting the HDS to the data link connector (DLC), the HDS can retrieve the diagnostic information from the MICU via a diagnostic BUS called the K-LINE. The K-LINE is a separate communication line that is connected to some of the CAN-related ECUs. The MICU is a gateway between the HDS and B-CAN related ECUs, and sends B-CAN diagnostic information to the HDS. When doing a function test with the HDS, the HDS sends an output signal through the K-LINE to the M ICU. The MICU either relays the request to another ECU, or commands the function itself.

Wake-up and Sleep Function The multiplex integrated control system has wake-up and sleep functions to decrease parasitic draw on the battery when the Ignition switch is in LOCK (0). • In the sleep mode, the multiplex integrated control system stops functioning (communication and CPU control) when it is not necessary for the system to operate. • As soon as any operation is requested (for example, a door is unlocked), the related control units in sleep mode immediately wake up and begin to function. • When the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0) with all the doors and the hatch closed, and the driver's door is opened, then closed, there is a delay of about 40 seconds before the control unit goes from the wake-up mode to the sleep mode. • The sleep mode will not function if any door or the hatch is open, or if a key is in the ignition switch. NOTE: Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test (see page 22-161).

Fail-safe Function To prevent improper operation, the MICU has a fail-safe function. In fail-safe mode, the output signal is fixed when any part of the system malfunctions (for example, a faulty control unit or communication line). Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that fixes the output signal when there is a CPU malfunction, and a software fail-safe function that ignores the signal from a malfunctioning control unit, which allows the system to operate normally.

Hardware Fail-safe Control Fail-safe function When a CPU problem or an abnormal power supply voltage is detected, the MICU moves to the hardware fail-safe mode, and each system output load is set to the pre-programmed fail-safe value.

Software Fail-safe Control When any of the data from the B-CAN circuit cannot be received within a specified time, or an unusual combination of data is recognized, the MICU moves to the software fail-safe mode. The data that was not received is forced to a pre-programmed value.

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) MICU Power Supply Voltage Monitoring Function The MICU m onitors the pow er supply voltage f back-up voltage). If the v o l tage goes be l o w 10 V, the MICU does not store a DTC.

Input MICU B-CAN

O u tp u t

Battery voltage MICU (Under 10 V) message

Entry Lights Control System (Ceiling Lights, Ignition Key Light) The M I CU controls the interior lights and ignition key light ON/OFF based on inputs from each switch. Input MICU

B-CAN

O u tp ut

I G1 power supply I gnition key switch

I nterior lights Ignition key l ight

Driver's door switch Front passenger's door switch Left rear door switch Right rear door switch Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK) Keyless LOCK/UNLOCK signal Full latch switch (Built into the tailgate closer unit)

Back-up Lights The MICU controls the back-up lights based on inputs from each switch. Input MICU

IG1 power su p p l y Transmission range switch (R)

O u tp u t

Back-up fights

Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights The MICU controls the turn signal/hazard warning lights based on inputs from each switch. Input MICU

Hazard w arning switch

B-CAN

Turn signal switch (left) Turn signa l switch (right)

O u tpu t

Turn signa l lights (le Turn signa l lights (right)

Collision Detection Signal (CDS) The MICU controls the door lock actuators based on inputs from SRS signals sent by B-CAN.. Input IN.

B-CAN

IG1 power supply Front im pact sensor Side im pact sensor (first) Side im pact sensor (second) SRS unit rollover signal

utput

Door lock actuators (LOCK/UNLOCK)

Automatic Lighting System* The M I CU controls the autom atic lighting system based on inputs from each switch. Input

O u tp ut

IG1 power su p p l y Headlight back-up signa l I G2 power supply A utom atic lighting sensor signal Headlight switch (AUTO) AUTO LT messages b -c a i ^ Vehicle speed pulse signa l *: This system can be customized using the m ulti-inform ation display (MID) to suit the custom er's needs. For more inform ation about customizing options, refer to the Owner's Manual. MICU

Headlight Washer Operation The MICU controls the headlight washer system based on input from the headlight washer switch. O u tp u t

Input

..M .ICtl........ ...1 Headlight washer switch Headlight washer messages

B-CAN

Key Interlock The M I CU controls the key interlock solenoid based on inputs from each switch. Input M I CU

I gnition switch (ACC) Transmission range switch (P) Park pin switch

O u tp u t

Key interlock solenoid

Power Door Locks (Unlock all doors and tailgate at the same tim e)* The MICU controls the door lock actuators based on inputs from each switch. O u tp ut

Input ..m i c u ..

IG1 power supply Door l ock actuators (LOCI I gnition key switch Door l ock actuators (UNLOCK) Driver's door switch Front passenger's door switch Left rear door switch Right rear door switch B-CAN Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) Driver's door key cy l inder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) Driver's d oor lock knob switch (LOCK) Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) Full latch switch (Built into the tailgate c l oser unit) *: This system can be customized using the m u l ti-in form ation display (MID) to suit the custom er's needs, For more inform ation about customizing options, refer to the Owner's Manual.

Power Door Locks (Unlock only the driver's door first)* The MICU co n tro l s the door lock actuators based on inputs from each switch. O u tp u t

Input MICU

IG1 power supp l y Door lock actuators (LOCK) I gnition key switch Door lock actuators (UNLOCK) Driver's d oor switch Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK) Front passenger's door switch Left rear door switch Right rear door switch B-CAN Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK) Front passenger's door l ock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) Full l atch switch (Bui l t into the tailgate c l oser unit) *: This system can be customized using the m ulti-inform ation display (M ID ) to suit the custom er's needs. For more in form ation about customizing options, refer to the Owner's Manual.

Door Lock Response Operation The MICU controls the door lock actuators based on inputs from the door lock signals. Input B-CAN

Door lock signals

O u tp ut Door lock actuators (LOCK) Door lock actuators (UNLOCK) Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)

System Description (cont'd) Keyless Entry System (Unlock all doors and tailgate at the same time}* The MICU controls the do o r lock actuators based on inputs from each switch.

Input MICU

utput

IG1 power supply

Door lock actu ato rs {LOG!. ,

Ig nition key switch D rive r's d o o r switch

D o o r lock actu ato rs (U N L O C K )

Front passenger's door switch Left rear door switch Right rear door switch R elock message. B-CAN D river’s door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) Keyless LOCK/UNLOCK signal Full latch switch (Built into the tailgate c l oser unit) *: This system can be customized using the m ulti-inform ation display (M I D) to suit the custom er's needs. For more inform ation about customizing options, refer to the O wner's Manual,

Keyless Entry System (Unlock only the driver's door first)* The MICU controls the door lock actuators based on inputs from each switch. Input

utput

MICU

IG1 power supply Ig nition key switch D rive r's d o o r switch Front p a s se n g e r's d o o r s witch Left rear d o o r switch Rig h t rear d o o r switch

D o o r lock actu ato rs (LOCI , D o o r lock actu ato rs (U N L O C K ) D rive r's d o o r lock a c tu a to r (U N L O C K )

B-CAN

D rive r's d o o r lock switch (L O C K /U N L O C K ) D rive r's d o o r key c ylin d e r s w it c h (L O C K /U N L O C K ) D rive r's d o o r lock knob s w itc h ( L O C K /U N L O C K ) Fron t p a s se n g e r's d o o r lock sw itc h ( L O C K /U N L O C K ) Keyless L O C K /U N L O C K s ig n a l Fuil latch s witch (Built into th e t a ilg a te clo s e r unit)

R elock message..

*: This system can be customized using the m ulti-inform ation display (MID) to suit the custom er's needs. For more inform ation about customizing options, refer to the Owner's Manual,

Answer Back Response Operation The MICU controls the turn signal lights based on keyless signals sent by B-CAN, Input

MICU

IG1 p o w e r s u p p ly

B-CAN

A n s w e r back signal (buzzer) A n s w e r back signal (hazard ) Ve h ic le s p e e d pulse signal

utput T u r n sig nal lights (!e , T u rn signal lights (right)

Auto Power Door Locks (LOCK operation)* The MICU controls the door lock actuators based on inputs from each switch. Input MICU

B-CAN

IG1 p o w e r s u p p ly Ig nitio n key switch T r a n s m is s io n r an g e switch (P po sitio n) D rive r's d o o r switch Fron t pa s s e n g e r's d o o r s witch Left rear d o o r switch Righ t rear d o o r switch D rive r's d o o r lock k nob s witch (U N L O C K ) Front p a s se n g e r's d o o r lock k nob s w itc h ( U N L O C K ) Left rear d o o r lock knob s witch ( U N L O C K ) Rig ht rear d o o r lock knob sw itc h ( U N L O C K ) Vehicle s p e ed pulse signal E n g in e s p e ed signal Full latch sw itch (Built into th e t a ilg a te c lo ser unit)

.. utput D o o r lock actu ato rs (LOCI ,

*: This system can be customized using the m ulti-inform ation display (MID) to suit the cust o mer's needs. For m o re inform ation about customizing options, refer to the Owner's Manual.

Auto Power Door Locks (UNLOCK operation)* The MICU co n tro l s the door l ock actuators based on inputs from each switch.

itput

Input MICU

IG1 power supp Door lock actuators (UNLOCK) Driver's door l ock actuator (UNLOCK) Transmission range switch (P position) I g n it i on key switch Driver's door switch Front passenger's door switch Left rear door switch Right rear door switc B-CAN Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) Front passenger's door l ock knob switch (UNLOCK) Left rear d oor lock knob switch (UNLOCK) Right rear door l ock knob switch (UNLOCK) Full l atch switch (Bui l t into the tailgate closer unit) *: This system can be customized using the m ulti-inform ation display (MIDI to suit the custom er's needs. For more inform ation about customizing options, refer to the O wner's M anua l .

Security Alarm System The MICU controls the l ighting system and the horn based on inputs from each switch, Input MICU

B^CAN

IG1 power supp , Ignition key switch Audio switch Driver's door switch Front passenger's door switch Left rear door switch Right rear door switch Driver’s door key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) Driver's door l ock knob switch (UNLOCK) Front passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) Keyless LOCK/UNLOCK signal Door lock signa l Re l ay control m odule (Security hood switch) Full latch switch (Built into the tailgate closer unit)

. Jtput

MICU (SET 1) message M I CU (SET 2) message ALARM (ACTION) message ALARM (HORN) message ALARM (H/L LOW) message ALARM (PARKING LIGHT) message ALARM (CYCLE) message ANSWER BACK (PARK I NG LIGHT) message ANSWER BACK (BUZZER) message

Prevention of Key Locked Inside Vehicle The M IC U c o n tro l s the door l ock actuators based on inputs from each switch. Input MICU

Ignition key switch Driver's door switch

B-CAN

Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)

Jtput Door lock actuators (LOCI Door l ock actuators (UNLOCK) Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Interior Lights Reminder The MICU controls the interior lights OFF based on inputs from each switch. Input MICU B-CAN

O u tp ut

IG1 power supply I g nition key switch Driver's door switch Front passenger's door switch Left rear door switch Right rear door switch Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK) Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) Front passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) Door l ock signa l Keyless LOCK/UNLOCK signa l Full latch switch (Built into the tailgate c l oser unit) Battery management data

Interior l ights

Power Mirror Operation The MICU controls the power m irro r based on inputs from each switch. Input MICU

B-CAN

Power Power Power Power Power Power

m irror m irro r m irro r m irro r m irror m irro r

adjustm ent switch adjustm ent switch adjustm ent switch adjustm ent switch selector switch (L) selector switch (R)

O u tpu t

(up) (down) (left) (right)

Power m irro r messages

Rear MICU Rear Window Defogger Timer Operation The rear MICU controls the rear w in d o w defogger tim e r based on inputs from each switch. O u tp u t

Input Rear M I CU B-CAN

IG1 power supp l y Rear w in d o w defogger switch

Rear w in d o w defogger relay

Rear Window Wiper Operation The rear M I CU controls the rear w in d o w w ip e r m otor and washer m oto r based on inputs from each switch.

Output

Input Rear M I CU B-CAN

IG1 power supply Rear w in d o w w iper m otor stop switch W indshield w iper switch (LO/HI/INT) Rear w in d o w w iper switch fINT) Washer switch (FR WASH/RR WASH) Transmission range switch (R)

Rear w in d o w w iper m otor Rear w in d o w washer m otor

Answer Back Response Operation The rear MICU controls the key l ess buzzer based on inputs from the answer back signals. O u tp u t

Input Rear MICU B-CAN

Keyless buzzer Answer back signals

Fuel Fill Door Opener Operation The rear MICU con tro l s the fuel f il l d oor based on inputs from the door lock signals. O u tp ut

In| “ Rear................. E9CAN Door lock signa l

Fue l fill door opener solenoid

Tailgate Lights The rear MICU co n tro l s the ta i l gate lights based on inputs from each switch. O u tp ut

Input Rear MICU

B-CAN

IG1 power supp l y Ful l latch switch (Built into the power tailgate closer unit) Battery m anagement data

Left ta i l gate l ight Right ta i l gate l ight

Rear Door Courtesy Lights The rear MICU controls the rear door courtesy lights based on inputs from each switch.

Input Rear MICU

IG1 power supply

B-CAN

Left rear door switch Right rear door switch Battery m anagement data

O u tp ut Left rear door courtesy light Right rear d oor courtesy light

System Description (cont'd) Relay Control Modu,~ Exterior Lights The relay control m odule controls the exterior lights based on inputs from the com bination light switch signals,

. itput

Input Relay control module B

I nte rio r light re!

Com bination light switch (PAR KING/IO/H I/PASS iNG)

, H e a d lig h t lo w b e a m relay H e a d lig h t relay circuit (H IG H ) Ta illig h t relay circuit Relay control m o d u le message

Daytime Running Lights The relay control module controls the daytime running lights based on inputs from each switch.

Input

. itp u t

R elay control m o d u le

IG1 p o w e r supp:.,

Left d a y t im e r u n n in g light Right d a y t im e ru n n in g light

B -C A N

Com bination light switch (PARK I NG/tO/HI/PASSING)

R elay control m o d u l e message

Parking brake switch

Automatic Lighting System* The relay c o n tro l m odule co ntro l s the autom atic lighting based on inputs from each switch.

Input R elay control m o d u le

IG1 p o w e r s u p p .,

IG1 p o w e r s u p p ly sign al A u t o m a t ic lightin g signals C o m b in a t i o n light switch ( H I/P A S S IN G / A U T O )

itp u t H e a d lig h t lo w b e a m relay H e a d lig h t relay circuit (H IG H ) Ta illig h t relay circuit R elay control m o d u le message

*: This system can be customized using the m ulti-inform ation disp l ay ( M I D) to suit the custom er's needs. For more inform ation about customizing options, refer to the Owner's Manual.

Interior Illuminations* The relay co n tro l m odule co ntro l s the interior illum inations based on inputs from the interior light relay signals.

Input

itput In terio r light rel

R elay control m o d u le

B In terio r light relay signal Relay control m o d u le message *: This system can be customized using the m ulti-inform ation display ( M I D) to suit the custom er's needs. For more inform ation about customizing options, refer to the Owner's M anua l .

Exterior Lights Shutoff System* The relay control m odule controls the exterior lights shutoff based on inputs from each switch.

Input R elay control m o d u le

IG1 p o w e r s u p p ly

B-CAN

D river's d o o r sv\ D river's d o o r lock switch (L O C K /U N L O C K ) IG1 p o w e r s u p p ly signal Ig nitio n key switch C o m b in a ti o n light switch (A U T O /P A R K I N G /L O /H I)

itput Left d a y t im e ru n n in g ligh Right d a y tim e ru n n in g light H e a d lig h t lo w b e a m relay H e a d lig h t relay circuit (H IG H ) T a illig h t relay circuit R elay control m o d u le m e s s a g e s

*: This system can be customized using the m ulti-inform ation display (MID) to suit the custom er's needs. For more in fo rm a ti o n about customizing o p ti o ns, refer to the Owner's Manual.

Fog lights The re l ay c o ntrol m o dule c o ntrols the f o g lights based on inputs from the com bination l ight switch signals. O u tp u t

Input Relay control m odule B-CAN

Fog l ight relay

C om bination light switch signa l s

Relay control m odule message

Windshield Wiper/Washer (Normally operation) The re l ay control m odule controls the w in d sh ie l d w iper/w asher based on inputs from each switch. O u tp ut

in p u t Relay control m odule B-CAN

IG1 power supp l y W indshie l d w iper m otor stop switch W indshield w iper switch (INT/LO/Hl/MIST) Washer switch (FR WASH/RR WASH) Interm ittent w iper dwell tim e controller

W in d sh ie l d w iper interm ittent relay circuit W indshie l d w ip e r m otor relay circuit W indshie l d washer m otor re l ay circuit Relay co n tro l m odule messagi

Windshield Wiper (Vehicle Speed Sense)* The relay control m od u l e controls the w indshield w ip e r (vehicle speed sense) based on inputs from each switch. O u tp u t

Input Relay control m odule B-CAN

IG1 power supp l y W indshield w iper m otor stop switch

W indshie l d w ip e r interm ittent relay circuit W indshield w ip e r m otor relay circuit

Brake peda l position switch Relay control m odule messagi Parking brake switch Transmission range switch (P) Vehicle speed pulse signa l W indshie l d w iper switch (INT) I nterm ittent w iper dwell tim e co n tro l ler *: This system can be customized using the m ulti-inform ation display (MID) to suit the custom er's needs. For more inform ation about customizing options, refer to the Owner's M anua l .

Rear Window Washer The relay co n tro l m odule controls the rear w in d o w washer based on inputs from the w in d o w washer switch. O u tp u t

Input Relay co n tro l m od u l e B-CAN

IG1 power supply

Rear w in d o w washer m otor relay circuit

W in d o w washer switch (RR WASH)

Security Alarm System The relay control m odule controls the security system and the horn based on inputs from the security hood switch. Input Relay control m odule B-CAN

Security hood switch

O u tp ut Headlight l o w beam relay Tai l light relay circuit Horn relay circuit Relay control m odule message

Security alarm signa l s

Security Answer Back* The relay c o n tro l m odule controls the exterior lights and the horn based on inputs from the answer back signa l s. O u tp ut

Input Relay control m odule l^ C A N

Taillight relay circuit Horn relay circuit Answer back signals

*: This system can be customized using the m u l ti-inform ation display (MID) to suit the custom er's needs. For more inform ation about customizing options, refer to the O wner's Manual,

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Keyless Panic Function The re l ay control m odule co ntro l s the key l ess PANIC function based on inputs from the PANIC signals.

itput

Input Relay control m odule B-CAN

Headlight low beam relay T aillight relay circuit Horn relay circuit PANIC signa l s

Headlight Washer The re l ay control m odule controls the head l i ght washer based on inputs from each switch. Input Rel ay control m odule B-CAN

IG1 power supply Headlight l ow beam relay Headlight relay circuit (H I GH) Headlight washer switch Washer switch (FR WASH) ■

O u tp ut Headlight washer re

HDS Inputs and Commands Certain inputs happen so quickly that the HDS can not update fast enough. Hol d the switch that is being tested w h il e m onitoring the Data List, This should give the HDS tim e to update the signal on the Data List. Because the HDS software is updated to support the release fo r newer vehicles, it is not uncom m on to see system function tests that are not supported. Make sure that the m ost current software is l oaded. Input: System Menu Gauge

Data List Cruise Control Main Switch (ACC Switch) Cruise Control Set Switch Cruise Control Resume Switch Distance switch W asher Fluid Level Switch VSA Off Switch Parking Brake Switch Brake Fluid Level Switch I llum ination Plus Switch Il lum ination Min us Switch Select/Reset Switch I NFO Previous Switch INFO Next Switch ACC Distance Switch CMBS Cancel Switch ARC Cancel Switch Fuel Sending Unit I nput 1 Fuel Sending Unit Input 2 ABS I ndicaEBD Indicator (Electronic Brake Distribution) Cruise Control Main Switch Indicator M I L Indicator W asher Fluid Level Indicator (Canada) DRL Indicator V SA Off Indicator

^

VSA Indicator CMBS I ndicator ACC Indicai Low Oil Pressure Indicatoi Charging System Indicator Cruise C ontrol Main Switch ON Indicator Maintenance M inder Indicator High Beam I ndicator Parking Light ON I ndicator Low Fuel W arning I ndicate Security Indicator Fog Light Indicator Master W arning Indicator Seatbelt Indicator Tire Pressure Warn SH-AWD indicator Door Open Warn M u lti Inform ation Displ ay Maintenance M inder Oil Change Indicator Fuel Fill Cap Caution M ulti I nform ation Display A/T System Trouble M ulti Inform ation Display SRS M ulti I nform ation Display Side Airbag Cutoff M u lti Inform ation Display CMBS Radar Become Dirty Warn M ulti Inform ation Display A /T T e >le W arn M ulti Inform ation Display I MMOBI Trouble Warn M u l ti Inform ation Display Active Damper System Trouble W arn M u lti I nform ation Display Speed I ndicator (km/h) Com mand Speed I ndicator (mph) Command A/T Gear Position Switch (R) A/T Gear Position Switch (P)

Data List Indication ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/O ON/O ON/OFF ON/O ON/O ON/O ON/OFF deg V ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ..0 9 / 0 - r ..0 9 9 9 9 ON/OFF ON/OFF ^ w To f f ^ ON/OFF

”

ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Input: (cont'd) System Menu Lighting

Data List Headlight Switch (OFF) Headl ight Switch (PARKI NG! Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT! Headlight Switch (AUTO) Headlight Switch (High Beam! Headl ight Switch (PASSING) Turn Signal Switch (LEFT) Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT) Fog Li ght Switch Driver's door lock switch illum ination com m and Driver's door courtesy l ight com m and Front passenger's door courtesy light comm and Front passenger's door lock switch il lum ination com m and Driver's Door Switch Tailgate switch (swing) Cargo l ight switch Hazard w arning switch Turn Left input signal Turn Right input signal A u to lig h t Sensor input voltage A u to l ight Sensor M alfunction Detection voltage Max A u to lig h t Sensor M alfunction Detection voltage Min Ignition Key Cyl inder Light Command Door Switch Interior Light Command Foot Light Command Left Turn Signal Com mand Right Turn Signal Com mand Cargo Light Command A u to l ight Small Com mand A u to lig h t Headl ight Com mand A u to lig h t W arning Command A u to lig h t Headlight Backup l ine Com mand Map Light OFF Com mand Headl ight Switch (BACK-UP) Ignition Switch (IG 1) Headlight Command Headlight High Beam Command Parking Light Com mand Fog Light Command DRL Command Headlight Washer Command Interior Parking Light Com mand Inner T aillight Comm

Data List Indication OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF/ON ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF l _ON/OFF _ .. 9 ¥ r OFFTON ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF/ON OFF/ON ON/OFF OFF/ON OFF/ON V OFF/ON ON/OFF OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON ON/OFF OFF/ON OFF/ON

Input; (cont’d) System Menu Door Locks

Data List Driver's key cylinder switc

Driver's key cylinder switch (UNLOC Driver's door lock switch (LOCI

Keyless Transm itter

Driver's door lock switch (UNLOCK) Driver's door lock knob switch (LOC Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK Driver's door sw Driver's door lock switch illumination comm and Driver's door courtesy light comma! Front passenger's door courtesy light comm a Front passenger's door lock switch illumination comm a Driver's Door Sv Front Passenger's Door Switch Driver's Rear Door Switch Passenger's Rear Door sw Front Passenger's Door Lock Sw. (LOCK) Front Passenger's Door Lock Sw. (UNLOCK) Front Passenger's Door Lock Knob Sw. (UNLC Driver's Rear Door Lock Knob Sw. (UNLC Passenger's Rear Door Lock Knob Sw. (UNLO Door Lock Com mand Door Unlock C om m a Driver's Door Unlock Commam Fuel Fill Door Switch Fuel Fill Door Comm« Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK) Driver's door key cylinder switch (UNLOC Driver's door lock switch (L O O Driver's door lock switch (UNLOCK) Driver's door lock knob switch (LOC Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK; Driver's door switch Front passenger's door switch Driver's rear door switch Passenger's rear door swi Trunk Lid/Tailgate sw Front Passenger's Door Lock Sw. (LOCK) Front Passenger's Door Lock Sw. (UNLOCK) Driver's Rear Door Lock Knob Sw. (LOCK) Passenger's Rear Door Lock Knob Sw. (UNLO1 Door Lock Com m and Door Unlock Com m a Driver's Door Unlock C om mam Trunk Lid Release C om ma Ignition Switch ( Keyless Buzzer Comn

Data List Indication OFF/ON OFF/C OFF/C OFF/C OFF/C OFF/C OFF/C OFF/C OFF/C OFF/C OFF/C OFF/C OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON

OFF/ON OFF/ON

OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON

OFF/ON OFF/ON

1

OFF/ON

OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON

OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON

OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON

1

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Input; (cont’d) System Menu Power W indow s

Power W in d o w Power W in d o w Power W in d o w Power W in d o w Power W in d o w Power W in d o w Power W in d o w Power W in d o w

Data List Main Switch Master, Driver's AUTO Switch Master, Driver's UP Switch Master, Driver's DOWN Switch Master, Front Passenger's UP Switch Master, Front Passenger's DOWN Switc Master, Left Rear UP Switch Master, Left Rear DOWN Switch

Power Window Master, Right Rear UP Switch

~~

Power W in d o w Master, Right Rear DOWN Switch Power W in d o w Master, Passenger's AUTO Switch Front Passenger's W in d o w Switch (UP) Front Passenger's W in d o w Switch (DOWN) Front Passenger's W in d o w Switch (AUTO) Driver's W in d o w M otor A-phase Pulse Signal Driver's W in d o w M otor B-phase Pulse Signal Front Passenger's W in d o w M otor A-phase Pulse Signal Front Passenger's W in d o w M otor B-phase Pul se Signal Driver's W in d o w M oto r Command Front Passenger's W in d o w M otor Command Driver's Door Switch Front Passenger's Door Switch M oo n ro of Tim er Com mand

1

Data List Indication OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON lO F F /O N — — — lO F F /O N - ^ ^ NONE/DETECT NONE/DETECT NONE/DETECT NONE/DETECT OFF/UP/DOWN OFF/UP/DOWN OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON

Input: (cont'd) System M enu Power Seat/Power M irro r

Data List DPMS MEM Switch DPMS POS1 Sw DPMS POS2 Switch Left Power M irro r Horizontal Sensor Left Power M irro r Vertical Sensor Right Power M irro r Horizontal Sensor Right Power M irro r Vertical Sensor Left Power M irro r UP-DOWN M oto r Command Left Power M irro r LEFT-RI GHT M oto r Command Right Power M irro r UP-DOWN M oto r Command Right Power M irro r LEFT-RIGHT M oto r Command M em ory Switch I l l um ination Com mand Power M irro r A djust UP switch Power M irro r A djust LEFT switch Power M irro r Adjust DOWN switch Power M irro r Adjust RIGHT switch Power M irro r LEFT switch Power M irro r RIGHT switch Slide Switch Backward Slide Switch Forward Recline Switch Backward Recline Switch Forward Front Up-Down Switch Down Front Up-Down Switch Up Rear Up-Down Switch Down Rear Up-Down Switch Up Ignition Switch fo r Power Seat C ontrol Sl ide Sensor Front UP-DOWN Sensor Recline Sensor Rear UP-DOWN Sensor Slide M oto r com m and Recline M otor Com mand Front Height M oto r Com mand Rear Height M oto r Com mand Power Seat Buzzer Com mand ATP switch Col umn A uto Switch Column T ilt DOWN Switch Column Tel escopic Pull Switch Column Telescopic Push Switch I gnition Switch (ETS) Column T il t Sensor Column Tel escopic Sensor Column T ilt M otor Column Telescopic M otor

Data List Indication OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON NORMAL/ABNORMAL NORMAL/ABNORMAL NORMAL/ABNORMAL NORMAL/ABNORMAL OFF/UP/DOWN OFF/LEFT/RIGHT OFF/UP/DOWN OFF/LEFT/RIGHT OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON lO F F /O N ^ OFF/ON IO F F /O N lO F R O N

r ~OFF/ON~

"

“

“

i o f f To M^

OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/FWD/RWD OFF/UP/DOWN OFF/UP/DOWN OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/UP/DOWN OFF/UP/DOWN

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Input:

(cont'd)

System M enu W ipers

Data List W indshield W iper Switch ( M I ST) W indshield W iper Switch (L0 ¥ W indshield W iper Switch (HIGI Rear W iper Swit W indshield W asher Switc Rear W asher Sv\ Interm ittent W iper Dwell Timer Brake Pedal Position Switi Rear W iper Auto Stop Switch Rear W iper Com m an Rear W asher Com me Headlight W asher Sv W indshie l d W iper M oto r PARK Swit W indshield W i per Switch (BACK-UF W indshield W iper M otor HI Comma W in d sh i eld W iper M otor LO Comm; W i ndshield W asher M otor C o m m a r

W indshield Rear W asher M otor Commar Rear W in d o w W iper Com manc Security

Rear W in d o w W iper Switc Driver's key cylinder switch (LC Driver's key cylinder switch (UNLOC Driver's door lock switch (LOCI Driver's door lock switch (UNLOCK) Driver's door lock knob switch (LOC Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK Ignition Key Cylinder Swit Driver's door sw Front passenger's Door Switch Driver's Rear Door Switch Passenger's Rear Door Switch Trunk Lid/Tailgate S v Front Passenger's Door Lock Sw. (LOCK) Front Passenger's Door Lock Sw. (UNLOCK) Front Passenger's Door Lock Knob Sw. (UNLC Driver's Rear Door Lock Knob Sw. (UNLC Passenger's Rear Door Lock Knob Sw. (UNLOCK) Radio Harness Conne Hazard warning switch Door Lock C om m and Door Unlock Com m and Driver's Door Unlock Commam Trunk Lid Release Comma Security Hood Switch Ignition Switch ( Headlight Comn Headlight High Beam Com m an Parking Light Commc Horn Comn Tailgate sw

Data List Indication OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/C OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON 1 -2 5 5 OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/C OFF/C OFF/C OFF/C OFF/C

OFF/C OFF/C I OFF/C OFF/C OFF/C OFF/C OFF/ON OFF/ON u >ff 7c ^^OFF/ON " I r a

OFF/ON "^ o f f To n OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON

OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/C

OFF/ON OFF/ON

input: (cont'd) System Menu Power Tailgate

Data List Indication

Data List Power' witc P o w e r! inter Handle S Power Tailgate Inner S w it n Switch f Latch Gear Position Switch (Neutral Latch Gear Position Switch (Release Full Latch Switcl Ratchet Sw Half Latch i

OH f/O N

OFF/ON OFF/C OFF/C OFF/C OFF/C OFF/ON OFF/C i o f f Tc NONE l NONE NONE NONE OFF/OPEN/CLOSE OFF/C OFF/RELEASE/CLOSE OFF/C

Power Tailgate Drive M otor Pu Power Tailgate Drive M otor Pu Right Power Tailgate Upper Pinch Senso Left Power Tailgate U pper Pinch Sensor Power Tailgate M otor C om m ar Power Tailgate Clutch Commat Closer M otor Commc Power Tailgate Buzze

Function Test: System Menu Lighting

Power W ind ow s

Wipers

Securi Power Seat/Power Mirror

Door Locks

Power Tailgate

Note

n Ignition Key Cylinder Light C om m and Interior Light Commc Left Turn Signal Com m an Right Turn Signal C om m a Headlight C om m and Headlight High Beam Comman Parking Lights Com m and Driver's LOCK/UNLOCK Switch Illumination Light Passenger's LOCK/UNLOCK Switch Illumination Light Driver's W in d o w Up Driver's W in d o w Dov Front Passenger's Windov Front Passenger's W in d o w Down Left Rear Wi Left Rear W Right Rear V Right Rear V . d w ii Windshield W iper M otor Low Com m and Windshield W iper M otor High Com m and Windshield W asher Com m and Rear W iper W asher Rear W iper Mot« Horn C om m and Power Seat; Slide Motor-Full Forward Power Seat: Slide Motor-Full Backward Power Seat: Front U P-D OW N Motor-Full Up Power Seat: Front U P-D OW N Motor-Full Down Power Seat: Rear U P -DOW N Motor-Full Up Power Seat: Rear U P -DOW N Motor-Full Down Power Seat: Recline Motor-Full Forward Power Seat: Recline Motor-Full Backward Power Seat: M e m o ry Buzzer-5 seconds Lock All Do Unlock All Doon Unlock Driver's Side Door Vlotor: Op r: Clo fJ H \ < futch: Operates On Foi 1 if r elease Motor: Open elease Motor: (

Illuminates for 30 se i Illuminates for 30 sen ,

Blinks Blinks Operates for 15 sec. Operates for 15 Operates f< Operates f< Operates fi Drive* Drives for 3 sec Drives for 3 sec Drive; Drives for 3 sec Drives for 3 sec Drives for 3 sec. Drive* Operates f< Operates f< Operates f< Operates f< Operates f< Operates horn f Dr ves the slide motor to full forwa Dr ves the slide motor to full backw Dr ves the front up-down motor to full u Dr ves the front up-down motor to full down. Dr ves the rear up-down motor to full up. Dr ves the rear up-down motor to full down. Dr ves the recline motor to full forward. Dr ves the recline motor to full backward. Dr v e s fo r

Drives the power tailgate motor to full open. Drives the power tailgate motor to full close. Drives the tailgate closer motor to open positii Drives the tailgate closer motor to c position.

Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshooting PCM (see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of communication errors first, then do this diagnosis if the symptom is related to the B-CAN system. 1. Compare the symptom with this l ist of B-CAN related systems: • Gauge control module • Exterior lights • Turn signals • Entry light control • I nterior l ights • Safety indicators • Rear window defogger • HandsFreeLink • Horns (security and panic) • Beepers (key-in, seat belt, lights-on, l ow battery vo ltage, and parking brake) • Power windows • Power window/moon roof timer • Wiper/washer • Security • Keyless entry • Power door locks • Climate control • Key interlock • Dashlights brightness • Driving position memory system • Power tai l gate • XM radio • AcuraLink • Immobilizer • BSI system Is the s y m p to m re la te d to the B -C A N s y s te m ?

YES-Go to step 2. NO-Go to the system troubleshooting for the system with the symptorp ■

2. Connect the HDS to the data l ink connector (A), then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

3. From the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT menu, select B-CAN CONTROL UNITS INFORMATION, and then sel ect CHECK CONNECTED CONTROL UNITS l isted to see if the fo l l owing control units are communicating with the HDS. • MICU • Gauge control modu l e • Combination switch contro l unit • Rel ay control module • Power seat control unit (HDS name: Memory seat contro l unit) • HandsFreeLink control unit • Driver's MPCS unit • Rear MICU • Acura Link control unit (XM receiver) (HDS name; HIP (Honda Information Platform) Unit) • Power tai l gate control unit • Climate control unit • Immobi l izer-keyl ess contro l unit • BSI control unit NOTE: • If a unit is communicating with the HDS, DETECT will be displayed. • If a unit is not communicating or the vehicle is not equipped, "N ot Avail able" will be disp l ayed. • The HDS only checks the connected units status one time when BODY ELECTRICAL is selected. To recheck the status after repair, reboot the HDS and repeat step 3. A re a ll c o n tr o l u n its c o m m u n ic a tin g w ith th e H D S ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lf any of the control unit are not communicating, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode B (see page 22-156), If all units are not communicating or only the MICU is communicating, go to the DTC B1000 troubleshooting (see page 22-164).■

4. Select the system that has the problem from the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT menu, then sel ect DTCs. Are a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lf the prob l em is related to one of the following items and the system that is malfunctioning does not stop or turn off, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C (see page 22-158), if the prob l em is related to one of the fo l l owing items and the system that is malfunctioning does not work or turn on, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode D (see page 22-157). • Exterior lights • Turn signals • Entry light control • Interior lights • Horns (security and panic) • Power windows • Wiper/washer • Power door locks If the problem is related to one of the following items, go to the troub l eshooting for that individual system. ■ • Gauge control module • Safety indicators • Beepers (key-in, seat belt, lights-on, low battery vo ltage, and parking brake) • Rear window defogger (cl imate control) • Security • Keyless entry • Climate control • Key interlock • Dashlights brightness • Navigation • Driving position memory system • HandsFreeLink • Power tai l gate • I mmobilizer • BSI system

5. Record all DTCs, and troubleshoot them in this order: • Battery voltage DTCs. • Internal error DTCs. • Loss of communication DTCs. • Signal error DTCs.

Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode B

Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C

Do this diagnosis If any of the control units are not communicating (Not Available is displayed in the HDS) as found by the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154).

Do this diagnosis if a component that is controlled by the B-CAN system does not stop or turn off.

1. Using the HDS, select the system that has the symptom from the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT menu. 2. Select DTCs, and then check for loss of communication DTCs. A r e a n y lo s s o f c o m m u n ic a tio n D T C s in d ic a te d ?

NOTE: • If the component does not run or turn on, goto B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode D (see page 22-157). • See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a list of input and output devices and the contro l units that monitor the input and contro l the output devices (see page 22-147). 1. Check for DTCs by selecting the MODE MENU from the HDS.

YES-Go to step 3.

Are a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

NO-Rep l ace the MICU.B

YES-Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154).■

3. Do the power, ground, and communication part of the input test for the unit(s) not communicating with the HDS. NOTE; Troub l eshoot Rear MICU loss of communication DTCs before troubleshooting AcuraLink contro l unit (XM receiver), the power tai l gate contro l unit, and the power seat control unit DTC. ____ _ _ Unit not communicating M I CU (see page 22-175) ________ Gauge contro l module (see page 22-416) Relay contro l modu l e (see page 22-179) Driver's MPCS unit (see page 22-352) Combination switch contro l unit (see page 22-379)________ _______________________ Immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page _____ _ 22-5281 Rear MICU (see page 22-183) Power seat control unit (see page 22-583) Power tailgate contro l unit (see page 22-828) Climate control unit (see page 21-30) BSI control unit (see page 25-131) ______ _ HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-425) Acura Link control unit (see page 23-331)

NO-Go to step 2. 2. Turn off the switch that controls the malfunctioning component. 3.

Select the applicab l e system from the system MODE MENU, then select DATA LIST, and check the input of the switch that controls the component. D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te th e s w itc h is O F F ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-Go to step 8. 4. In the DATA LIST, check the output signal of the malfunctioning component. Is th e o u tp u t s ig n a l O F F ?

YES-Go to step 5, NO-Replace the contro l unit that controls the device that w i ll not turn OPF.H 5. Test the re l ay that controls the device that does not stop or turn off, if app l icable. If the relay tests OK, then check for a short in the wire between the re l ay and the component, the re l ay and control u n it or the component and control unit. Are the relay and the wire harness OK?

YES-Replace the control unit that controls the component that will not stop or turn OFF.B NO-Replace the relay or repair/replace the wire harness.■

Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode D 8, Test the switch, then check for a short in the wire between the switch and the control unit that monitors the switch. A r e th e s w itc h a n d w ire h a rn e s s O K ?

YES-Replace the contro l unit that monitors the switch,■ NO-Replace the switch or repair/replace the wire harness.®

Do this diagnosis if a component that is contro l l ed by the B-CAN system does not work or come on. NOTE: • If the component does not turn off or stop, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C (see page 22-156). • Seethe B-CAN system unit input/output index for a l ist of input and output devices and the control units that monitor the input and control the output devices (see page 22-147). 1. Check the fuse of the malfunctioning output device. is th e fu s e O K ?

YES-Go to step 2. NO-Rep l ace the fuse, and recheck.B 2. Check for DTCs by selecting the MODE MENU from the HDS. A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154),■ NO-Go to step 3. 3. Turn ON the switch that controls the malfunctioning component. 4. Select the applicable system from the system MODE MENU, then sel ect DATA LIST, and check output signal for the malfunctioning component. Is th e re a n o u tp u t s ig n a l?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-Go to step 3. 5. Test the relay and ground that contro l s the device that does not work, if app l icable. If the rel ay and ground test OK, then check for an open or a short in the circuit for the malfunctioning component. Is th e r e la y a n d th e c ir c u it O K ?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-Replace the re l ay, or repair the d re u it.ll 6. Do the function test for the malfunctioning component. D o e s th e o u tp u t d e v ic e p a s s th e fu n c tio n te s t?

YES-Go to step 7.

(cont'd)

Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode D (cont'd)

Troy bleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test M ode 2 (without the HDS)

7. With the malfunctioning output device connected, connect a vo l tmeter between the malfunctioning output device input and the ground wire that the contro l unit uses to contro l the output device circuit.

Special Tools Required MPCS (MGS) Service Connector 07WAZ-001010A

Test M ode 1

8. Select FUNCTI ONAL TEST from the MODE MENU, and do the forced operation test of the malfunctioning component.

Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM (see page 11 -3) or F-CAN loss of communication errors first, then do this diagnosis if the HDS is not available.

Is t h e r e

a c h a n g e in v o lta g e ( 1 2 V t o O V o r O V t o 1 2 V )?

YES-l nspect the ground for the component. If OK, replace the co m p on en t!! NO-Replace the control unit that contro l s the malfunctioning component.® 9. Sel ect DATA LIST from the MODE MENU, and make sure the switch signal input for the malfunctioning system indicates a change when operated, D o e s th e s w itc h in p u t in d ic a te O N w h e n th e s w itc h is ON?

YES-Repl ace the contro l unit that controls the ma l functioning component.®

1. Check the No. 7 (10 A) and the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/re l ay box. A r e th e fu s e s O K ?

YES-Go to step 2, NO-Find and repair the cause of the blown fuse.® 2. Remove the l eft kick panel (see page 20-76). 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and press the interior l ight control button (DOOR). 4. Connect the MPCS service connector (A) to the M ICU service check connector socket (B) in the under-dash fuse/re l ay box.

NO-Go to step 10. 10. Test the switch and its ground (if applicable), then check for an open or a short in the wire between the switch and the control unit that monitors it. is th e s w itc h a n d th e w ire h a rn e s s O K ?

YES-Replace the control unit that monitors the switch.® NO-Replace the switch, or repair/replace the wire harness.® f 07¥¥AZ-00101 0A)

5. Wait 5 seconds, and watch the individual map lights and ignition key light. When they flash once quickly and then go off, the system is in Test Mode 1.

6. Check for B-CAN DTCs indicated by the multi-information disp l ay (MID) on the gauge control module while still in Test Mode 1. Press the SEL/RESET button to display the next code. After you get to the l ast code, the display shows END. If no DTCs are stored, the display will read NO. NOTE: If the test times out, remove the MPCS service connector, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and repeat steps 3 and 4. A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Go to step 11. 7. Record all DTCs and sort them into these categories; • Battery voltage DTCs • Internal error DTCs • Loss of communication DTCs • Signal error DTCs 8. Troubleshoot the DTCs in the order listed above. 9. Clear the DTCs by pressing and holding the SEL/RESET button for at l east 10 seconds. 10. You will hear a beep to confirm the codes have been cleared. Operate the devices that fai l ed, and recheck for codes.

Test Mode 2 11. Remove the MPCS service connector from the under-dash fuse/relay box MICU service check connector socket for 5—10 seconds, then re-insert it to enter Mode 2. When the system enters Mode 2, the individual map l ights and ignition key light flash two times quickly and then go off. NOTE: If the MPCS service connector is disconnected for too short or too long of a time, or the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), the system returns to Test Mode 1.

IVliCU ________________ Item_____________ Driver's door switch (ON; door opened) Front passenger's door switch (ON; door opened) Left rear door switch (ON; door opened) Right rear door switch (ON; door opened) Automatic lighting sensor Headlight washer switch (ON; switch pressed) Ignition key switch (ON; key inserted) Brake pedal position switch (ON; pedal pressed) Transmission range switch (P, R) Audio security ground (when connected) Power mirror se l ector switch (LEFT, RIGHT) Power m irror adjustment switch (LEFT, RIGHT, UPy DOW RELAY CONTROL MODULE Item Windshield wiper switch (AUTO STOP/PARK) Security hood switch (ON; hood opened) COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT Item Turn signal switch (LEFT) Torn signal switch (RIGHT) Combination l ight switch (ON; each position) Dimmer switch (ON) Passing switch (ON) Windshield wiper switch (ON) I ntermittent wiper dwell timer Windshield washer switch (ON) Fog light switch (ON) Rear window wiper switch (ON) Rear window washer switch (ON) REAR M IC U Item •Full latch switch (Built into the tailgate c l oser unit) (ON) _____

(cont'd)

Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2 (without the HDS) (cont'd) DRIVER S MPCS UN IT Item Power window master switch (Driver’s window UP) Power window master switch (Driver's window

oowr

Power window master switch (Driver's window AUTO UP) Power window master switch (Driver's window AUTO DOWN) Power window master switch (Front passenger's window UP) Power window master switch (Front passenger's window DOWN) Power window master switch (Front passenger's window AUTO UP) Power window master switch (Front passenger's window AUTO DOWN) Power window master switch (Left rear window UP) Power window master switch (Left rear window DOWN) Power window master switch (Right rear window UP) Power window master switch (Right rear window DOWN) Driver's door key cy l inder switch* (LOCK) Driver's door key cylinder switch* (UNLOCK) Driver's door lock switch (LOCK) Driver's door lock switch (UNLOCK) Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK) Driving position memory switches (1,2, memo) Left rear power window switch (UP) Left rear power window switch (DOWN) Fuel fil l door opener switch (ON) A second key is necessary to check the key cylinder inputs. Be sure to rotate the key cylinder switch two times to each position (lock and l ock, unlock and unlock) to ensure the door lock knob switch is in the appropriate position.

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE Item Parking brake switch (ON; parking brake applied) Distance switch (ON; switch pressed) VSA OFF switch (ON; switch pressed) CMBS OFF switch (ON; switch pressed) Active damper system switch (ON; switch pressed) Cruise control main SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (ON; switch pressed) Transmission range switch (P, Ft, N, D, S) Dashlights brightness controll er ( + , —) Mu l ti - information switch (SEL/RESET, PREVIOUS, NE POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT Item Transmission range switch (P) Power seat slide switch (FORWARD, BACKWARD) Power seat front up-down switch (UP, DOWN) Power seat rear up-down switch (UP, DOWN) Power seat recl ine switch (FORWARD, RECLINE) Power tilt/telescopic steering switch (UP, DOWN, PUSH, PULL) FRONT PASSENGER'S MPCS UNIT Item Front passenger's door l ock switch (LOCK) Front passenger’s door lock switch (UNLOCK) Front passenger's power window switch (UP, DOWN/AUTO) Right rear power window switch (UP, DOWN) D o th e in d iv id u a l m a p lig h ts a n d ig n itio n k e y lig h t in d ic a te p r o p e r s w itc h o p e ra tio n ?

YES-Go to function and input test for the system related to the failure.■ NO-Repair an open, a short, or replace the fau lty sw itc h .il

Sleep and Wake-Up Mode Test 1. Shift to sleep mode: Close all doors. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then open and close the driver's door. If the MICU receives no signals from the inputs listed below, it will go into sleep mode in l ess than 40 seconds. • Driver's door l ock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK) • Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK or UNLOCK) • Front passenger's door l ock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK) • Full latch switch (Tailgate closed) • Hazard warning switch (OFF) • Power tailgate outer hand l e switch • Power tai l gate inside switch • Power tai l gate opener switch 2. Confirm s l eep mode: NOTE: Check any officia l Honda service website for more service information about parasitic draw at the battery. Check the parasitic draw at the battery after 40 seconds; amperage should change to less than 35 mA in less than 50 seconds. 3. Shift to wake up mode: When the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the MICU, and all B-CAN system components wake up. When any switch in the multiplex integrated contro l system is turned on, a message is sent to the re l ated contro l unit(s) to command the desired function. After confirming sleep mode, look in the following table for the switch most related to the problem. Operate that switch and see if its control unit wakes up. NOTE: If any contro l unit is fau l ty and does not wake up, several circuits in the system w i l l malfunction at the same time. Below is a list of the switches and input signals that can wake it up. • Door switches (Door open) • Driver's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK) • Driver's door l ock knob switch (LOCK or UNLOCK) • Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK or UNLOCK) • Front passenger's door l ock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK) • Front passenger's door lock knob switch (LOCK or UNLOCK) • Left rear door l ock knob switch • Right rear door lock knob switch • Full latch switch (Tailgate open) • Security hood switch (Hood open) • Hazard warning switch (ON) • Combination light switch (Parking, Headlight, Dimmer, Passing ON) • Ignition key switch (Key inserted)

Circuit Diagram

UNDER-DASH

*1: Without navigation •2: With navigation — : CAN line - - : UART line UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

MICU SERVICE CHECK CONNECTOR DATA L INK CONNECTOR 4T

LT BLU

LT GRN

5 B-CAN 1

BSl CONTROL UNIT

i LTGRN

1 I

B2 VBU

1 REAR I B11 FUSE/RELAY BOX

CAN

IG1

t - t VBU DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT

PG

;

I I 1 i I i 1

B

REAR MICU PG

UART

IG1

..9 .

SG

SG

—4—

1 €16

i i

V

LTGRN 1

LTGRN 1 1 A40

LTGRN 1 1 C7

B-CAN POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT DPMS BUS (UART)

B-CAN

B-CAN

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT

ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER)

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

• POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH • MOONROOF CONTROL UNIT/ MOTOR • FRONT PASSENGER'S MPCS UNIT

; ah DPMS BUS I UART) POWER TILT/ TELESCOPIC STEERING CONTROL UNIT _Q _

_u_

_£L

_£L

JwL

_Q_

_£L

_Q_

G601

G801

G604

G603

G601

G601

G601

G502

DTC Troubleshooting DTC B1000; Comm unication Bus Line Error

6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154).

7. Disconnect the appropriate connector for each control unit in the table one at a time. Clear the DTC#then recheck for DTCs after each unit is disconnected.

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 3. Wait for at least 8 seconds. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the communication bus line is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections, or worn/shorted wires. If the connections are good, check the battery condition (see page 22-94) and the charging system.■ 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. A re D TC s B 1 0 0 0 f B 1 0 0 5 , B 1 0 0 7 , B 1 0 1 1 , B 1 0 1 2 , B 1 0 1 3 , B 1 0 1 5 a n d B 1 0 3 2 a ll in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-Faulty MICU; rep l ace the under-dash fuse/relay box.B

NOTE; Leave the contro l unit connector disconnected after checking for DTCs, before moving on to the next control u n it Control unit Rel ay contro l module Gauge control modi Immobilizer-key l ess control unit Combination switch control unit Driver's MPCS unit Climate contro l unit Audio unit Audio-navigation unit HandsFreeLink contro l unit Power seat contro l unit Power tai l gate contro l unit AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) BSI control unit Rear MICU*

Connector Under-hood fuse/relay box connector E (14P) Connector A (12P) IP

connector

8P connector Connector A (40P) Connector A (40P) Connector C Connector F (20P) 28P connector Connector A (40P) Connector C (14P) connector A (32P) 16P connector Rear fuse/relay box connector B (34P)

*: Disconnect this one last Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 in d ic a te d w ith e a c h in d iv id u a l u n it d is c o n n e c te d ?

YES-Go to step 8. NO-Replace the contro l unit that was disconnected when B1000 did not reset.■ 8. Disconnect rear fuse/re l ay box connector C (42P).

9. Check for continuity between each of the contro l unit connector terminals l isted in the table and body ground. Control unit Power seat contro l unit Power tailgate contro l unit AcuraLink contro l unit (XM receiver) BSI control unit

Connector terminal A40

11. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay box connector N (45P) terminal No. 22 and body ground. UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR

N f4SP)

€7

IZ0ZIZI 120 17 [8 | « |X1 U T 7 \ 171*1 |16|/117|18|1»|

No. 10 No. 5

HD s a

B-CAN (LT GRN)

is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short to ground In. the wire between the rear fuse/relay box and the affected control unit.H

BIZ® (SpffpiTSl 991.PH

NO-Go to step 10. 10. Measure the vo ltage between each of the rear fuse/relay box connector terminals listed in the table and body ground.

W ire side of female term inals is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire.B Control unit Power seat control unit Power tailgate contro l unit Acura Link contro l unit (XM receiver) BSI control unit

Connector terminal A40 €7 No. 10

NO-Go to step 12. 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (il). 13. Measure the vo l tage between under-dash fuse/relay box connector N (45P) terminal No. 22 and body ground.

No. 5

Is th e re le s s th a n 0 .2 ¥ ?

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR

N (45P)

YES-Go to step 11. NO-Repair a short to power in the wire between the rear fuse/relay box and the affected contro l unit.B

03Z1Z1 03 171*1

B-CAN (LT GRN)

i lS l/ N l8 | l9 |

E*3 m

B iilT l f a W l

a

L* y \ x i / i / \ s

0IZS

r»nsi

1919191

W ire side of female term inals Is

there

b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Repair a short to power in the w ire .ll NO-Fau l ty M ICU, replace the under-dash fuse/relay b o x .il

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B1001: MICU Internal Error (CPU error) DTC B1002: MICU Internal Error (EEPROM error) NOTE; If you are troubleshooting m ultip l e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154).

DTC B liO S: M ICU Lost Com m unication with Relay Control M odule (RM Message) NOTE; If you are troubleshooting m ultip l e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

3. Wait for at l east 8 seconds.

3. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

Is D T C B 1 0 0 1 a n d fo r B 1 0 0 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.B NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this tim e.B

Is D T C B 1 0 0 5 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the MICU and the relay contro l module,■ 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. /Ire

D T C s B 1 1 5 8 , B 1 9 5 9 f B 2 1 6 2 , a n d B 2 9 7 0 a ls o

in d ic a te d w ith B 1 0 0 5 ?

YES-Do the relay contro l modu l e input test (see page 22-179).■ NO-Do the MICU input test (see page 22-175).■

DTC B1§07: M ICU Lost Com m unication with Com bination Switch Control Unit (HLSW Message) . NOTE: If you are troubleshooting mu l tip l e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS,

DTC B1011: M IC U Lost Com m unication with Gauge Control M odule (VSP/NE Message) NOTE: If you are troubleshooting m ultip l e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (li).

3. Wait for at l east 6 seconds.

3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D T C

B 1 0 0 7 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO- l ntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections between the MICU and the combination switch control u n i t l l 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. A r e D T C s B 1 0 6 2 , B 1 155, a n d B 1 9 5 7 a ls o in d ic a t e d w ith DTC B 1007?

YES-Do the combination switch contro l unit input test (see page 22-379).■

Is D T C B 1 0 1 1

in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the M ICU and the gauge control m odule.! 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. A r e D T C s B 1 0 6 0 f B 1 2 0 5 f B 1 3 5 7 , B 1 8 0 5 , a n d /o r B 2 1 6 0 a ls o in d ic a te d w ith D T C B 1 0 1 1 ?

YES-Do the gauge control module input test (see page 22-416).B ~ NO-Do the M I CU input test (see page 22-175),■

NO-Do the MICU input test (see page 22-175).B

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B1012: MICU Lost Communication with Rear MICU (RJU Message)

DTC B1013: M ICU Lost Communication with Drive CKSW Message)

NOTE; If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A fsee page 22-154).

DTC B1015: MICU Lost Communication with

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

Driver’j MPCS Unit (DRLOCKSW Message) NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to fo llo w the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Cl^ar the DTCs with the HDS, 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

is D T C B 1 0 1 2 in d ic a te d ?

3. Wait fo r at least 6 seconds.

YES-Go to step 5.

4. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS.

NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time, Check for loose or poor connections between the MICU and the rear M I CU.® 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS, is D T C B 1 9 5 5 in d ic a te d w ith D T C B 1 0 1 2 ?

YES-Do the rear M ICU input test (see page 22-183).■ NO-Do the MICU input test (see page 22-175).■

Is

d /o r B 1 0 1 5 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. N O -lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the MICU and the driver's MPCS unit.B 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

4m

D TC *.

B 1 1 8 2 , B 1 3 5 6 f B 1 3 6 8 , a n d /o r B 1 9 0 5

a ls o in d ic a te d w ith B 1 0 1 3 a n d /o r B 1 0 1 5 ?

YES Do the d rive r’s MPCS unit input test (see page 22-352).11 NO-Do the MICU input test (see page 22-175).■

DTC B1032: M ICU Lost Com m unication with SRS Unit (CDS Message) NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to fo l low the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

DTC B1080: Power Supply Circuit (IG1 Line) Input Error for Relay Control Module and MICU NOTE; If you are troubleshooting m ultip l e DTCs, be sure to fo l low the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II ).

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

3. Wait for at least 8 seconds.

is D T C B 1 0 3 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES~Go to step 5. NO- l ntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.■ 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C B 1 0 1 1 a ls o in d ic a te d w ith D T C B 1 0 3 2 ?

YES-Check for an open in the wire between the MICU and the gauge control module. If the circuit is faulty, repair the open.11 NO-Do the gauge control module input test (see page 22-416).11

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C B 1 0 8 0 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections.■ 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector D (10P). 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Measure the voltage between under-hood fuse/relay box connector D (10P) terminal No. 7 and body ground. UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR D HOP)

W ire side of fe m a l e te rm in a l s

Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Substitute a known-good under-hood fuse/relay box and recheck.B NO-Go to step 9. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 10. Check the No. 21 {7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse relay box, Is th e fu s e O K ?

YES-Go to step 11.

13. Check for continuity between under-hood fuse/re l ay box connector D (10P) terminal No. 7 and body ground. UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY SOX CONNECTOR D

(10P)

NO-Rep l ace the fuse. If the fuse blows again, repair a short to ground in the No, 21 (7.5 A) fuse circuit.® 11. Disconnect under-dash fuse/re l ay box connector D (17P). 12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector D (17P) terminal No. 6 and body ground with a jumper wire. UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR D

(17P) W ire side of female term inals

1G1 {YEL)

/ 8

2

3

4

9

10

11

12

13

14

5

6

7

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

15

16

17

YES-Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/re l ay box and recheck.B

JUMPER

WIRE

W ire side of fem al e term inals

NO-Repair an open in the w ire .ll

DTC B1050: Communication Circuit Error

(BUS-OFF)

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. A re D T C s B 1 0 5 0 , B 1 1 5 0 , B 1 2 0 0 , B 1 2 5 0 , B 1 3 5 0 , B 1 8 0 0 ,

B 1 9 0 0 , B 1 9 5 0 f a n d /o r B 2 1 5 0 in d ic a te d ?

DTC B1150: Communication Circuit Error

(BUS-OFF) DTC B1200: Communication Circuit Error

(BUS-OFF) DTC B1250: Communication Circuit Error

(BUS-OFF) DTC B1350: Communication Circuit Error

(BUS-OFF) DTC B1800: Communication Circuit Error

(BUS-OFF) DTC B1900: Communication Circuit Error

(BUS-OFF) DTC B1950: Communication Circuit Error

(BUS-OFF) DTC B2150: Communication Circuit Error

(BUS-OFF) NOTE: If you are troub l eshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back ON

YES-Go to step 5. NO-l ntermittent failure, the system is'OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at the MICU and B-CAN connected units in the table.® Under-dash fuse/relay box connector Connector D (17P) terminal No. 11 Connector N (45P) terminal No. 22 Connector X (39P) terminal No. 27 Connector J (21P) terminal No. 4 Connector N (45P) terminal No. 28 Connector N (45P) terminal No. 28 Connector N (45P) terminal No. 28 Connector N (45) terminal No. 28 Connector G (6P) terminal No. 1

(II).

3. Wait for more than 6 seconds.

Connector G (6P) terminal No. 1 Connector G (6P) terminal No. 1

B-CAN connected unit connector Under-hood fuse/relay box connector E (14P) terminal No. 1 Gauge control module connector A (12P) terminal No. 5 Combination switch control unit 8P connector terminal No. 4 Driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 28 Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector terminal No. 4 Climate control unit connector A (40P) terminal IS Audio unit connect C (24P) terminal No. 23 Audio-navigation unit connector F (20P) terminal IS Power seat control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 41 Power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) terminal IS Rear MICU (rear fuse/relay box connector B (34P) terminal No. 2

5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D T C B 1 0 0 0 a is o in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000.B NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections at the M I CU and B-CAN connected units in the table.B

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B2152: Driver's MPCS Unit Internal Error (EEPROM error)

DTC B2155: Driver's MPCS Unit Lost Com m unication with M iCU (M ICU Message)

NOTE: If you are troub l eshooting m ultip l e DTCs, be sure to fo l low the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154).

DTC B2156; Driver's MPCS Unit Lost Com m unication with M ICU (MtRRORSW Message)

1, Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2, Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 3, Check fo r DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C B 2 1 5 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Repl ace the driver’s MPCS unit.B NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this tim e.B

DTC B2181; D river’s MPCS Unit Lost Com m unication with M ICU (DO O RSW Message) NOTE; If you are troub l eshooting m ultip l e DTCs, be sure to fo l l ow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 3. Wait for at l east 8 seconds. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. A re D T C s B 2 1 S 5 , B 2 1 5 6 , a n d /o r B 2 1 61 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections between the driver's MPCS unit and the MICU.H 6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Are D T C s

B 1055, B 1057, B 1157, B 1159, B 1255, B 1355,

B 1 8 0 6 , B 1 8 1 0 , B 1 8 1 1, a n d /o r B 1 9 5 5 a ls o in d ic a te d ?

YES-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/re l ay box (see page 22-30).■ NO-Do the driver’s MPCS unit input test (see page 22-181).■

DTC B2157: Driver's MPCS Unit Lost Com m unication with Gauge Control M odule flLLUMl Message)

DTC B2162: Driver's MPCS Unit Lost Communication with Relay Control Module (RM Message)

DTC B2160: Driver's MPCS Unit Lost Com m unication with Gauge Control M odule (VSP/NE Message)

NOTE: If you are troub l eshooting mu ltiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

NOTE: If you are troubleshooting mu l tip l e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154).

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

3. Wait for at l east 8 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II ).

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C B 2 1 8 2 in d ic a te d ?

3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.

YES-Go to step 5.

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections between the driver's MPCS unit and the relay control m odule.ll

A re D T C s B 2 1 5 7 a n d /o r B 2 1 6 0 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the driver's MPCS unit and the gauge control module.■ 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. A re D T C s B 1 0 1 1 , B 1 0 6 0 f B 1 2 0 5 f B 1 2 0 7 f B 1 3 5 7 f B 1 8 0 5 , a n d /o r U 0 1 5 5 a ls o in d ic a te d ?

YES-Do the gauge control module input test (see page 22-418).■ NO-Do the driver's MPCS unit input test (see page 22-181).■

5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. A re D T C s B 1 0 0 5 , B 1 1 5 8 f B 1 9 5 9 , a n d /o r B 2 9 7 0 a ls o in d ic a te d ?

YES-Do the relay contro l modu l e input test (see page 22-179).H NO-Do the driver's MPCS unit input test (see page 22-181).■ ■ ■

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC U1280: Communication Bus Line Error (BUS-OFF) NOTE: If you are troub l eshooting mu l tip l e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back ON

(II). 3. Wait for more than 8 seconds. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C U 1 2 8 0 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at the MICU and B-CAN connected units in the tab l e.■ Under-dash B-CAN connected unit connector fuse/relay box connector Connector N (45P) HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector terminal No. 28 terminal No. 18 Connector G (6P) Acuralink contro l unit terminal No, 1 (XM receiver) connector A (32P) termina l Connector G (6P) BSI contro l uni termina l No. 1 connectorterminal No. 5 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 a ls o in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troubleshoot DTC B10OO.11 NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections at the M ICU and B-CAN connected units in the table.■

MICU Input Test NOTE: Before testing, troubleshoot the m ultip l ex integrated contro l unit first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Remove the left kick panel (see page 20-76). 3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors D, E, F, G, H, J, N, P, Q, and X. NOTE: All connector views are wire side of fema l e terminals. CONNECTOR

D (17P)

CONNECTOR

H (14P)

n

r 4

7

1

2

8 j—

9 10 11 12 113 [ 14 15 18 1?

7

8

3

8

5

5

9 11

\

2

CO

7

12

6

9 9

BLK

LTGRN

CONNECTOR J (21P)*

CONNECTOR E (16P)

LTGRN fi™ , 1 2 8 j—

9

r»

r» 3

4

5

11 112 13

9

9

1

7

15 18

9

9 o

4

3

9 11

5

X 9 /

-

Z

&

9 8 9 9 9 9

6

k

BLK CONNECTOR P (30P)

CONNECTOR F (14P) BRN

LT BLU p i. 1

9

4

3

6 7 / I 9 Lr-J

9

10 | 11 12 113 14 ----L

CONNECTOR G

v

1

ORN

2

15 16

5 3 9 9 9 9

6 20

7

9 X 9 9X 1/ /

CONNECTOR

(6P)

3

WHT

10 11 12 13 14

Q (14P) BLK

LTGRN 1

9

25 26 27 28

JE =~ L

2

9 9 9

n— , 1 2

9

8

4

9 9

9 X

11

X X X X 4

9

30

MICU Input Test (cont'd) CONNECTOR X (3SP)*

CONNECTOR N (45P)*

J = 3 ------ 1------1------ C = = L

0 |/Tu]

^

- l~ T —

^

17991

9 ] qT 9

pj]/^r7|l8|¥]

LTGRN

,9 1

23]

2 3 T i 4 [ 7 | | 26~| 27~]

[9 J 281/ 1

30 [ / [ / I

1 33~]

[2 3

p e M 7 / ! ? 3! 9 9

i 40 41 42

LTGRN

B

t - 9 '9 v M H " ft1 Vj I v j /

LTGRN

L_A_ *: Connector vie w show n rotated 180® from actual position In the under-dash fuse/relay box.

4. Inspect the connector and socket termina l s to be sure they are all making good contact, • If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. • If the termina l s look OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connectors sti ll disconnected, do the following input tests: • If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. C a v ity D11

G1

J4

W ire T

tg rn

L TG R N

LTGRN

^

T e s t c o n d itio n

Test: D esired re s u lt

U n d e r all c o ndition (U n d e r-h o o d fu s e /re l ay b ox c o n n e c to r E (14P) disco n ne cte d )

Check fo r c o n tin u ity b e tw een te rm in a l D11 and u n d e r-h o o d fu s e /re la y b o x c o n n e c to r E (14P) te rm in a l No. 1; T here sh o u ld be continu' Check fo r c o n tin u ity to g ro u n d : There s h o u l d be no continuitv, Check fo r c o n tin u ity be tw e en te rm in a l G1 and rear fu s e /re la y b o x c o n n e c to r B (34P) te rm in a l No. 2: T here s h o u ld be c o n tin u ity . Check fo r c o n tin u ity to g ro u n d : T here sh o u ld be no c o n tin u ity . Check fo r c o n tin u ity b e tw e en te rm in a l J 4 and d riv e r's MPCS u n it c o n n e c to r A (40P) te rm in a l No, 28; There sh o u ld be c o n tin u ' Check fo r c o n tin u ity to g ro u n d : T here sh o u ld be no c o n tin u ity .

U n d e r all c o n d itio n s (Rear fu se /re la y b o x c o n n e c to r B (34P) d isco n ne cte d )

U n d e r all c o n d itio n . (D rive r's MPCS u n it c o n n e c to r A (40P) d isco n ne cte d )

P ossible cause if d e sire d re s u lt is n o t o b ta in e d A n o pen o r high resistance in th e w ire

>rt to g ro u n d in the A n o p en or high resistar in th e w ir e

>rt to g ro u n d in the V

A n o p en or high resistar in the w ire

>rt to g ro u n d in the

Cavity

Wire

P8

ORN

N22

X27

LTGRN

LTGRN

N28

LTGRN

N28

LTGRN

N28

LTGRN

N28

LTGRN

N28

LTGRN

N28

LTGRN

Test condition Under al l conditions

Under all conditions (Gauge control module connector A (12P) disconnected)

Under all condition (Combination switch control unit 8P connector disconnected) Under all conditions (I mmobilizer-keyl ess control unit 7P connector disconnected) Under all conditions (Climate contro l unit connector A (40P) disconnected) Under all conditions (Audio unit connector C (24P) disconnected) Under all conditions (HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector disconnected) Under all conditions (Audio-navigation unit connector F (20P) disconnected) Under all conditions (Immobil izer-keyless control unit 7P connector, cl imate . control unit connector A (40P), audio unit connector C (24P), HandsFreeLink contro l unit 28P connector, and audio-navigation unit connector F (20P) disconnected)

Test: Desired result Check for continuity between terminal PS and DLC terminal No. 7: There should be continuity. Check for continuity to ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between terminal N22 and gauge control module connector A (12P) terminal No. 5; There should be continuity. Check for continuity to ground; There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between terminal X27 and combination switch control unit 8P connector terminal No. 4: There should be continuity. Check for continuity to ground; There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between terminal N28 and immobilizer-keyless control unit I P connector terminal No. 4: There shoul d be continuity. Check for continuity between terminal N28 and climate control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 4: There shoul d be continuity. Check for continuity between terminal N28 and audio unit connector C (24P) termina l No. 23: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between terminal N28 and HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector termina l No. 18; There should be continuity, Check for continuity between terminal N28 and audio-navigation unit connector F (20P) terminal No. 6: There shoul d be continuity. Check for continuity to ground: There should be no continuity.

Possible cause If desired result is not obtained An open or high resistance in the wire A short to ground in the wire An open or high resistance in the wire A short to ground in the wire An open or high resistance in the wire A short to ground in the wire An open or high resistance in the wire An open or high resistance in the wire An open or high resistance in the wire An open or high resistance in the wire An open or high resistance in the wire A short to ground in the wire

(cont'd)

MICU Input Test (cont'd) 6. Reconnect the connectors, and do the following input tests: • If any test indicates a prob l em, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/re l ay box (see page 22-30). Cavity

Wire

Test condition

E9 H3 Q4

BLK

In all ignition switch positions

P1

BRN

Test: Desired result Measure the vo l tage to ground; There should be less than 0.2 ¥,

• •

I n all

ignition switch positions

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be l ess than 0.2 ¥.

• •

Fl

LT BLU

Ignition switch ON (II)

Measure the voltage to ground; There should be battery voltage.

• • •

G3

WHT

Under all conditions

Measure the voltage to ground; There shoul d be battery voltage.

• • • • •

Possible cause if desired result is not obtained Poor ground (G601) or an open in the ground wire An open or high resistance in the wire Poor ground (G502) or an open in the ground wire An open or high resistance in the wire Blown No. 21 {7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/rel ay box Faul ty under-dash fuse/relay box An open or high resistance in the wire Blown No. 4 (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box Blown No. 7 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box Faulty main under-hood fuse box Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box An open or high resistance in the w

Relay Control Module Input Test NOTE: Before testing the relay control module, troub l eshoot the multiplex integrated control unit first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Remove the under-hood fuse/re l ay box (see page 22-88). 3. Disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connectors D (10P) and E (14P). UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (14P)

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR D |10P) BLK

BLK

LT GRN

n\ ^ 1 / 7 j—

W ire side of female te rm in a l s

r 3

9

4

5

6

I-----1 9 10 11 12 13 14

W ire side of fem al e term inals

4. I nspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. • If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system, • If the terminals l ook OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connectors still disconnected, do the following input tests: • If any test indicates a prob l em, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Cavity E1

Wire

Test condition

LTGRN . Under all conditions (Under-dash fuse/rel ay box connector D (17P) disconnected

Test: Desired result Check for continuity between terminal E1 and under-dash fuse/relay box connector D (17P) terminal No. 11: There should be continuity. Check for continuity to ground: There should be no continuity.

Possible cause if desired result is not obtained An open or high resistance in the wire

A short to ground In the

Relay Control Module Input Test (cont'd) 6. Reconnect the connectors, and do the fo l l owing input tests: • If any test indicates a prob l em, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If a l l the input tests prove OK, replace the relay contro l module. Cavity

Wire

Test condition

D3

BLK

In all ignition switch positions

Measure the vo ltage to ground; There should be l ess than 0.2 V.

D4

BLK

In all ignition switch positions

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be l ess than 0.2 ¥,

D8

WHT

Under all conditions

Measure the voltage to ground: There shoul d be battery voltage.

D7

YEL

Ignition

Measure the vo l tage to ground: There should be battery voltage.

switch ON (II)

Test: Desired result

Possible cause if desired result is not obtained • Poor ground (G202) or an open in the ground wire • An open or high resistance in the wire • Poor ground (G401) or an open in the ground wire • An open or high resistance in the wire • Blown No. 4 (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box • Bl own No. 7 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/rel ay box • Faulty main under-hood fuse box ulty under-dash fuse/relay box • An open or high istance in the wire wn No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/rel ay box • Faulty under-dash fuse/rel ay box • An open or high istance in the wire

Driver’s MPCS Unit Input Test NOTE; Before testing the driver's MPCS unit, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated contro l unit first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Remove the driver’s door panel (see page 20-9), 3. Disconnect driver’s MPCS unit connectors A (40P) and B (14P). DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)

DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)

WHT

BLK

1 2

1 21

3

4

5

6

T

8

3

10

22 23 24 25 26 2? 28 29

/

YEL

11

15 16 17 / / / 30 31 32 33 34 35 7 1/ /

19

20

38 39

/

1 8

2

. 4

3 9

10

5 /

V

7

8 12 13

14

7

BLK

LTGRN

W ire side of fem a l e term inals

Wire side of female te rm i nals

4. I nspect the connector and socket termina l s to be sure they are all making good contact. • If the termina l s are bent loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. • If the terminals l ook OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connectors sti ll disconnected, do the following input tests; • If any test indicates a prob l em, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If al l the input tests prove OK, go to step 8. Cavity A28

Wire

Test condition Under all condition.. (Under-dash fuse/relay box connector J (21 PS disconnected

Test: Desired result Check for continuity between termina l A28 and under-dash fuse/relay box connector J (21P) termina l No. 4; There should be continuity. Check for continuity to ground: There shoul d be no continuity.

Possible cause I desired result is not obtained An open or high resistance in the wire.

)rt to ground in the wire

(cont'd)

Driver's MPCS Unit input Test (cont'd) 6. Reconnect the connectors, and do the fo l l owing input tests: • If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system, • If all the input tests prove OK, replace the driver's MPCS u n it Cavity

Wire

Test condition

A5 B14

BLK

In all ignition switch positions

Test: Desired result Measure the voltage to ground; There should be less than 0.2 ¥. • •

A7

WHT

Under all conditions

Measure the vo l tage to ground: There shoul d be battery voltage. • • • •

A25

YEL

Ignition switch ON (I I)

Measure the vo ltage to ground; There shoul d be battery voltage.

• • •

Possible cause if desired >t obtained i r ground (G801) or an open in the ground wire Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box An open or high resistance in the w »wn No. 4 (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box Blown No. 7 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/rel ay box Faulty main-under hood fuse box Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box An open or high resistance in the wire Blown No, 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box Faulty under-dash fuse/rel ay box An open or high resistance in the wire

Rear MICU Input Test NOTE: Before testing the rear MICU, troub l eshoot the m ultip l ex integrated control unit first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Remove the l eft rear side trim (see page 20-88). 3. Disconnect rear fuse/relay box connectors B (34F) and C (42P). REAR FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR B (34P) LTGRN

LTGRN

WHT

1 2/ 4 20 21 22 23

/l« / I / 24 25

LTGRN

BLK

9 10 11 / I / 26 2? 28 29

f

LT BLU

BLK Wire side of femal e terminal s

REAR FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR C (42P) LT GRN 1U 9 / / 4 5 8 / 8 9 WfTT 12(13 9 15 18 1?9 19 20 21 36 37 / 24 / / / / 29 30 33—*iC— 34— 39 40 41 L— —— , 35 / ■

LTGRN Wire side of female terminals 4. Inspect the connector and socket termina l s to be sure they are all making good contact. • If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. • If the terminals l ook OK, go to step 5.

Rear MICU Input Test (cont'd) 5. With the connectors still disconnected, do the fo l lowing input tests; • If any test indicates a prob l em, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 8. Cavity

Wire

B2

LTGRN

B14

C18

C32*1

I T iTr.

LTGRN

LTGRN

LTGRN

LTGRN

*1: With Acura Link With BSI

*2 :

Test condition

Test: Desired result

Check for continuity between terminal B2 and under-dash fuse/rel ay box connector G (6P) terminal No. 1: There should be continui . Check for continuity to groun There should be no continuity. Under al l conditions (Power Check for continuity between seat control unit connector A terminal B14 and power seat control unit connector A (40P) (40P) disconnected) terminal No. 40: There should be continuity. Check for continuity to ground: There should be no continuit Under all conditions (Power Check for continuity between terminal C16 and power tailgate tailgate control unit control unit connector C (14P) connector C (14P) disconnected) terminal No. 7: There should be continuity. Check for continuity to ground: There should be no continuit Check for continuity between Under all conditions (Acuralink control unit (XM terminal C32 and AcuraLink control receiver) connector A (32P) unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminal No. 10: disconnected) There should be continuity. Check for continuity to ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between Under all conditions (BSI terminal B11 and BSI control unit control unit 16P connector disconnected) 16P connector terminal No. 5: There should be continu Check for continuity to ground: There should be no continuity. Under all conditions (Under-dash fuse/relay box connector G (6P) disconnected

Possible cause if desired suit is not obt

An open or high resistance in the wire

>rt to ground in the An open or high resistai in the wire

>rt to ground in the \ An open or high resistai in the wire

)rt to ground in the An open or high resistai in the wire

A short to ground in the \ An open or high resistance in the wire >rt to ground in the \

6. Reconnect the connectors, and do the following input tests: • If any test indicates a prob l em, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If all the input tests prove OK, the rear MICU must be faulty, replace the rear fuse/relay box (see page 22-93). Cavity

Wire

Test condition

B18 B29

BLK

In all ignition switc I positions

Measure the vo ltage to ground: There shoul d be l ess than 0.2 V.

B4

WHT

Under all conditions

Measure the vo ltage to ground: There should be battery voltage.

B23

LT BLU

Ignition

Measure the vo ltage to ground: There should be battery vo l tage,

switch ON (II)

Test: Desired result

Possible cause if desired result is not obtained • Poor ground (G603, G804) or an open in the ground wire • An open or high resistance in the wire • Blown No. 4 (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box • Blown No. 7 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box • Faulty main under-hood fuse box • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box • An open or high resistance in the wire • Bl own No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box • An open or high resistance in the wire

Component Location Index

Replacement, page 20-205

(Built in to th e rear fuse/relay Replacem ent page 22-93 I nput Test, page 22-221

box)

(cont'd)

Component Location Index (cont'd)

(Including FULL LATCH SWI TCH) Latch/Ratchet Switch Test, page 22-632 Replacem ent page 20-211

System Description Security Alarm System The security alarm system is integrated with the mu ltip l ex integrated control system. For the system to arm, the ignition switch must be in the LOCK (0) position, the key must be removed, and the MICU must receive signals that the doors, hood, and tailgate are closed and locked. The alarm can be armed or disarmed at any time by locking or un l ocking the driver's door with the key or pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the transmitter. The alarm can a l so be armed by l ocking (with the lock knob) then closing the driver's door. When everything is closed and l ocked, the only inputs that are grounded, and have 0 V, are the driver's door l ock knob switch {LOCK position), and the audio u n it In other words, all of the other switches are open, and have about 5.0 ¥ in sleep mode or 12 ¥ in awake mode, inc l uding the key cy l inder switches. The security indicator in the gauge control module begins to flash immediately after the doors, tailgate, and hood are closed and l ocked, and then, after 20 seconds, the flashing intervals of the security indicator change to indicate that the a l arm is fully armed. If the security indicator does not f l ash, the system is not arming. If the LOCK button is pressed a second time within 5 seconds (Keyl ess LOCK acknow l edgement is turned ON) and the vehicle is comp l etely closed and locked, the keyless buzzer sounds, and the parking lights and the side marker l ights flash one time to confirm the security alarm system is armed. If one of the switches is misadjusted or shorted internally (0 ¥), or there is a short in the circuit (0 V), the security system will not arm, A switch that is slightly misadjusted can cause the alarm to sound for no apparent reason. In this case, a significant change in outside air temperature, the vibration of a passing vehicle, or something bumping into the vehic l e could cause the alarm to sound. There is no glass breakage or motion detector feature. If anything is opened or improperly un l ocked after the system is armed, the contro l unit receives a ground signal from that switch, the 5—12 ¥ reference drops to 0 ¥, and the system sounds the alarm. If the audio unit is disconnected, the input loses its ground, and the input voltage goes to 5—12 ¥, and the system sounds the alarm. The system sounds the alarm when any of following occur while the security system is armed: • A ooor or the tailgate is forced open • • • • •

A Ooor is unlocked w ithout using the key or the transm itter The hood is opened The audio unit (or navigation unit, rear controller and screen) is disconnected transm itter panic is operated The ignition switch is turned ON (II)

When the system sounds the alarm, the horns sound, and the parking lights and the side marker lights flash for 2 minutes. The alarm can be stopped at any tim e by unlocking the driver's door with the key or by pressing any button on the transmitter.

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Panic Mode The panic mode sounds the a larm in order to attract attention. When the PANIC button on the transmitter is pressed and held for about 2 seconds, the horns sound, and the parking l ights and the side marker l ights f l ash for about 20 seconds. The panic mode can be cancell ed at anytime by pressing any button on the remote or by turning the ignition switch ON (II). The panic mode will not function if the ignition switch is in ON (I I).

Keyless Entry System The keyl ess entry system is integrated with the m u ltip l ex integrated control system. Transmitters 1 and 2 (Identified on the back of each transmitter) are linked to the DPMS, the climate control settings, the custom memory settings (in the M ID ) , the audio, the navigation and the il l umination settings. Depending on which transmitter un l ocks the vehicle, these settings are chosen. Some functions of the security, keyl ess entry, and power door l ocks can be customized using the M I D keyl ess memory setting. They include: • AUTO DOOR LOCK: Door l ocking can be turned off, or turned on when shifting from Park or at a speed above 15 mph. • AUTO DOOR UNLOCK: Door unlocking can be turned off, or turned on when shifting to Park or turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0). • KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE: Door unlocking can be set to unlock al l doors or only the driver's door on the first push. • KEYLESS DOOR LOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT: The keyless buzzer, the parking lights and the side marker l ights can be turned on or off when pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the remote. • SECURITY RELOCK T I MER: Select the time (30, 60, or 90 sec.) that the doors relock if you unlock the doors with the remote, but do not open any of them. • HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER: Sel ect time (0 ,15,30, or 60 sec.) to turn the headlights off after removing the key from the ignition opening, then closing the driver's door. • AUTO LI GHT SENSIT IV ITY: Automatic lighting sensor sensitivity can be adjusted five steps (M IN/LOW/M I D/HIGH/M AX). • INTERIOR LI GHT DIMMING TIME: Select the dimming time (15,30, or 60 sec.) of the interior l ights after closing the door with the key removed from the ignition.

- METER SETUP; Language-English/French/Espanol Adjust outside air temperature-4-5 + 4 + 3 + 2 + 1 0 —1 —2 —3 —4 —5 Trip A and average Fuel Reset w/fill-ON/OFF Adjust a l arm voiume-HlGH/MfD/LOW Elapsed time reset-Manually only/IGN OFF/Trip A/Trip B Auto interior illumination-MAX/MID/LOW/MIN/OFF - POSITION SETUP: Memory position l ink-ON/OFF Auto tilt and telescope steering wheel-ON/OFF NOTE: If either of these functions are turned off, they w i l l not function with a linked remote, - LIGHTING SETUP: Interior l ight dimming time (15, 30, 80 sec.) Headlight auto OFF timer (0,16,30, 80 sec.) Auto light sensitivity- MAX/HIG H/M I D/LOW/M I N - DOOR/WI NDOW SETUP: Auto door lock-Shift from park/With vehicle speed/OFF Auto door unlock-Shift to park (Driver door or All doors)/lgnition OFF (Driver door or All doors)/OFF Key and remote unlock mode-Driver door/AII doors Keyless lock acknowledgement-ON/OFF Security relock timer (90,60,30 sec) -WIPER SETUP: Wiper action-lntermittent/With vehicle speed - ACC SET UP: Pre-running car detect beep-ON/OFF ACC display speed unit-mph or km/h The transmitters can be linked and unlinked to the keyless memory settings by pressing the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for about 1 second. The LED on the transmitter blinks twice when unlinked, and once when linked. The keyless entry system allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle with the transmitter. When you press the LOCK button, all the doors lock (unless any one of the doors is not fully closed or the key is in the ignition switch). When you press the UNLOCK button the first time, only the driver's door unlocks, if keyless memory setting "KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE" is set to Driver's Door. The other doors unlock when you press the UNLOCK button a second time. All the doors unlock when you press the UNLOCK button the first time if keyless memory setting "KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE" is set to All Doors. NOTE: The doors will not lock with the transmitter if a door is not fully closed, or if the ignition key is in the ignition switch. If the UNLOCK button is pressed, released, then pressed and held, the windows and the moonroof begin to open. The windows and the moonroof stop if the button is released. The windows and moonroof cannot be closed with the remote. See power windows for more information and troubleshooting.

When the interior lights switch is set to the "DOOR" mode, the individual map lights will come on when the UNLOCK button is pressed. If a door is not opened, the lights will go off in about 30, 60, or 90 seconds (depending on the keyless memory setting "SECURITY RELOCK TIMER"), and the doors will relock. If the doors are locked with the transmitter within 30 seconds, the lights will go off immediately.

Circuit Diagram

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

IGNITION SWITCH

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

: B-CAN line : UART line UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

G606

G506

G508

G507

G601

G601

G502

G601

G601

(cont'd)

Circuit Diagram (cont'd)

LEFT REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATO R

{With navigation)

(With rear entertainment)

(Without navigation) (Without rear entertainment)

: B-CAN line

No. 7 {10 A) FUSE (UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX)

No, 11 (15 A) FUSE (MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BO X)

DTC Troubleshooting DTC B2179: Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch LOCK/UNLOCK Signal Error NOTE: • If you are troubleshooting m ultip l e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). • Two ignition keys are required to do this troubleshooting, 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. With one ignition key; turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 3. With the second key; turn the driver's door key cylinder to the LOCK and UNLOCK positions 10 times. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

8. Disconnect the driver’s door l ock actuator 10P connector. 3. Check the ON/OFF information of the Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) and Driver’s Door Key Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST. A r e b o th in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to r s O F F ?

YES-Faulty driver's door key cylinder switch; rep l ace the driver's door lock actuator assembl y.■ NO-Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Disconnect driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P). 12. Check for continuity between body ground and driver's door lock actuator 10P connector terminals No. 8 and No. 9 individually.

is D T C B 2 1 7 9 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5.

DRIVER'S DOOR LATCH 10P CONNECTOR

NO-lntermittent failure, the driver's door key cylinder switch system is OK at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections between the driver's MPCS unit and the driver's door lock actuator,■ 5. W ith the driver’s door key cylinder switch in neutra l position, sel ect KEYLESS TRANSMITTER from the BODY ELECTRI CAL SYSTEM SELECT menu, and enter DATA LIST. 8. Check the ON/OFF Information of the Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST,

W ire side of female term inals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

A re b o th in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to r s O F F ?

YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire.B

YES-Go to step 7.

NO-Rep l ace the driver's MPCS unit.B

NO-Go to step 8. 7. Turn the driver's door key cylinder to the LOCK and UNLOCK positions with the ignition key, and check the ON/OFF information of the Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door Key Cyl inder Switch (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST. A r e b o th D r i v e r 's D o o r K e y C y lin d e r S w itc h (L O C K ) a n d D r i v e r 's D o o r K e y C y lin d e r S w itc h (U N L O C K )

in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to r s O N a t th e s a m e tim e w ith th e d o o r k e y c y lin d e r s w itc h in th e L O C K o r U N L O C K p o s itio n ?

YES-Test the key cylinder switch (see page 22-237), If it is OK, repair a short between the No. 8 BLU and No. 9 LT BLU wires. NO-Replace the driver's MPCS unit.B

DTC 82180: Driver's Door Lock Switch LOCK/UNLOCK Signal Error NOTE: If you are troubleshooting mu l tip l e DTCs, be sure to fo l low the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154).

7. Disconnect the driver’s door lock switch 5P connector. 8. Check the ON/OFF information of the Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK). A r e b o th in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to r s O F F ?

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

YES-Faulty driver's door lock switch.®

2. Lock and unlock the driver's door with the driver's door lock switch.

NO-Go to step 9.

3. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C B 2 1 8 0 in d ic a te d ?

9. Disconnect driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P). 10. Check for continuity between body ground and driver's door l ock switch 5P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4 individually.

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the driver's MPCS unit and the driver's door lock switch. ■

4. With the driver's door lock switch in the neutral position, select KEYLESS TRANSMITTER from the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT menu, and enter DATA LIST. 5. Check the ON/OFF I nformation of the Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK).

DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR

p 1 2 3 UNLOCK {RED) 1

4 I

5 LOCK (PNK)

(H) (H) Wire side of female terminals

A r e b o th in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to r s O F F ? Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?

YES~Go to step 8.

YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire.B

NO-Go to step 7.

NO-Replace the driver's MPCS unit.B

8. Operate the driver's door lock switch in the LOCK and UNLOCK positions, and check the ON/OFF information of the Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door LOCK Switch (UNLOCK). A r e b o th D r i v e r 's D o o r L O C K S w itc h (L O C K ) a n d

Driver’s D o o r L O C K

S w itc h ( U N L O C K ) in fo rm a tio n

in d ic a to r s O N a t th e s a m e tim e w h e n th e d o o r lo c k s w itc h is in th e L O C K o r U N L O C K p o s itio n ?

YES-Do the door l ock switch test (see page 22-237). If the switch is OK, repair a short between the w ire s .! NO-Replace the driver's MPCS u n i t l l

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B2181: Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch LOCK/UNLOCK Signal Error NOTE; If you are troubleshooting mu l tiple DTCs, be sure to fo l low the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

10. Disconnect driver’s MPCS unit connector A (40P). 11. Check for continuity between body ground and driver’s door lock actuator 10P connector termina l s No. 6 and No. 7 individually. DRIVER’S DOOR LATCH

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then'back to ON (II). 3. Lock and un l ock the driver's door with the door lock knob switch,

1 5 LOCK (PUR)

10P CONNECTOR

2 6 I Jl

'

7 8 |

9

/

UNLOCK

JL (GRN)

(H) (ft)

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C B 2 1 81 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the driver's door l ock knob switch system is OK at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections between the driver's MPCS unit and the driver's door l ock actuator.! 5. Select KEYLESS TRANSMITTER from the BODY ELECTRI CAL SYSTEM SELECT menu, and enter DATA LIST. 6. Check the ON/OFF information of the Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST. D o e s th e D r iv e r 1s D o o r L o c k K n o b S w itc h (L O C K ) in fo rm a tio n in d ic a te O N a n d D r i v e r 's D o o r L o c k K n o b S w itc h (U N L O C K ) in fo rm a tio n in d ic a te O F F w ith th e d o o r lo c k k n o b s w itc h is in th e L O C K p o s it io n , a n d d o e s th e D riv e r 's D o o r L o c k K n o b S w itc h (L O C K ) in fo rm a tio n in d ic a te O F F a n d D r iv e r 's D o o r L o c k K n o b S w itc h (U N L O C K ) in fo rm a tio n in d ic a te O N w ith th e d o o r lo c k k n o b s w itc h is in th e U N L O C K p o s itio n ?

YES-Replace the driver's MPCS unit.B NO-Go to step 7. 7. Disconnect the driver's door l ock actuator 10P connector, 8. Check the ON/OFF information of the Driver's Door Knob Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST. A r e b o th in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to r s O F F ?

YES-Faulty driver's door lock knob switch; rep l ace the driver's door lock actuator assemb l y.® NO-Go to step 9. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),

W ire side o f female term inals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.I NO-Replace the driver's MPCS unit.B

DTC B218S: Front Passenger's Door Lock Switch LOCK/UNLOCK Signal Error NOTE: If you are troubleshooting m ultip l e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (I I), 3. Lock and unlock the front passenger's door with the front passenger's door l ock switch. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C B 2 1 8 6 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5, NO-lntermittent failure, the front passenger's door lock switch system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the front passenger's MPCS unit and the front passenger's door l ock switch.■ 5. With the front passenger's door lock switch in the neutral position, se l ect KEYLESS TRANSMITTER from the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT menu, and enter DATA LIST. 6. Check the ON/OFF information of the Front Passenger's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) and Front Passenger’s Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK).

8. Disconnect the front passenger's door l ock switch 5P connector. 9. Check the ON/OFF information of the Front Passenger's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) and Front Passenger's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK). A re b o th in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to rs O FF ?

YES-Replace front passenger's door l ock switch,■ NO-Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 11. Disconnect front passenger's MPCS unit connector A (28P). 12. Check for continuity between body ground and front passenger's door l ock switch 5P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4 individually, FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR

1 (ORN)

2

3

1

4

5

JL

(PNK}

(&) (&) W ire side of female term inals

A r e b o th in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to rs O F F ?

Is there co n tin u ity?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Go to step 8. 7. Operate the front passenger's door lock switch in the LOCK and UNLOCK positions, and check the ON/OFF information of the Front Passenger's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) and Front Passenger's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK). A r e b o th the F ro n t P a s s e n g e r's D o o r L o c k S w itc h

(LO C K ) a n d F ro n t p a s s e n g e r's D o o r L o c k S w itc h (U N L O C K ) in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to rs O N a t the s a m e tim e w h e n the d o o r lo c k s w itc h is in the L O C K o r U N L O C K p o s itio n ?

YES-Do the door lock switch test (see page 22-237). If the switch is OK, repair a short between the wires,■ NO-Replace the front passenger's MPCS unit.B

YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire 18 NO-Replace the front passenger's MPCS u n itl

Symptom Troubleshooting Index 1. Check for B-CAN DTCs. I f
_ r u i_ r P o sitio n w h e n s o m e th in g ' is p in c h e d

Period iod of _ n _ r u j

i .. i

pulse s ses

-

; n --

T h re sh o ld va lu e fo r ju d g m e n t o f p in c h in g

K e f Cylinder Operation With the key inserted in the driver's door key cylinder, turn the key a second time within 15 seconds and h o l d it to operate the w i n d o w s and mo onroof (cl ockwise to open, counterclockwise to close). The w i n d o w s and moon ro o f stop moving w h e n the key is released. Th e auto reverse operation is not active w h e n closing the w i n d o w s and moonro o f with the key cylinder. Keyless Operation By pressing and holding the U N L O C K button of the key l ess transmitter a second time within 15 seconds, the w i n d o w s and mo on ro o f open. The w i n d o w s and m o o nr oo f stop moving w h e n the U N L O C K , button is released. The w i n d o w s do not c l ose with the L O C K button,

Resetting the Power Window Control Unit Reset the p ow er w i n d o w control unit after doing any of the following actions:

W ithout the HDS

• P o w e r w i n d o w r e g u l a t o r r e p la c e m e n t o r r e p a ir.

N OTE: D o the reset procedure from the p o we r w i n d o w switch of the affected window.

• Pow er w i n d o w motor replacement or repair. • W i n d o w run channel replacement. • Door glass repl acement or repair. • Driver's M P C S unit replacement.

1. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II), 2. M o v e the p ow e r w i n d o w a l lthe w a y d o w n by using the pow er w i n d o w D O W N switch.

• Front passenger's M P C S unit replacement 3. O p e n the driver's or front passenger's door. • P ow er is disconnected from the driver's or front passenger’s M P C S unit while the po w e r w i n d o w timer is ON. N OTE: Ifthe passenger's w i n d o w l ost pow e r w h e n the key off timer w a s ON, it cannot be operated from the driver's switch and must be reset from the passenger's powe r w i n d o w switch.

Using the HDS

4. D o the foll owing four times before going to step 5: N OTE: D o each bullet step within 5 seconds of each other. • Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), or press the engine start/stop button to select the O F F mode. • Push and h o l d the po we r w i n d o w D O W N switch. • Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). • Release the p ower w i n d o w D O W N switch.

1. Connect the H D S to the data link connector. 2. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II), then enter the vehicl e's VIN and mileage at the prompts.

5. Confirm that A U T O U P no longer works. I f A U T O U P still works, repeat step 4, paying c l ose attention to the 5 second time limit.

3. Select B O D Y ELEC TR IC A L from the S Y S T E M SELECTI O N MENU.

8, M o v e the po w er w i n d o w all the w a y d o w n using the power w i n d o w D O W N switch,

4. Fr o m the B O D Y ELEC T RI CA L S Y S T E M S E L E C T menu, select P O W E R W I N D O W S .

7. Pull up and hold the pow e r w i n d o w U P switch until the pow e r w i n d o w is all the w a y up, then continue to hold the switch for several seconds.

5. F r o m the M O D E m enu, select A D J U S T M E N T . 0. F r o m the A D J U S T M E N T M E N U , select P O W E R W I N D O W R E S E T F O R DRIVER SIDE ( P A S S E N G E R ' S SIDE). 7. Follow the prompts on the screen. 8. Confirm that the p ow e r w i n d o w control unit is reset by using the p ower w i n d o w A U T O U P and A U T O D O W N function.

8. Confirm that the pow er w i n d o w control unit is reset by using the p o we r w i n d o w A U T O U P and A U T O D O W N function. I f the pow er w i n d o w still does not wo r k in A U T O , repeat the procedure several times, paying c l ose attention to the 5 seconds time l imit between each bull eted step. I f the w i n d o w stil ldoes not work, troubleshoot the p ower w i n d o w circuit

Circuit Diagram

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX No. 1 |BAT) (120 A)

No. 3 (IG) (50 A)

KTVJO-

B1

A2

IGNIT ION SWITCH / BAT T— hO

\ / 0 - 4 —— PNK —

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX No. 21 (7.5 A)

— TV9~

9 9 ^ No. 4 (40 A)

—

IG1 HOT in ON (ll) and START (HI)

No. 7 (10 A)

— rv^—

No. 3 (P/W) (50 A)

3-CAN

_ f_ _

i WHT

WHT

YEL

LTGRN

• : B-CAN line : UART line

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

Circuit Diagram (cont'd)

: UART line

G507

G508

WINDOW MOT

RIGHT REAR POWER OR

G606

DTC Troubleshooting DTC B217S; Driver's Power Window Motor Pulse A Error N OT E: I f you are troub l eshooting m u l tiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N Syste m Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154).

12. Check for continuity between driver's M P C S unit connector B (14P) terminal No. 5 and driver's po we r w i n d o w motor 6P connector terminal No. 4. DRIVER'S POWER W IN D O W M O TO R 8P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a le te r m in a l s

1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II),

PLSA (GRY)

3. O p e n and close the driver's p o w e r w i n d o w by using the po w e r w i n d o w master switch m a n u a l l y. PLSA (GRY)

4. Check for D T C s with the HDS, 1

Is D T C B 2 1 7 5 in d ic a te d ?

I 2

8

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time. Check for loose or poor connections,® 5. O p e n and c l ose the driver's p o w e r w i n d o w by using the p o w e r w i n d o w master switch m a n u a l l y.

D o e s th e p o w e r w in d o w m o to r o p e ra te ? Y E S - G o to step 6.

3 9

4 10

— n 5 6

\/\

12 113

7 14

DRIVER'S M PCS U N IT CONNECTOR B (14P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 13. NO-Repair an open in the wire.H 13. Check for continuity between driver's p o w e r w i n d o w motor 6P connector terminal No. 4 and b od y ground.

N O - D o the driver's p o we r w i n d o w motor test (see page 22-381 ).■

DRIVER'S POWER W IN D O W M O TO R 6P CONNECTOR

6. Select the P O W E R W I N D O W S from the B O D Y E L E C T R I C A L S Y S T E M S E L E C T m e n u and enter the D A T A LIST. 7. Check the D E T E C T / N O N E information of the Driver's w i n d o w motor A-phase p u l se signal in the D A T A LIST.

D o e s th e in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to r d is p la y D E T E C T w h ile th e p o w e r w in d o w is m o w in g , a n d d is p la y N O N E w h e n th e p o w e r w in d o w is s t o p p e d ?

PLSA (GRY)

W ire side o f fe m a le te r m in a l s

YES-Replace the driver's M P C S unit.B N O - G o to step 8, 8. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

is D T C B 2 1 7 6 a ls o in d ic a t e d ? Y E S - G o to step 15. N O - G o to step 3. 3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 10. Disconnect driver's M F C S unit connector B (14P). 11, Disconnect the

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short in the wire.B N O - G o to step 14, 14. D o the driver's p ow er w i n d o w motor test (see page 22-381).

Is th e m o t o r O K ? YES-Replace the driver's M P C S unit.B NO-Replace the driver's p o w e r w i n d o w

motor.H

6P connector from the driver's p o w er

w i n d o w motor.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 15. Check for continuity between driver's M P C S unit connector B (14P) terminals No. 3 and No. 8 and the driver's po w e r w i n d o w motor 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 respectively. DRIVER'S POWER W IN D O W M O TO R 6P CONNECTOR

DTC B217S: Driver's Power Window Motor Pulse B Error N OT E ; I f you ..are troub l eshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N S ystem Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154),

W ire side o f fe m a le te r m in a l s S ¥C C (PNK)

S G N D (W H T)

1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 3. O p e n and c l ose the driver's p o w e r w i n d o w by using the p o we r w i n d o w master switch manually. 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS,

is D T C B 2 1 7 6 in d ic a t e d ? Y E S - G o to step 5. DRIVER'S MPCS U N IT CONNECTOR B (14P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is O K at this time. Check for loose or poor connections. 11 5. O p e n and close the driver's p o w e r w i n d o w by using the p o we r w i n d o w master switch m a n u a l l y.

YES-Go to step 16, NO-Repair an open in the wire.B 18. Check for continuity between driver's p o w e r w i n d o w motor 6P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.

DRIVER'S POWER W IN D O W M O TO R SP CONNECTOR H S ¥C C

(PNK)

D o e s th e p o w e r w in d o w m o to r o p e ra te ? Y E S - G o to step 8. N O - D o the driver's p ow er w i n d o w motor test (see page 22-361),11 8. S e l ect the P O W E R W I N D O W S from the B O D Y E L E C T R I C A L S Y S T E M S E L E C T m e n u and enter the D A T A LIST. 7. Check the D E T E C T / N O N E information of the Driver's w i n d o w motor B-phase pulse signal in the D A T A LIST.

D o e s th e in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to r d is p la y D E T E C T w h ile th e p o w e r w in d o w is m o w in g , a n d d is p la y N O N E w h e n th e p o w e r w i n d o w is s t o p p e d ? .

YES-Replace the driver's M P C S unit.B W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

N O - G o to step 8.

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

8. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B

Is D T C B 2 1 7 5 a ls o in d ic a te d ?

N O - R e p l ace the driver’s p o w e r w i n d o w motor.l

Y E S - G o to step 15. N O - G o to step 3. 3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), 10. Disconnect driver's M P C S unit connector B (14P). 11. Disconnect the SP connector from the driver's p ow er w i n d o w motor.

12. Check for continuity between driver's M P C S unit connector B (14P) terminal No. 4 and driver’s po w e r w i n d o w motor 6P connector terminal No. 5.

15. Check for continuity between driver's M P C S unit connector B (14P) terminals No. 3 and No. 6 and the driver's p o w e r w i n d o w motor 6P connector terminals No, 1 and No. 2 respectively.

DRIVER'S POWER W IN D O W M O TO R SP CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a le te r m in a l s

DRIVER’S POWER W IN D O W M O TO R SP CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls SVCC

(PNK)

P IS B (BRN)

P tS B f] 1 8

2

4

| 9 110

5

\/\

1

2

3

4

5

0

(BRN)

--------- n 3

S G N D (W HT)

6 12 113

SVCC (PNK)

7

1

14

DRIVER'S M F C S U N IT C ONNECTOR

8

B (14P)

SG N D (W HT)

n-

.........f l .....

2 3 1-* 16 16 1 7 9 110 / 1 12 113 14

DRIVER'S M PCS U N IT CONNECTOR i (14P)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

W ire side o f fe m a l e te r m in a l s

Is there c o n t i n u i t y ?

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 13.

Y E S - G o to step 16. NO-Repair an open in the wire.B NO-Repair an open in the wire.B 13. Check for continuity between driver's po w e r w i n d o w motor

6P connector terminal No. 5 and bod y ground.

16. Check for continuity between driver's p o w e r w i n d o w motor 6P connector terminal No. 1 and b od y ground.

DRIVER'S POWER W IN D O W M O TO R 6P CONNECTOR DRIVER’S POWER W IN D O W M O TO R SP CONNECTOR

P LS B (B R N )

1

2

3

4

5

6

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls W ire side o f fe m a l e te r m in a l s

i s there c o n t i n u i t y ? Is

there c o n t i n u i t y ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire.B YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B N O - G o to step 14. N O-Replace the driver’s po w e r w i n d o w 14. D o the driver's p o w e r w i n d o w motor test (see page 22-381).

motor.l

Is t h e m o t o r O K ? YES-Replace the driver's M P C S unlt.H NO-Replace the driver's p o we r w i n d o w motor.ll

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B2177: Front Passenger's Power W in d o w M otor Pulse A Error NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N System. Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154). ■■ 1, Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 2, Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0 ) and then back to O N (II). 3, O p e n and close the front passenger's p o w e r w i n d o w by using the front passenger's pow er w i n d o w switch m a n u a l l y.

11. Disconnect the 6P connector from the passenger's power window motor. 12. Check for continuity between front passenger's MPCS unit connector B (14P) terminal No. 5 and front passenger's power window motor 6P connector terminal No. 3. FRONT PASSENG ER’S POWER W IN D O W M O TO R 8P CONNECTOR

Wiresideof femal eterminals PLSA (L T G R N ) ■\ 1

2

3

4

5

0

4, Check for D T C s with the HDS,

is D T C B 2 1 7 7 in d ic a te d ? Y E S - G o to step 5,

PLSA (L T G R N )

H

,- ..;

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is.OK at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections.■

3

10 11 12 13

14

FRONT PASSENGER'S MPCS U N IT CONNECTOR B (14P)

5, O p e n and close the front passenger's p o w # r w i n d o w by using the p ower w i n d o w master switch manually.

D o e s t h e p o w e r window m o t o r o p e r a t e ?

Wiresideof femaleterminals Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 13.

YES-Go to step 6.

NO-Repair an open in the wire.B

N O - D o the front passenger's p o w er w i n d o w motor

13. Check for continuity between front passenger's power window motor 6P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.

test (see page 22-382).■ 8. S e l ect the P O W E R W I N D O W S from the B O D Y EL E C T R I C A L S Y S T E M S E L E C T m e n u and enter the D A T A LIST.

FRONT PASSENG ER’S POWER W IN D O W M O TO R 6P CONNECTOR

7. Check the D E T E C T / N O N E information of the Front passenger's w i n d o w motor A-phase pulse signal in the D A T A LIST.

PLSA (L T G R N ) r -

D o e s t h e i n f o r m a t i o n i n d i c a t o r display D E T E C T w h i l e t h e p o w e r w in d o w is m o v in g , a n d d is p la y N O N E w h e n th e p o w e r w in d o w is s t o p p e d ?

1

2

3

4

5

0

Y E S - R e p l ace the front passenger's M P C S unit.B N O - G o to step 8.

Wiresideof femaleterminals 8. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

is D T C B 2 1 7 8 a ls o in d ic a te d ?

Is there continuity?

Y E S - G o to step 15,

YES-Repair a short in the wire.I

N O - G o to step 3.

NO-Go to step 14.

3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 10. Disconnect front passenger's M P C S unit connector (14P),

B

14. D o the front passenger's po we r w i n d o w motor test (see page 22-362).

is th e m o to r O K ? Y E S - R e p l ace the front passenger's M P C S unit.B

16. Check for continuity between front passenger's p o w e r w i n d o w motor 6P connector terminal No. 6 and body'ground.

F R O N T PASSENGER'S P O W E R W I N D O W M O T O R 6P CONNECTOR

NO-Replace the front passenger's p o w er w i n d o w

motor.B 15. Check for continuity between front passenger's M P C S unit connector B (14P) terminals No. 3 and No. 6 and the front passenger's p ow er w i n d o w motor 6P connector termina l s No. 8 and No, 5 respectively.

1

2

3

4

5

8 S V C C (GRN)

FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER W IN D O W M OTOR 6P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

Wire side of female terminals Is t h SGN D (GRY!

SG N D (GRY)

2

8

4

3 9

10

c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B

SVCC (GRN) 1

e re

6

5 11

NO-Replace the front passenger's p o w e r w i n d o w m otor.B

12

13

14

FRONT PASSENGER’S MPCS U N IT CONNECTOR B (14P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 16. NO-Repair an open in the wire.B

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B2178: Front Passenger's Power Window Motor Pulse B Error N OTE: Ifyou are troubl eshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure to foll o w the instructions in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (I I ).

11. Disconnect the

6P connector from the passenger's

p o w e r w i n d o w motor. 12. Check for continuity between front passenger’s M P C S unit connector B (14P) terminal No. 4 and the front passenger's po w e r w i n d o w motor 6P connector terminal No. 2, FRONT PASSENGER’S POWER W IN D O W M O TO R 6P CONNECTOR " W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s P IS S (ORN)

3. O p e n and close the front passenger's p o we r w i n d o w by using the front passenger's p o w er w i n d o w switch manually. 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 2 1 7 8 in d ic a te d ?

P IS S (ORN) L _ —

Y E S - G o to step 5.

1

NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is O K at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.■

8

5. O p e n and close the front passenger's p ow e r w i n d o w by using the po wer w i n d o w master switch m a n u a l ly.

D o e s th e p o w e r w in d o w m o to r o p e ra te ?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-Do the front passenger's pow er w i n d o w motor test (see page 22-382),■ 8. S e l ect the P O W E R W I N D O W S from the B O D Y E L E C TR IC A L S Y S T E M S E L E C T m e n u and enter the D A T A LIST. 7, Check the D E T E C T / N O N E information of the Front passenger's w i n d o w motor B-phase pulse signal in the D A T A LIST.

F 2

— =n 4 5 8

3 9 10

11

12 13 14

FRONT PASSENGER'S MPCS U N IT CONNECTOR B (14P) W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 13. NO-Repair an open in the wire.B 13. Check for continuity between front passenger's p o w e r w i n d o w motor 6P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. FRONT PASSENGER’S POWER W IN D O W M O TO R 8P CONNECTOR P L S i (ORN) —._

D o e s th e in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to r d is p la y D E T E C T w h ile th e p o w e r w i n d o w i s m o v i n g ,a n d d i s p l a y N O N E w h e n t h e p o w e r w in d o w is s t o p p e d ?

1

2

3

4

5

6

Y E S - R e p l ace the front passenger's M P C S unit.B N O - G o to step 8. W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

8. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 2 1 7 7 a ls o in d ic a t e d ?

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 15.

YES-Repair a short in the wire.l

N O - G o to step 3.

N O - G o to step 14,

3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 10, Disconnect front passenger's M P C S unit connector B

(14P).

14. D o the front passenger’s p o we r w i n d o w motor test (see page 22-362).

18. Check for continuity between front passenger's

power w indow motor 6P connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.

Is t h e m o t o r O K ? YES-Replace the front passenger's M P C S unit.B

FRONT P ASSENGER'S POWER W IN D O W M O TO R 6P CONNECTOR

NO-Replace the front passenger’s p o w e r w i n d o w motor.B 15. Check for continuity between front passenger's M P C S unit connector B (14P) terminals No. 3 and No. 6 and the front passenger's po w e r w i n d o w motor 6P connector terminals No. 8 and No. 5 respectivel y,

1

2

3

4

5

6 SV SCC (GRN)

FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER W IN D O W M O TO R 6P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a l e te r m in a l s

wire siae ot Temaie terminals 1

2

3

4

5

6

S G N D (GRY)

SVCC

(GRN) i

YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B NO-Replace the front passenger's p ow e r w i n d o w motor.B

S G N P (GRY)

—

r 2

8

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? S V C C (GRN)

3 9

4

Hi 5

6

10 11 12 13

/ 14

FRONT PASSENGER’S MPCS U N IT CONNECTOR

B (14P)

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 16. NO-Repair an open in the wire.B

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B2187: UART Communication Error 1 (Driver's MPCS Unit from DR Door ECU) N OT E: Ifyou are troubleshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure to foll o w the instructions in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154). 1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II).

17. Disconnect the p o w e r w i n d o w master switch 14P connector. 18. Turn the ignition switch to O N (I I). 19. C l ear the D T C s with the HDS. 20. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 21. Check for D T C s with the HDS. Is D T C 2 1 8 7 i n d i c a t e d ?

3. Check for D T C s with the HDS. Y E S - G o to step 22.

Is D T C B 2 1 8 7 in d ic a te d ?

N O - R e p l ace the p o w er w i n d o w master switch.!

Y E S ~ G o to step 4. 22. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0 ). N O - l ntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time.B 4. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 5. Disconnect front passenger's M P C S unit connector A (28P).

23. Disconnect driver's M P C S unit connector A (40P). 24. Check for continuity between driver's M P C S unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 8 and b od y ground.

DRIVER'S M P C S UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (40P)

8, Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 1 U A R T (GRY)

7. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 8. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II).

I ft—

—

fl

h g m M g ia n a a » a a l a

\ A A » »T7

9. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 2 1 8 7 in d ic a te d ? Y E S - G o to step 10. W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

N O - D o the front passenger's M P C S unit input test, step No. 8. If OK, replace the front passenger's M P C S unit.B 10. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 11. Disconnect the moonr oo f control unit/motor 10P connector. 12. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 13. C l ear the D T C s with the HDS. 14. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K ( 0 ) and then back to O N (II). 15. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 2 1 8 7 in d ic a te d ? Y E S - G o to step 16, NO-Replace the moo nr o of control unit/motor.B 16. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0 ).

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B N O - G o to step 25. 25. Turn the ignition switch to O N (I I).

26. Measure the voltage between driver's M P C S unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 8 and b ody ground.

DRIVER'S MPCS U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) 1U A R T fGRY)

n— — n

DTC B2188: UART Communication Error 2 (Driver's MPCS Unit from other node) N OTE; Ifyou are troubleshooting m u l tipl e DTCs, be sure to fol l o w the instructions in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-164).

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 3. O p e n and c l ose the driver's and front passenger's po w e r w i n d o w s by using the p ow er w i n d o w master switch m a n u a l l y,

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

Is th e r e v o lta g e ? YES-Repair a short to po we r in the wire.I NO-Replace the driver's M P C S unit.B

4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 2 1 3 8 i n d i c a t e d ? Y E S - G o to step 5, N O - l ntermittent failure, the system is O K at this

time.B 5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 6. Disconnect driver’s M P C S unit connector A (40P), 7. Disconnect front passenger's M P C S unit connector A (28P). 8. Check for continuity between driver's M P C S unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 8 and front

passenger's MPCS unit connector A (28P) terminal No. 4. DRIVER'S MPCS U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) U ART fGRY!

n—— —fi 1

2 (3 U U f e M j a 31 32 33 34 35

21 22 23 24 25

sTTtTlaR

Wiresideof femaletermi nal s FRONT PASSENGER'S MPCS U N IT

CONNECTOR. A (28P) UART fGRY) Y j 7 ] T [ t ] T

K v ,

r ' ! H 1' I / H

>, J I

p !

f ,

10 | 11

[

\ ?A\ l

13 114 | *" I 6|

/ { s

Wiresideof femal eterminals Is there continuity?

YES-Substitute a known-good driver’s MPCS unit and recheck. If the DTC goes away, replace the original driver's MPCS unit. If the DTC is still present, replace the front passenger's MPCS unit.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B218S; Driver's Window Position Data Error

DTC B2130: Assistant's Window Position Data Error

NO T E: I f you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N S ystem Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154).

NO T E: Ifyou are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to foll o w the instructions in i - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154).

1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS.

1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS.

2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II).

2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II).

3. O p e n and close the driver's p ow e r w i n d o w by using the po w e r w i n d o w master switch m a n u a l ly.

3. O p e n and close the front passenger's p o w e r w i n d o w by using the front passenger's po we r w i n d o w switch manually.

4. Check for D T C s with the HDS. Is D T C B 2 1 7 5 o r B 2 1 7 6 a l s o i n d i c a t e d ?

4. Check for D T C s with the HDS. Is D T C B 2 1 7 7 o r B 2 1 7 8 a l s o i n d i c a t e d ?

Y E S ~ G g to the indicated DTC(s) troubleshooting.■ Y E S - G o to the indicated DTC(s) troubleshooting.® N O - G o to step 5. N O - G o to step 5. 5. Reset the p ow e r w i n d o w control unit (see page 22-337).

5. Reset the p ow e r w i n d o w control unit (see page 22-337).

8. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 8. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 7. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 8. O p e n and close the driver's p ow er w i n d o w by using the po w e r w i n d o w master switch m a n u a l l y. 9. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

I s D T C B2189 i n d i c a t e d ? Y E S ~ G o to step 10. N O - T h e system is O K at this time.ll 10. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 11. Substitute a k nown-good driver's M P C S unit. 12. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 13. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 14. O p e n and close the driver's pow e r w i n d o w by using the p o w e r w i n d o w master switch manually. 15. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 2 1 8 9 in d ic a te d ? YES-Replace the driver's pow er w i n d o w motor.B N O - R e p l ace the original driver's M P C S unit.B

7. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 8. O p e n and close the front passenger's p ow e r w i n d o w by using the front passenger’s powe r w i n d o w switch m a n u a l l y. 9. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 2 1 9 0 in d ic a te d ? Y E S - G o to step 10. N O - T h e system is O K at this time.B

10. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 11. Substitute a known-good front passenger's M P C S unit. 12. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 13. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 14. O p e n and close the front passenger's p o w e r w i n d o w by using the front passenger's po we r w i n d o w switch manually, 15. Check for D T C s with the HDS,

I s D T C B2190 i n d i c a t e d ? Y E S - R e p l ace the front passenger's p ow e r w i n d o w motor.B N O - R e p l ace the original front passenger's M P C S

unit.B

DTC B2191: Front Passenger's MPCS Unit Internal Error (EEPROM error) N OTE: Ifyou are troubl eshooting m u l tiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154). 1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 3. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 2 1 9 1 in d ic a te d ? Y E S - R e p l ace the front passenger's M P C S unit.B NO-lntermittent failure, the system is O K at this. time.B

Driver's MPCS Unit Input Test 1.Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 2. R e m o v e the driver's door pane l (see page 20-9). 3. Disconnect driver's M P C S unit (A) connectors A (40P) and B (14P). CONNECTOR i r g ro u n d (G507) o r an op en in th e g ro u n d w ire • A n o p en o r h ig h re sistance in th e w ire w n No. 4 (40 A) fu se in th e m a in u n d e r-h o o d fu se b o x • f a u l ty m a in u n d e r-h o o d fu se box • B lo w n No, 7 (10 A ) fu se in th e u n d e r-d a sh fu s e /re la y b o x • Faul ty u n d e r-d a sh fu s e /re la y box • A n o p e n o r h ig h re sista n ce in th e .w ire w n No. 3 (P/W) (50 A ) fu se in th e m a in u n d e r-h o o d fu se b o x • F a ulty m a in u n d e r-h o o d fu se box • B lo w n No. 26 (30 A ) fu se in th e un d e r-d a sh fu s e /re la y b o x • Faulty u n d e r-d a sh fu s e /re l ay box • A n op e n o r h ig h re sista n c e in th e w ire tt y fro n t p a s s e n g e r's MPCS u n it • A n o p en o r h ig h re sistance in th e w ire • A s h o rt to g ro u n d in th e w ire . tt y fro n t p a ss e n g e r's p o w e r w in d o w s w itc h • F a ulty fr o n t p a sse n g e r's MPCS u n it • F a ulty fro n t p a s s e n g e r's p o w e r w in d o w m o to r • A n op e n o r h ig h re sista n c e in th e w ire • A s h o rt to g ro u n d in th e w ire

>r g ro u n d (G506) o r an o p en in th e g ro u n d w ire • Faul ty fro n t p a sse n g e r's MPCS u n it • A n op e n o r h ig h re s is ta n ce in th e w ire

Driver's Power Window Motor Test 1. R e m o v e the door panel (see page 20-3), and disconnect the driver's door wire harness B 28P connector (A) from the driver's door wire harness A.

5. Check for continuity between driver's po w e r w i n d o w motor 6P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 8 and the driver's door wire harness B 28P connector terminals No. 27 and No. 28 respectively. There s h o u l d be continuity. • Ifthere is no continuity, repair an open in the wire. • I f there is continuity, replace the p o w e r w i n d o w motor.

DRIVER'S POWER W IN D O W M O TO R 6P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls 1

2

al

4

5

0

?

8/

D O W N (YEL)

=| UP (BLU) a

4

IR 16

2. At the driver's door wire harness B 28P connector, test the p ow e r w i n d o w motor in each direction by connecting battery p o we r and ground according to the tab l e. W h e n the motor stops running, disconnect one lead immediately.

Terminal 27

28

Direction _

_

_

i

UP DOWN

©

“

I T " 1

©

3. Ifthe motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, go to step 4. 4. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the driver's p ow er w i n d o w motor (B).

5

6

10 11 12

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

/ U 25 28

DOWN (YEL)

DRIVER'S DOOR WIRE H ARNESS B 28P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

8. After replacing the po w e r w i n d o w motor, reset the p o w e r w i n d o w control unit (see page 22-337).

Front Passenger's Power Window Motor Test 1. R e m o v e the door panel (see page 20-9), and disconnect the front passenger's door wire harness 20P connector (A) from the front passenger's door subharness.

4. Disconnect the SP connector (A) from the front passenger's po w e r w i n d o w motor (B).

5. Check for continuity between front passenger's power window motor 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 4 and the front passenger's door wire harness 20P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 20 respectively. There s h o u l d be continuity, • Ifthere is no continuity, repair an open in the wire. • Ifthere is continuity, replace the p o w e r w i n d o w motor, 2. At the front passenger's door wire harness 20P connector, test the p o we r w i n d o w motor in each direction by connecting battery p o w e r and ground according to the table. W h e n the motor stops running, - disconnect one lead immediately.

FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER W IN D O W M O TO R 8P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s UP (BLU)

1

^

Terminal 2

Direction

2©

\

JD O W N fRED)

UP

©

DOWN

0

©

3. Ifthe motor does not run or fail s to run s m o o t h l y, go to step 4.

D O W N fRED)

UP (BLUJ 3

4

/

6

11 12 18 14

?

8

9

10

15 18 1? 1ft

FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR W IRE H ARN ESS 2CJP CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

8. After replacing the p o w e r w i n d o w motor, reset the p ow e r w i n d o w control unit fsee page 22-337).

Rear Power Window Motor Test 1. R e m o v e the door panel (see page 20-9), and disconnect the rear pow er w i n d o w switch 14P connector (A).

4. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the rear pow e r w i n d o w motor (B).

The illu s tra tio n sh o w s th e rig h t re ar d o o r, th e le ft rear d o o r is s im il a rl y c o n fig u re d .

2. Test the p o w er w i n d o w motor in each direction by connecting battery p o we r and ground according to the table. W h e n the motor stops running, disconnect one l ead immediately. \

T e rm in a l

Direction

\

7

1

3. Ifthe motor does not run or fails to run s m o o t h l y, go to step 4.

Rear Power Window Motor Test (cont'd)

Front Passenger's Power Window Switch Test

5. Check for continuity between rear p ow e r w i n d o w motor 6P connector termina l s No. 1 and No. 2 and rear p o w er w i n d o w switch 14P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 7 respectively. There should be continuity.

1. R e m o v e the front passenger's door p a n e l (see page 20-3), and disconnect the 14P connector from the front passenger's p ow er w i n d o w switch.

• Ifthere is no continuity, repair an open in the wire. • Ifthere is continuity, repl ace the p o w e r w i n d o w motor.

1 8

"f

T/

3 10

/

5 12

/

/

/ 14

LEFT REAR POWER W IN D O W M OTOR 2P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s ) 1

/

2

J

/ DO W N (BLU)

D O W N (BLU)

ft—

1 8

UP (ORN J

99 / / 99 / 9 i

4

11

7 14

LEFT REAR POWER W IN D O W SW ITCH 14P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s RIGHT REAR POWER W IN D O W MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls D O W N (RED!

2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. UP (BLU)

D O W N fREDl 1 8

9 9 » 191/1

i/9 - 9

UP fBLUJ 7 14

RIGHT REAR POWER W IN D O W SW ITCH 14P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

8. After repl acing the po we r w i n d o w motor, reset the po w er w i n d o w control unit (see page 22-337).

3. I f the continuity is not as specified, repl ace the switch (see page 22-388).

Rear Power Window Switch T est/Replacement

Power Window Master Switch Replacement

1. R e m o v e the rear door pa ne l (see page 20-22), and disconnect the 14P connector from the rear pow er w i n d o w switch.

1. R e m o v e the driver's door pa n e l (see page 20-9), and disconnect the 14P connector from the p o w er w i n d o w master switch.

2. R e m o v e the po we r w i n d o w switch panel (see page 20-22).

2. R e m o v e the p o w er w i n d o w switch panel (see page 20-9).

3. R e m o v e the three mounting screws and the rear p o w e r w i n d o w switch (A).

3. R e m o v e the four mounting screws and the pow er w i n d o w master switch (A). ■

4. S w a p the rear po w er w i n d o w switch with another known- go od p ow e r w i n d o w switch and test I f the original po w e r w i n d o w switch is faulty; replace it. 4, Install the switch in the reverse order of removal. 5. Install the switch in the reverse order of r e m o v a l . 6. Reset the po we r w i n d o w control unit (see page 22-337).

5. Reset the po we r w i n d o w control unit (see page 22-337).

Front Passenger's Power Window Switch Replacement 1. R e m o v e the front passenger's door pa n e l (see page 20-9), and disconnect the 14P connector from the front passenger's p o w er w i n d o w switch. 2. R e m o v e the p ow er w i n d o w switch panel (see page 20-3). 3. R e m o v e the three mounting screws and the front passenger's p o we r w i n d o w switch (A), A

4. Install the switch in the reverse order of r e m o v a l . 5. Reset the p o we r w i n d o w control unit (see page 22-337).

Component Location Index

R eplacem ent, page 22-384 A d ju s tm e n t, page 22-388

A U X IL IA R Y U N DER-DASH

Component Location Index (cont'd) WASHER TUBES R e p la c e m e n t page 22-330 W IN D SH IE LD W ASHER NOZZLES A d ju s tm e n t page 22-388 R e p la c e m e n t page 22-390 W ASH ER RESERVOIR R e p la c e m e n t page 22-385

HEADLIGHT W ASHER NOZZLES (Canada m o d e ls) R epl a c e m e n t page 22-388 HEADLIGHT W ASH ER TUBE (Canada m o d e ls ) R e p la c e m e n t page 22-391

W ASH ER FLUID LEVEL SW ITCH Test, page 22-383

HEADLIGHT W ASH ER M O T O R (Canada m o d e ls ) Te st/R epl a c e m e n t page 22-388

W IN D SH IE LD /R E A R W IN D O W W ASH ER MO TO R Test, page 22-383 R e p la c e m e n t page 22-385

T e s t page 22-382 R epl a c e m e n t page 22-385

in te r m itte n t w ip e r re la y c irc u it) R eplacem ent, page 22-93

Circuit Diagram - Windshield

M A I N UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX No. 1 (BAT) {120 A)

No. 3 (IG) (50A)

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BO X

- : B-CAN line IGNITION SW ITCH

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

Circuit Diagram - Headlight Washer

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

FUSE/RELAY BO X

G202

IGNITION SWITCH

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

Circuit Diagram - Rear Window

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

JLL. G202

G401

- - - - - -

- : B-CAN line

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

G702

G604 G603

G601 G502

G601 G601

DTC Troubleshooting DTC B1076: Windshield Wiper Switch Back-up Circuit Malfunction

DTC B1077: Windshield Wiper Motor (Park) Signal Error

N O T E ; Ifyo u are troubleshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure to fol low the instructions in B - C A N Sys te m Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154).

1. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II), and the windshield wiper switch ON. 2. Check the windshield wiper operation.

1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 3. Turn the windshie l d wiper switch O N for 5 seconds and OFF. 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 1 0 7 6 in d ic a te d ? Y E S - G o to step 5. N O - l ntermittent fail ure, the system is O K at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections.® 5. S e l ect W I P E R from the B O D Y E L E C T R I C A L S Y S T E M S E L E C T menu , and enter D A T A LIST. 6. Check the O N / O F F information of the Windshield wiper switch (BACK-UP) with the HDS. Is O F F i n d i c a t e d ? Y E S - G o to step 7. N O - C h e c k for a short in the wire between the

D o e s th e w ip e r w o rk ? Y E S - G o to step 3 . N O - G o to step 1 3 . 3 . Clear the D T C with the HDS.

4. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 5. Turn the windshield wiper switch ON, and then OFF. 8. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 1 0 7 7 in d ic a te d ? Y E S - G o to step 7. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.■ 7. Select W I P E R from the B O D Y E L E C T R I C A L S Y S T E M S E L E C T menu, and enter D A T A LIST. 8, Check the O N / O F F information of the Windshield wiper motor park switch with the HDS.

combination switch control unit and the relay control mo d u l e ( B A C K - U P W I P E R line), ifthe harness is OK, replace the combination switch control unit (see page

I s O F F i n d i c a t e d w h e n t h e m o t o r i s s t o p p e d ,a n d O N in te rm itte n tly in d ic a te d w h e n th e m o to r r u m ?

22-381).I

YES-Faulty rel ay control module, rep l ace the under-hood fuse/rel ay box (see page 22-88).■

7. Turn the windshield wiper switch ON. N O - G o to step 9. 8. Check the O N / O F F information of the Windshield wiper switch (BACK-UP) with the HDS.

3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

is O N in d ic a te d ?

10. Disconnect the windshie l d wiper motor 5P connector.

Y E S - G o to the rel ay control m od ul e input test (see page 22-179) and check for a poor ground, ifthe G N D line is OK, replace the under-hood fuse/rel ay box (see page 22-88).■

1 1 .Disconnect under-hood fuse/rel ay box connector A

N O - C h e c k for an open in the wire between the combination switch control unit and the relay control m o d u l e ( B A C K - U P W I P E R l ine), ifthe wire is OK, replace the combination switch control unit (see page

22-381 ) . ■

(4P).

12. Check for continuity between windshield wiper motor 5P connector terminal No. 4 and under-hood fuse/relay box connector A (4P) termina l No. 2. W IN D SH IE LD WIPER MO TO R 5P CONNECTOR

17. Check for continuity between windshield wiper motor 5P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 5 and under-hood fuse/relay box connector A (4P) terminals No. 3 and No. 4 respectively. W IN D SH IE LD WIPER M O TO R 5P CONNECTOR

W ire side o f fe m a le te r m in a l s

Wire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls 2

1

V

3

1

5/

2

\*

W iPER A S {RED)

3

W IP LO (BLU)

5/

WIP Hi (GRN)

WIPER A S fREDl W iP HI {GRN) 1

2

3

4 1

2

4

3

U N D ER-HOO D FU SE/R ELAY BOX CONNECTOR A (4P)

WIP LO (BLU)

UN D ER-HOO D FU SE /R ELAY BO X CONNECTOR A (4P)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Faulty relay control module, replace the under-hood fuse/rel ay box (see page 22-88).■

Is t h e r e c o n t i n u i t y ? Y E S - G o to step 18. NO-Repair an open in the wire.B

NO-Repair an open in the wire. ■ 13. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), and then check the No. 11 (30 A) and No. 31 (15 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box.

18. Check for continuity between windshield wiper motor 5P connector terminal No. 2 and b od y ground.

W IN D SH IE LD WIPER M O TO R §P CONNECTOR

A re th e fu s e s O K ? Y E S - G o to step 14.

GND (BLK)

. rr=

NO-Replace the fuse(s) and recheck the system.■

1

2

3

14. D o the wiper motor test (see page 22-382).

V

D o e s th e w ip e r m o to r ru n n o rm a lly ?

5 /

YES-Go to step 15. NO-Replace the windshield wiper motor and recheck.B 15. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor

5P connector.

16. Disconnect under-hood fuse/rel ay box connector A

(4P).

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Faulty relay control m o d u l e, replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page 22-88).■ NO-Repair an open in the wire or poor ground (G202).11

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B1281: Windshield Wiper Switch MIST Position Circuit Malfunction DTC B1282: Windshield Wiper Switch INT Position Circuit Malfunction DTC B1283: Windshield Wiper Switch LOW Position Circuit Malfunction DTC B1284: Windshield Wiper Switch HIGH Position Circuit Malfunction NO T E: Ifyou are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to fol low the instructions in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154), 1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (ll). 3. Turn the windshield wiper switch to MIST, and wait for 2 seconds. 4. Turn the windshield wiper switch OFF, and wait for 2 seconds. 5. Turn the windshield wiper switch to I NT, and wait for 2 seconds. 6. Turn the windshield wiper switch to L O W , and wait for 2 seconds. 7. Turn the windshield wiper switch in H I GH, and wait for 2 seconds, 8. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

is D T C

B 1 2 8 1 ,

B 1 2 8 2 ,B 1 2 8 3 r a n d f o r B 1 2 8 4 i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Replace the wiper/washer switch.■ N O - l ntermittent failure, the wiper/washer switch and the combination switch control unit are O K at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.®

Wiper/Washer Switch (Combination Switch Control Unit) Input Test N OT E: Before testing the combination switch control unit, troubleshoot the multipl ex integrated control unit first, using B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154). 1. R e m o v e the dashboard l ower cover (see page 20-118). 2. R e m o v e the steering column covers (see page 20-128). 3. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B).

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

4, I nspect the connector and socket terminal s to be sure they are all making g o o d contact. • Ifthe terminal s are bent, loose, or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary, and recheck the system, • I f the termina l s l ook OK, go to step 5.

Wiper/Washer Switch (Combination Switch Control Unit) Input Test (cont'd) 5. With the connector stil ldisconnected, d o the following input tests: • Ifany test indicates a prob l em, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If a l lthe input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Cavity

W ire

T e s t c o n d itio n

T e s t: D e s ire d re s u lt

1

WHT

D is c o n n e c t u n d e r-h o o d fu s e /re la y b o x c o n n e c to r E (14P) an d u n d e r-d a s h fu s e /re la y b o x c o n n e c to r P (SOP)

C heck f o r c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n te r m in a l N o, 1 a n d u n d e r-h o o d fu s e /re l a y b o x c o n n e c to r E (14P) te r m in a l N o, 11: T h e re s h o u ld be c o n tin u ity . C heck fo r c o n tin u ity to g ro u n d : T h e re s h o u ld be n o c o n tin u ity . C heck fo r c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n te r m in a l N o. 2 a n d h e a d lig h t l e v e l in g c o n tr o l u n it 18P c o n n e c to r te r m in a l N o. 16: T h e re s h o u ld be c o n tin u ity . C heck f o r c o n tin u ity to g ro u n d : T h e re s h o u l d be n o c o n tin u ity . C heck f o r c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n te r m in a l N o. 4 a n d u n d e r-d a s h fu s e /re l ay b o x c o n n e c to r X (39P) te r m in a l N o, 27: T h e re s h o u l d be c o n tin u ity . C heck f o r c o n tin u ity to g ro u n d : T h e re s h o u l d be n o c o n tin u ity . C heck f o r c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n te r m in a l N o. 5 a n d u n d e r-h o o d fu s e /re l a y b o x c o n n e c to r E (14P) te r m in a l N o, 12: T h e re s h o u ld be c o n tin u ity . C heck fo r c o n tin u ity to g ro u n d : T h e re s h o u ld be no c o n tin u ity

2#

4

5

LT BLU

LTG R N

PNK

D is c o n n e c t h e a d lig h t l e v e lin g c o n tro l u n it 18P c o n n e c to r

D is c o n n e c t u n d e r-d a s h fu s e /re la y b o x c o n n e c to r X (39P)

D is c o n n e c t u n d e r-h o o d fu s e /re la y b o x c o n n e c to r E (14P)

P o s s ib le c a u se if d e s ire d r e s u lt is n o t o b ta in e d A n o p e n o r h ig h re s is ta n c e in th e w ire

A s h o rt to g ro u n d in th e w ire A n o p e n o r h ig h re s is ta n c e in th e w ire

A s h o rt to g r o u n d in th e w ire A n o p e n o r h ig h re s is ta n c e in th e w ire

A s h o rt to g r o u n d in th e w ire A n o p e n o r h ig h re s is ta n c e in th e w ire

A s h o rt to g r o u n d in th e w ire

*: W ith h e a d lig h t le v e l in g s y s te m

8 . R e c o n n e c t th e 8P c o n n e c to r to th e w ip e r /w a s h e r s w itc h , a n d d o th e fo llo w in g in p u t tests: • If a n y te s t in d ic a te s a p r o b l e m , fin d a n d c o rre c t th e cau se, th e n re c h e c k th e s y s te m . • I f a ll th e in p u t te s ts p ro v e OK, re p l ace th e w ip e r /w a s h e r s w itc h (c o m b in a tio n s w itc h c o n tro l u n it). C a v ity

W ire

T e s t c o n d itio n

T e s t: D e s ire d re s u lt

3

BLK

In a l l ig n itio n s w itc h p o s itio n s

M e a s u re th e v o lta g e to g ro u n d : T h e re s h o u ld be less th a n 0.2 V.

8

WHT

U n d e r all c o n d itio n s

M e a s u re th e v o l ta g e to g ro u n d : T h e re s h o u ld be b a tte ry v o lta g e .

7

Y EL

Ig n itio n s w itc h O N (II)

M e a s u re th e v o l ta g e to g ro u n d : T h e re s h o u ld be b a tte ry v o lta g e .

P o s s ib le c a u se if d e s ire d re s u lt is n o t o b ta in e d • P o o r g ro u n d (G601) o r an o p e n in th e g ro u n d w ire • F a u lty u n d e r-d a s h fu s e /re la y box • A n o p e n o r h ig h re s is ta n c e in w ire w n N o. 4 (40 A) fu s e in th e m a in u n d e r-h o o d fu s e b o x • B lo w n N o, 7 (10 A ) fu s e in th e u n d e r-d a s h fu s e /re l a y b o x • F a u lty m a in u n d e r-h o o d fu se box • F a u lty u n d e r-d a s h fu s e /re l ay box • A n o p e n o r h ig h re s is ta n c e in th e w ire w n N o. 21 (7.5 A ) fu s e in th e u n d e r-d a s h fu s e /re la y b o x • F a u lty u n d e r-d a s h fu s e /re l ay box • A n o p e n o r h ig h re s is ta n c e in w ire

Wiper/Washer Switch Replacement

Headlight Washer Switch Test/Replacement

NO T E: The wiper/washer switch is built into the

Canada models

combination switch control unit. For the wiper/washer test, refer to the combination switch control unit input test (see page 22-379).

1. R e m o v e the driver's-dashboard undercover (see page 20-118). ....

1. R e m o v e the steering column covers (see page 20-128).

'

2. Push out the headlight washer switch (A) from the back of the instrument panel.

2. Disconnect the combination light switch 10P connector (A), and dashboard wire harness 8P connector (B) from the wiper/washer switch (C). A

B

C

6P connector (B) from the switch.

3. Disconnect the 3. R e m o v e the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch.

4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.

^

Terminal 2

Position

3

OFF ON

5

6

\

o - - o

o -

- o

o -

- o

5. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (A) or the headlight washer switch.

Wiper Motor Test Windshield

Rear Window

1, O p e n the hood, and remov e the wiper arm s (see page 22-384).

1. O p e n the tailgate, and re mo ve the tailgate lower trim panel (see page 20-93).

N OT E: Carefully re mo ve the wiper ar ms so that they do not touch the hood.

2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the rear w i n d o w wiper motor (B).

2, R e m o v e the cowl covers (see page 20-218). 3, Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the windshield wiper motor (B).

A

4. Test the motor by connecting battery p o w er to windshield wiper motor 5P connector terminal No. 3 and ground to terminal No. 2. The motor should run at l o w speed. Ifthe motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace the motor. 5. Test the motor by connecting battery p o w e r to windshield wiper motor 5P connector terminal No. 5 and ground to terminal No. 2. The motor should run at high speed. Ifthe motor does not run or fails to run s m o o t h l y, replace the motor (see page 22-384). 8. Connect an analog o h m m e t e r between windshield wiper motor 5P connector termina l s No. 1 and No. 4, and run the motor at low or high speed. The o h m m e t e r s h o u l d indicate continuity and no continuity alternately. If itdoes not, replace the motor.

3. Test the motor by connecting battery p o w e r to rear w i n d o w wiper motor 4P connector terminal No. 1 and ground to terminal No. 2. T he motor should run. Ifthe motor does not run or fail s to run s m o o t h l y, replace the motor (see page 22-385). 4. Connect an a n a l og o h m m e t e r between rear w i n d o w wiper motor 4P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3. T he o h m m e t e r should indicate continuity and no continuity alternately. Ifit does not, replace the motor.

Washer Motor Test

Washer Fluid Level Switch Test

1. R e m o v e the right inner fender (see page 20-232).

1. R e m o v e the right inner fender (see page 20-232).

2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer motor (B).

2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer fluid level switch. A

3. Test the motor by connecting battery po w e r to washer motor 2P connector terminal No. 2 (No. 1) and ground to terminal No. 1 (No. 2) of the washer motor. Th e motor should run, • Ifthe motor does not run or fail s to run smoothly, replace it. • Ifthe motor runs smoothly, but littl e or no washer fluid is p um p e d , check for a disconnected or b l ocked washer hose, or a clogged w asher motor outlet.

3. R e m o v e the washer fluid l evel switch from the washer reservoir. N OT E: Fluid m a y flow out of the opening. 4. Check for continuity between terminals No. 1 and No. 2 in each float position. • There should be continuity w h e n the fl oat is down. • There should be no continuity w h e n the float is up. 5. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.

Wiper Motor Replacement 1. O p e n the hood. R e m o v e the caps, nuts (A), and the windshie l d wiper arms (B).

5. M a t e sure to note the m ar k on the l ink and linkage that s h o w the original adjustment, then separate the windshield wiper linkage (A) from the wiper motor (B ).

2. R e m o v e the cowl covers (see page 20-218). 3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the wiper motor. B 9.4 N -m (0.98 kg f-m , 6.9 ib f-ft)

8. I nstall in the reverse order of removal, and note these items; • Align the marks on the l ink and the linkage to install the l inkage to its original adjustment, • A p p l y multipurpose grease to the mov in g parts. • Before instal ling the wiper arms, turn the wiper switch ON , then O F F to return the shafts to the park position. • I f necessary, replace any d a m a g e d c l ips. 7. After instal l ation, adjust the wiper a rms (see page 22-388).

4. R e m o v e the three bolts (B ) and the wiper l inkage assembly (C).

Rear W indow Wiper Motor Replacement

Washer Reservoir Replacement

1. O p e n the tailgate, and r em ov e the tail gate l o w e r trim panel (see page 20-93),

1. R e m o v e the right inner fender (see page 20-232).

2. R e m o v e the mounting nut (A), the wiper a r m (B) and the special nut (C).

2. D is c o n n e c t t h e 2 P c o n n e c t o r s (A ) f r o m t h e w a s h e r

motor(s) (B) and the w asher fluid level switch (€). W a s h e r Reservoir Capacity 4 J L (4.2 U S qt}: U S A models 5.8 L (6.1 U S qt): C an a da models A

3. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) and r e m o v e the three mounting bolts (B), then r e mo ve the rear w i n d o w wiper motor (C).

4. R e m o v e the bolts and the washer reservoir.

(0.96 k g f-m , 6.9 Ib f-ft}

4. Instal l in the reverse order of removal.

5. Install in the reverse order of removal. Check the w asher motor operation.

Headlight Washer Motor Test/Replacement

Headlight Washer Nozzle Replacement

Canada models

Canada models

1, R e m o v e the right inner fender (see page 20-232). 2. Disconnect the motor (B).

2P connector (A) from the washer

1. R e m o v e the front b u m p e r (see page 20>194), and disconnect the h e a d l ight washer tubes from the w asher motor. 2. Disconnect the headlight washer tube (A) from the headlight w asher nozzle (B).

3. R e m o v e the headlight washer nozzle cover (C). 3. Test the motor by connecting battery p o w e r to

headlight washer motor 2P connector terminal No. 1 and ground to terminal No. 2, Th e motor s h o u l d run. • Ifthe motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it • Ifthe motor runs s m o o t h l y, but little or no washer fl uid is p um p e d , check for a disconnected or blocked w asher hose, or a clogged washer motor

outlet. 4. Instal lthe washer motor in the reverse order of removal.

4. R e m o v e the two screws and the headlight washer nozz l e, 5. Install the nozzle in the reverse order of r e m o v a l .After installation, check the headlight washer operation,

Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield 1. Lift the wiper a rm s from the windshie l d. N O T E : Lift the driver's side first. 2. Press and h o l d the tab (A) and s l ide the wiper a s s e m b l y (B) toward the tab to release itfrom the wiper a r m (C).

3. Slide the wiper blade (A) out from the wiper a s s e m b l y (B).

Rear Window 1. Lift the wiper a r m from the rear window. 2. Turn the rear wiper a s s e m b l y (A), rel ease the lock, and then r e m o v e the wiper assembly from the rear wiper a r m (B). A

3. Raise the old blade assembly (B).

(A), and r em o v e itfrom the wiper

B

4. instal la n e w wiper blade onto the wiper assembly in the reverse order of removal. 5. Install the wiper assembly onto the wiper a r m in the reverse order of removal. 6. Check the wiper operation, ifthe blades s l ip, turn the wiper switch OFF, and reinstal lthe wiper blades securely.

4, I nstall the n e w wiper blade and the wiper a s s e m b l y in the reverse order of removal. N O T E : After instal lation, confirm that the wiper a r m works smoothly.

Wiper Arm/Nozzle Adjustment Windshield Wiper a r m s park position 1. W h e n the wiper ar ms stop at the park (automatic stop) position, confirm that they are at the standard position. a: b:

Position at about 40.7 m m (1.8 in) from the top of cowl cover (A) Position at about 64.3 m m (2.1 in) from the top of cowl cover (A)

W a s h e r nozzle position 2. W h e n you turn on the washers, confirm m o r e than 5 0 % of the washer fluid l ands within the spray area. Ifthe spray area is not within the standard positions, adjust the nozzles. c: d: e: f; g; h:

Position Position Position Position Position Position

at about at about at about at about at about at about

104.7 104.7 283.4 283.4 300 m 300 m

m m m m m m

m (4.1 in) from the top of the black ceramic area (B) at the lower windshield m '(4.1 in) from the top of the black ceramic area (B) at the lower windshield m (10.4 in) from the top of the black ceramic area (B) at the lower windshield m (10.4 in) from the top of the black ceramic area (B) at the lower windshield (11.8 in) from the windshield center line (C) (11.8 in) from the windshie l d center l ine (C)

Rear Window W ip e r a rm p ark p ositio n 1. W h e n the wiper a r m stops at the park position, confirm that it is at the standard position, a:

Position at about 11.2 m m (0,4 in) from the b l ack ceramic area (A)

W a s h e r n o zzle p ositio n 2, W h e n you turn on the washers, confirm m o r e than 5 0 % of the wa sh er fluid lands within the spray area. Ifthe spray area is not within the standard positions, adjust the nozzles. b:

Position at about 130.2 m m (5.1 in) from the rear washer nozzle (B)

B

Washer Tube Replacement 1, R e m o v e the washer nozzles and clips, then r e mo ve the washer tubes.

Windshield/Rear W i n d o w Wa s h e r s

Headlight Washer (Canada models)

2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. Take care not to pinch the washer tubes. Check the washer's operation.

Component Location Index

Te st/R epla cem en t, page 22-419

M U LTI-INFO RM ATIO N DISPLAY (M ID)

TACHOMETER

SPEEDOMETER

FUEL GAUGE

ENGINE CO O LANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE

S-M ATIC LCD DISPLAY

DOOR INDICATOR

A /T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

ABS INDICATOR

SRS INDICATOR

IM MOBILIZER INDICATOR M ALFUNCTIO N INDICATOR LAM P( MIL)

|J

SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR (U SA m o d els)

x LEFT TURN SIGN AL INDICATOR

Y

= D ^ — FOG LIGHT INDICATOR LOW TIRE • PRESSURE INDICATOR

ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM INDICATOR

BSi INDICATOR A /T FLUID TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR (U SA m o dels)

BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR (C ANA DA m o d els)

LOW FUEL INDICATOR SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR (C AN A D A m o d els)

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (W ith o u t ACC)

Component Location Index (cont'd) C ONNECTOR B (24P)

CONNECTOR A (12P)

S elf-D iag n o stic Function NOTE: Before testing the gauge system, troubl eshoot the multipl ex integrated control unit first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). The gauge control module has a self-diagnostic function. • The beeper drive circuit check. • The indicator drive circuit check. • The switch input test. • The LCD segments check. • The gauges drive circuit check (speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, cool ant temperature gauge). • The communication line check (of the body-controller area network (B-CAN) communication line and the fa s t - c o n t r o l l e r area network (F-CAN A) communication line between the gauge control module). NOTE: Indicators are also controll ed via the communication line.

Entering the Self-diagnostic Function Before doing the self-diagnostic function, check the No. 7 (10 A) fuse and the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/rel ay box. 1 . Push and hold the SEL/RESET button.

2. Turn the headl ights ON. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 4. Within 5 sec., turn the headlights OFF, then ON and OFF again. 5. Within 6 sec., release the SEL/RESET button, and then push and release the button three times repeatedl y. NOTE: • While in the self-diagnostic mode, the dashlights brightness controller operates normally. • While in the self-diagnostic mode, the SEL/RESET button is used to start the Beeper Drive Circuit Test and the Gauge Drive Circuit Check, • If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h) or the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0 ) , the self-diagnostic mode ends.

Ignition Switch

Lighting Switch

Select Switch ■ Move to self-diagnostic mode. 5 sec.

5 sec.

S elf-D iag n o stic Function (cont'd) The Indicator Drive Circuit Check W h e n e n te r in g t he s e lf-d ia g n o s tic m o d e , th e s e in d ic a to r s b lin k :

ABS indicator, ACC indicator, active damper system indicator, A/T fluid temperature indicator, A/T gear position indicator, brake system indicator, BSI indicator, charging system indicator, CMBS indicator, cruise control indicator, cruise main indicator, door indicator, fog l ight indicator, high beam indicator, immobil izer indicator, l ig h ts -o n indicator, low fuel indicator, low oil pressure indicator, l ow tire pressure indicator, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), message indicator, seat belt reminder indicator, security indicator, shift indicator, SH-AWD indicator, Side airbag cut off indicator, SRS indicator, VSA OFF indicator, and VSA indicator.

Switch Input Check After the intermittent beeper sounds at the initial stage of self-diagnosis, a beeper sounds continuously if any of the following switch inputs are switched from OFF to ON: Parking brake switch, VSA OFF switch, active damper system switch, CRUISE switch, SET/DECEL switch, CANCEL switch, RES/ACCEL switch, multi-information switch, cruise control main switch, CMBS OFF switch, distance switch, and dashl ights brightness control l er (VOL ( + ), VOL ( —)).

The Beeper Drive Circuit Check When entering the sel f-diagnostic mode, the beeper sounds five times.

The LCD [Sport shift and m ylti-inform atlon d isplaf (MID)] Segment Check When entering the self diagnostic mode, the word "Checking Now" shows on the MID.

The Gauge Drive Circuit Check When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the speedometer, the tachometer, the fuel gauge, and the coolant temperature gauge needles sweep from the minimum position to maximum position, then return to the minimum position. NOTE: After the beeper stops sounding and the gauge needles return to the minimum position, pushing the SEL/RESET button starts the Beeper Drive Circuit Check (one beep) and the Gauge Drive Circuit Check again. The check cannot be started again until the gauge needles return to the minimum position.

Self-diagnostic mode

ON OFF

SEL/RESET switch

ON OFF

Gauge needles

ON OFF

Beeper

ON OFF

n ____ a

j i ___a

ir jT jm

jin _ r L

5 sec.

il The needles sweep from the minimum position to the maximum position, then return to the minimum position.

If any needl e fail s to sweep or the beeper does not sound, replace the gauge control modul e.

The Communication Line Check While in the s e lf-d ia g n o s tic mode, the Communication Line Check starts after the LCD Segments Check.

If the communication line is OK, the word "OK" w il l be indicated on the multi-information display (MID). If there is a communication line error, the word "ERROR" will be indicated on the MID. Indication pattern There is a malfunction in the communication line between the F-CAN A and gauge control module. The B-CAN is OK at this time. Check for DTCs in the PCM and troubl eshoot any DTCs found.

There is a malfunction in the communication line between the B-CAN and gauge control module. The F-CAN A line is OK at this time.

1 There is a malfunction in the communication l ine between the gauge control module and F-CAN A and B-CAN. Check for DTCs in th e PCM and troubl eshoot any DTCs found.

Ending the self-diagnostic function Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NOTE: If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h), the s e lf diagnostic function ends.

C ircuit D iag ram

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

IGNITION SWITCH / bat\ ■WHT— ( O O r — PNK*

No, 21 (7.5 A)

w

No, 7 (10 A)

X34

•PCM

•SRS UNIT • VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT • DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) • YAW LATE -LATE RAL/LON GITU Dl NAL ACCELERATION SENSOR • STEERING ANGLE SENSOR • ACTIVE DAMPER CO NTRO L UNIT • SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT • ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER)

• TPMS CONTROL UNIT • ACC UNIT • E-PRETENSIONER UNIT

•MICU • RELAY CONTROL MODULE • COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT • REAR MICU • DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT • CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT ■ IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT • AUDIO UNIT (W ithout navigation) • HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT • POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT • POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT • ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER) • AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT (With navigation) • BS! CONTROL UNIT

X35

DASHLIGHTS BRIGHTNESS CONTROLLER

*1 *2 - -

: W ithout navigation : W ith active damper system : CAN line : UART line

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

S-MATIC ILLUMINATION {WHITE)

POINTERS ILLUMINATION {RED)

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION (AMBER)

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY/S-MATIC ILLUMINATION (WHITE)

POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/ CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER

ILLUMI(SW)

RED

A ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM SWITCH LIGHT AMBIENT LIGHTS (Built into the roof console) A/T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL LIGHT BSI OFF SWITCH LIGHT CMBS OFF SWITCH LIGHT DASHLIGHTS BRIGHTNESS CONTROLLER LIGHT DRIVER'S AMBIENT LIGHT DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH LIGHT DRIVER'S SEAT VENTILATION SWITCH LIGHT FRONT PASSENGER'S AMBIENT LIGHT FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH LIGHT FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT VENTILATION SWITCH LIGHT HAZARD WARNING SWITCH LIGHT HEADLIGHT WASHER SWITCH LIGHT LEFT SECOND ROW SEAT HEATER SWITCH LIGHT MOONROOF SWITCH LIGHT ROOF CONSOLE SWITCH LIGHTS REAR CONTROLLER AND SCREEN REAR INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHT SWITCH LIGHTS RES AUXILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY LIGHT RIGHT SECOND ROW SEAT HEATER SWITCH LIGHT POWER MIRROR SWITCH LIGHT STEERING WHEEL SWITCH LIGHTS VSA OFF SWITCH LIGHT VSA/BSI OFF SWITCH LIGHT

(cont'd)

C ircuit D iag ram (cont'd)

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

_LL

*1 : W ith active damper system *2 : W ith TPMS * 3 : W ith ACC * 4 : Canada models w ithout BSI or USA models * 5 : Canada models w ith BSi * 8 : W ith navigation • 7 : W ithout ACC

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

G501

G302

(cont'd)

C ircuit D iag ram (cont'd)

*1 : W ith ACC *2 : W ithout ACC

TURN SIGNAL/ HAZARD RELAY

Y BLU

Y

BRN

DTC T ro u b le sh o o tin g DTC B1152: Gauge Control Module Internal Error (EEPROM error) ■ NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to foll ow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1 . Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to ON (II). 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

DTC B115S: Gauge Control M odule Lost Communication with Combination Switch Control Unit (HLSW Message) DTC B1156: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with Combination Switch Control Unit (WIPSW Message) NOTE: If you are troubl eshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to fol low the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154).

Is D T C B1152 i n d ic a t e d ?

1 . Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

YES-Repl ace the gauge control modul e (see page

2 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to

22-419).B ' NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this tim e.B

ON (II). 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds, 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C B 1 1 5 5 a n d / o r B 1 1 5 6 in d ic a t e d ? Y E S -G o to s te p 5. N O - ln t e r m it t e n t fa ilu re , th e s y s te m is OK a t th is tim e . C h e ck f o r lo o s e o r p o o r c o n n e c tio n s b e tw e e n th e g a u g e c o n tro l m o d u le a n d th e c o m b in a t io n s w itc h c o n tro l u n i t . B

5. C h e ck f o r DTCs w it h th e HDS. Are D T C s B 1 0 0 7 , B 1 0 6 2 t B 1 0 8 3 , B 1 9 5 7 f B 1 9 5 8 , a n d / o r B 2 9 6 9 also indicated? Y E S - D o th e c o m b in a t io n s w itc h c o n tro l u n it in p u t te s t (see p a g e 2 2 -3 7 9 ).B N O - D o th e g a u g e c o n tro l m o d u le in p u t te s t (see p a g e

22-416).B

(c o n t'd )

DTC T ro u b le sh o o tin g (cont'd) DTC B1157: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with MICU (MICU Message) DTC B1159: Gauge Control Module lo s t Communication with MICU (DOORSW Message) DTC B1180: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with MICU (AUTOLT Message) NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154).

DTC B1158: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication w ith Relay Control Module (RM Message) NOTE: If you are troubl eshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in i-CA N System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1 . Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to

ON (II). 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

Is D T C B 1 1 5 8 in d ic a te d ?

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to ON (II).

YES-Go to step 5.

3. Wait for at l east 8 seconds, 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C B 1 1 5 7 , B 1 1 5 9 , a n d /o r B 1 1 8 0 in d ic a te d ?

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the gauge control module and the relay control m o d u le ,! 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

Y E S - G o to step 5.

A r e D T C s B 1 0 0 5 r B 1 9 5 9 , B 2 1 8 2 , a n d / o r B 2 9 7 0 a ls o

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the gauge control module and the MICU.®

in d ic a te d ?

5. Check for DTCs with the HDS, A re D T C s B 1 0 5 5 , B 1 0 5 6 , B 1 0 5 7 , B 1 2 5 5 , B 1 3 5 5 , B 1 8 0 8 f B 1 8 1 0 , B 1 8 1 I B 1 9 5 5 , B 2 1 5 5 , B 2 1 5 6 , a n d /o r B 2 1 61 a ls o in d ic a te d ?

YES-Do the MICU input test (see page 2 2 -1 7 5 ).■ NO-Do the gauge control module input test (see page 22-416).!

2 2 4 0 4

YES-Do the relay control module input test (see page

22-179).! NO-Do the gauge control module input test (see page

22-416).!

DTC B1162: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication w ith Power Tailgate Control Unit (PIG Message) NOTE: If.you are troubleshooting mul tiple DTCs, be sure to foll ow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1 . Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to ON (II).

DTC B1168: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication w ith PCM (ENG Message) DTC B1169: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication w ith PCM (A/T Message) DTC B1178: F-CAN Communication Line Error NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to fol low the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154).

3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to ON (II). '

I s D T C B1162 i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 5. N O -l ntermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the gauge control module.® 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Are D T C s B1155, B1156, B11S7, B11S8, B1159, B1180, B1182, a n d / o r U128F a l s o i n d i c a t e d ? YES-Do the gauge control module input test (see page 2 2 -4 1 8 ).■ NO-Do the power tailgate control unit input test (see page 22-628).B

3. Wait for at least 8 seconds. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. I s D T C B1168, B1169, a n d / o r B1178 i n d i c a t e d ? YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connection between the gauge control module and the PCM.B 5. Check for Fuel and Emissions Systems DTCs with the HDS. Are t h e r e a n y D T C s i n d i c a t e d ? YES-Go to and troubl eshoot the indicated DTCs, then recheck.B

NO-Go to step 6. 8 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

7. Disconnect gauge control modul e connector A (12P). 8 . Jump the SCS line with the HDS,

9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

DTC T ro u b le sh o o tin g (cont'd) 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector A (49P) terminals No. 48 and No. 43 and gauge control module connector A (12P) connector terminals No. 12 and No. 8 respectively.

DTC B1170: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication w ith VSA Modulator-Control Unit (VSA Message)

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) Terminal side of femal e terminals

NOTE: If you are troubl eshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure to fol low the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1 . Cl ear the DTCs with the HDS.

| 1 I 2

9

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7

11 12 13 / I / 24 22 /

X

8 T 1 1° L 16 / 1 18 19 20 21

25

X

26 27 28

29 30 31 32133 / / 1 38 37 38 39 | 40 | 41 « 1 « 1 « 1 / 1

1! 12

3 4

5

S T

8

9

13 14 15 18 1? 18 19

10 20

Wire side of female terminals 3 . Measure the resistance between cabl e reel

subharness 20P connector terminals No. 14 and No. 15 in each multi-information switch position according to the table.

3. Disconnect the connectors (B), and remove the gauge control module. 4. Instal l the gauge control module in the reverse order of removal.

Position Previous (A ) SEL/RESET Next ( ▼ )

Resistance About 33 O Aboi About 363 O

4. If the resistance is not as specified, repl ace the cable reel subharness. NOTE: If the switch is OK, but there is a problem with switch function, check the cable reel.

O u tsid e A ir T e m p e ra tu re In d ica to r C alib ratio n NOTE: To test the outside air temperature sensor, refer to the outside air temperature sensor test procedure (see page 21-101).

Description

Update to the outside air temperature indicator while driving Engine coolant temperature is 140 °F (80 °C) or higher:

These conditions can heat soak the outside air temperature sensor and cause inaccurate readings. Logic has been written into the gauge control modul e to hel p prevent-abnormal or fluctuating outside air temperature indicator readings.

If the temperature measured by the outside air temperature sensor is greater than the temperature on the outside air temperature indicator, the outside temperature indicator w il l increase by 1 °F (1 °C) per minute after the vehicl e speed is greater than 13 mph (30 km/h) for more than 1 minute and 30 seconds. It will continue to increase until the current outside air temperature is indicated. So, the first change to the outside air temperature indicator is 1 minute and 30 seconds after the vehicl e speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h), If the vehicl e speed drops below 19 mph (30 k m /h ), the indicator will not update again until the v e h ic l e sp e e d is increased to 13 mph (30 km/h) or more for more than 1 minute and 30 seconds again.

Outside A ir Temperature Indicator Logic

Engine coolant temperature is less than 140 °F (60 °C):

If the engine coolant temperature is 140 °F (80 °C) or higher when the ignition switch is turned to ON (I I), the outside air temperature indicated the last time the key was turned off will be displayed regardless of the current temperature measured by the outside air temperature sensor,

If th e e n g in e c o o la n t a ir te m p e r a tu r e is less t h a n 140 °F (60 °C), th e t e m p e r a tu r e d is p la y e d in c re a s e s 1 °F (1 °C) e v e ry 2 s e c o n d s u n til th e c u r r e n t o u ts id e a ir t e m p e r a tu r e is d is p la y e d ,

The outside air temperature sensor is l ocated behind the center of the front bumper. The gauge control module uses measurements from this sensor to display the outside air temperature, Because of the l ocation of the sensor, it may be affected by heat reflection from the road, engine and radiator heat, or hot exhaust from surrounding traffic.

If the engine coolant temperature is l ess than 140 °F (60 °C) or lower when the ignition switch is turned to ON (ll)r the current temperature measured by the outside air temperature sensor will be indicated.

If th e o u ts id e a ir t e m p e r a tu r e is less th a n th e in d ic a te d t e m p e r a tu r e , th e t e m p e r a tu r e w ill d e c re a s e 1 °F (1 °C) e v e ry 2 s e c o n d s u n til th e c u r r e n t o u ts id e a ir t e m p e r a tu r e is in d ic a te d re g a rd le s s o f v e h ic le s p e e d .

Troubleshooting If th e in d ic a to r d is p la y s " ------------ " f o r m o r e th a n 2 s e c o n d s a fte r s e le c tin g th e o u ts id e a ir t e m p e r a tu r e d is p la y m o d e , th e g a u g e is n o t re c e iv in g th e o u ts id e te m p e r a tu r e d a ta f r o m th e c lim a te c o n tro l u n it o v e r th e B-C A N . C h e ck th e c lim a te c o n tro l s y s te m o r m u ltip le x in te g ra te d c o n tro l s y s te m f o r DTCs (see B -C A N S y s te m D ia g n o s is T e s t M o d e A ) (see p a g e 22-154).

Calibration T h e o u ts id e a ir t e m p e r a tu r e in d ic a to r 's d is p la y e d te m p e r a tu r e can b e re c a lib ra te d ± 5 °F or ± 3 °C t o m e e t th e c lie n t's e x p e c ta tio n s .

C o m p o n e n t Location In dex

S ystem D escription Compass Operation (Canada models, without navigation) The electrical compass unit shows the direction of the vehicle on the center information display. Compass operation can be affected by driving near power lines or stations, across bridges, through tunnel s, over railroad crossings, past large vehicl es, or driving near l arge objects that can cause a magnetic disturbance. If you see " in the direction display and "CAL" and "C Z 3 ” ore shown in the calendar display, the compass is self-calibrating. The compass may need to be manually cal ibrated after exposure to a strong magnetic fiel d. If the compass seems to be continual l y showing the wrong direction, and is not self-cal ibrating, complete the compass calibration procedure. I n most areas, there is a variation between magnetic north and true north. Zone setting is required so the compass can compensate for this variation. To check and select the zone set into the compass, compl ete the compass zone setting procedure: Self-diagnosis Function 1. Press and hold the " S E T " button, the switch ON (I I).

arrow down button, and the " A " arrow up button, then turn the ignition

2 . R elease all b u tto n s a fte r 1 se c o n d .

3. W it h in 3 s e c o n d s , p re s s a n d rele a se th e "SET" b u tto n , p re ss a n d re le a s e th e " ▼ " a r r o w b u tto n , a n d f in a lly p re s s a n d re le a se th e " A " a r r o w u p b u tto n . 4. T h e s e lf-d ia g n o s is f u n c tio n b e g in s w it h a b la n k d is p la y . Press a n d re le a s e th e " A " a r r o w u p b u tto n to s c ro ll th r o u g h

th e th re e m o d e s . COMPASS M o de 1

„

„

DO | & O S 3 & D & O O U t f I ZlIUlIUl! L L lO t t ! U O s

i

i t

s

M O d 6 C.

Eamm 9mmm

Mode 3

All segm ents are off,

j

j

j

3 3

1 0 -0 0

fU-OO 3

AM PM

3 3

5. Press th e " S E T " b u tto n to e x it th e s e lf-d ia g n o s is fu n c tio n .

Compass Adjustment Mode menu T h e c o m p a s s z o n e s e ttin g a n d th e c o m p a s s c a lib ra tio n can be d o n e in th e c o m p a s s a d ju s t m e n t m o d e . Each a d ju s tm e n t ca n be d o n e in d e p e n d e n tly f r o m o n e a n o th e r.

Compass Zone Selection NO TE: D u rin g c o m p a s s z o n e s e le c tio n , if n o b u tto n s are p re s s e d f o r 10 s e c o n d s , th e " S E T " b u tto n , th e " A " a r r o w u p b u tto n , o r th e " ▼ " a r r o w d o w n b u tto n , th e c o m p a s s a d ju s tm e n t m o d e w ill ca n c e l a n d th e d is p la y w ill r e tu r n t o n o rm a l d is p la y . Y o u s h o u ld d o t h is p ro c e d u re in an o p e n area a w a y f r o m b u ild in g s , p o w e r lin e s, a n d o th e r v e h ic le s . In m o s t a re a s, t h e re is a v a r ia tio n b e tw e e n m a g n e tic n o rth a n d tr u e n o rth . Z o n e s e le c tio n is r e q u ir e d so th e c o m p a s s can c o m p e n s a te f o r th is v a ria tio sck a n d s e le c t th e zo n e , d o th is : 6. Press a n d h o ld th e " S E T " b u tto n f o r 5 s e c o n d s u n til th e C lo c k d is p la y c h a n g e s " Z O N ? N " (c lo c k a d ju s t m e n t m o d e w ill be s ta rte d a fte r th e fir s t 2 se c o n d s ). 7. Press th e

a r r o w d o w n b u tto n . "ZON?Y" w ill be d is p la y e d .

8. Press th e " S E T " b u tto n . T h e d is p la y w ill s h o w w h ic h zo n e is c u r r e n t ly s e le c te d .

9. Find the zone for your area on the map.

10. If the zone i s incorrect press the arrow down button to cycle the count down, or press the " A " arrow up button to cycle the count up. Once the correct zone is displayed, continue to step 11. 11 . Press the "SET" button to set the zone selection. 12. Press and hold the "SET" button for about 5 seconds to exit the zone selection menu and return the displ ay to normal .

Compass Calibration NOTE: During compass calibration, if no buttons are pressed for 10 seconds (the "SET" button, the " A " arrow up button, or the arrow down button) the compass adjustment mode will cancel and the display w ill return to the normal display. You should do this procedure in an open area away from buildings, power lines, and other vehicl es. If you see in the compass display and "CAL" and self-calibrating.

"C Z 3

" are shown in the calendar display, the compass is

The compass may need to be manuall y calibrated after exposure to a strong magnetic fiel d. If the compass seems to be continuall y showing the wrong direction and is not self-calibrating, do the fol lowing. 13. Press and hold the "SET" button for 5 seconds until the Clock display changes to "ZON?N" (clock adjustment mode will be started after the first 2 seconds). 14. Press the "SET" button. "CAL?N" will be displayed. At this point, pressing the "SET" button will exit the calibration mode. 15. Press the " ▼ " arrow down button. "CAL?Y" will be displayed.

16. Press the "SET" button. The compass display will change to 17. Drive the vehicle slowly in two complete circles.

and "CAL" and "£TZ 3 ” are shown.

S y s te m D escriptio n (cont'd) 18. When the display goes from "——"to an actual heading, the unit is calibrated and the displ ay returns to normal.

C ircuit D iag ram

UNDER-DASH

. L l.

G702

G506

C e n te r In fo rm a tio n D isp lay In p u t T e s t 1 . Remove the center upper panel (see page 20-119).

2. Remove the dashboard center panel (see page 20-120). 3. Remove the four screws, and the center information displ ay (A).

4. Disconnect the 12P connector (B) from the center information display. 5. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. • If the terminal s are bent, l oose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. • If the terminals l ook OK, go to step 6. 6 . Reconnect the connector to the center information display, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do the following

input tests; • If any test indicates a probl em, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If all input tests prove OK, the center information display must be faulty; repl ace it. Cavity

Wire

Test Condition

11

BLK

I n al l ignition switch positions

Measure the voltage to ground: There shoul d be less than 0.2 ¥.

12

WHT

Under al l conditions

Measure the voltage to ground: There shoul d be battery voltage.

6

YEL

Ignition switch ON (II)

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be battery voltage.

10

BLU

Under al l conditions

Check for continuity between terminal No. 10 and PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 30. There should be continuity.

Test: Desired result

Possible cause I desired result is not obtained • Poor ground (G506) or an open in the ground wire • An open or high resistance in the wire • Blown No. 7 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box • An open or high resistance in the wire wn No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box • An open or high resistance in the w ir

An open or high resistance in the wire

Electrical C om pass U n it In p u t T e s t 1 . Remove the headliner (see page 20-38).

2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the el ectrical compass unit (B).

3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. • If the terminals are bent, l oose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. • If the terminals l ook OK, go to step 4. 4. Reconnect the connector to the el ectrical compass unit, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do the fol l owing input tests: • If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If al l input tests prove OK, the electrical compass unit must be faulty; repl ace it. Cavity

Wire

Test Condition

Test; Desired result

2

BLK

In all ignition switch positions

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be l ess than 0.2 V,

1

YEL

Ignition switch ON |ii|

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be battery voltage.

3

RED

Under all conditions

Measure the voltage to ground; There should be about 4 V.

4

BLU

Under all conditions

Measure the voltage to ground; There shoul d be about 4 ¥.

5

ORN

Under all conditions

Measure the voltage to ground: There should, be about 4 ¥.

6

GRY

Under all conditions

Measure the voltage to ground: There shoul d be about 4 ¥.

Possible cause if desired result is 1 ©btainei • Poor ground (G702) or an open in the ground wire • An open or high resistance in the w ir

• Blown No. 21 (7,5 A) fuse under-dash fuse/rel ay box • Faulty under-dash fuse/rel ay box • An open or high resistance in the wire • Faulty center information displ • An open or high resistance in the wire • A short to ground in the wire • Faulty center information displ • An open or high resistance in the wire • A short to ground in the wire • Faulty center information display • An open or high resistance in the wire • A short to ground in the wire • Faulty center information display • An open or high resistance in the wire • A short to ground in the wire

C o m p o n e n t Location In dex

C ircuit D iag ram

UNDER-DASH

G801

G801

G502

G601

G601

G801

; CAN line : UART line

YEL

WHT

LTGRN

G802

G605

G501

C o n tro l U n it In p u t T e st NO TE:

• Before testing the reminder system control unit, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control unit first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A {see page 22-154). • Before testing the reminder system control unit, troubleshoot the F-CAN system first, using gauge control module sel f-diagnosis function (see page 22-395). MICU (Common Test) 1 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and remove the left kick panel (see page 20-78).

2. Disconnect under-dash fuse/rel ay box connectors E, H, P and Q. NOTE: A l l connector views are wire side of female terminals.

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR £ (16P)

■ UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR P (30P) BRN

m i

2

8

9 9

n 7 5 9 13 9 15 18 4

3

11 12

BLK

L~*tJ

1 2

PNK 3

15 18 9

9 9

8 8 7 20 9 22 X /

9 25

30

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q (14P) BLK

1

r

1 2 8

13 14

3 27 28 9

GRN

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR H (14P)

7

10 11 12

I 9

I

9 5 6 11 12 9 9

m

.

T

BLK

3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are al l making good contact. • If the terminal s are bent, l oose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. • If the terminals l ook OK, go to step 4. 4. Reconnect the connectors, turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), and do the foll owing input tests: • If any test indicates a probl em, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system, • If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5. Cavity E9 Pl9

Test: Desired result

Test condition

BLK

In all ignition switch positions

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be l ess than 0.2 ¥,

• P oor g ro u n d (G 601) o r an open

In all ignition switch positions

Measure the voltage to ground; There should be l ess than 0.2 ¥.

• P oor g ro u n d (G502) o r an open

I

Q4 PI

Possible cause if desired result is not obtained

Wire

BRN

in the ground wire • An open or high resistance in the wire in the ground wire • An open or high resistance in the wire

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE (Common Test) 5. Disconnect gauge control modul e connectors A (12P) and B (24P). NOTE: All connector views are wire side of femal e terminals. GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (12.P) WHT 11 1

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR B f24P)

BLK

ORN -j]

3

2 7

8

5 9

10

6 11

1 12

ji_

p.... 2

3

4

5

,T 8

/

13 14 15 18 17 18 19

/

9

10

11

21 22

12

23 24

YEL 6 . Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.

• If the terminals are bent, l oose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. • If the terminals look OK, go to step 7. 7. Reconnect the connectors, turn the ignition switch to ON (ll ), and do the foll owing input tests: • If any test indicates a probl em, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If al l the input tests prove OK, go to the appropriate input test. - Key-in reminder, go to step 8. - Parking brake reminder, go to step 9. - Lights-on reminder, do the combination switch control unit input test (see page 22-379) and the combination l ight switch test (see page 22-268). - Seat belt reminder, check for SRS DTCs (see page 24-30). - Low battery voltage reminder, do the battery sensor input test (see page 22-107).

Cavity

Wire

Test condition

A2

BLK

In all ignition switch positions

Measure the voltage to ground; There shoul d be less than 0.2 ¥.

A1

WHT

Under al l conditions

Measure the voltage to ground: There shoul d be battery voltage.

A7

YEL

Ignition switch ON (II)

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be battery voltage.

Test: Desired result

Possible cause if desired result is not obtained • Poor ground (G501) or an open in the ground wire • An open or high resistance in the wire • Blown No. 4 (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box • Blown No. 7 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/rel ay box • Faulty main under-hood fuse box • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box • An open or high resistance in the wire • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box • An open or high resistance in the wir

C on trol U n it In p u t T e st (cont'd) Key-in reminder 8 , Reconnect the under-dash fuse/rel ay box connectors, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do the following input

tests: • If any test indicates a probl em, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If all the input tests prove OK, the M IC U must be faulty, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-90). Cavity

W ire

Test condition

Test: Desired result

P13

PNK

Ignition key inserted into the ignition switch

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be l ess than 0.2 ¥.

• Poor g ro u n d (G601) o r an ope n in

Ignition switch ... LOCK (0) position and the ignition key removed from the ignition switch Driver's door open

Measure the voltage to ground; There should be at least 5 V.

the ground wire • An open or high resistance in the wire • Faulty ignition key switch • A short to ground in the wire

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be less than 0.2 ¥.

• Faulty driver’s door switch • Faulty driver's door switch ground • An open or high resistance in the

Driver's door closed

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be at least 5 ¥.

ilty driver's door switch • Faulty driver's door switch ground • A short to ground in the wire

E15

GRN

Possible cause if desired result is t obtained • Faulty ignition key switch

e

Parking Brake Reminder 9, Reconnect the gauge control module connectors, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do the following input tests; • If any test indicates a probl em, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If all the input tests prove OK, replace the gauge control modul e (see page 22-419). Cavity

Wire

BIO

ORN

Test condition

Test: Desired result

Ignition switch ON (II), parking brake pedal pressed

Measure the voltage to ground: There shoul d be l ess than 0.2 V.

Ignition switch ON (II), parking brake pedal released

Measure the voltage to ground: There shoul d be at least 5 ¥.

Possible cause I desired result is not obtained ilty parking brake switch • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box • Faulty parking brake switch ground • An open or high resistance in the wire jlty parking brake switch • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box • Faulty parking brake switch ground hort to ground in the wire

P B0I DY I

I C o m p o n e n t Location In d ex

(Built into the under-dash fuse/relay box) Input Test page 22-221 Replacement, page 22-90

S y m p to m T ro u b le sh o o tin g In d ex Symptov Water l eaks from moonroof

Wind noise from moonroof Motor noise from moonroof

Moonroof gl ass does not move, but motor turns

Moonroof gl ass does not move and motor does not turn (glass can be moved with 5 mm hexagonal wrench) Moonroof glass does not stop at proper flush cl osed position Moonroof gl ass moves in a jerking motion (moves 40 mm (1.57 in.), stops for 0.4 seconds, and repeats) During auto cl ose operation, moonroof glass reverses when no object is trapped Moonroof glass moves, but there is no AUTO function

Diagnostic procedure 1 . Check for a clogged drain tube.

2. Check for a gap between the glass weatherstrip and the roof panel (see page 20-84). 3. Check for a defective or an improperl y installed glass weatherstrip or drain channel . 4. Check for a gap between the drain seal and the roof panel. Check for excessive cl earance between the glass weatherstrip and the roof panel 1 . Check for a loose motor. 2. Check for a worn gear or bearing. 3. Check for a deformed cable assembly. 1 . Check for a defective gear or inner cable. 2. Check for foreign matter stuck between the guide rail and the slider. 3. Check for a loose inner cabl e. 4. Make sure the cable assembly is attached properl y. 1. Check for a blown fuse. 2. Check for a faulty moonroof switch. 3. Check for a run down battery. 4. Check for a defective control unit/motor. 1. Reset the moonroof control unit (see page 22-437). 2. Check glass position adjustment Reset the moonroof control unit (see page 22-437).

Check for dirt and debris in the track. Reset the moonroof control unit (see page 22-437). Reset the moonroof control unit (see page 22-437).

Also check for

R ese ttin g th e M o o n ro o f C o n tro l U n it NOTE: Do the moonroof control unit reset with all the doors and tail gate closed. Resetting the moonroof is required when any of the foll owing have occurred. • The moonroof was moved manual ly whil e the battery was dead or disconnected. • The moonroof motor was removed or replaced with a new one. • Any components related to the moonroof were repl aced or removed and reinstal led. -W in d deflector - Moonroof glass - Moonroof seal - Moonroof gl ass bracket - Moonroof cables, etc. To reset the moonroof control unit, do these steps: 1 . Close the driver's door, and leave it closed until the procedure is compl ete.

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Press and hold the tilt switch, and turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). 4. Release the til t switch, and turn the ignition switch to LOCK ( 0 ). 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 four times. 6 . Check if the AUTO OPEN and AUTO CLOSE functions stil l work. If they stil l work, the AUTO functions have not been

cleared, go back to step 1. If the AUTO functions have been cleared, go to step 7. 7. Press and hold the moonroof open switch for at least 3 additional seconds after the moonroof is ful ly opened. 8 . Press and hol d the moonroof close switch for at least 3 additional seconds after the moonroof is fully cl osed (tilted).

9. Confirm that the moonroof control unit is reset by using the moonroof AUTO OPEN and AUTO CLOSE function.

C ircu it D iag ram

FUSE/RELAY BOX

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX No. 1 (BAT) (120 A) No. 3 (IG) (50 A)

EJ1

-crvx>—— •—crvx>— ■

IGNITION SWITCH

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX No. 21 (7.5 A)

A2

—crvo— 1G1 , IG1 HOT in ON (II) and START (111) No. 7 (10 A)

No. 4 (40 A)

—-CTVjD— No. 3 (15 A)

No. 2 (OP1) (40 A)

_ c r \jo —-

X11 GRN

D14 GRN

X10

D13 PUR

L_ MOONROOF CONTROL UNIT/MOTOR

INTERIOR LIGHT RELAY

LT GRN

LT BLU

PNK

O AUTO

_£L G501

DASHLIGHTS BRIGHTNESS CO NTROL CIRCUIT (In the gauge control module)

MOONROOF SWITCH

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

G601

M o o n ro o f C o n tro l U n it In p u t T e st N O TE:

• Before testing the moonroof control unit, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control unit first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). • If the moonroof works OK manuall y, but will not work in AUTO, or reverses frequently (pinch detection) do the moonroof control unit reset procedure (see page 22-437) before proceeding with the input test. 1 . Remove the headl iner (see page 20-98). 2 . Close the driver's door, and keep it closed until the procedure is compl ete.

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the moonroof control unit (B).

5. Inspect the connector and socket terminal s to be sure they are all making good contact. • If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system, • If the terminals l ook OK, go to step 6. 8 . With the connector still disconnected, do the fol lowing input test;

• If any test indicates a probl em, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 7. Cavity

Wire

Test condition

4

GRY

Under al l conditions

Test: Desired result Check for continuity between terminal No. 4 and under-dash fuse/rel ay box connector X (39P) terminal No. 15, and terminal No. 4 and front passenger's MPCS unit connector A (28P) terminal No. 4: There should be continuity.

Possible cause if desired result is not obtained An open or high resistance in the wire

7. Reconnect the connector, and' do the foll owing input test: • If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 8. Cavity

Wire

Test condition

10

BLK

I n al l ignition switch positions

Measure the voltage to ground: There shoul d be l ess than 0.2 V.

GRN

Under all conditions

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be battery voltage.

Moonroof switch in AUTO OPEN or AUTO CLOSE position Moonroof switch in TI LT position Moonroof switch in CLOSE position Moonroof switch in OPEN position

Measure the voltage to ground; There should be battery voltage.

8

LTGRN

7

ORN

8

PNK

9

LT BLU

Test: Desired result

Measure the voltage to ground; There shoul d be battery voltage. Measure the voltage to ground:' There shoul d be battery voltage. Measure the voltage to ground: There should be battery voltage.

■' Possible cause If desired result is not obtained • Poor ground (G501) or an open in the ground wire • An open or high resistance in the wire • Blown No. 2 (OP1) (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box • Blown No.'3 (15A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/rel ay box • Faulty main under-hood fuse box • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box • An open or high resistance in the wire • Blown No. 4 (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box • Blown No. 8 (7,5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/rel ay box • Faulty main under-hood fuse box • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box • Faulty moonroof switch • An open or high resistance in the wire

8 . If all the input tests are OK and multipl e failures are found, replace the moonroof control unit/motor assembly. If the

problem is related to the key-off operation, go to the driver's MPCS unit input test (see page 22-352), and front passenger's MPCS unit input test (see page 22-357).

M o o n ro o f S w itc h T e s t/R e p la c e m e n t 1. Remove the roof console, (see page 22-311) 2. Remove the two screws (A) then puli out the moonroof switch (B) from the roof console (C).

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tabl e. \

Terminal Position

\

i

OPEN CLOSE

a

TILT

a

i

a

CLOSE+AUTO a OPEN+ AUTO kJ

7

2

3

4

5

O o a

o o rs

99

o

o 99 x j

4. If the continuity is not as specified, repl ace the switch. 5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal .

C o m p o n e n t Location In dex

*: Without Rear Entertainment

(cont'd)

C o m p o n e n t Location In d ex (cont'd)

C ircuit D iag ram

: B-CAN line MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

Fron t A ccessory P o w e r S o c k e t T e s t/R e p la c e m e n t 1. Remove the consol e panel (see page 20-110).

7. Remove the socket (A).

2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the front accessory power socket (B).

8 . Remove the housing (A).

3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. • If the terminals are bent, l oose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. • If the terminals look OK, go to step 4 . 4. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I). 5. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 and body ground. There should be battery voltage. • If there is battery vol tage, go to step 8. • If there is no battery voltage, check for; - A bl own No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - A blown No. 9 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, - Faulty accessory power socket relay. - Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box, - Poor ground (G601). - An open or high resistance in the wire, 8 . Check for continuity between terminal No. 2 and body

ground. There shoul d be continuity. • If there is continuity, go to step 7. • If there is no continuity, check for: - Poor ground (G507). - An open or high resistance in the wire.

9. Install the power socket in the reverse order of removal.

R ear A ccessory P o w e r S o c k e t T e s t/R e p la c e m e n t Without Rear Entertainment 1. Remove the center console rear trim (see page 20-107). 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the rear accessory power socket (B).

6 . Check for continuity between terminal No. 2 and body

ground. There shoul d be continuity. • If there is continuity, go to step 7. • If there is no continuity, check for: - Poor ground (G503). - An open or high resistance in the wire. 7. Remove the socket (A).

8 . Remove the housing (A),

3. I nspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. • If the terminal s are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary# and recheck the system. • If the terminals l ook OK, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I).

5. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 and body ground. There shoul d be battery voltage. • If there is battery voltage, go to step 8. • If there is no battery vol tage, check for: - A blown No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - A blown No. 9 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - Faulty accessory power socket relay. - Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box. - Poor ground (G 6 0 1 ). - An open or high resistance in the wire.

3. Install the power socket in the reverse order of removal .

C argo A re a A ccessory P o w e r S o c k e t T e s t/R e p la c e m e n t NOTE: Before testing the cargo area accessory power socket, do the mul tipl ex integrated control system troubl eshooting using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). 1. Remove the l eft rear side trim panel (see page 20-88). 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the cargo area accessory power socket (B). WHT

8 . Check for continuity between terminal No, 2 and body

ground. There should be continuity. • If there is continuity, go to step 7. • If there is no continuity, check for: - Poor ground (G604). - An open or high resistance in the wire. 7. Remove the socket (A).

BLK

8 . Remove the housing (A).

3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. • If the terminal s are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. • If the terminal s look OK, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I). 5. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 and body ground. There shoul d be battery voltage. • If there is battery vol tage, go to step 8. • If there is no battery vol tage, check for; - A blown No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - A blown No, 5 (10 A) fuse in the rear fuse/relay box. -

Faulty cargo area accessory power socket relay. Faul ty rear fuse/rel ay box (including rear MICU). Poor ground (G603). An open or high resistance in the wire.

9. Install the power socket in the reverse order of removal .

C o m p o n e n t Location In d ex

Replacement, page 22-453

C ircuit D iag ram

RANGE SWITCH

(PorN)

AC INVERTER UNIT

POVi/EFt SUP•PLY CIRC:u iT

CF»u

_£2_ G503

1

3

[]

[]

'

AC In v e rte r U n it In p u t T e s t 1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95). 2 . Remove the driver's console side trim (see page 20-104).

3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the AC inverter unit (B).

Wire side of female terminals

4, I nspect the connector and socket terminal s to be sure they are al l making good contact • If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system, • If the terminals look O K, go to step 5. 5. With the connector stil l disconnected, do the foll owing input tests: • If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If all the input tests prove O K, go to step 8. Cavity

Wire

Test condition

5

BLU

Under all conditions

12

PNK

Under al l conditions

Test:- Desired result Check for continuity between terminal No. 5 and power outl et 3P connector terminal No, 3: There shoul d be continuity. Check for continuity between terminal No. 12 and power outl et 3P connector terminal No. 1: There should be continuity.

Possible cause I desired result is not obtained An open or high resistance in the wire An open or high resistance in the wire

8 . Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-96).

(cont'd)

AC In v e rte r U n it In p u t T e s t (cont'd) 7. Reconnect the connector, and do the fol lowing input tests: • If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If al l the input tests prove OK, replace the AC inverter unit, then go to step 8. Test; Desired result

Cavity

Wire

Test condition

8

BLK

I n al l ignition switch positions

Measure the voltage to ground: There shoul d be l ess than 0.2 ¥,

1

GRN

Under all condition.

Measure the voltage to ground: There shoul d be battery voltage.

3

PNK

Ignition switch ON (II)

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be battery voltage.

Possible cause if desired result is not obtained • Poor ground (G503) or an open in the ground wire • An open or high resistance in the wire • Blown No. 15 (20 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box • Faulty main under-hood fuse box • An open or high resistance in the wire • Blown No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box • Faulty I G2 cut relay • An open or high resistance in the wir

8 . After repl acing the AC inverter unit, do the steering col umn position memorization (see page 17-13), and enter the

anti-theft codes for the audio system and the navigation system (if equipped), and set the clock (without navigation).

P o w e r O u tle t R ep la c e m e n t 1 . Remove the center console (see page 20-104).

2. Remove the power outlet (A), and disconnect the 3P connector (B).

3. Instal l the power outlet in the reverse order of removal.

C o m p o n e n t Location In d ex

Replacement, page 22-90

inp u t Test/Replacement, page 22-458

22455

C ircuit D iag ram

- Shielding

IGNITION SWITCH

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

REARVIEW MIRROR IG2 AUTOMATIC DIMMING INSIDE MIRROR

REARVIEW CAMERA DISPLAY CAM VCC

GND

CAM GND

CAM VID GND

CAM VIDEO

BACK LT

CAM SH

V • BACK-UP LIGHTS • AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT • NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT

8

J i N17 UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

H

L

□

H2 BLK

9

6 CAM VCC

4 CAM GND

5 CAM VID GND

3 CAM VIDEO

GRY j 2 CAM SH

REARVIEW CAMERA G101

TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (Closed; In R position)

System Description The rearview mirror with rearview camera display system consists of a rearview camera and an automatic dimming inside mirror with a built-in rearview camera display. When the transmission range switch is in R position, the rearview monitor is on, and the image from the rearview camera appears. Brightness of the rearview camera display changes automatically using the front-facing lux level sensor (A), rear-facing lux level sensor (B), and the control unit for the automatic dimming inside mirror. The rearview monitor mirror's brightness will gradually dim if it is operated for a long time. The rearview monitor turns off when the automatic dimming off button (D) is pressed and the indicator (C) goes off, or the transmission range switch is in any position other than Ft.

Rearview Mirror With Rearview Camera Display Input Test/Replacement NOTE: The normal operating temperature range of the rearview mirror with rearview camera display is —22 ° F t o 176 ° F (—30 ° C to 80 ° C ) . Allow the inside temperature of the vehicle to stabilize within the normal operating range before testing. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Check the auto dimming inside mirror indicator (A). If the indicator flashes 2 times, and then turns on, there is a malfunction in the mirror. Replace it. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Remove the roof console (see page 22-311), 5. Disconnect the 12

P

connector

(B)

from the roof wire harness (C).

T e rm in a l side o f m a le te rm in a ls

8. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact, • If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system, • If the terminals look OK, go to step 7. 7. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (see page 20-93).

8. With the connector still disconnected, do the following input tests: NOTE; Make sure the connector is connected while testing terminals 12, 5, and 8. Make sure the connector Is disconnected while testing terminals 3,8, 2,1, and 7. • If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If the input tests prove OK. Substitute and connect a known-good rearview camera and check the monitor image in reverse. If the symptom is gone, the rearview camera is faulty; replace it (see page 23-322). If the symptom is still present, the rearview mirror is faulty; replace it. C a v ity

W ir e

T e s t c o n d itio n

T e s t: D e s ire d re s u lt

Possible c a u s e

If d e s i r e d r e s u l t i s

n o t o b t a i n e d

12

BLK

In all ig n itio n s w itc h po sitio n s

M e a s u r e th e v o lta g e b e tw e e n te rm in a l N o . 12 a n d b o d y g ro u n d : T h e r e s h o u ld be less th a n 0 .2 V,

• A n o p e n o r h i g h r e s i s t a n c e in t h e wi re

• P o o r g r o u n d ( G 6 0 1 ) o r a n o p e n in the g r o u n d wi re

5

6

PNK

B RN

Ig n itio n s w itc h O N (ll)

Ig n itio n s w itc h O N (II) a n d th e tra n s m is s io n ra n g e s w itc h in R p o s itio n

M e a s u r e th e v o lta g e b e tw e e n te rm in a l N o . 5 a n d b o d y g ro u n d : T h e r e s h o u ld be b a tte ry v o lta g e .

M e a s u r e th e v o lta g e b e tw e e n t e r m in a l N o . 6 a n d b o d y g ro u n d : T h e r e s h o u ld be b a tte ry v o lta g e .

•

F a u lty u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y b o x

•

A n

o p e n

o r h i g h r e s i s t a n c e in t h e

wire •

Faulty u n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay b o x

• Faulty IG2 cut relay • B l o w n N o . 3 0 ( 1 0 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r - d a s h fu s e /r e la y b o x • A n o p e n o r h i g h r e s i s t a n c e in t h e wire

•

B l o w n

N o.

21 (7.5 A ) f u s e i n t h e

u n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay b o x

• Faulty u n d e r - d a s h fuse/relay b o x • Faulty or improperly adjusted t r a ns m is s io n r a n g e switch

• P o o r g r o u n d ( G 1 0 1 ) o r a n o p e n in the g r o u n d wire

3

8

2

WHT

GRN

RED

BLK

D is c o n n e c t th e r e a r v ie w c a m e r a 6 P c o n n e c to r

D is c o n n e c t th e r e a r v ie w c a m e ra 6 P c o n n e c to r

D is c o n n e c t th e r e a r v ie w c a m e ra 6 P c o n n e c to r

D is c o n n e c t th e r e a r v ie w c a m e ra 6 P c o n n e c to r

C h e ck fo r c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n te rm in a l N o . 3 a n d r e a r v ie w c a m e r a 6 P c o n n e c to r t e r m in a l N o . 6: T h e r e s h o u ld be c o n tin u ity .

A n

C h e ck fo r c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n t e r m in a l N o . 3 a n d b o d y g ro u n d : T h e r e s h o u ld be no c o n tin u ity .

A

C h e c k fo r c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n te r m in a l N o . 8 a n d r e a r v ie w c a m e r a 6 P c o n n e c to r te r m in a l N o . 4: T h e r e s h o u ld be c o n tin u ity .

A n

C h e c k f o r c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n te rm in a l N o . 8 a n d b o d y g ro u n d : T h e r e s h o u ld be no c o n tin u ity .

A

C h e ck fo r c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n te r m in a l N o . 2 a n d r e a r v ie w c a m e r a 6 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l N o . 5: T h e r e s h o u ld be c o n tin u ity .

A n

C h e c k fo r c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n te rm in a l N o . 2 a n d b o d y g ro u n d : T h e r e s h o u ld be no c o n tin u ity .

A

C h e c k fo r c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n te r m in a l N o . 1 a n d r e a r v ie w c a m e r a

A n

6P

c o n n e c t o r terminal

o p e n

o r h i g h r e s i s t a n c e in t h e

wi re

short to g r o u n d

o p e n

in t h e w i r e

o r h i g h r e s i s t a n c e in t h e

wi re

short to g r o u n d

o p e n

in t h e w i r e

o r h i g h r e s i s t a n c e in t h e

w ir e

short to g r o u n d

o p e n

in t h e w i r e

o r h i g h r e s i s t a n c e in t h e

wi r e

N o . 3:

T h e r e s h o u l d b e continuity. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n terminal N o . T h e r e s h o u l d

7

GRY

D is c o n n e c t th e r e a r v ie w c a m e ra 6 P c o n n e c to r

A

short to g r o u n d

b e n o continuity.

C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n

A n

terminal No . 7 a n d

wi re

6P

r e a r vi e w c a m e r a

c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l N o . 2:

T h e r e s h o u l d

in t h e w i r e

1a n d b o d y ground:

b e continuity.

o p e n

o r h i g h r e s i s t a n c e in t h e

A u to m a tic

D im m in g

In s id e

M ir r o r

Circuit Diagram

REARVIEW MIRROR

i [5]

AUTOMATIC DIMMING INSIDE MIRROR {Has built in control unit)

2[12] BLK N17 UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

G601

V ■ BACK-UP LIGHTS • AUDIO /NAVIGATIO N UNIT (With navigation) - NAVIGATIO N DI SPLAY UN IT {With navigation)

GND

TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (Closed : in R position)

System Description

Test

The automatic dimming inside mirror has a front-facing lux level sensor (A), rear-facing lux level sensor (B), and a control unit. The control unit receives signals from each sensor. Based on the difference between the two lux levels (the light outside the vehicle and the light from the headlights of the other vehicle, etc.), the control unit controls the e lectro-chromic gel to reduce glare. This dimming function is canceled when the transmission is in reverse, or when the automatic dimming off switch (C) is turned OFF and the indicator (D) goes off.

Without Rearview Mirror with Rearview Camera Display 1. Check for obstructions (parking stickers, labels, etc.) over the. front-facing lux level sensor (A).

2. Disconnect 7P connector (B). 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 and body ground, • If there is battery vo ltage, go to step 5. • If there is no voltage, check for: - A blown No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - An open or high resistance in the wire. - Faulty IG2 cut relay. - Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Reconnect the 7P connector, 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 2 and body ground. • If there is less than 0 .2 V , go to step 3. • If there is more than 0.2 V, check for; - An open or high resistance in the ground wire. - Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box. - Poor ground (G601).

(cont'd)

A u to m a tic

D im m in g

In s id e

M ir r o r

Test (cont'd) 9. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 3 and body ground with the transmission range switch in R position. • If there is battery voltage, replace the rearview mirror (see page 20-44). • If there is no voltage, check for: - A blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, - An open or high resistance in the wire, - Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box. - Faulty transmission range switch. - Poor ground (G101).

With Rearview Mirror with Rearview Camera Display 1. Check for obstructions (parking stickers, labels, etc.) over the front-facing lux level sensor, 2. Remove the roof console (see page 22-311), 3. Disconnect 12P connector (A) from the roof wire harness(B) B

A

4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 5. Measure the vo ltage between terminal No. 5 and body ground. • If there is battery vo ltage, go to step 8. • If there is no voltage, check for: - A blown No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - An open or high resistance in the wire. - Faulty IG2 cut relay, - Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 7. Reconnect the 7P connector. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 9. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 12 and body ground. • If there is less than 0.2 V , go to step 10. • If there is more than 0.2 V, check for: - An open or high resistance in the ground wire. - Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box. - Poor ground (G601).

10. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 6 and body ground with the transmission range switch in R position. • If there is battery voltage, replace the rearview mirror (see page 20-44). • If there is no voltage, check for: - A blown No. 21 (7,5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - An open or high resistance in the wire. - Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box. - Faulty transmission range switch, - Poor ground (G101).

Component Location Index

Test/Replacement, page 22-489

(Built

into the climate control unit)

System Description Power Mirror Defogger Auto Operation Function When the outside air temperature is 41 °F (5°C) or below and the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the left and right power mirror defoggers automatically turn on. The power mirror defogger auto operation function is controlled by the driver's MPCS unit. • When the driver's MPCS unit receives a signal that the outside air temperature is 41 °F (5°C) or below from the climate control unit, the driver's MPCS unit automatically turns on the left and right power mirror defoggers within ten seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON (II). • Power mirror defogger output automatically stops in ten minutes as a result of its timer. • If the driver's MPCS unit receives a rear window defogger/power mirror defogger switch input signal from the climate control unit during power mirror defogger output the driver's MPCS unit shuts off the auto operation function immediately. • While the power mirror defogger auto operation function is operating, the rear window defogger does not automatically operate, • The power mirror defogger auto operation function stops temporarily, when any power windows operate during power mirror defogger output.

Circuit Diagram With power retractable mirror B-CAN l ine UART line

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

*; With power retractable mirror - : B-CAN line - : UART line

BLK

BLK K6

K1

H9

H2

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

BLK

BLK

1 A.

JUL.

G601

G601

1

Circuit Diagram (cont'd) With power retractable mirror : B-CAN line : UART line

J . G506

G507

Power Mirror Switch T est/Replacement

Power Mirror Actuator Test

1. Carefully pry the switch panel out from the dashboard.

NOTE: The power mirror actuator can be tested by using the HDS and following these steps: • Select POWER SEAT/POWER MIRROR from the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT menu. • Select FUNCTIONAL TESTS, and then the appropriate power mirror function test.

2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the power mirror switch (B).

— II-

f

n n 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 8 9 10

1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-9). 2. Disconnect the 16P connector (A) from the power mirror actuator (B). W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. LEFT l

T e r m in a l Position

8*

S

T IL T U P T IL T D O W N

9

1©

©

©

©

S W IN G LEFT S W IN G R IG H T RETRACT*

© ©

' EXTENDED* R e tr a c t S w itc h ( W i t h p o w e r re tr a c ta b le m irro r) \

T e r m in a l P o s itio n RETRACT

9

10

11

© ©

©

©

©

© ©

* : W it h p o w e r r e tr a c ta b le m ir ro r

RIGHT

\

fO

4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power mirror switch,

^

T e r m in a l

Position

\

7*

8*

9

T IL T U P T IL T D O W N S W IN G LEFT S W IN G R IG H T RETRACT*

©

©

EXTENDED*

©

©

10

11

©

©

©

©

©

©

©

©

* : W it h p o w e r r e tr a c ta b le m irro r

4. If the mirror fails to work properly, replace the mirror actuator, Defogger Test 5. Measure the resistance between terminals No. 1 and No. 2 of the 16P connector. There should be less than 8 0. If there is no continuity, check for an open circuit.

22469

Power Mirror Actuator Replacement Actuator Replacement

Actuator Harness Replacement

1. Remove the mirror holder (see page 20-43),

1. Remove the mirror holder (see page 20-43).

2. Remove the three tamperproof TORX screws from the actuator (A) using a T10TORX bit.

2. Remove the power mirror (see page 20-43). 3. Remove the three tamperproof TORX screws from the actuator (A) using a T10 TORX bit.

3, Remove the connectors (B) and the actuator. 4. Install the actuator in the reverse order of removal.

4. Remove the four tamperproof TORX screws from the housing (B) using a T10 TORX bit. 5. Disconnect the connectors from the actuator, the retract actuator (if equipped), and the side turn signal light. 8. Remove the gasket (C) and the harness (D) from the power mirror, 7. Route the wire harness of the new actuator through the hole in the bracket and the gasket in the reverse order of removal. 8. Connect the connectors to the actuator and the side turn signal light securely. 9. Install the actuator, housing, and the gasket in the reverse order of removal, 10. Install the power mirror on the door, and then install the mirror holder in the power mirror. 11. Make sure the actuator, mirror defogger, and side turn signal light operate properly.

Component Location Index

D R I V E R ' S S E A T - B A C K

H E A T E R

T e s t, p a g e 2 2 -4 7 5 R e p la c e m e n t p a g e 2 2 -4 7 8 D R IV E R 'S S E A T C U S H IO N H E A T E R T e s t p a g e 2 2 -4 7 5 R e p la c e m e n t p a g e 2 2-4 7 7 F R O N T P A S S E N G E R 'S S E A T C U S H IO N H E A T E R T e s t p a g e 2 2 -4 7 5 R e p la c e m e n t p a g e 2 2 -4 7 7

A U X IL IA R Y U N D E R -D A S H R E L A Y B LO C K B

S E C O N D M O W S E A T H E A T E R R E LA Y T e s t p a g e 2 2 -1 0 9

(4P)

F R O N T P A S S E N G E R ’S S E A T H E A T E R S W IT C H T e s t/R e p la c e m e n t, p a g e 2 2 -4 7 6 D R IV E R 'S S E A T H E A T E R S W IT C H T e s t/R e p la c e m e n t p a g e 2 2 -4 7 6 U N D E R -D A S H F U S E /R E L A Y B O X F R O N T S E A T H E A T E R R E LA Y {4PJ T e s t p a g e 2 2 -1 0 9

( c o n t ’d )

Component Location Index (cont'd) R I G H T S E C O N D

R O W

Circuit Diagram - Front Seat

LT GRf UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

MA I N UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX No. 1 (BAT) (120 A)

© -

CTVjD--—

IGNITION SWITCH

9 9

No. 3 (IG) (50 A)

IG2 CUT RELAY ......." 3

T—

f-O

C H —

No. 30 {10 A)

—crvx>C PNK UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

IG2 HOT in ON (I!) No, 2(OP1)(40 A)

D18

No. 4 (20 A)

—€r\jo-i

— —(TX9>-

FRONT SEAT HEATER RELAY TH : THERMOSTAT BR: BREAKER INTERIOR LIGHT RELAY

ION : 77-95 °F {25-35 °C)J [OFF : 97-111 °F (36-44°C)] [ON : 77-95 °F (25-35°C)l [OFF : 115-129 °F (46-54°C)]

H I: High LO: Low

---BRN

I

Y

im i cniun Li1 RELAY

Y

BLK

1 G602

G507

Circuit Diagram - Second Row Seat AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH RELAY BLO CK B IG2 CUT RELAY PCM UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX No. 1 (BAT) (120 A!

No. 3 (IG) (50 A)

81

A2

H >

LT GRN -

IGNITION SWITCH

_ 9 9

r-fO

-W H T —4 0

O j— c ORNOf—

A4

No. 30 {10 A) __ j'-r -x

rv T.TI..

,

D?

< r-UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

I G2

DASHLIGHTS BRIGHTNESS CONTROL CIRCUIT {In the gauge control module)

!

c

B2 !th

|—

ib r

V

i

LEFT SECOND ROW SEAT CUSHION HEATER

B1

HOT in ON (II)

Seat Heater Test Driver's Seat

Front Passenger's Seat

NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or servicing.

NOTE; SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or servicing.

1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-139).

1. Remove the front passenger's seat (see page 20-139).

2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) and 2P connector (B) from the seat heater.

2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the seat heater.

S E A T C U S H IO N H E A T E R 4P C O N N E C TO R

3. Check for continuity between seat heater 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3, and terminals No. 2 and No, 3. There should be continuity.

S E A T -B A C K H E A T E R 2P C O N N EC TO R

Seat-Back 3. Check for continuity between seat-back heater 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be continuity. Seat Cushion 4. Check for continuity between seat cushion heater 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2, and terminals No. 1 and No. 3. There should be continuity. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the appropriate seat heater (see page 22-477).

4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the seat heater (see page 22-477).

Seat Heater Test (cont'd)

Switch Test/Replacement

Second Row Seat

Front Seat Heater

1, Remove the second row seat (see page 20-160).

1. Remove the center console panel (see page 20-110).

2, Disconnect the 3P connector (A) .and 2P connector (B) from the seat heater.

2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the seat heater switch (A).

NOTE: Seat heater connector B (2P) is a.part of the seat cushion heater assembly. SEA T HEATER C O N N E C T O R i (2P)

1 3

2 4

5

8

3. Remove the two screws and the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.

S EA T HEATER C O N N E C T O R A (3P)

Seat-back 3. Check for continuity between seat heater connector B (2P) terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be continuity. Seat Cushion 4. Check for continuity between seat heater connector A (3P) terminals No. 2 and No. 3. There should be continuity, 5. Connect the 2P connector, and check for continuity between seat heater A (3P) connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be continuity. 8. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the appropriate seat heater (see page 22-477).

5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulbs (B) or the switch.

F ■

l

BODY ■

Seat Heater Replacement Second Row Seat Heater

Front Seat Cushion Heater

1. Remove the center console rear trim {see page 20-107).

NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or servicing.

2. Remove the HVAC trim from the center console rear trim (see page 20-107). 3. Disconnect the 6P connector from the seat heater switch (A).

1. Remove the front seat cushion cover (see page 20-157). 2. Carefully remove the seat cushion heater (A) from the .seat cushion pad (B).

1 3

2 4

5

8

NOTE: The seat cushion heater is g lued to the seat cushion pad. When removing it, take care not to damage the seat cushion pad.

4. Remove the two screws and the switch. 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 3. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

6. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulbs (B) or the switch.

(cont'd)

Seat Heater Replacement (cont'd) Front Seat-Back Heater

Second Row Seat Cushion Heater

NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or servicing.

1. Remove the second row seat cushion cover (see page 20-180).

1. Remove the front seat-back cover (see page 20-153). 2. Carefully remove the seat-back heater (A) from the seat-back pad (B). NOTE: The seat-back heater is glued to the seat-back pad. When removing it, take care not to damage the seat-back pad.

2. Carefully remove the seat cushion heater (A) from the seat cushion pad (B). NOTE: The seat cushion heater is glued to the seat cushion pad. When removing it, take care not to damage the seat cushion pad.

A

3. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

Second Row Seat-Back Heater 1. Remove the second row seat-back cover (see page 20-175). 2. Carefully remove the seat-back heater (A) from the seat-back pad (B). NOTE: The seat-back heater is g lued to the seat-back pad. When removing it, take care not to damage the seat-back pad.

3. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

P o w e r

L u m b a r

S u p p o rt

Component Location Index

Circuit Diagram

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

BLK

DRIVER'S LUMBAR SUPPORT MOTO R

BLK

P o w e r

L u m b a r

S u p p o rt

Switch Test/Replacement

Motor Test

NOTE; SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or servicing,

NOTE; SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or servicing.

1. Remove the recline cover from the driver's power seat (see page 20-142).

1. Remove the front seat-back cover (see page 20-153).

2. Separate the lumbar support switch cover (A) from the switch (B).

2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the lumbar support motor.

3. Test the motor by applying battery power and ground to the terminals. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.

\

T e r m in a l P o s itio n

\

T e r m in a l Position

F o rw a rd B a c k w a rd

1

2

4

3

1

2

\

5

\ o

- - o o

o

- o

- o

o

-

- o

5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.

4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it (see page 20-152).

Component Location Index For t h e d riv e r's p o w e r s e a t, re fe r t o t h e D riv in g P o s itio n M e m o r y S y s te m ( D P M S ) C o m p o n e n t Lo catio n In d ex , p a g e 2 2 -5 3 2

FRONT U P - D O W N M OTOR T e s t p a g e 2 2 -4 8 6 L ink ag e D is a s s e m b ly /R e a s s e m b ly, p a g e 2 0 -1 4 5

Circuit Diagram - Front Passenger's Power Seat

BATTERY No. 2 (OP2) (40 A)

© -

No. 13 (20 A)

! No. 17 (20 A)

cx UP

BLK

p

X

No. 7 (10 A)

I No. 21 (7.5 A)

J9

VBU

IG1

B-CAN

i

MICU

I I T

, G1

I LTGRN I I I I B2

_

(7.5 A)

-UT^>

REAR FUSE/RELAY BOX FUEL LID ©

6

JZL

Xl

-LL

G604

G603

G604

FUEL FILL DOOR OPENER SOLENOID

Fuel Fill Door Opener Solenoid Test

Fuel Fill Door Opener Switch T est/Replacement

NOTE: Before testing, check the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154).

NOTE: Before testing, check the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22*154).

1. Open the tailgate, and remove the left rear side trim panel (see page 20-88).

1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-9).

2, Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the fuel fill door opener solenoid (B),

3. Check solenoid operation by connecting power to terminal No. 1 and ground to terminal No. 2. To prevent damage to the solenoid, apply battery voltage only momentarily. The solenoid should work. 4. If the solenoid does not work as specified, replace it.

2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the fuel fill door opener switch (B).

3, Check for continuity between terminals No. 1 and No. 2. • There should be continuity with the switch pressed. • There should be no continuity with the switch released. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.

Emergency Access to Fuel Fill Door Opener Solenoid 1, Remove the rear fuse lid panel (A).

2. Move the knob (A) by hand in the direction that the arrow shows, and release the lock.

R e a r

W in d o w

D e fo g g e r

Component Location Index C L IM A T E C O N T R O L U N IT

R EAR W IN D O W D E F O G G E R / P O W E R M IR R O R D E F O G G E R S W IT C H * *: R ea r w i n d o w d e fo g g e r / p o w e r m irro r d e fo g g e r s w itc h is b u ilt in to t h e c lim a te c o n tro l un it.

M IC U (B u ilt in to th e u n d e r-d a s h f u s e /r e la y bo x) In p u t Test, pa g e 2 2 - 1 7 5 R e p la c e m e n t pa g e 22-9 0

REAR W IN D O W D E F O G G E R Function Te s t, p a g e 2 2-5 1 2 D e fo g g e r W ire R ep air, p a g e 2 2 -5 1 3

REAR F U S E /R E L A Y B O X (W ith b u ilt in re a r M IC U !

N O IS E R E D U C T IO N C O N D E N S E R re a r w i n d o w d e f o g g e r )

(for

REAR W IN D O W D E FO G G E R R E LA Y T e s t pa g e 2 2 -1 0 9

(4P)

Circuit Diagram - : B-CAN line PCM UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BO X BATTERY No, 1 {BATH 120 A)

© -

No. 3 (IG) (50 A) P—

\ )

r r ^ O

B1

A2

—

No. 3 (RR F/B) (60 A)

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

A4

No. 30 (10 A)

J

MICU B-CAN

1

i

1

i 1 I

G1 N - - - •- - - -

JN28

N20

i LTGRN I I I A4 B-CAN

ncmrrcB/ I , POWER POWPR

i l

92. G701

XL G804

TRANSMISSIO N RANGE SWITCH

(PorN)

H6

1nuLUWI1

1/1Z71

1 TOTTTTPTTtTf |/|/|/1 ® | / | 37 I/I 39 140

9 110 11 112

/ |

29 | / | 31

JSEG (PUR) POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) W ire side of fem ale te rm in a l s

Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 13. NO-Repair an open in the wire.H 13. Check for continuity between power seat control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 13 and body ground. POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)

6. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

RHSE (YEL) Are D T C s B1825, B1826, a n d / o r B1828 a l s o i n d i c a t e d ? Y E S - G o to step 17.

n « l/ l/ l

1—

——

•I

1

9 11 0|11112 i T 231 / 1 25| / 1 271 / | 291 / | 31l / l /

n

O T l / l

35|/| 371 / | 39140

N O - G o to step 7. 7. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 8. Operate the rear u p- do wn switch for 2 seconds, and check the rear u p - d ow n motor operation.

W ire side of fe m a l e terminals

Is there continuity?

D o e s th e r e a r u p -d o w n m o to r r u n s m o o th ly ?

YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B

Y E S - G o to step 9.

NO-Go to step 14. 14. Reconnect power seat control unit connector A (40P). 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 16. Measure the v o l tage between rear u p - d o w n position sensor 4P connector terminal s No, 2 (+ ) and No. 3

REAR UP-DOWN POSITION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR

21. Disconnect the 4P connector from the slide position sensor and the front u p- do wn position sensor, then disconnect the driver's seat wire harness 8P [14P] connector. [ ]: With seat ventilation 22. Check for continuity between b od y ground and rear up - d o w n position sensor4P connectorterminal No. 1.

RHSE (YEL)

SEG (PUR)

REAR U P -D O W N POSITION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR

JBS ¥C C (BRN) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

I s there a b o u t 5 I/?

YES-Faulty rear up -d ow n position sensor, replace the W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

rear u p- d ow n motor.B N O - l f there is no v o l tage, replace the p o w e r seat control unit. I f there is battery voltage, repair a short in the wire (sensor

line).B

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B

17. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0),

N O - G o to step 23.

18. Disconnect p ow e r seat control unit connector A (40P),

23. Reconnect p o w e r seat control unit connector A

19. Disconnect the rear u p- d ow n position sensor 4P connector.

24. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II).

20. Check for continuity between p o we r seat control unit connector A (40P) terminals No. 15 and No. 29 and rear u p - d ow n position sensor 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 respectivel y.

(40P).

25. Measure the v o l tage between p o w e r seat control unit connector A (40P) terminals No. 15 and No. 29. POWER SEA T C O NTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

SVCC (BRN)

REAR UP-DOWN POSITION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

-EEL SVCC (BRN)

JSEG (PUR)

SEG (PUR) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

’t ]/\ 3| 4| 5| 6| 7| / \ |io|n|i2 t^ V A A 7 \A 7 ( 1/1/1 231 /1 ®1/127171281/13'1/17171*1/1 &1/1» l«° I SEG (PUR) POWER SEA T CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is there c o n t i n u i t y ?

YES-Go to step 21. NO-Repair an open in the wire.B

Is t h e r e b a t t e r y voltage w h e n t h e r e a r up-down s w i t c h i s o p e ra te d ? YES-Replace the rear up -d o w n motor/position sensor.B NO-Replace the po w e r seat control unit.B 28. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 27. Disconnect p o w e r seat control unit connector B (18P). 28. Disconnect the rear u p -d ow n motor

2P connector.

29. Check for continuity between p o w e r seat control unit connector B (18P) terminals No. 2 and No. 10 and rear u p - d ow n motor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 respectively. REAR UP-DOWN M OTO R 2P COWNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

JE~~L

RHM— (PNK)

RHMH-(GRN)

DTC B1828: Power Seat Recline Motor Pulse Error N OT E: • Ifyou are troubleshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N S ystem Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154). • If D T C B 1 8 2 7 and B 1 8 2 8 are both indicated, check for a blown No. 16 (20A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. I f the fuse b l o w s again, check for a short to ground in the recline motor circuit. 1. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II).

R H M + fG R N )

2

fl

9 10

96 11 9l1 / 9 J9 16

9

4

7

8S

17 18

RHM —(PNK) POWER SEAT C O NTROL U N IT CONNECTOR B (18PJ W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

2. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 3. Operate the p o w e r seat adjustment switch in all directions for at least 6 seconds each. 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 1 8 2 8 in d ic a te d ? Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 5.

YES-Go to step 30. NO-Repair an open in the

wire.B

30. Check for continuity between body ground and rear u p- d o w n motor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 individually.

NO-lntermittent failure, the recline motor/position sensor is O K at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at the p ow e r seat control unit

connector.B 5. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 1 8 3 6 a ls o in d ic a te d ? REAR UP-DOWN M OTO R 2P CONNECTOR

Y E S - G o to the D T C B1836 troub l eshooting (see page 22-557),B N O - G o to step 6. 6. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Are D T C s B 1 8 2 5 , B 1 8 2 6 , a n d / o r B 1 8 2 7 a l s o i n d i c a t e d ? Y E S - G o to step 17. W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?

N O - G o to step 7. 7. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (ll).

YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B

IMO-Go to step 31. 31. D o the rear up- do wn motor test (see page 22-593).

8. Operate the recline switch for 2 seconds, and check the recl ine motor operation.

D o e s th e r e c lin e m o to r r u n s m o o th ly ?

is th e m o t o r O K ?

Y E S - G o to step 9.

YES-Replace the p ow er seat control unit.B

N O - G o to step 26.

N O - R e p l ace the rear up-d o wn motor/position sensor.B

3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 10. Disconnect p o w e r seat control unit connector A (40P). 11. Disconnect the driver's seat wire harness connector. [ ]: With seat ventilation

8P [14P] (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 12. Check for continuity between p o we r seat control unit connector A (40P) termina l s No. 10 and No. 23 and driver's seat wire harness 8P [14P] connector terminals No. 2 [No. 3] and No. 3 [No. 4] respectivel y. [ ]: With seat ventilation

W ith o u t se a t v e n tila tio n

13. Check for continuity between p o w e r seat control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 10 and bod y ground. POWER S EA T CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

-

RESE (GRN) n

DRIVER S SEAT W IRE HARNESS 8P C O N N EC T O R

m

^ z f r n w n r n z \ A

A

^

\ A

^

\ A

\ ^

r — ------------ r 9 110 111 112 \ A

^

\ A

^

\ A

n

m

A

A

^

\ A

^

\ A

^

\ ^

T e rm in a l side o f m a le te rm in a ls

n, 1 1 2 4

= tn 3

p=,

5

8

6 9

Lj

iM

vb RESE f GRI N)

— f j 10 111 112 I 9 l/ l2 3 l/ l2 5 | / 1 27 l/|2 9 |/l3 1 \ / 7

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

1 «« n

9

^ / \ / \ &

\ / \ $ j I / \ ®

\ aQ

I SEG fPURf

W ith se a t v e n tila tio n

DRIVER'S SEAT W IRE HARNESS 14P CONNECTOR T e rm in a l side o f m ale te rm in a ls

F - .... — f 91 2 3 8

9

RESE (GRN) Ld . : = ..B 10

..

4

5

6

12 13 4

P.^3E (GRIM) 1— _ r - r. n m YtTi T TF T7 T7 T 7J9 110 111 112 13]/| is ] / | / | 7 | / f 7 | l/L/| 23 I/I 26 |/l 27 1/| 29 |/| 31 l / l / l / l 36 |/| 37 | / | 39 |40 J SEG fPUR) POWER SEA T CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 13. NO-Repair an open in the wire.H

N O - G o to step 14, 14. Reconnect p o w e r seat control unit connector A (40P).

POWER S EA T CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

SEG (PUR) ,

YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B

15, Turn the ignition switch to O N (II ),

16. Meas ur e the voltage between driver's seat wire harness 8P [14P] connector terminals No. 3 [No. 4] (+) and No. 2 [No. 3] (— ). [ J: With seat ventilation

Without scat ventilation

20. Check for continuity between p o w e r seat control unit connector A (40P) terminals No. 15 and'No. 29 and driver's seat wire harness 8P [14P] connector terminals No. 2 [No. 3] and No. 8 [No. 12] respectivel y. [ ]: With seat ventilation

Without seat ventilation DRIVER’S SEAT WIRE HARNESS 8P CONNECTOR DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS 8P CONNECTOR Terminal side of mal e term inals SEGfPUR)

RESE (GRN) SEG (PUR),

”

1 2

3

f — —

1 8 J

4— 5 8 j / 1- Jj— -9=1

^

_n 3

1 2

@

4

.

5

6 I /

8

J sSVCC w c (BRN)

Terminal side of male term inals ’ I / l » | 4 | 5 [ « | 7 | 9 » | l0|ll|l2 * \ a * \ a a a A

X

With seat ventilation SEG fPUR) DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS 14P CONNECTOR

SEG(PUR) r @ - i RESE (GRN) .,..

2

3

/ y

8

9

4 o

7

5

12 13

POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (4®P) W ire side of fem ale term inals

With seat ventilation

rj

6

9

L

DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS 14P CONNECTOR Terminal side of male term inals

Terminal side of male term inals

Is

there a b

o u t 5 ¥?

Y E S - C h e c k for an open/short in the wire of the driver's seat subharness. Ifthe harness is OK, replace the recline motor/position sensor.B NO-lf there is no voltage, repl ace the p o w e r seat control unit. Ifthere is battery voltage, repair a short in the wire (sensor line).B 17. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

/

/

2 8

3 .1=1. 4 5 6 9 1 0 / 12 13

4

SVCC (BRN)

SVCC

9 j 10j 11112 13|/|16l/l/l/lA / \ 1/1/1 23I / I 251/1 271/| a [ / I 311/1/171* I/I37I/I38[40

POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) W ire side of female terminals

18. Disconnect p o w e r seat control unit connector A (40P). 19. Disconnect the driver's seat wire harness 8P [14P] connector. [ ]: With seat ventilation

Is t h e m c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 21.

NO-Repair an open in the wire.B 21. Disconnect the 4P connector from the s l ide position sensor, the front up - d o w n position sensor, and the rear u p- d o w n .position sensor.

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 22. Check for continuity between body ground and driver’s seat wire harness 8P [14P] connectorterminal No. 8 [No. 12|. [ ]: With seat ventilation

25. Measure the v o l tage between p o w e r seat control unit connector A

(40P) terminal s No. 15 and No. 23.

POWER SEA T CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P!

Without seat ventilation SVCC (BRN) D RIVER'S S EAT W IRE HARNESS SP CONNECTOR

PI m

1— — — f 9 110 | 11 112

m

n

I / 1 / 1 23 1 / 1 26 i / 1 2 7 1 / 1 29 1 / 1 31 l / l / ' i / l 36 | / 1 37 [ / I 39 140

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

I s t h e r e b a t t e r y voltage w h e n t h e r e c l i n e s w i t c h i s o p e ra te d ? YES-Replace the recline motor/position sensor.B With seat ventilation

N O - R e p l ace the p o w e r seat control unit.B

DRIVER'S SEAT W IRE H AR N E S S .14P CONNECTOR

26. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 27. Disconnect p o w e r seat control unit connector B

(18P).

...... ri

7 /

2

3

8

9

10

/

4

5

12

13

8

4

T e rm in a l s ide o f m a le te rm in a ls

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B ' N O - G o to step 23. 23. Reconnect p o w e r seat control unit connector A (40P). 24. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II).

28. Disconnect the driver’s seat wire harness connector.

8P [14P]

23. Check for continuity between p o w e r seat control unit connector B (18P) terminals No. 9 and No. 11 and driver's seat wire harness 8P [14P] connector terminals No. 4 [No. 8] and No, 5 [No. 9] respectively. [ ]: With seat ventilation

30. Check for continuity, between body ground

and

driver's seat wire harness 8P [14P] connector termina l s No. 4 [No. 8] and No. 5 [No. 9] individually, [ ]: With seat ventil ation Without seat ventilation

Without seat ventilation DRIVER'S SEAT W IRE HARN ESS 8P CONNECTOR DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS 8P CONNECTOR T e rm in a l s ide o f m ale te rm in a ls

n.. __jj 1 2 4 5 69 8 Lri— nJ

15.

R E M - (L T G R N )

R E M - {L T G R N )

REM+fYEL)

ca

fl

REM+I (YEL)

2

4

/

9 10 11

/J I /

9 1/

9]

6

7

8s)

16 17 18

T e rm in a l side o f m a l e te rm in a ls

With seat ventilation

REM-(LTGRN) DRIVER’S S EA T W IRE HARN ESS 14P CONNECTOR

POWER S EA T C O NTROL U N IT CONNECTOR B (IS P ) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

3 8 9 10 /

7 / U

With seat ventilation

DRIVER'S S EAT WIRE HARNESS 14P CONNECTOR T e rm in a l side o f m a l e te rm in a ls

n....... .. _ _n 6 / 2 3 _.r—. 4 9 10 12 1 3 8 9 / R E M - (L T G R N )

REM+ (YEL) ca >

.si

2

4 2 / 7 8 7 8%j 16 17 18 9 10 11 / v /Iv REM+I (YEL) REM-(LTGRN)

REM + (YEL) JL

...n 4 5 6 12 13 4

JLREM - (L T G R N )

(cDCD T e rm in a l side o f m a le te rm in a l s

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B N O - G o to step 31.

c a fi

POWER S EA T CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR B (18P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

31. D o the recline motor test (see page 22-593).

is th e m o to r O K ? YES-Replace the p ow e r seat control

unit.B

NO-Replace the recline motor/position sensor J

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 30. NO-Repair an open in the wire.B

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B1829: A/T P Signal and VSS Signal Mismatch

DTC B1838: Power Til^Telescopic Steering Switch Signal input Error

N O T E ; Ifyou are troubleshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N Sy s te m Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154).

N OT E : Ifyou are troubleshooting m u l tiple DTCs, be sure to foll o w the instructions in B - C A N Sy stem Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154),

1. C l ear the D T C s with the HDS.

1. Clear the D T C with the HDS.

2. Start the engine.

2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to

3. Test drive at i m p h (10 km/h) for at l east 10 seconds. 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 1 8 2 9 in d ic a te d ? Y E S - G o to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at the p o w e r seat control unit connector.® 5. Check the P indicator of the A/T gear position indicator and the M I L

D o e s th e P in d ic a to r a n d M IL c o m e o n ? YES-Troubleshoot the automatic transmission system.■ N O - G o to step 6. 6. Check for g auge control m o d u l e D T C s with the HDS.

O N (ll). 3. Operate the power tilt/telescopic steering switch in each direction for at least 3 seconds each. 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 1 8 3 5 i n d i c a t e d ? Y E S - G o to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the p o w e r tilt/tel escopic steering system is O K at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections between the p o w e r tilt/telescopic steering switch connector and the p o w e r tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector.® 5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 6. D o the p o w e r page 22-595).

tilt/telescopic steering switch test (see

Is the s w i t c h O K ?

A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

Y E S - G o to step 7.

YES-Troubleshoot the g auge control m o d u l e . !

NO-Replace the p o w e r

tilt/telescopic steering

switch.! N O - R e p l ace the p o w e r seat control unit.B

7. Disconnect power tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (16P). 8. Disconnect the power tilt/telescopic steering switch 13P connector.

9. Check for continuity between bo d y ground and p o w e r tilt/telescopic steering switch 13P connector terminals No, 1, No. 3, No. 6, No. 7, and No. 10 individually.

DTC B1836: Power Seat Position Sensor Circuit Short N O T E : Ifyou are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to fol l o w the instructions' in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154).

POWER T itl/T E L E S C O P fC STEERING S W ITCH 13P CONNECTOR S¥¥G' (LT BLU}

1. Clear the D T C with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II).

L3 (LT GRN)

3. Operate the p o w e r seat adjustment switch in all direction for at l east 6 seconds each. 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS. W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

is D T C B 1 8 3 6 in d ic a t e d ? Y E S - G o to step 5.

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short to ground in the

wire.H

NO-lntermittent failure, the,system is O K at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections at the p o w er sear control unit connectors.■ ■

N O - G o to step 10. 10. Check for continuity between p o w e r til t/tel escopic steering control unit connector A (16P) terminals No. 7, No. 8, No. 10, No. 14, and No. 15 and p o w e r tilt/ telescopic steering, switch 13P connector terminals No. 1, No. 7, No. 3, No. 10, and No. 6 respectivel y. POWER TILT/TELESCOPiC STEERING SW ITCH 13P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

(LT GRN)

a

^ v

6. Disconnect po w e r seat control unit connector A (40P). 7. Disconnect the 4P connectors from the slide position sensor, the front u p - do wn position sensor, and the rear up- do w n position sensor, and disconnect the 8P [14P] connector from the driver's seat subharness. [ ]: With seat ventil ation 8. Check for continuity between p o we r seat control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 15 and body ground.

SWG (LT BLU)

L3

5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

P O W E R SEAT C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (40P)

v

L2

is

(GRN)

(PUR) SVCC (BRN)

(Q)

’lI/| 3 |4 |5 |6 |7 \ } ^9 110111[12^«T7T’5l7T7T717t7f L3

L l (GRN)

T A A m A ^ iA ^ Y A M A ^ l/lA A ^ lA ^ lA ^ U _jr

1 SW BAT

(BRN)

2

9

4

5

{3

!

8

©

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 L2 (PUR)

POWER TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING C ONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (16P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Replace the po w e r tilt/telescopic steering control unit.B

W i r e side o f f e m a le t e r m in a l s

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.H NO-Go to step 9.

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 9. Check for continuity between body ground (motor body) and terminal No. 1 of the slide position sensor, the front u p- do wn position sensor, and the rear u p - d ow n position sensor.

10. Check for continuity between b ody ground (seat frame) and terminal No. 8 [No. 12] of the driver's seat subharness 8P [14P] connector. [ ]: With seat ventilation Without seat ventilation

SLIDE POSITION SENSOR CONNECTOR (4P) FRONT U P -D O W N POSITION SENSOR CONNECTOR (4P) REAR U P -D O W N POSITION SENSOR CONNECTOR (4P)

DRIVER’S SEA T S U BH A R N ES S SP CONNECTOR

i=L SVCC

(BRN) T e rm in a l side o f m a le te rm in a l s

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - R e p l ace the motor/position sensor that has continuity.! N O - G o to step 10,

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

With seat ventilation

DRIVER’S SEA T SU SH A R N ES S 14P CONNECTOR

7 / u_

—

2

3

8

9

4 10

/

5

j 6

12 13 SVCC (BRN)

W i r e side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - C h e c k for a short to ground in the wire of the driver's seat subharness. I f the harness is bad, repair it, ifthe harness is OK, replace the recline motor/position sensor.B N O - R e p l ace the p o we r seat control unit.B

DTC B1837: Driving Position Memory Recall

12. Clear the D T C s with the HDS, and wait for 6 seconds.

Timeout

13. M o v e the motors s h o w n one at a time, and check the

N OT E ; Ifyou are troubl eshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N Sy stem Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154).

operation time. • Steering tilt motor up and d o w n • Steering telescopic motor p u l led and pushed • P o we r mirror actuator (up, down, l eft, right)

1. Clear the D T C with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (il). 3. M o v e the steering position to the ful ltilt up and ful l telescopic out positions with the p o w e r tilt/telescopic steering switch.

• P o we r seat (slide forward/backward, recl ine forward/backward, front up-down, rear up-down)

D o e s a n y m o to r fa il to r u n s m o o th ly ? Y E S - G o to the fail ed motor test; • P o w e r til t/tel escopic motor test (see page 22-595). • P o w e r mirror actuator test (see page 22-489).

4. M o v e both p o w er mirrors to the full up and ful lleft positions with the p ow e r mirror switch. 5. M o v e the p o w er seat to the full front up and full rear up positions, then slide the seat a l l the w a y back and complete l y recline the seat-back backward with the p o w e r seat adjustment switch.

• P o w e r seat motor test (see page 22-593). Ifthe motor is OK, check the e n g a g e m e n t of the motor gear.B N O - G o to the each input test: • Po we r seat control unit input test (see page 22-583).11

6. Put this seating position into m e m o r y with the driving position m e m o r y switch. 7. Manually m o v e the seat a w a y from the position just memorized.

• P ow e r tilt/telescopic steering control unit input test (see page 22-589).■ • Driver's M P C S unit input test (see page 22-352).■

8. Recall the m e m o r y position with the driving position m e m o r y switch. 9. Wait for 3 minutes. 10. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Are a n y D T C s i n d i c a t e d ? Y E S - G o to step 11. ~ NO-lntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections.■ 11. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Are a n y D T C s o t h e r t h a n B 1 8 3 7 i n d i c a t e d ? Y E S - G o to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting.■ N O - G o to step 12,

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B1840: Tilt Motor Pulse Error N OT E: Ifyou are troub l eshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N Sy st em Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154).

12. Check for continuity between p ow er tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (18P) terminals No. 4, No. 12, and No. 18 and p ow er tilt motor/position sensor SP connector terminals No. 8, No. 1 , and No, 8 respectivel y. POWER TILT M O T O R /P O S ITIO N SENSOR 8P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II),

7 9

3. Operate the til t switch in each direction for at least 8 seconds.

2 5

7 | 8

6

u 16 7 | 9 j 10 | 11 112 13 114 15 SEG (GRN)

U S B (BLU)

POWERT il f/TELESCOPICSTEERING

is D T C B 1 8 4 1 a ls o in d ic a te d ?

C O NTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (16P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

YES-Go to step 17.

i s there c o n t i n u i t y ?

N O - G o to step 6.

Y E S - G o to step 13.

6. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 7. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 8. Operate the til t switch for 2 seconds, and check the tilt motor operation.

D o e s t h e tilt m o t o r r u n s m o o t h ly ?

NO-Repair an open in the

wire.B

13. Check for continuity between body ground and power tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (16P) terminals No. 4 and No. 12 individually. POWER T ill/T E L E S C O P iC STEERING CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (18P)

Y E S - G o to step 9. U S A (ORN)

N O - G o to step 26. r

—

1

3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

2

9

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

10. Disconnect p ow e r tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (18P), 11. Disconnect the p o w er tilt motor/position sensor connector.

TISB (BLU)

8P

Wiresideoffemal eterminals Is there continuity?

YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B NO-Go to step 14. 14. Reconnect power tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (16P).

16. Measure the v o l tage between p o w er tilt motor/position sensor 8P connector terminals No. 6 and No. 8 and between terminals No. 7 and No. 8.

20. Check for continuity between po w er tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (16P) terminals No. 2 and No. 16 and p o we r til t motor/position sensor 8P connector termina l s No. 5 and No. 8 respectively.

POWER TILT M O TO R /P O S ITIO N SENSOR 8P CONNECTOR POWER TILT M O TO R /P O S ITIO N SENSOR SP CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

SEG (GRN)

SVCC (PUR)

ft)

(ft

SVCC {PUR) TL_ 1 >

r

9

4

5

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Is th e r e a b o u t 5 ¥ ? YES-Faulty p ow e r tilt motor/position sensor, replace the til t motor a s s e m b l y .® NO-lf there is no v o l tage, repl ace the p ow er tilt/telescopic steering control unit. I f there is battery v o l tage, repair a short in the wire.H

SEG (GRN) POWER TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (16P) W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

17. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

Y E S - G o to step 21.

18. Disconnect pow er tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (16P).

NO-Repair an open in the

19. Disconnect the pow er tilt motor/position sensor connector.

0 7 8

8P

wire.B

21. Disconnect the p ow er telescopic motor/position sensor 6P connector. 22. Check for continuity between p ow er tilt motor/position sensor 8P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground, POWER T i l l M O TO R /P O S ITIO N SENSOR 8P CONNECTOR

2

/

u _ _

5

F ::9 ... 8

- n 3 8

_

SVCC (PUR)

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.ll N O - G o to step 23. 23. Reconnect p ow e r tilt/tel escopic steering control unit connector A (16P). (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 24. Turn the ignition switch to O N (I I). 25. Measure the v o l tage between pow er tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (16P) terminals No. 2 and No, 18.

29. Check for continuity between p o w e r tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector B (8P) terminals No. 7 and No. 8 and p ow e r til t motor/position sensor 8P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3 respectively. POWER TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING C O NTROL U N IT CONNECTOR B (SP) W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s

POWER TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (16P) SVCC (PUR)

1 I2 9l 4 I5 I6 I9

T IM — (ORN)

r _______ _n

t—

6 \

TIM + (LT BLU)

7 18 1

10 | 11 112 113 114 115 [ 16

SEG (GRN)

T IM — (ORN)

T !M + (LT BLU)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e w h e n t h e tilt s w i t c h is o p e r a t e d ? YES-Faulty po we r tilt motor/position sensor, replace the tilt motor assembly.® NO-Replace the pow er til t/telescopic steering control unit.B

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

YES~Go to step 30. NO-Repair an open in the

26. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), 27. Disconnect p o we r til t/telescopic steering control unit connector B (8P). 28. Disconnect the po w er tilt motor/position sensor connector.

POWER TILT M O T O R /P O S ITIO N SENSOR 8P CONNECTOR

wire.B

30. Check for continuity between body ground and pow er tilt motor/position sensor 8P connector termina l s No. 2 and No. 3 individual l y.

8P POWER TILT M O TO R /P O S ITIO N SENSOR SP CONNECTOR

TIM — (ORN)

■ TIM + (LT BLU)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire,I N O - G o to step

31.

31. D o the tilt motor test, (see page 22-595)

DTC B1841: Telescopic M otor Pulse Error

Is th e m o to r O K ?

N OT E: Ifyou are troubleshooting m u l tiple DTCs, be sure

YES-Replace the power tilt/telescopic steering control

to foll o w the instructions in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154).

unit.B NO-Replace the p o w e r tilt motor/position sensor.B

1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 3. Operate the telescopic switch in each direction for at

l east 8 seconds. 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS,

i s D T C B1841 i n d i c a t e d ? Y E S - G o to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.■ 5. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

i s D T C B1840 a l s o i n d i c a t e d ? Y E S - G o to step 17. N O - G o to step 6. 6. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 7. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 8. Operate the telescopic switch for 2 seconds, and check the tel escopic motor operation.

D o e s th e t e le s c o p ic m o to r r u n s m o o th ly ? Y E S - G o to step 3.

NO-Go to step 26. 9. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), 10. Disconnect p o w e r tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (1SP). 11. Disconnect the po w e r tel escopic motor/position sensor 6P connector.

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 12. Check for continuity between p ow er tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (18P) terminals No. 5, No. 13, and No. 16 and p o we r telescopic motor/position sensor 6P connector terminals No. 4, No. 5, and No. 6 respectively.

18. Measure the voltage between p o w er telescopic motor/position sensor 6P connector terminals No. 4 and No. 8 and between terminals No. 5 and No. 8. P O W E R TELESCOPIC MOTOR/POSITION S E N S O R SP C O N N E C T O R

P O W E R TELESCOPIC MOTOR/POSITION S E N S O R 6P C O N N E C T O R W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

TESA fll BLU!

S EG (GRN)

TESB (YEL)

TESA (LT BLU) f 7 | 8 | 14 15 10

I TESB (YEL) S EG P O W E R TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (18P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is th e r e a b o u t 5 V ? Y E S - F a u l t y p o w e r te le s c o p ic m o t o r / p o s it io n s e n s o r ,

rep l ace the tel escopic motor a s s e m b l y .® NO-lf there is no voltage, replace the p o w e r tilt/telescopic steering control unit. I f there is battery v o l tage, repair a short in the wire.B

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 13.

17. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

NO-Repair an open in the wire.B

18. Disconnect p o w e r tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (16P).

13. Check for continuity between body ground and p ow e r til t/telescopic steering control unit connector A (16P) terminals No. 5 and No. 13 individual ly.

P O W E R lill/IElESGOPiC STEERING C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (16P) TESA (LT BLUf jr 4 E 0 7 8 1 2 9 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 TESB (YEL)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B N O - G o to step 14. 14. Reconnect po w e r tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (16P).

19. Disconnect the p ow e r telescopic motor/position sensor 6P connector.

20. Check for continuity between p o w e r tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (16P) terminals No. 2 and No. 16 and p o w e r telescopic motor/position sensor 6P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 8 respectivel y. POWER TELESCOPIC M O T O R /P O S ITIO N SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

24. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II), 25. Measure the v o l tage between p o we r tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (16P) terminals No. 2 and No. 18.

POWER TiLT/TELESC O PIC STEERING C O NTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (IS P ) SVCC (PUR)

1 r~i [T 3 4 5 6

p.. .jri 1 I / 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 |13 |14 |15 116

SVCC { P U R J J ^ ^ ^ ^ S E G (GRN)

©

@

SEG {GRN)

' SVCC (PUR)

__n 7 8I

1I

i / 1 4 15 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

SEG (GRN) 1

Is th e r e b a tt e r y v o lt a g e w h e n t h e t e le s c o p ic s w it c h is o p e ra te d ?

POWER TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (18P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Y E S - F a u l ty p ow e r telescopic motor/position sensor, replace the telescopic motor assembly.!!

Is t h e r e c o n tin u it y ? Y E S ~ G o to step

NO-Replace the p o we r til t/tel escopic steering control unit.B

21.

NO Repair an open in the wire.il 21. Disconnect the p o w er tilt motor/position sensor

26. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0),

8P

connector. 22, Check for continuity between p o w e r telescopic motor/position sensor 6P connector terminal No. 3 and b ody ground.

POWER TELESCOPIC M O T O R /P O S ITIO N SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR n.....

..... n

1 3

2 4

5

6

y SVCC (PUR)

x W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.ll N O G o to step 23. 23, Reconnect po w e r tilt/tel escopic steering control unit

connector A (16P).

27. Disconnect p o we r tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector B (8P). 28. Disconnect the. p o we r telescopic motor/position sensor 6P connector.

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 29. Check for continuity between p o w e r tilt/telescopic steering contro l unit connector B (8P) terminals No. 4 and No. 8 and p o w e r telescopic motor/position sensor 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 respectivel y. POWER TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR B (SP) W ire sid e o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

POWER TELESCOPIC M O T O R /P O S ITIO N SENSOR 8P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 30. NO-Repair an open in the wire.B 30. Check for continuity between bod y ground and p ow e r telescopic motor/position sensor SP connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 individually.

POWER TELESCOPIC M O T O R /P O S ITIO N SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR J E M - (LT GRN)

T E M + (PNK)

31. D o the telescopic motor test fsee page 22-535). Is t h e m o t o r O K ? YES-Replace the p o w e r til t/telescopic steering control unit.B NO-Replace the p o w er tel escopic motor/position sensor.B

DTC B1842: Power Tilt/Telescopic Position

Sensor Power Supply Circuit (SVCC Line) Short

10. At the. sensor side, check for continuity between po we r telescopic motor/position sensor 6P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground (motor body).

N OTE: Ifyou are troubleshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154).

POWER TELESCOPIC MOTOR/POSITION SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR n

n 1

1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS.

2 4

3

2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II).

5

6

u

u

SVCC (PUi)

3. Operate the p ower tilt/telescopic steering switch in each direction for m o r e than 1 second. 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Terminal side of male terminal s

i s D T C B 1 8 4 2 indicated? Y E S ~ G o to step 5.

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

N O - l ntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections.■

YES-Replace the po we r telescopic motor/position sensor.B

5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 6. Disconnect p ow er tilt/tel escopic steering control unit connector A (16P).

N O - G o to step 11. 11. At the sensor side, check for continuity between p ow er til t motor/position sensor 8P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground (motor body).

7. Disconnect the po wer telescopic motor/position sensor 6P connector.

POWER TILT MOTOR/POSITION SENSOR CONNECTOR

BP

8. Disconnect the pow er til t motor/position sensor 8P connector.

n

/

9. Check for continuity between p o we r tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (18P) terminal No. 2 and body ground,

■5

CU

9 o

CO

1 2

8 y

U

Terminal side of male terminals

jJr 6

8

SVCC (PUR)

SVCC {PUR) ,

F=1

3

u

P O W E R TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (16P)

1

rj 2

7 8

11 (12 13 | 14 15 116

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - R e p l ace the po we r tilt motor/position sensor.B NO-Replace the po wer tilt/telescopic steering control

Y

unit.B

Wire side of female terminals

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B N O - G o to step 10.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B1S43: Power Seat Control Unit Lost Com m unication with Power Tilt/Telescopic Steering Control Unit (UART line) NO T E: ifyou are troubleshooting m u l tiple DTCs, be sure to follow the Instructions in B - C A N S ystem Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154).

8. Check for continuity between p o w er seat control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 39 and p o w e r tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (16P) terminal No. 11, POWER S EA T CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls ’

1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS.

[ /I 3 | 4 | SI 6 | 7

9 110 111 112

\7 \7 m 7 m 7 \m 7 m

2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (il).

U A R T (PUR)

3. Check for D T C s with the HDS. Is DTC B1843 i n d i c a t e d ?

1

2

5

6

7 8

U A R T (PUR)

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time. Check for loose or poor

94

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Y E S ~ G o to step 4.

connections.! POWER TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING C ONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (16P)

4. M o v e the p o w e r tilt/telescopic steering in each direction with the p ow er tilt/telescopic steering switch.

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

Is there continuity?

D o e s t h e tilt/telescopic s t e e r i n g move i n e a c h d i r e c t i o n s m o o th ly ?

YES-Go to step 9.

Y E S - G o to step 5.

NO-Repair an open in the wire.B

N O - G o to step

9. Check for continuity between power seat control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 39 and body ground.

10.

5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), 6. Disconnect p o we r seat control unit connector A

(40P).

POWER SEAT CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

power tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (16P).

7. Disconnect

1t T 7 R 7 T . T * T - I 7 9 110 111 ] 12 1 / 1 ^ / 1 2 3 1 / 1 2 6 1 / 1 2 7 1 / ] 291^/131 ' "

"

"

’ "

'

"

9 K)

UAFtT (PNK)

W ire side of fem ale terminals

Is there continuity? YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B NO-Substitute a known-good power tilt/telescopic steering control unit and recheck. If DTC B1843 is still indicated, replace the power seat control unit.B 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Disconnect power tilt/telescopic steering control unit connectors A (16P) and B (8P). 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ).

13. Measure the voltage between p ow e r tilt/telescopic steering control unit connector A (16P) terminal No. 9 and connector B (8P) terminal No. 1, and between connector A (18P) terminal No. 1 and connector B (8P) terminal No. 1. POWER lill/T E L E S C O M C STEERING C ONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (16P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

2

N OTE: Ifyou are troubleshooting m u l tiple DTCs, be sure to foll o w the instructions in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154), 1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition O N (II).

V B U (W HT)

9

DTC B1844: Power Seat Slide'Switch"Circuit Malfunction

9 4 5 67 8 1011 12 13 14 15 16

liGliYEL)

switch to L O C K (0) and then back to

3. Operate the slide switch in each direction for m o r e than 3 seconds. 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 1 8 4 4 in d ic a te d ? n j M

>G(BL

PG (BLK) 4 rI 5

3%

6 JI,7 8

POWER TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING CONTROL U N IT C ONNECTOR B (8P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

i s t h e r e .b a t t e r y voltage? YES-Replace the

power tilt/telescopic steering control

unit.B N O - D o the pow er til t/tel escopic steering control unit input test (see page 22-589).■

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.® 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Disconnect power seat control unit connector A (40P). 7. Disconnect the power seat adjustment switch 12P connector. 8. Check for continuity between body ground and power seat control unit connector A (40P) terminals No. 1, No. 7, and No. 27 individually. POWER SEAT CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

S C O M (BLU)

SLFW (GRY)

9110111112 lO T 1 7 l7 i7 ^ r \A A * \A * > \A n \A * * \A ® \A A A * \A ® \A * \* SLR W (LT G R N )

W ire side of fem ale terminals

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 3. Check for continuity between these po w e r seat control unit connector A (40P) terminals:

DTC B184S: Power Seat Recline Switch Circuit Malfunction

• No. 1 and No. 7 NO TE ; Ifyou are troubleshooting m u l tiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154).

• No, 1 and No. 27 • No. 7 and No. 27

POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) SCOM (BLU) I n

SL F W fGRY)

©

m

^

T /IT P IT T a M

9 110111112 ' * \ A ' * \ A A A A A

n

1. C l ear the D T C s with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (ll). 3. Operate the recl ine switch in each direction for at l east 8 seconds. 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

SCOM fBLU) m r» 1 [ / I 3 14 IS 18 I 7 L / 9 110111112 m \ A * \ / \ A A A / \

i s D T C B1845 i n d i c a t e d ?

\A A & \A * \A * \A * * \A * \A A A * \A * * \A * \« >

YES-Go to step 5.

VflTGRN) NO-lntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.!

SLFW (GRY)

m«

1 I/I 3 I4-|S |6 J7 I/* 9 1 10111112 * \ a

*\a a a M \ / \ A & \ A * > \ A n \ A ® \ A ® \ A A A & \ A ® \ A ® \ A* |SLRW (LTGRN) Wire side of female terminals

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short in the

5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 8. Disconnect p o w er seat control unit connector A

7. Disconnect the p o w e r seat adjustment switch 12P connector. 8. Check for continuity between bod y ground and po we r seat control unit connector A (40P) termina l s No. 1, No. 8, and No. 25 individually.

wire.H

N O - G o to step 10. 10. D o the po w e r seat adjustment switch test (see page 22-592).

P O W E R SEAT C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (40P)

is th e s w it c h O K ? S C O W (BLU) YES-Replace the po we r seat control

(40P).

unit.B

R E P W {LT BLU)

9110111(12 ^ F T f s T W l T t ^ r

NO-Replace the po wer seat adjustment switch.■

REFtW (GRN)

Wire side of female terminals

3. Check for continuity between these p o w e r seat control unit connector A (40P) termina l s:

DTC B1846; Power Seat Front Up-Down Switch Circuit Malfunction

• No. 1 and No. 8 N OT E: Ifyou are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to foll o w the instructions in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154).

• No. 1 and No. 25 • No, 8 and No. 25 P O W E R SEAT C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (40P) SCOM fBLU)

||)— ]R E F W {LT BLU} 9 110 111 112

1/1/1 23I/I® 1/1271/129I/ I

•a M T sl/T /T V rT f * 1/13 71/1 ® 140

31l / l / l / l

1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 3. Operate the front up-do wn switch in each direction for at least 6 seconds. 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS,

S C O W (BLU)

(i______ |i

IRERV¥ (GRN) REFV i (LT BLU

n

il f*i 9110111112 k \A * \A A A 'A A

\AAto\A*\An\A*\A*\AAA*\A*r\A»\*> J R E R W (GRN) W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short in the wire.B N O - G o to step 10. 10. D o the po w e r seat adjustment switch test (see page 22-532).

is th e s w it c h O K ? YES-Replace the p o w er seat control u n i t ® N O - R e p l ace the pow er seat adjustment switch.■

is D T C B 1 8 4 8 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. N O - l ntermittent fail ure, the system is O K at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections.® 5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 8. Disconnect pow er seat control unit connector A

(40P).

7. Disconnect the pow er seat adjustment switch 12P connector. 8. Check for continuity between body ground and po w er seat control unit connector A (40P) terminals No. 1, No. 4, and No. 5 individually. P O W E R SEAT C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (40P) F H P N (RED) SCOfVl (BLU)71 FHOPfORN)

' I/I 3I 6M l/ 9J10j 11112 *\a * i a a a A 4 l / l / l 231/126|/| |/| 29l/ l 31| / | / | / | 36|/| 37|/|

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire J N O - G o to step 3.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 9. Check for continuity between these p o w e r seat control unit connector A (40P) terminals:

DTC B1847: Power Seat Rear Up-Down Switch Circuit Malfunction

• No. 1 and No. 4 N O T E; Ifyou are troubleshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154).

• No. 1 and No. 5 • No. 4 and No. 5 POWER S EA T CONTROL U N IT C ONNECTOR A (40P) SCOW {BLU)

^ h F H D N (RED)

rf7!7TtT7T7T7^ 9 110 111 11? T ip f T s p p p p p f l / M “ I / I * M » M » l / l « l / l / I / l* l/l ® l/ l » l*

scom

Y E S - G o to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time. Check for loose or poor connections,■

FHUP {ORN)

1/1/123 M

3. Operate the rear up-do w n switch in each direction for at l east 6 seconds.

is D T C B 1 8 4 7 in d ic a te d ?

^ 1 / 1 3 I 4 i 5 | 6 | 7 1 / V flO 111 1121 1 7 ! 7 P I7 1 ^

FHDN

2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II),

4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

, FHUP (ORN)

(BLU)

1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS.

. 3| /k M /! /l X/ | r

1

5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

25 | / | 27 1/129 1/1 31 1/1/1/1*1/137 ^/130140

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short in the wire.B N O - G o to step 10. 10. D o the po w e r seat adjustment switch test (see page 22-592).

is th e s w itc h O K ?

6. Disconnect pow e r seat control unit connector A

(40P).

7. Disconnect the p o w e r seat'adjustment switch 12P connector. 8. Check for continuity between body ground and pow er seat control unit connector A (40P) terminals No. 1, No. 3, and No. 23 individuall y. POWER SEAT CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) RHDN (W HT) S C O M (BLU)

YES-Replace the p o w e r seat control unit.B 1f/1

S | 4 | 6 | 6 | 7 1 / 9 110 111 1 12

»I7Ik1"A A A A

NO-Replace the p o wer seat adjustment switch.■ RHUP (PNK)

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

A

9. Check for continuity between these po w e r seat control unit connector A (40P) terminals:

DTC 82182: Left Power M irror Horizontal Sensor Signal Error

• No. 1 and No. 3 N OT E: I f you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154).

• No. 1 and No. 23 • No. 3 and No. 23 POWER S EA T C ONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P)

' \A 3I 11516 | r 1/ 9 110111112 1/1/1231/1261/1Z71/129I/ I 31l/ l / l / l 361/1371/ | 39|«

1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 3. M o v e the left p o w e r mirror in each direction with the p o we r mirror switch. 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS,

'a 110111112 13MlB|y1yi/ IZiZL^^

is D T C B 2 1 8 .2 in d ic a te d ? Y E S - G o to step 5.

JRHtJP (PNK)

RHDN (W HT ) n m

T P ™ t T7T7T7 9 110111112 ,3i / i 161/1/1/1/19 I 7 l / W ^ ^ J R H U Pf P NK ) W ire side o f fem a le te rm in a l s

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short in the wire.B N O - G o to step 10. 10. D o the p ow e r seat adjustment switch test (see page 22-592).

N O - l ntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.® 5. Select P O W E R S E A T / P O W E R M I R R O R from the B O D Y E L E C TR I CA L S Y S T E M S E L E C T menu, and enter the D A T A LIST. 6. Check the N O R M A L / A B N O R M A L information of the LEFT P O W E R M I R R O R H O R I Z O N T A L S E N S O R in the D A T A LIST.

Is th e in fo r m a tio n in d ic a to r A B N O R M A L ? Y E S - G o to step 7. NO-Replace the driver's M P C S unit.®

is th e s w it c h O K ?

7. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

Y E S - R e p l ace the p ow e r seat control unitll

8. Disconnect driver's M P C S unit connector A (40P).

N O - R e p l ace the powe r seat adjustment switch.®

9. Disconnect the driver's door wire harness A 16P connector.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 10. Check for continuity between driver’s M P C S unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 10 and driver's door wire harness A 16P connectorterminal No, 4.

12. Check for continuity between driver’s door wire harness A 1SP connector terminals No. 4 and No. 8. DRIVER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS A 16P CONNECTOR

DRIVER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS A 16P CONNECTOR T e rm in a l side o f m ale te rm in a ls —

LSEH (PUR)

ja____jn

itS E H (PUR)

G

G

1

2

3

4

9

10

11

12

L “— x x S —

r

„ 9 10 11 12 G L— L_ .

13

2 7 7

r

99 999 ] ^ 8

13

~~—

J

T e rm in a l side o f m ale te rm in a ls

LSEH (PUR) n - _

S V C C (ORN)

t

1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 110 | 11 | 21122123| 24 j2B| 26| 27128129| 30| 31| 32132

116117( / 1 19 | 20|

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short in the wires.®

DRIVER’S MPCS U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P! W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

N O - G o to step 13. 13. Reconnect driver's M P C S unit connector A (40P).

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

14. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II).

Y E S - G o to step 11.

15. Measure the voltage between driver's door wire

NO-Repair an open in the wir. M 11. Check for continuity between driver's door wire harness A 16P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground,

harness A 16P connector termina l No, 4 and body ground. DRIVER’S DOOR W IRE HARNESS A 16P CONNECTOR — — —

DRIVER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS A 16P CONNECTOR w tn ,

n G

“ r

n 2

3

9

10

11 12

G

ir u n /

1*- n 99 999 .. n

1

4

5 13

i LSEH (PUR)

n____ □ ____ ___ 2

3

4

5

9

10

11

12

13

I—

•—

----------------- ^ n ____ n

1..

1

—

99 99 9 8

s

6

T e rm in a l side o f m ale te rm in a l s

is th e r e a b o u t 5 ¥ ? T e rm in a l side o f m ale te rm in a ls

YES-Replace the left p o wer mirror.ll

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.I N O - G o to step 12.

NO-Replace the driver's M P C S unit.B

DTC B2183: Left Power M irror Vertical Sensor Signal Error NOTE ; Ifyou are troubleshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154).

10. Check for continuity between driver's M P C S unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 9 and driver's door wire harness A 16P connectortermina l No. 3.

DRIVER'S DOOR W IRE H ARNESS A 18P CONNECTOR T e rm in a l side o f m a le te rm in a l s

1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. LSEV (LT BLU)

2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 3.'Move the left p o w e r mirror in each direction with the p o w e r mirror switch.

g?=====rg

11 r

b

9 1 0 ---------

12 ""“

13 /

/

/

J

“

L S E V {L T B LU J

4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

i s D T C B2183 i n d i c a t e d ?

J -

D = = n . ___ _____ 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | to 111 | / | / | / | 15 116 117 | / | 19 | 201

( 2112 2 1 23 124 12B 12 6 127 1 2^81 29 130 f 31 f 32 133 134 136 \ / \ / \ 38 | 39 \ /

Y E S - G o to step 5. NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is O K at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.! 5. Select P O W E R S E A T / P O W E R M I R R O R from the B O D Y E LE C T R I C A L S Y S T E M S E L E C T menu, and enter the D A T A LIST. 8. Check the N O R M A L / A B N O R M A L information of the LEFT P O W E R M I R R O R V E R T I C A L S E N S O R in the D A T A LIST.

is th e in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to r A B N O R M A L ?

DRIVER'S MPCS U N IT CONNECTOR A (40P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 11. NO-Repair an open in the wire.B 11. Check for continuity between driver's door wire harness A 16P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground,

Y E S - G o to step 7. DRIVER'S DOOR W IRE H ARNESS A 16P CONNECTOR

N O - R e p l ace the driver's M P C S unit.B —

7. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 8. Disconnect driver's M P C S unit connector A (40P).

— n lS E V (LT B LU f n

rt

99 999 ~ 5

1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13

~

9. Disconnect the driver's door wire harness A 16P connector.

T e rm in a l side o f m a le te rm in a l s

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.l N O - G o to step 12.

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 12, Check for continuity between driver's door wire harness A 16P connector terminals No, 3 and No, 6. DRIVER'S DOOR W IRE HARNESS A 18P CONNECTOR

SVCC (ORN)

LSEV f l l B LU)

U

p..

DTC B2184; Right Power M irror Horizontal Sensor Signal Error N OT E: I f you are troubleshooting m u l tiple DTCs, be sure to foll o w the instructions in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A fsee page 22-154). 1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS.

1 -

1

2

3

4

5

9

10

11

12

13

99 9 9 9 J] 6

2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 3. M o v e the right p o w e r mirror in each direction with the p o w e r mirror switch.

T e rm in a l side o f m a le te rm in a l s

4. Check for D T C s with the HDS,

Is t h e r e c o n t i n u i t y ?

Is D T C B 2 1 8 4 i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Repair a short in the wires.ll

Y E S - G o to step 5.

N O - G o to step 13.

N O - l ntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections.!!

13. Reconnect driver's M P C S unit connector A (40P). 14. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II), 15. Measure the v o l tage between driver's door wire harness A 16P connectorterminal No. 3 and body ground. DRIVER'S DOOR W IRE HARNESS A 16P CONNECTOR

p

. .o 2. 1

9

10

5. Select P O W E R S E A T / P O W E R M I R R O R from the B O D Y E L E C T R I C A L S Y S T E M S E L E C T menu, and enter the D A T A LIST. 8. Check the N O R M A L / A B N O R M A L information of the R I G H T P O W E R M I R R O R H O R I Z O N T A L S E N S O R in the D A T A LIST.

is th e in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to r A B N O R M A L ?

LSEV (LT BLU) 3

4

5

11

12

13

I199 999 8

Y E S - G o to step 7. N O - R e p l ace the front passenger's M P C S unit.B 7. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 8. Disconnect front passenger's M P C S unit connector A (28P),

T e rm in a l side o f m a le te rm in a l s

Is t h e r e a b o u t 5 ¥ ? YES-Replace the l eft p ow er

mirror.B

NO-Replace the driver’s M P C S unit.B

9. Disconnect the front passenger's door subharness 16P connector,

10. Check for continuity between front passenger’s M P C S unit connector A (28P) termina l No. 6 and front passenger's door subharness 16P connector terminal No. 3.

12. Check for continuity between front passenger's door subharness 16P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 6. FRONT PASSENGER’S DOOR SU BH A R N ES S 16P CONNECTOR

FRONT PASSENGER’S DOOR SU BH A R N ES S 18P CONNECTOR

L

P ....

:

i

tr— i

—

I

?

1 2 3 4 5 6

FtSEHfPNK) n

SVCC (YEL)

I (PNK!

T e rm in a l side o f m ale te rm in a l s

9 10 11 12 13 /

l

79 999

99 99 1

2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13

*1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5

T e rm in a l s i de o f m a le te rm in a l s

10 111 l / l 13 114 f

115 116 1 17 [ / ] 19 | 2D [ / I 22 [ / ] 24 | 25 | 26 \ / \ 28

FRONT PASSENGER'S M PCS U N IT CONNECTOR A (28P) W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short in the wires.H N O - G o to step 13. 13. Reconnect front passenger's M P C S unit connector A (28P).

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

14. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II),

Y E S - G o to step 11.

15. Measure the v o l tage between front passenger's door subharness 1 6 P connectorterminal No. S a n d body ground.

NO-Repair an open in the wire.B 11. Check for continuity between front passenger's door subharness 16P connector termina l No. 3 and body ground.

FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SU BH A R N ES S 16P CONNECTOR t RSEH

FRONT PASSENGER’S DOOR S U BH AR N ESS 18P CONNECTOR tR S E H (PNK)

w E

i .... C 1 2 3 4

Q

(PNK) 5

9 10 11 12 13

6 79 999

99 9 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13

T e rm in a l side o f m a le te rm in a l s

i s there a b o u t 5 ¥ ? T e rm in a l side o f m ale te rm in a l s

YES-Replace the right po w e r mirror.ll

is t h e r e c o n tin u it y ?

N O - R e p l ace the front passenger's M P C S unit.l

YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.l N O - G o to step 12.

(cont'd)

DTC T ro u b lesh o o tin g (cont'd) DTC B2185: Right Power Mirror Vertical Sensor Signal Error NOTE : Ifyou are troubleshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure to foll o w the instructions in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154). 1. Clear the D T C s with the HDS.

10. Check for continuity between front passenger's M P C S unit connector A (28P) terminal No. 5 and front passenger's door subharness 16P connector terminal No. 4.

FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SUBHARNESS 16P CONNECTOR Terminal side of male terminal s

2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0) and then back to O N (II). 3. M o v e the right p o we r mirror in each direction with the p ow er mirror switch.

i $E W (PUR)

I

I

99 999

1 2 3 i 5 8 9 10 11 12 13

I

4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 2 1 8 5 in d ic a te d ? Y E S - G o to step 5. N O - l ntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.®

i t = = = f 1 1 2 1 3 i ■» | S T F f T P 1 1 0 | 1 1 L / | 1 3 ] U | ’ 115 116 1 17 [ / J 19 1 20 L /1 22 L /T 24 | 2S | 26 [ / I 28

FRONT PASSENGER’S MPCS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P) Wire side of femal e terminals

5. Select P O W E R S E A T / P O W E R M I R R O R from the B O D Y E LE C T R I C A L S Y S T E M S E L E C T m enu, and enter the D A T A L I ST. 8. Check the N O R M A L / A B N O R M A L information of the R I G H T P O W E R M I R R O R V E R T I C A L S E N S O R in the D A T A LIST.

is th e in fo r m a tio n in d ic a to r A B N O R M A L ? Y E S - G o to step 7. N O - R e p l ace the front passenger's M P C S unit.B 7. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 8. Disconnect front passenger's M P C S unit connector A (28P).

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 11. NO-Repair an open in the wire.H 11. Check for continuity between front passenger's door subharness 16P connector termina l No. 4 and body ground.

FRONT PASSENGER’S DOOR SUBHARNESS ISP CONNECTOR RSEV (PURI

99 99 9

1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13

9. Disconnect the front passenger's door subharness 16P connector.

Terminal side of male terminals

12. Check for continuity between front passenger's door subharness 16P connector terminals No. 4 and No. 8. FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR S U BH AR N ESS 16P CONNECTOR

RSEV (PUR)

SVCC (YEL)

_ 1=t (r 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13

99 999

T e rm in a l side o f m ale te rm in a ls

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short in the wires.■ N O - G o to step 13. 13. Reconnect front passenger's M P C S unit connector A

(28P). 14. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 15. Measure the v o l tage between front passenger's door subharness 16P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground. FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR S U BH AR N ESS 16P CONNECTOR

T e rm in a l side o f m a l e te rm in a ls

is th e r e a b o u t 5 V ? YES-Replace the right power mirror.ll N O - R e p l ace the front passenger's M P C S unit.B

System Input Test and Function Test 1. Connect the H D S to the DLC. 2. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II ). 3. F ro m the B O D Y E L E C T R I C A L S Y S T E M S E L E C T menu, se l ect P O W E R S E A T / P O W E R M I R R O R , then DTCs, • If D T C s are found, troubleshoot the D T C s using B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154), • If no D T C s are found, go to step 4. 4. Exit the D T C mode, and select D A T A LIST from the P O W E R S E A T / P O W E R M I R R O R T E S T M O D E M E N U . 5. Test each input and monitor each output under the condition s h o w n be l ow: • Ifthe data list indication is correct, continue to the next switch. I f a l lswitches are OK, go to step 6. • Ifthe data l ist indication is not correct, do the appropriate test at the control unit and terminal indicated in the table. - Voltage drop tests s ho u l d be done with the ignition switch in O N (II) and all connectors connected and the meter negative test l ead attached to a g oo d body ground, unless specified otherwise. - Continuity tests s h o u l d be done with the ignition switch in L O C K (0) and indicated terminals disconnected. Data List

Input/Command Slide Switch Forward

Slide Switch Backward

Recline Switch Forward

Rec l ine Switch Backward

Front U p - D o w n Switch U p

Front U p - D o w n Switch D o w n

Rear U p - D o w n Switch U p

Condition; Data List Indication S l ide switch forward: O N Switch released: O F F

Slide switch backward: O N Switch released: O F F

Recline switch forward: O N Switch released; O F F

Control Unit/Terminal Number/Test (If applicable) P ower seat control unit/Al,A 7 Slide switch forward: 0 ¥ Switch released: 5 V

Power seat control unit/A1 (BLU), A 2 7 (L T G R N ) Slide switch backward: 0 V Switch rel eased: 5 ¥

P ower seat control unit/A1, A 6 Recline switch forward: 0 ¥ Switch released: 5 ¥

Recline switch backwar ON Switch released: O F F

P ower seat control unit/Al,A 2 6 Recline switch backward: 0 ¥ Switch rel eased: 5 ¥

Front up-down switch up: ON Switch rel eased: O F F

P ower seat control unit/A 1,A 5 Front up-down switch up: 0 ¥ Switch rel eased: 5 ¥

Front up-down switch down: O N Switch rel eased; O F F

unit/A1, A4 Front up-down switch down: 0 ¥ Switch released: 5 ¥

Rear up-down switch up: ON Switch released: O F F

Power seat control unit/A1, A23 Rear up-down switch up: 0 ¥ Switch released: 5 ¥

Po w er seat control

Possible cause If desired result is not obtained • Faulty switch (see page 22-592)

• An open or high resistance in the wire • A short in the wire ilty control unit . ilty switch (see page 22-532)

• An open or high resistance in the wire • A short in the wire ilty control unit ilty switch (see page 22-592)

• An open or high resistance in the wire • A short in the wire ilty control unit ilty switch (see page 22-592)

• An open or high resistance in the wire • A short in the wire ilty control unit ilty switch (see page 22-532)

• An open or high resistance in the wire • A short in the wire ilty control unit .. ilty switch (see page 22-532)

• An open or high resistance in the wire • A short in the wire ilty control unit ilty switch (see page 22-592)

• An open or high resistance in the wire • A short in the wire ilty control unit

Condition: Data List Indication Rear up-down switch down: ON Switch released: OFF

Control Unit/Terminal Number/Test (If applicable) Power seat control unit/Al, A3 Rear up-down switch down: 0 ¥ Switch released: 5 ¥

Ignition Switch for Power Seat Control

Ignition switch ON (II); ON Ignition switch OFF; OFF

Power seat control unit/A35 Ignition switch ON (II): 12 ¥

ATP Switch

Transmission range switch P position: ON Any other position than P: OFF

Power seat control unit/A31 Transmission range switch P: 0¥

Slide Sensor

Seat moving forward or backward; ON Seat not moving: OFF

Power seat control unit/A11 Pulses as seat moves: 2.5 ¥ average

Front Up-Down Sensor

Seat front moving up/down: ON Seat not moving: OFF

Power seat control unit/A12 Pulses as seat moves: 2.5 ¥ average

Recline Sensor

Seat-back moving forward or backward: ON Seat not moving: OFF

Power seat control unit/A10 Pulses as seat moves: 2.5 ¥ average

Rear Up-Down Sensor

Seat rear moving up/down: ON Seat not moving: OFF

Power seat control unit/Al3 Pulses as seat moves: 2.5 ¥ average

Data List Input/Command Rear Up-Down Switch Down

Possible cause if desired result is not obtained • Faulty switch (see page 22-592)

• An open or high resistance in the wire • A short in the wire • Faulty control unit • Blown No. 2 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box • An open or high resistance in the wire • Faulty control unit • Faulty transmission range switch • An open or high resistance in the wire • Faulty control unit • Faulty sensor • An open or high resistance in the wire • Faulty control unit • Faulty sensor • An open or high resistance in the wire • Faulty control unit • Faulty sensor • An open or high resistance in the wire • Faulty control unit • Faulty sensor • An open or high resistance in the wire • Faulty control unit

(cont'd)

System Input Test and Function Test (cont'd) 6. Exit the DATA LIST and select FUNCTION TEST. 7. Do each of the function tests listed in the table shown. The appropriate output should occur. • If the function operates normally, go to the next function test. If all function tests operate normally, the system is OK. • If the function does not o c c u r, do the appropriate test at the control unit and terminal indicated in the table. - Voltage drop tests should be done with the ignition switch in ON (II) and all connectors connected. - Continuity tests should be done with the ignition switch in LOCK (0) and indicated terminals disconnected. - Jumper tests should be done according to the instructions indicated. • If the test indicates that the component operates normally, but the function w ill not operate by doing the function test or the normal use of the component, the control unit that operates that function must be faulty; replace it. • If the test indicates that the component does not operate normally, check for an open or short in the harnesses between the component and the control unit If the harness is OK, replace the component. Function Test Power Seat: Slide Motor-Full Forward

Component and Operation Seat slides forward

Power Seat; Slide Motor-Full Backward

Seat slides backward

Power Seat: Front Up-Down Motor-Full Up

Front of seat moves up

Power Seat: Front Up-Down Motor-Full Down

Front of seat moves down

Power Seat; Rear Up-Down Motor-Full Up

Rear of seat moves up

Power Seat: Rear Up-Down Motor-Full Down

Rear of seat moves down

Power Seat; Recline Motor-Full Forward

Seat-back moves forward

Power Seat: Recline Motor-Full Backward

Seat-back moves backward

Control Unit/Terminal Number/Test (If applicable Power seat control unit/68, A9, B7, B17 Disconnect power seat control unit connectors A and B. Connect B8 to B17 and B7 to A9; driver's seat should slide forward. Power seat control unit/B8, A3, B7, B17 Disconnect power seat control unit connectors A and B. Connect B8 to B7 and B17 to A9; driver's seat should slide backward Power seat control unit/B8, A9, B6, B18 Disconnect power seat control unit connectors A and B. Connect B8 to B16 and B8 to A3; front of driver's seat should move * Power seat control unit/B8, A9, B6, B18 Disconnect power seat control unit connectors A and B. Connect B8 to B8 and B18 to A9; front of driver’s seat should move down. Power seat control unit/B1, A9, 82, BIO Disconnect power seat control unit connectors A and B. Connect B1 to B2 and B10 to A3; rear of driver's seat should move i Power seat control unit/B1, A9, B2, B10 Disconnect power seat control unit connectors A and B. Connect B1 to B10 and B2 to A9; rear of driver's seat should move down. Power seat control unit/Bl, A9, B9, B11 Disconnect power seat control unit connectors A and B, Connect B1 to B9 and B11 to A9; driver's seat-back should move forward. Power seat control unit/Bl, A9, B9, B11 Disconnect power seat control unit connectors A and B. Connect B1 to B11 and B9 to A3; driver's seat-back should move backward.

Possible cause if desired result is not obtained • Faulty motor • An open or high resistance in the wire • A short in the wire • Faulty motor • An open or high resistance in the wire • A short in the wire • Faulty motor • An open or high resistance in the wire • A short in the wire • Faulty motor • An open or high resistance in the wire • A short in the wire ilty moto • An open or high resistance in the wire • A short in the wire . ilty motor • An open or high resistance in the wire • A short in the wire • Faulty motoi • An open or high resistance in the wire • A short in the wire • Faulty motor • An open or high resistance in the wire • A short in the wire

Power Seat Control Unit Input Test NOTE: • SRS com ponents are l ocated in this area. Review the SRS com ponent locations (see page 24-13), and precautions and procedures fsee page 24-20) before doing repairs or servicing. • Before troubleshooting the D PMS, trou b le sh o o t the m u l tip l ex integrated control system firs t using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test M ode A fsee page 22-154). 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-133). NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the in te rio r trim . 3. Disconnect 40P connector (A) and 18P connector L I BLU

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR A (40P!

f 1 9

B ( 1 8 P )

(B) from

GRN

BLK

2

4

/

the pow er seat co n tro l unit BRN

11

1 /

C 7 \ \ / / / itH 1 / 3 4 5 8 7 / 9 10 23

6

F = l. /

27

25

GRY

7

P N K

7 G R N

■ j /

P U R

_____________________

15

/

GRN

■

/ / /

35

23

7

L T G R N

W ire side o f female te rm in a l s

16 17 18

7 ..... 7 .....7 ~~7

ORN

8X

11 12 13

(C).

37

W ire side of fe m a l e te rm in a l s

39

\

\

Y E L

W H T

P U R

L T G R N

4. Inspect the connector and socket term inals to be sure they are all making good contact. • I f the term inals are b e n t loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. • If the term inals l ook OK, go to step 5.

(cont'd)

Power Seat Control Unit Input Test (cont'd) 6, W ith th e c o n n e c to r s still d is c o n n e c te d , d o th e fo llo w in g in p u t te st: • I f a n y te s t in d ic a te s a p r o b le m , fin d a n d c o r r e c t th e ca use , th e n re che ck th e s y s te m . • If all th e in p u t te s ts p r o v e OK, g o to ste p 6. C a v ity

W ir e

A37

WHT

T e s t c o n d itio n U n d e r all c o n d itio n s

T e s t: D e sire d r e s u lt M e a s u re th e v o lta g e to g r o u n d : T h e re s h o u ld be b a tte ry v o lta g e .

• • • •

P o s s ib le c a u se if d e s ire d r e s u lt is n o t lined B lo w n No 7 (10 4) fu s e in th e u n d e r-d a s h fu s e /re la y b o x B lo w n No. 4 (40 A) fu s e in th e m a in er-hood fu s e b o x Fa u lty u n d e r-d a s h fu s e /re la y b o x Fa u lty m a in u n d e r - h o o d fu s e b o x 3pen or high resistance in the v

6. R e c o n n e c t t h e c o n n e c to r s to th e p o w e r se a t c o n tr o l u n it, a nd d o th e f o llo w in g in p u t te sts: • If a n y te s t in d ic a te s a p r o b le m , fin d a n d c o r r e c t th e ca use , th e n re che c k th e s y s te m . • If all th e in p u t te s ts p ro v e OK, th e c o n tr o l u n it m u s t be fa u lty ; re p la ce it.

Cavity

Wire

Test condition

Test: Desired result

A9 B4 B18 A3 5

BLK BLK BLK YEL

In all ignition switch positions

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be less than 0.2 ¥,

Ignition switch ON fl l )

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be battery voltage.

81

LT BLU

Under all conditions

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be battery voltage.

B8

ORN

Under all conditions

Measure the voltage to gr o und: There should be battery voltage.

A31

GRN

Shift lever in P position

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be less than 0,2 V,

Shift lever out of P position Side switch in FORWARD position Side switch in BACKWARD positic Recline switch in FORWARD positic Recline switch in BACKWARD position Front up-down switch in UP positic Front up-down switch i n DOWN position Rear up-down switch in UP position Rear up-down switch in DOWN pos i tion

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be about 10 v. Measure the voltage between the terminals: There sh o uld be less then 0 . 2 V. Measure the voltage between the terminals: There should be less then G Measure the voltage between the terminals: There should be less then 0,2 V. Measure the voltage between th terminals: There should be less then 0,2 V. Measure the voltage between the terminals: There should be less then 0 Measure the voltage between th terminals: There should be less then 0 Measure the voltage between th terminals: There should be less then 0.2 V, M e as u re the voltage between the terminals: There should be less then 0

A1

BLU

A7

GRY BLU

A 1

A27 A1

LTGRN BLU

A8

LT BLU BLU

A25

GRN BLU

A5 A1

ORN BLU

A4

RED _

A 1

A23

PNK BLU

A3

WHT

Possible cause if desired result is not obta • Poor ground (G602) or an open in t ground wire • An open or high resistance in the wire • Blown No, 21 {7,5 A ) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box • Fdiilty under-dash fuse/relay box • An open or high resistance in the wire • Blown No. 2 (OP2) (40 A) fuse in the main under-ho o d fuse box • Blown No. 18 (20 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay b o x • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay b o x • Fdiii lty m a i n u n de r-h o od fuse box • An o pen or high resistance in the wire • Blo wn N o , 2 (OP2) (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box • Blown No. 14 (20 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box • Faulty main under-hood fuse box 3pen or high resistance in the v Ity transmission range sw • Poor ground (G101) or an o pen or high resistance in the wi A short to ground in the wi Ity driver's power seat adjustm switch upon or high resistance in the v Ity driver's power seat adjustm switch upen or high resistance in the v Ity driver's power seat adjustm switch 3pen or high resistance in the w ity driver's power seat adju stm switch 3pen or high resistance in the w Ity driver's power seat adju stm switch Dpen or high resistance in the v Ity driver's power seat adjustrrr

switch • Art open or high resistance in the v • faulty driver's power seat adjustrrr switch • An open or high resistance in the wire • Faulty driver’s p o wer seat adjustment switch • An open or high resistance in the v\

Power Mirror Circuit Input Test NOTE: Before troubleshooting the DPMS, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system first using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154). MICU 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Remove the left side kick panel (see page 20-78). 3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector P (30P). UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR P (30P) WHT

PNK

PUR

W ire side of fe m a l e term inals

4, inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. • If the terminals are bent loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. • If the terminals look OK, go to. step 5.

Power Mirror Circuit Input Test (cont'd) 5. Reconnect the connector to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and do the following input tests: • If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system, • If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 8, Test; Desired result

Cavity

Wire

Test condition

P3

WHT

Power mirror switch in UP

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be less than 0.2 ¥.

Power mirror switch released Power mirror switch in DOWN

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be at least 5 ¥. Measure the voltage to ground: There should be less than 0,2 ¥.

Power mirror switch released Power mirror switch in LEFT

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be at least 5 ¥. Measure the voltage to ground: There should be less than 0,2 ¥.

Power mirror switch released Power mirror switch in RIGHT

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be at least 5 ¥. Measure the voltage to ground: There should be less than 0.2 ¥.

Power mirror switch released Power mirror switch in L position

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be at least 5 ¥. Measure the voltage to ground: There should be less than 0.2 ¥,

Power mirror switch released Power mirror switch in R position

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be at least 5 ¥. Measure the voltage to ground: There should be less than 0.2 ¥.

Power mirror switch released

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be at least 5 ¥.

P10

P25

P26

P11

P22

PNK

GRN

BLU

PUR

GRY

Possible cause if desired result is not obtainei • Poor ground (G501) or an open in the ground wire • Faulty power mirror switch • An open or high resistance in j win • Faulty power mirror switch • A short to ground in the wire • Poor ground (G501) or an open in the ground wire • Faulty power mirror switch • An open or high resistance in the win LiIty power mirror swit ihort to ground in th e 1 or ground (G501) or an op< in the ground wire • Faulty power mirror switch • An open or high resistance in i win jlty power mirror swit >hort to ground in th e 1 or ground (G501) or an opt in the ground wire • Faulty power mirror switch • An open or high resistance in j win jlty power mirror swit .hort to ground in the ’ or ground (G501) or an open in the ground wire :aulty power mirror switch • An open or high resistance in the wire • Faulty power mirror switch • A short to ground in the wire • Poor ground (G501) or an open in the ground wire • Faulty power mirror switch • An open or high resistance in the wire • Faulty power mirror switch • A short to ground in the wire

Driver's MPCS Unit 6, Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-3). 7. Disconnect driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P). DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT CONNECTOR A (40PJ BLK

WHT

YEL

GRY

RED

W 1

2 21

4

3 22

23

5 24

7

6 25

26

8 27

9 28

11

10 29

30

/

/

/

31

32

33

15 34

35

18

17

/

/

20

7 19 38

39

/

\ PNK W ire side of female term inals

8. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. • If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system, • If the terminals look OK, go to step 9. 3. With the connector still disconnected, do the following input tests: • If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 10.

Cavity

Wire

Test condition

A5*

BLK

In all ignition switch positions

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be less than 0.2 ¥.

A7*

WHT

Under all conditions

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be battery voltage.

A8

GRY

Under all conditions

A10 A38

YEL PNK

Under all conditions

A17 A38

RED PNK

Under all conditions

Check for continuity between A8 terminal and front passenger's MPCS unit connector A (28P) terminal No. 4; There should be continuity. Connect A7 and A16 terminals, and A5 and A38 terminals: The left power mirror moves DOWN, Connect A7 and A17 terminals, and A5 and A38 terminals: The left power mirror swings RIGHT.

Test: Desired result

Possible cause if desired result is not obtained • Poor ground (G801) or an open in the ground wire • An open or high resistance in the wire • Blown No. 4 (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box • Blown No, 7 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box • Faulty main under-hood fuse box • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box • An open or high resistance in the wire jlty under-dash fuse/relay box • An open or high resistance in the wire

• Faulty left power mirror actuator • An open or high resistance in the wire • Faulty left power mirror actuator • An open or high resistance in the wii

*: Reconnect the connector to the driver's MPCS unit

(cont'd)

Power Mirror Circuit Input Test (cont'd) Front Passenger’s MPCS Unit 10. Remove the front passenger’s door panel (see page 20-9). 11, Disconnect front passenger's MPCS unit connector A (28P). FRONT PASSENGERS M P C S UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P) WHT

BLK

GRY

2 15

LT BLU r

1 ...

1

LT GRN

4

3 16

17

/

5

7

6 19

9

/ 20

/

22

/

11

10 24

18

/ 25

28

/

14 28

TBLU W ire side of female te rm in a l s

12. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact, • If the terminals are bent loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system, • If the terminals look OK, go to step 13. 13, With the connector still disconnected, do the following input tests: • If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system, • If all the input tests prove OK#go to step 14. Cavity

Wire

Test condition

Test: Desired result

AT

BLK

In all ignition switch positions

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be less than 0,2 ¥.

A2*

WHT

Under all conditions

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be battery voltage.

A4

GRY

Under all conditions

A10 A25

LTGRN BLU

Under all conditions

A11 A25

LT BLU BLU

Under all conditions

Check for continuity between A4 terminal and driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 8: There should be continuity. Connect A2 and A10 terminals, and A7 and A25 terminals: The right power mirror moves UP. Connect A2 and A11 terminals, and A7 and A25 terminals: The left power mirror swings RIGHT,

Possible cause if desired result is not obtained • Poor ground (G508) or an open in the ground wire • An open or high resistance in the wire • Blown No. 4 (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box • Blown No, 7 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box • Faulty main under-hood fuse box • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box • An open or high resistance in the 'e jlty under-dash fuse/relay box • An open or high resistance in the wire • Faulty right power mirror actuator • An open or high resistance in the wire jlty right power mirror actuator • An open or high resistance in the wii

*: Reconnect the connector to the front passenger's MPCS unit. 14. If multiple failures are found on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the M ICU). If input failures are related to a particular control unit, replace the control unit.

Power Tilt/Telescopic Steering Control Unit Input Test NOTE: Before troubleshooting the DPMS, troubleshoot the m ultiplex integrated co n tro l system firs t using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test M ode A {see page 22-154), 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK ( 0 ). 2. Remove the steering colum n cover fsee page 20-128). 3. Disconnect 16P connector (A) and 8P connector (B) from the pow er tilt/telescopic steering control unit (C).

CONNECTOR B (8P)

W ire side of female term inals

CONNECTOR A (16P)

YEL

/ LT BLU

PUR

BLU

\

PUR \

YEL

GRN GF

BRN

4, I nspect the connector and socket te rm in a l s to be sure they are all m aking good contact. • If the term inals are bent, l oose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. • If the term inals l ook OK, go to step 5.

Power Tilt/Telescopic Steering Control Unit Input Test (cont'd) 5. Reconnect the connectors to the pow er tilt/telescopic steering control u n it and do the fo llo w in g input tests: • If any test indicates a problem , find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit m ust be faulty; replace it. Test: Desired result

C avity

W ire

Test co n d ition

A8 81

BLK

I n a l l ignition switch positions

Measure the voltage to ground: There should be l ess than 0.2 V.

A1

WHT

Under all conditions

Measure the voltage to ground: There shou l d be battery v o l tage.

• • • • • •

A9

YEL

Ignition switch ON (ID

Measure the v o l tage to ground; There sh o u l d be battery v o l tage. •

B3

WHT

Under a l l conditions

M easure the v o l tage to ground: There sh o u l d be battery voltage. • • •

B5

GRN

Under a l l conditions

Measure the v o l tage to ground: There sh o u l d be battery voltage. •

AS

GRN

A15 A10

LT BLU

A14 A14 ,

TELESCOP I C switch in RETRACT

BRN PUR PUR

TELESCOPIC switch in RETRACT TELESCOPI C switch in EXTEND

BRN

A15 A6

GRN

A10 A7

LT BLU GRN

A15 A8

BRN GRN

A10 A7

LT BLU GRN

A10 A6

LT BLU GRN

A1E

BRN

TELESCOPIC switch in EXTEND TILT switch in UP position TILT switch in UP position T I LT switch in DOWN position TILT switch in DOWN position

Measure the voltage between the term inals: There should be less than 0.2 V, Measure the v o l tage between the te rm in a l s: There shou l d be less than 0,2 V, Measure the v o l tage between the term inals: There should be l ess than 0.2 V. Measure the voltage between the term inals: There should be l ess than 0.2 V. Measure the v o l tage between the te rm in a l s: There should be l ess than 0.2 V. Measure the v o l tage between the te rm in a l s: There should be less than 0.2 V. Measure the v o l tage between the te rm in a l s: There sh o u l d be less than 0,2 V. Measure the v o l tage between the te rm in a l s: There should be l ess than 0.2 V

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • •

Possible cause if desired result is n o t obtained Poor ground (G503, G506) or an open in the ground w ire An open or high resistance in the w ire Blown No. 4 (40 A) fuse in the ms under-hood fuse box Blown No. 7 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box Faulty main under-hood fuse box Faulty under-dash fuse/re l ay box open or high resistance in the w ire wn No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in under-dash fuse/relay box Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box open or high resistance in the w ire wn No. 3 (P/W) (50 A ) fuse in t main under-hood fuse box Blown No. 28 (20 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/re l ay box Faulty main under-hood fuse box Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box open or high resistance in the w ire . wn No. 2 (OP2) (40 A) fuse in 1 main under-hood fuse box Blown No. 15 (20 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/re l ay box Faulty main under-hood fuse box Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box An open or high resistance in the w ire Faulty pow er tilt/telescopic steering switch An open or high resistance in the w ire Fau l ty power tilt/telescopic steering switch An open or high resistance in the w ire Faulty power t i l t/te l escopic steering switch An open or high resistance in the w ire Faulty pow er tilt/telescopic steering switch An open or high resistance in the w ire Faulty power tilt/telescopic steering switch An open or high resistance in the w ire Faulty power tilt/te l escopic steering switch An open or high resistance in the w ire Faulty power tilt/telescopic steering switch An open or high resistance in the w ire Faulty power tilt/telescopic steering switch An open or high resistance in the w ire

Driving Position Memory Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-9). 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the driving position memory switch (B).

3. Remove the two screws, then remove the switch from the door panel. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. ^

Terminal

Position

1

8

2

4

5

7

6

OFF MEMO

BUTTON ON

o

-

- o

OFF POSITION 1 BUTTON ON

o

OFF POSITION 2 BUTTON ON

o

INDICATOR 1

o

-

INDICATOR 2

o

- —@ —

- o

6. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.

- o

- - o

- - o

Power Seat Adjustment Switch Test/Replacement NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or servicing, 1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs (A) and recline cover from the driver's power seat (see page 20-142), then remove the two screws and the power seat adjustment switch (B).

1

2

3

8

8

9

/

5 11

12

2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the power seat adjustment switch. 3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Ny

Term inal

1 Position SLIDE SWITCH

RECLINE SWITCH FRONT

2

3

5

e

8

7

J

FORWARD

o—

BACKWARD

REAR

FORWARD BACKWARD

r\

r%

UP

vJ

DOWN UP

BOWM

—o

r\ \J

X J

o——o O - —o

U P -D O W N

SWITCH

12

o — - o

U P -D O W N

SWITCH

11

\

o —

—o

5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.

Driver's Power Seat Motor Test Slide motor, Front up-down motor, Rear up-down motor NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or servicing. 1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-139).

3. Test each motor by connecting power and ground according to the table. When the motor stops running, disconnect battery power immediately. >

minai 1

P o s itio n S LID E MOTOR

2. Disconnect the 2P connector from each power seat motor. NOTE: A ll connectors are terminal side of male terminals. S L ID E M O T O R

0

FO RW ARD BACKW ARD

©

Terminal 1

0

2

P o s itio n FRONT

R EA R U P -D O W N M O T O R

2

"

UP

©

©

DOWN

e

©

UP-DOWN MOTOR

Terminal 1

2

P o s itio n R EAR

UP

©

©

DOW N

©

©

UP-DOWN M OTOR

4. If the front up-down motor or rear up-down motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace the faulty motor (see page 20-145). If the slide motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace the left seat track/slide motor (see page 20-145), NOTE: The slide motor is not available separately because it is assembled into the left seat track, refer to the seat linkage disassembly/reassembly (see page 20-145). F R O N T U P -D O W N M O T O R

(cont'd)

Driver's Power Seat Motor Test (cont'd) Recline motor NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or servicing.

3, Test the motor by connecting power and ground according to the table. When the motor stops running, disconnect battery power immediately,

\

T e rm in a l

\

P o s itio n

1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-139). 2. Disconnect the driver's seat wire harness 8P [14p] connector from the driver's seat subharness. [ ]: With seat ventilation

R E C L IN E M OTOR

4 [8]

FORWARD

©

BACKWARD

©

5 [9]

©

[ ]: W ith s e a t v e n tila tio n

4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, check for an open in the wire between the 8P [14P] connector and recline motor. If the harness is OK, replace the recline motor (see page 20-151). [ ]: With seat ventilation

BLU 1

2

4

5

.. f = 3 . . . 3 8 6 9

W ith o u t s e a t ventilation

YEL' LT GRN

0

BRN

ORN

PUR

GRN

BRN

JL

BLU

4 YEL

2

3

4

8

9

12 13

/ LTG R N

109

5

8

2^

T ORN

ORN W ith s e a t v e n tila tio n

BLK BRN

Power Tilt/Telescopic Steering Switch Test/Replacement

Power Tilt/Telescopic Steering Motor Test

1. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-128).

1. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-128).

2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the power tilt/telescopic steering switch (B).

2. Disconnect the 6P connector and 8P connector from the power tilt/telescopic steering motors.

1 8

3

/ ?

/ / / 1 ,09 / / TELESCOPIC MOTOR 8P CONNECTOR

[7 ~

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.

3

TILT MOTOR 8P CONNECTOR

.f = 3 . . 4 | 5 8

T erm ina l side of male term inals

9 9

2 5

.. 8

|

T ] ?

8

Term inal side of m a l e term inals

3. Check each motor by connecting power and ground according to the table. When the motor stops running, disconnect battery power immediately. TILT MOTOR:

Terminal

4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.

2

3

TILT UP

©

©

TILT DOWN

©

©

Position

TELESCOPIC MOTOR: Term inal 1

2

TELESCOPIC IN

©

©

TELESCOPIC OUT

©

©

Position

4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly; replace the steering column assembly (see page 17-9).

-

Component Location Index

Input Test, page 22-828

Replacement, page 22-633

/ /

'

INSIDE TAILGATE SWITCH Test/Replacement, page 22-631

TAILGATE LATCH ASSEMBLY (CLOSER UNIT) (Including closer m o to r and la tch /ra tch e t switch) Latch/Ratchet Switch Test, page 22-632 Closer M otor T e s t page 22-832

TAILGATE RIGHT PINCH SENSOR Replacement, page 22-833

System Description The power tailgate can be opened and closed automatically by operating the driver's door power tailgate switch (to open), inside tailgate switch (to close) or the keyless transmitter. The power tailgate has two safety functions for safeguarding passengers: obstruction detection, and fall-down detection.

Basic Operation OPEN: The power tailgate can be opened by operating the driver's door power tailgate switch, or the keyless transmitter under the following conditions; • Tailgate is fully closed (full-latched position is detected.). • Driver's door o r Passenger's door lock knob switch is in UNLOCKED. • The remote unlock button is pressed twice, and then the tailgate button is pressed and held for 2 seconds (unless customized setting is set to unlock all doors). • Shift lever is in Park position. • Vehicle speed is less than 1.2 mph (2 km/h). • Closer unit detects the tailgate neutral position. • Battery voltage (VBU) is more than 11V. • System is not in fail-safe mode, CLOSE: The power tailgate can be closed by operating the driver’s door power tailgate switch, inside tailgate switch, or the keyless transmitter under the following conditions: • T a ilg a te is f u lly o p e n .

• • • •

Pinch sensor detects no obstruction, Closer unit detects the tailgate neutral position. Battery voltage (VBU) is more than 11V, System is not in fail-safe mode.

O bstruction Detection fu n ctio n If any obstruction is detected while the tailgate is automatically opening or closing, the tailgate will stop and reverse operation will be activated. An obstruction is detected by the tailgate pinch sensor and the pulser in the drive unit If the obstruction is detected when the shift lever is in any position other than P, or the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h), the tailgate stops moving immediately.

Fall-down Detection Function This function prevents the tailgate from suddenly falling down because of an accumulation of snow, or other causes. If the pulser in the drive unit detects abnormal pulses, the tailgate starts to open. If this operation is activated twice, the tailgate w ill close automatically. If the obstruction detection function detects any obstruction several times during this fall-down detection function, the tailgate stops moving. NOTE: If the tailgate falls repeatedly, replace the tailgate support strut (see page 20-209). A: Auto open action completed B: Tailgate falling is detected C: Clutch reconnect when falling is detected D: Auto open action (power tailgate motor reverse action) E: Close function activated from fully open position

Power Tailgate Buzzer Beep Pattern Condition When the tailgate starts to open automatically When the tailgate starts to close automatically When the reverse operation is started after the tailgate has detected any obstruction When reverse operation is started by switch operation When vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h) while the tailgate is opening automatical!1 When the shift lever is shifted to any position other than P while the tailgate is closing automatically When the fail-safe is detected (other than the neutral switch, the release switch, the ratchet switch, the full latch switch, or the half latch switch malfunction fail-safe) while the tailgate is operating automatically When the operating time is over When vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h) while the tailgate is closing automatically When pinch sensor on is detected while the tailgate is closing automatically When the pinch sensor detects an obstruction while the tailgate is closing automatically

Beep Pattern Beeps 1 time Beeps 1 time Beeps 3 times Beeps 3 times Beeps 3 times Beeps 3 times Beeps 3 times

Beeps 3 times Beeps intermittently until the condition is corrected Beeps 3 times Beeps 3 times

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Condition When the tailgate is not fully-latched, and the following condition is met: The shift lever is any position other than P, and the brake pedal position switch and parking brake switch is OFF, and the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h) When the tailgate fall-down detection function is activated

Beep Pattern Beeps intermittently until the condition is corrected

Beeps continuously

Resetting the Power Tailgate Control Unit if the battery terminal is disconnected, or the No. 7 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box is removed while the power tailgate is operating, the power tailgate w ill not be able to open or close automatically until it is reset. To reset the system, fully close the tailgate manually. Once the battery terminals are reconnected, or the No. 7 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box is replaced, the power tailgate system w ill automatically reset Make sure the power tailgate operates properly.

Circuit Diagram

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BO X

IGNITION SWITCH

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube, typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic.

— — — — — : B-CAN line _________; Shielding

No. 8 (7.5 A) FUSE {REAR

FUSE/RELAYBOX)

G702 G701 G701

DTC Troubleshooting DTC B1352: Power Tailgate Control Unit Internal Error (EEPROM error)

DTC B13SS; Power Tailgate Control Unit Lost Communication with MICU (MICU Message)

NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154).

NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154).

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector.

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

3. Remove the No. 7 (10 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 4. Wait for at least 1 minute, then reinstall the No. 7 (10 A) fuse to the under-dash fuse/relay box. 5. Close the tailgate manually (not with the power tailgate switch), 8, Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is DTC B1352 indicated? YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit.B NO-lntermittent failure, the power tailgate control unit is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the M lC U .il

3. Wait for at least 8 seconds. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is DTC B1355 indicated? YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the power tailgate control unit is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the MICU.H 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Are DTCs B1055f B1157, B1255, B1965, B2155, and/or B1806 also indicated? YES-Do the M ICU input test (see page 2 2 -1 7 5 ).■ NO-Do the power tailgate control unit input test (see page 22-628).H

DTC B1356: Power Tailgate Control Unit Lost Communication with Driver's MPCS Unit (DRLOCKSW Message)

DTC B1357: Power Tailgate Control Unit Lost Communication w ith Gauge Control Module (VSP/NE Message)

DTC B1358; Power Tailgate Control Unit Lost. Communication w ith Driver’s MPCS Unit (ASLOCKSW Message)

DTCB1359: Power Tailgate Control Unit Lost Communication w ith Gauge Control Module (A/T Massage)

NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154).

NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-154).

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS,

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (ii).

3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.

3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

is DTC B1356 and/or B1358 indicated?

is DTC B1357 and/or B1359 indicated?

Y E S -G o to step 5.

YES-Go to step 5.

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the driver's MPCS unit.B

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the gauge control

5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Are DTCs B1013, B1015, B1065, B1182f and B1905

also indicated?

m o d u le .!

5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Are DTCs B W 1 I B1060, B1Q61, B1205, B1805, B1808f B1906, Of 956, B2180t and/or U0155 also indicated?

2 2 -3 5 2 ).■

YES-Do the gauge control module input test (see page 2 2 -4 1 6 ).!

NO-Do the power tailgate control unit input test (see page 2 2 -8 2 8 ).■

NO-Do the power tailgate control unit input test (see page 22^028).»

Y E S -D o the driver's MPCS unit input test (see page

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B1375: Driver's Door Power Tailgate Switch Circuit Malfunction

10. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 5 and body ground.

NOTE: If the power tailgate motor does not operate, do the motor test first

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL

UNIT CONNECTOR B(20P)

1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

n

3. Operate the driver's door power tailgate switch for at least 2 seconds.

1

/

S C Q M (WHT) t, m ?

n 2

3

/

5

1/ /

8

p 9

10

12 13 14 15 18 17 18 19 20

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is DTC B1375 indicated? W ire side of female term inals

YES-Go to step 5. N O -lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the driver's door power tailgate switch,■ 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Disconnect the 7P connector from the driver's door power tailgate switch. 7. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector C (14P), 8. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) terminal No. 5 and body ground. POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P)

DRSW | i m m ] i ___CL__ __S 1 2 3 4 5 8

3 r~“

10

11

/

/ 13 14 U __Jij_ _ i

W ire side of female term inals

is there continuity? YES-Repair a short in the wire.B NO-Go to step 9. 9. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B (20P).

is there continuity? YES-Repair a short in the wire.B NO-Go to step 11. 11. Do the driver's door power tailgate switch test (see page 22-831). is the switch OK? YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit.B NO-Replace the driver's door power tailgate swi tch .il

DTC B1376; Tailgate Outer Handle Switch Circuit Malfunction

11. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 5 and body ground.

NOTE: If the power tailgate motor does not operate, do the motor test first

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS, and wait for 2 seconds.

n 1

3. Pull the tailgate outer handle for at least 2 seconds.

/

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

£ICO!M W H T ) t, xt__ _____ n___ □ __ _

n 2

3

/

5

/ /

8

9

10

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 L“ “ t r — — t 3----

is D IG B1376 indicated? YES-Go to step 5. W ire side o f female te rm in a l s

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the tailgate outer handle s w i t c i .l 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Open the power tailgate with the keyless transmitter. 7. Disconnect the 3P connector from the tailgate outer handle switch. 8. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector C (14P). 9. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) terminal No. 3 and body ground. POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P) t,

n 1

n

fj

2

3

4

8 3 “ ““ i

10

11 /

5

7

/

13 14 r*—"-

jOh s w I yel )" " ^

(Q )

W ire side of female te rm in a l s

is there continuity? YES-Repair a short in the wire.Hl NO-Go to step 10. 10. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B (20P).

is there continuity? YES-Repair a short in the wire.H NO-Go to step 12. 12. Do the tailgate outer handle switch test (see page 22-239). is the switch OK? YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit.B NO-Replace the tailgate outer handle switch.■

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B1377: Inside Tailgate Switch Circuit Malfunction

11. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 5 and body ground.

1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P!

2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 3. Open the tailgate with the keyless transmitter. 4. Push the inside tailgate switch for at least 2 seconds.

€ SCO! ___ n ___o ______ ____ 1

2

8

12

13

____ _____... _____

5 /

6. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

M (WHT)

s

8 /

14

15

9

10

19

20

/

10

17

/

18

T—

is DTC B1377 indicated? YES-Go to step 6. N O -lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time, Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the inside tailgate switch. ■ 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Disconnect the 5P connector from the inside tailgate switch. 8. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector C (14P), 9. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) terminal No. 8 and body ground. POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P) c

ri..._ 1

2

3

4

8 i__

y

10

11

b

/

13

14

1—

G T S W (BLU!

u

W i re side o f female term inals

is there continuity? YES-Repair a short in the wire.B NO-Go to step 10, 10. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B (20P).

Wire side of female term inals

Is there continuity? YES-Repair a short in the wire.B NO-Go to step 12, 12. Do the inside tailgate switch test (see page 22-631). Is the switch OK? YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit.B NO-Replace the inside tailgate switch.■

DTC B1378: Power Tailgate Right Pinch Sensor Circuit Malfunction 1. Open the tailgate manually or with the keyless transmitter.

12. Check for continuity'between power tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 13 and power tailgate right pinch sensor 2P connector terminal No. 2. POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)

2. Close the tailgate with the keyless transmitter or driver's door power tailgate switch, 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

n 1

n 2

S 3

/

5

e!_____ o__ a _ _

/ /

8

9

10

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 —jj — ir— ISE R (WHT) W ire side of female te rm in a l s

/

4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is DTC B1378 indicated?

ISE R (WHT)

YES-Go to step 6. N O -lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the power tailgate right pinch sensor.B 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Disconnect the 2P connector from the power tailgate right pinch sensor, 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Measure the voltage between harness side of power tailgate right pinch sensor 2P connector terminals No. 2 ( + ) and No. 1 ( - ) .

POWER TAILGATE RIGHT PiNCH SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

TSrST Term ina l side of male term inals

is there continuity? YES-Go to step 13. NO-Repair an open in the wire.I 13. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 17 and power tailgate right pinch sensor 2P connector terminal No. 1.

POWER TAILGATE RIGHT PINCH SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)

/ SEG2

(PUR)

T T T

ISE R (WHT)

Term inal side of m a l e te rm in a l s

Is there battery voltage?

p

r1

r1 1

2

3 ‘/

5

l / /

___a_ 8 9 10

12 13 14 15 18 17 18 19 20

W ire side of female term inals

j SEG2 (PUR)

SEG2 (PUR) POWER TAILGATE RIGHT PINCH SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

' Term ina l side of m a l e term inals

YES-Replace the power tailgate right pinch sensor.l NO-Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B (20P).

is there continuity? YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit.l NO-Repair an open in the w ire.B

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B1379: Power Tailgate Left Pinch Sensor Circuit Malfunction

12. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 16 and power tailgate left pinch sensor 2P connectorterminal No. 2.

1. Open the tailgate manually or with the keyless transmitter.

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)

2. Close the tailgate with the keyless transmitter or driver's door power tailgate switch.

..._r3__ □ ___ 1 2 3

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). /

4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

m

?

/

5

/

8

/

9

r1... 10

12 13 14 15 18 17 18 19 20 — j 3---TSEL fGRY)

L“ “ i j “ “

W ire side of female term inals

5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. TSEL (GRY)

is DTC B1379 indicated?

POWER TAILGATE LEFT PINCH SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 6. T T “ar

N O -lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the power tailgate left pinch sensor.B 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 7. Disconnect the 2P connector from the power tailgate left pinch sensor, 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 3. Measure the voltage between harness side of power tailgate left pinch sensor 2P connector terminals No. 2 ( + ) and No. 1 ( —).

Term inal side of male term inals

is there continuity? YES-Go to step 13. NO-Repair an open in the wire.B 13. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 17 and power tailgate left pinch sensor 2P connector terminal No. 1. POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)

POWER TAILGATE LEFT PINCH SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR __Ea__n__ 1 2 3

(PUR)

/

p

____ □ ___ c5_

/ /

8

9

.

10

12 13 14 15 18 1? 18 19 20 L _ jL _ J L— I a— Wiresideof femaleterminals SEG2 (PUR)

/

£Z2 1

s 5

o Z fGRY!

Term ina l side of male te rm in a l s

SEG2 (PUR) POWER TAILGATE LEFT PINCH SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

SZ2.

Terminal sideof maleterminals

is there battery voltage? YES-Replace the power tailgate left pinch sensor.B NO-Go to step 10, 10, Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B (20P),

Is there continuity? YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit.l NO-Repair an open in the wire.B

10. Check for continuity between power tailgate closer unit connector B (6P) terminal No. 5 and body ground.

DTC B1380: Power Tailgate Closer Unit Neutral Switch Circuit Malfunction 1. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle.

POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT CONNECTOR B

(6P)

2. Close the tailgate manually. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

I 1

I 2

.4

8

5

8 u

LT

4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

N IL

6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is DTC B1380 indicated?

YES-Go to step 8.

Term inal side of male term inals

N O -lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the power tailgate closer u n it ll 6. Open the tailgate with the power tailgate outer handle. 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Disconnect power tailgate closer unit connector B

(6P). 9. Check for continuity between power tailgate closer unit connector B (6P) terminals No. 1 and No. 5.

is there continuity? YES-Replace the power tailgate closer unit.B NO-Go to step 11. 11. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector C (14P). 12. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) terminal No. 3 and body ground. POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P)

POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT CONNECTOR

B (8P)

4JL f W H T J

r

r*

___n ______

I

I 1 Lr

2

3

4

5

6 J

1

2

3

4

8

9

10

11

b---

n

5 /

/

13 14 j— ..... t

W ire .side of female term inals Term inal side of m a l e te rm in a l s

is there continuity?

is there continuity?

YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B

YES-Faulty neutral switch, replace the power tailgate closer unit.B

NO-Go to step 13.

NO-Go to step 10.

13. Turn the tailgate lock latch to the fully-closed position using a screwdriver. 14. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B (20P).

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 15. Connect battery power to the power tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 1 and ground the terminal No. 2 momentarily. (The motor should run in the release direction.)

19. Check for continuity between power tailgate closer unit connector B (6P) terminals No. 1 and No. 5. POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT CONNECTOR

B (6P)

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P) I CLM + (p u r ;» jn_ n_________ S 1 2 3 5

/

/

^ CLM -

1

n

?

/ /

8

n 9

10

3

4

5 ^ u --------Li-------- Ll—

8 u

12 13 14 15 18 17 18 19 20 a

(YEL)

0 ©

Term ina l side of male term inals W ire side o f female term inals

18. Reconnect the 6P connector to the power tailgate closer unit 17. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) terminals No. Sand No. 11. POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P) f CUT (WHT)

?

*1

1

2

3

4

9

10

11

n 5

/

/

7

13 14

SEG3 (GRN)

W ire side of female term inals

Is there continuity? YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit.B NO-Go to step 18. 18. Disconnect power tailgate closer unit connector B

(6P ).

I 2

is there continuity? YES-Repair an open in the wire between the power tailgate closer unit and power tailgate control unit.B NO-Replace the power tailgate closer unit.B

DTC B1381: Power Tailgate Closer Unit Release Switch Circuit Malfunction 1. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle switch.

11. Check for continuity between power tailgate closer unit connector B (6P) terminal No. 6 and body ground. POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT CONNECTOR B f8P)

2. Close the tailgate manually. I

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (ii).

1

I 4

6 u u ------------ iJ-------- U-------RS

4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

2

3

5

5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is DTC B1381 indicated? Term inal side of m a l e term inals

YES-Go to step 8. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the tailgate closer unit.B 6. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle.' 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Turn the tailgate lock latch to the fully-closed position using a screwdriver. 9. Disconnect power tailgate closer unit connector B

Is there continuity? YES-Replace the power tailgate closer unit.B NO-Go to step 12. 12. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector C

(14P). 13. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) terminal No. 4 and body ground.

(6P). 10. Check for continuity between power tailgate closer unit connector B (6P) terminals No. 1 and No. 6. POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT CONNECTOR B (6P)

I 1 Lr

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P)

FIS {RED) fj n ___n_____ S 1 2 8 4 5 / 8 9 10 11 13 14

I 2

3

4

5

6 tJ

W ire side o f female term inals

is there continuity? Term inal side of m a l e term inals

YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire.B NO-Go to step 14.

is there continuity? YES-Faulty release switch, replace the power tailgate closer unit.B

14. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B (20P).

NO-Go to step 11.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 15. Connect battery power to the power tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 1 and ground terminal No. 2 momentarily. (The motor should run in the release direction.)

19. Check for continuity between power tailgate closer unit connector B (6P) terminals No. 1 and No. 8, POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT CONNECTOR i

(6P)

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P) I C L M + (PUR,) ____ n __________ c?____ __ n __ _n____ 1 2 3 5 8 9 10 / / 12 13 14 15 18 17 18 19 20 / C L M -

u

I 2

3

4

5

8

--------u-------- u--------

SEG3

u RS

(YEL)

0 ©

Term inal side of male term inals W ire side o f female term inals

18. R e c o n n e c t th e 6P c o n n e c to r to th e p o w e r ta ilg a te c lo s e r u n it.

17, Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) terminals No. 4 and No. 11, POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P)

RS fRED) c, __ 1 2 3 4 8

9

10

11

5 / /

7 13 14

SEG3 (GRN)

W ire side of fem a l e te rm in a l s

is there continuity? YES-Replace the power tailgate control u n it.! NO-Go to step 18. 18. Disconnect power tailgate closer unit connector B

(6P).

1

is there continuity? YES-Repair an open in the wire between the power tailgate closer unit and power tailgate control unit.B NO-Replace the power tailgate closer unit.B

DTC B1382: Power Tailgate Closer Unit Full Latch Switch Circuit Malfunction 1. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle.

11. Check for continuity between power tailgate closer unit connector B (6P) terminal No. 2 and body ground. POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT CONNECTOR

B (6P)

2. Close the tailgate manually. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (ll).

I 1

I 2

3

5

8 u

JT

4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

4

FULL

5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is DTC B1382 indicated?

YES-Go to step 6. Term ina l side o f m a l e term inals

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the power tailgate . closer unit.B

is there continuity? YES-Replace the power tailgate closer u n it ll

NO-Go to step 12.

6. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle.

12. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector C

7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 8. Turn the tailgate lock latch to the fully-closed position using a screwdriver.

(14P).

9. Disconnect power tailgate closer unit connector B

(6P). 10, Check for continuity between power tailgate closer unit connector B (6P) terminals No, 1 and No. 2, POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT CONNECTOR B

I

n 1

(6P)

2

u

3

4

1j — —

3

5

6 LJ

FULL YOY

Terminal side of male term inals

is there continuity? YES-Faulty full latch switch, replace the power tailgate closer unit.B NO-Go to step 11.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 13. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) terminal No, 2 and body ground,

17. Disconnect power tailgate closer unit connector B

(6P). 18. Check for continuity between power tailgate closer unit connector B (SP) terminals No. 1 and No. 2.

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR Cf14P) POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT CONNECTOR FULIL (PIJRJ t. ?

m 2 8

8

3 10

4 11

5

/

B (6P)

n

/

I

7 1

13 14

2

3

4

5

8 u

SEG3

FULL

W ire side of female term inals Term inal side of male term inals

Is them, continuity? YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the power tailgate control unit and the rear fuse/relay box ~or between the rear fuse/relay box and the power tailgate closer unit. If the wire harness are OK, replace the rear fuse/relay box.B NO-Go to step 14. 14. Turn the tailgate emergency lever to release the tailgate lock latch from the fully-locked position to release position. 15. Reconnect the 6P connector to the power tailgate closer unit. 16. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) terminals No. 2 and No. 11. POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P)

ri. J. 1 2 8

FULL (PUR} c, 3

4

9 10 11 3----

5

/

/ 13 14

SEG3 (GRNJ

Wire side of female term inals

is there continuity? YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit.l NO-Go to step 17.

is there continuity? YES-Repair an open in the wire between the power tailgate closer unit and power tailgate control unit.B NO-Replace the power tailgate closer unit.B

10. Check for continuity between power tailgate closer unit connector B (6P) terminal No. 4 and body ground.

DTC B1383: Power Tailgate Closer Unit Ratchet Switch Circuit Malfunction 1. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle.

POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT CONNECTOR

B (6P)

2. Close the tailgate manually. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

I 1

I 2

3

4

5'

8

J

4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

Ll

RACI

5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is DTC B1383 indicated? YES-G o to step 6.

Term inal side o f male term inals

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the power tailgate closer u n it ll 6. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle. 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Disconnect power tailgate closer unit connector B

(6P). 9. Check for continuity between power tailgate closer unit connector B (BP) terminals No. 1 and No. 4. POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT CONNECTOR

! 1

B (6P)

3

4

■5

YES-Replace the power tailgate closer unit.B NO-Go to step 11. 11. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector C (14P). 12. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) terminal No. 10 and body ground. POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P) €j ? ......ri.... 1 2 3 4 5

! 2

■ Is there continuity?

6 u

8

9

10

11 /

n / 13 14

RACT (ORN) RACT

SEG3

— (§ )— W ire side o f fem ale term inals Term inal side of male term inals

Is there continuity? YES-Faulty ratchet switch, replace the power tailgate closer unit.B NO-Go to step 10.

is there continuity? YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire.B NO-Go to step 13. 13. Turn the tailgate lock latch to the fully-locked position using a screwdriver. 14. Reconnect the 6P connector to the power tailgate closer unit.

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 15. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) terminals No. 10 and No. 11.

1. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle.

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P)

1

ri ... 2

3

4

8

9

10

11

5

2. Close the tailgate manually. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II).

/ 13 14 ----

4. Clear tl.~

SEG3 (GRN)

RACT (ORN)

DTC B1384: Power Tailgate Closer Unit Half ■ Latch Switch Circuit Malfunction

with the HDS.

5. Check for DTCs with the HDS, is DTC B1384 indicated? YES-Go to step 8.

W ire side of female term inals

is there continuity? YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit.B NO-Go to step 16,

8. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle.

18. Disconnect power tailgate closer unit connector B

(6P). 17. Check for continuity between power tailgate closer unit connector B (BP) terminals No. 1 and No. 4. POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UN I T CONNECTOR

B (6P)

7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Turn the tailgate lock latch'to the fully-closed position using a screwdriver. 9. Disconnect the' SP connector from the power tailgate closer unit. 10. Check for continuity between power tailgate closer unit 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.

I

I

1

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the tailgate closer u n 't . l

2

3

4

5

8

POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT SP CONNECTOR

y

— — tr— ”-Tj—— — RACT SEG3 I

1

2

y

Terminal side of male term inals

is there continuity? YES-Repair an open in the wire between the power tailgate closer unit and power tailgate control u n itll NO-Replace the power tailgate closer unit.B

3

5

8

u --------- Li-----------------

HALF

SE63

9 § )Term inal side of male term inals

is there continuity? YES-Faulty half latch switch, replace the power tailgate closer u n it ll NO-Go to step 11.

11. Check for continuity between power tailgate closer unit 6 P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.

18. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) terminals No. 1 and No. 11.

POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT 6P CONNECTOR '

I 1

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR.C (14P)

I 2

4

3

8 _ _ JLJ

5

u ------------ lT

HALF

(LT BLU!

1

2

3

4

8

9

10

11

HALF

5

/

/ 13 14

SEG3 (GRN)

Term inal side of male term inals

W ire side o f female term inals

is there continuity?

is there continuity?

YES-Replace the power tailgate closer unit.B

YES-Replace the power tailgate control u nit.ll

NO-Go to step 12.

NO-Go to step 17.

12. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector C

(14P). 13. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) terminal No. 1 and body ground.

17. Disconnect the 6 P connector from the power tailgate closer unit. 18. Check for continuity between power tailgate closer unit 6 P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3. POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT 6P CONNECTOR

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (14PJ n HALF (LT BLUl

S

r*

2

3

4

8 9 “ “ “ tr

10

11

1

n 5

/

/ 13 14 —j3

— —y —

HALF

SEG3

409 T erm ina l side of male te rm in a l s W ire side of female term inals

is there continuity? is there continuity? YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire.B

YES-Repair an open in the wire between the power tailgate closer unit and power tailgate control unit.B

NO-Go to step 14.

NO-Replace the power tailgate closer unit.B

14, Turn the emergency lever of the tailgate and release the tailgate lock latch from the fully-locked position to release position. 15, Reconnect the 6 P connector to the power tailgate closer unit

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B138S: Power Tailgate Sensor Pulse A Circuit M alfunction NOTE: If the motor does not operate, do the power tailgate motor test (see page 22-630).

8. Measure the voltage between power tailgate control unit connector i (20P) terminals No. 14 and No. 18 while the tailgate is opening and closing with the keyless transmitter or inside tailgate switch. POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)

1. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle. 2. Close the tailgate automatically with the keyless transmitter or inside tailgate switch. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (11).

1

2

3

12

13

9 14

15

16

S 17

18

19

20

SEG1 (LT GRN)

(ORN)

5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

10

tr

~*f!r SENA

4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

9

Is DTC B1386 indicated? W ire side o f fem ale term inals

YES-Go to step 8. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the drive unit.B

Does it alternate between about 0 ¥ and 5 ¥ with an analog voltmeter, oris about 2.5 ¥ indicated with a digital voltmeter?

8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit.B

7. Connect the voltmeter to power tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminals No. 14 and No. 18.

NO-Go to step 9. 9, Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B

(20P). 10, Disconnect drive unit connector B (8P). 11. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector i (20P) terminal No. 14 and body ground. m W E U TAILGATE CONTROL

UNIT CONNECTOR

B (20P) ri

___ e l .__c3__

1

/

2

3

5

/

12 13 14 15 18

8

ri

9

10

18 19 20

1?

L “ “ tr —

SENA (ORN)

W ire side o f fem ale term inals

Is them continuity?

YES-Repair a short* to ground in the wire J NO-Go to step 12.

12. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminals No. 14 and No. 18 and drive unit connector B (8P) terminals No. 5 and No. 8 respectively. POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P) n 1

/

n 2

S 3

/

5

DTC B1387: Power Tailgate Sensor Pulse B C irc u it M a lfu n c tio n NOTE: If the motor does not operate, do the power tailgate motor test (see page 22-630). 1. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle.

d _____ d__ n__

/ /

8

9

10

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

W ire side of female term inals

SEG1 fLTGRN)

SENA (ORN)

2. Close the tailgate automatically with the keyless transmitter or inside tailgate switch. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then' back to ON (II).

SENA {ORN) ( Q )

4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

...... r

1

u

4 Lr-

5

8

2

3

7

8

SEG1 f L I GRN)

DRIVE UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P) W ire side of female te rm i nals

is there continuity? YES-Faulty power tailgate sensor A, replace the drive unit.B NO-Repair an open in the wire.I

5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is DTC B1387 indicated? YES-Go to step 6.

.

.

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the drive u n it ll 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Connect the voltmeter to. the power tailgate control unit B connector (20P) terminals No. 15 and No. 18. 8. Measure the voltage between power tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminals No. 15 and No. 18 while the tailgate is opening and closing with the keyless transmitter or inside tailgate switch. POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)

..... ea__ n___ 1 2 3

/

c.

/

/ /

5

......ri n 8 9 10

12 13 14 15 10 17 18 19 20 SENB

'

^

SEG1

(YEL) >— - ( y ) —J (LTGRN)

W ire side o f female term inals

Does it alternate between about 0 V and 5 V with an analog voltmeter, oris about2.5 Vindicated with a digital voltmeter? YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit.B

NO-Go to step 9. 9. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B (20P). 10. Disconnect drive unit connector B (SP). (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 11. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 15 and body ground.

DTC B1388: Power Tailgate M otor Circuit M alfunction 1. Open the tailgate.

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)

1

2

3

/

5

/ /

8

9

2. Close the tailgate automatically with the keyless transmitter or inside tailgate switch. 10

12 13 14 15 18 17 18 19 20

/

SENS (YEL)

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to ON (II). 4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is DTC B1388 indicated? YES-Go to step 8.

W ire side o f fe m a l e term inals

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between the power tailgate control unit and the drive unit.B

is there continuity? YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire.B NO-Go to step 12. 12. Check for continuity between power tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminals No. 15 and No. 18 and drive unit connector B (8P) terminals No. 8 and No. 8 respectively, POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B |20P) c r"i n ri r 1

2

3

/

5

/ l/

8

9

10

W ire side of 12 13 14 15 10 17 18 19 20 fe m a l e term inals TQf SEG1 SENS (YEL) (LTGR: SENS fY E l)

X

1 4

5

8

2

3

?

8

SEG1 (LT GRN)

8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector A (5P). 8. Disconnect drive unit connector A (2P). 9. Check for continuity between body ground and power tailgate control unit connector A (5P) terminals No. 3 and No. 5 individually. P O W E R

T A I L G A T E C O N T R O L

C O N N E C T O R

A

x _

_JT

1 _ 8 P T G —

2 4

5

( W H T ) n ^ * - ^ ~ p T G +

©

U N I T

(SP)

( R E D!

©

DRIVE UNIT CONNECTOR B (SP) W ire side of female term inals

is there continuity?

W ire side of female term inals

YES-Faulty power tailgate sensor B, replace the drive unit.B

is there continuity?

NO-Repair an open in the wire.l

YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire.B NO-Go to step 10. 10. Reconnect drive unit connector A (2P).

11. Connect battery power to the power tailgate control unit connector A (5P) terminal No. 3 (or No. 5) and ground the terminal No. 5 or (No. 3).

17. Connect battery power to power tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 9 and ground the terminal No. 20. Check for clutch operation.

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (5P)'

B15(+)

WHT

r ...... ..~ B 6 F T .... .......l i W + i

BRN

r"........... b i " F )

PNK

L e ft t w e e t e r

nTIn 1 2 FRLDR SPKR+ (WHT)

R ig h t t w e e t e r

FRLDR SPKR-(GRN)

S u b w o o fe r

JU M P E R W IRE

GRN RED BLU

STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s

1

RIGHT TWEETER 2P CONNECTOR

10

_ J t = 2 3 4

= = I L 5 6 7

_ 8

11 12 13 14 15 18 17

B (18P)

9 18

In 1 2 FRR SPKR+ (RED)

FRR SPKR-(BRN)

JU M P E R WIRE W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

W ire sid e o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

is there continuity?

YES-Go t o

s t e p 28.

wire(s) speaker(s).B

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e SUBW OOFER 8P CONNECTOR

4

5

6

9 /

b e tw e e n th e s te re o

28 . R e m o v e t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ),

WOOFER P R E + fB tU )

(7

a m p lifie r a n d th e

a n d d is c o n n e c t a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t c o n n e c t o r F 3 8

w o o fe rL ^ PRE—(PNK)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

(20P).

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 30. C h e c k f o r c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n th e te r m in a ls o f

23. C h e c k f o r c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n s te re o a m p lifie r c o n n e c to r F

(20P)

Audio-Navigation unit connector

From terminal

W ire

To terminals

color

F l 1 (B R N )

F l (B L U ), F2 (G R N )

F12 (P N K )

F1

A1

Fl

BLU

A2

F12

PNK

A15

F2

GRN

(BLU),

F2 (G R N )

A U D IO -N A V IG A T IO N U N IT CONNECTOR F

jr

-I

20

1

l/l 1 / 13

24 25

14 | "

27

(20P)

2

5

9

/

V

r-i

9 9

/ 1?

/

10 19

/

is there continuity between any of the terminals?

YES-There

11 ■1 2 9 14

14

11 12

0

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

A U D IO -N A V iG A T iO N U N IT CONNECTOR F

1

5

28

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

-f

4

2

O CM

10 | 11

19

15

(20P)

(28P)

STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A

V|2T7I7176I918I9 21 / / 18 //

to

t h e t a b l e.

a c c o r d i n g t o t h e ta b le .

Stereo amplifier connector

(20P) a c c o r d i n g

a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it c o n n e c to r F

c o n n e c t o r A (2 8P ) a n d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it

is a s h o r t in t h e w i r e s b e t w e e n t h e

a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it a n d th e s te re o a m p lifie r .

10

R e p la c e t h e a f f e c t e d s h i e l d e d

harness.!

" i s 1 20 N O - G o t o s t e p 31 . 31. C h e c k fo r c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d s te re o

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

a m p l i f i e r c o n n e c t o r A (2 8P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 1, N o ,

2, a n d

N o . 15 i n d i v i d u a l l y .

is there continuity?

YES-Go t o

STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A

s t e p 30,

N O - T h e r e is a n o p e n in t h e

wire(s) b e t w e e n

t h e s te r e o

RS485 fB LU )

RS485 G N D

HI

a m p l i f i e r a n d t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t R e p la c e t h e a f f e c t e d s h i e ld e d h a r n e s s . ■

1 | 2

3

4

9

(PNK)

it— 6

(28P)

— — nn 9

8

9

10

11

9

13

14

18 19 20 21Z Z 24 25Z 27 28 1 S 4 8 5 + (GRN)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is

there continuity?

wire(s) between the stereo amplifier and the audio-navigation unit Replace the affected shielded harness.■

Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e

NO-Go to step 32. 32. Disconnect audio-navigation unit connectors A (24P), and connector B (24P).

33 . C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t

(24P), c o n n e c t o r B (2 4P ) a n d s t e r e o c o n n e c t o r A (28P) a c c o r d i n g t o t h e t a b le .

c o n n e c to r A a m p lifie r

A u d io - N a v ig a tio n u n it c o n n e c to r

S te re o a m p lifie r c o n n e c to r

W ir e c o lo r

A28

YEL

A14

BRN

Al

34. C h e c k f o r c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d s te re o a m p l i f i e r c o n n e c t o r A (2 8 P ) a c c o r d i n g t o t h e ta b le . S te re o a m p lifie r c o n n e c to r

W ir e c o lo r

A4

BLU

A6

IR N

A10

«RN BLU

A27

PUR

A13

LT BLU

A13

LT BLU

A14

BRN

A25

PfH

A18

PNK

9

A 11

BLU

A 19

RED

A22

A24

RED

A24

F

A23

A10

GRN

A25

PNK

PNK

A27

PUR

B3

.. ........A _ _l l _

_

| B L U “ B12

A8

GRN

B24

A19

RE D

A28

STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (28P)

A U D IO -N A V IG A T IO N U N IT CONNECTOR A J24P)

9 9

t

14 16

—

—

ttsth/

3 |4

/

18

17

18 19

r 9 /

/

n 2I3I* [ / 6I9I 8I9 15 9 9 18 ISl 20 21 9,/ 24 25 9 27 h _

12 10

11

22 2 3

24

1

_

_

H

10 | 11 | / i 13 1 14 |

28

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls W ire sid e o f fe m a le te rm in a l s A U D IO -N A V IG A T IO N U N IT CONNECTOR B {24PJ

is there continuity? 5

13

/

15

ie

P

W

> 17(18 19

/

V 9 22

Y E S - R e p a i r a s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e 24

amplifier.H

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls N O - G o t o s t e p 35.

STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A {28P}

rh — 15

9'/

—

— fl

10I1 1I/113 114 f i 20|2 199 25 9

18 19

24

27 28

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is there continuity?

YES-Go t o

s te p 34 .

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e

wire(s) b e t w e e n t h e a m p lifie r .!

a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it a n d th e s te re o

wire(s)

b e tw e e n th e a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it a n d th e s te re o

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 35. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s o f s te r e o a m p l i f i e r c o n n e c t o r A (28P ) a c c o r d in g t o t h e t a b l e. F ro m te r m in a l A 4 (B L U )

36. M e a s u re th e v o lta g e b e tw e e n s u b w o o fe r

8P

c o n n e c to r te r m in a l N o. 5 a n d b o d y g ro u n d .

T o te r m in a ls A 6 (G R N ), (BLU), A 1 3 (L T B L U ), A 1 4 (B R N )# A18(PNK), A 1 9 (R E D ), A 2 4 (R E D ), A 2 5 (P N K ), A 2 7 (P U R ), A 2 8 (Y E L)

SUBW OOFER 8P CONNECTOR

GRN

A 8 (G R N )

BLU),A14(BRN), A18(PNK), A19(RED),A24(RED),A25 (P N K ), A 2 7 (P U R ), A 2 8 (Y E L)

BLU), A 1 3 (L T B L U (B R N ), A 1 8 (P N K ), A 1 9 (R E D )# A 2 4 (R E D ), A 2 5 (P N K ), A 2 7 (PUR), A 2 8 (YE

A 1 0 (G R N )

_U), A 1 4 (B R l\ (PNK), A 1 9 (R E D ), A 2 4 (R ED ), A 2 5 (PNK), A 2 7 fP U R )# A 2 8 (YEL) 3RN] JK), A19 (RED), A24 (RED), A25 (PNK), A27 (PUR), A28 (YE 3NK), A19 (RED), I (RED), A25 (PNK), A27 (PUR), A28 (YEL) A19 (RED), A24 (RED), £ (PNK), A27 (PUR), A28 (YEL) A24 (RED), A25 (PNK), A27 (PUR), A28 (YEL) A25 (PNK), A27 (PUR), A28 (YEL) A27 (PUR), A28 (YEL) A28 (YEL)

A 11 (B L U )

A 1 3 (L T B L U )

A 1 4 (B R N ;

A 1 8 (P N K ) A 1 9 (R ED ) A 2 4 (R E D ) A 2 5 (P N K ) A 2 7 (P U R ]

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is there battery voltage?

YES-Go

t o s t e p 37 ,

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e N o . 12 (1 0 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e la y b o x a n d

subwoofer 8P connector terminal

No. 5 .H

37 . T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II). 38 . M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n s u b w o o f e r

8P

c o n n e c to r te r m in a l N o. 6 a n d b o d y g ro u n d .

SUBW OOFER 8 IP CONNECTOR

17 Is! 9 4

5

6

3 8

SUBVV S W + B fW V H Ii STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (28P)

11213 14 9 6I9I 8|9 \ / \ 20 21 9 / 7 24 25 9 27 9 10 I 11

15 | 9

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

13 I 14 I

18 119

28

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

Is there battery voltage?

YES-Go

t o s t e p 41 .

N O - G o t o s t e p 39 ,

is there continuity between any of the terminals? Y E S - R e p a ir a s h o r t in t h e w i r e s b e t w e e n t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it a n d th e s te r e o a m p l i f i e r . ®

NO-Substitute a

k n o w n - g o o d s te r e o a m p l i f i e r (se e

p a g e 2 3 -1 3 2 ), a n d re c h e c k . If th e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p l a ce t h e o r ig i n a l s te r e o a m p l if i e r {se e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 2 ). If th e s y m p t o m is s till p r e s e n t , S u b s t it u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it (se e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (se e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 3 ).■

continuity

33 . C h e c k f o r

STEREO A MPLIFIER CONNECTOR A W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

5

ORN

B12 (+ )

BLU

B3 ( — )

GRY

B17 ( + )

RED

B8 { — )

BLK

c o n n e c tio n . STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR B (18P)

Reconnect the speaker connector; and recheok the symptom; is the condition still present? Y E S - G o t o s t e p 14.

n— — — o 9 2 |3 |/| 5 |6 |7 |8 | 10 18 i

N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e . O p e r a t i o n is n o r m a l . ■ 14. T e s t t h e s p e a k e r ( s ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 8 ).

is the speaker OK? Y E S - G o t o s te p 16.

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

N O - R e p l a c e t h e s p e a k e r ( s ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 8 ) . ■ Is

there continuity?

15. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

wire(s) speaker(s).B

Y E S - R e p a i r a s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e b e tw e e n th e s te re o a m p lifie r a n d th e

NO-Go to step 21.

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 21 . D i s c o n n e c t t h e le f t t w e e t e r 2 P c o n n e c t o r a n d t h e r i g h t

24 . C o n n e c t t h e t w e e t e r

(—) with

tw e e te r 2P c o n n e c to r.

2P c o n n e c t o r

te r m in a l ( + ) a n d

a ju m p e r w ire .

22 . M e a s u r e t h e r e s is t a n c e b e t w e e n b o t h p a ir s o f s p e a k e r w i r e s ( + ) a n d (■—) a t s te r e o a m p l i f i e r c o n n e c t o r B

(18P)

LEFT TWEETER 2P CONNECTOR

a c c o r d i n g t o t h e t a b l e. Speaker

W ire c o lo r

S te re o

r I n 2

a m p lifie r

1

c o n n e c to r

B16( + )

F ro n t c e n te r s p e a k e r

BLK

b7

F F ~ B11 ( + )

D r i v e r 's d o o r s p e a k e r F r o n t p a s s e n g e r 's d o o r speaker

WHT

B 2(—)

GRN

B15 ( + )

...... ... RED.........

RN

B6 ( — )

L e ft r e a r d o o r s p e a k e r

.....l i .o’.( + 1 ......

PNK

B 1I ...)

PUR

B14 ( + )

BLU

R ig h t r e a r d o o r speaker

B5 { — )

S u b w o o fe r

FRLDR

SPKR-(GRN)

FRLDR SPKR + fW H T)

JU M P E R W IRE W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

RIGHT TWEETER 2P CONNECTOR

ORN ... _

rr ^_B T_ 2 H_ =T_ ^ RY

(+ ) B8(—)

RED

B17

BLK

FR R

SPKR-(BRN)

FR R SPK R + (RED)

R e s is t a n c e F ro n t c e n te r sp e a k e r:

4 Q

D r i v e r 's d o o r s p e a k e r ;

2 Q

F r o n t p a s s e n g e r 's d o o r s p e a k e r :

2

L e ft re a r d o o r s p e a k e r:

2

R ig h t re a r d o o r s p e a k e r:

2 Q 2

1

... O” 2 |3

.......

|9|5 | 6 | 7 | 8 |

10

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Cl Cl

S u b w o o fe r;

STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR

JU M P E R WIRE

Cl

B (18P)

9 18

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

is the resistance OK?

YES-Go t o

s t e p 23 .

wire(s) speaker(s).H

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n o r a s h o r t in t h e t h e s t e r e o a m p li f i e r a n d t h e

2P c o n n e c t o r 2P c o n n e c t o r .

23 . D i s c o n n e c t t h e D r i v e r 's d o o r s p e a k e r a n d t h e p a s s e n g e r 's d o o r s p e a k e r

b e tw e e n

25 . C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n b o t h p a ir s o f s p e a k e r

28. C h e c k fo r c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n a u d io u n it c o n n e c to r B

w i r e s ( + ) a n d ( — ) a t s te r e o a m p l i f i e r c o n n e c t o r B

(3 2P ) a n d s t e r e o a m p l i f i e r c o n n e c t o r A (2 0P )

(18P) a c c o r d i n g t o t h e ta b le .

a c c o r d i n g t o t h e ta b le .

S peaker

S te re o a m p lifie r

W ire c o lo r

c o n n e c to r

B11(+) B2( —) B15( + ) B6 ( —)

L e ft t w e e t e r R ig h t t w e e t e r

1

S te re o a m p lifie r c o n n e c to r

W ire c o lo r

B10

A17

PNK

\19 B13

A20

PUR YEL

^ “ "WHT GRN RED

STEREO A MPLIFIER CONNECTOR B (18P)

10

A u d io u n it c o n n e c to r

RED

B14

A14

RED

B18

A13

PNK GRN

B24

r...*....... *..A6 ......... ...

B28

A7

BLU

B27

A9

LT BLU

9

B29

A10

BRN

111 |12 | 9 | l 4 | l 5 11 6 11T 18

B30

A4

GRN

n------------------- n 2 |3 I/I 5 |6 | 7 |8 |

B32

BLU A U D IO U N IT CONNECT OR B (32P)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

/ | i 3|w 7 ^

/ 77 T 3 t 7 7 1 7 9 f 9 7 9 ~

is there continuity?

YES-Go t o

/

29

30

/

32

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s

s te p 26.

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e

27

I 9 I 9 I 19 | 9 I 9 I 9 I 23

wire(s)

b e tw e e n th e s te re o

STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (20P)

a m p lifie r a n d th e s p e a k e r(s ).B 1

9

4

3

/

9

13 14

/

8

7

9

16 17

/

r 9

10 19 20

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is there continuity? Y E S - G o t o s t e p 27.

wire(s) amplifier.®

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e u n it a n d t h e s t e r e o

b e tw e e n th e a u d io

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 27. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d s t e r e o a m p l i f i e r c o n n e c t o r A (2 0P ) a c c o r d i n g t o t h e t a b l e. S te re o a m p lifie r

W ire c o lo r

connect

28. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e tw e e n th e t e r m i n a l s o f s te r e o a m p lifie r c o n n e c to r A

T o te r m in a ls A 4 (G R N ), A 0 (G R N ), A 7 (BLU), A 9 (L T BLU), A10 (BRN), A 1 3 (P N K ), A 1 4 (R E D ), A 1 6 (R E D ), A 1 7 (P N K ), A 1 9 (P U R ), A 2 0 (Y E L)

A 4 (G R N )

A 6 (G R N ), A 7 (B L U ), A 9 (L T BLU), A10 (B R N ), A 1 3 (PNK), A 1 4 (R ED ), A 1 0 (RED), A 1 7 (PNK), A 1 9 (P U R L A 2 0 (Y E L)

A 8 (G R N )

A 7 ( B L U ) r A 9 (L T B L U ), A 1 0 (B R N ), A 1 3 (P N K ), A 1 4 (R E D ), A 1 8 (R E D ), A 1 7 (PNK), A19 (P U R ), A2G (Y E L)

A 7 (B L U )

A 3 (L T B L U ), A 1 0 (B R N ), A12 (P N K ), A 1 4 (R E D ), A16 (R E D ), A 1 7 (P N K ), A 1 9 (P U R ), A 2 0 (Y E L)

BLU GRN BLU LT BLU A10 PNK A14

RED

A18

RED

U7 A13 A20

3RN),A13(PNK), A14(RED), (PNK), A 1 9 (P U R ),

A 9 (L T B L U ) STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (20P)

A 1 0 (RED), A 1 7 A 2Q (Y E L)

=>NK), A 1 4

A 1 0 (B R N )

t = = [ ___ ______ _ n 9 9 8 7 9 9 10 9 9 13 14 / 18 17 / 19 20

n________ _ 1 3 4

a c c o r d in g t o th e ta b le .

A 3 (B L U ) GRN

A8

(20P)

F ro m te r m in a l

(R E D ), A 1 6 (R ED ), 3N K ), A 1 9 (P U R ), A 2 0 (Y E L)

A 1 3 (P N K )

3ED), A 1 8 (R E D ), A 1 7 (P N K ), A 1 9 (P U R ), A 2 0 (YE

A 1 4 (RED)

A 1 8 (RED), A 1 7 (P N K ), A 1 9 (P U R ), A 2 0 (Y E L)

=>NK), A 1 9

A16 (R ED ) A 1 7 (P N K ) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

YES-Repair a

A 2 0 (Y E L)

A 1 3 (P U R )

is there continuity?

(P U R ), A 2 0 (Y E L)

, A 2 0 (YE

STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (20P)

wire(s) amplifier.!

s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e

b e t w e e n t h e a u d i o u n it a n d t h e s t e r e o

1

oo

9

N O - G o t o s t e p 28,

49!61''919b 16[i7[7]li}20

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is there continuity between any of the terminals? Y E S - R e p a ir a s h o r t in th e w i r e s b e tw e e n th e a u d io u n it a n d th e s te r e o a r n p l i f i e r . i l

NO-substitute

a k n o w n - g o o d s te r e o a m p l i f i e r (se e

p a g e 2 3 -1 3 2 ), a n d

recheck.

If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n

g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l s te r e o a m p l if i e r (se e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 2 ). If t h e s y m p t o m is s t i l l p r e s e n t , S u b s t it u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d io u n it (se e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d re c h e c k . If th e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p l a ce th e o r i g i n a l a u d io u n it (se e p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 7 ) . ■

Audio system sound is weak or distorted (display is normal) (with navigation) NOTE:

Audio sfstem sound isweak or distorted {displaf is normal) (without navigation) NOTE:

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t

(see p a g e

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e 2 2 -9 4 ).

2 2 -9 4 ), • C h e c k th e c o n n e c to rs f o r p o o r c o n n e c tio n s o r lo o s e

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls .

te r m in a ls .

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (ll). 2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it , a n d c h e c k f o r s o u n d in e a c h m o d e ( A M ,

FM, X M ,

a n d C D ).

Is there sound from the speakers, and is the sound quality normal in each mode?

2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o u n it , a n d c h e c k f o r s o u n d in e a c h m o d e ( A M , F M , X M , a n d C D ).

is there sound from the speakers, and is the sound quality normal in each mode?

Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e . T h e s y s t e m is O K a t t h i s

Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e . T h e s y s t e m is O K a t t h i s

t i m e . C h e c k f o r lo o s e c o n n e c t i o n s a t t h e

t i m e . C h e c k f o r lo o s e c o n n e c t i o n s a t t h e a u d i o u n it ,

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it , t h e a m p l i f i e r , a n d e a c h

th e a m p lifie r, a n d ea ch s p e a k e r.®

s p e a k e r.®

NO-The

N O - T h e s p e a k e r s a l l w o r k , b u t t h e s o u n d q u a l i t y is

s p e a k e r s a ll w o r k , b u t t h e s o u n d q u a l i t y is

p o o r:

• If t h e s o u n d q u a l i t y is p o o r o n l y w i t h X M r a d i o , o r

• If t h e s o u n d q u a l i t y is p o o r o n l y w i t h X M r a d i o , o r th e X M ra d io d o e s n o t fu n c tio n , g o to p o o r o r n o s o u n d w i t h X M r a d i o (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 1 7 ) . ■ • If t h e s o u n d q u a l i t y is p o o r o n l y w i t h A M o r F M , g o t o p o o r A M o r F M r a d i o r e c e p t i o n o r in t e r f e r e n c e

(see

p o o r:

page 2 3 -5 9 ).■

(see p a g e

radio does

n o t fu n c tio n , g o to p o o r o r n o

s o u n d w it h X M ra d io

(see p a g e

2 3 -1 2 1 ) . ■

• If t h e s o u n d q u a l i t y is p o o r o n ly w i t h A M o r F M , g o to p o o r A M o r FM ra d io re c e p tio n o r in te rfe r e n c e (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 6 2 ) . ■ • If t h e s o u n d is p o o r in a ll m o d e s , g o t o s o u n d

• i f t h e s o u n d is p o o r in a ll m o d e s , g o t o s o u n d q u a l i t y d ia g n o s i s

th e X M

2 3 -1 2 3 ).■

q u a lity d ia g n o s is

(see p a g e

2 3 -1 2 3 ).■

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Radio preset memory is lost (with navigation) N OTE: • C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e 2 2 -9 4 ).

NOTE: • C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e

• L o c k a n d u n lo c k t h e v e h ic l e w i t h t h e r e m o t e t o m a k e s u r e t h e v e h ic l e r e c o g n iz e s w h i c h r e m o t e { d r i v e r 1 o r d r i v e r 2) is b e in g u s e d . • If o n l y

Radio preset memory is lost (without navigation)

XM

s t a t io n s

are

2 2 -3 4 ). • If o n l y

KM s t a t io n s a r e lo s t, g o t o X M r a d i o p r e s e t

m e m o r y is l o s t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 1 8 ). lo s t,

go t o XM

ra d io p re s e t 1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

m e m o r y is l o s t - W i t h A c u r a U n k (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 1 3 )

2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o u n it , a n d s e t e a c h o f t h e r a d i o

- W i t h o u t A c u r a U n k (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 1 4 )

s t a t io n p r e s e t b u t t o n s .

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (ll).

Do each of the buttons set property?

2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it , a n d s e t e a c h o f t h e

Y E S - G o t o s t e p 3.

r a d i o s t a t io n p r e s e t b u t t o n s .

N O - R e p l a c e t h e a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 7 ) . ■

Do each of the buttons set properly?

YES-Go t o

3. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0) f o r 1 m i n u t e , t h e n t u r n it b a c k t o O N (II).

s te p 3.

N O - R e p l a c e t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ).1 1

4 . T e s t t h e p r e s e t b u t t o n s f o r p r o p e r r e c a l l o p e r a t io n . Do

3. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0) f o r 1 m i n u t e , a n d t h e n b a c k t o O N (II).

the preset buttons recall the set radio stations?

Y E S - S y s t e m is n o r m a l a t t h i s t i m e . C h e c k c o n n e c tio n s a t th e a u d io u n i t ®

4. T e s t t h e p r e s e t b u t t o n s f o r p r o p e r r e c a ll o p e r a t io n .

Do the preset buttons recall the set radio stations?

N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e

Y E S - S y s t e m is n o r m a l a t t h i s t i m e . C h e c k c o n n e c tio n s a t th e a u d io -n a v ig a tio n

NO-Substitute

unit.B

a k n o w n - g o o d a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it

( i n c l u d i n g t h e H D D ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 1 8 ) . ■

2 3 -1 2 7 ),■

Volum e does not change (w ith navigation) NO TE: • C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e 2 2 -3 4 ),

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls .

2 2 -9 4 ). • S e t t h e f a d e r a n d b a la n c e p o s it io n s t o t h e c e n te r . • C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e t e r m i n a l s.

1 . T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II),

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t a n d c h e c k f o r s o u n d in e a c h m o d e ( A M , F M , X M , a n d C D ).

2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o u n i t a n d c h e c k f o r s o u n d in e a c h m ode

the sound normal?

YES-Go t o

NOTE: • C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e

• S e t t h e f a d e r a n d b a la n c e p o s it io n s t o t h e c e n te r .

Is

Volume does not change (without navigation)

(AM, FM,XM,and

C D ).

Is the sound normal?

s t e p 3.

N O - G o t o a u d i o s y s t e m s o u n d is w e a k o r d i s t o r t e d (s e e p a g e 2 3 -8 1 ), o r n o s o u n d is h e a r d f r o m t h e

Y E S - G o t o s t e p 3. N O - G o t o a u d i o s y s t e m s o u n d is w e a k o r d i s t o r t e d

s p e a k e r ( s ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 6 8 ) . ■

(s e e p a g e 2 3 -8 1 ) , o r n o s o u n d is h e a r d f r o m t h e s p e a k e r ( s ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 7 Q . i l

3. O p e r a t e t h e v o l u m e k n o b t o s e e i f t h e v o l u m e changes.

3. O p e r a t e t h e v o l u m e k n o b t o s e e i f t h e v o l u m e

Does the volume change?

changes,

YES-Operation

Does the volume change?

is n o r m a l a t t h i s t i m e . B

NO-Substitute a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n (s e e p a g e 23-318), a n d re c h e c k . If t h e

u n it

YES-Operation

is n o r m a l a t t h i s t i m e , ■

N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e

s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p l a c e t h e o r ig i n a l

2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d re c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ). If th e

a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e

s y m p t o m is s t i l l p r e s e n t , s u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d

2 3 -1 2 7 ). If t h e s y m p t o m is s t ill p r e s e n t , s u b s t i t u t e a

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n p a n e l (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d

k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o p a n e l (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d

r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y ,

r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y ,

r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n p a n e l (s e e p a g e

r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l a u d i o p a n e l (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 7 ) . ■

23-318).I

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) V o lu m e does not increase w ith speed {w ith navigation)

V olum e does not increase w ith speed {w ith o u t navigation) NOTE:

NOTE; • C h e c k t h e v e h i c le b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t

(see page

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e 2 2 -3 4 ).

2 2 -9 4 ). • C h e c k th e c o n n e c to rs f o r p o o r c o n n e c tio n s o r lo o s e t e r m i n a l s.

• C h e c k th e c o n n e c to rs f o r p o o r c o n n e c tio n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls .

• S e t t h e f a d e r a n d b a la n c e p o s it io n s t o t h e c e n te r .

• S e t t h e f a d e r a n d b a la n c e p o s it io n s t o t h e c e n te r ,

1. C h e c k t h e (S V C ) m o d e s e t t in g In t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n

1. C h e c k t h e (S V C ) m o d e s e t t in g in t h e a u d i o u n i t s o u n d

u n i t s o u n d s e t- u p .

s e t- u p .

Is the (SVC) set to off?

is the (SVC) set to off?

YES-Change t h e

Y E S - C h a n g e t h e s e t t in g t o a t l e a s t t h e M i d s e t t in g ,

s e t t in g t o a t le a s t t h e M i d s e t t in g ,

retest.■

a n d re te s t.■

and

N O - G o t o s te p 2.

N O - G o t o s t e p 2.

2. D o t h e s e l f - d i a g n o s t i c f u n c t i o n f o r t h e v e h ic l e s p e e d p u ls e i n d i c a t i o n (s e e p a g e 2 3 -4 9 ).

2. D o th e s e lf- d ia g n o s tic f u n c t io n f o r th e v e h ic l e s p e e d

Does the self-diagnostic function indicate a YSP signal when the vehicle is mowing?

Does the self-diagnostic function indicate a YSP signal when the vehicle is mowing?

Y E S - S u b s titu te a k n o w n - g o o d a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it

Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e

(s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e

2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d re c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s

s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it

NO-Go t o

(see p a g e

2 3 -3 1 8 ).■

s t e p 3.

3. T e s t - d r i v e t h e v e h i c le a t h i g h w a y s p e e d s , a n d

p u ls e i n d i c a t i o n (s e e p a g e 2 3 -4 9 ),

a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e

23-127).! N O - G o t o s t e p 3. 3. T e s t - d r i v e t h e v e h i c le a t h i g h w a y s p e e d s , a n d

m o n i t o r i f t h e v o l u m e in c r e a s e s .

m o n i t o r i f t h e v o l u m e in c r e a s e s ,

Does the volume increase?

Does the volume increase?

Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e , t h e s y s t e m is O K a t t h i s

Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e , t h e s y s t e m is O K a t t h i s

tim e .B

tim e .B

N O - C h e c k f o r B -C A N D T C s ( c o m m u n i c a t i o n B U S L in e

N O - C h e c k f o r B -C A N D T C s

E r r o r ) w i t h t h e H D S a n d g o t o t h e in d i c a t e d D T C 's

E r r o r ) w i t h t h e H D S a n d g o t o t h e in d i c a t e d D T C 's

t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . If n o B -C A N D T C s o r c o m m u n i c a t i o n

t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . If n o B -C A N -DTCs o r c o m m u n i c a t i o n

(communication

B U S L in e

b u s l in e e r r o r s a r e f o u n d , s u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d

b u s lin e e r r o r s a r e f o u n d , s u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d r e c h e c k .

a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e

If t h e s y m p t o m g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l

s y m p t o m g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o u n it

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 1 8 ) . ■

(s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 7 ) , !

Volume is too high or t m low when driving at freeway speeds

Radio tuner does not change stations

NOTE:

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t

(see p a g e

NOTE:

(see

page

2 2 -9 4 ), • C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e

2 2 -9 4 ), • C h e c k th e c o n n e c to rs f o r p o o r c o n n e c tio n s o r lo o s e

t e r m i n a l s. • If t h e r a d i o t u n e r d o e s n o t c h a n g e s t a t io n s w i t h t h e

te r m in a ls .

a u d io r e m o te s w itc h o n th e s te e rin g w h e e l, g o to 1. C h a n g e t h e S V C m o d e s e t t in g in s o u n d s e t - u p t o M i d (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 0 ). Is

- W i t h n a v ig a t i o n (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 0 )

the volume level still too high , or too low?

YES-Go t o

- W i t h o u t n a v ig a t i o n (s e e p a g e 2 3 -9 1 )

s t e p 2.

NO- lmproper S V C

1. C h e c k t h e a u d i o i n f o r m a t i o n o n t h e d i s p l a y p a n e l. s e t t in g f o r c l i e n t s s o u n d t a s t e . B

2. C o m p a r e t h e S V C t o a k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic le . Is

Does the audio information display properly? Y E S - G o t o s t e p 2.

the SVC operation similar in both vehicles?

YES-The

a u d io re m o te s w itc h d o e s n o t w o r k p r o p e r ly .

N O - G o to a u d io u n it p o w e r s w itc h w i l l n o t tu r n o n . • ' W i t h n a v ig a t i o n

S V C is o p e r a t in g n o r m a l ly .

(see p a g e

2 3 -6 5 ),■

• W i t h o u t n a v ig a t i o n (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 8 6 ) , ■ N O - G o t o s te p 3. 2. O p e r a t e t h e t u n i n g b u t t o n s t o s e e i f t h e r a d i o s t a t io n 3. T e s t - d r i v e t h e v e h ic l e a t f r e e w a y s p e e d s a n d m o n i t o r

changes.

t h e v o l u m e le v e l, Is

Does the radio station change?

the volume level too high , or too low?

Y E S - ln te r m it te n t fa ilu r e , th e t u n in g b u tto n s a re O K a t YES-

th is t im e . B

• W i t h n a v ig a t i o n : R e p la c e t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t

NO-

(s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 1 8 ) . ■ • W i t h o u t n a v ig a t i o n ;

Replace t h e

a u d io u n it

(see

p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 7 J .B

• W i t h n a v ig a t i o n : R e p la c e t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 1 8 ) . ■ • W i t h o u t n a v ig a t i o n : R e p la c e t h e a u d i o u n i t

N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e , t h e s y s t e m is O K a t t h i s

(see

p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ).B

tim e .B

( c o n t ’d )

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Display does not dim or brighten with dimmer (without navigation)

8. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n a u d i o u n i t c o n n e c t o r C (2 4 P ) t e r m i n a l N o , 2 4 a n d c l i m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t c o n n e c t o r B (1 4 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 8.

NOTE: A U D IO U N IT CONNECTOR C

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e

(24P)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

2 2 -3 4 ). • C h e c k th e c o n n e c to rs f o r p o o r c o n n e c tio n s o r lo o s e t e r m i n a ls.

n _

1 1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

__________ r 2 5 13

99 14 15 /

f

8

17

_____ ____ _______ n

99 99/

23

2. T u r n t h e h e a d l i g h t s w i t c h t o t h e p a r k i n g o r h e a d l i g h t

24

HWAC BUS (BLU )

o n p o s it io n . 3. C h e c k t h e f r o n t c l im a t e c o n t r o l u n i t d i s p l a y .

Does the climate control illumination change with dimmer?

YES-Go

1

/

2

t o s t e p 4,

/ / X

11

4

5

6

12

13

14

A U D IO D A T A (BLU)

N O - G o t o c l i m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (s e e

C LIM ATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR

page 2 1 -9 0 ).■

B (14P)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

4. C h e c k t h e N o . 7 (1 0 A ) f u s e a n d t h e N o . 3 2 (1 0 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y b o x .

Are the fuses OK?

fuse(s), a n d

is there continuity?

YES-Go t o

s te p 9.

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e a u d i o u n i t a n d th e c lim a te c o n tr o l u n it . B

Y E S - G o t o s t e p 5. N O -R e p la c e th e

3

8

re c h e c k .B

9. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n a u d i o u n i t c o n n e c t o r C (2 4 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 2 4 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .

5. R e m o v e t h e a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ). C h e c k t h a t t h e a u d i o u n i t a n d c l i m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t c o n n e c t o r s a re

A U D IO U N IT CONNECTOR C (24P)

p r o p e r ly c o n n e c t e d .

Are they connected property? Y E S - G o t o s t e p 8,

n 1

2

/ /

13 14 15 /

l 5

6

I 99/

n

/ / /

17

23 24

N O - R e p a ir p o o r c o n n e c tio n s a n d re c o n n e c t th e H V AC BUS (BLU ) f

c o n n e c to r, a n d re c h e c k .B 8. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0). 7. D i s c o n n e c t a u d i o u n it c o n n e c t o r C (2 4P ) a n d c l i m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t c o n n e c t o r B (14P ).

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is there continuity? Y E S - R e p a i r a s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e w i r e b e tw e e n th e a u d io u n it a n d th e c lim a te c o n tr o l N O - G o t o s t e p 10.

unit.l

10. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n c l im a t e c o n t r o l u n i t c o n n e c to r A

(40P) t e r m i n a l

No. 1 an d b o d y g ro u n d .

C LIM ATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A

+ B

13. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n c l i m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t c o n n e c t o r A (4 0 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 3 7 a n d b o d y g r o u n d ,

(40P)

C LIM ATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A

(40P)

(WHT)

a

1

2

3

4

5

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 3Z 33 34 35 36 37 38

G N D {BLK)

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is there battery voltage?

Is there less than 0.2 ¥?

YES-Go t o

Y E S - S u b s titu te a k n o w n - g o o d c lim a te c o n tr o l u n it

s t e p 11.

(s e e p a g e 2 1 -1 3 9 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e N o . 7 (1 0 A ) fu s e in t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y b o x a n d t h e c li m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t . B 11. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o

s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l c l i m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 1 -1 3 9 ), If t h e s y m p t o m is s t i ll p r e s e n t , s u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n i t

ON

(s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d re c h e c k . If t h e

(II).

s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l 12. M e a s u r e t h e v o lt a g e b e t w e e n c l i m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t c o n n e c to r A

(40P) t e r m i n a l

a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e

23-127).B

No. 25 and b o d y g ro u n d . N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n o r h i g h r e s is t a n c e in t h e w i r e

C LIM ATE CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A

(40P)

b e t w e e n c l im a t e c o n t r o l u n i t c o n n e c t o r A te r m in a l N o. 37 a n d b o d y g ro u n d

22-40). H

ACC {PUR)

W ire side o f fe m ale te rm in a ls

Is there battery voltage? Y E S - G o t o s te p 13. N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e N o . 3 2 {1 0 A ) fu s e in t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y b o x a n d t h e c li m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t . B

(G506)

(40P) (s e e p a g e

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Security indicator does not w o rk properly (w ith navigation)

Security indicator does not w o rk properly (w ith o u t navigation)

NOTE:

NOTE:

• C h e c k t h e v e h i c le b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t

(see p a g e

22-94),

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e 2 2 -9 4 ).

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls .

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls .

• B e fo re tr o u b le s h o o tin g , m a k e s u re y o u h a v e a n ti-th e ft c o d e s fo r th e a u d io -n a v ig a tio n u n it

• B e fo re t r o u b le s h o o tin g , m a k e s u re y o u h a v e a n ti-th e ft c o d e s f o r th e a u d io u n i t

• A fte r tr o u b le s h o o tin g , e n te r th e a n ti- th e ft c o d e s f o r th e a u d io -n a v ig a tio n u n it

• A fte r t r o u b le s h o o tin g , e n te r th e a n ti-th e ft c o d e s f o r t h e a u d i o u n it .

1 . T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0).

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0),

is the security indicator (LED) on (biink)?

is the security indicator (LED) on (biink)?

Y E S - G o t o S t e p 2,

Y E S - G o t o S t e p 2.

NO-Substitute

a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it ( in c lu d in g t h e H D D ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d recheck. If

N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n it (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d re c h e c k . If th e s y m p t o m / in d ic a t io n g o e s

t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e

a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e

o r ig i n a l a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ) . ■

2 3 - 1 2 7 ) ,H i

2. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

2. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

3. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o s y s t e m .

3. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o s y s t e m .

is the security indicator (LED) off?

is the security indicator (LED) off?

YES-The

Y E S - T h e a u d i o u n i t is O K a t t h i s t i m e . C h e c k f o r lo o s e

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t is O K a t t h i s t i m e .

C h e c k f o r lo o s e o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s a t t h e

o r p o o r c o n n e c tio n s a t th e a u d io u n it . B

a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it a n d th e a u d io - n a v ig a tio n

NO-Substitute

s w itc h p a n e l,■ N O - S u b s titu te a k n o w n -g o o d

a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e

2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d re c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s

audio-navigation

u n it

( i n c l u d i n g t h e H D D ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 1 8 ) .B

a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o u n i t 2 3 -1 2 7 ).■

(see p a g e

Audio-Navigation unit button illumination does not work (with navigation)

Audio unit button illum ination does not w o rk (w ith o u t navigation)

NOTE:

NOTE:

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e

2 2 -9 4 ).

2 2 -9 4 ).

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls .

te r m in a ls . 1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

2. T u r n t h e c o m b i n a t i o n l i g h t i n g s w i t c h t o t h e p a r k i n g

2. T u r n t h e c o m b i n a t i o n

l i g h t i n g s w i t c h t o t h e p a r k in g

l i g h t p o s it io n .

l i g h t p o s it io n . 3. C h e c k t h e i l l u m i n a t i o n o f t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t b u tto n s .

3. C h e c k t h e i ll u m i n a t i o n o f t h e a u d i o u n i t b u t t o n s .

Are the buttons illuminated?

Are the buttons illuminated?

Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t p r o b le m : t h e a u d i o u n i t is O K a t t h i s

Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t p r o b le m : t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t

t i m e . C h e c k f o r lo o s e o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s a t th e a u d i o

is O K a t t h i s t i m e . C h e c k f o r l o o s e o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s

u n it c o n n e c to r C

a t t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it c o n n e c t o r F

(20P).B

N O - G o t o s t e p 4.

N O - G o t o s t e p 4. 4. C h e c k t h e i l l u m i n a t i o n o f s e v e r a l o t h e r b u t t o n s n o t

4. C h e c k t h e i l l u m i n a t i o n o f s e v e r a l o t h e r b u t t o n s n o t r e la t e d t o t h e a u d i o s y s t e m .

r e la te d t o t h e a u d i o s y s t e m .

Are the buttons illuminated?

Are the buttons illuminated? Y E S -G o to th e B -C A N

(24P ).I

Y E S - G o t o t h e B -C A N lin e t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (s e e p a g e

l in e t r o u b le s h o o t i n g (s e e p a g e

2 2 -1 5 4 ). If t h e B -C A N lin e is O K , s u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d

2 2 -1 6 4 ). If t h e B -C A N lin e Is O K , s u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ),

r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y ,

a n d re c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y ,

r e p l a c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ). If t h e

r e p l a c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e

s y m p t o m is s t i l l p r e s e n t , s u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d

2 3 -3 1 8 ). If t h e s y m p t o m is s t i l l p r e s e n t , s u b s t i t u t e a

a u d i o p a n e l (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d re c h e c k . If t h e

k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n p a n e l (s e e p a g e

s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l

2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s

a u d i o p a n e l (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 7 ) . ■

a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n p a n e l (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 1 8 ) . ■

NO-Troubleshootthe

NO-Troubleshootthe

i n t e r i o r lig h t s . S t a r t b y c h e c k in g

t h e N o . 2 2 (7 .5 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r - h o o d f u s e / r e l a y i n t e r i o r l i g h t s . S t a r t b y c h e c k in g

t h e N o . 2 2 (7 .5 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r - h o o d f u s e / r e l a y b o x . If t h e f u s e is O K , c h e c k t h e i n t e r i o r l i g h t

relay.H

b o x . If t h e f u s e is O K ,

check the interior l i g h t

r e la y .H

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Aydio rem ote sw itch does not w o rk properly {w ith nawigation)

r e s is t a n c e b e t w e e n a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t c o n n e c t o r A (2 4 P ) t e r m i n a l s N o . 5 a n d N o . 16 a s s p e c if ie d in t h e ta b le ,

NOTE; • C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t

(see page A U P IO -N A W lG A IiO N U N IT CONNECTOR A (24P)

2 2 -9 4 ), • C heck th e

6. R e c o n n e c t t h e a u d i o r e m o t e s w i t c h , a n d m e a s u r e t h e

connectors f o r poor c o n n e c t i o n s or lo o s e

te r m in a ls . • B e fo r e t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , m a k e s u r e y o u h a v e a n t i - t h e f t c o d e s f o r t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it . • A fte r t r o u b le s h o o tin g , e n te r th e a n ti- th e ft c o d e s f o r th e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it . 1 . T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II). 2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t a n d c h e c k t h e a u d i o

up, v o l u m e

r e m o t e s w i t c h o p e r a t io n ( v o l u m e

dow n,

C H (U P ), C H ( D O W N ) , M O D E ).

A U D IO R E M O T E S W IT C H T A B L E

is the audio-navigation unit operation OK?

YES-Operation

CH {_ ,

CH (+ )

MODE

VO L DOW N

R e s is ta n c e

about about about about about 1 0 0 0 3 5 7 0 7 7 5 0 1.7 kO 3 .7 kO

is n o r m a l . ■

N O - G o t o s t e p 3. 3. T e s t t h e a u d i o r e m o t e s w i t c h (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 4 ).

is the audio remote switch OK?

YES-Go t o

VOL UP

B u t t o n h e ld down

(No button pressed) about 10 kO

is the resistance OK? Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e

s t e p 4.

s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p l a c e t h e o r ig i n a l

N O - R e p l a c e t h e a u d i o r e m o t e s w i t c h (s e e p a g e

23-134).H

23-3181 ■

N O - G o t o s t e p 7.

4. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0). 5. R e m o v e t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d d is c o n n e c t

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e

audio-navigation

u n it c o n n e c to r A

(24P ). N O T E : E je c t a ll t h e d is c s b e f o r e r e m o v i n g t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t t o p r e v e n t d a m a g i n g th e C D /D V D p l a y e r 's l o a d m e c h a n i s m .

7. D i s c o n n e c t t h e c a b l e r e e l s u b h a r n e s s 2 0 P c o n n e c t o r f r o m t h e c a b le r e e l .

8. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t c o n n e c t o r A (2 4 P ) t e r m i n a l s N o . 5 a n d N o . 16 i n d i v i d u a l l y . A U D IO -N A V IG A T IO N U N IT CONNECTOR A

(24P)

AUDI O REMC)TE GND (BfIN) n----------------n 1 ■ 3 4 5 6 / 13 14 716 "18 19 /

9

9

Audio rem ote sw itch does not w o rk p ro p e rlf (w ithou t navigation) NOTE: • C h e c k t h e v e h i c l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e • C h e c k th e c o n n e c to rs f o r

9 9 9 10

V

'2 2

11

12

>23 24

A U D IO REMOTE {ORN)

page

2 2 -9 4 ),

poor c o n n e c t io n s or loose

t e r m in a ls . • B e f o r e t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , m a k e s u r e y o u h a v e a n t i- t h e f t c o d e s f o r t h e a u d io u n i t • A f t e r t r o u b l e s h o o t in g , e n t e r t h e

anti-theft c o d e s

fo r

t h e a u d io u n it . 1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w it c h t o O N (II)..

2. T u r n

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s Is

o n t h e a u d i o u n it a n d c h e c k t h e a u d io r e m o t e

s w it c h o p e r a t io n ( v o lu m e u p , v o l u m e d o w n , CH (U P ), CH

there continuity?

(DOWN),

M O D E ).

is the audio unit operation OK?

Y E S - G o t o s t e p 9. N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e

YES-Operation

is n o r m a l .■

N O - G o t o s t e p 3.

s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it (s e e p a g e

3. T e s t t h e a u d io r e m o t e s w it c h (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 4 ).

23-318).■

is the audio remote switch OK?

9. D i s c o n n e c t t h e d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s 20 P c o n n e c t o r f r o m t h e c a b le re e l.

Y E S - G o t o s t e p 4.

10. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it c o n n e c t o r A (2 4P ) t e r m i n a l s

N O - R e p la c e t h e a u d io r e m o t e s w it c h (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 4 ).1 1

N o . 5 a n d N o . 18 i n d i v i d u a l ly. 4. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w it c h t o L O C K (0).

AUDIO-NAVIGATION U N IT CONNECTOR A (24P) 5. R e m o v e t h e a u d io u n it (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d AU D IO REMOTE G ND (BRN) 1

13

io •11 99 14■ 18> 19 '16 9' / ' 9 V22! 23 24

/

3 4

5

12

6

A U D IO REMOTE

d is c o n n e c t a u d io u n it c o n n e c t o r B (32P ). N O T E : E je c t a ll t h e d is c s b e f o r e r e m o v i n g t h e a u d io u n it t o p r e v e n t d a m a g i n g t h e C D p la y e r 's lo a d m e c h a n is m .

(ORN)

W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls

is there continuity? Y E S - R e p a ir a s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e w ir e ( s ) b e tw e e n th e

audio-navigation

u n it a n d t h e c a b le

r e e l. ® N O - R e p la c e t h e c a b le r e e l (s e e p a g e 2 4 -21 1 ) , ■

( c o n t 'd )

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 8, R e c o n n e c t t h e a u d i o r e m o t e s w i t c h , a n d m e a s u r e t h e r e s is t a n c e b e t w e e n a u d i o u n i t c o n n e c t o r

B (32P )

8. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d a u d i o u n it c o n n e c to r

t e r m i n a l s N o . 3 a n d N o . 19 a s s p e c if ie d in t h e t a b le .

B (3 2P )

t e r m i n a l s N o . 3 a n d N o . 19

in d iv id u a lly . A U D IO U N IT CONNECTOR B (32P)

A U D IO U N IT CONNECTOR B (32P)

A U D IO REMOTE GN D (BRN) A U D IO REMOTE GN D (BRN) / V

9

'l/M /

9 M

9 b °

>

i.i/ i»Tu|/K

v \ / \ 7

^

/ !

w \ 7

8 1 9 1 10

1 1 1 / 1 1 3 114 l / f i e

r

\ / \ ^

A U D IO REMOTE (ORN) A U D IO REMOTE (ORN)

ID

(u

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls A U D IO R E M O T E S W IT C H T A B L E CH

Is CH (+ )

MODE

B u t t o n h e ld down

VOL DOWN

R e s is ta n c e

about about about about about 1 0 0 0 3 5 7 Q 7 7 5 0 1.7 kO 3 .7 kO

VOL UP

(No button pressed) about 10 kO

is the resistance OK?

YES-Substitute

Y E S ~ G o t o s t e p 3. N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If th e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e

23-127).B

a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e

2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p l a c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e

23-127).H

9. D i s c o n n e c t t h e d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s

20P

c o n n e c t o r f r o m t h e c a b le r e e l . 10. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d a u d i o u n i t c o n n e c t o r B (3 2P ) t e r m i n a l s N o , 3 a n d N o . 19 i n d i v i d u a l ly.

N O - G o t o s t e p 7, 7. D i s c o n n e c t t h e c a b le re e l s u b h a r n e s s

there continuity?

20P c o n n e c t o r

A U D IO U N IT CONNECTOR B (32P)

f r o m t h e c a b le re e l. A U D IO REMOTE GND (BRN) 9 9 1 3

"

w

v

/ l »

l / i »

11 I 9 l 13f l 4 l / T 16 1r

1 9 1 9 1 19 I / 1 9 1 / 1 23 1 * * 1 9 1 26 1 27 | / | 29 I 30 I / ) 32

A U D IO REMOTE (ORN)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is there continuity? Y E S - R e p a i r a s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e

wire(s)

b e t w e e n t h e a u d i o u n i t a n d t h e c a b le r e e l . B N O - R e p l a c e t h e c a b l e r e e l (s e e p a g e 2 4 -2 1 1 ) . ■

Audio disc does not load (w ith navigation)

Audio disc does not load (w ith o u t navigation)

NOTE:

NOTE:

• C h e c k t h e v e h i c le b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t

(see page

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m i n a l s .

te r m in a ls . • D is c l a b e ls s h o u l d n o t b e u s e d in t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it . T h e y m a y j a m a n d d a m a g e t h e p l a y e r m e c h a n is m .

• D is c l a b e ls s h o u l d n o t b e u s e d in t h e a u d i o u n it . T h e y m a y ja m a n d d a m a g e th e p la y e r m e c h a n is m . • M a k e s u r e t h e a u d i o d is c is c o m p a t i b l e w i t h t h e

• M a k e s u r e t h e a u d i o d is c is c o m p a t i b l e w i t h t h e s y s t e m (s e e t h e o w n e r ' s m a n u a l f o r m o r e i n f o r m a t io n ) .

s y s t e m (s e e t h e o w n e r ' s m a n u a l f o r m o r e i n f o r m a t io n ) . 1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (ll).

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II). 2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it , a n d i n s e r t a k n o w n - g o o d d is c t o s e e i f t h e s y m p t o m c a n b e d u p lic a te d .

to se e if th e s y m p to m ca n be d u p lic a te d .

Does the disc bad?

b u t w i l l n o t p la y , g o t o A u d i o d is c d o e s n o t p l a y (s e e

is n o r m a l . If t h e d is c lo a d s n o r m a l l y ,

b u t w i l l n o t p la y , g o t o A u d i o d is c d o e s n o t p l a y (s e e page 2 3 -3 6 ).■

page 2 3 -9 8 ).■ N O - G o t o s t e p 3. 3. In s e r t a n o t h e r d is c .

N O - G o t o s t e p 3.

Does the disc bad?

3. I n s e r t a n o t h e r d is c .

Y E S - T h e o r ig i n a l d is c is f a u l t y . !

Does the disc toad? Y E S - T h e o r ig i n a l d is c is

faulty.!

N O - S u b s titu te a k n o w n - g o o d a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it ( i n c l u d i n g t h e H D D ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ). If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it

2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o u n it , a n d i n s e r t a k n o w n - g o o d d is c

Y E S - O p e r a t i o n is n o r m a l . If t h e d is c lo a d s n o r m a l ly ,

Does the disc load?

YES-Operation

• C h e c k t h e v e h i c l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e 2 2 -9 4 ),

2 2 -9 4 ).

(see p a g e

2 3 -3 1 8 ).■

N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ). If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o u n it (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 7 ) . ■

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Audio disc does not eject (with navigation) N OTE: • C h e c k t h e v e h i c le b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e 2 2 -9 4 ).

Audio disc does not eject (w ith o u t navigation) NOTE: • C h e c k t h e v e h i c l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e

• D is c la b e ls s h o u l d n o t b e u s e d in t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t T h e y m a y ja m a n d d a m a g e th e p la y e r m e c h a n is m .

2 2 -9 4 ). • D is c la b e ls s h o u l d n o t b e u s e d in t h e a u d i o u n it . T h e y m a y ja m a n d d a m a g e th e p la y e r m e c h a n is m .

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls .

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it .

2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o u n i t

Does the system turn on?

Does the system turn on?

Y E S ~ G o t o s t e p 3.

YES-Go t o

N O - G o t o a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it p o w e r s w i t c h w i l l n o t t u r n o n (s e e p a g e

23-65).!

s t e p 3,

N O - G o to a u d io u n it p o w e r s w itc h w ill n o t tu r n o n (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 6 6 ) . ■

3. C h e c k t o s e e i f t h e d is c e je c t s c o r r e c t l y w i t h n o

3. C h e c k t o s e e i f t h e d is c e je c t s c o r r e c t l y w i t h n o

b in d in g w h e n y o u p u s h th e E JEC T b u tto n .

'b i n d in g w h e n y o u p u s h t h e E J E C T b u t t o n .

Does the disc eject property?

Does the disc eject property?

YES-Operation

is n o r m a l . ! !

N O -S u b s titu te a

known-good

Y E S - O p e r a t i o n is n o r m a l . ® a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it

N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e

( i n c l u d i n g t h e H D D ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ). If t h e

2 3 -1 2 7 ). If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e

s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l

t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 7 ) . ■

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 1 8 ) . ■

Audio disc changer does not load all six discs (without navigation) NOTE:

Audio disc changer does not move between discs (without navigation) NOTE:

• C h e c k t h e v e h i c le b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t

(see page

2 2 -9 4 ).

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e 2 2 -9 4 ).

• C heck th e

connectors f o r poor c o n n e c t i o n s or l o o s e

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls .

te r m in a ls . • D is c l a b e ls s h o u l d n o t b e u s e d in t h e a u d i o u n it . T h e y m a y j a m a n d d a m a g e t h e p la y e r m e c h a n i s m .

• D is c la b e ls s h o u ld n o t b e u s e d in t h e a u d i o u n i t T h e y m a y ja m a n d d a m a g e th e p la y e r m e c h a n is m .

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (ll).

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o u n it , a n d t r y l o a d i n g s i x d is c s i n t o

2. I n s e r t s i x d is c s i n t o t h e a u d i o u n i t ( in - d a s h d is c • c h a n g e r), a n d see if th e c h a n g e r m o v e s b e tw e e n

t h e a u d i o u n i t ( in - d a s h d is c c h a n g e r ) .

d is c s .

Does the audio unit accept a ll six discs? Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e , t h e a u d i o u n i t is O K a t t h i s

YES-lntermittent f a i l u r e ,

tim e .B

NO-Go t o

t h e d i s c c h a n g e r is O K a t t h i s

tim e .B s t e p 3.

3. T r y l o a d i n g t h e d is c p l a y e r w i t h s i x k n o w n - g o o d d is c s .

Does the audio unit (in-dash disc changer) accept aii six discs?

YES-At

Does the changer operate normally?

le a s t o n e o f t h e o r i g i n a l d is c s is f a u l t y . ®

N O - G o t o s t e p 3. 3. In s e r t s i x k n o w n - g o o d d is c s i n t o t h e a u d i o u n i t

Does the changer operate normally? Y E S - A t l e a s t o n e o f t h e o r i g i n a l d is c s is

faulty.!

N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n i t ( in - d a s h d is c

N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n i t ( in - d a s h d is c

c h a n g e r ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e

c h a n g e r ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e

s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l

s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p l a c e t h e o r ig i n a l

a u d io u n it

(in-dash d is c

ch a n g e r)

(see p a g e

2 3 -1 2 7 ).■

a u d i o u n i t ( in - d a s h d is c c h a n g e r ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 7 ) . ■

( c o n t 'd )

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Required 07AAZ-SDBA100

Special Tools Required

S p e c ia l T o o l s

D ia g n o s tic C D 0 7 A A Z -S D B A 1 0 0

D ia g n o s t i c C D

Audio disc does not play (w ith navigation)

Audio disc does not play (without navigation)

NOTE:

NOTE:

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e 2 2 -9 4 ).

2 2 -9 4 ). • C heck th e c o n n e c to rs fo r

poor c o n n e c t i o n s

o r lo o s e

.

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls ,

te r m i n a l s , • D is c la b e ls s h o u l d n o t b e u s e d in t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n

• D is c la b e ls s h o u ld n o t b e u s e d in t h e a u d i o u n i t T h e y m a y ja m a n d d a m a g e th e p la y e r

u n it . T h e y m a y j a m a n d d a m a g e t h e p l a y e r m e c h a n is m .

1. T u r n

1 . T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II). 2. T u r n o n t h e

audio-navigation

Does the disc bad? Y E S - G o t o s t e p 3.

Does the disc bad?

NO-Go to audio disc does not load (see page

Y E S - G o t o s t e p 3.

2 3 -3 3 ).1 1

N O - G o t o a u d i o d is c d o e s n o t l o a d (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 3 ).■

known-good

d is c t o s e e i f t h e s y m p t o m c a n

be d u p lic a te d ,

Insert a known-good disc to see if the symptom can be duplicated. Does the disc play?

NO-Go to step 4.

is n o r m a l , ■

4. Insert audio diagnostic CD (T/N G7AAZ-SDBA100) in the audio unit.

N O - G o t o s te p 4. 4. I n s e r t a u d i o d i a g n o s t i c C D (T /N 0 7 A A Z - S D B A 1 0 0 ) in t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it .

fo r m a t. ll

Y E S - T h e o r ig i n a l d is c is f a u lt y o r h a s a n u n r e a d a b l e fo r m a t. ll

known-good

Does the disc play?

YES-The original disc is faulty or has an unreadable

Does the disc play?

N O - S u b s titu te a

3.

YES-Operation is normal.■

Does the disc play?

YES-Operation

t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o u n it , a n d t r y lo a d i n g a d is c .

u n it , a n d t r y l o a d i n g a

d is c .

3. In s e r t a

mechanism.

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it

( i n c l u d i n g t h e H D D ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ). If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ).■

NO-Substitute a known-good audio unit (see page 23-127). If the sy m pto m/indication goes a w a y , replace the original audio unit (see page 23-127).■

Special Tools Required • Diagnostic CD 07AAZ-SDBA100 • Skip Test CD 07AAZ-SDBA200 • Skip Test CD 07AAZ-SDBA300

5. In s e r t t h e d i a g n o s t i c s k ip t e s t C D (T /N

07AAZ-SDBA300). P l a y

t r a c k s 2 — 11, a n d n o t e o n

w h i c h t r a c k n u m b e r ( s ) t h e d is c s t a r t s s k i p p i n g . D o t h e s a m e t e s t o n a k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic le .

Does the disc skip on the same track(s) as the known-good vehicle?

Audio disc skips (with navigation) NOTE:

Y E S - O p e r a t i o n is n o r m a l . ®

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t

(see page N O - G o t o s t e p 6.

2 2 -9 4 ). • C h e ck th e c o n n e c to rs fo r

poor c o n n e c t i o n s or lo o s e

te r m in a ls .

6. I n s e r t t h e d i a g n o s t i c s k ip t e s t C D (T /N 0 7 A A Z -S D B A 2 O O ). P la y t r a c k s 7 — 11 a n d tr a c k s 1 3 —

• D is c la b e ls s h o u l d n o t b e u s e d in t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it . T h e y m a y j a m a n d d a m a g e t h e p l a y e r m e c h a n is m .

15, a n d n o t e o n w h i c h t r a c k n u m b e r ( s ) t h e d is c s t a r t s s k i p p i n g . D o t h e s a m e t e s t o n a k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic le .

1. C o n f ir m t h e v e h ic l e s t i r e s a r e p r o p e r l y in f la t e d .

Does the disc skip on the same track number(s) a s the known-good vehicle?

2. C h e c k t h e c l i e n t 's d is c f o r s c r a tc h e s a n d f i n g e r p r i n t s .

Y E S - O p e r a t i o n is n o r m a l . ■

N O T E : T h e f o llo w in g te s t s h o u ld b e d o n e w ith th e

N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it

a u d i o s y s t e m b a s s a n d t r e b l e s e t t o t h e c l i e n t 's

( i n c l u d i n g t h e H D D ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ). If t h e

l is t e n in g s e t t in g s . W h e n c o m p a r i n g t o k n o w n - g o o d

s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p l a c e t h e o r ig i n a l

v e h ic le s , d o t h e c o m p a r i s o n o n t h e s a m e m o d e l a n d

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 23 -31

t r i m le v e l. 3. T e s t - d r i v e t h e v e h i c l e t o i d e n t i f y w h e n t h e c l i e n t 's d is c s k ip s . T h e a u d i o d i a g n o s t i c C D (T /N 0 7 A A Z - S D B A 1 0 0 ) c a n b e u s e d i f t h e c l i e n t 's C D is n o t a v a il a b l e ; u s e tr a c k s 1 0 — 12.

Does the disc skip?

YES-Go t o

s te p 4.

NO-Operation

is n o r m a l . ■

4. C o m p a r e t h e c l ie n t 's C D t h a t s k ip s t o a k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic l e u n d e r t h e s a m e c o n d i t i o n s .

Does the disc skip in the known-good vehicle under the same conditions? Y E S - T h e d is c p l a y e r o p e r a t io n is n o r m a l , t h e p r o b l e m is w i t h t h e c l i e n t 's

disc.B

N O - G o t o s te p 5. N O T E : D o t h e f o l lo w i n g t e s t w i t h v e h ic l e p a r k e d a n d th e e n g in e ru n n in g .

B )M

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 6. In s e r t t h e d i a g n o s t i c s k ip t e s t C D (T /N

S p e c ia l T o o l s R e q u ir e d • D ia g n o s tic C D 0 7 A A Z -S D B A 1 0 0

07AAZ-SDBA200).

. S k ip T e s t C D 0 7 A A Z ^ S D B A 2 0 0

15, a n d n o t e o n w h i c h t r a c k

• S k ip T e s t C D 0 7 A A Z ^ S D B A 3 0 0

s k i p p i n g . D o t h e s a m e t e s t o n a k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic le .

Audio disc skips (without navigation)

Does the disc skip on the same track number(s) as the known-good vehicle?

NOTE:

P la y tr a c k s 7 — 11 a n d t r a c k s

number(s) t h e

13—

d is c s ta r ts

Y E S - O p e r a t i o n is n o r m a l . ■

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e

2 2 -9 4 ). • C h e ck th e

connectors f o r poor c o n n e c t i o n s

o r lo o s e

te r m in a ls . • D is c la b e ls s h o u l d n o t b e u s e d in t h e a u d i o u n i t T h e y m a y j a m a n d d a m a g e t h e p la y e r m e c h a n i s m . 1. C o n f ir m t h e v e h ic l e s t ir e s a re p r o p e r l y i n f la t e d . 2. C h e c k t h e c l i e n t 's d is c f o r s c r a tc h e s a n d f i n g e r p r i n t s . N O T E : T h e f o l lo w i n g t e s t s h o u l d b e d o n e w i t h t h e a u d i o s y s t e m b a s s a n d t r e b l e s e t t o t h e c l i e n t 's li s t e n i n g s e t t in g s . W h e n c o m p a r i n g t o k n o w n - g o o d v e h i c l e s, d o t h e c o m p a r i s o n o n t h e s a m e m o d e l a n d t r i m le v e l. 3. T e s t - d r i v e t h e v e h ic l e t o i d e n t i f y w h e n t h e c l i e n t 's d is c s k ip s . T h e a u d i o d i a g n o s t i c C D (T /N 0 7 A A Z - S D B A 1 0 0 ) c a n b e u s e d i f t h e c l i e n t ’s C D is n o t a v a il a b l e ; u s e tr a c k s 1 0 — 12.

Does the disc skip? Y E S - G o t o s t e p 4,

NO-Operation

is n o r m a l .■

4. C o m p a r e t h e c l ie n t 's C D t h a t s k ip s t o a k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic l e u n d e r t h e s a m e c o n d i t i o n s .

Does the disc skip in the known-good vehicle under the same conditions? Y E S - T h e d is c p l a y e r o p e r a t io n is n o r m a l , t h e p r o b l e m is w i t h t h e c l i e n t 's d i s c . ® N O - G o t o s te p 5. N O T E ; D o t h e f o l l o w i n g t e s t w i t h v e h ic l e p a r k e d a n d th e e n g in e ru n n in g . 6. I n s e r t t h e d i a g n o s t i c s k ip t e s t C D (T /N 0 7 A A Z - S D B A 3 0 0 ) . P la y tr a c k s 2 •— 11, a n d n o t e o n w h i c h t r a c k n u m b e r ( s ) t h e d is c s ta r ts s k i p p i n g . D o t h e s a m e t e s t o n a k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic le ,

Does the disc skip on the same track(s) as the known-good vehicle? Y E S - O p e r a t i o n is n o r m a l . ■ N O - G o t o s t e p 6.

2 3 -1 2 7 ). If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 7 ) . ■

Audio-Navigation unit button does not work (with navigation)

Audio unit button does not work (without navigation)

NOTE:

NOTE: • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94).

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e 2 2 -9 4 ). • C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls . • In o r d e r t o t r o u b l e s h o o t t h e m a in p o w e r s w i t c h , g o t o

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls . • In o r d e r t o t r o u b le s h o o t t h e m a in p o w e r s w i t c h , g o t o

a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it p o w e r s w itc h w i l l n o t tu r n o n

a u d i o u n i t p o w e r s w i t c h w i l l n o t t u r n o n (s e e p a g e

(s e e p a g e 2 3 -6 5 ).

2 3 -8 6 ).

1. G o i n t o t h e D e t a i l I n f o r m a t i o n & S e t t i n g s s e le c t U n i t C h e c k , a n d u s e t h e A u d i o k e y t e s t u n d e r H a r d k e y (s e e p a g e 2 3 -2 4 0 ).

1. O p e r a t e a l l i t e m s in t h e a p p r o p r i a t e s w i t c h

l ist.

S w it c h lis t A M , F M , X M , D IS C / A U X , T IT L E , P re s e t

1-6, S C A N ,

Do the buttons work properly?

RPT, A .S E L /R D M ,

Y E S - O p e r a t i o n is n o r m a l .■

Do all the items in the appropriate switch list work properly?

N O - S u b s titu te a k n o w n - g o o d a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it ( i n c l u d i n g t h e H D D ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ). If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ). If t h e s y m p t o m s t i ll p r e s e n t , s u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n p a n e l (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d re c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n p a n e l (s e e p a g e

23-318).!

S K IP , V O L , S O U N D

Y E S - O p e r a t i o n is n o r m a l . ! N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e

23-127).

If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e

t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o u n it (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ). If t h e s y m p to m s t ill p re s e n t, s u b s titu te a k n o w n - g o o d a u d io p a n e l (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d re c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p l a c e t h e o r ig i n a l a u d i o p a n e l (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 7 ) . !

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Audio-Navigation unit disc indicator does not w o rk (w ith navigation)

Audio unit disc indicator does not w o rk (w ith o u t navigation)

NOTE;

NOTE:

• C h e c k t h e v e h i c le b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e

• C h e c k t h e v e h i c l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e

2 2 -9 4 ). • C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls . • D is c s w i t h la b e ls s h o u l d n o t b e u s e d in t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it . T h e y m a y j a m a n d d a m a g e t h e p la y e r m e c h a n is m . 1 . T u r n o n th e a u d io s y s te m , 2. I n s e r t a k n o w n - g o o d d is c o r p r e s s t h e E J E C T b u t t o n .

is the DISC indicator (LED) indicated? Y E S - T h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t is O K a t t h i s t i m e . C h e c k f o r lo o s e o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s a t t h e a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it a n d th e a u d io - n a v ig a tio n p a n e l ,■

2 2 -9 4 ). • C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e t e r m i n a l s. • D is c s w i t h

la b e ls s h o u l d n o t b e u s e d in t h e a u d i o u n i t

T h e y m a y j a m a n d d a m a g e t h e p la y e r m e c h a n i s m , 1. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o s y s t e m , 2. I n s e r t a k n o w n - g o o d d is c o r p r e s s t h e E J E C T b u t t o n . Is

the DISC indicator (LED) indicated?

Y E S - T h e a u d i o u n i t is O K a t t h i s t i m e . C h e c k f o r lo o s e o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s a t t h e a u d i o u n it a n d t h e a u d i o p a n e l.■ N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s

N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it

a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e

( i n c l u d i n g t h e H D D ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If

2 3 -1 2 7 ), If t h e s y m p t o m is s t i ll p r e s e n t , s u b s t i t u t e a

t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e

k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o p a n e l (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d

o r ig i n a l a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ). If t h e

r e c h e c k , If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y ,

s y m p t o m is s t i l l p r e s e n t , s u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d

r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o p a n e l (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 7 ) . B

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n p a n e l (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If th e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p l a c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ),■

USB device does not function (with navigation)

c o n n e c t e d t o t h e U S B p o r t.

Does NO DATA appear?

NOTE: • C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t

5. C h e c k i f N O D A T A a p p e a r s w h e n t h e m u s ic p l a y e r is

(see page

2 2 -9 4 ). • C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e

Y E S - C h e c k t h e n a v ig a t i o n s y s t e m e r r o r c o d e (s e e page 2 3 -1 8 6 ).■ N O - G o t o s t e p 6.

te r m i n a l s . • M a k e s u r e y o u h a v e t h e c l i e n t 's U S B d e v ic e t o u s e f o r te s t in g .

6. C h e c k f o r s o u n d in e a c h m o d e ( A M , F M , X M a n d C D ).

is the sound normal?

• N o t a l l p la y e r s a n d p l a y e r f u n c t i o n s w o r k w i t h t h e U S B p o r t. P le a s e s e e t h e o w n e r ' s m a n u a l f o r m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n . A l w a y s t e s t t h e c l ie n t s U S B d e v ic e in a k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic l e o f t h e s a m e y e a r a n d t r i m ( if

Y E S - C h e c k t h a t t h e r e is n o d i r t o r d a m a g e in t h e U S B p o r t . If t h e U S B p o r t is O K , t h e m u s ic p l a y e r is e i t h e r d e f e c t i v e o r i n c o m p a t i b l e .! !!

p o s s ib le ) . T e c h n o lo g i e s c h a n g e a n d a r e u p d a t e d

N O - G o t o n o s o u n d is h e a r d f r o m t h e s p e a k e r ( s ) (s e e

f r e q u e n t l y w h i c h m a y r e s u lt in t h a t U S B d e v ic e s m a y

page 2 3 -6 8 ).■

w o r k in n e w e r v e h ic le s , b u t n o t in o l d e r v e h ic l e s o f t h e s a m e m o d e l. • M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e m u s ic p l a y e r c o n n e c t e d t o t h e U S B p o rt w o r k s p r o p e r ly . • T h e U S B m e m o r y u s e d f o r t e s t in g s h o u l d c o n f o r m t o th e " U S B m a s s s t o r a g e c l a s s " s t a n d a r d . • T h e U S B f u n c t i o n is n o t c o m p a t i b l e w i t h a U S B m e m o r y o f 1 2 8 M B o r l ess . • T h e m u s ic m u s t b e s a v e d t o t h e p l a y e r a s W M A ( W in d o w s M e d ia A u d io ) file s o r M P 3 . M P 3 file s s a v e d in a v a r i a b le b it ra te a r e n o t c o m p a t i b l e . 1, C o n n e c t a k n o w n - g o o d m u s ic p l a y e r t o t h e U S B p o r t. 2. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (ll). 3. P re s s t h e U S B / A U X b u t t o n , a n d c h e c k i f it c h a n g e s t o USB m ode.

Does it change to the USB mode? Y E S - G o t o s t e p 4. N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it ( i n c l u d in g t h e H D D ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If th e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 1 8 ) . ■ 4, C h e c k t h a t t h e c l i e n t 's U S B d e v ic e f o r i n s p e c t i o n f u n c t i o n s p r o p e r ly w h e n it is c o n n e c t e d t o a k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic le .

Does the device work property? Y E S - G o t o s te p 5, N O - C h e c k t h a t t h e r e is n o d i r t o r d a m a g e in t h e U S B p o r t. If t h e U S B p o r t is O K , t h e m u s ic p l a y e r is e i t h e r d e fe c tiv e o r i n c o m p a t ib le . ! !

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) USB input sound is low or cannot be heard (with navigation) NOTE: • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94). • C h e c k th e c o n n e c to r s f o r p o o r connections o r lo o s e te r m in a ls , • N o t a l l p la y e r s a n d p l a y e r f u n c t i o n s w o r k w i t h t h e U S B

9. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0). 10. C o n n e c t t h e c l i e n t 's U S B d e v ic e t o a k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic l e ( s a m e y e a r / t r i m ) t h a t is e q u i p p e d w i t h a U S B a d a p t e r c o n t r o l u n it , a n d c h e c k t h e U S B d e v ic e o p e r a t io n .

is the USB device working property in the known-good wehide? Y E S - S u b s titu te a k n o w n - g o o d a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it

p o r t. P le a s e s e e t h e o w n e r ' s m a n u a l f o r m o r e

( i n c l u d i n g t h e H D D ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If

i n f o r m a t i o n . A l w a y s t e s t t h e c l ie n t s U S B d e v ic e in a

t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e

k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic l e o f t h e s a m e y e a r a n d t r i m ( if

o r ig i n a l a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 1 8 ) . ■

p o s s i b l e), T e c h n o lo g ie s c h a n g e a n d a r e u p d a t e d f r e q u e n t ly w h i c h m a y r e s u lt in t h a t U S B d e v ic e s m a y

N O - U S B d e v ic e is f a u l t y o r n o t c o m p a t i b l e . A l s o

w o r k in n e w e r v e h ic le s , b u t n o t in o ld e r v e h ic l e s o f t h e

c h e c k t h e U S B c a b le a n d U S B a d a p t e r c o n n e c t o r

s a m e m o d e l,

c o n d itio n .■

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II). 2. D o t h e s p e a k e r c h e c k m o d e w i t h t h e s e l f - d i a g n o s t i c m o d e (s e e p a g e 2 3 -5 2 ).

Do all speakers make a sound?

YES-Go t o

s t e p 3.

N O - G o t o n o s o u n d is h e a r d f r o m t h e s p e a k e r ( s ) (s e e page 2 3 -8 8 ).■ 3. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0). 4. O n t h e c l i e n t 's

vehicle, c o n n e c t

th e c lie n t's U S B

d e v ic e t o t h e U S B p o r t. 5. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II). 8. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o s y s t e m . 7. P re s s t h e U S B / A U X b u t t o n u n t il U S B a p p e a r s o n t h e f r o n t c l i m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t d is p la y . 8. C h e c k i f t h e U S B d e v ic e c a n b e o p e r a t e d w i t h t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it ( F o ld e r s o r F ile s U P /D O W N , e tc .). C a n you operate the USB device, but there is no sound heard?

YES-Go t o

s t e p 9.

N O - l f t h e s o u n d is n o r m a l , t h e U S B d e v ic e is O K a t t h i s t i m e . If t h e U S B d e v ic e c a n n o t b e o p e r a t e d , g o t o U S B d e v ic e d o e s n o t f u n c t i o n (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 0 1 ) . ■

Error code; XM NO SIGNAL or XM LOADING is displafed (w ith navigation)

2 3 -1 3 5 ).

Does the KM radio receive a signal?

NOTE: • C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a tte r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e

Y E S - R e p l a c e t h e o r ig i n a l X M a n t e n n a (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 5 ).■

2 2 -9 4 ). • C h e ck th e

6. S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d X M a n t e n n a (s e e p a g e

connectors f o r poor connection or loose

NO~

te r m in a ls . • C h e c k f o r o t h e r e r r o r c o d e s (s e e p a g e

23-54),

and

c h e c k t h e X M A n t e n n a S ig n a l R e c e p t io n L e v e l (s e e

• W ith A c u r a lin k : S u b s titu te a k n o w n - g o o d X M a n t e n n a le a d . If t h e A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) r e c e iv e s a s ig n a l, r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l X M

p a g e 2 3 -5 6 ),

a n t e n n a l e a d . If t h e A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M 1. P a rk t h e v e h i c l e o u t s i d e w i t h a c le a r v i e w o f th e s o u t h e r n h o r iz o n .

r e c e iv e r ) d o e s n o t r e c e iv e a s i g n a l, s u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d A c u r a li n k c o n tr o l u n it

2. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II). 3. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t a n d s e le c t X M r a d io .

(XM r e c e iv e r )

(s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 3 ), a n d re c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l A c u r a U n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 3 ).■

Does the XM radio receive a signal?

YES-Reception

o p e r a t io n is

normal,®

• W it h o u t A c u ra U n k : S u b s titu te a k n o w n - g o o d X M a n t e n n a le a d . If t h e X M r e c e i v e r r e c e iv e s s i g n a l , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l X M a n t e n n a le a d . If t h e X M r e c e i v e r d o e s n o t r e c e iv e s i g n a l , s u b s t i t u t e a

N O - G o t o s te p 4.

k n o w n - g o o d X M r e c e i v e r u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 3 ),

4. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0).

a n d re c h e c k . I f t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y ,

5. C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t i o n a t X M a n t e n n a 2 P c o n n e c t o r

2 3 -1 3 3 ).■

r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l X M r e c e iv e r u n i t (s e e p a g e a n d A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r B (2P).

Are the connectors connected?

YES-Go t o

s te p 6.

NO-Reconnect t h e

X M a n te n n a

2P c o n n e c t o r a n d (2P) c o n n e c t o r ,

A c u r a U n k c o n tro l u n it c o n n e c to r B

a n d r e c h e c k X M r a d i o o p e r a t io n , If t h e s i g n a l is r e s t o r e d , t h e s y s t e m is O K . If t h e s i g n a l is n o t r e s t o r e d , g o t o s t e p 8.

( c o n t 'd )

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Error code: XM NO SIGNAL or XM LOADING is displayed (without navigation)

Error code: XM ANTENNA is displayed (with AcuraLink)

NOTE;

NOTE:

• C h e c k t h e v e h i c l e b a t t e r y c o n d it io n f i r s t (s e e p a g e

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e 2 2 -9 4 ).

2 2 -9 4 ). • C h e ck th e c o n n e c to rs fo r

poor c o n n e c t i o n

o r lo o s e

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n o r lo o s e te r m in a ls .

te r m in a ls . • C h e c k f o r o t h e r e r r o r c o d e s (s e e p a g e 2 3 -5 4 ) , a n d c h e c k t h e X M A n t e n n a S ig n a l R e c e p tio n L e v e l (s e e

•

If y o u r e p la c e t h e A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l unit (XM r e c e iv e r ) , t h e A c u r a U n k m u s t b e r e a c t iv a t e d b y A c u r a C l ie n t S e r v ic e s .

p a g e 2 3 -5 8 ). 1. P a rk t h e v e h ic l e o u t s i d e w i t h a c l e a r v i e w o f th e s o u t h e r n h o r iz o n .

• C h e c k f o r o t h e r e r r o r c o d e s (s e e p a g e 2 3 -5 4 ) , a n d c h e c k t h e X M A n t e n n a S ig n a l R e c e p t io n L e v e l (s e e p a g e 2 3 -5 8 ).

2. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N ( II).

1. C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r a t t h e

3. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o u n it , a n d s e le c t X M r a d io .

AcuraLink c o n t r o l

u n it (X M

r e c e iv e r ) .

Does the XM radio receive a signal?

is the connector connected?

YES-Reception

YES-Go t o

o p e r a t io n is n o r m a l . ■

N O - G o t o s t e p 4.

s t e p 2.

N O - R e c o n n e c t t h e c o n n e c t o r ( s ) . If t h e e r r o r m e s s a g e d o e s n o t g o a w a y , g o t o s te p 2.

4. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0). 5. C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t i o n a t X M a n t e n n a

2P c o n n e c t o r

2. C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r a t t h e X M a n te n n a .

a n d X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r B (2P).

is the connector connected?

Are the connectors connected?

YES-Go to step 3.

Y E S - G o t o s t e p 6.

NO-Reconnect the connector(s). If the error message does not go a w a y , go to step 3.

NO-Reconnect t h e

X M a n te n n a

r e c e iv e r c o n n e c t o r B

(2P), a n d

2P c o n n e c t o r

and X M

r e c h e c k t h e X M r a d io

o p e r a t io n . If t h e s ig n a l is r e s t o r e d , t h e s y s t e m is O K . If t h e s i g n a l is n o t r e s t o r e d , g o t o s te p 8. 6. S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d X M a n t e n n a (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 5 ).

3. Substitute a known-good XM antenna (see page 2 3 -1 3 5 ).

Is the error message gone?

YES-Replace the original XM antenna (see page 2 3 -1 3 6 ).■

Does the XM radio receive a signal? Y E S - R e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l X M a n t e n n a (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 5 ).■ N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d X M a n t e n n a le a d . If t h e X M r e c e iv e r r e c e iv e s s i g n a l , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l X M a n t e n n a l e a d . If t h e X M r e c e iv e r d o e s n o t r e c e iv e a s ig n a l, s u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d X M r e c e i v e r u n it (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 3 ), a n d re c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p l a c e t h e o r i g i n a l X M r e c e i v e r u n it (s e e page

23-133).■

NO-Go to step 4. 4. Substitute a known-good Acura Link control unit (XM receiver) (see page 23-133). Is the error message gone?

YES-Update the Acura Link control unit (see page 23-366). If it does not have the latest software, then recheck. If the software is the la te s t, substitute a known-good XM antenna le a d , and recheck. If the AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) receivers a signal, replace the original XM antenna lead. If the symptom/indication is still present, replace the original AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) (see p a g e 2 3 -1 3 3 ). ■

NO-Replace the XM antenna le a d .l

Error code: XM ANTENNA is displayed (without AcuraUnk) NOTE: • C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e 2 2 -9 4 ). • C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n o r lo o s e te r m in a ls . • C h e c k f o r o t h e r e r r o r c o d e s (s e e p a g e 2 3 -5 4 ), a n d c h e c k t h e X M A n t e n n a S i g n a l R e c e p t io n L e v e l (s e e p a g e 2 3 -5 8 ). 1. C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r a t t h e X M r e c e iv e r .

Is the connector connected? Y E S - G o t o s te p 2.

XM radio display is blank and no station information is displayed (with navigation with AcuraUnk) NOTE: • C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e 2 2 -9 4 ). • C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls . • If y o u r e p l a c e t h e X M r e c e iv e r , t h e A c u r a l i n k m u s t b e r e a c t iv a t e d b y A c u r a C l i e n t S e r v ic e s . 1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0). 2. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A (3 2 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 1 a n d b o d y g ro u n d .

N O - R e c o n n e c t t h e c o n n e c t o r ( s ) . If t h e e r r o r m e s s a g e

ACURALINK CONTROL

d o e s n o t g o a w a y , g o t o s te p 2.

U N IT

(XM RECEIVER)

C ONNECTOR A (32P)

2. C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r a t t h e X M a n t e n n a , Is

the connector connected?

+ ' 9

Y E S - G o t o s te p 3,

e (WHT)

n— —

— fl

13 " 9 9 ! 6

9 l 9 h 3J i 4 | i 5 h 6 f 117 | 18 119 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | / | 28 129 | 30131 [ /

N O - R e c o n n e c t t h e c o n n e c t o r ( s ) . If t h e e r r o r m e s s a g e d o e s n o t g o a w a y , g o t o s te p 3.

X

3. S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d X M a n t e n n a (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 5 ). Is

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

the error message gone? Is

there battery voltage?

Y E S - R e p l a c e t h e o r ig i n a l X M a n t e n n a (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 5 ).■

Y E S - G o t o s t e p 3.

N O - G o t o s te p 4.

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e N o . 5 (1 0 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y b o x a n d

4. S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d X M r e c e i v e r (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 3 ).

Is the error message gone?

A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n it ( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A (3 2 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 1.11 3. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N ( II).

Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d X M a n t e n n a le a d , a n d re c h e c k . If t h e X M r e c e iv e r r e c e iv e s a s i g n a l, r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l X M a n t e n n a le a d . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n is s t i l l p r e s e n t , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l X M r e c e iv e r (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 3 3 ) . ■ N O - R e p l a c e t h e X M a n t e n n a l e a d . 11

( c o n t 'd )

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 4. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n

Acura Link c o n t r o l

u n it

8. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n A c u r a U n k c o n t r o l u n it

( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A (32P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 3 a n d

( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A (3 2 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 2 8 a n d

b o d y g ro u n d .

b o d y g ro u n d .

A C U R A U N K CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (32P)

(XM RECEIVER)

A C U R A LIN K CONTROL U N IT (X M RECEIVER) CONNECTOR A (32P)

ACC (PUR) ’

i

M

I M

n I---------------- r ’ ’ I 2 I 3 I 9 9 I 6 9 7 L Z F /1 /|l3 |H |l5 |l6 | | 17 | 18 119 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 2S | 26 | / | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | /

/ | / | 13 114 J15 116 |

/ I *

117 | 18 119 | 2 0| 21 122 I 23 \ Z4 \ 25 J 28 [ / | 2 8 | 29 [ 30 | 31 /

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is there battery voltage?

is there less than 0,2 ¥?

YES-Go t o s te p 5.

YES-Go

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e N o . 3 2

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n o r h ig h r e s is t a n c e in t h e w i r e

t o s t e p 7.

AcuraLink c o n t r o l

(1 0 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e la y b o x a n d

b e tw e e n

Acura Link c o n t r o l

c o n n e c t o r A (3 2P ) t e r m i n a l N o , 2 8 a n d b o d y g r o u n d

u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A

(G606)

(3 2P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 3.11 5, M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n

Acura Link c o n t r o l

u n it

( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A (3 2P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 2 a n d b o d y g ro u n d .

1G1 (LT BLU) ! ---------------- n -

„

„

„

9 9 9 7 1 7 9 1 1 9 9 b ° l / I 9 13 M 15I 18I 117 118 119 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | / | 28129 | 30131 /

X) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls Is

there battery voltage?

YES-Go t o

s t e p 6,

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e N o . 21 (7 .5 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y b o x a n d A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n it ( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A

(32P) t e r m i n a l

8. D i s c o n n e c t a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t c o n n e c t o r D (1 4P )

N o . 2.11

Acura Link c o n t r o l

(3 2P ).

(XM RECEIVER)

22-46).I

7. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o LOCK. (0).

and

A C U R A U N K CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A f32P)

(s e e p a g e

u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r )

u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A

9. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n A c u r a U n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A (3 2P ) a n d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t c o n n e c t o r D (1 4 P ) a c c o r d i n g t o t h e t a b l e.

AcuraLink

Audio-Navigation

c o n tr o l u n it

u n it c o n n e c to r

10. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d A c u r a U n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A (3 2 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 3 0 a n d N o . 31 i n d i v i d u a ll y . A C U R A U N K C O NTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (32P)

W ire c o lo r

(XM RECEIVER)

(XM m m m efl c o n n e c to r A30

■

A31

D9

GRN

D10

RED

A C U R A LIN K C ONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (32P)

^

/l/lis lw lttfie f l/l/l 117 118 119 | 20 | 21 | 22123 | 24 | 26 | 26 | / | 28129 | 30131 [ / G A -N E T J . G A -N E T B U S A + /JE T JL BU S A — (GRN) O f f i ) R E D )

(XM RECEIVER!

7171 7 l9 l9 h ° 117 J18 119 | 20 j 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 125 j 26 28129 j 30 j 31 \ /

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls Is

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

there continuity?

Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e b e tw e e n t h e a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it a n d th e

A U D IO -N A V IG A T IO N U N IT CONNECTOR D (14P)

c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) , R e p la c e t h e a f f e c t e d s h ie ld e d h a r n e s s ,®

/

2

/

/ |

4

3 9

10 /

/

5

6

13 14

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is

there continuity?

YES-Go t o

s t e p 10.

NO-There is a n o p e n in t h e wire(s) b e t w e e n t h e audio-navigation u n i t a n d t h e A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n i t (XM r e c e iv e r ) . R e p l a c e t h e a f f e c t e d s h i e l d e d h a rn e s s .®

wire(s) AcuraUnk

N O - G o t o s t e p 11.

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 11. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s o f A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A (3 2P ) a c c o r d i n g t o t h e ta b le . F ro m te r m in a l

T o te r m in a ls

A 2 9 (B R N

A 3 0 (G R N ), A 3 1 (R E D )

A 3 0 (G R N )

A 3 1 (R E D )

XM radio d isp la f is blank and no station inform ation is displayed (w ith navigation w ith o u t AcuraLink)

.

NOTE: • C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e 2 2 -9 4 ),

A C U R A U N K CONTROL U N IT (X M RECEIVER! CONNECTOR A |32PJ

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls . 1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0). 2. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n

I 2 l 3 T /1 9 1 6 117 118

I. .1 /1 9 1 .!° 9 9 1 13114 M

16 f

KM r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r

A (1 4 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 1 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .

X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls ] + B (W HT) Is

1

there continuity between any of the terminals?

2

/

Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t in t h e w i r e s b e t w e e n t h e

9

Hssan 10 11

8 9 /

5

8

13 14

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it a n d t h e A c u r a U n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) . R e p l a c e t h e a f f e c t e d s h i e l d e d h a rn e e s .B N O - S u b s titu te a k n o w n - g o o d a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it ( i n c l u d i n g t h e H D D ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ). If t h e

1 W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is there battery voltage? Y E S - G o t o s t e p 3,

s y m p t o m is s t i ll p r e s e n t , s u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e N o . 5

A c u r a L in k c o n t r o l u n i t o r u p d a t e t h e A c u r a t i n k

(1 0 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y b o x a n d X M

c o n t r o l u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 6 8 ), i f it d o e s n o t h a v e t h e

r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 1 . ■

l a te s t s o f t w a r e , a n d re c h e c k . If t h e s y m p to m /in d ic a tio n g o e s a w a y a fte r th e s u b s titu tio n , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 3 ). If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y a f t e r t h e u p d a t e , t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is c o m p le te . If th e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n is s t i l l p r e s e n t , g o t o s t e p 1, a n d re c h e c k .B

3. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

4. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4P ) t e r m i n a l N o . '11 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .

8. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t

XM

c o n n e c t o r D (1 4 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 2 a n d

r e c e iv e r

c o n n e c t o r A (1 4 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 2. K M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A

(14P)

A U D IO -N A V IG A T IO N U N IT CONNECTOR D

(14P)

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls jA C G fRED) 1

2

3 CD

9/

10 11

9 5 / 13

GND

14

(BLK)

92 / /

3 9

10

/

4

/

5

3

13 14

(v )

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is there less than 0.2 ¥?

ACC {RED) 1

2

/ /

Y E S - G o t o s t e p 5. N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n o r h ig h r e s is t a n c e in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4P ) t e r m i n a l N o .

3 9

10 11

95 / 13

XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A

6 14 (14P)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

11 a n d b o d y g r o u n d (G 6 0 6 ) (s e e p a g e 2 2 - 4 8 ) . ■

Is there continuity?

6. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0). 6. D i s c o n n e c t a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t c o n n e c t o r D (1 4P )

Y E S - G o t o s t e p 9. N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e

a n d X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4P ). 7. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r

a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it a n d th e X M r e c e iv e r . !

A (1 4P ) t e r m i n a l N o , 2 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .

X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A

(14P)

ACC {RED) 1

2

/ /

3 9

10 11

9 /

5

6

13 14

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is there continuity? Y E S - R e p a i r a s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e w i r e b e tw e e n th e a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it a n d th e X M r e c e iv e r ,!!

( c o n t 'd )

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 9. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n a u d i o - n a v ig a t io n - u n i t

(14P) a n d XM

c o n n e c to r D

r e c e iv e r c o n n e c to r A

(14P)

a c c o r d i n g t o t h e t a b l e.

11. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s o f X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4 P ) a c c o r d i n g t o t h e t a b le .

From terminal

Audio-Navigation

KM re c e iv e r

u n it c o n n e c to r

c o n n e c to r

D9

A9

D10

A10

Wire c o l o r

To terminals

A 3 (B R N )

A 9 (G R N ), A 1 0 (R E D )

A 9 (G R N )

A10

(R E D ]

GRN X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A

A U D IO -N A V IG A T IO N U N IT CONNECTOR

D (14P) 1

9

2 /

H*an 9 10

4

3 /

/

5

(14P)

2

6 /

13 14

/

3 9

10 11

9 /

5

8

13 14

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A 1 /

2 /

nan 9 10 11

3

9 /

(14P) Is there

5

continuity between any of the terminals?

0 Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t in t h e w i r e s b e t w e e n t h e

13 14

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t a n d t h e X M r e c e iv e r . R e p la c e th e a ffe c te d s h ie ld e d h a r n e s s .®

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s N O - S u b s titu te a k n o w n - g o o d a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it ( i n c l u d i n g t h e H D D ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If i s there

t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e

continuity?

o r i g i n a l a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t {s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ). If t h e Y E S ~ G o t o s t e p 10.

NO~There

s y m p t o m is s t i l l p r e s e n t , s u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d X M

is a n o p e n in t h e

wire(s)

b e tw e e n th e

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t a n d t h e X M r e c e iv e r . R e p la c e ■t h e a f f e c t e d s h i e l d e d

XM r e c e i v e r (s e e p a g e 23-133).B

harness.!

10. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 9 a n d N o . 10 i n d i v i d u a ll y .

X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)

1

2

/ G A -N E T BU S A +

rsrar 9

10 11

3

9

5

0

13 14

/ G A -N E T BU S A — (RED)

(GRN)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s Is there

r e c e i v e r (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 3 ), a n d r e c h e c k , i f t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l

continuity?

Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e

wire(s)

b e tw e e n th e a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it a n d th e X M r e c e iv e r . R e p la c e t h e a f f e c t e d s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . ®

XM radio display is blank and no station

5. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0),

information is displayed (without navigation)

6. D i s c o n n e c t a u d i o u n i t c o n n e c t o r D (1 4 P ) a n d X M r e c e iv e r c o n n e c t o r A

NOTE: • C h e c k t h e v e h i c l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e

7. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n X M A (1 4P )

2 2 -9 4 ).

(14P).

terminal N o .

2

and

receiver connector

b o d y g ro u n d .

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls .

X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)

1 . T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0). ]A C C (RED)

2. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4P ) t e r m i n a l N o , 1 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .

1

7

/ X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A

9

2 9

10 11

5

6

13 14

/

(14P) U

1 + B (W H T) 1 /

2

3 9

/

10 11

5 /

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

8

Is there continuity?

13 14

Y E S - R e p a i r a s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e w i r e b e tw e e n th e a u d io u n it a n d th e X M r e c e iv e r ,®

_L

N O - G o t o s t e p 8. W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls 8. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n a u d i o u n i t c o n n e c t o r D

is there battery voltage?

(1 4P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 2 a n d X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A

YES-Go

(1 4P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 2.

t o s te p 3.

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e N o . 5 (.10 A ) fu s e i n

the

A U D IO U N IT CONNECTOR

u n d e r-d a s h fu s e /re la y b o x a n d X M

r e c e iv e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4 P )

terminal N o .

D (14P)

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

1.11 m C C (RED)

3, T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II),

2

4. M e a s u r e t h e v o lt a g e b e t w e e n X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r

/

4

3 9

10

/

5

6

13 14

A (1 4P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 11 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .

XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR

A (14P) .ACC (RED) 1

1 /

2 /

3 /

_ r i

9

10 11

5

0

/

13 14 / GN D (BLK)

(X) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

/

3 / 9

10 1.1

6

A

(14P)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

continuity?

Y E S - G o t o s t e p 9.

NO-Repair a n o p e n in t h e and the XM receiver.®

Y E S - G o t o s te p 5.

/

5

13 14

XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR

Is there

is there less than 0.2 V?

2

w ir e b e tw e e n th e a u d io u n it

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n o r h ig h r e s is t a n c e in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 11 a n d b o d y g r o u n d

(G606)

(s e e p a g e 2 2 - 4 8 ) . ■

(cont'd)

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 9. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n a u d i o u n i t c o n n e c t o r D (1 4P ) a n d X M r e c e iv e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4 P ) a c c o r d i n g t o

11. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s o f X M r e c e iv e r c o n n e c to r A

t h e t a b l e. F ro m A u d io u n it

receiver

XM

c o n n e c to r

W ir e c o lo r

(14P)

a c c o r d i n g t o t h e t a b le .

termina

T o te r m in a ls

A 3 (B R N )

A9

(GRN), A 1 0

A 9 (G R N )

c o n n e c to r

D9

A9

GRN

D10

A10

RED

(R E D )

RED]

X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) A U D IO U N IT CONNECTOR D (14P)

9

1 2

4

3 9

10

/

/

5

2

6 /

13 14

/

3 9

10 11

9

5

6

13 14

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) 1

2

3 9

/

10 11

is there continuity between any of the terminals?

9

5

/

13 14

6 Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t in t h e w i r e s b e t w e e n t h e a u d i o u n it a n d th e s h ie ld e d

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

XM r e c e iv e r . R e p la c e t h e a f f e c t e d

harness.!

N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 2 7 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e

is there continuity?

YES-Go to s t e p NO-There

2 3 -1 2 7 ). If t h e s y m p t o m is s t i l l p r e s e n t s u b s t i t u t e a 10,

k n o w n - g o o d X M r e c e iv e r (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 3 ), a n d

is a n o p e n in t h e w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n t h e a u d i o

u n i t a n d t h e X M r e c e iv e r . R e p la c e t h e a f f e c t e d s h i e ld e d h a r n e s s . ■ 10. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 9 a n d N o . 10 i n d i v i d u a l ly,

X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)

1

2

/ / G A -N ET SUSA+ (GRN)

3 9

9

10 11

5

8

13 14

/ G A -N E T B U S A fRED)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is there continuity? Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e

wire(s)

b e t w e e n t h e a u d i o u n i t a n d t h e X M r e c e iv e r . R e p la c e th e a ffe c te d s h ie ld e d h a rn e s s .■

r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l

XM r e c e i v e r (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 3 3 ) . ■

XM radio preset memory is lost (with navigation with AcuraLink)

8. M e a s u r e t h e v o lt a g e b e t w e e n A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A (3 2 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 1 a n d b o d y g ro u n d .

NOTE: A C U R A LIN K C ONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (32P)

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e

(XM RECEIVER)

2 2 -3 4 ). • C h e c k th e c o n n e c to rs f o r p o o r c o n n e c tio n s o r lo o s e + B fV ¥ H T )

te r m in a ls . •

n—

n

99113W15161

If y o u r e p la c e t h e A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l unit (XM r e c e iv e r ) , t h e A c u r a l i n k m u s t b e r e a c t iv a t e d b y A c u r a C l ie n t

r [ 7 P ?R 117 118 119 | 20 | 21 | 22 123 | 24 | 25 | 26 | / | 28129 | 30131 | /

S e r v ic e s . • If y o u c a n o n l y t u n e t o c h a n n e l 0 0 0 , 0 0 1 , 1 7 4 , a n d 2 4 7 ,

X

m a k e s u r e t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t is s e t t o c h a n n e l m o d e (s e e o w n e r ' s m a n u a l ), i f it is s e t t o c h a n n e l

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

m o d e , c a l l X M S a t e l l i t e R a d io c l i e n t s u p p o r t , a n d c h e c k t h e a c c o u n t a c t i v a t i o n s ta t u s .

Is there battery voltage?

• L o c k a n d u n lo c k t h e v e h ic l e w i t h t h e r e m o t e t o m a k e s u r e t h e v e h i c le r e c o g n iz e s w h i c h r e m o t e ( d r i v e r 1 o r

Y E S - G o t o s t e p 7.

d r i v e r 2) is b e in g u s e d .

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e N o . 5

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

(1 0 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e la y b o x a n d A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A

2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o s y s t e m a n d s e t e a c h o f t h e X M

(3 2 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 1.11

ra d io c h a n n e l p re s e t b u tto n s . 7. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

Do each of the XM radio channel preset buttons set property?

8. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A

YES-Go t o

s t e p 3.

(3 2 P ) t e r m i n a l s N o . 2 a n d N o . 3 i n d i v i d u a l ly.

N O - G o t o s t e p 5.

A C U R A U N K CONTROL U N IT ( X M RECEIVER) CONNECTOR A (32P)

3. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0) f o r 1 m i n u t e , a n d t h e n b a c k t o O N (II).

IG1 (LT

B LU !

ACC (PUR)

4. T e s t a l l o f t h e X M r a d i o c h a n n e l p r e s e t b u t t o n s f o r p r o p e r r e c a ll o p e r a t io n .

Do the preset buttons recall the set radio stations? Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e , t h e s y s t e m is n o r m a l a t t h i s tim e . C h e c k c o n n e c tio n s a t th e

audio-navigation

u n it.! NO-Go t o

s t e p 5.

Is there battery .voltage ? 5. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0). Y E S - G o t o s t e p 9. N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e N o . 21 (7 .5 A ) f u s e a n d t h e N o . 3 2 (1 0 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r- d a s h fu s e /re la y b o x a n d

AcuraUnk c o n t r o l u n i t

( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A (3 2 P ) t e r m i n a l s N o . 2 a n d N o . 3.11

( c o n t 'd )

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 3. M e a s u r e t h e v o lt a g e b e t w e e n A c u r a U n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A (3 2P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 2 8 a n d b o d y g ro u n d .

XM radio preset m em ory is lost (w ith navigation w ith o u t AcuraUnk) NOTE:

A C U R A LIN K C ONTROL U N IT (X M RECEIVER! CONNECTOR A (32P)

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e 2 2 -9 4 ). • C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e

n_a__ __ n_____ ___ fc— —

— f

_____ jn L _ _ ri

1399 6799!1 0

’ I2 117 118 119 | 20 | 21 | 22 123 | 24 125 1261 / | 28| 29 130 131 | /

G N D (BLK)

(V) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is there less than 0.2 V?

te r m in a ls , • If y o u c a n o n ly t u n e t o c h a n n e l 0 0 0 , 0 0 1 , 1 7 4 , a n d 2 4 7 , m a k e s u r e t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t is s e t t o c h a n n e l m o d e (s e e o w n e r ' s m a n u a l ) , i f it is s e t t o c h a n n e l m o d e , c a ll

XM r a d i o c l i e n t s u p p o r t , a n d c h e c k t h e

a c c o u n t a c t i v a t i o n s ta t u s . • L o c k a n d u n lo c k t h e v e h ic l e w i t h t h e r e m o t e t o m a k e s u r e t h e v e h i c l e r e c o g n iz e s w h i c h r e m o t e ( d r i v e r 1 o r d r i v e r 2) is b e in g u s e d .

Y E S - U p d a t e t h e A c u r a U n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r )

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

(s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 8 8 ) i f it d o e s n o t h a v e t h e l a te s t

2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o s y s t e m , a n d s e t e a c h o f t h e X M

s o f t w a r e , a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e s o f t w a r e is t h e la te s t,

ra d io c h a n n e l p re s e t b u tto n s .

s u b s titu te a k n o w n - g o o d A c u r a U n k c o n tr o l u n it (X M r e c e iv e r ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 3 ), a n d re c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) (s e e p a g e

Do each of the XM radio channel preset buttons set properly? Y E S - G o t o s t e p 3.

2 3 -1 3 3 ).■ N O - G o t o s t e p 5. N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n o r h i g h r e s is t a n c e in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n A c u r a L in k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A (3 2 P ) t e r m i n a l N o , 2 8 a n d b o d y g r o u n d ( G 6 0 6 ) (s e e p a g e 2 2 - 4 6 ) . ■

3. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0) f o r 1 m i n u t e , a n d t h e n b a c k t o O N (II). 4. T e s t a ll o f t h e X M r a d i o c h a n n e l p r e s e t b u t t o n s f o r p r o p e r r e c a l l o p e r a t io n ,

Do the preset buttons recall the set radio stations? Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e , t h e s y s t e m is n o r m a l a t t h i s tim e . C h e c k c o n n e c tio n s a t th e a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it ll N O - G o t o s t e p 5, 5. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o LOCK. (0).

8. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 1 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .

XM RECEIVER

11. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 2 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .

X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A

CONNECTOR A (14P)

|+B(WHT) 1

2

/I /

(14P)

ACC (RED)

9

-ssr 9 10 11

/

5

1

6

13 14

2

9

/

3 9

10 11

9

5

8

13 14

/

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is there battery voltage?

Is there continuity?

Y E S - G o t o s te p 7.

Y E S - R e p a i r a s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it a n d t h e X M

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e N o . 5

r e c e iv e r . ■

(1 0 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y b o x a n d X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 1 . ■

12. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t

7. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II). 8, M e a s u r e t h e v o lt a g e b e t w e e n

N O - G o t o s t e p 12.

XM r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r

c o n n e c t o r D (1 4 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 2 a n d X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 2.

A (1 4 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 11 a n d b o d y g r o u n d . A U D iO -N A V iG A IiO N U N IT CONNECTOR D (14P) X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls jA C G (RED)

9 1 /

2 /

3 9

10 11

9 9 13 5

8

2 9

/

/

4

3 10 /

/

5

8

13 14

14

G ND (BLK)

! ACC (RED) 1

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is there less than 0.2 V? Y E S - G o t o s t e p 9.

/ X M

N o . 11 a n d b o d y g r o u n d (G 6 0 6 ) (s e e p a g e 2 2 - 4 6 ) . ■ 9. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0), 10, D is c o n n e c t a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t c o n n e c t o r D (1 4P ) a n d X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4P ).

/

3 9

10 11

9 /

5

0

13 14

RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n o r h i g h r e s is t a n c e in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4 P ) t e r m i n a l

2

Is there continuity? Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d X M r e c e i v e r (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 3 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l X M r e c e i v e r (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 3 ).■ N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it a n d th e X M r e c e iv e r .®

( c o n t 'd )

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) XM radio preset memory is lost (without navigation)

6. M e a s u r e t h e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 1 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .

NOTE:

K M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)

• C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e 2 2 -9 4 ).

] +B (WHT)

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r s f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls ,

1

2

9/

• If y o u c a n o n l y t u n e t o c h a n n e l 0 0 0 , 0 0 1 , 1 7 4 , a n d 2 4 7 , m a k e s u r e t h e u n it is s e t t o c h a n n e l m o d e (s e e o w n e r ’s

9

rsan 10 11

3

9 /

5

6

13 14

m a n u a l ), i f it is s e t t o c h a n n e l m o d e , c a ll X M r a d io

I

c lie n t s u p p o r t, a n d c h e c k th e a c c o u n t a c tiv a tio n s ta t u s .

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II). Is

there battery voltage?

2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o s y s t e m , a n d s e t e a c h o f t h e X M ra d io c h a n n e l p re s e t b u tto n s ,

Y E S - G o t o s t e p 7.

Do each of the KM radio channel preset buttons set property?

N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e N o . 5

\ __ — >t o s te p 3,

(1 0 A ) f u s e in t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y b o x a n d X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 1 . ■ 7. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II).

N O - G o t o s t e p 5, 8. M e a s u r e t h e v o lt a g e b e t w e e n X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r 3. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0) f o r 1 m i n u t e , a n d t h e n b a c k t o O N (I I). 4. T e s t a ll o f t h e X M r a d io c h a n n e l p r e s e t b u t t o n s f o r p r o p e r r e c a l l o p e r a t io n .

A (1 4 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 11 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .

K M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A

(14P)

Do the preset buttons recall the set radio stations? Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e , t h e s y s t e m is n o r m a l a t t h i s tim e . C h e c k c o n n e c tio n s a t th e a u d io u n it . B

1 /

2 /

3 9

10 11

9 /

5

8

13 14

N O - G o t o s te p 5. 5. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0).

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

Is there less than 0,2 V? Y E S - G o t o s t e p 3. N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n o r h i g h r e s is t a n c e in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 11 a n d b o d y g r o u n d (G 6 0 6 ) (s e e p a g e 2 2 - 4 6 ) . ! 9. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0). 10. D is c o n n e c t a u d i o u n i t c o n n e c t o r D (1 4 P ) a n d X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (14P ),

11. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4 P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 2 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .

Poor or no sound w ith XM radio (Audio-Navigation unit does d isp la f KM channels) (w ith navigation)

X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) NOTE: • C h e c k t h e v e h i c le b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e ACC fRED) 1

/

2

2 2 -3 4 ). 8 /

10 11

/ [ 9

5

8

13 14

/

• C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls . • C h e c k t h e X M r a d io r e c e p t i o n in a n o p e n a r e a . P o o r r e c e p t i o n / i n t e r f e r e n c e c a n b e c a u s e d b y t a ll b u il d in g s , m o u n t a in s , o r h i g h - v o lt a g e p o w e r lin e s a r e n e a r b y . ' • If y o u c a n o n l y t u n e t o c h a n n e l 0 0 0 , 0 0 1 , 1 7 4 , a n d 2 4 7 ,

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

m a k e s u r e t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it is s e t t o c h a n n e l m o d e (s e e o w n e r ' s m a n u a l ) , i f it is s e t t o c h a n n e l

is there continuity?

m o d e , c a ll X M S a t e ll ite R a d io c l i e n t s u p p o r t , a n d Y E S - R e p a i r a s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e w i r e b e tw e e n th e a u d io u n it a n d th e X M r e c e iv e r .®

c h e c k t h e a c c o u n t a c t i v a t i o n s ta t u s . • If y o u r e p la c e t h e A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) , t h e A c u r a l i n k m u s t b e r e a c t iv a t e d b y A c u r a C lie n t

N O - G o t o s t e p 12.

S e r v ic e s . 12. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n a u d i o u n i t c o n n e c t o r D (1 4P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 2 a n d X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4P ) t e r m i n a l N o . 2.

1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II). 2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o s y s t e m a n d s e le c t X M r a d io .

A U D IO U N IT CONNECTOR D (14P) W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s

3. C h e c k f o r a n e r r o r m e s s a g e o n t h e d is p la y .

Are there any messages displayed?

ACC fREDJ

/

2

3

/

9

10

/

4

/

Y E S - G o t o e r r o r c o d e lis t (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 5 7 ) , ■ 5

8

13 14

NO• W i t h A c u r a L in k : G o t o s t e p 4. • W i t h o u t A c u r a U n k : G o t o s t e p 9. 4. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0).

ACC (RED) 1

2

/ /

Hssri 9 10 11

3

9

5. D i s c o n n e c t t h e s e i te m s : 5

8

13 14

X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls Is

• A u d i o - N a v i g a t i o n u n i t c o n n e c t o r D (1 4P ) • H a n d s F r e e L in k c o n t r o l u n i t 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r • A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A (3 2P )

there continuity?

Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d X M r e c e i v e r (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 3 ), a n d re c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l X M r e c e i v e r (s e e p a g e

23-133).H N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it a n d th e X M r e c e iv e r . il

( c o n t 'd )

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 6. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it c o n n e c to r D

(14P)

a c c o rd in g to

7. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s o f a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t c o n n e c t o r D (1 4 P ) a c c o r d i n g t o t h e t a b le .

t h e ta b le . W ir e c o lo r

A u d io - N a v ig a tio n u n it c o n n e c to r

F ro m

terminal

T o te r m in a ls

D 4 (G R Y )

D 5 (R E D ), D 8 (B L K ), D 1 3 (WHT), D 1 4 (G R N )

D 5 (R E D )

D 8 (B L K ), D 1 3 ( W H T ) , D 1 4 (G R N

RED

D5 D6

BLK

D13

WHT

D14

GRN

D 6 (B L K )

D 1 3 (W H T ) , D 1 4 (G R N )

D13

D 1 4 (G R N )

(W H T )

A U D iO -N A V iG A T lO N U N IT CONNECTOR D (14P) A U D iO -N A V lG A T IO N U N IT CONNECTOR D (14P)

9 2 9/

3

nsaq 9

10

/

4

/

5

8

/ 2 / /

14

3

rrsan 9

10

/

4

/

5

6

13 14

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is there continuity? is there continuity between any of the terminals? Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e w ir e ( s ) b e t w e e n t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it a n d t h e A c u r a U n k

Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t in t h e w i r e s b e t w e e n t h e

c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) . R e p la c e t h e a f f e c t e d

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t a n d t h e A c u r a U n k c o n t r o l u n it

s h ie ld e d h a r n e s s .®

( X M r e c e iv e r ) . R e p la c e t h e a f f e c t e d s h i e l d e d h a rn e s s .■

N O - G o t o s t e p 7. N O - G o t o s t e p 8.

AcuraUnk control u n i t (32P) a n d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n

8. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n ( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c t o r A

10. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t c o n n e c to r D

(14P)

a n d X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4P )

a c c o r d i n g t o t h e ta b le ,

u n i t c o n n e c t o r D (1 4P ) a c c o r d i n g t o t h e ta b le . A u d io - N a v ig a tio n

A c u ra U n k

W ire

A u d io - N a v ig a tio n

u n it c o n n e c to r

c o n tr o l u n it

c o lo r

u n it c o n n e c to r

XM

re c e iv e r

D5

( X M r e c e iv e r ) c o n n e c to r A13

RED

5

BLK I

A14 A16

W ire

color

c o n n e c to r A5

RED

A6

...... BLK... .. WHT

A13

>14

A14

N

WHT GRN A U D IO -N A V IG A T IO N U N IT CONNECTOR D (14P)

9 /

A U D iO -N A ¥ iG A IlO N U N IT CONNECTOR D (14P)

92 / /

3 9

10

/

4

/

5

2

4

3 9

/

10

5

6

13 14

6 W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

13 14

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)

A C U R A LIN K CONTROL U N IT (X M RECEIVER) CONNECTOR A (32P)

1

2

/ / 9 1 / 1 13 14 15 J 16 117 I 18 119 I 20 I 21 I 22 I 23 I 24 I 25 I 26 \ / \ 28129 | 30 | 31 [ /

3 9

10 11

9 /

5

6

13 14

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

is there continuity? Y E S - G o t o s t e p 11.

Is there continuity? Y E S -S u b s titu te a k n o w n -g o o d

AcuraLink c o n t r o l

u n it

( X M r e c e iv e r ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 3 ), t h e n r e c o n n e c t a ll c o n n e c t o r s , a n d re c h e c k , If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n

NO-There

is a n o p e n in t h e w i r e ( s ) b e t w e e n t h e

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t a n d t h e X M r e c e iv e r . R e p la c e t h e a f f e c t e d s h i e ld e d h a r n e s s . ■

g o e s a w a y , u p d a t e t h e A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 6 6 ), i f it d o e s n o t h a v e t h e la te s t s o f t w a r e , a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e s o f t w a r e is t h e la te s t, r e p la c e t h e A c u r a l i n k c o n t r o l u n i t ( X M r e c e iv e r ) (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 3 ). If s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n is s t i ll p r e s e n t , r e p la c e t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 3 1 8 ) . ■ MO- T h e re is a n o p e n in t h e

wire(s)

b e tw e e n th e

a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it a n d th e A c u r a li n k c o n t r o l u n it ( X M r e c e iv e r ) . R e p l a c e t h e a f f e c t e d s h i e l d e d h a rn e s s .■ 9. D i s c o n n e c t th e s e it e m s : • A u d i o - N a v i g a t i o n u n i t c o n n e c t o r D (1 4P ) • H a n d s F r e e L in k c o n t r o l u n i t 2 8 P c o n n e c t o r • XM

receiver connector A (14P)

( c o n t 'd )

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 11. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d

12. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s o f

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t c o n n e c t o r D (1 4 P ) a c c o r d i n g t o

audio-navigation

t h e t a b le .

c a b le .

Audio-Navigation

u n it

W ir e c o lo r

c o n n e c to r D5

Rl

Dt

ID T "

D14

A U D lO -N A V iG A T iO N U N IT C ONNECTOR D

F ro m te r m in a l P 4 (G R Y )

T o te r m in a ls D 5 (R E D ), D 8 (BLK), D 1 3 ( W H T ) , D 1 4 (G R N )

D 5 (R E D )

D6(BLK),D13(WHT),

D 8 (B L K )

D 1 3 (W H T ) , D 1 4 (G R N )

D 1 3 (W H T )

D 1 4 (G R N )

D 1 4 (G R N )

.“..._ .“WHT "g r n

D13

c o n n e c t o r D (1 4P ) a c c o r d i n g t o t h e

(14P) AUDIO-NAVIGATION U N IT

/ 2 / /

9

!-sean 10

/

8

4

/

5

CONNECTOR D (14P)

8

/ 2 / /

13 14

4

3 9

10

/

/

5

8

18 14

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

Is

there continuity? is there continuity between any of the terminals?

Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e

wire(s)

b e tw e e n th e a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it a n d th e X M r e c e iv e r . R e p la c e t h e a f f e c t e d s h i e l d e d h a r n e s s . ®

Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t in t h e w i r e s b e t w e e n t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t a n d t h e X M r e c e iv e r . R e p la c e th e a ffe c te d s h ie ld e d h a rn e s s .■

N O - G o t o s t e p 12. N O - S u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), a n d r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l

audio-navigation

u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ), If t h e

s y m p t o m is s t i l l p r e s e n t , s u b s t i t u t e a k n o w n - g o o d X M r e c e i v e r (s e e p a g e

23-133), a n d

re c h e c k . If th e

s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r ig i n a l X M r e c e i v e r (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 3 3 ) . ■

Poor or no sound with XM radio (Audio unit does display XM channels) (without navigation) NOTE: • C h e c k t h e v e h ic l e b a t t e r y c o n d i t i o n f i r s t (s e e p a g e

8. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s o f a u d i o u n i t c o n n e c t o r D (1 4 P ) a c c o r d i n g t o t h e t a b l e.

To terminals D5 (RED), D6 (BLK), D13 (WHT), D14 (GRN) D6 (BLK), D13 D14 (GRN D13 (WHT), D14 (GRN) D14 (GRN)

From terminal D4 (GRY) D5 (RED)

2 2 -9 4 ). • C h e c k t h e c o n n e c t o r f o r p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r lo o s e te r m in a ls .

D6(BLK) D13 (WHT)

• C h e c k t h e X M r a d i o r e c e p t i o n in a n o p e n a r e a . P o o r r e c e p t i o n / i n t e r f e r e n c e c a n b e c a u s e d b y t a l l b u i ld i n g s , m o u n t a i n s , o r h i g h - v o l t a g e p o w e r lin e s a r e n e a r b y .

A U D IO U N IT CONNECTOR D (14P)

• If y o u c a n o n l y t u n e t o c h a n n e l 0 0 0 , 0 0 1 , 1 7 4 , a n d 2 4 7 , m a k e s u r e t h e a u d i o u n i t is s e t t o c h a n n e l m o d e (s e e o w n e r ' s m a n u a l ) , i f it is s e t t o c h a n n e l m o d e , c a l l X M S a t e l l i t e R a d io c l i e n t s u p p o r t , a n d c h e c k t h e a c c o u n t

9

2

3 9

a c t i v a t i o n s ta t u s .

10

4

/

5

6

13 14

I . I u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II). 2. T u r n o n t h e a u d i o s y s t e m a n d s e le c t X M r a d io .

W ire sid e o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

3. C h e c k f o r a n e r r o r m e s s a g e o n t h e d is p l a y .

is there continuity between any of the terminals? Are there any messages displayed? Y E S - T h e r e is a s h o r t in. t h e w i r e s b e t w e e n t h e a u d i o Y E S - G o t o e r r o r c o d e l is t (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 5 7 ) . ■

u n i t a n d t h e X M r e c e iv e r . R e p la c e t h e a f f e c t e d

N O - G o t o s t e p 4.

s h i e ld e d h a r n e s s . ®

4. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0).

N O - G o t o s t e p 7.

5. D is c o n n e c t a u d i o u n i t c o n n e c t o r D (1 4 P ) a n d X M r e c e i v e r c o n n e c t o r A (1 4P ).

( c o n t 'd )

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 7. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n b o d y g r o u n d a n d u n it c o n n e c to r D A u d i© u n it

(14P)

audio

a c c o r d i n g t o t h e t a b le .

connector

Wire c o l o r

8. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n

XM

re c e iv e r c o n n e c to r

A (1 4 P ) a n d a u d i o u n i t c o n n e c t o r D (1 4 P ) a c c o r d i n g t o t h e t a b l e.

Audio unit connector

XM Receiver connector

W ir e c o lo r

BLK

D13

WHT

D5

A5

RED

D14

GRN

D6

A6

BLK

D13

A13

WHT

D14

A14

GRN

D5

RED

A U D IO U N IT CONNECTOR D

(14P) D (14P)

A U D IO U N IT CONNECTOR

92 / /

9

rjopi 10

3

4

/

8

/

13 14

2

/

3

nan 9

10

/

4

/

5

8

13 14

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls W ire s ide o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) Is

there continuity? 1

YES-There

is a s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d in t h e

wire(s)

/ /

b e t w e e n t h e a u d i o u n i t a n d t h e X M r e c e iv e r . R e p la c e t h e a f f e c t e d s h i e ld e d

2

harness.!

9

rs n 10 : :

3

95 / 13

8 14

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

N O - G o t o s t e p 8.

is there continuity? Y E S -S u b s titu te a k n o w n - g o o d

XM r e c e i v e r (s e e p a g e

2 3 -1 3 3 ), t h e n r e c o n n e c t a ll c o n n e c t o r s , a n d re c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y , r e p la c e t h e o r i g i n a l X M r e c e i v e r (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 3 3 ). If s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n is s t ill p r e s e n t , r e p la c e t h e a u d i o u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 1 2 7 ) . ■

NO-There

is a n o p e n in t h e

u n it a n d th e

wire(s)

b e tw e e n th e a u d io

XM r e c e iv e r . R e p l a c e t h e a f f e c t e d

s h ie ld e d h a r n e s s . ®

Sound Quality Diagnosis Phase Test

S p e c ia l T o o ls R e q u ire d D ia g n o s tic C D 0 7 A A Z -S D B A 1 00

D o t h i s t e s t t o c o n f i r m p r o p e r s p e a k e r p h a s in g . U s e th e fo llo w in g te s ts to c h e c k s o u n d q u a lity . N O T E : B e fo re b e g in n in g th e fo llo w in g te s ts , w r ite d o w n t h e c l i e n t ' s b a s s , t r e b l e , f a d e r a n d b a la n c e s e t t in g s , t h e n s e t t h e m t o t h e i r c e n t e r p o s it io n s f o r t h e t e s t in g .

Left/R ight Channel ID

in to th e a u d io

07AAZ-SDBA100)

i n t o t h e a u d i o u n i t o r t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it .

07AAZ-SDBA100)

t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it .

2. P la y t r a c k N o . 2 ( p h a s e ) a t a n o r m a l , o r s l i g h t l y h i g h e r t h a n n o r m a l , v o l u m e level.

is in - p h a s e . 4. T h e v o i c e s h o u l d s o u n d d i f f u s e d , a n d h a v e le s s b a s s w h e n it is o u t o f p h a s e . •

2. P la y t r a c k N o . 1 (le f t, b o t h , r i g h t c h a n n e l ID ) a t a n o r m a l , o r s l i g h t l y h i g h e r t h a n n o r m a l , v o l u m e le v e l. 3. T h e v o i c e s h o u l d b e a u d i b l e o n ly f r o m t h e c h a n n e l o r c h a n n e l s w h e n i n d ic a t e d . •

unit o r

3. T h e v o i c e s h o u l d s o u n d c e n t e r e d a n d f o c u s e d w h e n it

D o th is te s t to c o n fir m p r o p e r c h a n n e l ro u tin g . 1. In s e r t t h e a u d i o d i a g n o s t i c C D (T /N

1. I n s e r t t h e a u d i o d i a g n o s t i c C D (T /N

If t h e c h a n n e l ID is c o r r e c t f o r e a c h s id e , g o t o p h a s e te s t .

• If t h e c h a n n e l ID is n o t c o r r e c t , c h e c k f o r : - S h o rte d s p e a k e r w ire - F a u lt y s t e r e o a m p l i f i e r - F a u lt y a u d i o u n i t o r a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t

If t h e v o i c e c h a n g e s f r o m i n - p h a s e t o o u t o f p h a s e a s in d i c a t e d b y t h e p r o m p t , t h e p h a s i n g is c o r r e c t . G o t o e le c t r ic a l n o is e te s t .

• If t h e v o i c e a lw a y s s o u n d s o u t o f p h a s e , p h a s i n g is n o t c o rre c t. C h e c k fo r; - C ro s s e d s p e a k e r w ir e - F a u lt y a m p l i f i e r - F a u lt y a u d i o u n i t o r

audio-navigation

u n it

Sound Quality Diagnosis (cont'd) Electrical Noise Test

Individual Speaker Test

D o t h i s t e s t t o c h e c k f o r e le c t r ic a l n o is e b e in g i n d u c e d

D o th is te s t to Id e n tify a f a u lty s p e a k e r,

in to th e a u d io s y s te m . N O T E ; E l e c t r i c a l n o is e m a y b e c a u s e d b y o u t s i d e s o u rc e s th a t c a n n o t b e h a n d le d b y th e a u d io s y s te m . M a k e s u r e y o u r e m o v e a n y c e ll p h o n e s a n d / o r t u r n o f f a n y a f t e r m a r k e t d e v ic e s b e f o r e b e g i n n i n g t h i s te s t . 1. I n s e r t t h e a u d i o d i a g n o s t i c C D (T /N 0 7 A A Z - S D B A 1 00 ) i n t o t h e a u d i o u n i t o r t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it . 2. P la y t r a c k N o . 4 ( d ig it a l z e r o ) a t a n o r m a l , o r s l i g h t ly h i g h e r t h a n n o r m a l , v o l u m e l e v e l.

1. I n s e r t t h e a u d i o d i a g n o s t i c C D (T /N 0 7 A A Z - S D B A 1 0 0 ) in to th e a u d io u n it o r th e a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n i t 2. P la y t r a c k N o . 3 0 ( s t e a d y 3 0 0 H z t o n e ) a t a n o r m a l , o r s l i g h t ly h i g h e r t h a n n o r m a l , v o l u m e le v e l. 3. L is te n t o e a c h s p e a k e r f o r p o o r s o u n d c o m p a r e d t o t h e o t h e r c h a n n e ls . U s e t h e a u d i o s y s t e m 's f a d e r a n d b a la n c e s e t t in g s t o h e l p is o l a t e t h e c h a n n e l w i t h t h e p r o b le m , • If t h e s o u n d q u a l i t y p r o d u c e d b y a s p e c if ic s p e a k e r is p o o r , s u b s t i t u t e it w i t h a k n o w n - g o o d s p e a k e r . If

3. O p e r a t e a n y e l e c tr ic a l d e v ic e t h a t m a y c r e a te

t h e p o o r s o u n d q u a li t y c o n t in u e s , g o t o t h e s o u n d

e l e c t r i c a l n o is e in t h e a u d i o s y s t e m , i n c l u d i n g s t a r t i n g

b a la n c e te s t .

t h e e n g in e . • 4. P l a y t r a c k N o . 5 ( n e a r d i g i t a l z e r o ) a t a n o r m a l , o r s l i g h t l y h i g h e r t h a n n o r m a l , v o l u m e l e v e l. 5. O p e r a t e a n y e l e c t r i c a l d e v ic e t h a t m a y c r e a t e e l e c t r ic a l n o is e in t h e a u d i o s y s t e m , i n c l u d i n g s t a r t i n g t h e e n g in e . 6. P la y t r a c k N o . 8 (S N R ) a t a n o r m a l , o r s l i g h t l y h i g h e r t h a n n o r m a l , v o l u m e l e v e l. 7. O p e r a t e a n y e le c t r ic a l d e v ic e t h a t m a y c r e a te e l e c tr ic a l n o is e in t h e a u d i o s y s t e m , i n c l u d i n g s t a r t i n g t h e e n g in e . • If n o a b n o r m a l n o is e is h e a r d , g o t o t h e i n d i v i d u a l s p e a k e r te s t . • If t h e n o is e is p r e s e n t o n l y d u r i n g t h e S N R t r a c k , r e p la c e t h e a u d i o u n i t o r a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it . •

If t h e n o is e is h e a r d d u r i n g t h e d i g i t a l z e r o o r n e a r d i g i t a l z e r o tr a c k , c h e c k f o r : - P o o r g r o u n d a t th e a u d io u n it o r a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it , e n g i n e , o r b a t t e r y c a b le - P in c h e d o r s h o r t e d s p e a k e r w i r e - F a u lt y s t e r e o a m p l i f i e r - F a u lt y a u d i o u n i t o r a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t - O t h e r f a u l t y c o m p o n e n t s c a u s in g e x c e s s iv e e l e c t r ic a l n o is e ( i g n i t i o n c o i l s, a lt e r n a t o r , d o o r lo c k a c t u a t o r s , e tc .). D i s c o n n e c t a n y s u s p e c t c o m p o n e n ts , a n d th e n re p la y th e tra c k s th a t w e r e o r i g i n a l l y n o is y . If t h e n o is e is g o n e , c h e c k t h e c o m p o n e n t's c ir c u it a n d th e c o m p o n e n t

If t h e s o u n d q u a l i t y is O K , g o t o t h e s o u n d b a la n c e t e s t.

Sound Balance Test D o t h i s t e s t t o i d e n t i f y a f a u lt y c h a n n e l o r s p e a k e r . 1. In s e r t t h e a u d i o d i a g n o s t i c C D (T /N 0 7 A A Z - S D B A 1 0 0 ) in t o t h e a u d i o u n i t o r t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it .

Frequency Sweep D o t h i s t e s t t o f i n d r a t t le s o r r e v e r b e r a t i o n s t h a t m a y c a u s e a p e r c e p t io n o f p o o r s o u n d q u a l i t y . 1. I n s e r t t h e a u d i o d i a g n o s t i c C D (T /N

07AAZ-SDBA100)

in to th e a u d io u n it o r th e a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n i t 2. C o n f i r m t h e b a s s a n d t r e b l e a r e s e t t o t h e c e n t e r p o s it io n s . 3. P la y t r a c k N o . 3 ( p in k n o is e ) a t a n o r m a l , o r s l i g h t l y h i g h e r t h a n n o r m a l , v o l u m e le v e l.

2. P la y t r a c k N o . 13 ( s w e e p f r o m 5 0 0 H z t o 3 5 Hz) a t a n o r m a l , o r s l i g h t l y h i g h e r t h a n n o r m a l , v o l u m e l e v e l. 3. L is te n t o e a c h s p e a k e r f o r p o o r s o u n d q u a l i t y o r r e v e r b e r a t i o n s c a u s e d b y s p e c if ic f r e q u e n c i e s . U s e

4. A s t a t ic t y p e s o u n d s h o u l d b e h e a r d t h r o u g h a ll s p e a k e rs . 5. I n s e r t t h e a u d i o d i a g n o s t i c C D (T /N 0 7 A A Z - S D B A 1 0 0 )

th e v o ic e - o v e r to e s tim a te th e fr e q u e n c y th a t c a u s e s t h e v i b r a t i o n . U s e t h e a u d i o s y s t e m 's f a d e r a n d b a la n c e s e t t in g s t o h e lp is o l a t e t h e c h a n n e l w i t h t h e

in to th e a u d io u n it o r th e a u d io - n a v ig a tio n u n it o f a

p r o b le m .

k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic le .

• If v i b r a t i o n s o r p o o r s o u n d q u a l i t y a r e h e a r d , g o t o

8. S e t t h e b a s s a n d t r e b le t o t h e c e n t e r p o s it io n s . 7. P la y t r a c k N o . 3 ( p in k n o is e ) a ll t h e s a m e le v e l a s w a s p l a y e d in s t e p 3. 8, C o m p a r e t h e s o u n d s m a d e b y t h e t w o v e h ic le s . • If t h e s o u n d s m a d e b y t h e t w o v e h ic l e s a r e v e r y s i m i l a r , g o t o t h e F r e q u e n c y S w e e p T e s t. • If t h e s o u n d d o e s n o t h a v e a s m u c h b a s s , c h e c k t h e s u b w o o f e r a n d c ir c u it . • If t h e s o u n d d o e s n o t h a v e e n o u g h h is s , c h e c k t h e t w e e t e r s a n d t h e i r c ir c u it s .

s t e p 4. • If n o v i b r a t i o n s o r p o o r s o u n d q u a l i t y a r e h e a r d , g o to s o u n d ju d g in g . 4. C h o o s e t h e a p p r o p r i a t e t r a c k f r o m N o , 1 4 t o 2 5 ( s m a ll r a n g e f r e q u e n c y s w e e p ) o r 2 6 t o 5 3 ( s in g le fre q u e n c ie s ) to re c re a te th e fr e q u e n c y th a t c a u s e d th e p o o r s o u n d q u a l i t y o r v i b r a t i o n w i t n e s s e d in s t e p 3; t h i s a id s in d i a g n o s i s o f t h e c a u s e . N O TE : W h e n y o u g e t to th e tra c k th a t re c re a te s th e p r o b l e m , s e le c t t h e r e p e a t f u n c t i o n o n t h e a u d i o s y s t e m , t h i s w i l l h e lp y o u i s o la t e t h e c a u s e . 5. R e p la c e o r in s u l a t e t h e s o u r c e o f t h e v i b r a t i o n o r , i f t h e s p e a k e r is t h e s o u r c e o f t h e p o o r s o u n d q u a l i t y , r e p la c e it.

Sound Quality Diagnosis (cont'd) Seek Stop Test

Sound Judging D o t h i s t e s t t o c o m p a r e o v e r a l l s o u n d q u a l i ty ,

imaging,

a n d d y n a m i c s b e t w e e n t h e c l i e n t 's v e h ic l e a n d a k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic le . O n l y u s e a v e h ic l e o f t h e s a m e m o d e l a n d trim

le v e l f o r t h i s te s t.

tr o u b le s h o o tin g ; a u d io s y s te m s o u n d w e a k o r d is to rte d , w i t h n a v ig a t i o n (s e e p a g e 2 3 -8 1 ), w i t h o u t n a v ig a t i o n

1. In t h e c l i e n t 's v e h ic l e , s e t t h e b a s s , t r e b l e , f a d e r , a n d b a la n c e s e t t in g s t o t h e c l i e n t 's n o r m a l s e t t in g s t h a t w e r e w r i t t e n d o w n b e f o r e b e g i n n i n g t h e te s t. 2. I n s e r t t h e a u d i o d i a g n o s t i c C D {T /N

D o th is te s t to c h e c k th e p e r fo r m a n c e o f th e a u d io s y s t e m ' s A M a n d F M r e c e p t io n . R e fe r t o s y m p t o m

07AAZ-SDBA100)

i n t o t h e a u d i o u n i t o r t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it .

(s e e p a g e 2 3 -8 1 ), o r n o s o u n d is h e a r d f r o m t h e s p e a k e r s ( d is p l a y is n o r m a l ) , w i t h n a v ig a t i o n (s e e p a g e 2 3 -8 8 ), w i t h o u t n a v ig a t i o n (s e e p a g e 2 3 -7 6 ) b e f o r e c o n t i n u i n g w i t h t h i s te s t, NOTE: • W in d o w tin t, a fte rm a rk e t

3. P la y tr a c k s N o , 7 t o 12 ( s o u n d q u a l i t y , m i d l a n d , d y n a m i c s , a n d i m a g i n g d e m o n s t r a t i o n tr a c k s ) a t a

theft-recovery d e v ic e s

and

o t h e r a f t e r m a r k e t d e v ic e s m a y a f f e c t r e c e p t io n , • C h a n g e s in c l o u d c o v e r a n d o t h e r a t m o s p h e r i c

n o r m a l o r s l i g h t l y h i g h e r t h a n n o r m a l , v o l u m e l e v e l.

c o n d i t i o n s w i l l a f f e c t t h e a b i li t y o f t h e a u d i o s y s t e m t o

W r i t e d o w n t h e v o l u m e s e t t in g b e in g u s e d .

r e c e iv e r a d i o s ig n a ls .

4. L is te n t o a r e a s o f t h e t r a c k t h a t s t a n d o u t a s b e in g e i t h e r v e r y c le a r o r p o o r e r t h a n o t h e r a r e a s o f t h e tr a c k .

1. P a rk t h e

client's v e h i c le

in a n o p e n a r e a a w a y f r o m

b u i ld i n g s o r o t h e r o b s t r u c t i o n s . 2. P a rk a k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic l e ( s a m e y e a r , m o d e l , a n d

5. In a k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic l e , i n s e r t t h e a u d i o d i a g n o s t i c C D (T /N

07AAZ-SDBA100)

in to th e a u d io u n it o r th e

t r i m le v e l) n e x t t o t h e c l i e n t 's v e h ic l e , f a c i n g t h e s a m e d ire c tio n ,

a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it . 3. S t a r t t h e e n g i n e in t h e 8. P la y t h e t r a c k s a t t h e s a m e v o l u m e le v e l a n d t h e s a m e

client's v e h ic l e ,

a n d tu r n o n th e

r a d io .

b a s s , t r e b l e , b a la n c e , a n d f a d e r s e t t in g s a s u s e d in s t e p 3 in t h e c l i e n t 's v e h i c l e. 7, L is te n t o t h e s a m e a r e a o f t h e t r a c k t h a t s t o o d o u t as b e in g e i t h e r v e r y c le a r o r p o o r e r t h a n o t h e r a r e a s o f t h e tr a c k . 8. C o m p a r e t h e c l ie n t 's v e h i c l e 's s o u n d q u a l i t y r e s u lt s t h e k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic l e 's re s u lts . • If t h e s o u n d q u a l i t y in t h e c l i e n t 's v e h ic l e is c o m p a r a b l e t o t h e s o u n d q u a l i t y in t h e k n o w n - g o o d

4. S e t t h e F M r e c e i v e r t o 8 7 .7 M H z . 5. P re s s t h e S e e k + b u t t o n , a n d r e c o r d t h e f i r s t s t a t io n t h a t t h e a u d i o u n i t o r a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t lo c k s o n t o . 8. P re s s t h e S e e k + b u t t o n r e p e a t e d l y , a n d w r i t e d o w n e a c h s t a t io n t h a t t h e a u d i o u n i t o r a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t lo c k s o n t o u n t i l t h e s t a t io n r e c o r d e d in s t e p 5 is r e a c h e d a g a in . 7. S e t t h e A M r e c e i v e r t o 5 3 0 kH z.

v e h ic l e , t h e n t h e c l i e n t 's v e h i c le is o p e r a t i n g as d e s ig n e d . • If t h e s o u n d q u a l i t y is n o t c o m p a r a b l e , c h e c k t h e s e i t e m s in o r d e r : - L o o s e o r i m p r o p e r l y i n s t a l le d s p e a k e r s o r o t h e r

8. P re s s t h e S e e k + b u t t o n , a n d r e c o r d t h e f i r s t s t a t io n t h a t t h e a u d i o u n i t lo c k s o n t o . 3, P re s s t h e S e e k + b u t t o n r e p e a t e d l y , a n d w r i t e d o w n e a c h s t a t io n t h a t t h e a u d i o u n i t o r a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n

h a r d w a r e t h a t m a y c r e a te i n t e r f e r e n c e f r o m t h e

u n i t lo c k s o n t o u n t i l t h e s t a t io n r e c o r d e d in s t e p 8 is

v ib r a tio n s g e n e ra te d b y th e s p e a k e rs

r e a c h e d a g a in .

- F a u lt y s t e r e o a m p l i f i e r

10. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0).

- D a m a g e d s p e a k e r(s ) - P o o r p o w e r o r g r o u n d to th e s te re o a m p lifie r - F a u lt y a u d i o u n i t o r a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it

11. S t a r t t h e e n g i n e in t h e k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic l e , a n d t h e n d o s te p s 4 t h r u 10 o n t h e k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic l e .

12. C o m p a r e t h e n u m b e r o f s t a t io n s r e c e iv e d in s t e p s 6 a n d 9 In t h e c l i e n t 's v e h ic l e w i t h t h e n u m b e r o f

S R S c o m p o n e n t s a r e lo c a t e d in t h i s a r e a . R e v i e w t h e S R S c o m p o n e n t l o c a t i o n s (s e e p a g e 2 4 -1 8 ) , a n d t h e

s t a t io n s r e c e iv e d in t h e k n o w n - g o o d v e h i c le.

p r e c a u t io n s a n d p r o c e d u r e s (s e e p a g e 2 4 -2 0 ) b e f o r e

• If t h e n u m b e r o f s t a t io n s r e c e iv e d is t h e s a m e , o r

d o i n g r e p a ir s o r s e r v ic e .

w i t h i n 10 % , t h e a u d i o u n it 's o r a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n i t 's t u n e r p e r f o r m a n c e is O K . T h e p r o b l e m m a y b e a tm o s p h e r ic c o n d itio n s , m u lti- p a th in te rfe r e n c e , o r o t h e r o b s t r u c t i o n s t o t h e r a d i o s ig n a l. • If t h e c l i e n t 's v e h ic l e r e c e iv e s f e w e r s t a t io n s b y a t

l e a s t 10 % , g o t o p o o r A M o r F M r a d i o r e c e p t i o n o r in te rfe re n c e . - w i t h n a v ig a t i o n (s e e p a g e 2 3 -6 9 ) - w i t h o u t n a v ig a t i o n (s e e p a g e 2 3 -8 2 )

NOTE: • P u t o n g lo v e s to p r o te c t y o u r h a n d s . • T a k e c a r e n o t t o s c r a tc h t h e d a s h b o a r d a n d r e la t e d p a r ts . • L a y a w o r k s h o p to w e l u n d e r th e p a rts w h e n w o r k in g o n t h e m t o p r o t e c t t h e fa c e p a n e l f r o m s c r a t c h e s o r o th e r d a m a g e . • E je c t a l l t h e d is c s b e f o r e r e m o v i n g t h e a u d i o u n i t t o p r e v e n t d a m a g i n g t h e C D p l a y e r 's lo a d m e c h a n i s m . • If y o u a r e r e p l a c i n g t h e a u d i o u n it , w r i t e d o w n t h e a u d i o p r e s e t s ( if p o s s ib le ) , a n d e n t e r t h e m i n t o t h e n e w a u d i o u n it . 1. M a k e s u r e y o u h a v e t h e a n t i - t h e f t c o d e s f o r t h e a u d i o s y s te m . 2. R e m o v e t h e d r i v e r ' s i n n e r d a s h b o a r d t r i m (s e e p a g e 2 0 -1 1 7 ), a n d t h e p a s s e n g e r 's d a s h b o a r d t r i m (se e p a g e 2 0 -1 2 2 ). 3. R e m o v e t h e c o n s o l e l o w e r t r i m (A ) a n d t h e b o lts (B ), t h e n p u l l o u t t h e a u d i o u n i t (€ ).

4, D i s c o n n e c t t h e c o n n e c t o r s

(D), t h e n

re m o v e th e a u d io

u n it . 5. R e m o v e t h e c l i m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t (s e e p a g e 2 1 -1 3 9 ).

( c o n t 'd )

Audio Unit Removal/Installation (cont'd)

Speaker Test/Repiacement

6. R e m o v e t h e b o lt s (A ) a n d t h e s c r e w s (B ), t h e n r e m o v e

Door Speaker

t h e r a d i o b r a c k e ts (C). 1. R e m o v e t h e d o o r p a n e l . • F r o n t (s e e p a g e 2 0 -9 ). • R e a r (s e e p a g e 2 0 -2 2 ). 2. R e m o v e t h e t h r e e m o u n t i n g s c r e w s f r o m t h e s p e a k e r (A ).

5 x 0.8 m m 3.7 N-m 10.38 kg f-m , 2.7 I b f ft) 7. R e m o v e t h e c e n t e r p o c k e t (s e e p a g e 2 0 -1 2 2 ). 8. R e m o v e t h e s c r e w s a n d t h e a u d i o u n i t (A ) f r o m t h e a u d i o p a n e l (B). A The illu s tra tio n s h o w s le ft side 3. D i s c o n n e c t t h e 2 P c o n n e c t o r (B ), a n d r e m o v e t h e s p e a k e r. 4. M e a s u r e t h e r e s is t a n c e b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l s N o . 1 a n d N o . 2. T h e r e s h o u l d b e a b o u t 2 O. 5. If t h e r e s is t a n c e is n o t a s s p e c if ie d , r e p la c e t h e d o o r s p e a k e r.

3, In s t a l l t h e a u d i o u n i t in t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r o f r e m o v a l , a n d n o t e th e s e i te m s ; • M a k e s u r e a ll t h e c o n n e c t o r s a n d t h e a n t e n n a le a d a re s e c u re . • E n te r a n ti- th e ft c o d e s f o r th e a u d io s y s te m . 10. G iv e t h e n e w a n t i - t h e f t c o d e s t o t h e c l i e n t

Center Speaker

Tweeter

NOTE:

1.From the notch (A) careful ly pry the tweeter gril le (B) out of the dashboard with a small screwdriver. Be careful not to damage the tweeter grill e and the dashboard.

• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Take care not scratch the dashboard and rel ated parts. 1.Remove the center upper panel (see page 20-119). 2. Remove the screws and the speaker (A).

The ill ustration shows right side

2. Disconnect the 2P connector (C) from the tweeter. 3. Measure the resistance between terminals No. 1 and No, 2 there shoul d be about 4 0.

3. Remove the tweeter (A) from the speaker grille by prying at the hook (B).

4. Ifthe resistance is not as specified, repl ace the front center speaker.

4. Check the capacitor (C) condition. Ifany problem is found, replace the tweeter.

(cont'd)

S p e a k e r T e s t / R e p l a c e m e n t (cont'd)

5. Measure the resistance between the tweeter (A) terminal No. 2 and the outside terminal ofthe capacitor. There shoul d be about 8 0.

8. Ifthe resistance is not as specified, replace the tweeter.

S atellite Speaker 1.Remove the quarter pil lartrim (see page 20-81). 2. Remove the speaker grille (A) and connector cl ip (B).

The illustration shows left side

3. Remove the screws and the satellite speaker (C). 4. Measure the resistance between the terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There shoul d be about 4 O. 5. I fthe resistance is not as specified, replace the satellite speaker.

Subwoofer/amplifier unit (with navigation)

Input Test

1. Remove the right rear side trim panel (see page 20-88).

1,With the subwoofer/amplifier 8P connector connected, make the input tests at the connector according to the table.

2. Disconnect the 8P connector (A),then remove the bol ts (B), nuts (C) and pull out the subwoofer (D).

Terminal 4 5 6

Test Measure the voltage to ground with allconditions: There should be less than 0. Measure the vol tage to ground with all conditions; There should be battery voltage. Measure the voltage to ground with audio system power switch ON: There should be battery voltage.

2. Ifthe input test proves OK and the subwoofer has no sound, replace the faulty subwoofer/ampl ifierunit.

S p e a k e r T e s t / R e p l a c e m e n t (cont'd)

S t e r e o Amplifier Removal/Installation

Subw oofer (without navigation)

1.Remove the gl ove box (see page 20-124).

1.Remove the right rear side trim panel (see page 20-88).

2. Disconnect the connectors (A).

2. Disconnect the 8P connector (A),then remove the bolts (B), nuts (C) and pull out the subwoofer (B).

(C).

4. Instal lthe stereo amplifier in the reverse order of removal. 3. Measure the resistance between the terminals No. 2 and No. 7 and terminals No. 3 and No. 8. There should be about 2 O. 4. Ifthe resistance is not as specified, repl ace the subwoofer.

A c u r a U n k Control Unit ( X M Rece iv er) R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n

X M

Receiver Removal/Installation

With AcuraLink

Without AcuraUnk

NOTE: The AcuraUnk must be reactivated by Acura Client Services when: • The AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) is replaced. • DATA RESET was selected while in the self-diagnostic function. • Vehicle ownership changes.

1. Remove the right rear side trim panel (see page 20-88). 2. Disconnect the connectors (A),then remove the bolts (B) and pull out the X M receiver (C).

1.Remove the right rear side trim panel (see page 20-88). 2. Disconnect the connectors ( A ) , then remove the bolts (B) and pull out the AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) (C).

3. Install the X M receiver in the reverse order of removal . 4. I fyou replaced the X M Receiver, register the new X M Receiver unit I.D. number with X M radio 800-852-9898.

3. Instal lthe AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) in the reverse order of removal . NOTE: Ifyou repl aced the AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver), make sure ithas the latest software (see page 23-366). 4. Ifyou repl aced the AcuraUnk control unit, registerthe new Acuralink (XM Receiver) unit I.D. number with X M radio 800-852-9696 and Acura Client Services 800-382-2238 and request a reactivation.

A u d i o R e m o t e S w i t c h Test

Audio R e m o t e Switch Replacement

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component l ocations (see page 24-18), and the precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or service.

SRS components are located In this area. Review the SRS component location (see page 24-18), and the precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or service.

1.Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-199).

1. Remove these items: • Driver's airbag (see page 24-199). • Steering wheel (see page 17-8). • Paddl e shifter (see page 14-242). • Distance switch (with ACC) (see page 25-83).

2. Remove the 20P connector (A) from the cable reel .

2. Remove the screws and the audio remote switch (A).

Wire side of female terminals

3. Measure the resistance between terminals No. 19 and No. 20 in each switch position according to the table. Position No button pressed MODE CH (+ )

Resistance About 10 kO About 3.7 kO About 1.7 kO About 776 0 it357 0 3. Instal lthe audio remote switch in the reverse order of removal.

(VOL UP) w

About 100 0

(VOL DOWN) 4. Ifthe resistance isnot as specified, replace the audio remote switch (see page 23-134), 5. Use a diode tester between terminals in each switch position according to the table.

Terminal

17

18 f-x

......

vJ

6.Ifthe diode test isnot as specified, replace the audio remote switch (see page 23-134).

A M / F M A n t e n n a Amplifier Replacement

X M

Antenna Replacement

1.Remove the headliner (see page 20-98),

1.Remove the headl iner (see page 20-98).

2. Disconnect the connector (A) from the AM/FM antenna amplifier (B).

2. Remove the nut ( A ) from the X M antenna (B).

3. Disconnect the connector (€) and remove the X M antenna. 4. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal.

4. Install the X M antenna in the reverse order of removal .

U S B A d a p t e r Ho lde r/ Au x i l i a r y J a c k Assembly Replacement

Auxiliary J a c k A s s e m b l y Replacement

1.Remove the center console (see page 20-104).

1.Remove the center console (see page 20-104).

2. Detach the connector (A) from the cl ip. Remove the cover (B), and disconnect the USB adapter connector

2. Carefully pull out the auxiliary jack assembly (A) from center consol e box, then disconnect the 5P connector

(C).

3.Careful ly pull out the USB adapter holder/auxiliary jack assembly (D) from the center console box, then disconnect the 5P connector (E), and remove the USB main harness connector (F)from the USB adapter holder/auxil iary jack assembly. 4. I nstall the USB adapter holder/auxiliaryjack assembly in the reverse order of removal.

(B).

3. Install the auxil iaryjack assembly inthe reverse order of removal .

C o m p o n e n t Location Index

Connector I nputs and Outputs, page 23-146 Repl acement page 23-176

(cont'd)

C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x (cont'd)

Test/Replacement, page 2 3 -1 3 0

(XM RECEIVER) (With AcuraUnk) Connector Inputs and Outputs, page 23-331 Removal/Installation, page 23-133 XM RECEIVER (Without AcuraUnk) Connector Inputs and Outputs, page 23-38 Removal/ Install ation, page 23-133

S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index

Symptom RES disc does not l oad

Diagnostic procedure Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-157)

RES disc does not eject

Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-157)

RES disc does not play

Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-158)

RES disc skips

Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-158)

RES power will not turn on RES power will not turn off Black picture isshown on the displ ay White picture isshown on the display/display l ock Display area picture has lines or has shifted No display appears on the rear control ler indicate No sound/no display with auxiliary video unit inputs

Symptom Troubl eshooting (see page 23-159) Symptom Troubl eshooting (see page 23-181) Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-182) Symptom Troubl eshooting (see page 23-164)

Also check for • Peeled label stuck in player • Wrong type dis< • Peeled l abel stuck in player • Wrong type dis< • Peel ed l abel stuck in player • Wrong type disc • Peeled l abel stuck in player • Wrong type dis


X M antenna/circuit malfunction.

• with A c u ra lin k (see page 23-267) • without A c u ra lin k (see page 23-267)

1801

HIP Error

HIP

HIP com m unication error, open the wire, or HIP unconnected.

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-26

2601

Display Diag: Connect

Display

GA -N ET bus circuit malfunction open/short. ECU bus circuit malfunction open/short,

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-270)

Low or weak battery voltage

(c o n t’d)

DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd) DTC

Circuit

Description

Failure Detection

Page

Also Check for

2805

H/U Diag: Connect

H/U

GA -N E T Bus circuit malfunction open/short.

DTC Troubleshooting fsee page 23-272)

2807

X M Diag

XM

G A -N E T bus circuit malfunction open/short. X M antenna circuit malfunction.

DTC Troubleshooting fsee page 23-273)

2008

R-Catnera Diag

Rear Camera

Rearview camera internal malfunction.

DTC Troubleshooting fsee page 23-286)

2010

DR A M Diag

ECU DRAM

Audio-Navigation unit internal D RAM malfunction.

DTC Troubleshooting fsee page 23-275)

2611

HDD Diag

HDD

HDD internal malfunction.

DTC T ro u b l eshooting fsee page 23-276)

2701

GPS Diag; Antenna

GPS

GPS antenna malfunction.

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-276)

2702

GPS Diag: Receiver in Navi ECU

GPS

GPS antenna malfunction.

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-277)

2703

Aircon Diag

Aircon

C om m unication error between climate control unit and audio-navigation unit (open/short).

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-277)

Check for B-CAN

Low or weak battery v o l tage

DTCs

2704

X M (HIP) Diag

HIP

HFL/HIP C O M M 1 thru HFL/HIP C O M M 4 bus circuit malfunction open/short.

DTC T ro u b l eshooting fsee page 23-273)

Check for B-CAN DTCs

2705

HFL Diag

HFL

HandsFreeLink control unit internal m a lfunction.

• with Acura Link (see page 23-282) • w ithout AcuraLink (see page 23-284)

Check for B-CAN DTCs

2708

Gyro Diag: ECU T e m p X X °C

Gyro

Audio-Navigation unit internal malfunction.

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-285)

2707

Mic Diag

Mic

Mic circuit malfunction open/short.

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-286)

2708

RES Diag

RES

G A -N E T bus circuit malfunction open/short. RES circuit malfunction.

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-287)

2703

FROM Diag

ECU FROM

Audio-Navigation unit internal FROM m a l function.

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23

2710

USB C abl e D

USB

USB cable circuit malfunction.

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-289)

Symptom Troubleshooting Index Symptom N a v i g a t io n s y s te m s ta y s o n th e G P S in itia l izatio n s c re e n

D ia g n o s t ic p r o c e d u r e S y s t e m In itia liz a tio n (s e e p a g e 2 3 -1 8 2 )

• • • • • • • • • • • •

A u d io - N a v ig a t io n u n it In te r n a l d e fe c t in G P S a n te n n a G P S a n t e n n a / c a b le is d is c o n n e c te d o r dam aged A f t e r m a r k e t m e t a l lic w i n d o w tin t S o f t w a r e n o t u p to d a te H a r n e s s /fu s e s /s w it c h e s

V e h i c l e p o s itio n ico n c o n s t a n t ly le a v e s r o a d , m o v e s e r ra tic a lly , o r is d is p la y e d v e r y f a r f r o m ac tu a l v e h i c l e p o s itio n

S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o tin g (s e e p a g e 2 3 -2 9 2 )

S y s t e m a lw a y s c o m e s u p in in -lin e d ia g n o s t ic m o d e

F a c to ry d ia g n o s t ic s c re e n in L in e D ia g (s e e p a g e 2 3 -2 3 8 )

N a v i g a t io n s y s te m w i l l n o t a c c e p t s e c u r ity c o d e

S y m p t o m T r o u b le s h o o t in g (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 0 4 )

A n t i- t h e f t c o d e n o t m a tc h in g

N a v i g a t io n f r e q u e n t l y asks f o r a n ti-t h e f t c o d e a n d /o r n e e d s G P S in itia liz a tio n

S y m p t o m T r o u b le s h o o t in g (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 0 7 )

G P S ico n is w h it e o r n o t s h o w n

S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o tin g (s e e p a g e 2 3 -2 3 7 )

• • • • • • • •

V e h ic le p o s itio n ico n w a n d e r s a c ro s s t h e m a p w h e n d r iv in g (d o e s n o t f o l l o w a d i s p l a y e d ro a d ) o r m a p o r v e h ic le IC O N s p in s

S y m p t o m T r o u b le s h o o t in g (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 0 3 )

N o p ic tu re is d is p la y e d

S y m p t o m T r o u b le s h o o t in g (s e e p a g e 2 3 -2 9 0 )

P ic tu re h a s l in es o r rolls

S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o tin g (s e e p a g e 2 3 -2 9 4 )

P ic tu re is m is s in g a c o lo r o r to n e o r is a n o d d c o l o r

S y m p t o m T r o u b le s h o o t in g (s e e p a g e 2 3 -2 9 3 )

T r a f fic o r W e a t h e r in f o r m a t io n i n o t s h o w n o n m a p s c re e n

S y m p t o m T r o u b le s h o o t in g (s ee p a g e 2 3 -3 1 2 )

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

A u d io - N a v ig a t io n u n it In te r n a l d e fe c t in G P S a n t e n n a G P S a n te n n a /c a b l e A f t e r m a r k e t m e t a l lic w i n d o w tin t P C M (s p e e d a n d fu e l p u ls e s ) H a r n e s s /fu s e s /s w it c h e s

Loss o f v o lt a g e o r p o o r g r o u n d (G 5 0 4 ) A u d io - N a v ig a t io n u n it S o f t w a r e n o t u p to d a te L o w b a tte r y v o l t a g e H a r n e s s /fu s e s /s w it c h e s A u d io - N a v ig a t io n u n it I n te r n a l d e fe c t in G P S a n t e n n a A f t e r m a r k e t a c c e s s o r ie s c o n n e c te d to t h e s y s te m G P S a n t e n n a /c a b le A f t e r m a r k e t m e ta llic w i n d o w tin t H a r n e s s /fu s e s /s w it c h e s A u d io - N a v ig a t io n u n it G PS a n te n n a /c a b l e A f t e r m a r k e t m e ta llic w i n d o w tin t P C M (s p e e d s ig n a l) In te r n a l d e fe c t in G P S a n t e n n a S o f t w a r e n o t u p to d a te A u d io - N a v ig a t io n u n it N a v i g a t io n d i s p la y u n it H a r n e s s /fu s e s /s w it c h e s A f t e r m a r k e t a c c e s s o r ie s c o n n e c te d to t h e s y s te m A u d io - N a v ig a t io n u n it N a v i g a t io n d is p la y u n it H a r n e s s /fu s e s /s w it c h e s

S o f t w a r e n o t u p to d a te A u d io - N a v ig a t io n u n it • N a v i g a t io n d i s p l a y u n it • A f t e r m a r k e t a c c e s s o r ie s c o n n e c te d to t h e s y s te m • H a r n e s s /fu s e s /s w it c h e s

• • • • • • •

A c u ra lin k (X M ) A u d io - N a v ig a t io n u n it L o w o r w e a k battery H arnes s C lie n t a c c o u n t s ta tu s A r e a o u ta g e A re a not co vered

(c o n t'd )

Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd) S y m p to m

D ia g n o s tic p r o c e d u r e

A ls o c h e c k fo r

D is p la y d a y /n ig h t m o d e d o e s n o t w o r k o r d o e s n o t w o r k p r o p e r ly

S y m p t o m T r o u b le s h o o t in g (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 0 2 )

• A u d io - N a v ig a t io n u n it • D is p la y b r ig h tn e s s s e t to H ig h in d a y o r n ig h t m o d e • N a v i g a t io n d is p la y u n it • G a u g e c o n tr o l m o d u l e (C A N ) • T h e n a v ig a tio n d i s p l a y b r ig h tn e s s is not set to A u to m o d e • H a r n e s s /fu s e s /s w it c h e s

S y s t e m l oc ks u p o r fr e e z e s c o n s t a n t ly

S y m p t o m T r o u b le s h o o t in g (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 0 3 )

• A u d io - N a v ig a t io n u n it • S o f t w a r e n o t u p to d a te

V o ic e g u id a n c e c a n n o t b e h e a r d , is b r o k e n u p , o r t h e r e is static

Symptom

T r o u b le s h o o t in g (s e e p a g e 2 3 -2 9 8 )

• V o l u m e o r v o ic e f e e d b a c k s e ttin g (s ee O w n e r ’s m a n u a l ) • A u d io - N a v ig a t io n u n it • S t e r e o /a m p lif ie r • H a r n e s s /fu s e s /s w it c h e s

V o ic e c o n tr o l d o e s n o t w o rk /re s p o n d

S y m p t o m T r o u b le s h o o t in g (s ee p a g e 2 3 -3 0 0 )

dio-Navigation u n it • M ic r o p h o n e • H a r n e s s /s w itc h e s • H a n d s F r e e L in k c o n t r o l u n it

N a v i g a t io n c a n n o t c o n tr o l H V A C b y v o ic e c o m m a n d

S y m p t o m T r o u b le s h o o t in g (s ee p a g e 2 3 -3 0 2 )

• S o f t w a r e n o t u p to d a te • H a r n e s s /fu s e s /s w it c h e s • B -C A N D T C s

N a v i g a t io n c a n n o t c o n t r o l X M r a d io

S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o tin g (s ee p a g e 2 3 -3 0 6 )

• S o f t w a r e n o t u p to d a te • A u d io - N a v ig a t io n u n it • A c u r a U n k c o n tr o l u n it ( X M r e c e iv e r ) (w ith A c u r a U n k ) o r X M r e c e iv e r (w i t h o u t A c u r a U n k ) • H arnes s

N a v i g a t io n c a n n o t c o n t r o l a u d io /d is c /r e a r e n t e r t a i n m e n t

S y m p t o m T r o u b le s h o o t in g (s ee p a g e 2 3 -3 0 6 )

• A u d io - N a v ig a t io n u n it • H arness • S o f t w a r e n o t u p to d a te

I n t e r fa c e d i a l b u tto n s d o n o t w o r k

S y m p t o m T r o u b le s h o o t in g (s e e p a g e 2 3 -2 9 6 )

• Audio-Navigation u n it • N a v i g a t io n d i s p l a y u n it • In te r fa c e dial • H a r n e s s /fu s e s /s w it c h e s

T o d a y 's D e s t in a tio n s b u tto n is d i m a n d n o t s e le c t a b l e in th e E n te r d e s tin a tio n b y s c re e n

T h e c lie n t h a s n o t e n te r e d a g r o u p o f lo c a tio n s f o r T o d a y 's D e s tin a tio n s . T h is is n o r m a l . T h e b u tto n is o n ly s e le c t a b l e if th e c lie n t is u s in g th is fu n c tio n .

S e e O w n e r 's M a n u a l

rness/fuses/switcl

(grayed-out) S o m e - s e t u p a n d in fo r m a tio n f u n c t io n s o f t h e n a v ig a tio n s y s te m a r e g r a y e d - o u t a n d d o n o t w o rk

C lie n t d id n o t s e le c t O K f r o m D is c la im e r s c re e n . R e fe r to D ia g n o s tic S y s t e m D ia g r a m (s ee p a g e 2 3 -2 1 3 ).

P re v io u s D e s t in a tio n s b u tto n is d im a n d n o t s e le c t a b l e in th e E n te r d e s tin a tio n b y s c re e n ( g r a y e d -o u t)

T h e v e h ic le m a y b e n e w , o r th e c lie n t d e le te d th e d e s tin a tio n . W i t h o u t a s to r e d p r e v io u s d e s tin a tio n , t h e s y s te m c a n 't r o u t e to a p r e v io u s d e s tin a tio n . E n te r a d e s tin a tio n , a n d a l l o w th e s y s te m to r o u t e t o it. A f t e r th e t r ip , t h e P re v io u s D e s t in a tio n s b u tto n w ill b e s e le c ta b le .

Symptom

A ls o

D ia g n o s t ic p r o c e d u r e

che
If open: The security system sets, and does not ti when the screen is removed. If short to ground: The security system sets, and does not trip when the screen is removed. If open: No change to display. If short to ground: No change to display.

System Description (cont'd) Interface Dial Inputs and Outputs

INTERFACE DIAL 5P CONNECTOR

D

c; 1

3

2

4

W ire side of female terminals

Interface Dial SP Connector Terminal Number 1

Wire Color W HT

BRN*

BLK

Terminal Name JOG BUS (Interface dial Jog) JOG SH (Interface dial Jog shield) GND (Ground) (GS06)

Description Interface dial operation signal 1 Shield for interface dial signal Ground for interface dial

Voltage {about) 0 —5 V pulses

If open; You can not operate the navigation system. If short to ground; You can not operate the navigation system. 4 Power source Battery voltage If open: You can not operate the navigation system. PUR ACC at ACCESSORY (Accessory) for interface dial If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 32 (10 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box. (1) *: The shielded wires have a heat-shrink tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube, typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic. 3

0V

Symptom If open; You can no t operate the navigation system. If short to ground: You can not operate the navigation system.

HFL-Navigation Microphone inputs and Outputs

H FL-NAVIGATION MICROPHONE 7P CONNECTOR

1

2

/

3

5

6

7

W ire side of fe m a l e te rm inal s

HFL-Navigation Microphone 7P Connector

GND (Ground) (G601)

2

BLU

3

PNK

MIC IN — ( HFL mic signal negative) M IC I N + (HFL mic signal positive)

5

LTGRN

HFL MUTE

6

PUR

ACC (Accessory)

7

WHT

+ B ( + B Power source)

Description Ground for HFL-navigation microphone Ground for microphone signal Microphone output signal positive

HFL MUTE signal Power source for accessory Continuous power source

Voltage

(a b o u t )

Symptom

OV

If open: You can not operate voice recognition. If short to ground: No effect on voice recognition.

OV

If open: microphone signal shown as red in diagnostics: System Links and Functional Setup Mic Level. If short to ground: No effect on voice recognition. If open: microphone signal shown as red in diagnostics: System Links and Functional Setup Mic Level, If short to ground: Microphone signal shown as red in diagnostic screens: System Links and Functional Setup Mic Level . If open: You can not operate HFL soun If short to ground: You can not operate audio sound. If open: You can not operate voice control. If short to ground: Bl ows fuse No. 32 (10 A) in the under-dash fuse/i If open: You can not operate HFL and voice control. If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 7 (10 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box.

8V




nnnnnnnnnn

KA

A f t e r th e d i s p l a y c h a n g e s to t h e D ia g n o s tic M e n u , s e l e c t th e ite m y o u w a n t t o c h e c k , a n d th e te s t b e g in s . T o r e tu rn to th e p r e v io u s s c re e n , s e l e c t R e tu rn .

Return

D e t a il In f o r m a t io n & S e tt in g F o llo w t h e s e s te p s to p r e v e n t th e s c re e n f r o m s h o w in g u p in th e fu tu r e : • P ress a n d h o ld t h e M E N U , M A P /G U ID E , a n d C A N C E L b u tto n s a t t h e s a m e t i m e un til th e S e le c t D ia g n o s is It e m s s c re e n c o m e s up . T h e n r e le a s e th e b u tto n s . • P ress a n d h o ld t h e M A P /G U ID E b u tto n u n til th e In l in e D ia g S e tt in g s c re e n a p p e a rs . • S e t th e In D ia g S e tt in g to C o m p le t e , th e n s e l e c t R e tu rn t w i c e to e x it t h e d ia g n o s t ic m o d e .

InLine

D ia g S e tt in g incomplete

| Return | Complete

Monitor Check

GPS Information

Unit Check

Yaw Rate

Functional Setup

Car Status

XM(HIP)

Erro r History

B-CAN

Versio n

M o n ito r C h e c k

G ray T o n e

O v e r v i e w o f d i s p l a y u n it

T h is s c re e n d ia g n o s e s p r o b le m s w it h c o n tra s t. Y o u

• T h e n a v ig a tio n d i s p l a y u n it c o m m u n ic a t e s w it h th e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it o v e r its o w n G A - N e t bu s. I n f o r m a t io n s e n t b y th e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it to th e n a v ig a tio n d is p la y u n it in c lu d e s c o m m a n d s to c o n tr o l t h e LC D b a c k l ight.

s h o u ld b e a b l e to s e e th e c h a n g e s f r o m b a r to b a r a c ro s s th e sc ale. It is n o r m a l f o r t h e t w o b a rs o n e it h e r s id e to a p p e a r t h e s a m e . If y o u c a n 't s e e c h a n g e s f r o m b a r to b a r, r e p l ac e th e n a v ig a tio n d is p la y u n it (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 9 ).

• T h e s e c u r ity s y s te m p r o te c ts th e n a v ig a tio n d is p la y u n it b y d a is y - c h a in in g th e s e c u r ity s ig n a l th r o u g h th e

G ray T o n e

| Hotum j

co m p o n en ts. • T h e illu m in a t io n in p u t f r o m th e g a u g e b r ig h tn e s s c o n t r o l p r o v id e s b a c k lig h tin g f o r th e b u tto n s s u r r o u n d in g th e s c re e n . T h e s e s c re e n s a l l o w y o u to t r o u b l e s h o o t t h e n a v ig a tio n d i s p l a y u n it. S e le c t th e ite m y o u w a n t t o t r o u b l e s h o o t a n d f o l l o w t h e d ia g n o s t ic in s tru c tio n s .

M o n ito r C heck

| Return | B la c k R a s t e r

RGB Color

Colo r Pattern

Gray Tone

White Raster

Black Raster

Monitor Adjustme

T h is d ia g n o s t ic s c re e n c h e c k s f o r p ix e ls t h a t m a y be s tu ck o n . T h e e n tir e d is p la y m u s t b e black. If p i x e l s a re s tu c k o n , r e p l a c e th e n a v ig a tio n d is p la y u n it (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 9 ),

RGB T h is s c re e n v e r if ie s t h a t th e d i s p l a y u n it is re c e iv in g th e v id e o

(R, G,

B a n d C o m p o s it e s y n c ) s ig n a ls p r o p e r ly . T h e

th r e e p r im a r y c o lo rs s h o u ld all a p p e a r w it h o u t d is to rtio n . T h e c o m b in a t io n o f a ll t h r e e s h o u ld p r o d u c e a c e n t r a l w h i t e s e c tio n . I f a n y o f t h e c o l o rs a re m is s in g , t r o u b l e s h o o t f o r th e c o lo r s ig n a l (s e e p a g e 2 3 -2 9 3 ). If th e p ic tu re h a s lin es in it o r sc ro lls h o riz o n ta lly , o r v e rtic a lly , tr o u b le s h o o t f o r a C o m p o s it e s y n c p r o b l e m (s ee p a g e 2 3 -2 3 4 ).

(cont'd)

System Diagnostic Mode (cont'd) C o lo r P a t t e r n

U n it C h e c k (Q u ic k C h e c k )

T h e d ia g n o s t ic s c re e n s h o w s th e c o l o rs b e in g u s e d fo r

N O T E : S o m e o f th e te s ts a n d s c re e n s t h a t a r e d is p la y e d

th e m a p a n d m e n u s c re e n s . T h is is f o r f a c to r y u s e o n ly .

u n d e r th e U n it C h e c k a r e d iffe r e n t f r o m th e o t h e r

T o c h e c k th e c o lo r s ig n a l , u s e th e R G B C o lo r d ia g n o s t ic

d e t a i l ed check s,

f o u n d u n d e r t h e M o n i t o r C h e ck. T o s ta rt th e t e s t s e l e c t th e ite m y o u w a n t to c h e c k starts. • D is p la y C o l o r P a tte rn

Return

• R a d io

• GPS • A ir c o n

• HFL • S m a r t C a rd • H ard Key • Y a w Sensor • E C U In fo. • R ear C am era

• XM (without AcuraUnk)

W h ite R aster

• U S B M e m o r y I n f o r m a t io n T h is d ia g n o s t ic s c re e n ch e c k s f o r p ix e ls t h a t m a y b e d e a d (off). T h e e n tir e d is p la y m u s t b e w h it e . If th e r e a r e d e a d p ix e ls , r e p l a c e th e n a v ig a tio n d i s p l a y u n it (s ee p a g e 2 3 -3 1 3 ).

W h it e R a s te r

Return

• HDD • D V D IVlech • R E S (w ith r e a r e n t e r t a i n m e n t )

| Return |

S e le c t C h e c k U n its Display

Hard Key

Radio

Yaw Sensor

GPS

ECU Info

Aircon

Rear Camera

HFL

XM

Smart Card

USB Memory Info 1 /2

V

M o n ito r A d ju s tm e n t | Return |

S e le c t C h e c k U n its T h is is f o r fa c t o r y u s e o n ly . T h e D e f a u l t b u tto n w ill re s e t th e d is p la y p o s itio n to f a c to r y s p e c ific a tio n s ,

HDD

RES

DVD IVlech M o n it o r A d ju s t m e n t

Return |

Setting (0, 0 ) Default ( 0 , 0)

2 /2

Default Tuning

X7

Display

U ad i©

T h is d ia g n o s t ic d o e s a d d it io n a l ch e c k s o n th e

T h is d ia g n o s t ic s c re e n ch e c k s t h e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it

c o m m u n ic a t io n b u s b e t w e e n t h e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it

i n t e r n a l r a d io t u n e r a n d C D /D V D p la y e r . If c o n n e c tio n is

a n d t h e n a v ig a tio n d i s p l a y . T h is te s t a ls o ch e c k s th e

N G , r e p la c e th e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n unit.

in t e r n a l e le c tr o n ic fu n c tio n s . • W h e n t h e c o n n e c tio n is N G , fir s t c h e c k f o r l o o s e te r m in a ls a t t h e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it a n d th e

N O T E ; If t h e X M lin k a p p e a r s re d , b u t t h e r a d io l ink a p p e a r s g r e e n in t h e n a v ig a tio n s y s te m l in k, r e fe r to a u d io s y s te m s y m p t o m tr o u b le s h o o tin g .

n a v ig a tio n d i s p l a y u n it c o n n e c tio n s . N e x t c h e c k f o r a n o p e n o r s h o r t in t h e c o m m u n ic a t io n lin e b e t w e e n th e

Radio

a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it a n d th e n a v ig a tio n d is p la y u n it.

["Return

If th e lin e h a s a n o p e n o r s h o r t, r e p la c e th e a f fe c t e d Connection

s h ie ld e d h a rn e s s .

OK

• T h e v e r s io n re p r e s e n ts th e s o f t w a r e v e r s io n in th e d is p la y .

D is p la y

[R e tu rn

Connection

OK

Version

093500 GPS T h is d ia g n o s t ic te s ts th e G P S a n t e n n a c o n n e c tio n a n d ■ t h e G P S r e c e iv e r c o n d itio n . • I n t h e G P S m e n u , if th e A n t e n n a in d ic a te s N G , th e n c h e c k t h e e n tir e G P S a n t e n n a w i r e f r o m th e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it to th e a n te n n a . If t h e w ir e is c r u s h e d o r d a m a g e d , t r y a k n o w n - g o o d a n te n n a . If th is d ia g n o s t ic r e a d s O K , th e n o r d e r a n e w G P S a n te n n a . If t h e d ia g n o s t ic still re a d s N G ( A n te n n a ) , th e n r e p l a c e th e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it (s e e p a g e 2 3 -3 1 8 ). • S e le c t in f o r m a t io n to s e e th e G P S s a te ll ite d e ta ils .

| Return |

GPS Antenna

OK

Receiver in Navi ECU

OK

FirmWare Versio n

7.103 ■ 061128

Information

(c o n t'd )

System Diagnostic Mode (cont'd) S m a rt C ard

A ir c o n T h is d ia g n o s t ic te sts th e c l im a t e b u s c o n n e c tio n and

AC-SO)

(AC-SI

b e t w e e n th e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it a n d

If th e r e m o te s a r e lin k e d to th e v e h i c l e, y o u c a n c h e c k t h e r e m o t e c o n d itio n o n th is s c re e n .

c li m a t e c o n t r o l u n it. M a k e s u re th e e n g in e is r u n n in g fo r th is te s t. | Return |

S m a r t C a rd W h e n t h e c o n n e c tio n a p p e a r s N G , g o to t h e N a v i g a t io n c a n n o t c o n tr o l H V A C b y v o ic e

command.

Return

A ir c o n Connection

OK

HFL T h is ch e c k s t h e 4 w ir e c o m m u n ic a t io n b u s b e t w e e n th e H a n d s F r e e L in k c o n t r o l u n it a n d th e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it. W h e n c o n n e c tio n is s h o w n w it h N G , c h e c k th e H F L fu n c t io n a n d g o to a p p r o p r ia t e t r o u b le s h o o t i n g in H a n d s F r e e L in k S y s t e m .

USER 1

ON

USER 2

OFF

Select Steering Key

H ard K ey T h is d ia g n o s t ic te sts th e in te r fa c e d i a l , t h e b u tto n s t h a t s u r r o u n d it, th e a u d io r e m o t e s w itc h , a n d th e

Return

S te e r in g K e y

H F L -n a v ig a tio n v o ic e c o n t r o l s w itc h . F o r th is m o d e l, th e MODE

in te r fa c e d ial a n d b u tto n s u s e th e se ria l b u s fo r

VOL DOWN

VOL UP

c o m m u n ic a t io n s .

CH UP

CH DOWN

ON HOOK

OFF HOOK

Talk SW

Back SW

T o c o m p le t e th e te s t, to u c h e a c h b u tto n o n th e v e h ic le 's c o n tr o l p a n e l, a n d m o v e th e in te r fa c e d i a l to e a c h in d ic a te d p o s itio n . A s e a c h fu n c t io n is te s te d , th e c o r r e s p o n d in g b u tto n o n th e d is p la y s h o u ld h i g h l i g h t T o e x it, p u s h in a n d h o ld th e s e le c to r k n o b . N O T E : Y o u c a n n o t u s e t h e o n s c r e e n re tu rn b u tto n to e x it th is f u n c t io n

H ard Key Steering Key Audio Key

| Return Navi Key

Select AU DIO Key

Return

A u d io K e y TITLE

1

SCAN VOLUM E UP

d\a/d PWR

A M /FM DVD PLAY

2 RPT

3

4

5

VO LUM E DOWN

XM

TUNE UP DISC

REAR PWR

6

EJECT

A.SEL/RDM SKIP DOWN

FRONT SOURCE

c n i SO UND

HDD

REAR SOURCE

SKIP UP

REAR CTRL

TUNE dow n

US B /A U X DVD EJECT

Select Navi Key

| Return |

N avi K ey

Keep Pushing to Return. RR

RL M A P GUIDE CANCEL A UDIO

O < 3

O

MENU

O

DAY NIGHT

ENTER O

INFO

(c o n t'd )

S y s te m

D ia g n o s tic

M o d e

( c o n t 'd )

Ya w Sensor

E C U In fo .

T h is s c re e n g iv e s a q u ic k t e s t o f th e y a w s e n s o r

T h is s c re e n l o o k s f o r p r o b le m s in t h e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n

f u n c t io n a l ity b a s e d o n th e t w o v o lta g e s S e n s o r a n d

un it. W h e n y o u in itia te th is d ia g n o s is , th e

O f f s e t F o r m o r e in f o r m a t io n s e e th e Y a w R a te

a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it m a y f r e e z e o r d e la y u p to a m in u t e

D ia g n o s tic .

w h i l e t h e d ia g n o s is ru n s .

• D-RAM | Ret

Y a w Sensor Zero Point Output

OK

Output Value

2,509 V

Current Offset

2,500 V

Temperature in ECU

36 °C

is

NG,

r e p la c e th e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it.

• P r o g r a m Flash: D is p la y s t h e v e r s io n o f t h e n a v ig a tio n s o f t w a r e in m e m o r y . • P r o g r a m on H D D ; If d i s p l a y e d , th is v a lu e r e p r e s e n ts th e v e r s io n o f t h e n a v ig a tio n s o f t w a r e o n th e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it H D D . • P r o g r a m on D V D ; If d is p la y e d , th is v a lu e r e p r e s e n ts t h e v e r s io n o f t h e n a v ig a tio n s o f t w a r e o n th e

audio-navigation

u n it D V D .

• S e r ia l N o . s h o u ld be th e s a m e as t h e s e r ia l n u m b e r f o u n d o n t h e u n d e r s i d e o f t h e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n un it. Y o u n e e d th is n u m b e r to o b ta in t h e s e c u r ity c o d e f r o m t h e in te r a c t iv e N e t w o r k (iN ) s y s te m . • D B V e r s io n ; D is p la y s th e v e r s io n o f th e D B o n th e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it H D D . • H D D V e r s io n : D is p la y t h e v e r s io n o f t h e H D D . • D - R A M c h e c k is f o r fa c to r y u s e o n ly .

Return

E C U I nfo D-RAM

OK (2008.4.27 10:22:30)

Flash OK

P rogram Flash 0,00.5800

M o d el STXX

P rogram on HDD 0.00.5800

Coverage KA

P rogram on DVD -

DB V ersion IT021.01.02 HDD V ersion 3.042.1201

D-RAM Check

Rear C a m e r a

USB

Memory Information

T h is te s t c h e c k s w h e t h e r t h e r e a r v ie w c a m e r a is

If t h e U S B m e m o r y is c o n n e c te d to th e U S B p o rt, th e

c o n n e c te d to t h e n a v ig a tio n d i s p l a y u n i t

s c re e n d is p la y s t h e U S B m e m o r y size, th e P ro d u c t I D,

W h e n c o n n e c tio n is s h o w n N G , c h e c k t h e r e a r v ie w

V e n d e r ID , a n d c o n n e c tio n s tatu s.

c a m e r a s ig n a l line. | Return |

U S B M e m o r y I n f o r m a t io n | Return |

R ear C am era Connection

USB Memory ; Not Inserted Memory size :

OK

Product ID

:

Vender ID

HDD • T h is s c re e n s h o w s th e H D D m o u n t e r r o r a n d th e

X M

te m p e ra tu re . T h is c h e c k s t h e G A - N E T B us lin e to t h e W hen

connection

XM

r e c e iv e r .

is s h o w n w it h N G , c h e c k th e

c o n n e c tio n b e t w e e n t h e X M

r e c e iv e r a n d th e

• T h e s c re e n s h o w s a l ist o f to ta l a n d f r e e c a p a c itie s o f e a c h p a rtitio n , • S e l e c t t h e E rr o r H is t o r y w i l l d is p la y th e e r r o r h is to ry o c c u r r e d w h i l e r e a d in g o r w r it in g th e d a ta to H D D .

a u d io - n a v ig a t io n un it.

W h e n t h e H D D s ta tu s is O K , t h e c o n n e c tio n b e t w e e n th e Return

XM

H D D p in s a n d t h e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it a r e g o o d . W h e n t h e H D D s ta tu s is N G , th e r e is a c o n n e c tio n

Co nnection

OK

p r o b l e m b e t w e e n t h e H D D p in s a n d th e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n i t • W h e n th e H D D S ta tu s is N G , th e s c re e n d o e s n o t s h o w th e fr e e a n d to ta l c a p a c itie s o f e a c h p a rtitio n , h o w e v e r , it s h o w s th e t e m p e r a t u r e .

HDD HDD Status OK P artition Size PartOO PartOI Part02 Part03 Part04 PartOB Part06

I HDD T em p, Free (byte) 10881325120135% )/ 1896738818 ( 57% )/ 835932160 ( 98% )/ 299335680 (9 9 % )/ 16232513536 ( 99% )/ 418500608 ( 99% )/ 8493232128 ( 99% )/

Return |

35°C Total (byte) 30348591104 3308359680 847781888 299728896 16245424128 419127296 8493236224

Error History

(c o n t'd )

S y s te m

D ia g n o s tic

M o d e

(c o n t 'd )

DVD Mech

F u n c tio n a l S e tu p

D o th is p r o c e d u re o n ly w h e n d ire c te d b y th e fa c to r y o r o t h e r H o n d a s e rv ic e in fo r m a tio n (like a s e rv ic e b u ll etin).

S e le c t t h e ite m y o u w a n t to ch eck ,

T h is d ia g n o s tic sc ree n checks th e a u d io -n a v ig a tio n u n it

• Dem o M ode

in te r n a l D V D p l a y e r m e c h a n is m .

• S a v e U sers M e m o r y

• A ll C le a r

• T h e s c re e n s h o w s D V D M e c h v e rs io n . W h e n th e a u d io -n a v ig a tio n u n it ca n read th e v e rs io n , th e s c re e n s h o w s C o n n e c tio n O K . If th e v e rs io n n u m b e r c a n n o t be

• M ic L e v e l • H D D R e c o rd

re a d , th e sc re e n s h o w s th e C o n n e c tio n N G . • For m o d e ls w it h o u t re a r e n t e r t a i n m e n t th e s c re e n

F u n c tio n a l S e tu p

j Return j

s h o w s o n ly F ro n t M e c h in fo r m a tio n . It d o e s n o t s h o w R e a r M e c h in fo r m a tio n .

Save Users Memo ry

• In s e rtin g th e disc th a t c o n ta in s a D V D M e c h u p d a te p r o g r a m a l l o w s y o u to s e l ec t D o w n lo a d . O th e r w is e it is grayed o u t •

j u p d a te th e D V D M e c h , y o u m u s t in s e rt th e u p d a te disc b e fo r e se le c tin g th is sc ree n. If y o u in s e rt th e u p d a te disc w h e n y o u a re on th is s c re e n , th e D o w n l o a d b u tto n stays g r a y e d ou t. If th is h a p p e n s , e x it th e D V D M e c h sc ree n a n d s ta rt th e p r o c e d u r e a g a in .

| Returr

DVD M ech Front Conn e ction

OK

V ersion

6,920

Download

Rear C o nnection

OK

V ersion

6,9200

Download

RES T h is ch ecks t h e G A -N E T Bus l in e to th e r e a r c o n t r o l ler a n d sc ree n. W h e n th e c o n n e c tio n a p p e a rs N G , ch e c k t h e c o n n e c tio n o p e n /s h o r t b e tw e e n th e re a r c o n tr o ll e r a n d s c re e n a n d th e a u d io -n a v ig a tio n unit.

Demo Mode All Clear

Mic Level HDD Rec, Deterrent

S a v e U sers

Memory

S e le c t th e E X P O R T b u tto n to m o v e t h e c l ie n t's d a ta f r o m

N O T E : If t h e H D D is O K , tr a n s fe r t h e H D D to t h e n e w a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it. D o th is p r o c e d u r e o n ly w h e n r e p la c in g th e H D D (if p o s s ib l e).

t h e o r ig in a l a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it to th e U S B d e v ic e . S e le c t Y E S o n t h e E x p o r t U s e r D a ta C o n f ir m a t io n s c re e n . T h e p r o c e s s ta k e s o n ly a c o u p le o f s e c o n d s . T h e s y s te m s to re s t w o file s o n t h e U S B d e v ic e .

W h e n r e p l a c in g th e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it, th is f u n c t io n a l l o w s t h e d e a le r to tr a n s fe r th e c lie n t's p e rs o n a l d a ta to

N O T E : If t h e E X P O R T b u tto n is g r a y e d o u t, c h e c k th e U S B p o rt.

t h e n e w a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it. T h e tr a n s fe r r e d in f o r m a t io n in c lu d e s t h e c li e n t ’s S e t u p s e ttin g s , a n d p e rs o n a l a d d r e s s e s . T h e d e a l e r in s e rts a U S B d e v ic e in to t h e U S B p o rt, a n d th e n s e le c t th e S a v e U s e r s M e m o r y fu n c tio n . T h e t w o fu n c t io n s in th is d ia g n o s t ic s c re e n a r e E X P O R T a n d I M P O R T , E X P O R T s a v e s t h e c l ie n t's d a ta to t h e U S B d e v ic e , a n d I M P O R T m o v e s t h e U S B d e v ic e file s to th e n e w a u d io - n a v ig a t io n unit,

S a v e U sers M e m o ry EXPORT

| Return | IMPORT

A f t e r re p la c in g t h e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n it, a l l o w th e s y s te m to b o o t u p . In s e rt t h e U S B d e v ic e in to th e U S B p o rt a n d e n t e r t h e S a v e U s e r s M e m o r y in th e n a v ig a tio n s y s te m d ia g n o s t ic m o d e . S e le c t t h e I M P O R T b u tto n to m o v e t h e t w o file s s to r e d b y t h e E x p o r t p r o c e s s f r o m th e U S B d e v ic e to t h e n e w a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n i t S e le c t Y E S o n th e Im p o r t U s e r T h is fu n c t io n d o e s n o t s ta rt (th e E X P O R T a n d I M P O R T b u tto n s a r e g r a y e d o u t) un til y o u c o n n e c t a U S B d e v ic e .

D a ta C o n f ir m a t io n s c re e n . W h e n th e tr a n s fe r is f in is h e d (a f e w s e c o n d s ) th e s y s te m a u t o m a t ic a ll y re b o o t. A f t e r t h e s y s te m r e b o o ts , r e m o v e t h e U S B d e v ic e f r o m th e U S B po rt. N O T E : If th e I M P O R T b u tto n is g r a y e d o u t, c h e c k if th e M o d e l a n d t h e P r o g r a m Flash s h o w n o n th e V e r s io n s c re e n a r e t h e s a m e ,

(c o n t'd )

S y s te m

D ia g n o s tic

M o d e

(c o n t 'd )

Dem o M ode

All Clear

T h is s c re e n is f o r f a c to r y u s e o n ly , a n d s h o u ld a l w a y s b e

T h e all c l e a r f u n c t io n d e l e te s a l l r ip p e d m u s ic , im a g e s ,

s e t to O F F. O c c a s io n a ll y t h e D E M O s e ttin g is t u r n e d O N

cell p h o n e in f o r m a t io n , p r e v io u s d e s tin a tio n s , a n d th e

w h e n v e h ic le s a r e b e in g u s e d a t a u to s h o w s o r s im ila r

P h o n e b o o k fro m th e H D D ,

e v e n ts . T u r n in g th is f e a t u r e o n , a ll o w s t h e n a v ig a tio n s y s te m to a u t o m a t i c a l ly f o l l o w a r o u te to a d e s tin a tio n w h e n th e v e h ic le is s ta tio n a r y . T h e S p e e d R a te c h a n g e s t h e s p e e d o f th e d e m o m o d e .

Dem o M ode Dem o

W h e n A ll C le a r is s e le c te d , t h e s y s te m re s ta rts a f te r p e r f o r m in g t h e A ll C l e a r p ro c e s s . A f t e r t h e r e s ta rt, a n o r m a l s ta rt-u p p r o c e s s o c c u rs a n d n e e d s G P S i n itia l iza tio n .

Return OFF

ON

1 OFF J

m ile / h o u r

Speed Rate FreeW ay

62

F erryW ay

62

m ile / h o u r

T o llW ay

82

m ile / h o u r

O therW ay

82

m ile / h o u r

If y o u s e l e c t Y E S , t h e s e c o n d c o n f i r m a t io n s c re e n a p p ea rs .

Mic Level

HDD Record D eterrent Setting

T h is d ia g n o s t ic a llo w s y o u to i n d e p e n d e n t l y te s t t h e

T h is s e ttin g a l lo w s y o u to e n a b l e o r d is a b le r e c o r d in g

m ic r o p h o n e a n d th e T A L K a n d B A C K b u tto n s . T h e y a r e

C D s to th e H D D , R e fe r to t h e O w n e r 's m a n u a l f o r m o r e

u s e d to a c tiv a te th e v o ic e c o n tr o l s y s te m . T h e

i n f o r m a t io n a b o u t r ip p in g m u s ic to t h e H D D .

m ic r o p h o n e is lo c a te d n e a r th e m a p lig h t in th e r o o f c o n s o le . T h e m ic r o p h o n e c a n n o w is o la te th e d r iv e r 's v o ic e e v e n w h e n th e r e is n o is e o r o t h e r c o n v e r s a tio n s in th e v e h ic le . T o p r o p e r l y c h e c k t h e m ic r o p h o n e s , m a k e s u re y o u a r e sittin g in th e d r iv e r 's s e a t

N O T E ; If t h e H D D Rec. D e t e r r e n t is s e t to o n , a n d th e c lie n t t r ie s to rip a C D to t h e H D D , a n e r r o r m e s s a g e a p p e a r s o n t h e s c re e n .

D eterrent Setting OFF

• P re ss t h e T A L K b u tto n o n th e s t e e r in g w h e e l , w a i t u n it y o u h e a r a b e e p , a n d in a n o r m a l v o ic e s a y " t e s t in g " . T h e T A L K in d ic a to r o n t h e s c re e n s h o u l d m o m e n t a r i l y tu rn g r e e n , a n d t h e t e x t N o w R e c o rd in g .., s h o u ld a p p e a r in y e l l o w . I f t h e ta lk in d ic a to r s h o w n o n th e s c re e n d o e s n o t b r ie f ly t u rn g r e e n w h e n y o u p re s s t h e T A L K b u tto n , c h e c k th e w ir in g f r o m th e s t e e r in g w h e e l T A L K b u tto n to th e H a n d s F r e e L in k c o n tr o l u n i t If t h e r e is n o M ic L e v e l m o v e m e n t w h e n y o u s p e a k , th e n y o u s h o u l d c h e c k t h e w ir e s r u n n in g f r o m t h e m ic r o p h o n e in t h e r o o f c o n s o le to t h e H a n d s F r e e L in k c o n tr o l u n it a n d th e a u d io - n a v ig a t io n u n i t If th e w ir e s a r e O K , th e m i c r o p h o n e m u s t b e fa u lty ; r e p l a c e th e m ic r o p h o n e l o c a te d in t h e r o o f c o n s o le (s ee p a g e 2 3 -4 2 4 ).

D eterrent S etting ON

• P ress t h e B A C K b u tto n o n th e s te e r in g w h e e l. T h is s h o u ld c a u s e th e B A C K in d ic a to r o n t h e s c re e n to m o m e n t a r i l y t u rn g r e e n . If it d o e s n o t b r ie f ly tu rn to

b

C o n firm a tio n

g r e e n , t h e n c h e c k t h e w ir in g f r o m t h e s te e r in g w h e e l

T h is o p e ra tio n w i l l ta k e several m in u te s . S h o u l d H D D R ecord C o n tr o l M o d e be set ? A fte r settin g, reset w ill occur a u to m a t ic a l ly.

B A C K b u tto n to t h e H a n d s F r e e L in k c o n tr o l u n it. N O T E : T h e M ic l e v e l s h o u ld re a c h t h e 6 th bar.

M ic L e vel Mic Level

□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ Stc;erimg Switch

Return

f

Yes

1

„ 11...... .......... ...F 9

#

S y s te m

X M

D ia g n o s tic

(H IP ) S y s t e m

M o d e

(c o n t 'd )

X M

L in k

T h is d ia g n o s t ic te s ts th e w i r e c o n n e c tio n s b e t w e e n th e

S ta tu s

Y o u c a n c h e c k t h e X M s ta tu s in th is s c re e n .

X M ( H I P) c o m p o n e n t s .

Item s

XM

B-CAN

T r a f fic S ig n a l R e c e p tio n XM(HIP).ECU

HFL

9119Audio

XM Status XM(HIP) Diag

C heck A n te n n a N o S ig n a l L o a d in g E x p ire d

• R e c e iv in g • Check A n te n n a • N o S ig n a l • L o a d in g • E x p ire d

Navi

. 11 . .

Condition Indicated • R e c e iv in g • • • •

Return

H IP S y s t e m Link

f -c a n ]

r e c e p tio n

T r a f fic In d ic a to r

• T R F (green icon): T r a f fic in f o r m a t io n is a v a ila b le , • T R F (w h it e icon): F l o w or in c id e n t d a ta is n o t a v a i l a b l e. • T R F (re d ico n): No tr a ffic a v a i l a b l e ( f lo w a n d in c id e n t).

T r a f fic D a ta

• OK • In v a lid

T r a f fic Last U p d a te

L ast u p d a t e t i m e a n d d a te in d ic a te d .

W e a t h e r S ig n a l R e c e p tio n

• • • • •

W e a t h e r D a ta

• OK • In v a lid

W e a t h e r Last U p d a te

Last u p d a te t i m e a n d d a te in d ic a te d .

X M S ta tu s

| Retur

XM Reception:

R e ce ivii Check A n ten n a N o S ig n a l L o a d in g E x p ire d

NoSignal

Traffic SignalReception:

NoSignal

Indicator: Data:

I nvalid

LastUpdate

0000.00.0000:00

Weather SignalReception: Data: LastUpdate:

Out of Coverage

NoSignal I nvalid 0000.00.0000:00

B -C A N (B o d y C o n t r o l ler A r e a N e t w o r k ) p a s s e s

T h is s c re e n s h o w s th e c u r r e n t sta tu s o f G P S r e c e p tio n .

in f o r m a t io n b e t w e e n p r o c e s s o r s o n t h e n e tw o r k . T h e

T h e c ir c u la r d i a g r a m s h o w s t h e c u r r e n t l o c a tio n o f th e

B -C A N n e t w o r k u s es a c o m m u n ic a t io n p ro to c o l t h a t

G P S s a t e ll ites ( y e l l o w n u m b e r s ) as t h e y w o u l d a p p e a r in

tr a n s m its d a ta a t 3 3 .3 3 K bp s.

t h e sky, T h e o u t e r c ircle r e p r e s e n ts th e h o riz o n (0

If t h e d ia g n o s t ic s c re e n r e a d s N G , tu r n t h e ig n itio n s w itc h to O N . D ia g n o s tic t r o u b le c o d e s (D T C s ) f o r th e B -C A N c a n b e r e tr ie v e d w it h th e H D S (H o n d a D ia g n o s tic S y s t e m ) . T h e d a ta d i s p l a y e d in th e I D b o x e s is f o r fa c to r y u s e o n ly .

d e g r e e s e l e v a tio n ). T h e m id d le a n d in n e r circle s r e p r e s e n ts 3 0 a n d 6 0 d e g r e e s r e s p e c tiv e l y . T h e v e r y c e n te r o f th e d i a g r a m (9 0 d e g r e e s e l e v a tio n ) is d ire c tly o v e r h e a d . N e a r b y o b s tr u c tio n s , l ike ta ll b u ild in g s w ill b lo c k s a t e l lites in th a t d ire c tio n . T h a t is w h y it is n e c e s s a r y t o b e in a n o p e n a r e a to e f f e c t iv e l y t r o u b l e s h o o t G P S r e c e p tio n iss ues . T h e s a te llite

Return

B -C A N

n u m b e r s s h o w n o n th e d i a g r a m c o r r e s p o n d to th e P R N n u m b e r in th e G P S D e ta ils s c re e n , T h e r e a r e a lw a y s a t

ERROR STATUS

le a s t 2 4 a c tiv e G P S s a te llite s in o rb it. B e c a u s e s a te ll ites

NO ERROR ID

ID

ID

F811

F873

F834

fa il, a n d h a v e to b e r e m o v e d f r o m s e rv ic e , s p a r e s a re a lw a y s p a rk e d in o r b it, r e a d y to b e a c tiv a te d . T h is is w h y th e P R N (s a te llite ID n u m b e r ) c a n b e g r e a t e r th a n 24,

F850

F854

F862 N O T E ; W h e n y o u u s e th is s c re e n fo r t r o u b le s h o o t in g ,

Must have engine running fo r this test.

p a rk th e v e h ic le o u ts id e , a w a y f r o m b u ild in g s , t a l l t r e e s , a n d h ig h - te n s io n w ir e s f o r a t l e a s t 10 m in u te s w it h th e e n g in e r u n n in g . • T h e N u m b e r o f S a t e l l ites b o x s h o w s th e n u m b e r o f a c q u ir e d s a te llite s ( m a x i m u m o f 12). It s h o u ld c o n ta in f o u r o r m o r e ico ns. I f n o t, tr o u b le s h o o t fo r G P S ico n is w h it e o r n o t s h o w n (s ee p a g e 2 3 -2 9 7 ). • T h e C u r r e n t P o s itio n 's h o w s la titu d e , lo n g itu d e , a n d e le v a t io n (in fe e t). If th e r e a r e less th a n f o u r s a t e ll ites, t h e e l e v a tio n c a n b e g r o s s l y in a c c u ra te . • T h e D a t e /T im e fie ld s h o w s t h e c u r r e n t d a te , a n d als o

GMI

tim e .

| Return |

G P S In fo r m a tio n [ 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 ^

I

Current Position Latitude

^-4 N x x ° x x 'x x ”

j

\

(^2?

Lo ngitude

E xxx°xx'xx”

Elevation

xx feet

\v

\

x x x x .x x .x x

x x :x x :x x

S'— G i n Use

/

/

/CF__ ^ O

Search

N O T E : P re s s in g t h e m a p /g u id e b u tto n d i s p l a y s th e s a te llite n u m b e r o n e a c h circle.

S y s te m

D ia g n o s tic

M o d e

(c o n t 'd )

T h e t a b l e o f v a lu e s s h o w n b e l o w d e fin e th e t e r m s a t t h e

G P S D e ta il

t o p o f th e c o lu m n s in th e G P S d e t a il s c re e n . B y p re s s in g a n d h o l d in g t h e M E N U b u tto n f o r 2 s e c o n d s , a G P S D e t a il s c re e n a p p e a rs . T h is s c re e n d is p la y s real t i m e in c o m in g s a t e l l ite p o s itio n a l d a ta w h e n t h e v e h ic le

C o lu m n

D e s c r ip tio n

P r o b le m in d ic a tio n

A c tiv e

A c tiv e s a t e ll ites ( Y e ll o w D o t)

If 3 D m is s in g w h e n th e v e h ic le is p a rk e d o u ts id e , d o t h e G P S ico n is w h it e or not s h o w n tr o u b le s h o o tin g , (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 7 )

PRN

T h e s a t e l l ite ID num ber

is o u ts id e in th e o p e n . T h e in f o r m a t io n s h o w n o n th is s c re e n is f o r f a c to r y use. N O T E : T h e d a ta s h o w n is a n e x a m p l e o n l y.

G P S D e t a il TS:xx AS.xx

[ Return |

HDop:xx.x VDop:xx.x

Speed:x.xMi/h Directiomx0

Date:xxxx.xx.xx Time:xx:xx:xx

3D

PRN

ST

A Z!

EL

cm

O

XX

XX

XXX

XX

XXX

XX

O

XX

XX

XXX

XX

XXX

XX

O

XX

XX

XXX

XX

XXX

XX

O

XX

XX

XXX

XX

XXX

XX

o

XX

XX

XXX

XX

o

XX

XX

XXX

XX

XXX XXX

XX

• T h e b o x T S /A S a n d

H Dop (h o r iz o n ta l

ST

T h e statu s: 0 = c a n n o t v i e w o r s e a r c h in g , 2 = a c q u ir in g

AZI

A z im u t h , th e angle ( 0 — 3 8 0 ) c lo c k w is e f r o m n o rth

EL

E le v a tio n f r o m th e h o riz o n (90 d e g is ov erhead)

ACC

XX

A

1/3

▼

d i l u tio n o f

p r e c is io n )/V D o p (v e rtic a l d ilu tio n o f p re c is io n ) is fo r

c m

R e c e iv e r s e n s itiv ity

ACC A

S a te llite a c c u r a c y

f a c to r y use. • T h e S p e e d a n d D ir e c tio n in fo r m a tio n is u p d a t e d in r e a l t i m e w h e n d r iv in g . • 7 ! .~ D a t e /T im e I n f o r m a t io n is th e s a m e as in S e tu p s c re e n 2 A d ju s t T i m e Z o n e /C lo c k . • If th e 3 D ico n is s h o w n a b o v e th e y e l l o w d o ts , th is im p lie s th a t a t l e a s t fo u r s a t e l l ites a r e a v a i l a b l e fo r m a p p o s it io n in g , and. t h e G P S in d ic a to r o n th e m a p s c re e n w i l l b e g r e e n . S e e t h e G l o b a l P o s itio n in g S y s t e m d e t a il e d e x p l a n a tio n in t h e S y s t e m D e s c rip tio n . • If th e r o w o f d a ta in th e t a b le b e l o w b e g in s w it h a y e l l o w d o t, t h e A Z I a n d EL fie ld s c a n b e u s e d to lo c a te e a c h s a te llite o n th e c ir c u la r G P S d i a g r a m (s e e p r io r s c re e n ).

1/3 to 3 /3

S h o w s v i e w o f all s a t e l lites in t h r e e s c re e n v ie w s 1/3, 2 /3 o r 3 /3

I f a l l O, th e n , d o th e G P S ico n is w h it e or not sh o w n tr o u b le s h o o tin g , (s e e p a g e 2 3 - 2 9 7 )

N o r m a l s ig n a 4 9 -5 2 , n o s ig n a l : 2 7 -3 3

Yaw Rate This diagnostic checks the yaw rate sensor in the contro l

unit This device detects when the vehicle turns, and repositions the vehicle position icon on the map screen. For more detailed information, see the yaw rate sensor theory of operation under System Description. • Sensor indicates the voltage output from the yaw rate sensor, It should indicate about 2.500 volts when the vehicle is stopped. • Offset is the reference voltage or standard within the yaw rate sensor. It also should indicate about 2,500 volts when stopped. • A sensor output voltage LOWER than the Offset voltage indicates that the vehicle is turning to the right • A sensor output voltage HIGHER than the Offset voltage indicates that the vehicle is turning to the left. • The yaw rate offset, and sensor should both indicate about 2.500 volts when the vehicle is stopped. If either reads zero, or 5.000 volts, replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318), • The yaw rate offset and sensor should be within + / —0.01 V of each other when the vehicle is stopped. The sensor value should change relative to the offset as the vehicle turns while driving. If not, replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318). Example; Car stopped Normal Offset Sensor

2.528 ¥ 2,518-2,538 ¥

Abnormal Offset 2.526 ¥ Sensor 2.623 ¥

Example: Car turning Normal Offset Sensor

2.526 ¥ 2.678 ¥ (left turn) 2.478 ¥ (right turn)

Abnormal Offset 2.528 ¥ Sensor 2.823 ¥ (no change on turns)

• Sensitivity study represents the status of the internal tuning function. At initialization, this value starts at 8 and increases to #10 as the interna l correction values become more accurate. • The settings CCW Cal Factor, CW Cal Factor, and Set are for factory use only. THIS SHOULD NE¥ER BE ADJUSTED. • For detailed analysis of the yaw rate select tuning.

| Return ]

Yaw Rate Sensor

x.xxxV

Offset

x.xxxV

CCW Factor

x.x%

CW Factor

x.x%

T u n in g

System Diagnostic Mode (cont'd) Yaw Rate Tuning This diagnostic allows you to graphically display problems with the yaw rate sensor. • The ANG-Disp value accumulates any differences between the offset, and sensor voltages (see Yaw Rate diagnostic). When the sensor functions normally, the random changes in these two voltages generally cancels out, so the value is 0. However if one voltage is consistently higher than the other, then the ANG-Disp value accumulates the constant change. • The Reset button temporarily clears the angular accumulation (ANG-Disp), and clears the display dots. • Do not touch the CCW, CW, or Set buttons. These are used for factory setup only. Two tests are explained below. For gross problems with the sensor, the stationary test usually confirms whether the sensor is defective. For yaw rate issues related to driving, do the road test described below. 1. Stationary test: If the VP icon spins with the vehicle parked and the engine running and the ANG-Disp value slowly increases or decreases, the yaw rate sensor is defective. Replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318).

2. Road test: Drive the vehicle on a very straight, smooth road. Enter the diagnostic mode, select Yaw rate, and touch the Tuning button. While driving down a straight road, the white dots should trace a straight line across the screen. However, if you are driving on a straight road, and you notice the dots constantly dropping down or heading up as you drive, the audio-navigation unit's yaw sensor is defective. To run the test again, touch Reset to clear ANG-Disp, and the dotted lines. If either test above fails, please enter Yaw rate sensor defective for the problem description, on the audio-navigation unit return form. NOTE; The CCW, CW and Set buttons are disabled and cannot be activated. cw~- o.o%

Tuning

ANG - Disp 0° R eset

o

CCW

9 ^

CW

R e tu rn |

Set

Car Status

Version

Use this screen to confirm that the audio-navigation unit is properl y receiving input signa l s. Signals equa l to (0) are OFF, and signals equal to (1) are ON. I f the value on the display does not match the actual vehicle status, then check the wire carrying the signal.

This screen disp l ays the current version information for the navigation system software. I n addition, this screen allows the loading of updated software if requested by the factory, or instructed by a service bull etin. Software may be l oaded from a DVD or a USB device.

• VSP-Vehicle Speed Pul se from PCM

• Flash; Displays the version of the navigation software in memory.

(audio-navigation unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 15)

• HDD: Displays the version of the navigation software in the navigation HDD.

a) OFF (0) when vehicle is not moving b) ON (1) when vehicle is moving The VSP comes from the PCM as a dedicated signal. I nternall y, the,audio-navigation unit compares the actual VP on the map against street data to adjust the pulse to speed scal ing factor. As this scaling factor becomes more accurate, the Level gradua l ly increases from 0 to 10 (see the Tire Ca l ibrate diagnostic screen),

• BACK-Reverse indication from taillight relay (audio-navigation unit connector C (28P) terminal No. 20) a) OFF (0) when the shift l ever is in any position other than reverse b) ON (1) when the shift l ever is in reverse The Back signa l is used by the audio-navigation unit to allow the map screen to show the VP moving backwards when in reverse. This signal is needed because the Speed Pulse has no direction indication.

• USB: If displayed, this va l ue represents the version of the USB software in the USB device, • Disc: I f displayed, this value represents the version of the navigation software on the navigation DVD. • DSP; Displays the version of the DSP firmware. • IPL, APL, DBOOT, HDD, and APP, are all for factory use.

• Model: For this model, the field should begin with STX. • Download: Do not touch, unless instructed by the factory or any other official Honda service information (like a service bulletin). Check any official Honda service website for more service information about the navigation system. Return

Version Program

| Return |

Car Status

VSP

BACK

[0 ]

[0 ]

ILL

PARK

fo ]

[-]

SH Flash HDD USB DISC AVCCore2 IPL APP GateWay APP

0.00.5800 0.00.5800

00.90.12A2 00.90.12A2 0.811

IPL DBOOT

0.000.100 0.310.120

HDD DSP

3.042.1201 0B2107

Model Coverage

STXX KA

DownL
9 i4 1 15] i&] i ' 19

1* - 9

r—

1.'5

[ " 9 1 i 24

NO-Go to step 4. 4. Shield the display unit from the sun with your hand, and check that the display is back lit (only the back light is ON.) Can you see the back light? YES-Substitute a known-good audio-navigation unit (including the HDD) (see page 23-318), and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318). If the symptom is still present, replace the navigation display unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 9 ).■ NO-Go to step 7.

Wire side of female terminals i s th e r e l e s s th a n 0 ,2 ¥ ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire between audio-navigation unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 12 and body ground (G504) (see page 22-38’,. 11

7. Measure the voltage between body ground and navigation display unit 28P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 individually.

8. Measure the voltage between navigation display unit 28P connectorterminal No. 15 and body ground, NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT 28P CONNECTOR n

+B (WHT)

1

ACC fPUR|

2

3

15 18 17 1I

>

3

4

9 9 10 11 12 13 14 9 9 22 23 24 25 28 9 7

T F

15 16 17 18

4

n --------------------( i 9 9 Q 10 11 12 13 14 18 9 20 9 22 23 24 25 28 99 5

GND (BLK)

20

Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals

Is there less than 0.2 ¥? Is there battery voltage? YES-Go to step 8. N O -lf the + EJ wire does not have voltage, repair an open in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the navigation display unit 28P connector. If the ACC wire does not have voltage, repair an open in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the navigation display unit 28P connector.il

YES-Substitute a known-good navigation display unit (see page 23-319), and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original navigation display unit (see page 23-319). If the symptom is still present, replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 8 ).■ NO-Repair an open or high resistance between navigation display unit 28P connector terminal No. 15 and body ground (G506) (see page 2 2 -3 8 ),■

(cont'd)

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Vehicle position icon constantly leaves road, m m es erratically, or is displayed wery far from actyai vehicle position

4. Substitute a known-good audio-navigation unit (including the HDD) (see page 23-318), and check to see if the problem occurs in the same place, Does the problem occur in the same place?

NOTE: • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-34). • Check that the GPS antenna is plugged in. • This is not the same condition as when driving off-road (or on a fire or logging road). This condition is caused by a loss of map matching from a bad sensor input. Check for aftermarket metallic window tinting or other objects that can block the GPS signal. Always do the Map Matching (see page 23-183) before proceeding with the troubleshooting. • Make sure that the latest navigation software is installed. • Check anyofficial Honda service website for

more

service information about the navigation system.

• Check the GPS signal reception in an open area. • Check for and resolve all CAN DTCs before troubleshooting the navigation system. 1. Check the GPS icon on the navigation screen. is the GPS icon white? YES-Go to troubleshooting for GPS icon is white or not shown (see page 2 3 -2 9 7 ).■ NO-Go to step 2. 2. Go into the Self-Diagnosis Mode, and use the Yaw sensor test (see page 23-240) to check the yaw rate sensor. 3. Go into the S e lf Diagnosis Mode, and use the Car Status test (see page 23-255) to check the vehicle speed pulse. Are the yaw rate sensor and vehicle speed pulse OK? YES-The condition may be normal. Check to see if the condition occurs in the same place in a known-good vehicle. If it does, the problem could be in the database. Go to step 4, N O -lf the problem is the yaw rate sensor, replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318). If the problem is the vehicle speed pulse, do the troubleshooting for DTC 1308; Vehicle Speed Pulse (see page 2 3 -2 8 2 ),■

YES-The problem is in the database. Report the problem according to the Navigation System Manual under Reporting Errors.■ NO-Replace the original audio-navigation unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 8 ).■

Picture is missing a color or tone or is an odd color NOTE: • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94). • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals.

8. Check for continuity between the terminals of audio-navigation unit connector G (SP) according to the table. From terminal G3 (RED) G7 (YEL) G8 (WHT)

To terminals G6 (BRN), G7 (YEL), G8 (WHT) G6 (BRN), G8| G6(B

• Check any official Honda service website for more service information about the navigation system. • Check the navigation screen settings for brightness, contrast and black level, and check the color screen for map color and menu color. • Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit • After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit.

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR G (SP)

• Check for aftermarket accessories that may interfere with the navigation system. • Check for and resolve all CAN DTCs before troubleshooting the navigation system.

is there continuity between any of the terminals? YES-There is a short in the wires between the audio-navigation unit and the navigation display unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.■

1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

NO-Go to step 7,

2. Go into the Detail Information & Settings select Monitor Check, and use RGB Color test under Monitor Check (see page 23-239). Are the red, green, and blue colored circles shown? YES-The system is OK at this tim e.B NO-Go to step 3.

_

9 /

n—

2

3

_n 4

6

7

8

Wire side of female terminals

7. Check for continuity between body ground and audio-navigation unit connector G (8P) according to the table. Audio-Navigation unit connector G3 G7 . _ _ _ . . n

Wire col F YEL WHT

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Disconnect audio-navigation unit connector G (8P) and the navigation display unit 28P connector.

AUPIO-NAVIGAIION UNIT CONNECTOR G (8P) n

9 /

5. Check for loose terminals at audio-navigation unit connector G (8P) and the navigation display unit 2SP connector. Are there loose terminals?

r

n

— 2

3

4

8

7

8

Wire side of female terminals

YES-Repair or replace the loose terminal.■ NO-Go to step 6.

is there continuity? YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s) between the audio-navigation unit and the navigation display unit Replace the affected shielded harness.■

(cont'd)

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 8. Check for continuity between the appropriate terminals of audio-navigation unit connector G (8P) and the navigation display unit 28P connector based on the missing color(s). Audio-Navigation unit connector

Missing color Blue Green Red

Navigation display unit connector 11 24 12

’ G3 G8

Wire color YEL RED WHT

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR G (8P)

p

/ /

r

t—

n

2

3

4

8

7

8

Wire side of female terminals NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT 2SP CONNECTOR 1

2

3 I4

15 18 17

9 7199 10 11 12 13 | 14 18 / 20 9 22 23 24 25 28 / 9 5

Picture has lines or rolls Diagnostic Test; Monitor Check NOTE: • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page

22-94).

• Always compare the screen image to a known-good vehicle. If the screen looks the same, inform the client that it is a characteristic of the system. • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals. • Make sure that the latest navigation software is installed. • Check any official Honda service website for more service information about the navigation system. • Check the navigation screen settings for brightness, contrast, and black level, and check the color screen for map color and menu color, • Before troubleshooting, make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit. • After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit, 1. Check for electronic aftermarket accessories (possibly hidden) mounted near the navigation display unit or the audio-navigation unit.

Wire side of female terminals

Are there any electronic accessories? Is there continuity? YES-Substitute a known-good audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318), and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318). If the symptom is still present, replace the navigation display unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 9 ).■ NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the navigation display unit and the audio-navigation unit. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the navigation display unit and the audio-navigation unit. If a poor connection or loose terminal is found, replace the affected shielded harness.■

YES-Disable the accessories, and recheck.B NO-Go to step 2. 2. Start up the navigation system (screen). is the picture scrolling horizontally (left to right or right to left)? YES-Go to step 3. NO-lntermittent failure.■ 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

4. Disconnect audio-navigation unit connector G (SP) and the navigation display unit connector.

28P

5. Check for continuity between audio-navigation unit connector G (8P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.

7. Check for continuity between audio-navigation unit connector G (8P) terminal No. 2 and navigation display unit 28P connector terminal No. 23.

AUDiO-NAViGATlON UNIT CONNECTOR G (8P) AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR G (8P) Wire side of female terminals C-SIG (GRN) p /

2

3

9 9

4

C-i n- —

(GRN) n

2

3

4

6

7

8

Wire side of female terminal s fLnn 1 2

is there continuity?

j

3

15 16 17

YES-There is a short to body ground in the wires between the audio-navigation unit and the navigation display unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.®

4

9 9 3 10 11 12 13 14 18 9 20 9 22 23 24 25 28 9 9 5

C-SIG (GRN) [

NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT 28P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals

NO-Go to step 6. 6. Check for continuity between the terminals of audio-navigation unit connector G (8P) according to the table. From terminal G2 (GRN)

To terminals G7 (YEL), G3 (RED] G8 (WHT), G6 (BRN)

is there continuity? YES-Go to step 8. NO-There is an open in the wire between the audio-navigation unit and the navigation display unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.! 8. Substitute a known-good navigation display unit (see page 23-319), and recheck.

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR G (8P)

is the picture OK? p

9

t—

r

2

3

4

8

7

8

Wire side of femal e terminal s

is there continuity between any of the terminals? YES-There is a short in the wires between the audio-navigation unit and the navigation display unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.■

YES-Check for loose connections, then replace the original navigation display unit.B NO-Check for loose connections, and recheck. If a poor connection or loose terminal is found, replace the shielded harness. If no poor or loose terminals are found, substitute a known-good audio-navigation unit (including the HDD) (see page 23-318), and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-navigation unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 8 ).■

(cont'd)

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Interface dial buttons do not work NOTE: • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94). • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals. • Check for and resolve all CAN DTCs before troubleshooting the navigation system. • Check any official Honda service website for more service information about the navigation system.

4. Measure the voltage between interface dial 5P connectorterminal No. 3 and body ground. INTERFACE DIAL SP CONNECTOR

GND (BLK)

• Before troubleshooting, make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit. • After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit.

Wire side of female terminal s

1. Start the vehicle.

Is there less than 0.2 V?

2. Go into the Detail Information & Settings select Unit Check, and use Hard Key test under Unit Check (see page 23-240).

YES-Go to step 5.

Do

the i n t e r f a c e d ia l b u t t o n s w o r k p r o p e r l y ?

NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire between interface dial 5P connectorterminal No. 3 and body ground (G508) (see page 2 2 -3 8 ).■

YES-The system is OK at this tim e.B

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

NO-Go to step 3.

8. Disconnect audio-navigation unit connector C (28P).

3. Measure the voltage between interface dial 5P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground. INTERFACE DIAL SP CONNECTOR

7. Disconnect the interface dial 5P connector. 8. Check for continuity between audio-navigation unit connector C (28P) terminal No. 28 and interface dial 5Pconnectorterminal No. 1. AUDlO-NAViGATiON UNIT CONNECTOR C (28P) Wire side of female terminal s

C? ACC (PUR)

1 | 2| 3 | 4- j 5 9 9 9 1 9 1 0 |9 l9 h 3 | l4 | 1 5 l / | l 7 18, 7 201912 2 23> 24 [ / 1 26127128 JOG BUS (WHT) JOG BUS (WHT)

Wire side of female terminals

1 2

is there battery voltage? YES-Go to step 4, NO-Repair an open in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the interface dial.l

3 4

INTERFACE DIAL SP CONNECTOR Wire side of femal e terminals

Is there continuity? YES-Go to step 3. NO-There is an open in the wire between the interface dial and the audio-navigation unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.!

9. Check for continuity between audio-navigation unit connector C (28P) terminals No. 13 and No. 28.

GPS icon is white or not shown Diagnostic Test: Self-Diagnosis M ode

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C f28P)

JOG SH “ - T (BRN) 1 |2 3 4 / io R E 7 13 14 115 / M M 18 i/^^0|^^|22j23|24[^^26 | 2T |28 “

JOG BUS (WHT)

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity? YES-There is a short in the wires between the audio-navigation unit and the interface dial. Replace the affected shielded harness.■ NO-Go to step 10. 10. Substitute a known-good interface dial (see page 23-319), and recheck. is the system OK? YES-Replace the original interface dial (see page 23-319) ■ NO-Replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 8 ).■

NOTE:

'

'

'

■

• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94), • With good reception, the icon is normally green. • Make sure the GPS antenna is plugged in. • Check for any aftermarket accessories or metallic window tinting that may be interfering with the GPS signal. • Make sure the vehicle is parked outside, away from buildings. • Refer to GPS Information (see page 23-251) for real-time satellite reception display, • Check for and resolve all CAN DTCs before troubleshooting the navigation system. 1. Check for aftermarket metallic window tint on the front window and electronic aftermarket accessories (possibly hidden) mounted near the GPS antenna or the audio-navigation unit. is there aftermarket metallic window tint or electronic accessories? YES-Remove tint or the accessories, and recheck.B NO-Go to step 2. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 3. Go into the Self-Diagnosis Mode, and use the System Links diagnostic (see page 23-233) to check the GPS antenna. is the GPS Ant icon red? YES-Check for a kinked, crushed, or disconnected GPS antenna wire. If icon is still red, replace the GPS antenna (see page 23-321 ) . ■ NO-Check that nothing is blocking the GPS antenna located under the package shelf, and recheck. Substitute a known-good GPS antenna, and recheck (see page 23-321). • If the symptom/indication is goes away, replace the GPS antenna (see page 23-321 ) . ■ • If the symptom is still present, substitute a known-good audio-navigation unit (including the HDD) (see page 23-318), and recheck. If the symptom/indication is goes away, replace the original audio-navigation unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 8 ).■

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Voice guidance cannot be heard, is broken up, or there is static

8. Check for continuity between body ground and audio-navigation unit connector F (20P) terminals No. 17 and No, 19 individually.

Diagnostic Test: Self-Diagnosis Mode NOTE; • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94). • Make sure that the latest navigation software is installed. • Check the navigation volume level (see Owner's Manual), • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals. • Before troubleshooting, make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit, • After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit, • Check for and resolve all CAN DTCs before troubleshooting the navigation system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the display unit SET-UP button. 3. Check the volume and voice feedback setting for the navigation system in set-up.

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR F (20P)

is there continuity? YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s) between the audio-navigation unit and the stereo amplifier. Replace the affected shielded harness.■ NO-Go to step 9. 9. Check for continuity between the terminals of audio-navigation unit connector F (20P) according to the table.

is either set to OFF? YES-Set the voice feedback to ON, and select an audible level for the volume.■

From terminal F17 (LT BLU) F13 (PUR)

To terminals F13 (PUR), F20 (BRN) F20 (BRN)

NO-Go to step 4. 4. Check the radio operation.

AUDIO-NAWIGAIION UNIT CONNECTOR F (20P)

Can you hear the radio? YES-Go to step 5. NO-Do the audio system troubleshooting.■

1 2 4 5 8/ 1 112/ I 14/ /

17

/

10 1920

5. Check for the hard error code (see page 23-188). Are there any Hard Error codes stored?

Wire side of female terminals

YES-Do the audio system troubleshooting.■ NO-Go to step 8, 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Disconnect audio-navigation unit connector F (20P) and the stereo amplifier connector A (28P).

is there continuity between any of the terminals? YES-There is a short in the wires between the audio-navigation unit and the stereo amplifier. Replace the affected shielded harness.®

10. Check for continuity between audio-navigation unit connector F (20P) terminal No. 19 and stereo amplifier connector A (28P) terminal No. 21.

11. Check for continuity between audio-navigation unit connector F (20P) terminal No. 17 and stereo amplifier connector A (28P) terminal No. 3.

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR F (20P) Wire side of female terminals

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR F (20P) Wire side of female terminals

1

r

1

/

/

10

17Z 19

20

Jr

rx — j

1

2 / 11 12

RG L+ (PUR)

4 /

5 14

6 /

/

/ 17

/ /

10 19

O c\j

4 5 8 / 2 / 11 1 2 / 14 Z Z

RG GND {LT BlUJ

©

RG GND (LT BLU) I H

F

F

15 9 9

F 6 7 T p r 10 | 11 | / 13 14 18 19 20 21 / I / 24 S / 27 28

RGL+(PUR)[

STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (28P) Wire side of female terminals

’l I 2 I 3 | 4 |9

15 9 9

6 I 9 ' l 8 1 9 10 111 I / I 13 114 I

18 19 20 21 9 / 1 -

25 /

2? 28

STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (28P) Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 11.

YES-Go to step 12.

NO-There is an open in the wire between the audio-navigation unit and the stereo amplifier. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the stereo amplifier and audio-navigation unit If a poor connection or loose terminal is found, replace the affected shielded harness.®

NO-There is an open in the wire between the audio-navigation unit and the stereo amplifier, Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the stereo amplifier and audio-navigation unit. If a poor connection or loose terminal is found, replace the affected shielded harness.! 12. Substitute a known-good stereo amplifier (see page 23-132), and recheck. is the system OK? YES-Replace the original stereo amplifier (see page 23-132).11 NO-Replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318).H

(cont'd)

S y m p to m

T r o u b le s h o o t in g ( c o n t 'd )

Voice control does not work/respond Diagnostic Test; Mic Level NOTE: • Check the vehicle battery condition first fsee page 22-94). • Check any official Honda service website for more service information about the navigation system. • Before assuming that a voice complaint is hardware related, ensure that the voice control system is being operated correctly. - Make sure you are sitting in the driver's seat when you give voice commands. - Make sure you are on the correct screen when trying to issue a voice command. For instance, the command "Find the nearest Italian Restaurant" only works on Map screen. (See the Navigation System manual for a complete list of allowed voice commands for the information being displayed). - Close the windows and sunroof. - Set the fan speed to low (1 or 2). - Adjust the air flow from the air conditioning vents so that they do not blow against the microphone on the ceiling. - Pause after pressing the TALK button then give a voice command clearly in a natural speaking voice. If the system cannot recognize your command, speak louder. - If you speak a command with something in your mouth, or your voice is too husky, or high pitched, the system may misunderstand your command. • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals. • Check for a loose roof console microphone; if it's loose, tighten it. • Before troubleshooting, make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit. • After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit. • Determine if the problem only happens to one person, or everyone who uses the system. • If the system only has a problem with one person's voice, this should be considered a system limitation. • Check for and resolve all CAN DTCs before troubleshooting the navigation system. 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

2, Measure the voltage between body ground and HFL-navigation microphone 7P connector terminals No. 8 and No. 7 individually. HFL-NAVIGATION MICROPHONE 7P CONNECTOR

ACC (PUR)

1 2 3/

+BfW¥HT)

5 8

Wire side of female terminals Is there battery voltage? YES-Go to step 3. NO-lf the + B wire does not have voltage, repair an open in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the HFL-navigation microphone 7P connector. If the ACC wire does not have voltage, repair an open in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the HFL-navigation microphone IP connector . ■ 3. Measure the voltage between HFL-navigation microphone 7P connectorterminal No. 1 and body ground. HFL-NAVIGATION MICROPHONE 7P CONNECTOR

1 2 3/

5 6

GND (BLK)

Wire side of female terminals Is there less than 0.2 ¥? YES-Go to step 4, NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire between HFL-navigation microphone 7P connector terminal No, 1 and body ground (G601) (see page 2 2 -4 4 ).■

4. Go into the S e lf Diagnosis Mode, select Mic Icon Menu, and use the Mic Level test under Functional Setup (see page 23-246) to check the operation of the TALK and BACK buttons.

10. Check for continuity between audio-navigation unit connector C (28P) terminals No. 27 and No. 28. AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (28P)

Are the TALK and BACK buttons operational? YES-Go to step 5. NO-Do the HFL system troubleshooting.■ 5. Use the Mic Level diagnostic under Functional Setup (see page 23-248) to check the operation of the microphone.

’ l I 2| 3 I 4 I 5 10|9l9 |l3 |l4 |1 5 |9 |1 7 |1 8 |9 |2 0 19122123 124 I / I 26 127 128 HFL MIC HFL MIC OUTOUT + (LT BLU) (PUR)

is the microphone operational? YES-Check the operation of the voice control system (see the Navigation System Manual).■

Wire side of female terminals

is there continuity?

NO-Go to step 8, 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Disconnect the HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector (see step 2 on page 23-424). 8. Disconnect audio-navigation unit connector C (28P). 9. Check for continuity between body ground and audio-navigation unit connector C (28P) terminal No. 27 and No. 28 individually, AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (28P)

YES-There is a short in the wires between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the audio-navigation unit Replace the affected shielded harness.■ NO-Go to step 11. 11. Check for continuity between the terminals of audio-navigation unit connector C (28P) according to the table.. From terminal C14 (BRN

ninals r C27.(It BIIu L.C28.(PUR)

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (28P) n

b = = = I 1

2

3

4

5

1 0 l/l/1 l3 ll4 r

HFL MIC OUT(LT BLU)

HFL MIC OUT + (PUR)

9 1 2 1 3 j 4 15 ,9 9 9 1 9 1 0 | / V | l 3 | l 4 | r | l 5 | 9 ] l 7 | l 8 t / 2 0 1 9 |22 |2c5 24 9 2 6 | 27[28

Wire side of female terminal s W i re side of female terminals

is there continuity? YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s) between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the audio-navigation unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.®

is there continuity between any of the terminals? YES-There is a short in the wires between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the audio-navigation unit, Replace the affected shielded harness,® NO-Substitute a known-good components in this order until the problem goes away: • HFL-navigation microphone (see page 2 3 -3 2 0 ).■ • HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 2 3 -4 2 4 ).■ • Audio-Navigation unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 8 ).■

(cont'd)

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Navigation cannot control HVAC by voice command

NOTE:

NOTE: • Check the vehicle battery condition first

22-94).

Display d ay/night mod© does not w o rk m does not w o rk properly

(s e e

page

• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals. • Check for and resolve all CAN DTCs before troubleshooting the navigation system. • If the Hard Error Code stored, check the Hard Error Code troubleshooting first. • Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit • After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit, • Verify that the correct audio-navigation unit is installed for this model. Go into the Diagnostic mode and use Version (see page 23-255). • Make sure that the latest navigation software is installed. • Check any official Honda service website for more service information about the navigation system. 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. Check for B-CAN or F-CAN DTCs in the data list. Are there any DTCs in the B-CAN or F-CAN systems? YES-Troubleshoot and repair all CAN related DTCs, and retest.■ NO-Go to step 2. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),

• Turn the headlight on, and check that the dash brightness setting is not set to high. • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals. • Always check for and resolve all CAN DTCs before troubleshooting the navigation system. • Verify that the correct audio-navigation unit is installed for this model. Go into the Diagnostic mode and use Version (see page 23-255). • Check any official Honda service website for more service information about the navigation system. 1. Adjust the A/C using voice commands. Can you contmi the A/C by voice command? YES-Go to step 2. NO-Go to troubleshooting for navigation cannot control HVAC by voice command (see page 2 3 -3 0 2 ).■ 2. Turn the headlights on, and adjust the dash brightness up and down, then to the middle range. Does the display change to day and night modes when turning the headlights on and off? YES-The system is OK at this tim e.B NO-Go to step 3. 3. Cover the sunlight sensor on the dash, then turn the headlights on and off.

3. Select the Self-Diagnosis mode.

Does the navigation display dim and brighten normally?

4. Check for the hard error code (see page 23-186).

YES-The system is OK at this t im e .!

is the Hard Error Code 2703 stored? YES-Do the DTC 2703 troubleshooting (see page 23-277).11 NO-Go to step 5.

NO-Check the ILL+ circuit for an open or short to ground between the navigation display to the gauge control module. If OK, substitute known-good units in this order, and recheck the system: • Audio-Navigation unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 8 ).■ • Climate control unit (see page 2 1 -1 3 9 ).■

5. Substitute a known-good climate control unit (see page 21-139). Reconnect all connectors, and retest. Does the symptom go away? YES-Replace the original climate control unit (see page 2 1 -1 3 9 ).■ NO-Replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318).B

• Gauge control module (see page 2 2 -4 1 9 ).!

System locks up or freezes constantly NOTE: • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94). • Check for and resolve all CAN DTCs before troubleshooting the navigation system.. • Verify that the correct audio-navigation unit is installed for this model. Go into the Diagnostic mode, and use Version (see page 23-255). • Make sure that the latest navigation software is installed. • Check any official Honda service website for more service information about the navigation system. • Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit. • After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit. • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). D o e s th e s y s te m

re b o o t, lo c k u p

,

o r fre e z e ?

YES-Replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318), and recheck. If the problem does not go away, replace the HDD (see page 2 3 -3 1 7 ).■ NO-The system is OK at this time. Go into the Diagnostic mode, and use the Unit Check diagnostic (see page 23-240) to check the audio-navigation unit and the navigation display unit status. If any status are NG, replace the affected units.■

Vehicle position icon wanders across the map when driving (does not fo llo w a d isp la f ed road) or map or wehicie ICON spins NOTE: • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94). • This is not the same condition as when driving off-road (or on a fire or logging road). • This condition is caused by a loss of map matching from a bad sensor input Check for aftermarket or other objects that can block the GPS signal. A lways do Map Matching (see page 23-183) before proceeding with the troubleshooting. • Check for and resolve all CAN DTCs before troubleshooting the navigation system. • Verify that the correct audio-navigation unit is installed for this model. Go into the Diagnostic mode, and use Version (see page 23-255). • Check for aftermarket metallic window tinting. • Check any official Honda service website for more service information about the navigation system. • Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit. • After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit. • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals. 1. Check the GPS icon on the navigation screen, Is the GPS icon white or missing? YES-Go to troubleshooting for GPS icon is white or not shown (see page 2 3 -2 3 7 ).■ NO-Go to step 2. 2. Go into the Self-Diagnostic mode, and use the Yaw sensor diagnostic (see page 23-240) to check the yaw rate sensor. is the yaw rate sensor OK? YES-Go to step 3, NO-Replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 8 ).■

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 3. Go into the Diagnostic mode, and use the Car Status diagnostic (see page 23-255) to check the vehicle speed pulse (VSP) and the BACK signals. Are the vehicle speed pulse and the BACK signals OK? YES-The symptom may be a characteristic of the system. Check to see if the symptom occurs in the same place in a known-good vehicle. If it does, the problem could be in the database. Go to step 4. NO-

• If the problem is the vehicle speed pulse, troubleshoot the vehicle speed signal circuit BLU wire for open or short. If OK, swap a known-good PCM. If the problem or symptom goes away, update the PCM (see page 11-227), if it does not have the latest software or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8).B • If the BACK signal is indicated ON (1), when in any shift lever position other than reverse, troubleshoot the back-up light switch circuit.! 4. Substitute a known-good audio-navigation unit (including the HDD) (see page 23-318), and check to see if the problem occurs in the same location. Does the problem occur in the same location? YES-The problem is in the database and should be considered a characteristic of the system. Report the problem according to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual under Reporting Errors, and look for improvements in future databases.■ NO-Replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 8 ).■

Navigation system w ill not accept security code NOTE: • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94), • The system w ill not operate without the 5-digit security (anti-theft) code. Follow the this procedure. (After 10 consecutive tries, you must cycle the key to continue trying) • The Navigation System Diagnosis and Core Return Form is available on ISIS, under Job aids, and can be printed out for recording this information. This information will help the remain facility determine what caused the failure. • Check for and resolve all CAN DTCs before troubleshooting the navigation system, • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals, • Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit. • After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit. • Check any official Honda service website for more service information about the navigation system. 1, Go into the Diagnostic mode, and use the ECU Info under the Unit Check diagnosis (see page 23-240), A brief diagnostic runs for 20 seconds, and the serial number is displayed. i s t h e s e r ia l n u m b e r d i s p l a y e d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-Go to step 2. 2, Remove the audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318), 3, Check the serial number on the label on the upper side of the audio-navigation unit. i s t h e s e r ia l n u m b e r c o n f i r m e d o n t h e u p p e r s i d e o f t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n u n it?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-Replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 8 ),■

4. Using the serial number, look up the navigation security code in the Interactive Network, (click: Service, Vehicle Information, Anti-Theft code Inquiry, and then select Navigation from the "product" dropdown box). Enter the serial number. Is a 5-digit code displayed on the screen? YES-Go to step 5. NO-Call the Warranty Department to obtain the code (the telephone number is in the PDI service bulletin). Then go to step 5. 5. Check that the obtained code works to bypass the code screen in the navigation system. Does the code work? YES-The system is OK at this time. Return the vehicle to the client and give them the anti-theft code.B NO-Replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318), and enter Won't take anti-theft code in the Problem description field of the core return form; (as proof, enclose the sticker that contains the Serial number and the Code),®

Navigation display stays on w ith the ignition sw itch in LOCK (§) NOTE: • Check for aftermarket accessories that may interfere with the navigation system. • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals. • Before troubleshooting, make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit. • After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit • The vehicle may have been used for a show event. Check for a short jumper harness in-line with the audio-navigation unit connector A. If a jumper harness is present, remove it, and return it to Tech Line. 1. Make sure turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Does the navigation screen stay on? YES-Go to step 2. NO-The system is OK at this t im e .! 2. Measure the voltage between audio-navigation unit connector A (24P) terminal No, 14 and body ground.

*

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)

r_ _ _ n

3 4 5 b 7/ 141516171819

101 1 12 222324

I ACC (PUR)

y )

Wire side of female terminals is there battery voltage? YES-Troubleshoot a short to battery voltage on the ACC c ircuit.! NO-Replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318). II

(cont'd)

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Navigation cannot control audio/disc/rear entertainm ent Diagnostic Test; System Links NOTE: • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-34). • Check for and resolve all CAN DTCs before troubleshooting the navigation system. • Verify that the correct audio-navigation unit is installed for this model. Go into the Diagnostic mode, and use Version (see page 23-255). • Check the connectors fo r poor connections or loose terminals. • Before troubleshooting, make sureyou have the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit • After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit. • Check any official Honda service website for m ore service information about the navigation system, 1 .Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). 2. Make sure the anti-theft code for the navigation system is entered, 3. Go into the Diagnostic mode, and use the System Links diagnostic (see page 23-234). Is the Radio icon red? YES-Replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318).11 NO-Go to step 4. 4. Substitute a known-good audio-navigation unit (including HDD) (see page 23-318), and recheck. Can the navigation system control audio/disc functions? YES-Replace the original audio-navigation unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 8 ).■ NO-Do the audio system troubleshooting.■

Navigation cannot control XM radio NOTE; • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94). • Check any official Honda service website for more service information about the navigation system. • Check for and resolve all CAN DTCs before troubleshooting the navigation system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Make sure the anti-theft code for the audio system is entered. 3. Go into the Diagnostic mode, and use the System Links diagnosis (see page 23-234), Is the XM loon red? YES-Do the troubleshooting for the voice guidance cannot be heard (see page 2 3 -2 9 8 ).■ NO-Go to step 4. 4. Substitute a known-good audio-navigation unit (including the HDD) (see page 23-318). Can the navigation system control XM radio functions? YES-Replace the original audio-navigation unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 8 ).■ NO-Do the audio system troubleshooting.■

Navigation frequently asks for anti-theft code and/or needs GPS initialization

5. Measure the voltage between audio-navigation unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 12 and body ground.

NOTE; • This is often caused by a loss of battery power, a low or poor battery condition, or a poor ground. • Make sure that the latest navigation software is installed.

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A {24P)

• Check any official Honda service website for more service information about the navigation system. • Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit, • After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit.

GND fBIK) 3

4

5

8

7

10 11

12 24

Wire side of female terminals

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Disconnect audio-navigation unit connector A (24P), and check for loose terminals. Are a n y o f t h e t e r m in a l s l o o s e ? YES-Repair or replace the loose terminal(s).B NO-Go to step 3, 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between body ground and audio-navigation unit connector A (24P) terminals No, 14 and No. 24 individually. AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)

Wire side of female terminals Is there battery voltage? YES-Go to step 5. N O -lf the + B wire does not have voltage, repair an open in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and audio-navigation unit connector A (24P). If the ACC wire does not have voltage, repair an open in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and audio-navigation unit connector A (24P).B

Is there less than 0.2 I/? YES-Replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 8 ).■ NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire between audio-navigation unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 12 and body ground (G504) (see page 22-38).11

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Rearview camera image does not come on or w o rk p ro p e rlf NOTE: • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94). • If you cannot change the rearview image, go to Rearview camera image does not change (see page 23-310). • Check for and resolve all CAN DTCs before troubleshooting the navigation system. • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals, • Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit. • After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit. • Check any official Honda service website for more service information about the navigation system. 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Does the Navigation screen come on and show an image when the vehicle is started? YES~Go to step 2. NO-Go to troubleshooting for No picture is displayed (see page 2 3 -2 9 0 ).■

Are the connections OK? YES-Go to step 6, NO-Repair the poor connection, and reconnect the connectors.■ 8. Disconnect the navigation display unit 28P connector and the rearview camera SP connector. 7. Check for continuity between the navigation display unit 28P connector and the rearview camera 6P connector according to the table.

Navigation

Rearview camera connector

display unit connector No. 7 No. 9

No. No. No. No. No,

r No. 14 No. 20 No. 28

Wire color

4 3 2 1

GRN YEL GRY BLK RED W HT

E Mo. €

NAVIGATION IDISPLAY UNIT 28P CONNECTOR n _ _ _ n CM

cO

O

m

"*1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5

9

Is the R-camera link on the screen?

5. Check the connections between the navigation display unit 28P connector and the rearview camera 6P connector.

9

2. Go into the Self-Diagnosis Mode, and use the System Links diagnostic (see page 23-234) to check the connection between the navigation display unit and the rearview camera.

4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Wire side of female terminals REARVIEW CAMERA SP CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 3, NO-Go to step 4. 3, Confirm the system connection, Is the R-camera link red on the screen?

Terminal side of male terminals

YES-Go to step 4.

Is there continuity?

NO-Go to Car Status, and check the BACK-Reverse indication status (see page 2 3 -2 5 5 ),■

YES-Go to step 8. NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the navigation display unit and the rearview camera. Replace the affected shielded harness.■

8. Check for continuity between the terminals of navigation display unit 28P connector according to the table. From terminal No. 7 (GRN)

No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No.

No. 9 (YEL) No. 13 (GRY) No. 14 (BLK) No. 20 (RED)

To terminals 9 (YEL), No. 13 (GRY), 14 (BLK), No. 20 (RED), 26 (WHT) 13 (GRY), No. 14 (BLK), 20 (RED), No. 26 (WHT) 14 (BLK), No. 20 (RED), 26 (WHT) 20 (RED), No. 26 (WHT) 26 (WHT)

NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

1

2

3

9 99 18 9 20 9 22 5

la

15 16 17

4

9. Check for continuity between body ground and navigation display unit 28P connector according to the table. Navigation display unit connector Wire color No. 7 . GRN ... ....“ ..................N c9.9 ~ ““ YEL No. 14 BLK RED No. 20 I W H T ~ No. 26 NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

i

2

3

4

/ 9 9 10 11 12 13 14 9 20 9 22 23 24 25 20 / 9

5

15 16 17 18

fl 10 11 12 13 14 24 25 26

Wire side of femal e terminals

/9

Is there continuity? Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity between any of the terminals? YES-There is a short in the wires between the navigation display unit and the rearview camera. Replace the affected shielded harness.! NO-Go to step 9,

YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s) between the navigation display unit and the rearview camera. Replace the affected shielded harness.■ NO-Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 11. Measure the voltage between body ground and navigation display unit 28P connector according to the table. Navigation display unit connector Wire color No. 7 GRN YEL No. 9 No. 14 BLK RE No. 20 ..~...WHT No, 20 NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT 28P CONNECTOR TU. 1

2

3

4

15 16 17 18

9 9 9 10 11 12 13 14 / 20 / 22 23 24 25 28 / 9

5

Wire side of female terminals

Is there more than 0.2 ¥? YES-There is a short to power in the wires between the navigation display unit and the rearview camera. Replace the affected shielded harness,■

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Rearview camera image does not change

13. Reconnect the navigation display unit 28P connector,

NOTE: You can select three different rearview camera angles for backing up. If there is no camera image on the display, go to Rearview camera image does not come on or work properly (see page 23-308).

14. Measure the voltage between body ground and rearview camera SP connector terminals No. 4 and No. 5 individually.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). REARVIEW CAMERA 6P CONNECTOR

| ?

| 2

| 3

| 4

CAMERA BIT 1 (g r n )

] 5

j 6~|

CAMERA B1I§

Terminal side of male terminals is there battery voltage on both terminals?

2. Go into the Detail Information & Settings select Unit Check, and use Hard Key test under Unit Check (see page 23-240). Does the interface dial ENTER button work properly? YES-Go to step 3. NO-Go to troubleshooting for Interface dial buttons do not work (see page 2 3 -2 9 6 ).■ 3. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever in R, 4. Operate the ENTER button several times, and check the rearview camera image.

YES- Replace the navigation display unit (see page 23-319).I

Is any of 3 modes of the rearview camera image displayed on the screen?

NO-Go to step 15.

YES-Go to step 5.

15. Reconnect the rearview camera 6P connector. 18. Substitute a known-good navigation display unit (see page 23-319), and check the rearview camera image in reverse. Is the rearview image OK?

NO-Go to troubleshooting for Rearview camera image does not come on or work properly (see page 2 3 -3 0 8 ).■ 5. Operate the ENTER button to see if the image from camera is switched between the wide view, the normal view and the top down view in this order.

YES-Replace the original navigation display unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 9 ).■

Does the rearview camera image change properly?

NO-Replace the rearview camera (see page 23-322),HI

YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this tim e.B NO-Go to step 8, 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7, Disconnect the navigation display unit 28P connector and the rearview camera 6P connector.

8, Check for continuity between body ground and rearview camera 6P connector terminals No, 4 and No. 5 individually.

11. Measure the voltage between body ground and rearview camera 6P connector terminals No. 4 and No. 5 individually.

REARVIEW CAMERA SP CONNECTOR

REARVIEW CAMERA 6P CONNECTOR

£

£

\ 5

CAMERA BIT 1

CAMERA BIT 0 fRED) .

(GRN)

Terminal side of male terminals

CAMERA BIT 1 (GRN)

Terminal side of m a l e terminals

Is there continuity?

Is there less than 1.0 V?

YES I here is a short to ground in the wire(s) between the navigation display unit 28P connector and the rearview camera 6P connector. Replace the affected shielded harness.■

YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Go to step 9. 9. Check for continuity between rearview camera 6P connector terminals No. 4 and No. 5. REARVIEW CAMERA 6P CONNECTOR

CAMERA BIT 1 {GRN!

CAMERA BiTO 1(RED)

IhsP Terminal side of male terminals

Is there continuity? YES-There is a short in the wires between the navigation display unit 28P connector and the rearview camera 6P connector. Replace the affected shielded harness.■ NO-Go to step 10, 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

CAMERA BIT 0 fRED)

NO-There is a short to power in the wire(s) between the navigation display unit 28P connector and the rearview camera 6P connector. Replace the affected shielded harness ■ 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Traffic or W eather inform ation is not shown on map screen

13, Check for continuity between the navigation display unit 28P connector and the rearview camera 6P connector according to the table.

Navigation display unit connector No. 7 No. 20

Rearview camera connector fioTT .......*.~~. No, 5

Wire color GRN

NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT 28P CONNECTOR n~n

1

2

3

4

15 18 17 18

9 9 9 10 11 12 13 14 9 20 9 22 23 24 25 26 / /

5

Wire side of female terminals REARVIEW CAMERA 6P CONNECTOR [i* | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6] Terminal side of male terminals Is there continuity? YES-Replace the rearview camera (see page 2 3 -3 2 2 ).! NO-There is an open in the wire between the navigation display unit 28P connector and the rearview camera 6P connector. Replace the affected shielded harness.!

)

If your client complains that traffic and/or weather is not displayed, it could be because a traffic and/or weather setting is not correct. NOTE: • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94). • Check for and resolve all CAN DTCs before troubleshooting the navigation system. • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals. • Before troubleshooting, get the navigation system anti-theft codes. • After troubleshooting, enter the navigation system anti-theft codes. • Check any official Honda service website for more service information about the navigation system. 1. Test the battery condition (see page 22-34), is the battery in good condition? YES-Go to step 2. NO-Troubleshoot the battery and/or charging system, and recheck.!

2. Park the vehicle outside where you have a clear view of the southern sky.

Message Receiving

3. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II). 4. Check to see if the vehicle is receiving ao XM signal. Select Setup, then select more, then select Traffic/Weather. No signal

Description The system is receiving XM signal, Traffic information and/or weather information. The signal is not being received.

Traffic & Weather Status X M S ignal R eception

R eceiving

T ra ffic In fo rm a tio n

R eceiving

W e a th e r In fo rm a tio n

R eceiving

f l

Return TT

^

Expired

7 1

Loading 5. Make sure that you are receiving the applicable signal that you are troubleshooting. For example, if the client complains that they do not receive real-time traffic and account is Expired, you need to contact XM to confirm the account is active. Refer to the table for the message status and action. NOTE: This check confirms the customer account, but does not check the XM signal reception. TheX M radio continues to tune XM channels 000, 001,174, or 247, even if the XM account is expired.

Check antenna

The account is expired. The system is searching for the signal, or receiving an update,

There is a problem with the XM antenna.

Action The system is OK. • Traffic: Go to step 7. • Weather: Go to step 9. Make sure you are outside with a clear view of the sky. Go into diagnosis mode check to check system links. Go to step 6. Give the system a few minutes to finish loading. If the loading message does not go away, go into diagnosis mode check to check system links. Check the XM antenna for damage or loose connections, then recheck using the system links in the diagnosis mode check.

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 8. Make sure the client's XM NavTraffic and/or XM weather information account status is active. These accounts are separate from the regular XM radio subscription, and they have separate fees. For the 2010-11 Acura MDX, real-time traffic and weather are free for the first 3 months.

7. Make sure the navigation map is set to any scale from 1/20 mile of a mile to 5 miles. If the scale is not set within this range, rotate the interface dial knob, or use the zoom in buttons to adjust the map to proper scale. NOTE: XM weather is available on all scales.

To check the XM NavTraffic and XM weather account status: • Call XM® Satellite Radio at 800-852-9090. • Make sure you have: -T h e VIN - The XM radio ID (shown on channel 000) • From the automated phone menu, select tech support. • Tell the agent that you are working on an Acura vehicle, and ask them to check the XM NavTraffic and XM weather account(s) status. Have the agent confirm that the XM NavTraffic and XM weather subscription(s) applies to the vehicle VIN you are working on.

Do you see real-time trafft on the navigation display? YES-Return the vehicle to the client, and explain the proper settings.! NO-Go to step 8,

NOTE: A client may own more than one vehicle capable of displaying real-time traffic and XM weather, Is the KM NavTraffic and KM weather aceount(s) status active? YES• Traffic: Go to step 7. • Weather: Go to step 9. N O-lf the free trial period is expired, return the vehicle to the client, and inform them how to renew their XM NavTraffic and XM weather subscription(s) by calling XM radio at 800-852^9898. ■ If the free trial period has not expired, call XM radio at 800-852-9896 and reactivate the account for the remainder of the free trial period, then request rapid refresh. To do a rapid refresh: • Park the vehicle outside, in a dear area, with the engine running. • Turn the audio system on, and tune to an XM radio channel, • Wait 30 minutes. If the vehicle now receives real-time traffic information and/or XM weather, return it to the client, otherwise go to step 7.

8. M a k e sure the real-time traffic settings are correct • Press the map/guide button, then se l ect the m a p m e n u by pressing in the se l ector button. • Select S h o w I con on M a p by turning the interface dial, then pressing in the selector button. • Select the Traffic icon ( A ) from the Icon se l ection bar at the bottom of the navigation display. • Select I con Options (B) by pushing the selector to the right. • F r o m the Select Category for I con settings menu, select the Traffic. • M a k e sure both Traffic Speeds and Traffic I cons are solid blue. Ifthey are not select Traffic Speeds by pressing in the selector on the Select Traffic I nfo screen. It should turn solid blue. Turn the interface dial to select Traffic I cons, and press in the selector again. It should turn solid blue. Push the selector to the right (DONE) to complete the process.

9. M a k e sure the X M weather settings are correct. • F r o m the S h o w I con on M a p me nu, select the Weather icon (A) from the I con selection bar at the bottom of the navigation display. • Select Icon Options (B) by pushing the selector to the right. • F r o m the S e l ect Category for I con settings menu, se l ect the Weather. • M a k e sure both Weather Warning Icons and Weather I cons are so l id blue. I f they are not, select Weather Warning Icon by pressing in the selector on the S e l ect Weather I nfo screen. I t should turn solid blue. Turn the interface'dial to select Weather Icons, and press in the selector again. It should turn solid blue. Push the selector to the right (DONE) to c o m p l ete the process, A

A

D o y o u s e e X M w e a th e r o n th e n a v ig a tio n d is p la y ? YES-Return the vehicle to the c l ient and explain the D o you see

r e a l- tim e

tra ffic o n th e n a v ig a t io n d is p la y ?

YES-Return the vehicle to the c l ient and explain the

proper settings.■ N O - G o to step 10.

proper settings.■ N O - G o to step 10.

(cont'd)

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 10. D o the diagnostic m o d e checks: • Start the vehicl e, and enter the navigation diagnostic m o d e by pressing and h o l ding the

12. Reset the A c u r a U n k control unit. NO T E ; M a k e sure you have the anti-theft codes for the navigation system.

Menu, Map/Guide, and Cancel buttons. • G o into the Diagnostic Menu, and select the S e l f-Diagnosis M o d e in the Select Diagnosis items menu, and verify that all the icons are green. I f any links/icons are red, refer to the applicable service manual section for repair information, then go to step 11, • Return to the Detail Information & Setting m e n u and select X M (HIP), then select X M (HIP) System Link, and verify that the links/icons are green. I f any l inks/icons are red, refer to the a p p l icabl e service manual section for repair information, then go to step 11. 11. D o a VIN status inquiry, updating the A c u r a U n k control unit software.

T o reset the A c u r a U n k control unit: • Disconnect A c u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) connector B (2P) from the A c u r a U n k control unit, • Enter the navigation diagnostic mode, select X M (HIP), then select X M (HIP) ECU, • Select Data Reset to do the reset. • W h e n the reset is done, press cance l twice to return to the X M (HIP) diagnostic menu. • Select Return to full y exit the diagnostic mode. • Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). • Reconnect A c u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) connector B (2P). • Start the vehicl e.

• Enter the a n ti-th e ft codes fo r th e n a vig a tio n system .

Are there any applicable product updates or service bulletins?

• Let the navigation system boot, then select one of the traffic sca l es (5,1,1/4,1/20 miles).

YES-Do the a p p l icable product updates and service b u l letins, then retest the vehicle. If real-time traffic does riot work, go to step 12.

• Park the vehicle outside with a clear view of the southern sky, and verify you are receiving an X M radio signal (see step 4).

NO-Go to step 12.

D o y o u s e e r e a l-tim e

tra ffb

o n th e n a v ig a tio n d is p la y ?

YES-Call Acura C l ient Services to ask for an A c u r a U n k reactivation. Return the vehicle to the die^tH N O - G o to step 13. 13. Substitute a kno wn -g ood Acuralink control unit ( X M receiver) (see page 23-133), and retest the vehicle. Park the vehicle outside with a clear view of the southern sky, and verify you are receiving an X M radio signal (see step 4),

D o y o u s e e r e a l’tim e t r a f f t o n th e

n a v ig a tio n

d is p la y ?

Y E S - R e p l ace the original Acura Link control unit ( X M receiver) (see page 23-133). Register the n e w A c u r a U n k control unit with X M radio and Acura Client Services, Return the vehicl e to the c lie n t.! NO-Substitute a known -g ood audio-navigation unit (incl uding the H D D ) (see page 23-318). Ifthe problem goes away, repl ace the original audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318).■

Forced Starting of the Audio-Navigation Unit Special Tools Required

NO TE :

S C S Service Connector 07PAZ-001010A

• Check any official H o n d a service website for m o r e service information about the navigation system.

1. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

• Static e l ectricity can d a m a g e the HDD. Always fol low proper h a n d l ing procedures.

2. R e m o v e the right kick panel (see page 20-78). 3. Connect the S C S service connector (A) to the navigation service connector (B) located by the right kick panel.

• Always use the anti-static ma t (ESD) and wrist strap w h e n removing the HD D. Before you open the audio-navigation unit or h a n d l e the repl acement HDD , attach the wrist strap around one of your wrists, and attach the alligator clip to the E S D m a t • M a k e sure you use the screws in the s a m e h o l es. The H D D can be d a m a g e d ifthe w r o n g screws are used. • D o not force the HDD . If it does not slide in smoothly, check the alignment of the H D D and the pins. I f the pins are bent, replace the HDD. • M a k e sure the H D D screws are not loose. I f they are, the H D D can be damaged. • Handle the H D D by its edges. D o not touch the pins. 1. R e m o v e the audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318). 2. R e m o v e the passenger's side radio bracket 3. R e m o v e the screws (A).

4, Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 5. Check that the diagnosis m e n u for the picture diagnosis starts up, and then changes to the system l ink menu. NO TE ; I f the displ ay fails to display the system link screen, refer to no picture is displayed (see page 23-290).

4. Lift the plastic tab (B), and use itto p u l lout the H D D (C). 5. Instal l the H D D in the reverse order of removal. NO T E : M a k e sure the H D D is properly a l igned w h e n install ing the HDD.

Audio-Navigation Unit Removal/Installation S R S c o mp one nt s are l ocated in this area. Review the S R S c o m p o n e n t l ocations (see page 24-18), and the precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or service,

8. R e m o v e the bolts (A) and the radio brackets (B).

NOTE; • Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts. • Lay a work sh op towel under the parts w h e n working on t h e m to protect the face panel from scratches or other damage. • Eject all the discs before r e mov e the audio-navigation unit to prevent dam ag in g the C D p l ayer's l oad mechanism. • I f you are replacing the audio-navigation unit, write d o w n the audio presets (if possible), and enter t h e m into the n e w audio-navigation unit.

1. M ake sure you have th e a n ti-th e ft codes fo r the audio-navigation unit.

f r o m t h e a u d i o - n a v i g a t i o n p a n e l (D ).

8. R e m o v e the interface dial (see page 23-319).

2. R e m o v e the driver's inner dashboard trim (see page 20-117), and the passenger's dashboard trim (see page 20-122). 3. R e m o v e the console lower trim (A) and the b o l ts (B), then pull out the audio-navigation unit (C). D

7. R e m o v e the screws and audio-navigation unit (C)

D

9. If you are rep l acing the audio-navigation unit, remove the H D D from the original audio-navigation unit, and install it in the replacement audio-navigation unit (see page 23-317). N O T E : T o avoid damag in g the audio-navigation unit or H D D : • D o not remove the H D D

with any of the audio­

navigation unit connectors connected. • D o not power up the audio-navigation unit without the H D D install ed, 10. I nstal lthe audio-navigation unit in the reverse order of r e m o v a l . N O T E : Check any official H o n d a service website for m o r e service information about patches for the navigation system. A p p l y any prescribed patches to the n e w audio-navigation unit. 11. Enter the n e w audio-navigation unit anti-theft codes. 12. Park the vehicle outside, and do the G P S initialization (see page 23-183). 4. Disconnect the connectors (D), then r e m o v e the audio-navigation unit 5. R e m o v e the c l imate control unit (see page 21-133).

13. Give the n e w anti-theft codes to the client.

NO TE:

NO TE:

• P u t on g l oves to protect your h a n d s.

• Put on g l oves to protect your hands.

• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and rel ated parts.

• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts.

• Lay a shop towel under the parts w h e n working on t h e m to protect the face panel from scratches or other damage.

• Lay a shop towel under the parts w h e n working on t h e m to protect the face panel from scratches or other

• W h e n prying components, use the K T C trim tool or equiva l ent. 1. Rem ove the dashboard center upper panel (see page 20-119).

damage. 1. R e m o v e the audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318). 2. R e m o v e the screws (A) and harness cover (B).

2. R e m o v e the screws (A) and b o l t (B), then rem o v e the display unit (C),

3.2 lbf*ft) 3. Disconnect the navigation display unit connector (D), and detach the clip (E). 4. Instal lthe unit in the reverse order of removal. Be careful not to drop the forward bolt behind the dashboard.

(cont'd)

In terface Dial R e m o v a l/In s ta lla tio n (cont'd)

H F L -N avigation M ic ro p h o n e R e m o v a l/In s ta lla tio n

3. Disconnect the interface dial 13P connecter (A).

1. R e m o v e the roof console (see page 22-311). 2. R e m o v e the screws and HFL-navigation microphone

(A).

3, Instal l the HFL-navigation microphone in the reverse order of removal.

4. R e m o v e the screws (B), then r e mo ve the knob (C) and the dial (D) from the interface dial (E) with t wo K T C trim tools and applying even force as shown, NO TE : Apply pressure slowly and steady until the knob and dial pops off. 5. Install the dial in reverse order of removal, NO TE: Ifthe hard buttons do not work, but the jog dial does, recheck the interface dial connector connection.

NOTE: • Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts. • Lay a shop towel under the parts w h e n working on t h e m to protect the face panel from scratches or other damage.

S R S compon en ts are l ocated in this area. Review the S R S c o m p o n e n t l ocation (see page 24-18), and the precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or service. 1, R e m o v e the driver's airbag (see page 24-199). 2. R e m o v e the 20P connector (A) from the cable reel.

1. R e m o v e the audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318). 2. R e m o v e the navigation displ ay unit (see page 23-313). A

n

n

>/

8

4

5

8

7

8

9

11 12 13 14 15 18 17 18 19 20

Wire side of female terminals 3. Measure the resistance between the terminals No. 8 and No. 19 in each switch position according to the table.

3. R e m o v e the screws (A), and detach the clips (B), then re m o v e the G P S antenna (C). 4. Instal lthe antenna in the reverse order of removal.

Position N o buttons pressed Talk button pressed Back button pressed

Resistance About 10 kO About 2.2 kO About 640 0

4. Ifthe resistance is not as specified, repl ace the voice control switch (see page 23-322). 5. Use a diode tester between the terminals in each switch position according to the tabl e.

Terminal

17

18 ....

o 99

6. Ifthe diode test is not as specified, repl ace the voice control switch (see page 23-322).

V o ic e C o n trol S w itc h R e p lace m e n t

R e arview C am era R e m o v a l/In s ta lla tio n

S R S comp on ent s are l ocated in this area. Review the S R S c o m p o n e n t l ocation (see page 24-18), and the precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or service.

1. R e m o v e the tailgate l o wer trim pa ne l (see page 20-93).

1. R e m o v e these items:

2. Disconnect the rearview camera 6P connector (A), then r em ov e the rearview camera cover and the rear l icense trim (see page 20-228).

• Driver's airbag (see page 24-199). • Steering wheel (see page 17-6). • Paddle shifter (see page 14-242). • Distance switch (see page 25-83). 2. R e m o v e the screws and the HFL-navigation voice control switch (A).

3. R e m o v e the screws and the rearview camera (B). 4. Install the rearview camera in the reverse order of removal.

3. Instal l the HFL-navigation voice control switch in the reverse order of removal.

C o m p o n e n t Location In dex

( X M RECEIVER) Connector Inputs and Outputs, page 23-331 Removal/I nstall ation, page 23-133

G en eral T ro u b lesh o o tin g In fo rm a tio n M ow

to Check for DTCs with the HDS '

1. M a k e sure the ignition switch is in L O C K (0). 2. Connect the H D S to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.

3. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 4. M a k e sure the H D S communicates with the vehicle and the Acuralink control unit ( X M receiver). I f it do e s n ’t, troubl eshoot the D L C circuit (see page 11-209). 5. Select XM /H I P in the B O D Y E L E C TR ICA L menu. 6. Select D T C s in the X M / H I P menu. 7. Check for DTCs, If any D T C s are indicated, write d o w n the DTCs, then go to the indicated D T C troubleshooting. If no D T C s are indicated, refer to s y m p t o m troubleshooting. N OTE; • After troubleshooting, clear the D T C s with the HDS. • For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that c a m e with the HDS.

Lever-Locked Connector

Connecting

Disconnecting

To connect the connector, push the connector into the connector sleeve (A). A s the connector is pressed in, the

T o disconnect the connector, pull the lever (A) while pushing the l ock tab (B) down, then pull the connector,. (C).

lever

(B) m o v e s to the locked'position.

D TC T ro u b le sh o o tin g Index AcuraUnk Control Unit DTC

Description

DTC

ty pe

Page

B2240

X M Antenna l ine failure

I nternal error

D T C Troub l eshooting (see page 23-357)

U0023

F-CAN Communication bus line error (BUS-OFF)

Loss of communication

D T C Troubleshooting (see page 23-357)

U0100

F-CAN Lost communication with P C M

Loss of communication

D T C Troub l eshooting (see page 23-358)

U0155

F-CAN Lost communication with Gauge Control Module

Loss of communication

D T C Troubleshooting (see page 23-359)

U1280

Communication bus l ine error (BUS-OFF)

Loss of communication

D T C Troubleshooting (see page 22-174)

U128D

Lost Communication with Gauge Control Module

Loss of communication

D T C Troubleshooting (see page 23-359)

S y m p to m T ro u b lesh o o tin g Index Symptom A c u r a U n k services do not work

Diagnostic procedure S y m p t o m Troubleshooting (see page 23-360)

Also

check for

• Blown fuse No. 5 (10 A), No. 21 (7.5 A), No. 32 (10 A) in the under-dash fuse/ relay box • Poor ground at G606 • Call Acura Client Services and request an activation. • Call X M client service and register the replacement Acuralink control unit (XM receiver).

Acuralink services do not work after replacing the Acuralink control unit ( X M receiver)

Acuralink message s cannot be heard or are w e a k

S y m p t o m Troubleshooting (see page 23-362)

Traffic or Weather information is not s h o w n on m a p screen

Navigation S ystem Symptom Troub l eshooting (see page 23-312)

Acuralink me ssages cannot be deleted

H o w to Delete Stored Acuralink Messages (see page 23-329)

System Description T he A cu ra Unk ® Sate l lite Communication System, referred to as AcuraUnk, uses the c l ient's cell pho ne or X M radio to transmit and receive information about the vehicl e. In addition, the Ac u r a U n k system has a Text-To-Speech engine, and also has the capabi l ity to initiate voice or data calls with the HandsFreeLink control unit. T he Acuralink control unit (HIP) is very similar in design to an X M receiver, but it has additional communication features. T he main functions incl ude: • Receiving and playing X M stations. Displays station, song title and other information on the front climate control unit display using the GA-Net bus. • Receiving X M traffic channel data. • Receiving weather data. • Gives Feature Guide tips. • Receiving Ac u r a U n k messa ge s and displaying t h e m in the navigation display. • Processing D T C (diagnostic trouble code) error messag es from the P C M , the S R S and other systems, and displaying t h e m on the navigation display. • Sending D T C information to the A c u r a U n k servers using the client's cell p ho ne (only if client has set up and enabled this option).

Service Application • Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) explanation (from server m e s s a g e and vehicl e message) • Service information m e s sa ge • Reca l l I nformation • Quick tips • Place to provide feedback/view cautions that were not available w h e n vehicl e w a s initially sold • Correction of address and ful l n a m e that is registered • • • •

R e a l time traffic information Maintenance information m e s s a g e Feature guide (90 days) Weather information

How to Delete Stored AcuraUnk Messages The Acura Link Sate l lite Communication System stores and displays these types of messa ge s on the navigation system display screen: • Feature Guide info • System m a l function info • Driver warnings • DTCs • Quick tips N OTE: • To d e l ete any stored Acuralink messages, follow these procedures. The first procedure is for your client. It lets t h e m delete certain types of messages. Th e second procedure is for technicians. It l ets you delete all stored messages. • The diagnostic m e n u includes a D A T A R E S E T function. S e l ect this only at TQ I and w h e n the vehicl e changes ownership. I t deletes all A c u r a U n k messages, log data, and Acuralink registration. Ifyou select D A T A R E S E T during the 45-day activation period, the A c u ra U n k Feature Guide repeats the first message. Acuralink me ss ag es rel ated to a repair should be d e l eted after that repair is done. Ifyou don't delete these messages, they stay in your c l ient's A cura Link m e s s a g e l og..

Message Delete Procedure Client 1. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 2. Press the I N F O button to bring up the I nformation screen. 3. Use the interface dial to select the S E T UP, then go to S E T U P (OTHER) tab and select A c u raLin k/M essages. 4. Use the interface dial to se l ect Delete Messages. 5. Select the item n u m b e r you want to delete, then select Delete. (I f you don't see D e l ete on the displ ay screen, you can't re m o v e this message.) 6. Select Yes to confirm your choice.

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Message Delete Procedure Service Tech 1, Turn the ignition switch to O N (II), 2. Press and hold the MAP / G U I D E , C A N C E L , and M E N U buttons at the s a m e time for 3 seconds more, and the self-diagnosis begins.

Select Diagnosis Items

Return

Self- D iagnosis Mode (Navi wilt check internal function, connections, etc, srform this test with vehicle stopped and engine running.S

D e ta il In f o r m a t io n & S e tt in g (Individual Diagnostic screens to confirm a specific dicignos‘ >r en.)

3, Using the interface dial ,se l ect the X M (HIP) from the Detail I nformation & Setting. Press the interface dial. S e l ect X M (HIP) Diag (A) from H I P System Link.

4. S e l ect Diagnostic Info. 5. Select the item you want to delete. After the m e s s a g e and date c o m e up, select Delete. 8. Select Yes to confirm your choice. 7. Repeat step 5 and 8 for each m e s s a g e you want to delete.

Acura Link Control Unit (XM Receiver) Connector for Inputs and Outputs

ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER) CONNECTOR A (32P)

AcuraUnk Control Unit (XM Receiver) Connector A (32P)

m_n__n.'. ___ „_n__n_n 1 2 3 / / 8 7 / / 10/ / 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 29 30 31 Wire side of female terminals

Connect to No. 5 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box A2 No. 21 (7,5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box A3 A0 F-CAN communication bus line A7 F-CAN communication bus l ine A10 B-CAN communication bus l ine Audio-Navigation unit HandsFreeLink control unit A13 AUDIO R+ A14 Audio-Navigation unit, HandsFreeLink control unit WHT AUDIO R Audio-Navigation unit, HandsFreeLink control unit BLK AUD I O L + y' A16 GRN AUDIO L— Audio-Navigation unit, HandsFreeLink control unit A17 WHT NAVI COMM1 Audio-Navigation unit Audio-Navigation unit RED NAVi COMM2 Audio-Navigation unit A19 GRN NAVI COM IVI 3 A20 BLK NAVI COMM4 Audio-Navigation unit A21 GRY* NAVI COMM SH Shiel d for terminal s No. 17, No. 18, No. 19, and No. 20 _ GRN HFL COMM3 HandsFreeLink control unit i P L COMM4 A23 BLK HandsFreeLink control unit A24 RED HandsFreeLink control unit HFL COMM1 HFLCOMM2 HandsFreeLink control unit WHT A25 _ _ Shield for terminals No. 22, No, 23, No. 24, and No. 25 A28 HFL COMM SH A28 BLK GND Body ground to G608 A29 BRN* GA-NET BUS A SH Shield for terminals No. 30 and No. 31 _ _ A30 GA-NET BUS A + Audio-Navigation unit Audio-Navigation unit RED GA-NET BUS A — A31 *: The shiel ded wires have a heat-shrink tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube, typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic, Cavity A1

Wire Color WHT LT BLU PI RED WHT LTGRN _ _

Terminal Name +B IG1 ACC F-CAN A L F-CAN A H

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) A c u r a U n k Control Unit ( X M

Receiver) Connector i

(2P)

Terminal side of female terminals

Cavity 81 B2

Wire __ _

Terminal N a m # TER-SAT G N D SH

Connect to X M antenna Shield for terminal No. 1

23-333

Circuit Diagram

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

IGNITION

: The shielded wires have a heat-shrink tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulatingtube, typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic, : Shielding

HFL-NAVIGATION MICROPHONE MIC

MIC

n 13 MIC IN+ HANDSFREELI NK CONTROL UNIT AUDIO L+

AUDIO L-

AUDIO R+

AUDIO R-

14 MIC IN-

12 MIC IN SH

HFT HFT MIC MIC OUT+ OUT27

28

ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEI VER) AUDIO L+ A15

BLK

AUDIO L- ' A16

GRN

AUDIO R+ A13

RED

AUDIO

R-

A14

WHT

V BLK

AUDIO L+

GRN

AUDIO L-

RED

AUDIO R+

ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER)

h

WHT . GRY*

AUDIO R-

AUDIO SH AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT

HFT MIC OUT+

HFT MIC OUT-

HFT MIC OUT SH

Circuit Diagram (cont'd)

* : The shielded wires have a heat-shrink tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube, typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic, ----------- -- shielding — - : CAN line . . . . . : GA-NET

Self-Diagnostic Function N OTE : Only select D A T A R E S E T from the X M (HIP) E C U screen w h e n instructed, Selecting D A T A R E S E T will clear the

Acura Link registration, and the Acura Link service wi l lreset to the factory default. I f the vehicl e w a s already registered for the Acuralink service, it will have to be reactivated by ca l ling Acura Client Services before a l l features will be availabl e. T he A c u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) has a se l f-diagnostic function. T o run the se l f-diagnostic function, do the following:

How to Enter the Self-Diagnostic Function N OTE : Always check for and repair any B - C A N or F-C AN D T C s before troubleshooting the Acura Link system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 2, Press and hold the M A P / G U I DE, C A N C E L , and M E N U buttons at the s a m e time for 3 seconds more, and the self-diagnosis begins.

3. Using the interface dial, select the Detail Information & Setting from the Select Diagnosis I tems menu. Press the interface dial .

Select Diagnosis I tems

|~Wetum~]

Self-Diagnosis Mode {Navi w ill check internal function, connections, etc. Perform this test w ith vehicle stopped and engine running.j

Detail Information & Setting (Individual Diagnostic screens to confirm a specific diagnostic screen.)

4. Using the interface dial , select the X M (HI P) from the Detail I nformation & Setting menu. Press the interface dial.

Detail I nformation & Setting

| Return |

GPS Informatio n

Mo nitor Check Unit Check

Yaw Rate

Functional Setup

Car Status Error History

M(H1P)

B-CAN

Version

5. T he display indicates HIP System Link, and will do an Acuralink connection check for each device. I f a connection is faul ty, the l ocation of the fault is indicated with N G (red).

H I P System Link

[Return*]

F-CAN B-CAN 1 z:^=i_J=irn=l

XM(HIP).ECU Navi

ZZ ..... I1--| HFL

Connection OK: Green color Connection NG: Red color

I 11 A udio

XM Status XM(HIP) Diag

(cont'd)

Self-Diagnostic Function (cont'd) 6. W h e n a red color is indicated, check the continuity between the Acuralink control unit ( X M receiver) and the device indicated in red.

Device indicated in red F-CAN

Test: Desired result

Test condition Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Gauge control module connector A (12P)

Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • PCM connector A (49P)

Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • VSA modul ator-control unit 46P connector

Disconnect these iten . • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • TPMS control unit 20P connector

Disconnect these iten . • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • SH-AWD contro l unit connector A (20P)

Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • SRS unit connector A (39P)

Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Active damper contro l unit connector

(14P)*

*:

With active damper system

B

Possible cause if result is not obtained An open in the wire

Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit connector A (32P) te rm ina l No. 7 and Gauge contro l module connector A (12P) term inal No. 12: There shou l d be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk An open in the wire control unit connector A (32P) te rm ina l No. 6 and Gauge contro l module connector A (12P) terminal No. 6: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk An open in the wire contro l unit connector A (32P) terminal No. 7 and PCM connector A (49P) te rm ina l No. 48: There should be co n tinuit Check for continuity between AcuraUnk An open in the wire contro l unit connector A (32P) terminal No. 6 and PCM connector A (49P) term inal No. 49: There shou l d be continuity. An open in the wire Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit connector A (32P) term ina l No. 7 and VSA m odulator-control unit 46P connector term inal No. 39: There shou l d be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk j An open in the wire control unit connector A (32P) term inal No. 6 j and VSA m odulator-control unit 46P connector term inal No. 38: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk An open in the wire control unit connector A (32P) term inal No. 7 and TPMS control unit 20P connector term inal No. 1: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk An open in the wire control unit connector A (32P) terminal No. 6 and TPMS control unit 20P connector term inal No. 11: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between Acura Link An open in the v\ control unit connector A (32P) terminal No. 7 and SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) terminal No. 10: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraLink An open in the wire control unit connector A (32P) terminal No. 6 and SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) term inal No. 20: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraLink An open in the wire control unit connector A (32P) term inal No. 7 and SRS unit connector A (39P) term inal No. 17: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraLink An open in the wire control unit connector A (32P) term inal No. 6 and SRS unit connector A (39P) term inal No. 16: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between Acura Link An open in the v\ control unit connector A (32P) term inal No. 7 and Active damper control unit connector B (14P) term inal No. 1: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraLink An open in the v\ control unit connector A (32P) terminal No. 6 and Active damper control unit connector B (14P) term inal No. 8: There should be continuity.

Device indicated in red F-CAN

Test condition Disconnect these items: • Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Yaw rate-l ateral / l ongitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector

Disconnect these items: • Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Steering angle sensor 5P connector

Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • ACC unit 20P connector*2

Disconnect these items: • Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P)*2

Disconnect these items: • Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Gauge control module connector A (12P) • PCM connector A (43P) • VSA modul ator-control unit 46P connector • TPMS control unit 20 P connector • SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) • SRS unit connector A (39P) • Active damper control unit connector B (14Pr • Yaw rate-l ateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector

Test: Desired result Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit connector A (32P) terminal No. 7 and Yaw rate-l ateral /longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector terminal No. 3: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit connector A (32P) terminal No. 6 and Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector terminal No. 2: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit connector A (32P) terminal No. 7 and Steering angle sensor 5P connector terminal No. 4: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit connector A (32P) terminal No. 6 and Steering angle sensor 5P connector terminal No. 2: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit connector A (32P) terminal No. 7 and ACC unit 20P connector terminal No. 10: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit connector A (32P) terminal No. 6 and ACC unit 20P connector terminal No. 20: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit connector A (32P) terminal No. 7 and E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P) terminal No. 3: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit connector A (32P) terminal No. 6 and E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P) terminal No. 5: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between body ground and AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7 individually: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 1 and No. 7: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 1 and No. 6: There should be no continuity.

Possible cause if result is not obtained An open in the wire

An open in the wire

An open in the wire

An open in the wire

An open in the wire

An open in the wire

An open in the wire

An open in the wire

A short in the wire

A short in the wire

A short in the wire

• Steering angle sensor 5P connector • ACC unit 20 P connector*2 • E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P)*2

* 1: With active damper system *2: With ACC

(cont'd)

Self-Diagnostic Function (cont'd) Device Indicated in red F-CAN

Test condition Disconnect these items; • Gauge control module connector A (12P) • PCM connector A (43P) • VSA modulator-control unit 48P connector • TPMS control unit 20P connector • SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) • SRS unit connector A (33P) • Active damper control unit connector B (14PP • Yaw rate-lateral / l ongitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector • Steering ang l e sensor 5P connector • ACC unit 20P connector*2 • E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P)*2 Disconnect these iten . • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • PCM connector A (49P) • VSA modul ator-control unit 46P connector • TPMS control unit 20P connector • SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) • SRS unit connector A (39P) • Active damper control unit connector B {14Pr • Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal

Test: Desired result

Check for continuity between body ground and AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7 individually; There should be no continuity.

Possible cause If result is not obtained A short in tl AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver)

Check for continuity between body ground and AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7 individually: There should be no continuity.

A short in tl Gauge control module

Check for continuity between body ground and AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7 individually: There should be no continuity.

A short in the PCM

acceleration sensor 4P connector

• Steering angle sensor 5P connector • ACC unit 20P connector*2 • E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P)*2 Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Gauge control module connector A (12P) • VSA modulator-control unit46P connector • TPMS control unit 20P connector • SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) • SRS unit connector A (39P) • Active damper control unit connector B

d4Pr • Yaw rate-l ate ra I/I o ng itu d in a I acceleration sensor 4P connector • Steering angle sensor 5P connector • ACC unit 20P connector*2 • E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P)*2

* 1: With active damper system *2: With ACC

Device indicated in

Test condition

Test: Desired result

red

F-CAN

Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Gauge control module connector A

Check for continuity between body ground and AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7 individually: There should be no continuity.

Possible cause if result is not obtained A short in the VSA modulator-control unit

(12P)

• PCM connector A (49P) • TPMS control unit 20P connector • SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) • SRS unit connector A (39P) • Active damper control unit connector B (14Pp • Yaw rate-lateral / l ongi tudinal accel eration sensor 4P connector • Steering angle sensor 5P connector ~ ACC unit 20P connector*2 • E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P)*2 Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Gauge control module connector A

Check for continuity between body ground and AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7 individually: There should be no continuity.

A short in tl TPMS control unit

Check for continuity between body ground and AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7 individually: There should be no continuity.

A short in the

(12P) • PCM connector A (49P)

• VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector • SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) • SRS unit connector A (39P) • Active damper control unit connector B

f!4PP • Yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector • Steering angle sensor 5P connector • ACC unit 20P connector*2 • E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P)*2 Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Gauge control module connector A (12P) • PCM connector A (49P) • VSA modulator-contro l unit46P connector • TPMS control unit 20P connector • SRS unit connector A (39P) • Active damper control unit connector B (14P)*1 • Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal accel eration sensor 4P connector • Steering angle sensor 5P connector • ACC unit 20P connector*2 • E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P)*2

SH-AWD control unit

*1; With active damper system *2: With ACC

(c o n t'd )

Self-Diagnostic Function (cont'd) Device indicated in red F-CAN

Test condition Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P)

• Gauge control module connector A

Test: Desired result

Check for continuity between body ground and AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7 individually: There should be no continuity.

Possible cause if result is not obtained A short in the SRS unit

(12P)

• PCM connector A (43P) • VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector • TPMS control unit 20P connector • SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) • Active damper control unit connector B (14P)*1 • Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal accel eration sensor 4P connector • Steering ang l e sensor 5P connector • ACC unit 20P connector*2 • E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P)*2 Disconnect these items: • Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Gauge control module connector A

Check for continuity between body ground and AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7 individually: There should be no continuity.

A short in tl Active damper control unif 1

Check for continuity between body ground and AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7 individually: There should be no continuity.

A short in the Yaw rate-lateral/longitu­ dinal acceleration sensor

(12P)

• PCM connector A (49P) • VSA modu l ator-control unit46P connector TPMS control unit 20P connector SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) SRS unit connector A (39P) Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector • Steering angle sensor 5P connector • ACC unit 20P connector*2 • E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P)*2 Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Gauge contro l module connector A

• • • •

(12P) • PCM connector A (49P) • VSA modulator-control unit 46P • • • •

connector TPMS control unit 20P connector SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) SRS unit connector A (39P) Active damper control unit connector B

(14PP • Steering angle sensor 5P connector • ACC unit 20P connector*2 • E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P)#2 *1: With active damper system *2: With ACC

Test condition

Device

indicated in red F-CAN

■Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Gauge control module connector A

Test: Desired result

Check for continuity between body ground and AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7 individually: There should be no continuity.

Possible cause if result is not obtained A short in the Steering angle sensor

(12P) • PCM connector A (49P)

• VSA modulator-control unit 48P connector • TPMS control unit 20P connector • SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) • SRS unit connector A (39P)

• Active damper control unit connector B (14P)*1 • Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal accel eration sensor 4P connector • ACC unit 20P connector*2 • E-pretensioner unit connector B (14PP Disconnect these items: • Acura Link control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Gauge control module connector A

Check for continuity between body ground and AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) termina l s No. 6 and No. 7 individually: There should be no continuity.

A short in the ACC unit*2

Check for continuity between body ground and AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7 individually: There should be no continuity.

A short in the E-pretensioner unit *2

(12P)

• PCM connector A (49P) • VSA modul ator-control unit 48P connector • TPMS control unit 20P connector • SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) • SRS unit connector A (39P) • Active damper control unit connector B (14P)*1

• Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector • Steering angle sensor 5P connector • E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P)*2 Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Gauge control module connector A

(12P) • PCM connector A (49P) • VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector • TPMS control unit 20P connector • SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) • SRS unit connector A (39P) • Active damper control unit connector B

(14Pp • Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector

• Steering angle sensor 5P connector • ACC unit 20P connector*2 *1: With active damper system #2 : With ACC

(cont'd)

Self-Diagnostic Function (cont'd) Device indicated in red B-CAN

Test condition

Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Under-dash fuse/relay box connector G (6P) Disconnect these iten • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P) Disconnect these items: • A cu ra lin k contro l unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Rear fuse/re l ay box connector B (34P) Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk contro l unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Combination switch contro l unit 8P connectc Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay control m odu l e) connector E (V Disconnect these iten • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Power seat contro l unit connector A (40P) Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk contro l unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector Disconnect these iterr • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • r /ver tailgate control unit connector C (14F Disconnect these iterr ... • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Gauge control module connector A (12P) Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) - 1.'~ndsFreeLink contro l unit 28P connector

*: With ACC

Test: Desired result

Check for continuity between Acura Link control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and Under-dash fuse/relay box connector G (6P) term inal No. 1: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and Driver’s MPCS unit connector A (40P) term inal No. 28: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between Acura Link control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and Rear fuse/relay box connector B (34P) term inal No. 2: There should be continu;’ Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and Combination switch control unit 8P connector term inal No. 4: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between Acura Link control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay control module) connector E (14P) terminal No. 1: There shou l d be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and Power seat control unit connector A (40P) term inal No. 40: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector term inal No. 4: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and Power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) term inal No. 7: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and Gauge control module connector A (12P) terminal No. 5: There should be continui' Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector terminal No. 18: There should be continuity.

Possible cause if result is not obtain An open in the wire

An open in the wire

An open in the wire

An open in the wire

An open in the v\

An open in the wire

An open in the wire

An open in the wire

An open in the v\

An open in the wire

Device indicated in red B-CAN

Test condition Disconnect these items: • Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Climate control unit connector A (40P) Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • BSI control unit 16P connector* Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Under-dash fuse/relay box connector G (6P)

• Driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P) • Rear fuse/relay box connector B (34P) • Combination switch control unit 8P connector • Under-hood fuse/relay box (Rel ay control module) connector E (14P) • Power seat control unit connector A (40P) • I mmobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector • Power tail gate control unit connector C

Test: Desired result

Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and Climate control unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 4: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between Acura Link control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) termina l s No. 10 and BSI control unit 16P connector* terminal No. 5: There shou l d be continuity. Check for continuity between body ground and AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10: There shou l d be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) termina l s No. 1 and No. 10: There should be no continuity.

Possible cause if result is not obtained An open in the wire

An open in the wire

A short in the wire

A short in the wire

(14P)

• Gauge control module connector A ( 12P) • HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector • Climate control unit connector A (40P) • BSI control unit 16P connector* Disconnect these items: • Under-dash fuse/rel ay box connector G (6P)

• Driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P) • Rear fuse/relay box connector B (34P) • Combination switch control unit 8P

Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and body ground: There should be no continuity.

A short in the AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver)

connector • Under-hood fuse/relay box (Rel ay contro l module) connector E (14P) • Power seat control unit connector A (40P) • Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector • Power tailgate control unit connector C

(14P) • • • •

Gauge control module connector A (12P) HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector Climate control unit connector A (40P) BSI control unit 16P connector*

*: With ACC

(con t'd )

Self-Diagnostic Function (cont'd) Device indicated in red B-CAN

Test condition Disconnect these iten • Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P) • Rear fuse/relay box connector B (34P) • Combination switch control unit 8P connector • Under-hood fuse/rel ay box (Rel ay control modul e) connector E (14P) • Power seat control unit connector A (40P)

Test: Desired result

Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and body ground: There should be no continuity.

Possible cause if result is not obtained A short in the Under-dash fuse/relay box

• I mmobil izer-keyless control unit7P

connector • Power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) • Gauge control module connector A (12P) • HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector • Cl imate control unit connector A (40P) • BSI contro l unit 16P connector* Disconnect these items: • AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Under-dash fuse/relay box connector G (6 P» • Rear fuse/relay box connector B (34P) • Combination switch control unit 8P connector • Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay contro l module) connector E (14P) • Power seat control unit connector A (40P) • Immobilizer-keyl ess control unit 7P connector • Power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) • Gauge control module connector A (12P) • HandsFreeLink contro l unit 28P connector • Climate control unit connector A (40P) • BSI control unit 16P connector* Disconnect these items: « 9_uraLink contro l unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Under-dash fuse/relay box connector G (6P) • Driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P) • Combination switch control unit 8P connector • Under-hood fuse/relay box (Rel ay control module) connector E (14P) • Power seat control unit connector A (40P) • Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector • Power tai l gate control unit connector C (14P) • Gauge contro l module connector A (12P) • HandsFreeLink contro l unit 28P connector • Climate control unit connector A (40P) • BSI control unit 16P connector*

*: W i th ACC

Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and body ground: There should be no continuity.

A short in the Driver's MPCS unit

Check for continuity between Acura Link control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and body ground: There should be no continuity.

A short in the Rear fuse/relay box

Device indicated in red B-CAN

Test condition Disconnect these items; • Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P)

• Under-dash fuse/rel ay box connector G

Test: Desired result

Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and body ground: There shou l d be no continuity.

Possible cause if result is not obtained A short in the Combination switch control unit

(6P)

• Driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P) • Rear fuse/relay box connector B (34P) • Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay control module) connector E (14P) • Power seat control unit connector A (40P) • I mmobil izer-keyl ess control unit 7P connector • Power tail gate control unit connector C (14P) • Gauge control modul e connector A (12P) • HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector • Cl imate control unit connector A (40P) • BSI control unit 16P connector* Disconnect these items: • Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Under-dash fuse/rel ay box connector G (6P) • Driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P) • Rear fuse/rel ay box connector B (34P) • Combination switch control unit 8P connector • Power seat control unit connector A (40P) • Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector • Power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) • Gauge control module connector A (12P) • HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector • Climate control unit connector A (40P) • BSI control unit 16P connector* Disconnect these items: • AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Under-dash fuse/relay box connector G (6P) • Driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P) • Rear fuse/relay box connector B (34P) • Combination switch control unit 8P connector • Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay control module) connector E (14P) • I mmobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector • Power tailgate control unit connector C

Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) termina l s No. 10 and body ground: There should be no continuity.

A short in the Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay control module)

Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and body ground: There should be no continuity.

A short in the Power seat control unit

(14P) • • • •

Gauge control module connector A (12P) HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector Cl imate control unit connector A (40P) BSI control unit 16P connector*

*: With ACC

(cont'd)

Self-Diagnostic Function (cont'd) Device indicated In red B-CAN

Test condition Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) ■ • Under-dash fuse/rel ay box connector G

Test: Desired result

Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and body ground: There should be no continuity.

Possible cause if result is not obtained A short in the Immobi l izer-key­ less control unit

(6P)

• Driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P) • Rear fuse/relay box connector B (34P) • Combination switch control unit 8P connector • Under-hood fuse/rel ay box (Relay control module) connector E (14P) • Power seat control unit connector A (40P) • P , iver tailgate control unit connector C (14P)

• Gauge control module connector A (12P) • HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector • Cl imate control unit connector A (40P) • BSI control unit 18P connectc Disconnect these items: • Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Under-dash fuse/relay box connector G

Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and body ground: There should be no continuity.

A short in tl Power tailgate control unit

Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) termina l s No. 10 and body ground: There should be no continuity.

A short in the Gauge control module

(6P)

• Driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P) • Rear fuse/relay box connector B (34P) • Combination switch control unit 8P connector • Under-hood fuse/rel ay box (Rel ay control module) connector E (14P) • Power seat control unit connector A (40P) • Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector • Gauge control module connector A (12P) • HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector • Climate control unit connector A (40P) • BSI control unit 16P connector* Disconnect these items: • Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Under-dash fuse/relay box connector G (6P) • Driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P) • Rear fuse/re l ay box connector B (34P) • Combination switch control unit 8P connector • Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay control module) connector E (14P) • Power seat contro l unit connector A (40P) • Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector • Power tailgate control unit connector C

(14P) • HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector • Climate contro l unit connector A (40P) • BSI control unit 16P connector* *: With ACC

Device indicated in red B-CAN

Test condition Disconnect these items: • AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Under-dash fuse/relay box connector G

Test: Desired result

Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and body ground: There should be no continuity.

Possible cause if result is not obtained A short in the HandsFreeLink control unit

(6P)

• Driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P) • Rear fuse/relay box connector B (34P) • Combination switch control unit 8P connector • Under-hood fuse/relay box (Rel ay control modul e) connector E (14P) • Power seat control unit connector A (40P) • I mmobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector • Power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) • Gauge control module connector A (12P) • Climate control unit connector A (40P) • BSI control unit 18P connector* Disconnect these items: • Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Under-dash fuse/relay box connector G

Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and body ground: There should be no continuity.

A short in tl Climate control unit

Check for continuity between Acura Link control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 and body ground: There should be no continuity.

A short in the BSI control unit*2

(6P)

• Driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P) • Rear fuse/relay box connector B (34P) • Combination switch control unit 8P connector • Under-hood fuse/relay box (Rel ay control module) connector E (14P) • Power seat control unit connector A (40P) • Immobil izer-keyless control unit 7P connector

• Power tailgate control unit connector C (14P) • Gauge control module connector A (12P) • HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector • BSI control unit 16P connector* Disconnect these items: • Acura Link control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Under-dash fuse/relay box connector G (6P) • Driver's MPCS unit connector A (40P) • Rear fuse/relay box connector B (34P) • Combination switch control unit 8P connector • Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay control module) connector E (14P) • Power seat control unit connector A (40P) • Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector • Power tailgate control unit connector C

(14P) • Gauge control module connector A (12P) • HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector • Climate control unit connector A (40P) With ACC

Device indicated in red Navi

Test condition Disconnect these items: Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) Audio-Navigation unit connector C (28P)

Test: Desired result

Possible cause if result is not obtained An open in the wire

Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 17 and audio-navigation unit connector C (28P) terminal No. 10: There should be continuity. An open in the wire Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminal s No. 18 and audio-navigation unit connector C (28P) terminal No. 9: There should ______ __________________ be continui ty, Check for continuity between Acuralink An open in the wire control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 13 and audio-navigation unit connector C (28P) terminal No, 23: There should be contin Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) termina l s No. 20 and audio-navigation unit connector C (28P) termina l No. 22: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 17 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 1 and No. 17: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 18 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 1 and No. 18: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 19 and body ground: There should be no continuity. __ Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 1 and No. 19: There should be no continuity.

An open in the wire

A short in the wire

A short to power in the wire

A short in the wire

A short to power in the wire

A short in the wire

A short to power in the wire

Device indicated in red Navi

Test condition

Test: Desired result

Disconnect these items: • Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Audio-Navigation unit connector C (28P)

Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 20 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminal s No. 1 and No. 20: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminal s No. 17 and body ground: There should be no continu Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 18 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 19 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P)

Disconnect audio-navigation unit connector C (28P)

Disconnect Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P)

terminals No. 20 and body ground: There should be no continu Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 17 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 18 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 19 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 20 and body ground: There should be no continuity.

Possible cause if result is not obtained A short in the wire

A short to power in the wire

A short in the AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) A short in the AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) A short in tl AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) A short in the AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) A short in the audio-navigation unit A short in the audio-navigation unit A short in the audio-navigation unit A short in the audio-navigation unit

(cont'd)

Self-Diagnostic Function (cont'd) Device indicated in red HFL

Test condition Disconnect these items: • Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector

Test: Desired result Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 24 and HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector terminal No. 20: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 25 and HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector terminal No. 21 : There should be conti nuity. Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminal s No. 22 and HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector terminal No, 7: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No, 23 and HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector terminal No. 6 : There should be continuity. Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 24 and body ground: There should be no continu" Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 1 and No, 24: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) termina l s No. 25 and body ground: There should be no continu'' Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 1 and No. 25: There shou l d be no contir

Possible cause if result is not btain An open in the vi

An open in the wire

An of ( ,i n! f9» w n e

An open in the v\

A short in the wire

A short to powei the wire

A short in the wire

A short to powei the wire

X

Device indicated in red HFL

Test condition Disconnect these items: • AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P)

• HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector

Disconnect HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector

Disconnect Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P)

Test; Desired result Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 22 and body ground: There should be no continu Check for continuity between Acura Link control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 1 and No. 22 : There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between Acura Link control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 23 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between Acura Link control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminal s No. 1 and No. 23: There shoul d be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 24 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 25 and body ground: There shoul d be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 22 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 23 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 24 and body ground: There shou l d be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk contro l unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 25 and body ground: There should be no continu Check for continuity between AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 22 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk contro l unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 23 and body ground: There should be no continuity.

Possibl e cause if result is not obtair A short in the wi

A short to powei the wire

A short in the wi

A short to powei the wire

A shor AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) A short in the AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) A short in the AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) A short in the AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) A short in the HandsFreeLink control unit A short in the HandsFreeLink control unit A short in the HandsFreeLink control unit A short in the HandsFreeLink control unit

Self-Diagnostic Function (cont'd) Device indicated in red Audio

Test condition

Test; Desired result

Disconnect these items: • Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) • Audio-Navigation unit connector D (14P)

Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminal s No. 30 and audio-navigation unit connector D (14P) terminal No. 9: There should be continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No, 31 and audio-navigation unit connector D (14P) terminal No. 10: There shoul d be continuity. Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminal s No. 30 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No, 1 and No. 30: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No, 31 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 1 and No. 31: There shoul d be no continuity. Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 30 and body ground: There should be no continuity, Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 31 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 30 and body ground: There should be no continuity. Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 31 and body ground: There shoul d be no continuity.

Disconnect audio-navigation unit connector D (14P)

Disconnect AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector A (32P)

Possible cause if result is not btained An open in the wire

An open in the wire

A short in the wire

A short to power in the wire A short in the wire

A short to power in the wire A short in tl AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) A short in the Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) A short in tl audio-navigation unit A short in the audio-navigation unit

NOTE: If the XM antenna connection condition is faulty, XM ANTENNA is indicated on the front climate control unit display. 7, Ifthe indication does not go away, confirm DTCs, and refer to the rel evant system troubleshooting and input tests.

Canceling the Self-Diagnostic Function 1. Use the interface d ia l to, s e l ect the Exit Diag. Press the interface dial to cancel the s e l f-diagnostic function.

DTC Troubleshooting DTC B2240: XM Antenna line failure 1. C onnect th e HDS to the DLC (see page 23-324).

DTC U0023: F-CAN Communication bus line error (BUS-OFF)

2. Clear the D T C with the HDS.

1. Connect the H D S to the D L C (see page 23-324).

3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), and then back to O N (II), and wait 30 seconds or more.

2. Clear the D T C with the HDS.

4. Check for D T C s with the HDS. Is D T C B2240 i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the X M antenna is O K at this time. Check for poor connections or l oose terminals at the Acura Link control unit ( X M receiver) and the X M antenna.■

3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), and then back to O N (II). 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

i s D T C U0029 i n d i c a t e d ? Y E S - R e p l ace the Acura Link control unit ( X M receiver) (see page 23-133).■ NO-lntermittent fail ure, Acuralink control unit ( X M receiver) is OK at this time.B

6. Check the X M antenna lead connection at the Acura Link control unit ( X M receiver) and at the X M antenna.

is it c o n n e c t e d p r o p e r t y ? ■YES-Substitute a k no wn-good X M antenna (see page 23-135), and recheck. I f the s y m p t o m / indication goes away, replace the original X M antenna (see page 23-135). If the symptom/indication is still present, update the Acuralink control unit (see page 23-386) if it does not have the latest software, and recheck. Ifthe software is the latest, replace the Acura Link control unit ( X M receiver) (see page 23-133).■

NO-Reconnect the connector, and recheck the D T C . B

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC U0100: F-CAN Lost communication with PCM NOTE: • Ifyou are troubl eshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to fol low the instructions in B - C A N System Diagnosis Test M o d e A (see page 22-154). • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94). 1. Connect the H D S to the D L C (see page 23-324). 2. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), and then back to

7. Check for continuity between A c u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) connector A (32P) terminal s No. 6 and No. 7 and P C M connector A (49P) terminals No. 49 and No. 48 respectivel y,

ACURAUNK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER) CONNECTOR A (32P) Wire side of female terminals F-CAN A H (WHT)

I2131/9167T7f7>/l/l1 3 1141 1 5 116]1 " I1 7I1 81 1 9I2 0I2 1|22!2 (|2 4j2 H ]?& ]/[2 8[2 9|3 0]3 1[/

O N (II).

F-CAN A L (RED) 3. Check for D T C s with the H D S and D T C l og data in the navigation system diagnostic m o d e (see page 23-233).

Is D T C U 0 1 0 0 in d ic a te d w ith H D S a n d o n th e n a v ig a t io n d is p la y ? YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent failure. F-CAN communication l ine is O K at this time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A c u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver).® 4. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

iC _ Z _ i 3 4 | 5 16 1 7 I 8 11 12 13 / I ' 16 / | 1 8 19 26 25 X ■ 22 / 24 X 29 30 31 3 2 | / / 9 3 6 37 140141 4 2 14 3 ’4 4 1 / ^ 4 6 [ /

1 2

c

9 110 f ■ i 27 28 i 38 39

20 21

4 8 14 9 1

F-CAN A H (WHT)

F-CAN A L (RED)

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) Terminal side of female terminals

5. J u m p the S C S line with the HDS.

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? 8. Disconnect Ac ur a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) connector A (32P) and P C M connector A (43P).

Y E S - C h e c k for poor connections or loose terminals at the Acura Link control unit ( X M receiver). If all connections are OK, update the AcuraUnk control unit (see page 23-386) if it does not have the latest software, and recheck. Ifthe software is the l atest, repl ace the A c u r a U n k control unit (XM receiver) (see page 23-133).■ NO-Repair an open in the wire between the Acura Link control unit { X M receiver) and the P C M . B

DTC U0155: F-CAN Lost communication with Gauge Control Module DTC U128D: Lost communication with Gauge Control Module N OTE : Ifyou are troubleshooting m u l tipl e DTCs, be sure to fol low the instructions in B - C A N system diagnosis test m o d e A (see page 22-154).

6. Check for continuity between Acuralink control unit ( X M receiver) connector A (32P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7, and gauge control m o d ul e connector A (12P) terminals No. 8 and No. 12 respectivel y.

ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER) CONNECTOR A (32P) Wire side of female terminal s F-CAN A L (RED)

F-CAN A H (WHT) Itf Z Z Z Z Ijj

1. Connect the H D S to the D L C fsee page 23-324). 2. Turn the ignition switch to O N (ll). 3. Check for D T C s with the H D S and D T C log data in the navigation system diagnostic m o d e (see page 23-233). Is D T C U 0 1 5 5 o r U 1 2 8 D i n d i c a t e d w i t h H D S a n d o n t h e

n a v ig a tio n d is p la y ?

-

„

/ I / ] 13 114 115 116 | ’ i T * 1® 1/ 1/ 1 «' [ 17 118 119 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 125 | 26 [/] 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 {/

F-CAN A L (RED) n

P 1

2 7

3 8

9 9

5

8

10 11 12

Y E S - G o to step 4. NO-lntermittent failure, the F - CAN or B - C A N communication l ine is O K at this time. Check for poor connections or loose termina l s at the A c u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver).■ 4. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 5. Disconnect Acuralink control unit ( X M receiver) connector A (32P) and gauge control m odu le 32P connector A (12P).

F-CAN A H (WHT) GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (12P) Wire side of femal e terminals

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 7. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the Acuralink control unit ( X M receiver) and the gauge control mo d u l e . !

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)

Symptom Troubleshooting

7. Check for continuity between A c u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) connector A (32P) terminal No. 10 and gauge control m od ule connector A (12P) termina l No. 5,

AcuraUnk services do not work

ACURALlilC CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER) CONNECTOR A (32P) Wire side of female terminals B-CAN (LTGRN)

N OTE : • Check the vehicl e battery condition first (see page 22-94). • In order for the A c u r a U n k service to work, the client must have an activated account with X M (receives at least channels, 000,001,174, and 247). • Verify the client account status by ca l ling X M Satellite Radio at 800-852-9898.

jjZ Z Z Z Z Z ^ /t/lia fu lis T ie f ’ 1 T2 13 l / J 9 ' i 8 ! 117 I 18 119 I 20 I 21 I 22 I 23 I 24 I 25 I 26 I / I 28 129 I 30 I 31 1 /

1. Check the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse and the No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ relay box. Are t h e f u s e s O K ?

B-CAN (LT GRN)

Y E S - G o to step 2.

P

■ jn

1

3

2

7

8

9

5

NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.B

8

9 110 11 112

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (12P) Wire side of female terminals

2. Turn the ignition switch to A C C (I). 3. Measure the v o l tage between Acuralink control unit ( X M receiver) connector A (32P) terminal No. 3 and body ground.

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER) CONNECTOR A (32P!

Y E S - C h e c k for poor connections or loose terminals at the A c u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver). I f all connections are OK, update the A c u r a U n k control unit (see page 23-368) if it does not have the l atest software, and recheck. Ifthe software is the l atest, replace the Acuralink control unit ( X M receiver) (see page 23-133).■ NO-Repair an open in the wire between A c u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) and gauge control m o d u l e. ®

ACC (PUR) ’ ’ I 2 I a I / I / I 6 7 9 9 1 10 9 9 1 1 3 114 115 116 f 117 j 18 j 19 J20 | 21122 123 j 24125126 \ / \ 28 j 29130 j 31 \y /'

T Wire side of female terminal s

is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ? Y E S -G o to step 4. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the A c u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) and the No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay b o x .B 4. Turn the ignition switch to O N (ll).

5. Measure the voltage between A c u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) connector A (32P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.

ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER) CONNECTOR A (32P)

6. Measure the v o l tage between A cur a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) connector A (32P) terminal No, 28 and body ground.

ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER) CONNECTOR A (32P)

1G1 (LT BLU) n I „ iM n T T /T e

1------------------ 1........ ..... _OL_ 1__ D___TI 10 / \ / \ 13 114 115 116 |

799!

j 17 p!8 119 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 2B | 26 | / | 28129 | 30 | 31 [ /

Y T r n p p iT

7 J 9 1 9 I 10 9 9 | l 3 | l 4 | l 5 f l 6 | r 117 | 18 119 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 [/] 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | /

V

Wire side of female terminals

Is t h e r e b a tt e r y

v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the Acuratink control unit ( X M receiver) and the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.B

Wire side of femal e terminals

Is th e r e le s s th a n 0 .2 V ? YE S- C h e c k for loose termina l s or poor connections at the Acura Link control unit ( X M receiver) connector A (32P). I f the connections are good, substitute a known-good Acura Link control unit ( X M receiver) (see page 23-133), and recheck. Ifthe s y m p t o m goes away, replace the original A cu r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) (see page 23-133).■ N O - C h e c k for an open in the wire between the

AcuraUnk control unit ( X M receiver) and body ground. Ifthe wire is OK, check for poor ground at G 6 0 6 (see page 22-46).■

(cont'd)

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) AcuraLink messages cannot be heard or are weak 1.Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 2. Check that the audio system is operating n o r m a l l y and the speaker sound l evels are normal from different audio sources (AM/FM, X M , CD/DVDs, navigation, etc.).

D o e s th e a u d io s y s t e m w o r k n o r m a lly a n d is t h e a u d io o u tp u t fro m th e s p e a k e r n o r m a l w h e n p la y in g v a rio u s a u d io s o u rc e s ? Y E S - G o to step 3. N O - D o the audio system s y m p t o m troubl eshooting.■ 3. Check the audio system w h e n Ac ur a U n k messages are played.

D o e s th e a u d io s y s te m m u te w h e n A c u ra U n k m e s s a g e s a r e b e in g p la y e d ?

6. Check for continuity between A c u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) connector A (32P) and audio-navigation unit connector D (14P) according to the tabl e.

AcuraLink control unit ( X M receiver) connector A13 A14 A15 A18

Audio-Navigation unit connector

Wire color

ED WHT BLK GRN

D13 P8

14

ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT {XM RECEIVER) CONNECTOR A (32P) n n ft i-------- r 9 P 9 9 ! 6 7 9 1 / 1 10 117 118 119 |20 |21 |22 123 |24 126 126 l/l 28129 |30131 | /

Wire side of female terminals

YES-l f audio system mutes and p l ays the messages at a n o r m a l volume, the system is O K at this time. If the m essages are weaker than n o r m a l ,go to step 4, N O - C h e c k for B - C A N codes. Repair any B - C A N codes, and recheck. I f there are no B - C A N codes, substitute a known- go od A cu ra U n k control unit ( X M receiver) (see page 23-133).■ 4. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 5. Disconnect these items;

AUDi0-NA¥lGAT10N UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P)

2 z 1/

3 9 10 /

4

5

6

13 14

Wire side of fema l e terminal s

Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?

• A c u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) connector A

(32P) • Audio-Navigation unit connector D (14P) • HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector

Y E S - G o to step 7. N O-T he re is an open in the wire(s) between the Ac ur aU nk control unit ( X M receiver) and the audio-navigation unit R e p l ace the affected shiel ded harness.■

7. Check for continuity between body ground and A c u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) connector A (32P) according to the table.

AcuraUnk control unit (XM receiver) connector

Wire color

A14 A15 A18

RED WHT BLK GRN

ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT CK M RECEIVER) CONNECTOR A (32P)

n n T1aI^l9i679l/l1 09I911 3 T U I'5T 16T

-------’1 2 117 118 119 |2D |21 |22 123 |24 [2512 6 2 8 129 [30131 I/'

8. Check for continuity between the terminals of audio-navigation unit connector D (14P) according to the table.

From t erminal D4 (GRY) D5 (RED) D6(BLK) D13 (WHT)

AUPfO-NAWtGAIiON UNIT C O N N E C T O R D |14P»

2

/ /

Wire side of female terminals

To terminals D5 (RED), D6 (BLK), D13 (WHT), D14 (GRN D6 (BLK), D13 (WHT), D14 (GRN D13 (WHT), D14 (GRN) D14 (GRN)

/

9 10 /

3 4 5 6 / 13 14

Wire side of female terminals

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity b e t w e e n a n y o f th e te r m in a ls ? YES-There is a short to b o d y ground in the wire(s) between the Acuralink control unit ( X M receiver) and the audio-navigation unit R e p l ace the affected shielded harness.®

YES-There is a short in the wires between the Ac u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) and the audio-navigation unit. R e p l ace the affected shielded harness.®

N O - G o to step 8. N O - G o to step 9.

(cont'd)

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 9. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 10, Measure the voltage between body ground and Ac u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) connector A (32P) according to the table.

AcuraLink control unit receiver) connector

Wire color

(XM

;D WHT BLK IN

13, Check for continuity between the HandsFreeLink control unit 23P connector and audio-navigation unit connector B (24P) according to the table.

HandsFreeLink control unit connector

Audio-Navigation unit connector

Wire color

85 No. 25 No. 28

B16

LT B L U PUR BRN

B17

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER) CONNECTOR A (32P) \ ]

2 [3 ] 4 I 5

6 | 7 | 8 | 9 10 j 11 j 12 [ 13114 r

15 16 1 / 18 19 | 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 117 | 18j 19 j20 p [/2 j23 [*4 | 25j26 ^ '|28|29| 30| 3 1 [ /

Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals

i s there l e s s t h a n 0 , 2 ¥ ? Y E S - G o to step 11. N O-T h e r e is a short to pow er in the wire(s) between the Ac u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) and the audio-navigation unit. Replace the affected shiel ded harness.®

AUDI O-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR. B (24P)

1 2 8X 8/ 9 10 9 12 13/ 151617 18 19 / / 22 / 24 Wire side of femal e terminals

11, Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

i s there c o n t i n u i t y ? 12. Disconnect audio-navigation unit connector B (24P). Y E S - G o to step 14. N O - The re is an open in the wire(s) between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the audio-navigation unit. R e p l ace the affected shielded harness.■

14. Check for continuity between body ground and audio-navigation unit connector B (24P) according to the table.

Audio-Navigation unit

Wire color

connector B16

LT B L U PUR

15. Check for continuity between the terminals of audio-navigation unit connector B (24P) according to the table.

From terminal B5 (LT BLU) B18 (PUR)

To terminals B16 (PURL B17 (BRN) B17 (BRN!

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B f24P) AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (24P)

1 2 3 5/ / I/ 910 12 18/ 1518171819X 22/ 24

r n. 1 2 3/ 5/ / / 9 10 12 13/ 1516171819/ 22 / 24 Wire side of female terminal s

Wire side of femal e terminal s

is th e r e c o n tin u ity b e t w e e n a n y o f th e te r m in a ls ? Is t h e r e c o n t i n u i t y ? YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s) between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the audio-navigation unit. R e p l ace the affected shielded harness.■ N O - G o to step 16.

YES-There is a short to the wire(s) between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the audio-navigation unit R e p l ace the affected shielded harness.® N O - G o to step 16. 18. Substitute a known-good Acuralink control unit ( X M receiver) (see page 23-133), and recheck.

D o e s t h e p r o b l e m g o a way? Y ES -Up da te the Acura Link control unit (see page 23-366) if it does not have the latest software, then recheck. I f the software is the latest repl ace the AcuraLink control unit ( X M receiver) (see page 23-133).■ NO-Substitute a k nown-good HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. I f the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424). Ifthe s y m p t o m is stil lpresent, replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318),■

Acura Link Control Unit Update Special Tools Required •G N A 6 0 0 and an iN workstation with H D S and C M update software*

. 258MB PCMCIA Memory Card* •Acuralink Re pr og r a m m i n g C a b l e* •Acura Link R epr og r a m m i n g Cable Adapter* •Available through the H o n d a Tool and Equipment Program 888-424-6857 NO TE : • W h e n e v e r you install a n e w A cura Link control unit, you must update the control unit with the latest software. • T he G N A 600 is the o n l y too l currently availabl e to update the AcuraLin k control unit. • Ifyou are updating an A cura Link control unit in a n e w vehicl e, m a k e sure all the fuses are install ed. • M a k e sure the iN workstation has the l atest H D S software install ed. (The A curaLink update software is contained in the H D S update CD.) • T he update m a y take up to 60 minutes, • Y o u cannot update an Ac ur aU nk control unit with its current or previous software versions. It wi l l only accept a n e w software version, • Before you update the AcuraLink control unit, test the vehicle battery (see page 22-94), and only proceed ifthe results are good. M a k e sure the battery is connected to a battery booster (not a battery charger) while updating the Acuralink control unit. I f the battery is not in g o o d condition, or it dies during the updating procedure, you m a y d a m a g e the Ac u r a U n k control unit. • Ifyou encounter errors in the software, follow the on-screen instructions, or if necessary, reboot the iN workstation, and try again. • There are five process invol ved in updating the Acura Link control unit: - Setting up the G N A 6 0 0 - Capturing the current program ID from the A c u r a U n k control unit - Do wn l o a d the n e w software to the G N A 6 0 0 - Update the software in the vehicle's A curaLink control unit - C o nfirm th e A c u ra U n k self-diagnosis

• While updating the Acuralink control unit, do the update with the ignition switch turned to L O C K (0). • To prevent d a m a g e to the Acuralink control unit do not operate anything e l ectrical (brakes, head lights, etc.) during the update. • Check any official H o n d a service website for m o r e service information about updating the Acura Link control unit. • T o update the Acura Link control unit, you must connect the GNA600 to the Acura Link connector (A), not the DLC. • Before you update an Acuralink control unit, read the procedure. T he order of connecting and disconnecting connectors is critical, and s o m e steps must be done within a specified period of time. Ifthe steps are not foll o w e d exactly, you m a y have to repeat the procedure from the start, and in s a m e cases, you m a y d a m a g e the GNA600 or the Acuralink control unit.

1. M a k e sure the ignition switch is turned to L O C K (0). 2. R e m o v e the right rear side trim p a ne l (see page 20-88). 3. Launch the Acuralink Update program and foll o w the on-screen instructions to complete the update. NOT E: • Ifthe software in the Acuralink control unit is the latest disconnect the update tool from the Acuralink connector, • I f the update is part of a troubleshooting or a repair procedure, return to that procedure and continue troubleshoot or repairing the vehicle,

Component Location Index W ith n a v ig a tio n

HFL MICROPHONE {B uilt in to th e roo f console)

Removal / I nstall ation, page 23-424

LEFT TWEETER (Telephone sound output)

RIGHT TWEETER (Telephone sound output)

General Troubleshooting Information H o w t o C h e c k for D T C s w i t h t h e H D S NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94). 1, M a k e sure the ignition switch is in L O C K (0). 2. Connect the H D S to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver’s side of the dashboard.

3. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 4. M a k e sure the H D S communicates with the vehicl e and the HandsFreeLink control unit. I f it doesn't troubleshoot the D L C circuit (see page 11-209). 5. S e l ect HandsFreeLink in the B O D Y E L E C TR IC AL menu. 8. Select D T C s in the HandsFreeLink menu. 7. Check for DTCs. If any D T C s are indicated, write d o w n the DTCs, then go to the indicated D T C troubleshooting. If no D T C s are indicated, refer to s y m p t o m troubleshooting. NOTE: • After troubleshooting, clear the D T C s with the HDS. • For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that c a m e with the HDS,

Lever-Locked Connector

INTRODUCTION

Disconnecting

The H F L system works only with Acura approved Bluetooth®-enabled cell phones with a hands-free profile. Ifyou are not sure ifyour ce l l pho ne is compatib l e with the H FL system, Acura has a dedicated ca l l center at 888-628-7876 and w e b site www.acura. com/handsfreelink to answer your questions.

To disconnect the connector, pull the lever (A) while pushing the lock tab (B) down, then pull the connector

(C).

Th e HF L system a l l o w s you to m a k e and receive hands-free ca l l s. I t cannot control the phone's performance (cal lquality and signal strength). For m o r e information about performance and performance problems, refer to Dropped Calls.

C h e c k i n g Cell P h o n e C o m p a t i b i l i t y The most important step in troubleshooting H FL issues is to identify the c l ient's phone m o d e l ,the software version, and the carrier that experiences the H FL problem. Not all phones with the B l uetooth feature and a hands-free profile are compatib l e with the HF L system.

Connecting To connect the connector, push the connector into the connector s l eeve (A). A s the connector is pressed in, the lever (B) m o v e s to the locked position.

G o to www.acura.com/handsfree l ink or ca l l Acura's dedicated call center at 888-528-7878, and check ifthe client's phone is approved to w or k with the Acura H FL system. NO TE: • These approved, archived, and currently testing phone model lists are constantl y changing, so m a k e sure you view t h e m frequentl y. • Phones are added as they are approved. • Phones can be remo ve d from the approved l ist if a software bug is discovered that m a k e s the phone incompatibl e. There phones can be added back to the approved l ist ifthe phone manufacturer corrects the bug. • Ifthe software bug is corrected, a n e w software version is created and m a y be listed in the Supported Features section of the phone. • Th e Acura w e b site n o w incl udes the software versions that are tested and approved. W h e n software versions are listed, you need to k n o w which version is loaded on the phone to h e l p you troubleshoot the client's complaint. Ifyou cannot access the Acura w e b site, call the HF L call center at 888-528-7878 for further assistance. The ca l lcenter is open M o n d a y thru Friday from 6:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. CST; Saturday from 7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. CST; and Su n d a y from 8:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. CST.

(cont'd)

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd) Voice Control Tips To give a voice c o m m a n d to the HFL system, press and release the T A L K button (A) or the HFL T A L K button (B). A l w a y s wait for the beep, then give your c o m m a n d in a clear, natural voice. The HFL microphone Is on the ceiling by the roof conso l e.

I f the HFL system doesn't recognize your voice c o m m a n d , you'll hear "Pardon? Press the T A L K button and say a c o m m a n d . For a list of c o m m a n d s , say handsfreehelp." I f your c o m m a n d isn't recognized a second time, you'll hear "Bluetooth handsfreelink main menu. Availabl e ca l l ing options are ca l l, dial, redial ,and transfer. Available setup options are pho ne setup, phone book, and system setup, For m o r e detail ed help, say handsfreehelp." I f your c o m m a n d isn't recognized a third time, the H F L system sends you to its H e l p menu. To hear a list of avail able options at any time, press the T A L K button or the HFL T A L K button and say "Handsfreehe l p." The HFL system m a y have problems recognizing s o m e voices. To improve voice recognition:

M a n y issues result from the client not using the system proper l y. W h e n the T A L K button or the H F L T A L K button is pressed, the client hears one audible tone. W h e n the B A C K button (C) or the HFL B A C K button (D) is pressed, the client hears two audible tones. M a k e sure to press the B A C K button or the H FL B A C K button to exit out of the H F L main m e n u after completing a call and before giving any navigation c o m m a n d s . The H F L system m a y experience a n u m b e r recognition issue, such as w h e n a client rattles off a set of n u mbe rs in a group unrecognized by the system. The H F L system understands ph on e nu mb e r s in specific b l ocks of 1,3,4, 7, and 10 numbers. For e x a m p l e, the system understands; 1234567830 123-456-7890 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-0 The system m a y b e c o m e confused if num b e r s are stated in other blocks l ike these: 1234-587-890 12-34-56-78-90 12345-67890 123-4567-890

• Close the w i n d o w s and moonroof. • Set the fan speed to low (1 or 2) or off. • Adjust the airflow from the center vents down, so that it's not blowing against the microphone on the ceiling, • Speak in a c l ear and natural voice. Ifthe system cannot recognize your c o m m a n d , try speaking louder, in a deeper tone. • Ifthe background noise is too l oud, you m a y need to speak louder, • I f you speak with something in your mouth, or your voice is too high, the system m a y not interpret your c o m m a n d correctly. • Find out ifthe problem is with one person or with everyone w h o uses the system. I f the system has a problem with only one person’s voice, this is a system l imitation. • M a k e sure you are sitting in the driver's seat w h e n setting up the HFL system, initiating ca l ls, or giving voice c o m m a n d s , • W h e n speaking numbers, m a ke s sure to speak clearl y. Ifthe system still has issues, try speaking slower.

W ith navigation

W ith o u t navigation

Navigation Through Menus

Pairing a Ceil Phone

T o skip a voice prompt, press and release the T A L K

Y o u must pair an approved Bluetooth-compatible ph one to the H F L system before you can m a k e and receive calls. For a current list of approved phones and specific ph on e pairing instructions for each phone, see Checking

button (A) or the H F L T A L K button (B) while the H FL system is speaking. The system beings l istening for your next voice c o m m a n d . T o go back a step in a voice c o m m a n d sequence, press and rel ease the B A C K button (C) or the H F L B A C K button (D), or press the T A L K button or the H F L T A L K button and say " G o back." Ifyou don't say anything w h i l e the HF L system is l istening for your voice c o m m a n d , ittimes out and stops voice recognition. The next time you press and rel ease the T A L K button or the H F L T A L K button, the

Cell P ho ne Compatibility, go to www.acura. com/handsfreelink or ca l l888-528-7876. T he foll owing procedure works for most phones. Ifyou cannot pair your pho ne to the H F L system with this procedure, refer to your p h o n e ’s operating m a n u a l ,the vehicle's owner's m a n u a l ,visit w w w . a c u r a . com/handsfreelink or ca l l 888-528-7878,

H FL system begins listening from the point ittimed out. NO TE : Ifyou've finished or want to stop a voice c o m m a n d sequence at any time, press and release the B A C K button or the H FL B A C K button, or press and release the T A L K button or the H FL T A L K button, wait for the beep, and say "Cancel." Th e next time you press and release the T A L K button or the H F L T A L K button, the H F L system begins from its main men u, and M A I N appears on the multi-information displ ay ( M I D) in the instrument panel. To avoid keeping the audio system muted, press and release the B A C K button or the H F L B A C K button w h e n you are finished. N OTE : Y o u can say m u l tipl e c o m m a n d s in one sequence, like "Pho ne set-up-pair" after pressing the T A L K button or the H F L T A L K button.

W ith navigation

W ithout navigation

• Y o u cannot pair a ph on e w h i l e the vehicl e is moving. • Your ph on e mus t be in its Discovery mode. • A m a x i m u m of six Bluetooth-compatible phones can be paired to the system.

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd) With navigation Th e c o m m a n d s for pairing the phone can either be selected using the interface dial or by using the voice recognition system (TALK and B A C K buttons). NO TE ; T he navigation system can pair up to six phones. I f you try to pair a seventh phone, a m e s s a g e appears that prompts you to delete one of your existing phones. 1 .Turn the ignition switch to A C C (I), and m a k e sure the phone you are pairing is on and in its discovery mode. 2. Press the I N F O button, and turn the interface dial to select Cell u l ar Phone, then press ENTER. 3. M o v e the interface dial d o w n to select Ph one Setup. 4. Select Setup Bluetooth phone, and press Enter. 5. Select Pair Phone, then press enter. 8, W h e n a four-digit pass key n u m b e r appears on the screen, wait until prompted by the phone, then enter the pass key into your cell phone. 7. O n c e the phone is successful ly paired, the screen displays "The pairing w a s successful ,"

Without navigation 1. With the phone on and the ignition switch in A C C E S S O R Y (I) or O N (II), press and release the H FL T A L K button. After the beep, say "Phone setup." The H F L responds, "Phone setup options are pair, edit, delete, list, status, next phone, set pairing code," 2. Press and release the H FL T A L K button. After the beep, say "Pair." The H F L responds, "The pairing process requires operation of your cell phone. For safety, only perform this function while the vehicle is stopped. For proper system function a compatible Bluetooth pho ne is required. Please visit w w w . a c u r a . com/handsfree l ink for a list of approved phones and other system information. Handsfreelink is waiting to pair with a B l uetooth phone, F r o m your phone, search for Bluetooth devices, and se l ect handsfreelink. W h e n prompted by your ce l lp hone enter the pairing code xxxx." Th e H F L system will give you a 4-digit pairing code. 3. W h e n prompted by your cell phone, enter the pairing code. Refer to your cell phone user guide for m o r e information about searching for a Bluetooth device. 4. O n c e the pho ne is recognized by the HFL system, it responds, "Handsfreelink has connected to a n e w phone. A n a m e is needed to identify this phone. Press the T A L K button and say a name. For example, John's phone." 5. Press and release the H F L T A L K button. After the beep, say the n a m e you want to use. For e x a m p l e, say "Toni's phone." T he H F L responds, "Tom's phone has been successfully paired. Returning to the main menu." N O T E : If no phones have been paired to the system, up on pressing the T A L K button, the system wi l lask if ■ you want to pair a phone. Press the T A L K button and say "Yes." T he system then proceeds to step 2,

Pairing Troubleshooting

Pairing Checks

M a n y pairing issues are resol ved by a l tering the client's phone settings. Call the H F L call center at 888-528-7876 after you have d u p l icated the problem,

For m o r e information about pairing, refer to the cell phone Owner's manual, or go to w w w . a c u r a . com/handsfree l ink.

Bluetooth feature settings must be turned on. Phone manufacturers set the default to disable Bluetooth features to conserve battery l ife. Cell phones m a y provide procedures to 'Temporary P o we r O n Bluetooth", or "Tower O n B l uetooth." Turn the

1. Is the ce l lp ho ne compatible with the HFL?

Bluetooth feature on, pair the phone to the vehicle, and confirm the phone is linked. D o this by turning the phone off and back on. M a k e or receive a call to confirm the cell phon e is successfully paired. W h e n the phone's Bluetooth feature is on, other handsfree accessories such as earpieces or headsets m a y automatica l ly reconnect to the phone w h e n you turn on the accessory or m o v e it within range of the cell phone. This results in the p hone not connecting to the HFL system w h e n the client enters the vehicle. Y o u must unlink the hands-free accessory from the pho ne before the H FL system can reconnect.

2. I s the Bluetooth feature turned on? 3. Is the client using the H F L buttons, not the navigation buttons (if a p p l icable), w h e n pairing? 4. Is the cell ph one battery fully charged, and is there g o o d signal strength w h e n pairing? 5. D o a soft reset on the cell phone. 6. Ifthe client is trying to pair a Blackberry® or Palm Treo™ device, m a k e sure the c l ient uses the shift key w h e n entering the pass code. Ifthe shift key is not pressed, the client m a y be entering letters. The HFL does not recognize l etters.

S o m e phones have an Auto A n s w e r setting that functions with a headset. This setting must be turned off or the H F L system cannot accept any incoming calls. W h e n this setting is on, it b l ocks the H F L system from answering the call, and the call goes to voice mail. This can cause the c l ient to think that the cell phone is not paired properly. The H F L system can pair a m a x i m u m of six phones. S o m e vehicles will tell you that the H F L system has reached its m a x i m u m while other vehicles will not. To check h o w m a n y phones are paired, press and release the T A L K button or the HF L T A L K button. After the beep, say ""Phone setup list." The H F L system l ists every assigned phone n a m e paired with it, then finishes by saying "The entire l ist has been read. Returning to the main menu," Count n u m b e r of phones l isted. I f there are six, you must delete one phone before adding a n e w one.

(cont'd)

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd) Dropped Calls Clients m a y perceive dropped ca l l s as being an HFL system fault, but most dropped ca l ls are resultant from cell phon e and cell phone carrier issues. The H F L system does not directly handle the ce l lphone signal .I t allows the cell phones to transmit the ce l l phone audio over the vehicle's audio system. Before troubleshooting for dropped ca l ls, confirm the cell ph one settings; • Disable Audio Answer. I f Auto A n s w e r is enabled, incoming ca l l s are routed to voice m a i l . • Disable Always Ask/Trust, Authorize Device, or similar setting, Ifthese settings are en a b l ed, each time the H F L system attempts to link to the phone, the phone will ask ifyou want to connect. Ifyou do not a l low the connection, the H F L will not operate. T h e phon e must be set to Never Ask, Authorize Device, etc, (based on the p hone manufacturer and carrier) for permission. Refer to the ce l lphone owner's manual for m o r e information or call Acura1s dedicated call center at

888-528-7878. • Disable Flip O p e n to an Answer. I f this setting Is e n a b l ed, the phone must remain open in the vehicle. If it is cl osed, the incoming ca l l s are routed to voice mail. Always confirm with the c l ient ifthe n u m b e r of dropped calls is higher while using the H F L system as opposed to using the cell phone only. Clients often confuse problems with their phone or carrier as a prob l e m with the H F L system. The H F L system cannot control or determine: • Cellul ar connection quality • Signa l strength • Cellular coverage • Ambient weather conditions that affect ce l lular signals W h e n a client complains about dropped call s, ask questions about w h e n or wh ere the calls are dropped, such as: • D o you drive the s a m e route on a regular basis? • Does the call drop in the s a m e l ocation? • W h e r e do you keep your cell phone? • Have you c om p a r e d the n u m b e r of dropped calls using the H FL versus making call s from the handset? • Does your ph one have an antenna that needs to be extended?

M a n y reasons for a dropped call are not related to the H F L system. Here are s o m e causes for dropped ca l ls: • Ifthe quantity of dropped calls is about the s a m e w h e n the client uses the H F L system versus the handset, the issue is l ikely due to the cell ular p hone or carrier. • Ifthe p hone is equipped with a retractable antenna, it needs to be extended to maximize signal strength. • If a client also notices that the calls tend to drop in the s a m e areas, the H F L system m a y be operating normally, but something about the area diminishes cellul ar coverage to a point w h er e the ca l ldrops. • Hills or mountains can block or interfere with cellul ar signals. • High-rise buildings, bridges, or other large structures m a y block or interfere with cellular signal s. • P l acing the cell ph o n e in a purse, in a metal briefcase, under the seat, in the glove box, or in the trunk can all affect signal reception. • There are coverage gaps in the cell ular service. W h e n driving, a call is typically passed from one tower to another. Ifthe client drives through an area where there is a coverage gap between towers, the call drops. • Electrical storms, heavy rain, or overcast conditions interfere with signal strength. • T he cell p hone battery's state of charge can affect signal reception. A low battery m a y reduce the p h o n e ’s ability to boost the antenna's p o w e r and function properly, especial ly in low signal strength areas. S o m e pho ne manufacturers trade off signal transmission and reception strength for battery life. A s the battery weakens, the signal strength m a y also weaken. S o m e cell phones m a y operate m o r e effectively than others in low signal strength areas, especially with a partial ly charged battery, and depending on whether or not the retractable antenna is full y extended (if applicable). O n these models, m a k e sure the antenna is a l w a y s extended to maximize signal strength and extend battery life.

Phone Will Not Automatically Connect to the HFL Call the HFL call center at 888-528-7876 after you have d u p l icated the problem. If a client c o m p l ains that their cell ph one is not automatica l ly connecting to the H F L system w h e n they enter the vehicle, do this:

Incoming Calls Call the HFL call center at 888-528-7876 after you have duplicated the problem . If a client c o m p l ains that they cannot receive incom ing cal ls throu gh the HFL system , see if the call is routing to the cell phone instead o f the HFL system. An easy w ay to know if the call is routed to the cell phone is w hen the client says, "I can't hear the caller, but they can hear m e."

1. M a k e sure the Bluetooth feature is turned on in the cell phone.

1. Make sure the Bluetooth feature is turned on in the cell phone.

2. M a k e sure the cell p hon e is proper l y paired to the H FL system.

2. Make sure the cell phone is paired to the HFL system and l inked.

3. D o a soft reset to the cell phone.

3. Make sure the answer settings in the cel l phone are set to m ulti-key or any-key answer. If the phone is set to flip open to answer, recom m end changing the setting to A n y Key or l eaving the phone flipped open w hen using the HFL system,

4. Check ifthe phone has an Authorized Connection or Trusted option. 5. Check the battery and signal strength on the cell phone. Pairing a p h on e requires optimal signal strength and a nearly full battery.

4. Make sure the A uto A nsw er feature is turned o ff in the cel l phone. 5. D o a soft reset to the phone,

6. Make sure the battery is fu lly charged and there is adequate signal strength. 7. Ask the client if they have set specific ring tones or ringer I Ds to specific contacts. If they have, recom m end using one standard ring tone fo r all call s, 8. Make sure the client is pressing the PICK-UP button (A) o r the HFL TALK button (B) and not the HANG-UP button (C), the HFL BACK button (D), the TALK button (E), or the BACK button (F). W ith navigation

W ithout navigation

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd) O utgoing Calls

6. D o a soft reset to the cell phone.

Ifa client says that they cannot place a call using the H F L system, ask ifthe ca l lw a s initiated through the H F L system or the ce l lp h o ne itself. C a l lthe H F L call center at 888-528-7876 after you have duplicated the problem, Ifthe call is placed by the H F L system : 1. M a k e sure the Bluetooth feature is turned on in the cell phone. 2. M a k e sure the ce l lpho ne is paired to the H F L system and linked. 3. M a k e sure the c l ient is pressing the T A L K button (A) or the H F L T A L K button (B) before each c o m m a n d and going through the calling process correctl y.

With navigation

W ithout navigation

4. M a k e sure the client is pressing the PICK-UP button (C) or the H F L T A L K button and not the H A N G - U P button (DL the H F L B A C K button (E), the T A L K button, or the B A C K button (F). 5. Check ifthe cell p h o ne has an Authorized Connections or Trusted option.

Ifthe ca l lis placed by the cell phone: By default, the ca l l will automatically transfer to HFL. This setting can be changed using the "Auto Transfer" c o m m a n d under the "System Setup" menu. If it is preferred to have a call placed by the ce l lp h o ne remain on the cell phone, then the Auto Transfer featured should be set to Disab l ed. T h e "Transfer" c o m m a n d can be used to transfer call s between the H F L and handset

Clearing the HFL system

Without navigation

W ith navigation

N OT E:

Th e c o m m a n d s for deleting a phone can either be selected using the interface dial or by using the voice recognition system (use the T A L K and B A C K buttons).

• This operation clears the H F L system of all pass code(s), any paired phones, and a l l n a m e s in the H F L phonebook.

N OTE :

• C l earing the H F L system is r e c o m m e n d before selling the vehicle.

• T h e entire H F L system cannot be deleted at once. Y o u mu st d e l ete one phon e at a time.

• I f the system is locked and the pass code is lost or forgotten, see the s y m p t o m troubleshooting.

• Ifthe system is l ocked and the pass code is l ost or forgotten, see s y m p t o m troubleshooting.

1. Press and release the H F L T A L K button. After the

1. Turn the ignition switch to A C C (I). 2. Press the INFO button, and turn the interface dial to select Cellular Phone, then press ENTER. 3. M o v e the interface dial d o w n to se l ect Pho ne Setup. 4. Select Edit User, and press ENTER. 5. Select Delete, then select the p h one you w ant to delete from the list. Press E N T E R to select the phone, then press E N T E R again to confirm. 8. Repeat steps 4 — 5 for each phon e you want to delete.

beep, say "System Setup Clear" and the H F L system responds, "This process will clear all paired phones, c l ear all entries in the phonebook, clear the security pass code and restore all defaults in.the system setup. I s this what you would like to do?" 2. Press and release the HF L T A L K button. After the beep, say "Yes" and the H F L system responds, "Preparing to clear the system, which m a y take up to 2 minutes to complete. T o proceed, press the talk button, and say continue. Otherwise say go back or cancel." 3. Press and release the H F L T A L K button. After the beep, say "Continue" to proceed, or say " G o back" or "Cancel," 4. Ifyou said "Continue," the H F L responds, "Please wait until the system is cleared." After a short period of time (up to 2 minutes) the H F L responds, "The system has been c l eared."

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd) Self-Diagnostic Fynction

Glossary of Terms

NO T E : This procedure s h o u l d be used o n l y if H D S is unavai l able.

Auto Answ er

To run the se l f-diagnostic function, do the following: 1, Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 2, Press and hold the B A C K button (A) or the H FL B A C K button (B) for m o r e than 5 seconds.

This ce l l phone setting forces incoming calls to automatica l ly be answered by the handset Disable this feature on the phone w h e n using the H F L system, as it m a y interfere with the H FL system answering incoming ca l ls. Set the p ho ne setting to: • S e n d Key • A n y Key

W it h n a v ig a tio n

W it h o u t n a v ig a tio n

• Multi Key answer

A nsw er Options These ce l l pho ne settings a l l o w you to select h o w you would like to answer an incoming call on the handset, T he answer option in the ph on e can affect inbound calls on the H F L system.

Authorized C o n n e ctio n This cell p hone setting allows the pho ne to connect automatical l y with the H FL system without prompting the client for permission to connect. I n s o m e instances, it can affect the ability of the p ho ne to properl y route sound to the H F L system.

Bluetooth Power

3, W h e n the HandsFreelink system enters the self-diagnostic function, the foll owing will occur. • I f the system has not completed testing for DTCs, the HandsFreeLink system says "The hands free system test is in progress." • Ifthere is no DTC, the HandsFreeLink system says "The hands free system is OK." • I f there is any DTC, the HandsPreelink system says "The hands free system needs to be serviced." • The self-diagnostic function ends w h e n the units return to idl e state, NOTE: T he self-diagnostic function can o n l y be initiated while the H FL is in an idle state.

This ce l l phone function enables or disabl es the Bluetooth application. W h e n using a hands-free device such as HFL, the B l uetooth a p p l ication needs to be enabled.

Discovery M o d e Y o u need to have the cell ph on e in Discovery M o d e to allow other devices with Bluetooth capabilities (such as the H F L system) to find the pho ne during the pairing process.

HFL Buttons

Hard Reset (Cellular phone)

• T A L K button (A) or the H F L T A L K button (B): This button activates the voice control system and is used for all voice c o m m e n d s . Press and rel ease it, wait for a beep, and give a voice c o m m a n d .

Hard reset clears the saved settings in the cell p hone and restores itto the factory defaults. A hard reset s h o u l d be done only as a last resort {see the ce l l pho ne owner's m a n u a l for m o r e information).

• B A C K button (C) or the H FL B A C K button (D); This button has the s a m e function as the C A N C E L button.

Soft Reset (Cellular phone)

W h e n you press and release it, the current voice c o m m a n d is canceled and the display returns to the previous screen, • PICK-UP button (E) or the HFL T A L K button: This button is used to answer incoming calls or to m a k e outgoing call s, Y o u can also go directl y to the Cellular Phone screen by pressing this button. • H A N G - U P button (F) or the HFL B A C K button: This button is used to end a call. W ith n a v ig a tio n

W it h o u t n a v ig a tio n

This helps to restore the basic functions of the phone. To do a soft reset, turn the phone p ow er off, rem o v e and reinsert the ce l l ph one battery, then turn the ph one back on. See the cell phone user manual for m o r e information.

S o ftw are Version This refers to the software version l oaded in the cell phone. The software version that w a s tested and determined to be compatib l e with the H F L system m a y be listed on the H F L website. Not a l lsoftware versions are compatible with the HF L system.

Standard Ringtone These ringtones c o m e factory-instal l ed on the cell phone.

Linking This is w h e n your paired phone is activel y ready to use the HFL system. Y o u can pair up to six phones to the HFL system, but o n l y one phone can be l inked at a time, I f two paired phones are in the vehicl e, o n l y the phone that is detected first and is linked can use the H F L system and functions. The second phone must be used as a normal handset.

Pairing A description for l inking two B l uetooth devices together. I n this case, you are linking a cell ph one with the H FL system. After the pairing process is c o m p l ete, the devices are able to recognize each other and co mm unicate wirel essly via Bluetooth.

DTC Troubleshooting Index HandsFreeLink Control Unit DTC B1775

Description M icrophone input/output shorted to power (with

DTC type Signal error

navigation;

B1792

Microphone input/output shorted to power (w ithout navigation) M icrophone input/output shorted to ground or open (with navigation) M icrophone input/output shorted to ground or open (w ithout navigation) HandsFreeLink steering wheel switch failure (with navigation) HandsFreeLink steering wheel switch failure (w ithout navigation) HandsFreeLink steering wheel switch line short (with navigation) HandsFreetink steering wheel switch l ine short (without navigation) HandsFreeLink con trol module error

U1280

Com m unication bus line error (BUS-OFF)

B1778

B1773

B1780

Signal error Signal error Signal error Signal error Signal error Signal error Signal error Internal error Loss of com m unication

Page DTC T roubl eshooting (see page 23-395) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-398) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-397) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-398) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-339) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-401) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-402) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-403) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 23-404) DTC T roubl eshooting (see page 22-174)

Symptom Troubleshooting Index NOT E: Most H F L problems with pairing and H FL function are usua l ly caused by the ce l l phon e and its configuration. Call the H F L support desk at 888-528-7878 for help before replacing any HFL components. Symptom

HFL does not respond The HFL digits do not go away from the fro n t climate c on trol unit displ ay after pressing the HFL BACK button The Bluetooth icon in the front clim ate con trol unit display is not displayed

D iagnostic procedure Control Unit I nput Test (see page 23-42! Sym ptom T roubl eshooting (see page 23-405)

There is no HFL-compatible phone paired to the vehicle. Pair an approved HFL-compatible phone to the vehicle.

The Acura approved Bluetooth phone is having problem s pairing to the vehicl e

HFL Self-Diagnostic Function (see page 23-380) or see HFL System T roub l eshooting (see page 23-394).

The Acura approved Bluetooth phone cannot use all its functions

HFL Self-Diagnostic Function (see page 23-380) or see HFL System Troubleshooting (see page 23-394).

The Acura approved Bluetooth phone does not place or receive cal ls using the HFL system

HFL Self-Diagnostic Function (see page 23-380) or see HFL System T roubl eshooting (see page 23-394).

The client wants the HFL system reset (all phones and address inform ation cleared from the HFL syster The HFL system is l ocked and the pass code has been lost or forgotte The HFL system does not recognize all voice prom pts The HFL system speaks in French or Spar The address book does not transfer from Honda approved Bluetooth phone to HFL system

Clearing the system (see page 23-379)

The HFL messages and voice prom pts cannot be heard or are weak

No sound when Bluetooth audio is used

;heck for

Check and repair all CAN related DTCs. Check and repair all CAN related DTCs

• The phone m ust be on the l ist of Acura approved Bluetooth phones and configured correctly. I a current list o f approved phones, go to www. acura.com /handsfreel ink, or cal l 888-528-7878 for further assistance. • Check the Diagnostic M en u and use the Navi System Link The phone m ust be on the list of Acura approved Bluetooth phones and configured correctl y. For a current list of approved phones, go to w w w .acura. com /handsfreel ink, or call 888-528-7878 fo r further assistance. The phone m ust be on the list of Acura approved Bluetooth phones and configured correctly. For a current list of approved phones, go to w w w .acura. com /handsfreelink, or cal l 888-528-7876 for further assistance. The phone m ust be on the l ist of Acura approved Bluetooth phones and configured correctly. For a current list of approved phones, go to w w w .acura. com /handsfreel ink, or call 888-528-7878 fo r further assistance. See the ow ner's manual fo r additional inform ation.

Sym ptom T roubl eshooting (see page 23-406) Sym ptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-4C See the HFL section in the ow ner's m anual fo r Changing Language There is no HFL com patible phone paired to the vehicl e or the approved phone does not support the function. Pair an approved HFL com patible phone to the vehicle. Sym ptom Troubleshooting: • W ith navigation (see page 23-407) • W ithou t navigation (see page 23-409) Sym ptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-411)

Also see Voice control tips (see page 23-372).

The phone m ust be on the list of approved Bluetooth phones and configured correctly. For a list of approved phones, go to w w w .acura. com/handsfreelink.com, or call the HFL support desk at 888^528-7878.

• Bluetooth phone • GA-NET line open/short

• HandsFreeLink control unit • A udio-Navigation unit

(cont'd)

Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd) itorm Bluetooth audio does not w ork

Diagnostic procedure Sym ptom T roub l eshooting (see page 23-415)

Bluetooth cell phone cannot be paired

Sym ptom Troubleshooting fsee page 23-418)

The com m unication w ith cel l phone is interrupted or changes

Sym ptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-419)

Pairing instructions are not displ ayed on the screen

Sym ptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-421)

Bl u e to o th c e l l p h o n e a u d io fu n c tio n SKIP and PAUSE/RESUM E do n o t

Sym ptom Troubleshooting (see

Also check fo r • Bluetooth phone • GA-NET line open/short

• HandsFreeLink control uni

V

page 23-422)

• Bluetooth phone

• HandsFreeLink control unit • Audio-N avigation unit • El ectric wave interference • HandsFreeLink control unit • A udio-N avigation unit • Bluetooth phone • Harness/connector • Navigation display unit • Bluetooth phone • H andsFreelink control unit • The Bluetooth phone may not be com p atib l e (Some Bluetooth phones do not support a part o f the guide.) B lu e to o th p h o n e (For fu rth e r in fo rm a tio n , please co n ta c t to th e p h o n e c o m p a n y .)

System Description HandsFreeLink Control Unit Inputs and Outputs

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

S ystem D escription (cont'd) HandsFreeLink Control Unit 28P Connector {with navigation)

n 1

2 15

3

4

6

5 18 19

16 /

7

8

9

____ _______ _______ 9) 11 12 13 14

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

Wire side of femal e terminal s

H A N D S F R E E L I N K C O N T R O L UNIT 28P C O N N E C T O R (with navigation)

3 4 5 8

W ire Color BLK BLU LTGRN GRN RED BLK

7

GRN

HFL COMM3

BRN*1 RED

HFL COMM SH AUDIO R +

BLK

AUDIO L +

Cavity 1

....“ ....I 3

~

_

~

W

~ 1

~

'

12 „.j

14 15 10 .... ..... 9s 20

I

LT BLU GRY*1 PNK BLU WHT PUR LTGRN BRN*1 RED

Term inal Name I

GND

HFL REMOTE SW HFL MUTE GARNET.1.O I .B.9 . GA-NET BUS B — n ^ L C O IS ^

LINE O U T + ...i w c i N .s i r MIC IN + .“ .......l i f f i l .:=:.... 9B ... ....*...... ..'ACC.. BCA9 r...~^g a W T b u s .b I T HFL COMM1

'

Connect to Body ground to G5C HFL-navigation voice control sw it HFL-navigation m ic ro p h Audio-Navigation u n it navigation disp l ay unit Audio-Navigation unit, navigation display unit Acu ra Link control unit (XM receiver)*2 A udio-Navigation u A cu ra Link control unit (XM receiver)*2 A u d io -N a v ig a tio n u Shie l d for term inals No, 8, No. 7, No. 20, and Nc Audio-Navigation u n it A c u ra L in k con tro l unit (XM receiver)*2 XM receivi Audio-Navigation unit, Acu ra Link con tro l unit (XM receiver)*2 XM receivi Audio-Navigation u Shield for term inals No. 13 and N HFL-navigation m icrophone HFL-navigation m icroph No. 5 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/rel No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay I B-CAN com m unication bus li Shield for term inals No. 4 and No

A c u ra L in k c o n tro l u n it (XM receiv A u d io -N a v ig a tio n u W HT HFL COMM2 A cu ra L in k c o n tro l u n it (XM receiver)*2 21 A u d io -N a v ig a tio n u ....^ y p iQ .s p ... GRY*1 S hie ld fo r te rm in a ls No. 3, No. 10, No. 23, and h 23 WHT A U D I O R— A u d io -N a v ig a tio n u n it A c u ra L in k co n tro l unit (XM receiver)"2 X M receivi 24 GRN AUDIO L A u d io -N a v ig a tio n u n it, A c u ra L in k c o n tro l u n it (XM receiver)*2 X M receivi , ____.Q y f9 :: A u d io -N a v ig a tio n u 25 PUR 26 BRN*1 INE OUT SH Sh ie ld fo r te rm in a ls No. 11 and N 27 i 7 M i c m i f + ...“ . A u d io -N a v ig a tio n u JR BLU HFL MIC O U .r A u d io -N a v ig a tio n u 28 *1: The shielded wires have a heat-shrink tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insu l ating tube, typica l l y b l ack or dark gray, may not match the color o f the w ire listed on the schematic.

*2: W ith AcuraUnk *3: W ithou t AcuraUnk

HandsFreeLink Control Unit 28P Connector (without navigation)

r 1

11

2 15

16 7

»

7 7 / 7 7 7

12

18

25 20

7

14

/

Wire side of fema l e termina l s

H A N D S F R E E L I N K C O N T R O L UNIT 28P C O N N E C T O R (without nawigatiom) l e c t to Cavity W ire Color Term inal Name 1 i r r ........ GND Body ground to G506 BLU 2 HFL switch HFL REMOTE SW 11 LT BLU LINE O U T + Audio unit 12 GRY* MIC IN SH Shield fo r term inals No. 13 and No. 14 sJK M IC IN + HFL m icrophone “ .*...1.3.. ..*..... 14 HFL m icrophone BLU MIC I N No. 5 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box WHT + B 18 PUR No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/re l ay box ACC 18 B-CAN com m unication bus line LTGRN B-CAN 25 PUR LINE O UT­ Audio unit 26 BRN* LINE OUT SH Shield fo r term inals No. 11 and No. 25 *: The shielded wires have a heat-shrink tube insulating the outside o f the wire. The color o f the insulating tube, typica l l y black or dark gray, may not match the color o f the w ire listed on the schematic.

C ircuit D iag ram With navigation

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

G508

IGNITION SWITCH

DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER

LEFT TWEETER

U 7 r

FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SPEAKER

RIGHT TWEETER

IZ 7 I2

12

I1

WHT

U J

f2

GRN

* : The shielded wires have a heat-shrink lube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insuiatingtube, typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic, - : Shielding • : CAN line

FRONT CENTER SPEAKER

I2

BRN

I' BRN

RED

L

616

B7

BIB

FR L DR SPKR+

FR L DR SPKRSTEREO AMPLIFIER FL PRE FL PRE IN+ INA10

HFL MIC OUT+

FL PRE IN+ HFL MIC OUT SH

HFL MIC OUTC27

C28

_„

27

A4

FR PRE IN­

A18

CTRPRE CTRPRE IN+ IN­ AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT

j C l4

LINE OUT-

LINE OUT SH

618

AUDIO REMOTE GND

J B17

r

BRN*

BRN

91

LT BLU

J___________

1\

/

I

28

11

HFL MIC OUT-

LINE OUT+

25 LINE OUT-

1

HFL-NAVIGATION VOICE CONTROL SWITCH

. . n

L- ..

-

HFL MIC OUT+

A25

.9 1

I L ^

CTR PRE CTR PRE 1N+ IN

FR PRE IN+ LINE OUT+

91 ! PUR

B2

FR PRE FR PRE IN+ IN A11

FL PRE IN-

B11

CTR CTR SPKR+ SPKR-

A24

BRN*

9 -

B6

FR R FR R SPKR+ SPKR-

BRN* 1 [ 28

LTGRN

I LTGRN

I

LINE OUT SH

I HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT MIC MIC IN-_ _ IN SH _ _ _

MIC IN+

HFL

MUTE

13

3 I GRY*

9 - ’

9 J

No. 7 (10 A) FUSE {in the under-dash fuse/relay box)

No. 32 (10 A) FUSE (in the under-dash fuse/relay box) \ b/

\ a/ i l

I L _

I

I WHT

3 MIC IN+

2 MIC IN-

PUR

I6

I7

.....

A

• GAUGE CONTROL MODULE •MICU

+B

ACC

5 HFL MUTE

HFL-NAVIGATION MICROPHONE GND

□

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX H2

BLK

(c o n t’d)

Circuit Diagram (cont'd)

(With ACURALINK)

)

L

* : The shielded wires have a heat-shrink tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulatingtube, typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic. - : Shielding - : GA-NET

(Without ACURALINK)

|

L

(cont'd)

Circuit Diagram (cont'd) W ith o u t navigation

IGNITION SWITCH

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX BATTERY

No. 1 (BAT) (120 A)

“—■•—

No. 3 {IG) (50 A}

No. 4 (40 A)

+B HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT GND

B-CAN

ACC BLUETOOTH TRANSCEIVER

HFL REMOTE SW

AUDIO UNIT

\

INTERIOR LIGHT RELAY

A

U.

r

5

I

BRN

LT BUL

19

17

I..... .. RlED 18 CABLE REEL

•GAUGE CONTROL MODULE • MICU

8

19

1?

18

V DASHLIGHTS BRIGHTNESS CONTROL CIRCUIT (In the gauge control module)

FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SPEAKER

DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER

LEFT TWEETER

U U U U U U 11 12 FI1 I2 T 2 I1 GRN WHT GRN BRN

1

l Z 7 I2

WHT

I’

BRN

RED

I

STEREO AMPLIFIER CTR PRE IN+ |~A3

BLU

| B32 CTR PRE IN+

CTR PRE IN| A13

FLPREIN+

FL PRE IN-

|A 6

PNK

GRN

^ 116

RED

B24

CTR PRE IN­ AUDIO UNIT

FR PREIN+

FL PRE IN+

AUDIO REMOTE GND _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

I A17

PNK

BLU

B8 FL PREIN­

| B26

I / a\ £_— i HFL SWITCH

I B10

FR PREIN+ LINE OUT SH

FR PREIN-

LINE OUT+

|C6 I BRN

FR PREIN-

| A7

| A16

LINE OUT-

017

C5

BRN* •

u

1

LT BLU PIJR i r 9 BRN*

- 1

(26

11

LINE OUT SH

LINE OUT+

LINE OUT-

MIC IN+

MIC IN-

25

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT MIC IN SH

HFL MICROPHONE ROOF CONSOLE

* : The shielded wires have a heat-shrink tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulatingtube, typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic. - - : Shielding — : CAN line

HFL System Troubleshooting NOTE: • Before doing this troubl eshooting, refer to General Troub l eshooting Information (see page 23-370) to m a k e sure the phone is compatible and configured correctly. Y o u can also check online at go to www.acura.com/handsfree l ink,or call the HFL support desk at 888-528-7876. • Y o u must be a b l e to duplicate the c l ient's concern to successful ly diagnose the problem. • A l w a y s use the client's phone to successfully diagnose the problem. 1. M a k e sure the phone is approved by checking www.acura.com/handsfree l ink, or call the HFL support desk at 888-528-7878.

Is th e B lu e to o th p h o n e a p p r o v e d ? Y E S - G o to step 2. N O - E x p l a i n to the client that the cell phone is not approved, R e c o m m e n d they get a phone that does appear on the www.acura.com/handsfreelink website.■

2. Check ifthe ce l lphone has any special requirements (software version, configuration, etc.). Call the HF L support desk at 888-528-7878 for h e l p.

Is th e c o r r e c t s o f tw a r e v e r s io n lo a d e d a n d is th e p h o n e p r o p e r ly c o n f ig u r e d ? Y E S - G o to step 3. NO-Explain to your c l ient that the cell phone software needs to be updated or the cell phone needs to be configured properly. I f the HFL support desk is able to help you configure the phone, explain the proper settings, otherwise direct your client to contact their cell p hone manufacturer or carrier.ll 3. Connect the H D S to the D L C (see page 23-370). 4. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 5. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ? YES-Repair the indicated DTCs, and recheck.B

NO-Go to Step 8. 8. Try to duplicate the problem.

C a n y o u d u p lic a te th e p r o b le m ? Y E S - G o to Step 7. N O - T h e system is O K at this time,11 7. Pair the phone to a known-good vehicl e (same m o d e l ,year, and trim), and try duplicate the problem.

D o e s th e p h o n e h a v e th e s a m e p r o b le m o n th e k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic le ? YES-Call the HFL support desk at 888-528-7878 to m a k e sure the phone is configured correctly and has the correct software. Ifthe phone is configured correctly, it is either a characteristic of the HFL system, or a characteristic of the particular approved phone being used, E xp l ain to your client that this is a system characteristic. Another phone from the approved phone l ist m a y give m o r e favorabl e resul ts.® NO-Substitute a known-good HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, replace the original HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424).■

DTC Troubleshooting DTC B1775: Microphone input/output shorted to power (with navigation) NOTE: Ifyou are troubleshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N system diagnosis test m o d e A (see page 22-154),

11. Check for continuity between HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector termina l No. 13 and HFL-navigation microphone 7P connector terminal No. 3. HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 2SP CONNECTOR W ire side of fe m a l e te rm in a l s MIC IN + (PNK)

1. Connect the H D S to the D L C (see page 23-370). n—

2. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5

3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), and then back to O N (II).

115 | 16

—

—

I

-n

6 j 7 | 8 I 9

„

10 | 11 112 113 114 |

I/]18 [ 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 [ 28

4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

is D T C B 1 7 7 5 in d ic a te d ?

M1C1N + (PNK)

YES-Go to step 5.

n__—

NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is O K at this time.il

1

2

3

—

/

n 5

6

7

H F l-N A V iG A IiO N MICROPHONE 7P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale term inals

5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), 8. Disconnect the HFL-navigation microphone 7P connector.

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

7. Disconnect the HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector (see step 2 on page 23-424). 8. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 9. Measure the voltage between HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connectortermina l No. 13 and body ground, HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

YES-Substitute a known- go od HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, repl ace the original HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424).. Ifthe s y m p t o m is still present replace the HFL-navigation microphone (see page 23-320).■ NO -T h e r e is an open in the wire between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the HFL-navigation microphone. Replace the affected shielded harness.®

M I C IN + (PNK) r— — — "l

| 2 | 3 | 4 | 5

6 | 7 | 8 | 9

15 118 | / | 1B [ 191 20 I

10 | 11 | 1? [ 13 | 14 | r

1 C ! 2 * j 24 | 25 | ?6 [ 27 j 28

X

Wire side of female term inals

is t h e r e b a tt e r y v o lt a g e ? YES-There is a short to power in the wires between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the HFL-navigation microphone. R e p l ace the affected shielded harness.■ N O - G o to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B1775: Microphone input/output shorted to power (without navigation) N OTE : I f you are troubl eshooting m u l tiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N system diagnosis test m o d e A (see page 22-164).

11. Check for continuity between HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connectorterminal No. 13 and roof console 20Pconnectorterminal No, 20.

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals MIC IN + (PNK)

1. Connect the H D S to the D L C {see page 23-370). 1

2. Clear the D T C s with the HDS.

! 2 9 9 9 , 4 9 / 9 / | 11 |12 113 |14 | 9 9 9 9 1 25126 9 9

M i s [/| 18 1/V

3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), and then back to O N (II ). 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

@

is D T C B 1 7 7 5 in d ic a te d ? 1

YES-Go to step 5, N O - l ntermittent failure, the system is O K at this

2

3

4

5

0

/ 8 / / / / / / / /

9 19 20

MIC IN + (PNK)

time.B

ROOF CONSOLE 20P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals

5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 8. Disconnect the roof console 20P connector.

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?

7. Disconnect the HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector (see step 2 on page 23-424).

YES-Substitute a known- go od HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, replace the original HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424), I f the s y m p t o m is still present, replace the H FL microphone (see page 23>424).H

8. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II), 9. Measure the voltage between HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector terminal No. 13 and body ground.

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR MIC IN4- (PNK)

V J 9 9 1 7 T 9 A A A / ./ ] |,6 |l6 9 18 / ' / 9 /1 /V

11 112 11;3 25

28

14

9

Wire side of female terminals

is th e r e b a tt e r y v o lta g e ? YES-There is a short to pow er in the wires between the HandsFreelink control unit and the HF L microphone. Replace the affected shielded harness.! N O - G o to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

NO -T h e r e is an open in the wire between the HandsFreelirtk control unit and the HFL microphone. Replace the affected shielded harness.■

DTC B1776; Microphone input/output shorted to ground or open (with navigation) NO TE: Ifyou are troubleshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure to fol low the instructions in B - C A N system diagnosis test m o d e A (see page 22-154).

9. Check for continuity between HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector terminals No. 13 and No, 14 and HFL-navigation microphone 7P connector termina l s No. 3 and No, 2 respectivel y.

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals

1. Connect the H D S to the D L C (see page 23-370).

IVJiC IN + (PNK)

2. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), and then back to O N (II).

1 j2 j 3 j4 I5

MIC m -

(BLU)

6 |7 |8 | 9 10 |11 |12 113 114 I

15 IS [ / 18 19 20 21]22 23 24 [25 28 27 |28

m

4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

u

is D T C B 1 7 7 6 i n d i c a t e d ? YES-Go to step 5.

M I C IN-

M I C IN +

(BLU)

(PNK)

N O - l ntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time.II 5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

HFL-NAVIGATION MICROPHONE 7P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals

6. Disconnect the HFL-navigation microphone 7P connector,

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

7. Disconnect the HandsFreeLink control unit 28P

Y E S - G o to step 10.

connector (see step 2 on page 23-424). 8. Check for continuity between body ground and HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector termina l s No. 13 and No. 14 individuall y, then between terminals No. 12 and No. 13.

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P C O N N E C T O R MIC IN SH r @ -

(GRY)

MIC IN +

(PNK)

N O-T h e r e is an open in the wires between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the HFL-navigation microphone. R e p l ace the affected shielded harness.l 10. Disconnect audio-navigation unit connector C (28P). 11. Check for continuity between body ground and HandsFreelink control unit 28P connector terminals No. 27 and No. 28 individually.

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 2SP CONNECTOR

1 |2 |3 |4 |5 6 | 7 |8 |9 10 |11 112 113 114 | f15 j16 [/] 18 119 |20 |21 |22 |23 |24 |25 |26 |27 |28 MIC I N - (BLU)

' T ^ T T T T I T i 6| 7 [8 J 9 10 (11)12 J13 |14 | |16 18 /

18 f19 f20 |21 |22 [23 I24 [25 |26 I27 I28

HFL MIC OUT+ (PUR)

Wire side of female terminal s

HFL M I C O UT(LT BLU)

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-There is a short in the wires between the HandsFreelink control unit and the HFL-navigation microphone. R e p l ace the affected shielded harness.l

Wire side of female terminals

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-There is a short to body ground in the wires between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the audio-navigation unit Replace the affected shielded harness.ll

NO-Go to step 12.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 12. Check for continuity between HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector terminals No. 27 and No. 28 and audio-navigation unit connector C (28P) terminals No. 28 and No, 27 respectivel y.

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals

DTC B177S: Microphone input/output shorted to ground or open (without navigation) NO TE; Ifyou are troubl eshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure to fol l o w the instructions in B - C A N system diagnosis test m o d e A (see page 22-154). 1. Connect the H D S to the D L C (see page 23-370).

CM

CO

O

"*1 |2 | 3 |4 |5 6 | 7 |8 | 9

115 |16 |/| 18 119 |20 f21 [22123 [24 [2 5 |2 6 | 27}28

HFL MIC OUT+ (PUR)

HFL MIC O UT(LT BLU)

bCH

2. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), and then back to O N (II). 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Is D T C B 1 7 7 6 in d ic a te d ? 1 2 3 4 5 9 9 9 9 13 14 17 18 15 / 9 20 9 22 23 24 9 28 27 28 O UT(LT BLU)

HFL MIC OUT+

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is O K at this

tim e.H

(PUR)

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (28P) Wire side of female terminals

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Substitute a known-good HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. I f the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424). Ifthe s y m p t o m is still present, replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318).■ N O - T h e r e is an open in the wires between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the audio-navigation unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.■

6. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 8. Disconnect the roof conso l e 20P connector, 7. Disconnect the HandsFreelink control unit 28P connector (see step 2 on page 23-424). 8. Check for continuity between body ground and HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector termina l s No. 13 and No. 14 individually, then between terminals No. 12 and No. 13.

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR mic i m +

MIC m SH f fGRY)

(PNK)

9

9

CM

9

116 116 | / i 18 9

9

^ 9

11 | 12 | 13 [ 14 |

1 9 9

9

9

1

2

5

I 26 9

9

MIC I N - (BLU)

Wire side of female terminals

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-There is a short in the wires between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the HFL microphone. Replace the affected shiel ded harness.■

9. Check for continuity between HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector terminals No. 13 and No. 14 and roof conso l e 20P connector terminals No, 20 and No. 19 respectively.

N OTE:

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminal s MIC IN(BLU)

MIC 1N + _

A 15 18 9

DTC B1773: HandsFreeUnk steering wheel switch failure (with navigation)

18 / V

_

_

_

_

3

7 V v \ 9 / / V

I 14T

25 28 9 9

• Ifyou are troubleshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B - C A N system diagnosis test m o d e A (see page 22-154). • Before troubleshooting, m a k e sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit • After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for the audio-navigation unit, 1. Connect the H D S to the D L C (see page 23-370). 2. Clear the D T C s with the HDS.

1 2 3 4 5 /

/

/

6 /

8 9 MIC IN -

(BLU)

9

/ 19 20 MIC IN + {PNK)

ROOF CONSOLE 20P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminal s

3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), then start the engine and turn the steering w h e e l from l ock to lock several times. 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

is D T C B 1 7 7 9 in d ic a te d ?

Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?

Y E S - G o to step 5.

YES-Substitute a known-good HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, replace the original HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424). If the s y m p t o m is still present replace the HF L microphone (see page 23-424).■

N O - l ntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time.B

N O - T h e r e is an open in the wires between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the H F L microphone. Replace the affected shielded harness.®

5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 6. D o the H F L switch test (see page 23-423).

is th e s w itc h O K ? Y E S - G o to step 7. N O - R e p l ace the HFL-navigation voice control switch (see page 23-322),■ 7. Disconnect the HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector (see step 2 on page 23-424). 8. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P connector from the cable reel. 3. Turn the ignition switch to O N (I I).

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 10, Measure the voltage between HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector terminal No. 2 and bod y ground.

HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

13. Check for continuity between audio-navigation unit connector A (24P) termina l No. 5 and dashboard wire harness 20P connectorterminal No. 13.

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P) Wire side of female terminals

HFL REMOTE S W fBLU)

AUDIO REMOTE GND (BRN)

6 | 7 |8 | 9 10 |11 112 15

18

/

18

19

20

21 22

23

24

25

1^—

13

28

uf 27 28

9 9

f Vi /I3|4 5 i e r n 7 T W I T 1 |14|15|16|17|18|19|/1/122|23 24

T Wire side of femal e terminals ft— , fjn u 1 2 3 4

I s there b a t t e r y v o l t a g e ? YES-Repair a short to po w e r in the B L U wire.B

5

8

7

.Ji™ .....rj 8 9 10

13 14 15 16 17 18 13 20

AUDIO REMOTE GND (BLK) N O - G o to step 11. 11. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 12. Check for continuity between Ha nd sFreeUnk control unit 28P connector terminal No, 2 and dashboard wire harness 20P connector terminal No. 5.

HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminal s — — 1 h f l REMOTE SW fiLUJ 1

I;? |3 |4 |5 j 6 | 7 |8 | 9 10 |11 112 113 114 | 15 16 9

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS 2©P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals

i s there c o n t i n u i t y ? YE S - C h e c k for loose or poor connections at the audio-navigation unit, HandsFreeUnk control unit, and HFL-navigation voice control switch. Ifthe connections are OK, substitute a k no wn-good HandsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23-424). I f the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original H andsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23-424). I f the s y m p t o m is still present, repl ace the cable reel (see page 24-211).B NO-Repair an open in the wire between the cable reel and the audio-navigation unit.B

HFL REMOTE SW fBLU) p—. ,,TL, 1 2 3 4

/

5

8

...jr ..n... 8 9 10

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS 20P CONNECTOR Wire side of femal e terminals

I s there c o n t i n u i t y ? YES-Go to step 13. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the cab l e reel and the HandsFr ee Un k control unit.B

DTC EJ1773; HandsFreeUnk steering wheel switch failure (without navigation) NO T E ; ifyou are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to fol low the instructions in B - C A N system diagnosis test m o d e A (see page 22-154). 1. Connect the H D S to the D L C (see page 23-370).

11. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 12. Check for continuity between Ha nd sFreeUnk control unit 28P connector terminal No. 2 and dashboard wire harness 20P connector terminal No. 5.

HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals HFL REMOTE SW fBLU)

2. Clear the D T C s with the HDS.

xj

V 9 9 » / , 3 Z Z Z Z

52

1 11 9 I 9 I 9 15 16 9

CM

.9

3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), then start the engine and turn the steering wheel from lock to lock severa l times.

25 2 6 / 9

4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

HFL REMOTE S W (BLU!

is D T C B 1 7 7 9 in d ic a te d ? Y E S - G o to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time.B 5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 6. D o the H F L switch test (see page 23-423).

is th e s w it c h O K ?

r n_

jr t_

O 1

4

7

_ ji

9

10

13 14 15 18 17 18 19

20

3

2

5

8

8

DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS 20P CONNECTOR Wire side of fema l e terminals

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 13.

Y E S - G o to step 7. NO-Replace the H FL switch (see page 23-423).■

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the cable reel and the HandsFreeLink control unit.B

7. Disconnect the HandsPreeLink control unit 28P connector (see step 2 on page 23-424). 8. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P connector from the cable reel. 9. Turn the ignition switch to O N (ll). 10. Measure the voltage between HandsFreelink control unit 28P connector terminal No. 2 and bod y ground.

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR HFL REMOTE S W fBLU)

Wire side of female terminals

is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ? YES-Repair a short to p ow er in the B L U wire.B N O - G o to step 11. (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 13. Check for continuity between audio unit connector B (32P) terminal No. 3 and dashboard wire harness 20P connectortermina l No. 19.

AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (32P) Wire side of female terminals

DTC B1780: HandsFreeUnk steering wheel switch line short (with navigation) N OTE : Ifyou are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to foll o w the instructions in B - C A N system diagnosis test m o d e A (see page 22-154).

AUDIO REMOTE GND fBRNf 1. Connect the H D S to the D L C (see page 23-370).

11 | / | 13 114 | / f l 6 | ' 29 301 /| 32

2. Clear the D T C s with the HDS.

9

l / l / l 19 | 20 | / | 22I 23

$2

/ h l / | s | 8 ,/ | 8 | / h 0

9

'A

3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), then start the engine and turn the steering wheel from l ock to l ock several times. 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS. fl— 1 2

/

3

4

5

8

7

8

H-J-j 9 10

13 14 15 18 17 18 19 20

is D T C B 1 7 8 0 in d ic a te d ? Y E S - G o to step 5.

AUDIO REMOTE GND (BLK) DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS 2 ©P CONNECTOR ■ Wire side of female terminals

i s there c o n t i n u i t y ?

N O - l ntermittent fail ure, the system is O K at this time,HI, 5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 8. D o the H F L switch test (see page 23-423),

Y E S - C h e c k for loose or poor connections at the audio unit, Hand sF ree Un k control unit, and H F L switch. If the connections are OK, substitute a kno wn -go od Hands Fre eU nk control unit (see page 23-424). Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, replace the original Hands Fre eU nk control unit (see page 23-424). I f the s y m p t o m is still present, repl ace the cable reel (see page 24-211).H NO-Repair an open in the wire between the cable reel and the audio unit.B

i s the s w i t c h O K ? YES-Go to step 7. NO-Replace the HFL-navigation voice control switch (see page 23-322).■ 7. Disconnect the HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector (see step 2 on page 23-424). 8. Disconnect the cab l e reel subharness 20P connector from the cable reel. 9. Check for continuity between HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connectorterminal No. 2 and body ground.

HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

~ ~ ~ \ HFL REMOTE S

(BLU) j | 3 |4 |5

1 15

18

9

W

p. 18

19

7 |8 | 9

8 20

21

22

23

10 24

11

12 25

13 114 |

28

27 |28

Wire side of female terminals Is there c o n t i n u i t y ? Y E S - G o to step 10. NO-Replace the HandsPreelink control unit (see page 23-424).■

10. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P connector from the cable reel. 11. Check for continuity between HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground,

DTC B1780: HandsFreelink steering wheel switch line short (without navigation) NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to fol l o w the instructions in B - C A N system diagnosis test m o d e A (see page 22-154).

HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR 1. Connect the H D S to the D L C (see page 23-370). ~

~

1

H F L R E M O T E

fBLU)

SW

2. Clear the D T C s with the HDS,

f>

’i b > | 3 |4 | 5 6 |7 |8 | 9 10 |11 |12 113 |14 |r 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 28 27 28 /

U

3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), then start the engine and turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several times. 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

is D T C B 1 7 8 0 in d ic a te d ? Wire side of female terminals Y E S - G o to step 5,

i s there c o n t i n u i t y ? YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the HandsFreeUnk control unit and the cab l e reel.II

NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is O K at this time.B 5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 6. D o the H F L switch test (see page 23-423).

NO-Replace the cable reel (see page 24-211 ).■

is th e s w itc h O K ? Y E S - G o to step 7. NO-Replace the HFL switch (see page 23-423).■ 7. Disconnect the HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector (see step 2 on page 23-424). 8. Disconnect the cable reel subharness 20P connector from the cab l e reel. 9. Check for continuity between HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

HFL REMOTE S W fBLU) r j_ _ 1

I

9 9 9

15 16 9

18

9 9 9

9 9

11 112 113 114 25

26 9 9

Wire side of fema l e terminals

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 10. NO-Replace the HandsFreelink control unit (see page 23-424).11

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 10. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P connector from the cable reel, 11. Check for continuity between HandsFr ee Un k control unit 28P connector terminal No. 2 and bod y ground.

HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

DTC B1792: HandsFreeUnk control module error N OTE : • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94). • Check any official H o n d a service website for m o r e service information about the H F L system, 1. Connect the H D S to the D L C (see page 23-370). 2. Clear the D T C s with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), and then back to O N (II). 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

Wire side of female terminals

Is t h e r e c o n tin u it y ? Y E S -R e pa ir a s h o rt to b o d y g ro u n d in th e w ire between the H andsFreeUnk control unit and the cable reel.ll N O - R e p l ace the cab l e reel (see page 24-211 ).■

is D T C B 1 7 9 2 in d ic a te d ? YES-Replace the HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424).B N O - l ntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time.B

Symptom Troubleshooting The HFL digits do not go away from the front climate control unit display after pressing the HFL BACK button

The HFL system does not recognize all voice prom pts

NOTE:

• Before doing this troubleshooting, refer to G enera l Troubleshooting Information (see page 23-370) to m a k e sure the ph on e is compatib l e and configured correctly. Y o u can also check online at w w w . a c u r a . com/handsfreelink, or call the H F L support desk at 888-528-7876,

• Before doing this troubleshooting, refer to General Troub l eshooting Information (see page 23-370) to m a k e sure the pho ne is compatible and configured correctly. Y o u can a l so check online at w w w . a c u r a . com/handsfreelink, or ca l l the H F L support desk at 888-528-7878. • Check any official H o n d a service website for m o r e service information about the H F L system. 1. Connect the H D S to the D L C (see page 23-370). 2. C l ear the D T C s with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), and then back to O N (il). 4. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

A r e th e r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

N OTE :

• Check any official H o n d a service website for m o r e service information about the H F L system. 1. Connect for H D S to the D L C (see page 23-370). 2. Check for D T C s with the HDS, and navigation D T C s (if equipped).

A r e th e re a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ? YES-Repair the indicated DTCs, and recheck.B N O - G o to step 3. 3. Check if client's concern is duplicated.

YES-Repair the indicated D T C s . B

C a n th e c lie n t s p r o b le m b e d u p lic a te d ?

N O - G o to step 5.

Y E S - G o to step 4.

5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 6. Substitute a known- go od HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424), then turn the ignition switch to O N (ll), and recheck the front c l imate control unit display.

N O - T h e system is O K at this time. Ask the client to demonstrate the concern. Try to d u p l icate the concern on a kno wn- go od vehicle. Ifthe know n- go od vehicle has the s a m e concern, it should be' a characteristic of the system.■

A r e th e m e s s a g e s c le a re d ? YES-Replace the original HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424).■

4. I f the vehicle is equipped with navigation, check ifthe navigation system can recognize voice prompts.

C a n th e v o ic e p r o m p t s b e r e c o g n iz e d ? N O - R e p l ace the climate control unit (see page 21-133).11

Y E S - G o to step 5. N O - D o the navigation system troubl eshooting (see page 23-298).B

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 5, Pair the c l ient's phone to a known-g ood vehicle, and try to duplicate the concern.

C a n y o u d u p lic a te th e c o n c e r n ? YES-Call the H F L support desk at 888-528-7876, and inquire ifthere are any k n o w n issues for the concern. I f there are no k n o w n issues, explain to the client this is a system characteristic and cannot be improved at this time.B NO-Substitute a kno wn-good HFL-navigation microphone (see page 23-320), and recheck. I f the symptom/indication goes away, repl ace the original HFL-navigation microphone (see page 23-320). I f the s y m p t o m is stil l present, replace the HandsFre eU nk control unit (see page 23-424).■

The HFL system is locked and the pass code has been lost or forgotten N OTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting, refer to Genera l Troubleshooting Information (see page 23-370) to m a k e sure the pho ne is compatib l e and configured correctl y. Y o u can also check online at w w w . a c u r a . com/handsfree l ink, or call the H F L support desk at 888-528-7878. • Check any official H o n d a service website for m o r e service information about the H F L system, 1. Connect the H D S to the D L C (see page 23-370). 2. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 3. F r o m the B o d y E l ectrical m e nu , select HandsFreeLink. 4. S e l ect Miscell aneous Tests, then se l ect Pass code

reset. 5. Foll o w the H D S prompts to reset the pass code.

The HFL messages and voice prom pts cannot be heard or are weak (w ith navigation) NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting/refer to General Troubleshooting Information (see page 23-370) to m a k e sure the phone is compatible and configured correctl y. Y o u can also check online at w w w . a c u r a . com/handsfreelink, or call the H FL support desk at 888-528-7878.

7. Check for continuity between HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector terminals No. 11 and No. 25 and audio-navigation unit connector B (24P) terminals No. 5 and No. 18 respectively.

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals LINE OUT+ 'l I2 I3 I4 I5 6 j 7 |8 | 9 10 |11 112 113 114 |

1. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II).

15 16 9

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

LINE OUT— (PUR)

2. Check that the audio system is operating normal l y from different audio sources ( A M , F M , X M , CD, Navigation, etc.). Also m a k e sure the front speakers operate normally.

LINE OUT+ (LT BLU)

D o e s . the a u d i o s y s t e m w o r k normally a n d i s t h e a u d i o o u tp u t fro m th e s p e a k e r n o rm a l w h e n p la y in g v a rio u s a u d io s o u rc e s ? YES-Go to step 3. NO-Do the audio system troubleshooting.■ 3. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

LINE O U T - fPUR) AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (24P} Wire side of female terminals

i s there c o n t i n u i t y ?

Are a n y D T C s i n d i c a t e d ?

Y E S - G o to step 8.

YES-Do the indicated D T C s troubleshooting.■

N O - The re is an open in the wire(s) between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the audio-navigation unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.■

N O - G o to step 4. 4. Press the T A L K button.

D o e s th e a u d io s y s te m m u te w h e n H F L m e s s a g e s a r e b e in g p la y e d ? Y E S - G o to step 5.

8, Check for continuity between body ground and audio-navigation unit connector B (24P) terminals No. 5 and No. 16 individually.

AUDiO-NAViGAIlON UNIT CONNECTOR B (24P)

N O - G o to step 10.

LINE OUT+ (LT BLU!

5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 6. Disconnect audio-navigation unit connector B (24P) and the HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector (see step 2 on page 23-424).

n . 1

.r 2

13

/

3 / 5 / / / 15 16|Tt 18 19

9 10 / /

/

22 2

12 24

I LINE OUT— {PURI

Wire side of female terminals

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s) between the H andsFreeUnk control unit and the audio-navigation unit. R e p l ace the affected shiel ded

harness.l

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 9. Check for continuity between the termina l s of audio-navigation unit connector B (24P) according to the table.

From terminal B5 (LT BLU) B16 (PUR)

To terminal s B16 (PUR), B17 (BRN) B17(BRN)

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (24P)

13. Check for continuity between HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector terminal No. 3 and HFL-navigation microphone 7P connector terminal No. 5.

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals HFL MUTE (LT GRN)

15 18 9

n__________ 1 ............... f ___________ n 1 2 3 9 9 / / / 9 1 ° Z l2 13 9 I 15 16 17 18 19 9 Z 2 2 / 2 4

6 17 18 j 9 10 j 11 j 12 113 j 14 I 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

1m a M s

HFL MUTE (LT GRN) ._ n

Wire side of female terminals 1

2

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity b e t w e e n a n y o f th e t e r m in a ls ? YES-There is a short in the wires between the HandsFreeUnk control unit and the audio-navigation unit. Replace the affected shiel ded harness.® NO-Substitute a known-good HandsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. I f the symptom/indication goes away, repl ace the original HandsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23-424). Ifthe s y m p t o m is still present, replace the audio-navigation unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 8 ).■ 10. Press the PICK-UP button,

D o e s th e fr o n t c lim a t e c o n tr o l u n it d is p la y s h o w th e H F L m e n u a n d th e s h o w H a n d s F r e e U n k w h e n p r e s s in g th e P IC K -U P b u tto n ? YES-Go to step 11. N O - G o to step 15. 11. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

3

/

5

6

7

HFL-NAVIGATION MICROPHONE 7P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 14. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the HandsFreeUnk control unit and the HFL-navigation microphone.■ 14, Check for continuity between HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector terminal No. 3 and bod y ground.

HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

HFL MUTE (LT BLU) 'l | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 6 | 7 [ 8 | 9 10 I 11 ! 12J 13 f 14 I " 25 | 26 | 27 | 28

12. Disconnect the HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector (see step 2 on page 23-424), and the HFL-navigation microphone 7P connector.

Wire side of female terminals

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the HandsFreeUnk control unit and the audio-navigation unit.B NO-Substitute a k nown-good HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, replace the original the HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424). If the s y m p t o m is still present repl ace the audio-navigation unit (see page 2 3 -3 1 8 ).■

15. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

16. D isconnect the HandsFreeUnk c o n tro l u n it 28P co n n e cto r (see step 2 on page 23-424) and th e d a shb oard w ire harness 20P c o n n e cto r fro m th e ca b l e reel. 17. Check for continuity between HandsFree Un k control unit 28P connectorterminal No. 2 and dashboard wire harness 20P connector termina l No. 5.

HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals HFL REMOTE S W fBLU)

N O T E: Before doing this troubleshooting, refer to General Tro ub l eshooting Information (see page 23-370) to m a k e sure the p hone is compatib l e and configured correctly. Y o u can also check online at w w w . a c u r a . com/handsfreelink, or ca l lthe H F L support desk at 888-528-7878. 1. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 2. Check that the audio system is operating normally from different audio sources (AM, FM, X M , CD, etc.). A l so m a k e sure the front speakers operate normally.

CM

CO

O

1 |2(3|4|5 |6|7|8 |9

The HFL messages and voice prom pts cannot be heard or are weak (w ith o u t navigation)

IIB 116 1 / 18 119 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28

D o e s t h e a u d io s y s t e m w o r k n o r m a lly a n d is t h e a u d io o u tp u t fro m th e s p e a k e r n o r m a l w h e n p la y in g v a rio u s a u d io s o u rc e s ? Y E S - G o to step 3.

HFL REMOTE S W (BLU) n 3 4

rt

1

/ /

2

5

6

7

n 8

9

M 10

N O - D o the audio system troubleshooting.■ 3. Check for D T C s with the HDS.

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS 20P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals

A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ? Y E S - D o the indicated D T C s troubleshooting.■ N O - G o to step 4.

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - D o the H F L switch test (see page 23-423), I f the H F L switch test is OK, substitute a k no wn -go od cable reel (see page 24-211), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, replace the original cable reel (see page 24-211).H NO-Repair an open in the wire between the HandsFre eU nk control unit and the cable reel.ll

4. Press the H F L T A L K button.

D o e s th e a u d io s y s te m m u te w h e n H F L m e s s a g e s a r e b e in g p la y e d ? Y E S - G o to step 5, N O - G o to step 10. 5. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 6. Disconnect audio unit connector C (24P) and the HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector (see step 2 on page 23-424).

(cont’d)

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 7. Check for continuity between HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector terminals No, 11 and No. 25 and audio unit connector C (24P) terminals No. 17 and No. 5 respectively.

HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals

9. Check for continuity between the termina l s of audio unit connector C (24P) according to the table, F r o m terminal C5 (P C8 (BRN)

ninal C6 (BRN), C17 (LT BLU) C17 (LT BLU)

AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (24P) (LT BLU)

--------------- 1

’■ I* M / / 9 9 9 9 V I h M isM M ,6 / T 189 u ' 1 / 1 / /^ 9 l z5 M 9 l / LINE OUT— (PURI

ft—

1 27 9 13 14 15 9

/

/

9

13 14 15 9

69

5 17

9

/

/ 9

/ /

/ /

/ 2.3 24

Wire side of female terminals

LINE O U T - (PUR! > ............. .... 1 5 69 9 1T

1 2/

n

i s there c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n a n y o f t h e t e r m i n a l s ? 9,3

24

LINE OUT+ (LT BLU} AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR € (24P) Wire side of female terminals

Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Go to step 8. N O - T h e r e is an open in the wire(s) between the HandsFre eU nk control unit and the audio unit. R e p l ace the affected shielded harness.® 8, Check for continuity between body ground and audio unit connector C (24P) terminals No. 5 and No. 17 individuall y,

AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C |24P!

YES-There is a short in the wire(s) between the

HandsFreeLink c o n tro l

u n it and the audio unit.

Replace the affected harness.■ NO-Substitute a know n-g oo d HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, repl ace the original HandsFreelink control unit (see page 23-424). I f the s y m p t o m is stil lpresent repl ace the audio unit (see page 23^127).H 10. Press the H FL T A L K button.

D o e s th e fro n t c lim a t e c o n tr o l u n it d is p la y u n it s h o w th e H F L m e n u a n d th e H a n d s F r e e U n k w h e n p r e s s in g th e H F L T A L K b u tto n ? YES-Substitute a known -go od HandsFreeUnk control unit {see page 23-424), and recheck. I f the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original the HandsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23-424). If the s y m p t o m is stil lpresent, replace the audio unit (see page 23-127).■ N O - G o to step 11. 11. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0),

Wire side of female terminals

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s) between the HandsFreeUnk control unit and the audio unit. R e p l ace the affected shielded harness.!

12. Disconnect the HandsFreelink control unit 28P connector (see step 2 on page 23-424), and the

dashboard wire harness 20P connector from the cable reel.

13. Check for continuity between Ha ndsFreeUnk control unit 28P connectorterminal No, 2 and dashboard wire harness 20P connectorterminal No. 5.

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR Wire side of femal e terminals HFL REMOTE SW fBLU) 1 1 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 9 / \ 11 112 113 25 26 9 9 N H 9 18 9 9 1 / 1 9 /

V

No soynd when Bluetooth audio is used (w ith navigation) NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting, refer to General Troub l eshooting Information (see page 23-370) to m a k e sure the p hone is compatible and configured correctl y. Y o u can also check online at w w w . a c u r a . com/handsfree l ink, or call the H F L support desk at 888-528-7876. • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94).

n 1

/ /

3 4

2

HFL REMOTE S W {BLU) n — n 5 6 7 8 9 10

13 14 15 18 17 18 19 20

DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS 20P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals

i s there c o n t i n u i t y ? YES-Do the H F L switch test (see page 23-423). I f the HF L switch test is OK, substitute a known-good cable reel (see page 24-211), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, replace the original cab l e reel (see page 24-211 ) . ■ NO-Repair an open in the wire between the HandsFreeUnk control unit and the cable reel.B

• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals. • Set the fader and balance positions to the center. • Check ifthe ce l lp hone with Bluetooth audio functions n o r m a l ly. • M a k e sure the cell phone is properly paired. 1. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 2. Turn on the audio-navigation unit, and check for sound in each m o d e (AM, FM, X M , and CD).

is th e s o u n d n o r m a l? Y E S - G o to step 3. N O - G o to S o u n d Quality Diagnosis (see page 23-123) or no sound is heard from the speaker(s) (see page 23-68). ■ 3. Press the U S B / A U X button, and check if it changes to Bluetooth Audio source.

D o e s it c h a n g e to B lu e to o th A u d io s o u r c e ? Y E S - G o to step 4. NO-Substitute a known -g oo d audio-navigation unit (incl uding the H D D ) (see page 23-318), and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318).■ 4. Check if it is connected w h e n switching to Bluetooth Audio screen by pressing the U S B / A U X button.

is N O C O N N E C T I O N is d is p la y e d ? Y E S - G o to B l uetooth ce l lphone cannot be paired (see page 23-418).■

(cont'd)

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 5. Check ifthe Bluetooth audio device can be played.

D o e s th e B lu e to o th a u d io p la y ?

10, Check for continuity between audio-navigation unit connector D (14P) and the HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector according to the tabl e.

YES-lntermittent fail ure, the audio-navigation unit is O K at this time.■

Audio-Navigation unit connector

N O - G o to step 8. 6. Connect the H D S to the D L C (see page 23-370). Check for H FL DTCs,

is th e r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te ? Y E S - G o to HF L D T C troubleshooting.■

AUDIO R + AUDIO R ”a O d i o I + AUDIO L—

I

h

Wire color RED WHT BLK GRN

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P)

N O - G o to step 7.

7. Turn on the audio-navigation unit, and check for X M

D5 D13 D8 D 14

HandsFreeLink control unit connector No. 9 Mo. 23 No. 10 No. 24

9

3 4 5 6

2

9 /

I 9 10 9

/

13 14

radio sound.

Wire side of female terminals

is th e s o u n d n o r m a l? Y E S - G o to step 8, N O - G o to step 11. 8. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0).

HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR n— — — n "l |2 |3 |4 |5 6 I7 I8 I 9 110 [11 112 113 114 jr 115 |16 [/| 18 119 |20 |21 j22 j 23 |24 |25 |26 |27 |28

9. Disconnect audio-navigation unit connector D (14P) and the HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector

Wire side of female terminals

(see step 2 on page 23-424).

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Substitute a kn ow n-good HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, repl ace the original HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424).■ NO - T h e r e is an open in the wire(s) between the audio-navigation unit and the HandsPreeLink control unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.® 11. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0), 12. Disconnect these items: • Audio-Navigation unit connector D (14P) • AcuraUnk control unit ( X M receiver) connector A (32P) (with Acuralink) • X M receiver connector A (14P) (without Acuralink)

• HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector

13. Check for continuity between bod y ground .and the HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector according to the table.

14. Check for continuity between audio-navigation unit connector D (14P) and the Ha nd sFreeUnk control unit 28P connector according to the table.

HandsFreeLink

AUDIO R + AUDIO R AUDiO L+ AUDIO L -

Wire color control unit connector No. 9 RED WHT No. 23 ....... ..NC9.i F ........ ....~~.B L K

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

Audio-Navigation

AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO

R+ RLf l~

D5 D13 D6 D 14

Wire side of femal e terminal s

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s) between the audio-navigation unit, then A c u r a U n k control unit ( X M receiver) or X M receiver, and the HandsFreeUnk control unit. R e p l ace the affected shielded harness.® N O - G o to step 14.

Wire color

RED No. 9 .....~ N a .23..... .W H T . No. 10 ".I l l GRN No. 24

AUPiO-NAViGAIiON UNIT CONNECTOR D f14P) 9

1 |2 | 3 |4 |5 6 |7 |8 |9 10 |11 112 113 114 |r 15 18 9 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2? 28

HandsFreeLink control unit connector

unit connector

2

9

ns=sn

9 10 9

3 4 9

5

6

13 14

Wire side of female terminals

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR n— — — fl 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 10 | 11 112 113 114 | r 115 [ 16 | / | 18 119 | 20 | 21 | 22 123 | 24 [ 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 Wire side of femal e terminals

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 15. NO -T h e r e is an open in the wire(s) between the audio-navigation unit and the HandsFreeUnk control unit Replace the affected shielded harness.®

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 15. Check for continuity between the terminals of the HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector according to the table. F r o m terminal No. 22 (GRY)

T o terminals No. 9 (RED), No. 23 (WHT), IS ' „K), No. 24 (GRN)

13. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 20. Disconnect the HandsFr eeU nk control unit 28P connector (see step 2 on page 23-424), 21. Reconnect A c u r a U n k control unit connector A (32P) or X M receiver connector A (14P). 22. Turn the ignition switch to O N (ll).

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR n— — — fl 'l | 2 | 3 | 4 |5 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 10 [ 11 112 113 115 [ 16 L /1 18 119 | 2° | 21 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 Wire side of female terminals

is th e r e c o n tin u ity b e t w e e n a n y o f th e t e r m in a ls ? YES-There is a short in the wires between the audio-navigation unit and the HandsFreeUnk control unit. R e p l ace the affected shielded harness,■ N O - G o to step 16. 18, Reconnect audio-navigation unit connector D (14P) and the HandsFreelink control unit 28P connector. 17, Turn the ignition switch to O N (ll). 18. Check ifthe Bluetooth audio device can be played.

D o e s th e B lu e to o th a u d io p la y ? YES-lnternal malfunction in unit whe re a connector for either the Acura Link control unit ( X M receiver) or the X M receiver is connected.■ N O ~ G o to step 19,

23. Check the operation of the reconnected unit.

is th e s y s t e m n o r m a l? YES-Substitute a known -go od HandsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. I f the symptom/indication goes away, repl ace the original HandsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23-424).■ NO-Substitute a know n-g oo d audio-navigation unit (including the H D D ) (see page 23-318), and recheck, I f the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318).■

Bluetooth audio does not w o rk (w ith nawigatlon) NOTE; • Before doing this troubleshooting, refer to General Troubleshooting Information (see page 23-370) to m a k e sure the p hone is compatible and configured correctly. Y o u can also check o n l ine at w w w . a c u r a . com/handsfree l ink, or call the HF L support desk at 888-528-7878. • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94). • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals. • Check ifthe cell phon e with Bluetooth audio functions normally. • M a k e sure the ce l l phon e is proper l y paired. 1 .Turn the ignition switch to O N (I I).

6. Connect the H D S to the D L C (see page 23-370). Check for H F L DTCs.

Are t h e r e a n y D T C s i n d i c a t e d ? Y E S - G o to H F L D T C troubleshooting.■ N O - G o to step 7. 7. Check for the navigation system hard error codes (see page 23-186).

Are t h e r e a n y navigation D T C s r e l a t e d t o t h e D i s p l a y s y s te m s ? ■YES-Go to step 8. N O - G o to step 11. 8. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 9. Disconnect audio-navigation unit connector B (24P) and the HandsFr ee Unk control unit 28P connector (see step 2 on page 23-424).

2. Turn on the audio-navigation unit, and press U S B / A U X button to select B l uetooth audio source.

D o e s it c h a n g e to B lu e to o th A u d io s o u r c e ? Y E S - G o to step 3. NO-Substitute a kn own-good audio-navigation unit (including the H D D ) (see page 23-318), and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, repl ace the original audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318).■ 3. Check ifthe cell phon e with Bluetooth audio can be played on the audio system.

D o e s th e B lu e to o th a u d io p la y ? YES-lntermittent fail ure, the audio-navigation unit is O K at this time.B N O - G o to step 4. 4. G o to www.acura.com/handsfree l ink and m a k e sure the phone is compatible for Bluetooth audio and proper l y configured. O n c e the issue is confirmed, call 888-528-7878 to m a k e sure there are no k n o w n issues for the cell phone. 5. Pair the cell phone to a k nown-good vehicle and check ifyou can play music using Bluetooth audio.

D o e s th e B lu e to o th a u d io p la y ? Y E S - G o to step 6, N O - T h e cell phone is faulty or not compatible with Bluetooth audio,■

(cont'd)

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 10. Check for continuity between audio-navigation unit connector B (24P) and the HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector according to the tabl e.

B19

HandsFreeUnk control unit connector 'No. 4

GRN

B18

No. 5

RED

Audio-Navigation uni connector GA-NET BUS B + GA-NEI BUS B —

13, Check for continuity between bo dy ground and the HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector according to the tabl e,

Wire color

HandsFreeLink control unit connector

Wire color

No. 4 No. 5

GRN RED

.GA^IeT.BUS.B +.. GA-NET BUS B—

HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT 2SP CONNECTOR

AUD!0-NA¥1GAT»0N UNIT CONNECTOR B (24P) rt...

V r F | T [ / s 9 9 9 9 |l0 |/|l2 |r |13|9115|16|17|18|19|9I9|22|9|24

n—

15

16

9

18

—

—

6 | 7 | 8 | 9 19

20

21 22

n

fl 10 | 11 112 113 114 I 23

24

25

26

......... -... .. .... ..Ft

9

18

19

20

21 22

10 | 11 | 12 113 | 14 | 23

24

25

26

27

28

Wire side of female terminals

HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5

.. ............. ... ' 6 | 7 | 8 | 9

15 116

Wire side of female terminals

«i

....

1

t---------------r

27

28

Wire side of female terminals

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-There is a short to b ody ground in the wire(s) between the audio-navigation unit, the navigation display unit, and the HandsFreeUnk control unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.■ N O - G o to step 14.

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-Substitute a known-good HandsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, replace the original HandsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23-424).■ N O - T h e r e is an open in the wire(s) between the audio-navigation unit and the HandsFreeUnk control unit. Replace the affected shiel ded harness.■ 11. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 12, Disconnect these items: • Audio-Navigation unit connector B (24P) • Navigation display unit 28P connector

• HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector

14. Check for continuity between audio-navigation unit connector B (24P) and the H an dsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector according to the tab l e. Audio-Navigation unit connector GA-NET BUS B + GA-NET BUS B ~

B19

HandsFreeUnk control uni connector No. 4

Wire color GRN

B18

No. 5

RED

16. Reconnect audio-navigation unit connector B (24P) and the Han dsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector. 17. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 18. Check ifthe cell ph one with Bluetooth audio can be played.

D o e s th e B lu e to o th a u d io p la y ? YES-lntermittent failure, the system is O K at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections at the navigation displ ay unit.B

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (24P) N O - G o to step 19. 19. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 5 9 9 9 '9|l0|/|izf 1131911511611711811919I9122 |9l 24

Wire side of femal e terminals

20. Disconnect the HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector (see step 2 on page 23-424). 21. Reconnect the navigation display unit 28P connector.

HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

22. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 23. Check the operation of the navigation display unit

18

19

20

21 22

23

24

25

28

s

9

CM

16

cO

16

O

1 |2 |3 |4 |5 6 |7 |8 |9

27 28

Wire side of femal e terminals

i s there c o n t i n u i t y ?

Is t h e s y s t e m n o r m a l ? YES-Substitute a known -g ood HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, repl ace the original HandsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23 -4 2 4 ).!

YES-Go to step 15. N O - T h e r e is an open in the wire(s) between the audio-navigation unit and the HandsF ree Un k control unit. R e p l ace the affected shiel ded harness.■ 15, Check for continuity between the terminals of the HandsF re eU nk control unit 28P connector according to the tabl e. F r o m terminal No. 19 (BRN)

T o terminals H n o ".

HANDSFREEUNK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

^1 ] 2 | 3 |4 |5 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 10 |11 112 113 114 | j15

j 1 6 |7 j1 8 [

19]

Wire side of female terminals

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity b e t w e e n a n y o f th e te r m in a ls ? YES-There is a short in the wires between the audio-navigation unit and the HandsFre eU nk control unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.® N O - G o to step 16.

NO-Substitute a kno wn- go od audio-navigation unit (including the H D D ) (see page 23-318), and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the ■ original audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318).■

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Bluetooth cell phone cannot be paired (w ith navigation) NOTE : • Before doing this troubleshooting, refer to General Tr oub l eshooting Information (see page 23-370) to m a k e sure the phone is compatible and configured correctl y. Y o u can also check online at w w w . a c u r a . com/handsfreelink, or call the H F L support desk at 888-528-7878. • Check the vehicl e battery condition first (see page 22-34). • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminal s, • W h e n six devices are already registered, delete a device before pairing another one (see page 23-375). • Check any official H o n d a service website for m o r e service information about the H F L system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II), 2. Press the T A L K button.

D oes ab e ep sound? Y E S - G o to step 3. N O - G o to step 6. 3. G o to www.acura.com/handsfree l ink and m a k e sure the phone is compatib l e for Bluetooth audio and proper l y configured. O n c e the issue is confirmed, call 888-528-7878 to m a k e sure there are no k n o w n issues for the cell phone. 4. Ifyou have the client's phone, go to step 5. Otherwise, pair a known- goo d cell phone to the client's vehicle.

C a n y o u p a ir th e B lu e to o th p h o n e , a n d d o e s it o p e r a te n o rm a lly ? Y E S - T h e client's Bluetooth ph one is defective or not compatible.■ N O - G o to step 6. 5, Pair the client's phone to a known-g oo d vehicl e.

C a n y o u p a i r t h e B l u e t o o t h p h o n e ,a n d d o e s i t o p e r a t e n o rm a lly ? Y E S - G o to step 8. N O - T h e cl ient's B l uetooth ph one is defective or not compatible.■

6, Connect the H D S to the D L C (see page 23-370). Check for H FL DTCs.

Is th e r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ? Y E S - G o to H FL D T C troubleshooting.■ N O - G o to s y m p t o m troubleshooting Voice control does not work/respond (see page 23-300)or H FL switch test (see page 23-423),■

The com m unication w ith cell phone is interrupted or changes (w ith navigation) NO TE: • Before doing this troubleshooting, refer to General Troub l eshooting Information (see page 23-370) to m a k e sure the p hone is compatible and configured correctl y. Y o u can a l so check online at w w w . a c u r a . com/handsfree l ink, or call the H F L support desk at 888-528-7876. • The connected device m a y not function properly w h e n it is in the trunk or in a m e t a l lic case. 1. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 2. Check that the audio system is operating normally from different audio sources (A M , FM, X M , CD,

6. Check the connections at the Han dsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector terminals.

A r e th e c o n n e c tio n s a n d te r m in a ls c o n n e c te d p r o p e r ty ? Y E S - G o to step 7. NO-Repair the connection, and recheck.B 7. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 8. Disconnect the HandsFreelink control unit 28P connector (see step 2 on page 23-424), and audio-navigation unit connector D (14P). 9. Check for continuity between body ground and the Ha ndsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector according to the table.

Navigation, etc.). Also m a k e sure the front speakers operate normally.

D o e s t h e a u d io s y s t e m w o r k n o r m a lly a n d is t h e a u d io o u tp u t fro m th e s p e a k e r s n o rm a l w h e n p la y in g v a rio u s a u d io s o u rc e s ?

HandsFreeLink control unit connector

Wire color

No. 3 No. 23 No. 10 No. 24

^ED WHT BLK GRN

AUDIO R + A U D I O R— A U D I O LJ AUDIO I—

Y E S - G o to step 3. N O - D o the audio system troubleshooting.■ 3. Duplicate the s y m p t o m with the Bluetooth phone.

D o e s th e s y m p t o m o c c u r in a s p e c if ic p l a c e o r u n d e r a s p e d f t c o n d itio n ? YES-Operation is normal: B l uetooth audio is O K at this time. I nfluence or electric w a v e interference.®

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

— — fl « r 1 |2 |3 |4 |5 IT— 6 |7 |8 |9 10 |11 112 113 |14 | 115 116 |/| 18 119 |

Wire side of female terminals

N O - G o to step 4. 4. I f you have the client's phone, go to step 5. Otherwise, pair a known-g ood cell phone to the c l ient's vehicl e.

C a n y o u p a ir th e B lu e t o o th p h o n e , a n d d o e s it o p e r a t e n o rm a lly ? Y E S - T h e client's Bluetooth ph one is defective or not compatib l e.■

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s) between the audio-navigation unit and the HandsFreeLink control unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.■ N O - G o to step 10.

N O - G o to step 6. 5. Pair the c l ient's pho ne to a known-g ood vehicl e.

C a n y o u p a ir th e B lu e t o o th p h o n e , a n d d o e s it o p e r a t e n o rm a lly ? Y E S - G o to step 8. N O - T h e client's Bluetooth phone is defective or not . compatible.■

(cont'd)

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) 10. Check for continuity between audio-navigation unit connector C (14P) and the HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector according to the table. Audio-Navigation unit connector AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO

R+ RL+ L~

HandsFreeUnk control unit connector No. 9 No. 23 No. 10 No. 24

.. 0'5.. __

D13 _ D1 4

Wire color

F r o m terminal No. 22 (GRY)

RED WHT BLK GRN

HANDSFREELINK CONTROl UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

AUPIO-NAVIGAIION UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P) 3

9 * / /

3

10

4

/

5

11. Check for continuity between the termina l s of the HandsFreeUnk control unit 28P connector according to the table. o terminals No. 9 (RED), No. 23 (WHT), No. 10 (BLK), No. 24 (GRN)

n 1 |2 |3 |4 |5 6 | 7 |8 | 9 10 |11 112 113 114 | 15 16 /

18 19 120 21 22 123 24 25 26 27 28

6

13 14

Wire side of femal e terminals HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR

Wire side of female terminals

is t h e r e c o n tin u ity b e t w e e n a n y o f th e te r m in a ls ? YES-There is a short in the wires between the audio-navigation unit and the H andsFreeUnk control unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.®

CO

9

"*1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 ^ 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 10 | 11 112 113 114 | r 18| 19 20 |21 22 23 24 25 |26 27 m 115 Wire side of female terminals

is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Y E S - G o to step 11. N O - T h e r e is an open in the wire(s) between the audio-navigation unit and the H an dsFreeUnk control unit. Replace the affected shiel ded harness.■

NO-Substitute a kn own -g oo d H andsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. I f the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original HandsFree Un k control unit (see page 23-424).■

Pairing instructions are not displayed on the screen (w ith navigation) NOTE;

........

• Before doing this troubleshooting, refer to General Troub l eshooting Information (see page 23-370) to m a k e sure the p hone is compatible and configured correctly. Y o u can also check online at w w w . a c u r a . com/handsfreelink, or ca l lthe H F L support desk at 888-528-7878. • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94). • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose termina l s. • M a k e sure the cell p hone is Acura approved, acura.com/handsfreelink)

(www.

1 .Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 2. Check if any system(s) other than Bluetooth audio system is displayed.

D o e s th e o th e r s y s te m d is p la y n o r m a lly ? Y E S - G o to step 3. N O - R e p l ace the navigation displ ay unit (see page 23-313).■ 3. Press U S B / A U X button to select B l uetooth Audio source.

D o e s it c h a n g e to B lu e to o th A u d io s o u r c e ? Y E S - G o to step 4. N O - G o to Bluetooth audio does not work (see page 23-415).11 4. Check ifthe audio system functions normally.

is th e s y s t e m n o r m a l? Y E S - G o to step 5, N O - G o to s y m p t o m troubl eshooting for N o sound w h e n Bluetooth audio is used (see page 23-411).B 5. Ifyou have the client's phone, go to step 6. Otherwise, pair a k now n-good cell phone to the c l ient's vehicl e. Ca n y o u p a i r t h e B l u e t o o t h p h o n e , a n d d o e s i t o p e r a t e n o rm a lly ? Y E S - T h e client's Bluetooth phone is defective or not compatible.■ NO-Substitute a known-good HandsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. I f the symptom/indication goes away, repl ace the original HandsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23-424).■

8. Pair the c l ient's phone to a k nown-good vehicle. Ca n y o u p a i r t h e B l u e t o o t h p h o n e , a n d d o e s i t o p e r a t e n o rm a lly ? YES-Substitute a kn own-good H andsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. I f the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original HandsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23-424).■ N O - T h e client's Bluetooth phone is defective or not compatible. ■

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Bluetooth cell phone audio function SKIP and PAUSE/RESUME do not work (with navigation) NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting, refer to General T roub l eshooting Information (see page 23-370) to m a k e sure the phone is compatib l e and configured correctly. Y o u can a l so check, online at w w w . a c u r a . com/handsfree l ink, or ca l l the HFL support desk at 888-528-7878. • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-94). • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals. • Check ifthe audio system functions normally. • S o m e mobile phones do not support the function. • Check any official H o n d a service website for m o r e service information about the H FL system. 1.Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). 2. Turn on the audio-navigation unit, and check that M E N U , S K I P, and TITLE button function normal l y with the audio-navigation unit.

is th e a u d io -n a v ig a tio n u n it o p e r a tio n O K ? Y E S - G o to step 3.

NO-Substitute a known-good audio-navigation unit (including the H D D ) (see page 23-318), and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, repl ace the original audio-navigation unit (see page 23-318).■ 3. Check that music plays with the Bluetooth device.

Is th e s y s t e m n o r m a l? YES-Go. to step 4. N O - G o to N o sound w h e n Bluetooth audio is used (see page 23-411 ).■ 4. Ifyou have the client's phone, go to step 5. Otherwise, pair a kn ow n-good cell phone to the c l ient's vehicle.

C a n y o u p a ir th e B lu e to o th p h o n e , a n d d o e s it o p e r a te n o rm a lly ? Y E S - T h e client's Bluetooth phone is defective or not compatible.■ NO-Substitute a known-good HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, replace the original HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424).■

5. Pair the client's ph one to a k nown-good vehicle.

C a n y o u p a i r t h e B l u e t o o t h p h o n e ,a n d d o e s i t o p e r a t e n o rm a lly ? YES-Substitute a k nown-good HandsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23-424), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, replace the original HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-424).■ N O - T h e cl ient’s Bluetooth phone is defective or not compatible.■

HFL Switch Test

HFL Switch Replacement

S R S co mp one nt s are located in this area. Review the

S R S compo ne nts are located in this area. Review the

S R S c o m p o n e n t l ocations (see page 24-18), and the precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before

S R S c o m p o n e n t l ocation (see page 24-18), and the precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before

doing repairs or service.

doing repairs or service.

1. R e m o v e the driver's airbag (see page 24-199).

1. R e m o v e these items:

2. Disconnect the

• Driver's airbag (see page 24-139).

20P connector (A).

• Steering wheel (see page 17-6). • Paddle shifter (see page 14-242). 2. R e m o v e the screws and the H F L switch (A).

n. -JTl™ ' 8 9 < 4 5 8 7 / 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Wire side of female terminal s 3. Measure the resistance between the terminals No. 8 and No. 19 in each switch position according to the table.

HFL-Navigation Voice Control Switch (with navigation) Positior N o buttons press* PICK-UP button pressed HANG-UP button pressed

Resistance About 10 kO About 47 Q About 220 O

H F L Switch (without navigation! Position N o buttons pressed H F L T A L K button pressed H FL B A C K button pressed

Resistance About 1 kO About 46 O About 185 O

4. Ifthe resistance is not as specified, replace the switch. • With navigation (see page 23-322). • Without navigation (see page 23-423).

3. Install the H F L switch in the reverse order of removal.

HandsFreeUnk Control Unit Removal/Installation

HFL Microphone Removal/Installation

NO TE ; T e l l the client they need to write d o w n all phone

W ith o yt nawigation

n u m b e r s as there is no w a y to transfer the information in the original HandsFreeUnk control unit to a n e w H andsFreeUnk control unit.

1. R e m o v e the roof console (see page 22-311). 2. R e m o v e the screws and bracket (A),

1, R e m o v e the center console rear trim (see page 20-107), 2. Disconnect the connector (A).

B 3. R e m o v e the screws and H andsFreeUnk control unit (B). 4, Instal lthe HandsFreeUnk control unit in the reverse order of r e m o v a l . After repl acing the HandsFreeUnk control unit, tell the client: • They need to pair their phones to the system. • They need to set up their system preferences.

3. Disconnect the connector (B) and r e m ov e the HFL microphone (C). 4. Install the H F L microphone in the reverse order of removal.

1. R e m o v e the HandsFreeUnk control unit (see page 23-424). 2. Inspect the connector (A) and socket (B) terminals for a good pin fit to be sure they are a l lmaking go o d contact • I f the terminals are bent, l oose or corroded, repair t hem as necessary, and recheck the system. • I f the terminals l ook OK, go to step 3.

3. Reconnect the connector, and m a k e these input tests at the connector. • If any test indicates a prob l em, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 4, Cavity

Wire

1

B LK

Under all ignition switch positions

15

WHT

Under all ignition switch positions

16

PUR

I gnition switch A C C E S S O R Y (I) or O N (II)

Test condition

Test: Desired result Measure the voltage to ground: There should be less than 0.2 ¥ Measure the v o l tage to ground; There should be battery voltage.

Measure the v o l tage to ground: There should be battery voltage.

Possible cause if result is not obtained • Poor ground (G506) • A n open in the wire • Blown No, 5 (10 A) fuse ii the driver's under-dash fuse/rel ay box • A n open or high resistance in the wire >wn No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box • A n open or high resistance in the wire

Control Unit Input Test (cont'd) 4. Disconnect the 28P connector again, and m a k e this input test at the connector. • Ifthe test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • Ifthe input test proves OK, the HandsFreeUnk control unit must be faulty, replace it (see page 23-424). Cavity

Wire

18

LT GRN

Test condition Under all ignition switch positions

Under-dash fuse/relay box connector N (45P) disconnected

Test: Desired result Check for continuity between terminal No. 18 and under-dash fuse/rel ay box connector N (45P) termina l No. 28: There should be continuity. Check for continuity to ground: There should be no continuity.

Possible cause if result is not obtained • A n open in the wire • Check for C A N D T C s

ort to ground • Check for C A N D T C s

Restraints Restraints Special Tools

...

.................. ................................... 24-2

Seat Belts Component Location In d ex................................................24-3 Front Seat Belt Replacem ent............................................ 24-4 Second Row Seat Belt Replacem ent..............................24-7 Third Row Seat Beit Replacem ent...................................24-13 Inspection.............................................................................. 24-15 Third Row Child Seat Tether Anchor Replacement. ..24-17

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Component Location Index................................................24-18 Precautions and Procedures............................................ 24-20 General Troubleshooting Inform ation.......................... 24-30 SRS Unit U p d ate................................................................... 24-32 ODS Unit Initialization......................................................... 24-33 ODS Unit Operation Check................................................24-35 Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Output Check After a Vehicle Collision........................................................... 24-36 Driver's Seat Position Sensor Operation Check.......... 24-37 E-Pretensioner Operation Check. .................................... 24-38 DTC Troubleshooting In d ex..............................................24-39 Symptom Troubleshooting In d ex...................................24-47 System Description............................................................ 24-48 Circuit D iagram .....................................................................24-56 DTC Troubleshooting......................................................... 24-60 Symptom Troubleshooting................................................24-192 Component Replacement/Inspection After Deploym ent...................................................................... 24-196 Driver's Airbag Replacement............................................ 24-199 Front Passenger's Airbag Replacement......................... 24-200 Side Airbag Replacement, . ............................................ 24-202 Side Curtain Airbag Replacement................................... 24-203 Airbag and Tensioner Disposal....................................... 24-207 Cable Reel Replacem ent.................................................... 24-211 SRS Unit Replacem ent........................................................24-214 Side Impact Sensoi (First) Replacem ent....................... 24-215 Side Impact Sensor (Second) Replacem ent................. 24-216 Rear Safing Sensor Replacem ent.................................... 24-217 Front Pas nsor Replacem ent.........24-218 ODS Unit Replacem ent...................................................... 24-220 E-Pretensioner Unit Replacem ent................................... 24-221 Front Impact Sensor Replacem ent................................. 24-222 Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement................. 24-223 Front Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator Illumination Bulb i est/Replacement...........................24-224

T

\

I

Restraints Special Tools Ref.No.

Tool N u m b e r

Description

07GAZ- SA AO 1OD

S R S Short Canceller

(D

0 7 0 A Z - S N A A 1 00

S R S Simulator Lead J

1 1

(I)

070AZ-SNAA200

S R S Simulator Lead K

1

©

070AZ-SNAA300

S R S Simulator Lead L

1

(D

07AAZ-000A100

Deployment Tool

1

©

07 SA Z-T B4 01 1A

S R S Inflator S i m u l ator

1

©

Q7TAZ-0O1O2O '

Back Probe Adapter, 17 m n

1

CD

©

J

Qty

©

©

Component Location Index

FRONT SHOULDER ANCHOR ADJUSTER

THIRD ROW CHILD SEAT TETHER ANCHOR Replacement, page 24-17 CENTER SECOND ROW SEAT BELT Replacement, page 24-10 I nspection, page 24-15 THIRD ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE Replacement, page 24-14

THIRD ROW SEAT BELT Replacement page 24-13 I nspection, page 24-15

SECOND ROW SEAT BELT Replacement page 24-7 Inspection, page 24-15 FRONT SEAT BELT Replacement page 24-4 I nspection, page 24-15

THIRD ROW SEAT BELT DETACHABLE ANCHOR Replacement page 24-14 CENTER SECOND ROW SEAT BELT DETACHABLE ANCHOR Replacement page 24-12 LEFT SECOND ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE Replacement page 24-8 CENTER SECOND ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE Replacement page 24-11

FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES Replacement page 24-6

RIGHT SECOND ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE Repl acement page 24-9

Front Seat Belt Replacement Front Seat Belt

2. Adjust the seat to its m i n i m u m height then remo ve the lower anchor bolt (A),

S R S com ponents are located in this area. Review the S R S c o m p o n e n t locations (see page 24-18) and the precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or service, NOTE: • If replacing the front seat be l ts after deployment, refer to C o m p o n e n t Replacement/ I nspection After Deployment (see page 24-138) for a complete list of other parts that must also be repl aced. • Take care not to tear or d a m a g e the seat covers. • Check the front seat belts for d a m a g e (see page 24-16), and replace th e m if necessary. • The driver's seat is shown; the passenger's seat is similar. 1. Slide the front seat all the w a y forward, and adjust the seat to its m a x i m u m height. Carefull y pry up on the bottom of the anchor cover (A) to rel ease the tab (B) with a small flat-tip screwdriver from below inside the recline cover (C), then remove it.

32 N-m |3.3 kgf-m, 24 Ibf-ft) 3. D o the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-35), then wait at l east 3 minutes before beginnig work. 4. R e m o v e the B-pillar lower trim (see page 20-79). 5. R e m o v e the B-pillar upper trim (see page 20-79). 6. R e m o v e the upper anchor bolt (A).

A 7/16-20 UNF 32 N-m (3.3 kgf-m, 24 Ibf-ft)

&

7. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A ), E-pretensioner motor connector (B) (with E-pretensioner). R e m o v e the upper retractor mounting b o l t (C) and the lower retractor bolt (DL then r emo ve the front seat belt assembly (E). € 6 x 1.0 mm

10. Install the seat belt in the reverse order of r e m o v a l , and note these items: • A p p l y m e d i u m strength liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before reinstallation. • Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten to the specified torque. • Check that the retractor locking m e c h a n i s m functions as described (see page 24-15), • Assemble the washer, the collar, and the bushing on the upper anchor b o l t as shown, • Ifthe seat belt tensioner has been d e p l oyed, replace the front seat belt protector. • Before installing the anchor bolts, m a k e sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt. • M a k e sure the seat belt tensioner connector is properly in p l ugged. • D o the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-95). • Check for any D T C s that m a y have been set during repairs, and c l ear them. Upper anchor bolt installation

8. I f necessary, r emove the front seat belt protector (F). UPPER A N C H O R 9. R e m o v e the shoulder anchor adjuster (A).

(cont'd)

Front Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd) Front Seat Belt Buckle

5. R e m o v e the center anchor bolt (A) and detach the harness clips (B), then remov e the seat belt buck l e (C).

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component l ocations (see page 24-18) and the precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or service. NOTE: • Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Take care not to tear or d a m a g e the seat covers. • T he driver's seat is shown; the passenger's seat is similar. 1. D o the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95), and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work, 2. R e m o v e the front seat (see page 20-139). 3. R e m o v e the center cover (see step 4 on page 20-143). 4. Lift up the front seat, then disconnect the seat belt buck l e switch connector (A), then detach the harness c l ip (B).

8. Pull the seat belt buckle switch harness (D) out through the space between the seat cushion and the seat track. 7. Install the buck l e in the reverse order of removal, and note these items; • A s s e m b l e the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown, • Apply m e d i u m strength l iquid thread lock to the center anchor b o l ts before reinstallation. • Tighten the b o l ts by hand first then tighten to specification with a torque wrench. • M a k e sure the seat belt buckle switch connector is plugged in proper l y. • D o the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-35), • Check for any D T C s that m a y have been set during repairs, and clear them.

C enter an cho r b o lt in s ta lla tio n TOOTHED LOCK WASHER

CENTER ANCHOR BOLT Apply thread lock.

WAVE WASHER CENTER ANCHOR

Second Row Seat Belt Replacement Second Row Seat Belt

5. R e m o v e the upper anchor bolt (A).

NOTE:

A

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

' ' '

7/16-20 UNF 32 N-m |3.3 kgf-m, 24 ibf-ft)

• Take care not to tear or d a m a g e the seat covers. • Check the second r o w seat belts for d a m a g e (see page 24-15), and repl ace t h e m if necessary. 1. S l ide the second r o w seat forward fully. 2. R e m o v e the rear side trim panel (see page 20-88). 3. Pull the carpet (A) back, and rem ove the lower anchor bolt (B).

8. Detach the clip (A) by p u l ling the bottom of the quarter pill ar trim (B) back. While h o l ding the trim a w a y from the C-pillar, pull the second r o w seat belt, the upper anchor (C), the tongue plate (D), and the lower anchor (E) into the trim, and pull the entire second r o w seat belt down.

7/16-20 UNF 32 N-m (3.3 kgf-m, 24 ibf-ft} 4. R e m o v e the seat belt exit C-pillar cap (A). -1. Pull out the rear upper corner of the cap to release the upper hook (B) and the rear hook (C). -2. Release the front hook (D) and the l o w e r hook (E) together by pulling the cap upw ard and rearward. -3. Take the cap off the second r ow seat belt (F).

(cont'd)

Second Row Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd) 7. R e m o v e the upper retractor mounting bolt (A) and the lower retractor bolt (B), then rem ov e the front seat belt assembly (€). The left second r ow seat be l t is shown; the right second ro w seat b e l t is simil ar.

Left Seat Belt Buckle NOTE: • Put on g l oves to protect your hands. • Take care not to tear or d a m a g e the seat covers, 1. R e m o v e the left second r ow seat (see page 20-180). 2. Fr o m under the seat cushion, rel ease the hooks of the back cover carpet from the seat cushion frame, then pull the carpet back (see step 2 on page 20-183). 3. With seat heater: Disconnect the seat cushion heater connector, and r emove the wire ties (see step 3 on page 20-183). 4. R e m o v e these items: • Recline outer cover (see step 4 on page 20-163) • I S O - F I X bracket outer cover (see step 6 on page 20-184)

7/16-20 UNF 32 N-m (3.3 kgf-m, 24 Ibf-ft) 8. Install the seat be l t in the reverse order of r e m o v a l , and note these items: • Apply m e d i u m strength liquid thread l ock to the anchor bolts before reinstal l ation. • Tighten the b o l ts by hand first, then tighten to the specified torque. • Check that the retractor locking m e c h a n i s m functions as described (see page 24-15). • Assemble the washers, the co l lar, and the bushing on the upper anchor bolt as shown, • Before install ing the anchor bolts, m a k e sure there are no twists or kinks in the second r o w seat belt. Upper anchor bolt installation

UPPER ANCHOR

5. R e m o v e the seat cushion from the left second row seat (see step 10 on page 20-185). 8. R e m o v e the center anchor bolt (A), and r em o v e the seat belt buckle (B).

7. Install the buckle in the reverse order of r e m o v a l ,and note these items: • Apply m e d i u m strength liquid thread lock to the anchor b o l t before reinstal lation. • Assemble the washers, the collar and the bushing on the center anchor bolt as shown.

C enter an cho r b o lt in s ta lla tio n

Right Seat Belt Buckle NOTE: • Put on gloves to protect your hands, • Take care not to tear or d a m a g e the seat covers. 1. R e m o v e the right second t o w seat (see page 20-160). 2. R e m o v e these items: • Recline outer cover (see step B o n page 20-187) • Center outer cover (see step 7 on page 20-167) 3. Using a T O R X T30 bit, rem ov e the pivot bolts (A), then careful ly l ift the seat cushion (B) up as needed.

/ SPRING WASHER \ WASHER CENTER ANCHOR

4, R e m o v e the center anchor bolt (A), and remo ve the seat belt buck l e (B),

(cont'd)

Second Row Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd) 5. I nstall the buck l e in the reverse order of r e m o v a l ,and note these items:

Center Second Row Seat Belt NO TE:

• Apply m e d i u m strength l iquid thread l ock to the anchor bolt before reinstall ation.

• Put on gloves to protect your hands,

• Assemble the washers, the co l lar, and the bushing

• Take care not to tear or d a m a g e the seat covers.

on the center anchor bolt as shown.

C enter an cho r b o lt in s ta lla tio n

1. Detach the clips, and remo ve the seat belt cover (A). Fastener Locations

UPPER ANCHOR

t > : Clip, 4

2, R e m o v e the he ad l iner (see page 20-98), 3. R e m o v e the upper anchor mounting b o l t (A) and the upper anchor b o l ts (B), then rem ove the upper anchor (C).

4. R e m o v e the retractor mounting bolt (A) and the retractor bolt (B), then re mo ve the retractor (C).

Center Second Row Seat Belt Buckle NOTE: • Put on g l oves to protect your hands, • Take care not to tear or d a m a g e the seat covers. 1. S l ide the right second r o w seat fully forward. 2. R e m o v e the ISO-FI X bracket outer cover (see step 6 on page 20-164). 3. R e m o v e the center anchor bolt (A), and remo ve the seat belt buck l e (B) from the elastic strap (C), then re mo ve itthrough the space between the l ink bracket and seat cushion.

7/16-20 UNF

6x1. 0 mm

32 N-m

9.8 N-m

(3.3 kgf-m#24 ibf-ft)

* (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)

5. Install the center second r ow seat belt and retractor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: • I f the c l ips are d a m a g e d or stress-whitened, replace t h e m with n e w ones. • Apply m e d i u m strength l iquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before reinstall ation. • Check that the retractor locking m e c h a n i s m functions (see page 24-15). • Before instal ling the upper anchor bolt, m a k e sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.

32 N-m

(3.3 kgf-m, 24 ibf-ft) Appl y thread lock. 4, I nstall the buckle in the reverse order of removal, and apply m e d i u m strength l iquid thread l ock to the anchor b o l t before reinstallation.

(cont'd)

Second Row Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd) Center Second Row Seat Belt Detachable Anchor

4. R e m o v e the seat belt detachable anchor (A).

NOTE : • Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Take care not to tear or d a m a g e the seat covers. 1. R e m o v e the left second row seat (see page 20-180). 2. R e m o v e the seat belt detachab l e anchor (A) from the elastic strap (B).

5. Install the detachable anchor in the reverse order of r e m o v a l ,and apply m e d i u m strength l iquid thread lock to the anchor bolt before reinstall ation.

&

Third Row Seat Belt Replacement Third Row Seat Belt

6. Remove the upper anchor bo lt (A).

NOTE: • Put on g l oves to protect your hands. • Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers. • Check the third row seat belts for damage (see page 24-15), and replace them if necessary. 1. Detach the third row seat belt lower anchor. 2. Remove the rear side trim panel (see page 20-88). 3. Remove the seat belt exit D-pillar cap (A). -1. Pull out the top of the cap to release the hooks(B). -2, Release the l ower hook (C) by pulling the cap upward, -3. Take the cap off the third row seat belt (D).

7. Remove the retractor mounting bolt (A) and the retractor bolt (B), then remove the third row seat be lt assembly (C).

4. Remove the quarter pillar trim (see page 20-81). 5. Remove the bolts (A) and the seat be lt guide (B).

32 N -m (3.3 kg f-m , 24 ib f-ft)

Third Row Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd) 8. Install the seat belt in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: • App ly medium strength liquid thread lock to the anchor bo lts before reinsta l lation, • Tighten the bo lts by hand first, then tighten to the specified torque. • Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions as described (see page 24-15). • Assemble the washers and the bushing on the upper anchor bo lt as shown. • Before installing the anchor bo lt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.

Seat Belt Buckle/Seat Belt Detachable Anchor NOTE: • Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers. • The seat belt buckle is shown, and the seat belt detachabl e anchor is similar. 1. Remove the third row seat (see page 20-184). 2. Remove the screw (A), and release the hook (B), then remove the bracket cover (C).

Upper anchor bolt installation

3. Remove the center anchor bolt (A), then remove the seat belt buckle (B).

32 N-m (3.3 kgf-m, 24 Ibf-ft)

Inspection 4. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: • Assemb l e the washers, the spring, the bushing, the bracket and the collar on the center anchor bolt as shown. • Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the center anchor bolt before reinsta l lation. Center anchor bolt construction CENTER ANCHOR BOLT A pply thread lock.

SPRING BRACKET

Out of Vehicle For front seat belt retractor with seat belt tensioner, review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or service.

Retractor 1. Before installing the retractor, check that the seat belt can be pull ed out freely. 2. Make sure that the seat belt does not l ock when the retractor (A) is l eaned sl owly up to 15 ° from the mounted position. The seat belt should lock when the retractor is leaned over 40 °. Do not attempt to disassemble the retractor. Front D riv e r's side; 8 0

TOOTHED LOCK WASHER

P a ss e ng er's side: 10.5 °

CENTER ANCHOR/ LOWER ANCHOR

Second row

Inspection (cont'd) Center Second

row

In-vehicle 1. Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught on anything. 2. After installing the anchors, check for free movement on the anchor bo lts. If necessary, remove the anchor bolts and check that the washers and other parts are not damaged or improper ly installed.

In sid e

Third

F ro n t

row

3. Check the seat belts for damage or disco l oration. Clean with a shop towel if necessary. Use only soap and water to clean. NOTE: Dirt build up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. Wipe the inside of the l oops with a clean cloth dampened in isopropy l alcohol. 4. Check that the seat belt does not lock when pulled out s lo w l y . T h e s e a t b e lt is d e s i g n e d t o lo c k o n ly d u r i n g a

sudden stop or impact 5. Make sure that the seat belt w il l retract automatica l ly when released, 8. For each passenger's seat belt, check the seat belt retractor locking mechanism automatic locking retractor (ALR). This function is for securing chil d seats. 3. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there Is any abnormality. Do not disassembl e any part of the seat belt for any reason.

-1. Pull the seat belt all the way out to engage the ALR. The seat belt shou ld retract with a ratcheting sound, but not extend. This is norma l . -2. To disengage the ALR, rel ease the seat belt and allow it to fully retract, then pull the seat belt out part-way. The seat belt should retract and extend norma ll y, 7. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there is any abnormality. Do not disassembl e any part of the seat belt for any reason.

Third Row Child Seat Tether Anchor Replacement 1. Remove the rear trim panel (see step 2 on page 20-87). 2. Remove the screws (A), and remove the third row child seat tether anchors (B). A 8 x 1.25 m m 18 N-m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft)

3. Install the anchor in the reverse order of removal, and apply medium strength l iquid thread l ock to the threads of the child seat tether anchor screws.

Component Location Index r SRS INDlG ATO i (RED) Troubleshooting, page 24-192 SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR fAMBER) Troubleshooting, page 24-194 FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR (AMBER) Bulb test/Replacement, page 24-224

FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG Replacem ent page 24-200 Disposal, page 24-207 SRS UNIT Update, page 24-32 Replacem ent page 24-214 OPDS SENSOR /SEAT-BACK COVER/PAD Initialization, page 24-33 Rep l acem ent page 20-153

CABLE REEL Replacement, page 24-211

FRONT PASSENGER'S SIDE AIRBAG R eplacem ent page 24-202 Disposal, page 24-207

! U j \\

ODS UNIT Initialization, page 24-33 Operation Check, page 24-35 Replacem ent page 24-220

DRIVER’S AIRBAG Replacem ent page 24-139 Disposal, page 24-207

FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT BELT TENSIONER /E-PRETENSIONER Rep l acem ent page 24-4 Disposal, page 24-207

DATA LINK CONNECTOR

RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (FIRST) Rep l acem ent page 24-215

(DLC) Troubleshooting, page 11-209

FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSORS I nitialization, page 24-34 Replacem ent page 24-218

DRIVER'S SIDE AiRBAG Replacem ent page 24-202 Disposa l , page 24-207 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (FIRST) Replacem ent page 24-215

DRIVER’S SEAT POSITION SENSOR Operation Check, page 24-37 Replacem ent page 24-223

DRIVER'S SEAT BELT TENSIONER

/E-PRETENSIONER Rep l acem ent page 24-4 Disposa l , page 24-207

■E l

fSECOND) Rep l acement, page 24-218

Precautions and Procedures General Precautions

Steering-Related Precautions

NOTE: Some systems store data in memory that is lost when the battery is disconnected. Before disconnecting the battery, refer to Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95).

Cable Reel A lignm ent

Please read the following precautions carefully before servicing the airbag system. Observe the instructions described, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. • Except when doing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at l east 3 minutes before starting work. NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0) or the battery ■ cabl es are disconnected from the battery. • Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts. Do not install used SRS parts. Use on ly new parts when making SRS repairs. • Carefully inspect any SRS part before you insta l l it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation.

• Before disconnecting the SRS unit connectors, always disconnect the appropriate SRS parts connectors. • Use on ly a digita l multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. • Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag.

• Misalignment of the cabl e reel could cause an open in the wiring, making the SRS system, remote steering wheel controls, and the horn inoperative. Center the cable reel whenever you do the following (see step 8 on page 24-213). - Installation of the steering wheel - Installation of the cable reel - Install ation of the steering column - Other steering-re l ated adjustment or installation • Do not disassemble the cable reel, • Do not apply grease to the cabl e reel. • If the cable reel shows any signs of damage, replace it with a new one. For example, if the cable reel does not rotate smoothly, replace it.

£ Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemb le an airbag. It has no serviceabl e parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused.

# Store the removed airbag on a secure, f l at surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200 °F/ 93 °C).

For temporary storage of an airbag during service, observe the fo l lowing precautions. • Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put anything on the airbag.

• Never do electrical tests on the airbags, such as measuring resistance.

• To prevent damage to the airbag, keep it away from any oil, grease, detergent or water.

• Do not position yourse lf in front of the airbag during removal, inspection, or replacement

• For proper disposa l of a damaged airbag, refer to airbag disposal (see page 24-207).

Precautions and Procedures (cont'd) • The side curtain airbag module assembly is a long, jointed part containing an inflator (A), a f l exible bag (B), and brackets (C). When removing or insta l ling the side curtain airbag inflator assembly, never; - Handle the f lexib l e bag. - Drop the airbag assembly. - C u t, te a r , o r u n w r a p t h e t a p e s t r ip s .

SRS Unit, Front and Side Impact Sensors, Rear Safing Sensor, Driver's Seat Position Sensor, and Front Passenger's Weight Sensors NOTE: Some systems store data in memory that is lost when the battery is disconnected. Before disconnecting the battery, refer to Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95). • Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at l east 3 minutes before beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit or disconnecting the connectors from the SRS unit. • Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit, the front impact sensors, the side impact sensors, or the rear safing sensor when the ignition switch is in ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).

£ • During installation or replacement be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit, the front impact sensors, the side impact sensors, or the rear safing sensor. The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury.

• After a collision where the front airbag, the side curtain airbags, or the seat belt tensioner deployed, go to Component Repl acement/Inspection after Deployment (see page 24-196). • After a collision where the airbags or the side airbags do not deploy, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRS unit, the front impact sensors, the side impact sensors, and the rear safing sensor. Also, do the front seat active head restraint inspection (see page 20-138). Repl ace all damaged parts.

• Do not disassemble the SRS unit, the front impact sensors, the side impact sensors, the rear safing sensor, the driver's seat position sensor, or the front passenger's weight sensors. • A lways install the SRS unit, al l impact sensors and the rear safing sensor securely with new TORX bolts torqued to 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft). • Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit or any of the sensors.

Wiring Precautions Some of the SRS wiring can be identified by a special yell ow outer'covering and the SRS connectors can be identified by their yellow color. Observe the following instructions: • Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. If there is an open or damage to the SRS wiring, rep l ace the harness.

• Be sure to insta l l the harness wires so they do not get pinched or interfere with other parts.

• Make sure all SRS ground l ocations are clean, and the grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounds can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. • Do not use any silicone based cleaners or l ubricants on any SRS connectors or terminals.

(cont'd)

Precautions and Procedures (cont'd) Precautions for Electrical Inspections

SRS Unit Connectors

Special Tools Required

When diagnosing or troubleshooting at an SRS unit connector (A), use the termina l test port below the terminal you need to check. Gently insert the pin probes of the tester or jumper wire at the terminal test port from the terminal side.

Back Probe Adapter, 17 mm 07TAZ-001020A • Make sure the battery is fully charged when doing e lectrical test. If the battery is not fu l ly charged, the results of the tests may not be accurate. • When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector (except waterproof connectors). Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do not tamper with the connector.

T e r m in a l s id e o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

• Use back probe adaptor, 17 mm (07IA2-001020A). Do not insert the probe forcib ly.

• Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting. Using improper too ls could cause a diagnostic error due to poor metai-to-metal contact.

NOTE: • Do not insert the pin probes of the tester or a jumper wire at the term ina l port or the SRS short canceller termina l port. • To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do not insert the test equipment probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as they can damage the terminals, Damaged terminals cause a poor connection and an incorrect measurement.

Water Proof Connectors for SRS System

Lever-Locked Connector

When diagnosis/troub l eshooting is done at the water proof c o n n e c t o r (A), use the termina l test port above the terminal you need to check. Gently contact the pin probe of the tester or jumper wire at the terminal test port from the terminal side.

The SRS unit connectors have a lever lock.

T e rm in a l sid e o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

NOTE: • Do not insert the pin probe of the tester or a jumper wire into the terminal port. . • To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do not insert the test equipment probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as they can damage the terminals. Damaged terminals cause a poor connection and an incorrect measurement.

SRS U nit Connectors Disconnecting

To release the lock, pull the lever (A) while pushing the lock (B), on the outside of the connector, then pull out the connector (C).

Connecting

To reconnect the connector, push in on the connector sleeve (A). As the connector is pressed in, the lever (B) moves to the locked position. A

(cont'd)

Precautions and Procedures (cont'd) Spring-Loaded Lock Connector

Side Airbag Connector

Some SRS system connectors have a spring-l oaded lock.

Disconnecting

Front Airbag Connectors Disconnecting

To rel ease the lock, pu l l the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) w hi le holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half.

To rel ease the l ock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector.

Connecting Hold both connector halves, and press them firm ly together until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side connector cl icks. Connecting To reconnect ho l d the pawl-side connector, and press on the back of the sleeve-side connector in the direction shown. As the two connector halves are pressed together, the s leeve is pushed back by the pawl (C). Do not touch the sleeve.

Opening the SRS Unit Shorting Connectors for Diagnosis Special Tools Required SRS Short Cancel ler 07DAZ-SAA0100 NOTE: • To prevent damage to the connector cavity, in s e r t an SRS short canceller straight into the cavity from the terminal side. • Before installing an SRS short canceller, wash it with electrical contact c leaner, then dry it with compressed air. • Do not u s e an SRS short cancell er if it is damaged. • Make sure to remove an SRS short canceller before reconnecting the SRS unit connector. • Some system store data in memory that is lost when the battery is disconnected. Before disconnecting the battery, refer to Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-35). When SRS unit connectors A (39P) and B (39P) are disconnected, a short circuit is automatica l ly created in the connector to prevent accidental deployment of an airbag or tensioner, The circuit may need to be opened when diagnosing the system. Insert an SRS short canceller (070AZ-SAA0100) in the specified cavities when necessary to keep the circuit open for diagnosis.

Terminal numbers are shown from the wire side of the female terminals. Insert the SRS short canceller(s) into the cavities on the terminal side of the connector. SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (39PJ

I nsert SRS short

canceller(s) here.

W ire side o f fem ale term inals

SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (39P) .. If

9 999 999 1fi 20/'2lJ^2 2> 25 99 99 1 / / V %7 38 39U 1

6f 7 ip f ir

11

12 44 TK 26 27 X 9 \ J.

Insert SRS short canceller(s) here. Term inal side of female term inals

W ire side o f fem ale term inals

Precautions and Procedures (cont'd) Seats with Side Airbags

Disconnecting System Connectors

Seats with side airbags have a "S IDE A IRBAG" l abel on the seat-back.

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), Disconnect the negative cabl e from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes before starting work. Driver's Airbag 2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag inflator 4P connector (B) on the cable reel harness.

• Cl ean the seats with a damp cloth. Do not soak the seats with l iquid, Do not spray steam on the seats. • Do not repair a torn or frayed seat-back cover/pad. Replace the seat-back cover/pad if it is damaged. • After a collision where the side airbag was dep l oyed, replace the side airbag and the seat frame with new parts. If the seat-back cushion is sp l it, it must be rep l aced. Refer to Component Replacement/Inspection After Depl oyment (see page 24-136), • Never put aftermarket accessories on the seats (covers, pads, seat heaters, lights, etc.).

Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Remove the g l ove box (see page 20-124), 4. Remove the connector c l ip (A), then disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (B) from the front passenger's airbag.

&

Side Airbag

Seat Belt Tensioner

5. Disconnect both floor wire harness 2P connectors (A) from the driver's and front passenger's side airbags.

8. Remove the B-pillar l ower trim (see page 20-79). 9. Disconnect both floor wire harness 4P connectors (A) from the driver's and the front passenger’s seat belt tensioners.

Side Curtain Airbag 6. Remove the quarter-pil lar trim (see page 20-81). 7, Disconnect both floor wire harness 2P connectors (A) from the left and right side curtain airbags.

SRS U nit

10. Remove the center conso l e trim (see page 20-104). 11. Disconnect SRS unit connectors A (39P) and B (39P) from the SRS unit.

General Troubleshooting Information DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Codes)

Precautions

The self-diagnostic function of the SRS system all ows it to locate the causes of system prob lems and store this information in memory. For easier troubleshooting, this data can be retrieved with the HDS via the data link circuit • When you turn the ignition switch to ON (ll)f the SRS indicator comes on. If it goes off after 6 seconds, the system is normal with no problems detected. • If a prob l em is detected, the system l ocates and defines the problem, stores this information in memory, and turns on the SRS indicator on. The data remains in memory even if the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0) or the battery is disconnected. • The data is stored in memory as a diagnostic troub le code (DTC). • SRS DTCs are either l atching or resetting depending upon the malfunction. Latching DTCs cause the SRS system to l ight the SRS indicator until the prob l em is corrected and the DTCs are cleared. Resetting DTCs cause the SRS system to l ight the SRS indicator until the ignition switch is turned off, If the malfunction does not occur when the ignition switch is subsequently turned to ON (II), the SRS system turns off the SRS indicator, a lthough the DTCs are stil l stored until cleared. • When you connect the HDS to the data l ink connector (DLC), you can retrieve a more detailed DTC in the HDS i#SRS" menu. • After reading and recording the DTC, proceed with the troubleshooting procedure for that code.

• Use only a digital mu ltimeter to check the system. Make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the smallest va l ue in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output cou ld damage the airbag circuit or cause accidenta l airbag deployment and possible injury. • Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been turned to LOCK (0) for l ess than 3 minutes, be carefu l not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or Injuries. • Before removing the dashboard wire harness or floor wire harness, disconnect the driver's airbag connector, the front passenger's airbag connector, both side airbag connectors, both side curtain airbag connectors, and both seat belt tensioner connectors. • Make sure the battery is fu ll y charged. If the battery is dead or low, electrical measurements may not be correct. • Do not touch a tester probe to the termina ls in the SRS unit or harness connectors, and do not connect the SRS unit terminals or the sensor terminals with a jumper wire. Use only the back probe set and the multimeter to back probe spring-loaded lock type connectors correctly.

£ How to Retrieve DTCs

How to Clear DTCs

NOTE; Make sure the battery is fu l ly charged before you begin.

NOTE: Make sure the battery is fully charged before you begin.

1. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).

1. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).

2. Connect the HDS to the data l ink connector (DLC) (A).

2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A).

3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),

3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS u nit If it does not communicate, inspect the power l ine of SRS unit, fuses, and ground, and if there is not any abnormality found, then troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209).

4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS u n it If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-203).

5. Use the HDS to check for DTCs. 8. Read and record the DTC. 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then wait for 10 seconds. 8. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. 9. Do the troub l eshooting procedure for the DTC.

5. In the SRS MENU of the HDS, select SRS, then DTC to clear DTCs. 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then wait for 10 seconds. 7. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)

SRS Unit Update

Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures

Special Tools Required • Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) tablet tester • Honda Interface Module (HI M) and an iN workstation with the l atest HDS software version • HDS Pocket Tester • GNA600 and an iN workstation with the latest HDS software version • MVCI unit with the l atest control module (CM) update software installed

If there was a malfunction that sets a DTC, but it does not recur, It will be stored in the memory as an intermittent fail ure, and the SRS indicator may come on depending on the malfunction detected, NOTE; • Check the condition of the battery (see page 22-94), and the charging system (see page 4-28). Low battery voltage may cause some intermittent failures. • A fau lty cabl e reel can cause intermittent connections which w i ll produce driver's airbag inf l ator DTCs. After checking the DTC, troub l eshoot as fo l lows; 1. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see How to Retrieve DTCs). 2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see How to Cl ear DTCs). 3. Set the parking brake, then start the engine, and let it idle. 4. The SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off, 5. Shake the related wire harnesses and the connectors. Look for loose connections and poor grounds. 8. Take a test-drive (quick acceleration, quick braking, and cornering). Turn the steering wheel fully left and right, and holding it at full l ock for 5 to 10 seconds. If the problem recurs, the SRS indicator w il l come on. 7, If you cannot dup l icate the concern, ask the customer about the conditions when it occurred, or ask the customer to demonstrate the concern. 8. If you cannot duplicate the intermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time.

Any one of the above updating tools can be used. NOTE: • Make sure the HDS/iN workstation or MVCI has the latest HDS software version, • Before you update the SRS unit, make sure the battery in the vehicle is fu l ly charged. • Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or ACC (I) during the update. If there is a prob l em with the update, leave the ignition switch in ON (II). • To prevent SRS unit damage, do not operate anything e lectrica l (headlights, audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof (if equipped), door locks, etc.) during the update. • To ensure the latest program is installed, do an SRS unit update whenever the SRS unit is rep laced. • You cannot update an SRS unit with a program it already has. It will only accept a new program. • If you need to diagnose the HIM because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, l eave the ignition switch in ON (II ) when you disconnect the HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This w il l prevent SRS unit damage.

£ ODS Unit Initialization 1. M ake sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0). 2. Connect the HDS to the data l ink connector (DLC) (A).

NOTE: • After ODS unit is replaced, do this procedure to initia l ize the ODS unit. • ODS unit initialization will initialize both OPDS sensor and front passenger's weight sensor.

OPDS Sensor Initialization When you replace a seat-back cover/pad, and/or ODS unit initialize the OPDS sensor with the HDS.

3. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o O N (II), b u t d o n o t s t a r t t h e e n g in e , 4. M a k e s u r e t h e u p d a t i n g t o o l c o m m u n i c a t e s w i t h t h e

NOTE: • A new (uninitialized) ODS unit installed with a fau lty OPDS sensor can cause DTC 85-71 and DTC 85-78. • Before initializing the ODS unit, make sure the battery is fully charged. • Make sure all components of the front passenger's seat are correctly installed, • Make sure nothing is the front passenger's seat. • Make s u r e there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket. • Keep the A/C and the heater off.

v e h i c l e a n d t h e S R S u n it . If it d o e s n o t c o m m u n i c a t e , t r o u b l e s h o o t t h e D L C c i r c u i t (s e e p a g e 11 -2 0 9 ). 5. S e l e c t t h e u p d a t e p r o g r a m , a n d f o l l o w t h e s c r e e n p r o m p t s t o u p d a t e t h e S R S u n it . 6. If t h e s o f t w a r e in t h e S R S u n i t is t h e la te s t, d i s c o n n e c t t h e u p d a t i n g t o o l f r o m t h e D LC , a n d g o b a c k t o t h e p r o c e d u r e t h a t y o u w e r e d o i n g . If t h e s o f t w a r e in t h e S R S u n i t is n o t t h e l a te s t, f o l l o w t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s o n th e scre e n . N O T E : If y o u r u n i n t o a p r o b l e m d u r i n g t h e u p d a t e p r o c e d u r e ( p r o g r a m m i n g t a k e s o v e r 15 m i n u t e s , s ta tu s b a r g o e s o v e r 100 % , D o r im m o b iliz e r lig h t f l a s h e s , H D S t a b le t fr e e z e s , e tc .), f o l lo w t h e s e s t e p s t o m in im iz e th e c h a n c e o f d a m a g in g th e SRS u n i t : • L e a v e t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h in O N (I I) p o s i t i o n , • C onnect

a ju m p e r

b a t t e r y (d o n o t c o n n e c t

a b a tte ry

ch a rg e r). • S h u t d o w n t h e u p d a t i n g t o o l. • D i s c o n n e c t t h e u p d a t i n g t o o l f r o m t h e D LC . • R e b o o t th e u p d a tin g to o l. • R e c o n n e c t th e u p d a tin g to o l to th e DLC, a n d tr y th e u p d a t e p r o c e d u r e a g a in . 7. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h t o L O C K (0), t h e n w a i t f o r 10 s e c o n d s .

8. Disconnect the updating tool from the DLC.

(cont'd)

ODS Unit Initialization (cont'd) 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2. Set the seat-back in a norma l position. 3. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0). 4. Connect the HDS to the data l ink connector (DLC) (A).

5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 8. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209). 7. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then INITIALIZATION. In the INITIALIZATION Menu, select ODS Initia l ization. Follow the prompts until the OPDS sensor initialization has been completed. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then wait for 10 seconds. 9. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. NOTE; If the ODS unit fails to initialize after several attempts, replace the OPDS sensor/seat-back and retry. If the ODS unit continues to fai l to initia l ize, replace the ODS unit (see page 24-220).

Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Initialization When you replace the SRS unit, the front passenger's weight sensors, the front passenger's seat assembly, or the ODS unit, initialize the front passenger's weight sensor with the HDS. NOTE: • Before initializing the front passenger's weight sensor, make sure the battery is fully charged. • Make sure all components of the front passenger's seat are correctly insta l led. • Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat. • Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket, • Keep the windows and the moonroof closed. • Do all initialization procedures, except test-driving, in the service bay. • Make sure the vehicle is on level ground, • Keep the A/C and the heater off. • Do not touch the front passenger's seat until you are prompted to or when you have comp leted the initialization. • Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden temperature changes.

ODS Unit Operation Check 1. Position the front passenger's seat a l l the way r e a r w a r d , a n d a d ju s t t h e s e a t- b a c k t o t h e f o r w a r d

most position. Do not move the seat from this position unti l the initia l ization is comp l eted. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A).

After Replacing Front Passenger's Seat Component(s) NOTE: Check the ODS unit operation after any of these actions: • Front passenger’s seat componentfs) replacement • SRS unit replacement • Remove the front passenger's weight sensor(s) • After a vehic le co l lision (see page 24-36)

Pre-Operation Check Set-Up

4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 5, Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS u nit If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209). 8. Drive the vehic le, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on l evel ground. 7. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then INITIALIZATION. In the INITIALIZATION Menu, select SWS I nitialization. Foll ow the prompts until the front passenger's weight sensor initialization has been completed. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then wait for 10 seconds. 3. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.

• Make sure all the components of the front passenger's seat are correctly installed, • Position the front passenger's seat to the rearmost position. Adjust the seat-back to the forward most position. Do not move the seat from this position until the operation check is comp l eted. • Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat, including after market seat covers or mats. • Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket, • Keep the windows and the moonroof closed. • Do all Initialization procedures, except test-driving, in the service bay. • Make sure the vehic le is on l evel ground. • Turn the heater and the A/C off. • Do not touch the front passenger's seat during the operation check. • Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden temperature changes, • Make sure a l l aftermarket devices such as amplifiers, f l uorescent lig h t air purifiers, CB, or HAM radios, etc. are turned off.

ODS Unit Operation Check (cont'd)

F r o n t P a s s e n g e r 's W e i g h t S e n s o r O u t p u t C h e c k A f t e r a V e h i c l e C o l l is i o n

1. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 22 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground.

NOTE: Check the front passenger's weight sensor output after this action; • After a vehic le co l lision

2. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A).

// // //

/ / /

f ,Y r x \\ \ \

X

9

4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. If it does not communicate, troub l eshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-203). 6. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then I nspection. In the Inspection Menu, select AFTER REPLACING FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT COMPONENT(S). Follow the prompts unti l the ODS unit operation check has been completed. 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 8. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC,

Pre-Operation Check Set-Up • Make sure al l the components of the front passenger’s seat are correctly installed. • Position the front passenger's seat to the rearmost position. Adjust the seat-back to the forward most position. Do not move the seat from this position until the operation check is comp leted. • Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat, including after market seat covers or mats. • Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket. • Keep the windows and the moonroof closed. • Do all Initialization procedures, except test-driving, in the service bay, • Make sure the vehic le is on level ground. • Turn the heater and the A/C off. • Do not touch the front passenger’s seat during the operation check, • Do not expose the front passenger’s seat to sudden temperature changes. • Make sure al l aftermarket devices such as amp l ifiers, fluorescent lig h t air purifiers, CB, or HAM radios, etc. are turned off.

Driver's Seat Position Sensor Operation Check 1. Drive the vehic l e, accelerate to 22 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground.

Check the driver's seat position sensor after the driver's seat position sensor replacement.

2. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).

1. Make sure the driver's seat is in the all the way forward position.

3. Connect the HDS to the data l ink connector (DLC) (A).

2. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A).

4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209). 6. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Inspection. In the Inspection Menu, select AFTER A VEHICLE COLLISION. Fol low the prompts until the front passenger's weight sensor output check has been completed. 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.

4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209). 8. From the HDS Main Menu, sel ect SRS, then PARAMETER INFORMATION. In the PARAMETER INFORMATION Menu, select Buckl e Switch, Seat Position Sensor.

Driver's Seat Position Sensor Operation Check (cont'd)

E-Pretensioner Operation Check

7, Using two pieces of tape (A), make alignment marks (B) on the seat's outer cover (C) and the front door si l l trim (D) as shown. The driver's seat position sensor shou l d read NEAR,

1. Shift the transmission to the P position, and release the parking brake, 2. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A).

4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8, Move the seat back In sma l l Increments (about 5 mm, 0.2 in) until the driver's seat position sensor reads NOT NEAR. The seat should be about 50 mm (1.97 in) from the front.

5, Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -203).

NOTE: It takes a few seconds for the HDS to display changes, so wait for about 5 seconds between each movement

8. Sit in the driver's and front passenger's seat and fasten the seat belts.

If the driver's seat position sensor data does not work

7. Make sure the SRS indicator comes on for about 8 seconds after turning the ignition switch to ON (II), then goes off. If the SRS indicator does not come on, check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

as described above, check the driver's seat position sensor for damage, and rep lace parts as needed. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then wait for 10 seconds. 10, Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.

NOTE; Have an assistant hel p you in the step.

NOTE: If any DTC is indicated, do the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, then go to step 8. 8. Start the engine, 9. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then FUNCTION TEST. In the FUNCTION TEST Menu, select E-Pretensioner for CMBS. Follow the prompts until the E-pretensioner operation check has been completed. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then wait for 10 seconds. 11. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.

DTC Troubleshooting Index DTC 11-1X 11-2x 11-3x

11-8x

Detection Item Open in the driver's airbag first inflator Increased resistance in the driver's airbag first inflator Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the driver's airbag first inf l ator Open in the driver's airbag second inflator I ncreased resistance in the driver's airbag second inflator Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the driver's airbag second inflator Short to power in the driver's airbag first inflator

11-9x

Short to ground in the driver's airbag first inflator

11-Ax

Short to power in the driver's airbag second inf l ator

11-Bx

Short to ground in the driver's airbag second inflator

12-1 x 12-2x 12-3x

Open in the front passenger's airbag first inflator I ncreased resistance in the front passenger's airbag first inflator Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the front passenger's airbag first inflator Open in the front passenger's airbag second inflal Increased resistance in the front passenger's airbag second inflator Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the front passenger's airbag second inflator Short to power in the front passenger's airbag first inflator

11-4x 11-5x 11-6x

12-4x 12-5x 12-6x

Notes DTC Troub leshooting (see page 24-60) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-82) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-1 DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 24-62) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-64) DTC Troubleshooting' (see page 24-66) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-64) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-66) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-68) DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 24-69) DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 24-68)

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-69) 12~8x DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-71) DTC Troubleshooting 12-9x Short to ground in the front passenger's airbag first inflator (see page 24-72) 12-Ax Short to power in the front passenger's airbag second inf l ator DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-71) Short to ground in the front passenger's airbag second inflator DTC Troubleshooting 12-Bx (see page 24-72) NOTE: The "x " at the end of each DTC denotes a numeric character (0 thru 9) or an alpha character (A thru F) that you w i l l see on the HDS display. The character is unrelated to your troub l eshooting; it designates the SRS unit manufacturer and other detail used for product analysis.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)

21-8x

Detection Item Open in the driver's seat belt tension Increased resistance in the driver's seat belt tensioner Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the driver's seat belt tensioner Short to power in the driver's seat belt tensioner

21-9x

Short to ground in the driver's seat belt tensioner

22-1x 22-2x 22-3x 22~8x

Open in the front passenger's seat belt tensioner Increased resistance in the front passenger's seat belt tensioner Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the front passenger’s seat belt tensioner Short to power in the front passenger's seat belt tensioner

22-3x

Short to ground in the front passenger's seat belt tensioner

31-lx 31-2x 31-3x

Open in the driver's side airbag inflator Increased resistance in the driver's side airbag inflator Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the driver's side airbag inflator Short to power in the driver’s side airbag inflator

DTC 21-1x 21-2x 21-3x

Notes DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 24-74) DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 24-75) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-77) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-1 DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-80) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-81) DTC Troubleshoot (see page 24-83) DTC Troubleshoot (see page DTC Troubleshoot (see page 24-88)

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-87) DTC Troub l eshooting 31-8x (see page 24-89) Short to ground in the driver's side airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting 31-9x (see page 24-90) NOTE: The "x" at the end of each DTC denotes a numeric character (0 thru 9) or an a l pha character (A thru F) that you will see on the HDS disp l ay. The character is unrelated to your troubleshooting; it designates the SRS unit manufacturer and other detail used for product analysis.

DTC 32-1x 32~2x 32~3x 32-8X

otion Iter Open in the front passenger's side airbag inflator Increased resistance in the front passenger’s side airbag inflate Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the front passenger's side airbag inf l ator Short to power in the front passenger's side airbag inf l ator

32-3x

Short to ground in the front passenger's side airbag inflator

33-1 x 33-2x 33-3x 33-8x

Open in the left side curtain airbag inf l ator Increased resistance in the left side curtain airbag inflator Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the left side curtain airbag inflator Short to power in the l eft side curtain airbag inf l ator

33-3x

Short to ground in the left side curtain airbag inf l ator

34-1x 34-2x 34-3x 34-8x

Open in the right side curtain airbag inf lator Increased resistance in the right side curtain airbag inflator Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the right side curtain airbag inflator Short to power in the right side curtain airbag inflator

34-9x

Short to ground in the right side curtain airbag inf l ator

4M x

No signal from the left front impact sensor

42-1 x

No signal from the right front impact sensor

41-2x 41-8x 41-9x 41-Ax 41-Bx 42-2x 42-8x 42-9x 42-Ax 42-Bx 43-1 x

I nternal fai l ure of the l eft front impact sensor

I nterna l fai l ure of the right front impact sensor

Notes DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-92) DTC Troubleshooting (see page DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-95) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-96) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-98) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-99) DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 24-101) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-102) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-104) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-105) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-107) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-108) DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 24-110) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-112) DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 24-114)

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-114)

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-115) DTC Troubleshooting 44“ 1x No signal from the right side impact sensor (first) (see page 24-119) 45-1 x No signal from the left side impact sensor (second) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-116) DTC Troub l eshooting 48-1 x No signal from the right side impact sensor (second) (see page 24-119) NOTE: The "x" at the end of each DTC denotes a numeric character (0 thru 3) or an alpha character (A thru F) that you will see on the HDS display. The character is unrelated to your troub l eshooting; it designates the SRS unit manufacturer and other detail used for product analysis. No signal from the left side impact sensor (first)

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd) DTC 43~2x 43~8x 43-3x 43-Ax 43-Bx 44~2x 44~8x 44-3x 44-Ax 44-Bx 45-2x 45-8x 45-9x 45-Ax 45-Bx 46-2x 46-8x 48-9x 48-Ax 48>Bx 51-xx 52-xx 53-xx 54-xx 55-xx 57-xx 58-xx 53-FF 58-21 56^22

Detection Item Interna l fail ure of the left side impact sensor (first)

Motes DTC Troubleshoot (see page 24-124)

Internal failure of the right side impact sensor (first)

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-124)

Interna l fail ure of the left side impact sensor (second)

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-125)

Internal fail ure of the right side impact sensor (second)

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-125)

I nterna l fail ure of the SRS unit

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-128)

SRS unit programming error

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-128) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-127)

Lost communication with the PCM (PGM-FI system) Undefined data received from the PCM (PGM-FI system)

....56^23.... NOTE: The "xMat the end of each DTC denotes a numeric character (0 thru 9) or an alpha character (A thru F) that you will see on the HDS display. The character is unrelated to your troubleshooting; it designates the SRS unit manufacturer and other detail used for product analysis.

DTC 56-25

Detection Item Lost communication with the gauge contro l module

56-26 56-27 61-1x

Undefined data received from the gauge control module Open in the driver's seat belt buckle switch

61-2x

Short in the driver's seat be lt buckle switch

62-1 x

Open in the front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch

62-2x

Short in the front passenger's seat belt buckle switch

71-1x

Open in the driver's seat position sensor

71-2x

Short in the driver's seat position sensor

73-12

Open in the driver's E-pretensioner motor

73-14

Short to Ground in the driver's E-pretensioner motor

73-15

Short to Power in the driver's E-pretensioner motor

74-22

Open in the front passenger's E-pretensioner motor

74-24

Short to Ground in the front passenger's E-pretensioner motor

74-25

Short to Power in the front passenger's E-pretensioner motor

76-31

Faulty F-CAN communication (ACC system) Faulty F-CAN communication (VSA system) Faulty F-CAN communication (PGM-FI system) Faulty F-CAN communication (A/T system) Faulty F-CAN communication (SRS system)

76-32 76-33 76-34 76-36 76-37 7S-4x 75-Sx 76-63 76-47 76-48

or internal failure of the E-pretensioner unit or interna l failure of the E-pretensioner unit or internal failure of the E-pretensioner unit

Notes DTC Troub leshooting (see page 24-128) DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 24-130) DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 24-130) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-133) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-135) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-138) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-139) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-141) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-142) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-143) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-144) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-145) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-147) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-148) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-149) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-151) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-152)

or interna l failure of the E-pretensioner unit or internal failure of the E-pretensioner unit

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-154)

I nterna l fai l ure of the E-Pretensioner unit

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-158)

Faulty power supply to the front passenger's E-pretensioner motor

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-158) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-157) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-158)

Faulty power supply to the driver's E-pretensioner motor

76-61 No signal from the E-Pretensioner unit 76-62 Non-Stipulated response data from the E-Pretensioner unit NOTE: The "x" at the end of each DTC denotes a numeric character (0 thru 9) or an alpha character (A thru F) that you will see on the HDS disp l ay. The character is unrelated to your troub l eshooting; it designates the SRS unit manufacturer and other detail used for product analysis.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd) DTC 81-4x 81-63 81-64 81-61 81-62 81-71 81-78 81-79

ction Item Internal failure of the ODS unit

No signal from the ODS unit Incorrect data from the ODS unit ODS unit not cal ibrated

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-162)

Front passenger's weight sensors initia l check failure

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-165) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-166) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-169) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-169) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-170) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-172) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-173) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-173)

82-11

No signa l from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor

82-12

No signa l from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor

82-13

No signal from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor

83-21

No signal from the outer side front passenger’s weight sensor

83-22

No signal from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor

83-23

No signa l from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor

85~4x 85-63 85-64 85-61 85-62 85-71 85-78 85-79

Internal fail ure of the ODS unit

86-1 x 88-2x 32~1x

Notes DTC Troub leshooting (see page 24-161)

No signa l from the ODS unit I ncorrect data from the ODS unit

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-165)

DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 24-174)

ODS unit not initialized

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-177)

OPDS sensor initial check failure

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-177) DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 24-178)

Faulty OPDS seat-back sens Faulty OPDS seat support sensor Short to power in the front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-179) 32-2x Open or short to ground in the front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-180) NOTE: The "x" at the end of each DTC denotes a numeric character (0 thru 9) or an alpha character (A thru F) that you w il l see on the HDS disp l ay. The character is unre lated to your troub l eshooting; it designates the SRS unit manufacturer and other detail used for product analysis.

i3 DTC A1-1x

Faulty power supply (VA line)

Detection Item

A2-1x

Faulty power supply (VB line)

A3~1x

SRS unit connector A not properly installed

A4-1x

SRS unit connector B not properly insta ll ed

B2~1x

No signal from the rear safing sensor

B2~2x B2-8x B2-9x B2-Ax B2-Bx Ex-11

I nterna l fai l ure of the rear safing sensor

Notes DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-182) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-183) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-184) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-184) DTC Troub leshooting (see page 24-185) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 24-187)

DTC Troub l eshooting (see page DTC Troub l eshooting Airbags and/or tensioners dep loyment recorded Fx-11 (see page 24-188) NOTE: The "x" at the end of each DTC denotes a numeric character (0 thru 9) or an alpha character (A thru F) that you will see on the HDS display. The character is unrelated to your troubleshooting; it designates the SRS unit manufacturer and other detail used for product analysis. Control operation recorded

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd) Only read DTCs from the SRS menu, not from SWS menus unless instructed to check SWS DTCs. SWS (ODS unit) DTCs are subcodes of SRS unit DTCs. Only troub l eshoot the corresponding SRS DTCs. Also these SWS DTCs are cleared by turning the ignition switch to LOCK(O). SW S DTC index

SRS Unit DTC 81-4x

SWS DTC 41-xx 42-xx 43-xx 71-xx

Detection Item Internal fail ure of the ODS unit

DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 24-132) No Signal From the I nner Side Front Passenger’s tM x DTC Troub l eshooting 82-11 Weight Sensor (see page 24-188) 12-2x No Signal From the I nner Side Front Passenger's DTC Troubleshooting 82-12 Weight Sensor (see page 24-183) No Signal From the I nner Side Front Passenger's 82-13 DTC Troubleshooting 13-3x Weight Sensor (see page 24-189) 83-21 21 -1x No Signal From the Outer Side Front Passenger's DTC Troub leshooting Weight Sensor (see page 24-130) 83-22 22-2x No Signal From the Outer Side Front Passenger's DTC Troubleshooting Weight Sensor (see page 24-190) 23-3x No Signal From the Outer Side Front Passenger's DTC Troubleshooting 83-23 Weight Sensor (see page 24-191) NOTE; The "x" at the end of each DTC denotes a numeric character (0 thru 9) or an alpha character (A thru F) that may also see on the HDS disp l ay. The alphanumeric character is unrelated to your DTC troubleshooting; it is used by the SRS unit manufacturer. 81-71

ODS unit not calibrated

3tes DTC Troub l eshooting (see page 24-131)

Symptom Troubleshooting Index Symptom SRS indicator does not come on

Diagnostic procedure Symptom Troub l eshooting (see page 24-192)

SRS indicator stays on, but no DTCs are stored, or cannot be read

Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 24-133)

Side airbag cutoff indicator flashes

Check for DTCs. If any DTC is indicated, go to the DTC troubleshooting

Side airbag cutoff indicator stays on

Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 24-134)

Side airbag cutoff indicator does not come on

Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 24-194)

Front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator flashes

Check for DTCs. If any DTC is indicated, go to the DTC troubleshooting

Front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator stays on or comes on suddenly Front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator does not come on HDS does not communicate with the SRS unit or the vehicle

Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 24-195)

Check for DTCs. If any DTC is indicated, go to the DTC troubleshooting Troub l eshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209)

Also check for Communication with the HDS • Charging system for under or overcharging • Communication with the HDS • ODS unit initia l ization • Communication with the HC Communication with the I • ODS unit initialization • Communication with the HDS • Communication with the HDS • ODS unit initia l ization Communication with the HDS Communication with the HDS Communication with the HDS

System Description SRS Components Airbags The SRS is a supp lemental safety device which, when used with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front passenger in a impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS u n it including safing sensor and impact sensor (A), the cabl e reel (B), the driver's airbag (C), the front passenger's airbag (D), the side airbags (E), the side curtain airbags (F), the seat belt tensioners (G), the side impact sensors (first) (H), the front impact sensors (I ), the rear safing sensor (J), the side impact sensors (second) (K). Since the driver's and front passenger's airbags use the same sensors, both norma l ly inflate at the same time. However, it is possib le for only one airbag to inf l ate. This can occur when collision severity is near thresho l d for airbag deployment, In such case, the SRS system w il l only deploy airbags when the protection provided by the seat belt is insufficient. Front Passenger's Weight Sensors The front passenger's weight sensors (L) are part of the seat base. The front passenger's weight sensors detect the weight on the seat, and send the information to the ODS unit (M). If the tota l weight is about 30 kg (65 lbs) or less, the ODS unit sends a signa l to the SRS unit to prevent the passenger’s airbag from deploying. When the passenger's airbag is disabled, the passenger airbag cutoff indicator (N) on the center panel comes on to a l ert the driver that the front passenger's airbag w i l l not deploy in a front-end collision. NOTE: The sensors on ly detect the weight on the seat, The sensors do not detect the weight of the passenger's l egs or arms that may be resting on the floor or armrests. Driver's Seat Position Sensor The driver's seat position sensor (0) is under the driver's seat on the right side. When the driver's seat is moved to the forward most position, the deployment of the driver's airbag is moderated to decrease its force of impact during a front-end collision.

Hear Safing Sensor The rear safing sensor is located under the second row seat. The rear safing sensor does the same basic function as the safing sensor in the SRS u n it It measures sideways G force, such as the force the vehic l e wou l d receive in a side coll ision in the rear, and sends that information to the SRS u n it The SRS unit uses that information, and the information from the second side impact sensors to determine the side that is impacted and the force. If the threshold is met, the SRS unit deploys the side airbag, the side curtain airbag and the seat belt tensioner on that side.

Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator/ODS Operation The OPDS sensors (P) is located on the front passenger's seat- back foam pad. The ODS unit detects front passenger's position on the seat by using the OPDS sensors, then sends the signa l s to the SRS unit. The indicator comes on if the front passenger's seat is occupied by a small adu lt or child who is l eaning into the deployment path, or when an object (grocery bag, briefcase, purse, etc.) is in the seat. This indicates the passenger's side airbag is off and will not deploy; there is no prob lem with the side airbag. If the passenger sits upright or moves to another seat, or you remove the object from the seat, the indicator shou ld go off. There will be some delay between the occupant's repositioning and when the indicator w il l turn on or off.

Passenger Airbag Cutoff Indicator/Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Operation The indicator comes on if the weight of the front passenger is about 30 kg (65 lbs) or less. This indicates the passenger's front airbag is off and will not dep l oy. The front airbag is shut off to reduce the chance of airbag-caused injuries.

SRS Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and analyzes the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regu lator and the back-up power circuit will keep voltage at a constant level. For the S IS to operate: Seat Beit Tensioners (1) The front impact sensor, the side impact sensor or the' rear safing sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor. (2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and trigger the tensioners. (3) The charges must ignite and deploy the tensioners. Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s)

(1) The front impact sensor must activate and send el ectric signals to the microprocessor. (2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and trigger the airbag inflator(s). (3) The triggered inflators that received signals must ignite and deploy the airbags. Side Airbag(s) (1) The side impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor. (2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and trigger the side airbag inflator(s). However, the microprocessor does not trigger the front passenger's side airbag if the SRS unit determines that the front passenger's head is in the deployment path of the side airbag. (3) The triggered inflators must ignite and deploy the side airbag.

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Side Curtain Airbag(s) (1) The side impact sensor or the rear safing sensor must activate and send electrical signals to the microprocessor. (2) The microprocessor must compute the signa l s and trigger the side curtain airbag and side airbag inflator(s). (3) The triggered inflators must ignite and dep loy the side curtain airbag and side airbag at the same time.

Self-Diagnostic System

A se lf-diagnostic circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the SRS indicator comes on and goes off after about 8 seconds if the system is operating normally. If the indicator does not come on, or does not go off after 8 seconds, or comes on while driving, it indicates an abnormality in the system. The system must be inspected and repaired as soon as possib l e.

For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores DTCs related to the cause of the ma lfunction, and the unit is connected to the data link connector (DLC). This information can be read with the HDS when it is connected to the DLC (see page 24-30). NOTE; Before you disconnect the negative cab le from the battery for troub leshooting, review Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95). E-Pretensioner

When at a risk of a collision, the E-pretensioner system, working with the co l lision mitigation braking system (CMBS), retracts the driver's and front passenger's seat belt several times s l ight ly to provide a tactile warning to the driver. And when a collision is imminent, the E-pretensioner system retracts the seat belt tightly to help reduce injury from the impact. The E-pretensioner system also works when the driver brakes hard and the brake assist system is turned on.

CMBS and E-pretensioner Operation Approaching a vehicle ahead: When driving, the m i l limeter wave radar detects a vehic le ahead, and the system provides audib le and visua l warnings if it detects a risk of collision.

Cl osing on a vehic le ahead: The system applies light braking, and increases seat belt tension sl ightly to provide a tactile warning to the driver. The front passenger does not fee l the tactile warning.

Coll ision unavoidable: The system activates strong braking, and securely tightens both the driver's and front passenger's seat belts to hel p reduce injury caused by the impact.

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) E-Pretensioner

The mechanical portion of the E-pretensioner consists of the motor and the gear sections. The coll ision mitigation braking system and the brake assist system sends signa l s to the motor in the retractor to retract or rewind the belt, if the system judges that the driving situation is safe, the tension on the seat belts is re l eased. The E-pretensioners used in conjunction with the conventional tensioners.

E-Pretensioner Unit

The E-pretensioner unit operates the motor-driving controls based on F-CAN data it receives from the ACC unit, VSA modu lator-contro l unit, and the PCM. Also the E-pretensioner unit receives seat be lt buckle switch signals from the SRS unit by an interactive communication function. The E-pretensioner unit has a self-diagnostic function, and if it detects a malfunction, it sends its information to the SRS unit. The SRS indicator is then turned on by the SRS unit. F-CAN

------ F-CANline

SRS Unit Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (39P)

u 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 /

/ /

/

/

/

26 27 28 29 / IT ....

16 17 18

31 /

20 /

/

/

/

/ / / X 38 37 38 39 U

Wire side of female terminals

Terminal Number 3 4 5 6 7 8

Wire Color

Terminal Name

.......i l .......... 18

BRN* LT BLU* BLU* YEL* PUR* GRN* LT BLU* LT GRN* RED*

LA1 — LA1 + RA1 — RA1 + LA2— LA2 + RA2RA2+ F-CAN A L

17

WHT#

F-CAN A H

18 K-LINE 20 PIT 20 YEL* VA 27 RED* VB 28 BLK* SRS GND 1 23 BLK* M rsgndT GRY* WEN 31 36 BRN* 37 RED* 38 LT BLU* RFS — GRN* 39 RFS+ *: Wire colors may be substituted in this table.

Description Ground for the driver's airbag first inflator Power source for the driver's airbag first inflator Ground for the front passenger's airbag first inflator Power source for the front passenger's airbag first inflator Ground for the driver's airbag second inf l ator Power source for the driver's airbag second inflator Ground for the front passenger's airbag second inflator Power source for the front passenger's airbag second inflator Sends and receives communication signa l from the gauge contro l modu l e Sends and receives communication signal from the gauge control module Sends and receives scan too l signa l (serial data) Front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator output line SRS system sub power (common with ODS) SRS dedicated power (dedicated booster circuit) Ground circuit for the SRS unit (G505) Ground circuit for the SRS unit (G505) Data link connector (10-11 mode l ) Ground for the left front impact sensor Power source for the left front impact sensor Ground for the right front impact sensor Power source for the right front impact sensor

System Description (cont'd) SRS Unit Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (39P)

U

999 999 9 99 99999 1 /

12 13 14 15

\E

27

u

6

7

8

9 10 11

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 38 37 38 39 0

W ire side of female term inals

Wire Color

Terminal Name

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 30

GRN* RED* GRN* BLU* W H I# BLU* B BRN* RED* LT BLU* GRN* YEL* WHT* BLU* ORN* BLU* RED* GRY# BLU* RED* iRY*

ODS LSALSA+ RSARSA+ LC A 1LCA1 + LRP— LRP+ RRP^

37

PNK*

LBS1 +

38

LT GRN*

RBS1-

33

BRN*

RBS1 +

Terminal Number 1 6 7

...*..... T

bsc .... LBSO .“ .......RlSCf^ RBSO SS + RCA1....... ..RCA1 + sssSSS + LBS1 —

*: Wire co lors may be substituted in this tab le.

Description Sends and receives communication signal with the ODS unit Ground for the driver's side airbag inf lat< Power source for the driver’s side airbag inflc Ground for the front passenger's side airbag infla Power source for the front passenger's side airbag inflator Ground for the left side curtain airbag inflatoi Power source for the left side curtain airbag inflat Ground for the driver's seat belt tension* Power source for the driver's seat belt tensioner Ground for the front passenger's seat belt tensioner Power source for the front passenger's seat be lt tensioner Driver's seat belt buckle switch unbuckled signal Driver's seat be lt buckle switch buckled signal Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch unbuckled signal Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch buckled signa l Driver's seat position sensor Ground for the right side curtain airbag inflator Power source for right side curtain airbag inflator Ground for the rear safing sensor Power source for the rear safing sensor Ground for the l eft side impact sensor (first), left side impact sensor (second) Power source for the l eft side impact sensor (first), l eft side impact sensor (second) Ground for the right side impact sensor (first), right side impact sensor (second) Power source for the right side impact sensor (first), right side impact sensor (second)

Circuit Diagram

MAIN

G501

G505

i Wire color may be substituted for SRS circuits : F-CAN line : Other communication line

FRONT PASSENGiER'S AIRBAG SECOND INFLATOF

FRONT PASSENG;e r 'S AIRBAG FIRST INFLATOf RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR

LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR

I BRN*

I RED*

"i —i

dp iI 4

1

2

3

RIGHT 1 » ENGINE LT BLU* GRN* COMPARTMENT WIRE HARNESS

37

p

b

4P | -

YEL*

LT BLU* GRN*

A36

2

3

CABLE REEL

4P L

DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS

DRIVER'S AIRBAG SECOND INFLATOR

-(w v )-

1 LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT WIRE HARNESS

DRIVER'S AIRBAG FIRST INFLATOI3

38

8

39

RA1 +

LFS+ SS+

BLU*

LTGRN* LT BLU*

5

10

9

RA1RA2+ SRS UNIT

LBSC

Dl

FLOOR WIRE HARNESS

4

3

2

1

LT BLU*

BRN*

GRN*

DASHBOARD PUR* WIRE HARNESS

4

3

8

7

LA1+

LAI-

LA2+

LA2-

RBSC

21|

’9I

BLU*

RBSO

22| ORN*

JUNCTION CONNECTOR

WHT*

YEL*

DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS

BLK

BLK

BLK

ORN

BLK

FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS

1

2j RED

DRIVER'S SEAT ON: BELT BUCKLED r BUCKLE SWITCH

ON: M UN; BUCKLED 9

PON: j UNQBUCKLED

_Q_

_Q_

G802

G605

FRONT PASSENGER'S ' ON: SEAT 3 BUCKLED BELT BUCKLE SWITCH

(cont'd)

Circuit Diagram (cont'd)

LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (SECOND)

LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR {FIRST}

RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (FIRST)

RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (SECOND)

REAR SAFING SENSOR

FLOOR WIRE HARNESS

LBS1+

LBS1-

LRP+

LRP-

RED*

BRN*

RRP+

RRP-

LSA+

RBS1+ RBS1SRS UNIT LSARSA+

RSA-

LCA1+

LCA1-

RCA1+

RCA1-

GRN*

RED*

BLU*

BRN*

BLU*

GRY*

RED*

SSS+

SSS-

FLOOR WIRE HARNESS

GRN*

LT BLU*

- (9 )DRIVER'S SEAT BELT TENSIONER

FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT B£LT TENSIONER

WHT*

^A/vV)DRIVER'S SIDE AIRBAG INFLATOR

FRONT PASSENGER'S SIDE AIRBAG INFLATOR

LEFT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG INFLATOR

RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG INFLATOR

* i Wire color may be substituted for SRS circuits

r

. TECH FUSE(10A) AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

•SRS UNIT • ACC UNIT •PCM • VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT

No. 6 {30 A) MAIN UNDER­ HOOD FUSE BOX

VV

V

V

No, 5 (30 A) MAIN UNDER­ HOOD FUSE BOX

I I I I 1 1 WHT i i I I I 1 , I

FLOOR WIRE

HARNESS

F-CAN A H

I I i i i i RED i I i i i I _I

V

FLOOR WIRE HARNESS

F-CAN

E-PRETENSIONER UNIT B 10 FLOOR WIRE HARNESS

BLK

11

BLK

9

1

4

B 13 FLOOR WIRE HARNESS

14

6

BLK

V DRIVER'S E-PRETENSIONER MOTOR

L.

FRONT PASSENGER'S E-PRETENSIONER MOTOR

DTC Troubleshooting DTC 11-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): Open in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator

8, Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cab l e reel.

DTC 11-2x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):

Increased Resistance in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator DTC 11-4x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):

Open in the Driver's Airbag Second Inflator DTC 11-5x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):

Increased Resistance in the Driver’s Airbag Second Inflator Special Tools Required • SRS Inflator Simu l ator 07SAZ-TB4011A • SRS Simulator Lead J 070AZ-SNAA100

NOTE; • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out if the vehicle was in a co l lision. If so, verify that al l the required components were replaced with new components, of the correct part number, and that they were properly installed (see page 24-198). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20), General Troubleshooting Information (see page 24-30), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95), • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS, If the software version is not the latest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10 seconds. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). is DTC

11-2xf 11 -4x, or 11 -5x indicated?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). If another DTC is indicated, troub l eshoot the DTC.B 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at l east 3 minutes.

©70AZ-SN A A l 00

7. Connect the SRS infl ator simulator (2 O connectors) and simulator l ead J to the cable reel. 8. Reconnect the negative cabl e to the battery. 9. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31), 10. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). Is D T C 1 P 1 x , 1 1-2x, 11-4x, o r 1 1-Sx. in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 11. NO-Open or increased resistance in the driver's airbag first or second inflator; replace the driver's airbag (see page 24-133), then clear the DTC.il 11 .Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes,

13. Remove the column cover (see page 20-128), then disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (A) from the cable reel .

22. Measure the resistance between the terminals of both SRS simulator l eads. DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS 4P CONNECTOR

is there less than 1.0 D?

14. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 Q connectors) and simulator lead J to the dashboard wire harness. 15. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 16. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 17. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit connector A (39P) and the SRS u n it Check the connection between the connector and the SRS unit. If the connection is OK, replace the SRS unit (see page 24-214).■ NO-Open or increased resistance in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness, then clear the DTC.B

Is DTC 11-1 xf 11~2x, 11-4x, or 11-5x indicated?

YES-Go to step 18. NO-Open or increased resistance in the cabl e reel ; replace the cabl e reel (see page 24-211), then clear the DTC.B 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 19. Disconnect the negative cabl e from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 20. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P) from the SRS unit (see page 24-29). 21. Disconnect the SRS inf l ator simu l ator from the SRS simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator lead from the dashboard wire harness 4P connector.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC 11-3x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): Short to Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator

6. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cab le reel .

DTC 11-6x ("xHcan be 0 thru 3 or A thru F): Short to Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in the Driver’s Airbag Second Inflator Special Tools Required • SRS Infl ator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A . SRS Simulator Lead J 070AZ^SNAA100 • SRS Short Cancel ler 070AZ-SAA0100 NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out if the vehicle was in a collision. If so, verify that all the required components were replaced with new components, of the correct part number, and that they were properly installed (see page 24-198). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20), General Troubleshooting Information (see page 24-30), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95). • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. If the software version is not the latest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest. 1. Cl ear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), then wait for 10 seconds. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31), Is DTC 11-3x or 11-6x indicated?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troub leshooting I ntermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Disconnect the negative cabl e from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes.

7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 0 connectors) and simulator lead J to the cable reel. 8. Reconnect the negative cab l e to the battery, 9. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 10. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). is DTC 11-3x or 11-6x indicated?

YES-Go to step 11. NO-Short in the driver's airbag first or second inflator; replace the driver's airbag (see page 24-199), then clear the DTC.B 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 12. Disconnect the negative cab le from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes.

13. Remove the column cover (see page 20-128), then disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (A) from the cable reel.

23, Measure the resistance between the terminals of both SRS simulator leads. DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS 4P CONNECTOR

is there an open circuit or at least 1 MO?

14. Connect the SRS inflator simu lator (2 0 connectors) and simulator lead J to the dashboard wire harness, 15. Reconnect the negative cab le to the battery. 16. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 17. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). Is DTC 11-3x or 11-6x indicated?

YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit connector A (39P) and the SRS unit. Check the connection between the connector and the SRS unit. If the connection is OK, replace the SRS unit (see page 24-214).11 NO-Short to another wire in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness, then clear the DTC.B

YES-Go to step 18. NO-Short to another wire in the cable reel; replace the cable reel (see page 24-211), then c lear the DTC.II 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 19. Disconnect the negative cab l e from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 20. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P) from the SRS unit (see page 24-29). 21. Disconnect the SRS inflator simu l ator from the SRS simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator lead from the dashboard wire harness 4P connector, 22. Connect the SRS short cancellers (070AZ-SAA0100) (see page 24-214) to SRS unit connector A (39P) terminals No. 3 and No. 4 and terminals No. 7 and No. 8.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC 11-8x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):

Short to Power in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator

8. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cable reel.

DTC 11 -Ax ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F); Short to Power in the Driver's Airbag Second Inflator Special Tools Required • SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A . SRS Simulator Lead J 070AZ^SNAA100 NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out if the vehic l e was in a coll ision. If so, verify that all the required components were rep laced with new components, of the correct part number, and that they were properly installed (see page 24-198). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20), General Troub l eshooting Information (see page 24-30), and Battery Termina l Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95). • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. If the software version is not the l atest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest.

070AZ-SNAA100

7. Connect the SRS inflator simu lator (2 0 connectors) and simulator lead J to the cable reel, 8. Reconnect the negative cab le to the battery, 9. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 10. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

1. Cl ear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

is DTC 11-8x o r 11 -Ax indicated?

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I), then wait for 10 seconds.

YES-Go to step 11.

3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). is DTC 11-8x or 11-Ax indicated?

YES-Go to step 4. NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troub leshooting Intermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Disconnect the negative cabl e from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes.

NO-Short to power in the driver's airbag first or second inflator; replace the driver's airbag (see page 24-199), then clear the DTC.B 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at l east 3 minutes.

& 13. Remove the column cover (see page 20-128), then disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (A) from the cabl e reel .

0"

24, Measure the voltage between body ground and each terminals of both SRS simulator leads individually, DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS 4P CONN

011A

Is th e re le s s th a n 2 .0 V? 14. C o n n e c t t h e S R S i n f l a t o r

s im ^ u ^ . ^ Q connectors)

a n d s i m u l a t o r le a d J t o t h e d a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s ,

c


5 12

i= = = l

8 /

8 /h o

13

14

—J

X

W ire side of female term inals

Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s

YES-Go to step 10.

Is th e r e le s s th a n 1 .0 D ?

NO-Open between the No. 8 (30 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box and E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P) terminal No. 12,■

YES-Go to step 15,

10.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11, Disconnect E-pretensioner unit connector A (5P) from the E-pretensioner unit (see page 24-221).

NO-Open between the No, 10 terminal of E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P) and body ground, or between the No. 11 terminal of E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P) and body ground or poor connection at G805.ll

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

15. Measure the resistance between body ground and E-pretensioner unit connector A (5P) terminal No.. 5. E-PRETENSIONER UNIT CONNECTOR A (SP)

19. Measure the resistance between body ground and SRS unit connector B (39P) terminal No. 1. SRS UNIT CONNECTOR

B (39P)

Yi z

U 4

5 Lnrt

U

99 99 8 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 999 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 28 27 9 38 37 38 39r r_ Ll 1

W ire side of female te rm in a l s

is th e r e le s s th a n 1 ,0 O ?

W ire side of female term inals

YES-Go to step 18.

18. Disconnect the negative cabl e from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 17, Disconnect SRS unit connect B (39P) from the SRS unit (see page 24-23). 18. Disconnect the ODS unit harness 18P connector (A) from the ODS unit (B).

Is th e r e a n o p e n c ir c u it o r a t le a s t 1 M O ? YES-Go to step 20.

NO-Short to ground between SRS unit connector B (39P) terminal No. 1 and E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P) terminal No, 8.11 20. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector B (39P) terminal No. 1 and E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P) terminal No. 8. SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (39P) W ire side of female term inals i------

U

1/

/

/

12 13 14 15 / Is

NO-Open between the No. 5 terminal of E-pretensioner unitconnector A (5P) and body ground or poor connection GS05.I1

/

_________ ^

/ K

b

11

/

/

/

I---—

9

!

6

/

7

8

9 10 11

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 /

/

/

38 37 38 39 0

------------------—

r,l . f = i

r I 13

14

E-PRETENSIONER UNIT CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale term inals

B (14P)

is th e r e le s s t h a n 1 .0 0 ?

YES-Faul ty E-pretensioner unit; replace the E-pretensioner unit (see page 24-221 ).■ NO-Open between SRS unit connector B (39P) terminal No. 1 and E-pretensioner unit connector B (14P) terminal No. 6.11

£ DTC 81-4x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F), 81-63,81-64 : Internal the Failure of the ODS

Unit NOTE:

• Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a coll ision. Ifso, verify that allthe required components were repl aced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properl y installed (see page 24-198). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures {see page 24-20) and General Troubleshooting Information (see page 24-30). • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. I fthe software version is not the latest update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest.

9. Repl ace the ODS unit (see page 24-220). 10. C l ear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds. 12. Check for.DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). i s D T C 81-4x,81-63, o r 8 1 - 6 4 i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Repl ace the SRS unit (see page 24-214).■ NO-The system isOK.ll

1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ),then wait for 10 seconds. 3.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). I s D T C 81-4x, 81 - 6 3 , o r 8 1 - 6 4 i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK atthis time. Go to Troubl eshooting Intermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B 4. Do the ODS unit initial ization (see page 24-33). 5. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 6.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),then wait for 10 seconds. 7.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ),then wait for 10 seconds. 8.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). Is DTC 81-4x,81-63, or 81-64 indicated?

YES-Go to step 9, NO-The system is OK atthis time.B

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

DTC 81-61: No Signal From the ODS Unit

8.Check the connection between the ODS unit harness 18P connector (A) and the ODS unit (B).

DTC 81-62 Incorrect Data From the ODS Unit NOTE:

• Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a collision. I fso, verify that allthe required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properl y install ed (see page 24-136). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20), General Troubleshooting I nformation (see page 24-30), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95). • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. I fthe software version is not the l atest update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest. 1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

is th e c o n n e c tio n O K ?

2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (l l )rthen wait for 10 seconds.

YES-Go to step 7,

3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

NO-Repair the poor connection and retest. I fDTC 81-61 or 81-82 isstill present, go to step 7,

is D T C 8 1 -8 1 o r 8 1 - 8 2 in d ic a te d ? YES-Go to step 8.

NO-lntermittent failure,the system is OK atthis time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 24-32). I fanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B 4.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5.Check the No, 2 (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-dash fuse holder 2. is th e fu s e O K ? YES-Go to step 6.

NO-Replace the fuse, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Ifthe fuse blows again, check for short in the auxil iary under-dash fuse holder 2 No. 2 (7.5 A) fuse circuit (right engine compartment wire harness, floor wire harness, or ODS unit harness), and retest.■

7. Disconnect the ODS unit harness 18P connector (A) from the ODS unit (B).

3. Measure the voltage between body ground and ODS unit harness 18P connectorterminal No. 1. ODS UNIT HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR

13.Vehicles with ACC: Disconnect E-Pretensioner unit connector B(14P) from the E-Pretensioner unit (see page 24-221). 14. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (39P) from the SRS unit (see page 24-23).

YEL

1 /

3 /

5 /

12 /

14 /

16

Z7

ZZ_

15. Measure the resistance between body ground and SRS unit connector B (39P) terminal No, 1. SRS UNIT CONNECTOR i (39P)

. ir 1 /

YES-Go to step 10.

8

7

9

1 0 11

/

12 13 14 15 z 7 9

9

19 2 0 21 22 2 3 2 4 2 5

26 27 9

/

/

W ire side of fem al e term inals

is th e r e b a tt e r y v o lta g e ?

6

9

9

9

/

9

9

9

36 37 38 39

U

NO-Open in the right engine compartment wire

harness, floorwire harness, or ODS unit harness; replace the faulty harness, then cl ear the DTC.B 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Measure the resistance between body ground and ODS unit harness 18P connectorterminal No. 12. ODS UNIT HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR

W ire side of fem ale term inals

Is th e r e a n o p e n c ir c u it o r a t le a s t 1 M O ?

YES-Go to step 17. NO-Short to ground between SRS unit connector B (39P) terminal No. 1 and the ODS unit harness 18P connector terminal No. 7 (right engine compartment wire harness, floor wire harness, or ODS unit harness); replace the faulty harness, then clear the

DTC.B 16. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

W ire side o f female term inals

Is th e r e le s s th a n 1 . 0 Q ? YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Open in the floor wire harness or ODS unit harness, or poor connection atthe ODS unit harness 18P connector and the ODS unit. Check the ground connection at G605. Check the connection; ifthe connection isOK, replace the faulty harness, then clear the DIC.ll 12. Disconnect the negative cabl e from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes.

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

18. Measure the vol tage between body ground and SRS unit connector B (39P) terminal No, 1.

20. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector B (39P) terminal No. 1 and ODS unit harness 18P connectorterminal No. 7.

SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (39P)

ODS UNIT HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR W ire side of female term inals GRN

“ If

1/ / / 9 6 7 8 9 10 11 9/ 919 20 21 22 23 24 25 99999/ / / 38 37 38 39

9l 3 PI5 199 199....9191

1

12 13 14 15 28 27

I2[9[i4[9li6l99

W ire side o f fem al e term inals «----L—

Is th e r e le s s th a n 0 .2 ¥ ?

YES-Go to step 19, NO-Short to power in the harness between SRS unit connector B (39P) terminal No. 1 and the ODS unit 18P connector terminal No. 7 (fl oor wire harness or ODS unit harness); repl ace the faulty harness, then cl ear the DTC.B 19.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

U 7

9999 999 13 20 21 22 23 24 25 99999999 36 37 38 39 1

6

8

9 10 11

12 13 14 15 28 27 U

SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (39P) W ire side o f fem ale term inals

Is th e r e le s s th a n 1 ,0 Q ?

YES-Faulty ODS unit or SRS unit; replace the ODS unit (see page 24-220), then clear the DTC. I fthe problem isstill present, replace the SRS unit (see page 24-214).H NO-Open in the wire harness between SRS unit connector B (39P) terminal No, 1 and ODS unit harness 18P connectorterminal No. 7 (floor wire harness, or ODS unit harness); repl ace the faulty harness, then clear the DTC.B

DTC 81-71,81-78: ODS Unit Not Calibrated

DTC 81-79: Front Passenger's Weight Sensors

NOTE:

Initial Check Failure

• Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out if the vehicle was in a collision. If s o , verify that all the required components were replaced with new components, of the correct part number, and that they were proper l y installed (see page 24-198). Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20) and General Troub l eshooting Information (see page 24-30). • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. If the software version is not the latest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10 seconds. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

Is D T C 8 1 - 7 1 o r 8 1 - 7 8 i n d i c a t e d ?

NOTE:

• Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a col l ision. Ifso, verify that allthe required components were repl aced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly installed (see page 24-198). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20) and General Troubleshooting Information (see page 24-30). • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. Ifthe software version is not the l atest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest. 1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds. 3.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

YES-Go to step 5.

is D T C 8 1 - 7 9 in d ic a te d ?

N O - l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B

YES-Go to step 4.

4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system isOK atthis time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B

5. Do the ODS unit initialization (see page 24-33). 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then wait for 10 seconds, 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10 seconds. 8. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

is 8 1 - 7 1 o r 8 1 - 7 8 D T C in d ic a t e d ? YES-Faulty ODS unit, repl ace the ODS unit (see page 24-220), then clear the DTC. If the DTC is stil l present, replace the SRS unit (see page 2 4 -2 1 4 ).■ NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

4.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Make sure nothing ison the front passenger's seat. 8.Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 7.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds. 8.Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D T C 8 1 - 7 9 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Loosen the front passenger's seat mounting bol ts (see page 20-139), and shake the seat in all directions. Tighten the seat mounting bol ts to the specified torque, then do the front passenger's weight sensor initialization (see page 24-33). I fthe problem is still present, replace the front passenger's weight sensor (see page 24-218), then cl ear the DTC. Ifthe problem isstill present, replace the ODS unit (see page 24-220), then cl ear the DTC.B NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32), Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubl eshoot the DTC.B

DTC 82-11: No Signal From the Inner Side Front Passenger’s W eight Sensor NOTE; • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a col l ision. I fso, verify that al lthe required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly installed (see page 24-136). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20) and General Troubleshooting I nformation (see page 24-30) and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95). • These SWS DTCs are cleared by turning the ignition switch to LOCK(O). 1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I ),then wait for 10 seconds, 3.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). is D T C 8 2 -1 1 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent failure, the system isOK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting I ntermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32), Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B 4. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Inspection. In the Inspection Menu, select S WS DTC CHECK. is a n S W S D T C a ls o in d ic a t e d ?

YES• DTC 11-11: Short to power in the inner side front passenger's weight sensor power circuit. Go to step 5. • DTC 11-12: Short to ground in the inner side front passenger's weight sensor output circuit. Go to step 11. NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B

6.Disconnect the ODS unit harness 2P connector (A) from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor (B).

12. Disconnect the ODS unit harness 2P connector (A) from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor (B).

7.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds.

13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds.

8.C l ear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

14. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

9.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds.

15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),then wait for 10 seconds.

10. from the HDS Main Menu, sel ect SRS, then Inspection, In the Inspection Menu, select S W S DTC CHECK. i s SWS D T C 1 1 - 1 1 i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Short to power in the ODS unit harness; replace the ODS unit harness, then cl ear the DTC. I fthe DTC does not clear, replace the ODS unit (see page 24-220).11 NO-Faulty inner side front passenger's weight sensor; replace the inner side front passenger’s weight sensor (see page 24-218), then clear the DTC.B 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I ),then wait for 10 seconds. 17. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Inspection. In the Inspection Menu, select S W S DTC CHECK. i s SWS D T C 1 1 - 1 2 i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 18. NO-Faulty inner side front passenger's weight sensor; replace the inner side front passenger's weight sensor (see page 24-218), then cl ear the DTC.B 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

13, Measure the resistance between body ground and ODS unit harness 2P connector terminal No. 2.

ODS UNIT HARNESS 2P CONNECTOR

W ire

s a d e

o f fem ale te rm in a ls

is th e r e a n o p e n c ir c u it o r a t le a s t 1 M O ?

YES-Faulty ODS unit; replace the ODS unit (see page 24-220), then cl ear the DTC.B NO-Short to ground in the ODS unit harness; replace the ODS unit harness, then cl ear the DTC.B

DTC 82-12: No Signal From the Inner Side Front Passenger's W eight Sensor NOTE; • Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicl e was in a coll ision. Ifso, verify that allthe required components were repl aced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properl y installed (see page 24-198). • Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20) and General Troubl eshooting Information (see page 24-30) and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95). • These S WS DTCs are cl eared by turning the ignition switch to LOCK(O). 1.Clear the DTCs with'the HDS (see page 24-31). 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I),then wait for 10 seconds. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31), is D T C 8 2 - 1 2 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC isindicated, troubl eshoot the DTC.B 4.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Disconnect the ODS unit harness 2P connector (A) from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor (B).

6.Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I ),then wait for 10 seconds. 7. Measure the voltage between ODS unit harness 2P connectorterminal No. 1 and No. 2.

ODS UNIT HARNESS 2P CONNECTOR

BLI

RED

Wire sade of female terminals

I s t h e r e m o r e t h a n 6 V?

YES-Faulty inner side front passenger's weight sensor; replace the inner side front passenger's weight sensor (see page 24-218), then clear the DTC.B NO-Open in the ODS unit harness; replace the ODS unit harness, then cl ear the DTC, and retest. Ifthe DTC isstil lpresent repl ace the ODS unit (see page 24-220).■

DTC 82-13: No Signal From the Inner Side Front Passenger's Weight Sensor NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a collision. I fso, verify that al lthe required components were repl aced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly installed (see page 24-198). • Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20) and General Troubleshooting Information (see page 24*30) and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95). • These S W S DTCs are cleared by turning the ignition switch to LOCK(O). 1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). Is D T C 8 2 -1 3 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Faulty inner side front passenger's weight sensor; replace the inner side front passenger's weight sensor (see page 24-218), then cl ear the DTC.B NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK atthis time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubl eshoot the DTC.B

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

DTC 83-21; No Signal From the Outer Side Front Passenger's W eight Sensor

8. Disconnect the ODS unit harness 3P connector (A) from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor (B).

NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out Ifthe vehicle was In a collision. Ifso, verify that allthe required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly instal led (see page 24-198). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20) and General Troubleshooting Information (see page 24-30) and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-35), • These S W S DTCs are cleared by turning the ignition switch to LOCK(O). 1.C l ear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ),then wait for 10 seconds. 3.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). Is D T C 8 3 - 2 1 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO- l ntermittent failure, the system isOK atthis time. Go to Troubl eshooting Intermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B 4. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Inspection. In the Inspection Menu, select S W S DTC CHECK. is a n S W S D T C a ls o in d ic a t e d ?

YES• DTC 21-11: Short to power inthe outer side front passenger's weight sensor power circuit Go to step 5. • DTC 21-12: Short to ground In the outer side front passenger's weight sensor output circuit Go to step 11. NO-lntermittent failure, the system isOK atthis time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B 5.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),

7,Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I),then wait for 10 seconds. 8,Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 9,Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ),then wait for 10 seconds, 10. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Inspection. In the Inspection Menu, select SW S DTC CHECK. Is S W S D T C 21-11 i n d i c a t e d ? YES-Short to power in the ODS unit harness; replace the ODS unit harness, then cl ear the DTC. I fthe DTC does not clear, replace the ODS unit (see page 24-220),11 NO-Faulty outer side front passenger’s weight sensor; replace the outer side front passenger's weight sensor (see page 24-218), then clear the DTC.B 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),

12. Disconnect the ODS unit harness 3P connector (A) from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor (B).

19. Measure the resistance between body ground and ODS unit harness 3P connector terminal No. 3.

ODS UNIT HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR

YEL

Wire sade offemale terminals Ist h e r e an o p e n c i r c u i t o r a t l e a s t 1 M O ? YES-Faulty ODS unit; replace the ODS unit (see page 24-220), then clear the DIC.ll NO-Short to ground in the ODS unit harness; replace the ODS unit harness, then clear the DTC.B 13.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds. 14. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 15.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),then wait for 10 seconds. 16.Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I ),then wait for 10 seconds. 17. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Inspection. I n the I nspection Menu, select S W S DTC CHECK. i s S W S D T C 21-12 i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 18. NO-Faul ty outer side front passenger's weight sensor; repl ace the outer side front passenger's weight sensor (see page 24-218), then cl ear the

DTC.B 18.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

DTC 83-22: No Signal From the Outer Side Front Passenger's W eight Sensor NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a col lision. Ifso, verify that allthe required components were repl aced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly installed (see page 24-196). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20) and General Troubleshooting I nformation (see page 24-30) and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95). • These S W S DTCs are cleared by turning the ignition switch to LOCK(O).

8.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds. 7. Measure the voltage between ODS unit harness 3P connectorterminal No, 1 and No. 3.

ODS UNIT HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR

1 LTGRN

MgH W ire

1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31), Is D T C 8 3 -2 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4 (see step 4 on page 24-168). NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 24-32). I fanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B 4.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Disconnect the ODS unit harness 3P connector (A) from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor (B).

YEL

sade o f fem ale term inals

is th e re m o re th a n 6 ¥ ?

YES-Faulty outer side front passenger's weight sensor; replace the outer side front passenger's weight sensor (see page 24-218), then clear the DTC.B IMO-Open in the ODS unit harness; replace the ODS unit harness, then clearthe DTC, and retest. I fthe DTC isstill present, repl ace the ODS unit (see page 24-220).11

DTC 83-23: No Signal From the Outer Side

Front Passenger's Weight Sensor NOTE: • Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicl e was in a coll ision. Ifso, verify that allthe required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly instal l ed (see page 24-196). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20) and General Troubleshooting I nformation (see page 24-30) and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95). • These S W S DTCs are cleared by turning the ignition switch to LOCK(O). 1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). is D T C 8 3 - 2 3 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Faul ty outer side front passenger's weight sensor; replace the outer side front passenger's weight sensor (see page 24-218), then clear the DTC.B NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is OK atthis time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B

DTC 85-4x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F), 85 63,85-64: Internal Failure of the ODS Unit -

NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicl e was in a collision. Ifso, verify that allthe required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly installed (see page 24-196). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20) and General Troubleshooting Information (see page 24-30). • Before repl acing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. Ifthe software version is not the latest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest. 1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I ),then wait for 10 seconds. 3.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). i s D T C 85-4x, 85-63, o r 8 5 - 6 4 i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system isOK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Fail ures fsee page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B 4.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 5. Do the ODS unit initialization (see page 24-33). 6.Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I ),then wait for 10 seconds. 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). i s D T C 85-4x, 8 5 - 6 3 , o r 8 5 - 6 4 i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Repl ace the ODS unit (see page 24-220), then clear the DTC, and retest I fthe DTC isstill present, repl ace the SRS unit (see page 24-214).■ NO-The system isOK atthis time.B

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

DTC 85-61: No Signal From the ODS Unit

8. Disconnect the ODS unit harness 18P connector (A) from the ODS unit (B).

DTC 85-62: incorrect Data From the ODS Unit NOTE:

• Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicl e was in a collision. Ifso, verify that allthe required components were repl aced with new components, of the correct part number, and thatthey were properl y instal l ed (see page 24-138). • Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20), General Troubl eshooting Information (see page 24-30) and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95). • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. Ifthe software version is not the l atest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest. 1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

7.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Measure the voltage between body ground and ODS unit harness 18P connectorterminal No. 1.

2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds,

ODS UNIT HARNESS

3.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

YEL

is D T C 8 5 -6 1 o r 8 5 - 6 2 in d ic a te d ?

18P CONNECTOR

1

YES-Go to step 5.

NO-lntermittent failure, the system isOK atthis time, Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B 4.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 5.Check the No. 2 (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-dash fuse holder 2. is th e fu s e O K ? YES-Go to step 8.

NO-Replace the fuse, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Ifthe fuse blows again, check for short in the auxil iary under-dash fuse holder 2 No. 2 (7.5 A) fuse circuit (right engine compartment wire harness, floor wire harness, or ODS unit harness}.■

1219114l9l 16191

W ire side of female term inals

is th e r e b a tt e r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 9. ISIO-Open between the No. 2 (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-dash fuse holder 2 and the ODS unit harness 18P connector terminal No, 1 (right engine compartment wire harness, floor wire harness, or ODS unit harness); replace the faulty harness, then clear the DTC.B

9.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

10. Measure the resistance between body ground and ODS unit harness 18P connectorterminal No. 12.

14. Measure the resistance between body ground and SRS unit connector B (33P) terminal No. 1. SRS UNIT CONNECTOR i (39P)

ODS UNIT HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR

1 / | Z | Z | 7 / 1 :1 4 Z 1 6 Z Z /

U

999 9 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 999 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 28 27 99999999 36 37 38 39 j 1

, „

I BLK

© Wire side of female terminals

u

Wire side of female terminals

i s there l e s s t h a n 1.0 O ?

I s t h e r e an o p e n c i r c u i t o r a t l e a s t 1 M O ?

YES-Go to step 11.

YES-Go to step 15.

NO-Open In the wire harness between ODS unit harness 18P connectorterminal No. 12 and body ground (G605) (floorwire harness, or ODS unit harness) or poor connection at G605; ifthe connection is OK, replace the faulty harness, then clear the DTC.B

NO-Short to ground between SRS unit connector B (39P) terminal No. 1 and ODS unit harness 18P connector terminal No. 7 (floorwire harness, or ODS unit harness); replace the faulty harness, then clear the DTC.B

11. Disconnect the negative cabl e from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 12. Vehicles with ACC: Disconnect E-Pretensioner unit connector B(14P) from the E-Pretensioner unit (see page 24-221). 13. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (39P) from the SRS unit (see page 24-23).

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

15. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector B (39P) terminal No. 1 and ODS unit harness 18P connectorterminal No, 7.

18. Measure the voltage between body ground and SRS unit connector B (33P) terminal No, 1. SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (39P!

ODS UNIT HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fem ale term inals GRN I I

U

19139| 5I9l7

1

9 9 .;.;;.w \ 12191419116199 J

9/

12 13 14 16 26 27 /

9/

/ /

/ /

8 7 8 9 10 11 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 30 37 38 33

/

i Lf

999 9 8 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 9 / 9 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 999999 9 38 37 38 ...391 J„ 1

SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (39P) W ire side of fem ale term inals

is th e re le s s th a n 1 ,0 0 ?

W ire side of fem ale term inals

Is t h e r e le s s t h a n 0 .2 V ? YES-Go to s te p 19.

NO-Short to power between SRS unit connector B (39P) terminal No, 1 and ODS unit harness 18P connector terminal No. 7 (floor wire harness, or ODS unit harness); repl ace the faulty harness, then clear the DTC.B

YES-Go to step 18. 19. Replace the ODS unit (see page 24-220). NO-Open in the wire harness between SRS unit connector B (33P) terminal No. 1 and ODS unit harness 18Pconnectorterminal No. 7 (floor wire harness, or ODS unit harness); replace the faulty harness, then clear the DTC.B

20. C l ear the DTCs with the HDS fsee page 24-31). 21. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). Is th e D T C 8 5 - 8 1 o r 8 5 - 8 2 in d ic a t e d ?

18, Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.

YES-Replace the SRS unit (see page 24-214).■

17.Turn the ignition switch.to ON (II).

NO-The system isOK at this time.B

DTC 85-71,85-78: ODS Unit Not Initialized

DTC 85-79: OPDS Sensor Initial Check Failure

NOTE:

• Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a collision. I fso, verify that allthe required components were repl aced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly instal l ed (see page 24-196). • Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20) and General Troubleshooting Information (see page 24-30), • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. Ifthe software version is not the l atest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest.

NOTE: • Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicl e was in a collision. Ifso, verify that allthe required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properl y instal led (seepage 24-196). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20) and General Troubl eshooting I nformation (see page 24-30). • Before repl acing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. Ifthe software version is not the latest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest.

1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I ),then wait for 10 seconds.

2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I ),then wait for 10 seconds.

3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

3.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

Is D T C 8 5 -7 1 o r 8 5 -7 8 in d ic a te d ?

is D T C 8 5 - 7 9 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5.

YES-Go to step 4.

NO- l ntermittent fail ure, the system is OK atthis time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B

NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system isOK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B

4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

4.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

5. Do the ODS unit initial ization (see page 24-33).

5. Make sure nothing ison the front passenger's seat.

6.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),then wait for 10 seconds.

8.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

7.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ),then wait for 10 seconds. 8.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31), is D T C 8 5 -7 1 o r 8 5 -7 8 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Faulty ODS unit; replace the ODS unit (see page 24-220), then cl ear the DTC. I fthe DTC isstil lpresent, repl ace the SRS unit (see page 24-214).■ NO-The system is OK atthis time.B

7.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds. 8.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). is D T C 8 5 - 7 9 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 9. NO- l ntermittent failure, the system isOK atthis time. Go to Troubl eshooting Intermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubl eshoot the DTC.B

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

9.C l ear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Do the ODS unit initial ization (see page 24-33). 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds. 13. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). i s D T C 85-79 i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Faulty ODS unit; replace the ODS unit (see page 24-220), then cl ear the DTC, and retest. Ifthe DTC Is stil lpresent, replace the seat-back cover/pad (see page 20-153) with equipped OPDS sensor, then clear the DTC.B NO-The system isOK.B

DTC 86-1 jc ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F); Faulty OPDS Seat-Back Sensor DTC 86-2x ( Y can be 0 thru 3 or A thru F); Faulty OPDS Seat Support Sensor NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a col l ision. I fso, verify that al lthe required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly install ed (see page 24-138), • Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20) and General Troubleshooting Information (see page 24-30). • Before repl acing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. I fthe software version is not the latest, update the SRS unit software {see page 24-32), and retest. 1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds. 3.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). i s D T C 8 8 - 1 x o r 86-2x i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO- l ntermittent failure, the system isOK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B 4.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

&

5.Check the connection atthe ODS unit harness 18P connector (A) and OPDS sensor connectors (B) and ODS unit.

A r e th e c o n n e c tio n s O K ?

YES-Go to step 8. NO-Repair the poor connection, clear the DTC and retest.® 6. Repl ace the seat-back cover/pad with equipped OPDS sensor (see page 20-153), and do the ODS unit initialization (see page 24-33).

PTC 92-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F); Short to Power in the Front Passenger's Airbag Cutoff indicator NOTE; • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicl e was in a col lision. I fso, verify'that all the required components were repl aced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly instal led (see page 24-198). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20), General Troubleshooting I nformation (see page 24-30), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95). • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with'the HDS. I fthe software version is not the l atest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest. • Ifthere are other SRS DTCs stored with 32-1x; ■ troubl eshoot them first. 1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ),then wait for 10 seconds. 3.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

7.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

is D T C 9 2 -1 x in d ic a t e d ?

8.Turn the ignition switch to ON (11),then wait for 10 seconds.

YES-Go to step 4.

3.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). is D T C 8 6 -1 x o r 8 6 - 2 x in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Replace the ODS unit (see page 24-220), then clear the DTC. Ifthe problem isstill present repl ace the SRS unit (see page 24-214),■ NO-The system isO K M

NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is OK atthis time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B 4.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Disconnect the front passenger’s airbag cutoff indicator 4P connector, 8, Disconnect the negative cabl e from the battery, then wait at l east 3 minutes. 7, Disconnect SRS unit connector A (33P) from the SRS unit (see page 24-32). 8, Reconnect the negative cabl e to the battery. 9,Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

10. Measure the voltage between body ground and SRS unit connector A (39P) terminal No. 20.

DTC 92-2x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): Open or Short to Ground in the Front Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator

SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (39PJ

NOTE:

u

/

3 4 5 8 7 8 9 10/

/ / / / 18 17 18/■20 / / / / 28 2728 29 / 31 / / 38 37 38 39 J I

Wire side offemale terminals i s t h e r e l e s s t h a n 0.2 V ?

YES-Faulty SRS unit or front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator; replace the passenger’s airbag cutoff indicator (see page 24-224), then clear the DTC, I fthe probl em isstil lpresent, replace the SRS unit (see page 24-214).■ NO-Short to power in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness, then clear the DTC.B

• Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a collision. Ifso, verify that al lthe required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly install ed (see page 24-198). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20), General Troubleshooting Information (see page 24-30), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-35), • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. Ifthe software version is not the l atest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest. • Ifthere are other SRS DTCs stored with 92-1x; troubl eshoot them first, 1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I),then wait for 10 seconds. 3.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). I s D T C 92-2x i n d i c a t e d ? YES-Go to step 4.

NO-lntermittent failure, the system isOK atthis time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubl eshoot the DTC.B 4.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Disconnect the front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator 4P connector, 8. Disconnect the negative cabl e from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 7. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P) from the SRS unit (see page 24-29).

8. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector A (39P) terminal No. 20 and front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator 4P connector terminal No. 2.

9. Measure the resistance between body ground and SRS unit connector A (39P) terminal No. 20. SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (39P)

SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (39P) W ire side o f fem ale term inals

TJ

U

/ / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 / / / / (/ 16 17 18 / 20• / / / / / 28 27 28 29 / 31 / / //V 36 37 38 39 J y

/ / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 9 / / / / 16 17 18/ 20■9 9 9 9 9 26 2728 29 / 31 / / //'9 36 37 38 39 U

U

BLU 1

1r ? .. 3 4

2

W ire side o f fem ale term inals

Ist h e r e a n o p e n c i r c u i t o r a t l e a s t 1 M O ? FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR 4P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fem a l e term inals

is th e r e le s s t h a n 1 .0 O ?

YES-Faul ty SRS unit or front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator; repl ace the front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator (see page 24-224), then cl ear the DTC. Ifthe probl em isstill present, repl ace the SRS unit (see page 24-214}.B

YES-Go to step 3. NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness, then clear the DTC.B

NO-Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness, then cl ear the DTC.B

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

DTC A1-1 x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): Faulty Power Supply (VA line) NOTE: • Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a collision. Ifso, verify that allthe required components were repl aced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly installed (see page 24-198). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20), General Troubleshooting Information {see page 24-30), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-35). • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. Ifthe software version is not the latest update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest. 1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

6.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Disconnect the negative cabl e from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes. 8. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P) from the SRS unit (see page 24-29). 3. Reconnect the negative cabl e to the battery. 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 11. Measure the voltage between body ground and SRS unit connector A (39P) terminal No. 28. SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (39P)

u /

/

3

4

5

8

7

16 17 18 / / / / / 28 27 28 29 9 / 31 / U

8

9 10 /

20 / /

/

/ / / / 36 37 38 39 U

2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I ),then wait for 10 seconds. 3.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

W ire side o f female term inals

I s DTCA1-1x i n d i c a t e d ?

i s there b a t t e r y voltage?

YES-Go to step 4.

YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit connector A (39P) and the SRS unit; check the connection. I fthe connection isOK, repl ace the SRS unit (see page 24-214).H

NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting I ntermittent Fail ures (see page 24-32). I fanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B 4.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5.Check the No. 2 (7,5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-dash fuse hol der 2. is th e fu s e O K ?

YES-Go to step 8. NO-Repl ace the fuse, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Ifthe fuse blows again, check for short to ground in the dashboard wire harness or auxil iary under-dash fuse holder 2 No. 2 (7.5 A) fuse circuit; replace the dashboard wire harness. I fthe problem is still present replace the auxiliary under-dash fuse holder 2 M

NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness; repl ace the dashboard wire harness, then cl ear the DTC.B

&

DTC A2-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): Faulty Power Supply (VB line) NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a col lision. Ifso, verify that allthe required components were repl aced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properl y instal led (see page 24-196). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20), General Troubleshooting I nformation (see page 24-30), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95). • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. I fthe software version is not the latest update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest. 1.C l ear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

8.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery# then wait at least 3 minutes. 8. Disconnect SRS unit.connector A (39P) from the SRS unit (see page 24-29). 3. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 10.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 11. Measure the voltage between body ground and SRS unit connector A (33P) terminal No. 27. SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (39P)

U /

/

3 4 5 8 7 8 9 10 /

/ / / / 16 17 18 / 28 27 28 29 / 31 / /

20 / /

/

/ / / / 38 37 38 39

2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds.

A

3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

W ire side o f fem al e term inals

U

i s D T C A2-1x i n d i c a t e d ?

is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 4.

YES-Faul ty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit connector A (39P) and the SRS unit; check the connection. Ifthe connection isOK, repl ace the SRS unit (see page 24-214).■

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK atthis time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B 4.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5.Check the No. 22 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. I s the f u s e O K ?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-Replace the fuse, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Ifthe fuse blows again, check for a short to ground in the dashboard wire harness or in the under-dash fuse/relay box No. 22 (10A) fuse circuit; repl ace the dashboard wire harness. I fthe probl em is stil lpresent repl ace the under-dash fuse/rel ay box (see page 22-30), then clear the DTC.B

NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness, then clear the DTC.B

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

DTC A3-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): SRS Unit Connector A Not Properly Installed

DTC A4-1x ("x" cam be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): SRS Unit Connector B Not Properly Installed

NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out if the vehicle was in a collision. If so, verify that all the required components were replaced with new components, of the correct part number, and that they were properly install ed (see page 24-198). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20), Genera l Troubleshooting I nformation (see page 24-30), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95). • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS, If the software version is not the latest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest.

NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a col lision, I fso, verify that allthe required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly install ed (see page 24-138). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20), General Troubleshooting Information (see page 24-30), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95), • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. Ifthe software version is not the latest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest,

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I), then wait for 10 seconds.

2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds,

3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31),

i s D T C A3-1x i n d i c a t e d ?

i s D T C A4-1x i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 8.

YES-Go to step 6.

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting I ntermittent Failures (see page 24-32), If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B

NO- l ntermittent fail ure, the system isOK atthis time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 24-32). I fanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B

4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

4.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

5. Disconnect the negative cab l e from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes,

5. Disconnect the negative cabl e from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes,

8. Check the connection between the SRS unit connector A (39P) and the SRS unit.

8.Check the connection between the SRS unit connector B (39P) and the SRS unit.

is th e c o n n e c t io n O K ?

is th e c o n n e c t io n O K ?

YES-Go to step 8.

YES-Go to step 8.

NO-Repair the poor connection, clear the DTC, and retest.

NO-Repair the poor connection, clear the DTC, and retest.

7. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P) from the SRS unit (see page 24-23).

7. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (39P) from the SRS unit (see page 24-29).

8. Check for bent or damaged terminals on the SRS unit.

8. Check for bent or damaged terminals on the SRS unit

Are a n y t e r m i n a l s b e n t o r d a m a g e d ?

Are a n y t e r m i n a l s b e n t o r d a m a g e d ?

YES-Rep l ace the SRS unit (see page 2 4 -2 1 4 ).■

YES-Repl ace the SRS unit (see page 24-214).■

NO-Rep l ace the dashboard wire harness, then clear the DTC.B

NO-Repl ace the floor wire harness, then clear the DTC.B

DTC B2-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 3 or A thru F): No Signal From the Rear Safing Sensor Special Tools Required -SRS Infl ator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A .SRS Simulator Lead L 070AZ^SNAA300 NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a collision. I fso, verify that al lthe required components were repl aced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly instal led (see page 24-136). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20), General Troubleshooting Information (see page 24-30), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-95). • Before repl acing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. I fthe software version is not the latest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest.

8.Check the connections between SRS unit connector B (39P) and the SRS unit (see page 24-29), between the floor wire harness 2P connector and the rear safing sensor (see page 24-217), and atfloorwire harness 2P connector, Are t h e c o n n e c t i o n s O K ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Repl ace the floor wire harness, then clear the DTC.B 7. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (39P) from the SRS unit (see page 24-29). 8. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector from rear safing sensor (see page 24-217), 9. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector B (39P) terminals No. 26 and No. 27. SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (39P)

1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds. 3.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). i s D T C B2-1x i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 4, NO- l ntermittent fail ure, the system isOK atthis time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubl eshoot the DTC.B

W ire side of fem ale term inals

i s t h e r e an o p e n c i r c u i t o r a t l e a s t 1 M O ?

YES-Go to step 10, 4.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then wait at least 3 minutes.

NO-Short to another wire in the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness, then clear the DTC.B

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

10. Measure the resistance between body ground and SRS unit connector B (39P) terminals No. 28 and No. 27 Individually. SRS UNIT CONNECTOR I (39P)

14.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (jumper connector) and the black SRS simulator lead (A) of simulator lead L to the floor wire harness 2P connector (B).

U 1 12 13 14 15 20 27 u

8 7 8 9 10 11

999 99 9 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 9 36 37 38 39

W ire side of female term inals

is th e r e a n o p e n c ir c u it o r a t le a s t 1 M O ?

YES-Go to step 11, NO-Short to ground inthe floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness, then cl ear the DTC.B 18. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector B (33P) terminals No. 26 and No. 27.

11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

SRS UNIT CONNECTOR i (39PJ

13. Measure the voltage between body ground and SRS unit connector B (33P) terminal s No. 28 and No, 27 individually.

U

999 / 9 9 9 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 999999 99 36 37 38 39 1

SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (39P)

..U

/ / / 9 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 99 9 19 20 21 22 23 24 28 27 9999999/ 36 37 38 39 r— — D U

y

0 7 8 9 10 11

12 13 14 15 28 27

m

1

W ire side of fem ale term inals

is th e r e le s s th a n 1 .0 Q ? W ire side of female term inals

is t h e r e le s s t h a n 0 ,2 V ?

YES-Go to step 14. NO-Short to power in the fl oor wire harness; replace the fl oor wire harness, then cl ear the DTC.B

YES-Faul ty rear safing sensor or SRS unit; replace the rear safing sensor (see page 24-217), then dearth© DTC. Ifthe problem isstill present, repl ace the SRS unit (see page 24-214).B NO-Open in the floor wire harness; replace the floor harness, then cl ear the DTC.B

m

DTC B2-2x#B2-8x#B2-9xf B2-Axf B2-Bx ("x,f can be § thru 3 or A thru F): Internal Faiiure-of the Rear Safing Sensor NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooti ng procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a collision, ifso, verify that al lthe required components were repl aced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly installed (see page 24-196). • Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20) and General Troubleshooting Information (see page 24-30). • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. ifthe software version is not the latest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest. 1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ),then wait for 10 seconds. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). I s D T C B 2 ~ 2 x , B 2 - 8 x , B 2 - 9 x f B 2 - A x , or B2-Bx indicated?

YES-Faul ty rear safing sensor; replace the rear safing sensor (see page 24-217), then clear the DTC. Ifthe DTC isstill present replace the SRS unit (see page 24-214). I

NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 24-32). Ifanother DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the DTC.B

DTC Ex-11 ("x" can be § thru 9 or A thru F); Control Operation Recorded NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out if the vehicl e was in a coll ision. If so, verify that all the required components were replaced with new components, of the correct part number, and that they were properly installed (see page 24-136). • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20) and General Troubleshooting Information (see page 24-30). • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. If the software version is not the latest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ),then wait for 10 seconds. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

is D T C E x - 1 1 in d ic a te d ? YES-Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit (see page 2 4 -2 1 4 ).■ NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 24-32). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the

DTC.B

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

DTC Fx-11 ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): Airbags And/or Tensioners Deployment Recorded NOTE; • Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a collision. Ifso, verify that allthe required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly install ed (see page 24-198). • Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure, review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20) and General Troubl eshooting I nformation (see page 24-30). • Refer to the DTCs shown; - DTC F1-11: Driver's airbag, leftside curtain airbag and/or driver's seat bel ttensioner deployed. - DTC F2-1 1 Front passenger's airbag, right side curtain airbag and/or front passenger's seat bel t tensioner deployed, - DTC F3-11 Driver's side airbag, leftside curtain airbag and/or driver's seat belt tensioner deployed. - DTC F4-11 Front passenger's side airbag, right side curtain airbag and/or front passenger's seat belt tensioner deployed. - DTC F5-11, F6-1 1 Both or onl y one side curtain airbag and seat belt tensioner deployed. When any airbag or tensioners have deployed, go to Component Replacement/Inspection After Deployment (see page 24-136),

DTC 11-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 3 or A thru F); Faulty Inner-Side Front Passenger’s W eight Sensor Circuit NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a collision. I fso, verify that allthe required components were repl aced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly installed (see page 24-196). • Only read DTCs from the SRS menu, not from S WS menus unless instructed to check S W S DTCs. S W S (ODS unit) DTCs are subcodes of SRS unit DTCs, Only troubleshoot the corresponding SRS DTCs. Also these S W S DTCs are cleared by turning the ignition switch to LOCK(O). Do the troubleshooting for SRS unit DTC 82-11 (see page 24-186).

DTC 12-2x ( Y can be § thru 3 or A thru F): Faulty Inner Side Front Passenger's W eight Sensor Circuit

DTC 13-3x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): Faulty Inner Side Front Passenger's W eight Sensor Circuit

NOTE; • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a col lision. Ifso, verify that allthe required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and thatthey were properl y installed (see page 24-198). • Only read DTCs from the SRS menu, not from S W S menus unl ess instructed to check S W S DTCs. S W S (ODS unit) DTCs are subcodes of SRS unit DTCs. On l y troubleshoot the corresponding SRS DTCs. A l so these S W S DTCs are cleared by turning the ignition switch to LOCK(O).

NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a coll ision. Ifso, verify that allthe required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly install ed (see page 24-198). Only read DTCs from the SRS menu, not from SWS menus unl ess instructed to check S W S DTCs. S WS (ODS unit) DTCs are subcodes of SRS unit DTCs. Only troubl eshoot the corresponding SRS DTCs. Also these S W S DTCs are cl eared by turning the ignition switch to LOCK(O).

Do the troubleshooting for SRS unit DTC 82-12 (see page 24-168).

Do the troubleshooting forSRS unit DTC 82-13 (see page 24-169).

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

DTC 21-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): Faulty Outer Side Front Passenger's W eight Sensor Circuit

DTC 22-2m ("x " can 'be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): Faulty Outer Side Front Passenger's W eight Sensor Circuit

NOTE; • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a col lision. I fso, verify that allthe required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly instal led (see page 24-198). • Only read DTCs from the SRS menu, not from S W S menus unl ess instructed to check S W S DTCs. S WS (ODS unit) DTCs are subcodes of SRS unit DTCs. Only troubleshoot the corresponding SRS DTCs. A l so these S W S DTCs are cl eared by turning the ignition switch to LOCK(O).

NOTE; • Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure, find out Ifthe vehicle was in a collision. I fso, verify that all the required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly install ed (see page 24-198), • Only read DTCs from the SRS menu, not from S W S menus unless instructed to check SW S DTCs. S W S (ODS unit) DTCs are subcodes of SRS unit DTCs. On l y troubleshoot the corresponding SRS DTCs, Also these S W S DTCs are cleared by turning the ignition switch to LOCK(O).

Do the troubl eshooting for SRS unit DTC 83-21 (see page 24-170).

Do the troubleshooting forSRS unit DTC 83-22 (see page 24-172).

DTC 23-3x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): Faulty Outer Side Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Circuit

DTC 41-xx, 42-»€#43-xx can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F); Internal Failure of the ODS Unit

NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a collision. Ifso, verify that allthe required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly installed (see page 24-136). • Only read DTCs from the SRS menu, not from SW S menus unless instructed to check S W S DTCs. SW S (ODS unit) DTCs are subcodes of SRS unit DTCs. On l y troubleshoot the corresponding SRS DTCs. Also these S W S DTCs are cleared by turning the ignition switch to LOCK(O).

NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a collision. Ifso, verify that allthe required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properl y installed (see page 24-196). • Only read DTCs from the SRS menu, not from SWS menus unless instructed to check S W S DTCs. SW S (ODS unit) DTCs are subcodes of SRS unit DTCs. Only troubleshoot the corresponding SRS DTCs, Also these S W S DTCs are cleared by turning the ignition switch to LOCK(O). Also these S W S DTCs are cleared by turning the ignition switch to LOCK(O).

Do the troubleshooting for SRS unit DTC 83-23 (see page 24-173).

Do the troubleshooting for SRS unit DTC 81-4x (see page 24-161).

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

S y m p t o m Troubleshooting

DTC 71-xx ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): ODS Unit Not Calibrated

SRS indicator does not come on

NOTE:

• Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a col l ision. Ifso, verify that allthe -required components were repl aced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and thatthey were properly installed (see page 24-198). • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. Ifthe software version is not the..latest,update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest.

• Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a coll ision. I fso, verify that allthe required components were repl aced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly install ed (see page 24-196). • Only read DTCs from the SRS menu, not from S W S menus unless instructed to check S W S DTCs, S W S (ODS unit) DTCs are subcodes of SRS unit DTCs. On l y troubl eshoot the corresponding SRS DTCs. A l so these S W S DTCs are cleared by turning the ignition switch to LOCK(O). Do the troubleshooting for SRS unit DTC 81-71 (see page 24-185).

NOTE:

1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),then wait for 10 seconds. 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ),and check that the SRS indicator comes on for about 8 seconds and then goes off. D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r c o m e o n ? YES-lntermittent failure, the system isOK atthis

time.B NO-Go to step 3. 3.Connect the HDS to the data linkconnector (DLC) (see page 24-30). 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. Ifitdoes not communicate, troubl eshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-203). 5. Do the gauge control modu l e sel fdiagnostic function (see page 22-395). D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?

YES-Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit (see page 24-214). I

, ■.

NO-Faul ty gauge control module; replace the gauge control module (see page 22-419).■

&

SRS indicator stays on, but no DTCs are stored, or cannot be read NOTE:

• Before doing this troubl eshooting procedure, find out ifthe vehicle was in a col lision. Ifso, verifythat al lthe required components were replaced with new components, ofthe correct part number, and that they were properly instal led (see page 24-196). • Before doing thistroubleshooting procedure, check the battery issufficiently charged (see page 22-94). If the battery vol tage is l ow, SRS indicator stays on. • Before repl acing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. Ifthe software version is not the latest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest. 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),and see ifthe malfunction indicator lamp (Mil) stays on. D o e s th e M IL s ta y o n lo n g e r th a n 3 0 s e c o n d s ?

YES-Go to the MIL CircuitTroubl eshooting (see page 11-208).11 NO-Go to step 2. 2.Connect the HDS to the data l ink connector (DLC) (see page 24-30). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit. Ifitdoes not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209). 4.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-30). A r e a n y S R S D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Do the SRS DTC troubleshooting. NO-Go to step 5. 5.Select Body Electrical status with the HDS. 6.Check for DTCs in the Gauge Menu with the HDS. is D T C B 1 1 8 7 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to the DTC B1187 troubleshooting (see page 22-411).H

7. Do the gauge control module selfdiagnostic function (see page 22-395). D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?

YES-Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit (see page 24-214).■ NO-Faul ty gauge control modu l e; replace the gauge control module (see page 22-419).!

S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)

Side airbag cutoff indicator stays on

Side airbag cutoff indicator does not come on

NOTE:

NOTE: • Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, find out if the vehicle was in a coll ision, If so, verify that all the required components were rep l aced with new components, of the correct part number, and that they were properly installed (see page 24-196). • If the SRS indicator a l so stays on, go to SRS indicator stays on, but no DTCs are stored. • Before repl acing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS, If the software version is not the latest update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest,

• Before doing this troub l eshooting procedure, find out if the vehicle was in a coll ision. If so, verify that a l l the required components were replaced with new components, of the correct part number, and that they were properly installed (see page 24-196). • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. If the software version is not the latest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32], and retest. 1. Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat. 2. Make sure the seat-back is dry. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), and check that the side airbag cutoff indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then wait for 10 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the s id e a irb a g c u to ff in d ic a to r c o m e s o n f o r a b o u t

D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r c o m e o n a n d s ta y o n ?

6 seconds and then goes off.

YES-Go to the Symptom Troubl eshooting "SRS indicator stay on, but no DTCs are stored, or can not

D o e s th e s id e a ir b a g c u to ff in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?

be read".®

YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.

NO-Go to step 4.

24-32). H

4. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (see page 24-30). 5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit, If it does not communicate, troub l eshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209).

Go to Troubleshooting I ntermittent Failures (see page NO-Go to step 3. 3. Connect the HDS to the data l ink connector (DLC) (see page 24-30).

6. Select Body El ectrical status with the HDS,

4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the SRS unit, If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -209).

7. Do the gauge control modu l e self diagnostic function (see page 22-395).

5. Do the gauge control module self diagnostic function (see page 22-335),

D o e s th e s id e a ir b a g c u to ff in d ic a to r fla s h ?

D o e s th e s id e a ir b a g c u to ff in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?

YES-Do the ODS unit initialization (see page 24-33), If the problem is still present, rep l ace the OPDS sensor/seat-back cover/pad (see page 20-153).

YES-Faulty SRS unit; rep l ace the SRS unit (see page 24-214). ■

NO-Fau l ty gauge control module; replace the gauge control module (see page 2 2 -4 1 3 ).■

NO-Faulty gauge control module; repl ace the gauge control modu l e (see page 2 2 -4 1 9 ).■

£ Front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator stays on or comes on suddenly NOTE: Under the following conditions, the front

passenger's airbag cutoff indicator stays on or comes on suddenly. • When no one issitting the front passenger's seat, but there is an object on the seat more than 5 kg (11 Ibf). • The seat belt is buckled, but no one is sitting on the front passenger's seat, • Someone who islessthan about 30 kg (85 Ibf)issitting on the front passenger's seat. • Before replacing the SRS unit, check the SRS unit software version with the HDS. I fthe software version is not the latest, update the SRS unit software (see page 24-32), and retest. 1.Check for these items, then recheck the front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator, • The front passenger's seat is instal l ed correctly. • Nothing is/was on the front passenger’s'seat. • Nothing is/was under the front passenger's seat. • Nothing is/was in the front passenger's seat-back pocket. • Whoever was sitting on the front passenger's seat was sitting in the proper sitting position, • The front passenger's weight sensors may not measure the correct weight ofthe front passenger. I fthe passenger is more than 30 kg (65 I bf) but is supporting some of their body weight with their feet on the fl oor, or with their hands and arms on an arm rest the actual weight ofthe passenger is not measured. Does the front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator stay on?

YES-Go to step 2. NO-Troubleshooting iscomplete.■ 2.Connect the HDS to the data linkconnector (DLC) (see page 24-30).

3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehic l e and the SRS unit. If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209). 5. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Inspection. In the Inspection Menu, sel ect AFTER REPLACING FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT COMPONENT(S), and follow the prompts. D o e s th e fro n t p a s s e n g e r 's a ir b a g c u to ff in d ic a to r s ta y on?

YES-Go to step 6.

NO-Troubleshooting is complete.® 8. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Inspection.'I n the I nspection Menu, select AFTER REPLACI NG FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT COMPONENTS), and fo l low the prompts. D o e s th e fr o n t p a s s e n g e r 's a ir b a g c u to ff in d ic a to r s ta y on?

YES-Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit (see page 24-32). If the probl em is still present, replace the ODS unit (see page 24-220)., and then if the problem is still present, replace the front passenger's weight sensors (see page 2 4 -2 1 8 ).■

NO-Troubl eshooting is comp l ete.■

C o m p o n e n t R e p l a c e m e n t / I n s p e c t i o n After D e p l o y m e n t

NOTE: • Before doing any SRS repairs, C l ear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-30), for the l ess obvious deployed parts (seat belt tensioners, front impact sensors, side airbag sensors, etc.) • Ifthere isa breaking or damage found in harness rel evant to the repl acement parts shown below, repl ace it,do not repair. • Do not repl ace the ODS unit unl ess itis physically damaged or a specific faultwas found during DTC troubleshooting. • After a vehicle collision, do the ODS unit operation check (see page 24-35). • After a vehicle collision, inspect the front seat active head restraints (see page 20-138). After a col lisionwhere the seat belttensioners deployed, replace these items: • SRS unit • Seat belttensioners • Front impact sensors After a collision where the front airbag(s) depl oyed, replace these items: • SRS unit • Depl oyed airbag(s) • Seat bel ttensioners • Front impact sensors • Dashboard After a collision where the side airbag(s) deployed, replace the items for the side(s) that deployed: • SRS unit • Deployed side airbag(s) • Reinforcing cloth rear hooks • Side impact sensor(s) (first) • Side impact sensor(s) (second) • Rear safing sensor • B-pil lar lower trim • Seat frame and related parts •■■ ■ ■' • Seat belttensioners(s)

After a collision where a side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the items forthe side(s) that deployed: • SRS unit • Deployed side curtain airbag(s) • Seat belt tensioner(s)

• Side impact sensor(s) (first) • Side impact sensor(s) (second) • Rear safing sensor • Roof trim • A-pil lartrim • B-pillar upper trim • Quarter-pillar trim • Front grab handl e • Rear grab handl e • All related trim clips • Sunvisor

&

After a moderate to severe side or rear coll ision, inspect for any damage on the side curtain airbag or other related components. Replace the components as needed.

Quarter-pillar trim

A-pillar trim

B-pillar trim

During the repair process, inspect these areas; • I nspect all the SRS wire harnesses. Replace, do not repair, any damaged harnesses. • Inspect the cabl e reel for heat damage. I fthere isany damage, repl ace the cable reel. After the vehicle iscompl etel y repaired, turn the ignition switch to ON (I I).Ifthe SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off,the SRS is OK. Ifthe indicator does not function properly, use the HDS SRS Menu Method to Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-30). Ifyou cannot retrieve a code, do the SRS Symptom Troubl eshooting.

(cont’d)

C o m p o n e n t R e p l a c e m e n t / I n s p e c t i o n After D e p l o y m e n t (cont'd)

Checking and Adjusting the Headliner/Pillar Trim Overlap To prevent the side curtain airbag from depl oying and damaging the pil l ar trim, the overl ap between the headliner and pil lartrim must be less then 8 m m (0.3 in) To check the overlap, do this;

3. Remove the pillartrim, and measure the headliner overlap. • Ifthe overlap is l ess than 8 m m (0.3 in), remove the tape, and install the pillartrim. • Ifthe overlap is more than 8 m m (0.3 in),go to step 4.

1,Install the headliner (A) and the pillartrim (B).

This ill ustration shows the A-pillar. This ill ustration shows the A-pill ar.

4.Carefull y trim the headl iner with a util ity knife, reducing the overlap to l ess than 8 m m (0.3 in).

2.Apply masking tape to the headl iner, mark the upper edge of each pillartrim.

This illustration shows the A-pillar, 5. Remove the tape, and install the pil lartrim,

A

Driver's Airbag Replacement NOTE: If replacing the driver's airbag after depl oyment, refer to Component Repl acement/Inspection After Depl oyment (see page 24-196) for a complete l ist of other parts that must also be replaced.

Removal 1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95), then wait at least 3 minutes before starting work.

Installation

NOTE: If you are repl acing a depl oyed airbag, inspect the cable reel for heat damage. If there is any damage, repl ace the cabl e reel. 1. Place the driver's airbag (A) in the steering wheel, and secure it with new TORX bolts (B), using a TORX T30 bit.

B 3,8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)

2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel , then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cable reel 4P connector.

2. Connect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A) to the cable reel 4P connector and horn switch 1P connector (B), then install the access panel (C) on the steering wheel.

4. Remove the two TORX bolts (A) using a TORX T30 bit.

3. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-95). 4. Cl ear any DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 5. Remove the driver's airbag (B).

5. After install ing the airbag, confirm proper system operation: • Turn the ignition switch to ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 8 seconds and then goes off. • Make sure the horn works properly. • Make sure the steering wheel switches work properly.

Front Passenger's Airbag Replacement Remowai NOTE: If rep l acing the front passenger's airbag after dep l oyment, refer to Component Repl acement/Inspection After Depl oyment (see page 24-198) for a complete list of other parts that must also be replaced. 1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95), then wait at least 3 minutes before starting work. 2. Remove the glove box (see page 20-124). 3. Remove the connector clip (A), then disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (B) from the front passenger's airbag.

4. Remove the mounting bolt and screws (A) from the bracket (B).

5. Remove the mounting nuts (A) and mounting bolts (B) from the bracket, then remove the front passenger's airbag (C).

&

Installation 1. Place the new front passenger's airbag (A) into the bracket. Tighten the front passenger's airbag mounting nuts (B) and mounting bolts (C).

3. Attach the connector clip (A), then connect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (B) to the front passenger’s airbag, then install the glove box {see page 20-124).

4. Do the battery termina l reconnection procedure (see page 22-95). 5. Clear any DTCs with the HDS. 6. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ); the SRS indicator shou l d come on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.

Side Airbag Replacement NOTE; If replacing the side airbag after deployment, refer to Component Repl acement/Inspection After Deployment (see page 24-196) for a complete list of other parts that must also be replaced.

Removal 1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 2.2-35), then wait at least 3 minutes before starting work. 2. Remove the front seat (see page 20-139) 3, Remove the seat-back cover/pad (see page 20-153) 4, Pull the side airbag harness (A) out through the hole (B) in the reinforcing cloth of the seat-back cover/pad (CL then remove the side airbag (D).

Installation NOTE; • If the side airbag l id is secured with tape, remove the tape. • Do not open the lid on the side airbag cover, • Make sure that the seat-back cover/pad is installed proper ly, I mproper insta l lation may prevent proper deployment. • Make sure that the seat-back cover/pad is installed properly. I mproper insta l lation may prevent proper deployment, • Be sure to insta ll the wire harness so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. 1. Install the side airbag harness (A) into the hole (B) in the reinforcing cloth of the seat-back cover/pad (C).

2. Place the side airbag (D) into the reinforcing cloth of the seat-back cover/pad. 3. I nsta l l the seat-back cover in the reverse order of remova l (see page 20-153). 4. Install the front seat (see page 20-139), then connect the floor wire harness 2P connector to the side airbag. 5. Move the front seat and the seat-back through their fu l l ranges of movement, making sure the harness wires are not pinched or interfering with other parts, 6. Do the battery termina l reconnection procedure (see page 22-36). 7. Clear any DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 8. After install ing the side airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch to ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 8 seconds and then goes off.

Side Curtain Airbag Replacement Removal N OTE: • If replacing the side curtain airbag after dep l oyment, refer to Component Repl acement/Inspection After Deployment (see page 24-196) for a complete list of other parts that must al so be repl aced, • Review the interior trim repl acement procedure before doing repair or service (see page 20-78). • Removal of the side curtain airbag must be done according to Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20).

1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95), then wait at least 3 minutes before starting work, 2. Remove the headl iner (see page 20-98). 3. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) from the side curtain airbag.

Left side shown; right side is sim il ar.

Side Curtain Airbag Replacement (cont'd) 4. Remove the mounting bo lts (A) and mounting bolts (B) from the bracket Detach the cl ips (C), then remove the side curtain airbag (D).

NOTE:

• If replace the side curtain airbag after dep l oym ent refer to Component Replacement/Inspection after Depl oyment (see page 24-196) for a complete l ist of other parts that must a l so be replaced. • Installation of the side curtain airbag must be done according to Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20). • If the airbag is frayed, or has any other visible damage, replace it. Do not attempt to repair an airbag. • When you install the airbag, make sure it is not twisted, and that it is not caught between the inflator bracket by the bracket bolts. • Make sure that the side curtain airbag inflator retainer is installed properly. Otherwise the airbag could incorrectly deploy and cause damage or injuries. • If there is any damage to the curtain airbag, do not try to repair it. Replace any damage side curtain airbag. 1. Place the side curtain airbag assembly on the side of the roof. Tighten the side curtain airbag mounting bolts (A) and mounting bolts (B) Attach the clips (C).

Side Curtain Airbag Replacement (cont'd) 2. Route the side curtain airbag tab (A) through the rear grab hand l e bracket (B) and over the top, and hook the tab onto the bracket's arrow tab (€).

3. Connect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) to the side curtain airbag.

Left side shown; right side is s im il ar.

4. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-35). 5. Clear any DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 8. After insta l ling the side curtain airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ); the SRS indicator should come on for about 8 seconds and then goes off. 7. I nsta ll all removed parts in the reverse order of removal. If any clips are stress-whitened, replace them with new ones. 8. Confirm proper headliner/pill ar trim overlap (see page 24-138).

A Airbag and Tensioner Disposal Special Tools Required Deployment Tool 07AAZ-000A100 Before scrapping any airbags, side airbags, side curtain airbags, seat belt tensioners (incl uding those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the part(s) must be deployed. If the vehic l e is still within the warranty period, the Acura District Parts and Service Manager must give approva l and/or special instruction before deploying the part(s). Only after the part(s) have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for examp l e), can they be scrapped.

Driver's Airbag 4. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cabl e reel .

If the parts appear intact (not depl oyed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure.

D eplof ing Airbags in the Vehicle If an SRS equipped vehicle is to be entirely scrapped, its airbags, side airbags, side curtain airbags, and seat belt tensioners should be deployed w hi l e sti l l in the vehicle. These parts should not be considered as salvageable parts and should never be installed in another vehic l e. 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then do the battery termina l disconnection procedure (see page 22-95), then wait at least 3 minutes before starting work. 2. Confirm that each front airbag, side airbag, side curtain airbag, or seat belt tensioner is securely mounted.

Front Passenger's Airbag

5. Remove the g l ove box. 6. Remove the connector clip (A), then disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (B) from the front passenger's airbag.

3. Confirm that the deployment too l is functioning properly by fo l lowing the check procedure on the tool label.

(cont’d)

Airbag and Tensioner Disposal (cont'd) Side Airbag

Seat Belt Tensioner

7. Disconnect both floor wire harness 2P connectors (A) from the driver's and front passenger's side airbags.

9. Disconnect both f l oor wire harness 4P connectors (A) from the driver's and the front passenger's seat belt tensioners. Pul l the seat belt out all the way and cut it.

Side Curtain Airbag 8, Disconnect both f l oor wire harness the 2P connectors (A) from the left and right side curtain airbags.

&

1 0.

Cut off each connector, and strip the ends of the wires. Twist each pair of unlike colored wires together, and clip an alligator cl ip (A) from, the deployment tool to each pair. NOTE; • Place the deployment tool at least 10 m (30 ft) away from the vehicle. • The driver's and front passenger's airbags have dual inflators. Twist each pair of unlike col ored wires together, and clip an alligator clip to each pair.

11. Connect a 12 V to the tool, • If the green light on the tool comes on, the igniter circuit is defective and cannot deploy the component. Go to 'Disposal of Damaged Components. • If the red l ight on the too l comes on, the component is ready to be deployed. 12. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbags and tensioners should deploy {deployment is both highly audible and visible: A loud noise and rapid inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation). • If the components deploy and the green light on the tool comes on, continue with this procedure. • If a component does not deploy, and the green l ight comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to Disposal of Damaged Components. • During deployment the airbags can become hot enough to burn you. Wait 30 minutes after deployment before touching the airbags. 13. Dispose of the complete airbag. No part of it can be reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag (A), and seal it securely.. Dispose of the deployed airbag according to your l ocal regulations.

Airbag and Tensioner Disposal (cont'd) Deploying Components Out of the Vehicle

Disposal of Damaged Components

If an intact airbag or tensioner has been removed from a scrapped vehicle, or has been found defective or damaged during transit, storage, or service, it shoul d be deployed as follows:

1. If install ed in a vehicle, fo l low the removal procedure for the driver's airbag {see page 24-199), front passenger’s airbag, side airbag (see page 24-202), side curtain airbag (see page 24-203), and seat belt (see page 24-4) tensioner. 2. In a ll cases, make a short circuit by cutting, stripping, and twisting together the two inflator wires, NOTE; The driver's and front passenger's airbags have dual inflators. The l ike color wires go to the individua l infl ators. Twist the like colored wires together. 3. Package the component in exactl y the same packaging that the new rep l acement part came in.

1. Confirm that the deployment tool is functioning proper ly by fo l lowing the check procedure Deploying Airbags in the Vehicl e on the tool l abel. 2. Position the airbag face up, outdoors, on f l at ground, at l east 10 m (30 ft) from any obstacl es or people. 3. Fol low steps 10 through 13 of the in-vehicle dep l oyment procedure. NOTE: The driver’s and front passenger's airbags have dual inflators. Twist each pair of un l ike colored wires together, and clip an alligator clip to each pair,

4. Mark the outside of the box DAMAGED AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED, DAMAGED SIDE AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED, DAMAGED SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED, or DAMAGED SEAT BELT TENSIONER NOT DEPLOYED so it does not get confused with your parts stock. 5. Contact your Acura District Parts and Service Manager for instructions on how and where to return it for disposal .

Deployment Tool Check 1. Connect the yell ow clips to both switch protector hand l es on the too l . 2. Then connect the red l ead to the positive battery post and the b l ack lead to the negative battery post, 3. Push the operation switch: The green l ight should come on, indicating that the tool is operating properl y and is ready for use. If the red light stays on, the tool is faulty, and another one must be used for the procedure. 4. Disconnect the too l cl ips and connectors from the protector hand l es and the battery.

Cable Reel Replacement Removal

6. Remove the column cover screws (A), then remove the column covers (B, C).

1 . Make sure the front w h e e l s are aligned straight

ahead. 2. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95), then wait at l east 3 minutes before starting work. 3. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-199). 4. Disconnect the cable reel sub harness 20P connector (A) from the cabl e reel, then remove the steering wheel bo lt (B).

5. Confirm that the front wheels point straight ahead, then remove the steering wheel with a steering wheel puller (see page 17-8). Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft when removing the steering wheel.

7. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (A) from the cable reel 4P connector (B), then disconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P connector (C) from the cable reel (D).

(cont’d)

Cable Reel Replacement (cont'd) 8. Rel ease the upper l ock tab (A) under the cab l e ree l connector with a 9 0 0 hook shaped tool (B). S l ide the too l belowthe cable reel connector just above the lock tab. Release the lower lock tab (C), and slide the cable reel off the column.

Installation 1. Before instal l ing the steering w h e e l, align the fro nt

wheels straight ahead. 2. If not already done, do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95), then wait at least 3 minutes before starting work. 3. Set the turn signal cancel ing s l eeve (A) so that the projections (B) are aligned vertical ly.

4, Carefully install the cabl e reel (A) on the steering column shaft, Then connect dashboard wire harness 20P connector (B) to the cable reel, and connect the cable reel 4P connector (C) to the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (D).

5. Install the steering co l umn covers.

8 . Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the

front wheels are pointing ahead, then center the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the cable reel clockwise unti l it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (about three turns) until the arrow mark (B) on the cable reel label points straight up.

8 . Install the steering wheel bolt (A) and tighten it to the

specified torque, then connect the cable reel sub harness 20P connector (B).

(4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf-ft) 9. Install the driver's airbag (see page 24-139). 7. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signa l cance l ing s l eeve (B) as shown, and insta l l the steering wheel on to the steering co l umn shaft, making sure the steering wheel hub (C) engages the pins (D) of the cab l e ree l and tabs of the turn signa l canceling sleeve. Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft when installing the steering wheel. C

10. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-95). 11. Clear any DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 12. After installing the cable reel, confirm proper system operation: • Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ); the SRS indicator should come on for about 8 seconds and then goes off. • After the SRS indicator has turned off, turn the steering wheel fully left and right to confirm the SRS indicator does not come on. • Make sure the horn and turn signal switches work properly. • Make s u re the cruise control combination switch work. • Make sure the audio remote switch work. • Make sure the multi-information switch work. • Make sure the HFL-navigation voice contro l switch (with navigation) work. • Make s u r e the HFL switch (without navigation) work, • Make sure the distance switch work. 13. After installation, check the steering wheel spoke angle. If the steering spoke angles to the right and l eft are not equal (steering wheel is not centered), correct the engagement of the wheel/column shaft splines.

SRS Unit Replacement Removal

installation

1. Do t he battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95), then wait at l east 3 minutes before

1,Install the SRS unit with new TORX bolts (A) using a TORX T30 bit,then connect the connectors (B) to the SRS unit; push them into position until they click.

starting work. 2. Remove the driver’s center consol e trim and passenger's center console trim (see page 24-15).

NOTE: Be sure the SRS unit issitting squarely against it’s bracket before torquing the TORX bolt.

3. Disconnect SRS unit connectors A (39p), and B (39p) from the SRS unit (C). NOTE; The SRS unit connectors have l ever l ocks. Release the l ocks before disconnecting the connectors (see page 24-25).

A 3,8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft) Replace. 2. Reconnect both seat belttensioner connectors (see page 24-30). 3. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-95). 4, Remove the TORX bolts (D) using a TORX T30 bit, then remove the SRS unit.

4. Make sure the SRS unit has the latest software. I fit does not have the latest, update the software in the SRS unit (see page 24-32). 5. Do the front passenger’s weight sensor initialization (see page 24-35). 8.Check the operation ofthe ODS unitwith the HDS (see page 24-35). 7.Confirm proper SRS operation; Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I);the SRS indicator shoul d come on for about 6 seconds and then goes off, 8. Instal lthe parts in the reverse order of removal,

Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement Removal

Installation

1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95), then wait at least 3 minutes before starting work.

1.Instal lthe side impact sensor (first) (A) with a new TORX bolt (B) using a TORX T30 bit,then connect the floor wire harness 4P connector (C) to the side impact sensor (first).

2. Remove the front seat (see page 20-139). 3. Remove the lower B-pill ar lower trim panel (see page 20-79). 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector (A) from the side impact sensor (first) (B).

2. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-95). 3.Clear any DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31).

5. Remove the TORX bolt (C) using a TORX T30 bit,then remove the side impact sensor (first).

4. Confirm proper SRS operation: Turn the ignition switch to ON (II);the SRS indicator should come on for about 8 seconds and then goes off. 5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal .

Side Impact Sensor (Second) Replacement Removal

installation

1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95), then wait at l east 3 minutes before starting work.

1.Install the side impact sensor (second) (A) with a new TORX bol t(B) using a TORX T30 bit,then connect floor wire harness 2P connector (C) to the side impact sensor (second).

2. Remove the rear side trim panel (see page 20-88). 3. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) from the side impact sensor (second) (B).

2. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-95). 3. Clear any DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 4, Remove the TORX bolt (C) using a TORX T30 bit,then remove the side impact sensor (second).

4. Confirm proper SRS operation: Turn the ignition switch to ON (II );the SRS indicator shoul d come on for about 8 seconds and then goes off. 5. I nstall the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Rear Safing Sensor Replacement Removal

Installation

1.Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95), then wait at least 3 minutes before starting work.

1.Install the rear safing sensor (A) with a new TORX bolt (B) using a TORX T30 bit,then connect the floor wire harness 2P connector (C) to the rear safing sensor.

2. Remove the second row seat (see page 20-160),

A

3. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) from the rear safing sensor (B). B

Replace.

2. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-95). 3. Clear any DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 4. Remove the TORX bolt (C) using a TORX T30 bit,then remove the rear safing sensor.

4. Confirm proper SRS operation: Turn the ignition switch to ON (II);the SRS indicator shoul d come on for about 6 seconds and then goes off, 5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal .

Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Replacement Removal NOTE:

5, Remove the mounting nuts (A),then remove the rear brackets (B) and anchorage brackets (C)from the front passenger's weight sensors (D).

• Removal ofthe front passenger's weight sensors must be done according to Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-20). • The front passenger's weight sensors are part ofthe sl ide/up-down adjuster and must be replaced as an assembly, 1.Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95), then wait at least 3 minutes before starting work. 2. Remove the front passenger's seat (see page 20-139). 3. Disconnect l eft seat track/sl ide motor connector from the power seat harness, then remove these items. • front cover (see page 20-142) • recline cover (see page 20-142) • center cover (see page 20-142) • outer height cover (see page 20-145) • inner height cover (see page 20-145) • protector (see step 5 on page 20-147) • seat belt buckl e (see page 24-6) 4. Disconnect the ODS unit harness connectors (A) from the front passenger’s weight sensors (B), then remove the mounting nuts (C) mounting bol ts (D) and slide joint cable (E)from the front passenger's weight sensors.

8. Remove the protectors (E) from the from the front passenger's weight sensors.

4f Installation

4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE; Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfering with other parts.

5. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-95).

1.Pl ace the anchorage brackets (A) and rear brackets (B) on the front passenger's weight sensors (C). Tighten the mounting nuts (D).

6.C l ear any DTCs with the HDS {see page 24-31). 7. Do the front passenger's weight sensor initialization (see page 24-38). 8. Confirm proper SRS operation; Turn the ignition switch to ON (II );the SRS indicator shoul d come ON for about 6 seconds and then goes off.

2. Install the protectors (E) to the front passenger's weight sensors, 3. Instal lthe sl ide joint cable (A), then instal land torque the new front passenger's weight sensors with mounting nuts (B) and new mounting bolts (€) under the seat cushion, then connect the ODS unit harness connectors (D) to the front passenger’s weight sensors.

ODS Unit Replacement Removal

Installation

1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-35), then wait at least 3 minutes before starting work.

1.Place the ODS unit (A) on the seat-back frame. Tighten the two screws (B), and connect the ODS unit harness 18P connector (C) and sensor connectors (D) to the ODS unit Install the cover (E).

2. Remove the front passenger's seat (see page 20-139). 3. Pull out the seat-back cover/pad (see page 20-153). 4. Remove the cover (A),then disconnect the ODS unit 18P connector (B) and sensor connectors (C) from the ODS unit (D).

2. I nstall the seat-back cover/pad in the reverse order of removal (see page 20-153), 3. Install the front passenger's seat (see page 20-133).

5. Remove the two screws (E) and the ODS unit.

4. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-35). 5.Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 6.Clear any DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31), 7. Do the ODS unit initial ization (see page 24-33). 8. Confirm proper SRS operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II ),and check that the SRS indicator comes on for about 8 seconds and then goes off.

&

E-Pretensioner Unit Replacement Removal

Installation

1.Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-35), then wait at least 3 minutes before starting work.

1. I nstal lthe E-pretensioner unit (A) with the mounting bolts (B).

2. Remove the passenger's center console trim (see page 20-104). 3. Disconnect the floor wire harness 5P connector (A) and 14P connector (B)from the E-pretensioner unit (C)

2. Connect the floor wire harness 5P connector (C) and 14P connector (D) to the E-pretensioner unit 3. I nstal lthe passenger's center console trim (see page 20-104). 4. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-95). 4. Remove the mounting bolts (D), then remove the E-pretensioner unit

5.Clear any DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 8.Confirm proper SRS operation: Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),and check that the SRS indicator comes on for about 8 seconds and then goes off.

Front Impact Sensor Replacement Removal

Installation

1.Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95), then wait at least 3 minutes before starting work,

1.Install the front impact sensor (A) with a new TORX bolt (B),then connect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (C) to the front impact sensor.

2. Remove the front inner fender (see page 20-232). 3. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (A) from, the front impact sensor (B). B

2. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-95). 3. Clear any DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 4. Remove the TORX bolt (C) using a TORX T30 bit,then remove the front impact sensor.

4. Confirm proper SRS operation: Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I );the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then goes off, 5. Install the parts inthe reverse order of removal.

Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement Removal

Installation

NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch to ON (II),and do not connect the battery cabl e while removing the driver's seat position sensor.

NOTE: • Be sure to instal lthe harness wires so they are not pinched or interfere with other parts. • Do not turn the ignition switch to ON (II ),and do not connect the battery cable while installing the driver's seat position sensor.

1.Raise the seat allthe way up. 2. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-95), then wait at least 3 minutes before starting work. 3. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-139). 4. Disconnect the driver's seat wire harness 2P connector (A) from the driver's seat position sensor (B).

1. Install the driver's seat position sensor (A) with a new TORX bolt (B) using a TORX T30 bit,then connect the driver's seat wire harness 2P connector (C) to the driver's seat position sensor.

2. I nstall the driver's seat (see page 20-139), 5. Remove the TORX bolt (C) using a TORX T30 bit,then remove the driver's seat position sensor.

3. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-95). 4. Clear any DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-31). 5.Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor with the HDS (see page 24-37), 6. Confirm proper SRS operation: Turn the ignition switch to ON (II );the SRS indicator shoul d come on for about 8 seconds and then goes off.

Front Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator Illumination Bulb Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard center panel (see page 20-120), 2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 6P connector

(A) from the front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator (B),

3. Push out the front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator from behind the center panel (C). 4. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No, 4 terminals of the front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator. I fthere is no continuity, repl ace the bulbs (D).

NOTE; Both ill umination bul bs are connected in parallel. Ifthere iscontinuity, remove the lower, hazard warning switch illumination bulb, and recheck for continuity. I fthere is no continuity, repl ace the upper, front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator illumination bulb. 5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal .

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) ( I driving support maintenance is required) The Acura M D X SRS includes a driver’s airbag inthe steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag inthe dashboard above the glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, side curtain airbags in the sides of the roof, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safel y service the SRS isincl uded in this Service Manual. I tems marked with an asterisk (*) on the contents page include or are l ocated near SRS components. Servicing, disassembling, or repl acing these items requires special precautions and tool s, and shoul d be done by an authorized Acura dealer. • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could l ead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal or side collision, all SRS service work should be done by an authorized Acura dealer. • Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and instal l ation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags, side airbags, and/or side curtain airbags. • Do not bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors, especially when the ignition switch is in ON (II),or for at least 3 minutes afterthe ignition switch isturned to LOCK (0);otherwise, the system may fail in a collision, or the airbags may deploy. • SRS electrical connectors are identified by yell ow color coding. Rel ated components are l ocated in the steering col umn, center console, dashboard, dashboard lower cover, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats, inthe roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)....................... 25-1 Collision Mitigation Braking System (CMBS) ... 25-93 Blind Spot Information System (BSI)............... 25-115

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Special T o o ls ..........................................................................25-2 Component Location In d e x ................................................25-3 General Troubleshooting Inform ation...........................25-5 ACC Unit U p d a te ..................................................................25-8 DTC Troubleshooting In d e x .............................................. 25-9 Symptom Troubleshooting In d ex...................................25-12 System Description.............................................................25-13 Circuit D iag ram ..................................................................... 25-20 DTC Troubleshooting......................................... ............... 25-22 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) System Troubleshooting (No DTC Indication)......................... 25-74 Symptom Troubleshooting................................................25-77 M illim eter W ave Radar Removal/Installation............... 25-80 * Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Combination Switch T e s t.......................................................................................25-82 * Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Combination Switch/Distance Switch Removal/Installation.........25-83 * Distance Switch T e s t........................................................... 25-83 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unit Removal/Installation........................................................ 25-84 Millimeter W ave Radar A im in g ........................................25-85 Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor Removal/Installation. .. 25-91

Special Tools RefJ ©

Tool Nun 07AAJ-STKA210 07AAJ-STKA220

J

Descripti

Alignment Set Stand Set

Qty

1 1

Component Location Index

Component Location Index (cont'd) GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

MULTI -INFORMATION DISPLAY (MID)

ACC I NDICATOR (AMBER)/ ACC ACTIVATION INDICATOR (GREEN)

General Troubleshooting Information Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Amber) When the ACC system is normal, the ACC indicator comes on for about 2 seconds afterturning the ignition switch ON (I I),then itgoes off. When the ACC system detects a problem whil e in operation, the ACC system stops control, and the ACC indicator changes from green to amber and stays on. NOTE; The ACC system iscommunicating with the PCM, the VSA system, and the gauge control module by F-CAN. Ifa connected unit ma l functions, the ACC system wil lnot operate. I n this case, both the ACC indicator and the connected unit indicator come on and stay on (except the gauge control module). MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY (MID)

ACC U nit The ACC unit uses input from the mil limeter wave radar to control the vehicl e’s speed and brakes to maintain a constant distance between the vehicle and other moving vehicles directl y ahead.

Millimeter Wave Radar The millimeter wave radar cal cul ates the distance between the moving vehicl e ahead and your vehicl e, and detects the two vehicles speed differential . The ACC unit receives this information from the mil limeter wave radar. The mil limeter wave radar al so detects itsown errors, and itsignals the ACC unit ifan error isdetected.

CAN Communication The ACC unit ison the F-CAN, and itcommunicates with other units (Acuralink, gauge control module, steering angl e sensor, PCM, SH-AWD, SRS, E-pretensioner unit, ADS, TPMS, yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudinal acceleration sensor, and VSA) via the F-CAN. Ifthe ACC unit detects a communication error or a malfunction in another connected unit, the ACC system will not operate-even though itis normal, I n this case, both the ACC indicator and the related unit indicator will come on and stay on.

ACC ACTIVATION INDICATOR fGREEN)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Green)

Millimeter Wave Radar Aiming Ifthe mill imeter wave radar is removed or repl aced, do the millimeter wave radar aiming procedure. Ifthe aiming is incomplete, the ACC indicator comes on.

I fthe ACC system is normal, the indicator comes on when the MAIN switch is ON, and goes offwhen the MAIN switch isOFF, I fthe ACC system m a l functions, the indicator color changes from green to amber, and stays on.

Self-diagnostic Function The ACC system has a sel f-diagnostic function. Ifthe self-diagnostic function detects a malfunction, the ACC system stops control, turns on the ACC indicator (amber), and stores DTCs.

Multi-information Display (MID) Indication When the ACC system is normal, the ACC indicates its operation on the multi-information display (MID) when the MAIN switch isON,

(cont'd)

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd) How to Troybleshoot DTCs Check the DTCs with the HDS, Make a copy of the freeze data, then clear the DTC. Before troubleshooting, check and note these items; • Ask the cl ient about the conditions when the problem occurred, and tryto reproduce the same conditions for troubl eshooting. • Ifthe symptom does not appear and the ACC indicator (amber) does not come on during the test-drive, but troubleshooting isdone based on the DTC, check for poor connections or loose terminals at all connectors rel ated to the circuitthat you are troubleshooting. • Afterthe troubleshooting or repairs are done, clearthe DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same conditions as when the DTC was original ly set. Make sure the ACC indicator (amber) does not come on. • The ACC system sometimes stops control because of the environment (weather, road conditions, driving

conditions, etc,). A DTC may be stored in these cases. DTCs may be stored even when the system isnormal: NOTE: The ACC indicator does not come on when the fol lowing DTCs are stored (except DTC 193: Adaptive cruise control (ACC) unit programming error). DTC 83: Millimeter Wave Radar Detection Unstable Driving behind a target vehicl e that caused unstabl e reception. DTC 84; Target vehicle comes closer than the millimeter wave radar detecting limits The target vehicl e brakes suddenly, etc. DTC 85; Extensive driving on a rough or winding road, or VSA system malfunction DTC 86: Abnormal tire pressure Abnormal tire pressure, flattire. DTC 87; Adaptive cruise control (ACC) brake control temporarily prohibited ACC brake works continuously, or ACC brake control is temporarily prohibited by a communication line error detected between the ACC unit and VSA modulator-control unit. DTC 88: Millimeter wave radar out of detection area Millimeter wave radar temperature istoo high, millimeter wave radar suppl y voltage istoo low, or out of detection condition. DTC Si; Front wheel spin DTC 91: Vehicle skidded, spun out, or abrupt steering wheel movements

DTC S3: Front tire problem Different diameter oftires, fl attire, or l arge air pressure differential, DTC 94: Rear tire problem Different diameter of tires, flattire, or l arge air pressure differential . DTC 95; Power supply voltage too high DTC 96: Power supply voltage too low DTC 99: Acceleration/deceleration abnormality DTC 101: Rear wheel locked Driving with the parking brake appl ied, or the parking brake stuck. NOTE: Loose or poor connections are a common cause of intermittent DTCs and other symptoms. I fyour troubleshooting results in no trouble found, monitor the ACC, CMBS, and VSA data listswhile flexing allthe circuit connections between the various sensors and their control units. I fany values change, you have found a poor connection.

How to Retrieve DTCs

How to Clear DTCs

NOTE: Make sure the battery isful lycharged before you begin.

NOTE: Make sure the battery isful lycharged before you begin.

1. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).

1.Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).

2.Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A).

2.Connect the HDS to the data linkconnector (DLC) (A).

3.Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).

3.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicl e and the ACC unit I fitdoes not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209).

4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ACC unit Ifitdoes not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209).

5. Use the HDS to check for ACC DTCs.

5. I n the DRIVING SUPPORT MENU of the HDS, sel ect ACC, then DTCs. Choose the clear DTCs icon, and foll ow the prompts.

6. Read and record the DTC. 7.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),then wait for 10 seconds.

8.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),then wait for 10 seconds.

8. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.

7. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.

9. Do the troubleshooting procedure for the DTC.

ACC Unit Update Special Tools Required •Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) tablet tester •Honda I nterface Modu l e (HIM) and an iN workstation with the latest HDS software version •HDS Pocket Tester •GNA600 and an iN workstation with the latest HDS software version •M V C I unit with the latest control module (CM) update software instal l ed Available through the Acura Tool and Equipment Program 888-424-8857

1, Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0). 2.Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A).

Any one of the above updating tool s can be used. NOTE: • Make sure the HDS/iN workstation has the latest HDS software version. • Before you update the ACC unit, make sure the battery inthe vehicl e isful ly charged. • Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or ACC (I) during the update. I fthere isa problem with the update, leave the ignition switch in ON (II). • To prevent ACC unit damage, do not operate anything electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moonroof (ifequipped), door locks, etc.) during the update. • To ensure the l atest program is install ed, do an ACC unit update whenever the ACC unit is repl aced. • You cannot update an ACC unit with a program it already has. Itwill only accept a new program. • Ifyou need to diagnose the H I M because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was fl ashing during the update, l eave the ignition switch in ON (I I)when you disconnect the HIM from the data l ink connector (DLC). This will prevent ACC unit damage. • DTCs stored in memory are cleared when the ACC unit is updated.

3.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ),but do not startthe engine, 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ACC unit I fitdoes not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209). 5.Select the update program, and foll ow the screen prompts to update the ACC unit. 8. Ifthe software inthe ACC unit isthe l atest, disconnect the HDS/HI M from the DLC, and go back to the procedure that you were doing. Ifthe software in the ACC unit is not the latest,foll ow the instructions on the screen. NOTE: I fyou run into a problem during the update procedure (programming takes over 15 minutes, status bar goes over 100 %, D or immobil izer light flashes, HDS tabl etfreezes, etc.),follow these steps to minimize the chance of damaging the ACC unit: • Leave the ignition switch in ON (I I)position. • Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery charger). • Shut down the HDS. • Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. • Reboot the HDS. • Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the update procedure again. 7.When the update iscomplete, or ifitwas not needed, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),then wait for 10 seconds. 8. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.

DTC Troubleshooting Index DTC

Detection Item

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator ON

10

Vehicle speed signal error

11

Left rear wheel speed sensor signal error

ON

12

Right rearwheel speed sensor signal error

ON

13

Leftfrontwheel speed sensor signal error

ON

14

Right frontwheel speed sensor signal error

ON

21

Yaw rate sensor error

ON

22

Yaw rate sensor center position revision val ue error

ON

23

Yaw rate sensor gain error

ON

24

Yaw rate sensor diagnose malfunction

ON

25

Yaw rate sensor stabilizing malfunction

ON

30

Brake l ight relay circuit malfunction

ON

42

VSA Brake actuator malfunction

ON

43

Cal FL brake system malfunction

ON

44

Cal FL brake fluid pressure sensor circuitopen/short

ON

45

Cal FL brake fluid pressure sensor center position error

ON

40

Cal FL brake fluid pressure sensor malfunction

ON

47

Cal FR brake system malfunction

ON

48

Cal FR brake fl uid pressure sensor circuitopen/short

on-

49

Cal FR brake fl uid pressure sensor center position error

ON

50

Cal FR brake fluid pressure sensor malfunction

ON

59

F-CAN B Communication error

ON

60

F-CAN A Communication error

ON

81

Millimeter wave radar communication error

ON

82

Mill imeter wave radar sensor error

ON

83

Millimeter wave radar aiming error

ON

81

Engine control system (including PCM) malfunction

Page DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-22) DTC Troubleshooting >ee page 25-22) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-23) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-23) DTC Troubl eshooting (see page 25-24) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-24) DTC Troubleshooting »ee page 25-24) DTC Troubl eshooting (see page 25-25) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-26) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-27) DTC Troubl eshooting (see page 25-28) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-32) DTC Troubl eshooting (see page 25-33) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-34) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-38) DTC Troubl eshooting (see page 25-41) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-45) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-47) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-50) DTC Troubl eshooting (see page 25-54) DTC Troubl eshooting (see page 25-58) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-53) DTC Troubl eshooting (see page 25-60) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-62) DTC Troubl eshooting (see page 25-82) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-83)

NOTE: For CMBS DTCs, referto the DTC troubleshooting index ofthe CMBS section. (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd) Detection Item

DTC 83

Millimeter wave radar detection unstabl e

84

Target vehicle comes closer than the millimeter wave radar detecting limits Extensive driving on a rough or winding road, orVSA system ma l functio Abnormal tire pressure

85 88

88

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) brake control temporaril y prohibited Mill imeter wave radar out of detection condition

89

Front wheel spin

90

A/T control system (including PCM) malfunction

91 92

Vehicl e skidded, spun out, or abrupt steering wheel movements VSA modulator-control unit malfunction

93

Front tire problem

94

Rear tire problem

35

Power supply voltage too high

98

Power supply voltage too low

99

Accel eration/decel eration abnormality

100

CMBS initial check incomplete

101

Left rear wheel locked

105

Dust or dirton the millimeter wave radar

107

Millimeter wave radar aiming incompl ete

110

Lost communication with the PCM (PGM-FI system)

111

Lost communication with the PCM (A/T system)

112

Lost communication with the VSA modulator-control unit

113

Lost communication with the gauge control module

115

Lost communication with the SH-AWD control unit

120

Two or more aiming targets exist

87

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator

ON

ON

NOTE: For CMBS DTCs, referto the DTC troubl eshooting index ofthe CMBS section.

Page DTC Troubl eshooting (see page 25-8) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-8) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-8) DTC Troubl eshooting (see page 25-8) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-6) DTC Troubl eshooting (see page 25-6) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-8) DTC Troubl eshooting ;ee page 25-83) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-8) DTC Troubleshooting see page 25-84) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-8) DTC Troubleshooting fsee page 25-8) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-8) DTC Troubl eshooting see page 25-8) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-6) DTC Troubleshooting ee page 25-110) (see page 25-8) DTC Troubleshooting ;ee page 25-84) DTC Troubleshooting ;ee page 25-85) DTC Troubleshooting ;ee page 25-85) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-87) DTC Troubleshooting see page 25-69) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-71) DTC Troubl eshooting (see page 25-72) Refer to the DTCs (ifthe aiming procedure is incomplete) (see page 25-30)

DTC

Detection Item

121

The width ofthe aiming target isout of specification

122

The distance ofthe aiming target isout ofspecification

123

The aiming target ismoved

124

The rightand l eftposition ofthe aiming target isout of specification

199

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) unit programming error

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator

ON

NOTE: For CMBS DTCs, referto the DTC troubleshooting index ofthe CMBS section.

Refer to the DTCs (ifthe aiming procedure incompl ete) (see page 25-30 Refer to the DTCs (ifthe aiming procedure is incomplete) (see page 25-90) Refer to the DTCs {ifthe aiming procedure is incomplete) (see page 25-90) Refer to the DTCs (ifthe aiming procedure is incompl ete) (see page 25-90) DTC Troubl eshooting (see page 25-73)

Symptom Troubleshooting Index NOTE: The adaptive cruise control system is cancell ed when the VSA system is activated.

npto Vehicl e speed can be set but there isno adaptive cruise control (ACC) indication on the l\ Vehicle speed cannot be set when the SET switch ispressed (between the 25 mph (40 km/h) and 30 mph (145 km/h))

Diagnostic procedure Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-395).

1.Test the adaptive cruise control combination switch (see page 25-82). 2.Test the transmission range switch (see page 14-234). 3.Test the brake pedal position switch (see page 22-282). 4.Check for a short inthe SCS l ine. Test the adaptive cruise control combination Vehicle does not decel erate or accel erate accordingly when the switch (see page 25-82). set/resume switch ispressed Set speed does not cancel when Test the transmission range switch (see page 14-234). the shift lever isin position N Set speed does not cancel when Test the brake pedal position switch (see page the brake pedal ispressed 22-282). Set speed does not cancel when Test th e a d a p tive cruise c o n tro l c o m b in a tio n the adaptive cruise control switch (see page 25-82). (MAI N) switch isturned off Set distance cannot be adjusted Test the distance switch (see page 25-83). with the distance switch Vehicle speed can be set, but Check for DTCs inthe PGM-FI system with the vehicle decelerates HDS (see page 11-3). Senses a vehicl e driving in Do the adaptive cruise control (ACC) system another lane check (see page 25-74). Does not sense the vehicl e driving ahead

Do the adaptive cruise control (ACC) system check (see page 25-74).

I ntermittently senses the vehicle Do the adaptive cruise control (ACC) system check (see page 25-74). driving ahead

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) indicator (amber) does not come on Adaptive cruise control (ACC) indicator (amber) does not go off Adaptive cruise control (ACC) activation indicator (green) does not come < Adaptive cruise control (ACC) activation indicator (green) does not go off

Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 25-77)

Symptom Troubl eshooting (see page 25-78) Symptom Troubl eshooting (see page 25-79) Symptom Troubl eshooting (see page 25-80)

Also check fo

• Blown No. 11 (15 A) fuse inthe main under-hood fuse box • An open inthe wire • A short inthe wire • The system isinservice mode • A short inthe wire • An open inthe wire • An open inthe wire • A s h o rt in th e w ire

Fault' • Incorrect mil limeter wave radar instal lation leel alignment • Out ofthe performance limits • Wheel alignment • Undetectable environment • Dirty radar l ens • I ncorrect millimeter wave radar installation • Wheel alignment • Undetectable environment ty radar k

System Description The adaptive cruise control (ACC) system automatically controls the vehicle speed, within the set speed, to maintain a safe distance to the vehicl e ahead.

Operation Criteria • When there is no vehicle ahead, the ACC maintains the set speed. • When there isa vehicle ahead, the ACC maintains a set distance within the set speed. • Ifthe vehicle ahead pulls over out ofthe way, the ACC accel erates the vehicl e to the set speed and maintains that speed. • The ACC measures the distance from the vehicle ahead using the millimeterwave radar, and itdetermines ifthe target vehicle driving ahead is in the same l ane by using inputs from the vehicle speed sensor and the yaw rate-l ateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor. • Ifthe ACC detects a slow vehicle and the distance to the vehicle ahead isclosing, the vehicle speed is reduced primarily by cl osing the throttl e, and additional slowing isaccompl ished by using the brakes. I fthe vehicle ahead is too close, an alarm sounds. • Ifa slower vehicle ahead accelerates, the throttle isopened to accel erate the vehicl e (up to the set speed) to maintain the following distance.

Basic ACC Pattern • Radar detection: Max. 0.08 mile (100 m) ahead in a 18 degree field of view • Vehicle operating speed: 25^90 mph (40— 145 km/h)

Cruise Control: No vehicle ahead

Deceleration Control: Vehicle ahead detected

Tracking Control: Tracks vehicle ahead

Acceleration Control: Vehicle ahead pulls aw ay

System Description (cont'd) ACC Unit The ACC unit obtains information from external sensors and switches that are connected to their respective control units. ACC Operation Range; • Setting speed range is25— 90 mph (40— 145 km/h) • Setting following distance from vehicle ahead is 1.0— 2.0 seconds • Maximum deceleration is0.30 G

Left front pressure sensor Right front pressure sensor Millimeter wave radar Brake light relay

Brake lights

Steering angle sensor

Yaw rate latera l/ longitudinal accelaration sensor

Whee lspeed sensor VSA modulator-control unit —

Gauge control m odu le > ACC indicator • Multi-information display (MIDI > CMBS indicator » Buzzer

Master cylinder pressure sensor {built into the modulator unit}

CANCEL switch SET/DECEL switch RES/ACCEL switch DISTANCE switch

Brake pedal position switch Transmission range switch ETCS Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor

SH-AWD control unit

M illim eter Wave Radar The mil l imeter wave radar is instal l ed on the main bracket attached to the front bul khead. The main bracket al lows the radar angle to be adjusted ±3 degrees vertically by moving the main bracket adjusters.

The millimeter wave radar has these functions: Basic distance function The mill imeter wave radar radiates 76— 77 GHz radar waves up to a range of 100 m (328 ft)ahead, 18 degrees horizontally, 3.9 degrees vertical ly,and itreceives the refl ected waves. I n doing so, itcan calculate the distance to the vehicle ahead, the relative speed (the difference in speed between the two vehicl es), and itsposition. This data issent to the ACC unit. Aiming function

The millimeter wave radar has a horizontal auto-aiming function range of ±3 degrees and isdirected by ACC unit. Self-diagnosis function The millimeter wave radar has a self-diagnostic function; itsends this information to the ACC unit. Sensitivity-lowering detection function

When the detecting abil ityof the radar is reduced by dirt, dust, or other contaminants, itsignal s the condition m a l function to the ACC unit until the problem goes away, Adjuster-misalignment detection function

When more than ±5 degrees of adjuster misalignment isdetected while driving, itsignals the condition to the ACC unit.

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor The brake fl uid pressure sensors are instal led in the right and l eft sides of the brake l ine 4-way joint. The brake fluid pressure isconverted to a signal (vol tage value) and isoutput to the ACC unit. The ACC unit isal ways monitoring the ACC brake operation and the brake pressure control led by the signal s sent from the brake fluid pressure sensors. RIGHT FRONT'BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR (GRY!

LEFT FRONT BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR fBLU)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unit Inputs and Outputs ACC UN I T 20P CONNECTOR

i

i 1

3

2

1 1

1 2

5 13

14

7

6

15

16

n 8

17

9 18 /

1 0

2 0

Wire side offemale terminals

Terminal number 1

Wire color WHT

2

YEL

3 5

Isrn-

8

BLK

7 8 9 10 11 12 13

PUR ORN BLK WHT 1 BLK “ ' BLK WHT

14

BLU

15 16

GRY YEL

17

RED

18 20

PNK RED

ORN

Terminal name. BRAKE DIAG + BTECH (10 A) VCC

Description Detects brake l ight relay activation Detects ignition switch ON/OFF signals Sensor ground Provides sensor voltage

Detects the brake fluid pressure signal of the rightfront brake caliper F-CAN B H F-CAN communication B (high) circuit K-LI NE Sends and receives scan tool signal s Ground circuitforthe ACC system GND rT C A N A.IT. F-CAN communication A (high) circuit GND Ground circuitforthe ACC system GND Ground circuitforthe ACC system + B BACK Provides DTC memory vol tage UP (10 A) PRESS PL Detects the brake fluid pressure signal of the leftfront brake caliper WEN Detects the write enable signal Drives the brake l ight relay BRAKE LAMP M/R TRX Communicates with the millimeter wave radar F-CAN B L F-CAN communication B (low) circuit F*CAN A L F-CAN communication A (low) circuit PRESS FR

Signal ACC brake operated or brake pedal pressed; battery voltage Ignition switch ON (I I ):battery voltage I gnition switch OFF: about 0 V Less than 0.2 ¥ atalltimes I gnition switch ON (II);about 5 ¥ I gnition switch OFF: about 0 ¥ Ignition switch ON (II ):about 0.5— 4.5 ¥ I gnition switch OFF: about 0 ¥

Less than 0.2 ¥ atall times Less than 0.2 ¥ atalltimes Battery voltage Ignition switch ON (I I):about 0.5— 4.5 ¥ I gnition switch OFF: about 0 ¥ I gnition switch ON (II):battery voltage I gnition switch OFF: about 0 ¥ I gnition switch ON (II):battery voltage

Ignition switch OFF: about 0 ¥

System Description (cont'd) Millimeter Wave Radar Inputs and Outputs

MILLI METER WAVE RADAR 5P CONNECTOR

r

_____ n n 1

_ □ ______ /

4

W ire side o f fem ale term inals

Terminal number 4 5

Wire color YEL BLK RED

Terminal name + BIECH (10 A) GND m m trx

Description

Signal

Power suppl y for mill imeter wave radar

I gnition switch ON (I I):battery voltage I gnition switch OFF: about 0 ¥

Ground for mil limeter wave radar Communicates with the ACC unit

Less than 0.2 ¥ at alltin* Ignition switch ON (II);battery vol tage Ignition switch OFF: about 0 ¥

Front Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor Inputs and O utputs FRONT BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

V...

Cvl

(

1 3

...J

W ire side o f fem a l e term inals

RIGHT FRONT BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR (GRY)

Terminal number 1

Wire color GRN

Terminal name SG

2

ORN

VCC

3

BLK

PRESS FR

Description

Signal Less than 0.2 ¥ at all times

Ground forfront brake fluid pressure sensor Provides sensor voltage

I gnition switch ON (I I):about 5¥

Detects the front brake fluid pressure sensor signal

I gnition switch ON (II):about 0.5 -4.5¥ I gnition switch OFF: about OV

Ignition switch OFF: about 0¥

LEFT FRONT BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR (BLU)

Terminal number 1

Wire color GRN

Terminal name SG

2

ORN

VCC

3

BLU

PRESS FL

Description Ground forfront brake fluid pressure sensor Provides sensor vol tage Detects the front brake fluid pressure sensor signal

Signal Less than 0.2 ¥ at alltimes I gnition switch ON (II ):about 5V Ignition switch OFF: about 0¥ Ignition switch ON (I I ):about 0.5 -4.5¥ I gnition switch OFF: about OV

Circuit Diagram

MAIN UN DER-HOOD FUSE BOX

No. 18 (10 A) UNDER-DASH

FUSE/RELAYBOX

: Other communication line

: Shie lding

DTC Troubleshooting DTC 10: Vehicle Speed Signal Error NOTE: IfDTC 110 and DTC 111 are stored at the same time as DTC 10, troubleshoot DTC 110 and DTC 111 first, then recheck for DTC 10. 1.Check for PGM-FI system DTCs with the HDS (see page 11-3). A re

a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

DTC 11; Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Error NOTE: IfDTC 112 is stored at the same time as DTC 11, troubleshoot DTC 112 first,then recheck for DTC 11. 1.Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55). A re

a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated PGM-FI system DTC(s).B

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated VSA system

NO-Go to step 2.

NO-Go to step 2,

2.Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55). A re

a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troubl eshoot the indicated VSA system DTC(s).B

DTC(s).B

2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). 3.Test-drive the vehicl e at 25 mph (40 km/h) or more with the adaptive cruise control (ACC) activated, 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). is D T C 11 in d ic a te d ?

NO-Go to step 3. YES-Go to step 5. 3. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). 4.Test-drive the vehicl e at 25 mph (40 km/h) or more with the adaptive cruise control (ACC) activated, and check the data of vehicle speed signal with the HDS. (ACC system)

NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system isOK atthis time.B 5.Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55). a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

D o e s H D S c o r r e s p o n d to th e v e h ic le s p e e d in d ic a t e d in th e m e te r?

A re

YES-lntermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this time.B

DTC(s).B

NO-Go to step 5. 5.Test-drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or more with the ACC activated, and check the data of vehicle speed signal with the HDS. (A/T system) D o e s H D S c o r r e s p o n d to th e v e h ic le s p e e d in d ic a t e d in th e m e te r?

YES-Check for l oose or poor connections. I fOK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. I f the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).■ NO-Go to the A/T system troubleshooting (see page 14-4).B

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated VSA system NO-Go to step 8. 8.Test-drive the vehicl e, and check the left rear wheel speed signal (LR WHEEL SPD) with the HDS. is th e re 0 m p h (0 k m /h ) ?

YES-Go to the VSA system troubleshooting (see page 19-54).B

NO-Check for loose or poor connections. IfOK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. I f the ACC unit was al ready updated, repl ace the ACC unit (see page 25-84),■

DTC 12: Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Error

DTC 13: Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Error

NOTE; If DTC 112 is stored at the same time as DTC 12,

NOTE: If DTC 112 is stored at the same time as DTC 13, troub l eshoot DTC 112 first, then recheck for DTC 13,

troubl eshoot DTC 112 first,then recheck for DTC 12. 1.Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55).

1. Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55).

A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

A r e a n y D TC s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated VSA system' DTC(s).B

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated VSA system

NO-Go to step 2.

NO-Go to step 2.

DTC(s).B

2.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7).

2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7).

3.Test-drive the vehicl e at 25 mph (40 km/h) or more with the adaptive cruise control (ACC) activated.

3. Test-drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or more with the adaptive cruise contro l (ACC) activated.

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7).

4. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7).

is D T C 1 2 in d ic a t e d ?

is D TC 13 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5.

YES-Go to step 5.

NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK atthis time.B

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this tim e.B

5.Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55).

5. Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55).

A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

A r e a n y D TC s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated VSA system

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated VSA system

DTC(s).B

DTC(s).B

NO-Go to step 6.

NO-Go to step 6.

6.Test-drive the vehicl e, and check the right rear wheel speed signal (RR WHEEL SPD) with the HDS.

6. Test-drive the vehic l e, and check the left front wheel speed signal (LF WHEEL SPD) with the HDS.

Ist h e r e 0 m p h ( 0 k m / h ) ?

Is there 0 m p h (0 km /h)?

YES-Go to the VSA system troubleshooting (see page 19-54).11

YES-Go to the VSA system troubleshooting (see page 19-54).B

NO-Check for loose or poor connections. IfOK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. I f the ACC unit was already updated, repl ace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).■

NO-Check for loose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck, If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).■

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC 14: Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Error NOTE; IfDTC 112 Isstored at the same time as DTC 14, troubleshoot DTC 112 first,then recheck for DTC 14. 1.Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55). A re

a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated VSA system DICfs).B NO-Go to step 2. 2.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). 3.Test-drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or more with the adaptive cruise control (ACC) activated. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7).

DTC 21: Yaw Rate Sensor Error DTC 22: Yaw Rate Sensor Center Position Revision Valu >r NOTE: IfDTC 112 is stored at the same time as DTC 21# troubleshoot DTC 112 first,then recheck for DTC 21 or DTC 22. 1.Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 13-55). A re

a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troubl eshoot the indicated VSA system DTC(s).l NO-Go to step 2, 2.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7),

Is D T C 1 4 in d ic a te d ?

3.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds.

YES-Go to step 5.

4.Watch the ACC indicator.

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK atthis time.B 5.Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55). A re

a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated VSA system DTC(s),B

D o e s th e A C C in d ic a to r (a m b e r) c o m e o n ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.■ 5.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). Is

D T C 2 1 o r D T C 2 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 8, NO-Go to step 8. 8.Test-drive the vehicle, and check the right front wheel speed signal (RF WHEEL SPD) with the HDS. is th e r e 0 m p h (0 k m /h ) ?

YES-Go to the VSA system troubleshooting (see page 13-54).11 NO-Check for loose or poor connections. IfOK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was al ready updated, repl ace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).■

NG-Troubleshoot the indicated DIC(s).H 6.With the vehicl e parked on level ground, check the Y A W RATE SENSOR with the HDS. is a b o u t 2 .5 V in d ic a t e d ?

YES-The yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudinal acceleration sensor signal is OK, check for loose or poor connections. IfOK, replace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).I

NO-Go to the VSA system troubl eshooting (see page 19-54).II

DTC 23: Yaw Rate Sensor Gain Error NOTE: IfDTC 112 isstored atthe same time as DTC 23, troubleshoot DTC 112 first,then recheck for DTC 23. 1.Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55). Are a n y D T C s i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated VSA system DTC(s).B NO-Go to step 2. 2.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). 3.Test-drive the vehicl e at 25 mph (40 km/h) or more with the ACC activated, and watch the ACC indicator. D o e s th e A C C in d ic a to r c o m e o n ? YES-Go to step 4.

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK atthis time. Check for l oose or poor connections.■ 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). is D T C 2 3 in d ic a t e d ? YES-Go to step 5. NO-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s).B

5.Test-drive in a straight line at 12 mph (20 km/h) or more, and check Y A W RATE SENSOR with the HDS. Isa b o u t 2 . 5 V i n d i c a t e d ? YES-Go to step 8. NO-Go to the VSA system troubleshooting (see page 19-54).|

6.Turn right at 12 mph (20 km/h) or more, and check Y A W RATE SENSOR with the HDS. D o e s t h e v o l t a g e i n c r e a s e from 2 . 5 V ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-113), and retest. I fthe vol tage increases, repl ace the original yaw rate-l ateral /longitudinal acceleration sensor. Ifthe voltage does not increase, repl ace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).■

7.Turn leftat 12 mph (20 km/h) or more, and check Y A W RATE SENSOR with the HDS. D o e s t h e voltage d e c r e a s e f r o m 2.5 V?

YES-The yaw rate-lateral /longitudinal acceleration sensor signal isOK, check for loose or poor connections. IfOK, replace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).■ NO-Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral /longitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-113), and retest. Ifthe voltage decreases, replace the original yaw rate-l ateral /longitudinal acceleration sensor. Ifthe voltage does not decrease, replace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).■

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC 24 Yaw Rate Sensor Diagnose Malfunction 1.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I),then wait for 10 seconds.

8,Wait for 30 seconds, then check for continuity between ACC unit 20P connector terminal No. 10 and yaw rate-lateral /longitudinal accel eration sensor 4P connector terminal No. 3rand between ACC unit 20P connectorterminal No. 20 and yaw rate-l ateral/l ongitudinal accel eration sensor 4P connectorterminal No. 2,

3.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). Is D T C 2 4 in d ic a te d ?

ACC UNIT 2©P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale term inals F-CAN A H (WHT)

YES~Go to step 4, NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK atthis time.B

1 |2 |3

¥ T iliq

F-CAN A L

4. Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55). A re

a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated VSA system DTC(s).B NO-Go to step 5. 5.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector.

F-CAN A H (WHT) YAW RATE-LATERAL/LONG1TUD1NAL ACCELERATION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR W ire side of fe m al e term inals

7. Disconnect the ACC unit 2OP connector. Ist h e r e c o n t i n u i t y ? YES-Check for loose or poor connections. I fOK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).B NO-Repair an open inthe wire between the ACC unit and the yaw rate-lateral/l ongitudinal acceleration sensor.B

DTC 25; Yaw Rate Sensor Stabilizing. Malfunction NOTE: IfDTC 112 isstored atthe same time as DTC 25, troubleshoot DTC 112 first,then recheck for DTC 25. 1.Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55). A re

a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troubl eshoot the indicated VSA system DTC(s).B

NO-Go to step 2. 2.Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7).

7.Turn l eftwith the ACC activated, and check the Y A W RATE SENSOR with the HDS. D o e s th e v o lta g e d e c r e a s e fr o m 2 .5 V ?

YES-The yaw rate-l ateral/longitudinal accel eration sensor signal isOK, check for loose or poor connections. I fOK, update the ACC unit (see page' 25-8), then recheck. I fthe ACC unit was already updated, repl ace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).B NO-Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral /l ongitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-113), and retest Ifthe vol tage decreases, replace the original yaw rate-lateral /longitudinal acceleration sensor. Ifthe voltage does not decrease, repl ace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).■

3.Test-drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or more with the ACC activated, and watch the ACC indicator. D o e s th e A C C in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent failure, the system isOK atthis time. Check for loose or poor connections.■ 4.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7), is D T C 2 5 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s).B

5.Test-drive the vehicle in a straight line with the ACC activated, and check the Y A W RATE SENSOR with the HDS. is a b o u t 2 .5 V in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-Go to the VSA system troubl eshooting (see page 19-54).11 6.Turn right with the ACC activated, and check the Y A W RATE SENSOR with the HDS. D o e s th e v o lta g e in c r e a s e

fro m

2 ,5 V ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Substitute a known-good yaw rate-l ateral/ longitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-113), and retest. I fthe voltage increases, repl ace the original yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor. I fthe voltage does not increase, repl ace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).■

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC 30: Brake Light Relay Circuit Malfunction 1.Check the brake l ights without pressing the brake pedal. A re

th e b ra k e

lig h ts

7. Measure the voltage between brake pedal position switch 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR

o ff?

YES-Go to step 10.

STOP S W (LT GRN!

NO-Go to step 2. 2.Check the brake pedal height, and adjust itifneeded (see page 19-8).

1

2

3 X

4

3. Check the brake l ights without pressing the brake pedal. W ire side of fem a l e term inals

A r e th e b r a k e lig h ts o ff?

YES-l ntermittent failure,the system isOK atthistime. Check for loose or poor connections.■ NO-Go to step 4. 4.Test the brake pedal position switch (see page 22-282), is th e b r a k e p e d a l p o s it io n s w itc h O K ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-Adjust or repl ace the brake pedal position switch,

Isth e r e b a t t e r y v o l t a g e ? YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the brake pedal position switch and the brake l ight relay.® NO-Go to step 8.

8. Disconnect the ACC unit 20P connector, 9. Measure the vol tage between ACC unit 20P connector terminal No, 1 and body ground,

and recheck (see page 19-39).B ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

6.Test the brake light relay (see page 22-109). Ist h e r e l a y O K ?

BRAKE DIAG

1 U i a / T I M L 8 | 9 |10| |11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|9|20

YES-Go to step 6. NO-Replace the rel ay, and recheck.B 8.Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P connector.

(WHT)

X

W ire si de of fem al e term inals

Isth e r e

b a t t e r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the ACC unit and the brake light relay, or between the ACC unit and the brake lights circuits.! NO-Check for loose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).■

10. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). 11. Press the MAIN switch ON. 12. Check the brake lights with the brake pedal pressed.

20. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connectortermina l No. 1 and brake light relay 5P connectorterminal No. 1. There should be less than

1.0 0.

D o th e b r a k e lig h ts c o m e o n ?

ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fem ale term inals

YES-Go to step 13. NO-Go to.step 37.

BRAKE DIAG (WHT)

91

■sT gT T

5 |6 | 7 of |11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|9120

13. Check for DTCs with the HDS'(see page 25-7). IsD T C 3 0 i n d i c a t e d ? YES-Go to step 14.

BRAKE DIAG (WHT)

NO-Go to step 21.

1

14.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Remove the brake l ight relay. 16. Disconnect the ACC unit 20P connector.

BRAKE LIGHT RELAY §P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fem ale te rm in al s

17. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector (see page 19-117). 18. Disconnect both rear tail lightconnectors from the taillights and, ifequipped, the trailer light harness connector from the rear fuse box. 19. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connectorterminal No. 1 and body ground. There shoul d be an open circuit or at l east 1 MO. ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR BRAKE DIAG (WHT) 1 i 2 13 91 5 I 6 | 7 8 | 9 |l0| |11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|/120

Ist h e r e s i s t a n c e as s p e c i f i e d ? YES-Check for loose or poor connections. I fOK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. I f the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).■ NO-Repair an open inthe wire between the ACC unit and the brake l ight relay.® 21. Test the brake l ight relay (see page 22-109). Ist h e

r e la y

OK?

YES-Go to step 22. NO-Replace the rel ay, and recheck.B 22. Remove the brake l ight relay.

W ire side of fem al e term inals

Ist h e r e s i s t a n c e as s p e c i f i e d ? YES-Go to step 20. NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the ACC unit and the brake l ight rel ay, or between the ACC unit and the brake l ights circuits ■

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 23. Measure the voltage between brake l ight rel ay SP connectorterminal No. 2 and body ground. There should be battery voltage.

28. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connectorterminal No. 18 and body ground. There shoul d be an open circuit or at least 1 MO. ACC UNIT 2©P CONNECTOR

BRAKE LIGHT RELAY 5P CONNECTOR

P-i— r— I 1I2I3 91 5|6|718 |9|lo|r Ill|i2|T3|l4[l5]l6[l7|l8|920

+ B {WHT)

BRAKE LAMP (YEL)

W ire side of fem ale te rm in al s W ire side o f female term inals

is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? is th e r e b a tt e r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 23.

YES-Go to step 24.

NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the ACC unit and the brake l ight rel ay.H

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 11 (15 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box and the brake light relay.® 24. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 25. Measure the voltage between brake light relay 5P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground. There should be battery vol tage, BRAKE LIGHT RELAY 5P CONNECTOR

23. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connectorterminal No, 18 and brake l ight relay 5P connector terminal 'No. 3. There should be less than 1.0 0.

.

.

ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale term inals

1 |2|3 z h h l v ^8 |9 |10|"" |11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|9I20 BRAKE LAMP (YEL)

BRAKE LAMP (YEL) W ire side of female term inals

BRAKE LIGHT RELAY SP CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale term inals

is th e r e b a tt e r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 26,

is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?

YES-Go to step 30. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/rel ay box and the brake light relay.® 28. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 27. Disconnect the ACC unit 20P connector.

NO-Repair.an open in the wire between the ACC unit and the brake l ight relay,®

30. I nstall the brake light relay. 31. Reconnect the ACC unit 20P connector.

42. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P c o n n e c to r te r m in a l N o . 1 a n d b o d y g ro u n d . There should be an open circuit or at least 1 MO.

32. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

33. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I),then wait for 10 seconds, and press the M A I N switch ON.

BRAKE DIAG fWHTJ

34. Sel ect ADAPT I VE CRU I SE CONTROL (ACC) from the DRIVING SUPPORT menu, then enter ACC RELAY from the FUNCTION TEST menu.

8 |9 |10| 1 I2 I3 A i h K |11|12|13|14|15(16(17|18|9|20

35. Do the brake light relay function test with the HDS. 36. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). Is D T C 3 0 in d ic a te d ?

is D T C 3 0 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 38. NO-Go to step 44. 38. Test the brake light relay (see page 22-103), i s t h e relay O K ?

YES-Go to step 39. NO-Repl ace the relay, and recheck.B

NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the ACC unit and the brake l ight rel ay, or between the ACC unit and the brake l ights circuits.■ 43. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connectortermina l No. 1 and brake light relay SP connector termina l No. 1. There shou l d be less than

1.0 0. ACC UNIT 2©P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem al e te rm in a l s BRAKE DIAG (WHT) i m o

9 9 9 1 7

I ll| l 2 | l3 | l4 | l 5 | l6 | l7 | i8 l9 l2 0

39. Remove the brake l ight relay. 40. Disconnect the ACC unit 20P connector. 41. Disconnect each tail l ight 3P connector and the high mount brake l ight 2P connector.

mb

37. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7).

YES-Go to step 43,

CD O

NO-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s). I fthere are no DTCs, the system is OK atthis time.B

is the re s is ta n c e as s p e c ifie d ?

00

YES-Check for l oose or poor connections. IfOK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, repl ace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).■

W ire side of fem al e te rm in al s

BRAKE DIAG (WHT)

1 3 4

5

BRAKE LIGHT RELAY 5P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale term inals is the re s is ta n ce as s p e c ifie d ?

YES-Check for loose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, rep l ace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).■ NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ACC unit and the brake l ight relay.®

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 44. Check the brake pedal height, and adjust itifneeded (see page 19-8). 45. Test the brake pedal position switch (see page 22-282). 46. Check the brake l ights with the brake pedal pressed. D o th e b r a k e fig h ts c o m e o n ?

YES-lntermittent failure,the system IsOK atthistime. Check for loose or poor connections,® NO-Repair an open in the wire or poor ground (G701, 6702).■

DTC 42: VSA Brake Actuator Malfunction 1.Check ifthe VSA modulator-control unit has ever been repl aced. H a s it b e e n r e p la c e d ?

YES-Go to step 2. NO-Go to step 3. 2.Check the part number of the VSA modulator-control unit, and make sure that itisthe correct part, and it was Installed properl y. A r e th e c o r r e c t p a r ts in s ta lle d ?

YiS-Go to step 3. NO-Faulty VSA modu l ator-control unit; replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-117).B 3. Update the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-115) and the ACC unit (see page 25-8), ifthey do not have the latest software. 4.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then wait for 10 seconds. 5.Press the M A I N switch ON. 6.Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). is D T C 4 2 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-lntermittent failure, the system isOK at this time.B 7.Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55). Are a n y D T C s i n d i c a t e d ?

YES-Troubl eshoot the indicated VSA system DTC(s).B NO-Check for l oose or poor connections. IfOK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8).B

DTC 43: Cal FL Brake System Malfunction NOTE: I n this troubleshooting, you w i l l operate the ADAPTIVE CRUI SE CONTROL (ACC) BRAKE (brake actuator 3) continuously four or five times using the FUNCTI ON TEST with the HDS. During this operation, the VSA'modulator-control unit may stop working. This means the VSA modulator-control unit has shut down to protect the system from overheating during continuous operation. If the VSA modulator-control unit stops working, wait for a few minutes until the VSA modu l ator-control unit cool s down, then restart the troubleshooting. 1. Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 13-55). Are

a n y D T C s in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Troub l eshoot the indicated VSA system DTC(s).B

10. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). is D T C 4 3 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 119' NO-Troubleshootthe indicated DTC(s). If there are no DTCs, the system is OK at this tim e.B 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 12. Press the brake pedal several times, and check the brake pedal travel. D o e s th e b r a k e p e d a i s in k ?

YES-lnspectthe master cylinder (see page 19-22).B NO-Go to step 13. 13. Check for brake fluid l eaks (see page 19-40).

Are

th e re a n y le a k s ?

YES-Repair the brake fluid leak.B NO-Go to step 2. NO-Go to step 14. 2. Start the engine, and press the MAIN switch ON. 14. Start the engine. 3. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). 4. Select ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) from the DRIVING SUPPORT menu, then enter the FUNCTION TEST. 5. Activate BRAKE ACTUATOR 3 from the FUNCT I ON TEST menu. 8. Watch the ACC indicator.

15. Check the brake switch signal (BRAKE SW (N.O.)) with the HDS. Does the indication show ON when the brake pedal is pressed, and show OFF when the brake pedal is released?

YES-Go to step 17. NO-Go to step 16.

D o e s th e A C C in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?

16. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). YES-Go to step 10. Is D T C 6 0 , 1 1 0 , o r 1 1 1 in d ic a t e d ?

NO-Go to step 7. YES-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s).B 7. Activate BRAKE ACTUATOR 3 again. 8. While the brake actuator is operating, press the brake pedal. 9. Watch the ACC indicator. D o e s th e

ACC

in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?

YES-Go to step 10. NO-lntermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.■

NO-Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal circuit (see page 1 1 -2 8 0 ). B

D T C T r o u b le s h o o t in g ( c o n t 'd )

17. Press the MAIN switch ON. 18. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). 19. Select ADAPT IVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) from the DRIVING SUPPORT menu, then enter the FUNCTION TEST, 20. Activate the BRAKE ACTUATOR 3 from the FUNCTION TEST. 21. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). Is D T C 4 3 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Check the brake fluid pressure sensor for proper installation or l eaks (see page 25-91). If OK, go to step 22. NO-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s). If there is no DTCs, the system is OK at this tim e.B 22. Without the brake peda l pressed, check the l eft front brake f l uid pressure voltage (LF BRAKE P) with the HDS. is th e r e a b o u t 0 . 5 V ?

YES-Go to step 23. NO-Go to step 28.

DTC 44: Cal FL Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor Circuit Open/Short 1. Cl ear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10 seconds. 3. Watch the ACC indicator. D o e s th e A C C in d ic a t o r ( a m b e r ) g o o ff?

YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.■ NO-Go to step 4. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). is D T C 4 4 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s). I f there are no DTCs, the system is OK at this tim e.B 5. Without the brake pedal pressed, check the left front brake f l uid pressure vo l tage (LF BRAKE P) with the HDS. Is t h e r e

a b o u t 0 ,5 ¥ ?

23. Test the brake booster (see page 19-22).

YES-Go to step 6.

24. Start the engine, then press the brake peda l with about 314 N (32 kgf, 70,6 Ibf) pressure.

NO-Go to step 9,

25. Check the left front brake fluid pressure voltage (LF BRAKE P) with the HDS. is t h e r e a b o u t 2 , 5 ¥ ?

YES-The left front brake fluid pressure signal is OK, check for loose or poor connections. I f OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 2 5 -8 4 ).■ NO-Go to step 26. 26. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). Is D T C

4 3 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Check for l oose or poor connections. I f OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 2 5 -8 4 ).■ NO-Troub l eshoot the indicated DTC(s). If there are no DTCs, the system is OK at this tim e.B

6. Test the brake booster (see page 19-22), 7. Start the engine, then press the brake pedal with about 314 N (32 kgf, 70.6 Ibf) pressure. 8. Check the left front brake fluid pressure voltage (LF BRAKE P) with the HDS. Is there about 2.5 V? YES-The left front brake fluid pressure signal is OK, check for loose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 2 5 -8 4 ).■ NO-Go to step 9. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Disconnect the ACC unit 20P connector.

11. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connectorterminal No. 5 and body ground. There shou l d be an open circuit or at l east 1 MO, ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

14. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connector terminal No. 6 and body ground. There shou l d be less than 1.0 Q. ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR VCC (ORN)

00 CO o

VCC fORN)

"l 12 13 9 l 5 | 6 | 7^ 8 | 9 |10|" Ill|l2|l3|l4h 5|l6|l7|l8|9|20

"l I 2 | 3 / I 5 I 6 | 71' Ill|l2|l3|l4|l5|l6h7|l8|9l20

Wire side of female terminal s

Wire side of female terminals

Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s

specified?

Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c ifie d ?

YES-Go to step 12.

YES-Go to step 15.

NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the ACC unit and the left front brake fluid pressure sensor.B 12. Disconnect the left front brake fluid pressure sensor 3P connector (see step 2 on page 25-91). 13. Connect l eft front brake fluid pressure sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire. LEFT FRONT BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR (BLU)

■ NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ACC unit and the left front brake fluid pressure sensor.B 15. Remove the jumper wire from the left front brake fluid pressure sensor. 16. Reconnect a ll connectors. 17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 18. Measure the voltage between ACC unit 20P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 5. There should be about 5 ¥. ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

SG (GRN}

JUMPER WIRE

Wire side of femal e terminal s

KS>i VCC (ORN!

l|r ’l|2|3 915|6I78|9|lC |11fT2|W W ll5jl6]l7lT8|9|20 Wire side of femal e terminal s

is th e v o lta g e a s s p e c ifie d ?

YES-Go to step 19. NO-Check for l oose or poor connections, If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, rep l ace the ACC unit (see page 2 5 -8 4 ).■ 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 20. Disconnect the ACC unit 20P connector.

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b le s h o o t in g ( c o n t 'd )

21. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connector terminal No. 14 and body ground. There should be an open circuit or at l east 1 MD.

24. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connectortermina l No. 14 and body ground. There shoul d be less than 1,0 Q.

ACC UNIT 2§P CONNECTOR

ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

ni I 2 I 3 '/ 4 5 l 6 | 7 l W l i o f |11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|9|20

1I2I3 8 | 9 |1 6 |ll|l2|l3|l4|l5|l6|l7|l8L/]20

9l 5[ |7

^ R E S S FL (BLU)

iESS FL fBLU)

f

Wire side of female terminals is th e r e s is t a n c e a s

specified?

Wire side of femal e terminals

Is t h e

r e s is t a n c e

as s p e c i f i e d ?

YES-Go to step 22.

YES-Go to step 25.

NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the ACC unit and the left front brake f l uid pressure sensor.B

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ACC unit and the l eft front brake f l uid pressure sensor.B

22. Disconnect the l eft front brake fluid pressure sensor 3P connector. 23, Connect l eft front brake fluid pressure sensor 3P connector terminal No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.

25. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connector terminals No. 5 and No. 14. There shou l d be an open circuit or at least 1 MO. ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR VCC (ORN)

LEFT FRONT BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

’l 12 | 3 M l 5 16 I 7 8| 9 |lo|r |11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|9|20 PRESS FL (BLU)

Wire side of femal e terminal s JUMPER WIRE

PRESS FL (BLU) Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s

specified?

YES-Go to step 26. Wire side of femal e terminal s

NO-Repair a short in the wire between the PRESS FL line and the VCC line.B

26. Connect l eft front brake fluid pressure sensor 3P connectortermina l No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. LEFT FRONT BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR (BLU) SG (GRN)

31. Measure the voltage between ACC unit 20P connector termina l s No. 3 and No. 14. There shou l d be voltage between 0.4 - 0.6 V, ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

SG (GRN) n

------- n 1 9l |6 | 7 j8 | 9 |l0|

""l 1 2 . 3

5

|11|12|13|U|15|16|17|18|9|20 JUMPER WIRE

PRESS FL fBLU)

Wire side of female terminal s Wire side of female terminals is th e v o lta g e a s s p e c ifie d ?

27. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. There should be less than 1.0 0. ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 32, NO-Faulty left front brake fluid pressure sensor; replace the left front brake fluid pressure sensor.B 32. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). 33. Watch the ACC indicator.

SG (GRN) Jt“~— — J n Y f Y f 3 / R i l 6 l 7 8 | 9 |10| 4fl5]l6n

D o e s th e A C C in d ic a t o r g o o ff?

YES- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections,■ NO-Go to step 34, 34. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7).

Wire side of female terminals is D T C 4 4 in d ic a t e d ? is

the r e s i s t a n c e

a s s p e c ifie d ?

YES-Go to step 28. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ACC unit and the l eft front brake fluid pressure sensor.B 28, Remove the jumper wire from the l eft front brake fluid pressure sensor.

YES-Check for loose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. I f the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).B NO-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s). If there are no DTCs, the system is OK at this tim e.B

29, Reconnect all connectors. 30, Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b le s h o o t in g (c o n t 'd )

DTC 45: Cal FL Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor Center Position Error 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10 seconds, 3. Watch the ACC indicator. Does the A C C

9. Disconnect the left front brake f l uid pressure sensor 3P connector (see step 2 on page 25-91). 10. Connect l eft front brake fluid pressure sensor 3P connectorterminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire. LEFT FRONT BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR (BLU)

in d ic a t o r ( a m b e r) g o o ff?

YES-Go to step 4. 4 1

NO-Go to step 5.

P S VCC (ORN) ? 3

4. Press the brake pedal, and watch the ACC indicator.

JUMPER WIRE

D o e s th e A C C in d ic a t o r ( a m b e r) g o o ff?

YES-The system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.■

W ire side of fem al e term inals

NO-Go to step 5. 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS {see page 25-7).

Is D T C

4 5 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 6.

11. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connectorterminal No. 5 and body ground, There shoul d be l ess than 1.0 0. ACC UNIT 2©P CONNECTOR

N O -Troubleshoot the indicated DTCs. If there are no DTCs, the system is OK at this tim e.B 8, Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

VCC (ORN)

f— '— — 1 ¥ T ¥ |T 1 | 2| 3

7, Disconnect the ACC unit 20P connector, 8. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 MO. W ire side of fem ale term inals

ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c ifie d ?

¥CC (ORN)

"’l j 2 | 3 z 9 M i 8 | 9 |10|r iTTjl2]T3 ]14| 15|1697fl8|9l20

YES-Go to step 12. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ACC unit and the left front brake fluid pressure sensor.B 12. Remove the jumper wire from the l eft front brake fluid pressure sensor. 13. Reconnect all connectors.

W ire side of female term inals

14, Turn the ignition switch to ON (il ).

Is t h e

r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c ifie d ?

YES-Go to step 9. NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the ACC unit and the left front brake f l uid pressure sensoi , ■

15. Measure the voltage between ACC unit 20P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 5. There shou l d be about 5 V.

20. Connect left front brake fluid pressure sensor 3P connector term ina l No. 3 to body ground with a

jumper wire. ACC UNIT 2©P CONNECTOR

SG (GRN)

Kgh

LEFT FRONT BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR (BLUf VCC (ORN)

"l I 2 I 3 91 5 | 6 | 7' 8 | 9 |l01r hl|l2|l3|l4|l5|l6|l7|l8|9l20

4 ?

P 'S 2 3 PRESS FL {BLU)

JUMPER WIRE W ire side o f fem ale term inals

Is th e v o lta g e a s s p e c ifie d ?

W ire side o f fe m a l e term inals

YES-Go to step 16. NO-Check for loose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 2 5 -8 4 ).■

21, Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connectorterminal No. 14 and body ground. There shou l d be less than 1.0 O. ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 17. Disconnect the ACC unit 20P connector. 18. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connectorterminal No, 14 and body ground. There shou l d be an open circuit or at least 1 MO.

1 I 2 | 3 9 i 5 | 6 I 7 8 | 9 |lo|r |ll|l2|l3|l4n5Tl6|T 7|18|9)20 JPR E SS FL (BLU)

©

ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

W ire side of fe m a l e term inals

"l I 2 I 3 / i 5 | 6 | 7 " e T a W |11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|9|20 JPR E SS FL fBLU)

@

Is t h e

r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c ifie d ?

YES-Go to step 22. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ACC unit and the left front brake f l uid pressure sensor.B

W ire side o f fem ale term inals

Is the r e s i s t a n c e

a s s p e c ifie d ?

YES-Go to step 19. NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the ACC unit and the l eft front brake fluid pressure sensor.B 19. Disconnect the l eft front brake fluid pressure sensor 3P connector.

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b le s h o o t in g ( c o n t 'd )

22. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connector terminal No, 5 and No. 14. There shou l d be an open circuit or at l east 1 MO,

24. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connector terminal No, 3 and body ground. There should be less than 1.0 Q. ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

VCC (ORN)

SG (GRN) n n--------------n TTFJa 9 ! 516 I 7 8 I 9 |10] n w iT ^

n 1!2 |3 / I

T fF jio f PRESS FL (BLU)

W ire side of fem ale te rm in a l s

W ire side of fem ale term inals

Is the r e s i s t a n c e

a s s p e c ifie d ?

is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c ifie d ?

YES-Go to step 23.

YES~Go to step 25.

NO-Repair a short in the wires between the PRESS FL line and the VCC line.B

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ACC unit and the left front brake f l uid pressure sensor.B

23. Connect l eft front brake fluid pressure sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. LEFT FRONT BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR (BLU)

fT

z )> 3

25. Remove the jumper wire from the left front brake fluid pressure sensor. 28. Reconnect all connectors. 27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10 seconds, 28. Check the brake switch signal (BRAKE SW (N.O.)) with the HDS. D o e s th e in d ic a tio n s h o w O N w h e n th e

brake pedal is

p r e s s e d , a n d s h o w O F F w h e n th e b r a k e p e d a l is

JUMPER WIRE

r e le a s e d ?

YES-Go to step 30. NO-Go to step 29. W ire side o f female term inals

29. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). is D T O 4 5 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 31. NO-Go to step 30. 30. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). is D T C 8 0 , 1 1 0 , o r 1 1 1 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Troub l eshoot the indicated DTC(s).B NO-Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal circuit (see page 11-280).B

31. Measure the vo l tage between ACC unit 20P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 14. With the brake peda l released, there should be vo l tage between 0.4 - 0.6 ¥. ACC U N IT 20P CONNECTOR

SG (GRN!

Y l T f a ^9| 5 ! 6 17I 8 | 9 |1 |lT |1 2 M PRESS FL fBLU )

DTC 48; Cal FL Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor Malfunction NOTE: In this troub l eshooting, you wil l operate the ADAPTI VE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) BRAKE (brake actuator 3) continuousl y four or five times using the FUNCTION TEST with the HDS. During this operation, the VSA modulator-control unit may stop working, This means the VSA modulator-control unit has shut down to protect the system from overheating during continuous operation. If the VSA modulator-control unit stops working, wait for a few minutes until the VSA modulator-control unit cools down, then restart the troubleshooting.

W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s

1. Start the engine, and press the MAIN switch ON. Is th e v o lta g e a s s p e c ifie d ?

2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7).

YES-Go to step 32.

3. Select ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) from the DRIV I NG SUPPORT menu, then enter the FUNCT I ON TEST.

NO-Faulty l eft front brake f l uid pressure sensor; replace the left front brake f l uid pressure sensor (see page 25-91 ) . ■ 32. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). 33. Watch the ACC indicator. D o e s th e

ACC i n d i c a t o r

(a m b e r) g o o ff?

YES-The system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.® NO-Go to step 34. 34. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). is D T C 4 5 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Check for loose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was a l ready updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 2 5 -8 4 ).■ NO-Troubleshootthe indicated DTC(s). If there are no DTCs, the system is OK at this tim e.B

4. Activate BRAKE ACTUATOR 3 from the FUNCTION TEST menu. 5. Watch the ACC indicator. D o e s th e A C C in d ic a t o r c o m e o n ?

YES-Go to step 9. NO-Go to step 6, 6. Activate BRAKE ACTUATOR 3 again. 7. W hi l e the brake actuator is operating, press the brake pedal. 8. Watch the ACC indicator. D o e s th e A C C in d ic a t o r c o m e o n ?

YES-Go to step 3. N O - l ntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections,■ 9. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). is D T C 4 8 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Go to step 10, NO-Troubleshootthe indicated DTC(s). If there are no DTCs, the system is OK at this tim e.B

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b le s h o o t in g ( c o n t 'd )

10. Without the brake pedal pressed, check the l eft front brake fluid pressure voltage (LF BRAKE P) with the HDS.

18. Connect l eft front brake fluid pressure sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground with a jumper wire.

Is th e r e a b o u t 0 ,5 V ?

LEFT FRONT BRAKE FLUID PRESSUiE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR (BLU)

YES-Go to step 11. NO-Go to step 14.

ne= VCC (ORN) nj 1 ? \

11. Test the brake booster (see page 19-22).

3

12. Start the engine, then press the brake pedal with about 314 N (32 kgf, 70.8 Ibf) pressure.

JUMPER WIRE

13. Check the left front brake fluid pressure vo l tage (LF BRAKE P) with the HDS. Is th e re a b o u t 2 .5

V?

Wire side of female terminals

YES-The left front brake f l uid pressure signal is OK, check for loose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).B

13. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connectorterminal No. 5 and body ground. There should be less than 1.0 0. ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

NO-Go to step 14. 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

VCC CORN)

15. Disconnect the ACC unit 20P connector. 18. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connectorterminal No, 5 and body ground. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 MO. ACC UNIT 2§P CONNECTOR

Wire side of femal e term i nals

VCC IIQRN) ft—

t— = = 1 1 ( 2 | 3 9 i 5 t 6 | 7 8 | 9 |lo|"" |ll|l2|l3|l4|l5|16|T7n8f9i20

is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c ifie d ?

r

1 ! 2 (3 _ 1 X l 8 | 9 |10| |11|12|13|14 920

Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 20. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ACC unit and the left front brake fluid pressure sensor.B 20. Remove the jumper wire from the left front brake fluid pressure sensor. 21. Reconnect a ll connectors.

Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c ifie d ?

YES-Go to step 17. NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the ACC unit and the left front brake fluid pressure sensor.B 17. Disconnect the l eft front brake fluid pressure sensor 3P connector (see step 2 on page 25-91).

22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I).

23. Measure the voltage between ACC unit 20P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 5. There shoul d be about 5 ¥.

28. Connect left front brake fluid pressure sensor 3P connector termina l No. 3 to body ground with a jum per wire.

ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR LEFT FRONT BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR fBLU) SG (GRN)

r« h .

VCC {ORN)

1 I 2| 3 9 | 5 | 6 | 7 |11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|9]20

9

=U1 2 J3 3

JUMPER WIRE

PRESS FL (BLU)

Wire side of femal e terminals

Is t h e

v o lta g e a s s p e c ifie d ?

Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 24. NO-Check for loose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 2 5 -8 4 ).■

29. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connector terminal No. 14 and body ground. There should be less than 1.0 0. ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 25. Disconnect the ACC unit 20P connector. 26. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connector terminal No. 14 and body ground. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 MO.

1 I 2) 3 / I 5 I 6 | 7 8 | 9 |l0|r |11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|9|20 JPRESS FL (BLU!

@

ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

Wire side of female terminal s

91 | |

’l I 2 | 3 5 6 7 8 | 9 |10 jP |11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|9|20 (PRESS FL (BLU)

@ Wire side of female terminal s

Is t h e

r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c ifie d ?

YES-Go to step 27, NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the ACC unit and the left front brake f l uid pressure sensor.B 27. Disconnect the l eft front brake fluid pressure sensor 3P connector.

is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?

YES-Go to step 30. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ACC unit and the left front brake fluid pressure sensor.B

D T C T r o u b le s h o o t in g (c o n t 'd )

30. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connectortermina l No. 5 and body ground. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 MO.

32. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. There should be l ess than 1.0 Q. ACC UNIT 2©P CONNECTOR

ACC UNIT 2®P CONNECTOR

SG (GRN)

VCC (ORN!

1 I 2 | 3 91 5 | 6 | 7 18 | 9 1101r |11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|9120

I 2 I 3 191 5 | 6 | 7 s T o lio f |l 1|12|13|14|15|16|T7|18|9|20

Wire side of femal e terminals

Wire side of female terminal s is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c ifie d ?

is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c ifie d ?

YES-Go to step 31.

YES-Go to step 33.

NO-Repair a short in the wire between the PRESS FL line and the VCC l ine.®

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ACC unit and the left front brake fluid pressure sensor.B

31. Connect left front brake fluid pressure sensor 3P connectortermina l No, 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. LEFT FRONT IR A K I FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

r 1 2 3

33. Remove the jumper wire from the left front brake fluid pressure sensor. 34. Reconnect all connectors. 35. Start the engine. 38. Check the brake switch signal (BRAKE SW (N.O.)) with the HDS. D o e s th e in d ic a t io n s h o w O N w h e n th e b r a k e p e d a i is p re s s e d

,

a n d s h o w O F F w h e n t h e b r a k e p e d a i is

r e le a s e d ?

JUMPER HViRE

YES-Go to step 38. NO-Go to step 37. Wire side of female terminals

37. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). is D T C 6 0 , 1 1 0 , o r 1 1 1 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Troub l eshoot the indicated DTC(s).H

NO-Troubleshoot the brake peda l position switch signal circuit (see page 11-280).H

38. Press the MAIN switch ON.

DTC 47: Cal FR Brake System Malfunction

39. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7).

NOTE: In this troubleshooting, you w i ll operate the ADAPTI VE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) BRAKE (brake actuator 3) continuousl y four or five times using the FUNCTI ON TEST with the HDS. During this operation, the VSA modulator-control unit may stop working. This means the VSA modulator-control unit has shut down to protect the system from overheating during continuous operation. If the VSA modulator-contro l unit stops working, wait for a few minutes until the VSA modulator-control unit cools down, then restart the troubleshooting.

40. Se l ect ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) from the DRIVI NG SUPPORT menu, then enter the FUNCTION TEST. 41. Activate BRAKE ACTUATOR 3 from the FUNCT I ON TEST menu, 42. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). is D T C 4 6 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Check for l oose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 2 5 -8 4 ).■ NO-Go to the VSA system troubleshooting (see page 19-54).H

1. Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55), Are

a n y D T C s in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated VSA system DTC(s).B NO-Go to step 2. 2. Start the engine, and press the MAIN switch ON. 3. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7), 4. Select ADAPTIVE CRU I SE CONTROL (ACC) from the DRIV I NG SUPPORT menu, then enter the FUNCTION TEST. 5. Activate BRAKE ACTUATOR 3 from the FUNCTI ON TEST menu. 6. Watch the ACC indicator. D o e s th e A C C in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?

YES-Go to step 10. NO-Go to step 7. 7. Activate BRAKE ACTUATOR 3 again. 8. While the brake actuator is operating, press the brake pedal. 9. Watch the ACC indicator. D o e s th e A C C in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?

YES-Go to step 10. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.®

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b le s h o o t in g ( c o n t 'd )

10. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7).

17. Press the MAIN switch ON.

is D T C 4 7 in d ic a t e d ?

18. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7).

YES~Go to step 11.

19. Select ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) from the DRIVING SUPPORT menu, then enter the FUNCTION TEST.

NO-Troubleshootthe indicated DTC(s). If there are no DTCs, the system is OK at this tim e.B 11 .Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

20. Activate BRAKE ACTUATOR 3 from the FUNCT I ON TEST.

12. Press the brake pedal severa l times, and check the brake peda l trave l .

21. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). is

DTC 47 i n d i c a t e d ?

D o e s th e b r a k e p e d a i s in k ?

YES-lnspect the master cyl inder (see page 19-22).B NO-Go to step 13. 13. Check for brake fluid l eaks (see page 19-22). Are

th e r e a n y flu id le a k s ?

YES-Repair the brake f l uid leak.B

YES-Go to step 22. NO-Troubleshootthe indicated DTC(s). If there are no DTCs, the system is OK at this tim e.B 22. Without the brake pedal pressed, check the right front brake fluid pressure voltage (RF BRAKE P) with the HDS. is th e re a b o u t 0 ,5 ¥ ?

NO-Go to step 14, YES-Go to step 23. 14. Start the engine. 15. Check the brake switch signal (BRAKE SW (N.O.)) with the HDS. D o e s th e in d ic a t io n s h o w O N w h e n th e b r a k e p e d a i is p r e s s e d , a n d s h o w O F F w h e n t h e b r a k e p e d a i is r e le a s e d ?

YES-Go to step 17. NO-Go to step 16, 16. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). is D T C 8 0 , 1 1 0 , o r 1 1 1 in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s).B NO-Troubleshootthe brake pedal position switch signal circuit (see page 11-280).B

NO-Go to step 26, 23. Test the brake booster (see page 19-22). 24. Start the e n g i n e , then press the. brake pedal with about 314 N (32 kgf, 70.8 Ibf) pressure. 25. Check the front brake fluid pressure voltage (RF BRAKE P) with the HDS. is th e re a b o u t 2 ,5 V ?

YES-The right front brake fluid pressure signal is OK, check for l oose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 2 5 -8 4 ),■ NO-Go to step 26. 26. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). Is DTC 47 indicated? YES-Check for loose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).B NO-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s). If there are no DTCs, the system is OK at this tim e.B

DTC 48: Cai FR Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor Circuit Open/Short

11. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connectorterminal No. 5 and body ground. There should be an open circuit or at l east 1 MO.

1. Cl ear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10 seconds,

ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

VCC {ORN)

3. Watch the ACC indicator. D o e s th e A C C in d ic a to r ( a m b e r) g o o ff?

Y l T f T / I 5 | 6 I 7 8 | 9 |lo|r |11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|9|20

YES- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.® NO-Go to step 4. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7).

Wire side of femal e terminal s

is D T C 4 8 in d ic a t e d ?

is t h e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c i f i e d ?

YES-Go to step 5.

YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Troubleshootthe indicated DTC(s). If there are'no DTCs, the system is OK at this tim e.B

NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the ACC unit and the right front brake fluid pressure sensor.B

5. Without the brake pedal pressed, check the right front brake fluid pressure vo l tage (RF BRAKE P) with the HDS. is th e r e a b o u t 0 ,5 V ?

YES-Go to step 6.

12. Disconnect the right front brake f l uid pressure sensor 3P connector (see step 3 on page 25-91). 13. Connect right front brake f l uid pressure sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.

NO-Go to step 9. 8, Test the brake booster (see page 19-22).

RIGHT FRONT BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR (GRY)

7. Press the brake pedal with about 314 N (32 kgf, 70.6 I bf) pressure. 8. Check the right front brake f l uid pressure vo l tage (RF BRAKE P) with the HDS. is th e r e a b o u t 2 ,5 ¥ ?

YES-The right front brake fluid pressure signal is OK, check for l oose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).I

VCC (ORN)

A 1 3 JUMPER WIRE

Wire side of femal e terminals

NO-Go to step 9. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Disconnect the ACC unit 20P connector.

(cont'd)

D T C T r o u b le s h o o t in g (c o n t 'd )

14. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connector termina l No. 5 and body ground. There shou l d be l ess than 1.0 0. ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

¥CC (ORN)

.... ,n 1 | 2 | 3 91 5 I 6 | 7 8 | 9 10 11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|9|20

Wire side of female terminals

21. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connectorterminal No. 8 and body ground. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 MO. ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

PRESS FR fiLIC) n —i— i— 1 | 2 13 9 1 5 | 6 | 7

8 | 9 |101r |ll|l2|l3il4il5|l6|l7|l8L /|20

Wire side of femal e terminal s

Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c ifie d ?

is t h e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c i f i e d ?

YES~Goto step 15.

¥ES-Go to step 22.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ACC unit and the right front brake fluid pressure sensor.B

NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the ACC unit and the right front brake fluid pressure sensor.B

15. Remove the jumper wire from the right front brake fluid pressure sensor. 18. Reconnect a l l connectors. 17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 18, Measure the voltage between ACC unit 20P connector terminals No. 3 and No, 5. There should be about 5 ¥. ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

SG (GRN)

22. Disconnect the right front brake f l uid pressure sensor 3P connector. 23. Connect right front brake f l uid pressure sensor 3P connector termina l No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire. RIGHT FRONT BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR (GRY)

VCC (ORN)

~i "*1 i 2 | 3 X I 5 16 | 7 8 | 9 |10|r |11|12|13|14|15|16|17|18|/120

PRESS FR (BLK) JUMPER WIRE

Wire side of female terminals

is th e v o lta g e

as s p e c i f i e d ?

YES-Go to step 19. NO-Check for loose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 2 5 -8 4 ).■ 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 20. Disconnect the ACC unit 20P connector.

Wire side of female terminals

24. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connector termina l No. 8 and body ground. There should be l ess than 1.0 O. ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

p res s f r

m

m

28. Connect right front brake fluid pressure sensor 3P connectorterminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. RIGHT FRONT BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR fGRY) SG (GRN)

"'l | 2 | 3' 91 5 I 6 | 7I 8 I 9 llCl|r 4|15|16|17|18|9|20 JUMPER WIRE

Wire side of female terminals Wire side of femal e terminals is

the r e s i s t a n c e

a s s p e c ifie d ?

YES-Go to step 25, NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ACC unit and the right front brake fluid pressure sensor.B

27, Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground, There shou l d be less than 1.0 O, ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

25. Measure the resistance between ACC unit 20P connector terminals No, 5 and No. 8. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 MO, n

ACC UNIT 2 see page 25-97) DTC Troubleshooting o O CMBS initial check incomplete 100 ee page 25-110) NOTE: When both the ACC and CMBS indicators come on, do the ACC system troubleshooting first (except DTC 100). 11

Left rear wheel sensor signal error

O

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd) DTC

102 103 105 107 112 113 117 199 NOTE:

Detection item

Adapt! v® Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator

CMBS Indicator

Page

DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-97) DTC Troubleshooting CMBS brake control prohibition O (see page 25-111) DTC Troubleshooting Dust or dirt on the m ill im eter wave radar • (see page 25-64) DTC Troubleshooting M illim eter wave radar aim ing incom pl ete O (see page 25-85) DTC Troubleshooting Lost com m unication w ith the VSA (see page 25-69) m odulator-control unit DTC Troubleshooting Lost com m unication w ith the gauge control (see page 25-71) m odule DTC Troubleshooting Lost com m unication w ith the steering angle O (see page 25-111) sensor DTC Troubleshooting Adaptive cruise control (ACC) unit O see page 25-73) program m ing error W hen both the ACC and CMBS indicators come on, do the ACC system troubleshooting first (except DTC 100). CMBS parking brake incom plete releasing

Symptom Troubleshooting Index S ym ptom CMBS OFF switch does not turn on/turn o ff (CMBS indicator does not change)

The MID does not indicate when the CMBS OFF switch is operated

The buzzer does not sound

The buzzer does not sound when the CMBS OFF switch is operated The MID does not indicate w ith the CMBS operating

The CMBS system operates frequently

The CMBS system operated w ith o u t danger of collision

The CMBS system didn 't operate

CMBS indicator does not come CMBS indicator does not go 0 HDS does not com m unicate w ith the adaptive cruise control (ACC) unit or the vehicle

js tic procedure 1. Adaptive cruise con trol (ACC) system tro u b l eshooting (No DTC I ndication) (see page 25-74). 2. Test the CMBS OFF switch (see page 25-113). 3. Do the gauge control m odule self-diagnostic function (see page 22-395). 1. Adaptive cruise control (ACC) system troubleshooting (No DTC Indication) (see page 25-74). 2. Test the CMBS OFF switch (see page 25-113). 3. Do the gauge control m od ul e self-diagnostic function (see page 22-395) 1. Adaptive cruise con trol (ACC) system troubleshooting .(No DTC Indication) (see page 25-74). 2. Do the gauge con trol m odule self-diagnostic function (see page 22-395). 1, Adaptive cruise con trol (ACC) system troubleshooting (No DTC I ndication) (see page 25-74). 2. Do the gauge control m od ul e self-diagnostic function (see page 22-395). 1, Adaptive cruise control (ACC) system tro u b l eshooting (No DTC I ndication) (see page 25-74). 2. Do the gauge control m od ul e self-diagnostic function (see page 22-395). 1. Adaptive cruise control (ACC) system troubleshooting (No DTC I ndication) (see page 25-74). 2. Check the m illim eter wave radar. 3. Check the front radar cover fo r warpage. 1 Check the w heel alignment. 1, Adaptive cruise control (ACC) system tro u b l eshooting (No DTC Indication) (see page 25-74). 2, Check the m illim eter wave radar. 3, Check the front radar cover fo r warpage. 4, Check the w heel al ignment. 1 . Adaptive cruise con trol (ACC) system troubleshooting (No DTC I ndication.) (see page 25-74). 2. Check the m illim eter wave radar. 3. Check the front radar cover fo r warpage. 4. Check the wheel alignm ent. Do the gauge con trol m od ul e self-diagnostic function (see

Also check'for • An open or increased resistance in the w ire • A short in the wire

• An open or increased resistance in the w ire • A short in the w ire

Driving conditions, weather, environm ental in fl uence

Driving c o n d itio n s , weather, environm ental influence

• Driving conditions, weather, environm ental in fl uences • Undetectabl e environm ent

page 22-395).

Sym ptom troubleshooting (see page 25-112). Tro u b les h o o t the DLC circuit (see page 11-209).

Incorrect HDS software

System Description The co l lision mitigation braking system (CMBS) anticipates coll isions and assists brake operation to reduce the impact on occupants and vehicle damage. The system works in combination with the E-pretensioners, which retract the seat belts in anticipation of impact.

CMBS Operation • Warnings are both audible (warning buzzer) and visual (MID) • Evasive action support and collision-speed reduction by brake contro l ' i / Approaching a vehicle ahead: The CMBS warns the driver by a MID indication twice, after th a t it warns by a MID indication and buzzer sound.

® Closer to vehicle ahead: • Warning by a MID indication and buzzer sound. • CMBS aids perception and evasive action by using the sensory warning of light braking.

(D Collision unavoidable: • Warnings by a MID indication and buzzer sound. • CMBS reduces col lision speed to mitigate damage.

(i) Approaching vehicle ahead

a DCloser to vehicle ahead

Collision unavoidable

■ -

Main Functions of CMBS • When a coll ision is about to happen and the relative speed (the speed difference from the object ahead) is greater than 9 mph (15 km/h), the system provides warnings (audib l e and visual) and brake contro l . • When approaching a object ahead and the distance to the vehicle is very c l ose, the system provides the coll ision warning (1st stage) by MID indication and buzzer sounding. • When the closing distance continues to decrease and there is a high risk of collision, the system app l ies light braking (2nd stage) with the 1st stage warning. • When the system judges that a collision is imminent, the system activates emergency brake control and applies strong seat belt tension.

CMBS Control The CMBS is operated by the ACC unit. The CMBS has the following functions: Obstacle determination function The system determines the potential for co l lision by the distance from the vehicle ahead and the relative speed based on the m il l imeter wave radar and the predictable course calculated by the driving conditions (whee l speed and yaw rate). Warning function When there is a high risk of collision, the system sends warning directions to the gauge contro l module and warns by both audible and visual means. Brake control function When there is a high risk of coll ision, the system sends brake directions to the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit and controls braking action.

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) CMBS Activation Conditions The system m ig h t activate (w arn the drive r, a p p ly the brakes) w h e n it detects o r en cou nters these situa tion s: • M e ta l lic pro je ctio n s on the road • M etallic m a n h o l e and drain covers • Signs and g u a rd ra ils ahead • Low overpasses and n a rro w gates • A p p ro a ch in g vehicles th a t are tu rn in g left or rig h t • Passing s l o w e r vehicles ahead The system m ig h t not activate (no w a rn in g o r in te rv e n tio n ) w h e n it detects o r en cou nters these situa tion s: • to w -s p e e d , heavy tra ffic (such as in a tra ffic ja m ) • Being cu t-o ff by a s lo w e r vehicle • A p p ro a c h in g a v e h ic l e stopped at an angle • D rivin g on curves • A p p ro a ch in g a b ic yc l e o r m oped • D irt or snow stuck on the fro n t radar cove r • Heavy rain o r sn o w W hen the CM BS activates, it sounds and feels ju s t l ike ABS activation. F-CAN

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unit Inputs and Outputs ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

n

_______ __ '

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

10

11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 /

20

Wire side of female terminal s

Terminal number 1

Wire color WHT

2

YEL

3 5

GRN ORN

Terminal name BRAKE DIAG + BTECH (10 A) SG VCC

6

BLK

PRESS FR

8 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 10 17 18 20

Signal

Description Detects brake l ight relay activation Detects ignition switch ON/OFF signal s Sensor ground Provides sensor voltage

Detects the brake f l uid pressure signal of the right front brake caliper PUR F-CAN B H F-CAN communication B (high) circuit ORN K-LI NE Sends and receives scan tool signal s BLK GND Ground circuit for the ACC system WHT F-CAN A H F-CAN communication A (high) circuit BLK GND Ground circuit for the ACC system ■... BLK............GND Ground circuit for the ACC system WH9 + B BACK Provides DTC memory voltage UP(IOA) ' BLU PRESS FL Detects the brake fluid pressure signal of the left front brake caliper GRY ...... WEN...... Detects the write enable signal ■ BRAKE YEL Drives the brake light relay LAMP RED M/R TRX Communicates with the millimeter wave radar PNK ...f^c a n I .l ~ F-CAN communication B (l ow) circuit RED F-CAN A L F-CAN communication A (low) circuit

ACC brake operated or brake pedal pressed: battery voltage Ignition switch ON (ll): battery voltage Ignition switch OFF: about 0 V Less than 0.2 ¥ at all times Ignition switch ON (II): about Ignition switch OFF: about 0 V Ignition switch ON (I I): about 0.5—4.5 ¥ Ignition switch OFF: about 0 ¥ Less than 0.2 ¥ at all times Less than 0.2 ¥ at all times Less than 0.2 ¥ at al l times Battery voltage Ignition

switch ON (II): about 0.5—4.5 ¥ Ignition switch OFF: about 0 ¥ Ignition

switch ON (II): battery vo ltage Ignition switch OFF: about 0 ¥ Ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage Ignition switch OFF: about 0 ¥

Circuit Diagram

MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

No. 7 (10 A)

N o. 21 {7.5 A)

T— / o "

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

'o X - P N K

IGNITION SWITCH IG1 HOT in ON {il)

and START fill)

■ VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT • SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT • STEERING ANGLE SENSOR • TPMS CONTROL UNIT • ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT {XM RECEIVER) • ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNI T • YAW RATE LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION SENSOR • SRS UNIT • DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

: F-CAN line

........................ : Other communication line

--------------------- -- ; Shielding

FUSE/RELAY BOX

• DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC!

DTC Troubleshooting DTC 20: Steering Angie Sensor Malfunction NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, check the steering angle sensor insta l l ation (see page 19-112), 1. Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 13-55).

DTC 26; Steering Angle Sensor Adherence Failure NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, check the steering angle sensor insta l lation. 1. Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55).

Are a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

A re a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated VSA system

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated VSA system

DTC(s).B

DTC(s).B

NO-Go to step 2.

ISIO~Go to step 2.

2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-98). 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10 seconds. 4. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-l ock several times. 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-98). Is D T C

2 0 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 8. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this tim e.B 6. Check the CALIBRATION STATUS OF STEERI NG ANGLE SENSOR in the ACC DATA LIST with the HDS. Is N O T C O M P L E T E in d ic a te d ?

YES-Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization (see page 19-114).B NO-Faulty steering angle sensor; replace the steering angle sensor (see page 19-112), then do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization (see page 19-114).B

2. Check the STEERING ANGLE in the ACC DATA LIST with the HDS, turn the steering whee l from lock-to-lock. D o a n y v a lu e c h a n g e ?

YES-Faulty ACC unit; check for l oose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).■ NO-Faulty steering angle sensor; replace the steering angle sensor (see page 19-112), then do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization (see page 19-114).B

DTC 34: Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor Circuit Open/Short DTC 35: Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor Center Position Error

10. Check the brake switch signal (BRAKE SW (N.O.)) with the HDS. D o e s th e in d ic a tio n s h o w O N w h e n th e b r a k e p e d a l is p r e s s e d , a n d s h o w O F F w h e n th e b r a k e p e d a l is re le a s e d ?

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-98).

YES-Check for loose or poor connections, If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 26-84).■

2. Watch the ACC indicator.

NO-Go to step 11.

DTC 36: Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor Shift Error

D o e s th e A C C in d ic a to r g o o ff?

11, Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-98).

YES-l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.!

Is D T C

NO-Go to step 3.

NO-Troubleshootthe brake pedal position switch signal circuit (see page 11-280).■

3. Press the brake pedal.

6 0 ,1 1 0 , o r 111 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s).H

4. Watch the ACC indicator. Does th e

A C C in d ic a to r g o o ff?

YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections,■ NO-Go to step 5. 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-98). Is D T C 34 , 3 5 , o r 3 6 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-Troubleshootthe indicated DTC(s).B 6. With the brake pedal released, check the master cylinder brake fluid pressure vo ltage (BRAKE P) with the HDS. Is th e re

a b o u t 0 .5 V?

YES-Go to step 7. NO-Check the VSA system.■ 7. Test the brake booster (see page 19-22). 8. Start the engine, then press the brake pedal with about 314 N (32 kgf, 70.6 Ibf) pressure. 9. Check the master cylinder brake fluid pressure voltage (BRAKE P) with the HDS. Is th e re a b o u t 2 .5 V?

YES-Go to step 10. NO-Check the VSA system,■

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC 64: CMBS Operation Error (Excessive Operation) NOTE: If the CMBS operates frequently, DTC 64 is stored. 1, Remove the front gril l e (see page 20-217). 2, Inspect the frame for warpage, and check the insta l l ation of the millimeter wave radar and the main bracket. Is th e in s ta lla tio n a n d th e

frame

OK?

YES-Go to step 3. NO-Reinsta ll the components correctly, or replace if damaged, then go to step 3.

DTC 100: CMBS initial Check Incomplete NOTE: The CMBS initia l check function checks the communication between the adaptive cruise contro l (ACC) unit and the VSA modu l ator-contro l unit. If the CMBS initia l check is incomplete, the ACC and CMBS indicators come on. For the CMBS to operate proper ly, always do the CMBS initia l check after replacing the ACC unit or the VSA modulator-control u n it 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll ), then wait for 10 seconds. 2. Watch the VSA indicator. D o e s th e V S A in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?

3, Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), then wait for 10 seconds.

YES-Troub l eshoot the indicated VSA system DTC(s).B

4, Aim the m i l limeter wave radar (see page 25-85),

NO-Go to step 3.

5, Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-98). 8. Press the MAIN switch ON. 7. Watch the ACC and CMBS indicators. D o b o th in d ic a to rs c o m e o n ?

YES-Go to step 8. NO- l ntermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this time. Check for l oose or poor connections,■ 8. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-38). 9. Watch the CMBS indicator. D o e s th e C M B S in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?

YES-Go to step 10. NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.■ 10, Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-98). Is D T C 6 4 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for l oose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, rep l ace the ACC unit, (see page 25-84)11 NO-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s).H

3. Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55). A re a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troub l eshoot the indicated VSA system DTCfs).B NO-Go to step 4. 4. Start the engine. 5. Select CMBS from the DRIV I NG SUPPORT menu, then enter the MISCELLANEOUS TEST. 8. Do the CMBS brake operation. 7. Watch the ACC and CMBS indicators. D o b o th in d ic a to r s c o m e o n ?

YES-Go to step 8. NO-The system is OK at this time. The CMBS initial check is comp l ete,■ 8. Check for ACC system DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). A re a n y D T C s e x c e p t D T C 1 0 0 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troub l eshoot the indicated DTC(s).B NO-Check for l oose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, rep l ace the ACC unit, (see page 25-84)11

DTC 103: CMBS Brake Control Prohibition 1. Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 13-55), A re a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated VSA system DTCfs).B NO-Go to step 2.

PTC 117: Lost Communication with the Steering Angie Sensor 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-38). 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10 seconds. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-98). Is D T C 1 1 7 in d ic a te d ?

2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-98).

YES-Go to step 4.

3. Watch the CMBS indicator.

NO-lntermittent failure. The system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.B

D o e s th e C M B S in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-The system is OK at this tim e.B 4. Check for ACC system DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-7). is D T C 1 0 3 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Check for loose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit, (see page 25-84)11

4. Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS (see page 19-55). A re a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated VSA system DTC(s).B NO-Go to step 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) 6. Disconnect the steering ang l e sensor 5P connector. 7. Disconnect the ACC unit 20P connector.

NO-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s).B

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)

Symptom Troubleshooting

8. Check for continuity between ACC unit 20P connector terminal No. 10 and steering angle sensor 5P connector terminal No. 4, and between ACC unit 20P connector terminal No. 20 and steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals No. 2.

CMBS indicator does not go off

ACC UNIT 20P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals

11

D o e s th e C M B S in d ic a to r g o o ff? r

3 12

5

/ 13

14

6 15

7 18

8 17

9 18

/

2. Press and hold the CMBS OFF switch for at l east 1 second to turn off the system, 3. Watch the CMBS indicator.

F-CAN A H (WHT) n, „ 1 2

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), then wait for 10 seconds.

10 20

F-CAN A L (RED)

YES-The system is OK at this tim e.B NO-Go to step 4. 4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-98), 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), then wait for 10 seconds.

F-CAN A I (RED) 1

2

/

4

5

F-CAN A H (WHT)

8. Check for the adaptive cruise control (ACC) system, VSA, and PCM DTCs with the HDS. A re a n y D T C s in d ic a t e d ?

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s).B STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminal s

■ NO-Go to step 7. 7. Start the engine, and wait for 2 seconds.

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Check for loose or poor connections. If OK, update the ACC unit (see page 25-8), then recheck. If the ACC unit was already updated, replace the ACC unit (see page 25-84).■ NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ACC unit and the steering angle sensor.B

8. Watch the CMBS indicator. D o e s th e C M B S in d ic a to r g o o ff?

YES-The system is OK at this tim e.B NO-Go to step 9. 9. Stop the engine, 10. Check for ACC system DTCs with the HDS. A re a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?

YES-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s).B NO-Test the CMBS OFF switch (see page 25-113). If the switch is OK, do the gauge contro l module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-395).B

1. Remove the instrument fascia (see page 20-117). 2. Remove the screws and the CMBS OFF switch (A).

3. Check for continuity between the 6 P connector terminals in each switch position according to the table. Terminal

4

Position

CMBS OFF switch (PRESSED: ON)

§

O ”

- O

CMBS OFF switch

(RELEASED; OFF)

CMBS OFF SWITCH SP CONNECTOR

r r r \

ILM +

ILM-

CMBS OFF

GND

4. If the continuity is not as specified, rep l ace the CMBS OFF switch. 6. Use a diode tester between the 6P connector termina l s in each switch position according to the table. Terminal

1

2

o - - N — J§ r —@ - - o

6. If the diode test is not as specified, install the CMBS OFF switch in the reverse order of remova l .

Blind Spot Information System (BSI) Special T o o ls .......................................................................... 25-116 Component Location In d e x ................................................ 25-117 General Troubleshooting Info rm ation...........................25-119 DTC Troubleshooting In d e x .............................................. 25-123 Symptom Troubleshooting In d ex................................... 25-124 System Description.............................................................25-125 Circuit D iag ram ..................................................................... 25-134 DTC Troubleshooting..........................................................25-136 Symptom Troubleshooting................................................ 25-156 BSI Radar Unit Rem oval/Installation.............................. 25-164 BSI Control Unit Rem oval/Installation............................ 25-165 BSI Alert Indicator Rem oval/Installation........................25-165 BSI OFF Switch Test/Rem oval/lnstallation.................... 25-166 VSA/BSI OFF Switch Test/Rem oval/lnstallation...........25-166 BSI Radar Unit Aim ing Inspection................................... 25-167 BSI Radar Unit Mounting Area Check............................ 25-170

Special Tools Ref.No. ® © (D 0

Tool Number O7AAJ-SJKA150 07AAJ-STKA160 07AAJ-STKA170 07AA J -STKA220

©

J

Description Rim Frame Target Set Ang l e Gauge Stand Set

Qty 1 1 1 1

Component Location Index

Removal /Instal l ation, page 25-164

(cont'd)

Component Location Index (cont'd)

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY (MID)

BSi INDICATOR

BSi OFF SWITCH (USA models) Test page 25-186 Removal /Install ation, page 25-166 ¥SA/BSi OFF SWITCH (Canada models) Test, page 25-166 Removal/Install ation, page 25-168

General Troubleshooting Information Blind Spot Information System (BSI) Indicator When the blind spot information system (BSI) is normal, the BSI indicator (A ) comes on for about 3 seconds after turning the ignition switch to ON (II), When the BSI system detects a prob l em while in operation, the BSI system stops control, the BSI indicator comes on, and the BSI system indicates that the system must be checked in the MID.

A CHECK PJ BL ND SPOT SYSTEM I

k,

A

Blind Spot Information System (BSl) Alert Indicator While the BSl system is working, the system turns on/blinks* the BSI al ert indicator (A) when it detects another vehicle on either side toward the rear. *: When the driver .moves the turn signa l lever toward the side with the BSI alert indicator (A) on, the alert indicator blinks to al ert the driver.

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd) BSl OFF Switch

BSi OPF/BSi ON

NOTE: On Canada models, the BSI OFF switch and the VSA OFF switch are combined in one switch assembly.

The BSI system indicates its condition for on l y 5 seconds when the system is turned on or off with the BSI OFF switch.

Pressing and ho l ding the button on the BSI OFF switch (A) at least 0,5 second turns the BSI system on or off. To turn on the BSI system, press the button on the BSI OFF switch (A) when the ignition switch to ON (II ). The BSI indicator in the gauge control modu l e goes off and the BSI system indicates that it is turned on in the multi-information display (MID). To turn off the BSI system, press the button on the BSI OFF switch again. The BSI indicator in the gauge control modu l e comes on and the BSI system indicates that it is turned off in the MID. NOTE; The i l lustration shows BSI OFF switch (USA models). Clean the BSl Radar Units When mud, dirt, wet snow, l eaves, or other foreign materia l sticks to the side of the rear bumper, the BSI system stops control and indicates that the BSI radar units must be cleaned in the M I D. It also turns on the BSI indicator at the same time, and store the DTC(s). When the obstruction or contamination is removed, the indicator in MID goes off and the BSI system automatica l ly returns to ON.

Multi-information Display (MID) Indication The BSI system indicates its operation on the mu lti-information display (MID) (A) in the gauge contro l modu l e.

S i

BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE

A

Self-diagnostic Function The BSI system has a self-diagnostic function. If the s e lf diagnostic function detects a ma lfunction, the BSI system stops contro l , turns on the BSI indicator, and stores DTCs.

Blind Spot Information Sfstern (BSi) Control Unit The BSI contro l unit uses input from the BSI radar units. The BSI radar units also detects its own errors, and it signa l s the BSI contro l unit if an error is detected.

Blind Spot Information Sfstem (BSl) Radar Units The BSI radar units are install ed in the rear bumper on both sides of the vehic l e. They detect other vehicles as they approach your vehicle from the rear sides, and they send this information to the BSI control unit,

CAN Commyriication B-CAN The BSI control unit is on the B-CAN, and it communicates with other units (AcuraLink, gauge contro l modu l e, M ICU, rear MICU) via the B-CAN. If the BSI control unit detects a communication error or a malfunction in another connected unit, the BSI system will not operate even though it is OK. In this case, both the BSI indicator and the related unit indicator w il l come on and stay on. BSi-CAN BSI-CAN is used as a network connecting the BSI control unit and the BSI radar units. When the BSI contro l unit does not proper l y receive information from the BSI-CAN, the BSI system stops contro l and turns on the BSI indicator.

How to Troubleshoot DTCs Check the DTCs with the HDS. Before troub l eshooting, check and note these items: • Ask the client about the conditions when the prob l em occurred, and try to reproduce the same conditions for troubleshooting. • If the symptom does not appear and the BSI indicator does not come on during the test-drive, but troubleshooting is done based on the DTC, check for poor connections or l oose terminals at all connectors related to the circuit that you are troubleshooting. • After the troubleshooting or repairs are done, clear the DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same conditions as when the DTC was original l y set. Make sure the BSI indicator does not come on. • The BSI system sometimes stops control because of the environment (weather, road conditions, driving conditions, etc.). A DTC may be stored in these cases. The BSl indicator m af come on and the following DTCs may be stored even when the system is normal: B18A5: Left side BSI radar unit temperature high B18A6: Right side BSI radar unit temperature high B18A7: Left side BSI radar unit voltage input l ow B18A8: Right side BSI radar unit voltage input low B18A9: Left side BSI radar unit voltage input high B18AA: Right side BSI radar unit voltage input high B18B4: Left side BSI radar unit dirty B18B5: Right side BSI radar unit dirty B18BD: BSI contro l unit voltage input high B18BE: BSI control unit voltage input low

General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd) How to Retrieve DTCs

How to Clear DTCs

NOTE: Make sure the battery is fully charged before you begin.

NOTE: Make sure the battery is fully charged before you begin.

1. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).

1. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).

2. Connect the HDS to the data l ink connector (DLC) (A).

2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A).

3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I).

3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the BSI control unit. If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 >209).

4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the BSI contro l u n it If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-209).

5. Use the HDS to check for BSI DTCs.

5. In the DRIVING SUPPORT MENU of the HDS, select BSI, then choose the Cl ear DTCs icon, and fo l l ow the prompts,

6. Read and record the DTC, 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then wait for 10 seconds. 8. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. 9. Do the troubleshooting procedure for the DTC.

6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then wait for 10 seconds. 7. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.

DTC Troubleshooting Index DTC

Detection Item

B18A1

BSI control unit internal circuit error

Blind Spot Information System (BSl) Indicator ON

B18A5

Left BSI radar unit temperature high

ON

B18A0

Right BSI radar unit temperature high

ON

B18A7

Left BSl radar unit vo ltage input low

ON

B18A8

Right BSI radar unit voltage input l ow

ON

B18A9

Left BSI radar unit voltage input high

ON

B18AA

Right BSI radar unit voltage input high

ON

B18AF

Left BSI radar unit internal circuit error

ON

B18B1

Right BSI radar unit internal circuit error

ON

B18B4

Left BSI radar unit dirty

ON

B18B5

Right BSI radar unit dirty

ON

B18B6 B18B7 B18B8 B18B9 B18BA B18BB B18BC

Lost communication with l eft BSI radar unit Lost communication with right BSI radar unit Left BSI radar unit azimuth off alignment Right BSI radar unit azimuth off alignment Left BSI radar unit version incorrect Right BSI radar unit version incorrect BSI radar units communication error

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

B18BD

BSI control unit vo ltage input high

ON

B18BE

BSI control unit voltage input low

ON

B18C2

Left BSI alert indicator output error

ON

B18CF

Right BSI alert indicator output error

ON

U01!

Lost communication with the gauge control module

ON

U0423

Inval id data received from PCM (vehicle speed data)

ON

U1280

Communication bus l ine error (BUS-OFF)

ON

Page DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-138) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-136) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-137) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-137) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-138) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-139) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-140) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-140) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-141) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-141) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-142) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-142) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-148) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-147) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-147) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-149) DTC Troubl eshooting (see page 25-143) DTC Troubl eshooting (see page 25-150) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-152) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-154) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-155) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 25-155)

Symptom Troubleshooting Index Symptom The BSI alert indicator comes on when no other vehicl e is in the detectable area (Wrong indication) The BSI does not come on when other vehicles are in the detectable area (No indicatio The BSI OFF switch does not work (USA models) The VSA/BSI OFF switch does network (Canada model s) The BSI indicator does not go off, or does not come on The BSI buzzer does.not sound HDS does not communicate with the blind spot information system (BSI) HDS does not communicate with the PCM or the vehicle

Diagnostic procedure Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 25-158) Symptom Troubl eshooting (see page 25-157) Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 25-158) Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 25-180) Symptom Troubl eshooting (see page 25-182) Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 25-162) Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 25-183) Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 11-203)

Also Check for

I ncorrect HDS softw • I ncorrect HDS software • Shorted reference voltage

System Description Blind Spot Information System (BSI) The blind spot Information system (BSI) that turns on the BSI al ert indicators (A) beside the door mirrors when another vehic l e in the next lane enters the "b lin d " area, where the driver cannot see the vehicle with his peripheral vision or with the inside and outside rearview mirrors. NOTE: The BSI system does not ensure the safety of the vehicle occupants, nor does it help in low visibility situations such as bad weather. The BSI system turns on/blinks* the BSI al ert indicator in the fo l l owing situations. *: When moving the turn signa l lever toward the side with the BSI alert indicator on, the al ert indicator b l inks to alert driver.

1. Pass from rear • Vehicl e operation speed: 6—99 mph (10—160 km/h) No alert

A le r t

Alert

No alert

uCDl

A Moving

direction

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) 2. Lane changes • Vehic l e operation speed: 8—93 mph (10—160 km/h) • Relative speed: more less 12 mph (20 km/h) Alert

Alert

No alert

No alert

A

Hill!

Mowing

lilii m u

direction

11111 n

3. Passing • Vehicl e operation speed: 8—99 mph (10—160 km/h) ' • Relative speed: more less 12 mph (20 km/h) No alert

Alert

Moving direction

When the vehicle stays in the alert area for 1.5 seconds or more

No alert

4. Starting • Vehic l e operation speed: 6—99 mph (10—180 km/h) N o a le rt

S to p p e d

Alert

N o a le rt

Less th a n 6 m p h (10 k m /h )

N o a le rt

M o re th a n 6 m p h (10 k m /h )

5. One or more lanes apart • Vehicle operation speed: 6—99 mph (10—160 km/h) N o a le rt

A M o v in g d ire c tio n

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) 8. Oncoming cars • Vehicl e operation speed: 8—99 mph (10 —160 km/h) No alert

No alert

No alert

u n

K _

A L/

11111

111

'L .j- '.j

7. Static objects • Vehicl e operation speed: 8—33 mph (10—180 km/h) No alert

No alert •

IL

Guard rail

Wall

il

.'

u

A Moving direction

No alert

*

m

4

No alert

m mm

m

/ *

O u 1111911 i:!......tr m

Trees

j

Poles

Blind Spot Information (BSI) Control Unit The BSI control unit obtains information from externa l sensors and switches that are connected to their respective contro l units. B-CAN

System Description (cont'd) BSI Radar Units The blind spot information system (BSI) radar units are installed in the rear bumper on both sides.

Basic distance function The BSI radar unit radiates 24 GHz radar waves within the range of 9.84 ft (3 m) toward the rear and 3.84 ft (3 m) on both sides horizontall y and 20 degrees on both sides toward the rear. It receives the refl ected radar waves when another vehicle enters in this al ert area. Aiming function The BSI radar unit has a sma ll amount of auto-aiming capability. Straighten the body when auto-aiming is not possible. Self-diagnosis function The BSI radar units have a self-diagnostic function that displays the self-diagnostic information in the MID when the system turns on with the ignition switch to ON (II). Sensitivity-lowering detection function When the detecting abil ity of the BSI radar units are hampered by dirt or other contaminants around the rear bumper that covers BSI radar units, the BSI radar units outputs this condition to the BSI control unit until the function recovers.

Blind Spot Information System (BSI) Control Unit Inputs and Outputs BSI CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

Terminal number 2 3 4

Description Terminal name BSI-CAN L Radar CAN communication (l ow) circuit Radar CAN communication (high) circuit BSI-CAN H T i w r 1 Drives the l eft BSI alert indicator 1 B-CAN communication circuit GND Ground circuit for the BSl system

7

Wire color BRN YEL GRN LTGRN BLK

8

ORN

BSi OFF SW

10

YEL

+ B TECH (10 A)

14

l ¥ 0 “

R BSI I ND+

Detects the BSI off switch (USA mode l s) Detects the VSA/BSI off switch (Canada models) Detects the ignition signa l

Signal

Less than 0.2 V a t al l times

Ignition

switch ON (II): battery voltage Ignition switch OFF: abou

Drives the right BSI alert indicator

(cont'd)

System Description (cont'd) Blind Spot Information System (BSI) Radar Unit Inputs and Outputs LEFT BSI RADAR UNIT 6P CONNECTOR

n \

II 1

2

3

5 J

Wire side of female terminals

Terminal number 1 2

3 5

r n im

color YEL

YEL BLK

Terminal name BSI -CAN L + B TECH (10 A) BSI -CAN H GND

Description Radar CAN communication (low) circuit Detects the ignition signal

Radar CAN communication (high) circuit Ground circuit for the BSI radar unit

Signal

Ignition switch ON (II): battery vo l tage Ignition switch OFF: abou Less than 0.2 V at all times

Blind Spot Information System (BSI) Radar Unit Inputs and Outputs

n

n 1

2

CO

/

4

5

6

. _

J

RIGHT BSI RADAR UN IT 6P CONNECTOR

J

Wire side of female terminals

Terminal number 1 _

3 4 5 6

Wire color BR YEL

I

YEL

bLk

BLK BLK

Terminal name

Description

SI -CAN I + BTECH (10 A)

Radar CAN communication (l ow) circuit Detects the ignition signal

BSI-CAN H MPIO 0 D

Radar CAN communication (high) circuit Digital address input l ine for radar ID Ground circuit for the BSI radar unit

VI PIC

Digita l address input line for radar ID

Signal

Ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage Ignition switch OFF: about 0 V

Less than 0.2 V at all times

Circuit Diagram

— — — — : CAN line

................ : Other communication line

*1 USA models *2 CANADA models

No. 21 17.5 A) UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

BSi CONTROL UNIT

INTERIOR LIGHT RELAY

LT BLU

ORN

DASHLIGHTS BRIGHTNESS CONTROL CIRCUIT {In the gauge control module) _o_

G501

REAR FUSE/RELAY BOX

DTC Troubleshooting DTC B18A1: BSI Control Unit Internal Circuit Error

DTC B18A5: Left BSI Radar Unit Temperature High

1. Cl ear the DTCs with the HDS {see page 25-122).

NOTE: It is usually difficult to duplicate this DTC.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll), then wait for 10 seconds.

1. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122).

3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122). Is D T C

B 1 8 A 1 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Repl ace the BSI control unit (see page 25-165).H NO-lntermittent failure, the system Is OK at this tim e.B

Is D T C B 1 8 A 5 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 2, NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this tim e.B 2. Check the exhaust system and heat shie l ds for alternations and malfunctions. A re a ll p a r ts O K ?

YES-l ntermittent failure due to temporary high temperature around the BSI radar unit, the system is OK at this time. Clear the DTCs.B NO-Repair faulty p a rt.il

DTC B18A6: 'Right BSl Radar Unit Temperature High

DTC B18A7: Left BSl Radar Unit Voltage Input Low

NOTE: It is usuall y'difficu l t to duplicate this DTC.

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122).

1. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122).

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), then wait for 20 seconds.

Is D T C B 1 8 A 6 In d ic a te d ?

YES~Go to step 2. NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this tim e.B 2. Check the exhaust system and heat shie l ds for al ternations and malfunctions.

3. Check for DTCs with the HDS fsee page 25-122). Is D T C B 1 8 A 7 indicated?

.

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this tim e.B

A re a ll p a r ts O K ?

4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0)

YES-l ntermittent failure due to temporary-high temperature around the BSI radar unit, the system is OK at this time. Clear the DTCs.B

5. Check the connection at the left BSI radar unit 6P connector.

NO-Repair or replace the faulty part.B

Is th e c o n n e c tio n O K ?

YES-Go to step 6. NO-Repair the poor connection, and retest.■ 6. Disconnect the left BSI radar unit 6P connector. 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Measure the voltage between l eft BSI radar unit 6P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 5. There should be battery voltage. LEFT B Sl R ADAR U N IT 6P CONNECTOR + B TECH (10 A ) (YEL) p

p 1 /

2

3

5 /

i

G N D (BLK) W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

Is th e re

b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Repl ace the left BSI radar unit (see page 25-164).11 NO-Go to step 9.

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 9. Measure the vo ltage between l eft BSI radar unit 6P connectorterminal No.2 and body ground. There shou l d be battery voltage.

DTC B18A8: Right BSl Radar Unit Voltage Input Low 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122).

LEFT BSI RADAR UNIT 8P CONNECTOR +BTECH (10 A) (YEL) n 1

V

2

n 3

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then.wait for 20 seconds. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122). Is DTC B 1 8 A 8

I

A

5

in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this tim e.B 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0)

Wire side of female terminals

5. Check the connection at the right BSI radar unit 6P connector.

Is t h e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

Is th e c o n n e c tio n O K ?

YES-Repair an open in the wire between the l eft BSI radar unit 6P connector and G702 {see page 22-48).■

YES-Go to step 8.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the TECH relay In the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box and the left BSI radar unit.B

NO-Repair the poor connections, and retest.B 8. Disconnect the right BSI radar unit 6P connector. 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Measure the voltage between right BSI radar unit 6P connector termina l s No. 2 and No. 5. There shou l d be battery voltage, RIGHT BSi RADAR UNIT SP CONNECTOR + S IE C H (10 A) (YEL) n 1

2

3

4

5

8

n

GND (BLK) Wire side of female terminals Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Repl ace the right BSI radar unit (see page 25-164).B NO-Go to step 3.

9. Measure the voltage between right BSI radar unit 6P connectorterminal No.2 and body ground. There should be battery voltage.

RIGHT BSi RADAR UNIT 8P CONNECTOi + B TECH (10 A) (YEL) n 1

2

n 3

4

5

8 3

DTC B18A9: Left BSl Radar Unit Voltage Input High NOTE: • This DTC could be detected after jump-starting the vehicle with a booster battery or other power source. • This DTC may be indicated due to fau l ty charging system, inc l uding the battery. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122).

i

2. Start the engine, then wait for 20 seconds. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122). Is D T C B 1 8 A 9 in d ic a te d ?

Wire side of female terminals

Is th e re

b a tte r y

v o lta g e ?

YES-Repair an open in the wire between the right BSI radar unit 6P connector and G702 (see page 22-48).B NO-Repair an open in the wire between the TECH relay in the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box and the right BSI radar unit.B

YES-Go to step 4. NO- l ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this tim e.B 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Test the 12 V-battery. Is th e b a tte r y O K ?

YES-Replace the left BSI radar unit (see page 25-164).■ NO-Rep l ace the 12 V-battery. B

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B18AA: Right BSI Radar Unit Voltage Input High

DTC B18AF; Left BSI Radar Unit internal Circuit Error

NOTE: • This DTC cou l d be detected after jump-starting the vehicle with a booster battery or other power source.

1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122).

• This DTC may be indicated due to fau l ty charging system, including the battery. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122). 2. Start the engine, then wait for 20 seconds. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122). is D T C B 1 8 A A in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent failure, the system Is OK at this tim e.B 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Test the 12 V-battery. is th e b a tte r y O K ?

YES-Replace the right BSI radar unit (see page 26-164),B NO-Replace the 12 V-battery.B

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I), then wait for 30 seconds. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122). is D T C B 1 8 A F in d ic a te d ?

YES-Repl ace the left BSI radar unit (see page 25-164J.B NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this tim e.B

DTC B18B1: Right BSI Radar Unit Internal Circuit Error 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122). 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I), then wait for 30 seconds. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122). Is D T C

B 1 8 B 1 in d ic a te d ?

DTC B18B4; Left BSI Radar Unit Dirty 1. Check the outside of rear bumper for snow, ice, dirt, contaminants, or stickers. 2. Remove the bolts on rear bumper wheel arch (see page 20-136). Gently pull on the rear bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas to release it from the hooks (B) on the side spacers (C). Do not pull the rear bumper forcib l y.

YES-Repl ace the right BSI radar unit (see page 25-164).■ NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this tim e.B

3. Check the inside of rear bumper for snow, ice, dirt, contaminants. Also, check the BSI radar unit surface for dirt or contaminants. is i t O K ?

YES-lntermittent failure due to temporary contamination around the rear bumper, the system is OK at this time. Clear the DTCs.B NO-Go to step 4. 4. Remove the rear bumper, and wipe off any dirt or contaminants. 5. Check the sensor cover for proper installation, is i t O K ?

YES-lntermittent fai l ure due to temporary contamination around the rear bumper, the system is OK at this time. Clear the DTCs.B NO-lnstall the sensor cover properly. If it is damaged, replace it.B

(cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) DTC B18B5: Right BSI Radar Unit Dirty 1. Check the outside of rear bumper for snow, ice, dirt, contaminants, or stickers. 2, Remove the bolts on rear bumper whee l arch (see page 20*196). Gently pull on the rear bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas to release it from the hooks (B) on the side spacers (C). Do not pu l l the rear bumper forcibly.

DTC B18BS: Lost Communication with Left BSI Radar Unit DTC B18B7: Lost Communication with Right BSI Radar Unit 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122). 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), then wait for 10 seconds. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122), is D T C B 1 8 B 8 o r B 1 8 B 7 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent fai l ure, the system is OK at this tim e.B 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122). A re D T C B 1 8 B 6 a n d B 1 8 B 7 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 5. NO• Only DTC B18B8 is indicated, go to step 24. • Only DTC B18B7 is indicated, go to step 32, 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 8. Disconnect the left BSI radar unit 6P connector. 3. Check the inside of rear bumper for snow, ice, dirt, or contaminants. Also, check the BSI radar unit surface for dirt or contaminants. Is if O K ? YES-lntermittent failure due to temporary contamination around the rear bumper, the system is OK at this time. Clear the DTCs.B

7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Measure the voltage between l eft-BSI radar unit 6P connector termina l s No. 2 and No, 5. There should be battery voltage, LEFT BSl RADAR UNIT 6P CONNECTOR

NO-Go to step 4.

+ S IE C H (10 A) (YEL)

U_

4. Remove the rear bumper, and wipe off any dirt or contaminants, 5. Check the sensor cover for proper insta l lation.

BSI-CAN L (BRN)

is i t O K ?

YES-lntermittent failure due to temporary contamination around the rear bumper, the system is OK at this time. Clear the DTCs.B NO-lnstall the sensor cover properly. If it is damaged, •replace it.B

Wire side of female terminals is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Go to step 10. NO-Go to step 9,

9. Measure the voltage between l eft BSI radar unit 6P connectorterminal No. 2 and body ground. There should be battery voltage.

15. Measure the voltage between BSI control unit 18P connectorterminal No. 3 and body ground. There should be l ess than 0.2 ¥. B S l CONTROL U N IT 16P CONNECTOR

LEFT BSI RADAR U N IT 6P CONNECTOR + U T E C H {1© A ) {YEL) n

n 1

c

2

/ /

3

5

/

7 \

BSI-C AN H (YEL)

/

.

YES-Repair an open in the wire or poor ground (G702)„H NO-Repair an open in the wire between the BSl control unit and the branch of the +B TECH (10A) line.B

10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Disconnect the right BSI radar unit 6P connector. 12. Disconnect the BSI contro l unit 16P connector. 13. Check for continuity between BSI contro l unit 18P connectorterminal No. 2 and body ground. B Sl C ONTROL U N IT 16P CONNECTOR

10

4

3

5

/

/

7

14

/

8

/ /

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a l s

W ire sid e o f fe m a le te rm in a l s Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

2

Is th e v o lta g e a s s p e c if ie d ?

YES-Go to step 18. NO-Repair a short to power in the wire between the BSI control unit and the branch of the BSI-CAN l ine (BSI-CAN H ) M 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 17. Check for continuity between BSI control unit 18P connector termina l No. 3 and l eft BSI radar unit 6P connectortermina l No. 3, and between BSI control unit 18P connectorterminal No. 2 and left BSI radar unit6Pconnectorterm inal No. 1. BSl C ONTROL U N IT 16P CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s B SI-C AN H (YEL)

B S i-C A N L (BRN) B SI-C AN L (BRN)

/ /

3

2 10

/

4 /

5

7

8

/ 14

/

/ /

2 10

4

3

14

/ / /

8

/ /

/

BSI-C AN H (YEL) n

BSI-C AN L (BRN)

n

W ire sid e o f fe m a le te rm in a ls

1

c

/

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the BSl control unit and the branch of the BSI-CAN l ine (BSI-CAN D M NO-Go to step 14.

7

5

2 5

3

3

/

LEFT B Sl RADAR U N IT SP CONNECTOR W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 18. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the BSI contro l unit and the branch of the BSI-CAN line (BSI-CAN H, BSI-CAN D M (cont'd)

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) 18. Reconnect the right BSI radar unit 6P connector. . , 19. Reconnect the BSI control unit 16P connector. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ), then wait for 10 seconds.

30. Check for continuity between BSI control unit 16P connector termina l No. 3 and left BSI radar unit 6P connectorterminal No. 3, and between BSI contro l unit 16P connector termina l No. 2 and l eft BSI radar unit 6P connector terminal No. 1,

21. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see-page 25-122). 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10 seconds. ■ ■.

; •■

BSl CONTROL U N IT 16P CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale terminals

B S i-C A N L (BRN)

B S i-C A N H (YEL)

23. Check for DTCs with the HDS (see page 25-122). A r e D T C B 1 8 B 6 a n d B 1 8 B 7 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Repl ace the right BSI radar unit (see page 25-164).■ NO-Replace the left BSI radar unit.(see page 25-164).■

/ /

3

2 10

/

/

LEFT BSl RADAR UNIT 8P CONNECTOR

- jD j r r i j L

1

c

8

/ 14

/

/

/

B SI-C AN H (YEL) n 2

3 3

5

/

25. Disconnect the l eft BSI radar unit 6P connector.

27. Measure the vo l tage between left BSI radar unit 6P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 5. There should be battery vo ltage.

5

B S i-C A N L (BRN) n

24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

26. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II),

4

LEFT B Sl RADAR U N IT SP CONNECTOR W ire side of fem ale terminals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Replace the left BSI radar unit (see page 25-184).■ NO-Repair an open in the wire between the BSI control unit and the left BSI radar unit.B 31. Measure the voltage between left BSI radar unit 6P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. There should be battery voltage.

I GN D (BLK) LEFT BSl RADAR U N IT SP CONNECTOR

Wire side of female terminals

+ B TECH (10 A ) (YEL)

1

r L

YES-Go to step 28. ■ NO-Go to step 31.

0

n

Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

7)

/

2

3

5

28. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 29. Disconnect the BSl control unit 18P connector.

W ire side of fem ale terminals Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

YES-Repair an open in the wire between the left BSI radar unit and body ground (G702).H NO-Repair an open in the wire between the tech relay in the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box and the left BSI radar u n it ll

32. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 33. Disconnect the right BSl radar unit 6P connector. 34. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10 seconds. 35. Measure the voltage between right BSI radar unit 6P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 5. There shou l d be battery vo ltage.

40. Check for continuity between BSI contro l unit 16P connectorterminal No. 3 and right BSI radar unit 6P connector terminal No. 3, and between BSI control unit 16P connectorterminal No, 2 and right BSI radar unit SP connector terminal No. 1. BSi CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR Wire side of femal e terminals BSi-CAN L(BRN)

RIGHT BSl RADAR UNIT 8P CONNECTOR f— — — 1+e TECH {10 A) (YEL)'

■

n 1

n 2 3

4

5

■

I

BSi-CAN H (YEL) I

/

2-

/

10' /

J

3

4 /

7

5 /

14

/

8